SP7 PDF

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
OF INDIA 1983
GKOUf I- tAK.TS II If1 I V V a n d X
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
GROUP 1
PART 11 ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING
REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIAtS
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
BUREAU
OF
INDIAN
STANDARDS
MANAKBHAVAN,9BAHADURSHAHZAFARMARG,
N E W D E L H I -
SP 7(l): 1983
FIRST PUBLISHED DECEMBER 1970
FIRST REVISION APRIL 1984
FIRST REPRINT MAY 1992
0 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
UDC $9 : 006.76
THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 1983 WAS ADOPTED BY THE BUREAU OF
INDIAN STANDARDS (THEN INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION) ON 26 DECEMBER 1983,
AFTER THE DRAFT FINALIZED BY THE GUIDING COMMITTEE FOR NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE HAD BEEN APPROVED BY THE CIVIL ENGINEERING DIVISION
COUNCIL.
PRICE Rs 250.00
PRINTED IN INDIA AT KAPOOR ART PRESS, MAYAPURI INDUSTRIAL AREA, NEW DELHI 110064 AND
PUBkISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARC, NEW DELHI 110002
FOREWORI:)
Consrructinn programmes a r e i n t e r w o v e n iti a large measure in ali sectors of
development. br it housing, transport. industry. irrigation, power. agriculture,
educati<m or health. (onstruction, both public and private. accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outla\/ in ant: Plan. Half of the total money spent onconstruction
activitic\ i:, speilt on buiidinps ior residential. illdustrial. commercial. administrative,
educational. medical, municipal and entertalnrnent 1Ise.j. It is estimated that about
half :)I the rota1 outlay on buildings would be on housing. lna Five-Year Plan of, say,
KS I 560 biiiion, about KS 7X0 billion would he spent on consti uction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings ot valioils tlpes and occupancies. lt
is impel-ativc that tor such a large national investment, optimum return\ are assu:cd and
was!age in construction is a\;oidcd.
Soon after the Third Plan. the Plannmg CommisGon decided that the whole gamut o!
operations involved in construction. such as administrative. organissti~~nal, fin:t.lcial
and technical aspects. bc studied in depth. F o r [his stlld!,. ;I I%nei of I,\pcrt\ ua.s
appointed in 1965 by the Planning C\mrnission and it> rccommendatlons are found iri
the Report on Economics in Constructinn <..(>si> published in 1968.
One of the facets ofbuildiq construction. namci!. conttoilingand regulat!ng buildings
through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooks recei\,ed the atrentlon of the
Panel and a study of thqsc regulatory practices I-evealsd thirt some of the prcvaiiing
methods of construction are outmoded; some designs arc o\,erburdcneci with satet!
factors and there arc other design criteria \vhlch. in the light of newer techmquch anh
methodologieb. could be rationalized; and bullding byclaws and repulation~ of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activit! In the country whrrevrr
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the UIL of neu buiidlng materials and
the latest developments in buildrng designs and construction techniclues. It alscl became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were mol-e often than not
specification oriented and not performance oriented.
.fhese studies resulted m a recommendation tha: a National Building Code be prepared
to unify the building regulations throughout the country for use by government
departments, municipal b o d i e s a n d other c o n s t r u c t i o n agencies. ~The Indian
Standards Institutmn was entrusted bythe Planning Commission with the preparation
of the Nationai t3uilding Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of 111~ Code. was set up by the Civil Engineering Ditision Council in
1967. T!iis Comrniticc. in turn, set up I8 :,pecialist panels to prepare th2 various parts
of the Code. The Guidil ;g Committee and its panels were constituted with architects.
:own planners. material:; experts. structural, construction, electrical illumination, airconditioning, acoustics and puhi!c health engineers. These experts were drawn irorn
the Central and State Ciovcrnmen:\. local bodies. professional institutions and private
agencies. The first vcrsior: oi the Code wan puh!ished in 1970.
After the National Building Code was publishcti in 1970. a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the ISI to propagate the conrents and use 01 the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, desiguinp and COtIStillCtiOtl activities. FOI- this.
State-wise implementation conferences wet-c organilcd with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects. town planners. administrators, buildirq material
manufacturers. building and plurnblng services installation dgcncirs, cuntractorz, etc.
These conferences have been useful in getting across the conteiits of the Code to t!le
interests concerned. .These conferences have also heiped in the eatabli>hment of
Action Committees to look into the actual irnpiementation work carried out by the
construction departments. local bodies and other agencies in different State.<. The
Action Committees reprcscnting all Interests in individual States met reguiarly to
review and consider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were tc revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks. manuals,
etc. as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at tit>- and town levels,
zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as tobrivg them in line with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. Arlsmg out ot this,
considerable progress has been made by most of the states in revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of ISI.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other local bodies in the States
of Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Bihar, West Bengal, Union Territory of Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and
Haryana were redrafted to bring them in line with National Building Code and
submitted to the respective Governments. These are under various stages of
consideration.
Some of the State Construction Departments like Public Works Departments have set
up Cells to look into the revision of PWD Specifications and Codes to align them with
the National Building Code and other related Indian Standards.
In spite of the best efforts by all concerned to implement the Code, the revised building
byelaws finalized in many states have not yet been adopted by the concerned
implementing/enforcing agencies due to procedural bottlenecks. Efforts are necessary
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising buildingbyelaws and PWD
specifications and adopting them in practice, reflecting the present state of knowledge
on various aspects of building construction.
Since the publication in 1970 of the National Building Code, a large number of
comments and useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and
sections of the Code were received as a result of use of the Code by all concerned, and
revision work of building byelaws of some states. In addition, a number of Indian
Standards have been prepared over the past 13 years and a large number of Indian
Standards on which some parts/sections of the Code were based have undergone
substantial modifications, particular mention may be made of the revisions to Concrete
Code, Earthquake Code and Masonry Code. The revised version of the National
Building Code has been prepared taking into consideration all the aspects mentioned
above.
The National Building Code is a single document in which,like a network, the
information contained in varicus Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
and cogency with the interdependent requirements of sections carefully analyzed and
fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of preplanning is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the
economies in construction particularly in building and plumbing services.
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by
various departments, municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set
of minimum provisions designed to protect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; solong as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is
left to the ingenuity of the architect and the engineer. The Code also covers aspects of
administrative regulations, development control rules and general building
requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials and
structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
and lifts; regulation for ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as water
supply, drainage, sanitation and gas supply; measures to ensure safety of workers and
public during construction; and rules for erection of signs and outdoor display
structures.
Some other important points covered by the Code include industrialized systems of
building and architectural control. The increase in population in the years to come
will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It has been estimated that the
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades and consequently at
least as much additional accommodation as is now available has to be provided during
this period. Speed of construction is thus of dn utmost importance and special
consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased
building activity, it is also essential that there should be some architectural control in the
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in
our urban areas is to be avoided.
The changes incorporated in the present Code have been specified in the Foreword to
each part/section of the Code. Some of the important changes are: addition of
VI
development control rules, requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including

norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low income housing;
tire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete andprestressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities in the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibration, air filter. automatic control, energy conservation for air-conditioning; and
guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.
The Code as now published is the second version representing the present state of
knowledge on various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of
the Code has thrown up a number of problems; some of them have been answered fully
and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme is envisaged by which
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution,usersviews over a
period of time pinpointingireas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in to the&ode from time to time to make it a living
document. It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.
Provision of the Code will serve as a model for adoption by PWDs and other
government construction departments, local bodies and other construction agencies.
Existing PWD codes, municipal byelaws and other regulatory media could either be
replaced by the National Building Code or suitably modified to cater to local
requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code cou!d be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee fsr Corrective Actiori.
This publication farms part of the Natiohal Building Code of India 1983 and
Contains the following Parts:
Part 11 Administration
Part III Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements
Part IV Fire Protection
Part V Building Materials
Part X Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
The information contained in this publication will essentially serve the town planner
and the architect in dealing with the development and building schemes from the
early stages of planning.
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC64

CHAIRMAN
MEMBERS
IX B. M. AH U J A
MAJ-GEN HARKIRAT SINGH

W-S1 Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
REPRESENTING
SHRI V. ASRANI PA H A L A J
SHRI J. P. BAJAJ
SHRI SASXDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B ALWANT SINGH
S HRJ J. R. BHALLA
SHRJ M. S. BHATJA
Sari H. U. B~JLAN~
S HRJ H. K. YADAV(A/ternare)
SHRJ C. S. CHANDRASEKHARA
S HRJ R. CHANNABASAPPA
?&RI A. CHATTERJl
CHIEF ENGXNEER (BUILDINGS )
S UPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(I AND D CIRCLE) (Afrernate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (DESIGNS)
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi

Corporation of Madras, Madras
The Institution of Surveyors, New Delhi
In personal capacity (N-29 Panchshila Park,
New Delhi 110 017)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
In personal capacity (A-21 36 Sufdarjang Encfcve,
New Delhi 110 016)
Housing and IJrban Development Corporation

Ltd, New Delhi
Institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
Corporation of Bangalore, Bangalore
Tariff Advisory Committee (Delhi Regional
Committee). Bombay
Public Works Department, Govt of Tamii Nadu
Central Public Works Department (Central
Designs Organizationj. New Delhi
SUPERJN?ENDING ENGINEER (Aftrmore)
%RI D N. CHOPSA
DESAJ
PROF DJNESH MOHAN
SHR~ D. S.
SHR~ 2. C. MANGAL (Alternate)

DJRECT~R
DIRECTOR (CIVIL E&xxi)
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (,4Irernare)
DIRECTQR STANT,IR.DS (C~vrr.)
DIRECTOR (ENGG SERVICES &PROJECTS )
CITY ENGINEER (Afrernu!c)
SHRJ J. DURAI RAJ
GENERAL SECRE TARY
SHRI S. S. GILL
SHR; V. K. GUPT~
SHRI K. DEV.~RAJAN (Afrernare)
SHRI IV. JAG.~NNATH
SHR~ J. C. K.4pcR
DP R. K. GLlpTA (Ai!ermm)
SIJKI A. C KH.L\ZAVU~I
SHK! P. KRISHYW
Vlli
Schooi <:I Planning and .4rchi:ecture, NW Delhi

R a i l w a y Board (Ministr\i of Railu~y-,)
Reseaixh, Prsigns & Standards Orgni;vt::o;l
(Mmijtry oi Rai!ways), I uckvw
Municipal Corpo:atiGn of Greater Bombay,
Rrlmbay
in p e r s o n a l c a p a c i t y (Cf, 141 Sa:yo Mtarg,
New Delhi I!0 02f)

The Institution of Fire Engineers India, New Delhi
Public Wcrks Department, Government of Punj?b
Engineer-in-Chiefs dranch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
Steel Authority of India Limited. Yey~, !)elhi
Danf~~ss (India) Limited, Bombay
Regional Research Laboraiory (CSIR), Jcwllat
North Eastern (Younci!. Shillong
MEMBERS
SHKI M. z. K~IKIEN
SHKI D. S. HARPALANI (Alternate)
S HRI MADAN MO H A N
S HRI M AHENDRA R A J
S HRI A. D. PAVATE (Alrernufe)
S HRI G. C. MATHIJR
SHRI M. M. M ISTRY (Alternare)
S HRI G. D. MA T H U R
D R S. MAUDGAL
S HRI P. N. ME H R O T R A
S HRI G. B. MEWON
S HRI K. K. NA M B I A R
S HRI R. NATRAJAN
SHRI M. D. PATEL
S HRI I. K. MODI (Mrernafe)
P RESIDENT
S HRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RA G H U
S HRI A. RAMAN
S HRI D. RAGURAMAN (Alternate)
S HRI N. V. RAMAN
S HRI Z ACHARIA G EORGE (Alternate)
S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIANI
REPRESENTING
Tata Consulting Engineejs. Bombay

Directorate GeneraI of Factory Advice Service and
Labour Institute, Bombay
The Association of Consulting Engineers (India),
New Delhi
National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
Town and Country Planning Organization,
New Delhi
Department of Science & Technology, New Delhi
In personal capacity (/!-lo1 Anand Lihar.
New Delhi I10 092)
Ministry of Home Affairs
In personal capacity (Rnmnnala~~u,lS First Crescertt
Park, Gandhi Mapar. A$.lar, Mndras 600 020)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi

Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat
Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun
Ministry of Works & Housing (CPHEEO)
National Environmental Engineering Research
Institute (CSIR), Nagpur
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR),
Madras
In personal capacity (5/3 Eust Pate1 Nagar, New
Delhi 110 008)
SHRI V. S. RANE
SHRI B. K. ROY
SHRJ D. P. R OY C H O W D H A R Y
S HRI 8. P. GHOZH (Alternare)
SHRI T. K. SARAN
S HRI T. S. RATNAM (Alternate)
S HRJ H. J. SHAH
S HRI R. G. GA N D HI (_Alrernate)
S HRI R. L. SURI
SHRI M. TH Y A G A R A J A N
SHRI
B. T. UNWAL~.A
K. M EHTA (Alternate)
Brig D. R. KATHURIA (Alternate)
SHRI Y.
D R !-I. C. VISVESVARAYA
Public Works & Housing Deparanent, Goxrnment

of Maharashtra, Bombay
Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
Public Works Department, Government of
West Bengal
Bureau of Public Enterprises (Ministry of Finance),
New Delhi
Builders Association of India, Bombay
Suri & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,
New Delhi
Indian institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
1 he Concrete Associationof India, Bombay and
Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Cement Research lnstitute of India, New Delhi
MEMBERS
REPRESENTING
SHRI
D. AJITHA SIMHA, Deputy Director

General [Former Director (CivEn& 1
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director (Civ Engg)
Director General, ISI (Ex-officio Member)
FORMER SECRETARY
SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA

Deputy Director General [Former Director (Civ Engg)],ISI
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Director (Civ Engg),ISI
JOINT SECRETARY
SHRI J. VENKATARAMAN
Sr. Deputy Director (Civ Engg),ISI
Panel for Administration, Development Control Rules

and General Building Reqirements, BDC 64: Pl
CONVENER
REPRESENTING
SHRI H. U. BIJLANI
Housing & Urban Dxloprnent Corpomtion Limited,

New Delhi
MEMBERS
S HRI V. SURESH (Alternate to

Shri H. U. Bijlani)
S HRI V. A. ANANDADOSS
S HRI J. R. BHALLA
CHIEF ARCHITECT
S ENIOR A RCHITECT (H & TP)II
Housing & Urban Development Corporation

Limited, New Delhi
Ministry of Health, Family Planning, Works&
Urban Development, New Delhi
(Alternate)
C ITY E NGINEER
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI G. DA-~-~ARI
S HRI J. D. GOYAL
S HRI P. S. GUJRAL
S HRI T. N. GUPTA
S HRI V. K. MATHUR (Alternate)
S HRI J IVAN Duly
JOINT D IRECTOR
S HRI A. C. KHOSLA
S HRI S. K. KOGEKAR (Alternate)
S HRI M. L. MAINI
S HRI B. D. KSHIRSAGAR (Alternate)
S HRI G. C. MATHUR
S HRI M. M. MISERY (Alternate)
S HRI G. D. MATHUR
S HRI .N. RANGANATHAN
S HRI B IMAL KRISHNA R O Y
Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,

Bombay
Madras Metropolitan Development Authority,
Madras
Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi
Directorate General of Civil Aviation, New Delhi
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee
The Institute of Engineers (India), Calcutta
Railway Board (Ministry of Railways)
The Institute of Surveyors, New Delhi
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters
Town & Country Planning Organisation,
New Delhi
Institute of Town Plaimers (India), New Delhi
The Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
Panel for Fire Protection. BDC 64:P2

CONVENER
In personnel capacitty (B-61 38-I S a f d a r j a n g
Enclave, New Delhi 110 029)
S HRI P. N. ME H R O T R A
MEMBERS
Central Building Research Institute (CSJR).

Roorkee
D R G N. BA D A M I
SHRI GOPAL KRISHAN (Alternate)
SHRI A. CHAITERJI
SHRI S. M. DESAI
G ENERAL S ECRETARY
SHRI S. GHOSH
SHRI M. R. K AMATH
SHRI K. R. EASWARAN (Alternate)
SHRI G. B. M&o\
SHRI V, B. NI~CAM
SHRI G. N.. SHET(;IRI (Altrmate)
SHKI Y. P. PVNDOL
SHRI D: D. PCRAWARE
SHRI SATISH K~MAR
SHRI S. S. L. SHAHMA
SHRI VIJAY KUMAR
Tarrif Advisory Commitee (Delhi Regional

Committee, New Delhi), Bombay
State Bank of India, Bombay
The Institute of Fire Engineers (India), New Delhi
National Fire Service College (Ministry of Home
kffairs), Nagpur
h4ather & Platt Ltd, Bombay
Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay
(Bombay Fire Brigade), Bombay
Indian Hotels Company Limited, Bombay
Indian Prtro-Chemical Corporation Limited,
Nagpur
Forest Research Insritute & Colleges, Dehra Dun
Municipal Co:poration of Delhi (Delhi Fire
Service), Delhi
Central Labour Jnstitute (Ministry of Labour),
Bombay
SHRI R. K. GPrir,~(Alternute)
Panel for Burlding Materials, BDC 64:P3
CON IENER
SHRI T. S. VEUAWR~
C&&al Public Works Department (Central Designs

Organisation), New Delhi
MEMBERS
SHRI A. N. BAJAJ
SHRI J. K. CH~US
SHRI A. K. CHOPRA(A/lernate)
DEPUTY DIRECT-OK S'r%NLiAKDs (B&S) I.
SHRI R. N. GREW%
'SHRI Y. K. MEHTA (A;ternafe)
B RIG HARISH CHANDRA

SHRI S. A. Rum (Aho-nate)
D R H. N. J~GAIXESH
SHRI K. DAMWXRAIV (,4Itmzare)

SHRI MA N O H A R IAN_ JAW
SHKI D. P, CHAUHA
SHRI K . S. LA:!I.Y
Forest Research Institute & Colleges, Dehra bun

Research Designs & Standards Organization
(Ministry of Railways), Lucknow
The Concrete Association of India, Bombgy
Builders Association of India, Bonibay
Indian Plywood Industry Research Institute,
Bangalore
All Jndia Brick & Tile Mantifacturers Federation,
New Delhi
(,dlfernate)
The Indian Plywood Manufacturing Co Ltd.
Dandeli
LT-COL (RET~) G. B. SINGH (Alternate)

S HRI N. MACEDO
Lime Manufacturers Association of India, Delhi
SHRI MO H A N RAI
Central. Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee
XI
MEMBERS
SHRI KRJSHAN L~L (Afrernate)

SHRI B, K. PANTHAKY
SHRI P. V. NAIK (Allernare)
DR A, V. R. RAC)
S HRI J. SUN GllrTA.(&ternale)
SHRI P. J. TARAPOREVALA
D R S. P. VE R M A
REPRESENTING
The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay

Hindustan Steel Limited, Bhilai
Directorate General of Technical Development,
New Delhi
Panel for Sign and Out Door Display Structures, BDC 64:P17
COh VENER
SHRI J. R. BHALLA
Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
MEMBERS
CITY ENGINEER
D EPUTY CmY ENGINEER (AItemate)
SRIMATJ GUL M. E NGINEER
SHRI. K. S. NICHOLSON (Alrernare)
SHR~ J. D. GOVAL
SHRI RAJENDRA JAIN

S HRJ Y. K. JAIN (Alrerrzare)
SHRI B. N. RAHALKAR
T HE SECRETARY
SHRI M. S. SIALI

Bombay
Selvel publicity and consultants Pvt Ltd, Bombay
Aaren Advertising Private Ltd, Bombay
Town and Country Planning Organization
(Ministry of Works & Housing). New Delhi
Delhi Urban Arts Commision, New Delhi
institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:
PART I
DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BllILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section I
Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES
Lighting and Ventilation
Electrical Installations
Air-conditioning and Heating
Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES

Section 1
Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X
SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
CONTENTS
...
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3.
APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE
...
4.
INTERPRETATION
...
5.
ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND

CONSTRUCTION. AND TESTS
...
0. FOREWORD
SECTlON 2 ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT

6.
DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING INSPECTION
...
7.
POWER AND DUTIES OF BUILDING OFFICIAL
...
...
...
...
11. DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT
...
f2. APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/BUILDlNG PERMIT
...
13.
...
12
14. INSPECTlON
...
12
1.5. UNSAFE BUILDING
...
13
16.
DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
...
13
17.
VALIDITY
...
13
18.
ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL
...
13
GUIDE FOR THE QUALlFlCATlONS A N D

COMPETENCE OF LICENSED ARCHITECTS,
ENGINEERS, STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS,
SUPERVISORS AND TOWN PLANNERS
...
14
FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP,

ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE ALTERATION
-IN ANY PLACE IN A BUILDING
...
16
...
17
...
17
...
18
8. BOARD OF APPEALS
9.
VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES
10. POWER TO MAKE RULES

SECTION 3 PERMIT AND INSPECTION
RESPONSlBlLlTlES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER
APPENDfXA
APPENDtX B
APPENDIX C FORM FOR SUPERVISION

APPENDIX D
FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF

DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT
APPENDIX E FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT

APPENDIX F
FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
...
18
APPENDIX G
FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT
...
19
PART
II
ADMINISTRATION
II-
0.
FOREWORD
0.1 A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different

development control rules and buildingbyelaws had been felt particularly in regard to
the applicability of the Code, desirable qualifications for the enforcing Authority and
the representative of the owner and responsibilities and duties of the Authority and the
owner.
It is expected that the town and country planning department will coordinate the
administrative provisions of this part and the same given in the State Town and
Country Planning Acts.
0.2 This part recommends the setting up of a Board of Appeal. The Board of Appeal
gives the owner/architect an opportunity to defend the schemes which are based on
conventional or new methods of design and-construction or using new materials, which
have been otherwise rejected by the Authority.
0.3 This part also emphasizes the need for setting up an Art Commission for
metropolitan areas to safeguard existing aesthetics in the event of new schemes
proposed for buildings of public importance or buildings coming up in an important
area or monumental buildings. The Commission can assist the civic authorities in
reviewing plans for development from the stand point of assuring good taste and
regard for often threatened natural beauties.
0.3.1 The Commission can serve as a means whereby the government and public
bodies and individuals could get advice on artistic questions in connection with
building schemes.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of implementing this
part in rewriting buildingbyelaws and development control rules of some municipal
corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions have emerged. These have
been incorporatedin this revised version to the extent possible.
0.5 The significant changes in this part includes the new administrative provisions
related to development control rules, additional information to be furnished/ indicated
in the building plan for multistoreyed and special buildings and modified provisions
regarding submission of building plans by Government Departments to the Authority.
II- 2
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
SECTION 1 GENERAL
I. SCOPE
1.1 Short Title- This Code is called the
National Building Code, hereinafter referred
to as the Code.
1.2 This part covers the administrative
aspects of the Code, such as apphcabthty,
organization of building department for
enforcement of the Code, procedure for
obtaining development and building permits
and responsibility of the owner.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply.
ACCESSORY U SE - Any use of-the premises
subordinate to the principal use and
customarily incidental to the principal use.
from the average level of the ground around

and contiguous to the building or as decided
by the Authority to the highest point of the
building adjacent to the street walls; and in the
case of pitched roofs, up to the point where the
external surface of the outer wall intersects the
finished surface of the sloping roof, and in the
case of gables facing the road, the midpoint
between the eaves level and the ridge.
Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration shall be
excluded for the purpose of measuring
heights.
B UILDING L INE -The line up to which the
plinth of a building adjoining a street or an
extension of a street or on a future street may
lawfully extend. It includes the lines
prescribed, if any, in any scheme. The building
line may change from time to time as
decided by the Authority.
CONVERSION - The change of occupancy or
premises to any occupancy or use requiring
additional occupancy permit.
A L T E R A T I O N -A change from one

occupancy to another, or a structural change,
such as an addition to the area or height, or
the removal of part of a building, or any
change to the structure, such as the
construction of, cutting into or removal of any
wall, partition, column, beam, joist, floor or
other support, or a change to or closing of
any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment.
D EVELOPMENT - Development with

grammatical variations means the carrying
out of building, engineering, mining or other
operations in, or over, or under land or water,
or i.n the use of any building or land, and
includes redevelopment and layout and
subdivision of any land; and to developshall
be construed accordingly.
A PPROVED - Approved by the Authority

having jurisdiction.
DRAIN - A conduit or channel for the carriage of storm water, sewage or otherused
AUTHORITY HAVING
Authority which
JURISDICTION - The
has been created by a statute

and which, for the purpose of administering
the Code/ Part, may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the Authority.
B UILDING -
Any structure for whatsoever

purpose and of whatsoever materials
constructed and every part thereof whether
used as human habitation or not and includes
foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, plumbing and building services,
fixed platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice
or projection, part or a building or anything
affixed thereto or any wall enclosing or
intended to enclose any land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents
SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc,
erected for temporary and ceremonial occasions with the permission of the Authority
shall not be considered as building.
B U I L D I N G , H EIGHT OF - The vertical
distance measured, in the case of flat roofs,
PART
I I ADMiNISTRA.TION
water.
DRAINAGE - The removal of any liquid by a

system constructed for the purpose.
LICENSED
ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, STRCCTURAL E NGINEER; SUPERVISOR, T OWN P LANNER - A qualified architect/engineer/
structural engineer/supervisor/ town
planner who has been licensed by the
Authority.
O CCUPANCY OR USE G ROUP -The principal

occupancy for which a building or a part of a
building is used or intended to be used; for
the purposes of classification of a building
according to occupancy, an occupancy shall
be deemed to include the subsidiary
occupancies which are contingent upon it.
O CCUPIER -Occupier includes any person
for the time being, paying or liable to pay rent
or any portion of rent of the building in
respect of which the ward is used, or
compensation or premium on account of the
occupation of such building and also arentfree tenant, but does not includea lodger, and
II- 3
the words occupy and occupation do not

refer to the lodger.
An owner living in or otherwise using his own
building shall be deemed to be the occupier

thereof.
PERATIONAL C ONSTRUCTION - A
construction put up by Government Departments for operational purposes (see12.1.1.1).
O WNER -The person who receives the rent

for the use of the land or buildingor would be
entitled to do so if it were let out. It also
includes:
fare or not, over which the public have a right

of passage or access or have passed and had
acceqq uninterruptedly for a specified period,
whether existing or proposed in any scheme
and includes all bunds, channels, ditches,
storm-water drains, culverts, sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside trees and hedges, retaining walls, fences, barriers and railing within
the street lines.
STREET LEVEL OF G RADE -The officially
established elevation or grade of the centre
line of the street upon which a plot fronts and
if there is no officially ectablished grade, the
existing grade of the street at its mid-point.
4 An agent or trustee who receives such rent
S T R E E T L INE -The line defining the side

limits of a street.
b) A receiver, executor or administrator or a
To E RECT - To erect a building means:
on behalf of the owner;
manager appointed by any court of

cdmpetent jurisdiction to have the charge
of, or to exercise the rights of the owner;
cl An agent or trustee who receives the rent
of or is entrusted with or is concerned

with any building devoted to religious or
charitable purposes; and
d) A mortgagee in possession.
PERMIT- - A permission or authorization in
writing by the Authority to carry out work
regulated by the Code.
ROAD - See Street.
R OAD L INE - See Street Line.
ROOM HE I G H T - The vertical distance
measured from the finished floor surfact= to
the finished ceiling surface. Where a finished
ceiling is not provided, the underside of the
joists or beams or tie beams shall determine
the upper point of measurement for
determining the head room.
SANCTIONELI PLAN -The set of plans a n d

specifications submitted under the Code in
connection with a building and duly approved
and Fanctioned by the Authority.
S ERVICE R OAD 7 A road/lane provided at
the rear or side of a plot for service purposes.
S E T- BACK LINE - A line usually parallel to
the plot boundaries and laid down in each case
by the Authority, beyond which nothing can
be constructed towards the site boundaries.
S ITE (PLOT) --A parcel (piece) of land
enclosed by definite boundaries.
STREET- Any means of access, namely,

highway, street, lane, pathway, alley, stairway, passageway, carriageway, footway,
square, place or bridge, whether a thorough-
a) to erect a new building on any site

whether previously built upon or not;
b) to re-erect any building of which
portions above the plinth level have been
pulled down, burnt or destroyed; and
c) conversion from one occupancy to
another.
U NSAFE B UILDING - Unsafe buildings are
those which are structurally unsafe, insanitary
or not provided with adequate means oizgress
or which constitute a fire hazara or are
otherwise dangerous to human life or whichig
relation to existing use constitute a hazard to
safety or health or public welfare, by reason of
inadequate maintenance, dilapidation or
abandonment.
3. APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE
3.I Parts I to X and their sections of the
Code shall apply to all buildings described
in 3.2 to 3.8.
3.2 Where a building is erected, the Code
applies to the design and constructidn of the
building.
3.3 Where the whole or any part of the building is removed, the Code applies to all parts of
the building whether removed or not.
3.4 Where the whole or any part of the building is demolished the Code applies to any
remaining part and to the work involved in
demolition.
3.5 Where a building is altered (see 12.4 and
12.4.1), the Code applies to the whole building
whether existing or new except that the Code
applies only to part if that part is completely
self contained with respect to facilities and
safety measures required by the Code.
3.6 Where the occupancy of a building is

changed the Code applies to all parts of the
building affected by the change.
advance as proof of compliance. These tests

shall be made by an approved agency at the
expense of the owner.
3.7 Where development of land is undertaken

the Code applies to the entire development of
land.
5.3.1 Test methods shall be specified by the

Code for the materials or design or construction in question. If there are no appropriate
test methods specified in the Code, the
Authority shall determine the test procedure.
For methods of test for building materials,
reference may be made to Part V Building
materials.
3.8 Exisring Buildings/ Development Nothing in the Code shall require the removal,
alteration or abandonment, nor prevent continuance of the use or occupancy of an existing building/development, unless in the
opinion of the Authority, such building/development constitutes a hazard to thesafety of
the adjacent property or the occupants of the
building itself.
5.3.2 Copies of the results of all such tests

shall be retained by the Authority for a period
of not less than two years after theacceptance
of the alternative material.
4. INTERPRETATION
4.1 The heading which appears at the beginning of a clause or sub-clause of the Code shall
be deemed to be a part of such clause or
sub-clause respectively.
4.2 The use of present tense includes the
future tense, the masculine gender includes
the feminine and the neuter, the singular
number includes the plural and the plural
includes the singular. The word person
includes a corporation as well as an individual; writing includes printing and typing and
signature includes thumb impression made
by a person who cannot write if his name is
written near to such thumb impression.
5. ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS,
METHODS OF DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION, AND TESTS
5.1 The provisions of the Code are not
intended to prevent the use of any material or
method of design or construction not specifically prescribed by the Code, provided any
such alternative has been approved.
5.2 The Authority may approve any such
alternative provided it is found that the proposed alternative is satisfactory and conforms
to the provisions of relevant parts regarding
material, design and construction and that
material, method, or work offered is, for the
purpose intended, at least equivalent to that
prescribed in the Code in quality, strength,
compatibility, effectiveness, fire and water
resistance, durability and safety.
5.3 Tests - Whenever there is insufficient
evidence of compliance with the provisions of
the Code or evidence that any material or
method of design or construction does not
conform to the requirements of the Code or in
order to substantiate claims for alternative
materials, design or methods of construction,
the Authority may require tests sufficiently in
SECTION 2 ORGANIZATION AND

ENFORCEMENT
6. DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING
INSPECTION
6.1 The department of building inspection
shall be created and the executive official incharge thereof shall be known as building
official.
6.2 Appointment - The building official
shall be appointed by the Authority.
6.3 Organization -The building official
shall appoint such number of officers,
technical assistants, inspectors and other
employees as shall be necessary for the
administration of the Code and as authorized
by the Authority.
6,4 Delegalisn of Powers -The Authority
of the building official may designate an
employee or employees who shall exercise all
the powers of the official during the
temporary absence or disability of the
building official.
6:5 Qualification of Building Official - To
be eligible for appointment, the building official shall be a licensable Engineer or Structural Engineer or Architect or Town Planner
whose qualifications shall not in any case be
less than those prescribed in Appendix A.
6.5.1 In small local bodies having insufficient
funds to appoint such offtcials with the above
qualifications, two or three such bodies could
join together and have one qualified building
official.
6:6, Qualifications of Assistant - No person
shall be appointed as Assistant unless he has
got the qualifications prescribed in Appendix
A for a licensed Supervisor.
II-
6,7 Restriction on Employees - No official
or employee connected with the Department

of Building Inspection except one whose only
connection is that of a member of the Board of
Appeals, established under 8 shall be engaged
directly or indirectly in a work connected with
the furnishing of labour, materials or
appliances for the construction, alteration or
maintenance of a building, or the preparation
of plans or of specifications thereof unless he
is the owner of the building; nor shall such
officer or employee engage in any work which
conflicts with his official duties or with the
interests of the Department.
6.8 Officers Not Liable for Damage - Any
official of the Authority shall not render himself liable personally and he shall be relieved
from all personal liabilities for any damage
that may accrue to persons or property as a
result of any act required or permitted in the
discharge of his official duties. Any suit instituted against any officer or employee.because
of an act performed by him in the official
discharge of his duties and under the provisions of the Code shall be defended by the
legal representative of the Authority until the
final termination of the proceedings. In no
case shall the official or any of his subordinate
employees liable for costs in any action, suit or
proceeding that may be instituted in pursuance of the provisions of the Code and any
official of the department of building inspection acting in good faith and without malice
shall be free from liability for acts performed
under any of the provisions or by reasons of
any act or omission in the performance of his
official duties connected therein.
6.9 Records - Proper records of all applications received, permits and orders issued,
inspections made shall be kept and copies of
all papers and documents connected with the
administration of its duties shall be retained
and all such records shall be open to public
inspection at all appropriate times.
7. POWER AND DUTIES OF BUILDING
OFFICIAL
7.0 The building official shall enforce all the

provisions of the Code and shall act on any
question relative to the mode or manner of
construction and the materials to be used in
the erection, addition, alteration, repair,
removal, demolition, installation of service
equipment and the location use, occupancy
and maintenance of all buildings except as
may otherwise be specifically provided.
7.1 Application and Permits - He shall
receive all applications and issue permits
(see 12.11) for the erection and alteration of
buildings and examine the premises for which
such permits have been issued and enforce

compliance with the Code.
7.2 Building Notices and Orders - He shall
issue all necessary notices or orders to remove
illegal or unsafe conditions, to require the
necessary safeguards during construction, to
require adequate exit facilities in existing
buildings arid to ensure compliance with all
the requirements of safety, health and general
welfare of the public as included in the Code.
7.3 Right of Entry- Upon presentation of
proper credentials and with advance notice,
the building official or his duly authorized
representative may enter at any reasonable
time any building or premises to perform any
duty imposed-upon him by the Code.
7.4 Inspection - He shall make all the
required inspections or he may accept reports
of inspections of authoritative and recognized
services or individuals; and all reports of
inspections shall be in writing and certified by
a responsible officer of such authoritative service or by the responsible individual or engage
any such expert opinion as he may deem
necessary to report upon unusual technical
issues that may arise, subject to the approval
of the Authority.
7.5 Construction Not According to Plan
- Should the building official determine at
any stage that the construction is not proceeding according to the sanctioned plan or is in
violation of any of the provisionsofthe Code,
or any other applicable Code Regulation, Act
or Byelaw, he shall notify the owner, and all
further construction phall be stayed until correction has been effected and approved.
73.1 Should the owner fail to comply with
the requirements at any stage ofconstruction,
the Authority is empowered to cancel the
building permit issued and shall cause notice
of such cancellation to be securely posted
upon the said construction, if the owner is not
traceable at his address given in the notice.
Posting of such a notice shall be considered
sufficient notification of cancellation to the
owner thereof. No further work shall be
undertaken or permitted upon such construction until a valid building permit thereafter
has been issued. If the owner, in violation of
the notice for cancellation, continues the construction, the Authority may take all necessary means to stop such work.
7.6 Modification - Wherever practical difficulties are involved in carrying out any provision of the Code, the building official may
vary or modify such provisions upon application of the owner or his representative provided the spirit and intent of theC0d.e shall be
observed and public welfare and safety be
assured. The application for modification and

the final decision of the building official shall
be in writing and shall be officially recorded
with the application for the permit in the permanent records of the Department of Building Inspection.
7.7 Occupancy Violations - Wherever any
building is being used contrary to provisions
of the Code, the building official may order
such use discontinued and the building or portion thereof, vacated by the notice served on
any person, causing such use to be discontinued. Such person shall discontinue the use
within 10 days after receipt of such notice or
make the building or portion thereof, comply
with the requirements of the Code.
8. BOARD OF APPEALS
8.1 In order to determine the suitability of
alternative materials or methods of design or
construction and to provide for reasonable
interpretation of the provisions of the Code, a
Board of Appeals consisting of members who
are qualified by experience and training and
to pass judgement upon matters pertaining to
building construction, shall be appointed by
the Authority. The building official shall be an
ex-officio member and shall act as secretary to
the Board. The Board shall adopt reasonable
rules and regulations for conducting its investigations and shall render all decisions and
findings in writing to the building official with
a duplicate copy to the appellant and may
recommend such modifications as are
necessary.
9. VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES
9.1 Offences and Penalties- Any person
who contravenes any of the provisions of the
Code or any requirements of obligations
imposed on him by virtue of the Code, or who
interferes with or obstructs any person in the
discharge of his duties, shall be guilty of an
offence and the Authority shall levy suitable
penalty.
NOTE - The penalty may be in the form of collection of
arrears of tax.
9.2 In the case of buildings coming up in the
vicinity of an aerodrome, violation of height

restriction laid down by Directorate General
of Civil Aviation, shall be demolished at the
expense of the owner and reduced to bring to a
level within permissible height.
9.3 The licensed architect/ engineer/ structural engineer/ supervisor/ town planner
shall be. responsible for supervision of the
construction and for the completion certificate; in the event of violation of the provisions
of the Code he shall be liable to penalties as
prescribed by the Authority including cancellation of licence.
PART
II
ADMINISTRATION
9.4 Further Obligation of Offender - The

conviction of any person for an offence under
the provision of 9.1 shall not relieve him from
the duty of carrying out the requirements or
obligations imposed on him by virtue of the
provisions of the Code; and if such requirements or obligations are not complied with in
accordance with an order made under
provisions of 9.1, the Authority under the
provisions of the Code may, if necessary and
advisable, enter upon the premises in respect
of which a conviction has been made and
carry out at the expense of the convicted
person, the requirements or obligations
referred to in the said order and the expense, if
not paid on demand, may be recovered with
cost in a court.
9.5 Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecution-The conviction of any person under
the provisions of this part for failing to

comply with any of the said requirements or
obligations shall not operate as a bar to
further prosecution under this part for any
subsequent failure on the part of such person
to comply.
10. POWER TO MAKE RULES
10.1 The Authority may make rules forcarrying out the provisions and intentions of the
Code provided that any rule shall not be in
direct conflict or nullify any of the provisions
of the Code.
SECTION 3 PERMIT AND

INSPECTION
11. DE V E L O P M E N T/ BUILDING
PERMIT
11.1 Permit Required - No person shall
carry out any development, erect, re-erect or
make alterations or demolish any building or
cause the same to be done without first
obtaining a separate permit for each such
development/ building from the Authority.
No permits shall, however, be required for
works referred to in 12.4.1.
11.2 Pre-code Development/ Building Permit - If any development/ building, permit
for which had been issued before the commencement of the Code, is not wholly completed within a period of three years from the
date of such permit, the said permission shall
be deemed to have lapsed and fresh permit
shall be necessary to proceed further with the
work in accordance with the provisions of the
Code.
II- 7
12. APPLICATION FOK DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT

12.1 Notice - Every peison who intends to
develop,,erect, re-erect or make alterations in
any place in a building shall give notice in
writing to the Authority of his said intention
in the prescribed form (see Appendix B) and
such notice shall be accompanied by plans
and statements in triplicate as required under
12.2 and 12.3 except for special buildings
(high rise, non-residential) where additional
copies may be submitted as desired by the
Authority (See P663).
12.1.1 Regarding submission of plans by
Government Departments, the procedure
shall be as given m 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2.
12.1.1.1 The operational construction of the
Government, whether temporary or permanent, which is necessary for the operation,
maintenance, development or execution of
any of the following services may be exempted
from the point of view of the byelaws:
12.2.1 SIZES OF D R A W I N G S HEETS A N D

R ECOMMENDED N OTATION FOR COLOURING
PLANS
12.2.1.1 The size of drawing sheets shall be

any of those specified in Table 1.
---------------~-
TABLE 1 DRAWING SHEET SIZES

S L DESIGNo. NATION
(1)
(2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
A0
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
TRIMMED SIZE
(9
mm
841 X 1189
594X 841
420X 594
297X 420
210X 297
148 X 210
UNTRIMMED SIZE.
Min
(4)
mm
880 X 1 230
625 X 880
450X 625
330X 450
240x 330
165 X 240
12.2.1.2 The plans shall be coloured as specified in Table 2.
12.2.2 K EY P LAN - A key plan drawn to a

scale of not less than 1 in 10000 shall be
Railways;
submitted along with the application for a
b) National highways;
development/ building permit showing the
National waterways;
boundary locations of-the site with respect to
Major ports;
neighbourhood landmarks. The minimum
e) Airways and aerodromes;
0 Posts and telegraphs, telephones, wire- dimension of the key plan shall be not less
less, broadcasting, and other like forms than 75 mm.
of commdnications;
12.2.3 S ITE P LAN -The site plan sent with
g) Regional grid for electricity; and
an
application for permit shall be drawn to a
Any,
other
service
which
the
State
h)
Government may, if it is of opinion that scale of not less than 1 in 500 for a site up to
the operation, maintenance, develop- one hectare and not less than 1 in 1000 for a
ment or execution of such service is site more than one hectare and shall show:
essential to the life of the community, by
notification. declare to be a service for a) the boundaries of the site and of any contiguous land belonging to the owner
the purpose of this clause.
thereof;
the position of the site in relation to
12.1.1.2 However the following construc- b) neighbouring street;
tion of the Government departments do not
come under the purview of operational con- cl the name of the streets in which the building is proposed to be situated, if any;
struction for the purpose of exemption under
12.1.1.1.
d) all existing buildings standing on, over or
under the site including service lines;
New residential building (other than
gate lodges, quarters for limited essen- e) the position of the building and of all
other buildings (if any) which the applitial operational staff and the like), roads
cant
intends to erect upon his contiguous
and drains in railway colonies, hospiland referred to in (a) in relation to:
tals, clubs, institutes and schools, in the
case of railways; and
1) the boundaries of the site and in case
where the site has been partitioned, the
A new building, new construction or
boundaries of the portion owned by the
new installation or any extension theapplicant and also of the portions
reof in the case of any other services.
owned by others;
1L .2 I n f o r m a t i o n A-ccompan.ring
2) all adjacent street, buildings (with
Notice --The notice shall be accompanied
number of storeys and height) and prethe key plan, site plan, building plan, services
mises within a distance of 12 m of the
plans, specifications and certificate of supersite and of the contiguous land (if any)
vision as prescribed in 12.2.2 to 12.2.6.
rl?feired to in (a); and
2)
II- 8
TABLE 2 COLOURING OF PLANS

(Clause 12.2.1.2)
SL
NO.
IT
S ITE
E M
\
White Plan
(I)
PI_AN
(3)
(2)
i) Plot lines
ii) Existing street
Blue Print
,
White Plan
Ammonia
Print :
(6)
(5)
(4)
Thick black
Thick black
Green
Green
Green
Green dotted Green dotted Green dotted
Thick black
Thick black
_
BUILDING PLAN
L
\
Ammonia
Blue Print
Print
(7)
Thick black
-
(8)
Thick black
iii) Future street,

if any
iv) Permissible build- Thick dotted Thick dotted Thkiccotted
black
black
ing lines
No colour
No colour
No colour
No colour
No colour
No colour
v) Open spaces
Blue
White
Black
Blue
Black (outline) White
vi) Existing work
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
vii) Work proposed
hatched
hatched
hatched
hatched
hatched
hatched
to be demolished
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red filled in Red
viii) Proposed work
(see Note 1)
Red dotted
Red dotted
Red dotted
Red dotted
Red dotted
Red dotted
xi) Drainage and
sewerage work
Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Bl;;kdotted Blaccdotted
x) Water supply
thin
thin
thin
thin
work
NOTE 1 - For entirely new construction this need not be done; for extension of an existing work this
shall
apply.
NOTE 2 1 For land development, subdivision, layout, suitable colouring notations shall be used which shall be indexed.
3)if there is no street within a distance

of 12m of the site, the nearest existing
street;
0 the means of access from the street to the
building, and to all other buildings (if
any) which the applicant intends to erect
upon his contiguous land referred to in
(a);
g) space to be left about the building to
secure a free circulation of air, admission
of light and access for scavenging
purposes;
h) the width of the street (if any) in front
and of the street (if any) at the side or near
the buildings;
3 the direction of north point relative to the
plan of the buildings;
k) any physical features, such as wells.
drains, etc; and
ml such other particulars as may be prescribed by the Authority.
12.2.4 S U B - D I V I S I O N / LA Y O U T P LAN - ln
the case of development work, the notice shall
be accompanied by the sub-division/layout
plan which shall be drawn on a scale of not less
than I : 500 containing the following:
a) Scale used and north point;
b) The location of all proposed and existing
roads with their existing/proposed/
prescribed widths within the land;
c) Dimensions of plot along with building

lines showing the setbacks with dimensions within each plot;
d) The location of drains, sewers, public

facilities and services, and electrical lines,
etc;
e) Table indicating size, area and use of all
the plots in the sub-division/ layout plan;
A statement indicating the total area of
the site, area utilized under roads, open
spaces for parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces and development plan reservations, schools, shopping and other
public places alongwith their percentage
with reference to the total area of the site
proposed to be subdivided; and
g) In case of plots which are subdivided in
built-up areas in addition to the above,
the means of access to the sub-division
from existing streets.
0
22.2.5 BU I L D I N G P L A N -The plan of the

buildings and elevations and sections accompanying the notice shall be drawn to ascalt?of
1 : 100. The plans shall:
a) include floor plans of all floors together
with the covered area clearly indicating
the size and spacings of all framing
members and sizes of rooms and the
position of staircases, ramps and

liftwells;
b) show the use or occupancy of all parts of
the building:
cl show exact location of essential services,
for example, WC, sink, bath and the
like;
4 include sectional drawings showing
clearly the sizes of footings, thickness of
basement wall, wail construction, size
and spacing of framing members, floor
slabs and roof slabs with their materials.
The section shall indicate the heights of
building and rooms and also the height
of the parapet; and the drainage and the
slope of the roof. At least one section
should be taken through the staircase;
e) show all street elevations;
f-J indicate details of served privy, if any;
g) give dimensions of the projected portions beyond the permissible building
line;
h) include terrace plan indicating the drainage and the slope of the roof; and
j) give indications of the north point relative to the plan.
12.2.5.1 BUILDING PLAN FOR MULTISTOREYED,
- For multistoreyed
buildings which are more than 15 m in height
and for special buildings like educational,
assembly, institutional, industrial, storage
and hazardous and mixed occupancies wrth
any of the aforesaid occupancies having area
more than 500 m*, the following additional
information shall be furnished/ indicated in
the building plan in addition to the items given
in 12.2.5 as applicable:
SPECIAL BUILDINGS
b)
cl
4
e)
g)
h)
Access to fire appliancesj vehicles with

details of vehicular turning circle and
clear motorable accessway around the
building;
Size (width) of main and alternate staircases alongwith balcony approach, corridor, ventilated lobby approach;
Location and details of lift enclosures;
Location and size of fire lift;
Smoke stop lobby/door, where
provided;
Refuse chutes, refuse chamber, service
duct, etc;
Vehicular parking spaces;
Refuse area, if any;
DETAILS
OF
B UILDING SERVICES-Air-
conditioning system with position of fire

dampers, mechanical ventilation system,
electrical services, boilers, gas pipes, etc;
k) Details of exits including provision of

n-4
4
P)
q)
ramps, etc, for hospitals and special risks;

Location of generator, transformer and
switchgear room;
Smoke exhauster system, if any;
Details of fire alarm system network.
Location of centralized control, connecting all fire alarm systems, built-in
fire protection arrangements and public
address system, etc;
Location and dimensions of static water
storage tank and pump room alongwith.
fire service inlets for mobile pump and
water storage tank;
Location and details of fixed fire protection installations such as sprinklers, wet
risers, hose-reels, drenchers, COZ installation, etc; and
Location and details of first-aid fire fight-ing equipments/ installations.
12.2.6 S E R V I C E S P L A N S - The services

plans shall include all details of building and
plumbing services, and also plans, elevations
and sections of private water supply and sewage disposal system, if any (see Part VIII
Building services and Part 1X Plumbing
services).
12.2.7 SPECIFICATIONS - Specifications,
both general and detailed, giving type and
grade of materials to be used, duly signed by
the licensed architect/ engineer/ structural
engineer/ supervisor shall accompany the
notice (see Appendix B).
12.2.8 S UPERVISION - The notice shall be
further accompanied by a certificate in the
prescribed form (see Appendix C) by the
licensed architect/ engineer/ structural
e n g i n e e r / supelvisorj t o w n p l a n n e r
(see Appendix A) undertaking the supervision
(see 9.3.)
12.3 Prepararion and Signing o f
Plans - The licensed architect: engineer/
supervisor/ town planner shall prepare and
duly sign all plans (see Appendix A) and shall
indicate his name, address, qualification and
licence number as allotted by the Authority.
Wherever stipulated by the Authority, the
structural plans and details shall also be prepared and duly signed by the licensed structural engineer (see A-2.3.1). The plans shall also
be duly signed by the owner indicating his
address. The type and volume of buildings/development work to be undertaken by the
licensed professionals may generally be as in
Appendix A.
12.3.1 The services (building and plumbing
services) plans for buildings identified
in 12.2.5.1 shall be prepared and signed by

competent persons having suitable qualifications (see Appendix A).
allowed to re-submit it without any fees after complying

with all the objections raised by the Authority within a
period of one year from the date of rejection after which
fresh fees shall have to be paid.
12.4 Notice for Alteration Only - When the

notice is only for an alteration of the building
(see 3.5), only such plans and statements, as
may be necessary, shall accompany the notice.
12.7 Duration of Sanction - The sanction

once accorded shall remain valid up to three
years. The permit shall be got revalidated
before the expiration of this period.Revalidation shall be subject to the rules then in force.
12.4.1 No notice and building permit is neces12.8 Deviations During Construction - If

sary for the following alterations, and thelike
which do not otherwise violate any provisions during the construction of a building any
regarding general building requirements, departuie (excepting for items as given in
structural stability and fire safety require- 12.4.1) from the sanctioned plan is intended to
be made (see 7.5), sanction of the Authority
ments of the Code:
shall be obtained before the change is made.
revised plan showing the deviations shall
4 Opening and closjng of a window or The
be submitted and the procedure laid down for
door or ventilator;
the original plan heretofore shall apply to all
b) Providing intercommunicationdoors;
such amended plans except that the time limit
specified under 12.11.1 shall be three weeks in
cl Providing partitions;
such cases.
Providing
false
ceiling;
d)
e) Gardening;
12.9 Revocation of Permit - The Authority
f-l White washing;
may
revoke any permit issued under the proviPainting;
ia Ke-tiling
sions
of the Code, wherever there hasbeenany
and re-roofing;
h)
false
statement or any misrepresentation of
d Plastering and patch work;
any
material
fact in the application on which
k) Ke-flooring;
the
permit
was
based.
ml Construction of sunshades on ones own
land; and
12.10 Qualifications of Architects/ Engin) Ke-erection of portions of buildings neers/ Structural Engineers/ Sueprvisorsl
damaged by earthquake or other natural
calamities, to the same extent and speci-
fication as existed prior to such damage.

12.5 Notice for Land Adjoining the Government or Corporate Bodies Formed Under the
Statute - In case of a notice of intention to
erect, re-erect or make alteration in a building
or to make or enlarge any structure abutting
on property maintained by Public Works
Department, Defence or other Government
Departments, the notice and plan shall be in
sufficient numbers to enable the Authority to
forward one set each to the appropriate
departments for report before the permission
is granted; the government department shall
report to the Authority within two weeks from
the date of the receipt of the notice and plans
whether or not they have any objection to the
proposed construction. If no reply is received
within two weeks by the Authority,. from the
Government Department the notice and plans
shall be deemed to have been sanctioned.
12.6 Fees - No notice as referred to in 12.1
shall be deemed valid unless and until the
penon giving notice has paid the fees to the
Authority and an attested copy of the receipt
of such payment is attached with the notice.
NOTE -The fees may be charged in terms of area df
layout/total floor area of the building. In the event of a
building/development permit is not issued, the fees so
paid shall not be returned to the owner, but he shall be
Town Planners/ Services Personnel -
Architects, engineers, structural engineers,

supervisors, and town planners referred to
under 12.2.7, 12.2.8 and 12.3 shall be licensed
by the Authority as competent. to do the
work for which they are employed. A guide
for the equivalent technical qualifications and
professional experience required for such
licensing with the Authority is given in
Appendix A. In case of services, qualifications
for services personnel shall be as given in A-3.
12.11 Grant of Permit or Refusal-The
Authority may either sanction or refuse the
plans and specifications or may sanction them
with such modifications or directions as it
may deem necessary and thereupon shall communicate its decision to the person giving the
notice (see Appendix D).
12.11.1 The building plans for buildings identified in 12.2.5.1 shall also be subject to the
scruitiny of the Fire Authority and the sanction through building permit shall be given by
the Authority after the clearance from the Fire
Authority.
12.11.2 If within 30 days of the receipt of the

notice under 12.1 of the Cbde, the Authority
fails to intimate in writing to the person, who
has given the notice, of its refusal or sanction,
the notice with its plans and statements shall
be deemed to have been sanctioned; provided
IY
the fact h immediately brought to the notice

of the Authority in writing by the person who
has given notice and having not received any
intimation from the Authority within fifteen
days of giving such written notice. Subject to
the conditions mentioned in this clause,
nothing shall be construed to authorize any
person to do anything in contravention of or
against the terms of lease or titles of the land
or against any other regulations, byelaws or
ordinance operating on the site of the work.
12.11.3 In the case of refusal, the Authority
shall quote the reason and relevant sections of
the Code which the plans contravene. The
Authority shall as far as possible advise all the
objections to the plans and specifications in
the first instance itself and ensure that no new
objections are raised when they are resubmitted after compliance of earlier
objections.
12.21.4 Once the plan has been scrutinized
and objections have been pointed out, the
owner giving notice shall modify the plan to
comply with the objections raised and resubmit it. The Authority shall scrutinize the
re-submitted plan and if there be further
objections, the plan shall be rejected.
13. RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
OF THE OWNER
13.1 Neither the granting of the permit nor
the approval of the drawings and specifications, nor inspections made by the Authority
during erection of the building shall in any
way relieve the owner of such building from
full responsibility for carrying out the work in
accordance with the requirements of the Code
(see 9).
13.2 Every owner shall:
4 permit the Authority to enter the building
bl
cl
d)
e)
or premises for which the permit has been

granted at any reasonable time for the
purpose of enforcing the Code;
submit a document of ownership of the
site;
obtain, where applicable, from the
Authority, permits relating to building,
zoning? grades, sewers, water mains,
plumbing, signs, blasting, street occupancy, electricity, highways,,and all other
permits required in connection with the
proposed work;
give notice to the Authority of the intention to start work on the building site (see
Appendix E);
give written notice to the Authority
regarding completion of work described
in the permit (see Appendix F); and
-12
f)
obtain an occupancy permit (see Appendix G) from the Authority prior to any:
1) occupancy of the building or part thereof after construction or alteration of
that building or part, or
2) change in the class of occupancy of any
building or part thereof.
13.2.1 TEMPORARY O CCUPANCY - Upon

the request of the holder of the permit, the
Authority may issue a temporary certificate of
occupancy for a building or part thereof,
before the entire work covered by permit shall
have been completed, provided such portion
or portions may be occupied safely prior to
full completion of buildingwithout endangering life or public welfare.
13.3 Documents at Site
13.3.1 Where tests of any materials are made
to ensure conformity with the requirements of
the Code, records of the test datashall be kept
available for inspection during the construction of the building and for such a period
thereafter as required by the Authority.
13.3.2 The person to whom a permit is issued

shall during construction keep:
a)
b)
posted in a conspicuous place on the

property in respect of which the permit
was issued, a copy of the building permit; and
a copy of the approved drawings and
specifications referred to in 12 on the
property in respect of which the permit
was issued.
14. I N S P E C T I O N
14.1 Generally all construction or work for
which.a permit is required shall be subject to
inspection by the Authority and certain types
of construction involving unusual hazards or
requiring constant inspection shall have continuous inspection by special inspectors
appointed by the Authority.
14.2 Inspection, where required, shall be

made within 7 days following the receipt of
notification, after which period the owner will
be free to continue the construction according
to the sanctioned plan. At the first inspection,
the Authority shall determine to the best of its
ability that the building has been located in
accordance with the approved site plans. The
final inspection of the completion of the work
shall be made within 21 days following the
receipt of notification [see 13.2 (e)] for the
grant of occupancy certificate.
14.3 When inspection of any construction
operation reveals than any lack of safetypreNATiONAL
BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
cautions exist, the Authority shall have right

to direct the owner to stop the work immediately until the necessary remedial measures
to remove the violation of safety precautions
are taken.
14.4 Periodic inspections of buildings after
completion shall be made by the Fire Authority to ensure compliance with the provisions
of fire protection requirements (see Part IV
Fire protection).
15. UNSAFE BUILDING
15.1 All unsafe buildings shall be considered
to constitute danger to public safety and shall
be restored by repairs or demolished or dealt
with as otherwise directed by the Authority.
IS.2 Examination of Unsafe Building ~ The
Authority shall examine or cause to be examined every building reported to be unsafe or
damaged, and shalt make a written record of
such examination.
15.3 Notice to Owner, Occupier - Whenever
the Authority finds any building or portion
tHereof to be unsafe, it shall, m accordance
with established procedure for legal notice,
give to the owner and occupier of such building written notices stating the defects thereof.
This notice shall require the owner ror the
occupier within a stated time either to complete specified repairs or improvements or to
demolish and remove the building or portion
thereof.
such building or portion thereof to be rendered safe or removed. For thiy purpose, the
Authority may at once enter such structure or
land on which it stands, or abutting land or
structure, with such assistance and at such
cost as may be deemed necessary. T h e
Authority may also get the adjacent ctructures
vacated and protect the public by an appropriate fence or such other mean5 as may be
necessary.
1.6 Costs - Costs incurred under 15.4
and 15.5 shall be charged to the owner of the
premises involved. Such costs shall be charged
on the premises in respect of which or for the
benefit of which the same have been incurred
and shall be recoverable as provided under the
laws (see Note).
16. DEMOLITION OF BUILDING

16.1 Before a building is demolished, the
owner shall notify all utilities having service
connections within the building, such as
water, electric, gas, sewer and other connections. A permit to demolish a building shall
not be issued until a release iq obtained from
the utilities stating that their respectivecervice
connections and appurtenant equipment,
5uch as meters and regulators have been
removed or sealed and plugged in a safe
manner.
17. VALIDITY
15.3.1 The Authority may direct in writing

that the building which in his opinion iq dangerous, or has no provision for exit if caught
fire, shall be vacated immediately .or within
the period specified for the purpose; provided
that the Authority concerned shall keep a
record of the reasons for such action with him.
If any person does not comply with the orders
of vacating a building, the Authority may
direct the police to remove the person from
the building and the police shall comply with
the orders.
15.4 Disregard of Notice - In case the owner
or occupier fails, neglects, or refuses to
comply with the notice to rep&r or to demolish the said building or portion thereof, the
Authority shall cause the danger to be removed
whether by demolition or repair of .the
building, or portion thereof 01; otherwise.
15.5 Cases of Emergency - In case of emergency, which, in the opinion of the Authority
involves imminent danger to human life or
health, the decision of the Authority shall be
final. The Authority shall forthwith or with
such notice as may be possible promptly cause
17.1 Partial Invalidit~,~~ In the event any

part or provision of the Code is held to be
illegal or void. this shall not have the effect of
making void or illegal any of the otherpart5 or
provisions thereof, which may or shall be
determined to be legal, and it ThaII be presumed that the Code wou1.d have been passed
without cuch illegal or invalid parts or
provisions.
17.2 Segregation of Invalid Provisions -Any invalid part of the Code shall be segregated from the remainder of the Code by the
court holding such part invalid, and the
remainder shall remain effective.
17.3 Decisions Involving Existing Build-
ings - The invalidity of any provision in any
clause of the Code as applied to existing buildings and structures shall not be held to effect
the validity of such section in its application to
buildings hereafter erected.
18. ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL
18.1 Compliance with the provisions of the
Code is adequate for normal buildings. But
23
for major public building complexes or buildings coming up in an important area or monumental buildings in metropolitan cities the
aesthetics of the whole scheme may also have
to be examined, vis-a-vis existing structures.
In addition, any development which may mar
the general characteristics and environment of
historical, architectural or other monuments
should also be subject to the provisions of this
clause.
Norm ~~~ This clause IS Intended to cover very few structures to come up in the vicinity of other declared, historically important structures. and the scrutiny shall be
limited to the r.rrernalarchirec~rura/fearure.c only so as to
ensure an aesthetic continuance of the existing structures
with the new.
18.2 The Authority may appoint an Art

Commission for examining schemes of such
buildings. This Commission may consist of
elite of city, such as an architect, engineer,
scu!ptor, painter, writer, landscape specialist
and laymen.
18.3 The Commission may work in the following manner:
a) The Commission may select only the

important buildings as in 18.1 and
examine the same. The person responsible for the schemes, say an architect or
an engineer, may examine either alone
or with the owner. A study of the plans,
elevations, models, etc, should be made.
The architect should explain in general
terms the purposes which the building is
to serve and the main conditions which
have influenced him in preparing the
design.
b) The Commission after full discussion,
may communicate their decision in writing to the parties concerned. The Commission may recommend a change in the
whole scheme or suggest modifications
in the existing scheme.
18.4 The Art Commission should also be
charged with advising the city government, on
schemes which will beautify the city and add
to its cultural vitality.
APPENDIX A
(Clauses 2.0, 6.5, 6.6, 9.3, 12.2.8, 12.3 and 12.10)
GUIDE FOR THE QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCE OF LICENSED
ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, STRUC TURAL ENGINEERS, SUPERVISORS AND
TOWN PLANNERS
A-l. ESSENTIAL KEQUIREMENTS
A-f. 1 Every building work for which permission is sought under the Code shall be
designed and supervised by a licensed architect/engineer/structural engineerjsupervisor,town planner. Qualifications which an
architect or engineer or structural engineer or
supervisor or town planner shall have before
he is registered by the local body and permitted to practice within the local bodysjurisdiction are given in A-2.1 to A-2.5. The
competence of such licensed personnel is also
indicated in A-2.1.1 to A-2.5.1.
A-2.1.f C O M P E T E N C E - T - h e L i c e n s e d
Architect shall be competent to carryout the
work related to the building permit as given
below and shall be entitled to submit:
__
a ) All plans and information connected
with building permit.
b) Structural details and calculations
for residential buildings on plot up to
500m and up to three storeys or 11 m in
height.
c) Certificate of supervision and completion of all buildings.
d) All plans and related information connected with development permit of
area up to 1 hectare.
A-2. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, STRUCTURAL

ENGINEERS, SUPERVISORS AND e) Certificate of supervision for developTOWN PLANNERS
ment of land of area up to 1 hectare..
A-2./ Architecr - The minimum qualifications f-or an architect shah be the Associate
Membership of the Indian Institute of Architects or such degree or diploma which makes
him eligible for such membership or such
qualifications as listed in the Architects Act
1972, and shall be registered with the Council
of Architecture under the Act.
tt.14
A-Z.2 Engineer - The minimum qualifications for an engineer shall be the Corporate
Member of Civil Engineering Division of the
Institution of Engineers (India) or such degree
or diploma in civil, municipal or structural
engineering which makes him eligible for such
membership.
NATlONAL
A-2.2.1 C OMPETENCE - The licensed engineer shall be competent to carryout the work
related to the building permit as given below
and shall be entitled to submit:
a) All plans and information connected
with building permit.
b) Structural details and calculations of
buildings on plot up to 500 m2 and up to
5 storeys or 16 m in height.
c) Certificate of supervision and completion for all buildings.
d) All plans and related information connected with development permit of area
up to 1 hectare.
e) Certificate of supervision for development of land of area up to one hectare.
A-2.3 Structural Engineer - The minimum
qualifications for a structural engineer shall
be graduate in civil engineering of recognized
Indian or foreign university, or Corporate
Member of Civil Engineering Division of
Institution of Engineers (India) or equivalent
overseas institution, and with minimum 3
years experience in structural engineering
practice with designing and field work.
No rE - The 3 years experience shall be relaxed to2 years
in the case of post graduate degree of recognized lndian or

foreign university in the branch ofstructural engineefing.
In case of doctorate in structural engineering, the experience required would be one year.
architecture or engineering equivalent to the

minimum qualification prescribed for recruitment to non-gazetted service by the Government of India plus 5 years experience in
building design, c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d
supervision.
A-2.4.1. COMPETENCE - The licensed supervisor shall be entitled to submit:
a) all plans and related information connected with building permit for residential buildings on plot up to 200 m* and
up to two storeys or 7.5 m in height; and
b) certificate of supervision for buildings
in (a).
A-2.5 Town Planner - The minimum qualification for a town planner shall be the Associate Membership of the Institute of Town
Planners or post-graduate degree or diploma
in town and country planning which makes
him eligible for such membership or recognized by the Public Service Commissions for
the post of Assistant Town Planner.
,4-2.5.1 COMPETENCE - The licensed town
planner shall be entitled to submit:
a) all plans and related information connected with development permit of all
areas; and
b) certificate of supervision for development of land of all areas.
A-2.3. I C OMPETENCE - The licensed structural Engineers shall be competent to submit A-3. SERVICES PERSONNEL
the structural details and calculations for all A-3.1 - For buildings identified in 12.2.5.1,
buildings and supervision.
the work of building and plumbing services
shall be executed under the supervision of
A-2.3.Z.Z In case of buildings having special competent personnel. The qualification. for
structural features, as decided by the Autho- licensed electrical engineer and plumbers for
rity, which are within the horizontal areas carrying out the work of electrical installaand vertical limits specified in A-2.1.1(b),
tions and water supply, drainage and sanitaA-2.2.1(b) and A-2.4.1(a) shall be designed tion installations respectively shall be as given
only by structural engineers.
in Part VIII Building services, Section 2 Electrical installations; Part IX Plumbing servi,4-2.4 Supervisor - The minimum qualifica- ces, Section 1 Water supply, and Section 2
tions for a supervisor shall be qualification in Drainage and sanitation.
APPENDIX B
(Clause 12.1)
FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP, ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE
ALTERATION IN ANY PLACF IN A BUILDING
To
........................................
Sir,
1 hereby give notice that 1 intend to develop, erect. re-erect or to make alteration in the
building No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oni in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M
. OHALLA/ BAZAR,: Road . . . . . . . .._.................. City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and
in accordance with the building code of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part II, Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and1
forward herewith the following plans and specifications in triplicate duly signed by me and............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Architect! Engineer/ Structural Engineer/Supervisor; Town
Planner. Licence No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . who will supervise its erection.
(name in block letters)
I. Key plan
2. Site plans
3. Sub-division. layout plan
4. Building plans
5 . Services~plans
6. Specifications, general and detailed*
7. Ownership title
1 request that the development, construction may be approved and permission accorded to
me to execute the work.
Signature of Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(in block letters)
Address of Owner...................................................................
....................................................................
...................................................................
/htcJ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*A format may be prepared by the Authority for direct use
,P
NA,,ONAL BVILDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
APPENDIX C
(Clause 12.2.8)
FORM FOR SUPERVISION
1 hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of
building No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on/in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLA/
...
BAZARl Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
out under my supervision and I Certify that
City. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shall be carried
all the materials (type and grade) and the workmanship of the work shall be generally in
accordance with the general and detailed specifications submitted along with, and that the work
shall be carried out according to the sanctioned plans.
Signature of Architect/ Engineer/ StructuralEngineer/ Supervisor/ TownPlanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner_...........................
(in block letters)
Licence No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner..............
Address of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
Dare.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX D
(Clause 12.11)
FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT
To
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
Sir,
With reference to your application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for grant of permit for the development, erection, reerection or material alteration in the building
No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on/in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in
Colony/Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLAIBAZAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I have to inform you that the sanction has been granted/ refused by the Authority on the following
grounds:
1.
:*
4:
2:
Office Stamp.. .................................
Signature of the Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office (Communication) No.. .............
Name, Designation and Address

of the Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a
Date ..................................
.................................................
..................................................
PART
II
ADMINISTRATION
II-17
APPENDIX E
[(Clause 13.2 (d)]
FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT

I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection. or material alteration in/ of
building No.. ..................... or the.. .................... on/in Plot No.. ........................... in
Colony/Street.. ...: .... ................................... MOffALLA/ BAZARi Road.. ................................
............................................... City.. .........................................will be commenced on.. ...............
as per your permission, vide No...........................................dated ..........................................
under the supervision of.. .......................................... Licensed Architect/ Engineer/ Structural
Engineer/Supervisor/ Town Planner, Licence No...................................... and in accordance
with the plans sanctioned, vide No.. ..........................................dated.. .....................................
Signature of Owner........................................................
Name of Owner..............................................................
(in block letters)
Address of Owner...........................................................
...........................................................
...................... . ......................... ...........
Date.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX F
[( Cluuse 13.2(e)]
1 hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alterationinI of
building No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .,............. oni in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BAZAR/ Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLA,
..
..............................C
. ity.,........................................... has been supervised by me and has been
to the plans sanctioned, vide No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
completed on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .according
The work has been completed to my best satisfaction. the
dated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
workmanship and all the materials (type and grade) have been used strictly in accordance with
general and detailed specifications. No provisions of the Code, no requisitions made, conditions
prescribed or orders issued thereunder have been transgressed in the course of the work. The land
is fit for construction for which it has been developed or redeveloped or the building is fit for use
for which it has been erected, re-erected or altered, constructed and enlarged.
1 hereby also enclose the plan of the building completed in all aspects.
Signature of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engirieer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(in block letters)
Licence No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner..............
Address of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...................................
Signature of the owner
Date..
.....................
28
NATIONAL.
MJILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
APPENDIX G
[(Clause 13.2(f)]
FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT
The work of erection, re-erection or alteration in/of building No...................................
or the.. ....................................... oni in Plot No............................. in Colony/ Street.................
.............................. MOHALLAI BAZAR/Road.. ........................................... City.....................
completed under the supervision of........................................ Architect/ Engineer/ Structural
Engineer/ Supervisor, Licence NO.. ................................ has been inspected by me. The building
can be permitted/not permitted for occupation subjected to the following:
One set of completion plans duly certified is returned herewith.

Signature of the Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office stamp
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART
II ADDMIUISTRATIOU
PART 1
DEFINITIONS
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
Section 1 Loads
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Section 6 Steel
PART VIII
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES

Section 1 Water Supply
PART S
NATIONAL BUlLLING CODE
PART III DEVELOPMENT

CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL
BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
CONTENTS
0.
FOREWORD
...
1.
SCOPE
...
2.
TERMINOLOGY
...
3.
LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND USES PERMITTED
-..
4.
MEANS OF ACCESS
...
5.
COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES
...
6.
REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
...
10
7.
CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
...
11
8.
OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT)
...
11
9.
AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS
...
14
10.
OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
...
16
11.
GREENBELTS AND LANDSCAPING
...
16
12.
REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS
...
17
13.
RAT-PROOFING AND TERMITE-PROOFING OF

BUILDINGS
...
22
14.
LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
...
22
1.5.
AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
...
22
16.
SOUND INSULATION
...
22
17.
HEAT INSULATION
...
22
18.
PROVISION OF LIFTS
...
22
19.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
...
22
APPENDIX A CIVIL AVIATION REQUIREMENTS FOR

CONSTRUCTION IN THE VICINITY OF AN
AERODROME
...
23
APPENDIX B OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
...
28
APPENDIX C GUIDE FOR PLANTATION OF SHRUBS,

TREES AND GREENERY
...
29
APPENDIX D SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME

HOUSING
...
30
APPENDIX E SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING

OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS MEANT FOR USE OF
PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
...
32
P A R T Ill D E V E L O P M E N T
CONTROL
HCLES AND GENERAL BIILDINC
REQUIREMENTS
ill- 1

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part covers development control rules, including such aspects as subdivision
and layout rules, land use classifications, open spaces, area and height limitations,
means of access, and parking spaces; this part also covers the general building
requirements, such as the requirements of parts of buildings, provision of lifts, etc.
It is expected that for proper coordination and enforcement of the development
control rules and general building requirements, the departments concerned, namely,
the town planning department and the building department, will coordinate the total
development and building activity at both organisational and technical levels.
Ill- 2
0.2 Particular attention is invited toTable 3 on floor area ratio(FAR) limitations. It is

emphasized that the floor area of a single storey building is limited in absolute terms by
the type of construction and occupancy class. Also, it has been established by work
abroad that the absolute floor areas for different types of construction and different
occupancies have a definite ratio among them. The ratios as recommended in the
American Iron and Steel Institute publication 1961, Fire protection through modern
building codes have been generally adopted in this part and Table 3 has been
developed on this basis. Table 3 is repeated in Part IV Fire protection also for
convenience of reading.
0.2.; Limitation of areas and heights of buildings is achieved in this country by
specifying it in terms of floor area ratio (FAR) or floor space index (FSI). The
significance of the contribution of different types of construction giving different fire
resistances has not been taken cognizance of in specifying FAR for different
occupancies, in the present develapment control rules and municipalbyelaws of the
country. Table 3, therefore, gives the comparative ratios ofFAR between types of
buildings and occupancy classes and these have been specified mainly from the fire
protection aspect of buildings. To arrive at the actual FAR for different buildings
coming up in different areas, the Authority should further modify them, by taking into
consideration other aspects like density of any area, parking facilities required, the
traffic load (road width) and the services available. The heights of buildings shall also
be regulated, keeping in view the local fire fighting facilities.
0.2.2 The trend in the foreign codes is to allow an increase in the area and height of
buildings for increase in frontage above 25 percent of the perimeter of the building and
the installation of an automatic sprinkler system in the building.
0.23 It is particularly to be borne in mind by the Authority that the ratios are
definitive and it can assess the particular FAR for a type of construction andfor,an
occupancy and establish a new table, but retaining the comparative ratios as given in
Table 3.
0.3 Keeping in view the needs of low income housing, to cater to Economically
Weaker Sections of Society (EWS) and Low Income Group (LIG), whose monthly
family income is below Rs. 350 and 600 respectively, the requirements on planning,
design of layout/ shelter have been rationalised and the same are provided in this part.
This will contribute significantly in the massive housing programmes undertaken for
the low income sector. This information is based on the provisions ofIS:8888-1978
Guide for requirements of low income housing.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of incorporation of
this part in the revised development control rules and buildingbyelaws of some
municipal corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions have emerged.
These have been incorporated in this revised version to the extent possible.
0.5 The major revisions in the part are:
4 addition of development control rules giving guidance on means of access,

b)
cl
4
e)
f-J
community spaces and other aspects required for planning layouts.

addition of provisions regarding plot sizes and frontage for different types of
buildings, such as detached, semi-detached, row type and specialhousing schemes.
requirements of open spaces for other occupancies, such as educational,
institutional, assembly, industrial buildings, etc have been included.
provisions relating to interior open space have been elaborated, including
requirements for ventilation shaft.
requirements of open spaces for group housing development have been covered.
requirements of off-street parking spaces have been covered.
ia
requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantation of

shrubs and trees have been covered.
h) requirements of certain parts of buildings, such as loft, store room, garage,
basement, chimney, parapet, cabin, boundary wall, wells, septic tanks,office-cumletter box room, meter room have been included.
special
requirements of low income housing have been covered (see 0.3)
j)
P-T 01 DEVELOIMMT
CONTROL
RULES
AND
GENEUAL DUILDMG IteQ~EMFHTS
III- 3
1. SCOPE
1.1 This part deals with the development control rules and general building requirements
to ensure health and safety of the public.
2. TERMINOLOGY
ACCESSORY USE - Any use of the premises
subordinate to the principal use and customarily incidental to the principal use.
A LTERATION -A change from one occupancy to another, or a structural change, such
as an addition to the area or height, or the
removal of part of a building, or any change
to the structure, such as the construction of,
cutting into or removal of any wall, partition,
column, beam, joist, floor or other support,
or a change to or closing of any required
means of ingress or egress or a change to the
fixtures or equipment.
A PPROVED -
Approved by the Authority

A U T H O R I T Y H AVING
J URISDICTION -I-he
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which for the purpose of administering
the Code/Part may authorize a committee or
B ALCONY --- A horizontal projection,
including a handrail or balustrade, to serve as
passage or sitting out place.
B ASEMENT OR C ELLAR -The lower storey
of a building below or partly below ground
level.
BUILDING - Any structure for whatsoever
fixed platforms, verunduh, balcony, cornice
or projection, part of a building or anything
intended to enclose any land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents,
shamiunuhs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected
for temporary and ceremonial occasions with
the permission of the Authority shall not be
considered as building.
B UILDING, HEIGHT OF -The vertical distance measured in the caseof flat roofs, from
the average level of the ground around and
contiguous to the building or as decided by
the Authority to the highest point of the
Ill-
building adjacent to the street wall; and in the

case of pitched roofs, up to the point where
the external surface of the outer wall intersects the finished surface of the sloping roof;
and in the case of gables facing the road, the
mid-point between the eaves level and the
ridge. Architectural features serving no other
heights.
lawfully extend. It includes the lines prescribed, if any, in any scheme. The building
line may change from time to time as decided

by the Authority.
C ABIN - A non-residential enclosure
constructed of non-load bearing partition.
C ARPET A REA
-The covered area of the

usable rooms at any floor level (excluding the
area of the wall).
C H H A J J A - .4 sloping or horizontal
structural overhang usually provided over
openings on external walls to provide
protection from sun and rain.
C HOWK
OR C O U R T Y A R D -A
space
permanently open to the sky, enclosed fully or
partially by building and may be at ground
level or any other level within or adjacent to a
building.
CHOWK, INNER -A
chowk enclosed on a9
sides.
CHOWS,
OUTER - A chowk one of whose

sides is not enclosed.
COOKING ALCOVE - A cooking space having

direct access from the main room without any
inter-communicating door.
C OVERED A REA -
Ground area covered by

the building immediately above the plinth
level. The area covered b the followmg in
the open spaces is exclu3ed from covered
area (see Table 3):
a) Garden, rockery, well and well structures,
plant nursery, waterpool, swimming pool

(if uncovered), platform round a tree,
tank, fountain, bench, chubutru with open
top and unenclosed on sides by walls and
the like;
b) Drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit, gully
pit, chamber, gutter and the like;
c) Compound wall, gate, unstoreyed porch
and portico, slide, swing, uncovered
staiicase, ramps areas covered by chhu@
and the like; and
NATIONAL DUILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
d) Watchmens booth, pumphouse, garbage

shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and
such other utility structures meant for the
services of the building under
consideration.
NOTE - For the purpose of this part, covered area equals
the plot area minus the area due for open spaces.
D E N S I T Y -The residential density is

expressed in terms of the number of dwelling
units per hectare.
NOTE - Where such densities arc expressed exclusive of
community facilities and provision of open spaces and
major roads (excluding incidental open spaces), these will
be net residential densities. Where these densities are
expressed taking into consideration the required open
space provision and community facilities and major
roads, these would be gross residential densities at
neighbourhood level, sector level or town level, as the case
may be. The provision of o en spaces and community
facdities will depend on tRe size of the residential
community.
Incidental open spaces are mainly open spaces required to
be left around and in between two buildings to provide
lighting and ventilation.
D E T A C H E D B U I L D I N G - A building
detached on all sides.
D EVELOPMENT - Development with
grammatical variations means the carrying
out of building, engineering, mining or other
operations, in, or over, or under land or water,
on the making of any material change, in any
building or land, or in the use of any building,
land, and includes redevelopment and layout
and subdivision of any land; and to develop
shall be construed accordingly.
D RAIN -A conduit or channel for the
carriage of storm water, sewage or other used
water.
UNIT/IENEMENT - An independent housing unit with separate facilities
for living, cooking and sanitary requirements.
D WELLING
EXIT - A passage, channel or means of egress

from any building, storey or floor area to a
street or other open space of safety.
FIRE SEPARATION - The distance in metres
measured from any other building on the site,
or from other site, or from the opposite side of
a street or other public space to the building
for the purpose of preventing the spread of
fire.
F LOOR -The lower surface in a storey on
which one normally walks in a building. The
general term floor unless specifically
mentioned otherwise shall not refer to a
mezzanine floor.
(plinth area) on ill floors by the area of the

plot:
Total covered area of all floors
Plot area
G A L L E R Y -An intermediate floor or platform projecting from a wall of an auditorium
or a hall providing extra floor area, additional seating accommodation, etc. It shall
also include the structures provided for seating in stadia.
FAR =
G ARAGE, PRIVATE -A building or a portion

thereof designed and used for parking of
private owned motor driven or other vehicles.
GARAGE , PUBLIC -A building or portion
thereof, other than a private garage, designed
or used fo. repairing, servicing, hiring, selling
or storing or parking motor driven or other
vehicles.
GROUP HOUSING - Group or multi-storeyed
housing for more than one dwelling unit,
where land is owned jointly (as in the case of
co-operative societies or the public agencies,
such as local authorities or housing boards,
etc) and the construction is undertaken by one
Agency/ Authority.
H ABITABLE R OOM -A room occupied or
designed for occupancy by one or more
persons for study, living, sleeping, eating,
kitchen, if it is used as a living room, but not
including bathrooms, water-closet
compartments, laundries, serving and storage
pantries, corridors, cellars, attics, and spaces
that are not used frequently or during
extended periods.
LEDGE OR TRND - A shelf-like projection,
supported in any manner whatsoever, except
by means of vertical supports within a room
itself but not having projection wider than
one metre.
LIFT - An appliance designed to transport
persons or materials between two or more
levels in a vertical or substantially vertical
direction by means of a guided car platform.
LOFT - An intermediary floor between two
floors on a residual space in a pitched roof,
above normal floor level with a maximum
height of 1.5 m and which is constructed or
adopted for storage purposes.
MEZZANINE FLOOR - An intermediate floor,
between two floors, above ground level,
accessible only from the lower floor.
OR U SE G ROUP -The principal
building is used or intended to be used; for the
OCCUPANCY
FLOOR AREA RATIO (FAR) - The quotient

obtained by dividing the total covered area
?MT III DEVELOPMENT CONJaOL PIJLES AND GENERAL BUILDING
REQUIREMENTS
llLW
purposes of classification of a building

according to occupancy; an occupancy shall
be deemed to include subsidiary occupancies
which are contingrnt upon it.
P O R C H -A covered surface supported on

pillars or otherwise for the purpose of
pedestrian or vehicular approach to a
building.
OPEN SPACE --- An area, forming an integral
R OAD -See Street.
part of the plot. left open to the sky.

SOIt-
.I he open space shall be the minimum distance

measured between the front. rear and side of the building
and the respective plot boundaries. The front. rear and
ride of the building shall be the point of the building
nearest to the boundary. Where permitted, the average
open space shall be the average of the minimum and
maximum of such an open space.
O PEN S P A C E , FR O N T --- An open space

across the front of a plot between the building
line and the front boundary of the plot.
O PEN S PACE, REAR - An open space across
the rear of a plot between the rear of the
building and the rear boundary of the plot.
R OAD L INE -See Street Line.

R O O M H E I G H T --The vertical distance
measured from the finished floor surface to
the finished ceiling surface. Where a finished
ceiling is not provided, the underside of the
joists Qr beams or tie beams shall determine
the upper point of measurement.
Row HOUSING/ROW TYPE B UILDING - A
row of buildings, with only front, rear and
intericr open spaces where applicable.
S E M I- D E T A C H E D B UILDING - A building
detached on three sides.
O PEN S PACE, SIDE -- An open space across

the side of the plot between the side of the
building and the side boundary of the plot.
SERVICE ROAD - A road/lane provided

adjacent to a plot for service purposes.
O WNER -The person who receives the rent

for the use of the land or building or would be
entitled to do so if it were let out. It also
includes:
4 an agent or trustee who receives such rent
b) a receiver, executor or administrator or a
competent jurisdiction to have the charge
cl an agent or trustee who receives the rent of
or is entrusted with or is concerned with
any building devoted to religious or
4 a mortgagee in possession.
S E T- BACK L INE - A line usually parallel to

the plot boundaries and laid down in each case
by the Authority, beyond which nothing can
be constructed towards the plot boundaries.
P ARAPET -- A low wall or railing built along

the edge of a roof or floor.
P A R K I N G S P A C E -An area enclosed or
unenclosed, covered or open, sufficient in
size to park vehicles, together with a driveway connecting the parking space with a
street or alley and permitting ingress or
egress of the vehicles.
P ARTITION - An interior non-load bearing
barrier, one storey or part-storey in height.
SI I E (Pt.or) ~~~~ A parcel (piece) of land

S ITE. CORNER -A site at the junctions of
and fronting on two or more intersecting
streets.
S I T E. DEPTH OF -The mean horizontal
distance between the front and rear site
boundaries.
SITE, DOUBLE FRONTAGE - A site, having a
frontage on two streets. other than a corner
plot.
INTERIOR OR T ANDEM - A site access
to which is by a passage from a street whether
such passage forms part of the site of not.
SITE .
STAIRCOVEK - A structure with a covering

roof over a staircase and its landing built to
enclose only the stairs for the purpose of providing protection from weather and not used
for human habitation.
Pt.lh I H - The portion of a structure between

the surface of the surrounding ground and
surface of the floor, immediately above the
ground.
S TOREY -The portion of a building included

between the surface of any floor and the surface of the floor next above it, or if there be no
floor above it, then the space between any
floor and the ceiling next above it.
P LINTH A REA --The built up covered area

measured at the floor level of the basement or
of any storey.
S TOREY. TOPMOST - The uppermost storey

in a building whether constructed wholly or
partly on the roof.
Ill- 6
NATIONAL BUILDWC CODE OF INDIA
S T R E E T - Any
means of access, namely,

highway, street, lane, pathway, alley,
stairway, passageway, carriageway,footway,
square, place or bridge, whether a
thoroughfare or not, over which the public
have a right of passage or access. or have
passed and had access uninterruptedly for a
specified period, whether existing or proposed
in any scheme, and includes all bunds,
channels, ditches, storm-water drains,
culverts, sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside
trees and hedges, retaining walls, fences,
barriers and railings within the street lines.
S TREET
LEVEL OR G RADE - The officially

established elevation or grade of the central
line of the street upon whtch a plot fronts and
if there is no officially established grade: the
existing grade of the street at its mid-point.
S TREET L INE -The line defining the side
limits of a street.
To ABUT -- To abut on a street such that any
portion of the building is on the road
boundary.
T OWER-LIKE S TRUCTURES -Structures shall
be deemed to be tower-like structures when
the height of the tower-like portion is at least
twice the height of the broader base at ground
level.
VERANDAH -A covered area with at least
one side open to outside with the exception
of 1 m high parapet on the upper floors to be
provided on the open side.
VOLUME pro
PLOT AREA RATIO (VPR)- The

ratio of volume of building measured in cubic
metres to the area of the plot measured in
square metres and expressed in metres.
W A T E R - CLOSET (WC) -A water flushed
plumbing fixture designed to receive human
excrement directly from the user of the
fixture. The term is used sometimes to
designate the room or compartment in which
the fixture is placed.
W INDOW -An opening to the outside other

than a door which provides all or part of the
required natural light or ventilation or both to
an interior space.
-Residential with
shop lines at
ground floor (Rz)
b) Commercial zone -Local commercial
area (Cl)
-District commercial
area (Cl)
-Service industries
c) Industrial zone
(II)
-General industries
(12)
-Special industries
(13)
d) Green zone
e) Special reservations
3.2 The various building uses and occupancies (see 7) permitted on the various zones
shall be as given in the Master Plan.
3.3 Uses to be in Conformity with the
Zone - Where the use of buildings or premises is not specifically designated on the
Development Plan, it shall be in conformity
with the zone in which they fall.
3.4 Uses as Speclyically Designated on
Development Plan - Where the use of a site
is specifically designated on the Development
Plan, it shall be used only for the purpose so
designated.
3.5 Non-conforming Uses - No plot shall be
put to any use, occupancy or premises other
than the uses identified in 3.1, except with the
prior approval of the Authority.
4. MEANS OF ACCESS
4.1 Every building/plot shall abut on a public/ private means of access like streets/ roads
duly formed.
4.2 Every person who erects a building shall
not at any time erect or cause or permit to
erect any building which in any way
encroaches upon or diminishes the area set
apart as means of access required in the Code.
No building shall be erected so as to deprive
any other building of the means of access.
4.3 Width of Means of Access -The residential plots shall abut on a public means of
access like street/road. Plots which do not
abut on a street/road shall abut/front on a
3.1 Lund Use Classification - The various means of access, the width and other requireland use classifications may be as indicated ments of which shall be as given in Table 1.
below:
In no case, development on plots shall be
a) Residential zone -Purely residential
permitted unless it is accessible by a public
street of width not less than 6 m.
(RI)
3. LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND
LJSES PERMITTED
PART 111 DEVELDPMENT
CONTROL RULES AND CENFSAL
BUILDING RFQUIIIEMWTS
Ill-
TABLE i WlDTH AND LENGTH OF
MEANS OF ACCESS
(Clause 4.3)
SI.
No.
W IDTH OF
M EANS OF
A CCESS
L E N G T H OF
M EANS OF
ACCESS
(3)
m
75
i)
150
ii)
250
iii)
400
iv)
1000
v)
above
vi)
1000
NOTE - If the development is only on one side of the
means of access, the prescribed widths may bereduced by
I m in each case.
(2)
(1)
m
6.0
7.5
9.0
12.0
18.0
24.0
43.1 OTHER B UILDINGS - For all industrial

buildings, theatres, cinema houses, assembly
halls, stadia, educational buildings, markets,
other buildings which attract large crowd, the
means of access shall not be less than the
following:
Width of
Means of
A ccess
Length of
Means of
Access
12.0
15.0
18.0
24.0
200
400
600
above
600
Further, in no case shall the means of access

be lesser in width than the internal accessways
in layouts and subdivision.
4.3.2 P A T H W A Y S -The approach to the
buildings from road/street/ internal means of
access shall be through paved pathway of
width not less than I .5 m, provided its length
is not more than 30 m.
4.3.2.1 In the case of special housing schemes
for low income group and economically
weaker section of society developed up to two
storeyed row/cluster housing scheme, the
pedestrian pathway width shall be 3 m subject
to provisions of 9.4.1(a). The pedestrian
pathway shall not serve more than 8 plots on
each side of the pathway; the length of the
pathway shall be not more than 50 m.
4.3.3 The length of the main means of access
shall be determined by the distance from the
farthest plot (building) to the public street.
The length of the subsidiary accessway shall
be measured from the point of its origin to the
next wider road on which it meets.
Ill-
4.3.4 In the interest of general development

of an area, the Authority may require the
means of access to be of larger width than that
required under 4.3 and 4.3.1.
4.3.5 In existing built-up areas in the case of
plots facing street/means of access less than
4.5m in width, the plot boundary shall be
shifted to be away by 2.25 m from the central
line of the street/means of accessway to give
rise to a new street/means of accessway of
4.5 m width.
4.4 The means of access shall be levelled,
metalled, flagged, paved, sewered, drained,
channelled, lighted, laid with water supply
line and provided with trees for shade to the
satisfaction of the Authority free of
encroachment by any structure or fixture so as
not to reduce its width below the minimum
required under 4.3 and shall be maintainedin
a condition to the satisfaction of the
Authority.
4.4.1 If any private street 01 any other means
of access to a building is not levelled, metalled,
flagged or paved, sewered, drained, channelled, lighted or laid with water supply line 01
provided with trees for shade.to the satisfaction of the Authority, who may, with the sanction cif the Authority, by written notice
require the owner OI owners of the several
premises fronting or adjoining the said street
of other means of access or abutting thereon
01 to which access is obtained through such
street 01 other means of access or which shall
benefit by works executed, to carry out any or
more of the aforesaid requirements in such
manner as he shall direct.
4.4.2 If any structure or fixture is set upon a
means of access so as to reduce its width below
the minimum required, the Authority may
remove the same further and Iecovet the
expenses so incurred from the owner.
4.5 Access from Highwa)ps/ I m p o r t a n t
Roads- No premises other than highway
amenities like petrol pumps, motels,etc,shall
have an access direct from highways and such
other roads not less than 52 m in width, which
the Authority with the approval of the Highway Authority shall specify from time to time.
The Authority shall maintain a register of
such roads which shall be open to public
inspection at all times during office hours. The
portion of such roads on which direct access
may be permitted shall be as identified in the
Development Plan. However, in the case of
existing development on highways/other
roads referred to above, the operation of this
clause shall be exempted. These provisions
shall, however, be subject to the provisions of
the relevant State Highway Act, and National
Highway Act.
NATIONAL BLII.DING
CODE OF INDIA
4.6 For high rise buildings and buildings

other than residential, the following
additional provisions of means of access shall
be ensured:
a) The width of the main street on which the
building abuts shall not be less than 12 m
and one end of this street shall join
another street not less than 12 m in width.
b) The approach to the building and open
spaces on all its sides up to 6 m width and
the layout for the same shall be done in
consultation with the Chief Fire Officer of
the city and the same shall be hard surface
capable of taking the weight of fire engine,
weighing up to 18 tonnes. The said open
space shall be kept free of obstructions
and shall be motorable.
c) The main entrance to the plot shall be of
adequate width to allow easy access to the
fire engine and in no case shall it measure
less than 4.5 m. The entrance gate shall
fold back against the compound wall of
the premises, thus leaving the exterior
accesswai within the plot free for
movement of fire service vehicle. If the
main entrance at the boundary wall is built
over, the minimum clearance shall be
4.5 m.
4.7 Cul-de-sacs giving access to plots and
extending from 150 to 275 m in length with an
additional turning space at 150 m will be
allowed only in residential areas, provided
cul-de-sacs would be permissible only on
straight roads and further provided the end of
cul-de-sacs shall be higher in level than the
level of the starting point of such dead end
road. The turning space, In this case shall
be not less than 81 rn* m area, with no
dimension less than 9 m.
4.8 Intersection cf Roads - For intersection
junctions of roads meeting at right angles as
well as other than right angles, the rounding
off or cut off or splay or similar treatment
shall be done, to the approval of the
Authority, depending upon the width of
roads, the traffic generated, the sighting angle,
etc,to provide clear sight distance.
4.9 The building line shall be set back at least
3 m from internal means of access in a layout
of buildings in a plot subject to provisions
of 8.2.1.
5. COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND

AMENITIES
shall be reserved for recreational purposes

which shall as far as possible be provided in
one place or planned out for the use of the
community in clusters or pockets.
5.1.1 The community open spaces shall be
provided catering to the needs of area of
layout, population for which the layout is
planned and the category of dwelling units.
The following minimum provision shall be
made:
a) 15 percent of the area of the layout, or
b) 0.3 to 0.4 ha] 1000 persons; for low income
housing the open spaces shall be
0.3 ha/ 1000 persons.
5.2 No recreational space shall generally be
less than 450 m*.
5.2.1 The minimum average dimension of
such recreational space shall be not less than
7.5 m; if the average width of such recreational
space is less than 24 m, the length thereof shall
not exceed 2.5 times the average width. HQWever, depending on the configuration of the
site, commonly open spaces of different
shapes may be permitted by the Authority, as
long as the open spaces provided set-ve the
needs of the immediate community contiguous to the open spaces.
5.2.2 In such recreational spaces, a single
storeyed structure as pavilion or gymnasia up
to 25 m2 in area may be permitted; such area
may be excluded from FAR calculations; no
toilet block shall be permitted.
5.3 Each recreational area and the structure
on it shall have an independent means of
access. Independent means of access may not
be insisted upon if recreational space is
approachable directly from every building in
the layout. Further, the building line shall be
at least 3 m away from the boundary of recreational open space.
5.4 Industrial Zones - in the case of subdivision of land in industrial zones of area
0.8 hectare or more, 5 percent of the total area
shall be reserved as amenity open space which
shall also serve as a general parking space;
when such amenity open space exceeds
1500 m, the excess area could be utilized for
the construction of buildings for b a n k s ,
canteens, welfare centres and such other
common purposes considered necessary for
the industrial user, as approved by the
Authority.
5.1 Residential and Commercial Zones - In

any layout or sub-division of land measuring
0.3 hectare of more in residential and commercial zones, the community open spaces
5.4.1 In all industrial plots measuring

1000 m2 or more in area, 10 percent of the
total area shall be provided as an a2menity
open space to a maximum of 2500 m . Such
an amenity open space shall have a means of
PART 111 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL
BUILDING
REQUIREMMTS
III-
access and shall be so located that it could be

conveniently utilized as such by the persons
working in the industry.
oullding shall, if the Authority so requires, be

effectively drained by surface water drains or
other means.
5.5 Other Amenities--- In addition to community open spaces, the layouts shall provide
for the following, depending on the magnitude of the settlement and as decided by the
Authority:
6.3.1 The written approval of the Authority

shall be obtained for connecting any subsoil
or surface water drain to a sewer.
a) Educational Nursery school, primary

school, middle school,
facilities
high school or college
as applicable.
b) Health facility C l i n i c , h e a l t h c e n t r e ,
dispensary or hospital,
as applicable.
c) Commercial Booth, shops, convenience
facility, inclu- shopping centre, local
ding shopping shopping centre, or zonal
shopping centre. as applifacility
cable.
d) Communica- Post office, post and teletion facilities graph office, police post,
and essential police station, fire station
services
e) Social, com- Religious building, community and m u n i t y h a l l (mangal
cultural faci- karyafa, ka!~w7anlatldalities
pam. harat g h a r , etc),
welfare centre, cinema.
NO it. ~~ The requirements of essential amenities for low
income housing shall be as given in Appendix B.
5.6 Every layout or subdivision shall take

into account the provisions of development
plan and if the land is affected by any
reservation for public purposes, the Authority
may agree to adjust the location of such
reservations to suit the development.
6. REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
6.1 No building shall be constructed on any
site, on any part of which there is deposited
refuse, excreta or other offensive matter
objectionable to the Authority, until such
refuse has been removed therefrom and the
site has been prepared or left in a manner
suitable for building purposes to the satisfaction of the Authority.
6.2 Damp Sites - Wherever the dampness of
a site or the nature of the soil renders such
precautions necessary, the ground surface of
the site between the walls of any building
erected thereon shall be rendered damp-proof
to the satisfaction of the Authority.
6.3 Surface Water Drains -- Any land
passage or other area within the curtilage of a
lll.lo
6.4 Distance from Electric Lines -~ No

verandah, balcony, or the like shall be allowed
to be erected or re-erected or any additions or
alterations made to a building within the
distances quoted below in accordance with the
current Indian Electricity Rules and its
amendments from time to time between the
building and any overhead electric supply
line:
Verticaily
4 Low and medium
m
2.5
voltage lines and

service lines
bj High voltage lines 3.7
up to and including I1 000 V
Cl Higfi voltage lines 3.7
above 1 1 000 V
and up to and including 33000 V
d) Extra high voltage
3.7
lines beyond
(plus0.3m
33000 v
for every
additional
33000 V
and part
thereof)
Horizontarry
m
I.2
1.2
2.0
2.0
(plus 0.3 m
for every
additional
33000 v
and part
thereof)
6.5 Distance of site from the normal edge of

water course, area m?y be specified by the
Authority, keeping in view the normal
maximum flood. tide level.
6.6, Size of f lots
6.6.1 RESIDENTIAL -- Each plot shall have a
minimum size,: frontage corresponding to the
type of development as given below:
T,,pe of
Development
Plot Six
m
Detached building
above 250
Semidetached building 125-250
R o wtype
building
so- 125
Frontage
m
above 12
8to 12
4.5 to 8
NOTE -- For low income housIng see Appendix B.

NATIONAI. BlllLDlNC
CODE
OF
INDIA
6.6.1.1 The minimum size of the site for

group housing development shall be as given
in the Master Plan and local development
control rules.
6 . 6 . 2 I N D U S T R I A L -The size of the plot
shall not be less than 300 m and its width shall
not be less than 15 m.
6.6.3 OTHER LA N D U SES -The minimum
size of plots for buildings for other uses like
business, educational, mercantile, assembly
(cinema theatre), mangal karyaluya, petrol
filling station, etc, shall be as decided by the
Authority subject to 6.6.3.1 to 6.6.3.3.
6.6.3.1 ASSEMBLY HALLSjclNEMA THEATRES-- The minimum size of plot for
assembly buildings/cinema theatres used for
public entertainment with fixed seats shall be
on the basis of seating capacity of the building
at the rate of 3 m per seat.
6.6.3.2 MANGAL KARYALA~AIKALYANA
MAND,4PAM,'BARAT CHAR/COMMUNITY
HALLS -The size of plot shall not be less
than 1000 m2.
6.6.3.3 PETROL FILLING STATION - The size
of the plot shall not be less than:
a) 31 x 17 m in the case of petrol filling
station with kiosk without service bay,
and
b) 37 x 31 m in the case of pt?trOl filling
station with service bay.
7.1.2 T YPES
a)
b)
cl
d)
OF
C ONSTRUCTION
Type 1
Type 2
Type3
Type 4
8. OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT)

8. I General - Every room intended for
human habitation shall abut on an interior or
exterior open space or an open Vera&ah open
to such interior or exterior open space.
8.1.J The open spaces inside and around a
building have essentially to cater for the light-.
ing and ventilation requirements of the rooms
abutting such open spaces, and in the case of
buildings abutting on streets in the front, rear
or sides, the open spaces provided shall be
sufficient for the future widening of such
streets.
8.1.2 O PEN S PACES S EPARATE FOR E A C H
B UILDING OF WING -The open spaces shall
be separate or distinct for each building and
where a building has two or more wings, each
wing shall have separate or distinct open
spaces for the purposes of lighting and
ventilation of the wings.
However, separation between accessory and
main buildings more than 7 m in height shall
not be less than I.5 m; for buildings up to 7 m
in height no such separation shall be required.
8.2 Residential Buildings
7. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
7.0 Buildings are classified based on occupancy and types of construction.
7.1 For the purpose of the Code, the
following shall be the occupancy classification
and types of construction; for more detailed
information, reference may be made to 3 of
Part IV Fire protection.
7.1. I OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Residential
Educational
Institutional
Assembly
Business
Mercantile (will include both retail and
wholesale stores)
g) Industrial (will include low, moderate and
high fire hazards)
h) Storage
j) Hazardous
PART III
DEVELOPMENT
8.2.1 E XTERIOR O PEN S P A C E S

8.2.1.1 FRONT OPEN SPACE
a) Every building fronting a street shall have
a front space, forming an integral part of
the site as below:
Width of Street
Front Open Space,
Fronting ihe Plot
Min
m
m
up to 7*5*
1.5*
7.5 to 18
;I;
18 to 30
Above 30
6.0
*For buildings up to a maximum height 7 m.
NOTE - In case a building abuts two or more streets, the
value of open spaces is to be based on the average width of
streets, subject to a minimum of 1.8 m for cases (ii). (iii)

and (iv)above.
b) For streets less than 7.5 m in width, the

distance of the building (building line)
shall be at least 5 m from the centre line of
the street (see 4.3.5).
NOTE -This limiting distance has to be determined by
the Authority for individual road/street widths taking
into account the traffic flow.
C O N T R O L RULES AND GENmAL CUltDING REQIIIEEM~TS
UY
8.2.3 The open spaces mentioned in 8.2.1.1

to 8.2.1.3 s h a l l b e f o r r e s i d e n t i a l
Every residential building shall have a rear buildings up to a height of 10 m.
open space, forming an integral part of the
site, of an average width of 3 m and at no 8.2.3.2 For buildings of height above 10 m,
the open spaces (side and rear) shall be as
place measuring less than 1.8 m, except
that in the case of a back-to-back-site, the given in Table 2. The front open spaces for
width of the rear open space shall be 3 m increasing heights of buildings shall be
throughout. Subject to the condition of governed by 9.4.1(a).
free ventilation, the open space left up to
half the width of the plot shall also be
taken into account for calculating the
TABLE 2 SIDE AND REAR OPEN SPACES FOR
average width of the rear open space. For
DIFFERENT HEIGHTS OF BUILDINGS
plots of depth less than 9 m, for buildings
(Clause 8.2.3.1)
up to 7 m in height, the rear open space
may be reduced to 1.5 m.
8.2.1.2 REAR OPEN SPACE
i%.
b)
REAR OPEN SPACE TO EXTEND

WALL -The
H EIGHT
OF
B UILDINGS
S IDE AND R E A R
O PEN S PACES TO B E
L EFT A R O U N D
B UILDING
(2)
(3)
111I8
T H R O U G H O U T T H E RE A R
rear open space shall be co-extensive with

the entire face of the rear wall. If a building
abuts on two or more streets, such rear
open space shall be provided throughout
the face of the rear wall. Such rear wall
shall be the wall on the opposite side of the
face of the building abutting on the wider
street unless the Authority directs
otherwise.
8.2.1.3 SIDE OPEN SPACE
a) Every semi-detached and detached
building shall have a permanently open air
space, forming an integral part of the site
as below:
9 For detached buildings there shall be a
minimum side open space of 3 m on
both the sides.
N OTE - For detached residential buildings up
to 7 m in height on plots with a frontage less than
I2 m (sce6.6.l). one of the side openspaces may
be reduced to I.5 m.
ii) For semi-detached buildings, there

shall be a minimum side open space of
3 m on one side.
N OTE - For semidetached buildings up to
7 m in height on plots with a frontage less than
9m (see 6.6.1). the side open space may be
reduced to I.5 m.
iii) For row-type buildings, no side

open is required.
b) In the case of semi-detached buildings,
the open spaces provided on one side
shall be as in 8.2.1.3 and all habitable
rooms shall abut either on this side open
space or front and rear open spaces or an
interior open space (see 8.2.5).
8.2.2 The provisions of 8.2.1.2and 8.2.1.3are
not applicable to parking lock-up garages up
to 3 m in height located at a distance of7.5 m
from any street line or front boundary of the
plot.
**P
(1)
ii)
iiij
iv)
VI
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Xj
xij
xii)
21
24
:i
t:
35
IO
II
45
4
1:
50 and above
1:
NOTE I - For buildings above 24 m in height, there shall

be a minimum front open space of 6 m.
N O T E 2 - W h e r e rooms do not derive light and
ventilation from the exterior open space, the width of
such exterior open space as given in co1 3 may be reduced
by I m subject to a minimum of 3 m and a maximum of 8
m. No further projections shall be permitted.
NOTE 3 - If the length or depth of the building exceeds
4Om, add to col 3 ten percent of length or depth of
building minus 4.0 m.
8.2.3.2 For tower-like structures (seed), as an

alternative to 8.2.3.1, open spaces shall be as
below:
a) Up to a height of 24 m, with one set-back,
the open spaces at the ground level, shall
be not less than 6 m;
b) For heights between 24 m and37.5 m with
one set-back, the open spaces at the
ground level, shall be not less than 9 m;
cl For heights above 37.5 m with two setbacks, the open spaces at the ground level,
shall be not less than 12 m; and
4 The deficiency in the open spaces shall be
made good to satisfy 8.2.3.1 through the
set-backs at the upper levels; these setbacks shall not be accessible from
individual rooms/flats at these levels.
8.2.4 The front open space would govern the
height of the building (see 9.4).
NATIONAL MJILDINC CDDD OF INDIA
8.2.5 I NTERIOR O PEN S P A C E S

a)
C O U R T Y A R D-- In case the whole

of one side of every room excepting bath,
WC and store room is not abutting on
either the front, rear or side(s) open
spaces, it shall abut on an inner courtyard.
whose minimum width shall be 3 m.
Further, the inner courtyard shall have an
area, throughout its height, of not less
than the square of one-fifth the height of
the highest wall abutting the courtyard,
Provided that when any room (excluding
staircase bay, bathroom and water-closet)
is dependent for its light and ventilation
on an inner courtyard, the dimension shall
be such as is required for each wing of the
building.
Where only water closet and bath room
are abutting on the interior courtyard, Ihe
size of the interior.courtyard shall be in
line with the provision for ventilation
shaft as given in 8.2.5(b).
b) V E N T I L A T I O N S H A F T- For ventilating
the spaces for water closets and bath
rooms, if not opening on to front, side,
rear,and interior open spaces, these shall
open on to the ventilation,shaft, the size of
which shall not be less than the values
given below:
INNER
Height of
Buildings
m
up to 10
12
18
24
30
Above 30
Size of
Ventilation
Shaft
m*
1.2
;:;
54
8.0
9.0
Minimum Size
of Shaft
m
o-9
I.2
1.5
;:i
3.0
N O T E I- For buildings of height above 30 m, a

mechanical ventilation system shall be installed besides
the provision of minimum ventilation shaft.
NOTE 2 - For fully air-conditioned residential buildings
for lodging purposes, the ventilation shaft need not he
insisted upon, provided the air-conditioning system
works in an uninterrupted manner; also, provided there is
an alternative source of power SUpply.
c)
COURTYARD- The minimum

width o f t h e o u t e r c o u r t y a r d ( a s
distinguished from its depth) shall be not
less than 2.4 m. If the width of the outer
courtyard is less than 2.4 m, it shall be
treated as a notch and the provisions of
outer courtyard shall not apply. However,
if the depth of the outer courtyard is more
than the width, the provisions of 8.1.2
shall apply for the open spaces to be left
between the wings.
OUTER
PMT ill DLVELCWMMPPIT
CONTROL
RULES
AND
8.2.6 J OINT O PEN A IR S P A C E- Every such

interior or exterior open air space, unless the
latter is a street, shall be maintained for the
benefit of such building exclusively and shall
be entirely within the owners own premises.
8.2.6.1 If such interior or exterior open air
space is intended to be used for the benefit of
more than one building belonging to the same
owner, the width of such open air space shall
be the one specified for the tallest building as
specified in 8.2.3 abutting on such open air
space.
8.2.6:2 If such interior or exterior open air
space is jointly okned by more than one
person, its width shall also be as specified
in 8.2, provided every such person agrees in
writing to allow his portion of such joint open
air space to be used for the benefit of every
building abutting on such joint open air space
and provided he sends such written consent
to the Authority for record. Such common
open air space shall thenceforth be treated as
a permanently open air space required for the
purposes of the Code. No boundary wall
between such joint open air space shall be
erected or raised to a height of more than
2.0 m.
8.3 Other Occupancies
8.3.1 Open spaces for other occupancies shall
be as below;
a) E D U C A T I O N A L BUILDINGS-E~~~~~ for
nursery schools, the open spaces around
the building shall be not less than 6 m;
b) I N S T I T U T I O N A L BU I L D I N G S- The open
spaces around the building shall be not
less than 6 m; and
A
c) S S E M B L Y B U I L D I N G S- T h e o p e n
space at front shall be not less than 12m
and the other open spaces around the
building shall be not less than 6 m.
N OTE - However, if assembly buildings are
permitted in purely residential zones, the open
spaces around the building shall be not less than
12m.
d) BUSINESS, MERCANTILE AND STORAGE

BUILDINGS -The
open spaces around
the building shall be not less than 4.5 m.
Where these occur in a purely residential
zone or in a residential with shops Iine
zone the open spaces may be relaxed.
e) I N D U S T R I A L B U I L D I N G S- T h e o p e n
spaces around the building shall be not
less than 4.5 m for heights up to 16 m,
with an increase of the open spaces of
0.25 m for every increase of 1 m or
fraction thereof in height above 16 m.
N O T E -Special rules for narrow industrial plots
in the city, namely plots less than I5 m tn wrdtb,
and with appropriate set-backs from artain
streets and highways, shall be applicable.
CENmAL SUILDMC IttCQUlREMUWS
nil3
f)
HAZARDOUS
O C C U P A N C I E SThe
open spaces around the building shall be
as specified for industrial buildings [see
8.3.2(e)]
8.4 Exemption to Open Spaces

8.4.1 P ROJECTIONS
INTO
O PEN SPACES-
Every open space provided either interior or

exterior shall be kept free from any erection
thereon and shall be open to the sky, except as
below:
a) Cornice, roof or weather shade not more
than O-75 m wide;
b) Sunshades over windows/ventilators or
other openings not more than0.75 m wide;
Canopy
at first floor level, but not to be
4
used as a sitout with clearance of l-5 m
between the plot boundary and the
canopy;
4 Projected balcony at higher floors of
width not more than O-9 m; and
e) Projecting rooms/ balconies [see (d)] at
alternate floors such that rooms of the
lower two floors get light and air and the
projection being not more than the height
of the storey immediately below.
However, these projections into open spaces
shall not reduce the minimum required open
spaces.
8 . 4 . 1 . 1 A C C E S S O R Y B U I L D I N G- T h e
following accessory buildings may be
permitted in the open spaces:
a) In an existing building, sanitary block of
2.4 m in height subject to a maximum of
4 m2 in the rear open space at a distance
of l-5 m from the rear boundary may be
permitted, where facilities are not
adequate.
b) Parking lock up garages not exceeding
2*4m in height shall be permitted in the
side or rear open spaces at a distance of
7.5 m from any road line or the front
boundary of the plot; and
cl Suction. tank and pump room each up to
2.5 m* in area.
8.4.2 P ROJECTJON
INTO
STREEI
8.4.2.1 In existing built-up or congested

areas, no projection of any sort whatsoever,
except sunshades (see 8.4.2.3) extending more
than 23 cm. below a height of 4.3 m, shall
project over the road or over any drain or over
any portion outside the boundaries of the site,
provided the projection arising out of the
vertical part of the rain-water spouts
projecting at the road level or the water pipe
may be permitted in accordance with the
drainage plan.
Id4
8.4.2.2 PORTICOS IN EXISTING DEVELOPED

AREA - Porticos in bazar areas of existing
developed areas may be permitted to project
on road land subject to the following
limitations:
a) Porticos may be allowed on such roads
leaving a minimum clear space of 18 m
between kerbs;
b) The porticos shall not be less than 3 m.
wide;
4 Nothing shall be allowed to be
constructed on the portico which shall
be used as an open terrace;
4 Nothing shall be allowed to project
beyond the line of arcades; and
The
space under the portico shall be
e)
paved and channelled according to the
directions of the Authority.
8.4.2.3 SUNSHADES OVER WINDOWS AND
VENTJLATORS - Projections of sunshades
over windows or ventilators in existingbuiltup or congestedareas when permitted by the
Authority shall fulfil the following conditions:
No sunshade shall be permitted over the
road or over any drain or over any
portion outside the boundaries of the
site below a height of 2.8 m from the
road level;
b) Sunshades provided above a height of
2.8 m from the ground level shall be
permitted to project up to a maximum
width of 60 cm, if the road over which
they prcject exceeds 9 m in width; and
No
sunshade shall be permitted on roads
cl
less than 9 m in width or on roads having
no footpaths.
8.5 Limitations to Open Spaces
8.5.1 S AFEGUARD A GAINST R EDUCTION OF
O PEN S PACE - NO construction work on a
building shall be allowed if such work operates to reduce an open air space of any other
adjoining building, belonging to the same
owner to an extent less than what is prescribed
at the time of the proposed work orto reduce
further such open space if it is already less
than that prescribed.
8.5.2 A DDITIONS OR E XTENSIONS TO A
BUILDING- Additions or extensions to a
building shall be allowed, provided the open
spaces for the additions/extensions satisfy 8.2
after such additions/extensions are made.
9. AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS
9.2 General- The limitation of area and
height of buildings of different occupancy
classes and types of construction shall be
achieved by specifying it in terms of FAR,
which shall take into account the various

aspects that govern in specifying FAR as
given below:
a) Occupancy class;
b) Types of construction;
c) Width of street fronting the building and
the traffic load;
d) Locality where the building is proposed
and the density;
e) Parking facilities;
f) Local fire fighting facilities; and
g) Water supply and drainage facilities.
9.2 The comparative FARs for different
occupancies and types of construction are as
given in Table 3 and the Authority shall select
a basic FAR for one occupancy and a type of
construction and arrive at the FAR values for
other combinations taking into account the
other local factors (see 9.1).
9.2.1 UNLIMITED A REAS - The minimum
fire separation on all sides of buildings of
unlimited areas (see Table 3) and of Type 1
construction shall be 9 m.
9.3 Street Widrh - The area limits shall
apply to all buildings fronting on a street or
public spa%. not less than 9 m in width
accessible to a public street.
9.4 Height Limit-The height and number
of storeys shall be related to FAR and the
provisions of 8.
9.4.1 Where a building height is not covered
by Table 3, the maximum height shall be
limited according to the width of the street as
follows:
a) The maximum height of building shall not
exceed 1.5 times the width of road
abutting plus the front open space;
b) If a building abuts on two or more streets
of different widths, the building shah be
deemed to face upon the street that has the
greater width and the height of the
building shall be regulated by the width of
that street and may be continued to this
height to a depth of 24 m along the
narrower street subject to conformity
of 8; and
c) For buildings in vicinity of aersdromes,
provisions of 9.5 shall apply.
9.4.2 HEIGHT EXCEPTIONS
9.4.2.1 ROOF STRUCTURES - The following
appurtenant structures shall not be included
in the height of the building unless the
aggregate area of such structures, including
pent-houses, exceeds one-third of the area of
TABLE 3 COMPARATIVE FLOOR AREA RATIOS

FOR OCCUPANCIES FACING ONE PUBLIC
STREET OF AT LEAST 9 m WIDTH
(Clause 9.2 )
OCCUPANCY
C LASSIFICATION
T YPE
OF
CONSTRUCTION
Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4
(1)
Residential
(2)
UL
(3)
2.0
(4)
1.4
(5)
1.0
hducational
UL
2.0
1.4
1.0
Institutional
UL
1.5
1.0
0.8
Assembly
UL
1.c
0.7
0.5
Business
UL
2.9
2.3
1.6
Mercantile
8.0
1.8
1.4
1.0
Industrial
7.5
1.9
1.6
1.3
Storage (see Note 4)
6.0
1.5
1.3
I.0
Hazardous (see Note 4) 2.8
1.1
0.9
NP
UL - Unlimited.
NP - Not Permitted.
N OTE 1 -This table has been prepared, takin into
account the combustible content in the dt #Iferent
occupancies as well as the fire resistance offered by the
type of construction (see Part IV Fire protection).
NOTE
2 - This table shall be modified by the Authority,

taking into account the other aspects as given below
(see 9.1):
a) Density in terms of dwelling units/ hectare;
b) Traffic considerations;
c) Parking spaces;
d) Local fire fighting facilities; and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitation requirements.
NOTE 3 -The FAR specified may be increased by 20
percent for the following:
a) A basement or cellar and space under a building
constructed on stilts and used as a parking space, and
air-conditioning plant room used as accessory to the
principal use;
b) Electric cabin or substation, watchmans booth of
maximum size of 1.6 m2 with minimum width or
diameter of 1.2 m, pumphouse, garbage shaft, space
requited for locatton of fire hydrants, electric fittings
and water tanL;
c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically
exempted (see 8.4.1); and
d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost
storey. architectural features; and chimneys and
elevated tanks of dimensions as rmissibk under the
Code; the area of the lift shaft s/G 11 be taken only on
one floor.
NOTE 4 - In so far as single stomy storage and haxardous
occupancies are concerned, they would be further
governed by volume to plot area ratio (VPR), to be
decided by the Authority.
the roof of building upon which they are
erected:
a) Roof tanks and their supports;
b) Ventilating, air-conditioning, lift rooms
and similar service equipment;
c) Roof structures other than pent-houses;

and
d) Chimneys and parapet walls not exceeding
I m in height.
9.4.2.2 Except in buildings where automatic
sprinkler equipment is a requirement in
accordance with Part IV Fire plotection, all
structures of Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3
construction designed for industt ial, business,
mercantile, low or moderate hazard storage
occupancies may be erected 6 m higher than
specified in Table 3 when equipped with an
approved one-source automatic sprinkler
system.
Y.5.3 Butcheries. tanneries and solid waste

disposal sites shall not be permitted within
IO km from the aerodrome reference point.
Y.6 Group Housing
9.6.1 Group housing development may

normally and preferably be in multistoreyed
blocks; it shall not be a customary
subdivision of land into streets and plots.
Y.6.Z No limit to floors and height shall be
applicable, but the coverage and ~IOOI alea
ratio for WI ious densities may be as given in
lable 4 unless otherwise provided in the
Master Plan and local development control
rules.
9.5 Restrictions
i n t h r Cicinit.v o/
Aerodromes
9 . 5 . 1 FOI buildings in the vicinity of
aerodromes, the maximum height of such
buildings shall be decidedin consultation with
the Civil Aviation Author-ities. This shall be
regu!ated by the rules fol giving no objection
certificate for construction of buildings in the
vicinity of aerodromes of DirectorateGeneral
of Civil Aviation,, which are given in
Appendix A. However, the latest rules of
Directorate General of Civil Aviation stiall be
followed in all cases of buildings coming up in
the vicinity of an aerodrome.
9.5.1.1 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f 9.5.1 n e w
buildings, structures which rise to 30 m or
more in height and are to be located within
20 km of the aerodrome reference point, shall
be constructed only ii no objection certificate
has been obtained from the Directorate
General of Civil Aviation.
--~
TABLt 4 FLOOR AREA RATIO AND COVERAGE
FOR GROUP HOUSING
FLOOH
SI
GROSS
M AXIMUM
No
RESIIXN~IAL
DENSIIV
COVEKAtiE
IN PERCENT
AR E A
R ATIO
PERSONS/
HECTARE
(1)
(2)
1)
ii)
I25
250
(3)
25
30
(4)
0.75
1.25
iii)
425
33;
1.50
iV)
500
v)
625
35
35
1.75
2.00
NOTE ~ The coverage shall be calculated on the basis of

the whole area reserved for group housing after
deductmg:
a) The area of any highway, any road up to 25 m and
maior residential roads of 18 m wtdth around the
g&p housing area (residential street, loop street, culde-sac, service lanes and footpaths shall not be
deducted);
9.5.1.2 In the case of buildings to be erected in

the vicinity of defence aerodromes, the
maximum height of such buildings shall be
decided by the Defence Authority (see 12.5 of
Part Ii Administration).
9.5.2 This will apply specially to new
constructions, overhead HT/ LT lines, telephone/telegraph lines, factories, chimneys,
wire/TV antennas.
9.5.2.1 No new chimneys or smoke producing
factories shall be constructed within a radius
of 8 km from the aerodrome reference point
(ARP).
9.5.2.2 Ovei-head HT/ LT lines ox telephone/telegraph lines shall not be permitted in the
approach/take-off climb axeas within 3 000 m
of the inner edge of these areas.
9.5.2.3 A 3 m margin shall be allowed in new
constructions for wireless/TV antennas, cooling towers and mumties.
,,P
b) The area of school (excluding sites for nursery schools)

and other community facilities within the group
housing area; and
c) The open spaces, except playgrounds and totlots of
local nature.
10. OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES

10.1 The off-street parking (on-site parking)
spaces in a plot to be provided shall be in
accordance with Appendix B. The spaces
given in Appendix B shall be considered by
the Authority in conjunction with the
Development Rules, in force, if any.
11. GREENBELTS AND LANDSCAPING
11.1 General - Greenbelts and landscaping
including plantation of shrubs and trees help

to certain extent in enhancing the
environmental quality.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
11.1.1 Planting of trees in streets and in open

spaces should b e done carefully to take
advantage of both shades and sunshine
without handicapping the flow of natural
winds. rheir advantage for abating glare and
for providing cool and/ or warm pockets in
developed areas should also be taken.
not less than 4.5 cm from the surrounding

ground level.
11.1.2 Where relief from noise is to be

provided by means of greenbelts, these may be
of considerable width and be landscaped. The
extent of relief that may be derived from the
above may be estimated only after considering
other environmental factors. Strong leafy
trees may be planted to act as noise baffles.
Shrubs or creepers may also be planted for
additional protection between tree trunks;
artificial mounds and banks should be formed
wherever practicable.
12.2 Habitable Rooms
Il.2 Norms for Planting of Shrubs and Trees

11.2.1 Suitable provisions may be made for
greeneries including plantation of shrubs and
trees as a part of environmental protection in
general. This aspect shall be taken care of
from the initial stage of town and country
planning, zoning and planning o f
development of particular area and group
housing. Finally, this. aspect shall also be
taken into account in planning individual
building of different occupancies. A guide for
the quantum of plantation of shrubs, trees and
other greenery in different occupancies and
community spaces is given in Appendix C.
11.2.2 The types of plants, the distance
between trees/plants from the building and
the distance between plants shall be carefully
worked out keeping in view the structural
safetv and aesthetic requirements of
buildjngs.
11.3 Trees shall be numbered area-wise, plotwise and road-wise by the concerned
authority and they shall be checked
periodically.
I I .4 Cutting and pruning of trees in public as
well as private areas shall be suitably
regulated. Trees shall be cut only after
obtaining the permission of the Authority
designated for this purpose.
1 2 . KEQUIREMENTS O F P A R T S O F
BUILDINGS
12.1 Plinth
12.1.1 M AIN B UILDINGS -The plinth or any
part of a building or outhouse shall be so
located with respect to the surrounding
ground level that adequate drajnage of the
site is assured. The height of the plinth shall be
PAiT III D E V E L O P M E N T C O N T R O L RULFS A N D G E N E R A L
12.1.2 1~1.~~10~ CO U R T Y A R D S - Every

interior courtyard shall be raised at least 15
cm above the level of the centre of the nearest
street and shall be satisfactorily drained.
12.2.1 H EIGHT --The height of all rooms for

human habitation shall not be less than 2.75 m
measured from the surface of the floor to the
lowest point of the ceiling (bottom of slab). In
the case of pitched roof, the average height of
rooms shall not *be less than 2.75 m. The
minimum clear head room under a beam,
folded plates or eaves shall be 2.4 m. In the
case of air-conditioned rooms, a height of not
less than 2.4 m measured from the surface of
the floor to the lowest point of airconditioning duct or the false ceiling shall be
provided.
12.2.1 .I The requirements of 12.2.1 apply to
residential, business and mercantile buildings.
For educational and industrial buildings, the
following minimum requirements apply:
Ceiling height 3.6 m for
a) Educational
all regions; in cold
buildings
regions, 3 m.
Ceiling height 3.6 m,
b) Industrial
except when air-condiBuildings
tioned, 3 m (Factory
Act 1948 and rules
therein shall govern
such heights, where
applicable).
12.2.2 SIZE ~~ The area of habitable room
shall not be less than 9.5 m, where there is
only one room with a minimum width of
2.4-m. Where there are two rooms, one of
these shall not be less than 9.5 m- and the
other not less than 7.5 m, with a minimum
width of.2. I m.
12.3 Kitchen
12._J.l HEIGHT -The height of a kitchen
measured from the surface of the floor to the
lowest point in the ceiling (bottom slab) shall
not be less than 2.75 m, except for the portion
to accommodate floor trap of the upper floor.
12.3.2 SIZE - The area of a kitchen where
separate dining area is provided, shall be not
less than 5.0, rn- with a minimum width of
1.8 m. Where there is a separate store, the area
of the kitchen mav be reduced to 4.5 m. A
kitchen, which is i&ended for use as a dining
area also, shall have a floor area of not less
than 7.5 m with a minimum width of 2.1 m.
BCILDINC
REQLIREMFATS
111-l
12.3.3 O T H E R R E Q U I R E M E N T S - Every
room to be used as kitchen shall have:
a) unless separately provided in a pantry,
means for the washing of kitchen utensils
which shall lead directly or through a sink
to a grated and trapped connection to the
waste pipe;
b) an impermeable floor;
cl a flue, if found necessary; and
4 a window or ventilator or opening of size
not less than as specified in 14.1.2 subject
to increase in area of opening in
accordance with Note 3 of 14.1.2.
12.4 Bathrooms and Water-Closets
12.4.1 H EIGHT - The height of a bathroom
or water-closet measured from the surface of
the floor to the lowest point in the ceiling
(bottom of slab) shall not be less than 2.m.
12.4.2 SIZE -The size of a bathroom shall
not be less than 1.5 X I.2 m or 1.8m2. The floor
area of water-closet shall be I.1 m* with a
minimum width of 0.9 m. If bath and watercloset are combined, its floor area shall not be
less than 2.8 mz with a minimum width of
1.2 m.
12.4.3 O T H E R R E Q U I R E M E N T S -- E v e r y
bathroom or water-closet shall:
4 be so situated that at least one of its walls

b)
cl
d)
e)
f)
shall open to external air;

not be directly over or under any room
other than another water-closet, washing
place, bath or terrace, unless it has a
water-tight floor;
have the platform or seat made of watertight non-absorbent material;
be enclosed by walls or partitions and the
surface of every such wall or partition
shall be finished with a smooth impervious
material to a height of not less than I m
above the tloor of such a room;
be provided with an impervious floor
covering, sloping towards the drain with a
suitable grade and not towards verandah
or any other room; and
have a window or ventilator, opening to a
shaft or open space, of area not less than
0.3 m with side not less than 0.3 m.
12.4.4 No room containing water-closets

shall be used for any purpose except as a
lavatory and no such room shall open directly
into any kitchen or cooking space by a door,
window or other opening. Every room
containing water-closet shall have a door
completely closing the entrance to it.
J8
12.5 Ledge or TAND/ Lo)

12.5.1 HEIGHT - It shall have a minimum
head-room of 2.2 m.
12.S.2 SIZE - A ledge or rand in a habitable
room shall not cover more than 25 percent of
the area of the floor on which it is constructed
and shall not interfere with the ventilation of
the room under any circumstances.
f2.5.3 LOFI -The maximum height of loft
shall be 1.5 m. A loft, if provided, on a
kitchen, shall not exceed 25 percent ofthe area
of the kitchen, leaving a minimum headroom
of 2.2 m for kitchen under loft. On bathroom,
water-closet and corridor, the loft can be 100
percent.
12.6 Mezzanine Floor
12.6.1 H EIGHT - It shall have a minimum
height of 2.2 m.
12.6.2 SIZE - The minimum size of the
mezzanine floor, if it is to be used as a living
room, shall not be less than 9.5 m*. The
aggregate area of such mezzanine floor in a
building shall in no case exceed one-third the
plinth area of the building.
12.6.3 OTHER RE Q U I R E M E N T S - - A m e z zanine floor may be permitted over a room or
a compartment provided:
a) it conforms to the standards of living
rooms as regards lighting and ventilation
in case the size of mezzanine floor is 9.5m2
or more (see 14.1.2);
b) it is so constructed as not to interfere
under any circumstances with the
ventilation of the space over and under it;
cl such mezzanine floor is not subdivided
into smaller compartments;
d) such mezzanine floor or any part of it shall
not be used as a kitchen; and
e) in no case shall a mezzanine floor be
closed so as to make it liable to be
converted into unventilated compartments.
12.7 Store Room
12.7.1 HEIGHT - The height of a store room
shall be not less than 2.2 m.
1 2 . 7 . 2 SIZE -The size of a store room,
where provided in a residential building, shall
be not less than 3 m.
12.8 Garage
12.8.1 HE I G H T -The height of a garage
shall be not less than 2.4 m.
12.8.2 SIZE ~~
below:
a) PRlVATE
and
.I-he size of garages shall be as
CARAGE ~~
2.5 x 5.0 m, Ikfin;
b, PUBLIC GARAGE - Based on the number

of vehicles parked, etc (see 10).
12.9 Basement
12.9.1 The basement shall not be used for
residential purposes.
12.9.2 The constt.uction of the basement shall
be allowed by the authority in accordance
with the land use and other provisions specitied under the Development Control Rules.
12.9.2.1 The basement to be constructed
within the prescribed set-backs and prescribed
building lines and subject to maximum coverage on floor 1 (entrance floor) may be put to
only the following uses:
a) Storage of household or other goods of
ordinarily combustible material;
b) Strong rooms, bank cellars, etc;
c) Air-conditioning equipment and other
machines used for services and utilities of
the building; and
d) Parking spaces.
12.9.3 The basement shall have the following
requirements:
4 Every basement shall be in every part at
least 2.4 m in height from the floor to the

underside of the roof slab or ceiling;
b) Adequate ventilation shall be provided for
the basement. The ventilation
requirements shall be the same as required
by the particular occupancy according to
byelaws. Any deficiency may be met by
providing adequate mechanical
ventilation in the form of blowers, exhaust
fans, air-conditioning systems, etc;
4 The minimum height of the ceiling of any
basement shall be 0.9 m and the
maximum, 1.2 m above the average
surrounding ground level;
4 Adequate arrangements shall be made
such that surface drainage dues not enter
the basement;
d The walls and floors of the basement
shall be watertight and be so designed

that the effects of the surrounding soil
and moisture, if any, are taken into
account in design and adequate damp
proofing treatment is given; and
The
access to the basement shall be
r)
separate from the main and alternative
staircase providing access and exit from
PART Ill
higher floors. Where the staircase is

continuous in the case of buildings served
by more than one staircase, the same shall
be of enclosed type serving as a fire
separation from the basement floor and
higher floors. Open ramps shall be
permitted if they are constructed within
the building line subject to the provision of
(6).
12.10 Chimneys-The chimneys shall be
built at least 0.9 m above flat roofs, provided
the top of the chimneys is not below the top of
the adjacent parapet wall. In the case of sloping roofs, the chimney top shall not be less
than 0.6 m above the ridge ofthe roof in which
the chimney penetrates.
12.11 Parapet - Parapet walls and handrails
provided on the edges of roof terraces, balcony, varandah, etc shall not be less than
1.05 m and not more than 1.20 m in height
from the finished floor level.
12.12 Cabin -The size of cabins shall not be
less than 3.0 m*. The clear passages within the
divided space of any floor shall not be less
than 0.75 m and the distance from the farthest
space in a cabin to any exit shall not be more
than 18.5 m. In case the subdivided cabin does
not derive direct lighting and ventilation from
any open spaces/mechanical means, the
maximum height of the cabin shall be 2.2 m.
12.13 Boundary Wall
12.13.1 The requirements of the boundary
wall are given below:
4 Except with the special permission of the
Authority, the maximum height of the
compound wall shall be 1.5 m above the
centre line of the front street. Compound
wall up to 2.4 m height may be permitted if
the top 0.9 m is of open type construction
of a design to be approved by the
Authority.
b) In the case of a corner plot, the height of
the boundary wall shall be restricted to
0.75 m for a length of 10 m on the front
and side of the intersections and the
balance height of 0.75 m if required in
accordance with (a) may be made up of
open type construction (through railings)
and of design to be approved by the
Authority.
cl However, the provisions of (a) and (h) are
not applicable to boundary walls of jails.
In industrial buildings, electric
substations, transformer stations,
institutional buildings like sanitoria,
hospitals, industrial buildings like
workshops, factories and educational
buildings like schools, colleges, including
hostels. and other uses of public utility
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING
RFiQUDWMMTS
Ill-
1 9
undertakings height up to 2.4 m may be

permitted by the Authority.
12.14 Wells - Wells, intended to supplv
water for human consumption or domestic
purposes, where provided, shall comply with
the requirements of 12.14.1 and 12.14.2.
12.14.1 LO C A T I O N -The well shall be
located:
4 not less than 15 m from any ash pit, refuse
pit, earth closet or privy and shall be
located on a site upwards from the earth
closet or privy;
b) not less than 18 m from any cess pit
soakway or borehole latrine and shall be
located on a site upwards from the earth
closet or privy;
cl that contamination by the movement of
sub-soil or other water is unlikely; and
d) not under a tree or otherwise it should
have a canopy over it, so that leaves and
twigs may not fall into the well and rot.
12.14.2 R EQUIREMENTS -The well shall:
a) have a minimum internal diameter of not
less than 1 m;
b) be constructed to a height not less than
I m above the surrounding ground level.
to form a parapet or kerb and to prevent
surface water from flowing into a well. and
shall be surrounded with a paving
constructed of impervibus material which
shall extend for a distance of not less than
I .8 m in every direction from the parapet
from the kerb forming the well head and
the upper surface of such a paving shall be
sloped away from the well;
c) be of sound and permanent construction
@ucca) t h r o u g h o u t . T e m p o r a r y o r
exposed (kufcha) wells shall be permitted
only in fields or gardens for purposes of
irrigation; and
have
the interior surface of the lining or
d)
walls of the well be rendered impervious
for a depth of not less than 1.8 m measured
from the level of the ground immediately
adjoining the well-head.
12.15 Septic Tanks-Where a septic tank is

used for sewage disposal, the location. design
and construction of the septic tank shall
c o n f o r m t o r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 12.15.1
and 12.1.5.2.
12.15.1 L OCATION OF S EPTIC T ANKS AND
S~HSUKFACE ABSORPTION S YSTEMS - A
subsoil dispersion system shallnot be closer
than 18 m from any source of drinking water,
such as well, to mitigate the possibility of
bacterial pollution of water supply. It shall
also be as far removed from the nearest
111-20
habitable building as economically feasible

but not closer than h m, to avoid damage to
the structures.
12.1.5.2 REQUHEMENTS
b)
cl
e)
g)
DIMENSIONS OF. SEPTIC TANKS - Septic

tanks shall have a minimum width of 75
cm, a minimum depth of 1 m below the
water level and a minimum liquid capacity
of I ml. The length of tanks shall be 2 to 4
times the width;
Septic tanks may be constructed of
brickwork. stone masonry, concrete or
other suitable materials as approved by
the Authority;
Under no circumstances shall effluent
from a septic tank be allowed into an open
channel drain or body of water without
adequate treatment;
The minimum nominal diameter of the
pipe shall be 100 mm. Further. at
junctions of pipes in manholes, direction
of flow from a branch connection shall not
make an angle exceeding 45 with the
direction of flow in the main pipe;
l-he gradients of land drains. underdrainage as well as the bottom of
dispersion trenches and soakways shall be
between I:300 and 1:400;
Every septic tank shall be provided with
ventilating pipe of at least 50 mm
diameter. The top of the pipe shall be
provided with a suitable cage of mosquitoproof wire mesh.
The ventilating pipe shall extend to a
height which would cause no smell
nuisance to any building in the area.
Generally. the ventilating pipe may extend
to a height of about 2 m. when the septic
tank is at least 15 m away from the nearest
building and to a height of 2 m above the
top of the building when it is located closer
than 15 m;
When thedisposal ofseptic tank effluent is
to a seepage pit, the seepage pit may be of
any suitable shape with the least crosssectional dimension of 90 cm and not less
than 100 cm in depth below the invert level
of the inlet pipe. The pit may be lined with
stone, brick or concrete blocks with dry
open joints which should be backed with
at least 7.5 cm of clean coarse aggregate.
The lining above the inlet level should be
finished with mortar. In the case of pits of
large dimensions, the top portion may be
narrowed to reduce the size of the RCC
cover slabs. WheTe no lining is used,
specially near trees, the entire pit should
be filled with loose stones. A masonry ring
may be constructed at the top of the pit to
prevent damage by flooding of the pit by
NATIONAL BIILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
surface runoff. The inlet pipe may be

taken down a depth of 90 cm from the top
as an anti-mosquito mean:re; and
h) When the disposal of the septic tank
effluent is to a dispersion trench, the
dispersion trench shall be 50 to IOOcm
deep and 30 to 100 cm wide excavated to a
slight gradient and shall be provided with
15 to 25 cm of washed gravel or crushed
stones. Open jointed pipes placed inside
the trench shall be made of unglazed
earthenware clay or concrete and shall
have a minimum internal diameter of 75 to
100 mm. Each dispersion trench shall not
be longer than 30 m and trenches shall not
be placed closer than 1.8 m.
_13_. 16 Office-cum-Letter Box Room - In the
case of multistoreyed multifamily dwelling
apartments constructed by existing and
proposed Cooperative Housing Societies or
Apartment Owners Associations, limited
companies and proposed societies, an officecum-letter box room of dimension 3.6 X 3 m
shall be provided on the ground floor. In case
the number of flats is more than 20, the
maximum size of the office-cum-letter box
room shall be 20 m2.
12.16.1 B USINESS B UILDINGS - Provision
shall be made for letter boxes on the entrance
floor as per the requirements of the postal
department.
12.17 M e t e r R o o m s - For all buildings
above 15 m in height and in special
occupancies, like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous
and mixed occupancies with any of the
aforesaid occupancies having area more than
500 m on each floor, provision shall be made
for an independent and ventilated meter
(service) room, as per requirements of electric
(service) supply undertakings on the .ground
floor with direct access from outside for the
purpose of termination of electric supply from
the licensees service and alternative supply
cables. The door/doors provided for the
service room shall have fire resistance of not
less than two hours.
12.18 Staircase
12.18.1 The minimum clear width, minimum
tread width and maximum riser of staircases
for buildings shall be as given in 12.18.1.1
to 12.18.1.3 (seealso Part IV Fire protection).
12.18.1.1 MINIMUM WI DTH -The minimum
width of staircase shall be as follows:
a) Residential buildings (dwellings) 1.0 m
NOTE-For row housing with 2 storeys, the mini
mum width shall be 0.75 m.
b) Residential hotel buildings
1.5 m
c) Assembly buildings like

1.5 m
auditoria, theatres and
cinemas
d) Educational building
1.5 m
up to 24 m in height
more than 24 m in height
e) Institutional buildings
2.0 m
up to 10 beds
more than 10 beds
2.0 m
f) All other buildings
1.5 m
12.18.1.2 MINIMUM TREAD -The minimum
width of tread without nosing shall be 25 cm
for residential buildings. The minimum width
of tread for other buildings shall be 30 cm.
12.18.1.3 MAXIMUM RISER -The maximum
height of riser shall be 19 cm for residential
buildings and 15 cm for other buildings and
these shall be limited to 15 per flight.
12.18.2 The minimum head-room in a
passage under the landing of a staircase shall
be 2.2 m. The minimum clear head-room in
any staircase shall be 2.2 m.
12.19 Roofs
12.19.1 The roof of a building shall be so
constructed or framed as to permit effectual
drainage of the rain-water therefrom by
means of sufficient rain-water pipes of
adequate size, wherever required, so
arranged, jointed and fixed as to ensure that
the rain-water is carried away from the
building without causing dampness in any
part of the walls or foundations of the
building or those of an adjacent building.
12.19.2 The Authority may require rainwater pipes to be connected to a drain or sewer
to a covered channel formed beneath the
public footpath to connect the rain-water pipe
to the road gutter or in any other approved
manner.
12.19.3 Rain-water pipes shall be affixed to
the outside of the external walls of the
building or in recesses or chases cut or formed
in such external walls or in such other manner
as may be approved by the Authority.
12.20 Special requirements of low income
housing shall be as given in Appendix D. For
detailed information in this regard, reference
may be made to the accepted standards
[III(l)*].
12.21 The special requitements for planning
of buildings keeping in view the needs of the
l
in this part, where reference, is made to accepted

standards or good practice in relation to design,
testing, construction procedure or other information,
the appropriate document listed at the end of this part
may be used as a guide to the interpretation of this terms
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND CENERRAL BUILDING
REQUlilEMENTS
III-
3 1
*I
physically handicapped, applicable particularly to public buildings meant for their use,
are given in Appendix E.
13. RAT-PROOFING AND TERMITEPROOFING OF BUILDINGS
Z3.1 Every building or part thereof that is
designed or intended for use as a dwelling or
for the handling, storage or sale of foodstuffs
shall conform to the requirements as given
in 13.2 and 13.3.
d) one-twelfth of the floor area for cold

climate.
N OTE I-If a window is partly fixed, the openable area
shall be counted.
N OTE 2 -No portion of a room shall be assumed to be
lighted, if it is more than 7.5 m away from the opening
assumed for lighting that portion.
N OTE 3 --The area of opening as given in (a) to (d)
above shall be increased by 25 percent in the case of a
kitchen. [see 12.3.3(d)]
1.5.
AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
13.2 Every such building unless supported on

posts shall have continuous foundation walls,
extending from at least 60 cm below ground
level to at least 15 cm above ground level or
shall have a continuous floor of masonry or
reinforced concrete or other equally effective
rat-proof materials.
15.1 For information regarding design,

construction and installation of airconditigning and heating systems, reference
may be made to Part VIII Building services,
Section 3 Air-conditioning and heating.
13.3 All openings in such foundations or

floors, windows and drains, and all junctions
between foundation walls and building walls
shall be effectively rat-proofed, that is,
windows and doors shall be tight fitting, and
other openings shall be securely covered with
rat-proof screening or grillage or shall be
tightly closed with metal sheeting, concrete or
other equally effective rat-proof material.
16.1 For information regarding the desired

noise levels and sound insulation in different
occupancies, reference may be made to Part
VIII Building services, Section 4 Acoustic and
sound insulation.
13.4 Termite control in buildings is very

important, as the damage likely to be caused
by termites to wooden structures of buildings
and other household articles like furniture,
clothing, stationery, etc, is considerable.Antitermite measures in buildings shall be taken in
accordance with good practice [111(2)].
14. LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
14.1 The lighting and ventilation
requirements for different uses and
occupancies are,covered in Part VIII Building
services, Section 1 Lighting and ventilation.
14.1.2 LIGHTING
AND
V ENTILAT I O N
OF
ROOMS*-Rooms
shall have, for the
admission of light and air, one or more
openings, such as windows and ventilators,
opening directly to the external airor into an
open verandah with a maximum width of
2.4 m.
14.1.2 Notwithstanding the area of openings

obtained through 14.1, the minimum
aggregate area (see Notes 1 to 3) of such
openings, excluding doors inclusive of frames,
shall be not less than:
a) one-tenth of the floor area for dry hot
climate;
b) one-sixth of the floor area for wet hot
climate;
c) one-eighth of the floor area for
intermediate climate; and
m-22
16. SOUND INSULATION
17. i-IEAT INSULATION

17.1 For information on recommended limits
of thermal transmittance of roofs and walls
for different parts of ttie country and heat
transmission losses due to differentconstrue
tions, reference may be made to good practice
[111(3)*].
18. PROVISION OF LIFTS
18.1 Provision for lifts shall be made for

buildings more than 15 m in height. Planning
and designing of lifts shall be done in
accordance with the provisions given in
Part VIII Building services, Section 5
Installation of lifts and escalators.
19.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
19.1 Lightning protective system requires to
be installed on all buildings and structures
vulnerable talightning strokes owing to their
height or exposed situtation, buildings of
public of strategic importance, buildings of
public resort, buildings housing valuable
materials, ancient monuments, observatories,
etc. For information regarding details of
various factors that affect the risk of the
structure being struck, the consequential
effects of a stroke and other details, reference
may be made to Part VIII Building services,
Section 2 Electrical installation.
- - - - - * In this part, where reference, is made to accepted
standards or good practice in relation to design,
testing, construction procedure or other information,
the appropriate document listed at the end of this part
may be used as a guide to theinterpretation of this terms.
NATtONAL
APPENDIX A
(Clause 9.5.1)
CIVIL AVIATION REQUiREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION IN THE
VICINITY OF AN AERODROME
A-O. GENERAL
A-l. PROHIBITED AREA
A-O.1 For the purpose of this Appendix, the

following definitions shall apply.
A-l.1 No building or structure shall be

constructed or erected, or no tree shall be
planted, on any land within the limits
specified in A-l.2 and A-l.3 in respect of the
aerodromes listed in A-3 and in respect of the
aerodrome at Trivandrum.
A-O. 1.1 A EKODROME R EFERENCE P O I N T

(ARP) -This is a designated point, which is
established in the horizontal plane at or near
the geometric centre of the landing area.
A-0.1.2 A PPROACH F UNNEL - See Fig. 1.
A-0.1.3 ELEVAT-ION OR R EDUCED L EVEL --
This is the vertical distance of a point or a
level, on or affixed to the surface of the earth,
measured from the mean sea level.
A-O. 1.4 TRANSITIONAL AREA - It is an area

which is below a specified surface sloping
upwards and outwards from the edge of the
approach funnel and from a line originating at
the end of the inner edge of each approach
area, drawn parallel to the runway centie line
in the direction of landing (see Fig. 1).
A-l.2 For the Aerodromes Listed in A3 - These requirements shall be applicable

for the land enclosed in approach funnels of
the runway with a maximum distance of
360 m measured frcm each runway and along
the extended centre line of the runway. For
the purpose of this clause, the requirements of
approach funnel and an instrument runway
shall be as given in A-1.2.1 to A-1.2.3.
A-0.1.5 RUNWAY STRIP - See Fig. 1.
A-1.2.1 Approach funnel in the case of an

instrument runway means the area in the
shape of an isosceles trapezium having the
longer parallel side 4800 m long (2400 m on
either side of the extended centre line of the
runway) and smaller parallel side 300 m long
(150 m on either side of the extended centre
t
SURFACE
r RUNWAY
1 A Instrument Runway
fR&4..~~~AL
APPRnACH
I B Non-Instrument Runway
All-dimensions are in metres.
Fig. I Runway
PART 11,
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULE.3 AND GMERRAL BUIL.L)INC REQUlREMF3TS
u1.23
line of the runway) where the smaller and

longer parallel sides are placed at a distance of
60 m and I5 060 m. respectively, from the end
of the runway and at right angles to the
extended centre line.
A-f 2.2 In the case of a non-instrument runway, the approach funnel means the area in
the shape of an isosceles trapezium having
the longer parallel side 1800 m long (900 m on
either side of the extended centre line of the
runway) and smaller parallel side 180 m long
(90 m on either side of the extended centre line
of the runway), where the smaller and longer
parallel sides are placed at a distance of 60 m
and 6540 m, respectively, from the end of the
runway and at right angles to the extended
centre line. Thereafter, the trapezium is followed by a contiguous rectangular area of that
width for the remainder of the length up to a
distance of 15 060 m from the end of the
runway.
A-1.2.3 An instrument runway is a runway
served by visual and non-visual aid or aids
providing at least directional guidance adequate for a straight in approach and intended
for the operation of aircraft using instrument
approach procedures.
A-l._. For the Aerodrome at Trivandrum These requirements shall be applicable for the
land enclosed in approach funnels of all runways with a maximum distance of
304.80 m, measured from each runway and
along extended centre line of the runway, and
the land enclosed in a belt of 30.48 m width
outside the operational boundary of the aerodrome. For the purpose of this clause, the
requirements of approach funnel and operational boundary shall be as given in A-1.3.1
and A-1.3.2.
A-l.3 I Approach funnel means the area in
the shape of an isosceles trapezium having the
longer parallel side of kngth 4724.4m
(2 362.2 m on either side of the extended centre
line of the runway) and smaller parallel side of
152.4 m (76.2 m on either side of the extended
centre line of the runway) where the smaller
and longer parallel sides are placed at a distance of 60.9 m and 15301 m, respectively,
from the end of the runway and at right angles
to the extended centre line.
A-f..?.? Operational boundary means an area
enclosed between parallel lines ata distance of
152.4 m on either side of the centre line of the
runways or 30.4 m from the boundary fencing
of the aerodrome, whichever is greater.
A-2. HEIGHT RESTRICTION
A-2.1 For the Aerodromes Listed in A-3 No building or structure higher than the
111-24
height specified in Tables 5 and 6 shall be

constructed or erected, or no tree which is
likely to grow or ordinarily grows higher than
the height specified in the Tables 5 and 6, shall
be planted, on any land within a radius of
20 km from ARP of the aerodromes listed
in A-3, excluding the land covered by A-1.2.
l-ABLE S H E I G H T R E S T R I C T I O N W I T H
RESPECT TO APPROACH FUNNELS
(Clauses A-2. I onJ A-2. I. I)
MAXIMUM
SI_
ARE*
Yu
PFKMISSIRLE
ttEIGHT
AROVE -rHE Et EVATION

OF IHL >hFAKESl
RUSWA~ END
(1)
(2)
(3)
m
I) More than 360 m but

not exceekilng 5 IO m
ii) More than 510 m but

not exceedinp 660 m
Iii) Mbre than 660 m hut

not exceeding 8 IO m
12
IV)
More than 810 m but

not exceeding Yho m
v) More than 960 11 but

not excecdmg I I IO m
I5
IX
vi) More than I1 IO m but

not exccedtng 126U m
21
vii) More than I260 m but

not exceeding I410 m
24
vlil) hlore than I410 m but

not exceeding I f.60 m
27
I X)
Mow than I560 m
30
7~ABI.E 6 HEIGHJ R E S T R I C T I O N W I T H
RESPEC r TO TRANSITIONAL AREA
(Clause .4 -2.1 ancl t-2.1,.7)
Sl.
No
DI\I~\CE
FK~U THF
MAYIM~~~
PEKMIS-
I~FK BOC\IIARY ot rttE VRL r HEIU~ AROVE

~~HA\;SIIIOV~~ AK E A
%t~~ltlFO bWVE
(2)
(1)
,t Et EV4IIOU Ot 1Ht
ARP
(3)
m
i) Ilp to a dlsrancc of 21 m
ii) More than 21 m hut
not exceeding 42 m
Iii) More than 42 m but

not exceeding 63 m
iv) More than 63 m but

not exceeding 84 m
v) More than 84 m but

not exceeding 105 m
I2
vi) More than IO5 m but

lot exceeding 126 m
15
vii) More than 126 m but

not exceeding 147 m
I8
viii) More than 147 m but

not exceeding 168 m
?I
ix) More than 168 m but

not exceeding 189 m
24
x) More
than 189 m but

not exceeding 210 m
xi) More than 210 m
27
30
A-2.1.1 Table 5 gives the height restriction

with respect to approach funnels and shall be
applicable for the land enclosed in the
approach funnels of all runways where distances are measured from each end of the runway, along extended centre lineofthe runway.
A-2.1.2 Table 6 gives height restriction with
respect to transitional area and shall be
applicable for the land enclosed in the
transitional area of all runways at an
aerodrome listed in A-3 where distances are
measured from the associated runway strip
and the edge of the associated approach
funnels, forming the inner boundary of the
transitional area and along a line at right
angles to the centre !ine of the runway.
A-2.2 For the Aerodrome at Wvandrum No building or structure higher than the
height specified in Table 7 shall be constructed
or erected, or no tree which is likely to grow or
ordinarily grows higher than the height specified in Table 7, shall be planted, on any level
within a radius of 20 km from ARP of the
aer odrome at Tr ivandrum, excluding the land
coveled by A-1.3.
A-3. AERODROMES
A-3./ A list of aerodromes indicating runway
directions, runway and elevations and ARP
elevations is given in Table 8.
TABLE 7 HEIGHT RESTRICTION
(Clause A-2.2)
SL
A REA
M AXIMUM PERMIT
SIBLE HEIGHT A BOVE
GROUND L~vm
(1)
(2)
(9
No.
i) The area lying between the coastline and the Chakai canal other than specified in A-1.3.
ii) The area lying in a belt of 457.2 m width between the Eastern Bank of the Chakai canal
and a line running parallel to this canal ior the entire length.
iii) A parallel belt of 762 m width running East of area (ii) above.
15.2
iv) A parallel belt of 609.6 m width running East of area (iii) above.
24.3
v) Rest of the area extending up to 20 km from ARP
30.4
TABLE 8
RUNWAY DIRECTIONS, RUNWAY END ELEVATIONS AND

ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES
(Clause A-3. I)
co, AERODROME
(2)
(1)
ARP
ELEVATION
R U N- RUNWAY WAY E N D
ELEVANo.
TION
(3)
(4)
2) Agartala
3)
4)
Akola
Amritsar
55
I4
305
229
(2)
(1)
m
I) Ahmadabad
(5)
S L AERODROME
No.
I4
::
23
::
54
56
05
23
I2
14.5
::
13.5 13.5
::
303
303
07
25
229
230
::
230 229
ARP
E LEVATION
RUNWAY
No.
EN D
ELEVATION
(3)
(4)
(5)
m
m
5 ) Aurangabad
581
6 ) Belgaum
758
7) Balurghat
8)
Bangalore
PART III DEVELOPME NT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING
24
888
RU NWAY
582
513.5
08
26
09
27
09R
21L
09L
2lR
755
141
24
23
875
881
876
882.5
(Continued)
ItFZjlJIilEMMTS
24
11l--u
TAB1 E 8
SL AERODROME
No.
(I)
RUNWAY DIRECTIONS. RUNWAY END El.EVAl-IONS AND

ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES-Conrcl
ARP
ELEVA
noN
(2)
(3)
m
9) Vadodara
37
10) Behala
2.6
1 I) Bhavnagar
5.4
12) Bhopal
523
RUN.
WAY
No
(4)
04
22
09
27
14) Bhuj
15) Bilaspur
44.5
18.5
274
AtKODKOMF
36.5
37.5
36.5
38.7
22) Delhi (Palam)
06
24
522.5
521
521.5
523
:4
33
41.5
38
37
05
23
81.5
14.5
:;
:;.5
06
24
f-h
NO
(1)
II
6
05
23
(5)
m
07
25
::
16) Bombay (Juhu)
EN
E L E V ATION
3.5
3.5
2
13) Bhubaneshwar
RU N-
WAY
270
282
276
269
(2)
ARP
EI.FIVA
ilO\
(3)
m
227
::
09
27
::
18) Calcutta
19) Chakulia
20) Coimbatorc
21) Coach-Bchar
5.3
129
396
41.5
(5)
::
09
27
m
219
236.5
220
229
23) Delhi (Safdarjung)
212
24) Dibrugarh
109.5
05
23
109
109.5
48
03
21
49
48
::
01
19
108
115.5
109
III
25) Gauhati
26) Gaya
27) Hyderabad
215
212
I10
531
09
27
:2
530
522
531
528
28) lndore
561
07
25
563.5
559.5
29) Jabalpur
495
06
24
480
494.5
30) Jaipur
385
I5
:;
27
389.5
384.4
383.7
381.3
::
236.5
236.5
06
24
228.20
229. I4
:.5
OIL
19R
OIR
l9L
08
26
;::
2.5
2.5
1:
II
1.5
::
135
132
130
127
05
23
402
391
04
22
31) Jhansi
32) Jharsuguda
236
228
33) Kailashadar
27.5
03
21
28.5
21.5
34) Kamalpur
39
01
I9
1:
35) Kandla
29
05
23
29
29
3 6 ) Kanpw
I25
4.8
:
4.5
41.5
41.5
RUSWAY Exr>
EI.ELA710%
(4)
08
Z
22
17) Bombay (Santacruz) 8
RlIN
WA\
No
37) Keshod
49.5
125
124.5
05
23
50.5
50.5
2
IConrinuedl
I*,-26
TABLE 8
.I
RUNWAY DIRECTIONS, RUNWAY END ELEVATIONS AND

ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES- Conrd
AFKOI)KOUI
RCXWAY EN
ELEVAIIOZ
ho
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
217.4
01
19
222
210
39) Kolhapur
607
07
25
ZE
::
272
272
4 1 ) Kulu
273
1084
3Y
1089
1088
42) Khowai
29
4 3 ) Lalitpur
367
44) Lilabari
loo.2
4 5 ) Lucknow
122
09
27
01
19
122
122
122
123
46) Madras
47) Madurai
48) Malda
49) Mangalore
50) Muzaffarpur
5 1 ) Mysore
10.5
136.30
::
:;
::
368.5
363
04
22
101.5
101.5
07
25
E.5
::
*z
09
27
::
f!
138.5
136
53) Panagarh
54) Panna
::,
E.5
:;
:;
::
05
720
710
717.5
708
102
53
715.5
308.5
09
27
::
E
315
307
::
::
73
425
::
55) Passighat
155.5
::
56) Patna
PART Ill
(1)
(2)
ARP
E L E V ATION
(3)
233
::
No.
(4)
R U NEN
E L E V ATION
WAY
Fi
6.7
4.5
59) Port Blair
04
22
3.66
17.8
313.6
06
24
45
05
23
60) Raipur
61) Rajahmundry
::
E
62) Rajkot
134
133
128.5
130
133.5
6 3 ) Ranchi
646
654
632.5
64) Satna
319
65) Sholapur
418
66) Silchar
102
316.5
316
478.5
478
98.5
107.5
6 7 ) Tiruchchirappalli
(5)
58) Porbandar
85
15
G
27
68) Tanjore
76
:2
07
25
::.5
76.5
74.5
69) Tirupati
103
70) Tulihal (lmphal)
774.5
04
22
773.5
775
7 1) Udaipur
509
08
26
511.5
508
72) Varanasi
80
09
27
73) Vijayawada
21
08
26
::.5
!i:
09
4
2
4
74) Vishakhapatnam
106.4
102
27
ii
36
7 5 ) Warmgal
234
234
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL PIJLCS AND GCNPAL
RUNWAY
435.80
410.35
156.5
153
51
!Z
57) Pantnagar
E R O D R O M E
24
:
27
52) Nagpur
S L A
No
38) Khajuraho
40) Kota
BUILDING R~IJRDl~
285
z.5
z.5
,,l.*7
APPENDIX B
(Clause 10.1)
OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
B-I. The spaces to be left out for off-street
parking as given in B-2 to B-3 shall be m
addition to the open spaces left out for
lightmg and ventilation purposes as given in
14. However, one row of car parking may be
provided in the front open space of 12 m
without reducing the clear vehicular
accessway to less than 6 m.
B-l.1 Further 50 percent of the open spaces
required around buildings under 8 may be
allowed to be utilized for parking or loading
or unloading spaces, provided that a
minimum distance of 3.6 m around the
building shall be kept free from any parking,
loading or unloading spaces.
B-2. Each off-street parking space provided
for motor vehicles (cars) shall not be less than
13.75 m in area, and for scooters and cycles

the parking spaces provided shall not be less
than 1.25 m* and 1.00 m2.
B-3. For buildings of different occupancies,
off-street parking space for vehicles shall be
provided as stipulated below:
V EHICLES - Space shall be provided as specified in Table 9 for parking
motor vehicles (cars).
b) O THER T YPES OF VEHICLES - For nonresidential building, in addition to the
parking areas provided in (a) above, 25
to 50 percent additional parking space
shall be provided for parking other types
of vehicles and the additional spaces
a)
MOTOR
TABLE 9 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES

[CIau.re B-3 (a)]
SL No.
cb33JPANCY
O NE C AR
Pooulation between
200000 to 1oooooo
P A R K I N G S PACE
P.
FOR
EVERY
Ponulation
- -r----~----
5ooooto
200000
(1)
1)
(2)
Residential
i) Multi-family
(3)
a) 2 tenements having carpet area 101 to
200 m*
b) 1 tenement exceeding 201 mr carpet
area
4 guest rooms
Population
less than
50000
(4)
(5)
ii) Lodging establishments,

8
12
tounst homes and hotels,
with lodging accommodation
Educational*
70 m2 carpet area or fraction thereof of
2)
theadministrative office area and public
service areas
Institutional (Medical)
20 (Private)
10 beds (Private)
15 (Private)
3)
30 (Public)
IS beds (Public)
25 (Public)
i) Assembly
25 seats
80
120
4)
halls, cinema theatres
ii) Restaurants
Up to first 20 seats nil; one for every
60
40
additional 20 seats
iii) Marriage halls,
200 mr plot area
600
400
community halls
300
i) Business off&s and titms
100 m* carpet area or fraction thereof
200
5)
for private business
500
ii) Public or semi-public offtces 2QO m* carpet area or fraction thereof
300
300
Mercantilet
100 mr carpet area or fraction thereof
200
6)
Industrial
200 mr carpet area or fraction thereof
300
400
7)
storage
500 m2 floor area or part thereof
8)
*Norm 1 --In the case of auditoria for educational buildings, parking space shall be provided as per Sl No. 4.
tNorx I-For plots up to 100 m*, as in the case of shops, parking spaces need not be insisted on.
NO= 3 - For other institutions, transpott/communication centre, parking space requirement shall be assessed based on
the propod building.
NOB 4 - The requirements for off-street parking for metropolitan cities with opulation more than 4 00 000 shall be
broadly W on column (3) and appropriately adapted to suit the increased t raffpIC generated, the traffic pattern as well as
the nature of vehicles in the city.
NATIONAL IWILDING CODE OF INDIA
required for other vehicles shall be as

decided by the Authority. keeping in
view the nature of traffic generated in
the city.
B-4. Off-street parking space shall be provided with adequate vehicular access to a
street; and the area of drives, aisles and such
other provisions required for adequate
manoeuvering of vehicle shall be exclusive of
the parking space stipulated in these rules.
B-5. If the total parking space required by
these rules is provided by a group of property
ownets for their mutual benefits, such use of
this space may be construed as meeting the
off-street parking requirements under these

rules, subject to the approval of the Authority.
B-6. In addition to the parking spaces provided for buildings of mercantile (commercial), industrial and storage type at the rate of
one such space of 3.5 X 7.5 m, for loading and
unloading activities, for each I 000 m* of floor
area or fraction thereof, shall be provided.
B-7. Parking spaces shall be paved and
clearly marked for different types of vehicles.
B-8. In the case of parking spaces provided in
basements, at least two ramps of adequate
width and slope shall be provided, located
preferably at opposite ends.
APPENDIX C
(Clause 11.2.1)
GUIDE FOR PLANTATION OF SHRUBS, TREES AND GREENERY
C-l. The norms for plantation of shrubs,
iii) 100 trees
trees and other greeneries for residential,
per hectare
educational, institutional and industrial
of total
occupancies shall be as follows:
land area.
SI. Occupant.)* P l o t S i z e Greenery IO b e
iv) 40 percent
tn
Planted, Min
No.
of the permissible
a) Residen- For smaller For every 50
open space
plots (smal- families create
tial
to be covered
one small comler than
by greenery.
munity space,of
200 m),
EWS hous- about 100 mNoir
Landscape proposal shall be got approved from
where clumps
ing, slum
the local Authority alongwith the buildmg plan for group
housing schemes.
of trees may be
areas and
the like
planted so as to
provide shade
b ) Educai) I25 trees per
and improve
tional and
hectare.
the quality of
institutional
ii)
50
percent
environment.
of the peri) 10 percent
200 and
missible open
of open
above
space for
space to be
greenery.
left unpaved
for greenery
NOTE - Landscape proposal shall be got approved from
with at
the local Authority alongwith the building plan.
least two
small/ medc) Industrial
300-I 000 5 trees for 300 m
ium trees
plot area and 2
up to plot
trees for every
area of
additional In0 m*
500 m.
area.
ii) An additional one
Above I 000 i) 150 trees
tree for
per hectare.
every 100 m*
ii) 20 percent
area of plot
of the peror part
missible
thereof
open space
above 500 rn!
for greenery.
DEVELOPMENT
CONTROL RULES AND CEN~M
Ill-29
No I E I ~- For industrial plots. it is advisable to have peripheral plantation to minimile pollution especially air and
noise pollution.
greenery such as shrubs, grass and suitably

landscaped.
C-3. COMMUNITY SPACES
No1 E 2 --Large polluting industry should be separated

from the neighbouring residential area by a thick green
belt which should occupy an area of about 15 percent of
the Industrial area.
NOIE 3-- Landscape proposal shall be got approved
from the local Authority alongwith the buildlnp plan.
C-3. I Community Open Spaces -The open

spaces.to be left in the total development of
the area are covered in 5. These open spaces
should be suitably landscaped. A minimum of
125 trees per hectare shall be provided.
C-2. For other occupancies namely assembly,

business, mercantile, the quantum of greenery
shall be planned taking the development as a
whole. However, a minimum of 50 trees shall
be provided per hectare; 25 percent of the
permissible open should be covered by
C-3.2 Roads in a Development Plan-Trees

shall. be provided on either side of the road or
on both sides depending upon the width of the
roads, the location of building along the road
side and other considerations. However,
minimum one tree for every 10 m shall be
provided.
APPENDIX D
(Clause 12.20)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HOUSING
D-l. GENERAL
D-1.1 These requirements cover the planning
and general building requirements of low
income housing developed as clusters (see
0.3, and Table 10). The requirements regarding layout planning of low income housing
colonies are applicable to public agenciesl
government bodies. The requirements on
design and construction of buildings for low
income housing in approved layouts are applicable to public agencies/government bodies
or private builders.
D-l.2 In these planning standards, the general master plan requirement for community
open spaces estimated at 0.3 ha for thousand
persons is provided; road areas are worked
out between 10 and 20 percent of the site area;
one nursery school of 0.1 ha is provided for a
population of 1500 and shoppiyg centres at 4
shops per thousand population are also
covered. It would, therefore, be seen that even
for apparently high densities, the basic
requirements and community facilities are
also taken care of.
7ABLE IO MAXIMUM DENSITIES F O R

LOW INCOME HOUSING
(Clousr O-2.2)
SL No
D ENSITY IN D W E L L I N G
UHITS: ha FOR PLINTH
A REA O F U NIT OF
A
I
30 m
20 ml
No. OF
STOREYS
(2)
(3)
i)
130
85
(4)
I
2
(1)
ii)
250
I70
iii)
300
225
iv)
350
260
v)
400
300
N OTE I - These densities are applicable to a cluster of

dwellings up to 400, with a family of 5 members.
N OTE 2 - V e r t i c a l i n c r e m e n t a l h o u s i n g s h a l l b e
permitted in single ownership plot.
N OTE 3 -These densities include provision for open
spaces, convenience-shopping, nurs&y, and all internal
roads and pathways, but do not include peripheral road
around the- cluster.
NOTE 4 - The minimum density shall be 75 percent of the
above.
D-2. PLANNING
D-l.3 It is emphasized that this typeofdevelopment should apply to clusters of 400 dwelling units, so distributed in the development
under consideration as to maintain the overall
densities of the master plan for the area (See
Note 1 of Table 10.).
u1-30
D-2.1 TI*pe of Development - The type of

development for low income housing shall be
plotted development as row housing, flatted
development as row housing/ block
development as group housing.
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE OF
INDIA
than 6.5 m* with a minimum width

of 2. I m, provided the total area of
both the rooms is not less than 16 m2.
In the case of incremental housing to
be developed as a future two-roomed
house, the total area of rooms to be
provided in the initial and later stages
should not be less than 16m2.
D-2.2 Densir,, - The maximum density, in

dwelling units/ hectare, shall be as givkn in
Table 10.
D-2.3 Size of Plot/ Plinth Area - The
minimum plot size shall be as follows, with
coverage not exceeding 75 percent.
Type of Development
Minimum
Plot Size
Incremental housing with one
30 m2
room, cooking space and
combined bath and WC on
ground floor and future extension
of one room and a bath on the first
floor/ ground floor.
Two roomed house on each floor
for group housing/ individual
ownership house.
40 m2
NOTE I -The minimum sizeof plots takes Into account

the need of incremental housing. In the case of cities
(other than metropolitan cities) with population less than
0.5 million, the size of the plots may be increased by
33; percent.
NOTE 2 - In exceptional cases in metropolitan cities with

population more than I million, the si7e of plots may be
brought down to 25 m in the cases of low income house
colonies hated in congested areas or in areas as decided
by the Authority.
D - 2 . 3 . 1 M INIMUM F R O N T A G E - T h e m i n imum frontage of the plot shall be 3.6 m in

width.
b) WC/ B ATH R O O M
9 The size of independent water-closet
shall be 0.9 X 1.0 m;

ii) The size of independent bath shall be
I.0 X 1.2 m; and
iii) The size of combined bath and water
closet shall be I.0 X 1.8 m and this
may be permitted in a one-roomed
house.
cl K ITCHEN -The size of a cooking alcove
serving as cooking space shall not be less
than 2.4 m* with a minimum width of
1.2 m. The size of individual kitchen
provided in a two-roomed house shall not
be less than 3.3 m2 with a minimum width
of 1.5 m.
4 B A L C O N Y - The minimum width of
individual balcony, where provided, shall
be 0.9 m.
D-3.4 Min@um Height - The minimum
height of rooms/spaces shall be as follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
NOTE - The minimum frontage of 3.6m isdesirable. For

an economical layout, group housing appears to be a
good solution. But if plotted development is to be
adopted and if there are occasions when sufficient
frontage is not available, the same may be reduced to 3 m.
D-2.4 Height of Building- The height of

building shall not exceed 15 m.
NOTE - For buildings up (0 the height of IS m, there is no
Habitable room
Kitchen
Bath/ WC
Corridor
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.1
m
m
m
m
D-3.4.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the

average height of roof for habitable rooms
shall be 2.6 m Bnd the minimum height at
eaves shall be 2.0 m.
need lo provide lifts.
D-3. GENERAL BUILDING

REQUIREMENTS
D-3.1 The requirements of parts of buildings
shall be as in D-3.2 to D-3.7.
D-3.2 Plinth -The minimum height of
plinth shall be 30 cm from the surrounding
ground level.
D-3.5 Lighting and Ventilation -- T h e

openings through windows, ventilators and
other openings for lighting and ventilation
shall be as per 14.1.2.
NoTE - The windows and other openings shall abut on
to open spaces either through areas left open within the
plot (see D-3.3) or the front, side and rear spaces rovided
in the layouts which shall be deemed to be suf9.
lcient for
light and ventilation purposes.
D-3.3 Size of Room
D-3.6 Steirs - The following criteria shall be

adopted for internal individual staircase:
a)
a)
HA B I T A B L E R
O O M
9 In the case of a one-roomed house,
the size of the multipurpose room,

including space for cooking, shall be
not less than 12.5 m* with a minimum
width of 2.4 m.
ii) In the case of a two-roomed house,
the size. of a room shall not be less
PART
Ill
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL ItULEs AND GENFitAL
1)
2)
3)
4)
b)
INIMUM
2
2
3
3
I D T H
storeyed-straight
storeyed-winding
or more storeyed-straight
or more storeyed-winding
R ISER
0.60
0.75
0.75
0.90
20
m
m
m
m
cm,
MUX
C)
TR E A D
1) 2 storeyed
22.5 cm,*
2) 3 storeyed or more
25 cm,
Mlh
Min
d) HEAD ROOM - The minimum clear head
room shall be 2.1 m.

-This could be reduced to 20 cm as the clear
tread between pcrpends, with possibility of open riser as
* NOTE
well as nosing and inclined riser 10 have an effective

going of 22.5 cm.
D-3.7 Circulation Area - The circulation

area on any floor including staircase, shall not
exceed:
a) 2.0 m*/unit where four dwelling units are
grouped around a staircase; and
b) 4.0 m*/unit where two dwelling units are
grouped.
D-4. ROADS AND PATH-WAYS

D-4. I The area under roads and pat h-ways in
such housing p ects shall normally not
exceed 20 percerit9co the total land area ofthe
project.
Access to the dwelling units, particularly
where motorised vehicles are not normally
expected shall be by means of paved footpaths with a right of way of 6 m and a pathway of 2 m only. The right of way shall be
adequate to allow for the plying ofemergency
vehicles and also for road side drains and
plantation.
Where motorable accessways are not

provided and pedestrian pathways are
provided, the minimum width of such
pedestrian path-way shall be 3 m, which shall
not serve more than 50 m and eight plots on
each side of the.pathway.
D-5. OTHER REQUIREMENTS
D-5.1 One water tap per dwelling unit may be
provided, where adequate drinking water

supply is available. If supply is inadequate,
public hydrants shall be provided. In the
absence of piped water supply, it could be
done through hand pumps.
D-5.2 The infrastructural services shall be
provided before the plots are handed over to
individual owners.
D-6. SITE AND SERVICES SCHEMES
D-6./ The developed plot sizes shall be as
per D-2.3. Services would have to be laid by
the Agency concerned as per the provisions of
the Code. In so far as roads andpath-ways are
concerned, they could also be in line withD-4.
D-6.2 Site and services schemes shall provide
for the following:
a) The infrastructural needs for a permanent
housing, depending upon requirements;
b) A service sanitary core in the plot; and
c ) P e r m i s s i o n t o alloti t e m p o r a r y
construction on the plot.
No it - A skeletal structure of columns and roof or a
developed plinth may be nrovided. where feasible.
APPENDIX E
(Clause 12.21)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS

MEANT FOR USE OF PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
E-O GENERAL
E-O.1 For the purpose of this Appendix, the

E-O. 1. I ACXNG - Those manifestations of
E-0.1.2.2 H E AR ING DISABILITIES - Deafness

or hearing handicaps that might make an
individual insecure in public areas because he
is unable to communicate or hear warning
signals.
the aging processes that significantly reduce

mobility, flexibility, co-ordination, and
perceptiveness but are not accounted for in
the categories mentioned in E-0.2.2.
E-0.1.2.3 NON-AMBULATORY DISABILITIESImpairments that, regardless of cause or manifestation, for all practical purposes, confine
individuals to wheelchairs.
E-0.1.2 D I S AB I L I T I E S
Impairments that cause individuals to walk

with difficulty or insecurity. Individuals using
braces or crutches, amputees, arthritics, spastics, and those with pulmonary and cardiac ills
may be semi-ambulatory.
E-0.1.Z.f D I S A B I L I T I E S O F INCO-ORDI-
Faulty co-ordination or palsy

from brain spinal, or peripheral nerve injury.
NATION -
111.32
E-0.1.2.4 SEMI-AMBULATORY DISABILITIES-
E-0.1.2.5 SIGHT DISABILITIES - Total blindness or impairments affecting sight to the

extent that the individual functioning in public areas is insecure or exposed to danger.
E-0.1.3
R A M P S.
R AMPS WITH GRADIENTS Because the term ramp has a multitude of

meanings and uses, its use in this text is clearly
defined as ramps with gradients (or ramps
with slopes) that deviate from what would
otherwise be considered the normal level. An
exterior ramp, as distinguished from a walk,
would be considered an appendage to a
building leading to a level above or below the
existing ground level. As such, a ramp shall
meet certain requirements .similar to those
imposed upon stairs.
E-0.1.4 W ALK, W ALKS - Because the terms
walks walks have a multitude of meanings
and uses, their use in this standard is clearly
defined as a predetermined, prepared-surface,
exterior path-way leading to or from a
building or facility, or from one exterior area
to another, placed on the existing ground level
and not deviating from the level of the existing
ground immediately adjacent.
E-l.
E-1.2.3 Wherever walks cross other walks,

dirveways, or parking lots they should blend
to a common level.
E-1.2.3.1 This requirement, does not require

the elimination of kerbs, which, particularly if
they occur at regular intersections, are a distinct safety feature for all of the handicapped.
particularly the blind. The preferred method
of meeting the requirement is to have the walk
incline to the level of the street. However, at
principal intersections, it is vitally important
that the kerbs run parallel to the street, up to
the point where the walk is inclined, at which
point the kerb would turn in and gradually
meet the level of the walk at its highest point.
A less preferred method would be to gradually
bring the surface of the driveway or street to
the level of the walk. The disadvantage of this
method is that a blind person would not know
when he has left the protection of a walk has
entered the hazards of a street or driveway
(see Fig. 2).
SITE DEVELOPMENT
E-1.1 Almost any building can be made

accessible to handicapped persons by so planning the site that the terraces, retaining walls
and winding walks are used effectively.
E-1.1.1 Site development is the most effective

means to resolve the problems created by
topography, definitive architectural designs
or concepts, water table, existing streets, and
typical problems, singularly or collectively, so
that ingress and egress to buildings by physically disabled may be facilitated while preserving the desired design and effect of the
architecture.
max. GRADIENT 1 IN 10
KERB max. 2+5cm H I G H
Fig. 2 Suitable Method of B l e n d i n g

Pavement and Roadway Surfaces
E-1.2.4 A walk shall have a level platform at
the top which is at least 130 X 150 cm, if a door

swings out onto the platform or toward the
walk. This platform shall extend at least 30 cm
beyond each side of the doorway.
E-1.2.1 Public walks shall be at least 120 cm
E-1.2.5 A walk shall have a level platform at

least 90 cm deep and 150 cm wide, if the door
does not swing onto the platform ort.owards
the walk. This platform shall extend at least 30
cm beyond each side of the doorway.
wide and shall have a gradient not greater

than 5 percent.
E-l.3 Parking Lots
E-l .2 Waiks
E-1.2.1.1 It is essential that the gradient of

walks and driveways be less than that
prescribed for ramps, since walks would be
devoid of handrails and kerbs and would be
considerably longer and more vulnerable to
the elements. Walks of near maximum grade
and considerable length should have level
areas at intervals for purposes of rest and
safety. Walks or driveways should have a nonslip surface.
E-1.2.2 Such walks shall be of a continuing

common surface not interrupted by steps or
abrupt changes in level.
PART 111
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND CENFBAL
E-1.3.1 Spaces that are accessible and

approximate to the facility should be set aside
and identified for use by individuals with
physical disabilities.
E-1.3.2 A parking space open on one side,

allowing
. . . . room
. . for. individuals in wheelchairs
or indivrduals on braces and crutches to get in
and out of an automobile onto a level surface,
suitable for wheeling and walking, is
adequate.
E-1.3.3 Parking spaces for individuals with
physical disabilities when placed between two
BUILDING RWUIREMEPITS
ru.33
conventional diagonal or head-on parking

spaces should be 3.6 m wide.
E-l .3.4 Care in planning should be exercised,
so that individuals in wheelchairs and individuals using braces and crutches are not compelled to wheel or walk behind parked cars.
E-1.3.5 Consideration should be given to the
distribution of spaces for use by the disabled
in accordance with the frequency and persistence of parking needs.
E-1.3.6 Walks shall be in conformity
with E-i.2.
E-2. BUILDINGS
E-2.1 Ramps with Gradients- Where ramps
with gradients are necessary or desired, they
shall conform to the following requirements:
(see Fig. 3).
E-2.1.1 A ramp when provided shall not have
a slope greater than 1 in 12.
E-2.1.2 A ramp shall have handrails on at
least one side, and preferably two sides, that
are 80 cm beyond the top and bottom of the
the ramp, that are smooth, and that extend
30 cm beyond the top and bottom of the ramp.
RECESS
IN
ENTRANCE
NOTE 1- Where handrails are specified to be of heights

other than 80 cm, it is recommended that two sets of
handrails be installed to serve all people. Where major
traffic is predominantly children, particularly physically
disabled children, extra care should be exercised In the
placement of handrails, in accordance with the nature of
the facility and the age group or groups being serviced
(see ulso E-3).
NOTE 2 _ Care should be taken that the extension of the
handrails is not in itself a hazard. The extension may be
made on the side of a continuing wall.
E-2.1.3 A ramp shall have a non-slip surface.

E-2.1.3. I The provision of non-slip surfaces
on ramps greatly assists the handicapped persons with semi-ambulatory and ambulatory
disabilities. Non-slip surfaces are provided by
many standard finishes and materials. The
surfaces of the concrete ramps can be made
non-skid by brooming the surface or by finishing with an indenting roller.
E-2.1.4 A ramp shall have a level platform at
the top which is at least 180 X 180 cm, if a door
swings out onto the platform or toward the
ramp. This platform shall extend at least
30cm beyond each side of the doorway (see
Fig. 4).
E-2.1.5 Each ramp shall have at least 180 cm
of straight clearance at the bottom.
DOOR
\r
E X P O S E D POSlTlON 7
150X I SO cm min.
LEVEL PLATFORM
n c __
yyp
KERB T O E X P O S E D S I D E O F
EXTEND HANDRAIL AT HEAD

H A N D R A I L S min. 91.0 c m
ABOVE RAMP LEVEL
E X T E N D H A N DR A I L
FOOT OF RAMP
ALTERNATIVE STEPPE
APPROACH WHERE RAMP
GRADIENT EXCEEDS I IN I2
TREAD min. 30 cm RISERS
max. IS cm
AT
RAMP PREFERRED max.

GRADIENT I IN 12min. W I D T H
150.0 cm max. LENGTH 90.0 cm
WHERE RAMP GRADIENT
EXCEEDS I IN 12
Fig, 3 Example of Ramped Approach
Itt-34
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE Of INDIA
K:-_.3.2 I he floor on the lnstdc and outslde of

each doorway shall be level for a distance of
15Ocm from thcdoorin thcdirecticlnthedoor
swings and shall extend 30 cm beyond each
jade of the door.
RAMP
UP OR
DOWN
E-2.3._? Sharp Inclines and abrupt changes In

Icvcl shall be a\olded at doorsills. As much ax
possible. thresholds shall be flush with rhe
floor.
Ftg. 4 Lel~el A r e a s R e q u i r e d a t Ed (!/

Ramps Leading to Doorways
E-2.1.6 Ramps shall have level platforms at
9.5 m intervals for purposes of rest and safety
and shall have platforms wherever they turn.
E-2.2 Entrance5
E-2.2. I At least one primary entrance to each

building shall be usable by individuals m
wheelchairs (see Fig. 5A) and shall be
indicated by a sign (see Fig. 5B).
E-2.2.2 At least one entrance usable by
individuals in wheelchairs shall be on a level
that would make the elevators accessible.
E-2.3 Doors and Doorways
E-2.3.1 Doors shall have a clear opening of

not less than 80 cm when open and shall be
operable by a single effort.
E-2.3.1.1 Two-leaf doors are not usable by
those with disabilities defined in E-0.1.2.3and
E-0.1.2.4 unless they operate by a single effort,
or unless one of the two leaues meets the
requirements of E-2.3.1.
E-2.3./.2 It is recommended that all doors

have kick plates extending from the bottom of
the door to at least 40 cm from the floor, or be
made of a material and finish that would
safely withstand the abuse they might receive
f r o m c a n e s , c r u t c h e s , w h e e l c h a i r footplatforms, or wheelchair wheels.
E-2.3.3./ ( a r c s h o u l d b e t a k e n 111 t h e
selection. placement and setting of door
clo\crs so that they do not pre\ent the uhe of
door> bk t h e physIcally diahlcd. I IIIIC-del;t)
door closer\ arc recommended.
E - 2 . 3 . 3 . 2 A u t o m a t i c doors that otherwise
conform to 1Y-2.3.l. E-2.3.2 and E-2.3.3 tire
very satisfactorv.
k..-2.4 Starrs - S t a i r s w h e n m a d e 111 w o o d

shall conform to accepted standards [I I l(4)].
with the following additional considerationb.
E-2.4.l Steps in stairs that might require use
by those with disabilities defined in E-U. 1.2.4
and E-U./..?._5 or by the aged shall not hate
abrupt (square) nosing (SW Fig. 6A).
E-2.4.1.1 Individuals with restrictions in the

knee, ankle, or hip, with artificial legs, long
leg braces. or comparable conditions cannot,
without great difficulty and hazard, use steps
with nosing as illustrated in Fig. 6A. but may
safely and with minimum difficulty use steps
with nosing as illustrated in Fig. 6B. Open
risers should not be recommended.
E-2.4.2 Stairs shall have handrails 80 cm high
as measured from the tread at the face of the
riser. A desirable shape of the handrail is given
in Fig. 7.
ORANGE (LUMINOUS COLOUR)
r
/
&lTE
Fig. SA Plan of Doors Suitable for the Whalchair Bound
&LACK
Fig. SB Sign for use at the Entrances
NOTE - Because entrances also serve as exits, some being particularly Important in case ofan emergency, and because the
proximity of such exits to all parts of buildings and facilities, in accordance with their design and function, isessential, it is
preferable that all or most entrances (exits) should be accessible to, and usable by, individuals in wheelchairs and
individuals with other forms of physical disability herein applicable.
Fig. 5 Entrances
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROI RCLES AND GENERAL WILDING REQUIREMENTS
N O T E- Where handrails arc speclficd to be of heights

other than 80 cm, it is recommended that two sets of
handrails be installed to serve all people. Where traffic is
predominantly children, particularly physically disabled
children, extra care should be exercised in the placement
of handrails in accordance with the nature of the facihty
and the age groups being serviced. Dual handrails maybc
necessary as illustrated in Fig. 6C.
hazard. The extension may be made on the

side of a continuing wall. At right angle junction of walls and at landing levels, the handrails should be rounded off to minimize the
hazards due to sharp projecting corners (see
Fig. 8).
PROJECTING NOSINGS
NOT RECOMMENDED WITH

PROJECTIONS MORE THAN
2.5 cm
6A
r 16.5 cm max.
1
r24.Ocmmin.
1
2.5 cm
RECOMMENDED
6B
N OTE -Where codes specify handralls to be at heights

other than 80 cm. it IS. recommended that fwo sets of
handrails be installed to serve all people. Wheretraflic IS
predominantly children, particularly physvzaliy disabled
children, extra care should be exercised m the placement
of handrails in accordance with the nature of the faclhty
and the age group or groups being serviced D u a l
handrails may be necessary as Illustrated m Fig hC.
Fig. 7 Suggested Details for Handrail

30.5cm MINT rEXTEND H A N D R AIL A l
STAIRCASE
FOR ADULTS
CONTINUOUS HANDRAIL
AROUND LANDING
FOR CHILDREN
4
Fig. 6 Stairs
E-2.4.3 Stairs shall have at least one handrail
that extends at least beyond the top step and
beyond the bottom step.
E-2.4.3.1 Care should he taken that the
extension of the handrails is not in itself a
Fig. 8 Example of Staircase Plan for

Ambulant L%abled
E-2.4.4 The common formula for calculation
of treads and risers shall be 1 tread + 2 risers=
60 cm. Steps should, wherever possible, and in
conformity with existing step formulae, have
risers that do not exceed 17 cm. The treads
may have non-slip surface.
E-2.5 Floors
E-2.5.1 Floors shall have a non-slip surface.
E-2.5.2 Floors on a given storey shall be of a
common level throughout or be connected by
a ramp in accordance with E-2.1.1 to E-2.1.6.
NATION7.L BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
E-2.5.2.1 There shall not be a difference

between the level of the floor of q corridor ark
the level of the floor of the toilet r-ooms.
4 has a door (where doors are used), that
E-2.5.2.2 There shall not be a difference

between the level of the floor of a corridor and
the level of a meeting room, dining room, or
any other room, unless proper ramps are
provided.
and parallel to the floor, 3.8 cm clearance between rail and wall, and fastened
securely at ends and centre; and
is, 80 cm wide and swings out;
4 has handrails on each side, 78 cm high
d has a water closet with the seat 50cm

from the floor.
E-2.6, Toilet Rooms- It is essential that an

app1 opr iate number of toilet rooms, in accordance with the nature and use of a specific
building or facility, be made accessible to, and
usable by, the physically handicapped.
NOTE- The design and mounting of the water closet is of

considerable importance. A wall-mounted water closet
with a narrow understructure that recedes sharply is most
desirable. If a floor mourited water closet must be used, it
should not have a front that is wide and perpendicular to
the floor at the front of the seat. The bowl should be
shallow at the front of the seat and t&n backwards more
than downwards to allow the individual in a wheelchair to
get close to the water closet with the seat of the
wheelchair.
E-2.6.1 Toilet rooms shall have space to

allow traffic of individuals in wheelchairs
(see Fig. 9 and 10).
E-2.6,3 Toilet rooms shall have wash basins
E-2.6.2 Toilet rooms shall have at least one

toilet stall for the ambulant disabled (see Fig.
I1 and 12), that:
a) is 90 cm wide;
b) is at least 140 cm, preferably 150 cm
deep;
with narrow aprons, which when mounted at

standard height are usable by individuals in
wheelchairs; or they shall have wash basins
mounted higher, when particular designs
demand, so that they are usable by individuals
in wheelchairs.
WASH HAN0 BASIN WITH
TOWEL DISPENSER OVER
RIM A7 Sl.Ocm ABOVE FLOOR
IS?-Ocm MIN OR ISZ~Ocm WHERE

OEPTM IS LESS IHAN 17%ocm OR
&BOOR IN ALTERNATIVE POStlION
HORIZONTAL PULL RAJL
lslroelmlwGEs
All dimensions
in cmtimctrcs.
Fig. 9 Suggested Plan WC Comparrmenf for rho Wheelchair Bound

?ARf III
D E V E L O P M E N T CONTltOLPULES AND CENmAL
BUILDING REQUlREMMTS
l2
./.I!
.!,II
-1
I.
!I.
!I
I(
.I
PAPER
TOWEL
- VERTICAL RAIL
83.5 TO 12Y.5 cm
--jy
C
rOIl.ET
0 c
PAPFK
1
R A I L A T 28.Ocm
A B O V E W C SEAI-
ABOVE FLOOR
PULL
BASIN
RIM A T
cm
A B O V E Fl .OOR
WC
SEAT
RAIL
AT
107.0 cm
78.0
ABOVE FLOOR
AT
50.0 cm
ABOVE
FLOOR
IFig. 10 Section Through WC Compartment for (he Wheelchair Bound
~63.5 cm MN PREFERRED
~0/;
p
26.0cm
33.0 CI
~TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
TOILET PAPER
~I~ORI~ONTAL RA I L AT
28.0 cm ABOVE
W C SEAT L E V E L
- VERlKAL RAIL
03.5 TO 120*5cm
AWVE CLOOO
-VERTICAL RAIL
1293cm MlGbl
-r)ECOYMNDED
EXTENSION TO
MORIZONTAL
RAIL
/-WORlZONTAL PULL
RAIL
Fig. 11 Suggested Plan WC Compartment

for the Ambulant Disabled
Fig. 1.2 Section Through WC Compartment

for the Ambulant Disabled
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
E-2.6.3.1 The drain pipes and hot-water pipes
under a lavatory shall be covered or insulated

so that a wheelchair individual without sensation will not burn himself.
E-2.6.4 Some mirrors and shelves shall be
provided above the wash basins at a height as
low as possible and not more than 1 m above
the floor, measured from the top of the shelf
and the bottom of the mirror.
E-2.6.5 Toilet rooms for men shall have wallmounted urinals with the opening of the basin
48 cm from the floor, or shall have floormounted urinals that are on level with the
main floor of the toilet room.
E-2.6.6 Toilet rooms shall have an approp-
riate number of towel racks, towel dispensers,
?**t fl DRVRLDPMl!NT
CONTROL
and other dispensers and disposal units

mounted not higher than 1 m from the floor.
E-3. DESIGNING FOR CHILDREN
E-3.1 The dimensions given in this Appendix
are for adults of average stature. In designing
buildings for use by children, it may be necessary to alter some dimensions, such as height
of handrails, in accordance with accepted
standards [III (5)].
E-4. For additional information regarding
other facilities and conveniences required in
buildings meant for use of physically handicapped, reference may be made to accepted
standards [III (6)].
RULES A N D CF.NORAL RUILDINC REQUlREMkJWS
11l-39
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as good practice and
accepted standards in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adoptedat the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listedmay be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.
In thefollowing list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this Part.
(I) IS: 8888-1978 Guide for requirements of
low income housing
(2) IS:63 13 Code of practice for anti-termite
measures in buildings:
IS:6313 (Part I)-1971 Part I Constructional measures
IS:6313 (Part. II)-1971 Part II Preconstructional chemical treatment
measures
IS:6313 (Part-III)-1971 P a r t 111
Treatment for existing buildings
(3) lS:3792-I978 Guide for heat insulation
of non-industrial buildings (first
revision)
(4) IS: 1634-1973 Code of practice for design

and construction of wood stairs in
houses first revision)
(5)
IS:4838 Anthropometric dimensions for

school children:
IS:4838 (Part I)-1969 Part I Age
group 5 to 1 I years
IS:4838 (Part-II)-1969 Part II Age
group 12 to 16 years
(6)
IS:4963- 1968 Recommendations for

buildings and facilities for the
physically handicapped
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
The National Building Codeof India consists of the following Parts and Sections:
PART I
DEFINITIONS

Section I Loads
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Section 6 Steel
PART VIII
Section I
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES

Section .I Water Supply
PART X
Bl:REAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
1. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS BASED ON

OCCUPANCY
. . ..
4. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
...
5. FIRE ZONES
...
6: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL INDIVIDUAL

OCCU PANClES
...
IO
7. EXIT REQUIREMENTS
...
28
8. REQUIREMENTS OF RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

(GROUP A)
...
31
Y. REQUIREMENTS OF EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS

(GROUP B)
...
33
10. REQUIREMENTS OF INSTITUTIONAL BUlLDlNGk

(GROUP C)
..,
34
II. REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS

(GROUP D)
...
35
12. REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS BUILDINGS

(GROUP E)
...
38
I3. REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE BUILDINGS

(GROUP F)
...
39
14. REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

(GROUP G)
...
40
1.5. REQUIREMENTS OF STORAGE BUILDINGS (GROUP H)
...
42
16. REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS FOR HAZARDOUS

lJSES (GROUP J)
...
43
...
44
...
50
...
54
...
60
APPEND/X A FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR
BUILDINGS MORE THAN ISm IN HEIGHT

APPEND/X B GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF FIRE
DETECTORS
APPEND/X C FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR
VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

APPEND/X D GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND
EVACUATION PROCEDURES FOR HIGH

RISE BUILDINGS
?ANT
Iv FINI
rNolImloN
lv-
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part of the Code deals with safety from fire and explosion. It specifies the demarcation of
fire zones, restrictions on construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings
based on occupancy, types of building construction according to fire resistance of the structural
components and other restrictions and requirements necessary to minimize danger to life from
fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can be evacuated. The Code recognizes that safety
of life is more than a matter of exits and accordingly deals with various matters which are
considered essential to the safety of life.
0.2 Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different
materials and structural elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of
buildin@ must also be taken into consideration for assessing the extent of hazards and methods
should then be devised by which the hazards could be minimized. An indefinite combination of
variable is involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which can not be quantified. The
requirements of this Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engmeering design
approach should be adopted for ensuringafire safe design for buildings. It would also be necessary
for this purpose to associate qualified and trained fire protection engineers with the planning of
buildings, so that adequate fne protection measures could be incorporated in the building design
right from the beginning.
0.3 Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this part is to specify
measures which will provide that degree of safety fromfire which can be reasonably achieved. The
Code endeavours to avoid requirements which might involve unreasonable hardships or
unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal use and occupancy of buildings, but insists
upon compliance with minimum standards for fire safety necessary in public interest.
Iv- 2
NATIONAL
UJU5lNG CODE OF INDIA
0.4 This part does not cover general fire prevention. Nor does it cover the prevention ofacctdental
personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
0.5 This part recognizes that panic in a building on tire may be uncontrollable, but dealswith the
potential panic hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic.
Experience indicates that panic seldom develops even in the presence of potential danger, so long
as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits which they can see within a reasonable distance
and with no obstructions or undue congestion in the path of travel. However, any uncertainty as to
the location or adequancy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or fumes and the stoppage of
travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles and falls on stairs, may be
conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.
0.6 Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building such as space between ceiling
and false ceiling, horizontal and vertical ducts,etc. tend to act as flues/ tunnels during a fire.
Provision should, therefore, be made to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
0.7 Nothing in this part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building
construction, more exits or otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified
in this part.
0.8 Compliance with this part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for
other provisions for safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy
condittons. Nor shall any provision of this Code be construed as requiring or permitting.any
addition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy conditions.
0.9 One of the major points brought out in this part is the limitation of heights and areas of
buildins based on fire saety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter
Table 2 based on local conditions, but the ratios of areas as maintained in the table for different
occupancies and types of construction shall be adhered to.
0.10 Advantage has been taken of the developments, particularly in tire resistance rating of
materials, designating types of construction in a rational manner and relating the area1imitatior.s
of different occupancies to dtfferent types of construction. In-the light of the above, thebaste
Indian Standards on fire safety are to be revised to conform to the latest developments in this field.
0.11 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of implementationofthis part,
some useful suggestions have emerged. These have been incorporated in this revision to the extent
possible. The major changes in this revision are:
a) A table has been included giving the fire resistance ratings for various types of construction
for structural and non-structural members.
b) The requirements for wet riser, wet riser-cum-downcomer, automatic sprinklerinsta!lation,
high pressure water spray or foam generating system, etc, for buildings more than 15 m in
height have been included.
cl S rinkler concession given for travel distance and capacity of exits has been withdrawn to
a!ford greater safety to the occupants of a building.
4 The requirements of fire detection/extinguishing system for each occupancy group have
been elaborated to cover various areas in particular occupancy.
e) Fire.protection requirements for buildings more than 15 m in height have been included in
Appendix A.
r) Guidelines for selection of various types of fire detectors for installation in different
occupancies have been included in Appendix B.
B) Fire protection considerations for venting in industrial buildings have been covered in
Appendix C.
h) Guidelines for fire drill and evacuation procedures for high rise building have been included
in Appendix D.
hat
Iv Ftu rBolxcnon
IV-
1. SCOPE
C OMBUSTIBLE M A T E R I A L -A material is
combustible if it burns or adds heat to a fire
1.1 This part covers the requirements of fire

protection of buildings through classification
of buildings based on occupancy, type of
construction, and their requirements.
when tested for non-combustibility in

accordance with good practice [(IV(l)]*.
1.2 This part also covers the exit

requirements for all occupancies.
2. TERMINOLOGY
C OVERED AREA-Ground area covered by

level. The area covered by the following in the
open spaces is excluded from covered area
(see Table 2):
4 garden, rockery, well and well structures,
plant nursery, waterpool, swimmingpool

(if uncovered), platform round a tree,
tank, fount&n, bench, chubufru with
open top and unenclosed on sides by
walls and the like;

definitions shall apply:
A U T O M A T I C F IRE D ETECTING AND A L A R M
SYSTEM -An arrangement of automatic fire
detectors, such as a fuse working at a given

temperature, a thermostat or a fluid filled tube
or an electronic device, for detecting an
outbreak of fire, and sounders and other
equipment for automatic transmission and
indication of alarm signals without manual
intervention. The system also has provision
for testing of circuits and, where required for
the operation of auxiliary services.
AUTOMATIC S PRINKLER S YSTEM - A n
arrangement of piping, sprinklers and

connected equipment designed to operate
automatically by the heat of fire and to
discharge water upon that fire and which may
also simultaneously give automatic audible
alarm.
B UILDING -Any structure for whatsoever
fixed platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice
or projection, part of a building or anything
intended to enclose any. land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents,
shumiunuhs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected
for temporary and ceremonial occasions with
the permission of the Authority shall not be
considered as building.
B U I L D I N G . HE I G H T O F- T h e v e r t i c a l
distance measured in the case of flat roofs,
from the average level of the ground around

and contiguous to the building or as decided
by the Authority to the highest point of the
building adjacent to the street wall; and in the
case of pitched roofs, up to the point where the
external surface of the outer wall intersects the
finished surface of the sloping roof; and in the
case of gables facing the road, the mid-point
between the eaves level and the ridge.
Architectural features serving no other
heights.
IV-
b)
drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit, gully

pit, chamber, gutter arid the like;
c) compound wall, gate, unstoreyed porch

and portico, slide, swing, uncovered
staircases, ramp areas covered by chhuju
and the like; and
d) watchmans booth, pumphouse, garbage
shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and

such other utility structures meant for the
s e r v i c e s o f the
building
under
consideration.
NOTE - For the purpose of this part, covered area equals
the plot area minuk the area due for open spaces in the
plot.
DOWNCOMER -A wet riser fed from an
overhead tank installed on the building.
D RY R ISER - A vertical water ,nain inside a
building, not normally connected to a water

main or an automatic stationary pump, with
an inlet or inlets at street level,.through which
water can be pumped by fire service pumps to
hydrant outlets or hose reels at various floors.
F IRE E XIT-A way out leading to an escape
route.
F IRE R E S I S T A N C E ( CR I T E R I A O F ) - F i r e
resistance is a property of an element of
building construction and is the measure of its
ability to satisfy for a stated period some or all
of the following criteria: (a) resistance to
collapse, (h) resistance to flame penetration,
ahd (c) resistance to excessive temperature
rise on the unexposed face.
F IRE S EPARATION -The distance in metres
or from other site, or from the opposite side of
street or other public space to the building for
the purpose of preventing the spread of fire.
---_-_
l
In this part where reference is made to good practice

in relation to design, testing, construction procedures
or other information, the appropriate document listed
at the end of this part may be used as a guide to the
interpretation of this term.
NATKbNAL BUlLoIwC CXVDC O F I N D I A
FlkE TOWER -An enclosed staircase which

can only be approached from the various
floors through landings or lobbies separated
from both the floor areas and the staircase by
fire-resisting doors, and open to the outer air.
F IRE W A L L-A fire resistance rated wall,
having protected openings, which restricts the
spread of fire and extends continuously from
the foundation to at least I m above theroof.
F LOOR A REA R ATIO (FAR)--The
quotient
(plinth area) on all floors by the area of the
plot:
FAR = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Plot area
HIGH RISE B UILDING -A building in which a
stack effect is created by a fire and in which
fire fighting can not be carried out from
outside with the fire appliances available with
the fire services. For the purpose of this part,
all buildings more than 15m in height shall be
considered as high rise buildings.
H ORIZONTAL E X I T-An arrangement which
allows alternative egress from a noor area to
another floor at or near the same level in an
adjoining building or an adjoining part of the
same building .with adequate fire separation.
O CCUPANCY OR U SE G ROUP --The principal
building is used or intended to be used: fort he
purposes of classification of a building
according to the occupancy. an occupancy
shall be deemed to include subsidiary
occupancies which are contingent upon it.
P LINTH AREA-The built-up covered area

measured at the floor I9vel of the basement or
of any storey.
ROOF EXITS -A means of escape on to the
roof of a building; but acceptable only where
the roof has access to it from the ground. The
exit shall have adequate cut-off within the
building from staircase below.
SJTE (PLOT)-- A parcel (piece) of land
TRAVEI DISTANCE-The distance to be

travelled from point in a building to a
protected escape route. external escape route
or final exit.
V ENTILATION -Supply of outside air into, or
the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
V E N T I N G , FIRE -The process of inducing
heat and smoke to leave a building as quickly
as possible by such paths that lateral spread of

tire and heat is checked, fire fighting
operations are facilitated and minimum fire
damage is caused.
V O L U M E T O PLOI AKEA RAIIO (VPR)-The
ratio of volume of building measured in cubic
metres to the area of the plot measured in
square metres and expressed in metres.
WFI RISK -~ A charged vertical water main
inside a building, connected to a water main
or an automatic stationary pump and fitted
with internal hydrants landing valves, hose
reels for tapping water at various floors.
NOII
For
made
definitions 01 other Icrms. referenceshall be

we [ I V(Z)].
I u good prac~
3. CLASSIFICA-IION
OF BUILDINGS
BASEDONOCCUPANCY
3. I Gene& Class{/icotio,t - All buildings,

whether existing or hereafter erected, shall be
classified, according to the use or the
character of occupancy. in one of the
following groups:
Group A Residential
Group B Educational
Group C Institutional
Group D Assembly
Group E Business
Group F Mercantile
Group G lqdustrial
Group H Storage
Group J Hazardous
3.1.1 M i n o r .occupancy i n c i d e n t a l t o
operations in another type of occupancy shall
be considered as part of the main occupancy
and shall be classified under the relevant
group for the main occupancy.
Examples of buildings in each group are
given in 3.1.1.1 to3.1.1.9.
3./././ GKOI!P A RESIDE~IIIAL BUILDINGS These shall include any building in which
sleeping accommodation is provided for
normal residential purposes, with or without
cooking or dining or both facilities, except
any building classified under Group C.
Buildings and structures under Group A shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision
Subdivision
dwellings
Subdivision
Subdivision
Subdivision
A-l Lodging or rooming houses

A-2 One-or two-family private
A-3 Dormitories
A-4 Apartment houses (flats)
A-5 Hotels
a) SUBDIVISION
ROOMING
A-l
HOUSES
LODGING OR
- These shall
I.5
include any building or group of buildings under the same management, in

which separate sleeping accommodation
for a total of not more than 15 persons, on
transient or permanent basis, with or
without dining facilities, but without
cooking facilities for individuals, is
provided.
A lodging or rooming house shall b e
classified as a dwelling in Subdivision A-2
if no room in any of its private dwelling
units is rented to more than three persons.
b)
SUBDIVISION A-2 ONE- OR TWO-FAMILY

DWELLING -These
shall
include any private dwelling which is
occupied by members of a single family
and has a total sleeping accommodation
for not more than 20 persons.
3. J. 1.3 GROUP C INSTlTUTlONAL BUILDINGS

-These shall include any building or part
thereof, which is used for purposes, such as
medical or other treatment or care of persons
suffering from physical or mental illness,
disease or infirmity; care of infants,
convalescents or aged persons and for penal
or correctional detention in which the liberty
of the inmates is restricted. Institutional
buildings ordinarily provide sleeping
accommodation for the occupants.
Buildings and structures under Group C shall
PRIVATE
Subdivision C-l Hospitals and sanatoria

Subdivision C-2 Custodial institutions
Subdivision C-3 Penal and mental institutions
SUBDIVISION C-l
SANATORIA -This
If rooms in a privatedwelling are rented

to outsiders, these shall be for
accommodating not more than three
persons per room.
If sleeping accommodation for more than
20 persons is provided in any one
residential building, it shall be classified
as a building in Subdivision A-3 or A-4 as
the case may be.
~-3 DORMITORIES - These
shall include any building in which group
sleeping accommodation is provided,
with or without dining facilities, for
persons who are not members of the same
family, in one room or a series of closely
associated rooms under joint occupancy
and single management, for example,
school and college dormitories, students*
and her hostels and military barracks.
SUBDIVISION
SUBDIVISION A-4 APARTMEN-F HOUSES

(.FLATS) - T h e s e s h a l l i n c l u d e a n y
building or structure in which living
quarters are provided for three or more

families, living independently of each
other and with independent cooking
facilities, for example, apartment houses,
mansions and chawls.
A- S HOTELS -These shall

include any building or group of
buildings under single management, in
which sleeping accommodation, with or
without dining facilities, is provided for
hire to more than 15 persons who are
primarily transient, for example, hotels,
inns, clubs and motels.
SUBDIVISION
3.1.1.2 GROUP B EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS

-These shall include any building used for
school, college or day-care purposes involving
assembly for instruction, educatron or
recreation and which is not covered by Group D.
IV-
HOSPITALS
AND
subdivision shall
include any building or a group of
buildings under single management,
which is used for housing persons
suffering from physical limitations
because of health or age, for example,
hospitals, infirmaries, sanatoria and
nursing homes.
b)
SUBDIVISION C-2 CUSTODIAL INSTITUTIONS
-This subdivision shall include any

building or a group of buildings under
single management, which is used for the
custbdy and care of persons, such as ,
children, convalescents and the aged, for
example, homes for the aged and infirm,
convalescent homes and orphanages.
cl SUBDIVISION C-3 PKNAL AND MENTAL
INSTlTUTlONS-This subdivision shall
which is used for housing persons under
restraint, or who are detained for penal or
corrective purposes, in which the liberty of
the inmates is restricted, for example, jails,
prisons, mental hospitals, mental
sanatoria and reformatories.
3.1.1.4 GROUP D ASSEMBLY BUILDINGSThese shpll include any building or part of a
building, where groups of people congregate
or gather for amusement, recreation, social,
religious, patriotic, civil, travel and similar
purposes, for example, theatres, motion
picture houses, assembly halls, auditoria,
exhibition halls, museums, skating rinks,
gymnasiums, restaurants, places of worship,
dance halls, club rooms, passenger stations
and terminals of air, surface and marine
public transportation services, recreation
piers and stadia, etc.
Buildings under Group D shall be further
subdivided as follows:
N A TI ONAL BUIUHNG CODE OF,
INDIA
D-l Buildings
Subdivision
having a
theatrical stage and fixed seats for over 1000
persons
Subdivision
D-2 Buildings h a v i n g a
theatrical stage and fixed seats for less than
I 000 persons
Subdivision D-3 Buildings without a stage
having accommodation for 300 or more
but
no permanent
seating
persons
arrangement
Subdivision D-4 Buildings without a stage
having acommodation for less than 300
persons
S u b d i v i s i o n D - 5 A l l o t h e r structurers
designed for assembly of people not covered
by subdivisions D-l -to D-4 _
S~JBDIVISION
D- I --This subdivision shall

include any building primarily meant for
theatrical or operatic performances and
exhibitions and which has a raised stage,
proscenium curtain, fixed or portable
scenery or scenery loft, lights, motion
picture booth, mechanical appliances or
other theatrical accessories and
equipment and which is provided with
fixed seats for over 1000 persons.
D-~--This subdivision shall

include any building primarily meant for
use as described for Subdivision D-l, but
with fixed seats for less than 1000 persons.
b)
SUBDIVISION
cl
SUBDIVISION
D-3 -This subdivision shall

include any building. its lobbies, rooms
and other spaces connected thereto,
primarily intended for assembly of people,
but which has no theatrical stage or
theatrical a n d o r c i n e m a t o g r a p h i c
accesories and has accommodation for
more than 300 persons, for example,
dance halls, night c l u b s , halls for
fncidental picture shows, dramatic,
theatrical or educational presentation,
lectures or other similar purposes, having
no theatrical stage except a raised
platform and used without permanent
seating arrangement; art galleries,
museums, lecture halls, libraries,
passenger terminals; and buildings used
for educational purposes for less than 8
hours per week.
SUBDIVISIOF;
e)
SUBDIVISION
D-4-This subdivision shall

include any building primarily intended
for use as described in Subdivision D-3.
but with accommodation for less than 300
p e r s o n s .
~-5 -This
include any building
assembly -of people
Subdivisions D-l to
grandstands. stadia.
structures. reviewing
tents.
subdivision shall
meant for outdoor
not covered by
D-4, for example,
amusement park
stands and circus
3.1.1.5 GROUP E BUSINESS BUILDINGS~

These shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for transaction oc
business (other than that covered by Group F
and parts of buildings covered by 3.1.1); for
keeping of accounts and records and similar
purposes, professional establishments, service
facilities, etc. City halls, town halls, court
houses and libraries shall be classified in this
group so far as the principal function of these
is transaction of public business and keeping
of books and records
Business buildings shall be further subclassified as follows:
Subdivision E-l Offices, banks, professional
establishments, like offices of architects,
engineers, dcctors, lawyers, etc.
Subdivision E-2
Laboratories,
research
establishments and test houses.
Subdivision E-3 Computer instatlations.
3.1.1.6 GROUP F MERCANTILE BUILDINGS -These shall include any building or part of a
building, which is used as shops, stores,
market, for display and sale of merchandise,
either wholesale or retail.
Mercantile buildings shall be further subclassified as follows:
Subdivision E-1 Shops, stores, markets with
area up to 500 m.
Subdivision F-2 Underground shopping
centres, departmental stores with area more
than 500 m2
Storage and service facilities incidental to the
sale of merchandise and located in the same
building shall be included under this group.
3.1.1.7 GROUP G INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGSThese shall include any building or part of a
building or structure, in which products or
materials of all kinds and properties are
fabricated, assembled, manufactured or
processed, for example, assembly plants,
laboratories, dry cleaning plants, power
plants, pumping stations, smoke houses,
laundries, gas plants, refineries: dairies and
saw-mills.
Buildings under Group G shall be further
sub-divided as follows:
Subdivision G-l Buildings used for low
hazard industries
Subdivision G-2 Buildings used for moderate
hazard industries
Subdivision G-3 Buildings used for high
hazard industries.
The hazard of occupancy, for the purpose of
the Code, shall be the relative danger of the
start and spread of fire, the danger or smoke
or gases generated, the danger of explosion or
I\;- 7
other occurrence potentially endangering the

lives and safety of the occupants of the
buildings.
Hazard of occupancy shall be determined by
the Authority on the basis of the character of
the contents and the processes or operations
conducted in the building, provided, however,
that where the combustibility of the building,
the flame spread rating of the interior finish or
other features of the building or structure are
such as to involve a hazard greater than the
occupancy hazard, the greater degree of
hazard shall govern the classification.
Where different degrees of hazard of
occupancy exist in different parts of a
building, the most hazardous of those shall
govern the classification for the purpose of
this Code, except in as far as hazardousareds
are segregated or protected as specified in the
Code.
4 SUBDIVISION G-I --This subdivision shall
include any building in which the contents
are of such low combustibility and the
industrial processes or operations
conducted therein are of such a nature that
there are no possibilities for any selfpropagating fire to occur and the only
consequent danger to life and property
may arise from panic, fumes or smoke, or
fire from some external source.
SUBDIVISION
G -2-This subdivision shall
b)
or industrial processes of. operations
conducted therein are liable to give rise to
a fire which will burn with moderate
rapidity and give off a considerable
volume of smoke, but from which neither
toxic fumes nor explosions are to be
feared in the event of a fire.
4 SUBDIVISION ~-3 -This subdivision shall
or industrial processes or operatrons
conducted therein are liable to give rise to
a fire which will burn with extreme
rapidity or from which poisonous fumes
or ex losions are to be feared in the event
of a Pire.
3.1.1.8 GROUP H STORAGE BUILDINGSThese shall include any building or part of a
building, used primarily for the storage or
sheltering (including servicing, processing or
repairs incidental to storage) of goods, wares
or merchandise (except those that involve
highly combustible or explosive products or
materials), vehicles or ammals, for example,
warehouses, cold storage, freight depots,
transit sheds, storehouses, truck and marine
terminals, garages, hangars (other than
aircraft repair hangars), grain elevators, barns
and stables.
Storage properties are characterized by the
presence of relatively small number of persons
Iv-
in proportion to the area, Any new use which

increases the number of occupants to a figure
comparable with other classes of occupancy
shall change the classification of the building
to that of the new use, for example, hangars
used for assembly purposes, warehouses used
for office purposes, garage buildings used for
manufacturing.
3.1.1.9 GROUP J HAZARDOUS BUILDINGSThese shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for the storage,
handling, manufacture or processing of highly
combustible or explosive materials or
products which are liable to burn with
extreme rapidity and/or which may produce
poisonous fumes or explosions; for storage,
handling, manufacturing or processing which
involve highly corrosive, toxic or noxious
alkalis, acids or other liquids or chemicals
producing flame, fumes and explosive,
poisonous, irritant or corrosive gases; and for
the storage, handling or processing.of any
material producing explosive mixtures of dust
which result in the division of matter into tine
particles subject to spontaneous ignition.
Examples of buildings in this classare those
buildings which are used for:
4 Storage, Ynder pressure of more than
;i r[rnrn and in quantities exceeding
of acetylene, hydrogen,
illuminating and natural gases, ammonia,
chlorine, phosgene, sulphur dioxide,
carbon dioxide, methyloxide and all gases
subject to explosion, fume or toxic
hazard, cryogenic gases, etc;
b) Storage and handling of hazardous and
highly flammable liquids, rocket
propellants, etc;
cl Storage and handling of hazardous and
highly flammable or explosive materials,
other than liquids; and
4 Manufacture of artificial flowers,
synthetic leather, ammunition, explosives
and fireworks.
3.2 Any building not covered by the above
shall be classified in the group which most
nearly resembles its existing or proposed use.
3.3 Where change in the occupancy of any
building places it in a different group or in a
different subdivision of the same group, such
building shall be made to comply with the
requirements of the Code for the new group or
its subdivision.
3.4 Where the new occupancy of abuilding is
less hazardous, based on life and fire risk, than
its existing occupancy, it shall not be
necessary to conform to the requirements of
the Code for the new group or its subdivision.
3.5 A certificate of occupancy shall be
necessary, as required under Part II
NATIONAL
UlLWNC
CfODE OF
lwolA
Administration, before any change is effected

in the character of occupancy of any building.
4.0 General- The design of any building and
the type of materials used in its construction
are important factors in making the building
resistant to a complete burn-out and in
preventing the rapid spread of fire, smoke or
fumes, which may otherwise contribute to the
loss of lives and property.
The fire resistance of a building or its
structural elements is expressed in hqurs
against a specified test load which is expressed
in k cal/ m , and against a certain intensity of
fire. The fire-resistance test for structure shall
be done in accordance with good practice
[IV(2)]. For the purpose of the Code, the types
of construction according to fire resistance
shall be classified into four categories,
namely, Type I Construction, Type 2
Construction, Type 3 Construction and

Type4 Construction. The fire resistance
ratings for various types of construction for
structural and non-structural members
should be as given in Table I.
For buildings above 15 m in height noncombustible materials shall be used f o r
construction (see also 5.6 and 5.7).
4.1 The fire resistance ratings of various
building components shall conform to
accepted standards [W(4)]*.
5. FIRE ZONES
5.1 Demarcation-Thecity orareaunder the
jurisdiction of the Authority shall, for the
l
In this part where reference is made to accepted

standards in relation to material specification, design,
testing or other information, the appropirate document

listed at the end afthis part may beused asa guideto the
TABLE 1 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS (IN HOURS)

T YPE
S TRUCTURAL E LEMENT
1)
rT~pe
4
2
Exterior walls
Fire separation less than 3.7 m
Bearing
Non-Bearing
Fire separation of 3.7 m or more but kss

than 9 m
Bearing
Non-Bearing
Fire separation of 9 m or more
Bearing
Non-Bearing
2)
Fire walls and party walls
3)
4)
Fire separation assemblies
5)
6)
Fire enclosures of exitways, exitway hallways

and stairways
Shaft other than exitways, elevator hoistways
Exitway access corridors
7)
8)
Vertical separation of tenant spaces

Dwelling unit separations
Non-bearing partitions
9)
Interior bearing walls, bearing partitions,

columns, girders, trusses (other than roof
trusses) and framing
Supporting more
than one floor
OF
C ONSTRUCTION
Type 2
2
I1
Type 3
2
Type 4
I
I
2
I
I
I?
2
I
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
I
I
2
I
2
I
I
I
I
I
-At least half an hour2
2
2
4
Supporting one
floor only
If
Supporting a roof
only
I$
IO) Structural members supporting wail
Ii
I I)
1;
Smorleaainheight
to lowest member
I$
More than 5 m but

lessthan6.7min
height to lowest
member
6.7 m or mote in
height to lowat
member
Floor construction, including beams
12) Roof construction, in&din beams, trusses

and framing arches and roof deck
?ARt IV FIRE
PROTECTION
IV-
purpose of the Code, be demarcated into

distinct zones, based on fire hazard inherent in
the buildings and structures according to
occupancy (see 3), which shaI1 be called the
Fire Zones.
5.2 Number and Designation of Fire Zones
5.2.1 The number of fire zones in a city or
area under the jurisdiction of the Authority,
depends upon the existing layout, types of
building construction (see 4), classification of
existing buildings based on occupancy (see 3)
and the expected future development of the
City or area. Ih large cities or areas, three fire
zones may be necessary, while in smaller ones
one or two may be adequate..
5.2.2 The fire zones shall be made use of in
land use development plan and shall be
designated as follows:
a) Fire Zone No. I,
b) Fire Zone No. 2, and
c) Fire Zone No. 3.
5.2.2.1. FIRE ZONE NO. I -This shall comprise
areas having residential (Group, A),
e d u c a t i o n a l ( G r o u p B ) , institutlonal
(Group C) and assembly (Group D), small
business (Subdivision E-l) and retail
mercantile (Group F) buildings, or areas
which are under development for such
occupancies.
5 2 2.2 FIRE ZOKE NO. z ~-This shall comprise
&iness (Subdivisions E-2 and E-3) a n d
industrial b u i l d i n g s (Subdiiisions G - l
and (i-2). except high hazard industrial
buildings (Subdivision G-3) or areas which
are under development for such occupancies.
5.2.2.3 FIRE Z ONE No. 3-This shall comprise
areas having high hazard industrial buildings
(Subdivision G-3), storage buildings
(Group H) and buildings for hazardous uses
(Group J) or areas which are under development for such occupancies.
5.3 Change in the Fire Zone BoundariesWhen the boundaries of any fire zone are
changed, or when it is intended to include
other areas or types of occupancies in any fire
z&e, it shall be done by following the same
procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
5.4 Overlapping Fire Zones
5.4.1 When any building is so situated that it
extends to more than one fire zone, it shall be
deemed to be in the fire zone in which the
major portion of the building-or structure is
situated.
extends equally to more than one fire zone, it
shall be deemed to be in the fire zone having
more hazardous occupancy buildings.
l-lo
5.5 Temporary Ruildings

5.5.1 Temporary buildings shall be permitted
only in Fire Zones No. I and 2, as the case may
be, according to the purpose for which these
are to be used, by special per&t from the
Authority for a limited period and subject to
such conditions as may be imposed in the
permit.
5.5.2 Such buildings shall be completely
removed on the expiry of the period specified
in the permit.
5.6 Restrictions. on lhe Type of Construction
for New Buildings
5.6.1 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. I
shall conform to construction of Type 1, 2, 3
or 4.
5.6.2 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 2
shall conform to construction of Type I, 2
or 3.
shall conform to construction of Type 1 or 2.
5.7 Restrictions on Existing Buildings-The
existing buildings in any fire zone shall not be
required to comply with the requirements of
the Code unless these are altered, or in the
opinion of the Authority, such building
constitutes a hazard to the safety of the
adjacent propeity or the o&pants of the
building itself. In the event of alteration, it
shall be necessary to obtain permission of the
Authority for such alteration consistent with
fire hazard (see Part II Administration).
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL
INDIVIDUAL OCCUPANCIES
6.1 General- All buildings shall satisfy
certain requirements which contribute,
individually and collectively, to thesafety of
life from fire, smoke, fumes and panic arising
from these or similar causes. There are,
however, certain general principles and
common requirements which are applicable
to all or most of the occupancies. They are
given in 6:2 to 6.18.
6.1. I EX C E P T I O N S
AND
D EVIATIONS Exceptions and deviations to the general
provisions of requirements of individual
occupancies are given as applicable to each
type of ocupancy in 8 to 16. In case of
practical difficulty or to avoid unnecessary
hardship, without sacrificing reasonable
safety, the Authority may grant exemptions
from the Code.
6.2 Maximum Height- Every building shall
be restricted in its height above the ground
level and the number of storeys, depending
upon its occupancy and the type of
construction. The height shall be measured as
specified in Part III Development control
and general building requirements. The

maximum
permissible
height
for any
combination
of occupancy and types of
construction should necessarily be related to
the width of street fronting the building, or
floor area ratios and the local fire iig,hting
facilities available.
resisting walls, having a fire resistance of not

less than 4h. extending from thelouncfatiort to
I m above the root at ail points, may be
considered to be a separate building for the
calculation of maximum permissible height
and floor area, provided openings, if any, in
the separating wall, are also protected by fire
assemblies of 4 h.
6,3 Fkwr Area Ro~io The comparative

floor area rat ios for different occupancies
and types of construction are given in Table
2. (see ah
Part Jll Ekveiopmertt control
rules and general building requirements).
6.4 Open Spawr The open spaces arou d

or inside a building shall conform to the
requirements of Part III Developmerrt control
rubx and general building requirements.
6.3. / Each portion of a building, which is

fire
separa~ed by sm.: or more continuous
4.4,1 For high r[se buildings the foilowirtg

additional provisions of means of access to the
building shall be ensured (see Part 111
rules
i.4tK.E 2
COMPARAriVE
FLOOR AREA RATIOS FOR OCCUPANCIES
ONE Pl,i BLIL SIR EE.[.4T LEAST 9 m WlfXf H
FACING
(ckrlm 6..1)
1y% i
Type 2
T ypc 3
1-}pe4
Educatirrna}
UL
20
I .4
I ,0
Imtittstimral
~lL
1.5
1,0
0.8
.Assembly
UL
I .0
u?
(1.5
Bisirress
~L
~.Q
2.3
! .6
indmtriai
7.5
1.9
16
1.3
Storage {se? Note 4!
6.0
!.5
;.3
I.0
Hazarstcms(SPP!fole 4}
2.0
I.i
09
NP
U L
NP
L%dirnited.
Not permitted
NOTE1-- Ttrc FAR wslucs given im this table are subwct tc overall rmtrwtions on the hti~ghti of buildings m the case of
educational, institwiorrnl. awembly, slorage and hazardous occupancies as specif;ed m COI 3 of Tisbk 3.
Now. 2 - This tabte has been prepared, taking ho account the combustible content m the di[feretv occupancies as weH as
the fire reslsta nee offered by the type of construction
NOTE 3-- This table sho~id be modified by the Authority. taking into accourrtskc rxhcr aspects as given below:
a) Denst!y in terms ot dwdlirrg units per hecsare;
b} Trraffii considmstlons:
c) Parking spaces:
d) -Local fire fighting factlitics: and
e} Water supply. drainage and samtation requirements.
!WSTE 4 ..- The FAR
a;
values speciticd m tftk tabk may be irtcreascrj by 20 peram
for the folfowirsg services:
A basement or cellar. space under a hsi!digg constructed on stilts arsdused as a parkirsgspace and .air+onditionirtg
pkm room used as accessory to the prmclpal use:
b) Watchrnans booth.
umphottse, garbage ~haft, ekctric cabin or substation and other utility structures rrmsntfor the
serwces of Ihe budz Ing under cons]dcrattort;
c)
Projections and accessory huiidirrgs as specifically exempted under the Codq and
d} Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost storey: architectural fea(urex and chimneys and elevated ranks of
dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area of the tift shaft shall be taken only on one ffoor.
NOI E 5 In so far as sirtg[e sttwcy rdorage and hazardous ocqancres are concerned. they woufd be further governed by
whmse m plot area ratIo (VPRI to be decided by the Authority.
.
PAl~
SV FtW
?ROTECSSON
-
,V 11
Development control rules and general

building requirements):
4 The width of the main street on which the
and one end of this street shall join
another street not less than 12 m in width;
b) The road shall not end in a dead end;
cl The compulsory open spaces around the
building shall not be used for parking; and
4 Adequate passageway and clearances
required for fire fighting vehicles to enter
the premises shall be provided at the main
entrance; the width of such entrance shall
be not less than 4.5 m. If an arch or
covered gate is constructed, it shall have a
clear head-room of not less than 5 m.
6.5. Mixed Occupancy- When any building
is used for more than one type of occupancy,it
shall conform to the requirements for the
most hazardous of the occupancies. If mixed
occupancies are separated by a separating
wall of 4 h fire rating, the occupancies shall be
treated individually.
6.6. Openings in Separating Walls and
Floors- At the time of designing openings in
separating walls and floors, particular
attention shall be paid to all such factors as
will limit fire spread through these openings.
For Types 1 to 3 construction a doorway or opening in a separating wall on any

floor shall be limited to 5.6 m* in area with a
maximum height of 2.75 m and a maximum
width of 2.1 m. The wall openings shall be
protected with fire-resisting doors or steel
rolling shutters conforming to accepted
standards [IV(S)]. All openings in the floors
shall be protected by vertical enclosures
extending above and below such openings,
the walls of such enclosures having a fire
resistqnce of not less than 2 hand all openings
therein being protected with a fire-resisting
assembly having a fire-resistance rating as
specified in 6.8.
6.6.2 Type 4 construction. openings in
the separating walls or floors shall be
fitted with 2 h fire-resisting assemblies.
6.6.1
6.6.3 Openings in walls/floors which are

necessary to be provided to allow cables/
electrical wirings/ telephone cables/ plumbing
and fixtures, etc, shall be protected by
enclosures in the form of ducts/ shafts having
a fueresistance not less than 2 h. Medium and
low voltage wiring running in shafts/ducts,
shall either be armoured type or run through
metal conduits. Further the space between the
conduits and the walls shall be filled in by a
filler material, compressed asbestos fibre
mixed with cement or any other material
having fire resistance rating of not legs than
one hour.
1!2
NOTE-In the case of buildings where it is necessary to

lower or lift heavv machinervl goods from one floor to the
other, it may be-necessary ii Frovide larger openings in
the floor. Such openings shall be provided with
removable covers which shall have the same strength and
fire resistance as the floor.
6.7 Electrical Installations - For

requirements regarding electrical installations
from the point of view of fire safety, reference
may be made to good practice[IV(6)] (see also
Electrical installations).
6.8 Fire Stop or Enclosure of all
Openings-W here openings are permitted,
they shall not exceed three-fourths the area of
the wall in the case of an external wall and
they shall be protected with fire-resisting
assemblies or enclosures having a fire
resistance equal to that of the wall or floor in
which these are situated. Such assemblies and
enclosures shall also be capable of preventing
the spread of smoke or fumes through the
openings so as to facilitate the safe evacuation
of building in case of a fire.
6.9 Fire Detecting and Extinguishing
S y s t e m - In buildings of such size,
arrangement or occupancy that a fire may not
itself provide adequate warning to occupants,
automatic fire detecting and alarm facilities
shall be provided, where necessary, to warn
occupants oft he existence of fire, so that they
may escape,. or to facilitate the orderly
conduct of fire exit drills.
6.9.1 The fire detecting and extinguishing
system shall conform to accepted standards.
N O T E-Heat sensitive fire detectors for use in an
automatic fire alarm system shall conform to accepted
standards [IV(7)] and the automatic fire alarm system
using such detectors shall be installed in accordance with
good practice [IV@)].
6.9.2 The requirements of fire detection and

alarm systems are covered for each occupancy
under 8 to 16; attention is also drawn to such
requirements in case of high rise buildings
(above I5 m in height) as given in
Appendix A.
6.9.3 Guidelines for selection of various types
of fire detectors for different occupancies are
given in Appendix B.
6.10 Fixed Fire Fighting Installations
6.10.1 All buildings depending upon the
occupancy use and height shall be protected
by wet riser, wet riser-cum-downcomer,
automatic sprinkler installation, high
pressure water spray or foam generating
system, etc, in accordance with the provisions
of6.10.2 to 6.10.9.
6.10.2 The wet riser installations shall
conform to accepted standards. The typical
NATICNAL
BUILOING
CODB
O F
MM*
requirements of wet riser/ wet riser-cumdowncomer installations and capacity of

water storage tanks and fire pumps shall be as
specified in Table 3. The typical arrangements
of wet riser-cumdowncomer and wet riser
installations are shown in Fig. I to 5. The wet
riser shall be designed for zonal distribution
ensuring that unduly high pressures are not
developed in risers and hose pipes.

6. JO.3 First-aid fire fighting appliances shall
be provided and installed in accordance with
accepted standards [lV(9)]. The fire fighting
equipment and accessories to be installed in
butldings for use in fire fighting shall conform
to accepted standards [IV( IO)].
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREMENTS

(Clause 6.10.2)
SL
No.
T YPE OF THE
BUILDING/OCCUPANCY
R EQUIREMENTS
,
of
installation
Water Supply
Type
(1)
9
(2)
Pump Capacity
-iGz-Gz Near the UnderTank

ground :taantt
ground Static
Tank
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
At the Terrace
Level
(7)
Residenriol Buildings
0) Ladging or rooming houses (A-I),
dormitories (A-J)
and hotels (A-5)
Nil
I) Up to IS m in
height
N OTE- NO provisions are
necessary for
dormitories
housing less
than 25 persons.
50
two
litrcs
Nil
Nil
Nil
2) Above I5 m
in height but
not exceeding 24 m.
One wet riser-cumdowncomer per

I 000 rn floor area.
The riser shall be
fully charged with
adquate pressure
at all times, and shall
be automatic in
operation.
100000
litres
2itE
900 litres per minute

2400 tit=? per
giving a pressure
mmute pvmg a
not less than
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm. at 0.3 N/mm* at the
topmost hydrant.
the topmost
tiydrant.
3) Above 24 m
in height but
not exceeding 35 m.
One wet riser-cumdowncorner per

I Ooo m* floor area.
The riser shall be
fully char@ with
adecprate pressure
all ttmcs. and shall
be automatic in
operation.
100000
litres
20 000
litres
i) 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute

minute giving
a giving a pressure
pressure not. tess not less than
than 0.3 N/mm2. 0.3 N/mm at the
The pump pro- topmost hydrant.
vided will be of
multi-stage type
with suctton and
delivery sires not
lessthan IScm
dia with low
kvel riser
up to IO storeys
and high level riser
delivery for
upper floors.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
PART
Iv
FUE
?RORcTMJN
Iv_13
--T A B L E 3 TYPICAL l-IKE J-IGH 1 ING INS IAl.LAl lC)NS KtQUlKtMtN fS

SL
No.
~1 YPF C~I- l.HE

kklILUINti;&ClJlAN(Y
KtJJlllH1MIN,\
water
l ype o!
mstallatlon
(1)
(2)
C'onrd
U n d e r ?
ground Starlc
Tank
(3)
4) At-love 35 nl One WC1 ilSel-CUlu, kelght but downcw,ncr per

not exceed1 000 m. lloor area.
Ihe riser shall b e
mg W rn.
fully charged wnh
adqua!r prtslure
at all times, .md
shall be automatic
lls operation.
t%lrnp Capauty
,
At the Terrace
Tarracr -Nrarthe Cl ndrrLevel
I anh
Kround Static
.i an k
Supply
(4)
(5)
I50 uuo
NII
hires
(6)
i) 2 4otJ htrcs per
mtn311e gwmg a
prrbaulr not les2
than 0.3 N, mm.
I he pump provided wdl be of
mulrl-at;cg!c 1ype
with suction a n d
delivery sues
not ic>s than I5 cm
dla with low kvel
riser up to 10
storcys and high
level riser deliveiy lor upper
Iloors.
(7)
Nil
ii) A standby pump

ol equal capacity
shall be provided on alternallve source
of supply
5) Above 6U m
in height but
not exceeding 92 m
One wei r*ser-cumdowncomer per

I WJ m2 floor area.
I he riser shall be
fully charged with
adequate pressure
at all times, and
shall be automatic
in opcratlon.
2w wu
htres
Nil
i) 2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm*.
The pump provided will be of
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery WCS
not less than I5 cm
dia with low level
riser up to I5
storeys and hrgh
level riser deli-
very for upper
floors.
Nil
ii) A standby pump

of equal capacity
shaJl be provided on alternative source
of supply
6) Above 92 m
in height
One wet Tlser-cumdowncomer per

I WO m* floor
area. The riser shall
be fully charged
with adequate prcssure at all times.
and shall be automatic tn operation.
250 000
htrcs
Nil
i) 2 400 litres
pier, mmute
gwmg a pressure
not less than
0.3 N/mm.
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sizes
not less than
I5 cm dia with
low level
riser up to
I5 storeys and
high level
riser delivery
Nil
N A T I O N A L BUIUMNC CODE W WDIA
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREhlENTSSL

No.
T YPE OF THF
BUILDIHG/~KUPANCY
REQUIREMENTS
A
,
Type of
installation
(1)
(2)
Conrd
(3)
Water Supply
A
UnderTarrace
ground Static
Tank
T#k
(5)
.
Pump Capacity
Near the Underground Static

Tf#k
At the Terrao?
Level
(7)
for upper
noors up to
60 m. Anotha
pump of equal
performance with
a break tank
of IZoo
litres capacity at 75 m
level and set
of ball valves
lo supply
the tank with
at least 2 400
litres per
minute from the
first pump.
Alternatively, a
multistage,
multi-outlet
pump may be
Installed.
ii) A standby
pump of equal
capacity shall
be provided on
alternative
source of supply.
b) One or IWO
,fomr!r @vote
dwellmp (A -2)
ond oportmenr
houses (/7ors)
(A-4)
I) up to I5 rn
in height
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
One wet riser-cumdowncomer with

provision of fire
service inlet
only near ground
level per I 000 m
floor area
Nil
10 ooo
litres
Nil
Nil
Note-One
or two family
private dwellmg ahove
I5 m in
hieght shall
not be permltted
2) Above ISm
in height but
not exceeding 24m.
450 litres per
at the topmoat
hydrant.
3) Above 24 m
in height but
not exceeding 35 m
-with shop- One wet riser-cumpmg area up downcomer per
lo 250 m2
I 000 m* floor area.
The riser shall be
and restricting the fully charged with
shopping
adequate pressure
50 000
lilres
20 000
litm
I 800 litres par

minute giving a
preuurc not I?
than 0.3 N/mm
at the topmost
hydrant.
9O(j litra pa mioute

giving a pfesurc
not 3ar thr
0.3 N/mm at the
topmou hydrant.
T A B L E 3 T Y P I C A L F I R E F I G H T I N G INSTALLATIONS~REQUIREMENTS!sL
No.
Conld
R~OUIKEMEMS
T YPE OF THE
B U I L D I N G ! OCC~JPANCY
Type of
installation
(1)
(2)
(3)
Water Supply
Pump Capacity
Underground Static
Tank
Tarrace
Tank
(4)
(5)

Tank
At the Terrace
Level
(6)
(7)
areas to
at all times. and shall
the ground be automatic in
floor only. operation.
100 000
lit rcs
20 006

I 000 m floor area.
The riser shall be
fully charged wtth
adequate pressure
be automatic in
operatton.
50 000
lures
5) Above 45 m One wet riser-cumin height but downcomer per

not exceedI 000 m floor
ing 60 m.
be fully charged with
adequate pressure
at all times, and
shall be automattc
in operation.
6) Above 60 m One wet riser-cumin heignt but downcomer per
I 000 m floor
not exceedarea. The riser shall
ing 92 m.
be fully charged
with adequate pressure at all times.
and shall be automatic in operatton.
N OTE -Apartment houses
(flats) above
92 m shall not
be permitted.
-with shop- One wet riser-cumping area downcorner per

exceeding
I 000 m floor area.
250 m..
The riser shall be
fully charged with
adequate pressure
be automatic in
operation.
4) Above 24 m
in height but
not exceeding 45 m.
ii)
2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N mmat the topmost
hydrant.

giving a pressure not
less than 0.3 N/mm
at the topmost
hydrant.
20 000
litres
I 800 litres per

minute givings
pressure not less
the 0.3 Nj mm at
the topmost
hydrant.

less than 0.3 N, mm
at the topmost
hydrant.
109000
In res
20 000
lrtres
2 400 litres per

mtnutr giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N mmat the topmost
hydrant.

less than 0.3 N; mm*
at the topmost
hydrant.
I50 000
lit res
20 000
lnres
2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 Ni mmat the topmost
hydrant. The pump
provided should be
of multistage type
with suction and
delivery sizes not
less than I5 cm dia
with low level riser
up to I5 storeys
delivery for upper
floors.

giving a pressure
not less than
0.3 N/ mm2 at the
topmost hydrant.
50 000
litres
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
20 000
litres
Nil
450 litra per minute

less than 0.3 N/mm
at the topmost
hydrant.
litres
Educotionol (B) and

Instirulional (C)
Buildings
a) UptoISmin
height
Nil
One wet riser-cumb) Above I5 m in

height but not
downcomer per
exceeding 24 m. I 000 m2 floor area.
The riser shall be

fully charged with
adequate pressure at
all times and shall
be rutomatic in
opefrtion.
( Conrinuedj
NATIONAL. l
UlwFlC CODE OF WdA
~~TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING lNSTALLATIONS/REQUlREMENTS- &t&

SL
No.
T YPE OF THE
BUILDING/OCCUPANCY
R EQUIREMENTS
Type of
installation
Water Supply
m
ground Static
Tank
Tank
(2)
(1)
(3)
c) Above 24 m in One wet riaer-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 35 m. I Ooo m2 floor
NOTE - Educaadequate pressure at
tional and insti- all times and shall be
tutional build- automatic in opera7
ings above 35m tion.
in height shall
not be permitted.
(4)
1OOcilO
litres
(5)
20000
litres
Pump Capacity

Tank
(6)
i) 2 400 litrcs per

minute giving a
At the Terraa
LCVCI
(7)

pressun not less less than 0.3 N/mm2
than 0.3 N/mm. at the topmost
The pamp
hydrant.
provided shall
be of multistage
type with suction
and delivery
sizes not less than
15 cm dia with low
level riser up to 10
storeys and high
level riser ddivery for upper
floors.
ii) A standby pump

of qua1 capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
iii)
Assemh~.v (D) Buildings
a) Up 10 15 m in
height
Nil
50 000
litres
Nil
b) Above I5 m in One wet riser-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 24 m. I 000 m floor
adequate pressure at
all times. and shall be
automatic in operation.
100000
litres
?tI r?
c) Above 24 m in One wet riser-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 35 m. I 000 m floor area.
The riser shall be fully
charged with adequate pressure at all
times, and shall be
automatic in
operation.
100 000
litres
20 ooo
litres
50000
litres
Nil
NOTE ~-
Assembly buildings above 35 m

in height shall
not be permitted.
iv)
Nil
Nil
2 $I0 litreT per

sp9 litres per minute
mmute glvtng a
lvmg a pressure noI
fess than 0.3 N/mm
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm at the topmost hydrant.
,
the topmost hydrant.

minute giving a giving a pressure not
pressure not less less than 0.3 N/mm2
than 0.3 N/mm*. at the topmost
The pump pro- hydarant.
vided will be of
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sizes not
less than I5 cm
dia with low level
riser up lo IO
storeys and high
level riser delivery
for upwr floors.
ii) A standby pump
of qua1 capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
BMness (I?) h&rconrile (F) ond Iwdusrrital (6)

B&&W@
a) Up lo I5 m in
height
Nil
Nil
Nil
(Continued)
?ART IV F I R E NtOTECTlON
w-1
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS;REQUIREMENTSSL

No.
T YPE OF THE
BU~LDING/O~CUPANCY
R EQUIREMENTS
,
instdlatiOn
7IzfYz
ground Static
Tank
Tank
(2)
Pump Capacity
Water Supply
Type of
(1)
Conrd

Tank
(6)
At the Terrace
Level
(7
(4)
(5)
b) Above I5 m in One wet riser-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 24 m. I 000 m* floor area.
times, and shall be at
100000
litres
20 000
litres

2 400 litres per
minute giving a
less than 0.3 N/mm
pressure not !ess
than 0.3 N/mm at at the topmost
hydrant.
the topmost
hydrant
c) Above 24 m in One wet riser-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 35 m. I 000 m floor area.
The riser shallbe fully
tima, and shallbe at
1ooooo
litres
20 000
litres

minute giving a giving a pressure not
pressure not less, less than 0.3 N/mm
than 0.3 N/mmat the topmost
The pump provi- hydrant.
ded will be of
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sires not
less than 15 cm
dia with low level
riser up to IO
storeys and high
level riser delivery for upper
floors.
(3)
ii) A standby pump

of equal capacity
shall be povided
on alternative
source of supply.
One wet riaer-cumheight but not downcomer per

exceeding 60 m. I Ooo m* floor area.
d) Above 35 m in
l50000
litres
Nil
charged with adcquate pressure at all

ttmea. and shah be
i) 2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm.
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sizes not
less than I5 cm dia
with low level
riser up to IO
rtoreys and high1
evel delivery for
upper floors.
Nil
ii) A standby pump

of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
e) Above 60 m in One wet riser-cumdowncomer per

height but not
exceeding 92 m. I Ooo m* floor area.
The riser shall be fttllv
charged with adequate pressure at a11
ttmes, and shall be

2fK) 000
litres
Nil
i) 2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sixes not
less than I5 cm
dia with low kvel
Nil
(Conrinued)
NATtDNAL. BUIWNC CODa OF INDIA
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE F I G H T I N G

SL
NO.
R EQUIREMENTS
TYPE OF THE
BIJILDISU/~CCUPASCY
Type of
installation
(2)
(1)
Conrd
INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREMENTS-
Water Supply
Underground Static
Tank
Tarrace
Tank
(4)
(5)
Pump Capacity
Tank
At the Terrace
LCVCI
(6)
(7)
riser up to I5
storeys and high
level riser delivery
for upper fIoors.
ii) A standby pump of
equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
f) Above 92 m in
height

I 000 mfloor ara.
charged with ado
quate pressure at all
times, and shall be
250 ow
litres
Nil
i) 2 400 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N!mm.The
pump provided
will be of multistage type with
suction and delivery sizes not less
than I5 cm dia
with low level riser
up to I5 storeys
delivery for upper
floors up to 60 tn.
Another pump of
equal performance with a
tank of I? 000
litres capacity at
75 m level and a
set of ball valves to
supply the tank
with at least 2 400
litres per miriute
from the first
pump. Alternatively. a multistage, multi-outlet
pump may be
installed.
Nil
ii) A standby pump

of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
VI
Storage (If) md
Hazarabus Q&it&
ings
a) Upto 15min
height

I 000 mfloor area.
The riaet shall be fully
tunes, and shall be
automatic in opcra-
100000
litms
20 ooo
litres
I 800 litres per

minute giving a
pressure not kss
than 0.3 N/mmat
the topmost
hydrant

kss than 0.3 N/mm
at the topmat
hydrant.
tion.
NOTE-Hazardous
buildings above
IS tn in height
sziytlmt be per(Continued)
?Mt IV IIRI PitOlUTKlN
d9
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INS1 AL.1.A.I-IONS,KEOlIKEMENlS-
Sr
No.
(onId
Kt~l.IKFM1-sI~
7YPF Ot THE
Br:ILl~!hl;!~-CIJPANCY
-----__ --_-_
of
Water :iupply
Iump Capraty
i n s t a l l a t i o n _ ,--fl1
LndrrI arrace
Ircear the UnderAt the Terrace
ground Static
Tank
ground Starrc
1 eve1
Tank
Tank
Type
(1)
(2)
b) Ahnve 15 m in
helpzt but not
c*.cced:r;)r 24 1.
(3)
(4)
(5)
One wet rirer-cumdowncomer per

I 00 m floor area.
%c riser chall he fully
charged with adcqurte pressure at all
times. and shall bc
automdttc in operation.
100 000
litres
20 000
lures
(6)
(7)
2 400 lures per

t/(K) lnrrs per mmule
minute gtvmg a
pressure not iehs
less than 0.3 N, mm
!han 0.3 N mm. at at the topmost
hydrant.
the topmost
hydrant.
Norr-Storage
buildin@ above
24 m m hetqht
shall not be permitted.
No?t I - Where more than one riser is requtred because of large floor area, the quantity of water recommended in this
table shal! be proportionately Increased.
NOPE 2 -- Any of the above categories may mcorporate an automatic sprinkler! drencher system. rf the risk 15: such that it
requires installation ofsuch protective methods. Wheresprinkleridrcncher system is installed, water requuementsforsuch
installations shall be in addition to those indicated in this Table.
Notr: 3 - A minimum of two hydrants shalt be provided withm the courtyard.
NATE 4 ~- Wet riser-cumdowncomer is an arrangrment for fire ftghting wtthin the buildmg by means of vertical rtsing
mains no! IA\ than IO0 mm internal dia wtth hydrant outlets and hose rcei on each floor/ landing connected to a terrace
!ank for fire fighting purpose, through a booster pump, check valve and a non-return valve near the tank-end and a fire
pump, gate and non-return valve, over the underground static tank. AYtre servtcc tnlet at ground level fitted wtth a nonreturn valve shall also be provided to the rising mam for charging it by fire services pump in case of failure of static fire
pump over the underground static tanks.
NOTE 5 -
The performance of pumps specified above shail be at revolutions per mmutc not exceeding 3 000.
NOI t 6 -- 7 he terrace tank and pttrnp need not be provtded if theautomatic pump at ground level can be maintained lo the
satisfaction of the !ocal fire brigade.
NOTF 7 - The above quantities of water shall be exclustvely for fire fightmg and shall not be utilized for domestrc or other
use.
Norm 8 ~-~
Size of the riser shail be as under (in:ernal diameter):
a ) Aparrmenr lroust~~
i)
b)
up to 45 m
--
100 mm with single! twin hydrant outlet and hose reel on each lloor.
ii)
above 45 to SS m
IS0 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.
iii)
above 85 to 165 m
200 mm with twm hydrant ou:iets and hose reel on each floor.
Buildings orher rhon opar!mennr houses

up to 24 m
tt)
above 24 to 85 m
150 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.
iii)
above 85 m to 165 m
200 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.
100 mm with singfe/twm hydrant outlet and hose reel on each floor.
Nor E 0 -- A facility to boost up water pressure in the riser directly from the mobile pump shall also be provided on the wet
riser system with a suitable fire service inlets (collecting head with 2 numbers of 63 mm inlets for IOOmm risingmainand4
numbers of 63 mm in!ets with check valves for 150 mm dia rising main) with check valve and a gate valve.
NOTE 10 -- Internal diameter of rubber hose for hose reel shall be minimum I2 mm. A shut-off branch with nozzle of5 mm
size shall be provided.
I% IE I I - An arrangement of alternative source of power supply shall be provided to drive pumps, etc,in case of failure of
normal power supply.
No~t I2 - For typical layout of wet riser-eumdowncomer and wet riser installations. see Fig. I to 5.
w20
NATIONAL NILMNC
CODE
OF tNOlA
rAIR_ R E L E A S E
VALVE
TERRACE TANK FOR

FIRE FIGHTING/DOMESTIC
SUPPLY
CHECK
VA LV E,
S E R V I C E - INLET
1177
.NON-RETURN
VALVE
Fig. I Typical Arrangement of Wet Riser- cum-Downcomerfor Apartment Houses Above I5 m

hut not Exceeding 24 m in Height
6.10.4 In addition to wet riser wet risercum-downcomer. first-aid hose reels shall be
installed on all the floors of buildings above
15 m and shall conform to accepted standards
[IV( I I)]. The first-aid hose reel shall be
connected to one of the female couplingsof
twin couplings of landing valves of the wet
riser installations by means of adapter.
6.10.5 ST A T I C W A T E R S T O R A G E T A N K S- A
satisfactory supply of water for the purpose of
fire fighting shall always be available in the
form of underground static storage tank with
capacity specified for each building with
arrangements of replenishment by main or
alternative source of supply at the rate of I 000
litres per minute. When this is not practicable,
PART IV F I R E
PROTECTION
the capacity of static storage tank(s) shall be

increased proportionately in consultation
with the local fire brigade.
The static storage water supply required for
the above-mentioned purpose shall entirely be
accessible to the fire engines of the local fire
service. Provision of suitable number of
manholes shall be made available for
inspection, repairs and insertion of suction
hose, etc. The covering slab shall be able to
withstand the vehicular load of I8 tonnes.
The domestic suction tank connected to the

static water storage tank shall have an
overflow capable of discharging 2250 litres
per minute to a visible drain point from which
,v?l
TERRACE TANK FOR

FIRE FIGHTING/
AIR RELEASE
VALVE
SLUICE AND
CHECK VALVE
rPUMP
FIRE SERVICE
CHECK VALVE
UNOERTANK
Fig. 2 Typic01 Arrangement of Wet Riser- cum-Downcomer for Apartment Houses Exceeding
24 m in Height
by a separate conduit the overflow shall be

conveyed to a storm water drain.
4 To prevent stagnation of water in the
static water storage tank, the suction tank

of the domestic water supply shall be fed
only through an overflow arrangement to
maintain the level therein at the minimum
specified capacity (see Fig. 6).
b) The static water storage tank shall be
provided with a fire brigade collecting

breaching with 4 number 63 mm dia (2
number 63 mm dia for pump with capacity
I 400 litres, minute) instantaneous male
IV-
22
mlets arranged in a valve box at a suitable

point at street level and connected to the
static tank by a suitable fixed pipe not less
than 15 cm in dia to discharge water into
the tank when required at the rate of
2250 litres per minute.
6.10.6 A UTOMATIC SPRINKLERS-Automatic
sprinklers shall be installed in:
used as car parks or for
a) basements
storage occupancy, if the area exceeds
200 m-.
b) multi-level basements used as car parks,
and for housing essential services
NATIONAL l
Ull.DlNC CODE OF WDIA
AIR
RELEASE
VALVE
BALL VALVE
F L O O R 14
FLOOR 9
FLOOR 9
11 m
FLOOR 3
I
-SLUICE AND
CHECK V&VE
URN
CHECK VALVE
TANK
Fig. 3 7jpical Arrangement of Wet-Riser

System for Buildings other than Apartment
Houses Abo\,e 35 m in Height
cl
4
e)
h)
ancillary to a particular occupancy or for

storage occupancy.
any room or other compartment of a
building exceeding 500 m except as in (g)
(see Note).
departmental stores or shops, if, the
aggregate floor area exceeds 750 m.
all non-domestic floors of mixed
occupancy which constitute a hazard and
are not provided with staircases
independent of the remainder of the
buildings.
godowns and warehouses as considered
necessary.
on all floors of tkbuildings other than
residential buildings, if the height of the
building exceeds 45 m (see Note).
dressing rooms, scenery docks, stages and
stage basements of theatles.
?MT
PIRL PROlUXION
Fig. 4 Topical Arrangement qf Wet Riser

System for Buildings other than Apartment
Houses above 35 m in Height
NOTE -- It is desirable that all high rise building should

be fully sprinklered irrespective of their heI ht and
occupancy. If selective sprinklering is adopted. t1 ere IS a
real danger of a fire starting on one of the lower
unsprinklered floors gathering momentum spreading
upwards from floor to floor through the unsprinklacd
floor and reaching the first sprinklered floor as a fully
developed fire. In such an event, the sprinklers can be
rendered useless/ ineffective.
6.10.7 AUTOMATIC H IGH V ELOCITY W A T E R.
S PRAY
OR
E MULSIFYING S YSTEM - A u t o -
matic high velocity water spray or emulsifying

system shall be provided for protection of
indoor transformers as applicable in
accordance with A-1.16 of Appendix A,
and I I .20 of accepted standards [ lV( l2)]
6.10.8 F IXED F OAM INSTALLATION -Fixed
foam generating system shall be provided for
protection of boiler rooms with its ancillary
storage of furnace oils in basement.

We23
6.11 Air-Conditioning and Ventilation -Air-
conditioning and ventilation requirements of

different rooms/areas in any occupancy shall
be as given in Part VIII Building services,
Section 1 Lighting and ventilation and
Section 3 Air-conditioning and heating.
6.11.1 Air-conditioning and ventilating
systems shall be so installed and maintained as
to minimize the danger of spread of fire,
smoke or fumes thereby from one floor or fire
area to another, or from outside into any
occupied building or structure (seeA-1.17)
6.11.2 Air-conditioning and ventilating
systems circulating air to more than one floor
or fire area shall be provided with dampers
designed to close automatically in case of fire
and thereby prevent spread of fire or smoke.
Such a system shall also be provided with
automatic controls to stop fans in case offire,
unless arranged to remove smoke from a fire,
in which case these shall be designedto remain
in operation.
LEVEL
TANK
Fig. 5 Typical Alternate Arrangement of

Wet Riser System for Buildings other than
Apartment Houses Above 35 m in Height
6,10.9 CA R B O N D I O X I D E F IRE E X T I N G U I -
S YSTEM -Fixed carbon dioxide fire

extinguishing installation shall be provided in
accordance with good practice [IV( 13)] on
premises where water or foam can not be used
for fire extinguishing because of the special
nature of the contents of the buildings/areas
to be protected. For some special fire risk,
carbon dioxide may not be suitable and it may
be necessary to provide BCF(Bromochlorodifluoromethane) - Halon 1 21 I or BTM
(Bromochlorotrifluoromethane) - Halon
1 301. These types of installations may be
provided instead of carbon dioxide
installation. The use of these types of
installations should, however, be restricted to
cases where it is unavoidable because
chemicals are not available indigenously.
6.10.10 Fire fighting equipement shall be
suitably located and clearly marked by
illuminated signs, wired to an independent
electrical circuit on an alternate source of
supply.
SHING
NOTF -
This provision shall not apply to occupancies
A-.? and A-4 up to I5 m in height.
,34
6. J I .3 Air-conditioning system serving large

places of assembly (over IO00 persons), large
departmental stores or hotels with over 100
rooms in a single block shall be provided with
effective means for preventing circulation of
smoke through the system in the case of a fire
in air filters or from other sources drawn into
the system even though there is insufficient
heat to actuate heat sensitive devices
controlling fans or dampers. Such means shall
consist of approved photo-electric or other
effective smoke sensitive controls, or if
approved by the Authority, ma be manually
operated controls ?n cases wITere qualified
personnel responstble for operation of
controls are continuously on duty while the
premises are occupied.
6.12 Smoke Venting
6.12.1 Smoke venting facilities, where
required for safe use of exits in windowless

buildings, underground structures, large area
factories or where required by other
provisions of the Code, shall be automatic in
action.
612.2 Natural draft smoke venting shall
utilize roof vents or vents in walls atOr near
the ceiling level; such vents shall be normally
open, or, if closed, shall be designed for
automatic opening in case of fire, by release of
heat sensitive elements, such as fusible links;
breakage of glass, or melting of pbstk Under
the influence of heat; or by other approved
means.
6.123 Where smoke venting facilities are
installed for purposes of exit safety in
accordance with the requirements of the
Code, these shall be adequate to prevent
NATIONAL
UllLDlNG CODE OF
INDIA
PRIME
MOVER
FIRE PUMP
.SUCT ION
OVERFLOW
AND VENT
-I
G.L
TOWN
MAIN SUPPLY
G.L.
//I\_
___---.I
.- - - - -
/SEPARATION WALL
,/DOMESTlC
WATER SUPPLY
TANK (OTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER I
:OOT VALVES
6A With Negative Suction
DOMESTIC WATER
SUPPLY TANK
(OTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER 1
FIRE
FIGHTING
TANK
SLUICE
VALVE -,
TO DOMESTIC FIRE
PUMP SUCTION
G.L.
I .*,
SLUICE VALVE
CLC M1ll.V
HOLE WITH
BOLTED COVER
RIME
68 With Positive Suction
Fig. 6 Typical Arrangementfor Providing Combined Fire Fighting and Domestic Water Storage
Tank
?AllT IV FIRE
PROTECTION
*V-25
dangerous accumulation of smoke during the

period of time necessary to evacuate the area
served, using available exit facilities with a
margin of safety to allow for unforeseen
contingencies. It is recommended that smoke
exhaust equipment should have a capacity of
approximately a 5-min air change. Where
mechanical venting is employed, it shall be
firesafe.
6.12.4 The discharge apertures of all natural
draft smoke vents shall be so arranged as to be
readily susceptible to opening by fire service
personnel.
6.12.5 Power operated smoke exhausting
systems may be substituted for natural draft
vents only by specific permission of the
Authority.
6.13 Hearing-Installation of chimney and
heating apparatus shall conform to good
practice [IV( 14)].
6.14 SpeAal Hazards-In addition to the
factors covered by 6.2 LO 6.13 there are cetain
aspects, applicable to particular occupancies
only, which may affect the spread of fire,
smoke or fumes and thus the safe evacuation
of the building in case of fire. Some such
aspects are:
4 interior finish and decoration;

b) seating, aisles, railings and turnstiles in
places of assembly;
4 service equipment and storage facilities in
buildings other than storage buildings;
and
d) hazards on stage, in waiting spaces,
projection booths, etc, in theatres and
cinemas.
considered as divided into four classes as

follows:
CLASS I SURFACES OF VERY L O W F L A M E
SPREAD -Those surfaces on which not more
than 19 cm effective spread of flame occurs.

CLASS 2 SURFACES OF L O W F L A M E
SPREAD-Those surfaces on which the
effective spread of flame neither exceeds 30
cm during the first 1.5 min nor exceeds a final
value of 60 cm.
CLASS
The finishing materials used for various

surfaces and decor shall be such that the flame
spread rating shall not be more than the values
given in 6.15.2 and in addition shall not
generate toxic smoke/fumes.
6.15.2 The susceptibility to fire of various
types of wall surfaces is determined in terms of
the rate of spread of fire. Based upon the rate
of spread of fire, surfacing materials shall be
,,L26
SURFACES
OF
MEDIUM
FLAME
C L A S S 4 SURFACES OF RAPID FLAME

effective spread of flame exceeds 30 cm during
the first 1.5 min or exceeds 85 cm during the
first 10 min.
6.1.5.3 The situation under which materials
falling into various classes shall be used in
building construction is given below:
Class I
Class 2
May be used bay be used

in any situ- in any situation
ation, except
on walls,
facade of the
building and
ceilings of
staircases and
corridors
6.15 Surface Finishes

6.15.1 The use of flammable surface finishes
on walls (including external facade of the
buitding) and ceilings affects the safety of the
occupants of a building. Such finishes tend to
spread the fire and even though the structural
elements may be adequately fire resistant,
serious danger to life may result. It is,
therefore, essential to have adequate
precautions to minimize spread of flame on
wall, facade of building and ceiling surfaces.

effective spread of flame neither exceeds
30 cm during the first 1.5 min nor exceeds
85 cm during the first 10 min.
Class 3
Should be used
only in living
rooms and bedrooms (but not
in rooms on the
roof) and only
as a lining to
solid walls and
partitions. Not
on staircases
or corridors
or facade of
the building
NOTE - Panelling (lining) shall be permitted in a limited

area. It shall not be permitted in a vestibule.
Materials of Class 4 which include

untreated wood fibre-boards may be used as
ceiling lining, provided the ceiling is at least
2.4 m from the top surface of the floor below,
and the wall surfaces conform to requirements
of Class [see Note under 6.15.31. Class 4
materials shall not be used in kitchens,
corridors and staircases. Some types contain
bitumen and, in addition to risk from spread
of fire, emit dense smoke on burning; such
materials shall be excluded from use under
these conditions and shall also not be used for
construction of ceiling where the plenum is
used for return air in air-conditioned buildings.
6.1.5.4
6.15.5 When frames, walls, partitions or

floors are lined with combustible materials,
the surfaces on both sides of the materials
shall conform to the appropriate class,

because there is considerable dangrr from
fire starting and rapidly spreadrng within the
concealed cavity unknown to the occupants
whose escape may he hampered there by. For
detailed information on materials and details
of construction with their fire-resistance
rating, reference may be made to accepted
standards [I V(4)].
6.16 Glazing
grooves not less than 6.5 mm in width or

depth, with due allowance for expansion
and shall be secured by hard metal
fastenings to the sashes or frames
independently of any lead, cement or
putty used for weather-proofing purposes.
6.16.4 No wall opening exceeding 5 m* shall
be deemed capable of efficient protection by
wired glass or electro-copper glazing.
6.16.1 Building of Types I to 4 construction

shall employ one of the two types of glazing
described in 6.16.2 and 6.16.3 except that
Type 4 construction may have the alternative
of hardwood sashes or frames or both.
6.16.5 CA S E M E N T - Hard metal casements,

not exceeding 0.8 m2 fitted with wired glass or
electro-copper glazing in accordance
with 6.16.2 and 6.16.3, secured to the frames
by hard metal hinges not more than 60 cm
apart and by fastenings at top, centre and
bottom shall be permissible.
6.16.2 Wired glass shall comply with the

following requirements:
6.17 Skylights
O F - G L AS S-The thickness of
glass shall be not less than 6.5 mm.
a)
THICKNESS
b)
EMBEDDED
WIRE N E T T I N G - E m b e d d e d
wire netting shall be not largerthan 2.5 cm
mesh.
c) SIZE OF SQUARES OF GLASS--The area

shall not exceed 2 500 cm.
AND FRA.M~s--T~~ s a s h e s o r
frames or both shall be entirely of iron or
other suitable metal securely bolted or
keyed into the walk except in the case of
..
panels in internal doors.
S.GHES
e) SETTING OF GLASS-The panels of &SS
shall be set in rebates or grooves not less

than 6.5 mm in width or depth, with due
allowance for expansion, and shall be
secured by hard metal fastenings to the
sashes or frames independently of any
lead, cement or putty used for weatherproofing purposes.
6.16.3 Electra-copper glazing shall comply

with the following requirements:
_
4 Thickness of glass shall be not less than
6.5 mm.
b) Size of squares of glass shall not exceed

100 cm.
cl
-The square glasses

to be formed by electro-coppef glazing
into sectional lights shall not exceed
0.37 m* in area.
SECTIONAL LIGHTS
d)l SASHES AND FRAMES-The sashes or

frames or both shall be entirely of iron or
other hard metal, securely bolted or keyed
into the wall, except when in panels in
internal doors.
e) FIXING OF SECTIONAL LIGHTS-The
sectional lights shall be set in rebate or
?A#1 I V
FMlI: ?RORCTlON
6.17.1 Wired glass for skylights or monitor

lights shall comply with the following
requirements:
4 Thickness of glass shall be not less than

6.5 mm;
b) Embedded wire netting shall be not larger
than 2.5 cm mesh;

cl F R A M E S AN D GLAZtNC--The f r a m e
shall be continuous and divided by bars
spaced at not more than 70 cm cclltres.
The frame and bars shall be of iron or
other hard metal, and supported on a
curb either-of metal or of wood covered
with sheet metal. The glass shall be
frame and bars independently of any
6.17.2 No skylight opening exceeding 5 m*
shall be deemed capable ofefficient protection
by wired glass.
6.18 fire Lifrs- Where applicable, fire lifts
shall be provided with a. minimum capacity
for 8 passengers and fully automated with
emergency switch on ground level. In
general, buildings over 15 m in height shall be
provided with fire lifts [see ,4-1.5(q)].
6.18.1 In case of fire, only fireman shall
operate fire-lifts. In normal course, it may be
used by other persons.
6.18.2 Each fire lift shall be equipped with
suitable inter-communication equipment for
communicating with the control room on the
ground floor of the building.
6.18.3 The number and location of fire lifts in
a building shall be decided after taking into
consideration various factors like building
2
population, floor area. section of building

(compartmentation), etc.
any floor area or the occupant load shall be

based on the actual number of occupants, but
in no case less than that specified in Table 4.
TAB1.F 4 OCCUPANT LOAD

SL
7.1.1 An exit may be a doorway; corridor;

passageway(s) to an internal staircase, or
external staircase, or to a v e r a n d a h o r
terrace(s), which have access to the street, or
to the roof of a building or a refuge area. An
exit may also include a horizontal exit
leading to an adjoining building at the same
level.
7.1.2 Lifts and escalators shall not be
considered as exits.
No
GH0U P OF
OCCLl PAhCY
(1)
(2)
(3)
Residential
12.5
ii)
Educational
iii)
Institutional
158
iv)
Assembly:
7.2 General
7.2.1 Every building meant for human
occupancy shall be provided with exits
sufficient to permit safe escape of occupants,
in case of fire or other emergency.
7.2.2 In every building exits shall comply
w.ith the minimum requirements of this part,
except those not accessible for general public
use.
7.2.3 All exits shall be free of obstructions.
7.2.4 No building shall be so altered as to
reduce the number, width or protection of
exits to less than that required.
7.2.5 Exits shall be clearly visible and the
routes to reach the exit shall be clearly marked
and sign posted to guide the population of the
floor concerned. Signs shall be illuminated
and wired to an independent electrical circuit
on an alternative source of supply.
NOTE-This provision shall not apply to A-2 and A-4
occupancies up to I5 m in height.
7.2.6 Where necessary, adequate and reliable

illumination shall be provided for exits.
7.2.7 Fire-resisting doors (see 6.6.1) shall be
provided at appropriate places along the
escape routes to prevent spread of fire and
smoke, and particularly at the entrance to lifts
and stairs where a funnel or flue effectmay be
created, inducing an upward spread of fire.
7.2.8 All exits shall provide continuous
means of egress to the exterior of a building or
to an exterior open space leading to a street.
7.2.9 Exits shall be so arranged that they may
be reached without passing through another
occupied unit.
7.3 Occupant Load-For determining the
exits required. the number of persons within
l-28
OCCUPANT
LOAD. F L O O R
A REA IN
m*/ PFWSON
v)
a) with fixed or loose seats

and dance floors
0.6*
b) without seating facilities

including dining rooms
1.5t
Mercantile:
a) street floor and sales
basement
b) upper sale floors

Business and industrial
10
vii)
Storage
30
viii)
Hazardous
10
vi)
*Occupani load m dormitory portions of homes for the

aged. orphanages. insane asylums. etc. where sleeping
accommodation is provided. shall becalculated at not less
than 7,s m gross floor area, person.
tThe gross floor area shall include, m addition to the
main assembly room or space1 any occupied connecting
room or space in thesame storey or in the storeys above or
below, where entrance IS common to such rooms and
spaces and they are available for use by the occupants of
the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the
gross area for corridors. closets or other subdivisions; the
areashall includeall spaceserving the particular assembly
occupancy.
7.3.1 M E Z Z A N I N E -The occupant load of a

mezzanine floor discharging to a floor below
shall be added to that floor occupancy and the
capacity of the exits shall be designed for the
total occupancy load thus established.
7.4 Capacir,, of Exits
7.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure
the capacity of any exit, shall be 50 cm. A
clear width of 25 cm shall be counted as an
additional half unit. Clear widths less than
25cm shall not be counted for exit width.
7.4.2 Occupants per unit exit wid,th shall be in
accordance with Table 5.
7.4.3 H ORIZONTAL E XIT A L L O W A N C E When horizontal exit is provided in buildings
of mercantile, storage, industrial, business
and assembly occupancies, the capacity per
storey per unit width of exit of stairways in
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
Table 5 may be increased by 50 per cent; and

in buildings of institutio-nal occupancy it may
be increased by 100 percent.
TABLE 5 OCCUPANTS PER UNIT EXIT WIDTH
N U M B E R OF;OCCUPANTS
SL. GROUP OF
No. O C C U P A N C Y
Stairways Ramps Doors
(1)
9
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Residential
25
50
75
ii)
Educational
25
50
75
iii)
Institutional
25
50
75
iv)
Assembly
40
50
60
Business
50
60
75
Mercantile
50
60.
75
vii)
Industrial
50
60
75
viii)
Storage
50
60
75
Hazardous
25
30
40
v)
vi)
ix)
7.5 Arrangement of Exits

7.5.1 Exits shall be so located that the travel
distance on the floor shall not exceed the
distance given in Table 6.
TABLE 6 TRAVEL DISTANCE FOR OCCUPANCY
ANDTYPEOFCONSTRUCTION
SL
NO.
GROUP OF
OCCU PANCY
(1)
(2)
l&2
3&4
(3)
(4)
Residential
22.5
22.5
ii)
Educational
22.5
22.5
iii)
Institutional
22.5
22.5
iv)
Assembly
30.0
30.0
v)
Business
30.0
30.0
Mercantile
30.0
30.0
vii)
Industrial
45.0
30.0
viii)
Storage
30.0
30.0
Hazardous
22.5
22.5
vi)
ix)
7.5.2 The travel distance to an exit from the

dead end of a corridor shall not exceed half
the distance specified in Table 6, except in
educational, assembly and institutional
occupancies in which case it shall not
exceed 6 m.
7.5.3 Whenever more than one exit is
required for any room space or floor of a
building, exits shall be placed as remote from
each other as possible and shall be arranged to
provide direct access in separate directions
from any point in the area served.
requirement of different occupancies in

8 to 16.
7.6.2 All buildings which are more than 15 m
in height and all buildings used as
educational, assembly, institutional,
industrial, s t o r a g e a n d h a z a r d o u s
occupancies and mixed occupancies with any
of the aforesaid 1 occupancies. having area
more than 500 m- on each floor shall have a
minimum of two staircases. They shall be of
enclosed type; at least one of them shall be on
external walls of buildings and shall open
directly to the exterior, interior open space or
to an open place of safety. Further. the
provision or otherwise of alternative staircase
shall be subject to the requirements of travel
distance being complied with.
7.7 Doorways
7.7.1 Every exit doorway shall open into an
enclosed stairway, or a horizontal exit of a
corridor or passageway providing continuous
and protected means of egress.
7.7.2 No exit doorway shall be less than
IOOcm in width. Doorways shall be not less
than 200 cm in height.
7.7.3 Exit doorways shall open outwards,
that is, away from the room, but shall not
obstruct the travel along any exit. No door,
when opened, shall reduce the required width
of stairway Y)r landing to less than 90 cm;
overhead or sliding doors shall not be
installed.
NoTE-I~ the case of buildings where there is a central
corridor, the doors of roomsshall open inwards to permit
smooth flow of traffic in the corridor.
7.7.4 Exit door,shall not open immediately

upon a flight of stairs; a landing equal to at
least the width of the door shall be provided in
the stairway at each doorway; the level of
landing shall be the same as that of the floor
which, it serves.
7.7.5 Exit doorways shall be openable from
the side which they serve without the useof a
key.
7.7.6 R EVOLVING D O O R S
7.4 Number of Exits
7.7.6.1 Revolving doors shall not be used as

required exits, except in residential, business
and mercantile occupancies, but shall not
constitute more than half the total required
door width. In mercantile buildings where
there is a possibility of congregation of a large
number of people (more than 200), revolving
doors shall not be permitted.
7.6. I G E N E R A L -The general requirements

of number of exits shall supplement the
7.7.6.2 Where the revolving doors provided

are completely made of glass (plate glass), a
PART
IV FIRE PROTECTION
,V9
red circle or emblem or logo at 1.5 m level

above sill shall be painted on the glass. The
thickness of the glass shall be not less than
12 mm.
7.8 Corridors and Passageways
7.8.1 Exit corridors and passageways shall be
of width not less than the aggregate required
width of exit doorways leading from them in
the direction of travel to the exterior.
7.8.2 Where stairways discharge through
corridors and passageways, the height of
corridors and passageways shall be not less
than 2.4 m.
7.9 Internal Staircases
7.9.1 Interior stairs shall be constructed of
non-combustible materials throughout.
7.9.2 Interior staircase shall be constructed as
a self-contained unit with an external wall
constituting at least one of its sides and shall
be completely enclosed.
7.9.3 A staircase shall not be arranged round
a lift shaft unless the latter is totally enclosed
by a material of fire-resistance rating as that
for type of construction itself.
7.9.4 Hollow combustible construction shall
not be permitted.
7.9.7 The minimum width of tread without

nosing shall be 25 cm for internal staircase of
residential buildings. This shall be 30 cm for
assembly, educational, institutional. business
and other buildings. The treads shall be
constructed and maintained in a manner to
prevent slipping.
7.9.8 The maximum height of riser shall be
19 cm for residential buildings and 15 cm for
other buildings and the number shall be
limited to 15 per flight.
7.9.9 Hand rails shall be provided at a
minimum height of 100 cm to be measured
from the baseofthemiddleofthetreadstothe
top of the hand rails. Further, the gap between
the two verticals shall not exceed 30 cm. This
gap shall be reduced to 15 cm where children
are likely to use the staircase.
7.9.10 The number of people in between floor
landings in staircase shall not be less than the
population on each floor for the purpose of
design of staircase.
7.10 Fire E,scapes or External Stairs
7.10.1 Fire escapes shall not be taken into
account in calculating the evacuation time of a
building.
7.102 All fire escapes shall be directly
connected to the ground.
7.9.5 No gas piping shall be laid in the

stairway.
7.10.3 Entrance to the fire escape shall be

separate and remote from the internal
staircase.
7.9.6 Notwithstanding the detailed provision

for exits in accordance with 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5,
the following minimum width shall be
provided for staircases:
7.10.4 Care shall be taken to ensure that the

wall opening or window opens on to or close
to a fire escape.
4 Residential buildings (dwellings)
I.0 m
NorE--- For row housing with 2 storeyes, the width

shall be 0.75 tn.
b) Residential hotel buildings
1.5 m
7.10.6 The fire escape shall be constructed of

non-combugible materials, and any doorway
leading to the fire escape shall have the
required fire resistance.
1.5 m
7.10.7 No staircase, used as a fire escape, shall

be inclined at an angle greater than 45 from
the horizontal.
c) Assembly buildings like
auditorium, theatres and

cinemas
d) Educational buildings.
i) Up to 24 m in height
ii) More than 24 m in height
1.5 m
2.0 m
e) institutional bdildings like

hospitals.
i) Up to 10 beds
ii)
More than IO beds
f-l All other buildings
w-30
7.10.5 The route to the fire escape shall be

free of obstructions at all times.
1.5 m
2.0 m
1.5 m
7.10.8 Fire escape stairs shall have straight

flight not less than 75 cm wide with 2Ocm
treads and risers not more than 19 cm. The
number of risers shall be limited to 15 per
flight.
7.10.9 Hand rails shall be of a height not less
than 100 cm.
7.10.10 SPIRAL FIRE ESCAPE-The use of
spiral staircase shall be limited to low
NATIDNAL
BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
occupant load and to a building not exceeding

9 m in height unless they are connected to
platforms, such as balconies and terraces to
allow escapes to pause,
A spiral fire escape shall be not less than 150
cm in diameter and shall be designed to give
adequate headroom.
7.1 J Roof Exit--In all buildings over three
storeys in height where the slope of the roof is
less than 20 degrees, direct access to the roof
shall be provided from the street by means of a
stairway. Where roofs are used as roof
gardens or for other habitable purposes,
sufficient stairways shall be extended to them
to provide the necessary exit facilities required
for such occupancy.
NOTE--This does not apply to A-2 and A-4 occupancies
up to 15 m m height.
7. I2 Horizontal Exirs
7.12. J The width of horizontal exit shall be
same as for the exit doorways (see 7.7).
7.12.2 A horizontal exit shall be equipped
with at least one fire door of self-closing type.
7.12.3 Floor area on the opposite or refuge
side of a horizontal exit shall be sufficient to
accommodate occupants of the floor areas
served, allowing not less than 0.3 m2/ person.
The refuge area into which a horizontal exit
leads shall be provided with exits adequate to
meet the requirements of this part. At least
one of the exits shall lead directly to the
exterior of the building or to a street.
7.12.4 Where there is a difference in level
between connected areas fat horizontal exits,
ramps, not more than 1 in 10 in slope shall be
provided; steps shall not be used.
7.12.5 Doors in horizontal exits shall be
openable at all times from both sides.
7.13 Fire Tower-Fire towers are the
preferred type of escape route for storeyed
buildings and their application shall be
considered as the safest route for escape. Their
number, location and size shall depend on the
building concerned, and its associated escape
routes.
7.13. J In every mercantile, industrial,
business, assembly buildings other than
and residential
institutional
theatres,
buildings, over 6 storeys or 25 m in height, at
least one required means of egress shall be a
fire tower.
?ART IV FIRE PROTECTION
7.13.2 The enclosure of fire towers shall be

constructed of walls with a 4 h fire-resistance
rating without openings other than the exit
doorways, with platforms, landings and
balconies of not less than 3 h fire-resistance
ratulg.
7.14 Ramps
7.14.1 Kamps shall comply with all the
applicable requirements for stairways
regarding enclosure, capacity and limiting
dimensions except where specified in 8 to 16
for special uses and occupancies.
7.142 The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1
in 10. In certain cases steeper slopes may be
permitted but in no case greater than 1 in 8.
7.14.3 For all slopes exceeding 1 in 10 and
wherever the use is such as to involve danger
of slipping, the ramp shall be surfaced with
approved non-slipping material.
8. REQUIREMENTS OF
RESlDENTlAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP A)
8.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for the type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the requirements given in 8.2
to 8.4.10 shall be complied with. The
capacity of any open mezzanine or balcony
shall be added to the capacity of the floor
below for the purpose of determining exit
capacity.
8.2 Fire Detection/ Extiqguishing System
-The requirements specified in 8.2. J to 8.2.5
shall apply to normal buildings of low rise
nature (up to 15 m in height). Requirements
for high rise buildings (above 15 m in height)
shall be in accordance with Appendix A. For
information regarding alarm systems
(see Appendix B).
8.2. J O CCUPANCY
LODGINC~
OR
UBDIVISION
R OOMING H O U S E S
Height i Area of
Occupancy
A - l
Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System
a) Up to 2 storeys
Not required
b) 3 storeys and above

i) Area of each floor
less than 300 m*.
ii) Area of each floor
more than 300 m*
with central corridor and rooms on
either side.
Not required
ManuaHy operated electric fiie
alarm (MOEFA)
,VPl
8.2.2 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISWN A-2 O NE OK

T w o F A M I L Y P R I V A T E DWELLINGS - Not
req u ired.
8.2.3 O C C U P A N C Y
S U B DIVISION
A-3
DOKMITOKIES - Requirements laid down in
8.2.1 shall be followed.
permit the opening of the locked or closed

door from the outside in an emergency
without the use of a special key.
b) Every below-street-level sleeping room
shall have direct access to the outside of

the building.
8.3.3 For occupancy Subdivision A-3, the

8.2.4 O C C U P A N C Y
A PARTMENT
required.
W~S~I~ISION
A-4
HOUSES
(FLA-I S) -- Not
8.2.5 O C C U P A N C Y S UBDIVISION A-5 H O - I - E L

-Manually operated fire alarms and a u t o matic fire alarm systems shall be provided if a
building has more than 2 storeys; or if the
area per floor exceeds 300 m2. Where the
entire building is sprinklered, the automatic
detectors may not be required.
8.3 Exit Facilities
8.3.1 In a d d i t i o n t o reqwements f o r
occupancy Subdivision A-2 (see 8.3.2). the
following shall be provided for occupancy
Subdivision A-l:
4 Every sleeping room above the street !loor
shall have access to two separate means of

exit, at least one of which shall consist of
an enclosed interior stairway or a n
exterior stairway, or a fire escape or
horizontal exit all so arranged as to
provide a safe path of travel to the outside
of the building without traversing any
corridor or space exposed to an
unprotected vertical opening.
b) Any sleeping room below the street floor
shall have direct access to the outside of

the building.
8.3.2 For occupancy Subdivision A-2 of

more than two rooms, every occupied room,
excluding areas used solely for storage, shall
have at least two means of exit, at least one of
which shall be a door or a stairway providing a
means of unobstructed travel to the outside of
the building or street or grade level and not
more than one of which may be a window. No
room or space shall be occupied which is
accessible only by a ladder, folding stairs or
through a trap door. The following further
provisions shall be made:
a) All locking devices which would impede
or prohibit exit, such as chain type bolts,
limited opening sliding type locks and

burglar locks which are not disengaged
following provisions shall apply:

All dormitories, except those mentioned
at 8.3.5, shall ha.ve exits so arranged that,
from any sleeping room or open aormitory
sleeping area, there shall be access to two
separate and distinct exits in different
directions with no common path of travel
unless the room or space is subject to
occupancy by not more than 10 persons and
has a door opening directly to the outside of
the building at street or grade level, or to an
outside stairway in which case one means of
exit may be accepted.
4 Every individual living unit covered by
occupancy Subdivision A-4 shall comply

with the requirements for occupancy
Subdivision A-2 in respect of exit.
b) Every living unit shall have access to at
least two separate exits which are remote

from each other and are reached by travel
iii different directions, except that a
common path of travel may be permitted
for the first 6m (that is, a dead-end
corridor up to 6m long may be
permitted) provided that single exit may
be permitted under any of the conditions
given under(c).
c) Any building not more than two storeys in
height with no basement, or in case there is

a basement and with street floor level not
more than 2.5 m above grade at any point
next to the building, excluding driveways,
not more than 10 percent of the perimeter
shall be subject to the condition that the
access to the basement is only from the
exterior of the building if the basement
contains a heating plant, group storage,
ineinerator room or paint shop or other
hazardous occupancy.
4 At least half of required exits shall

discharge. direct to the outside of the
buildings; any other exits shall be the same
as required for hotels.
easily by quick-releasing catches, shall be

prohibited. All closet door latches shall be

such that even children may open the

doors from inside. All bathroom door
locks or fasteners shall be designed t o
a) Not less than two exits, as remote from

each other as practicable, shall be
I?*
NATIONAL
WIlJlING CODE OF INDIA
accessible from every floor, including

basements occupied for hotel purposes,
except as a single exit as permitted in (b)
below. Exits and ways of access thereto
shall be so arranged that they are
accessible in at least two different
directions from every point in any open
area, or from any room door.
b) Any room or section with an outside door
at street or grade level may have such

outside door as a single exit, provided no
part of the room or area is more thanI5 m
from the door measured along the natural
path of travel.
8.3.5.1 Where stairways or other exits serve

two or more upper floors, the same stairway
or other exit required to serve any one upper
floor may also serve other upper floors, except
that no inside open stairway or ramp may
serve as a required egress facility from more
than one floor.
N O T E-Under this provision, if the second and third
floors were each required to have three stairways. the
second floor may use thestairways servingthe third floor,
so that thetotal number ofstairways required is three. not
six.
8.3.6
B ASEMENT
8.4.2 No stove or combustion heater shall be

located directly under or immediately at the
foot of stairs or otherwise so located as to
block escape in case of malfupctioning of the
stove or heater.
8.4.3 All kitchen exhaust fans, where
provided, shall be fixed to an outside wall or
to a duct of non-combustible material which
leads directly to the outside. The ducts must
not pass through combustible materials.
8.4.4 All wiring shall be done in accordance
with Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations.
8.4.S Where television is installed, all
outdoor antennae shall be properly grounded
and protected from lightning (see Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations).
8.4.6 Doors leading into rooms in which
flammable liquids are stored or used shall be
as in 6. Such assembly shall be self-closing and
shall be posted with a sign on each side of the
door in 25 mm high block letters stating
FIRE DOOR- KEEP CLOSED.
EXITS
8.3.6.1 Basements occupied for hotel

purposes shall have exits arranged in
accordance with 8.3.5.
8.3.6.2 Basement exits shall be sufficient to
provide for the capacity of the basement as
determined in accordance with 8.1; in no case
shall there be less than two independent
basement exits.
8.3.6.3 Basements or sub-basements not open
to the public and used only for heating
equipment, storage and service operations
(other than kitchens which are considered
part of the hotel occupancy shall have exl,ts
appro riate to the actua 1 occupancy, m
actorc_?ante with other ap licable provlslons
of the Code, or in case oP mixed occupancy
where there may be doubt as to which other
section is apphcable, such basements shall
have exits determined on the basis of lesser
exit capacity.
8.4.7 Where a boiler room is provided or a

central heating plant is installed, which uses
solid or Ii uid fuel, it shall be separated from
the rest o;i the building by a separation wall
with all openings protected as in 6.
8.4.8 Room containing high pressure boilers,
refrigerating machinery, transformers or
other service equipment subject to possible
explosion shall not be located directly under
or adjacent to exits. Allsuch rooms shall be
effectively cut off from other parts of the
building and shall be provided with adequate
vents to the outer air.
8.4.9 All rooms or areas of hazardous
occupancy, in addition to those hereinbefore
mentioned, shall be segregated or shall be
protected as may be directed by the enforcing
Authority where, in the opinion of the
enforcing Authority, fire, explosion or smoke
therefrom js likely to interfere with safe egress
from the building.
8.4 Special Hazards
8.4.10 For detailed information regarding

hazardous petroleum products, reference may
be made to the Petroleum Act 1934
8.4.1 Flammable liquids for household

purposes shall be kept in tightly stoppered or
sealed containers. For the limits of quantities
of flammable liquids to be allowed in various
occupancies, reference may be made to
appropriate regulations.
9. REQUIREMENTS OF
EDUCATIONAL BUILDlNGS
(GROUP B)
specified in 6 for type of construction and
IV-33
occupancy group and exit requirements given

in 7, .the requirements iti 9.2 to 9.4.5 shall be
complied with.
9.2 Buildings intended for educational
occupancy shall not be used for any
9.3 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System
-The requirements specified in 9.3.1 shall
apply to normal buildings of low rise nature
(up to 15 m in height). Requirements for high
rise buildings (above I5 m in height) shall be
in accordance with Appendix A.
9.3.1 Educational buildings above two
storeys having an area of more. than
1000 m*/floor shall have manually operated
electrical fire alarm (MOEFA).
9.4 Exit Facilities -In addition to the
provisions in 7, the following shall be
provided.
9.4.1 Exits, in accordance with 7, shall be so
arranged that at least two separate exits are
available in every floor area. Exits shall be as
remote from each other as practicable and so
arranged that there are no pockets or dead
ends of appreciable size in which occupants
may be trapped.
9.4.2 Every room with a capacity of over
100 persons in area shall have at least two
doorways as remote from each other as
practicable. Such doorways shall provide
access to separate exits, but may open upon a
common corridor leading to separate exits in
opposite directions.
9.4.3 Exterior doors shall be operated by bars
or some other panic hardware device, except
that doors leading from classrooms directly to
the outside may be equipped with the same
type lock as is used on classroom doors
leading to corridor, with no provision
whatsoever for locking against egress from the
classroom.
9.4.4 S PECIAL H AZARD
9.4.4.1 Storage of volatile flammable liquids
shall be prohibited and the handling of such
liquids shall be restricted to science
laboratories only.
9.4.4.2 Each building shall be provided with
an approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked, where applicable. The
detailed requirements regarding safe use of
gas shall be as specified in Part 1X Plumbing
services, Section 3 Gas supply.
1v_34
9.4.4.3 All exterior openings in a boiler room

or rooms containing central heating
equipment, if located below openings in
another storey or if less than 3 m from other
doors or windows of the same building, shall
be protected by a fire assembly as in 6. Such
assemblies shall bc fixed, automatic or selfclosing. Provisions of 8.4.7 shall also apply to
this group of occupancy.
9.4.5 EXCEPTION
AND
DEVIATION
9.4.5.1 Gymnasiums and similar occupancies

may have running tracks of wood or
unprotected steel or iron.
9.4.5.2 In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose
school rooms having an area not greater than
300 m, 25-mm nominal tight tongue-andgrooved or 20-mm plywood wall covering
may be used in the inner side in lieu of fireresistance plaster.
9.4.5.3 A building which will have only the
first floor accessible to not more than 20
pupils at any time, may be used for school
purposes with the following exceptions:
a) Exterior walls or parts of walls which are
less than 90 cm from adjacent property
lines shall have no openings therein.
b) Classrooms may have only one exit not
less than 90 cm wide.
10. REQUIREMENTS OF
INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP C)
given in 7, the following requirements shall be
complied with.
10.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System
-The requirements specified in 10.2.1 shall

apply to normal buildings of low rise nature
(up to 15 m in height). Requirements for high
rise buildmgs (above 15 m in height) shall be
in accordance with Appendix A.
10.2.1 In hospitals, manually operated
electrical fire alarm (MOEFA) system and
automatic fire alarm system (see Appendix B)
shall be provided with sounders/ indicators,
located in the duty room, so that only the duty
personnel receive the warning.
10.3 Exit Facilities-In addition to the
provisions of 7, the following requirements
shall be complied with.
NIATMmAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
10.3.1 In buildings or sections occupied by

bed-ridden patients where the floor area IS
over 280 m , facilities shall be provided to
move patjents in hospital beds to the other
side of a smoke barrier from any part of such
building or section not directly served by
approved horizontal exits or exits from the
first floor (floor 2) of a building to the outside.
10.3.2 Not less than two exits of one or more
of the following tv es shall be provided for
every floor, incluing basement, of every
building or section:
a) Doors leading directly outside the
building;
b) Stairways;
c) Ramps; and
d) Horizontal exits.
10.3.3 All required exits which serve as egress
from hospital or infirmary sections shall be
not less than 150 cm in clear width, including
patient bedroom doors. to permit
transportation of patients on beds, litters, or
mattresses. The minimum width of corridors
serving patients* bedrooms in- buildings shall
be 240 cm. For detailed information on
recommendations for buildings and facilities
for the physically handicapped, reference may
be made to good practice [IV( 15)].
10.3.4 Revolving doors shall not be counted
as required exits and shall not be installed,
except in situations, such as revolving doors
at a main entrance where they are not subject
to emergency exit use by patients.
10.3.5 Efevators constitute a desirable
supplementary facility, but arenotcounted as
required exits.
10.3.6 Each storey in which 35 or more
atients are housed.shgll be divided into at
Peast two compartments by smoke barriers
and the Authority may require storeys
housing a lesser number of patients to be
divided into compartments when, in its
judgment, such division is essential to the
protection of the patients.
10.3.7 Doors in smoke barriers shall be so
installed that these may normally be kept in
open position, but will close automatically or
may be released manually to self-closing
action. Corridor door openings in smoke
barriers shall be not less than 150cm in width.
Provision shall also be made for double swing
single/double leaf type door.
10.3.8 Exits and other features for penal and
mental institutions, and custodial institutions
shall be the same as specified for hospitals, in

so far as applicable. Reliable means shall be
provided to permit the prompt release of
inmates from any locked section in case of fire
or other emergency.
10.3.9 Wherever any inmates are confined in
any locked rooms or spaces, adequate guards
or other personnel shall be contmuously on
duty or immediately available to provide for
release of inmates or for such other action as
may be indicated in case of fire or other
emergency.
10.3.10 No building constructed in whole or
in part of combustible materials shall be used
to combine inmates in cells or sleeping
quarters, unless automatic sprinkler
protection is provided.
10.3.11 All buildings or sections ofbuildings
in penal and mental institutions used for
manufacturing. storage or office purposes
shall have exits in accordance with the
provisions of the Code for those occupancies.
IO.4 Special Hazards
10.4.1 No combustible material of any kind
shall be stored or used in any building or
section thereof used for institutional
occupancy, except as necessary to normal
occupancy and use of the building.
10.4.2 Storage of volatile flammable liquids,

such as chloroform, eth I alcohal,,spirit, etc,
shah not be allowed andythe handhng of such
hqutds shall not be ermitted in quantities
more than 5 litres. pFhe handling of such
liquids byunauthorized persons shall also not
be permuted.
1 0 . 5 E x c e p t i o n a n d D e v i a t i o n - It is
reco nized that in institutions or part of
but!3. mgs housmg various types of psychiatric
patterns, or used as penal and mental
mstttuttons, it is necessary to maintain locked
doors and barred windows; and to such extent
the necessary provision in other sections of
the Code requiring the keeping of exits
unlocked may be waived. Ft is also recognized
that certain types of psychiatric patients are
not capable of seeking safety without
adequate guidance. In buildings where this
situation prevails, reliable means for the rapid
release of occupants shall be provided, such as
the remote control of locks, or by keying all
locks to keys commonly used by attendants.
II. REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY

BUILDINGS (GROUP D)
Il. I In addition to the general requirements
IV-35

given in 7, the requirements in 11.2 to 11.7.4
1 I.2 Mixed Occupant:,.-- Places of assembly
in buildings of other occupan,cy, such as
ballrooms in hotels, restaurants m stores and
assembly rooms m schools, shall be so
located, separated or protected as to avold
any undue dan er to the occupants of the
place of assembfy from a fire originating in
the other occupancy or smoke therefrom.
11.3 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System The requirements specified in 1 1 . 3 . 1
to 11.3.5 shall apply to normal buildings of
low rise nature (up to 15 m in height).
Requirements for high rise buildings (above
15m in height) shall be in accordance with
Appendix A.
11.3.1 Occupancy
SIJ~WIVIS~~N D-1
Details of
Occupancy
a) Stage
b) Auditoria
Automatic sprinkler
Automatic fire alarm
system (see Appendix
B)
s stem (see Appendix
I&
svstem (see Appendix
B)
s stem (see Appendix
B;
c) Corridor, green
rooms
d) Canteen
e) Storage
11.3.2 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION D-2Requirements laid down in 11.3.1 shall be

followed.
11.3.3 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION D-3Automatic fire alarm system (see Appendix B).
11.3.4 O C C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N D-4Automatic fire alarm system (see Appendix B).
11.3.5 OCCUPANCY SU B D I V I S I O N D-5Manually operated electrical fire alarm
system (MOEFA).
1 I .4 Exit Facilities
11.4.1 Every place of assembly, every tier or
balcony, and every individual room u!$d as a
place of assembly shall have exits sufficient to
provide for the total capacity thereof as
determined in accordance with 7.
,-36
1 1 . 4 . 1 . 1 Every place of assembly of

subdivision D-l shall have at least four
separate exits as remote from each other as
practicable.
1 1 . 4 . 1 . 2 E v e r y p l a c e o f assemblv of
Subdivision D-2 shall have at leasi two
separate exits as remote from each other as
practicable and if of capacity over 600, at least
three exits shall be provided with each exit not
less than of 2 unit widths.
1 1 . 4 . 1 . 3 Every place of assembly of
Subdivisions D-3, D-4 and D-5 shall have at
least two means of exit, consisting of separate
*exits or doors leading to a corridor or other
spaces giving access to two separate and
independent exits in different directions,
except that for places of assembly having a
capacity of less than 100 persons, one 2-unit
doorway may be permitted in rooms where no
part of the room is more than 15 m from the
doorway, measured along the line of travel,
and the doorway leads directly outside the
building at grade level or leads to a corridor or
other space giving access to two separate and
independent exits.
11.4.2 Clear aisles not less than 1.2 m in
width shall be formed at right angles to the
line of seating in such number and manner
that rio seat shall be more than seven seats
away from an aisle. Rows of seats opening on
to an aisle at one end only shall have not
more than seven seats. Under the conditions,
where all these aisles do not directly meet the
exit doors, cross-aisles shall be provided
parallel to the line of seating so as to provide
direct access to the exit, provided that not
more than one cross-aisle for every 10 rows
shall be required. The width of cross-aisles
shall be a minimum of I m. Steps shall not be
placed in aisles to overcome differences in
levels, unless the gradient exceeds 1 ih IO.
11.4.3 The fascia of boxes, balconies and galleries shall have substantial railings not less
than 65 cm high above the floor. The railings
at the end of aisles extending to the fascia shall
be not less than 75 cm high for the width of the
aisle or 90 cm high at the foot of steps.
11.4.4 Cross-aisles except where the backs of
seats on the front of the aisle project 60 cm or
more above the floor of the aisle, shall be
provided with railings not less than 90 cm
high.
11.4.5 No turnstiles or other devices to
restrict the movement of persons shall be
installed in any place of assembly in such a
manner as to interfere in any way with the
required exit facilities.
NATIONAL BUIl.DINC
CODE OF INDIA
11.4.6 In theatres and similar places of public

assembly where persons are admitted to the
building at a time when seats are not available
for them and are allowed to wait in a lobby or
similar space until seats are available, such use
of lobby or similar space shall not encroach
upon the required clear width of exits. Such
waiting shall he restricted to areas separated
from the required exitways by suhstantial
permanent partitions or fixed rlgid railing not
less than IOS cm high. Exits shall be provided
for such waiting spaces on the basis of one
person for each 0.7 m- of waiting space area.
Such exits shall he in addition to the exits
specified for the main aurlitorlum area and
shall conform in construction and
arrangement to the general rules of exits given
ahove.
11.4.7 No display or exhibit shall he so
installed or operated as to interfere In any wal
with access to any required exit, or with any
required exit sign.
All displays or exhibits of combustible
material or construction and all hooths and
temporary construction in connection
therewith shall be so limited in combustibility
or protected as to avoid any undue halard of
fire which might endanger occupants before
they have opportunity to use the available
exits, as determined by the authority.
,1.4.8 No mirrors shall be placed in or
adjacent to any exitway in such a manner as to
confuse the direction of exit.
11.4.9 Places of assembly in buildings of
other occupancy may use exits common to the
place of assembly and the other occupancy.
Provided the assembly area and the other
occupancy are considered separately. each has
exits sufficient to meet the requirements of the
Code.
11.4.10 E x i t s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t f o r
simultaneous occupancy of both the places of
assembly and other parts of the building,
unless the Authority determines that the
conditions are such that simultaneous
occupancy will not occur.
devices shall be used in any place of assembly,

except in the following cases:
a) Where necessary for ceremonial purposes,
the enforcing Authority may permit open
flame lighting under such restrictions as
are necessary to avoid danger of ignition
of combustible materials or injury to
occupants.
h) Candles may be used on restaurant tables
if securely supported on non-combustible
bases and so located as to avoid danger of
ignition of comhustihle materials.
cl Open flame devices may be used on stages
where they are a necessary part of

t h e a t r i c a l p e r f o r m a n c e . provided
adequate precautions, satisfactory to the
Authority, are taken to prevent ignition of
combustible materials.
II 6 Special Hazards
11.6.1 1 he decorations of places of assembly
shall be of non-tlammahle materials. Fabrics
and papers used for sudh purpose shall be
treated with an effective flame-proofing
material. Stage settings made of combustible
materials shall likewise be treated with flameproofing materials.
11.6.2 Seats in places of public assembly,

accommodating more than 300 persons, shall
be securely fastened to the floor, except as
permitted in 11.6.3. All seats in balconies and
galleries shall be securely fastened to the floor,
except that in nailed-inenclosures, boxes with
level floors and having not more than I4 seats,
the seats need not be fastened.
Il.6.3 Chairs not secured to the floor may be
permitted in restaurants, night clubs and
other occupancies where the fastening of seats
to the floor may be impracticable, provided
that in the area used for seating, excluding
dance floor. stage, etc. there shall be not more
than one seat for each I .4 m of floor area and
adequate aisles to reach exits shall be

maintained at all times.
11.6.3.1 Rows of seats between aisles shall
11.4.11 For any place of assembly under
have not more than I4 seats.
Subdivision D-l, at least half the required

means of exits shall lead directly outdoors or
through exitways completely separated from
exits serving other parts of the building.
11.6.3.2 Rows of seats opening on to an aisle

at one end only shall have not more than 7
seats.
Zi.4.12 For detailed information regarding
11.6.3.3 Seats without dividing arms shall

have their capacity determined by allowing 45
cm per person.
cmema buildin s, reference may be made to

good practice [PV( 16)].
11.5 Lighting-No
IART
open flame lighting
IV FIRE. PitOlECTlON
11.6.4 The spacing of rows of seats from back

to back shall be neither less than 85 cm norless
w3
than 70 cm plus the sum of the thickness of the

back and inclination of the back. There shall
be a space of not less than 35 cm between the
back of one seat and the front of the seat
immediately behind it as measured between
plumb lines.
11.6.5 Rooms containing high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery of other than
domestic refrigerator type, large transformers
or other service equipment subject to possible
or adjacant to the required exits. All such
rooms shall be effectively cut off from other
parts of the building and provided with
adequate vents to the outer air.
11.6.6 All rooms or areas used for storage of
any combustible materials or equipment, or
for painting, refinishing, repair or similar
purposes shall be effectively cut off from
assembly areas or protected with a standard
system of automatic sprinklers. They shall be
located away from staircases.
II .6.7 Every stage equipped with fly galleries,
gridirons and rigging for movable theatrctype scenery, shall have a system of automatic
sprinklers over and under such stage areas or
spaces and auxiliary spaces, such as dressing
rooms, store rooms and workshops. and the
proscenium opening shall be provided with a
fire-resisting curtain, capable of withstanding
a lateral pressure of 4 kN/m* over the entire
area. The curtain shall have an emergency
closing device capable of causing the curtain
to close without the use of power and when so
closed, it shall be reasonably tight against the
passage of smoke.
11.6.8 The stage roof of every theatre using
movable scenery or having a motion picture
screen of highly combustible construction
shall have a ventilator or ventilators in or
above it, openable from the stage floor b y
hand and also opening by fusible links or
some other approved automatic heat actuated
device, to give a free o ning equal to at least
the floor of the stage.
one-eighth the area ofe
11.6.9 Where automatic sprinkler protection
is not provided, the proscenium wall of every
theatre using movable scenery of decorations
shall have, exclusive of the proscenmm
opening, not more than two openiq+s entering

the stage, each not to exceed 2 m and fitted
with self-closing fire check doors..
11.6.10 Every place of assembly in which

projection of motion pictures by light is made
shall have the projection apparatus enclosed
in a fire-resistmg fixed booth according to
good practice[lV( 1611, except that such booth
w-38
shall not be required where no nitrocellulose

motion picture film is used.
11.6.11 Automatic smoke vents shall be
installed above the audotorium of theatres,
including motion picture houses, with vent
area equal to not less than 3- I j 3 percent of the
floor area of the auditorium, including the
sum of the floor areas of all balconies,
galleries, boxes and tiers. It may be desirable
to provide a large number of small vents
rather than a small number of large vents.
11.7 Exception and Deviation
11.7.1 Where boilers or central heating plants
using liquid or solid fuel are located at grade
level, these may be separated from the
remainder of the building by a separating wall
with openings protected.
I I .7.2 Gymnasiums and similar occupancies
may have running tracks constructed ofwood
or unprotected steel or iron.
11.7.3 The underside of continuous steel deck
grand stands when erected outdoors need not
be fire-protected when occupied for public
toilets.
11.7.4 A fire-resistive ceiling is not required
in a one-storey building having an open-frame
roof.,
12. REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS
BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
12.1 In addition to the general requirement!
specified in 6 for type of construction ano
12.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing SystemThe requirements specified in 12.2.1 to 12.2.3
nature (up to 15 m in height). Requirements
for high rise buildings (above IS m in height)
shall be in accordance with Appendix A.
1 2 . 2 . 1 O C C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N E- 1
( EXCEPT O FFICE B UILDING )
Details of
Occupancy
Fire Detection/ Extin

guishing System
Buildings more
than 2 storeys
with floor area
above 500 mZ/
storey.
system (see Appendix B).
12.2.2 O C C U P A N C Y SUBDWNON E-2

Fire Detecti&/ Extinguishing Sysrem
Derails of
Occupancy
a) Laboratory with Fixed automatic
CO2 fire extinguishing system or

automatic fire alarm
system (see Appendix B)
b) Solvent storage Automatic foam installation or automa
tic CO2 fire extinguishing system
c) Flammable liquid Automatic foam
installation or automatic COZ fire extinguishing system
delicate instruments
12.4 Special Hazards

12.4.1 No storage of flammable liquids shall
be allowed in Group E occupancies and the
handling and use of gasoline, fuel oil and
other flammable liquids shall not be
permitted, unless such use and handling
complies with the appropriate regulations.
12.4.2 Every boiler room or room containing
a central heating plant using solid or liquid
fuel shall be separated from the rest of the
building by a separating wall. Every boiler
room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns gas as a fuel shall be
adequately separated from the rest of the
building.

12.2.3
O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION
Derails of
Occupancy
E-3
a) Area of computer Automatic fire alarm

system (see Appeninstallations
dix B)[BCF fixed
fire extinguishing
installation
b) Space under false Automatic fire alarm
system (see Appenceiling(floor)
dixB)
c) Space above false Automatic fire alarm
system(see Appenceiling
dix B)
d) Electrical switch Automatic fire alarm
system(see Appenboard
dix B),/BCF fixed
fire extmguishing
installation
provisions of 7, the requirements given
under 12.3.1 and 12.3.2 shall be complied
with.
12.3.1 In the case of mezzanines or balconies
open to the floor below, or other unprotected
vertical openings between floors, the
population of the mezzanine or other
subsidiary floor level shall be added to that of
the main floor for the purpose of determining
the required exits, provided, however, that in
no case shall the total number of exit units be
less than that required if all vertical openings
were enclosed.
12.3.2 Not less than two exits shall be
provided for every floor, including basements
occupied for office purposes or uses incidental
thereto.
?A@1 IV
FIRE PROTECTION
12.5.1 Basements used only for storage,

heating. any other service equipment, and not
for office occupancy, shall conform to exit
requirements for Group H occupancies in all
respects.
13. REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE

BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
specified in 6 for types of construction and
given in 7, the,.additional requirements in 13.2
to 13.5 shall be complied with.
13.1.1 MIXED O CCUPANCY - NO dwelling
unit shall have its sole means of exit through
any mercantile occupancy in the same
building, except in the case of a single family
unit where the family operates the store.
1 3 . 2 F i r e Deteclionl E_vtinguishing Svstern-The requirements specified in 13.2.1

Requirements of high rise buildings (above 15
m in height) shall be in accordance with
Appendix A.
13.2.1
OIXWPANCY SUBDIVISION
Derails of
Occupanq
F-l
a) Whole sale estab- Automatic sprinklers/

lishments: ware- automatic fire alarm
houses, transport system (see Appenbooking agencies dix B)
b) Other premises

w-39
13.2.2
O CCUPANCY S UBDIVISION
Details of
Occupancy
Retailers
F-2

a) Shopping lines
system (see Appenwith central
dix B)
corridors open
to sky
Automatic sprinklers
b) Shopping area
inside buildings
to automatic fife
with area more
system (see Appenthan 500 sqm
dix B) with venting
on each floor
facilities
c) Underground
Automatic sprinklers
shoping centres
times to permit prompt escape from any point

of danger in case of fire or other emergency,
but no dead-ends in which persons might be
trapped due to display stands, adjoining
buildings, fences, vehicles or other
obstructions.
13.4.5 If mercantile operations are conducted
in roofed-over areas, these shall be treated as
mercantile buildings, provided canopies over
individual small stands to p r o t e c t
merchandise from the weather shall not be
constructed to constitute buildings for the
purpose of the Code.
13.5 E x c e p t i o n a n d D e v i a t i o n - A n y
mercantile occupancy, where goods of a
highly hazardous nature are predominant,
shall be considered under Group J occupancy
for the purpose of the Code.
14. REQUIREMENTS OF

vertical openings between floors, the

population or area of the mezzanine or other
subsidiary floor level shall be added to that of
the main floor for the purpose of determining
the required exits, provided, however, that in
no case shall the total number of exit units be
less than that required if all vertical openings
were enclosed.
13.3.2 At least two separate exits shall be
accessible from every part of every floor,

including basements; such exits shall be as
arranged as to be reached by different paths of
travel in different directions, except that a
common path of travel may be permitted for
the first 15 m from any point.
13.4 Special Hazards
13.4.1 Requirements specified in 12.4.1 shall
be applicable to all Group F occupancies also.
13.4.2 Hazardous areas of mercantile
occupancies shall be segregated or protected.
13.4.3 In self-service stores, no check-out
stand or associated railings or barriers shall
obstruct exits or required aisles or appraoches
thereto.
13.4.4 Open-air mercantile operations, such
as open-air markets, gasoline filling stations,
roadside stands for the sale of a farm produce
and other outdoor mercantik operations shall
be so arranged and conducted as to maintain
free and unobstructed ways of travel at all
w40
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP G)
14.1 In addition to the general

requirements specified in 6 for type of
construction and occupancy group and the
exit requirements given in 7. the requirements
in 14.2 to 14.5 shall be complied with.
14.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System - The requirements specified in 14.2.1

Requirements of high rise buildings (above 15
m in height) shall be in accordance with
Appendix A.
14.2.1 O C C U P A N C Y
required.
14.2.2
S UBDIVISION
OWUPANCY SUBDIVISION
Details af
Occupancy
G-l - N o t
G-2
a) Area up to 750 m* Automatic fire alarm

b) Area above 750 m* Automatic sprinklers/
automatic fire
alarm system (see
Appendix B)
24.2.3 OC C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N G - 3 See 14.3.4.3(d).
14.3 Exit Facilities--ln addition to the
provision of 7, the following requirements
shall also be complied with.

provided for every floor or section including
NATJONAL B U I L D I N G C O D E O F WDlA
basements used for industrial purposes or uses

incidental thereto.
14.3.2 In buildings used for alrcraft assembly
or other occupancy requiring undivided floor
areas so large that the.distances from points
within the area to the nearest outside walls
where exit doors could be provided are in
excess of 45 m, requirements for distance to
exits may be satisfied by providing stairs
leading to exit tunnels or to overhead
passageways. I n c a s e s w h e r e s u c h
arrangements are not practicable. the
Authority may, by special ruling, permit other
exit arrangements for one-storey buildings
with distances in excess of the maximum
distances specified in 7, if completely
automatic sprinkler protection is provided
and if the heights of ceiling curtain boards and
roof ventilation are such as to mimmize the
possibility that employees will be overtaken
by the spread of fire or smoke within 180 cm of
the floor level before they have time to reach
exits, provided, however, that in no case may
the distance of travel to reach the nearest exit
exceed 120 m where smoke venting is required
as a condition for permitting distances of
travel to exits in excess of the maximum
otherwise allowed.
14.3.3 SPECIAL H AZARDS
14.3.3.1 In any roum in which volatile
flammable liquids are used or stored, no
device generating a glow or flame capable of
igniting flammable vapour shall be installed
or used.
Such a room shall be provided with a suitably
designed exhaust ventilation system (see
Appendix C). To ensure safety from fire due
to short circuit, faulty electrical connection or
some similar cause, proper care shall be taken
in designing electncal. installations in such
room (see Part VIII Building services, Section
2 Electrical Installations).
14.3.3.2 The storage, use and handling of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable liquids
shall not be permitted in any Group G
occupancy unless it complies with regulations
pertaining to Petroleum Act 1934.
14.3.3.3 Every boiler room or room below the
first floor containing a heating plant shall be
buildings.
14.3.3.4 For requirements regarding
subject to industrial occupancy, shall have

exits in accordance with the requirements of
Group H occupancies.
14.3.4.2 The following exceptions shall apply
to specia! purpose industrial occupancies:
4 Exits need be provided only for the
persons actually employed; spaces not

subject to human occupancy because of
the presence of machinery or equipmept
may be excluded from consideration.
b) Where unprotected vertical openings are
necessary to manufacturing operations,

these may be permitted beyond the limits
specified for industrial occupancy,
provided every floor level has direct access
to one or more enclosed stairways or other
exits protected against obstruction by any
fire in the open areas connected by the
unprotected vertjcal openings or smoke
therefrom.

to high hazard industyial occupancies: _ _
a) Exits shall be so located that it will not be
necessary to travel more than 22.5 m from

any point to reach the nearest exit.
b) From every point in every floor area, there
shall be at least two exits accessible in

differenb directions; where floor areas are
divided into rooms, there shall be at least
two ways of escape from every room,
however small, except toilet rooms, S O
located that the points of access thereto
are out of or suitably shielded from areas
of high hazard.
c) In addition to types of exits for upper

floors specified for Group G occupancies,
slide escapes may be used as required exits
for both new and existing buildings.
4 All high hazard industrial occupancies
shall have automatic sprinkler protection

or such other protection as may be
appropriate to the particular hazard,
including explosion, venting for any area
subject to explosion hazard, designed to
minimize danger to occupants in case of
fire or other emergency before they have
time to utilize exits to escape.
rww.
14.4 For detailed information onfire safety

of ceriain individual (specific) industrial
occupancies reference may be made to good
practice [ IV( 17)].
14.3.4 EXCEPTION AND D EVIATION

14.3.4.1 Basements used only for storage,
heating and other service equipment, and not
14.5 Fire protection considerations for

venting industrial occupancies shall be as in
Appendix C.
electrical generating and distribution stations,

reference may be made to good practice
PART IV FIRE P R O T E C T I O N
w41
15. REQUlREMENTS OF STORAGE

BUlLDlNGS (GROUP H)
specified in 6 for type of constructlon and
given in 7, the requirements in 15.2 to IS.5
IS.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing Qstem T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s s p e c i f i e d i n 15.2.1

nature (up to 15 m in. height). Requirements
of high rise buildings (above 15 m in height)
shall be in accordance with Appendix A.
15.2.1 Automatic sprinklers are prohibited
where water reactive material is kept and
hence automatic detectors shall be provided.
1 5 . 3 E x i t F a c i l i t i e s - I n addition to the
15.3.1 Every building or structure used
for storage. and every section thereof
considered separately, shall have access
to at least one exit so arranged and located
as to provide a suitable means of escape
for any person employed therein and,in any
room or space exceeding 1400 m- gross
area, or where more than 10 persons may
be normally present, at least two separate
means of exit shall be available, as remote
from each other as practicable.
15.3.2 Every storage area shall have access to
at least one means of exit, which can be readily
opened. This shall not be subject to locking so
long as any persons are inside and shall not
depend on power operation.
IS. 3.3 The following special provisions shall
to parking garages of closed or open
type, above or below ground, but not to
mechanical parking facilities where
automobiles are moved into and out of
storage mechanically which are not normally
occupied by persons and thus require no exit
f cihties. Where repair operations are
c!l nducted, the exits shall comply with the
requirements of Group G occupancies in
addition to compliance with the following:
apply
a) Where both parking and repair operations
are conducted in the same building, the

entire building shall comply with the
requirements for Group G occupancies,
unless the parking and repair sections are
effectively separated by separation walls.
b) Every floor of every closed parking garage

shall have access to at least two separate
means of exit, so arranged that from any
point in the garage the paths of travel to
1w42
the two means of exit shall be in different

directions, except that a common path of
travel may be permitted for the first 15 m
from any point.
d On the street floor, at least two separate

exit doors shall be provided, except that
any opening for the passage of
automobiles may serve as a means of exit,
provided no door or shutter is installed
thereon. Street floor exits in closed
garages shall be so arranged that no point
m the area is more than 30 m from the
nearest exit, or 45 m in the case of garages
protected by automatic sprinklers,
distance bein measured along the natural
path of trave.
f
4 On floors above the street, at least two
means of exit shall be provided, one of

which shall be an q!Ictosed stairway. The
other means of egress may be a second exit
of any of the types, or in a ramp type
garage with open ramps not SUbJeCt to
closure, the ramp may serve as the second
means of exit.
9 Upper floor exits inclosed garagesshall be
so arranged that no point in the area shall

be more than 30 m from the nearest exit
other than a ramp on thesame floor level,
or 45 m in the case of garages protected by
automatic sprinklers.
0 On floors below. the street (either
b a s e m e n t o r o u t s i d e undergr.ound
garages) at least two exits shall be
@ovided, not counting any automobile
ramps, except that for garages extending
only one floor level below the street, a
ramp leading direct to the outside may
constitute one required means of exit. In
garages below street level, e&its shall be so
arranged that no part of the area shall be
more than 30 m from the nearest stair exit.
g) If any gasoline pumps are located within
any closed parkin garage, exits shall be so

located that travefaway from the gasoline
pump in any direction shall lead toan exit,
with no dead-end. in which occupants
might be trapped by fire or explosion at
any gasoline pump. Such exit shall lead to
the outside of the building on the same
level, or downstairs; no upward travel
shall be permitted unless direct outside
exits are available from that floor and any
floor below (as in the case of a basement
garage where the grade is one storey or
more lower at the rear than at the street).
15.3.4 Exits from aircraft hangars (storage or

servicing areas) shall be provided at intervals
of not more than 45 m on all exterior walls of
aircraft hangars. There shall be a minimum of
two exits serving each aircraft storage or
servicing area. Horizontal exits through
interior fire walls shall be provided tit intervals
NATIDNAL
of not more than 30 m. Dwarf or smash

doors in doors accommodating aircraft may
be used to comply with these requirements.
All doors designated as exits shall be kept
unlocked in the direction of exit travel while
the area is occupied.
15.3.5 Exits from mezzanine floors in aircraft
storage or servicing areas shall be so arranged
that the maximum travel to reach the nearest
exit from any point on the mezzanine shall not
exceed 22.5 m. Such exitsshall lead directly to
a properly enclosed stairwell discharging
directly to the exterior or to.a suitably cut-off
area or to outside fire escapestairs.
Z6.2.1 Hazardous buildings shall have

combustible vapour detectors/explosion
suppression systems/ automatic sprinklers,
depending on the situation.
16.3 Exit Facilities- Requirements specified
in 7 and 14.3.4.3 shall apply to Group J
occupancies also.
16.4 Special Hazards-The following
requirements shall apply to all Group J
occupancies, as applicable:
4 Each building where gas is employed for
25.3.6 The following special provisions shall

apply to grain elevators:
a) There shall be at least one stair tower from
basement to first floor and from the first

floor to the top floor of workhouse
enclosed in a dust-tight non-combustible
shaft.
b) Non-combustible doors of self-closing
type shall be provided at each floor
landing.
cl An exterior fire escape of the stair or
basket ladder type shall be provided from
the roof of the workhouse to ground level
or to the roof of an adjoining annexe with
access from all floors above the first.
4 An exterior fire.escape ofeither the stair or
basket ladder type shall be provided from
the roof of each storage annexe to ground
level.
15.4. Special Hazards- Requirements

specified in 14.3.3 to 14.3.3.4 shall apply to
Group H occupancies also.
15.5 Exception and Deviatibn- Every area
for the storage of hazardous
commodities shall have an exit within 22.5 m
of any point in the area where persons may be
present or 30 m where automatic sprinkler
used
16. REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS

FOR HAZARDOUS USES (GROUP J)
given in 7, the requirements in 16.2 to 16.4
16.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System-The requirements specified in 16,2.1

nature (up to I5 m in height). Buildings above
15 m in height shall not be permitted for
PAR.T
IV FIRE PROTECTION
b)
c)
any purpose shall be provided with an

approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked. The detailed
requirements regarding safe use of gas
shall be as specified in Part IX Plumbing
Each boiler room or room containing a
heating plant shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a separating wall.
In any room in which volatile flammable
liquids are used or stored, no device
generating a spark, or glow flame capable
of igniting gasoline vapour shall be
installed or permitted unless it is enclosed
in a flame-proof enclosure.
The use, handling, storage and sale of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable
liquids shall-not be permitted in Group J
occupancies unless such use, handling,
storage add sale is in accordance with
appropriate legislation in force.
All openings in exterior walls except wall
vents shall be protected by a fire assembly
as in 6,and they shall be fixed, automatic
or self-closing. Wall vents having an area
of not less than 100 cm each shall be
placed in the exterior walls near the floor
line, not more than 180 cm apart
horizontally. Each building shall he
provided with a power driven fan exhaust
system of ventilation which shall be
arranged and operated so as to produce a
complete change of air in each room every
3 min.
Each machine in dry-cleaning
establishments which uses flammable
liquid shall have an adequate steam line
directly connected to it, so arranged as to
have the steam automatically released to
the inside of each machine should an
explosion occur in the machine.
Equipment or machinery which generates
or emits combustible or explosive dust or
fibres shall be provided with an adequate
dust collecting and exhaust system, unless
the building or portion thereof housing
such machmery is provided with an
automatic fire extinguishing system.
l-43
APPENDIX A
(Clauses 6.9.2, 8.2, 9.3, 10.2, 12.2, 13.2, 14.2, IS.2 and 16.2)
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS
MORE THAN 15 m IN HEIGHT
A-O. GENERAL
0 For buildings above 15m in height.
A-O. I In addition to the provisions of Part IV

Fire protection. the Authority may insist on
suitable protection measures in a building
more than 15 m in height.
g) If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core of
collapsible gates shall not be permitted for

lifts and shall have solid doors with fire
resistance of at least I h
the building, a positive pressure between

25 and 30 Pa shall be maintained in the
lobby and a positive pressure of 50 Pa
shall be maintained in the lift shaft. The
mechanism for pressurisation shall act
automatically with the fire alarm; it shall
be possible to operate this mechanically
also.
A-l. CONSTRUCTION
A-l.1 All materials of construction in load
bearing elements, stairways and corridors and
facades shall be non-combustible.
A-f.2 The interior finish materials shall not
have a flame spreadability rating exceeding
Class 1 (see 6.15.2).
A-l.3 The internal walls of staircase shall be
of brick or reinforced concrete with a
minimum of 2 h fire rating.
A-l.4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the
top; the vent openings shall be of 0.5 m in the
external wall and the top. If the staircase
cannot be ventilated, because of location or
other reasons, a positive pressure of 50 Pa
shall be maintained inside. The mechanism
for pressurizing the staircase shall operate
automatically with the fire alarm. The roof of
the shaft shall be I m above the surrounding
roof. Glazing or glass bricks shall not be used
in the staircase.
A-l.5 L.J~~s -- General requirements of lifts
shall be as follows:
a) Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire

rating of 2 h; lift shafts shall have a vent at
the top of area not less than 0.2 m*.
b) Lift motor room shall be located
preferably on top of the shaft and
separated from the shaft by the floor of the
room.
cl Landing doors in lift enclosures shall have

a fire resistance of not less than half an
hour.
4 The number of lifts in one lift bank shall

not exceed 4. Individual shafts in a bank
shall be separated by a wall of 2 h fire
rating.
d Lift car door shall have a fire resistance
rattng of 1 h.
IV-
44
h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
core of the building, shall be through a

self-closing smoke stop door of half an
hour Fire resistance.
Lifts shall not normally communicate

with the basement; if, however, lifts are in
communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurised as in (g),
with self-closing door as in (h).
k) Grounding switch(es), at ground floor
level, shall be provided to enable the fire

service to ground the lifts.
m) Telenhone or other communication

facihties may be provided in lift cars for
building of 30 m in height and above.
Communication system for lifts shall be
connected to fire control room for the
building.
4 Suitable arrangements such as providing

slope in the floor of lift lobby, shall be
made to prevent water used during fire
fighting, etc. at any landing from entering
the lift shafts.
P) A sign shall be posted and maintained on

every floor at or near the lift indicating
that in case of fire, occupants shall use the
stairs unless instructed otherwise. The
sign shall also contain a plan for each floor
showing the location of the stairways.
9) F IRE L IFTS - Following details shall
apply for a fire lift:
To enable fire servtces personnel to
reach the upper floors with the
minimum delay, one or more of the
lifts shall be so designed so as to be
available for the exclusive use of the
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF
INDIA
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
firemen in an emergency and be

directly accessible to every
dwelling/ lettable floor space on each
floor.
The lift shall have a floor area of not
less than 1.4 m*. It shall have loading
capacity of not less than 545 kg (8
persons/lift) with automatic closing
doors.
The electric supply shall be on a
separate service from electric supply
mains in a building and the cables run
in a route safe from fire, that is,
within the lift shaft. Lights and fans
in the elevators having wooden
panelling or sheet steel construction
shall be operated on 24 volt supply.
In case of failure of normal electric
supply, it shall automatically trip
over to alternate supply. For
apartment houses, this changeover of
supply could be done through
manually operated changeover
switch. Alternatively, the lift should
be so wired that in case of power
failure; it comes down at the ground
level and comes to stand-still with
door open.
The operation of a fire lift is by a
simple toggle or two-button switch
situated in a glass fronted box
adjacent to the lift at the entrance
level. When the switch is on, landing
call-points will become inoperative
and the lift will be on car control only
or on a priority control device. When
the switch is off, the lift will return to
normal working. This lift can be used
by the occupants in normal times.
The words FIRE LIFT shall be
conspicuously displayed in
fluorescent paint on the lift landing
doors at each floor level.
The speed of the fire lift shall be such
that it can reach the top floor from
ground level within I min.
A-l.6 Basements
A-1.6.1 Each basement shall be separately
ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area
(aggregate) not less than 2.5 percent of the
floor area .spread evenly round the perimeter
of the basement shall be provided in the form
of grills or breakable stallboard lights or
pavement lights or by way of shafts.
Alternatively, a system of air inlets shall be
provided at basement floor level and smoke
outlets at basement ceiling level. Inlets and
extracts may be terminated at ground level
with stallboard or pavement lights as before,
but ducts to convey fresh air to the basement
floor level have to be laid. Stallboard and
PART
IV FIRE
?ROTECTlON
pavement lights should be in positions easily

accessible to the fire brigade and clearly
marked SMOKE OUTLETor AIR INLET
with an indication of area served at or near the
opening.
A-1.6.2 The staircase of basements shall be of
enclosed type having fire resistance of not less
than 2 h and shall be situated at the periphery
of the basement to be entered at ground level
only from the open air and in such positions
that smoke from any fire in the basement shall
not obstruct any exit serving the ground and
upper storeys of the building and shall
communicate with basement through a lobby
provided with fire resisting self-closin doors
of 1 h fire resistance. If the travel d:tstance
exceeds 18.50 m, additional staircases shall be
provided at proper places.
A-1.6.3 In multi-storey basements, intake
ducts may serve all basement levels, but each
basement and basement compartment shall
have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts.
A-1.6.4 Mechanical extractors for smoke
venting system from lower basement levels
shall also be provided. The system shall be of
such design as to operate on actuation of heat
sensitive detectors or sprinklers, if installed,
and shall have a considerably superior

performance compared to the standard units.
It shall also have an arrangement to start it
manually.
A-1.6.4.1 Mechanical extractors shall have
an internal locking arrangement, so that
extractors shall continue to operate and
supply fans shall stop automatically with the
actuation of fire detectors.
A-1.6.4.2 Mechamcal extractors shall be
designed to permit 30 air changes per hour in
case of fire or distress call. However, for
normal operation, only 28 air changes or any
other convenient factor can be mamtained.
A-1.6.4.3 Mechanical extractors shall have
an alternative source of supply.
A-1.6.4.4 Ventilating ducts shail be
integrated with the structure and made out of
brick masonry or RCC as far as possible and
when this duct crosses the transformerareaor

electrical switch board, fire dampe.rs shall be
provided.
A-1.6.5 Kitchens working on gas fuel,
departmental stores, and shops shall not be
permitted in basement/sub-basement.
A-1.6.6 If cut outs are provided from
basements to the upper floors or to the
atomosphere, all sides cut out openings in the
basements shall be protected by sprinkler
heads at closed spacing so as to form a water
curtain in the event of a fire.
wv45
A-l.7 Openable windows on external walls

shall be fitted with such locks which can be
opened by a firemans axe.
A-l.8 All floors shall be compartmented with
area not exceeding 750 m- by a separation wall
with 2 h fire rating, for floors wrth sprinklers
the area may be increased by 50 percent. in
long buildings, the fire separation walls shall
be at distances not exceeding 40 m. For
department stores, shopping centres and
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2.
Where this is not possible, the spacings of the
sprinklers shall be suitably reduced.
A-l.9 Service Ducts
a) Service ducts shall be enclosed by walls
and doors, if any, of 2 h fire rating; if ducts

are larger than I m2, the floor should seal
them,, but provide suitable openings for
the popes to pass through, wrth the gaps
sealed.
b) A vent opening at the top of the service
shaft shall be provided between onefourth and one-half of the area of the
shaft.
A-f. 10 Refuse chutes shall have outlet at l-east

I m above roof level and they shall have an
enclosure wall of non-combustible material
with fire resistance of not less than 2 h, They
shall not be located within the staircase
e n c l o s u r e o r s e r v i c e s h a f t s , o r airconditioning shafts; inspection panel and
doors shall be tight fitting with I h fire
-resistance; the chutes should be as far away as
possible from exits.
A-l. 1 I For all buildings except multi-family
dwellings, refuge area of not less than 15 m
shall be provided on the external walls as
cantilever projection or in any other manner
(which will not be covered in FAR) in
accordance with the following:
a) For floors above One refuge area on the
floor immediately
15 mandupto
24m
above 18 m.
b) For floors above One refuge area on the
floor immediately
24 m and up to
above 24 m.
36 m
c) For floors above One refuge area per
F;myoors above
36 m
A-1.12 Electrical services shall conform to
the following:
a) The electric distribution cables/ wiring shall be laid in a separate duct. The
duct shall be sealed at every alternative
floor with non-combustible materials,
having the same fire resistance as that of
the duct. Low and medium voltage wiring
I-46
running in shaft and in false ceiling shall

run in separate conduits.
Water mains, telephone lines, inter-corn
lines, gas pipes or any other service line
shall not be laid in the duct for electric
cables.
c) Separate circuits for water pumps, lifts,

starrcases a n d c o r r i d o r hghting a n d
blowers for pressurising system shall be
provided directly from the main switch
gear panel and these circuits shall be laid
in separate conduit pipes, so that fire in
one circuit will not affect ihe others.
Master switches controlling essential
service circuits shall be clearly labelled.
d) Tbe inspection panel doors and any other
opening in the shaft shall be provided with

air-tight fire doors having fire resistance of
not less than 2 h.
e) Medium and low voltage wiring running
in shafts, and within false ceiling shall run

in metal conduit. Any 230 V wiring for
lighting or other services, above false
ceiling, shall have 660 V grade insulation.
The false ceiling, including all fixtures
used for its suspension, shall be of noncombustible material.
An independent and well ventilated
service from shall be provided on the
ground floor with direct access from
outside or from the corridor for the
purpose of termination of electric supply
from the licensees service and alternative
supply cables. The doors rovided for the
service room shall have PIre resistance 01
not less than 2 h.
If the licensees agree to provide meters on

upper floors, the licensees cables shall be
segregated from consumers cable by
providing a partition in the duct. Meter
rooms on upper floors shall not -open into
staircase enclosures and shall be ventilated
directly to open air outside.
A-1.13 Gas supply shall conform to the
following:
a) T O W N GAS:L.P. GA S S U P P L Y P I P E S
- Where gas pipes are run in the building,
the same shall be run in separate shafts
exclusively for this purpose and these shall
be on external walls, away from the
staircases. There shall be no
interconnection of this shaft with the rest
of the floors. LPG distribution pipes shall
always be below the false ceding. The
length of these pipes shall be as short as
possible. In the case of kitchen cooking
range area, apart from providing wood,
covering the entire cooking range, the
exhaust system should be designed to take
care of 30 m per minute per m2 of hood
NATIONAL BUILDING COD2 OF INDIA
area. It should have grease
rejected
using metallic grease to trap oil
Ivapours
?llters
escaping into the fume wood.
No~~-_or d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n aas oioe
installations, reference may be made to_Pari iX
Plumbing services, Section 3 Gas supply.
b) All
wiring in fume hoods shall be of fibre

glass insulation. Thermal detectors shall
be installed into fume hoods of large
kitchens for hotels, hospitals, and similar
areas located in high rise buildings.
Arrangements shall be made for
automatic tripping of the exhaust fan in
case of fire. If LPG is used, the same shall
be shut off. The voltage shall be 24 V or
100 V dc operated with external rectifier.
The valve shall be of the hand re-set type
and shall be located in an area segregated
from cooking ranges. Valves shall be
easily accessible. The hood shall have
manual facility for steam or carbon
dioxide gas injection, depending on duty
condition.
C) Gas meters shall be housed in a suitably

constructed metal cupboard located in a
well ventilated space? keeping in view the
fact that LPG is heavier than air and town
gas is lighter than air.
A-1.14 Staircase and corridor lights shall

conform to the following:
4 The staircase and corridor lighting shall be
on separate circuits and shall be

independently connected so as it could be
operated by one switch installation on the
ground floor easily accessible to fire.
fighting staff at any time irrespective of the
position of the individual contra! UI the
light points, if any. It should be of
miniature circuit breaker type of switch so
as to avoid replacement of fuse in case of
crisis.
b) Staircase and corridor lighting shall also
be connected to alternative supply as

defined in A-1.15 for buildings exceeding
24 m in height. Forassembly, institutional
buildings of height less than 24 m, the
alternative source of supply may be
provided by battery continuously trickle
charged from the electric mains.
cl Suitable arrangements shall be made by

installing double throw switches to ensure
that the lighting installed in the staircase
and the corridor does not get connected to
two sources of supply simultaneously.
Double throw switch shall be installed in
the service room for terminating t h e
stand-by supply.
4 Emergency lights shdll be provided in the

staircase/corridor.
A-f. f5 A stand-by electric generator shall be

installed to supply power to staircase and
corridor lighting circuits, fire lifts, the standby fire pump, pressurisation fans and blowers,
smoke extraction and damper systems in case
of failure of normal electric supply. The
generator shall be capable of taking starting
current of all the machines and circuits stated
above simultaneously. If the stand-by pump is
driven by diesel engine, the generator supply
need not be connected to the stand-by pump.
Where parallel HV/LV supply from a
*separate sub-station is provided with
appropriate transformer for emergency, the
provislon of generator may be waived in
consultation with the Authority.
A-1.16 Transformers shall conform to the
following:
a) A sub-station or a switch-station with
apparatus having more thah 2 000 litres

of oil shall not ordinarily be located in the
basement where proper oil drainage
arrangements cannot be provided. If
transformers are housed in the building
below the ground level, they shall
necessarily be in the first basement in a
separate fire resisting room of 4 h rating.
The room shall necessarily be at the
periphery of the basement. The entrance
to the room shall be provided with a fire
resisting door of 2 h fire rating. A curb
(sill) of a suitable height shall be provided
at the entrance in order to prevent the
flow of oil from a ruptured transformer
into other parts of the basement. Direct
access to the transformer room shall be
provided, preferably from outside. The
switch gears shall be housed in a room
separated from the transformer bays by a
fire resisting wall with fire resistance of
not less than 4 h.
b) The transformer, if housed in basement.

shall be protected by an automatic high
velocity water spray system.
cl In case the transformers are housed in the
basement. totally segregated from other

areas of the basements by 4 h fire resisting
wall/ walls with an access directly from
outside, they may be protected by carbon
d i o x i d e o r B C F (Bromochlorodifluoromethane) or BTM (Bromotriffuoromethane) fixed installation system.
4 When housed at ground floor level,
it/they shall be cut off from the other

portion of premises by fire resisting walls
of 4 h fire resistance.
e) Oil filled transformers shall not be housed

on any floor above the ground floor.
f-l Soak pit of aproved design shall be

provided where the aggregate oil capacity
,F
of the a paratus does not exceed 2 000

litres. Wgere the oil capacity exceeds 2 000
litres, a tank of RCC construction of
capacity capable of accommodating the
entire oil of the transformers shall be
provided at a lower level to collect the oil
from the catch-pit in case of emergency.
The pipe connecting the catch-pit to the
tank shall be of non-combustible
construction and shall be provided with a
flame-arrester.
A-l. 17 Air-conditioning shall conform to the
following:
4 Escape routes like staircases, common

corridors, lift lobbies, etc, shall not be
used as return air passage.
b) The ducting shall be constructed of
substantial gauge metal in accordance

with good practice [lV( 18)].
cl Wherever the ducts pass through Iire walls
or floors, the opening around the ducts

shall be sealed with fire resisting materials,
such as asbestos rope, vermiculite
concrete, etc.
4 As far as possible, metallic ducts shall be

used even for the return air instead of
space above the false ceiling.
e) The materials used for insulating the duct
system (inside or outside) shall be of noncombustible materials. Glass wool shall

not be wrapped or secured by any material
of combustible nature.
Area more than 750m2 on individual floor
shall be segregated by a fire wall and
automatic fire dampers for isolation shall
be provided (see g).
g) Air ducts serving main floor areas,
corridors, etc, shall not pass through the

staircase enclosure.
h) The air-handling units shall be separate
for each floor and air ducts for every floor

shall be separate and in no way
interconnected with the ducting of any
other floor.
If the air-handling unit serves more than
one floor, the recommendations given
above shall be complied with in addition
to the conditions given below:
Proper arrangements by way of

automatic fire dampers working on
fusible link for isolating all ducting at
~ee;a~~or from the mam riser shall
ii)
When the automatic fire alarm

operates, the respective airhandling
units of the air-conditioning system
shall automatically be switched off.
l-48
k) The vertical shaft for treated fresh air shall

be of masonry construction.
ml Where plenum is used for return air
passage, ceiling and its fixtures shall be of

non-combustible material.
n) The air filters of the air-handling units

shall be of non-combusitble materials.
P) The air-handling unit room shall not be

used for storage of any combustible
materials.
4) Inspection panels shall be provided in the
main trunkmg to facilitate the cleaning of
ducts of accumulated dust and to obtain
access for maintenance of fire dampers.
r) No combustible material shall be fixed
nearer than 15 cm to any duct unless such
duct is properly enclosed and protected
with noncombustible material (glass
wool or spunglass with neoprene facing
enclosed and wrapped with aluminium
sheeting) at least 3.2 mm thick and which
would not readily conduct heat.
s) F IRE D AMPERS
I) These shall be located in conditioned
air ducts and return air ducts/passages
at the following points:
i) At the fire separation wall,
ii) Where ducts/passages enter the
central vertical shaft,
iii) Where the ducts pass through
floors, and
iv) At the inlet of supply air duct and
the return air duct of each
compartment on every floor.
2) The dampers shall operate automatically and shall simultaneously
switch off the air-handling fans.
Manual operation facilities shall also
be provided.
NOTE - For blowers, where extraction system
and dust accumulators areused, dampersshall be
provided.
3) Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke
extraction shafts) for buildings more
than 24 m in height.
For apartment
In non-ventilated
houses
lobbies/ corridors
operated by fusible link and
manual control.
For other
On operation of
buildings
smoke detection
system and manual
control.
~YAT,~PIAL
4)
Automatic fire dampers shall be so

arranged so as to close by gravity in
the direction of air movement and to
remain tightly closed open operation
of a fusible link.
A-1.18 Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms

shall conform to Indian Boiler Act. Further.
the following additional aspects may be taken
into account in the location of boiler/ boiler
room:
a) The boilers shall not be allowed in subbasement, but may be allowed in the
basements away from the escape routes.
b) The boilers shall be installed in a fire
resisting room of 4 h fire resistance rating,
and this room shall be situated on the
periphery of the basement. Catch-pits
shall be provided at the low level.
4 Entry to this room shall be provided with a
composite door of 2 h fire resistance.
4 The boiler room shall be provided with
fresh air inlets and smoke exhausts
directly to the atmosphere.
e) The furnace oil tank for the boiler, if
located in the adjoining room shall be
separatd by fire resisting wall of 4 h rating,
The entrance to this room shall be
provided with double composite doors. A
curb of suitable height shall be provided at
the entrance in order to prevent the flow of
oil into the boiler room in case of tank
rupture.
Foam inlets shall be provided on the
external walls of the building near the
ground level to enable the fire services to
use foam in case of fire.
dealing with fire above 15 m hei ht and in the

opinion of the Authority, such%uilding does
not constitute a hazard to the safety of the
adjacent property or occupants of the
building itself.
A-3.2.1 Manually operated electrical fire
alarm system shall be installed in a building
with one or more call boxes located at each
floor. The call boxes shall conform to the
following:
a) The location of call boxes shallbe decided
b)
A-2. PROVISION OF FIRST-AID FIRE

FIGHTlNG APPLIANCES
A-2.1 The first-aid fire fighting equi merit
shall be provided on all floors, mcPudmg
basements, lift rooms, etc, in accordance with
good practice [W(9)] in consultation with the
Authority.
A-2.2 The fire fighting appliances shall be

distributed over the building in accordance
with good practice [W(9)].
e)
A-3. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

A-3.1 All buildings with heights of more than
15 m shall be equipped with manually
operated electrical fire alarm (MOEFA)
system and automatic fire alarm system (see
Appendix B). However, apartment and offict
buildings between 15 m and 24 m in height
may be exempted from the installation of
automatic fire alarm system provided the
local fire brigade is suitably equipped for
?MT
IV
FlllE PROTFCTlON
after taking into consideration the floor

plan with a view to ensuring that one or
the other call box shall be readily
accessible to all occupants of the floor
without having to travel more than
22.5 m.
The call boxes shall be of the break-glass
type where the call is transmitted
automatically to the control room without
any other action on the part of the person
operating the call box. The mechanism of
operation of the call boxes shall preferably
be without any moving parts. However,
where any moving part is incorporated in
the design of the call box, it shall be of an
approved type, so that there shall be no
malfunctioning of the call box.
All call boxes shall be wired in a closed
circuit to a control panel in the control
room in accordance with good practice
[W(8)], located as per A-5, so that the
number/zone where the call box is
actuated is clearly indicated on the control
panel. The circuit shall also include one or
more batteries with a capacity of 48 h
normal working at full load. The battery
shall be arranged to be continuously
trickle-charged from the electric mains.
The circuit may be connected to
alternative source of electric supply as
defined in A-1.15.
The call boxes shall be arranged to sound
one or more sounders so as to ensure that
all appropriate occupants of the desired
floor (s) shall be warned whenever any call
box is actuated.
The call boxes shall be so installed that
they do not obstruct the exitways and yet
their location can easily be noticed from
either direction. The base of the call boxes
shall be at a height of 1 m from the floor
level.
A-3.1.2 The installation of call boxes in

hostels and such other places where these are
likely to be misused shall as far as possible be
avoided. Location of call boxes in dwelling
units shall preferably be inside the building.
Nom I - Several types of fire detectors are available in
the market, but the application of.each type is limited and
w49
has to be carefully considered in relation to the type ot

risk and the structural features of the building where they
are to be installed. For guidelines for selection of Crr
detectors reference may be made to Applmdix B.
NOTE 2 - No automatic detector shall be required in any
room or portion of building which is equipped with an
approved installation of automatic sprinklers.
A-4. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF

BUILDINGS
A-4.Z The lightning protection for buildings
shall be provided as given in Part VIII Building
services, Section 2 Electrical installations.
A-5. CONTROL ROOM
A-5.1 For all buildings over 15 m in height
and apartment buildings with a height of 30 m
and above, there shall be a control room on
the entrance floor of the building with
communication system (suitable public
address system) to all floors and facilities for
receiving the message from different floors.
Details of all floor plans along with the details
of fire fighting equipment and installations
shall be maintained in the control room. The
control room shall also have facilities to detect
the fire on any floor through indicator boards
connectin : fire detecting and alarm systems
on all floors. The staff incharge of the control
room shall be responsible for the maintenance
of the various services and fire fighting
equipment and installations.
~-6. CARETAKER FOR RESIDENTIAL,
HOTELS, BUSINESS, MERCANTILE,
INDUSTRIAL, STORAGE AND
HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS WITH
HEIGHT MORE THAN 45 m
A-6.1 A qualified Fire Officer with
experience of not less than 3 years shall be
appointed as a caretaker who will be available

on the premises at all times.
A-6.2 The Fire Officer shall:
a) maintain the fire fighting_ equipment in
good working condition at all times.

b) lay out fire orders and fire operational
plans.
d impart training to the occupants of the
buildings in the use of fire lighting
equipments provided on the premises and
keep them informed about the fire
emergency evacuation plan.
4 keep proper liaison with city Fire Brigade.
A-7 HOUSE KEEPING
A-7.1 To eliminate fire hazards, good house
keeping, both inside and outside the building,
shall be strictly maintained by the occupants
and/or the owner of the building.
A-8. FIRE DRILLS AND FIRE ORDERS
A-8.1 Fire notices/orders shall be prepared

to fulfil the requirements of tire fighting and
evacuation from the buildings in the event of
fire and other emergency. The occupants shall
be made thoroughly conversant with their
action in the event of emergency, by
displaying fire notices at vantage points. Such
notices should be displayed prominently in
broad lettering.
For guidelines for fire drills and evacuation
procedures for high rise buildings, see
Appendix D.
APPENDIX B
(Clauses-6.9.3 and 8.2)
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF FIRE DETECTORS

B-I. GENERAL
El. I Various types of fire detectors are
available for installation in buildings intended
for different occupancies. However, no single
detector is suitable for universal application.
Great care must, therefore, be exercised while
selecting fire detectors.
52. CHOICE OF FIRE DETECTORS

82.0 Fire detectors mav respond to any one
w5*
or other of the manifestations of combustion,

such as the generation of heat, smoke and
flames.
B-2.1 Heat Detecrors-There are two main
classes of heat-sensitive detectors. One is the
point or spot type of detector which is
affected by the limited area of hot gas layer
immediately adjacent to it. The other is the
line type of detector which is sensitive to the
effect produced by heated gases along any
portion of the detector line.
NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA
There are two main types of heat detectors in

each class. One type is designed to operate
when the temperature of the heat sensitive
element is raised to a predetermined level. It is
referred to as fixed temperature heat
detector.
The other type is designed to operate when the
rate of rise of temperature exceeds a
predetermined value. It will also operate at a
predetermined temperature. 11 is referred to as
rate of rise heat detector.
Heat setsitive detectors shall conform to
accepted standards [1V(7)].
B-2.2 Smoke Detectors-There are three
distinct types of smoke detectors. One type
depends upon the absorption or scattering of
visible or near-visible light by the combustion
product. It is referred to as optical smoke
detector.
The second type depends upon the effects of
the combustion products on ionization
currents within the detector. It is referred to as
ionization chamber smoke detector.
The third type is sensitive to carbon monoxide
or other products of combustion. It is termed
chemically sensitive smoke detector.
B-2.3 Flame Derecrors - These are designed
to respond to radiation emitted by flames.
B-3. APPLICATION
B-3.1 Since fires in practice invariably
produce both heat and smoke, detectors
which respond to these are accepted as the
best general purpose fire detectors.
B-3.1. I FI X E D T E M P E R A T U R E H E A T
D ETECTORS -These are particularly suitable
for use where ambient air temperatures are
high and/or may rise and fall rapidly over
short periods.
B-3.1.2 R ATE OF R ISE H EAT D E T E C T O R S
-These are particularly suitable where the
normal ambient air temperature is low and/ or
may vary over a wide range slowly. These
detectors operate due to the abnormally sharp
rise in temperature due to a fire. They are
liable to give false alarms at ambient
temperatures approaching 43O C and should
not be used where ambient temperatures
approach 43C. Such tire detectors do not

conform to the recognised standard
specifications and should not be used alone,
but only as supplements to the fixed
temperature type fire detectors. They are
useful in low ambient temperatures where the
temperature remains in the neighbourhood of
4oc.
PART IV FIRE PROWCTDN
B-3.1.3 S MOKE DLTECTORS IN G ENERAL These should be used (JT& at places where the
ambient temperature varlt$ within the limits
of 0C to 38C. Beyond this temperature
range, smoke detectors are not satisfactory.
B-3.1.4 O P T I C A L S MOKE D E T E C T O R S These will not respond to the invisible smoke
from a clear burning fire but will respond
quickly to smoke which is optically dense.
This type of detectors can be used only in dustfree and clean atmospheres. Deposits of
atmospheric dust and dirt on the sensitive
surface of the photo sensitive element and/or
the exciter lamp will impair the efficiency of
the detector in course of time.
B-3.1.5 I O N I Z A T I O N C H A M B E R S M O K E
D E T E C T O R S -These respond quickly to
invisible smoke from a clear burning fire, but
may respond slowly to optically dense smoke.
This type of detector can be used only in dustfree and humidity controlled atmospheres.
False alarms may be caused by smoke and
other fumes, dusts (including slow
accumulations of dust and disturbed aerial
dusts), fibres, steam and condensation
produced by normal processes, activities and
the environment, by vehicle engines and insect
infestation. Self-cleaning ovens may cause an
ionization detector to operate. Very fast air
flows, for example, in a warehouse exposed to
windy conditions, could cause some
ionization smoke detectors to give false
alarms.
Presence of explosive gas mixtures can cause
explosions.
Ionization type smoke detectors do not give
t i m e l y warnmg or may fail in smokes
produced by burning materials like polyvinyl
chloride (PVC).
B-3.1.6 C H E M I C A L L Y S E N S I T I V E S M O K E
D ETECTORS -They have a chemically coated
sensitive element that reacts to the presence of
carbon monoxide or other products of
combustion present in smoke. Depositing of
dust or moisture affects the operation of the
sensitive element and can cause the detector to
give false or no alarms. These detectors may
not be suitable for residential occupancies.
B-3.2 Where there are production processes
which produce smoke in a manner which
would operate smoke detectors, an alternative
detector should be used or an operational

routine established to avoid unwanted alarms.
B-3.3 The fact that combustion is not always
accompanied by flame restricts the
application of flame detlctors. Another factor
is that radiation from flames travels in straight
lines and a clear line of sight is desirable,
although reflected radiation may actuate a
w51
installed in the ridges of the waffles. Where

detectors are installed inside the waffles, each
waffle shall be treated as a separate
compartment and the provision of accepted
B-4. SITING OF DETECTORS-GENERAL standards [IV(8)] shall apply in each ccise.
detector. Flame detectors are, therefore, used

mainly in special applications and to
supplement heat and smote detectors.
R-4. I Coverage
B-4.1.1 Every portion of the building(s)
should be covered and each effectively
enclosed space should be considered
separately for this purpose in accordance with
the limits of spacing for the type(s) of
detectors concerned. Voids not more than250
mm (see Note below B-4.6.f) in height need
not necessarily have independent coverage.
Small lavatories and water-closets need not
have independent coverage, but may rely
upon that provided in a lobby common
thereto.
B-4.2 Sectioned Room

B-4.2.1 Rooms divided into sections by walls,
partitions or storage racks (including stacks in
the libraries and archives) reaching to within
300 mm of the ceiling or where goods might be
stacked in defined areas to a corresponding
height, shall have detectors for each section or
passageway.
B-4.3 Flue-like Openings and Other

Openings
B-4.3.1 Hoists, elevators and similar flue-like
openings, windows, doors, ventilators and

inlet ducts of an air-conditioning system shall
be covered by a detector within 1.5 m at the
top for every 2 m of their width or part
thereof.
B-4.3.2 Each inlet to the return air ducts of an
air-conditioning system shall have a detector
mounted on its centre. If this inlet is oblong or
continuous, there shall be a detector every 2
m, or part of it along and within 250 mm of the
opening.
NOTE-Ceilin@ with waffles or beams/joists 25 cm in

depth shall beconsidered as having even surfaces. Normal
detector coverage shall be followed in such cases.
B-4.7 Beams
B-4:7.1 If the ceiling is intersected by beams
more than 25 cm in depth, each bay formed by
successive beams in the ceiling shall be treated
as a separate compartment and fire detectors
shall be installed in accordance with good
practice [IV(8)] in each such compartment.
B-5. OTHER STRUCTURAL FEATURES

B-5.1 Structural features, particularly roofs
and ceilings, which require consideration
depending to some extent on the type of
detectors concerned are referred to in the
clauses dealing with the siting of those
detectors.
B-6. HEIGHT COWSIDERATIONS
B-6.1 The degree of cover afforded by heat
sensitive detectors falls sharply as their height
above the floor level increases. Generally,
where roof heights exceed 9 m, heat sensitive
detectors should not be used unless the
ambient conditions are likely to adversely
affect the performance of smoke sensitive
detectors.
B-7. SPECIAL COVERAGE
B-7.1 The use to which any room, area or

void is to be put, or its structural features, may
necessitate the installation of additional
detectors.
B-8. SITING OF HEAT SENSITIVE
(POINT) DETECTORS
B-4.4 Staircases
B-8.1 Position Relative to Ceiling
B-4.4.1 These shall be covered by detectors

54.5 Lantern Lights
B-8.1.1 Detectors shall be so mounted that

their heat sensitive elements are positioned
not less than 25 mm and not more than 150
mm below the ceiling or underside of the roof.
84.5.1 All lantern lights shall be covered by

detectors.
B-8.2 Limits of Spacing
B-4.6 Waffles
B-8.2.1 Spacing for heat sensitive detectors

shall be m accordance wtth good practice
on each floor.
B-4.6.1 In case of ceilings with waffle

construction, the spacing given in accepted
standards [IV(8)] shall be reduced up to 75
percent for depth of waffles between 20 and
50cm and up to 50 percent for depth of
waffles above 50 cm, where the detectors are
UW3)l.
B-8.3 Ceilings
B-8.3.1 Where ceilings are crossed by beams,
girders or other structural features, having a
depth of 250 mm or more, detectors $a11 be

installed in each part formed between such
features as specified in accepted standards
r IV(Q].
B-8.4 Single Truss and Norrh Light Roofs
B-8.4.1 One row of detectors shall be sited
along the apex of each roof or bay. These and
any further detectors needed to cover the
area shall be spaced in accordance with good
practice [IV(g)].
B-8.5 Floor Openings
B-8.5.1 Detectors shall be so sited that at
least one on each floor is suitably placed with
1.5 m of hoists, elevators, stairways, wallholes and similar openings to the floor above.
B-8.6 Lunrern L.ighrs
B-8.6.1 Detectors fitted in lantern lights shall
be protected from direct sunlight. Since such
situations are liable to rapid temperature
variations due to combinations of solar and
internal heating, fixed temperature type
detectors should be used.
B-8.7 HOI Situations
B-8.7.1 In kitchens, boiler houses, furnace
kiln rooms and the like, where height and/or
suddenly rising temperatures are likely, only
fixed temperature type of detector shall be
used. If ambient temperatures are likely to
exceed 43OC,
its nominal operating
temperatures may need to be greater than is
permitted in accepted standards [IV(7)]. In
this case, a specially set version of detector,
normally complying with that standard.
should be used; the maximum operating
temperature setting should not exceed
117oc.
B-8.8 Vibration Combined with Rapid
Temperature Change
B-8.8.1 If detectors have t,o be fitted where
they will be subject to shock and/or vibration
and may also experience rapid temperature
changes (for example in covering hoist
apertures), a fusible alloy fixed temperature
type shall be used. Vibration coinciding with
rising (although not dangerously rising)

temperatures could induce false alarms from
other types.
B-9. SITING OF HEAT SENSITIVE LINE
DETECTORS
B-9.1 Hear sensitive line detectors are
affected by the same phenomenon as heat
sensitive point detectors and the guidance
given above should be followed.
?ART IV FIRE
PROTECTION
B-10. SITING OF SMOKE SENSITIVE

DETECTORS
B - 1 0 . 1 In a building, the greatest
concentration of smoke (invisible or visible)
will, generally, collect at the highest parts of
enclosed areas. It is here, therefore, that
smoke detectors should normally be sited.
They shall be so mounted that their sensing
area is not less than 25 mm or more than 600
mm below the roof or ceiling, except as may
be indicated by site tests.
B-10.2 The maximum area which a smoke
detector may satisfactorily cover is the same
as recommended for heat sensitive detectors,
but the maximum distance between two
smoke detectors can be 20 percent more than
that recommended for heat detector.
However, the actual spacing will depend upon
site tests with reference to the air flow pattern
in the protected space.
N~~-_There is no Indian Standard specification for
smoke sensitive detectors at present. It is roposed to
bring out a standard specification for smo f:e detectors
and the present Code of Practice will be suitably amended
to cover smoke detectors also.
B-10.3 The area which a smoke detector may

cover is, however. affected by many factors,
only some of which are mentioned in the
following clauses.
B-10.3.1 Where a room or space to be
protected is divided into sections by walls,
partitions or,storage racks (including stacks in
libraries and archives), each section or
passageway shall be protected separately
(see B-4.2.1). In the case of storage
racks, additional rows of detectors shall be
provided on the racks for every 2 m height
or part thereof. The detectors being not more
than 3 m apart in each row, these shall be
staggered in the adjacent rows.
B-10.3.2 If the building is provided with
mechanical ventilation system, and, in any
area, this system results in more than IO air
changes per hour, significant dilution of the
smoke will take place and a definite air flow
pattern may be established. Additional
detectors become necessary to cover the
ventilation inlet and exhaust openings
(see B-4.3).
B-10.3.3 It is necessary to use additional
detectors to monitor the smaller extract ducts,
windows, ventilations and other openings.
This may also be accomplished with the aid of
sampling devices. Additional detectors may
be required in rooms with a high rate of air
change in order to cope with the air flow
pattern and the dilution of the combustion
products.
B-10.3.4 Inlet ducts shall also be monitored
by a detector within 1.5 m of the duct.
,?3
B-10.3.5 Inlet of each return air duct shall

have a detector mounted in its centre. In case
the plenum above a false ceiling is used for
return air, the opening for the return air shall
have a detector every 2 m or part thereof of its
length within 250 mm of the opening.
B-10.3.6 There are not many buildings in
which the mechanical ventilation system is
run continuously. It is most important,
therefore, that smoke detectors in such
buildings are so sited that they will detect fire
when the mechanical ventilating system is
switched off as well as when it is operating.
B-10.3.7 Warm air collects naturally under
ceilings and in the apex of pitched roofs. In
some circumstances, this warm air can form
what is usually known as a heat barrier to the
products of combustion, rising from a small
fire which is producing little change in the
ambient condition. The combustion products
from such a fire will spread out below the heat
barrier in the same way as they do beneath the
ceiling or an apex of a pitched roof. The siting
of detectors should be arranged to take this

into account.
B-10.4 Among other factors which can
establish temporary or permanent conditions
which have their effect on the siting of smoke
detectors are:
a) the various forms of overhead heating;
b) air cooled equipment with the exhaust air

blowing out into the room or factory area;
cl roofs or ceilings of unusual shape or

special construction;
d) deep beams.
e) lofty buildings, that is, buildings with
areas above 10 m and up to about 30 m
in height;
r) staircases;
B) canteens and restaurants,
h) plant rooms;
j)
ambient air currents.
APPENDIX C
(Clause 14.5)
FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING
IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
C-l. APPLICATION AND SCOPE
C-f.1 The provisions given below are
applicable only to single-storey industrial
buildings (factories and storage buildings)
covering large floor areas without subdividing/
separating wails which are usually designed
to meet modern production methods.
C-l.,? The requirements of fire and explosion
venting of industrial buildings, as dealt with in
this section, fall under two categories:
a) Smoke and fire venting, and
b) Explosion relief vents
C-2. SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING
C-2.1 The basic considerations to be kept in
mind while formulating the design and other
requirements for smoke and fire vents are as
given in C-2.1.1 to C-2.1.20.
C-2.1.1 The smoke and hot combustion products from a fire, being lighter than the surrounding air, tend to rise and on reaching the
roof or ceiling spread out (mushroom) on all
sides and form a layer which floats on top of
the cold air beneath. In the absence of vents,
ws4
this laver becomes nroeressivelv deener until

the whole building-is 8lled w&h hoi smoky
gases. The time consumed for this to happen
may be only a few minutes, depending on
variables like, type of material on fire, process/
storage conditions involved, etc.
C-2. I.2 The hot gases at the roof level moved
by convection currents contribute to rapid
lateral spread of fire.
C-2.1.3 The provision of properly designed
and suitably located vents in adequate
number helps the speedy removal of smoke
and hot gases, thereby preventing spread of
fire, besides reducing risks of explosion of
unburnt gases and reducing damage to the
contents and structure of the building by heat
and smoke. In addition, they facilitate fire
fighting operations, and minimise personal
hazards to the firemen.
C-2. I .4 The time taken for accumulation of
smoke and hot gases within a building on fire
being very short, the venting devices installed
shall be designed to operate in the early
stages of the fire, and must be automatic so as
to ensure speed and efficiency in their
operation.
C-2.1.5 The smoke and fire venting system

shall be designed in such a manner as to keep
the temperature of the combustion products
from the fire as low as possible, preferably
below approximately 150 C.
C-2.1.6 Automatic venting systems are complementary to the fire extinguishing systems,
and automatic sprinklers, where provided,
should operate before the operation of the
vents; otherwise, venting may delay sprink1c.r
operation.
C-2.1.7 It is easier to vent a building of smoke
than clear it of smoke once it has been filled.
C-2.f .8 Venting is particularly desirable in
large area industrial buildings or warehouses,
windowless buildings, underground structures or in areas housing hazardous operations. Automatic fire vents shall be provided
for all industrial occupancies (including stoiage buildings) classified as medium hazardSC
above having floor areas exceeding 750 m,
irrespective of whether they are compartmentalized or not.
C-2.1.9 These provisions do not cover other
aspects, of ventilation (or lighting) designed
for regulation of temperature within a building
for personal comfort or meeting process
needs.
C-2.1.10 Similarly, fire and smoke venting

requirements as given here under are also not
applicable to multi-storey buildings, as their
requirements are different and more complex.
C-2.1.11 It is difficult to determine precise
venting requirements on account of the many
variables involved. For instance, the rate of
combustion varies appreciably according to
the nature, shape, size and packaging of the
combustible materiali as well as the size,
height and disposition of the stacks of
materials.
C-2.1.12 In indytrial buildings of floor area
less than 750 m and I~sed as low fire hazard
occupancies, conventional ventilators fitted
high up near the eaves of the external walls
may serve as vents for smoke and hot gases,
rovided care is taken to ensure that they are
f:ept open at all times or are designed to open
automatically in case of fire.
adopted in the case of single-storey industrial

buildings.
C-2.1.1.5 Since 70 to 80 percent of heat
produced in a fire is convective heat, the
ventilation system has to be suitably designed
to ensure early outflow of the heat and thereby
minimize fire spread.
C-2.1.16 Combustible roof linings should be
avoided, as they themselves will contribute to
the spread of fire, thereby multiplying the
venting problems.
C-2. I. I7 A wind blowing across a flat roofor
a roof with a pitch under 40 produces a
negative pressure, that is, it tends to draw
gases out of the building and so aids venting of
hot gases. Wind blowing across a roof of pitch
greater than 40 will draw gases out on the
leeward side, but oppose outward flow on the
windward side of the roof.
C-2.1.18 For vents to work at full efficiency,
the area of the inlets for cold air entering the
compartment must equal at least the total area
of the vents. Ideally. the inlets should be as
close to the ground as possible.
C-2.1.19 Where roof vents are installed in a
single-storey building any neighbouring
buildings, particularly those of more than one
storey, will be subject to some degree of
exposure hazard either from flying birds or
radiation, or both, as a result.
C-2.1.20 If vknts are to be installed. the size,
design, number and disposition of the vents
and the associated roof screens/ curtain
boards have to be assessed after careful
analysis of the various factors stated underC2.1.11 above, as well as other related factors
like type of building construction, nature and
height of roof, process hazards, exposure
hazard, etc.
C-2.2 Venring Area
C-2.2.1 The estimated requirements for
ventilation are largely based on the assumed
build-up of the fire from the time of initial
outbreak to the time of effective fire fighting
action by tire brigade.
C-2.1.13 Extinction of fires by closing the

doors and windows is not likely in the case of
industrial buildings because of their large size,
where sufficient air to sustain the fire at least
in the initial stages can be expected to be
present.
C-2.2.2 The vent area required to be provided

shall be approximately proportional to the
perimeter of the fire area, because the
entrained air forms the bulk of the vented
gases.
C-2.2.3 The effective area shall be the
minimum cross-sectional area through which
the hot gases must flow out to the atmosphere.
C-2.1.14 Of the two types of building

ventilation, namely, vertical and horizontal,
vertical ventilation is the one commonly
C-2.2.4 No consideration shall be given to the

increased air movement obtained by powel;
operated fans, since it must be assumed thatin
PART IV FIRE PROlUTlON
the event of fire, power will be interrupted, or

fans damaged by heat.
with ordinary glass or movable sash arranged

for both manual and automatic operation.
C-2.2.5 The total vent tireas to be provided

shall be as per the following ratios of eftective
area of vent openings to floor area for various
occupancy classifications indicated:
C-2.3.9 Baffles shall not be installed inside

vents, as they greatly reduce the effective area
for venting.
a) Low heat release content

(Subdivision G-l)
I:150
b) Moderate heat release content (Subdivision G-2)
I:100
c) High heat release content

(Subdivision G-3)
I:30 to 1:50
C-2.3 Qpes of Venrs

C-2.3.1 Venting shall be accomplished by
any of the types, such as monitors, continuous gravity vents, unit type vents or sawtooth
roof skylights.
C-2.3.2 Where monitor type vents are
installed, wire glass or metal panels shall be
used only if the sash is arranged to open
automatically.
C-2.3.3 The use of plain thin glass for venting
shall be avoided on account of its
unpredictable behaviour during fire.
However, if glass or other suitable plastic
sheet materials with early disintegration
characteristics are used, they should be
designed for automatic operatibn.
C-2.3.4 Where monitors or unit type vents
are used, the panels shall be hinged at the
bottom and designed to open automztically.
Both sides of the vents should be designed to
vent simultaneously to ensure that their
effectiveness at the time of fire is not in any
way impeded by wind direction.
C-2.3.5 Where movable shutters are provided
for continuous gravity vents, these shall open
automatically in the event of fire.
C-2.3.6 Unit type vents shall be of relatively
small area, ranging between I, and 9 m :
having light weight metal frames and housing
with hinged dampers which shall be designed
C-2.4 Vent Operation

C-2.4.1 The vents shall be automatic in
operation, unless where specified in these
provisions that they shall be designed for both
manual and automatic operation.
C-2.4.2 The release, mechanism shall be
simple for operation and independent of
electrical power, since electrical services may
be interrupted by fire.
C-2.4.3 The automatic operation of vents
shall be achieved by actuation of fusible links
or other types of heat and smoke detectors, or
by interlocking with operation of sprinkler
system or any other automatic fire
extinguishing system covering the area.
Following their release, the vents shall be
designed to open by a system of counterweights and associated equipment utilizing
the force of gravity or spring loaded levers.
C-2.4.4 Automatic fire alarm system, where
installed, shall be coupled to the automatic
vents to ensure simultaneous operation.
C-2.4.5 Automatic sprinklers, where
installed, shall operate before the vents open
order to avoid any likely delay in sprinkler
operation. However, heat actuated devices
used for vent release shall be suitably shielded
from sprinkler discharge so that water does
not delay their action.
C-2.4.6 Premises where height of roof apex is
10 m or more or where the materials handled
or stored have high smoke producing
characteristics, in addition io fusible links, the
vent release mechanism shall be interlinked to
smoke actuated automatic fire detectors to
ensure early operation of vents.
C-2.4.7 Non-corrosive materials shall be used
for hinges, hatches and other related parts to
ensure long fail-safe operation of the vents.
C-2.3.7 Sawtooth roof skylight shall be

considered as satisfactory for venting
purposes only when designed for automatic
operation.
C-2.4.8 In case of any doubts regarding the

types of vents required to be installed for any
particular occupancy, authorities having
jurisdiction shall be consulted.
C-2.3.8 Likewise, exterior wall windows shall

not be reckoned as satisfactory means for
venting of fire gases and smoke. in industrial
buildings. However, they may be reckoned as
additional means of venting when, they are
located close to the eaves and are provided
C-2.5 Size, Spacing arid Disposition of Vents

C-2.5.1 Vents shall be correctly sited to
ensure their functional efficiency. Ideally,
they shalrbe sited at the highest point in each
area to be covered.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OP INDIA
C-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be

located immediately above the risk to be
protected so as to allow free and speedy
removal of smoke and other combustion
products in the event of fire.
C-2.5.3 The mimmum dimension for an
effective vent opening shall be not less than
1.25 m in any direction.
C-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vent
shall be based on the principle that more
number of well distributed smaller vents are
more effective than less number of badly
located larger vents.
C-2.5.5 The maximum spacing between vents
for the three occupancy classifications shall be
as follows:
4 Low heat relese content - 45 m between

centres
b) Moderate heat release content- 36 to

37 m between centres.
c) High heat release content- 22.5 to 30 m

between centres, depending on the severity
of fire potential.
C-2.5.6 Vents shall be placed in a sheltered

situation where advantage can be taken of the
prevailing wind. The design of the vent shall
be such as to produce a suction effect. A wind
blowing across a flat roof or one with a pitch
below 40 produces a negative pressure, that
is, it tends to draw gases out of the building
and so aids venting of hot gases. Wind
blowing across a roof of pitch greater than 40
will draw gases out on the leeward side, but
oppose outward flow on the windward side of
the roof.
C-2.5.7 Low level inlets, with total area not
less than ,the total area of vents, shall be
provided to permit outside air to be drawn rn
to aid automatic venting. These inlets, which
may be in the form of doors, windows or such
other openings, shall be designed for manual
operation when desired.
C-2.6 Roof Screens or Curtain Boards
C-2.6.f Industrial buildings with large areas

and having no subdivision/separating walls
limiting the area of individual compartments
to 750m or less, .jhall be provided with roof
screers or curtain boards.
These screens which extend from the roof
downwards at specific intervals not only
prevent lateral spread of heat and smoke in
the event of fire below, but substantially assist
in early operation of automatic sprinklers and
vents.
C-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or may

other substantial non-combustible material
strong enough to withstand damage by heat or
impact.
C-2.6.3 They shall be resonably gas-tight,
although small openings for passage of pipes,
conduits, etc. shall be permitted.
C-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the
roof/ceiling for a minimum depth of 2.2 m.
Around specil hazards, the depth shall be 4 m.
Where roof/ceiling height exceeds 15 m they
shall extend down to within 3 m of the floor.
For pitched/sawtoothed roofs, they shall
extend down to truss level dividing the roof
into compartments.
C-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the
distance between the screens/curtain boards
shall not exceed ij m and the curtained areas
shall be limited to a maximum of 4 500 m.
C-2.6.6 In high hazard occupancies, the
distance between screens shall not exceed 30
m and the curtained area shall be limited to
750 m2.
C-2.6.7 The curtained roof area shall be so
arranged that they, effectively aid in the
venting of smoke and hot gases through the
automatic vents provided in each area.
C-2.6.8 In sprinklered buildings, the screens
shall preferably be so located as to coincide
with the individual sprinkler system areas.
C-3. EXPLOSION RELIEF VENTS
C-3.1 Industrial premises where combustible
dusts can accumulate or where flammable
gases, vapours or mists in explosive
concentrations may be present are constantly
exposed to explosion hazards. Pressures
developed by such explosions may be of the
order of 7XlOPa and ordinary buildings will
not be able to withstand the shock of such
pressures. Hence, such buildings require
explosion relief vents for preventing
structural damage.
C-3.2 Basic Principle/ Considerations
C-3.2.1 Most ordinary building walls will not

withstand a sustained internal pressure as
great as 6.9X103Pa. Hence, explosion relief
vents for buildings must be designed to
operate at pressures well below those ai which
the building walk will fail.
C-3.2.2 There is a rise in pressure during an
explosion within an eticlosure even with open,
unobstructed vents, and any delay in opening
the venting devices increases that pressure.
C-3.2.3 Structural damage can be minimized

by locating hazardous opertions or equipment
outside of buildings and cut off from other
operations by a pressure resisting wall. Such
isolated processes or equipment shall be
housed in single-storey buildings properly
vented and-a device provided at the inlet of the
collector which will prevent an explosion
from blowing back through the duct work and
into the building.
involve a large part of the total volume ofthe

enclosure, and frequently occure near the
upper or lower limits of the explosive range.
Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum.
C-3.2.14 Rectangular unrestricted vents are
as effective as square vents of equal area.
C-3.3 Types of Explosion Relief Vents
C-3.2.4 Where highly hazardous opertions

cannot be located outside of main buildings,
they shall be segregated by pressure resisting
walls and each such unit shall be ventilated
outdoors. External walls may. be or heavy
constrction if equipped with surtable vents or
high-weight panels which blow out easily.
C-3.3.1 The explosion relief vents shall be

any one or more of the following types,
depending on individual requirements as
assessed by the Authority. Open or
unobstructed vents, louvres, open roof vents,
hanger-type doors, building doors, windows,
roof or wall panels or movable/fixed sash.
C-3.2:5 Operations or equipment involving

explosion hazards shall not be permitted in
basements or areas partially below grade.
C-3.3.2 The effect or external wind pressure

or suction on these devices shall be taken into
consideration while designing and selecting
the type of vents, since wind pressures may
reach over 2XIOPa in severe wind storms.
C-3.2.6 Fire can be expected to follow an

explosion in most occupancies, so that any
fixed fire extinguishing equipment, like
sprinklers, if installed, shall be such that only
the minimum damage is caused to it.
C-3.2.7 For a given material, the finer the
particle size of the dust, the more violent is the
explosion. Some materials, such as aluminim
powder, hydrogen, and acetylene, are difficult
to vent effectively due to the rapid rate of
pressure rise. Some slow burning materials,
such as coal dust in a confined space, may do
much damage because of the longer duration
of their presence. Some dusts, such as
magnesiusm, titanium and zirconium and
several metal hydrides may react with and
ignite in some common inert gases, such as
nitrogen and carbon dioxide.
C-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in
a vented structure decreases as the size of the
vent increases, but is independent of the
rupturing pressure of a diaphragm.
C-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release
of explosion pressures is an unobstructed
vent opening.
C-3.2.10 Pressure required to rupture
diaphragms of the same area and material
directly varies with the thickness of the
material.
C-3.2.1 1 The slower the rate of pressure rise,
the more easily can the explosion be vented.
C-3.2.12 The degree of venting required is
directly proportional to the degree of
explosion hazard.
C-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most
explosions of dusts, vapours and gases do not
19
C-3.3.3 The type of vent for explosion relief

for any occupancy shall be selected with life
safety as the primary aim followed by
minimum damage to property.
C-3.3.4 Where large hanger type doors or
metal curtain doors in side walls are used as
vents care shall be taken to ensure that they
are kept wide open during operations.
C-3.3.5 Where weather hoods are used to
cover roof vents, they shall be as light as
possible and lightly attached so as to enable
them to be blown off quickly when an
explosion occurs.
C-3.3.6 Doors and windows when used as
explosion vents shall be installed to swing
outwards. Doors shall have friction, spring 0
m a e n a t i c l a t c h e s t h a t w i l l functron
aut&atically to permit the door to open
under slight Internal pressure.
C-3.3.7 Movable sash shall be of the top or
bottom hinged or projected type. These shall
be equipped with a latch or friction device to
prevent accidental opening due to wind action
or intrusion. Such latches or locks shall be
well maintained.
C-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with
very light wall anchorages, or, if tight, shall be.
securely fitted and glazed with plastic panes in
plastic putty.
C-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the
whole of a building or a room may be
involved, it may be desirable to arrange for a
lightly costructed wall or roof to collapse and
thus avert the worst effects of an explosion.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF MD!.4
C-3.4 Design, Size and Disposition of Vents

C-3.4. I The required area of ex lesion vents
shall ordinarily depend on tRe expected
maximum intensity of an explosion in the
occupancy, the strenght of the structure, the
type of vent closure and other factors.
C-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a
manner as to prevent injury to personnel and
damage to explosures. In congested locations,
substantial ducts or diverters shall be
provided to direct the blast.
C-3.4.3 When ductwork is used, the ducts
shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the
maximum expected explosion pressure.
C-3.4.4 Where explosions are likely within
duct and piping syst.ems, they shall be vented
by the use of suitable diaphragms designed to
blow out at a predetermined pressure. There
shall be no physical connection between
ductwork system for more than one collector.
C-3.4.5 In large structures, the position of
vents shall be relative to the point of origin of
explosion, when it can be determined.
C-3.4.6 Where relatively slow explosions
involving coal dust, chlorinated solvents, etc,
are involved, light, hinged swinging panels
may be preferred to diaphragm type of vents.
C-3.4.7 Obstructions of any kind blocking
the vents from the risk ccvered shall be
avoided, particularly where risks of rapid
violent explosions are present.
C-3.4.8 Counter-weights add to the inertia of
the vents and so shall be avoided.
C-3.4.9 Various relieving devices, including
devices actuated by detonators, shall start to
open at as low a pressure as possible. They
shall bz of light construction, so that full
opening can be quickly attained.
C-3.4.10 Vents shall be of such size and
design as to prevent rupture of the protected
device or apparatus.
C-3.4.11 Skylights or monitors with movable
sash that will open outwards, or fixed sash
containing panes of glars or plastic that will
blow out readily under pressure from within,
can be used to supplement wall vents or
windows, provided resistance to their
displacement or opening is kept as low as
consistent w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
structural strenght.
C-3.4.f2 Flexible plastic sheets when used for
vent closures shall be installed in slotted
frames in such a way that pressure from within
bulges the sheets and releases them from the
holding frame.
C-3.4.13 Fragile sheets made of +hc, when

used for vent closures, shall be thm sheets tht
will crack or rupture under less pressure than
single strength glass. For this reason w of
transparent or trauslucent plastic sheets Is
more advantageous instead ofglass in window
sash.
C-3.4.14 If closed vents are uSed, they shall be
larger in area than unenclosed vents to
provide equivalent exp!osion pressure relief.
C-3.4.15 Small enclosures, such as machines,

shall be vented more enerously than
buildings, because if an expfosion occurs in a
machine, its entire volume may he involved.
C-3.4. I6 Vents for the protection of buildings
and equipment shall be installed on the
following basis.
C-3.4.16.J Small1 enclosures of less than
30 m, machines and ovens of light construction-l 000 cm for each 0.3 to 0.9 m3.
C-3.4.16.2 For small enclosures of more
substantial construction having reasonably
high bursting strength-l 000 cm2 for each
0.9 m.
C-3.4.16.3 Fairly large enclosures of 30 to
700 m3, such as bins silos rooms stora$
tanks, etc - 1 000 cd* for &ch 0.9 ;o 1.5 m
In these cases,.attempt shall be made to th;
extent possible to predict the likely point of
origin of the explosion in relation to the vent.
C-3.4.16.4 Large rooms and buildings over
700 m containing hazardous equipment
comprising a small fraction of the entire
volume:
a) For heavy reinforced concrete, walls100 cm* for each 2.25m3.
b) For light reinforced concrete. brick or
wood construction - 1000 cm* for each
1.65 to 2.25 m.
c) For lightweight construction, such as
prefabricated panels - 1000 cm* for each
1.5 to 1.65 m .
C-3.4.16.5 Large rooms or building over

700 m3 containing hazardous equipment
comprising a large part of the entire volume of
a room or building shall % vented as
generously as possible IO00 cm for each 0.3
to 1.05 m .
C-3.4.16.6 In order to obtain these ratios, the
size of the building or room must be limited.
For some hazardous materials, such as
hydrogen,acetylene, carbon disulphide, etc.

these limits are extremely low.
,V.59
C-3.4.17 Emphasis shall always be placed on

segregating hazardous areas by means of
firewaILs or separating walls to prevent spread
of fire.
C-3.4. I8 Interior walls of light construction,

such as tile, shall be avoided in hazardous
locations, since they can cause injuries to
personnel in the event of an explosion.
APPENDIX D
(Clause A-8.1)
GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION PROCEDURES

FOR HIGH RISE BUII DlNGS(ABOVE I5 m IN HEIGHT)
,9-l. INIIIODC~CTION
I>-/./ In case of a fire in a high rise building,
safe evacuation of its occupants may present
serious problems unless a plan for orderly and
systematic evacuation is prepared in advance
and all occupant:, are well drilled in the
operation of such plan. These guidelines are
intended to assist them in this task.
D-2. ALARMS
D-2.1 .Any person discovering fire, heat or
smoke shall immediately report such
condition to the fire brigade. unless he has
personal hnowledge that such a report has
been made. No person shall make, issue, post
or maintain any regulation or order, written
or verbal, that would require any person to
take any unnecessary delaying action prior to
reporting such condttion to the fire brigade.
D-3. DRILLS
D-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in
accordance with the Fire Safety Plan, at least
once every three months for existing buildings
during the first two years after the effective
date of these rules, or for new buildings during
the first two years after the issuance of the
certificate of occupancy. Thereafter, fire drills
shalt be conducted at least once every six
mom hs.
D-3.2 All occupants of the buildi .g shall
participate i n t h e f i r e d r i l l . .iowever,
occupants of the building. other than building
service employees, are not required to leave
the floor or use the exits during the drill.
D-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be
kept on the premises for a three year period
and shall be readily available for Fire Brigade
inspection.
D-4. SIGNS AND PLANS
D-4.1 Signs at Liff Landings - A sign shall
he posted and maintained in a conspicuous
w60
place on every floor at or near the lift landing

in accordance with the requirements,
indicating that in case of fire, occupants shall
use the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The
sign shall contain a diagram showing the
location of the stairways except that such
diagram may be, omitted, provided signs
containing such diagram are posted in
conspicuous places on the respective Boor.
A sign shall read IN CASE OF FIRE, USE
STAIRS UNLESS INSTRUCTED
01 HER WISE. lhelettering shall be at Least
1.25 cm block letters in red and white
background. Such lettering shall be properly
spaced to provide good legibility. The sign
shall be at least 25 X 30cm. where the diagram
is also incorporated in it and 6.25X25cm
where the diagram is omitted. In the latter
case, the diagram sign shall be at least 20X
30cm. The sign shall be located direct!yabove
a call-button and squarely attached to the wall
or partition. The top of the sign shall not be
above 2 m from the floor level.
D-4.2 Floor Nurnheri~!g Signs- A sign shall
be posted and maintained within each stair
enclosure on every floor, indicating the
number of the floor, in accordance with the
requirements given below.
The numerals shall be of bold type and at least
7.5cm high. The numerals and background
shall be in contrasting colours. The sign shall
be securely attached to the stair side of the
door.
D-4.3 Stair and Elevator Ident$carion
Signs-Each stairway and each elevator back
shall be identified by an alphabetical letter. A
sign indicating the letter of identification shall
be posted and maintained at each elevator
landing and on the side of the stairway door
from which egress is to be made,
in
accordance with the requirements given
below.
The lettering on the sign shall be at least
7.5cm high, of bold type and of contrasting
colour from the background. Such signs shall
be securely attached.
D-4.4 S:air &v:II~\- .Tiprr.\ ~- A sign shall bc

posted and maintained on each floor within
each stairway and on the occupancy side of
the stairway whcrc required. Indicating
whether re-entry is provided into the building
and the floor where such re-entry is provided.
in accordance with the requirements given
bclou.
The lettering and numerals ol the signs shall
be at least 1.3cm high of bold type. I he
lettering and background shall be of
contrastIng colours and the signs bhall be
securely attached approxlmatcly 1.5 m above
the floor level.
D - 4 . 5 Fire command station shall be
provided with floor plan of the building and
other pertinent information relative to the
service equipment of the building.
D-5. FIKE SAFETY PLAN

D-5. I A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall
be as given in D-8.
D-5.2 The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to all
tenants of the building by the building
management when the Fire Safety Plan has
been apprpved by the Chief Fire Officer.
D-8. t-IKE SAFETY PLAN FOKMA-1

D-X. I Buildirlg A ddrtvs
Street and Pin Code Number . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-8.2 Purpose und Objective
D-8.2.1 111 KPOSE ---To establish method of

systematic. safe and orderly evacuatibn of an
area or building by and of its occupants in
case of ti;-e or other emergency, in the least
possibie ttme, to a safe area by the nearest
safe mea~~s of egress; also the use of such
available fire appliances (including sounding
or alarms) as may have been provided for
controlling or extinguishing fire and
safeguarding of human life.
D-8.2.2 OBJECIWE --To provide proper
education as a part of continuing employee
indoctrination and through a continuing
written programme for all occupants, to
ensure prompt reporting of tire, the response
of fire alarms as designated, and the
immediate initiation of fire safety procedures
to safeguard life and contain fire until the
arrival of t.he Fire Brigade.
D-8.3 Fire Safety Director
ii) Name
D-5.3 Phe applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then he distributed b)
the tenants,to all their employees and by the
building management to all their building
employees.
D-5.4 Where the owner of the building is also
an occupant of the building, he shall be
responsible for the observance of these rules
and the Fire Safety Plan in the same manner
as a tenant.
D-5.5 In the event there are changes from

conditions existing at the time the Fire Safety
Plan for the building was approved. and the
changes are such so as to require amending the
Fire Safety Plan, within 30 days after such
changes, an amended Fire Safety Plan shall be
submitted to the fire brigade for approval.
D-6. FIRE COMMAND STATION
~-6.1 A Fire Command Station shall be
established in the lobby of the building on the
entrance floor. Such command station shall
be adequately illuminated.
D-7. COMMUNICATIONS AND FIRE

ALARM
D-7.i A means of communication and fire
alarm for use during fire emergencies shall be
provided and maintained by the owner or
person in charge of the building.
PART IV FIRE ?ROTECTlON
b) Regularly a_ssigned employment-Title

c) Regularly assigned location
d) How is he notified when at regular
location?
e) How is he notified when not at regular

location?
f) Normal working hours
g) Duties of Fire Safety Director-see
D-9.1
D-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Dirertor
4
b)
cl
4
e)
Name
Regularly assigned employment-Title
Regularly assigned location

How is he notified when at regular location?
How is he notified when not at regular
location?
fl Normal working hours
g) Duties of Deputy Fire Safet} Director see O-9.2
;l$ieire Wardens and Deputy Fire
4 Are their names on Organisation Charts
for each floor and/or tenancy?

b) Submit typical completed Organisation
Chart for Fire Dnll and Evacuation
Assignment.
I31
c) Duties of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire

Wardens - see D-9.3
a). Signs at elevator landings. Floor

b) Floor numbering
D-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor
4
b)
c)
4
Name
C)
Regularly assigned employment - -1 itle

How is he notified when at regular
location?
location?
Normal working hours
Duties of Building Evacuation
Supervisor -see D9.4
a) Submit a completed Organization Chart
4
4
4
for Fire Parties naming person in charge,

and his title in the building.
Indicate standards of selection from
building employees based on background
and availabllity.
How are they notified?
How are they notified when they are not at
their regular locations?
Means of responding
Duties bf each
Party - see O-9.5
Stairway
diagrams
identification
d) Elevator idcntitication
e) Stair re-entry
D - 8 . 1 2 F i r e Preventation und F i r e
Protection Programme See D-9.7.
D-8.l3 B u i l d i n g /rtformatio~r Form - See D-9.8.
D - 8 . 1 4 Kepresentati\le Floor Plan See D-9.9.
D-8.15 Fire Safer,. Plan Prepared h_is -~
See D-9.10.
D-8.7 Fire Party
b)
D-8. I I Signs
member
of
Fire
D-8.8 Occupants Instructions-Distribution
a) Date when prepared

b) D.ate when revised
D-9. DUTIES
D-9.1 Fire Safety Directors Duties
D-9.1.1 Be familiar with the written Fire
Safety Plan providing for fire drill and
evacuation procedure in accordance with
orders on the subject.
D-9.1.2 Select qualified building service
emplpyees for a Fire Party and orgamze, train
and supervise such Fire Brigade.
of instructions to all tenents, tenents

employees and building employees see D-9.6.
D-8.9 Evacuation Drills
D-9.1.3 Be responsible for the availability

and state of readiness of the Fire Party.
a) Frequency of drills
b) How conducted?
c) Participation. Who participated? How?
d) Controls and supervision
e) Recording of details of drills
D-9.1.5 Be responsible for the designation

and training of a Fire Warden for each floor,
and sufficient Deputy Fire Wardens for each
tenancy in accordance with orders on the
subject.
D-8.10 Fire Command Station
a) Location
b) Requirements
1) Adequate illumination
2) _ Adequate communication to
mechanical equipment room gnd
elevator control room on each floor
3) Copy of Fire Safety Plan
4) Copy of Building Information Form
5) Representative floor plans showing
location of signs, floor remote
station, communications, etc.
,.62
D-9.1.4 Conduct fire and evacuation drills.
D-9.1.6 Be responsible for a daily check for

the availability of the Fire Warden and
Deputy Wardens, and see that up-to-date
organization charts are posted.
N OTE - If
the number of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire

Wardens in the building is such that it is impractical to
individually contact each one daily. a suggested method
to satisfy the requirement is to make provisions for the
Fire Warden, or a Deputy Fire Warden in the absence of
the Fire Warden, to notify the Fire Safety Director when
the Fire Warden or required number of Deputy Fire
Wardens are not available. In order to determine the
compliance by the Fire Warden and Deputy FIZZ
Wardens, when this method is used, the Fire Safety
Director shall make a spot check of several different
floors each day.
D-9.1.7 Notify the owner or some other

person having charge of the building when
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
any designated individual is neglecting his

responsibilities contained in Fire Safety Plan.
The owner or the other personirrcharge of the
building shall bring the matter to the attention
of the firm employing the individual. If the
firm fails to correct the condition, the Fire
Department shall be notified by the
owner/ person in charge of the building.
D-9.1.8 In the event of fire, shall report to the
Fire Command Station to supervise, provide
for and coordinate:
4 Ensure that the Fire Department has been
notified of any fire or fire alarm.
b) Manning of the Fire Command Station.
c) Direction of evacuating procedures as
provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
4 Reports on conditions on fire floor for
information of Fire Department on their
arrival.
e) Advise the Fire Department Officer in
charge in the operation of the Fire
Command Station.
fire, and direct evacuation of the floor in

accordance with directions received and the
following guidelines:
4 The most critical areas for immediate
evacuation are the fire floor and floors
immediately above.
b)
D-9.1.9 Be responsible for the training and

activities of the Building Evacuation
Supervisor.
D-9.2 Deputy Fire Safety Directors Duties
e)
D-9.2.1 Subordinate to the Fire Safety
Director
D-9.2.2 Perform duties of Fire Safety
Director in his absence.
D-9.3 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
Wardens Duties-The tenant or tenants of
each floor shall, upon request of the owner or

person in charge of buildings, make
responsible and dependable employees
available for designation by the Fire Safety
Director as Fire Warden and Deputy Fire
Wardens.
D-9.3.1 Each floor of a building shall be under
the direction of a designated Fire Warden for
the evacuation of occupants in the event of
fire. He shall be assisted in his duties by the
Deputy Fire Wardens. A Deputy Fire Warden
shall be provided for each tenancy. When the
floor area of a tenancy exceeds7OOm of
occupiable space, a Deputy Fire Warden shall
be assigned for each 700m* or part thereof.
D-9.3.2. Each Fire Warden and Deputy Fire

Warden shall be familiar with the Fire Safety
Plan, the location of exits and the location
and operation of any available fire alarm
system.
D-9.3.3 In the event of fire, or fire alarm the
Fire Warden shall ascertain the location of the
Evacuation from the other floors shall be

instituted when instructions from the Fire
Command Station or conditions indicate
such action. Evacuation should be via
uncontaminated stairs. The Fire Warden
shall try to avoid stairs being used by the
Fire Department. If this is not possible, he
shall try to attract the attention of the Fire
Department Personnel before such
personnel open the door to the fire floor.
Evacuation to two or more levels below
the fire floor is generally adequate. He
shall keep the Fire Command Station
informed regarding his location.
Fire Wardens and their Deputies shall see
that all occupants are notified of the fire,
and that they proceed immediately to
execute the Fire Safety Plan.
The Fire Warden on the fire floor shall, as
soon as practicable, notify the Fire
Command Station of the particulars.
Fire Wardens on floors above the fire
shall, after executing the Fire Safety Plan,
notify the Fire Command Station of the
means being used for evacuationaud any
other particulars.
In the event that stairways serving fire
floor and/or floors above are unusable
due to contamination or cut off by fire
and/or smoke or that several floors above
fire involve large numbers of occupants
who must be evacuated, consideration
may be given to using elevators in
accordance with the following:
1) If the elevators servicing his floor
also service the fire floor, they shall
not be used. However, elevators may
be used if there is more than one bank
of elevators, and he is-informed from
the Fire Command Station that one
bank is unaffected by the fire.
2) If elevators do not service the fire
floor and their shafts have no
openings on the fire floor, they may
be used, unless directed otherwise.
3) Elevators manned by trained
building personnel or firemen may
also be used.
41 In the absence of a serviceable
elevator, the Fire Warden shall select
the safest stairway to use for
evacuation on the basis of the
location of the fire and any
W63
information received from the Fire

Command Station. The Fire Warden
shall check the environment in the
stairs prior to entry for evacuation. If
it is affected by smoke, alternative
stair shall be selected, and the Fire
Command Station notified.
5) The Fire Warden shall keep the Fire
Command Station informed of the
means being employed for
evacuation by the occupants of his
floor.
g) Ensure that an alarm has been
transmitted.
D-9.3.4 ORGANISATION CHART FOR F I R E
AND E VACUATION A SSIGNMENT - A
chart designating employees and their
assignments shall be prepared and posted in a
conspicuous place in each tenancy and on
each floor of a tenancy that occupies more
than one floor and a copy shall be in the
possession of the Fire Safety Director.
D-9.4 Building Evacuation Supervisors

Duties - A Building Evacuation Supervisor
is required at all times other than normal
working or business hours when there are
occupants in the building and there is no Fire
Safety Director on duty in the building.
D-9.4.1 He shoQld be capable of directing the
evacuation of the occupants as provided by
the Fire Safety Plan.
D-9.4.2 During fire emergencies, the primary
responsibility of the Building Evacuation
Supervisor shall be to man the Fire Command
Station, and the direction and execution of
the evacuation as provided in the Fire Safety
Plan.
D RILL
a) The Building Evacuation Supervisors

training and related activities shall be
under the direction of the Fire Safety
Director in accordance with these rules,.
and the Fire Safety Plan. Such activities
shall be subject to Fire Department
control.
D-9.3.5 Have available an updated listing of

all personnel with physical disabilities who
cannot use stairs unaided. Make
arrangements to have these occupants assisted
in moving down the stairs to two or more
levels below fire floor. If it is necessary to
move such occupants to a still lower level
during the fire, move them down the stairs to
the uppermost floor served by an uninvolved
elevator bank and than remove the street
floor by elevator. Where resistance is required
for such evacuation, notify Fire Safety
Director.
D-9.3.6 Provide for Fire Warden
identification during fire drills and fires, such
as using armband, etc.
D-9.5 Fire Party Duties - On receipt of an

alarm for iire the Fire Party shall:
D-9.3.7 Ensure that all persons on the floor

are notified of fire and all are evacuated to
safe areas. A search must be conducted in the
lavatories to ensure all are out. Personnel
assigned as searchers can promptly and
efficiently perform this duty.
D-9.3.8 Check availability of applicable
personnel on Organisation Chart and provide
for a substitute when the position on a chart is
not covered.
D-9.3.9 After evacuation, perform a head
count to ensure that all regular occupants
known to have occupied the floor have been
evacuated.
D-9.3.10 When alarm is received, the Fire
Warden shall remain at a selected position in
the vicinity of the communication station on
the floor, in order to maintain communication
with the Fire Command Station and to receive
and give instructions.
t*64
4 report to the floor below the fire to assist

b)
c)
fl
in evacuation and provide information to

the Fire Command Station.
after evacuation of fire floor, endeavour
to control spread of fire by closing doors,
etc.
atiempt to control the fire until arrival of
the Fire Department, if the fire is small
and conditions do not pose a personal
threat.
leave one member on the floor below the
fire to direct the Fire Department to the
Gre location and to inform them of
conditions.
on arrival of the Fire Depariment, the
Fire Party shall report to the Fire
Command Station for additional
instructions.
have a member designated as runner, who
shall know the location of the nearest
telephone, and be instructed ib its use.
Such member shall immediately upon
receipt of information that there is a fire
or evidence of fire, go to the telephone,
transmit an alarm and await the arrival of
the Fire Department and direct such
department to the fire.
NOTE - A chart designating employees and their
assignments shall be prepared.
D-9.6 Occupants Instructions
a) The applicable parts of the approved Fire

Safety Plan shall be distributed to all

management when the Fire Safety Plan
has been approved by the Fire
Commissioner.
b) The applicable parts of the approved Fire

Safety Plan shall then be distributed by
the tenants to all their employees and by
the building management to all their
building employees.
cl All occupants of the building shall

participate and cooperate in carrying out
the provisions of the Fire Safety Plan.
D-y.7 Fire Prevention and Fire Protection
lrogrumme
4 A plan for periodic formal inspections of

each floor area, including exit facilities,
fire extinguishers and house keeping shall
be developed. A copy of such plan be
submitted.
b) Provision shall be made for the monthIy
testing of communication and alarm
systems.
D-9.8 Building Information Form - It shall
include the following information:
a) Building address,. _ _ _ . . Pin Code . . . . . . .

b) O w n e r o r p e r s o n i n - c h a r g e o f
b u i l d i n g - Name, Address and
Telephone Number.
cl Fire Safety Director and Deputy Fire
Safety Directors Name, and Telephone

Number.
4 Certificate of occupancy. Location where

posted, or duplicate attached.
4 Height, area, class of construction.

f-l Number, type and location of fire stairs
and/or fire towers.
g) Number, type and location of horizontal

exits or other areas of refuge.
h) Number, type, location and operation of

elevators and escalators.
j) Interior fire alarms, or alarms to central

stations.
k) Communications systems and/or walkie

talkie, telephones, etc.
m) Standpipe system; size and location of

risers, gravity or pressure tank, fire pump,
location of siames connections, name of
em loyee with certificate of qualification
anB number of certificate.
n) Sprinkler system; name of employee.with
Certificate of Fitness and certificate
PART
I V
FIRE PJIOTECTION
number. Primary and secondary water

supply, fire pump and areas protected.
P) Special extinguishing system if any,
components and operation.
q) Average number of persons normally
employed in building. Daytime and night
time.
r) Average number of handicapped people in
building. Location. Daytime and night
time.
s) Number of persons normally visiting the
building. Daytime and night time.
t) Service equipment such as:
1) Electric power. primary, auxiliary;

2) Lighting, normal, emergency, type
and loca.tion;
3) Heating. type, fuel, location of

heating unit;
4) Ventilation -with fixed windows,
emergency means of exhausting heat
and smoke;
5) Air Conditioning Systems - Brief
description of the system, including
ducts and floors serviced;
6) Refuse storage and disposal;
7) Fire fighting equipment and
appliances. other than standpipe and
sprmkler system;
8) Other pertinent building equipment.
u) Alterations and repair operations, if any,
and the protective and preventive
measures necessary to safeguard such
operations with
attention to torch
operations.
v) Storage and use of flammable solids,
liquids and/ or gases.
w) Special occupancies in the building and
the proper protection and maintenance
thereof. Places of public assembly,
studios, and theatrical occupancies.
D-9.9 Representative Floor Plan-A floor
plan, representative of the majority or the
floor designs of the entire building, shall be at
the Command Post, in the main lobby, under
the authority of the Fire Safety Director. One
copy of a representative floor plan shall be
submitted to the Fire Department with the Fire
Safety Plan.
D-9.10 Fire Safety Plan - In planning,

evaluate the individual floor layouts, the
population of floors, the number and kinds of
exits, the zoning of the floor by area and
occupants. Determine the movement of traffic
l-65
by the most expeditious route to an

appropriate exit and alternative route for each
zone, since under fire conditions one or more
exits may not be usable. This format is to be
used in the preparation of the Fire Safety
Plan.
Nothing contained in this Fire Safety Plan
format is to be construed as all inclusive. All
rules and.other requirements are to be fully

complied with.
1>-9. I I Personal Fire lnwuction Card - All
the occupants of the building shall be given a
Personal Fire Instruction Card giving the
details of the floor plan and exit routes along
with the instructions to be followed in the
event of fire. A typical Personal Fire Instruction Card shall be as follows:
PERSONAL FIRE
INSTRUCTION CARD
SEAL
NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION
ADDRESS OF THE ORGANIZATION
DESIGNATION:
FLOOR NO:
FIRE WARDEN
-66
IF YOU DISCOVER A FIRE:
INSTRUCTIONS:
I. Break the glass of the nearest push button

fire alarm, and push the button.
FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY YOU

SHOULD KNOW
2. Attack the fire with extinguishers

provided on your floor. Take guidance
from your Wardens.
I. Two push button fire alarm boxes are

provided per floor. You should read the
operating instructions.
3. Evacute if your Warden asks you to do so,

2. Y o u s h o u l d r e a d t h e o p e r a t i n g
instructions on the body of the fire
extinguishers provided on your floor.
IF YOU HEAR
INSTRUCTIONS:
3. The nearest exit from your table.
EVACUATION
I. Leave the floor immediately by the

south/north staircase.
4. Your assembly point on ground floor

(check with your Fire/Dy. Fire Warden.
2. R e p o r t t o y o u r W a r d e n a t y o u r
predetermined assembly point outside the
building.
5. FOR YOUR OWN PROTECTION YOU

SHOULD REPORT TO YOUR
FIRE/DEPUTY FIRE WARDEN
Do not try to use lifts.

Do not go to cloakroom.
a) If any exit door/ route is obstructed by

loose materials, goods, boxes, etc.
Do not run or shout.
b) If any staircase door, lift lobby door

does not close automatically, or does
not close completely.
Do not stop to collect personal

belongings.
7. Keep the lift lobby and staircase doors
shut.
c) If any push button fire alarm point, or

fire extinguisher is obstructed,
damaged or apparently out of order.
YOUR ASSEMBLY POINT IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NORTH
19
16
17
18
Y)
BLOCK NO. 2
l
t;;
2
z
BLOCK NO. I
l
CI
SOUTH
(*To indicate appropriate plan of building concerned)
LIST OF STANDARDS
The foNoh*ing list records those standards which are acceptable as good practice and
accepted standards in the fulfifment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used
by the AuthoritJq as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.
In (he follonin~ list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number qf the reference in this part.
(1) IS :3808-1979 Method of test f o r
non-combustibility of building
materials yirst revision)
(2) 1s : 8757-1978 Glossary of terms

associated with fire safety.
(3) IS : 3809-197Y Fire resistance test of

structures (first revision)
(4) IS : 1642-196O* Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Materials
and details of construction
(5) IS: 3614 (Part I)-1966 Specification for
fire check doors: Part I Plate, metal
covered and rolling type
(6) IS : 1646-1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations first revision)
(7) IS : 2175-1977 Specification for heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in
automatic electric fire alarm system
first revision)
(8) IS: 2189-1976 Code of practice for
installation of automatic fire alarm
system using heat sensitive type fire
detectors (first revision)
(9) 1S:2190-1979 Code of practice for
selection, installation and maintenance
of portable first-aid fire appliances
(second revision)
IS : 2217-1982 Kecommenc!ations for
providing first-aid fire fighting
arrangements in public buildings (first
revision)
(10) IS : 636-1979 Specification for fire
fighting hose rubber lined or ruberized
fabric lined, woven-jacketed (second
revision)
- - - Ulldcr revision
lv_6*
IS : 884-1969 Specification for first-aid

hose reel for fire fighting (for fixed
installations)
I S : 901-1975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
c o u p l i n g s , dduble male and doule
female, instantanieous pattern, for fire
fighting (second revision).
IS : 902-1974 Specification for suction
hose couplings for fire fighting purposes
(second revision)
IS : 903-1984 Specification for fire hose
tielivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles
and nozzle spanner (third revision)
(under print)
IS : 904-1983 Specification for two-way
and three-way suction collectings heads
for fire fighting purposes ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 905-1980 Specification for delivery
brcechings dividing and collecting,
instantaneous pattern, for fire fighting
purposes (second revision)
IS : 906- I972 Specification for branch
with revolving head for fire fighting
IS : 907-1984 Specification for suction
strainers, cylindrical and hose types, for
fire fighting purposes (second revision)
(under print)
1s : 908-1975 Specification for fire
hydrant, stand post type ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: 909-1975 Specification for
underground fire hydrant, sluice valve
type (second revision)
1s : 9 lo-1980 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
combined key for hydrant, hydrant
cover and lower valve (second revision)
IS : 926-l 970 Specification for firemans
axe (first revision)
IS : 927-198 I Specification for fire
hooks (second revision)
IS : 928- I984 Specification for fire bells
(second revision) (under print)
IS : 930- I977 Specification for wooden
extension ladders for fire brigade use
(first revision)
lS:931-1973 Specification for wheeled
fir6 escape (firsr revision)
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE OF INCHA
IS: 933-1976 Specification for portable

chemical fire extinguisher, foam type
(second revision)
IS : 934-1976 Specification for portable
chemical fire extinguisher, soda acid

type (third revision)
IS : 937- I98 I Specification for washers
for water fittings for fire fighting
IS : 939- 1977 Specification for snatch
block for use with fibre rope for fire
brigade use first *revision)
IS : 940- I976 Specification for portable
chemical fire extinguisher, water type
(gas pressure) (second revision)
IS : 94 I- I977 Functional requirements
for blowers and exhauster for fire
fighting (first revision)
IS : 942-1982 Specification for 275I/min portable pump set for fire
fighting (second revision)
IS : 943-1979 Specification for 6801 / min trailer pump for fire brigade use

portable fire extinguishers, dry powder
IS: 2175-1977 Specification for, heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in
automatic electric fire, alarm system
(jkst revision)
IS : 2298-1977 Specification for single-
barrel stirrup pump for fire fighting

IS : 2546-1974 Specification for
galvanized mild steel fire bucket (/it-St
revision)
IS : 2696- 1974 Fut&onal requirements
for I 125-I /min light fire engine first
revision)
firemens helmets (second revision)
IS : 2871-1983 Specification for branch
(second revision)
pipe, universal, for fire fighting

purposes first revision)
IS : 2878- 1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, carbondioxide type (first revision)
IS: 944-1979 Specification for I 8001 / min trailer pump for fire brigade use
IS : 2930- 1980 Specification for hose

laying tender for fire brigade use(j?rst
(second revision)
IS : 946-1977 Functional requirements
for motor fire engine (/irst revision)
IS : 947- I%0 Specification for towing
revision)
IS: 3582-1984 S ecification for basket
tender for trailer pump for fire brigade

use
IS : 948- I983 Specification for water
tender, type A, for fire brigade use
strainers for fptre fighting purposes

(cylindrical type) (j?rst revision) (under
print)
IS : 4308Ll982 Specification for dry
powder for fire fighting flist revision)
IS : 457 I- 1977 Specification for
emergency tender for fire brigade use

and rescue tender for general purposes
aluminium extension ladders for fire

brigade use first revision)
1s : 4643-1984 Specification for suction
wrenches for fire brigade use first
first fevision)
IS : 950- 1980 Specification for water
revision) (under print)

IS : 4861-1984 Specification for dry
tender, type B for fire brigade use

for
fognozzle for fire brigade use
for carbon-dioxide tender for fire
brigade use @rst revision)
IS : 955-1980 Specification for dry
powder tender for fire brigade use wrst
powder for fighting fires in burning

metals first revision) (under print)
IS : 4927-1968 Specification for unlined
flax canvas hose for fire fighting
IS : 4928-1968 Specification for quick
closing clack-valve for centrifugal pump
outlet
IS : 4947-1977 Specification for gas
cartridge for fire extinguishers (first
revision)
IS : 957-1967 Specification for control
revision)
IS : 4989-1974 Specification for foam
van for fire brigade use

IS : 1941 (Part I)-1976 Functional
requirements for electric motor sirens:
Part I AC 3 phase 50 Hz, 415 V type
compound for producing mechanical

foam for fire fighting (first revision)
IS : 5131-1969 Specification fordividing
breeching with control, for fire brigade
use
IS : 5290-1983 Specification for landing
valve (second revision)
(second revision)
(second revision)
IS : 952-1969 Specification
(second revision)
IS : 2097-1983 Specification for foam

making branch (fkst revision)
IS : 5486-1969 Specification for quick

release knife
IS : 5490 Specification for refills for
portable fire extinguishers and chemical
fire engines:
IS : 5490 (Part I)-1977 Part I For
soda acid portable Iire extinguishers
wrst revision)
IS: 5490 (Part II)-1977 Part II For

foam type portable fire
extinguishers (first revision)
IS: 5490 (Part III)-1979 Part III For
soda acid chemical fire enginesCfirst
revision)
IS : 5490 (Part IV)- 1979 Part IV For
foam chemical fire engines (first
revision)
IS : 5505-1969 Specification formultiedged rescue axe (non-wedging)

IS : 5506 1979 Specification for 50-l
capacity chemical fire engine, soda acid
type first revision)
IS : 5507-1979 Specification for 50-l
capacity chemical fire engine, foam type
@St revision)
IS : 5612 Specification for hose-clamp
and hose-bandages far fire brigade use
IS:5612 (Part I)-1977 Part I Hose
clamps first revision)
IS: 5612 (Part II)-1977 Part II Hose
bandages first revision)
hydrant, stand-pipe for fire fighting
first revision)
IS : 6026-1970 Specification for hand
operated sirens
IS : 6067- 1983 Functional requirements
for water tender, Type X for fire
brigade use cfirsf revision)
IS : 6234- 197 1 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, water type
(constant air pressure)
coupling branch pipe, nozzle, used in
hose reel tubing for fire fighting
IS : 8096- 1976 Specification for fire
beater
for twin CO2 fire extinguishers (trolley
mounted)
controlled percolating hose for fire
fighting
IS :8442-1977 Functional requirements
for stand post type water monitor fire
fighting
automatic sprinkler heads
p

portable fire extinguisher mechanical
foam type
IS : 10460- 1983 Functional requirements
for small foam tender for fire brigade
use
IS : 10474 1983 Specification for 150
litre capacity chemical fire engine, foam
type
IS : 10658-1983 Specification for higher
capacity dry powder fire extinguisher
(trolley mounted)
IS :
1984 Specification for
extended branch pipe for fire fighting
(under print)
IS :
portable fire extinguisher BCF type
(under print)
IS :
1984 Functional requirements
of dry powder tender 2 000 kg capacity

(under prinrJ
IS :
bromochlorodifluor.omethane (Halon)
(under print)
(11) IS : 884- 1969 Specification for first-aid

hose reel for fire fighting (for fixed
installation)
.safety of industrial buildings: Electrical
generating and distributing stations
(/Zrst r e v i s i o n )
(13) I$ : 6382-1984 Code of
ractice for
design and installation ofPtxed carbon
dioxide fire extinguishing systemyirst
safety of buildings (general): Chimneys,

flues, flue pipes and hearths
IS:l647-1960 Code of ractice for fire
safety of buildings Qgeneral): Non.electric lighting equipment, oil and gas
heaters and burners of small capacity
IS: 1649- 1962 Code of practice for
design and construction of flues and
chimneys for domestic heating
appliances
( 15) IS : 4963- 1968 Recommendations for
buildings and facilities for the physically
handicapped
(16) IS : 4878-1968 Byelaws for construction
of cinema buildings
installations (jIrst revision)
IS :2726-1964 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Cotton
gining and pressing (including cotton
seed delintering factories)
NATIDNAL
-~ocmDlA
IS :3034-198 I Code of practice for fire

safety of industrial bui!dings: Electrtcal
generating and distrrbutmg stations
(first revision)

safety of industrial burldings: Viscose
rayon yarn and/ or staple fibre plants
lS:3079-1965 Code of practice for fire
safet of industrial burldings: Cotton
text1Ie mills

safety of industrial buildings: General
storage and warehousing including cold
storages
IS: 3595-1967 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Coal
Pulverizers
safety of industrial buildings: Jute mills

first revision)
I S :4209-1966 C o d e o f s a f e t y f o r
chemical laboratories
safety of industrial buildings:
Aluminium powder factories
IS :4886-1968 Code of ractice for ftre
safety of industrial kildings: T e a
factories
IS 6329- 197 I Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Saw mills
and wood works
IS :9 109-1979 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Paint and
Varnish factories
(18) IS : 655-1963 Specification for metal air
ducts (revised)
PART I
DEFINITIONS
PART 111 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
PART 1V FIRE PROTECTION

PART VI
Section 1
Section
Section
Section
Section
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Loads
2 Foundations
3 Wood
4 Masonry
5 Concrete
Section 6 Steel

PART VIII
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES

Section I Water Supply
PART X
CONTENTS
0.
FOREWORD
...
1.
SCOPE
...
2.
MATERIALS
...
3.
NEW OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
...
4.
USED MATERiALS
...
5.
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
...
6.
METHODS OF TEST
...
V- 1
0. FOREWORD
0.1 Ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the construction and
their storage are as important as the other phases of building activity like planning, designing
and constructing the building itself.
0.2 This part, therefore. lists the Indian Standards for all materials used in building
construction, in vogue. The methods of tests, to ensure the requirements demanded of the
materials in the various situations, are also included.
0.3 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. This revision. incorporates the up-to-date
list of acceptable Indian Standards specifications andmethods of tests given at the end of this
part of the Code.
0.4 This part does not preclude the use of new or alternative building materials, provided it is
proved by authentic tests that the new material is effective and suitable for the purpose intended.
0.5 A reference to SP:21-1983 Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials (under
print) may be useful. This publication gives the Summaries of Indian Standards covering various
building materials, fittings and components except standards relating to paints.
V-
NATtONAL DUILDINC
CODE
O F INMA
1. SCOPE
owner or his agent, to substantiate any claim

for the proposed material.
1.1 ThispartoftheCodecoversthemimmum
requirements of building materials, and
criteria for accepting new or alternative
building materials.
N OTE -For interpretation of the term Authority

(see also 6. I), the definition of Authority having
jurisdiction given in Part II Administration shall apply.
4. USED MATERIALS
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Every material used in fulfilment of the
requirements of this part, unless otherwise
specified in the Code or approved, shall
conform to the specifications issued by the
Indian Standards Institution. In the case of
materials where Indian Statidards are not
available, the same shall conform to the
specifications issued by the recognized
authority. A list of acceptable Indian
Standard specificatiohs is given at the end of
this part of the Code.
N OTE---The list given at the end of this part of the Code
would be augmented from time to time by amendments,
revisions and addittons. The Authority shall take
coanisance of such amendments and revisions. The latest
vekion of a specification shall, as far as possible, be
adopted at the time of enforcement of this part of the
Code.
3. NEW OR ALTERNATIVE
MATERIALS
4.1 The use of used materials may not be

precluded provided these meet the minimum
requirements of this part for new materials
(see Part II Administration).
5. STORAGE OF MATERIALS
5.1 All building materials shall be stored on
the building site in such a way as to prevent
deterioration or the loss or impairment of
their structural and other essential properties
(see Part VII Constructional practices and
safety).
6. METHODS OF TEST
6.1 Every test of material required in this part
or by the Authority shall be carried out in
accordance with a standard method of test
issued by the Indian Standards Institution. In
the absence of methods of tests where Indian
Standards are not available, the same shall
conform to the methods of tests issued by the
recognized authority. A list of acceptable
Indian Standard methods of tests is given at
the end of this part of the Code. Laboratory
tests shall . . be conducted by recognized
laboratories acceptable to the Authority.
3.1 The provisions of this part are not

intended to prevent the use ofany material not
specifically prescribed. Any such material
may be approved provided it is shown to be
satisfactory for the purpose intended and at
least the equivalent of that required in this
part in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire
resistiveness, durability, safety, maintenance
and compatibility.
6.1.f The manufacturer/ supplier shall satisfy

himself that materials conform to the
requirements of the specifications and if
requested shall supply a certificate to this
effect to the purchaser or his representative.
3.2 Approval in writing shall be obtained by

the owner or his agent before any new,
alternative or equivalent material is used. The
Authority shall base such approval on the
principle set forth in 3.1 and shall require that
tests be made (see 6. I) or sufficient evidence or
proof be submitted. at the expense of the
When such test certificates are not available,

the specimen of the material shall be tested
and the cost thereof should be borne by the
manufacturer/ supplier if the material does
not conform to the specification after,such
tests. If the material is found acceptable the
purchaser will bear the cost of such tests.
?MT V BUILDING MATERIALS
LIST OF STANDARDS
accepted standards in the fuljilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standardshall beadoptedat the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listedmay be used
Code.
In thefollowing list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this Part.
IS : 2645 1975 Specification for integral
cement waterproofing compounds(first
revision)
IS : 3466- I967 Specification for masonry
cement firs/ revision)
IS : 6452-1972 Specification for high
alumina cement for structural use
supersulphated cement
IS : 8041-1978 Specification for rapid
hardening Portland cement (first
revision)
IS : 8042-1978 Specification for white
Portland cement (first revision)
IS : 8043- 1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
hydrophobic Portland cement Cfirst
revision)
IS : 8 I I2- 1976 Specification for high
strength ordinary Portland cement
General
IS: 1911-1967Scheduleofunitweightsof
building materials (first revision)
Cetrlen: a.nd Concrete
4 .%GKEGATES
IS : 3831970 Specification for coarse and
fine aggregates from natural sources for
concrete (second revision)
IS : 650- 1966 Specification for standard
sand for testing of cement (first revision)
IS : 2386 Methods of test for aggregates
for concrete:
IS : 2386 (Part I)- 1963 Part 1 Particle
size and shape
IS: 2386 (Part II)-1963 Part 11
Estimation of deleterious materials
and organic impurities
IS:2386 (Part III)-1963 Part III
Specific gravity, density, voids,
absorption and bulking
IS : 2386 (Part IV)-1963 Part IV
Mechanical properties
IS : 2386 (Part V)-1963 Part V
Soundness
IS: 2386 (Part VI)-1963 Part VI
Measuring mortar making properties
of fine aggregates
IS: 2386 (Part VII)-1963 Part VII
Alkali aggregate reactivity
IS: 2386 (Part VIII)-1963 Part VIII
Petrographic examination
IS : 2430-1969 Methods of sampling of
aggregates for concrete
IS : 9 IO3- I979 Specification for
admixtures for concrete
IS : 9 I42- 1979 Specification for artificial
lightweight aggregates for concrete
masonry units
b)
CEMENT
IS : 269-1976 Specification for ordinary
and low heat Portland cement (third
revision)
IS : 455 1976 Specification for Portland
slag cement (third revision)
IS : 1489-1976 Specification for Portland
pozzolana cement (second revision)
v-4
c)
CEMEN-T A N D C O N C R E T E S
M ETHODS OF T E S T
A M P L I N G
AND
IS : 5 I6- I959 Methods of test for strength

of concrete
IS : 1199-1959 Methods of sampling and
analysis of concrete
IS : 2770 (Part I)-1967 Methods oftesting
bond in reinforced concrete: Part 1 Pullout test
lS:3085-1965 Methods of test for
permeability of cement mortar and
concrete
IS : 3535-1966 Methods of sampling
hydraulic cement
IS
IS : 9013-1978 Method of making, curing

and determining compressive strength of
accelerated cured concrete test specimens
IS: 9284-1979 Method of test for
abrasion resistance of concrete
d) PRECAST C ONCRETE P R O D U C T S
IS : 2 185 Specification for concrete
masonry units:
IS:2185(Part I)-1979 Part I H o l l o w
and solid concrete blocks (semnd
revision)
IS : 2185(Part II)-1983 Part II Hollow
and solid lightweight concrete blocks
IS:2185 ( P a r t Ill)-1984 P a r t 111
Autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete
blocks (under print)
IS : 4 9 9 6 - 1 9 8 4 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
reinforced concrete fence posts (firs/
IS: 5751-1984 Specification for precast
concrete coping blocks first re\lision)
(under print)
IS : 5758-1984 Specification for precast
concrete kerbs (first revision) (under
print)
IS : 5820-1970 Specification for precast
concrete cable covers
autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
wall slabs
floor and roof slabs
IS : 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved
reinforced cellular concrete products:
IS:6441 ( P a r t I)-1972 P a r t I
Determination of unit weight or bulk
density and moisture content
IS:6441 ( P a r t II)-1972 P a r t I I
Determination of drying shrinkage
I S : 6 4 4 1 ( P a r t IV)-1972 P a r t I V
Corrosion protection of steel
reinforcement in autoclaved cellular
concrete
IS:6441 ( P a r t V ) - 1 9 7 2 P a r t V
Determination of compressive
strength
IS:6441 ( P a r t VI)-1973 P a r t V I
Strength, deformation and cracking of
flexural members subject to bendingshort duration loading test
IS:6441 (Part VII)-1973 P a r t V I I
Strength, deformation and cracking of
flexural members subject to bendingsustained loading test
IS:6441 (Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII
Loading tests for flexural members in

diagonal tension
IS:6441 ( P a r t IX)-1973 P a r t I X
Jointing of autoclaved cellular
concrete elements
IS : 6523- 1983 Specification for precast
reinforced concrete door and window
frames (/i-W revision)
IS : 9872- 198 I Specification for precast
concrete septic tanks
IS : 9893- 198 I Specification for precast
concrete blocks for lintels and sills
e) AS B E S T O S C E M E N T P R O D U C T S
unreinforced corrugated and semicorrugated asbestos cement sheets
(second revision)
IS : I592- 1980 Specification for asbestos
cement pressure pipes (second revision)
IS: 1626 Specification for asbestos
cement building pipes and pipe fittings.
gutters and gutter fittings and roofing
fittings:
1S : 1626 (Part I)-1980 Part I Pipes and
pipe fittings yirsf revision)
IS: 1626(Part II)-1980 Part JIGutters
and gutter fittings (/Trsf revision)
I S : 1 6 2 6 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 Part III
Roofing accessories (first revision)
IS : 2096-1966 Specification for asbestos
cement flat sheets
IS : 2098- I964 Specification -for asbestos
cement building boards
lS:5913-1970 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
asbestos cement products
cement pipes and fittings for sewerage
and drainage
IS-: 7639-1975 Method of sampling
cement pressure pipes (light duty)
f) CO N C R E T E P I P E S
IS : 458- I97 I Specification for concrete
pipes (with and without reinforcement)
(second revision)
I S : 784- 1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
prestressed concrete pipes (including
fittings) Y;rst revision)
IS : 1916-1963 Specification for steel
,cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
IS: 3597-1966 Methods of test for
concrete pipes
v-
IS : 4350-1967 Soecification for concrete

porous pipes for under drainage
IS : 73 19- 1974 Specification for
perforated concrete pipes
IS : 7322-1974 Specification for specials
for steei cyiinder reinforced concrete
pipes
Pozzolanas
IS : 1344- I981 Specification for calcined
clay pozzoiana (second revision)
IS : 1727-1967 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
pozzoianic materials (first revision)
IS : 38 l2- I98 1 Specification for fly ash for
use .as pozzoiana and admixture yi:rsr
revision)
IS: 6491-1972 Method ofsamplingflyash
Building Limes
IS : 712-1973 Specification for building
limes (second revision)
IS: 1624-1974 Method of field testing of
building lime (pirs! revision)
IS,: 2686-1977 Specification for cinder
aggregates for use in lime concrete firsf
revision)
IS : 3068-1975 Specification for broken
brick (burnt-ciay) coarse aggregates for
use in lime concrete first revision)
IS : 3115-1978 Specification for lime
based blocks (jirssr revision)
IS : 3 l82- 1975 Specification for broken
brick (burnt clay) fine aggregates for use
in lime mortar cfirst revision)
IS : 4098-1983 Specification for limepozzolana mixture lfirsr revision)
IS : 4 I39- I976 Specification for sandlime
bricks first revision)
IS:6932 (Parts I to X)-IV73 Method of
tests for building limes
I S : 6Y32 ( P a r t I)-1973 P a r t I
Determination of insoluble residue,
loss on ignition, insoluble matter,
silicon dioxide, ferric and aluminium
oxide, calcium oxide and magnesium
oxide
IS:6Y32 ( P a r t II)-1973 P a r t I I
Determination of carbon dioxide
content
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t III)-I973 Part III
Determination of residue on slaking of
quicklime
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t IV)-1973 Part IV
Determination of fineness of hydrated
lime
-6
IS : 6932 (Part V)- I 9 7 3 P a r t V

Determination of unhydrated oxide
Determination of volume yield of
quicklime
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t VII)-1973 Part VII
Determination of compressive and
transverse strength
Determination of workability
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t IX)-1973 Part IX
Determination of soundness
IS : 6932 (Part X)-1973 Part X
Determination of popping and putting
of hydrated lime
IS:6932 (Part XI)-1983 Method of test
for building limes: Part XI
Determination of setting ttme of hydrated
lime
pozzolana concrete blocks for paving
IS:
Specification for quick
setting lime pozzolana mixture (under
print)
Stones
I S : I I21 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of strength properties of
natural building stones:
I S : I121 ( P a r t I)-1974 P a r t I
y Compressive strength Cfirsr revision)
IS: I I21 ( P a r t ii)-1974 P a r t I I
Transverse strength yirst revision)
I S : II21 ( P a r t Iii)-1974 P a r t I I I
Tensile strength cfirsf revision)
IS: II21 (Part IV)-1974 Part IVShear
strength first revision)
IS : I I22- 1974 Methods for determination
of true specific gravity of natural building
stones (first revision)
IS : 1123-1975 Method of identification
of natural building stones (first revision)
I S : I 124-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of water absorption.
apparent specific gravity and porosity of
natural building stones (first revision)
I S : 1125-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of weathering of natural
building stones (/irsf revision)
I S : 1126-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of durability of natural
building stones yi:rsr revision)
IS : I l27- 1970 Recommendations for
dimensions and workmanship of natural
building stones for masonry work (first
revision)
I S : I 128-1974 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision)
NATIONAI.
IS : 1130- 1969 Specification for marble

(blocks, slabs and tiles)
IS : 1706-1972 Method of determination
of resistance to wear by abrasion of
natural building stones yirst revision)
structural granite (firsr revision)
IS : 3620-1979 Spedification for laterite
stone block for masonry firsr revision)
IS : 3622-1977 Specification for sand
stone (slabs and tiles) (first revision)
lS:4121-1967 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of water transmission rate
by capillary action through natural
building stones
IS : 4122-1967 Method of test for surface
softening of natural building stones by
exposure to acidic atmospheres
IS : 4348- 1973 Methods of test for
determination of permeability of natural
building stones (first revision)
IS:5218-1969 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
toughness of natural building stones
IS:5640-1970 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determining the aggregates impact value
of soft coarse aggregates
IS : 6250- 198 1 Specification for roofing
slate tiles yi:rst revision)
IS:7779 Schedule for properties and
availability of stones for construction
purposes:
IS : 7779 (Part I/Set I.)-1975 Part I
Gujarat State, Section I Availability
of stones
IS : 7779 (Part I/ Set 2)- I975 Part 1
Gujarat State, Section 2 Engineering
properties of building stones
IS:7779 (Part I/Set 3)-1975 Part 1
Gujarat State, Section 3 Engineering
properties of stone aggregates
IS:7779 (Part lI/Sec I)-1979 Part II
Maharashtra State. Section I
Availability of stones
IS: 7779 (Part II/Set 2)-1979 Part 11
Maharashtra State, Section 2
Engineering properties of building
stones
IS : 7779 (Part 111 Set 3)-1979 Part 11
Maharashtra State. Section 3
Engineering properties of stone
aggregates
IS:7779(Part IlI/Sec2)-1980PartlII
Tamil Nadu State, Section 2
Engineering properties of building
stones
IS:7779(Part III/Sec3)-1980 Part 111
Tamil Nadu State. Section 3
?AET V B U I L D I N G
MATPIIALS
Engineering properties of stone

aggregates
IS : 9394- 1979 Specification for stone
lintels
Clay Products for Building
a) BL O C K S
IS : 3952-1978 Specification for burnt
hollow b!ocks for walls and partitions
cfirst revision)
b) BR I C K S
IS : 1077-1976 Specification for common
burnt clay building bricks (thirdrevision)
IS : 2117-1975 Guide for manufacture of
hand-made common burnt clay building
bricks (secor?d revision)
IS : 2 I8@ 1970 Specification for heavyduty burnt clay building bricks (first
revision)
clay perforated building bricks (second
revision)
IS : 269 I- I972 Specification for burnt
clay facing bricks (first re~~i.~ion)
IS : 3495 (Parts 1 to IV)-1976 Methods of
test of buryt clay building bricks Isecond
re\Gon)
I S : 3 4 9 5 ( P a r t I)-1976 P a r t I
Determination ofcompresfive strength
(second rr\Ys!on)
1s : 3495 (Part !I)-1976 P a r t I I
Determination of water absorption
(semnd re\tision)
IS:3495 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 P a r t 111
Determination o f effloren\cence
(second revi.Fion)
IS: 3 4 9 5 ( P a r t IV)-!976 P a r t I V
Determination of warpage (second
revision)
IS : 3583-1975 Specification tor burnt
clay paving bricks (Jirst re\Vsion)
IS : 4885-1968 SoecificaTion for sewer
bricks
IS : 5454-1978 Methods for sampling of
clay building bricks (first revision)
IS : 5779- 1970 Specification for burnt
clay soling bricks
IS : 6165-1971 Dimensions for special
shapes of clay bricks
c ) JALLIES
IS : 7556- 1975 Specification for burnt
clay jallies
d ) TILES
IS : 654- 1972 Specification for clay
roofing tiles, Mangalore oattern (.remnd
revision)
V-
IS : 1464-1973 Specification for clay ridge

and ceiling tiles (first revision)
IS : 1478- 1969 Specification for clay
flooring tiles wrsf revision)
IS : 2690 Specification for burnt clay flat
terracing tiles:
IS : 2690 (Part I)-1975 Part 1 Machine
made (jlrst revision)
IS : 2690 (Part II)-1975 Part II Hand
made firer revision)
clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and
drainage works firsr revision)
IS : 3951 Specification for hollow clay
tiles for floor and roofs:
IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 Part 1 Filler
type yirsl revision)
I S :3951 ( P a r t II)-1975 P a r t I I
Structural type firsr revision)
IS : 8920- 1978 Methods for sampling of
burnt clay tiles
commercial timbers and their zonal

distribution (revised)
IS : 1150-1976 Trade names and
abbreviated symbols for timber species
(second revision)
IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of
commercial timber first revision)
b) T I M B E R T E S T I N G
IS : 1708-1969 Methods of testing small
clear specimens of timber (jkst revision)
IS: 1900-1974 Method of testing wood
poles yirst revision)
IS : 2408-1963 Methods of static tests of
timbers in structural sizes
IS: 2455-1974 Methods of sampling of
model trees and logs for timber testing
and their conversion first revision)
IS : 4907-1968 Method of testing timber
connectors
IS : 6874-1973 Methods of test for round
bamboos
IS: 8242-1976 Methods of test for split
bamboos
IS : 8292-1976 Methods for evaluation of
working qualities of timber under
different operations
IS:-8720-1978 Methods of sampling of
timber scantlings from depots and their
conversion for testing
IS : 8745-1978 Methods of presentation
of data of physical and mechanical
properties of timber
IS : 10420-1982 Method of determination
of Sound absorption coefficient of timber
by standing wave method
1S : 10754-1983 Method of determination
of thermal conductivity of timber
Gypsum Building Materials
IS : 2095- I982 Specification for gypsum

plaster boards
IS: 2542 Methods of test for gypsum
plaster, concrete and products:
IS:2542 (Part I/Sections I to l2)1978 Part 1 Plaster and concrete (first
revision)
IS:2542(Part II/Sections I tog)-1981

Part II Gypsum products (first
revision)
IS: 2547 Specification for gypsum

building plaster:
IS: 2547 (Part I)-1976 Part 1
Excluding premixed lightweight
plaster (/ksf revision)
I S : 2 5 4 7 ( P a r t II)-1976 Part II
Premixed lightweight plaster (/ksf
CO N V E R S I O N
AND
G RADING
IS : l90- 1974 Specification for coniferous

sawn timber (baulks and scanolings)
bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid

and hollow types) (f?rsr revision)
IS : 8272-1976 Specification for gypsum
plaster for use in the manufacture of
fibrous plaster boards
IS : 8273-1976 Specification for fibrous
gypsum plaster boards
IS : 9498-1980 Specification for inorganic
aggregates for use in gypsum plaster
(third revision)
IS : 1326-1976 Specification for non-
Timber
a) TIMBER CL A S S I F I C A T I O N
IS : 3Y9- I963 C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f
v- 8
C)
revision)
IS : 2849- 1983 Specification for non-load
coniferous sawn timber (baulks and

scantlings) (fksf revision)
IS: 1331-1971 Specification for cut sizes
of timber (second revision)
IS : 2372-1963 Specification for timber
for cooling towers
IS : 3337-1978 Specification for bakes
for general purposes (first revision)
IS: 3364 Method of measurement and
evaluation of defects in timber:
IS :,3364 (Part I)-1976 Part I Logs
first revision)
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
IS:3364 ( P a r t II)-1976 P a r t I I
Converted timber (/?rsr revision)
1%: 5966 1970 Specification for nonconiferous timber in converted form for
general purpose
d) STRIJCTURAL TIMBER
AND
TEST

structural timber in building
IS : 489 I- 1968 Specification for preferred
cut sizes of structural timber
1s : 4924 Method of test for nail jointed
timber trusses:
IS : 4924 (Part I)- I968 Part I
Destructive test
lS:4924 (Part II)-1968 Part II Proof
test
for paving
IS : 212- 1983 Specification for crude coal

tar for general use (second revision)
IS : 2 15-l 98 I Specification for road tar
(second revision)
IS : 2 I6- I96 I Specification for coal. tar
pitch (revised)
IS : 217-1961 Specification for cutback
bitumen (revised)
IS: 218-1983 Specification for creosote
oil for use as wood preservatives(second
revision)
IS : 454-1961 Specification for Drgboi
type cutback bitumen (revised)
IS: 702-1961 Specification for industrial
bitumen (revised)
IS: 1201-1978 to 1220-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials (/Tut
revision)
IS: 1201-1978
revision)
Sampling (first
IS: 1202-1978 Determination of

specific gravity (first revision)
IS : I203- 1978 Determination of
penetration first revision)
residue of specified penetration Virsr
revision)
IS: 1205-1978
Determination of
softening point (j?rst revision)

IS : 1206 Determination of viscosity:
IS: 1206 (Part I)-1978 Part I
Industrial viscosity yirst revision)
IS: 1206 (Part II)-1978 Part I)
Absolute viscosity (/ir.v/ revision)
MAIT
V BUILDING MATERIALS
revision)
IS : 1208- I978 Determination of
ductility yi:rst revision)
IS : 1209-1978 Determination of flash
point and fire point (/k-St revision)
IS : 1210-1978 Float - test ( f i r s t
relsision)
IS : 12 I I-1
978 Determination of water

content (Dean and Stark method)
(fksr revisioh)
1s : 1212-1978 Determination of loss

of heating first revision)
IS : 1213-1978 Distillation test (first
revision)
IS : I2 14- 1978 Determination .of
matter insoluble in benzene wrst
Bitumen and Tar Products

IS : 73-1961 Specification
bitumen (revised)
1s: 1206 (Part III)-1978 Part 111

Kinematic viscosity (first revision)
IS : 1207-1978 Determination of
equiviscous temperature (EVT) (first
revision)
matter insoluble in toluene (first
revision)
solubility in carbon disulphide or
trichloroethylene (first revision)
IS: 1217-1978 Determinationof
mineral-matter (ASH) flrsr re\ision)
phenols Cfirst revision)
naphthalene (first revision)
IS : 1220- I978 Determination of
volatile matter content (f?rst revision)
IS : 3 I 17-1965 Specification for bitumen
emulsion for roads (anionic type)
IS : 8887- I978 Specification for bitumen
emulsion for roads (cationic type)
IS: 9381-1979 Methods for testing tar
and bituminous materials: Determination
of FRAASS breaking point of bitumen
IS: 9382-1979 Methods for testing tar
and bituminous materials: Determination
of effect of heat and air by thin film oven
test
IS: 1051 l-1983 Method for determination
of asphaltenes in bitumen by
precipitation with normal haptane
IS : 10512-1983 Method for determination

of wax content in bitumen
Floor Coverings and Other Finishes
a ) GENERAL
IS: 777-1970 Specification for glazed
earthenware tiles first rr~i,vio~~)
V-
IS : I237- I980 Specification for cement

concrete flooring tiles (/%W revision)
IS : 1542-1977 Specification for sand for
plaster (/?sr revision)
IS : 2333-198 I Specification for plaster of
Paris firer revision)
IS : 3461-1980 Specification for P V C
asbestos floor tiles (/i~r~l revision)
IS : 3462- 1979 Specification for flexible
PVC flooring (/irsr revision)
IS : 3463- 1966 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
polyst,yrene wall tiles
IS : 3464-1981 Methods of test for plastic
flooring and wall tiles (f?rsr revision)
IS :4456 Methods of test for chemical
resistant mortars:
IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Part I Silicate
type and resin type
IS:4456 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t I I
Sulphur type
IS : 4457- 1982 Specification for ceramic
unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles (f?rsr
revision)
IS : 4832 Specification for chemical
resistant mortars:
1s: 4832 (Part I)-1969 Part I Silicate
type
IS : 4832 (Part II)- 1969 Part II Resin
type
IS:4832 ( P a r t Ill)-1968 P a r t I l l
Sulphur type
IS : 4860- 1968 Specification for acidresistant bricks
b) FLOORING C OMPOSITIONS
IS : 657- I982 Specification for materials
for use in the manufacture of magnesium
oxychloride flooring compositions
(second revision)
IS: 9162-1979 Methods oftestsfor resins,

hardners, and epoxy resin composition
for floor topping
IS : 9 I97- 1979 Specification for epoxy
resin composition for float topping
materials for use in the preparation of
oxychloride flooring compositions
C)
LINOLEUM
IS : 653- I980 Specification for linoleum
sheets and tiles (secortd revision)
IS: 9704-1980 Methods of tests for
linoleum sheets and tiles
d) RUBBER F LOORING
IS : 809-1970 Specification for rubber
_lO
flooring materials for general purposes

yirsr revision)
e) B I T U M I N O U S F L O O R I N G
IS: 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen
mastic for flooring (second revision)
IS : 8374- I977 Specification for bitumen
mastic, anti-static and electrically

conducting grade
IS : 9510-1980 Specltlcatlon for bitumen
mastic acid-resisting grade
Waterproofing and Damp- proofing
Materials
IS : I322- 1982 Specification for bitumen

felts for waterproofing and dampproofing (third revision)
IS : I580- 1969 Specification for
bituminous compound for waterproofing
and caulking purposes (f&w revision)
IS : 3037-1965 Specification for bitumen
mastic for use in waterproofing of roofs
IS : 3384- 1965 Specification for bitumen
primer for use in waterproofing and
damp-proofing
IS : 587 I- 1970 Specification for bitumen
mastic for tanking and damp-proofing
IS : 7193-1974 Specification for glass
libre base coal tar pitch and bitumen felts
Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings
a) G E N E R A L
IS : 77 I Specification for glazed fire-clay
sanitary appliances:
IS : 77 I (Part I)- 1979 Part I General
requirements (second revision)
IS : 771 (Part II)-1979 Part II Specific
requirements of kitchen and
laboratory sinks (second revision)
IS:771 (Part lli/Sec I)-1979 Part III
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section I Slab urinals ( s e c o n d
revision)
1s : 771 (Part HI/Set 2)-1979 Part Ill

Section 2 Stall urinals ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS:771 ( P a r t IV)-1979 P a r t I V
Specific requirements of post mortem

slabs ((second revision)
IS : 771 (Part V)-1979 Part VSpecific
requirements of shower trays (second
revision)
IS:771 (Part VI)-1979 Part. VI

Specific requirements of bed pan smks
(second revision)
I S : 7 7 1 ( P a r t VII)-1981 P a r t V I I
Specific requirements of slop sinks
(second revision)
IS : 772- 1973 Specification for general
requirements of enamelled cast iron
sanitary appliances (seCond revision)
IS : 773- 1984 Specification for enamelled
cast iron water-closets railway stock type
(fhird revision) (under print)
IS : 774-1984 Specification for flushing
cisterns for water-closets and urinals
(valveless siphonic type) (fourth revision)
(under print)
IS : 775-1970 Specification for cast iron
brackets and supports for wash basins
and sinks (second revision)
IS : 778-1984 Specification for gunmetal
gate, globe, and check valves for general
purposes (third revision) (under pritil)
IS : 780-1984 Specification for sluice
valves for waterworks purposes (50 to 300
mm size) (sixrh revision) (under print)
IS : 781-1984 Specification for cast
copper alloy screw-down bib taps and
stop valves for water services (fhird
IS : 782- I978 Specification for caulking
lead (third revision)
IS : 804- 1967 S ecification f o r
rectangular presses steel tanks first
revision)
IS : 1700- 1973 Specification for drinking
fountains first revision)
IS: 1701-1960 Specification for mixing
valves for ablutionary and domes:ic
purposes
IS ; 1703-1977 Specification for ball
valves (horizontal plunger type) including
floats for water supply purposes (second
revision)
IS : 17 I l-1984 Specification for selfclosing taps (second revision) (under
prim)
IS : 1726 Specification for cast iron
manhole covers and frames:
IS : 1726 (Part I)- 1974 Part 1 General
IS : I726 (Part II)- 1974 Part II Specific
requirements of heavy duty ctrcular
IS: 1726 (Part Ill)-1974 Part 111
Specific requirements of heavy duty
d o u b l e trtangular type ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: 1726 (Part IV)-1974 Part IV
Specific requirements of MD circular
IS : I 726 (Part V)- I974 Part V Specific
PART V IIUILDINC
MATERIALS
requirements of MD rectangular type

(second revision)
IS : 1726 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of LD
rectangular type, Section I Single seal
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part Vl/Sec 2)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of LD
rectangular type, Section 2 Double
seal (second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part VIl/Sec I)-1974 Part
VII Specific requirements of LD
square type, Section 1 Single seal
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part VII/Set 2)-1974 Part
VII Specific requirements of LD
square type, Section 2 Double seal
(second revision)
IS : 179% 1982 Specification for pillar
taps for water supply purposes (second
revision)
I S : 2326- 1970 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
automatic flushing cisterns for urinals
first revision)
IS : 2548 Specification for plastic seats
and covers for water-closets:
I S : 2 5 4 8 ( P a r t I)-1983 P a r t 1
Thermoset seats and covers (fourth
revision)
I S : 2 5 4 8 ( P a r t II)-1983 Part II
Thermoplastic s e a t s a n d c o v e r s
Vourth revision)
IS : 2556 Specification for vitreous
sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
IS : 2556 (Part I)- 1974 Part I General
requirements of wash-down waterclosets (third revision)
IS:2556 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 P a r t I I I
Specific requirements of squatting
pans (third revision)
I S : 2 5 5 6 (Part IV)-1972 Part IV
Specific requirements of wash-basins
(second revrsion)
IS : 2556 (Part V)- 1979 Part V Specific
requirements of laboratory sinks
(second reyision)
IS : 2256 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1979 Part VI
Spectftc requirements of urinals,
Sectton I Bowl type (third revision)
IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Part VI
Section 2 Half stall urinals ( s e c o n d
revis@)
IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 3)-1974 Part VI
Section 3 Squatting plates ( s e c o n d
revision)
v_ll
IS:2556(Part VI,Sec4)-1974Part VI
Section 4 Partition slabs (second
revision)
IS: 2556 (Part VliSec 5)-1974 Part VI
Section 5 Waste fittings (set-anti
revision)
IS:2556(PartVI;Sec6)-1974PartVI
Section 6 Water spreader for half stall
urinals (second revision)
IS:2556 (Part VII)-1973 P a r t V I I
Specific requirements of half-round
channels (second revision)
Specific requirements of siphonic
wash-down water-closets (second
rmlision)
IS:2556 ( P a r t IX)-1979 P a r t I X
Specific requirements of bidets(rhirJ
re\i.\ion)
IS : 2556 (Part X)- 1974 Part X Specific
requirements of foot rests (second
revision)
I S : 2 5 5 6 (Part XI)-1979 Part Xl
Specific requirements of shower rose
(firsr re\lision)
IS:2556 (Part XII)-1973 P a r t X I I
Specific requirements of floor traps
IS:2556 (Part XIII)-1973 Part XIII
Specific requirements of traps for
squatting pans
IS: 2556 (Part XIV)-1974 Part XIV
Specific requirements of integrated
squatting pans
IS: 2556 (Part XV)-1974 Part XV
Specific requirements of universal
water-closets
IS : 2692- 1978 Specification for ferrules
for water services (first revision)
IS : 2906-1984 Specification for sluice
valves for water works purposes (350 to
I 200 mm size) (rhird revision) (under
print)
IS : 2963- 1979 Specification for nonferrous waste fittings for wash-basins and
sinks (firsf revisioit)
IS : 3004-1979 Specification for plug
cocks for water supply purposes firsr
revision)
IS : 3042-1965 Specification for single
faced sluice gates (200 to I 200 mm size)
IS : 331 I-1979 Specification for waste
plug, and accessories for sinks and washbasins first revision)
IS : 3489- 1 9 6 6 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
enamelled steel bath tubs
_l*
IS : 3950- 1979 Specification for surface

boxes for sluice valves first revision)
IS : 4038- 1979 Specification for I foot
valves for water works purposes (first
revision)
IS : 4346-1982 Specification for washers
for water taps for cold water services (firs?
revision)
IS:5219 (Part I)-I%9 Specification for
cast copper alloy traps: Part I Pand S
traps (50 to 300mm size)
IS : 53 I2 (Part I)- 1984 Specification for
swing check type reflux (non-return)
valves : Part I Single door pattern (first
IS: 5961-1970 Specification for cast iron
gratings for drainage purposes
IS: 641 I-1972 Specification for gelcoated glass fibre reinforced polyester
resin bath tubs
IS : 723 I-1984 Specification for plastic
flushing cisterns (valveless siphonic type)
for water-closets and urinals (/irsr
IS : 87 I8- 1978 Specification for vitreous
enamelled steel kitchen sinks
IS : 8727- 1978 Specification for vitreous
enamelled steel wash-basins
IS : 893 I-1978 Specification for cast
copper alloy fancy bib .taps and stop
valves for water services
IS : 8934- 1978 Specification for cast
copper alloy fancy pillar taps for water
services
IS : 9338- 1984 Specification for cast iron
screw-down stop valves and stop and
check valves for water works purposes
(first revision) (under prinr)
IS : 9739-198.1 Specification for pressure
reducing valves for domestic water supply
IS : 9758- I98 I Specification for flush
valves and fittings for water-closets and
urinals
I S : 9762- I98 1 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
polyethylene floats for ball valves
IS : 9763- 198 I Specification for plastic
bib taps and stop valves (rising spindle)
for cold water services
b) WATER M E T E R S
IS : 779- I978 Specification for water
meters (domestic type) (fifth revision)
IS : 2 lO4- 198 I Specification for water
meter boxes (domestic type) ( f i r s t
revision)
IS : 2373- I98 I Specification for water
meters (bulk type) (rhird revision)
IS : 6784-1984 Methods for testing of

water meters (domestic type)(firsr
c) PI P E S
AND
FHTINGS
IS : 404 (Part I)- 1977 Specification for

lead pipes: Part I For other than
chemical purpose (second revision)
IS : 407-198 I Specification for brass tubes
for general purposes (third revision)
IS : 65 I - I980 Specification for salt-glazed
stoneware. pipes and fittings (fourfh
revision)
rain water pipes and fittings ( s e c o n d
revision)
I S : l536- 1 9 7 6 Soecification f o r
centrifugally cast (ipun) iron pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (secotxl
Fevision)
IS : 1537-1976 Specification for vertically
cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage (first revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t s I t o XXVIII)-1976
Specification for cast iron fittings for
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
(second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part I)-1976 Part I General
requirements for sockets and spigots
of pipes (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 P a r t I l l
Specific requirements for sockets of
fittings (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t IV)-1976 P a r t I V
Specific requirements for flanges of
pipes and fittings (second revision)
IS : I538 (Part V)- 1976 Part V Specific
requirements for raised flanges
(second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t VI)-1976 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for standard
flange drilling of flanged pipes and
fittings (second revision)
I S : 1538 (Part VII)-1976 Part VII
Specific requirements for flanged
sockets (second revision)
Specific requirements for flanged
spigots (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t IX)-1976 P a r t I X
Specific requirements for collars
(second revision)
IS : I538 (Part X)- 1976 Part X Specific
requirements for double socket bends
(second revision)
PMT V BUILDING MATRIALS
IS: 1538 (Part XI)-1976 Part XI

Specific requirements for tees, all
IS: 1538 (Part XII)-1976 Part X I I
Specific requirements for double
socket tee with flanged branch (sec~onti
revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XIII)-1976 Part XIII
Specific requirements for crosses, all
IS: 1538 (Part XIV)-1976 Part XIV
socket tapers (second revision)
Specific requirements for caps (second
revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XVI)-1976 Part XVI
Specific requirements for plugs
(secon& relision)
IS: 1538 (Part XVII)-1976 Part XVII
Specific requirements for bell mouth
pieces (second revision)
I S : 1 5 3 8 ( P a r t XVlll~-1976 Part
XVIII Specific requirements for
double flanged bends (secondrevision)
IS: 1538 (Part XIX)-1976 Part XIX
Specific requirements for all flanged
tees (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XX)-1976 Part XX
crosses (second revision)
IS: l5j8 (Part XXI)-1976 Part XXI
flanged tapers (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XXII)-1976 Part XXII
Specific requirements for split puddle
or body flanges (second revision)
IS: 1 5 3 8 (Part XXIII)-1976 Part
XXI11 Specific requirements for blank
flanges (second revision)
I S : 1 5 3 8 ( P a r t XXIV)-1982
Specification for cast iron fitting for
pressure pipes for water, gas sewage :
Part XXIV Specific requirements for
all flanged radial tees (secondre\ision)
IS : I592- I980 Specification for asbestos
IS : 1626 Specification for asbestos
cement building pipes and pipe fittings,
gutters and gutter fittings and roofing
fittings :
IS : 1626 (Part I)- 1980 Part I Pipes and

pipe fittings yirsr revision)
IS: 1626 (Part II)-1980 Part II Gutters
and gutter fittings yirsr revision)
I S : 1 6 2 6 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 Part Ill
Roofing accessories (f?rsr revision)
23
IS : 1729-1979 Specification for sand cast

iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories
yirsr revision)
IS : I879 (Parts I to X)- 1975 Specification
for malleable cast iron pipe fittings firsr
revision)

requirements first revkion)
IS : 1879 (Part II)- 1975 Part 11 Specific
requirements for elbows (first revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 (.Part Ill)-1975 P a r t Ill.
Specific requirements for tees (first
revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t IV)-1975 Part IV
Specific requirements for crosses (first
revision)

requirements for bends (firsr revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t VI)-1975 Part VI
Specific requirements for sockets (first
revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t VII)-1975 Part VII

Specific requirements for bushing and
hexagon nipples (first revision)
Specific requirements for backnuts
(first revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t IX)-1975 Part IX
Specific requirements for caps and
plugs (firsf revision)
IS : I879 (Part X)- 1975 Part X Specific
requirements for unions first revision)
chemically resistant salt-glazed
stoneware pipes and fittings ( f i r s t
revision)
IS : 3076- 1984 Specification for low

density polyethylene pipes for potable
water supplies (second revision) (under
print)

spigot and socket drain pipes
IS : 3589- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
electrically welded steel pipes for water,
gas and sewage (150 to 2 000 mm nominal
size) (firsr revision)
IS: 3597-1966 Methods of tests for
concrete pipes
centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and
socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes,
fittings and accessories yirsr revision)
IS : 4350-1967 Specification for concrete
1s : 4984- I978 Specification for high
density polyethylene pipes for potable
-14
water supplies, sewage and industrial

effluents (second revision)
IS : 4985- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n for,
unplasticized PVC pipes for potable
water supplies (firsl revision)
IS : 5504-1969 Specification for spiral
wetded pipes
I S : 5 5 3 1 ( P a r t s 1 to Ill)-1977
Specification for cast iron specials for
asbestos cement pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage first revision)
IS : 553 1 (Part I)-1977 Part I General
requirements (first revision)
IS : 553 1 (Part II)-1977 Part II Specific
requirements for cast iron plain-end
bends; plugs, reducers and crosses
(ffrsr revision)

Specific requirements for cast iron
plain-end flanged spigots, tees and
wyes yirst revision)
IS : 6 163- 1 9 7 8 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
centrifugally cast (spu I) iron low pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (/%-a
revision)
IS : 64 18-197 1 Specification for cast iron

and malleable cast iron flanges for
general engineering purposes
IS : 6908- 1975 Specification for asbestos
cement pipes and fittings for sewage and
drainage
horizontally cast iron double flanged
pipes for water, gas and sewage
perforated concrete pipes
IS : 7322- 1974 Specification for specials
for steel cylinder reinforced concrete
pipes
IS : 7639-1975, Method of sampling
IS : 7834 Specification for injection
moulded PVC socket fittings withsolvent
cement joints for water supplies :
requirements
IS : 7834 (Part II)- I975 Part I I Specific
requirements for 45 elbows
I S : 7 8 3 4 ( P a r t Ill)-1975 Part, 111
Specific requirements for 90 elbows
IS:7834 ( P a r t IV)-1975 P a r t I V
Specific requirements for 90 tees
requirements for 45 tees
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
IS: 7834 (Part Vl)-1975 Part VI

Specific requirements for sockets
lS:7834 ( P a r t VII)-1975 P a r t VII
Specific requirements for unions
13:7834 (Part Vlll)-1975 Part VII1
Specific requirements for caps
IS : 8008 Specification for injection
moulded high density polyethylene
(HDPE) fittings for potable water
supplies :
Specific requirements for end caps

IS: 10124 (Part V)-1982 Part V
IS:10124 ( P a r t V I ) - 1 9 8 2 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for flanged tail
piece with metallic flanges
IS: 10124 (Part Vll)-1983 Specific
requuements for threaded couplers
IS: I0124 (Part Vlll)-1982 Part VIII
Specific requirements for 90 bends

requirements
IS:10124 ( P a r t IX)-1982 P a r t I X
IS : 8008 (Part I I)- I976 Part II Specific

requirements for 90 bends
IS: 10124 ( P a r t X ) - l 9 8 2 P a r t X
I S : 8 0 0 8 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 Part 111


I S : 8 0 0 8 ( P a r t IV)-1976 Part IV
Specific requirements for reducers
IS: 10124 (Part X11)-1982 Part X11

Specific requirements for 22$ bends
IS : 8008 (Part V)- I976 Part V Specific

requirements for ferrule reducers
IS: 10124 (Part XIII)-1982 Part Xl11

Specific requirements for I 1% bends
IS:8008 ( P a r t VI)-1976 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for pipe ends
IS:8008 (Part VII)-1976 Part VII
Specific requirements for sandwich
flanges
centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS : 8360 Specification for fabricated high
density polyethelene (HDPE) fittings for
potable water supplies :
requirements
IS : 8360 (Part II)- 1977 Part II Specific
requirements for 90 tees
IS:8360 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 P a r t 111
detachable joints for use with asbestos
cement pressure pipes
Builders Hardware
IS : 204 Specification for tower bolts :

IS:204 (Part 1)-197X Part 1 Ferrous
metals Cfourfh wvision)
IS:204 (Part II)-1978 Part II N o n ferrous metals (/iourth revision)
IS : 205-1978 Specification for nonferrous metal butt hinges (third revision)
IS: 206-1981 Specification for tee and
strap hinges (third re\lision)
IS : 208-1979 Specification for door

handles (rhird rel~r,iu!:)
IS : 28 I- I973 Specification for mild steel
sliding door bolts for use with padlock
(second revision)
IS : 362- 1982 Specification for parliament
hinges Cfourth re\>ision)
IS : 363- I976 Specification for hasps and
staples (rhird re\!ision)
IS :, 9523-198.0 Specification for ductile

iron fittings for pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
IS : 364-1970 Specification for fanlight

catch (second re\jision)
IS : 10124 Specification for fabricated

PVC fittings for potable water supplies :
IS : 452- 1973 Specification for door

springs, rat-tail type (second re\,ision)
1S : 10124 (Part I)-1982 Part I General

requirements
IS : 453- I973 Specification for doubleacting spring hinges (second re\aision)
IS: 10124 (Part II)-1982 Part II

Specific requirements for cement
couplers
IS : 729- I979 Specification for drawer

locks, cupboard locks and box locks
(third revision)
IS: 10124 (Part Ill)-1982 Part III

Specific requirements of straight
reducers
IS : 10124 (Part IV)-1982 Part IV
IS: 1019-1974 Specification for rim

latches (second re\!ision)
IS: 1341-1981 Specification for steel butt
hinges vourrh revision)
?MT
BUlLDING
MATERlAW
_15
IS : 1823-1980 Specification for floor

door stoppers (third re\,ision)
IS : 7540- 1974 Specification for mortice

dead locks
IS: 1837-1966 Specification for fanlight

pivots (/irsl rr\V.riorl)
IS : 8756- 1978 Specification for ball

catches for use in wooden almirah
IS : 2209- lY76 Specification for mortice

locks (vertical type) ([hit-d re\Vsion)
IS : 8760- 1978 Specification for mortice

sliding door locks, with lever mechanism
IS : 268 I - I979 Specification for nonferrous metal sliding door bolts for use
with padlocks (.vrc~nd rm~ision)
IS : 9 lO6- I979 Specification for rising

butt hinges
IS : 3564-lY75 Specification for door

closers (hydraulically regulated) (.w~wI~
re\Vsion)
IS : 9460- 1980 Specification for flush

drop handle for drawer
IS : 9 I3 I- 1979 Specification for rim locks
IS : 9899- I98 I Specification for hat, coat

and wardrobe hooks
IS : 38 l8- I97 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
continuous (piano) hinges (/?r.st ret~ision)
IS : 100 I9- I98 I Specification for steel

window stays and fasteners
IS : 3828- 1966 Specification for ventilator

chainc
IS : 10090-1982
numericals
IS : 384% I Y66 Specification for steel

backflap hinges
IS : 4Y48- 1974 Specification for welded

steel wire fabric for general use (/ir.s/
rr\~r.sion)
IS : 4Y92- I975 Specification for dool
handles for mortice locks (vertical type)
Cfirsr tw~ision)
IS: 5187-1972 Specification for flush
bolts (firsr re\!i.sion)
bathroom latches
for
IS : 10342- I982 Specification for curtain

rail system
IS : 3847-1966 Specification for mortice

,llght latches
IS : 462 I- 1975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
indicating bolts for use in public baths
and lavatories (jir.s/ tmti.,iorl)
Specification
a)
PLY
wool)
IS : 303- I975 Specification for plywood

for general purposes (second revision)
IS : I328- I082 Specification for veneered
decorative plywood (second revision)
Is: 1734 (Parts I to 20)-1983 Method 01
test for plywood (second revision)
I S : 1734 ( P a r t I)-1983Part I
Determination of density and
moisture content (second revision)
IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice

latch (vertical type)
I S : 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 2)-1983 P a r t 2
Determination of resistance of dry
heat (.second raGion)
IS : 63 I5- 1971 Specification for floor

springs (hydraulically regulated) for
heavy doors
I S : 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 3)-1983 P a r t 3
Determination of fire resistance
(second revision$
IS : 63 I8- 197 I Specification for plastic

window stays and fasteners
IS: 1734 (Part 4)-1983 Part 4 Determination of glue shear strength

(second revision)
IS : 6343-1982 Specification for door

closers (pneumatically regulated) for light
doors weighing up to 40 kg@rst revision)
IS : 1734 (Part 5)- 1983 Part 5 Test for

adhesion of plies (second revis@)
IS : 6602- 1972 Specification for ventilator

poles
Part 6
IS: 1734 (Part 6)-1983
Determination of water resistance
(second revision)
IS : 6607- 1972 Specification for rebated

mortice locks (vertical type)
IS : 7 l96- I974 Specification for hold fast
IS : 7197-1974 Specificatioti for double
action floor springs (without oil check)
for heavy doors
IS : 7534-1974 Specification for mild steel
locking bolts with holes for padlocks
16
Part 7
IS: 1 7 3 4 (Part 7)-1983
Mycological test (second revision)
IS:1734 ( P a r t 8)-1983
Part 8
Determination of pH value (second
revision)
Part 9
IS: 1734 (Part \9)-1983
Determination of tensile strength
(second revision)
NATIDNAL
BUILDING
C O D E OF INDIA
IS : 1734 (Part IO)-1983

P a r t IO
D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f compiesbive
strength (sec,on/J rel*ision)
IS:2380 ( P a r t II)-1977 P a r t II
Accuracy of dimensions of boards
(firsf rerlision)
Part I I
IS: 1734 (Part 1 I)-1983
Determination of static bending
strength (second re\-ision)
IS:2380 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 P a r t JH
Determination of moisture content
and density (first revision)
IS: 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 12)-1983 P a r t 1 2
Determination of scarf joint strength
(second revision)
IS:2380 ( P a r t IV)-1977 P a r t I V
Determination of static bending
strength (modulus of rupture and
modulus of elasticity in bending) first
revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l3)-1983

P a r t I3
Determination of panel shear strength
(second revision)
P a r t 14
IS: 1734 (Part l4)-1983
Determination of plate shear strength
(second revision)
P a r t I5
IS: 1734 (Part IQ-1983
Central loading of plate test (second
revision)
IS:2380 (Part V)-1977 Part V

p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o s u r f a c e (jirsf
revision)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t VI)-1977 Part V:
parallel to surface yirsr re\*i.sion)
IS: 1734 (Part l6)-1983

P a r t 16
Vibration of plywood plate test
(second revision)

Determination of compression
perpendicular to the plane of the board
firs! revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l7)-1983 Part I7 Long

time loading test of plywood strips
(second revision)

Compression parallel to surface test
first re\ision)
IS: 1734 (Part l8)-1983

P a r t I8
Impact resistance test on the surface of
plywood (.second re\si.sion)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t 1X)-1977 Part IX
Determinatiop of resistance to shear in
plane of the board yirst re\*i.sion)
P a r t 19
I S : 1734 ( P a r t l9)-1983
Determination of nails and screws
holding power (sc>cond re\~i.sion)
IS : 2380 (Part X)-l977 Part X Falling

hammer impact test flrsr revision)
IS: 1734 (Part 20)-1983

Part 20
Acidity and alkalinity resistance test
(second re\-ision)
IS : 4990- 198 I Specification for plywood
for concrete shuttering work (fit-x/
re\Vsion)
IS : 5509-1980 Specification for lire
retardant plywood (first re\ision)
preservative treated plywood
IS:73 l6- 1974 Specification for decorative
plywood using plurality of veneers for
decoratice faces
b ) PARTICLE BOARDS
AND
FIBKE BOARDS
IS : 1658- 1977 Specification for fibre

hard boards (sewnd relhion)
IS : 1659-1979 Specification for bloch
boards (second revision)
IS: 2380 (Parts I to XXI)-1977 Methods
of test for wood particle boards and
boards from other lignocellulosic
materials (first revision)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t I)-1977 P a r t I
Preparation and conditioning of test
\peclniens (fir7I tw~i~inn)
PART V BUILDING MATERIAL!5
I S : 23dO ( P a r t XI)-1977 P a r t X l
Surface hardness (/hi revis@)
IS : 2380 (XII)-1977 Part XII Central
loading of plate test (first revision)
IS:2380 (Part Xltt)-1977 Part XIII
Long time loading bending test (firs/
re\i.sion)
IS:2380 (Part XIV)-1977 Part XIV
Screw and nail withdrawl test (first
revision)
Lateral nail resistance (/hr re\vision)
IS : 2380 (Part XYt)-I977 Part XVI
Determination of water absorption
Vim re\+.sion)
IS: 2380 (Part XVII)-1977 Part XVII
Determination of swelling in water
Virsr revision)
IS: 2380 (Part XVIII)-1977 P a r t
XVIII Determination of mass and
dimensional changes caused by
moisture changes (firsf revision)
lS:2380 (Part XIX)-1977 Part XIX
Durability cyclic test for interior use
first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XX)-1977 Part XX
v.l
Accelerated weathering cyclic test for

exterior use first revision)
1s: 2380 (Part XXI)-1977 Part XXI
Planeness test under uniform moisture
content (first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XXII)- 198 1 Method of test
for wood particle boards and boards from
other lignocellulosic materials : Part
XXII D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f s u r f a c e
glueability test
IS : 2380 (Part XXIII)-1981 Method of
test for wood particle boards and boards
from other lignocellulosic materials : Part
XXIII Vibration tests for particle boards
IS : 3087-1965 Specification for wood
particle boards (medium density) for
general purposes
IS : 3097-1980 Specification for veneered
particle boards (firsf revision)
IS : 3 129- 1965 Specificaiion for particle
board for insulation purposes
IS : 3308- 198 I Specification for wood
wool building slabs first revision)
IS : 3348-1965 Specification for fibre
insulation boards
density wood particle boards
c) WO O D- BASED L A M I N A T E S
IS : 3513 Specification for high and
medium density wood-based laminates
(compreg):
1333513 (Part Ill)-1966 P a r t 1 1 1
General purposes
IS:3513 ( P a r t IV)-1966 P a r t I V
Sampling and tests
IS:9307 (Parts I to VIII)-1979 Methods
of tests for wood-based structural
sandwich construction
IS : 9307 (Part I)- 1979 Part I Flexure
test
IS:9307 ( P a r t II)-1979 P a r t I I
Edgewise compression test
IS:9307 (Part III)-1979 P a r t 1 1 1
Flatwise compression test
IS : 9307 (Part IV)-1979 Part 1V Shear
test
IS : 9307 (Part V)-1979 Part V Flatwise
tension test
IS:9307 ( P a r t V I ) - 1 9 7 9 P a r t V I
Flexure creep test
Cantilever vibration test
Weathering test
_l*
4 ADHESIVES
IS : 848-1974 Specification for synthetic
resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic
and aminoplastic) (first revision)
IS : 849- 1957 Specification for cold
setting case in glue for wood
IS : 851-1978 Specification for synthetic
resin adhesives for construction work
(non-structural) in wood yirsr revision)
IS : 852- 1969 Specification for animal
glue for general wood-working purposes
(first revision)
IS : 4835- 1979 Specification for polyvinyl
acetate dispersion-based adhesives for
wood (first revision)
IS : 9188-1979 Specification for adhesive
for structural laminated wood products
for use under exterior exposure
condition
Doors and Windows
a) W OODEN DOOK AND W INDOW F R A M E S ,

AND S H U T T E R S
IS : 1003 Specification for timber
panelled and glazed shutters:
IS: 1003 (Part I)-19J7 Part 1 Door
shutters (second revi.pion)
I S : 1 0 0 3 ( P a r t II)-1983 Part II
Window and ventilator shutters

, (second revision)
IS : 1826-1961 Specification for Venetian
blinds for windows

IS : 2191 Specification for wooden flush
door shutters (cellular and hollow core
type):
IS: 2191 (Part I)-1983 Part I Plywood
face panels (fourth revision)
IS: 2191 (Part II)-1983 Part 11 Particle
board face panels and hardboard face
panels (third revision)
IS : 2202 Specification for wooden flush
door shutters (solid core type):
IS : 2202 (Part I)-1983 Part I Plywood

face panels Vourth revision)
IS : 2202 (Part II)-1983 Part II Particle
board face panels and hardboard face
panels (rhird revision)
IS :4020-1967 Methods of tests for

wooden flush doors: Type tests
IS : 4121-1983 Specification for timber
door, window and ventilator frames
(second revision)
IS : 4962- 1968 Spetification for wooden

side sliding doors
bars for concrete reinforcement (second

revision)
IS : 6198.-1983 Specification for ledged,

braced and battened timber door shutters
(jTrst revision)
IS : 2090-1983. Specification for high

tensile steel bars used in prestressed
concrete (first revision)
b) M ETAL L&OR AND W I N D O W F R A M E S ,

AND SHUTI-ERS
IS : 6003- 1983 Specification for indented

wire for prestressed concrete (first
revision)
IS : 6006-1983 Specification for uncoated
stress - relieved strand for prestressed
concrete (first revisron)

doors, windows and ventilators (third
revision)
windows for industrial buildings (/irsr
revision)
aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators
Steel
IS : I 136- 1958 Preferred sizes for wrought

metal products

aluminium windows for industrial
buildings
IS : 1137-1959 Thicknesses of sheet and

diameters of wire
IS : 4351-1976 Specification for steel door

frames (first revision)
IS : 1762 Code for designation of steels:
IS : 6248-1979 Specification for metal

rolling shutters and rolling grills (first
revision)
IS : 1762 (Part I)-1974 Part I Based on

letter symbols (firsf revision)
IS : 7452-1982 Specification for hot rolled

steel sections for doors, wmdows and
ventilators yirsr revision)
IS : 1762 (Part II)- 1974 Part 11 Based

on numerals for industrial and
commercial purposes cfirsf revisidn)
(under preparation)
IS : 1045 I- 1983 Specification for steel

sliding shutters (top hung type)
IS : 2049-1978 Colour code for the

identification of wrought steel for general
engineering purposes (first revision)

collapsible gates
Concrete Rein/&-cement
IS: 43.2 Specification for mild steel and
medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn
steel wire for concrete reinforcement:
IS : 7598- IF74 Classification of steels
b) STRUCTURAL STEEL.
IS : 226- I975 Specification for structural
steel (standard quality) (/iqih revision)
IS : 432 (Part I)- 1982 Part I Mild steel

and. medium tensile steel bars (third
revision)
IS: 961-1975 Specification for structural

steel (high tensile) (second revision)
IS : 1977- 1975 Specification for structural
steel (ordinary quaiity) (second revision)
IS:432 .(Part II)-1982 Part 11 Hard

drawn steel wire (third revision)
IS : 1139- 1966 Specification for hot rolled
mild steel, medium tensile steel and high
yield strength steel deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement (revised)
IS : 1566-1982 Specification for hard
drawn -steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement (second revision)
IS: 1785 Specification for plain hard
drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete:
IS : 2062-1984 Specification for weldable

structural steei (third revision) (under
prmt)
IS : 2830- 1975 Specification for carbon
steel billets. blooms and slabs for rerolling into structurai steel (standard
quality) first revision)
IS :.283 I-1975 Specification for carbon
steel billets, blooms and siabs for rerolling into structural steel (ordinary
quality) (second revision)
IS : 1785 (Part I)-1983 Part I Cold

drawn stress-relieved wire (second
revision)
IS: 1785 (Part II)-1983 Part II Asdrawn wire yirst revision)
coldworked steel high strength deformed
FART
GENERAL
V BUILDING MATERLALS

structural steel (medium and high
strength qualities)
C)
S HEET
AND
S TRIP
IS : 277-1977 Specification for galvanized
steel sheets (plain and corrugated) (rhird

revision)
IS : 412-1975 Specification for expanded
metal steel sheets for general purposes
(second revision)
carbon steel sheet and strip (rhird
revision)
IS : 4030-1973 Specification for cold

rolled carbon steel strip for general
engineermg purposes (fkst revision)
IS : 7226 1974 Specification for cold
rolled medium, high carbon and low alloy
steel strip for general engineering
purposes
d) B A R S, R O D S, W IRE
AND
W IRE
RODS

wire for general engineering purposes
Light Metals and Their Allo_vs
IS : 733-1983 Specification for wrought

aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars,
rods and sections for general engineering
purposes (third revision)
aluminiuin and aluminium alloys, sheet
and strip lfor general ecgineering
purposes) (second revision)
alummium and altiminivm alloy drawn
tube for general engineering purposes
(second revision)
IS : 1254-1975 Specification for corrugated aluminium sheet (second revision)
IS : 1285-1975 Sepcification for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
extruded round tube and hollow sections
(for general engineering purposes)
(third revision)
(second revision)

steel rivet bars (up to 40mm diameter)
for structural purposes (third revision)
IS : 1149-1982 Specification for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes

aluminium and aluminium alloys welded
tubes for general engineering purposes
(third revision)
IS : 2591-1982 Dimensions for hot rolled

bars for threaded components (second
revision)
IS : 7887- 1975 Specification for mild steel
wire rods for general engineering
purposes
e) PL A T E S
IS : 3502- 1966 Specification for s&eel
chequered plates
f) TUBES
AND
TUBULARS

tubes for structural purposes (third
revision)
IS: 1239 Specification for mild steel
tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings:
IS : i 239 (Part I)- 1979 Part 1 Mild steel
tubes Vourth revision)
IS: 1239 (Part II)-1982 Part 11 Mild
steel tubulars and other wrought steel
pipe fittings (third revision)
IS : 4270- 1983 Specification for steel
tubes used for water wells yirst revision)
IS : 45 16 1968 Specification for elliptical
mild steel tubes
IS : 4923-1968 Specification for hollow
mild steel sections for structural use
20
Structural Shapes
a) S TRUCTURAL S H A P E S
IS : 808- 1964 Specification for rolled steel
beam, channel and angle sections
(revised)
IS : 8 I l-1965 Specification for coldformed light gauge structural steel

sections (revised)
IS : I 173-1978 Specification for hotrolled and slit steel tee bars (second
revision)
IS : 1852- 1979 Specification for rolling
and clotting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
products (third revision)
IS : 23 14-1963 Specification for steel
sheet piling sections
IS : 3443-1980 Specification for crane rail
sections (/k-s1 revision)
aluminium equal leg angles
IS : 3909- I966 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
aluminium unequal leg angles
IS : 392 I- 1966 Specification for
aluminium channels
IS : 3954- 1967 Specification for hot rolled
steel channels sections for general
engineermg purposes
IS : 3964- 1980 Specification for light rails
yirst revision)

aluminium l-beams
IS : 6445- 197 1 Specification for

aluminium tee sections
b) DIMENSIONALSTANDARDS
IS : 808 (Part I)- I973 Dimensions for hotrolled steel beams : Part I MB series
(second revision)
IS: 808 (Part II)-1978 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel column: Part II SC series
(second revision)
IS:808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel beams, channel and angle
sections: Part 111 Channel, MC and MCP
series (second revision)
IS: 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections : Part V Equal leg
angles (second revision)
IS:808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections : Part VI Unequal
leg angles (second revision)
IS : 1730 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet
and strip for structural and general
engineering purposes:
IS : 1730 (Part I)-1974 Part 1 Plate
first revision)
IS: 1730 (Part II)-1974 Part II Sheet
(first revision)
IS : 1730 (Part Ill)- 1974 Part 111 Strip

yirsr revision)
IS : 173 I- 1971. Dimensions for steel flats

for structural and general engineering
purposes first revision)
IS : 1732- I972 Dimensions for round and
square steel bars for structural and
general engineering purposes wrsf
revision)
IS : 2673- I979 Dimensions for wrought

extruded round tube (first revision)
IS : 2676- 198 1 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet
and strip first revision)
IS : 2678-1972 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium,and aluminium alloys, drawn
tube (/%sr revision)
IS : 3965 198 1 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar,
rod and section (first revision)
IS : 6477- 1983 Dimensions for wrought
extruded hollow sections
Welding Elecrrodes and Wires
IS : 8 14 Specification for covered
electrodes far arc welding of sfructural
steels:
PART
BUILDING
MATERIALS
IS : 814 (Part I)-1974 *Part I For

welding products other than sheets
Vourrh revision)
IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Part. II- For

welding sheets uourth revision)
IS : 8 15 1974 Classification and coding of
covered electrodes for metal arc welding
of structural steels (second revision)
IS : 1278-1972 Specification for fillerrods
and wires for gas welding ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 13951982 Specification for low and

me,dium alloy steel covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding(third revision)
IS : 3613-1974 Acceptance tests for wireflux combinations for submerged-arc
welding of structural steel (jirsr revision)
IS : 4972- 1968 Specification for resistance
spot-welding electrodes
IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding
rods and base electrodes for gas shielded
arc welding of structural steel
IS : 6560-1972 Specification for molybdenum and chromium-molybdenum low
alloy steel welding rods and base
electrodes for gas shielded arc welding
IS : 7280- 1974 Specification for base wire
electrodes for submerged-arc welding of
structural steels
IS : 8363-I976 Specification for bare wire
electrodes for electroslag welding of steels
Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories
IS : 207-1964 Specification for gate and
shutter hooks and eyes (revised)
IS : 45 l-1972 Technical supply conditions
for wood screws (second revision)
1s : 723- 1972 Specification for steel
countersunk head wire nails (second
revision)

and brass cup, ruler and square hooks
and screw eyes (revised)
IS : 725- 196 1 Specification for copper
wire nails (revised)
IS : 730-1978 Specification for hook bolts
for corrugated sheet roofing (second
revision)
IS : I 120-1975 Specification for coach

screws (first revision)
IS : I363 1967 Specification for black.
hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts (dia 6
to 39 mm) and black hexagonal screws
(dia 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 1365- 1978 Specification for slotted
countersunk head screws (third revision)
_21
IS : I366- I982 Specification for slotted

cheese head screws (dia range 1.6 to
20 mm) (sect& revision)
IS : I367 Technical supply conditions for
threaded steel fasteners:
IS : 3468-1975 Specification for pipe nuts

first re\Gion)
IS : I367( Part I)- 1980 Part I

Introduction and general information

tensile friction grip bolts (first revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t II)-1979 Part II
Products grades and tolerances
IS : 4206- 1967 Dimensions for nominal

lengths, and thread lengths for bolts,
screws and studs
IS : 4762-1968 Specification for worm
drive hose clips for general purposes
(second revision)
(second revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t Ill)-1979 Part III

Mechanical properties and test
methods for bolts, screw; and .nuts
with full loadability (second revisiionj
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t V)Y1980 P a r t V
methods for set screws not under
tensile stresses (second revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t VI)-1980 Part VI
methods for nuts with specified proof
loads (Second re\,ision)
IS: 1367 (Part VII)- 1980 Part VII
methods for nuIs without specified
proof loads (swond re\fision)
IS: 1 3 6 7 . ( P a r t IX)-1979 Part IX
Surface discontinuities of bolts, screws
and studs (sewntl re\*ision)
IS : 5369- 1975 General requirements for

plain washers and lock washers (first
revision)
IS : 5372-1975 Specification for taper

w a s h e r f o r c h a n n e l s (ISMC) (firsr
revision)
IS : 5373-1969 Specification for square

washers for wood fastenings
IS : 5374- 1975 Specification for taper
w a s h e r s f o r l - b e a m (ISME)) (firs,
revision)
foundation bolts
I S : 6 I I3- l9jO S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
aluminium fasteners for building
purposes
H o t d i p gal\aniired c o a t i n g s o n
threaded fasteners (.vrc~mc/ re\li.sion)
IS : 66 IO- 1972 Specification for heavy

washers for steel structures
IS : 6623- 1972 Specification for high
tensile friction grip-nuts
IS : 6639-1972 Specification for hexagon
bolts for steel structures
IS : 6649- 1972 Specification for high
tensile friction grip washers
IS : 6733- I972 Specification for wall and
roofing nails
IS: 1367 (Part XVI)-1979 Part XVI

Designation system and symbols
IS : 6736-1972 Specification for slotted

raised countersunk head wood screws
I S : 1367 ( P a r t XVIII)-1979 P a r t

round head wood screws
IS : I367 (Part X)- 1979 Part X Surface
discontinuities on nuts (sec,onc/

re\~ision)
IS: 1367 (Part XII)-1981 Part XII

Phosphate coatings on threaded
fasteners (.sc~~,7t/ tw~ision)
IS: 1367 (Part XIII)-1983 Part XIII
(second revision)
XVIII Marking and mode of delivery

(.~~~~~ti~l re\~i.siotl)
IS: 2016-1967 Specification for plain

washers (second tw~i.sion)
IS : 2389- I968 Specification for precision
hexagon bolts. screws, nuts and lock nuts
(dia range 1.6 to 5 mm) (/ir.sr re\lision)
IS : 2585-1968 Specification for black

square bolts and nuts (dia range 6 to
39 mm) and black square screws (dia
range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 2687-1975 Specification for cap nuts
(fir\r w\~tsion)
22
IS : 3063- 1972 Specification for single

coil rectangular section spring washers
for bolts, nuts and screws (first revision)

countersunk head wood screws
IS : 8033- 1976 Specification for round
washers with square hole for wood
fastenings
IS : 84 l2- 1977 Specification for slotted
countersunk head bolts for steel
structures
IS : 8822- 1978 Specification for slotted
mushroom head roofing bolts
IS : 8869- I978 Specification for washers
for corrugated sheet roofing
NATIONAL. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
IS : 891 I-1978 Specification for slotted

raised countersunk head screws
IS: 10238-1982 Specification for step
Screw Threads and Rivets
Glass
IS : 2553- 197 1 Specification for safety

glass (second revision)
1: : 2835- I977 Specification for flat
transparent sheet glass (second revision)
IS : 554-1975 Dimensions for pipe threads

where pressure tight joints are required
on the threads (second revision)
IS : 3438- 1977 Specification for silvered

glass mirrors for general purposes @rst
IS: 1929-1982 Specification for hot

forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36
mm diameter) (first revision)
IS : 5437- 1969 Specification for wired and

figured glass
IS : 2155-1982 Specification for cold

forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6
to 16 mm diameter) (fkst revision)
IS : 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for
fastening purposes:
IS : 2643 (Part I)-1975 Part I Basic

profile and dimensions (/%-St revision)
IS : 2643 (Part II)-1975 Part 11 Tolerances virst revision)
I S : 2643(Part Ill)-1975 P a r t III
Limits of sizes (first revision)
IS : 2907-1964 Specification for nonferrous rivets (1.6 to IO mm)
revision)
Fillers, Stoppers and Putties
IS : 1 lo-1968 Specification for ready

mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for
enamels, for use over primers (f?rst
revision)
IS : 345-1952 Specification for wood

filler, transparent, liquid
IS : 4 I9- 1967 Specification for putty for
use on window frames (first revision)
IS : 42 I-1953 Specification for jointing
paste, for bedding mouldings on coaching
stdck
IS : 423- I96 I Specification for plastic
wood, for joiners filler (revised)
IS : 2998- 198 I Specification for cold

forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to
I6 mm diameter) first revision)
IS : 424-1965 Specification for plastic

asphalt (relvised)
IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets
IS : 3709- I966 Specification for mastic

cement for bedding of metal windows
Wire Ropes and Wire Products
IS : 278-1978 Specification for galvanized

steel barbed wire for fencing (/bird
IS : 7 164- 1973 Specification for stopper

Water Rased PairIts
re\~ision)
IS : 427- I965 Specification for distemper.

dry, colour as required (retVised)
IS : I835- 197.6 Specification for steel wire

for ropes (third re\~ision)
IS : 428- I969 Specification for distemper,,

oil emulsion, colour as required (first
IS : 2 140- 1978 Specification for stranded

galvanized steel wire for fencing (/irst
re\lision)
re\si.sion)
IS : 5410-1969 Specification for cement

paint, colour as required
I$ : 2266-1977 Specification for steel wire

ropes for general engineering purposes
IS : 541 I Specification for plastic

emulsion paint:
(secoml re\~ision)
IS : 2365-1977 Specification for steel wire
suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and

hoists vi/..sf re\~i.sion)
tS: 2721-1979 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
galvanized steel wire chain link fences
(first re\,ision)
IS: 3121-1981 Specification for rigging
screws and stretching screws ( f i r s t
IS:541 I (Part I)-1974 P a r t I F o r

interior use
IS:5411 (Part II)-1972 Part II For
exterior use
Read,, Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready

m i x e d p a i n t s a n d e n a m e l s (sec,ond
re\+sion)
re\~ision)
IS : 6594- 1977 T e c h n i c a l s u p p l y
conditions for wire ropes and strands
IS : 102-1962 Specification for ready

mixed paint. brushing. red lead. nonsetting, priming (re\lisedI
(/irsr re\~i.vion)
23

mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome,
priming (second revision)
IS: 109-1968 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster,
to Indian Standard colours No. 361 and
63 I (j?rst revision)
IS : I I I-1950 Specification for ready

mixed paint, brushing, undercoating,
exterior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I 12-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, spraying, undercoating,
exterior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 2 16, 352, 358, 443 and 632
interior, to Indian Standa,rd colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I l4- 1950 Specification for ready
interior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
exterior. matt finish, to Indian Standard
colours No. 352 and 632
IS : I 16- 1950 Specification for ready
exterior, matt finish, to Indian Standard
colours No. 352 and 632
IS : I I7- I964 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing exterior,
semi-gloss, for general purposes, to
Indian Standard colours-Light Co/ours
No. 101. 102. 174, 216, 217, 275281,352,
353;354, 358, 361, 364,365,384,385.386,
387. 388. 397,442,443.628,629,630,63 I,
693. 694 and 697; Dark Colours No. 103,
104. 169, 2 19, 278,280,283,359,360,362,
363. 410, 444. 632, 635 and 692 (revised)
IS : I20- I962 Specification for ready

mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semigloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 537, 538, 540, 541,
570 and 574 (revised)
IS : I2 I-1962 Specification for ready
Standard colour No. 414 (revised)
Standard colours No. 41 I, 412 and 413
(revised)
I$ : 123-1962 Specification for ready
Standard colours No. 445, 446, 448,449,
$4
451 and 473; and red oxide (colour

unspecified) (revised)
IS : 124 Specification for ready mixed
paint, brushing, finishing, semi-gloss, for
general purposes:
IS : I24 (Part I)-1976 Part I (second
revision)
IS : 124 (Part II)-1979 Part II (second

revision)
IS: 124 (Part Ill)-1979 Part III
IS : I26- I962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing,
exterior, semi-gloss, for general purposes,
to Indian Standard colour No. 671
(revised)
mixed paint, brushing, finishing,
exterior, semi-gloss, for general purposes,
white (revi.sed)
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semigloss, for general purposes, black
(revised)
mixed paint, brushing, finishing interior,
oil gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 101, 102, 103, 104,
169, 2 16, 2 17. 2 19,352,353,354,358,359,

360, -36 I, 362,363.364,4 IO, 443,444,628,
629, 630, 63 I, 632, 633, 634 and 635
IS : 133-1975 Specification for enamel,
interior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing
(second revision)

mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg-shell
flat, finishing, interior, to Indian

Standard colour, as required (revised)
IS: 155-1950 Specification for r e a d y
mixed paint, brushing, matt, black, for
use on wood
mixed paint. brushing, for use on floors,
colour as required
mixed paint, brushing, bituminous,
black, lead-free, acid, alkali, and heat
resisting (rhird revision)
mixed paint, brushing, fire resisting
silicate type, for use on wood, colour
as required
IS : 168- 1973 Specification for ready
m i x e d p a i n t , a i r - d r y i n g stmiglossy/ matt, for general purposes
(second revision).
IS : 290-1961 Specification for coal tar

black paint (revised)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF MD&A
IS : 341-1973 Specification for b l a c k

Japan, Types A, B and C wrst revision)
IS : 64 I- 1964 Specification for ready

mixedpaint, brushing, finishing, interior,
semi-gloss, for general purposes, white
(revised)
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, egg shell
gloss, for interior use, to Indian Standard
colours---Class A No. 218 and Class B
No. 221
IS : 872- I956 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, egg shell
gloss, for interior use, to Indian Standard
colours No. 4 12 and 4 13
mixed paint, brushing, oil gloss, genuine
zinc oxide, for general purposes
mixed paint, brushing, yellow ochre,
semi-gloss, for general purposes (revised)
mixed paint, red oxide-zinc chrome,
priming (fksf revision)
IS : 2075 1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint, stoving, red oxide-zinc
chrome, priming @rsr revision)
aluminium paint for general purposes, in
dual container
IS : 2932- 1974 Specification for enamel,
synthetic, exterior, (a) undercoating,
(b) finishing wrsf revision)
exterior (al undercoating, (b) finishing
yirsr ret&k)
mixed paint, brushing, wood primer,
pink
mixed paint, finishing, interior f o r
general purposes, to Indian Standard
colours
mixed paint, undercoattng, for use under
oil finishes, to Indian Standard colours,
as required
mixed paint. aluminium, brushing,
priming, water resistant, for wood work
mixed paint, thick white, for lettering
synthetic, exterior. (a) undercoating,
(b) finishing, for railway coaches
mixed paint. brushing, bituminous black,
PART Y BUILDING MATERIALS
lead free, acid, alkali, water and chlorine

resisting
Tkinners and Solvents
IS : 82- 1973 Methods of sampling and test
for thinners and solvents for paints first
revision)
IS : 324-1959 Specification for ordinary
denatured spirit (revised)
IS : 533- 1973 Specification for gum spirit
of turpentine (oil of turpentine) (/irsr
revision)
Varnishes and Lacquers
IS: 19?-1969 Methods of sampling and
test for varnishes and lacquers (first
revision)
IS : 337-1975 Specification for varnish,
finishing, interior first revision)
IS : 340- 1978 Specification for varnish,
mixing*(firsl revision)
spirit, clear, hard.
shellac, for general purposes (first
revision)
IS : 348-1968 Specification for French
polish (fk!r revision)
IS : 349-1955 Specification for lacquer,
cellulose, nitrate, clear, finishing, glossy
for metal (f?rsr revision)
finishing, exterior, synthetic (firsl
revision)
finishing, exterior and general purposes
firs1 revision)
IS : 642- I963 Specification for varnish
medium for aluminium paint (revised)
Thermal Insulation Mareriak
I S : 3144-1981 Methods of test for
mineral wool thermal insulation material
vrst revision)
I S : 3 3 4 6 - 1 9 8 0 Methods for the
determination of thermal conductivity of
thermal insulation materials (two slab,
guarded hot-piate method) first revision)
1s : 3677- 1 9 7 3 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal
insulation (firsr revision)
unbonded glass wool for thermal
insulation ylrsf revision)
_25
IS : 467 I - I968 Specification for expanded

polystyrene for thermal insulation
purposes
preformed block-type and pipe-covering
type thermal insulation @rst revision)
thermal insulating cement
IS : 6598- 1972 Specification for cellular
concrete for thermal insulation
IS : 7509-1974 Specification for thermal
insulating cement (type 750)
IS: 7510-1974 Specification for thermal
IS : 8 I54- I976 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
preformed calcium silicate insulation (for
temperature up to 6SOC)
IS: 8183-1976 Specification for bonded
mineral wool
IS : 9350-1980 Specification for thermal
IS : 9403-1980 Method of test for thermal
conductance and transmittance of built
up sections by means of guarded hot box
IS : 9489-1980 Method of test for thermal
conductivity of materials by means of
heat flow meter
13:9490-1981 Method for determination
for thermal conductivity of insulation
materials (water calorimeter method)
IS : 9742- 198 I Specification for sprayed
mineral wool thermal insulation
IS : 9743- I98 I Specification for thermal
insulation finishing cements
Plastics
IS: 1998-1962 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
thermosetting synthetic resin bonded
laminated sheets
IS : 2036-1974 Specification for phenolic
laminated sheets (/First revision)
decorative thermosetting synthetics resin
bonded laminated sheets (first revision)
I S : 2076- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
unsupported flexible vinyl film and
sheeting (jkst revision)
IS : 2508- 1984 Specification for low
density polyethylene films ( s e c o n d
revision)(under print)
IS : 6307- 197 I Specification for rigid
PVC sheets
IS : 9766- 198 I Specification for -flexible
PVC compound
Conductors and Cables

IS : 694- I977 Specification for PVC
insulated cables for working~voltages up
to and including I 100 volts ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 1554 Specifictation for PVC insulated
(heavy duty) electric cables:
IS: 1554 (Part I)-1976 Part I For
working voltages up to and including
I 100 volts (second revision)
IS: 1554 (Part II)-1981 Part I1 F o r
working voltages from 3.3 kV up to
and including I I kV (first revision)
polyethylene insulated cables for working
voltages up to and including II00 volts
(second revision)
IS : 4289-1967 Specification for lift cables
IS : 7098 Specification for cross-linked
polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
cables:
IS : 7098 (Part I)- 1977 Part I For
working voltage up to and including
IIOOV
IS : 7098 (Part II)-1973 Part 11 For
and including 33 kV
IS : 9968 Specification for elastomerinsulated cables:
IS : 9968 (Part I)-198 I Part I For
working voltages up to and including
IIOOV
IS: 9968 (Part II)-1981 Part II For
and including I I kV
1s :
Methods of test for
cables
Electrical Wiring Fittings and Accessories
IS: 371-1979 Specification for ceiling
roses (secotrcl re\$ision)
IS : 374- 1979 Specification for electric
ceiling type fans and regulators (third
relision)
IS : 4 18-1978 Specification for tungsten
filament general service electric lamps
(third revision)
IS : I258- I979 Specification for bayonet
lamp holders (second re\vision)
IS : l293- I967 Specification for three-pin
plugs and socket-outlets first revision)
IS : I534 (Part I)- I977 Specification for

ballasts for fluorescent lamps : Part I For
switch start circuits (second revision)
I S : I777- I978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial luminaire with metal reflectors
(,/ir.vt rr\,i.\/f~rl)
flameproof enclosures for electrical
apparatus (second revision)
steel conduits for electrical wiring

waterproof electric lighting fittings
watertight electric lighting fittings
IS : 3837-1976 Specification f o r
accessories for ri id steel conduits for
electrical wiringcii
rrsi revision)
IS : 2206 Specification for flameproof

electric lighting fittings:
IS : 3854-1966 Specification for switches

for domestic and similar purposes
IS : 1947-1980 Specification for flood

lights (firs/ revision)
IS : 2086- 1983 Specification for carriers
and bases used in re-wirable type electric
fuses up to 650 volts (second revision)
IS : 2206 (Part I)- I984 Part 1 Well glass

and bulkhead types ($rsr revision)
IS : 4012-1967 Specification for dustproof electric lighting fittings
IS : 2206 (Part II)-1976 Part II Fittings
IS: 4013-1967 Specification for dusttight electric lighting fittings
(under print)
using glass tubes

1S : 22 15-l 983 Specification for starters
for fluorescent lamps (third revkion)
IS : 24 l2- 1975 Specification forlink clips
for electrical wiring first rfwision)
IS : 2418 Specification for tubular
fluorescent lamps for general lighting
service:
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t I)-1977 P a r t I
Requirements and tests first revision)
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t II)-1977 P a r t I I
Standard lamp data sheets yirsr
revision)
Dimensions of G-5 and G-I 3 bi-pin

caps (f?rsr revision)
IS:2418 (Part IV)-1977 Part IV Go
and no-go gauges for G-5 and G-13
bGpin caps yirst revision)
IS : 2509- 1973 Specification for rigid nonmetallic conduits for electrical
installations (first revision)
IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid steel conduits for electrical
wiring (jhr revision)
IS : 2675-1983 Specification for enclosed
distribution fuseboards and cutouts for
voltages not exceeding I OOOV (second
revision)
I S : 3287- I965 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial lighting fittings with plastic
reflectors
IS : 3323- 1980 Specification for bi-pin

lamp holders for tubular fluorescent
lamps (firsf revision)
IS : 3324- I982 Specification for holders
for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps
Cfirst revision)
IS : 34 I9- I976 Specification for fittings

for rigid non-metallic conduits (first
re\lision)
IS : 3480-1966 Specification for flexible

IS : 4064 SpecificaJion for air-break

switches, air-break disconnectors, airbreak switch-disconnectors and fusecombination units for voltages not
exceeding I 000 V ac or I 200 V dc:
requirements (first revision)
IS : 4064 (Part II)- 1978 Part II Specific
requirements for the direct switching
of individual motors yirsr revision)
IS:4160-1967 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
interlocking switch socket outlet
IS: 46 I5- 1968 Specification for switch
socket-outlets (non-interlocking type)
IS : 4649- I968 Specification for adaptors
for flexible steel conduits
IS : 4949-1968 Specification for 2-amp

switches for domestic and similar
purposes
decorative lighting outfits
IS: 5133 Specification for boxes for
enclosures of electrical accessories:
IS : 5 I33 (Part I)-1969 Part I Steel and
cast iron boxes
IS: 5133 (Part II)-1969 Part II Boxes
made of insulating materials
IS : 6538-1971 Specification for three-pin
plugs made of resilient material
IS : 6946-1973 Specification for flexible
(pliable) non-metallic conduits for
electrical installations
luminaires for hospitals
miniature, air-break circuit-breakers for
voltage not exceeding 1000 V
IS: 9224 Specification for low voltage
fuses:
IS : 9224 (Part I)-1979 Part I General
requirements
v_2
I S :9224 (PM II)-1979 P a r t I I

Supplementary requirements for fuses
for industrial ,applications
IS :9224 (Part IV)-1980 Part IV
Supplementary requirements forfuselinks for the protections of semiconductor devices
IS : 9737 (Part I)-1980 Specification for
conduits for electrical installations: Part I
General requirements
IS : 9926298 1 Specifiiation for fuse wires
used in rewirable type electric fuses up to
650 volts
IS: 10322 Specification for luminaires:

requirements
IS: 10322 (Part II)-1982 Part II
Constructional requirements
Specification for conduits for
IS :
electrical installations:
IS:
(Part I)Part I Rigid plain
conduits of insulating materials
IS:
(Part II)Part II Pliable
self-recovering conduits of insulating
materials
PART VI
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 1 LOADS
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
1.
SCOPE
DEADLOAD
3.
IMPOSEDLOAD
4.
WINDLOAD
5.
SElSMlC LOAD
6.
SNOWLOAD
7.
SPECIALLOADS
8.
LOADCOMBINATIONS
APPENDIX A
ILLUSTRA~TIVFEXAMPLESHOWlNGREDUCTlON OF
UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS
IN MULTESTORtYED BUILDINGS FOR DESIGN OF
COLUMNS
APPENDIX B
NOTATIONS
A PPENDJX C
BASlCWlNDSPEEDATlOm HEIGHTFOR SOME

lMPORTANTCITIES/TOWNS
A PPENDJX D
CHANGES1NTERRAINCATEGORlES
APPENDJX E
EFFECTOFACLIPORESCARPMENTONTHE
EQUIVALENT HEIGHT ABOVE GROUND (k3FACTOR)
APPENDIX F
WINDFORCEONClRCULARSECTIONS
A PFENDJX G
BASIC HORIZONTAL SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS FOR

SOMElMPORTANTTOWNS/CITiES
4 PPi5NDJX H
SPECTRAOFEARTHQUAKE
?APT Vl slWJtTUU4L
DESIGN--SKI-ION I LOADS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the various loads and forces which are to be taken into account for
structural design of buildiqs. The various loads thk are covered under this section are dead load,
imposed load, wind load, seismic load, snow load, special loads and load combinations.
0.2 National Building Code of India was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. The present
revision is intended to bring this section in line with the following latest Indian Standards:
IS : 1893-l 894 Criteria for earthquake resistantde&n of structures Cfourth reviMn)
IS : 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other thanearthquake) for buildings and structures: Part 2 Imposed loads (second revision)
IS : 875 (Part 3) - 1988 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures: Part 3 Wind loads(second revision)
IS : 875 (Part 4) . 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures: Part4 Snow loads (secondtevfrfo?)
IS : 87.5 (Part 5) - 1987 Code of practice for design loads.(other than earthquake) for buildings and structures: Part 5 !+ecial loads and load combinations (secondrevision)
IS :
03
1893-l 984 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structure(.J~urth revision)
This section has to be read together with Sections 2 to 7 of Part VI Structural Design.
2
W-lMTIONAL BuIlMwo M 01 INnA
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section cpvers basic design loads to be
assumed in the design, of buildings. The
imposed Gads, wind loads, seismic loads, snow
loads and other loads, which are specified herein, are minimum working loads which should be
taken into consideration for purposes of design.
1.2 T,his section does not take into consideration loads incidental to construction.
2. DEAD LOAD
2.1 Assessment of Dead Load - The dead
load in a building shall comprise the weight of
all walls, partitions, flools and roofs, and shall
include the weights of all other permanent
constructions in the building and shall conform
to good practice [VI-l(l)] *
3. IMPOSED LOAD
3.1 This clause covers imposed loads+ (live
loads) to be assumed in the design of buildings.
The imposed ,loads specified herein ire
minimum loads which should, be taken into
consideration for the purpose of structural
safety of buildings.
NXTE - This section does not cover dctailcd prospecial
cases of vibration. such as movinp nlxhincry. heavy
acceleration from cranes, hoists and the like. Such
loads shall bc dealt \\ith individually in each USC.
visions for loads incidental to construction and
For the purpose of imposed loads

specified herein, the following defiinitions shall
apply :
3.2.1
IMPOSED LOAD ~ The load assumed to be

produced by the intended use or occupancy of
a building including the weight of movable
partitions, distributed and concentrated loads,
loads due to impact and vibration, and dust
loads but excluding wind. seismic, snow and
other loads due to temperature changes, creep,
shrinkage, differential settlement. etc.
O CCUPANCY OR Usk GROUP-The principal
occupancy for which a building or part of a
purpose of classification of a building according
to occupancy, an occupancy shall be deemed to
l
In this section. where referertcc is made to good

practice in relation to dcsitm, testing, conxtruction
procedures and other information. the appropriate
document listed at the end of the section may be
used as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
.t The word imposed load is used throughout instead

of live load which is synonymous.
include subsidiary occupancies which are

contingent upon it. The occupancy classification is given in the following groups:
A S S E M B L Y B U I L D I N G S - These shall include
any building or part of a building where groups
of people congregate or gather for amusement,
recreation, social, religious, patriotic, civil.
travel and similar purposes: for example,
threatres, motion picture houses, assembly
halls, city halls, marriage halls, town halls.
auditoria, exhibition halls, museums, skating
rinks, gymnasiums, restaurants (also used as
assembly halls), I)laces of worship, dance halls,
club rooms, passenger stations and terminals
of air, surface and other public transportation
services, recreation piers and stadia, etc.
B U S I N E S S B UILDINGS - These shall include
any building or part of a building, which is used

for transaction of business (other than that
rovered by mercantile buildings); for keeping
of accounts and records for similar purposes:
offices, banks, professional establishments.
court houses, and libraries shall be classified in
this group so far as principal function of
these is transaction of public business and the
keeping of books and records.
OIFICE BUILDIN GS -The buildings primarily
to be used as an office or for office-purposes:
office purposes include the purpose of
administration, clerical work. handling money.
telephone and telegraph operating, and
operating computers, calculating machines,
clerical work includes writing. book-keeping,
sorting papers. typing, filing, duplicating,
punching cards or tapes, drawing of matter
for publication and the editorial preparation of
matter for publication.
EI)I!CATIONAL BU I L D I N G S - These shall
include any building used for school, college or
day-care purposes involving assembly for
instruction. education or recreation and which
is not covered by assembly buildings.
INDUSTRIAL BU I L D I N G S -- These shall

include any building or a part of a building or
structure, in which products or materials of
various kinds and properties arc fabricated.
assembled or processed like assembly plants,
power plants, refineries, gas plants, mills.
dairies, factories, workshops. etc.
INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS - These shall
include any building or a part thereof, which
is used for purposes such as medical or other
treatment in case of persons suffering from
physical and mental illness. diseaseoc infirmity;
care of infants, convalescents or a(ged persons
and for penal or correctional detention in
which the liberty of the inmates is restricted.
Institutional buildings ordinarily provide
sleeping accommodation for the occupants. It
3
w-1.
includes hospitals,
sanitoria,
custodial
institutions or penal institutions like jails,
prisons and reformatories.
NOTE I - Where;in Table I, no values are given for

concentrated load, it may be assumed that the
tabulated distributed load is adequate for design
purposes.
M E R C A N T I L E BUILDINGS - These shall

include any building or a part of a building
which is used as shops, stores, market for
display and sale of merchandize either wholesale or retail. Office, storage and service
facilities incidental to the sale of merchandize
and located in the same building shall be
included und& this group.
NOTE 2 - The loads s ecified in Table 1 ate

equivalent uniformly distrltuted loads on the plan
area and provide for. normal effect of im act and
acceleration. They do not take into consdetation
P
special concentrated loads and other loads.
R E S I D E N T I A L B U I L D I NGS - These shall

include any building in which sleeping
hkXE I - Where the use of an area or floor is not

provided in Table 1; the imposed load due to theke
and occupancy of such an area shall be detetminbd
from the analysis of loads resulting from:
a) weight of the probable assembly of persons;
b) weight of the tobable accumulation of equip-
accommodation is provided for normal

ment and turns&mg;
residential purposes with or without cookingor
c) weight of the piobable storage materials; and
dining or both facilities (except buildings
under institutional buildings). It includesone or
d) impact factor, if any.
multi-family dwellings, apartment houses
(flats), lodging or roominghouses, restaurants,
NOTE 4 ~ While selecting a particular loading, the
hostels, dormitories and residential hotels.
DWELLINGS - These shall include any
building or part occupied by members of single/
multi-family units with independent cooking
facilitit%. These shall alsq include apartment
houses (flats).
STORAGE BUILDINGS - These shall include
any building or part of .a building used
priniarily for the storage or sheltering of goods,
wares or merchandize, like warehouses, cold
storages, freight depots, transity sheds, store
houses, garages, hangers, truck terminals,
grain elevators, barns and stables.
3.3 Imposed Loads on Floors Due to Use and
Occupancy
3.3. I I MPOSED
to be assumed
L O A DS - The imposed loads
in the design of buildings shall be

the greatest loads that probably will be
produced by the intended use or occupancy,
but shall not be less than the equivalent
flnimum loads specified in Table 1 subject to
any reductions permitted by 3.3.2.
Floors shall be investigated for both the
uniformly distributed load (UDL) and the
corresponding concentrated load specified in
Table 1, and designed for the most adverse
effects but they shall not be considered to act
simultaneously. The concentrated
loads
specified in Table 1 may be assumed to act over
an area of 0.3 x 0.3 m. However, the concentrated loads need not be considered where the
floors are capable of effective lateral distriblition of this load.
All other structural e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e
investigated for the effects of uniformly
distributed loads on the floors specified in
Table 1.
Ml-
possible change in use ot occupant of the building

should be kept in view. Designers should not
necessarily select in every case the lower loading
appropriate to the first occupancy. In doing this they
might introduce considerable restrictions in the use
of the building at a later date, and thereby reduce its
utility.
b&E 5 - The loads specified herein, which ate based

on estimations. may be considered as the characteristic
loads for the purpose of limit state method of design
till such time statistical data are established based on
load surveys to be conducted in the country.
WTE 6 - When an existing building is altered by
an extension in height or area, all existing structural
Darts affected by the addition shall be strengthened
where necessary,. and all new structural parts shall be
designed to meet the tequitements for building theteafter erected.
NOTE 7 - The loads specified in the section does not
include loads incidental to construction. Therefore,
close supervision during, construction is essential
to ensure that overloading of the building due to loads
by way of stacking of building materials or use of
equipment (for example, cranes and trucks) during
construction or loads which may be induced by floor
io ooot ptop ing in multi-stoteyed construction. does
not I)EC*. l-Vowever .If construction loads were of
short duration, permissible increase in stresses in the
case of working stress method or permissible decrease
in load factors in limit state method. as applicable to
relevnnt design codes, may be allowed for.
NOTE 8 - The loads in Table 1 ate grouped together
as applicable to buildings having separate principal
occupancy or use. For a building with multiple
occupancies, the loads appropriate to the occupancy
with comparable use shall be chosen from other
occupancies.
NOTE 9 - Regarding loading on lift machine rooms

including storage space used for repairing lift
machines, designers should go by the tecommendations of lift manufacturers for the present.Regarding
loading due to false ceiling. the same should be
considered as imposed loads on the roof/floor to
which it is fixed.
4
N4lloNu wuDING coo&I
op
IwDlA
TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES
S L OLTUVANCYCLASSIFICATION
No.
U NIFORMLY D I S TR I B U T E D
LOAD (UDL)
CONCENTRATED
LOAD
12)
(3)
(4)
kN/m2
kN
(1)
i)
Residential Buildings
a) Dwelling houses:
1) All rooms and kitchens
2.0
2) ToiJet and bath rooms
2.0
3) Corridors, passages, staircases including fine escapes and store rooms
3.0
.\
4) Balconies
3.0
1.8
4.5
1.5 per metre run concentrated at the outer edge
b) Dwelling units planned and executed

m accordance with IVI-i(2))* only:
1) Habitable rooms, kitchens, and toilet
and bath rooms
1.5
1.4
2) Corridors, passages and staircases

including fiie escapes
1.5
1.4
3) Balconies
3.0
c) Hotels, hostels, boarding houses, lodging

houses, dormitories and residential
clubs:
1) Living rooms, bed rooms and dormitories
2.0
1.8
2) Kitchen and laundries
3.0
4.5
3) Billiards room and public lounges
3.0
2.7
4) Store rooms
5.0
4.5
5) Dining rooms, cafeterias and restaurants
4.0
2.7
6) Office rooms
2.5
2.1
7) Rooms for indoor games
3.0
1.8
8) Baths and toilets
2.0
9) Corridors, passages staircases including fine escapes and lobbies as per the
floor serviced (excluding stores and the
like) but not less than
3.0
4.5
IO) Balconies
Same as rooms to which

they give access but with
a minimum of 4 .O
d) Boiler rooms and plant rooms

_ to be calculated but not less than
5.0
6.7
(Continued)
hltTnslRvcnm*l.
DES~G%SIMXION
UMDS
5
w-1.
TABLE I IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES - Contd.
s& OC C U P A N C Y C L A S S I F I C A T I O N
(I)
(2)
e) Garages
ii)
U NIFORMLY D ISTRIBUTED
LOAD (UDL)
(3)
kN/m2
C~NCENTHATEO
LOAD
(4)
kN
1) Garage floors (including parking area

and repair workshops) for passenger
cars_and vehicles not exceeding 2.5
tonnes gross weight, including access
waysand ramps to be calculated but
not less than
2.5
9.0
2) Garage floors for vehicles not exceeding 4.0 tonnes gross weight (including
access ways and ramps) to be
calculated but not less than
5.0
9.0
3.0
2.1
b) Dining rooms, cafetertas and restaurants
3.0
2.7
c) Offices, lounges and stalf rooms
2.5
2.1
d) Dormitories
2.0
2.1
e) Projection rooms
5.0
f) Kitchens
3.0
P) Toilets and bath rooms
2.0
h) Store rooms
5:o
Educational Bu;l&ng~
a) Class rooms and lecture rooms
(not used for asscmbiv purposes)
j)
4.5
L.ibrartes and archives.
11 Stack room/stack area
k)
4.5
6 . 0 kN/m for a mmtmum hetgQt of 2.2 mt

2.0 kN/m per metrr
height beyond 2.2 m
4.5
2) Reading rooms
Iwithout qxtrate storage)
4.0
4.5
I) Reading rooms
(will1 separate storage)
3.0
4.5
4.0
4,s
4.0
4.5
Ihkr roon~s a n d p l a n t r o o m s t o b e
m) Corridors. pasuftes. Iohhies, staircases

including fire escapes -- as per the
floor serviced (wtthout accounting
for sturage and prolectton rooms) hut
not less than
n) Balconies
ui) lnstirurional

they give access but
with a minimum ot
4.0
1.5 per metre run concentrated at the outct

edge
Burldrngs
a) Bed rooms, wards, dressing rooms,

dormitories and lounges
2.0
1.8
b) Kttchens, l a u n d r i e s a n d l a b o r a t o r i e s
3.0
4.5
(Conrimed)
ii
w-l-
w-iow
lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
,~~
TABLE
i IMPOSED
FLOOR LOADS
FOR
~~
DIFFERENT &cUPAN~IES - c0ntd
.-
U NIFORMLY D ISTRIBUTED
CONCENTRATED
LoADKJDL)
LOAD
(3)
kN/m'
(4)
iCN
cl Dining rooms, cafeterias and restaurants
3.0'
2.1
d) Toilets and bathrooms
2.0
C) X-ray rooms, operating rooms and

general storage areas - to be calculated
3.0
4.5
.f) Office rooms and O.P.D. rooms
2.5
2.1
d) Corridors, passages, lobbies and stair-
4.0
4.5
h) Boiler rooms and plant rooms

5.0
4.5
QCCIJPANCYCLASSIFICATION
No.
(1)
(2)
but not less than
cases including fire escapes - as per the

floor serticed but not less than
to be
j) Balconies

with a minimum of
4.0
15 per mehe NII c o n centrated at the outer
iv) Assembly Building

Assembly areas
4.0
I) With fixed seats+
5.0
2) Without fixed seats
5.0
b) Restaurants (subject to assembly),
4.0
cl Projection rooms
5.0
d) Stages
5.0
4.5
d Office rooms, kitchens and laundries
3.0
4.5
0 Dressing rooms
2.0
1.8
B) Lounges and billiards rooms
2.0
2.1
h) Toilets and bathrooms
2.0
i) Corridors, passages and staircases
4.0
museums and art galleries and gymnasia
4.5
including fire escapes
Same as rodms to which

with a minimum of
4.0
k) Balconies
v)
1.5 per mctm run concentrated at the other

edge
m) Boiler rooms and plant rooms including

weight cf machinery
7.5
4.5
n) Corridors, passages subject to loads

greater than from crowds, such as wheeled
vehicles, trolleys and the like. Corridors,
staircases and passages in grandstands
5.0
4.5
2.5
2.7
Business and office Buildings

(see also 3.2. I)
a) Rooms for general use with separate
storage
(Continued)
rAKTvlmnm
DESIGN-SECTION
I L0ADS
HI-
TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT 0CCUPANCII:S
k, OC~UI'ANCYCLASS~F~CATION
(2)
(1)
b)
Rooms without separate storage
DIS~KI~S\JTI;I~
LOAD (UDL)
NIFORMLY
(3)
kNlm2
4.0
c) Banking halls
3.0
d)
Business computing machine rooms

(with fixed computers or similar
equipment)
3.5
e) Records/fdes store rooms and storage
5.0
space
Vaults and strong rooms ~- to be calculated but not less than
5.0
4.5
R)
Cafeterias and dining rooms
3.0.
2.7
h) Kitchens
3.0
2.7
j)
4.0
4.5
Coriidors, passages, lobbies and staircases including fire escapes - as per the
floor serviced (excluding stores) but not
less than
k) Bath and toilets rooms
2.0
m) Balconies

t h e y give access b u t
with a mInimum of
4 .o
n) Stationary stores
4.U tor each metre ol
1 .S per metre *un concentrated at the outer

edcc
9.0
storage height
p) Boiler rooms and plant rooms ro be
q) Libraries
5.0
6.1
.+a Sl No. (ii)
vi) Mercantile Buildirvgs
a) Retall shops
4.0
3.6
b) Wholesale shops to be calculated but
6.0
4.5
Office rooms
2.5
2.1
Dining rooms, restaurants and cafeterias
3.0*
2.7
Toilets
2.0
Kitchens and laundries
3.0
4.5
Boiler rooms and plant rooms - to be

5.0
6.7
h) Corridors, passages, stair-cases including
4.0
4.5
i) Corridors, passages. staircases subject to
5.0
4.5
not less than
fir: escapes and lobbies
loads greater than from crowds, such as

wheeled vehicles. trolleys and the like
W Balqonies
\nr-

with a minimum of
A.0
1.5 per metre run concentrated at the outer

edge
(Conrinued)
8
N4lloN4L mJnDINo cuok OF INDIA
TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS I-OR DIIIERENT OCCUPANCIES - Cortrd
U N I F O R M L Y DISTRIBUTEI)
O CCUPANCY C LASSIFICATION
%I
C~N~;;;;.ATFD
LOAD fUDL)
(1)
(2)
(3)
kN/m2
(4)
2.5
4.s
5.0
4.5
7.0
45
kN
vii) brdusrrial Buildings
a) Work
areas
without
machinery/
equipment
b)
Work arcas
with machinery/equipment
1) Light dur)
2) Mediu n1 duty
T O be calculated
but not less than
In.0
4,s
C)
I
Boiler rooms and plant rooms -to be
5.0
h.7
d)
Cafeterias and dining rooms
3.0
2.1
4.0
4.5
3) Heavy dury
e) Corridors, passages and staircaFes

including fiie cscapcs
viii)
f)
Corridors. passages. stairi-ascs subicc! IO

machine loads and wheeled vehiclrr - to
bc calculated but not less than
5.0
4.5
F)
Kitchens
3.0
45
h)
Toilets and balhrooms 5
70
SruraKe BuildinKs
bt
Storage rooms (other rhan cold storage)

and warehouses -to be calculated based
on the bulk density ol materials stored
but not less than
14
kN/m2 p e r e a c h
metro ofxror+e hcieht
wirh 3 rnlnlmunl ol
7.5 kN/rn
7.0
Cold storage - to be rulcula~rd but not

less than
5.0 kN/m2 p e r e a c h
mctre otbtorage helghr
\\ilh a nlinirnunl ot
IS kN/nl2
Y.0
Corridors, passages and sraircasc5

including fire escapes-as per the floor
serviced but not less than
d)
Corridors, p a s s a g e s subjerr ro loads

greater than from crowds. such ac
whcclcd vehicles, trollcyr and the like
e)
l%oilcr rooms and plant rooms
4.n
1.5
5.0
4.s
7.5
4.5
Wheieunrcstrictcd assembly of persons is anticipated, the value of UDL should be increased to 4.0 kN/m2
With fixed seats implies that the removal of the seatmg and the use of the space for other purposes is
improbable. Ilre maximum likely load in this case is, therefore, closely controlled.
%he loading in industrial buildings(workshopsand factories) varies considerably and so three lotidings under
the terms light, medium and heavy are introduced in order to allov, for more economical designs bur
the terma have no special meaning in themselves other .thall the imposed load for which the relevant floor
is designed. It is, however, important particularly in tie case of bea.vy weight loads, to assess the actual
loads to ensure that they are not in excess of 10 kN/m ; in case whcrc they are in excess. the design sll~ll
be based on the actual loadings.
)For Niouamachanical handling equipment which arc used lo transport goods, as in warehouses, workshops,
*ore rooms. etc. the actual load coming from the use of such equipment shall be ascertained and design
hould cater to ulch loads.
-
mkrnm- DBSIGN-SELllOIy I LOADS
VI.1
.?.3.1.1. LOAD APPLICATION - The uniformly
warehouses and garages. However, for
distributed loads specified in Table 1 shall be

applied as static loads over the entire floor area
under consideration or a portion of the floor
area whichever arrangement produces critical
effects on the structural elements as provided in
respective design codes.
other buildings, where the floor is designed

for an imposed floor load of 5.0 kN/m* or
more, the reductions shown in 3.2.1 may
be taken provided that the loading assumed
is not less than it would have been if all the
floors had been designed for 5.0 kN/m2
with no reductions.
ln the design of floors, the concentrated loads

arc considered to be applied in the positions
which produce the maximum stresses and
where deflection is the main criterion in the
positions which produce the maximum
deflections. Cbncentrated load, when used for
the calculation of bending and shear, are
assumed to act at a point. When used for the
calculation of local effects such as crushing or
punching, they are assumed to act over an
actual area of application of 0.3 x 0.3 m.
.<..{.I.-7 LOADS DUE TO LIGHT PARTITIONS In office and other buildings, where actual
loads due to light partitions cannot be assessed
at the time of planning the floors and the
supporting structural members shall be designed
to carry, in addition to other loads, uniformly
distributed loads per square metre of not less
than 33.33 percent of weight per metre run of
finished partitions, subject to a minimum of
lkN/m*, provided total weight of partition
walls per m2 of the wall area does not exceed
1.5 kN/m* and the total weight per metre
length is not greater than 4.0 kN.
3.3.2 R E D U C T I O N
F L O O RS
IN
IMPOSED L OADS
ON
3.3.2.1 I:OR IFLOOR SUPPORTING STRUCTURAL

MEMBltRS - Except as provided for in 3.3.2.1
(a), the following reductions in assumed total
imposed loads on floors may be made in designing columns, load bearing walls, piers, their
supports and foundations.
NUUI her of Floors
(Including the Roof)
to be Carried by
Mem her Under
Consideratiun
Reduction in Total
Distributed Imposed
Load on All Floors
to be Carried by the
Member IJnder
Consideration
Percent
10
20
30
5 to IO
40
Over IO
SO
a) No reduction shall be made for any plant

or machinery which is specifically allowed
for, or for buildings for storage purposes,
NOTE - In case if the reduced load in the

lower floor is lesser than the reduced load in
the up er floor, then the reduced load of the
K will be adopted.
upper oor
b)
An example is given in Appendix A illustrating the reduction of imposed loads in a

multi-stgreyed building in the design of
column members.
3.3.2.2 FOR BEAMS IN EACH FLOOR LEVEL -
Where a single span of beam, girder or truss

supports not less than 50 m2 of floor at one
general level, the imposed floor load may be
reduced in the design of the beams, girders or
trusses by 5 percent for each 50 m2 area,
supported subject to a maximum reduction of
15 percent. However, no reduction shall be
made in any of the following types of loads:
a) any superimposed moving load,
b) any actual load due to machinery or similar
concentrated loads,
c) the additional load in respect of partition
walls; and
d) any impact or vibration.
N OTE - The above reduction does not apply to
beams. girders or trusses supporting roof loads.
3.3.3
P OSTING
OF
F LOOR C A P A C I T I E S -
Where a floor or part of a floor of a building
has been designed to sustain a uniformly distributed load exceeding 3.0 kN/m2 and in
assembly, business, mercantile, industrial or
storage buildings, a permanent notice in the
form shown below indicating the actual
uniformly distributed and/or concentrated
loadings for which the floor has been structurally designed shall. be posted in a conspicuous
place in a position adjacent to such floor or on
such part of a floor.
DESIGNED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADING
Concentrated . . . . . . . . . kN
Label Indicating Designed Imposed
Floor Loading
i%OTE 1 - The lettering of such notice shall be
embossed or cast suitably on a tablet whose least
dimension shall not be less than 0.25 m and located
not less than 1.5 m above floor level with lettering of a
minimum size of 25 mm.
10
VI-l-
NATtoNAl. llnlnlNc
COOL OF ItaL
NOTI: 2 - If a concentrated load or a bulk load has to

definite position on the floor, the same
could also be indicated in the Iable.
oc~py 3
3.4 Irrrpost~I
Loads OII RooJi
TYPES
On flat roofs, sloping roofs and
curved roofs. the imposed loads due to use and
occupancy of the buildings and the geometry of
the types of roofs shall be as given in Table 2.
3.4.1I~~os~D LOADS ONVARIOUS
01: ROOI:S -
3.4. I. I Roofs
or incidental
of buildings used for promenade

to assembly purposes- shall be
designed for the appropriate imposed floor
loads given in Table I for the occupancy.
3 . 4 . 2 C O N C E N T R A T E D LOAD ON ROOF
COVER IN G S - To provide for loads incidental
to maintenance, unless otherwise specified by
the Engineer-in-Charge, all roof coverings (other
than glass or transparent sheets made of fibre
TAHLF 2 IMPOSLD LOADS ON VARIOUS TYPWOI~ ROol:S
(Clause 3.4. I)
SL
No
(1)
1)
TY tt.
OF
IMPOSEI) LOAI) MI+IASUKI:IJ

ON PLAN AUKA
ROOI
(2)
(3)
I N I M U M IMPOSEDbAD
M EASURED ON P L A N
(4)
I 121. sloping or curved roof ~.irh

slopes up 10 a n d i n c l u d i n g IO
degrees
ti) Access provided
b) Access n o t provldcd
for maintendnce
I5 kN/m
t-wept
0.75 kN/m2
3.75 kN uniformly distributed

over any span of one mctre
width of the roof slab and 9 kN
uniformly distributed over the
span of any beam or truss or
wall
1.9 kN uniformly distributed
o v e r a n y spanlof one metre
width of the roof slab and 4.5
kN uniformly distributed over
the span of any beam of truss
or wall
il)
Sloping roof with slope sreater

than IO drgrees
I:ur roof membrane sheets or

purlins
0.75 kN/m2 less
0.02 kN/m2 for every degree
increase m s l o p e o v e r IO
deprcr\
Subject to a minimum of 0.4

kN/m2
iii)
Curved root with slope of line

obtained by Joining springing
point to the crown with the horliontal. g r e a t e r t h a n 10 dzgrecq
(0.75 - 0.52 Cu) kN/m2
Subject to a minimum of 0.4

kN/m2
where
a = II/l
h = hrlpht of the highest point
of the structure measured
from its sprinpine.; and
I = chord wrdth of the roof if
singly curved and shorter
of the two sides if doubly
curved
Alternatively, where structural
analysis can be carried out for
curved roofs of all slopes in a
simple manner applying the
laws of statistics, the curved
roofs shall be divided into
minimum 6 equal segments
and for each segment imposed
load shall be calculated appropriate to the slope of xhe
chord of each segment as given
in (i) and (ii)
NOTE 1 - The loads given above do not include loads due to snow, rain, dust collection, etc. The
designed for imposed loads given above or for snow/rain load, whichever is grater.
roof shholt be
N OTE 2 - For special types of roofs with highly permeable and absorbent materi& the contingancy of toof
material increasing in weight due to absorption of moisture shall be provided for.
?ARTvlslm~
DESIGN-SMDN
1 WADS
11
Wl-
glass) shall be capable of carrying an incidental

load of Q.90 kN concentrated on an area of
12.5 cm2 so placed as to produce maximum
stresses in the covering. The intensity of the
concentrated load may be reduced with the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, where it is
ensured that the roof coverings would not be
traversed without suitable aids. In any case,
the roof coverings shall be capable of carrying
the loads in accordance with 3.4. I, 3.4.3, 3.4.4
and wind load.
3.4.3 LO A D S DUE TO RAIN -
On surfaces
whose positioning, shape and drainage system
are such as to make accumulation of rain water
possible, loads due to such accumulation of
water and the imposed loads for the roof as
given in Table 2 shall be considered separately
and the more critical of the two shall be
adopted in the design.
placed at the most unfavourable positions

on the member.
NOTE - Where it is ensured that the roofs would be
traversed only with the aid of planks and ladders
capable of distributing the loads on them to two or
more supporting members, the intensity of concentrated load indicated in 3.4.5 Cb) may be reduced to
0.5 kN with the approval of the Engineer-inCharge.
3.4.5.1 Ln case of sloping roofs with slope

greater than IO, members supporting the roof
purling% such as trusses, beams, girders, etc,
may be designed for two-thrrds of the imposed
load on purlins or roofing sheets.
3.S Imposed Horizontal Loads on Parapets and
Balustrades
PAPAPETS. PA R A P E T W A L L S AND
BALUSTRAD ES - Parapets, parapet walls and
balustrades, together with the members which
give them structural support, shall be designed
for the minimum loads given in Table 3.These
are expressed as horizontal forces acting at
handrail or coping level. These loads shall be
considered to act vertically also but not simultaneously wit! the horizontal forces. The values
given in Table 3 are minimum values and where
values for actual loadings are available, they
shall be used instead.
3.5.1
3.4.4 DUST LOAIIS -
In areas prone to settlement of dust on roofs (example, steel plants,

cement plants), provision for dust load equivalent to probable thickness of accumulation ot
dust may be made.
3.4.5 Lords ON M E M B E R S S U P P O R T I N G
ROOF CO V E R I N G S - Every member of the
supporting structure which is directly supporting the roof covering(s) shall be designed to
carry the more severe of the following loads
except as provided in 3.4.5.1:
a) The load transmitted to the members from
the roof covering(s) in accordance with
3.4.1. 3.4.3 and 3.4.4: and
b) An incidental concentrated load of 0.90 kN
concentrated over a length of 12.5 cm
3 . 5 . 2 G R A N D S T A N D S A N D THE LI K E
Grandstands, stadia, assembly platforms, reviewing stands and the like shall be designed to
resist a horizontal force applied to seats of
0.35 kN per linear metre along the line of seats
and 0.15 kN per linear metre perpendicular to
the line of the seats. These loadings need not be
TABLE 3 HoRlZONTAL LOADS ON PARAYLIX, PARAPET WALLS AND BALUSTKAD~S

(Clause 3.5.1)
SL
No
(1)
US.A(; I AREA
(2)
INTE NSITY OF I~uK~LoNTAL WAI>

kN/rn KtJN
(3)
i)
Light access stairs, gangways and the like not more than
600 mm wide
l-l.25
ii!
Light access stairs, gangways and the like, more than

600 mm wide; stairways, landings. balconies and parapet
walls (private and part of dwell&s)
0 35
iii)
All other stairways, landings and balconies and all parapets

and handrails to roofs iexcept those subject to overcrow&q covered under (vi)]
0.75
iv)
Parapets and balustrades in place of assembly, such as

theatres. cinemas, churches, schools, places of entertainment, sports and buildings likely to be overcrowded
2.25
NOTE - in the case of gaurd parapets on a floor of multi-storeyed car park or crash barriers provided in certain
buildings for tire escape, the value of imposed horizontal load (together with impact load) may be determined.
applied simultaneously. Platforms without seats

shall be designed to resist a minimum horizontal force of 0.25 kN/m2 of plan area.
3.6 Loading Effects.Due to Impact and Vibra-
tion - The crane loads to be considered under

imposed loads shall include the vertical loads,
eccentricity effects induced by vertical loads,
impact factors, lateral and longitudinal braking
forces acting across and along the crane rails
respectively.
Forces specified in (c) and (d) shlilf be considared as acting at the rail leve! and being
appropriately transmitted to the supporting
system. Gantry girders and their vertical
supports shall be designed on the assumption
that either of the horizontal forces in (c) and
(d) may act at the same time as the vertical
load.
b&lTE - See /v1-1(3)]
IV) of cranes.
for classification (Class 1 IO
3.6.1 I M PA CT AL L OWANCE FOR L I F T S.

H OISTS AND M ACHINERY - T h e i m p o s e d
loads specified in 2.3.1 shall be assumed to
include adequate allo%uxe for ordinary impact
conditions. However, for structures carrying
loads which induce impact or vibration, as far
as possible, calculations shall be made for
increase in the imposed load due to impact or
vibration. In the abince of sufficient data for
such calculation, the increase in the imposed
3.6.3.1 OVERLOADING FACTORS IN CRANE
loads shall be as follows:
combinations shall be as indicated below.
Srructures
a) For frames supporting lifts
Impact
Allowance,
Percenr
Min
100
and hoists
b) For foundations, footings
and piers supporting lifts
and hoisting apparatus
40
c) For supporting structures

and foundations for light
20
d) For supporting structures

and foundations for reciprocating machinery or power
SO
SUPPORTING STRUCTURES -
For all ladle

cranes and charging cranes where there is
possibility of overloading from production
considerations, an overloading factor of 10 percent of the maximum wheel loading shall be
taken.
.{.6.4 C RA N E LoAD COMBINATIONS - I n
the absence of any specific indications. the load
.?.6.4. I Vt RTKAL LOADS
than one crane is in operation or has

provision for more than one crane in future, the
following load combinations shall be taken for
vertical loading:
a) Two adjacent cranes
3.6.2 CONCENTRATED IMPOSED LOADS

WITH I MPACT AND V I B R A T I O N ~~ Concentrated imposed loads with impact and vibration
which may be due to installed machinery shall
be considered and provided for in the design.
The impact factor shall not be less than 20 percent which is the amount allowable for light
machinery.
3.6.2.1 Provision shall also be made for carrying
any concentrated equipment loads while the
equipment is being installed or moved for
servicing and repairing.
3.6.3 I M P A C T A L L O W A N C E S F O R C R A N E
G I R D E R S ~ For crane gantry girders and
supporting columns, the impact allowances
(given in table on page VI-1 - 14) shall be deemed
to cover all forces set up by vibration, shock from
slipping of slings, kinetic action of acceleration,
and retardation and impact of wheel loads.
PART n !TrRucTuRAL
DESIGN--SWllON , UlADS
working in tanden)
with
full load and with overloading accordmg to 3,6..?(a); atid

For l o n g s p a n gantries. w h e r e more t h a n
one crane can come m the span, the girder

shall be designed for one crane fully loaded
with overloading according to J 6.J (a)
plus as many loaded cranes as can be
accommodated on the span but without
raking Inlo account ovelloading according
to 3.6..{(a) tu give the maximum effect.
machinery, shaft or motor

units
units
In an aisle. where
more
~.~.~..?LG~EKAL SUKGL~. F o r d e s i g n o f
columns *and foundations, supporting crane
girders, the followmg crane combinations shall
be considered:
a)
FOR SINGLE BAY I,RAMES - Effect Of

one crane in the bay kiving the worst effect
shall be considered for calculation of surge
force, and
b) F O R M U L T I- R AY F R A M E S ~ Effect
of two cranes working, one each in any of
two bays in the cross-section to give the

worst effect, shall be considered for
calculation of surge force.
3 6 4..? TRACTIVF I:OR<b.
a) Where one crane is in operation with no

provIsIon for future crane, tractive force
from only one crane shall be taken.
13
WI-
Impact Alhvance for Crane Girders (Z7ause _?.6.3!

Type of Load
a) Vertical loads for electric overhead

cranes
Additional Load
~ 25 percent of maximum static loads for

crane girders for all class of cranes
_ 25 percent for columns supporting
Class III and Class IV cranes
- 10 percent for columns. supporting
Class I and Class Ii cranes
No additional load for design of foundations
5) Vertical loads for hand operated cranes
10 percent of maximum wheel loads for

crane girders only
c) Horizontal forces transverse to rails:

1) For electric overhead cranes with
trolley havmg rigid mast for suspension of lifted weight (such as. soaker
crane. stripper crane. etc )
10 percent of weight of crab and the

weight lifted by the cranes, acting on
any one crane track rail, acting in
either direction and equally distributed
amongst all the wheels on one side of
rail track
For frame analysis, this force, caiculated
as above, shall be applied on one side
of the frame at a time in either direction
2) Fur all other electric overhead cranes

and hand operated cranes
- 5 percent of weight of crab and the

weight lifted by the crnnes, actmg on
any one crane track rail, acting in
either direction and equally distributed amongst the wheels on one side
of rail track
For the frame analysis. the force
calculated as above shall beapplied on
one side of the frame at a time in
either direction
d) Horizontal traction forces along the rails
- 5 percent of all static wheel loads
for overhead cranes, either electrically

operated or hand operated
b) Where more than one crane is in operation
or there is provision for future crane,
tractive force from two cranes giving maximum effect shall be considered.
bkITE - Lateral surge force and longitudmal tractrve
force acting across and alone the crane rail rcspccrtvel)
shall not be assumed to art simultaneously. However.
if there is only one crane in the bay, the lltetal a n d
longitudinal forces may act together simultaneously
wth vertical loads.
4. WIND LOADS
4.1 General - This clause gives wind forces
and their effects (static and dynamic) that
shoqld be taken ihto account when deslgrung~
buildings. structures and components thereof
14
NOTE I - It i s b e l i e v e d t h a t ulttmately w i n d l o a d
e s t i m a t i o n wdl be made by taking Into a c c o u n t t h e
r a n d o m v a r i a t i o n ot w m d s p e e d wrth rtme, b u t
avadablr throrrtrcal m e t h o d s have n o t m a t u r e d
sufflcrentlv at nrcsent tar u s e m rnc Secrlon. Ior t h i s
r e a s o n . srattc &nd method of load e s t i m a t i o n ,which
lmphes a s t e a d y w i n d s p e e d , whiL+ has proved to he
sattsfactbry for n o r m a l . short and he;~vy structures, I S
glren m 4 _i a n d 4 . 6 . H o w e v e r , a b e g i n n i n g h a s b e e n
m a d e t o t a k e a c c o u n t o f thr r a n d o m n a t u r e o f t h e
wind speed by requiring that thr along-wind or drag
load on structureswhich are prune to wmd i n d u c e d
o s c i l l a t i o n s , b e alsu dotermmed b y r h e g u s t f a c t o r
m e t h o d (SW 4 X ) a n d t h e m,re r e v e r e o f t h e fwo
e s t i m a t e s bu taken for derlpn
structures or their components. wch a s c o m e tclll

buildines chimney%. Iattlced toucr\. cwling tward%.
tranvnik~un Lo*.verc. puycd ma\tC. c o m m u n i c a t i o n
towers, long \pn bridge\. parrAly or complctsly Aid
faced antenna dish. etc. which reqtlire investigation 01
wind inducred osrillations. In ideniifying and ._nalyzing
such strucwcs. 7 shall be followed.
4.1.4 The liability of a building to h i g h w i n d

pressures depends not only upon the geogrs
phical l o c a t i o n a n d p r o x i m i t y o f o t h e r
obstructions to air flow but also upon the
characteristics of the structure itself.
No II, 2 - In the USC of tall sIruc1ufci \vi1h unsymm e t r i c a l pcomstry. rhc designs m a y II;IVS to bc
chcckcd tar torsional cltccts due to wind pwwre.
4./..i The effect of wind on the structure as a

whole is determined by the combined action of
external and internal pressures acting upon it.
In all cases, the calculated wind loads act
normal to the surface to which they apply.
4.1.1 Wmd i s a i r i n m o t i o n r e l a t i v e t o t h e
cause of wind
diffcr.ences in
terrestrial radiation. The radiation cffe& are
p r i m a r i l y responsible f6r c o n v e c t i o n either
upwards or downwards. The WIIIJ generally
blows horizontal to the ground at high wind
speeds, Since vertical componcii1s of atmospheric motion are relatively small, the term
wind denotes almost exclusively the horizontal
wind, vertical winds are always identified as
such. The wind speeds are assessed with the aid
of anemometers or anemographs which are
surface of the earth. The primary

is traced to earths rotation arid
i n s t a l l e d nt meteorological ohsclvatories a t
h e i g h t s gemrally varyir!g trcm IO to 30 nictres
above ground.
4.1.~ Very strong winds (greater than 80 km/h)

are generally associated with cyclonlc storms,
storms or vigorous
dust
thunderstorms,
monsoons. A feature of the cyclonic storms
over the Indian area is that they rapidly weaken
after crossing the coasts and m o v e a s
depressions/lows inland. The influence of a
severe storm after srriking the coast does nor. in
general, exceed about 60 kilometres, though
sometimes, it may extend even up to 120
kilometres. Very short duration hurricanes of
very high wind speeds called bai Boisoki or
Norwesters occur fairly frequently during
summer months over North-Eastern India.
4.1.3 The wind speeds recorded at any locaiity
are extremely variable and, in addition to
steady wind at any time, there are effects of
gusts which may last for a few seconds. These
gusts cause increase in air pressure but their
effect on the stability of the building may not
b e s o i m p o r t a n t ; often, g u s r s a f f e c t o n l y
part of the building and the increased local
pressures may be more than balanced by a
momentary reduction in the pressure elsewhere.
Because of the inertia of the building, short
period gusts may not cause any appreciable
increase in stress in the main components of the
building, although the walls, roof sheeting and
individual cladding units (glass panels) and their
supporting members, such as purlins, sheeting
rails and glazing bars may be more seriously
affected. Gusts can also be extremely important
for the design of structures with high slenderness
ratios.
WIT VI mmRAL DEHGN-SECTION
1 WADS
4.1.6 Buildings shall. also be designed with due

attention to the effects of wind on the comfort
of people inside and outside the buildings.
4. I. 7 The stability calculations of the building
as a whole shall be done considering the
combined effect, as well as separate effects of
imposed loads and wind loads on vertical
surfaces. roofs and other parts of the building
above the general I oaf level.
4.2 h0rariorr.c
The notations to be followed,
unless otherwise specified in relevant clauses
under wind loads. are given in Appendix B.
4.i. I F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f w i n d l o a d s , t h e
following definilions shall apply.
ANCLI, 01 ATTACK - A n g l e b e t w e e n t h e
direction of wind and a reference axis of the
structure.
BK L A 111 ti Breadth means hoI irontul dirncnsion of the building measured normal to the
direction of wind.
N)TI? Hrcad1l1 2nd depth 3rc dmlt~nwmr mrasurcd
in relatu)n to tlw directjon <)I the wnd. whcrc;li Irngh
and width arc dlmrnsionu rclnlcd (0 t h e 1~1~11
Dt:PTIi Depth means the horizontal dimension of the building measured in the direction
of the wind.
Dt. VI. LOPI~.D Hk I(;HT -- D e v e l o p e d heidlt iS
the h e i g h t o f u p w a r d p e n e t r a t i o n o f t h e
velocity profile in a new terrairi. At large.fetch
lengths, such penetration reaches the gradient
height above which the wind speed may be
taken to be cons:ant. At lesser fetch lengths. a
velocity profile of a smallet height but similar
to that of the fully developed profile of that
terrain category has to be taken, with the
additional provision that the velocity at the top
of this shorter profile equals that of the
unpenetrated earlier velocity profile at that
height.
EFFECTIVL.: F R O N T A L AK EA -The p r o j e c t e d
area of the structure normal to the direction of
the wind.
15
VI-I.
ELEMENT ok SURFACE ARI.A -- The area of

surface over which the pressure coefficient is
taken to be constant.
coefficient is also equal to [ I-( VP/ V,)2 1, where

VP is the actual wind speed at any point on the
structure at a height corresponding to that of
VZ.
FORCE COEFFIClliNT - A n o n - d i m e n s i o n a l
coefficient such that the total wind force on a
body is the product of the force coefficient,
the dynamic pressure of the incident design
wind speed and the reference area over which
the force is required.
NOTI PoGtivc sign ot the pressure c o e f f i c i e n t

indicates prebsurc acting towards the surface and
ncpative sign indicates prcrsure acting away from the
surtilcc.
NorI: - Hllrn the lorce is i n the direction o f the

incidcnr wind. the non-dimcnuional rocfticicnt will bc
catlcd 3s drap cocfticirnt. When the force is perpcndicular to the d i r e c t i o n o f incrdrnt w i n d . the nondzmensional cocfficicnt w i l l hc csllcd a s Iilk
coefficient.
RtTLlRN pt.RIOD R e t u r n p e r i o d i s t h e
number of years, the reciprocal of which gives
the probability of extreme wind exceeding a
given wind speed in any one year.
G R O U N D ROUGHNI Ss - The nature of the
earths surface as influenced by small scale

obstructions such as trees and buildings (as
distinct from topography) is called ground
roughness.
A positive or negative departure of
wind speed from its mean value. lasting for not
more than say 2 minutes over a specified
interval of time.
GUST -
PI, AK GUST -. Peak gust or peak gust speed is

the wind speed associated with the m a x i m u m
amplitude.
I I,.TCti LI,.N<;TH ~ Fetch length is the distance
measureil along the wind from a boundary at

which a change in the type of terrain occurs.
When the changes in terrain lypcs are
encountered (such as the boundary of a t o w n

or city. forest. etc ), the wind profile changes in
character but such changes arc gradual and start

a t g r o u n d l e v e l . spreading or penetrating
uvards with increasing fetch length.
G r a d i e n t h e i g h t i s the
height above the mean ground level at which
the gradient wind blows as a result of balance
among pressure gradient force, coriolis force
and centriftlgal force. For the purpose of this
section. the gradient height is taken as the
height above the mean ground level above
which the variation of wind speed with height
need not be considered.
GRADII~NT lit~.IGH!
MI
AN GROUND
LI;VFL ~~ T h e m e a n g r o u n d
level is the average horizontal plane of the area

enclosed by the boundaries of the structure.
PRESSURt; C0l.l I ICtkNT ~~ P r e s s u r e c o e f f i cient is the ratio of the difference between the
pressure acting at a point on a surface and the
static pressure of the incident wind to the
design wind pressure, where the static and
design wind pressures are determined at the
height of the point considered after taking into
account the geographical localion, terrain
cohditions and shielding effect. The pressure
16
U-l-
S H I E L D I N G EI:I:F.CT S h i e l d i n g effect o r
shielding refers to the condition whe[c wind has
to pass along some structure(s) or structural
element(s) located on the upstream wind side,
before meeting the structure or structural

element uru_ier consideration. A factor called
shielding factor is used to account for such

effects in estimating the force on the shielded
structures.
SUCTION - Suctions means pressure less than

the atmospheric (static) pressure and is taken to
act away from the surface.
S O L I D I T Y RATIO S o l i d i t y r a t i o i s e q u a l t o
the effective area (projected area of all the
individual elements) of a frame normal to the
wind direction divided by the area enclosed by
the boundary of the frame normal to t h e w i n d
direction.
NOTI,.
frames.
Solidity rtirio is.tn he calculated for individual
Tt:RRAIN CATEGORY -- T e r r a i n c a t e g o r y
means t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e surface
irregularities of an area which arise from natural
or constructed features. The categories are
numbered in increasing order of roughness.
vL:LOClTY PROt.ILE - The
horizontal component of the
speed at different heights
ground level is termed as
variation of the
atmospheric wind
above the mean
velocity profile.
T O P O G R A P H Y - The nature of the earth s

surface as influenced by the hill and valley
configurations.
4.4 Wind Speed and Pressure

4.4.1 N A T U R E
01: WI N D I N A T M O S P H E R E In general, wind speed in the atmospheric

boundary layer increases with height from zero
at ground level to a maximum at a height called
the gradient height. There is usually a slight
change in direction (Ekman effect) but ths IS
ignored in the section. The variation with
height depends primarily on the terrain

conditions. However, the wind speed at any
height never remains cbnstant and it has been
found convenient to resolve its instantaneous
magnituile into an average or mean value and a
fluctuating component around this average
value. The average value depends on the
averaging time employed in analyzing the
meteorological data and this averaging time
varies from a few seconds to several minutes.
The magnitude of the fluctuating component of
the wind speed, which is called as gust, depends
on the averaging time. In generai, smaller the
averaging interval, greater is the magnitude of
the gust speed.
4.4.2 BASIC WIND S PEED -- Figure 1 gives
basic wind speed map of India. as applicableto
10 m height above mean ground level for
different zones of the country. Basic wind
speed is based on peak gust velocity averaged
over a short time interval- of about 3 seconds
and corresponds to mean heights above ground
level in a open terrain (Category 2). Basic wind
speeds presented in Fig. 1 have been worked
out for a SO-year return period. Basic wind
speed for some important cities/towns is also
given in Appendix C.
4.43 D E S I G N W IND S P E E D ( 4 ) - The basic
wind speed (rb:) for any site shall be obtained
from Fig. 1 and shall be modified to includethe
following effects to get V,, design wind speed
at any height for the chosen structure:
a)
risk level;
b) terrain roughness, height and size of

structure; and
c) local topography.
It can be mathematically expressed as follows:
Vz = Vbkrk,k3
where
design wind speed at any height z in
m/s;
%= basic .wind speed in m/s (Fig. 1);
kl =
probability factor (risk coefficient)

(4.4.3.1);
k,=
terrain, height and structure size factor

( (4.4.3.2); and
5=
topography factor (4.4.3.3).
MTE ~ Design wind speed up to 10m height from

mean ground level shall be considered constant.
4.4.3.I.RISK COEFFICIENT (k,l - Figure 1
(see p. W-I-93) gives basic wind speeds for
terrain category 2 as applicable at 10 m above
ground level based on SO-yeqr mean return
period. The suggested life period to be assumed
in design and the corresponding kt factors for
different classes of structure for the purpose of
design is given in Table 4. In the design of all
buildings and structures, a regional basic wind
speed having a mean return period of 50 years
shall be used except as specified in the note of
Table 4.
TABLE 4 RISK COEFFICIENTS FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES OF STRUCTURES

IN DIFFERENT WIND SPEED ZONES
(Clause 4.4.3. I)
CLASS OF STRUCTURE
M EAN P H O B A B L E
D ESIGN L IFE OF
STyEyR;R~
IN
k, FACTOR
r
B ASIC W IND SPEED

(m/s) OFA
FOR
33
39
44
41
50
50
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Temporary sheds, structures such as those

used during construction operations (for
example, form-work and falsework).
structures during construction stages and
boundary walls
0.82
0.76
0.73 0.71
0.70 0.67
Buildings and structures presenring a low

degree of hazard to life and property in
the event of failure, such as isolated
towers in wooded areas, farm buildings,
other than residential buildings
25
0.94
0.92
0.91 0.90
0.90 0.89
Important buildings and structures, such

as hospitals, communications buildings/
towers and power plant structures
100
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
All general buildings and structures
1.07
55
1.0
1.08
TABLE 4 RISK CQEFFICIENTS FOX DIFFERENT CLASSES OF STRUCTURES IN

DlFFERENT WIND SPEED ZONES - cvnrd.
(clause 4.4.3.1)
kl
XN,P -
X 50.0.63
___-.._ -
l n ( I-PN)
A + 4B
.
when
Iv
= mean probable design life of structure in years;
PN
- risk level in N consecutive years (prob@lity that the design wind speed is exceeded at leant once in
I successive years). nominal value = 0.63;
XNY
= extreme wind speed for given values of N and PN ; and
ho, 0.823 *
extreme wind speed for N = 50 years and PN = 0.63
A as+d B are coeffkients having the following values for different basic wind speed zones:
Zone
33 m/s
83.2
9.2
39 m/s
84.0
14.0
44 m/s
88.0
18.0
47 m/s
88.0
20.5
50 m/s
88.8
22.8
55 m/s
90.8
23.3
bbTE - The factor kl is based on statistical concepts which take accountof the degree of reliability required and
period of time in years during whichthere will be exposure to wind, that is. life of the structure. Whatever wind
speed is adopted for design purposes, there isalways a probability (however small) that it may be exceeded in a
storm af esceptional violence; the greater the period of years over which there will be esposure to the wind,the
greater is the probability. Hi er return petids ranging from 100 to 1 000 years (implying lower riskleveli in
araociation with greater perio$ of axpoau?e may have to be selected.for exceptionally important structures, such
as nuclenr power reactors and satellite communication towers. Equation given below may be used in suchcasts to
ertimah kl factors fur different periods of txposure and chosen probability of exceedence (risk level). The
probabtiity level of 0.63 is normally considered sufficient for design of buildings and structures against wind
effeetr md the values of kl contsponding to this risk level are given in Table 4.
d.d.j.2 TERRAIN, HEIGHT AND

SIZE FACTOR (k2)
STRUCTURE
a ) TLlRRAIN - &?lection of t&rain categories

shall be made with due regard to the effect
of the obstruction which constitute the
gKWlld surface roughness. T h e t e r r a i n
category Used in the hesign of a structure
may vary depending on the direction of
wind under consideration. Wherever sufficient meteorological information is available
about the nature of wind direction. the
, orientation of any building or structure
m4y be suitably planned.
Tannin, i n w h i c h a stxeific s t r u c t u r e
rtimik, shall be assessed ai being one of the
M&wing terrain categories:
I ~ Exposed o p e n t e r r a i n
with few or no obstructions and in which
the average height of any objects surround
ing the structure is less than 1 .S m.
CATEGORY
kTk. - This category includes open

and tlat treeless plains.
sca<w\t\
C A T E G O R Y z - Open terrain with well

scattered
obstructions having heights
generally between 1.5 and 10 m.
APE - This is the criterion for measurement ol

regional basic wind speeds and includes airfield\.
o<en parklands and .undevelopcd sparsely built.
up outskirts of towns and suburbs. Open land
adjacent to sea coast may also be classified a~
calrgory 2 due to roughness of largesea waves 11
high winds.
4 - Terrain with nunierous

large high closely spaced obstructions.
3 - Terrain with numerous

closely spaced obstructions having the size
of buildings-structures up to 10 m in height
with or without a few isolated tall
strucfures.
CATEGORY
CATEGORY
N O TE
1 - This category includes well wooded

areas and shrubs, towns and industrial areas fully
or partially developed.
N0TE - Thiscategory includes large city centres,

generally with obstructions above 25 m and well
developed industrial complexes.
b) VARIATION OF WIND SPEED WlTH
HEIGHT
FOR DIFFERENT SIZES OF STRUCTURE IN
DIFFERENT TERRAINS (ka FACTOR)-
Table 5 gives multiplying factors (ks) by

which the basic wind speed given in Fig.1
shall be multiplied to obtain the wind
speed at different heights, in each terrain
category for different sizes of buildings/
structures.
NOTE 2 - It is likely that the next hisher

category than this will not exist in most design
situations and that selection of a more severe
category will be deliberate.
N OTE 3 - Particuiar attention must be-given to

the performance of the obstructions in areas
affected by fully developed tropical cyclones.
Vegetation, which is likely to be blown down or
defoliated, cannot be relied upon to maintain
Category 3 conditions. Where such situation ma
w1t.E
exist, either an intermediate category
velocity multipliers midway between the values
for Categories 2 and 3 given in Table 2, or
Category 2 should be selected having due regard
to local conditions.
The buildings/structures are classified into

the following three different classes depending upon their size :
CLASS A - Buildings and/or their
components, such as cladding, glazing,
TABLE 5 kz FACTORS TO OBTAIN DESIGN WIND SPEED VARIATION WITH HEIGHT IN

DIFFERENTTERRAINS FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES OF BUILDINGS STRUCTURES
~CIoure 4.4.3.2 (b)]
H&ht
(d
TERRAIN
CATEGORY 1
Class
TERRAIN
C ATEGORY 2
TERRAIN
C ATEGORY 3
Class
C--A
TERRAIN
CATEGORY 4
Class
1.0s
1.03
0.99
1.00
0.98
0:93
0.91
0.88
0.82
0,8O
0.76
0.67
15
1.09
1.07
1.03
1.05
1.02
1.97
0.97
0.94
0.87
0.80
0.76
0.67
20
30
50
100
1.12
1.10
1.06
1.07
1.05
1 .oo
1.01
0.98
0.91
0.80
0.76
0.67
1.15
1.13
1.09
1.12
1.10
1.04
1.06
1.03
0.96
0.97
0.93
0.83
1.20
1.18
1.14
1.17
1.15
1.10
1.12
1.09
1.02
1.10
1.05
0.95
1.26
1.30
1.24
1.20
1.24
1.22
1.17
1.20
1.17
1.10
1.20
1.15
1.05
1.28
1.24
1.28
1.25
1.21
1.24
1.21
1.15
1;24
1.20
1.10
1.32
1.30
1.26
1.30
1.28
1.24
1.27
1.24
1.18
1.27
1.22
1.13
10
150
C.-A
200
250
300
1.34
1.32
1.28
1.32
1.31
1.26
r.29
1.26
1.20
1.28
1:24
1.16
1.35
1.34
1.30
1.34
1.32
1.28
1.31
1.28
1.22
1.30
1.26
1.17
350
1.37
1.35
1.31
1.36
1.34
1.29
1.32
1.30
1.24
1.31
1.27
1.19
400
1.38
1.36
1.32
1.37
1.35
1.30
1.34
1.31
1.25
1.32
1.28
1.20
450
1.39
1.37
1.33
1.38
1.36
1.31
1.35
1.32
1.26
1.33
1.29
1.21
500
1.40
1.38
1.34
1.39
1.37
1.32
1.36
1.33
1.28
1.34
1.30
1.22
NOTE 1
- See 4.4.3.2 (b) for definitions of class A, class B, class C structures.
WoTE 2 - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation, if desired. It is permissible to assume
constant wind speed between two heights for simplicity.
rAlsnmucnmu SON I IDAD8
19
U-l-
2) For ibuildings; of heights greater than

the developed height ( (h,) in Table 6,
the velocity profile may be determined
in accordance with the following.
roofing, etc. having maximum dimension

(greatest horizontal or vertical dimension)
less than 20 m.
- Buildings and/or their
roofing, etc. having maximum dimension
between 20 and SO m.
CLASS B
CLASS
C - Buildings and/or their

roofing, etc, having maximum dimension
greater than 50 m.
c)
d)
TERRAIN CATt-.GORIFS IN RI:LATION TO
DIR~:CTION 01' WIND - The terrain

category used in the design of a building
may vary depending on the direction of
wind under consideration. Where sufficient
meteorological information is available, the
basic wind speed may be varied for specific
wind direction.
THE
CHANGES IN TFRRAINCATECORIES-
The velocity profile for a given terrain

category does not develop to full height
immediately with the commencement of
that terrain category, but developsgradually
t o height (h,) , which increases with the
fetch or upwind distance (x).
1) FETCH AND DEVELOPED HEIGHT
RELATIONSHIP -The relation between
the developed height (II,) and the fetch

(x) for wind-flow over each of the four
terrain categories may be taken as given
in Table 6.
i) The less or least rough terrain; or

ii) The method described in Appendix D.
4.4.3.3TOPOGRAPHY (kg FACTOR) - The

basic wind speed Vb given in Fig. 1 takes
account of the general level of the site above
sea level. This dpes not allow for local topographic features, such as hills, valleys, cliffs,
escarpments or ridges, which can significantly
affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect
of topography is to accelerate wind near the
summits of hills or crests of cliffs, escarpments
or ridges and decelerate the wind in valleys or
near the foot of cliffs. steep escarpments or
ridges.
The effect of topography will be significant at
a site when the upwind slope 6 is greater than
about 30, and below that the value of k3 may
be taken to be equal to 1 .O. The value of k3 is
confined in the range of 1 .O to ,I .36 for slopes
greater than 3. A method of evaluating the
value of k, for values greater than 1.0 is given
in Appendix E. It may be noted that thevalue
of k, varies with height above ground level at a
maximum near the ground, and reducing to 1 .O
at higher levels,
4.4 Ijrsigtl Wind Pressure - The design wind
pressure at any height above mean ground level
shall be obtained by the following relationship
between wind pressure and wind velocity:
TABLE 6 FETCH AND DEVELOPED HEIGHT RELATIONSHIP

[ CIoust 4.4.3.2 (b)]
LXVFLOPED HE I G H T . h,
5-Y @)
Terrain
Category 1
Terrain
Category 2
IN
M ETRES
--I
Terrain
Category3
(4)
Terrain
Category 4
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.2
12
20
60
0.5
20
30
95
25
45
130
35
65
190
60
100
300
80
140
450
20
120
200
500
SO
180
390
500
w-1. 20
NAllONAL BUllDING I-ODE OP INDIA
pz = 0.6 V,
where
pz =
design wind pressure in N/m at

height 2, and
5 = design wind velocity m m/s at height

2
NATE - The coefficient 0,6 (in SI units) in the above
formula depends on a number of factors, and mainly
on the atmospheric pressure and air temperature. The
value chosen corresponds to the average appropriate
Indian atmospheric conditions.
W IND V E L O C I T Y Cyclonic storms form far away from the sea

coast gradually reduce in speed as they approach
44.1
OF F S H O R E
the sea coast. Cyclonic storms generally extend

up to about 60 kilometres inland after striking
the coast. Their effect on land is already reflected in basic wind speeds specified in Fig. 1.
The influence of wind speed off the coast uptp
a distance of about 200 kilometres may be
taken as 1 J5 times the value on the nearest
coast in the absence of any definite wind data.
4.5 Wind Pressures and Forces on Buildings/
structure
45.1 GENERAL - The wind load on a building shall be calculated for:
a) the building as a whole;

b) individual structural elements as roofs and
walls; and
near the edges of walls and roofs are separately

shown. Coefficients for the local effects should
only be used for calculation of forces on these
local areas affecting roof sheeting, glass panels
and individual cladding units including their
fuctures. They should not be used for calculating force on entire structural elements such as
roof, walls or structure as a whole.
NOTE 1 - The pressure coefficients given in the
different tables have been obtained mainly from
measurements on models in wind tunnels. and the
great majority of data available have been obtained in
conditions of relatively smooth flow. Where sufficient
field data exist as in the case of rectangular buildings,
values have been obtained to allow for turbulent tlow.
NOTt.. 2 - In recent years, wall glaring and cladding
design hns been a source of major concern. Although
of less consequence than collapse of the main
structures, damage to glass can be hazardous and cause
considerable financial losses.
NOTE 3 Ior pressure coefficients for structures not
covered herein, reference may be made to specialist
literature on the subject or advise may be sought
from specialists in the subject.
4.5.2.1 WIND LOAD ON INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS
When calculating the wind load on individual

structural elements such as roofs and walls, and
individual cladding units and their fittings, it
is essential to take account of the pressure
difference between opposite faces of such
elements or units. For clad structures, it is,
therefore, necessary to know the internal
pressure as well as external pressure. Then the
wind load, P (in N) acting in a direction normal
to the individual structural element or cladding
unit is:
F = (C,, -Cpe) A pd
where
c) individual cladding units including glazing

and their flings.
45.2 PR E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S - T h e
pressure coefficients are always given for a
particular surface or part of the surface of a
building. The wind load acting normal to a
surface is obtained by multiplying the area of
that surface or its appropriate portion by the
pressure coefficient (C,) sod the design wind
= external pressure coefficient;

c pi = internal pressure coefficient;
A = surface area of structural element
or cladding unit in m* ; and
pressure at the height of the surface from the

ground. The average values of these pressure
coefficients for some building shapes are given

in 4.5.2.2 and 4.5.2.3.
Average values of pressure coefficients are given
for critical wind directions in one or more
quadrants. In order to determine the maximum
wind load on the building, the total load should
be calculated for each of the critical directions
shown from all quadrants. Where considerable
variation of pressure occurs over a surface, it
has been subdivided and mean pressure
coefficients given for each of its several parts.
In addition, areas of high local suction(neg$ve
pressure concentration) frequently occurring
?*ltr VI lrrpucrUR4L
D&BICN-S-ON I LOAD.5
pd =
design wind pressure in N/m2
NOTE I - If the surface design pressure varies with

height, the surface areas of the structural clement may
be subdivided so that the specified pressures are taken
over appropriate areas.
NOTI? 2 - Positive wmd load indicates the force
acting towards the structural element and negative
away from it.
4.5.2.2
a)
E X T E R N A L PRESSURE COEI~IICIENTS
-The average external pressure

coefficient for the walls of clad buildings
of rectangular plan shall be as given in
Table 7. In addition, local pressure concentration coefficients are also given.
WALLS
21
Vl.1.
TABLE 7 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (Cp,, FOR WALLS OF RECTANGULAR CLAD

BUILDINGS
BUILDIN
HEIGHT
RAT10
-r-
BUILDING
PLAN
RATIO
<$&-2
l-
llN~
.NGL: E
PL A N
IE LEVATION
CP,FORSURFACE
A
-I-
LOCAL
egreel
0
+0.7
-0.2
-0.5 -0.5
90
-0.5
-0.5
+0.7 - 0 . 2
+0.7
-0.2.
-0.6 -0.6
90
-us
-0.5
+0.7 - 0 . 1
+0.7
-0.2
-0.6 -0.6
90
-0.6
-0.6
+0.7 - 0 . 2 5
+0.7
1.3
-0.7 -0.7
.
-0.8
f<&
La
*b.
-1.0
cm*
1<$&2
+<+G-
cl 8
C
-1.1
Il cl
!El 0
c?&
90
-0.5 -0.5
+0.7 - 0 . 1
+0.8 -0.2!
-0.8 -0.8
90
-0.8 -0.8
+0.8 - 0 . 2 5
+0.7
-0.4
-0.7 -0.7
90
-0.5
-0.5
+0.8 - 0 . 1
+0.9:
-1.85
- 0 . 9 -m0.9
90
-0.8
-0.8
+0.9 - 0 . 8 5
T
-
-0
+0.9:
~0.25
-0.7 -0.7
90
-0.7
-0.7
w.93 -1.25
+0.8:
-0.75
-0.75 -0.75
90
-0.7:
-0.75
+0.8 a - 0 . 7 5
-1.1
@cl?.
-1.2
-$<h<
W
-1.2
I
3
-=-
-=a
H
1,
-= 1 .o
w
4
h
-1.25
-1.25
I
-- 2
w
IS the height to eaves 01 parapet,,

horizontal dimension of a building.
NOTP - 11
-1.25
I is the gieater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser
b)
pressure coefficients and pressure concentration coefficients for pitched roofs of

retangular clad building shall be as given in
Table 8 Where no pressure concentration
coefficients are given, the average coefficients apply. The pressure coefficients
on the underside of any over-hanging roof
shall be taken in accordance with4.5.2.2(g),
NOTE 1 - T h e p r e s s u r e concentration s h a l l b e
assumed to act outward (suction prtssure) _at the
ridges, eaves, cornices and 90 degree corners of roofs.
MTE 2 - The pressure conccntrstion shall not be
included with the net external pressure when computing overall loads.
c)
NOTE - Tables 12 to 17 may be used to pet internal

and estcrnal p r e s s u r e cocfiicients for pirchcs and
troughcd free roofs for some specific CPSLS for which
asnect ratios and roof slones have been snccificd.
Gwever, while using Tat&i 12 to 17 any &nificant
departure from it should be invest@tcd carefully. No
increase shall bc made for local effects elrept. as
indicated.
e)
C URVED RoOl:S --
f-1
P I T C H E D A N D S A W - TOOTH ROOFS 01,

M U L T I - S P A N B U I L D I N G S - For pitched
M O N O S L O P E ROOi,S 01: RFZTANGULAR

CLAD BUILDINGS The average pressure
coefficient and pressure concentration

coefficient for monoslope (lean-to) roofs
of rectangular clad buildings shall be as
given in Table 9.
d)
forces need be taken into account. Fascia

loads should be calculated on the area of
the surface facing the wind, using a force
coefficient of 1.3. Frictional drag should
be calculated using the coefficients given in
4.5.3.1.
PITCHED ROOFS 01: RECTANGULAR CLAD

The average external
BUILDINGS -
CANOPY
ROOFS
W I T H ?4 <
h/w< 1
The solidity ratio $ is equal to the area of

obstructions under the canopy divided by
the gross area under the canopy, both areas
normal to the wind direction. I$ = 0 represents a canopy with no obstructions underneath. 4 = 1 represents the canopy fully
blocked with contents to the downwind
eaves. Values of C, for intermediate solidities may be linearly interpolated between
these two extremes, and apply upwind of
the position of maximum blockage only.
Downwind of the position of maximum
blockage the coefficients for 4 = 0 may be
used.
In addition to the pressure forces normal

to the canopy, there will be horizontal
loads on the canopy due to the Wmd
pressure on any fascia and to friction over
the surface of the canopy. Fbr any wind
direction, only the greater of these two
mal-nlrnt~ DESIGN-SEXYION I LOADS
and saw-tooth roofs of multi-span buildings,

the external average pressure coefficients
and pressure concentration coefficients
shall be as given in Tables 19 and 20
respectively, provided that all spans shall
be equal and the height to the eaves shall
not exceed the span.
and
The pressure coefficients

l< L/w < 3 are given in Table 10 and 11 separately for
monopitch and double pitch canopy roofs
such as open-air parking garages, shelter
areas, outdoor areas, railway platforms,
stadiums and theatres. The coefficients
take account of the combined effect of the
wind exerted on and under the roof for all
wind directions; the resultant is to be taken
normal to the canopy. Where the local
coefficients overlap the greater of the two
given values should be taken. However, the
effect of partial closures of one side and
or both sides, such as those due to trains,
buses and stored materials shall be foreseen
and taken into account.
For curved roofs, the

external pressure coefficients shall be as
given in Table 18. Allowance for local
effects shall be made in accordance with
Table 8.
NOTI. - Evidence on multi-span buildings is fragmentary. Any departure given in Tables 19 and 20 should
be investigated separately.
PRESSURE COEtI~ICIENTS ON OVERHANGS

I.ROM ROOFS ~ The pressure coefficients
on the top overhanging portion of the

roofs shall be taken to be the same as that
of the nearest top portion of the nonoverhanging portion of the roofs. The
pressure coefficients for the underside
surface of the overhanging portions shall be
taken as follows and shall be taken as
positive if the overhanging portion is on
the windward side:
1) 1.25, if the overhanging slopes;
2) 1 .O, if the overhanging is horizontal; and
3) 0.75, if the overhanging slopes upwards.
For overhanging portions on sides other
than windward side, the average pressure
coefficients on the adjoining walls may be
used.
h)
CYLINDRICAL STRUCTURES - For the

purpose of calculating the wind pressure
distribution around a cylindrical structure
of circular cross-section, the value of
external pressure coefficients given in
Table 21 may be used provided that the
Raynolds numtier is greater than 10 000.
They may be used for wind blowing
normal to the axesof cylinders having axis
23
w-t-
TABLE 8 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS(Cpel FOR PITCHED ROOFS OF RECTANGULAR CLAD

BUILDINGS
-B UILDING H E I G H T
RATIO
ROOF
ANGLE
WIND
ANGLEB
O0
WIND
ANGLE tq
9o
L~~ALC~EFFICIENT~
mM
EF
GH
EC
FH
-0.8
-0.9
-1.2
-0.4
0
+0.3
+0.7
-0.4
-0.4
-0.4
-0.4
-0.4
-0.5
-0.6
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.7
-0.7
-0.7
-0.7
- 0 . 4 -2.0
-0.4 -1.4
-1.4
-0.6
-0.6
-1.0
-0.6
-0.8
-0.6 t-i
-0.6
-0.8
-0.9
-1.1
-m0.7
-0.2
+0.2
+0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-1.0
-0.9
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-1.5
-2.t1
-1.2
-1.5
_1.!
-0.7
-0.7
-0.7
-0.8
-1.0
-0.2
+0.2
+0.5
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.9
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
[- 0 . 8
-0.7
-0.8
-0.8
-0.8
-0.7
-0.7
-0.7
-0.7 1
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-1.5 I
- 1.5
-1.0
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-1.5
-2.t)
-1.2
-1.:
-l.!i
degrees
-2.0
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
L-r-
NOTE 1 - h is the height to caves or parapet, w is the lesser horizontal dimension of a building.
NOTE 2 - Where no local coefficients are given the overall coefficients apply.
l-----i
KEY PLAN
y;horo.l5w,
whichever is the lesser
-1.0
-1.2
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.2
-1.2
TABLE 9 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS(Cpe) FOR MONOSLOPE ROOFS FOR RECTANGULAR

CLAD BUILDINGS
y = h or 0.15 w, whichever is the lesser.
-L--?b
!%TE - Ark Hand area L refer to the whole quadrant.
OVERALL COEFFICIENTS
ROOF
ANGLE
a
degree
1
H
4s
O0
90
WIND ANGLE
180
135
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.9
-0.8
-0.6
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-0.5
-0.4
-0.3
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-0.3
-0.1
-1.0
-0.9
-0.6
-0.2
-0.1
0
-1.0
-0.9
-0.6
H&L
52
.$ .!j
aaE
u!:
5
10
15
-1.0
-0.5
-1.0
-0.9
-4.5
20
25
30
-0.8
-0.7
-0.5
-0.5
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-0.9
-0.8
-0.7
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
ROOF
ANGLE
-_
-0.9
-0.8
-0.8
LOCAL CO E F F I C I E N T S C,,
Ht
H2
Ll
L2
-2.0
-2.0
-1.8
-1.5
-1.5
-0.9
-2.0
-2.0
-1.8
.-1.5
-1.5
-1.4
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-1.8
-1.8
-1.8
-0.8
-0.7
-0.5
-1.8
-0.9
-0.5
-1.4
-0.9
-0.5
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
1
L
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
-2.0
NOTE - k h the hei@ to caves at lower side, I is the grcntet horizontal dimension of.a buildin and w is the lesser
horizontal dimension of a buildi.
ThBLE 10 PRESSUKE C0WIXII:NT.S FOR FREE STANDING MANOSLOPED ROOFS
Roof angle
2F-i._I
l cP
Section
Key plan
Solidif)
ratio
Muim~m (htg~d +VC) md
minimum (brgest de)
II
0
5
IO
All values of
4
I5
20
25
30
t 0.2
+ 0 4
+ 0.5
+ 0.7
+ 0.8
+ I.0
+ I.2
+ 0.8
5
IO
4=0
4= I
: 0.9
- I.1
_ I.5
- ?.I
I5
4=0
4= I
- I I
- I.4
- I.8
-23
20
25
30
4=0
4=l
T-
1.8
- I.8
+05
+ I.2
+ 1.4
l
I.7
7 2.0
4 2.2
- 3.0
- 3.0
em
13
For monopitch canopies the antrt of pft~un Wvuld be taken
IO
I.8
+ 2.1
t 2.4
+ 2.7
+ 2.9
+ 3.1
+ 3.2
- I.3
preslwe
mfficimr
ISa
+ I.1
t 1.3
+ 1.6
+ I.8
1 II
i 2.3
t 2.4
- I.8
- 1.4
- I.9
- 1.7
- 2.2
- I.8
- 2.3
- 2 0
- 2.6
-2.1
- 2.7
- 2.4
- 2.9
2.5
- 3.0
- 2.8
- 3.1
- 2.9
- 3.2
- 3.2
- 3.5
- 3.2
- 3.5
-- 3.8
- 3.8
- 3.6
-- 3.6
_ _...
act at 0.3~ from the windward edw.
TABLE 11 PRESSURE COEFFKIENTS FOR FREE STANDING DOUBLE SLOPED ROOFS

kl
Roof angle
+va roof BegIs
Key Wan
Sectton
Mwimom (largest
~ ~~-
Solidity ratio
+ve) and minimum
(lugat -vc) prumre
radficitnt~
OWdl
raelTlcics1r
-
- 20
- IS
- IO
- 5
45
+ IO
+ I5
+ 20
+ 25
+ 30
+ 07
+ 0.5
+ 0.4
t 0.3
+ 0.3
+ 0.4
+ 0.4
-c 0.6
TO7
A 0.9
All cdues of
aJ
0-0
aJ= I
- 20
- I5
- 10
-5
+5
+ IO
- 07
j - 0 9
a=0
I
-
a= I
j - 0.8
0.6
@=O
- 0.6
@= I
I - 0.8
uJ=o
- 0.5
@=I
- 0.8
@=O
CD= I
- 0.6
- 0.9
0
+ 0.8
+ofl
+ 0.6
* OS
+ 0.6
+ 0.7
+ 0.9
* I I
+ I.2
- 1.3
___~__
09
j~l.2
t I.6
+ I!
* 1.4
i I.5
+ I.R
f I.R
+I.9
.v IY
* 1.9
-t 1.9
+ Oh
+ 0.7
+ OR
+ 0.8
( + I.3
*
II
jt
II
: A I.5
- I6
1 - I.6
: _ 13
i - I9
-1.7
: ~~ __I_.____~__.___
i-08
i~1.Z
i-l.6
i-06
]-II
)
1.7
/ - 1.9 j - !?
@=O
- 0.7
@= I
- I.1
- 1.4
-- 2.0
*=o
- 0.8
- I 7
- 2.2
- I8
- 2.4
.--._____
- 1.4
- I.8
@=I
- 1.2
- 0.9
- I.5
- I.9
- 2.8
@=O
- 1.2
- 1.7
- I.8
- 2.3
- 1.4
- I.9
- 2.0
@=I
- 0.9
- 1.3
+ 25
@=O
@*I
- I.0
- I.4
-1.4
- I.9
-1.9
- 2.4
- 1.4
- 2.1
- 2.0
- 3.0
+30
+=0
@=I
- 1.0
- 1.4
- 1.4
- 2.1
- 1.9
_ 2.6
- 1.4
- 2.2
- 2.0
- 3.0
+ I5
+H)
Ench slope o f I duopitch

minbmmt aW&kntr, l d the who
cmffkimt with the. otbcr
be taken to act nt the centrc of each slope.
- 3.0
TABLE 12 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP& BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED ROOFS, Q = 30
fii$$T
I
I
C&.
G'
h= D5d
b=ld
b- d --+
a = 30
8 ,= 0~45, D, D, E, E full length
0 = 90,D,D,E,Epartiengthb
P R E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S. C,
0
45=
GO
45O
90
0.6
0.1
-0.3
-1.0
-0.3
-0.4
-0.5
-0.6
-0.3
End Surfaces
-0.9
-0.3
-0.4
-0.3
- -
0.8
0.3
- - -
-0.4
For i: Cp top = - 1 .O; C, bottom = -0 2

Tangentmlly acting friction: R90 = 0.05 pd.&
2R
VI-l.
NAlloKu DullDING
coot 0)
I?0lA
TABLE 13 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP& BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED FREE ROOFS. a = 30 WITH
EFFECTS OF TRAIN OR STORED MATERIALS
b'= d
1
b=Sd
E
Q: = 3o
8
Effects of trains OI stored materials:

O-45,
4
CT 13S-180,
D , D
. E, Efull lehgth
ed
90) D. D , E, E: part length 6
P R E S S U R E C O EF FICIENTS , cp
8
O0
45O
9$
180
90
4s
0.1
-0.1
-0.4
-0.3
::58
-0.5
0.6
-0.7
-0.8
--0.4 0.4
End Surfaces
0.9
0.5
-0.6 -0.5
-0.3
0.8
0.3
-0.4
Forj:Cptop= - 1 5; Cp bottom = 0.5

Tangentially acting friction: Rgo = 0 . 0 5 Pd.&
29
w-1.
TABLE 14 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP & BOTTOM) FOR PITCHFD FREE ROOFS, Q = 10
-f
b'=d
L ---
i-----d ------I
lo*
Q =
0 = 0-45,D,D.E,EfuUlength
0 = 90, D, D , E, E part length b
---.----~.~~~---- _____-----
.---_
P R E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S. Cp,
IIt7
D
I9
-_
30
I
1
I
1
End Surfaces
-1.0
-0.3
-0.3
- For fC top = 1 .O, Cp. bottom = 0 4
Tangen#aBy acting frictton. Rgo3 = 0.1 P&d
4s.
90
Hl-
_..- _-._-__---
- TABLE 15 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP & BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED FREE

EFFECTS OF TRAIN OR STORED MATERIALS
ROOFS Q = 10 WlTU
a = loo
Effects of trains or stored materials:

8 = O-45. 135-180, D, D* , E, E full length
8 = 90O. D, D, E. E part length b
I
8
PRETSURE COEFFICIENTS , Cp
End Surfaces
E
C
4s
90
180
O0
o-180
-1.3
-0.5
-0.3
-0.4
0.8
0.4
0
-0.3
-0.6
PG.3
a.3
PO.6
0.7
0.3
0
-0.3
-0.4
0.8
0.3
-0.6
Forf:CPtop= -1.6;Cpbottom=U.9
Tangentmlly acting friction: Rc,~= 0.1 P@
rMTn muclwtw- DESIGN-SEXlION I UMDS
w.,_31
TABLE 16 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS FOR

FOR TROUCHED FREE ROOFS, Of = IO
TABLE 17 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTSFOR

TROUGHED FREE ROOFS, a = 10, WITH
EFFECTS OF TRAINS OR STORED MATERIALS
t
b/=d
-tiL_
f
l----i
Roof slope LI = lo0

8 = 0*-45, D. D , E, E full length
@ = 909, D, D , E. E part length b
Roof Slope Q = 10
Effects of trains or stored materials:
@ = O-45. or 135-180. D, D, E, E full length
8 = 90, D, D , E, E part length b
PmssuuE C~EFFICIENTS.C~
6
D
0
45'
9o
O0
o=-9o
0.3
O
-0.1
D
-0.7
-0.2
0.1
E
0.2
0.1
-0.1
E
-0.9
-0.3
0.1
FOI j: Cp top = 0.4; cp b,tton = -1.5

Tangentially acting fnctlon:
R90 ' = 0.1 p,,.bd
PRES~URECOEFFICIENTS,C~
0.
0,
45
9o"
MO0
O0
o"-180"
ForfiCptop= -1.l;Cpbottom=0.9
Tangentially acting friction:
Rggo= 0.1 pd.ti
-
32
W-1.
N4noNAL DulLDIN CODK OF ImlA
TABLE 18 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS FOR CURVED ROOFS
(a) Roof Springing from Ground Level
WIND
-
(b) Roof on Elevated Structure
,CENTf?AL
HALF(C)
WINDWARD
NOTE - When the wind is blowing

normal to thegable ends, C,, may
be taken as equal to -0.7 for thtfull width of the roof over a length
of l/2 from the gable ends and
-0.5 for the remaining portion.
THIS LINE TO BE
TREATED AS AN
EXTENSION OF
VERTICAL SUPPORIS
(c) Doubly Curved Roofs
;- > 0 . 6 a n d 7 >I).6
Values of C, C, and C,
_~...___ -_-_____.
mRtnnaucnmAL
H/I
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
-0.8
-0.9
- 1 .o
-1.1
-1.2
DESIGN-SlWflON I LOWS
VI-l.
33
TABLE 19 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (Cpe) FOR PITCHED ROOFS OF MULTISPAN

BUILDINGS (ALL SPANS EQUAL WITH h > w
Roof
y.h orO.11~
plan
whichever is
the lesser
h,= h,=h
FIRST SPAN
WINI)
NGLE
,a
FIKST iNTFK
MF.I~IATI
SPAN
*
,
r
d
c
OrtiteR 1NIk.H. I:NI)

MEI)IATk.
SPAN
SP
A N
~-0.9
-0.6
.-0.4
-0.3
-1.1
J.I.6
0.4
-0.3
-0.3
--&_I
n.3
0.4
-0.7
-0.6
0.4
0.3
0.3
-0.3
-.n 1
- 0.5
0.2
-0.6
0.4
-0.3
0.2
-0.3
-0.2
-0.5
+0.3
-0.6
0.6
0.4
-0.2
-0.2
-r-t.4
~~~ __~
-0.5
degrees
0
Root
AN(iLI
WINI)
degrees
up to 4 5
dcprrrs
90
I)ISTANCF:
ANGLE
0,X
-0.6
-0.2
i
-
-2.0
-1.5
TABLE 20 EXTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTSCp,FORSAW-TOOTH
ROOFSOFMULTI-SPAN
BUlLDINGS (ALL SPANS EQUAL) WITH h 9 w
y=h orO.lw
wh!chcvcr is
the,lcsscr
WIND
F IRST S PAN
ANGLE
8
degrees
0
FIRSTINTERMEDIATE
SPAN
OTHERINTER-
LOCAL
COEFFICIENT
ENDSPANS
MEDIATE
SPANS
-Ta
+0.6
-0.7
-0.7
-0.4
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
-0.3
-0.5
-0.3
-0.3
-0.3
-0.4
-0.6
-0.6
-0.1 -l
-2.0
180
WIND ANGLE
9
degrees
90
270
Frictional drag: when wind angle fl =
-1.5
DISTANCE
ht
hz
h,
-0.8
-0.6
-0.2
Similarly, but handed
0 horizontal
vahJes;
forcer due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above
when wind angle 8 = 90 allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE - Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any depnttures from the cam g&en should be
investigated separately.
TABLE 21 EXTERNAL PRESSURE DlSTRlBUTlON COEFFICIENTS AROUND

CYLINDRICAL STRUCTURES
..
Pos~~loNoF
PERIYHEKY. (3
IN DEGREES
-
h/D = 25
h/D= 7
0
15
30
4s
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
165
180
36
W-l-
~__ .~.~_
~KESSUHECOEFFICI~~NT,C~,
h
1.0
0.8
0.1
-0.9
-1.9
-2.5
-2.6
1;:;
-0.7
-0.6
-0.6
-0.6
1.0
0.8
-::i
-1.7
-2.2
-2.2
-1.7
-0.8
-0.6
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
\
h/D = I
I.0
0.8
0.1
-0.7
-I .2
- I .6
-1.7
-1.2
-0.7
-0.5
PO.4
-0.5
-0.4
NAlloNAl. IuIlDlNc COOE OF INpA
normal to the ground plane (that is.

chimneys and silos) and cylinders having
their axis parallel to the ground plane (that

is, horizontal tanks) provided that the
clearance between the tank and the ground
is not less than the diameter of the cylinder.
h is the height of a vertical cylinder or
length of a horizontal cylinder. Where
there is a free flow of air around both ends,
Ir is to be taken as half the length when
calculating h/II ratio.
p) SPH liRES .- The external pressure coefficients for spheres shall be as given in
Table 25.
4..5...? INTLRNAL, PRI:SSURE COEII-ICIl34TS -
Internal air pressure in a building depends upon

the degree of permeability of the cladding. to
the flow of air. The internal air pressure may be
positive or negative depending on the direction
of flow of air in relation to the openings in
the buildings.
a) In the case of buildings w.here t.he claddings
In the calculation of the resultant load on

the periphery of the cylinder, the value of
fpi shall be taken into account. For open
ended cylinders, Cpi shall be taken as
follows:
1) -0.8, where h/D is not less than 0.3;
and
2) - 0.5, where h/D is less th&I 0.3.
j) ROOl:S A N D B O T T O M 01 CYLINI)KICAL
I-L.L~VATI~D STRLCTUHL- The external
pressure coefficients for roofs and bottoms

of cylindrical elevated structures shall bc
as given in Table 22 (see also Fig. 2).
The total resultant load (f) acting on the
roof of the structure is given by the
following formula :
P= 0.785 /I* (pi Cp,.Pd)
The resultanf of Y for roofs lies at 0.1 II
from the centre of the roof on the
windward side.
k) COMBIN1.D KOOl:S AND K0Ol.S WITH A SKY
L I G H T - The average external pressure
coefficients for combined roofs and roofs
with a .sky light are shown in Table 73.
m)GKANDSTANDS -
The pressure coeffi-
cients on the roof (top and bottom) and
rear wall of a typical grandstand roof,

which is open on three sides, is given in
Table 74. The pressure coefficients ale
valid for a particular ratio of dimensions
as specified in Table 24, but may be used
for deviationsup to 20 percent. In general,
the maximum wind load occurs, when the
wind is blowing into the open front of the
stand causing positive pressure under the
roof and negative pressure on the roof.
n)
UPPER SURI:ACF 01, KOUND SILOS AND

T ANKS ~~ The pressure coefficients on the
upper surface of round silos and tanks

standing on ground shall be as given in
Fig. 2.
PAIT VI SlllDCnJRAL DESIGN-SIWIION 1 LOADS
permit the flow of air with openings not

more than about 5 percent of the wall area
but where there are no large openings. it is
necessary to consider the possibility of the

internal pressure being positive or negative.
Two design conditions shall be examined.
one with an internal pressure coefficient of
HI.2 and another with an internal pressure
coefficient of -0.3.
The internal pressure coefficient isalgebraitally added to the external pressure coefficient and the analysis, which indicates
greater distress of the member, shall be
adopted. In most situations, a simple
inspection of the sign of the external
pressure will at once indicate the proper
sign of the internal pressure coefficient to
be taken for design.
i%)l I Tbr tCrti1 nornl.ll lwmwbility rclatcs t o th.
11uw of
nir conmonly allorded by the rladdinps not

only 1brouFh the open windows snd doors. but 31s)
throupb tbc slit< round the clowd u indcw~ Itnd-door\
Jnd through chimneys, vcntikttork ;tnd through the
jomts bcturcn rwl coverings. tbc to131 olwn xc3
being lrss ihan 5 pcrccnt of fhc ilrc3 (11 the wll\
loving the opcnintzs.
h ) IIUILDINGS WITII M I I)lllM A N D L.AK(;I~
OPI NIN(; s - Buildings with medium and
large openings may also exhibit clther

pc6itivc or negative Internal p r e s s u r e
depending upon the clireclion of wind.
Bulldings with medium openings between
about 5 to 20 percent of wall area shall be
examined for an internal pressure coefficient of +O.S and later with an internal
O.S. and the
pressure coefficient of
analysis which produces greater distress of
the members shall be adopted. Buildings
with large openings. that IS, openings larger
than 20 percent of the wall area shall he
exammed once with an internal prcssule
coefficient of +0.7 and again with an
internal pressure coefficient of -0.7, and
the analysiswhich produces greater distrecc
on the members shall be adopted.
Buildings with one open side or openings
exc_eqding 20 percent of wall area may be
assumed to be subjected to internal positive pressure or suction similar to thqse
vl.1.
37
---TABLE 22 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEIWCIENTS FOR ROOFS AND BOTTOMS Or:

CYLINDRICAL BUILDINGS
DIRECTION
OF WIND
CPe
1
- s-e=OslD
&
I
(h)
Pe
(d)
(cl
Cok:bkIcI1;N-r 01;
EXTERNAL
S T R U C T UR E A C C O R D I N G
PKESSURE,
TO
C,,
SHAPE
a,b&c
H/D
Roof
(Z/W-
0.5
1.00
2.00
-0.65
-1.00
-1.00
1 .oo
Total Force Acting on the Roof of the Structure.

The mukant of P lies eccentrically, e = O.lD
1.25
1.50
P = 0.785 Dz (pi -- cwpd)
Roof
Bottor
-0.75
-0.75
-0.75
-0.8
-0.7
-0.6
0.20 <h <30

tona<O-2
PLAN
(For
force coefficient corresponding to shell portion see Table 23)
Fig. 2 External Pressure Coefficients on the Upper Roof Surface of Singular Circular
Standing on the Ground
UMDS
WI-
39
TABLE 23 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, C,,, FOR COMBINED ROOFS AND ROOFS
WITH A SKY Llf%T
a) Combirred Roofs
0 -6
04
C.2
0 .!3
0
I_
h2
+e
-0 -2
hl_,.$
,-Cpc
b2
I1
DIRECTION 1
C/+d
01 RECTION 2
- G.6
VALUES OF C,,
_-
PORTION
D IRECTION 1
/al
From the Diagram
D IRECTION :
-1
cpe = -0.5, hl< 1.5

hz
I
-0.4
hl
c and d
e
Cpe = -0.7, - >I.S

2
SeeTable 5
See Claw 4.5.2.2(g)
conrinued
TABLE 23 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS. Cpe FOR COMBINED ROOFS AND ROOFS
WITI4 A SKY LIGHT - Conrd.
b) ROOFS WITH A SKY LIGHT

.
WIND
L-
?ArrvlslnDcnJmAL
-,b, -- &-b2-;
DESIGN-SECllOH 1 LOA D S
y(l .
41
TABLE 24 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS AT TOP AND BOTTOM ROOF OF GRAND STANDS OPEN
THREE SlDES (ROOF = 5)
(h:b:l = 0.8 : 1 r2.2)
FRONT AND BACK OF WALL
J-
O0
l .9
-0.5
+0.9
-0.5
45O
+0.8
0.6
+0.4
-0.4
+O.6
ml.0
-0.3
+0.4
13s
-1.1
*
___-__-__180
-0.3
+0.9
+0.9
M,-CpofK=-1.0
60
Lb4
(Shaded area to scale)
TO? & BOTTOM OF ROOF

_~
A
__--.O0
-1.0
8
45O
135O
PI.0
.~
0.4
1 80
PO.6
45O
r--45O
w.1.
42
+0.9
-1.0
+0.1
-0.7
~-~I .I
-0.3
- Cp
(top)
=
2.0,
MH
MR - C,,
,.
D
~___~
to.9
_~.___ _--..
+0.4
E
-le.7
-0.5
-0.7
-1.0
-0.9
-0.6
-0.3
-0.6
__- -.
(bottom) = + 1.0
NATIONAL BUllDING CODE OF INDU
TABLE 25 EXTERNAL PRESSURE DlSTRlBUTlON COEFFICIENTS AROUND.SPHERlCAL STRUCTURES
c lx
mSlTlON OF ~RIPHERY,
8 IN DEGREES
1:
+1.0
+0.9
+o.s
0.1
60
75
90
105
120
135
-0.1
-1.1
-1.2
PI.0
0.6
m-o.2
150
165
180
W.l
+0.3
+0.4
30
45
?mnmucnJRu
DESIGN-SEllON
I LOADS
I&MARKS
Cf = 0.S for DY, < 7
=0.2 fOrDvd 2 7
I._
43
Wl-
for buildings with large openings. A few

examples of buildings with one sided
openings are shown in Fig. 3 indicating
values of internal pressure coefficients
with respect to direction of wind.
c; =
0.01 for smooth surfaces without

corrugations or ribs across the wind
direction;
c; = 0.02 for surfaces with corrugations

across the wind direction;
c) In buildings with roufs bu! no walls, the

roofs will be subjected to pressure from
both inside and outside, and the recommendations shall be as given in 4.5.2.2.
4.5.3 FORCE C OEFFICIENTS -- The value of
force coefficients apply to a building or structure as a whole, and when multiplied by the
effectwe frontal area, A, of the building or
structure and by design wind pressure. Pd give
the total wind load on that particular building
or structure.
r; = 0.04 for surfaces with ribs across the

wind d/rection.
For other buildings, the frictional drag has been

where necessary, in the tables of
pressure coefficients and force coefficients
indicated,
t.- CfAcpd
where F is the force acting in a dircctinn
specified in the respective !ablcs and (r is the
force coefficient for the building.
bk_ITI: 1 - The value ot the force coefficient differs
for the wind acting on different faces of a building or
structure. In order to determine the critical load, the
total wind load should be calculated for each wind
direction.
No1 t-. 2 - If
the surface
drvided s o
appropriate
surface design pressure varies with height,

area of the hulldinglstructure may be subt h a t specified prcnsurrv a r c taken over
are3s.
Irh)TE 3 - In tapered buildings/structures, !he force

coctficients shall b e appllcd a f t e r cuhdivldinp tilt
butlding/$tructure i n t o ruitablc number :rf strips and
the I,>ad tin each strip calculated ~nd~r~tlu.~ll~. taklntz
the :irc:l of each strip as /I,.
M)II
1 1.orce coefficients f o r atrucfurz\ n o t
covcled herein, referrnce m3y hr made to specialist
htcr.lture on the subject or adv~<e may be sought from
spcc IJiIsts in the qubiact.
In certain
J.?..?.I I KICTIONAL l)KA(;
hulldIngs of special shape. a force due to fric.
tional drag shall be taken unto account, in
sdditlon to those loads speclfled 111 d..?.?. For
rectangular clad buildings. this addition is
necessary only where the ratio
d
h
or
d
b
IS gfcarer
CLAD BCJILDINGS 01: UNIFORM SECTION -
The overall force coefficients for rectangular clad buildings of uniform section with
flat roofs in uniform flow shall be as given
in Pip. 4 and fol other clad buildings of
unifnrm section (without projections,
except where cjtherwise shown) shall be
as given II\ I able LO.
b) B U I L D I N G S
OF
CIRCULAR
S H A P E S -~
Force coefficients for buildings of circular

cross-section shall be as given in Table 27.
(JN Fig. 5 and Appendix F)
Porce
coefficients for low walls and hnardings
less than IS m high shall be as given in
Table 27 provided the height shall be
measured from the ground to the top of
the walls or hoarding, ahd provided that
for walls or hoardings above the ground the
clearance between the wall or hoarding and
the ground shall be not less than 0.25 times
the vertical dimension of the wall or hoarding.
c) I OW W A L L S A N D H O A R D I N G S -
than 4. Itu irictional dreg f o r c e . F in the

of the wind plven hy the following
formulae:
direction
To allow for obhyue winds the design shall

alscr be checked for the net pressure norinal
to the surfact varying linearly from a
maximum of I .7 c~ at the up wind edge to
II .44 C-f at the ti~1v11 u 111d etlgt*
The first term in each case gives the drag vn the
roof and the second on the walls. The value of
C; has the following values:
44
The wind toad oil appurtenances and

supports for haardings shall be accounted
f o r separate/v by II<::~? ih? :iPprlJpria!r 1101
...
(b) F O R f >l
(a) FOR f <l
W I N D
q +&8 4
(Arrows indicate direction of wind flow)

c) FOR+
= 1, USE AVERAGE VALUES
Fig. 3 Large Opening in Buildings (Values of Coefficient of Internal Pressure)

(with top closed}
45
Wl-
PLAN
05
1.0
l-5
2.0
2.5
30
F = Cf P.j bh
/b----
b) Values of Ct verses alb for h/h -C I
Fig. 4 Force Coefficients for Rectanp~lar Clad Ruildings in Uniform Hort
46
W-l-
TABLE 26 FORCE COEFFICIENTS Cf FOR CLAD BUlLDINGS OF UNIFORM SECTION

(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND)
_~
PLAN SHAPE
cf
vcib
m2/s
____---
to
H
up
All
surfaces
<
FOR
--
1
-
6
0.7
U.7
Rough or with
p r o j e c t i o n s > 6
_-_-_- __._
Smooth
(set atso Appendix C)
________----_--.~.--~~~
HEIGHT/BREADTH RA T I O
>6
~~
0.8
0.5
- - -
O.!
-
0.5
0.5
0.5
O.!
-_
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.5
- -
0.:
-
0.8
0.X
0.
. -
0.8
0.8
0.
-_cd-_
c3
r
0.6
0.c
P4
0.4
0.4
0.4
-_
(I.9
I
_.
0.6
20
1.0
b/d= 1
r/b = l/3
0.4
:
1.2
(I.5
0.6
(I.6
-
0.6
(I.2
0.2
0.2
II.1
1.3
1.7
1 1.1
<4
10
1.5
(j.8
1.1D
0 .5
0.5
<IO
0.7
310
1.3I
0 .6
0.6
0.6,
0.3
0 .3
0.3
0.4i
-
0.2
0 .3
0.3
0.3
0.8
-
0.9
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.3
-
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.s
1 .O
1.0
0.8
-
__-d-- 1
b/d = 112
r/b = l/2
< 3
-~
3.3
All
values
All
values
0.5
0.9
D.5
0.5
--
0.9
1.0
0.5
0 .6
0.6
0.7
1.1
1 .2
1.5
1.9/
~Conrinued)
47
Ml-
-.
..a
TABLE26 FORCECOEFFICIENTSCfFORCLAD BUILDINGSOF UNIFORM SECTION

(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND)- Contd.
PLAN SHAPE
m2/i
All surfaces
-t-f
-0 4
d
up to
F/O = l/3
HEIGHT/BREADTH RA T I O
2
20
10
_-
< 6
0.7
0.8
0.8
- -
0.9
36
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.5
<
-6 J,
I-
FOR
b/d= 2
r / b = 114
-0
J-
cf
vd!
1.0
L
0.5
1.2
1.6
0.6
0.6
-
IO
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.5
310
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.6
va
~__
____~ _
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.6
1.3
r / b =
<
11
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
-
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
114 -
311
-~
r / b = l/12
-a
t
b
r/b=
-I_
1148 Au
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.3
vnluea
-
Lp
All
values
r/b = 114
<8
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.3
,8
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
48
U-l-
NAnomLwuDaNoamKo1aNbu
TABLE 26 FORCE COEFFICIENTS Cf FOR CLAD BUILDINGS OF UNIFORM SECTION

(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND) - mnrd.
-______
~--_
B._
FLAN SH A P E
m=/s
-ci
-
L-l
d
-0
-0
cf FOR
-L-
Vdb
AU
##<r/b
< !/12
12ssided
values
< 12
________
up to
-1
HEIGHT/BREADTH RAT I O
.2
10
20
1%
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.7
2.1
0.7
0.7
0.8
-.-
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.3
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
I.0
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.4
PdY&Wfl
312
_
Octagon
Hexagon
All
values
All
VfllUC!
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.4
-
MTE - Structures that, because of their size and the design wind velocity, are in the supercritical flow regime
may need further calculation to ensure that the greatest loads do not occur at some wind speed below the
maximum when the flow will be subcritical.
The coefficients are for buildings without projections, except where otherwise shown.
In lhis table Vdb is used as an indication of the airflow regime.
?MT Vl SRlJCKMW, DKSICN-SECllON 1 LOADS
49
Ml-
TABLE 27 FORCE COEFFICIENTS FOR LOW WALLS OR HOARDINGS (< 15 m HIGH)
I
,
ONE EDGE ON GROUND
ABOVE GROUND h.,cmht

(Wind hormal to face)
WIDTH TOHEIGHT RATIO. b/h

Wall above ground
From 0.5 to 6
10
D RAG COEFFICIENT,~~
Wall on ground
From 1 to 12
20
32
40
80
120
160 or more
::
40
60
80 or more
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7.
:::
l*L
FOR
1*2.
I
1
f
3r1#<R,<105,
i
El.2
t*22
1
I I-I
l-T-I-----1--6,0,
I I I
1-o
t
I I
I I
0.8
0.2
0H
2
105
c f = ORAG
I
----EXTRAPOLATE0
L
5 6
I
2
8 ?06
I
3
I
L
1
5 6
107
Re Cf
Fig. 5 Variation of - with R, < 3 x lo4 for Circuiar Sections

I +2-E
COEFFICIENT
.
L
I
5 6
.
0 lOa
pressure coefficients. Allowance shall be

made for the shielding effects of one
element or another.
d)
SOLID CIRCULAR SHAPES MOUNTED ON A

The force coefficients for
SURFACE -
solid circular shapes mounted on a surface

shall be as given in Fig. 6.
4.6 Dynamic Ejfccts
4.6.1 G ENERAL - Flexible slender structures
and structural elements shall be investigated to
ascertain the importance of wind induced
oscillations or excitations along and across the
direction of wind.
In general the following guidelines may be used
for examining the problems of wind induced

oscillations:
a) Buildings and closed structures with a
height to minimum lateral dimension ratio

of more than about 5.0; and
b) Buildings and closed structures whose
natural frequency in the first mode. *is
less than 1 .O HZ.
NOTE, 3 - Cross wind motions may be due to the

lateral nustiness of the wind. unsteady wake flow (for
exampli , vortex sheddingj. negative aerodynamic
damping or to a combination of these effects. These
cros&wi;ld motions can become critical in the design
of tall building structures.
NOTE 4 - Motions in the direction of the wind
(known also as buffeting) are caused by fluctuating
wind force assdciated with gusts. The excitations
depend on the gust energy available at the resonant
frequency.
hk3TE 5 - The wake shed from an upstream body

may intensify motions in the direction of the wind,
and may also affect crosswind motions.
h&IrTL 6 -- The designer must be aware of the tollowing three forms of wind induced motion which are
characterized by increasing amplitude of oscillation
with increase of wind speed.
il) GALLOPING - Galloping is transverse oscilla-
tions of some structures due to the development

of aerodynamic forces which are in phase with
the motion. It ischaracterized by the progressively
increasing jmplitudc of transverse vibration with
increase of wind speed. The cross-sections which
arc particularly prone to this type of excitation
include the following:
I) All structures with non-circular cross-sections,
such as triangular. square, polygons, as well as
angles, crosses and T-sections.
2) Twisted cables and cables with ice encrupta.
tions.
Any building or structure which does not

satisfy either of the above two criteria shall be
examined for dynamic effects of wind.
b) IFLUTTER - Flutter is unstable oscillatory

motion of a structure due to coupling between
aerodynamic force and the elasticdeformation of
the structure. Perhsos the most common form is
the oscillatory motion due to combined bending
1 - The fundamental time period (73 may

either be established by experimental observations on
similar buildings or calculated by any rational method
of analysis. In the absence of such data, T may be
determined as foltows for multi-storeyed buildines:
each degree of freedom may be damped, instability can set in due to energy transfer from
and torsion. Although oscillatory motions iri

NOTE
a) For moment resisting frames without bracing or

shear walls for resisting the lateral loads
T=o.ifl
where
n = number of storeys including basement storeys.
b) For all others
7 = 0.09 H
G-
where
H = total height of the main structure of the
building in metres, and
d = maximum base dimension of building in
metres in a direction parallel to the adplied

wind force.
!%T1: 2 - If preliminary studies indicate that windinduced oscillations are likely to bestgnificant. investigations should be persued with the aid ol analytical
methods or, if necessary, by means of wind tunnel
tests on models.
M-l-
52
one mode of ocscillation to another, and the

structure is seen to execute sustained or divergent
oscillation< with a type of motion which is a
;onrbination of the indivtdual modes of motion.
Such energy tratlsfer takes place when the natural
frequencies of the modes, taken individually,
are close to each other (ratio brintr typically less
than 2.0). f,lutter can set in at wind speedsmuch
less than those required for ckciting the individual
modes of motton. Long span suspension bridge
decks or any member of a structure with large
values of d/f (where d is the depth of a structure
or structural member parallel to wind stream and
I ir the least lateral dnnension of a member) are
prone to low speed flutter. Wind tunnel testing is
requtred to determine critical flutter speeds and
the likely structurJI response. Other types of
flutter arc stngle degree of freedom stall flutter,
lortional ftutter. rtc.
CJ OVALLING - This walled structures with open

ends at one or both ends. such as oil storage
tanks, and natural draught cooling towers, Trr
which the -ratio of the diameter of minimum
lateral dirneitston to the wall thickness is of the
order of 100 ot more, are prone to ovalling
oscillations. Thcsc oscillations are characterized
by periodic radial deformation of the hollow
structure.
NOTE 7 - Buildings and structres that may be
subjected to serious wind excited oscillations require
careful investigation. It is ,to be noted that wind
induced oscillations may occur at wind speeds lower
than the static design wind speed for the location.
NATIONAL BUllDING CODE OF INDIA
SlDE E L E V A T I O N
OESCRlQTlON O F S H A P E
Cf
1.2
CIRCULAR DISC
-IIl
/
dii!
HEMISPHERICAL
BOWL
1.4
HEMISPHERICAL
BOWL
o-4
HEMISPHERICAL
SOL ID
l-2
0-S FOR VdD e j

SPHERICAL
so1 IO
O-2 FOR
Fig. 6 Force Coefficients for Solid Shapes Mounted on a Surface
\bD*'
NOT&? 8 - Analytical methods for the response of

dynamic structures to wind loading can be found in
the following publications :
1) Engineering Science Data, Wind Engineering

sub-series (4 volumes), London, ESDU International.
2) Wind Engineering in the Eighties. Construction Industry Research and Information

Association, 1981. London.
3) Wind Effects on Structures by E Simiu and

R . H . Scanlan. John Wiley and Sons, New
York. 1978.
4) Supplement to the National Building Code of
Canada, 1980. NRCC, No. 17724. National
Research Council of Canada, Ottawa. 1980.
5) Wind Forces on Structures by Peter Sachs.
Pergamon Press.
6) Flow Induced Vibration by Robert D. Clevins.
Von Nostrand Reinfold CO .
MTE 9 - In assisting wind loads due to such
dynamic pllenomenonasRalloping, flutter and ovalling,
if the required information is not available either in
the references of Note 8 or other literature, specialist
advice shall be sought, including experiments on
models in wind tunnels.
4.6.2 MOTION
D UE
TO
V ORTEX S H E D D I N G
4.6.2.1 S L E N D E R S T R U C T U R E S - FOr a
structure, the shedding frequency,7 shall be
determined by the following formula :

sd
where
S = Strouhal number,
vd= design wind velocity, and
b = The breadth of a structure or structural. members in the horizontal plane
normal to the wind direction.
a) C I R C U L A R S T R U C T U R E S - For structures circular in cross-section :
S = 0.20 for by, not greater than 7, and
S= 0.25 for bV, greater than 7.
MTE 3 - Intensification of the effects of periodic

vortex shedding has been reported in cases where two
or more similar structures are located in close
proximity, for example, at less than 206 apart, where
b is the dimension of the structure normal to the wind
MTE 4 - The formulae given in 4.6.2.1. (a) and
4.6.2.1 (h), are _vaIid for infinitely long cylindrical
structures. The value of S decreases slowly as the ratio
of length to maximum transverse width decreases; the
reduction being up to about half the value, if the
structure is only three times higher than its width.
Vortex shedding need not be considered if the ratio of
length to maximum transverse width is less than 2.0.
Factor (GEF) Method

4 . 7 . 1 AP PL I C A T I O N ~ Only the method of
calculating ldad along wind or drag load by
using gust factor method is given in the section
since methods for calculating load across-wind
or other components are not fully matured for
all types of structures. However, it is permissible
for a designer to use gust factor method t6
calculate all components of load on a structure
using any available theory. However, such a
theory must take into accpunt the random
nature of atmospheric wind speed.
NnrE - It may be noted that investigations f o r
various types of wind induced oscillations out lined in
4.6 are in no wa related to the use of ust factor
IS n e e d e d
method given in 4y.7, although study of 4.8.
for using gust Fdctor method.
W I N D ~ Use of the
existing theories of gust factor method require
a knowledge of the maximum of the wind
speeds averaged over one hour at a particular
site. Hourly mean wind speeds at different
heights over different terrains is given in
Table 28.
4 . 7 . 2 HO U R L Y M E A N
NoTr;. - It must also be recognized that the ratio of

hourly mean wind (tIMW) to peak gust (PC;) given
In Table 28 may not be obtainable in India since
extreme wind occurs mainly due to cyclones and
thunderstorms, unlike in UK and Canada where the
mechanism is fully developed pressure system. HOWever Table 28 may be followed at present for the
estimation of the hourly mean wind speed till more
reliable values become available.
4.7.2.1 VARIATION OF HOURLY MEAN WIND
S P E E D W I T H. H E I G H T - T h e v a r i a t i o n o f
hourly mean wind speed with height shall be

calculated asfollows:
b) R E C T A N G U L A R S T R U C T U R E S ~ For
structures of rectangular cross-section:
S = 0.15 for all values of b V, .
MTt. I - Significant cross wind motions may be
produced by vortex shedding if the natural frequency
of the structure or structural element is equal to the
frequency of Ihe vortex shedding within the range of
expected wind velocities. In such cases, further
analysis sh$uld be carried out on the basis of references
given in Note 8 of 4.6.1.
M)Th: 2 Unlined welded steel chutney stacks and
similar structures are prone to excitation by vortex
bhedding.
VI.l-
54
where
V, = hourly mean wind speed in m/s at
height 2,
Vb =
regional basic wind speed in m/s,

(see Fig. l!
kl = probability factor (Table 4),
terrain and height factor

(Table 28), and
k3 = topography factor (Chuse 4.4.3.3).
k, =
NATIONAL mJllDlNo
cara.
OF ININA
-~___-
- ~-.-- ---
TABLE 28 HOURLY MEAN WIND SPEED F,\C;OR k2 IN DIFFERENT

TPRRAINS FOR DIFFERENT HElGHTS
(Clause 4.7 2)
Height
cm)
TEKHAIN
h
Category 1
Category 2
Catepory 3
Category 4
(1)
.(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10
0.78
0.67
0.50
0.24
15
0.82
0.72
0.55
0.24
20
0.85
0.75
0.59
0.24
30
0.88
0.79
0.64
0.34
SO
0.93
0.8.5
0.70
0.45
0.57
1ou
0.99
0.92
G.79
150
I.03
0.96
0.84
0.64
200
I .Oh
1.00
0.88
0.68
250
1.08
1.02
0.91
0.72
300
I .OY
1.04
0.93
0.74
350
1.1 1
I .06
0.95
0.77
400
1.12
1.07
0.97
0.79
450
1.13
1 .ua
0.98
0.81
SO0
1.14
1 .n9
rJ.99
~~~
0.82
_._~~
--__.~
.#.7..3 A L O N G W I N D L_OAI) - Along w i n d l o a d
on a structure on a strip area ( .I,) at any height
(Z) is given by:
1.; =
a l o n g w i n d l o a d on the struclurc at
a n y h e i g h t i! corresponding to strip
area A c,
a roughness Factor which is dependent

on the size of the structure in relation
to the ground roughness.
A,. =
effective frontal area considered for

the structure at beighl Z.
71, =
design pressure a t h e i g h t % d u e lo
mean hourly wind obtained as
0.6
and
peak load
= gust factor = ~~- ~-- and is given
mean load
by :
r;
- - G-l +g(.r.
v~(N,+T~*),
dl
B( I
+4)2+7
gr = p e a k f a c t o r defined a s t h e r a t i o o f
the expected peak value to the root
mean value of a fluctuating load, and
is a background factor indicating a measure

01 t h e s l o w l y v a r y i n g c o m p o n e n t o f Ihe
fluctuating wind load and is obtained from
f:ig. 8.
is a measure oi the resonant corr~poY
nent of the,fluctuating wind load.
c, = force coefficicnl for the b u i l d i n g .
where
~~
The value of gri- is given in Fig. 7.
Where
c;
1.
is a measure of the available enecpv in the

wind stream at the natural frequency of the
structure (SW Fig. 9 ) .
s
F
is size reduction tac!or (HP Fig. 10).

is the damping coefficient (as a fraction
of critical damping) of the structure (S E E
Tahle 29).
and is to be accounted only
for buildings less than 75 m
high in terrain category 4 and
for buildings less than 25 m
high in terrain categor; 3, and
is to be taken as zero in all
other cases.
5 5
\4-l-
I
/
VALUES OF L,,
If
\ t \ , \
I \\\\
/
/I
) \
\I
,\;
J Y
\ \i\,
Czh/Lh
Fig. 8 background Factor B
vh
OS
O-6
o-4
0.3
0.2
v)
0.15
g 0.04
F O-03
0.02
0,
O-01 -
z 0.006.
CY b
0~005 .
= Clh
0004.
0003 +
@OO2 *
Q-1
0.2
2.0
REDUCED
4-o
6-O
10
FREQUENCY,
40
20
F,-
60
100
200
LOO 600
Cr'P
jh
Fig. 10 Size Reduction Factor S
59
Ml-
5. SEISMIC LOAD
In Fig. 8 and 10.
Czf, h
CYb
h = - a n d F, = ___
Gh
Cl
where
C,= lateral correla$on constant which
may be taken a$10 in the absence of
data;
load
precise
more
c, = longitudinal correlation constant
which may be taken as 12, in the
absence of more precise load data:
b = breadth of a structure normal to the
wind stream;
height of a structure;
hourly mean wind speed at height Z:
natural frequency of the structure in
the fundamental mode; and
a measure of turbulence length scale
(see Fig. 7).
TABLE 29 SUGGESTtD VALUES OF

DAMPING COEFFICIENT
5.1 General Principles

5.1. I Earthquake shocks cause a movement of
ground on which the structure is situated; This

movement causes the structure to vibrate.The
vibrations may be resolved in any three
perpendicular directions and the design of
structures, made safe for the components
vibrations in the three directions acting
simultaneously, shall be considered safe unless
otherwise specifically stated. The predominant
direction of vibration is horizontal.
5.1.2 T h e vibration intensity of ground
expected at any bcation depends upon the
magnitude of earthquake, the depth of focus,
the distance from the epicentre and the strata
on which the structure stands. The important
structures shall be designed for the maximum
vibration Intensity expected at the place.
5.1.3 The response of the structure to the
ground vibration is a function of the nature of
foundation soil; materials, form, size and mode
of construction of the structure; and the
duration and the intensity of ground motion.
This section specifies design acceleration for
structures standing on soils which will not
conslderably settle or slide appreciably due to
vibration lasting for a few seconds.
j.1.4 In the case of structures designed for
horizontal seismic force only it shall be
considered to act in any one direction at a time.
Where both horizontal and vertical seismic
forces are taken Into account, horizontal
force in any one direction at a time may be
consldered simultaneously with the vertical
force as specified in .i. 4.S.
5.1.5 The vertical selsmlc coefficient shall be
considered only in the case of structures in
which stability is a criterion of design or for
overall stability except as otherwise stated in
the relevant clauses.
The peak acceleration along the wind direction

at the top of the structure is given by tllc
following formula:
where
Y = mean deflection at the positlon

where the acceleration is required.
60
Vl-l-
5.1.6 Though the basis for the design of

different types uf structures is covered in this
section, it is.not implied that structural analysis
should be made in every case. There might be
cases of less importance and relatively small
structures for which no analysis need be made,
provided certain simple precautions are taken in
the construction. For example, suitably
proportioned diagonal hracmgs in the vertical
pan& of steel and concrete structures add to
the resistance of frames to withstand earthquake
forces. Similarly, in highly seismic areas,
construction of a type which entails heavy
debiis and consequent loss of life and property,
such as masonry, particularly mud masonry and
rubble masonry, should be avoided in preference
to conStruction of a type which is known to
NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDu
withstand seismic effects better, such as

construction in light weight materials and well
braced timber-framed structures. For the
specified features of design and construction of
earthquake resistant of buildings of conventional types reference may be made to good
practice [VI- l(4)] .
5.4.2.1 Unless otherwise stated, the basic

seismic coefficients (a,)
and seismic zone
factors (F,,) in different zones ihall be taken as
given in Table 30 and Appendices G and H.
5.4.2.2The design seismic forces shall be

computed on the basis of importance of the
structure and its soil-foundation system.
5.2 Assumptions - The following assumptions

shall be made in the earthquake resistant
design of structures:
Earthquake causes impulsive ground
motion which is complex and irregular in
character, changing in period and amplitude
each lasting for small duration. Therefore,
resonance of the type. as visualized under
steady state sinusoidal excitations will not
occur as it would need time to build up
such amplitudes; and
Earthquake is not likely to occur
simultaneously with wind or maximum
flood or maximum sea waves.
TABLE 30 VALUES OF BASIC SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS AND SElSMlC ZONE FACTORS IN

DIFFERENT ZONES
(CZauses5.4.2.1, 5.4.2.3and 5.4.5)

SL Z O N E
No. No.
ETHOD
seismic Coefficient Response SpCCtNm

Method
Method (see
Basic Horhontal
Appendix H)
Seismic Coefficient,
a0
Seismic Zone Iactor
for Average Acceleration Spectra to be

Used with l,~g. 12. &,
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
i)
0.08
0.40
ii)
IV
0.05
0.25
Iii)
III
0.04
0.20
iv)
II
0.02
0.10
v)
0.0 1
0.05
5.3 Permissible Increase in Stresses

5.3.1 PER~~ISS~BLE
INCREASE IN M A T E R I A L
Whenever earthquake forces are
considered along with other normal design
forces, the permissible stresses in materials, in
the elastic method of design, may be increased
by one-third provided that for steels having a
definite yield stress; for steels without a
definite yield point, the stress will be limited
to 80 percent of the ultimate strength. In case
of limit state design, the appropriate partial
safety factors given in relevant sections shall be
S TRESSES -
NOTE I or underground structures and foundations

at 30 m depth or below, the basic seismic cpefficient
may be taken as 0.5 a*; for structures placed between
ground level and 30 m depth, the* basic seismic
coefficient may be linearly interpolated between s
and 0.5 ~0.
The seismic coefficients according to 5.4.2. I for some
important towns and cities are given in Appendix G.
used.
5.3.2 P E R M I S S I B L E I N C R E A S E
A B L E B EARING P RESSURE OF S
IN
AL
~~
L O W-
For
permissible increase in allowable bearing pressure
of soils, referenae may be made to Part VI
Structural design, Section 2 Foundations.
OILS
5.4.2.3 The design values of horizontal seismic

coefficient, ah in the Seismic Coefficient and
Response Spectrum methods shall be computed
as given by the following expresiions:
a) In seismic coefficient method
5.4 Design Seismic Coefficient for Different
Zones
b) In response spectrum method

44
(Y,, =pIF, where
8
5.4.1
For the purpose of determining the seismic

forces, the country is cla&fied into five zones
as shown in Fig. 1 1.
fl=a coefficient depending upon the soilfoundation systems (see 5.4.31,
5.4.2 Depending on the problem, one. of the

following two methods may be used for
I=a coefficient depending upon the

importance of the structure (see 5.4.4),
computing the seismic force:

a) Seismic coefficient method, and
b) Response spectrum method.
PART VI SIRUCIWRAL DESIGN-SlXlldN 1 IBM!?
same as existmg Fig. 13
61
W-l.
.
a0 = basic horizontal I seismic ccdfficient as
given in Table 30,
Fo=seismic zone fadtor for averag? acceleration spectra as given in Table 30, and
s,
- =average acceleration coefficient as read
g from Fig. 12 for Appropriate natural
period and clamping of the structure.
5.4.3 To take into account the soil-foundation
systems on which the structure is founded, a
factor /3 for various cases is given in Table 3 1.
NOTE 3 - If the imposed load is assessed instead of

taking the above proportions for calculating horiii
earth uake force, only that part of the im osed load

shall %e considered which possesses mass. I!arthquake
force shall not be applied on impact effects.
5.5.2 For calculating the earthquake for& on

roofs, the imposed load may not be considered.
5.6 Design Criteria for Multi-Storeyed Ruildings
The criteria for design o,f multi-storeyed
buildings shall 5e as follows:
a) In case of buildings with floors capable of

5.4.4 The importance factor /I) for various
categories of structures shall be as given in
Table 32.
5.4.5 The vertical seismic coefficient where
applicable (see 51.5) may be taken as half of
the horizontal seismic coefficient as indicated
in 5.4.2. In important structures where there is
a possibility of amplification of vertical seismic
coefficient, dynamic analysis is preferable. In
that case F. values in Table 30 should be
multiplied by 0.5.
5.5 Design Live toads
5.5.1 For various loading classes as specified in
Table 1, the horizontal earthquake force shall

be calculated for the full dead load and the
percentage of imposed loads a5 given below:
Imposed. Floor Load
Percentage of Design
Imposed Load
Up to 3 kN/m
25
Above 3 kN/m and

for garage, light Bnd
heavy
50
MJOTE 1 - The percentage of imposed load given

above shall also be used for calculating stresses due to
vertical loads for & mbmmg with those due to earfhquake forces. Under the carthquakc c.ondition, the
whole frame may bc assumed as loaded with imposed
load escept the roof.
N)TF 2 ~ The proportions of the imposed load
indicated above tor calculatine the hoiizontal seismic
forces arc applicable to average conditions. Where the
probable lbadr at the time of an earthquake are more
accurately asse$scd. the d e s i g n e r m a y alrer t h e
proportions indicated or ,even replace the entire
imposed ioad proporrlons by the actual assessed load.
VI.1.
62
providing rigid horizontal diaphragm action,

a separate building or any block of a
building between two separation sections
shall be analyzed as a whole for seismic
forces according to 5.1.4. The total shear
in any horizontal plane shall be distributed
to various elements of lateral forces
resisting system assuming the floors to be
infinitely rigid in the horizontal plane. In
buildings having shear walls together with
frames, the frames shall be designed for at
least 25 percent of the seismic shear.
b) In case of buildings where floors are not
able to provide the diaphragm action as in

(a), the building frames behave independently; and may be analyzed frame by
frame with tributory masses for seismic
forces according to 5. I .4.
c) The following methods are recommended
for various categories of buildings in
varouS zones (see Table on page VI-I- M,
d) Check for drift and ,torsion according to
5.6.3 and 5.6.4 is desirable for all

buildings, being particularly necessary in
cases of buildings greater in height than
40 m.
MTt, I - For buildings having irregular shape and/or
irregular distribution of mass and ,stiffentrs in
horizontal and/or vertical plane it is desirable to carry
out modal analysis usinp response spectrum method
(seealso Note 2 below 5.6.1.1).
NOrt 2 For multi-storeyed buildings. it is assumed
that the storey heights arc more or less uniform
ranging between 2.7 and 3.6 m. In exceptional cases,
where one 6r two-storey heights have to be up to 5 m.
the applicability of the clause is not vitiated.
NATIONAL
IIUiIDING
CODR OF
INDIA
[Recommended Methods of Analysis (see Cluuse 5.6 c)]

Seismic Zones
Recommended Metlwd
Greater than 40 m
Ill, IV and V
Detailed dynamic analysis (either

modal analysis or time history
analysis based on expected ground
mot&n- for which special studies
are required). For preliminary
design, modal analysis using response specturm method may be
employed
Greater than 90 m
I and II
Modal analysis using response spec

trum method.
Greater than 40 m and

up to 90 m
ASS zones
Modal analysis using response

spectrum method. Use of seismic
coefficient method permitted for
Zones 1, II and Ill
Lessthan4Om
All zones
Modal analysis using response

spectrum method. Use of seismic
coefficient method permitted in
all zones
Building Height
TABLE 31 VALUES OF fl FOR DIFFERENT SOIL-FOUNDATION SYSTEMS

K7ause 5.43)
IYIE Of SOIL
MAwiLY ~NSTITUTING THE
FOUNDATION.
ik
VALUES OF fl FOR
)\
Piles Passing Piles not

Throukh
Covered
Any Soil.
Under col.
but Resting
(3)
on Soil
Type 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Type I Rock or
Hard suils
1.0
ii)
Type II Medium
soils
1.0
Type 111 Soft
1.0
iii)
(4)
Raft Founda- Combined

lions
of Isolated
RCC Footings with Tie
Beams
(5)
(6)
Isolated RCC
Footings
Without Tie
Beams or Unreinforced
Strip Ioundations
(7)
Well )
Foundations
(8)
1.0
1.0
1.0
I.0
1.0
1.0
1 .o
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.5
SOilS
The base shear vg is given by the

following formula :
5.6.1.1
VE=KCah W
~=a coefficient defining the flexibility of

structure with the increase in number of
storeys depending upon fundamental
time period T(see Fig. 13).
ah=design seismic coefficient as defined in
5.4.2.3 (a),
where
K
Hl-
=performance factor depending upon the

structural framing system and brittleness or ductility of construction (see
Table 32),
64
W=TotaS dead load + appropriate amount

of live load as defined in 5.5, and
T=fundamental time period of the building
in seconds (see Note 1).
wllopuL BullDlK CUDC or IrnlA
NOTE 1 - no fundamental time period may either

be established by experimental observations onslmilar
buildlqs or ulcufatai .by any rational method of
analysis. In the absence of such data, T may be
determined as follows for multi-storeyed buildings :
a) For moment resisting frames without bracing or

shear walls for resisting the lateral loads
d =maximum base dimension of building in

met-es in a direction parallel to the applied
seismic force.
MTE 2 - The above clause shall not apply to the
buildings of the type shown in Fig. 14. For such
buildings, modal analysis shall be carried out.
T= 0.1 n
Where
n = number of storeys including basement stoteyr.

b) For all others
T_ 0.09H
6
where
H= total hclght of the main structure of the
bullding above the ground level inmetres, and
PERlOO IN SEC0105
BUILDING WITH FLEXIBLE

F I R S T STOREV
Fig. 13 C Versus Period
BUILDING IN
HILLV A R E A
TABLE 32 VALUES OF IMPORTANCE FACTOR, 1
(clause 5.4.4)
%.
S TRUCTURE
VALUE OF
IM~~P;.-;;E
(see Not;)
(2)
(1)
formula:
2.0
Of
ii) Important service and com-
1.5
munity structures, such

as hospitals; water towers
and tanks; schools; important power houses;
munumental structures
emergency buildings like
telephone exchanges and
fire brigade; large assembly structures like cinemas, assembly halls and
subway stations
iii) All others
5.6.1.2Distribution of forces along with the

height of the building is given by the following
(3)
i) Containers of inflammable
or poimnous gases
liqurds
Fig. 14 Buildings in Which Clause 5.6.1.1

shall not be Applicable
where
Qi =lateral forces at roof or floor I.

V H =base shear as worked out in 5.6.1.1;
1.0
NOTE - The values of importance factor, I given in

this table are for guidance. A designer may choose
suitable values depending onthe importance based on
economy, strategy and other considerations.
rARTvlsmttlcnmAL DESIGN-SECIION 1 LOADS
Wi =load (dead load + appropriate
amount
live load) of the roof or any floor i
(see Note);
hi =height measured from the base of

building to the roof or any floor i; anu
65
Vl-l-
TABLE 33 VALUES OF PERFORMANCE FACTOR,K

(C&use 5.6.1.1)
!~RUCTURALFRAMINGSYSTEM
SL
NO.
REMARKS
VALUEOF
PE;W~U&AN$E
(2)
(3)
(4)
i) a) Moment resista@ frame with appropriate

ductility details %s given in good practice
[VI-(s)] in reinforced concrete or steel
1.0
R.C. shear walls or

steel bracing members designed for
1.0
(1)
b) Frame as above with
.
These factors will apply only if the
steel bracing members and the infill
into tinsidantkm
in stiffness as well lateralstrength
panels are taken
ductility
i;) a ) l-tame as in (i) (a) with either steel
bracing members or plain or nominally
reinforced concrete infiil panels
b)
Frame
as in (i) (a) in combination with

masonry infills
calculations provided that the

frame acting alone will be able tb
resist at least 25 percent of the
design seismic forces
1.3
1.6
1
iii) Reinforced concrete framed buildings

covered by (i) or (ii) above)
[Not
1.6
of storeys including the basement floors, where the basement

walls arc not connected with grodnd
floor deck or the basement walls are
not fitted between building columns,
but excluding the basement floors
where they are so connected.
n =number
MITF - In calculating. Wi. the weight of walls and

columns m any storey is assumed to be shared half and
half between the roof or floor at top and the floor or
ground at bottom. and all weights are,assumed to be
lumped at the levei of the roof or any floor i.
force and shear distributions for a

ten-storeyed building are illustrated in Fig. 15.
5.6.1.SThe
Example:
For a ten-storeyed building in Fig. 15 :
VB
Qi
cah(w,
9Wr)
Vg
r-n
c wi4
1-I
Vj= 5Qi
1-j
where
Vj =shear in jth storey.
NOTE - For other notations, ser X6.1.1 and X6.1.2.
5.6.2 MODAL A NALYSIS - The load acting

at any floor level i due to the mode of vibrating
Qi(rl is given by the following equation:
i-7
Fig. 1.5 Force and Shear Distrtbution for Ten-Storeyed Building
66
w-1.
NMloNu wmDlNG caw 01 mm
where
K =sameasdefiiedin 5.6.1.1,
W, -weight of the floor i as given in 561.2,
=mode shape coefficient obtained from
free vibration analysis at floor i,
G =mode participation factor,
oh =design horizuntal seisnuc coefficient
as defined in 5.4.2.3 (b), and
r =reptesents rrh mode.
5.6.2.Z The mode participation factor C, may
be given bythe following equation:
i-n
C Wi #i(l)
c,
where
$ rjd. f i() same as defined in 5.62.
= total number of storeys as defined
in 5.6.1.1.
5.6.2.2 The shear force, Vi, acting in floor level
t, may be obtained as follows:
where
Vi = absolute value of maximum shear at
the ith storey in the rth mode; the
value of 7 shall be as given below:
Hefght, H
Y
@I
0.40
Upto 20
0.60
40
0.80
1.00
z
NOTE - For intennediatr heights of buMWs, value
of rrnay be obtained by linear interpolation.
5.6.2.3The totalload at Q, and Qi acting at
roof level n and floor level i will be computed
from the following equations respectively:
Qn = Vn
Qi =vi-
I$+1
The overturning moments at various levels of

the building may be computed by using the
aboye roof and floor level forces.
5.63 D~lpr - The maximum horizontal
rehftive displacement due to earthquake forces
between two successive floors shall not exceed
OEfitErs the difference in levels between
.
5.6.4 TORSION OF B UILDINGS - Provision
shall be made for the increase in shear resulting
MRn8ntmt&u DIuQluDcnONluMw
from the horizontal torsion due to an

eccentricity between the centre of mass aud the
ccntre of rigidity. The design eccentricitv shall
be taken as 1 5 times the computed ecccntr;city
between the centre of mass and the centre of
rigidity. Negative torsional shears shall be
neglected.
5 . 7 Type ot Construcrion - F o r d i f f e r e n t
types of construction adopted, the constructional details and the appropriate design criteria
to be adopted shall be in accordance with good
practice [W-1(4)].
5.8 Miscellaneous
58.1 Towers, tanks, parapets, smoke stacks,
chimneys and other vertical cantilever
projections Atached to buildings and projecting
above the roofs shall be designed for five times
*the horizontal seismic coefficient specified in
5.4.2.1. However, compound walls need not be
designed for increased seismic coefficient
except where the environmental circumstances
indicate that their collapse may lead to serious
consequences.
5.8.2 All horizontal projections like cornices
and balconies shall be designed to resist a
vertical force equal to five ttmes the vertical
seismic coefficient specified in 5.4.5 multiplied
by the weight of the projection.
NDTE - The increased seismic coefficients specitied
in 5.811 and 5.8.2 are for designing the projecting part
and its connection with the main structure. For the
design of the main stiucture such increase need not
be considered
5.8.3 For industrial structures and frame

structures of large spans and heights, modal
analysis using response spectrum method is
recommended.
5.9. Elevated Structures
5.3.1 GENERAL
5.9.1. I The elevated structures covered by these
provisions include elevated tanks, refinery
vessels and stacklike structures, such as
chimneys of normal proportions that are not
covered under 5.8. In the case of the elevated
structures of unusual proportions, more
detailed studies shall be made.
59.2 EL E V A T E D TOWER-SUPPORTFD
TANKS
5.9.2.1 For the purpose of this analysis,
elevated tanks shall be regarded as systems with
a single degree of freedom with their mass
concentrated at their centres of gravity.
5.9.2.2 The damping in the system may be
assumed as 2 percent of the critical for steel
W-l-
67
structures and 5 percent of the critical for

concrete (including masonry) structures.
5.9.2.3 The free period T, in seconds, of such
structures shall be calculated from the following
formula:
quakes are considerably less in magnitude as

compared to impulsive pressures and its effect
is a sloshing of the water surface. For the
purpose of design only the impulsive pressure
may be considered.
4 RECTANGULAR C0NTAINER
The pressure at any location x (fee Fig. 16)
is given by:
where
A = the static horizontal deflection at
the top of the tank under a static
horizontal force equal to a weight
W acting at the centre of gravity of
tank. In calculating the period of
steel tanks, the members may be
assumed to be pinjoined with only
the tenslle members of the bracing
regarded as active in carrying the
loads. No pretension shall be
assumed in the bracing rods; and
The pressure on the wall would be:
The pressure on the bottom of the tank

would be:
8= acceleration due to gravity.

5.9.2.4 The design shall be worked out .both
when the tank is full and when empty. When
empty, the weight w used in the design (see
5.9.2.3) shall consist of the dead load of the
tank and one-third the weight of the staging.
When full, the weight of contents is to be
added to the weight under empty condition.
5.9.2.5 Using the period T as calculated
in 5.9.2.3 and appropriate damping, the
spectral acceleration shall be read off from the
average acceleration spectra given in Fig. 12.
The design seismic coefficient, oh shall be
calculated as in 5.423 (b).
5.9.2.6 The lateral force shall be taken equal
to:
pb= ahwh fi
where
x,y,l and h are as defined in Fig. 16 and w
is the Unit Weight of water, and oh for
tanks located on towers is to be taken as
given by response spectrum method and
for those located
. . on ground correspondcoefficient method
$e 5.,P2.355?
b) CIRCULAR CONTAINER - The pressure
on the wall would be:
where
oh = design seismic coefficient as given
in 5.9.2.5, and
b.1 = weight as defined in 5.9.2.4.
The pressure on the bottom of the tank on a

strip of width- 2/r (see Fig. 16). would be:
This force shall be assumed to be applied at the

centre of gravity of the tank. horizontallyin the
plane in which the structure is assumed to
oscillate .for purposes of carrying out the lateral
load analysis.
5.9.2. PHYDRODYNAMIC PRESSURE IN TANKSWhen a tank,containing fluid vibrates the fluid
exerts impulsive and convective pressures on
the tank. The convective pressures during earth48
W-l-
where
x, y, 1 and h are as defined in Fig. 16 and
w and oh are as defined& (a).
NAnouu mJnDlNG
coot
01 MM*
5.10 Stackljke Structures
structures are those in which

the mass and stiffnem is more or kss uniformly
distributed along the height. Cantilever
structures like chimneys and refinery vessels are
examples of such structures (see Note).
5.10. I Stadcliie
NOTE - Such structures will not include structures

like refinery columns resting on frames. bins and
kypcrbotic cooling towers. Modal analysib will be
necessary in such cases.
F1
tzzl
RECTANGULAR TANK (PLAN)
of free vibration, T, of such

fmed at base, shall be calculated
from the following formula:
510.2 Period
structures,when
where
c, = coefficient depending upon the
slenderness ratio of the structure
given in Table 34,
wt = total weight of structure inchuliig
weight of lining and contents above
the base,
h = height of structures above the base,
E; = modulus of elasticity of material of
the structural shell,
A = area of cross-section at the base of
the structural shell, and
g = accckration due to gravity.
CIRCIJLAR T4NK (PLAN)
E LE VAT ION
TABLE 34 VALUES OF ct AND tv

(Clauses
5.10.2 and 5.10.6)
Ftg. 16 Rectangukrr and CLYrcubr Water Tank8
RATIO
1;
14.4
1.02
15
ZE
i*t;
3:
ii
41.2 30.4
65.0 56.0
1:25 1.30
1.39 1.35
t:
50 or more
73.8 82.8
1.8k
1.43 1.47
1.50
where
k = ratio, hfr,: and

r, = radius of gyration of the structural sbeli at
the base section.
5.10.3 Using the period T, as indicated
in 510.2, the horizontal seismic coefficient

ah shall be obtained from the spectrum given
in Fig, 12 and as in5.4.2.3 (b).
5.10.4 The design shear forot V, for such

structures at a distancex from the top, shall be
calcukted by the following formula :
where
c,= coefficient depending on skndernest ratio k given in Tabk 34,

q,= design horizontal teismic coeffident
deter&red in accordance with
s.Io.J,and
w, and h are same as defined in 5.10.2.
5.10.5 The design bending mement, M, at a
distance x from top shall be calculated by the
following formula :
49
Hl-
h=
height of centre of gravity of

structure above base. Other notations
are the same as given in 5.10.2 and
5.10.4.
6. SNOW LOAD
6.1 This clause deals with snow loads on roofs
of buildings. Roofs should be designed for the
actual load due to snow or for the imposed
loads specified in Part 2 Imposed loads, whichever is more severe.
NOTE - Mountainous regions in northern parts of
India are subjected to snow fall.
In India, part of Jammu and Kashmir (Baramulah
District. Srinagar District, Anantnag District and
Ladakh District); Punjab and Himachal, Pradesh
Chamba. Kulu. Kinnaur District. Maham District.
kiandi District, Sinnur District and Shnla District);
and Uttar Pradesh (Debra Dun District, Tehri Garhwil
District, Almora District and Nainital District?
experience snow fall of varying depths two to three
times in a year.
6.2 Notations
Ii
ht
fli
so
$i
(Dimensionless) - Nominal values of

the shape coefficients, taking into
account snow drift, sliding snow, etc,
with subscripts, if necessary.
(metres) - Horizontal dimension with
numerical subscripts, if necessary.
(metres) - Vertical dimensions with
numerical subscripts, if necessary.
(degrees) - Roof slope.
y;s~ca;] - Snow load on ground.
- Snow load on roofs.
S
6.3 Snow Load in Roof(s)

6.3. I The minimum design snow load on a roof
area or any other area above ground which is
subjected to snow accumulation is obtained by
multiplying the snow load on ground, s,, by the
shape coefficient p, , as applicable to the
particular roof area considered:
s=
psa
where
s = design snow load in Pa on plan area
of roof,
u = shape coefficient (see 5.4), a n d
so1 ground snow lord in Pa (1 Pa-l N/m)
NOTE - Ground snow load at any place depends on
the crltlal combination of the maximum depth of
undisturbed aggregate curnulatlve snow fall and its
Hl-70
average density. Induc course the characteristic snow

load on ground for different regions will bc included
based on studier Till such time the users of this
code are advised to contact either Snow and
Avalanches Study Establishment Wefence Research
and Development Organization), Manali (HP) or
Indian Meteorolo;ricaJ Department. UhfD). rune in
the absence of any specitic information for any
location.
6.4 Shope Coefficients
6.41 G E N E RA L PRINCI P LES ~ In perfectly

calm weather, falling snow would cover roofs
and the ground with a uniform blanket of
snow, and. the design snow load could be
considered as a uniformly distributed load:
Truly uniform loading conditions, however, ?re
rare and have usually only been observed in
areas that are sheltered on all sides by high
trees, buildings, etc. In such a case, the shape
coefficient would be equal to unity.
In most regions, snow-falls are accompanied or
followed tiy winds. The winds will redistribute
the snow, and on some roofs, especially multilevel roofs, ,the accumulated drift load may
reach a murtiple of the ground load. Roof,
which are sheltered by other buildings,
vegetation, etc, may collect more snow load
than the ground level. The phenomenon is of
the same nature as that illustrated for multilevel
roofs in 6.4.2.4.
So far sufficient data are not available to
determine the shape coefficient on a statistical
basis. Therefore, a nominal value is given.
A representative sample of roofs is shown
in 6.4.2. However, in special cases such as strip
loading, cleaning of the roof periodically by
deliberate heating of the roof, etc, have to be
treated separately.
The distribution of snow in the direction
parallel to the caves is assumed to be uniform.
6.4.2 (see p. 71 to 75)
6.4.3 SH A P E C O E F F I C I E N T S I N A R E A S
E XPOSED TO W IND - The shape coefficients
given in 6.4.2 and Appendix J may be reduced

by 15 percent, provided the designer has
demonstrated that the following conditions are
fulfilled :
The building is located in an exposed
location such as open level terrain with
only scattered buildings, trees or other
obstructions so that the roof is exposed to
the winds on all sides and is not likely to
become shielded in the future by obstructions higher than the roof within a distance
from the building equal to ten times the
height of the obstruction above the roof
level; and
6.4.2 Shape
6.4.2.1
Coeftlcients for SelectedTjjes of Roots

Simple Flat and
Monopitch Roofs
Simple Pitched Roofs

(Positive Roof Slope)*
p, = 0.8
Simple or Multiple Pitched Roofs

(Negative Roof Slope)
6.4.2.2
Two-Sp;;no;; Multispan
1
I
o< pc d
3t+6(
t-
Lp>SO
*For arymmctrica! simple Pitched roofs. each ride of tbc roof shall be treated as one half of correspoadi~
symmetrical roofs.
WIT VI SlRu(TIvItAL
DIBIGN-SiWl-lON I WADS
W.1.
71
6.4.2.3 Simple Curved Roofs
The following cases 1 and 2 must be examined:
t
CASE 2
Restriction:
Pm c 2.3
N==Oif@>W
72
W-l-
6.4.2.4 hhitilevei Roofs*
PI
= 0.8
P, = IlS
LIW
where
113 - due to sliding
/fu = due to wind
1, = Yrt but
IS
restricted as follows:
5m<I,< I5m
I,+/,
kh
L&n! =-7< ~
so
with the restriction 0.8 L jr,, < 40
where
h
is in metrcs
SO
is in kilopaxals
( kilonewtons per square metce )
= 2 kN,m*
h z 15 : I,, is determined from an additional load amounting to 50 percent of the maximum tot;ll load on the
adjacent slope of the upper roof;. and IS distributed linearly as shown on the figure.
l?#< 15O:fls = 0
*A more extensive formula for jrr is described in Appendix A.
tlf 1, < I,. the coefficient /A is determined by interpolation between or, and or-.
fThc load on the upper roof is calculated according to 6.4.2.1 or 6.4.2.2.
?ARl 11 SlRL!CWRAL DESIGN--SUTIOS I LOADS
73
VI-l-
6.4.2.5 Complex Multilevel Roofs

.
1, - 2rh,: 1, - 26,: p, = 08
RUtliCtioll:
5 m < Is < 15 m;
Sm<b<lsm;
CII and Cw ( Irr + h h w a@latcd according to 6.4.11.6.4.2.2 and 6.4.2.4.
W-l-
74
6.4.2.6 Roofs with Local Projections and Obstructions
& is in mates
jO ir in kilopascds (kiloncwtons per S$BR met@
k - 2 kN/m
PI - 08
I - M
Restrictiin5:
08 < k < 2.0
Sm<I< ISm
d i f f e r e n c e i n temperafure varlatrons o f t h e
material and air should he given due constdeldtion.
1, j.3 T h e strucrural a n a l y s i s nlust take
/._.
account of changes of the mean (thr.ough the
section) temperature in relation to the initial
temperaturC(sf) and the temperature gradient

through the section.
a) It should be borne III mind that the changes
o f m e a n t e m p e r a t u r e i n relation to t h e
initial, are liable to differ as between one
structural element and another in buildings
or structures. ;IS for example, between the
external walls and the inlernal elements of
a building. The distribution of temperature
t h r o u g h .seclion of s i n g l e - l e a f s t r u c t u r a l
e l e m e n t s n~ay be assumed linear for the
purpose of analyzes.
7 / Tlns c l a u s e g i v e s guiclallce o n loads a n d

l o a d eftecls due tt) tcmpclature c h a n g e s , so11
and hydrostatic ptessures. mrernally generating
s t r e s s e s (due IO c r e e p , shrmkage. d i f f e r e n t i a l
s e t t l e m e n t . ctc ). acctdental l o a d s . etc, 10. b e
considered in the design of buildings as appropriate. This clause also includes guidance on
l o a d comhinaflons. The nature ot l o a d s t o be
c o n s i d e r e d 101 a particular situation 15 10 h e
b a s e d o n cngineermg ludgement (SW U/VI -3 6).
7.2
7crirpcrururc~ I:/~cY~~v
7 ? / kxpansion and contraction due to changes

In t e m p e r a t u r e of the materials 0I a sf~ucture
shall be considered m destgn. Provision shall be
made either to relieve the stress hy the provlslon
of expansion/contraction joints m a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h g o o d p r a c t i c e [Vi-S(5)] o r d e s i g n t h e
s t r u c t u r e to c a r r y a d d i t i o n a l slrcsscs due to
t e m p e r a t u r e e f f e c t s a s sppropi tare t o t h e
problem
7.3. I. I Tile
temperature range varies f o r
different regions and under different dlurmal
and
seasonal
conditions.
The
absolute
maximum and nunimum temperature which
m a y b e e x p e c t e d i n d i f f e r e n t localities In t h e
c o u n t r y a r e i n d i c a t e d m Appendix A a n d
Appendix B of Part VI Section 6 respectively.
T h e s e f i g u r e s m a y b e u s e d f o r g u i d a n c e II~
assessing the maximum varlatmns of temperature.
2. l.2 T h e t e m p e r a t u r e , indicaled are the a i r
temperatures in t h e s h a d e . T h e rang? of
variation In t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e b u i l d i n g
m a t e r i a l s may be appreciably greater or less
than the variation of air temperature and is
influenced by the condition of exposure and
the rate at which the materials composing
the structure absorb or radiate heat. This
W-l-
b ) T h e effect (II m e a n remperature c h a n g e s

t,, a n d I?. and the temperature gradients
i*L a n d P: In the Ilot a n d c.Y~IcI ~rasons f o r
single-leal s t r u c t u r a l elenients s h a l l b e
evaluated on the basis of analytical
principles.
; f I In tt1c dqql
of5tructriles 01 p a r t s o r
srructures b e l o w g r o u n d Icvcl such 3s rctallllng
w a l l s a n d o t h e r w a l l s II> haselnent f l o o r s . the
p r e s s u r e e x e r t e d by the soil 01 ware1 or bolh
s h a l l b e d u l y a c c o u n t e d for on the basis 01
e s t a b l i s h e d theories. Due allowance shall he
made f01 possible surcharge from stationary or
movmg loads. When a p o r t i o n or whole of the
s o i l IS below the free wafer sur-face, the lateral
e a r t h pIessure shall bc evaluated for weight of
,c)il dlmmlshed b y b u o y a n c y and t h e f u l l
hydrostatic pressure.
: 3. I. I AIL foundation slabs and other footings

sublected to water pressure shall be designed tcr
resist a uniformly dlstrlhuted LIplift equal to th(
tull h y d r o s t a t i c p r e s s u r e . (ticcklng of over.
of foundation under s u b m e r g e d
turnrng
condition sllall b e d o n e corlsiderrng huoyarl t
weight of f o u n d a t i o n
7 .?.I While determining the lateral soil pressure
on c o l u m n l i k e s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s \uch a s
76
NATIONAL ~rnLDlm; CODE OF IhTm
pillars which rest in sloping soils, the width of

the member shall be taken as follows (WC Fig.
17):
Ratio oJ EJJktiw
Widrh to Actuul
Width
Less than 0.5 ni

Beyond 0.5 111 :~ntl
up to I Ill
Beyond I m
3.0
3.0 to 1.0
_ 2.0
The relieving pressure of soil in Iront of the

structural member concerned may generally not
be taken into account.
-f
2b
TO 3b
7.4.2 Where necessary, permissible stresses shall

be reduced to allow for the effects of fatigue
Allowance for fatigue shall be made F-s
combinations of stresses due to dead load 7:
imposed load. Stresses due to wind and ear
quakes may be ignored when fatigue is beirle
considered, unless otherwise specified inrelev3r.r
codes of practice.
Each element of the structure shall be designed
for the number of stress cycles of each
magnitude to which it is estimated that the
element is liable to be subjected during the
expected life of the structure. The rjurnber of
cycles of each magnitude shall be estimated in
the light of available date regarding the probable
frequency of occurrence of each type of loading.
NW1,. - A p a r t from the general obscrvlltions mndc
hcrcin, the section is unable to provide an) precise
guidance in estimating the probabilistic behaviour and
rqonsc of structures of variou* tvpes aricme out ot
rcpctitivc loading alqxoachin,(7 f,ltiguc condition< i n
structural tncmbers,loint~. materials. et;.
7..5 Stmcrurcl Suji,fj, lhrittg Cottstruction
Fig. 17 Sketch Showing .5[Tectitie Width 41

Pillar for Calculating Soil Pressure
7.3.3 Safe-guarding of structures and structural
members against overturning and horizontal
sliding shall be verified. Imposed loads having
favourable effect shall be disregarded for the
purpose. Due consideration shall be given to the
possibility of soil being permanently or
temporarily removed.
7.4 Fatigue
7.4.1 GENERAL - Fatigue cracks are usually
initiated at points of high stress concentration.
These stress conct?ntrations may be caused by

or associated with holes (such as bolt or rivet
holes in steel structures), welds includingstray
or fusions in steel structures, defects in
materials. and local and general changes in
geometry of members. The cracks usually
propagate, if loading is continuous.

where there is such loading cycles. sudden
changesof shape of a member or part of a
member, especially in regions of tensile stress

and/or local secondary bending, shall be
avoided. Suitable steps shall be taken to avoid
critical vibtations due to wind and other causks.
?fl VI SIWMTlJRAL DESlCN..SeCnON
I UlADS
7.5.1 All loads required to be carried by the

structures or any part of it due to storage or
positioning of construction materials and
ercetion equipment ir&luding all loads due to
operation ofsuch equipment, shall be considered
as erection loads. Proper provision shall be
made, including temporary bracings ,to take
care of all stresses due ,to erection loads. T!le
structure as a whole and all parts of structure in
conjunction with the temporary bracings shall
be capable of sustaining these erection loads,
without exceeding the permissible stresses
specified in respective codes of practice. Dead
load. wind load and such parts of imposed load,
as<.yould be imposed on the structure during
the period of erection,shall be taken as acting
together with erection loads.
7. h .A cd(wt~l I.O~S -- T h e o c c u r r e n c e of
which, with a significant value, is unlikely on;1
given structure over the period of time under
consideration, and also in most cases. is of short
duration. The occurrence of an accidental load
could, in many cases. be expected to ca;ise
severe consequences, unless special measures arctaken.
The accidental loads arising out of human

action include the following:
a) Impacts and collisions,

b) Explosions, and
c) Fire.
Characteristic of the above stated loads are that
they are not a consequence of no-mai use arc!
that they are undesired, and that extensive
efforts are made to avoid them. As a result. the
probability of occurrence of an accidental toad

is small whereas the consequences may be
severe.
The causes of accidental loads may be:
a) inadequate safety of equipment (due to
poor design or poor maintenance); and
b) wrong operatidR (due to insufficient
teaching or training, indisposition, negligence or unfavourable external circumstances).
In most cases, accidental loads only develop
under a combination of several unfavourable
occurrence. In practical applications, it may be
necessary to neglect the most unlikely loads.
The probability of occurrence of accidental
toads, which are neglected, may differ for
different consequences of a possible failure. A
data base for a detailed calculation of the
probability will seldom be available.
NOTI .--
Lkterr~titrariu~r of ,1ccxlcrrral I.oaJs T y p e s

a n d maenitudc 01 a c c i d e n t a l loadr s h o u l d nreferablv
b c bas;d o n a r i s k analy~~x. T h e a n a l y s i s shoulh
comider a l l f a c t o r s influencing the magnitude o f t h e
a c t i o n . i n c l u d i n g prevcntivc mcamrcs f o r a c c i d e n t a l
s i t u a t i o n s . G e n e r a l l y . onl! the principal load bcarinl:
s y s t e m need be designed for relevant ultimate l i m i t
Ftatcs.
7.6.1 IMPACTS
AND COLLISIONS
7.6.1.1 G E N E R AL - During an impact, the

kinetic impact energy has to be absorbed by the
vehicle hitting the structureand by the structure
itself. In an accurate analysis, the probability of
occurrence of an impact with a certain energy
and the deformation characteristics of the
object hitting the structure and the structure
itself at the actual place must be considered.
Impact energies for dropped objects should be
based on the actual loading capacity Bnd lifting
height.
Common sources of impact are:

a) vehicles;
b) dropped objects from cranes. fork lifts,
etc;
c) cranes out of control, crane failures; and
d) flying fragments.
The codat requirements regarding impact from
vehicles and cranes are given in 7.6. I.? and
7.6. I..?.
7.6. I.2 COLLISIONS HL:TWEI:N VEHICLKS ANI)
In road t r a f f i c .
the requirement that a structure shall be able to
resist collision may be assumed to be fulfiMed
STRUCI+JRAL ELLMENTS -
78
W-l-
if it is demonstrated that the structural element

is able to stop a fictitious vehicle, as described
below. It is assumed that the vehicle strikes
the structural element at a height of 1.2 m in
any possible direction and at a speed of 10 m/s
(36 km/h).
The fictitidtis-.vehicle shall be considered to
consist of two masses VI, and tn2 which, during
compression of the vehicle, produce an impact
force increasing uniformly from zero, corresponding to the rigidities Cl and C2. It is
assumed that the mass ~1, is broken completely
before the breaking of mass m2 begins.
7 he following numerical values should be used:
III , = 400 kg. c, = lOOOOkN/m,
the vehicle is compressed.
111 2 = 12 000 kg, C2 = 300 kN/m,
is compressed.
the vehicle
No I I lhc de<cribcd fictitious collision corresponds

in the cd9e o f a n o n e l a s t i c s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t t o a
maximum static force of 630 kN for the mass t?tt a n d
600 kN for the mass 1112 irrespective of the elasticity,
it will therrforc bs on- t h e s a f e s i d e t o a s s u m e t h e
htltic force to bc 630 kN.
In addition. breaking of the mass rn, will result
in an impact wave, the effect of which will
depend, to a great extent, on the kind of
structural element concerned. Consequently, it
wilt not always be sufficient to design for the
static force.
7.0.1.3S~i I.TY R A I L I N GS - With regard to
safety. railings put up to protect structures
against collision due to road traffic, it should be
shown that the railings are able to resist the
impact as described in 7.6.1.2.
N~)I.I. - Whcna vehicle collides with safety railings,
energ) of the v e h i c l e w i l l b e a b s o r b e d
p;lrtl) by the deformation of the railings and partly by
the deformation of the vrhiclc. The part of the kinetic
energy w h i c h the radinss s h o u l d b e a b l e t o a b s o r b
\(ithout brcahlng do\\ n m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e
b a s i s of the JWIW~ rigidity o f t h e v e h i c l e d u r i n g
comprcision.
IIIC kmctic
7.6.1.4 C R A N E I M P A C T L O A D O N
- The basic horizontal load PY
BUFFER
(tonnes),
acting along the crane track produced by
impact of the crane on the buffer stop, is
calculated by the following formula:
STOP
P, = MV=/f
where
! = speed at which the crane istravelling
at the moment of impact (assumed
equal to half the nominal value)
(m/s):
t h e maxImum
shortening
of
the
bUtfGr. 3wfned equal t o 0 . I m f o r
tight duly. m e d i u m - d u t y a n d heavyd u t y c r a n e s wlrh f l e x i b l e t o a d

s u s p e n s i o n altd toadmg capacity not
exceedmg 50 t. a n d 0 . 2 m i n e v e r y
other cranes;
/Ii =
t h e reducctl crane m.~ss. (r 5 III).

and IS obtained by the formula
h)
Internal dust explosions:
C) Boiler faitule:
d) F%tcrnal gas cloud exploslons;and
t) Extclnat e x p l o s i o n s o f h i g h e x p l o s i v e s
( T N T . dynamlre).
I t1c denial ~cquircmcnt r e g a r d i n g i n t e r n a l g a s

.(I..?.? I SILOSION
llI:FcT I N CLOSI, 1)
KOOMS - Gas e x p l o s i o n m a y b e c a u s e d , f o r
exalnple. hy leaks in gas pipes (inclusive of
where
R
= acceleration
( 9 . 8 1 lllk2 ).
P,, =
due
to
gravity
\)i)M?\ outsIde
the room), evaporation from
votarile liquids or unintentional evaporation of
g;1< floni ~nll sheaThings ( f o r e x a m p l e , c a u s e d
by fire 1.
c r a n e bridge weight (I),
P, = c r a b w e i g h t (1):
Q= crane loadmp capacity (t).

k = a coefficient, assumed equal to rero
for cranes with flexible load suspcnsion and to one for cranes with rigid
suspension;
The overprcssure is assumed to depend on a
Factor .1/l: whcrc A is the total window area in
12 a n d I is the v o l u m e In rrr3 of the room
considered:
I,, = crane span (m); and

I
nearness, of crab ( m ) .
7.62 EX P L O S I O N S
The
7.6.2.1 G E N E R A L - - E x p l o s i o n s m a y caCSC
impulsive loading on a structure. The following
types of explosions are particularly relevant:
internal prcssurr IS assumed to act simultancouhly upon ;IU wills and tloors in one closed
room ; and
The ,rcrlon
q. may bc taken as static action.
If account is taken of the time curve of the action, the
a) internal gas explosions which may be

caused by leakage of gas piping ( I n c l u d i n g
piping outside the room), evaporation from
volatile liquids or unintentional evaporation
from surface material (for example, fire);
9,
90
80
kN/m*
schematic correspondcncc hetwccn pressure

:md tune is assumed. where It is the time from the
start of combustion until ma,mlum pressure is reached
.Ind /2 is the time from maximum pressure. to the end
of combustion. For I, and f2, the most unfavourablc
values should bc chosen in relation to the dynamic
propertlrs of the s t r u c t u r e s . However, t h e v a l u e s
should hc chosen wtthin the intervals as eiven in
Irg. 19.
4.
(kN/mt t
70
60
50
10
30
20
IO
0
Am-
V
Fig. 18 Sketch Showing Relation Between

Pressure and Time
MRrnsln-
f t ig. 18)
DESIGN-SECll0N I LOADS
L- +L----t, _I
flbiE(d
Fig. 19 Sketch Showing Trme lntetval

and Pressure
VI-l-
79
N)TI 2 - I ipurc I8 i s bawd on tcstx w i t h ga

c\plosiions i n
roow
rorrespondinp
ttr ordwr)
rrvdentbl Gts and should, thcrctorc. no: bc appliccl
to considerably different conditions. The tigurc
corrdponds to an e.xplo&m caurcd I~!- towng;~> and it
might, t h r r e f o r c , b e somewhat on thr wto ride in
rums whcrc there is only tbc Iws4bility or gaw\ witb
a lower rate of~un~bustion.
7.6.3.lHl HMAI. 1.1
I,k.CT D U R I N G
I:IRI: -
T h e thermat effect d u r i n g f i r e m a y b e
determined from one of the following methods:
a) the time-temperature curve a n d the
required fire resistance (minutes), and
b) an energy-bakmce method.
If the thermal effect during fire is determined
from an energy balance method, the fire load is
taken to be:
I tgure I8 is given purely a s guidr ;~nd prolxlhilit), 01

uccurrenre of an explosion should Or <,hcckcd in ~3~11
wse using approprialc valuc~.
7 . 6 . 3
V~.KTICAL
LLIAI)
O N
4=
where
4
AIH KAID
th
SHFLTERS
7.6.3.1 CHARACTI~.KIS~lfI( V:\I.UI S --.
A s
regards buildings in which the individual
floors are acted upon by a total chal,acterlstlc
imposed action of up to 5.0 kN/m. vertical

actions on air raid shelters generally located
below ground level, for example, basement, etc,
should cbe considered to have the following
characteristic values:
2X kN/m*
Buildings wiih up to
2 storeys
Buildings with 3-4 storeyb
34 kN/m2
Building with more than

4 storeys
41 kN/m*
Ruildings
28
of particularly
kN/m*
stab,le construction
Irrespective of the number
of storeys
In the case of buildings with floors that are
acted upon by a characteristic imposed action
larger than 5.0 kN/m, the above values should
be increased by the difference between the
average imposed action ori all storeys above the
one concerned and 5.0 kN/m
NoTE I Uy storcyr tt ts understood, rvrry utiliz~hle
storey above the shelter.
N*ITt 2
By buildmgs of a particular stable ronstrurtion. it is understood, bulldingq in \\hich the loadbearing structures arc made from rrintorccd in-sirrc
concrete.
7.6.4 FI R E
7.6.4.1 GLNL:.RAL - Possible extraordinary
loads during a fire may be considered as
accidental actions. Examples are loads from
people along escape routes and loads on
another structure from structure failing because
of a fire.
W-1.
80
12 t,,
f i r e a c t i o n ( K J p e r m* f l o o r ) , a n d
required fire resistance (minutes)

[WC VI-l(6)]
NUT tlJ Tbc fire action is dctined a s t h e t o t a l

qUantlty of hut produced by complete combustion of
a l l combu+iblr nt.itcrirll in t IIC f i r e c~rupartmcnt,
incluck ol utvrcd goods and cquipmcnt rogether with
building structure, .tnd buildrng materials.
7. 7 Orlrer Loads Other loads not included in

the present code. such as special loads due to
technical process, m o i s t u r e a n d s h r i n k a g e
effects. e t c . s h o u l d b e t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t
where stipulated by building design codes or
esrablished in accordance with the performance
requirement of the structure.
8
LOAD
COMBINATIONS
8. 1 C;e~rra/ -- A judicious combination of the
loads keeping
in view the probability of:
a) their acting together; and

b) their disposition in relation to other loads
and severity of stresses or deformations
caused by the combinations of the various
loads, is necessary to ensure the required
safety and economy in the design of a
structure.
8.2 Load Combinations -
Keeping the aspect

specified in 8. I, the various loads should,
therefore, be combined in accordance with the
stipulations in the relevant design codes. In the
absence of such recommendations, the
following loading combinations, whichever
combination produces the most unfavourable
effect in the building, foundation or structural
member concerned may be adopted (as a
general guidance). It should also be recognized
in load combinations that the simultaneous
occurrence of rnaxirmm values of wind,
earthquake, imposed and snow loads is not
likely.
1) DL
2) DL t IL
3)DLtWL
4)DLtEL
5) DLtTL
6) DLtILtWL
7) DLtILtEL
8)DLtILtTL
9)DLtWLtTL
lO)DL+ELtTL
11) DLtILtWLtTL
12) DL+ILtEL+TL
both for evaluating earthquake effect and also for

combined load effects used in such combination.
MTE 4 - For the purpose of stability of the
structure as a whole against overturning, the restoring
moment shall be not less than I .2 times the maximum
overturning moment due to dead load plus 1.4 times
the maximum overturhina moment due to imoosed
loads. In caseSwhere deaiload provides the &aioring
moment, only 0.9 times the dead load shall be
considered. The restoring moments due io imposed
loads shall be ignored.
NOTE. 5 - The structure shall have a factor against
slid& of not Icss than 1.4 under the most adverse
combination of the applied loads/forces. tn this case,
only 0.9 times the dead load shall be taken into
account.
(DL = dead load, IL = imposed load,

WL = windload, EL = earthquake load
and TL = temperature load).
&TE 1 - When snow load is present on roul,,
replace imposed load by snow load for the purpose of
above load combinations.
NOTIC 2 - The relevant design codes shall be followed
for permissible stresses when the structure is designed
by working stress method and for partial suiety factors
when the structure is designed by limit stale design
method for each of the above load combinations.
t+&TE 3 - Whenever imposed load (IL) is combined

with earthquake load (EL), the appropriate part OC
imposed load as specified in IVI-1 (711 should be used,
MRTHalmmwu.
DCSIGIU~IKTION
I LOADS
NUTS: 6 - Where the bearinr oressure on soil due to

wind alone is less than 25 pe%nt of that due to dead
load and imposed load, it may be neglected in design
where this e.xceeds 25 percent, found;ltion may be so
proportioned rhat the pressure due to combined effect
of dead load, imposed l,oad rnd wind load does not
e\cecd the allowable bearing pressure by more than 25
percent. When earthquake ctfect is included. the
permissible incrrasc in allowable bearing pressure in
the soil shall be in accordance with [VI-I (7)1.
Reduced imposed load specified in 3 for the design of
supporting structures should not be applied in
combination with earthquake forces.
Nor&: 7 - O t h e r l o a d s a n d accidental l o a d
combinations not included should be dealt with
appmprialely.
NOTI: g - Crane load combinations are covered in
3.6.4.
81
M-1.
APPENDIX A
[Clause 3.3.2.1(b)]
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE SHOWING REDUCTIONOF UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS IN MULTI-STOREYED
BUILDINGS FOR DESIGN OFCOLUMh&
A-l. The total imposed loads from different
floor levels (including the roof) coming on the
central ~.~~lumn of a multi-storeyed building
(with mixed occupancy) is shown in Fig. 20.
Calculate the reduced imposed load for the
design of column members at different floor
Floor No.
From Top
including
Roof
levels using 3.3.2.1. Floor loads do not exceed

5.0 kN/m2.
A-l. I Applying reduction coeffiicents in
accordance with 3.3.2.1. total reduced floor
loads on the column at different levels is
indicated along with Fig. 20.
Actual Floor
Load Coming on
Columns at
different floors kN
LOADS FOR WHICH COLUMNS ARE
TO BE DESIGNED
+40+50+50) (l-0.3) = 119

(30+40+50+50+40) (l-0.4) = 126
-(30+40+50+50+40+45) (l-0.4) = 153
50+50+40+45+50+50) (l-0.4)
30+40+50+50+40+45+50+50t40t40+40
30+40+50+50+40+45+50+50+40+40+40
30+40+50+503+40+45+50+50+40+40+40
82
wc(-
APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.2)
NOTATIONS
A = Surface area of a structure or part of
= Length of the member or greater
horizontal dimension of a building
a structure
le= Effective frontal area
Pd = Design wind pressure
A,= An area at height Z
Pz = Design wind pressure at height Z
b= Breadth of a structure or structural
Pe = External pressure
member normal to the wind stream

in the horizontal plane
ci=
Force coefficient/drag coefficient
II = Internal pressure
R, = Reynolds number
Cm= Normal f&e coefficient
s =
Gt= Transverse force coefficient
v, = Regional basic wind speed

i$ = Mean hourly wind speed correspond-
c; =
G=
Frictional drag coefficient

Pressure coefficent
cpc- External pressure coefficient
cpi=
Internal pressure coefficient
d=
Depth of a structure or structural

member parallel to wind stream
Strouhal number
ing to 10 m height
v, = Design wind velocity at height Z
vz =
Hourly mean wind speed at height Z
W=
Lesser horizontal dimension of a

building or a structural member
w =
Bay width in multi-bay buildings
x =
Distance down wind from a change

in terrain category
K= Normal force
Wind angle from a given axis
F,= Transverse force
Inclination
horizonral
D= Diameter of cylinder
F= Force normal to the surface
F =
Frictional force
Height of structure above mean

ground level
+=
of the roof to the
Solidity ratio
hx= The height of development of a

kl
velocity profile at a distance x down

wind from a change in terrain category
Z= A height or distance above the
ground
kz = Multiplication factors
k:,
K= Multiplication factor
aal-.vl
mtJcrumL DESIGN-tW3lON I lOADS
&= Average height of the surface roughness
VI-,-
83
APPENDIX C
(Clause 4.4.2)
BASIC WIND SPEED AT 10 m HEIGHT FOR SOME IMPORTANT CITIES/TOWNS
CITY/TOWN
Am
Ahmadabad
Ajmer
Almora
Amritsar
Asansol
Aurangabad
Bahraich
Bangalore
Barauni
BareSly
Bhatinda
Bhilai
Bhopnl
Bhubaneshwar
Bhuj
Bikaner
Bokaro
Bombay
Calcutta
Calicut
Chandigarh
Coimbatore
Cuttack
Darbuanga
Darjeeling
Debra Dun
Delhi
Durgapur
Gangtok
Guwahati
Gaya
Gorakhpur
Hyderabad
lniphal
Jabalpur
Jaipur
Jamshedpur
Jhansi
M1Y
BASIC W IND SPEED

IN m/s
47
39
47
47
47
47
39
47
33
47
47
47
39
39
50
50
47
47
44
50
39
47
39
50
55
47
47
41
47
47
50
39
47
44
47
47
47
47
47
CITY ~TDWN
B ASIC W IND S PEED

IN m/r
Jodhpur
Kanpur
Kohima
Kurnool
Lucknow
Ludhiana
Madras
Madurai
Mandi
47
47
44
39
47
47
50
39
39
Mangalore
Moradabad
Mysore
Nagpur
Nainital
Nasik
Nellore
Punjim
Patiala
Patna
Pondicherry
Pune
Raipur
Rajkot
Ranchi
Roorkee
39
47
33
44
47
39
50
39
47
47
50
39
39
39
39
39
39
Rourkela
Shimh
Srinagar
Surat
Tiruchchirappalh
Trivandrum
Udaipur
Vadodara
Varanasi
Vijayswada
Vishakhapetnam
Lakshadweep
Port Blair
39
39
44
47
39
47
44
47
50
50
39
44
APPENDIX D
[Clause 4.4.3.2(d)J
CHANCES IN TERRAIN CATEGORIES
D-1. LOW TO HIGH NUMBER
determined in accordance with the rougher

(more distant) terrain; and
D-I.1 In cases of transitions from a low
category number (corresponding to a low

terrain roughness) to a high category number
(corresponding to a rougher. terrain), the
velocity profile over the rougher terrain shall be
determined as follows:
b) Below height h,, the velocity shall be

taken as the lesser of the following:
1) that determined in accordance with the
less rough terrain; and
a) Below height II,. the velocities shall be

determined in relation to the rougher
terrain; and
b) Above height h,, the velocities shall be
determined iri relation to the less rough

(more distant) terrain.
2) the velocity at height h, as determined

in relation to the rougher terrain.
NOTE; - Examples of the determination of velocity
profiles in the vicinity of a change in terrain category
ark shown in Fig. 21 (a and b) .
D-3 MORE THAN ONE CATEGORY
D-2 HIGH TO LOW NUMBER

D-2 i In cases of transitions trom a more
rough to a, less rough terrain. the velocity
profile shall be determined as follows:
a) Above height h,, the velocities shall be
D-3.1 Terrain changes involving more than one

category shall be treated in similar fashion to
that described in A- -.nd A-2.
MTI - Examples inv&ing three terrain catetzorias
arc shown in I:@. 21 (c).
WlNO
OIRECTlON
CATEGORY 2
x6 =fETCl& = WEIGHT FOR CATEOOW

. - . PROf IlE fOR CATEGORY 4
------ PROFIlE fOR CATEGORY 2
- DESIGN PROFILE AT A
a) DETERMINATION OF VELOCITY PROFILE NEAR A CHANGE
IN TERRAIN CATEGORY
(LESS ROUGH TO MORE ROUGH)
l
l l
Fig. 21 Velocity ProfiIes in the Vicinity of

?ARTvl8lnucnJRAL
~43~4~0~
mum
u Change in Terrain Ciztqory (Contd)

a!!
HI.
n2 rFETCH, h2=HElGHT FOR CATEfX~y 2
l ..~***.PROFIlE FOR CATEGORY 4

- --- PROFILE FOR CREGORY 2
-0ESlGN PROFWE AT A
WlNO
OlRECT ION
w
A
CATEGORY 4
c ---x2
CATEGORY 2
b) DETERMINATION OF VELOCITY PROFILE NEAR A CHANGE

IN TERRAIN CATEGORY
(MORE ROUGH TO LESS ROUGH)
%=FETCH, hpHEIGHT FOR CATEGO RY 4
x,&ETCH, h,=HEIGHT FOR CATEGORY 1
h4xt
h,l/
CATEGORY 3
VElOClTY
VELOCITY
VELOCITY-
. . . . . . . -. VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY L

---a- VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY 3
-.--- VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY 1
- DESIGN PROFILE
c) DETERMINATION OF DESIGN PROFILE INVOLVING MORE
THAN ONE CHANGE IN tERRAIN CATEGORY
Fig. 21 Velocity Profiles in the Vicinity of a Change in Terrain Category
w-1.
86
~llONu wlmlNc MDI 01 WUA
APPENDIX E
(Chore 4.4.3.3)
EFFECT OF A CLIFF OR ESCARPMENT ON THE EQUIVALENT HEIGHT
ABOVE GROUND (k, FACTOR)
E-1.. The influence of the topographic feature
is considered to extend 1.5 L, upwind and 2.5
I,, downwind of the summit or crest of the
feature, where f,, is the effective horizontal
length of the hill dependingotislope as indicated
below (SCC Fig. 22):
Slop0
L,
3<6 < 1 7
> 17
trout wind to PSKSS the height L and the upwind Slope

0 of the feature.
E-2. TOPOGRAPHY FACTOR, kj - The

topography factor k 3 is given by the following:
kj=l+Cs
where C has the following values:
1.
Slope
32 e G
0.3
where I. is the actual length of the upwind

slope in the wind direction, 2 is the effective
height of the feature, and 0 is the upwind slope
in the wind direction.
If the Lone downwind from the crest of the
feature is realtively flat, (0 < 3) for a distance
exceeding f.,, then the feature should be
treated as an escarpment. If not then the
feature should be treated as a hill or ridge.
Examples of typical features are given in
F1g. 77.
17
> 17*
1.2 (9
0.36
s is a factor derived in accordance with E-2. I

appropriate to. the height, H above mean
ground level and the distance x from the
summit or crest relative to the effective lengtli,
Ie V
E-21 The fector s should be determined
from:
a) Fig. 23 for cliffs and escarpments, and
b) Fig. 24 for hills and ridges.
NO~I I --
No difference is made in cvaluntinp ka

between a three dimensional hill and two dimensional
ridpc.
kY I, 2 - In undulating terrain. it is often not
porctblc to decide whether the local topography lo the
ute is significant in terms of wind Ilow. In such cases,
the average ~aluc of the rerram upwmd of the site for
a distance of 5 km should br taken a~ the base level
N>Tk. - Where the downwind slope of a hill or ridge

is greater than 3, there will be large regions o f
reduced accelerations or even shelter and it is not
possible to give gcncral design rules to cater for these
clrcumstanccs. Values of s from Fig. 24 may be used
;IJ upper bound values.
WIND
+ VI DDWNWND
-
a) GENERAL DEFINITION
Fig. 22 Definirion of Topographical Dimensions (Continued)
PART VI
1-l.
87
DOWNWI)D SLOPE *3
c)
HILL AND RIDGE
Fig. 22 Definition of Topographicul Dimensions
CRLSI CREST
UPWIND $
Fig 23 Facror s for Clif/and Escarprnrnr
CREST CREST
0.5
UPWII)
1.0
1.5
OOWNWHO
2.0
2.5-
1L
Le
Fig. 24 Factor s for Ridge and Hill
88
Vl-l-
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF IWIA
APPENDIX F
[ChUSP 453.2 (c)J
WIND FO-RCE ON CIRCULAR SKTIONS
t-1.
The wind force on any object is gtven by:

F = Ct.A,.p*
where
(r Lf force coefficient,
A~= effective area of the object normal

to the wind direction, and
pd = design pressure of the wind.
The dependence of a circular sections force

coefficient or Reynolds number is due to the
change in the wake developed behind the body.
At a low Reynolds number, the wake is as
shown in Fig. 25 and the force coefficient is
typically 1.2. As the Reynolds number is
increased, the wake gradually changes to that
shown in Fig. 26, that is, the wake width &,
decreases and the separation point, S moves
from the front. to the back of the body.
For most shapes. the force coefficient remains

approximately constant over the whole range
of wind speeds likely to be encountered.
However, for objecCts of circular cross-section.
it varies considerably.
As a result, the force coefficient shows a rapid

drop at a critical value of Reynolds number,
fallowed by a gradual. rise and Reynolds
number is increased still further.
For a circular section. the force coefficient

depends upon the war in which the wind flows
around it and is dependent upon the velocity
and kinematic viscosity of the wind and
diameter of the section. The force coefficient is
usually quoted against a non-dimensional
parameter, called the Reyl@ds number, which
takes account of the velocity and viscosity ot
the flowing medium (in this case the wind) and
the member diameter.
The variation of Cr with parameter Dvdis

shown in Fig. 5 for infinitely long circular
cylinders having various values of relative
surface roughness E ID
when subjected to
wind having an intensity and scale of
tuibulence typical of built-up urban areas. The
curve for a smooth cylinder EiD
= 1 x 10-s
in a steady air-stream. as found in a Iowturbulence
wind tunnel. is shown for
4!urnparison.
Reynolds number,
K, z !3_
Y
where
D = diameter of the member;
Vd = design wind speed; and

7 = kinematic vistosity of the air which
is 1.46 x10 m/sat 15Cand
standard atmospheric pressure
Since in most natural environments likely tc
be found in India, the kinematic viscosity of
the air is fairly constant, it is convenient to
use Dvd as the parameter instead of Reynolds
numbers and this has been done in this section.
Fig. 25 Wgke in Subcritical Flow
It all he XCIl IIIiII Ik lil;litl cll~!ct of free-strcam

turbulence i\ I() &crease the critical value 01
t h e paramctcr I) V,. I:or suhacriticaj Il0ws.
turbulence
can product
3 considcr;lhlc
reduction in (I b e l o w the ~t~tidy ail-stlcam
v a l u e s . IOI super-critical ~lo*ks. t h i s c~lcc~
hccoincs significantly smaller.
If the surface of 111~ cylinder is dclibcntcly
roughened such as by incoqx)rating flurcs.
rivetted construction. ctc . ~hsa the Dada
@yen in F i g . 5 foi ppproprbrc v a l u e o f
E /D> o shall be used.
IGg+ 26 Wake in Supercritical. Flow
APPENDIX G
(C1~zr.w 5.4.2.1)
BASIC HORIZONTAL SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS FOR
SOME IMPORTANT TOWNS
IOWN
ZoNI
BASIC
TOWN
HORIZONTAL
SL~ISMIC
(Ok.1 I.-ICI t:NT
7.()N t
Agt :I
Ah~~~dalrad
Ajnicr
Allah;lh;ld
Almora
A mIxI la
AlnlIlxll
Awnsol
Aurangahad
Bahraich
Uangalorc
Barauni
Biareilly
Bhatinda
Hhilai
IU~opaI
Bhuhancrhwar
llhq
IW3ncr
tk,k:llU
lJ~1llllXl)
lhwdw3i~
(alcllrla
(ahcut
Chandigrh
Chitradurg
Coimbalot e
Cuttack
Darbhang
Darjeeling
Dehra Dun
Delhi
Durgapur
Gangtok
Guwahati
Gya
Gorakhpur
Hyderabad
I 111 pha I
Jabalpur
Jaipur
Jamshedpur
Jhansi
Jodhpur
JOI hat
Kanpur
VI-l-
(21
(3)
I11
III
I
II
0.04
0.04
0.0 I
I;
IV
III
I
IV
I
IV
III
III
I
II
III
V
III
III
III
III
III
III
IV
Ill
III
V
IV
IV
IV
III
IV
V
III
IV
I
V
III
II
II
I
I
V
III
0.02
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.01
0.05
0.0;
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.01
0.0:
0.03
0.08
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.0 I
0.04
0.04
0.0x
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.04
0.05
0.0 I
0.08
0.04
0.02
0.0:
0.0 I
0.01
0.08
0.04
(1)
Kathmandu
Kohima
Kurnool
Lucknow
Ludhiana
Madras
Madurai
Mandi
Mangalore
Monghyre
Moradabad
Mysore
Nagpur
Nainital
Nasik
Nellore
PunJim
Paliala
fal na
Pilibhit
Iondlcherry
Iu11c
KLllpUI
bjkoc
Ranchi
Roorkec
Rourhela
Sadlya
Shinila
Sirvni
Srinaga r
Surat
TeLpur
Tanjavur
Tiruchchirappalli
Trivandrum
Udaipur
Vadodara
Varanasi
Vijayawada
Vishakhapa~nam
BASIC
b.IK IZON 1A I
SEISMIC
(0111 ICII NT
a
(2)
(3)
V
V
I
III
IV
0.08
0.08
I;
IV
III
IV
IV
I
II
IV
III
.I I
III
III
IV
IV
II
III
I
III
II
IV
I
V
IV
I
V
Ill
V
II
II
111
0.01
0.04
0.05
0.02
0.07
0.08
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.04
0.0:
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.04
0.0 I
0.04
O.O?
0.05
0.01
0.0x
0.05
0.01
0.08
0.04
0.08
0.02
0.07
0.04
II
III
III
III
II
::EZ
0.04
0.04
O.O?
90
N4lloNAL alJlmING CooL
oc
INDIA
APPENDIX H
(Clause 5.4.2.1)
SPECTRA OF EARTHQUAKE
H-I. GENERAL
II-I. I Spectrum of an earthquake is the
representation of the maximum dynamic
response of idealized structures during an
earthquake. The idealized structure is a single
degree of freedom system having a certain
period of vibration and damping. The
maximum response is plotted against the
natural period of vibration and can be
e x p r e s s e d in terms of maximum absolute
acceleration, maximvni relative velocity or
maximum relative displacement. For the
purpose of design, acceleration spectra are
very useful. as they give the seismic force on a
structure directly by multiplying it with the
generalized or modal mass of the structure.
11-J AVERAGE SPECTRA
II-2 I Prol G. W. Housner has proposed
average spectra on the basis of studies on
response spectra of four strongest earthquakes
that have occurred in USA (scr Fig. 14 which
shows the average acceleration spectra).
II-_._-J To take into account the seismicity of

the various zones, the ordmate of the average
spectra are to be multiplied by a factor /b.
This factor II; depends on the magnitude,
duration and form of the expected earthquake,
distance of the site from expected epicentre,
soil
conditions,
resistance
deformation
characteristics of
the
structure,
etc.
Approximate values of this factor are given in
Table 5.
MTE I t m a y h e p o i n t e d oul t h a t durmg t h e
expcctcd maCmum mtensity o f e a r t h q u a k e i n t h e
various seismic hones. structures will be-subjected to
a higcr force. Hut the capacity of the structure in
plastic range will be available for absorbing the kinetic
cncrpy rmpnrtcd by the earthquake. Therefore. the
L;trurtural details are fo be worked out in such a
manner
t h a t tt c a n u n d e r g o sufficient plastic
detor~r~tiun\ hefore failure.
H-~? DAMPING IN STRUCTURES

/I-.?. I The variety of damping displayed in
different types of structures has made the
choice of suitable damping coefficient for a

given structure largely a matter of judgement.
However, some values are given below to
indicate the order of damping coefficient in
various types of structures:
Tapes oj Strucrure
Damping Coellicknt
in Percent oj
Criticul
a) Steel structures
b) Concrete structures
c) Brick structures in
cement mortar
d) Timber structures
e) Earthen structures
2 to 5
St010
5 to IO
2 to 5
lot030
N)TI,. - It may be menrioncd hcrc 1lnti1 in the cla~ric

range. damping displayed hy \trucfure\ is much lower
t h a n t h a t given abow. II may lie br~wrrn I :tnd 4
p c r c c n r t o r rhe ;Ibove type o f strucruw II IOH
\trcsscs. The values given thus presume some inel:l%tic
detormil~bns or fins cracking to rake place uhcn thi\
order of damping \vill occur. However, tar obtsinintz
d e s i g n s e i s m i c roefticient, ~hc valuea ot dalupinp
mcnrinned in rrlewnt clause AlI apply.
ff-4.
METHOD OF USING THE SPECTRA
I/-J./ Let the period of a structure be 0.8

second and the damping 5 percent critical.
Further let the soil-foundation system give
factor p = 1.2 and let the structure have an
importance factor, I = 1 S. Referring to FIB. 14,
the spectral acceleration. S;, is 0.12 g. If the
structure has mass M=I?.O kg s2/cm and is
to be located in Zone V, the design horizontal
seismic coefficient Q,, would be [see .i.J.2.3
(b)l :
ah = PIF @,/&I)
= 1.2x1.Sx0.4x0.12
= 0.0864
Therefore, horizontal seismic force
P = lr,,Mg
= 0.0864
x 12.0 x 981
= 1017.1 kg
91
mRTvlm- DESiGKWmON 1 LOADS
W-l-
APPENDIX J
(C&uses 6.4.2.4 and 6.4.3)
SHAPE COEFFICIENTS FOR MULTILEVEL ROOFS

A more comprehensive formula for the shape coefficient for multilevel roofs
7
OlRECflONS
WIND
12
p, = 1
+j&, 1, +m?12)(4 -2h)
where
y, = 0.8
s,, is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)
13 =2h
k is in newtons per cubic metre
(h and I being in metres)
1, Q 15 m
Restriction:
Hl-
92
viluer of ml (ml) for the h@wr (lower) roof depend on itr profile and am taken as equal to:
0.5 for plane roofs with slopes a,< 20 and vaulted roofs with
iGa
0.3 for plane roofs with rlopa fi,< 20 and vaulted roofs with 7 > s
The cocftlcients ml and ml may be adjusted tQ take into account conditions for transfer of snow on the roof
surfwe (i.e. wind, tcmpaature. ete)
NOTE - The othe: condition of loading alaa shall be tried.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptabk as good practiGe
and accepted .standards in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
kztest vwsion of a standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the
Code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within perentheses indicates the number of the reference in this part/section
g a n t r y aanes other than steehvork
(1) IS:1875 (Part 1) - 1987 Code of practice
ixanes (jfr~t revision)
for design loads (other than earthquake)
for buildings and structures: Part 1 Dead
Loads - units weight of building materials (4) lS:432261576 Code of ptactia for earth
uake resistant construction of buildings
and stored materials (second revision)
&Irst revirion)
(2) IS:8888-1979 Guide for requirements of
(5) 13:3414-1968 Code of practia for des@
low income housing
and installation of ioints in buildings
(3) 13:807-1976 Code of practice for design,
manufacture, erection and testing (struc- (6) IS:1642-1960 Code of practice for fire
tural portion) of cranrs and hoists (j$sr
safety of buildings (general):Materials and
details of construction
revision)
13:3177-1977 Code of practice for elco
tric overhead travelling cranes and
MRr VI lrmucnJRAL
beSIGN-SKI-ION
UMDl
(7) IS:189%1984 Criteria for earthquake rexis.

tant design of structures (fourth revision)
u-i-
93
NATIONALBUILDING CODE
PART VI
SECTION2
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
FOUNDATIONS
CONTENTS
0.
FOREWORD
1.
SCOPE
2.
TERMINOLOGY
3.
SITE INVESTIGATION
4.
CLASSIFJCAT!ON AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS
5.
MATERIALS
6.
TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS
...
7.
SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
8.
DRIVEN/ BORED CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES
...
..
...
9.
DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
21
IO.
UNDER-REAMED PJLES
23
II,
TIMBER PILES
26
I2.
OTHER FOUNDATIONS
2
...
...
7
7
17
...
27
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY

AND POISSONS RATIO
...
27
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF SUBGRADE

REACTION
...
28
RIGIDITY OF SUPERSTRUCTURE AND

FOUNDATION
...
29
APPENDIX D CALCULATION OF PRESSURE DJSTRIBUTJON

BY CONVENTJONAL METHOD
.I.
30
APPENDIX E
CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND

MOMENTS BELOW FLEXiBLE FOUNDATION
...
3J
APPENDIX F
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION-GENERAL
CONDITION
...
32
APPENDIX G
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY-STATIC

FORMJJLA
...
33
APPENDIX J
DETERMINATION OF DEPTH OF FlXITY,

LATERAL DEFLECTION AND MAXIMUM
MOMENT OF LATERALLY LOADED PILES
. . 36
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX C
APPEND/X K SAFE LOAD ON UNDER-REAMED PILES

FAIT VI StpuffULIL
DESIGN -SCClION
FOUNDA,,DNt,
...
38
VI.

SECTION 2 FOUNDATIONS
0 .
F O R E W O R D
0.1 This section deals with the structural design aspects CJf foundations and nrn~niv covers the
design principles involved in different types of foundations.
0.2 This section was first published in.l970. The first revision is intended to update the provisions
in the light of revision of standards on which it was based and a large number o! new standards
being formulated on the subject. In this revision mainly the following changes have been made.
a) Design considerations in respect of shallow foundations modified,

b) Provisions regarding pier foundations added,
4 Provisions regarding raft foundations revised and elaborated.
d) Provisions regarding pile foundations modified to include driven, bored cast rrt-.GIU
concrete piles and driven precast concrete piles, and
Load test on piles is deleted and only a reference is given as now there exists a ,eparatc
lndian Standard covering the load test on all types of piles.
0.3 For detailed information regarding structural analysis and boil mechanics aspects of
individual foundations, reference should be made to standard textbooks and available literature.
0.4 The information contained in this section is mainly based on the following Indian Standards,
13 : 1080-1980 Code of practice for design and construction of simple spread foundations
yirsr revision)
IS: 1904-1978 Code of practice for structural safety of buildings: Shallow foundations
( s e c o n d revlion)
IS : 291 I (Part I/Set I)-1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations:
Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 1 Driven cast in-situ concrete piles (frrsr revision)
IS : 291 I (Part I/Set 2)-I979 Code of practice fordesign and construction of pile foundations:
Part I Concrete piles, Section 2 Bored cast in-situ piles C/irsr revisio~r)
1s : 2911 (Part l/Set 3)-1979 Code of practice fordesignand constructionof pile foundations:
Part I Concrete piles, Section 3 Driven precast concrete piles (firs: revision)
IS : 2911 (fart HI)-1980 Code of practice for designand construction of pile foundations: Part
III Under-reamed piles (/irsr revision)
IS :.2950 (Part D-1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations: Part1
Design (second
2
VI-t
revision)
NATIONAL l
IJILDINC CODE OF INDIA
1. SCOPE
1.f This section covers structural design
(principles) of all building foundations
(shallow, raft and pile) to ensure structural
safety without exceeding the permissible
stresses of the materials of foundations and
the bc:iring pressure of the supporting soil.
minerals, 50 percent or more of particles

greater than 0.075 mm or less than 4.75 mm in
size.
S A N D. COARSE-Sand which contains 50
percent or more of particles of size greater
than 2 mm and less than 4.75 mm.
S A N D. FINE --Sand which contains 50 percent of particles of size greater than 0.075 mm
and less than 0.425 mm.
2. TERMISOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this section, the
2. ! General
B E A R I N G P R E S S U R E, AL L O W A B L E - - T h e
maximum allowable net loading intensity on
the ground in any given case, taking Into
account the ultimate bearing capacity, the
amount and kind of settlement expected and
the ability of the given structure to take up this
settlement. It is, therefore. a combined
function of both the site conditions and
characteristics of the particular structure.
CLAY --An aggregate of microscopic and
submicroscopic particles derived from the
chemical decomposition and disintegration of
rock constituents. It is plastic within a
moderate to wide range of water content. The
partlcles are less than 0.002 mm in size.
MEDIUM - Sand which contains 50

percent or more of particles of size greater
than 0.425 mm and less than 2.0 mm.
SANL).
SILT C-A fine grained soil with httle or no
plasticity. The size of particles ranges from

0.075 mm to 0.002 mm.
!QOFT ROCK --A rocky cemented material
which oflers a high resistance to picking up
with pick axes and sharp tools but whichdoes
not normally require blasting or chiselling for
excavation.
SOIL. BLACK E XPANSIVE - Inorganic clays of
medium to high compressibility. They form a
major s o i l g r o u p i n I n d i a . T h e y a r e
predominately montmorillonitic in structure
and yellowish black or blackish grey in colour.
They are characterized by high shrinkage and
swelling properties.
C L A Y, FIRM -~A clay which at its natural

water content can be moulded by substantial
pressure with the tingersandcanbeexcavated
wrth a spade.
CLAI. SW1 -A clay which at its natural
water content can be easily moulded with the
fingers and readily excavated.
(I AY. SrlFF- 4 clay which at its natural
water content canno! be moulded with the
fingers and requires a pick or pneumatic sprdi
for its removal.
RH~UI~ATIO~ - I hat pert of the structure
which 1s In direct contact with soil -and
transmits loads to 11
GRAVLL. - Cohesionless a g g r e g a t e s o f
angular rounded or semi-rounded, fragments
01 more or less unaltered rocks or minerals, 50
percent or more of the particles having size
greater than 4.75 mm and less than 80 mm.
PEAT - A fibrous mass of organic matter in
various stages ot decomposition generally
dark brown to black in colour and of spongy
consistency.
SAKD - Cohesionless aggregate of rounded,
sub-rounded. angular, subangular or flat
fragments of more or less unaltered rock or
?A@T
VI
STWCTUIAL
DlslCN -- SECTtON 1
F O U N D A T IO N S
S O I L .. C O A R S E GRAINED --Soils which

Include the coarse and largely siliceous and
unaltered products of rock weathering. They
possess no plasticity and tend to lack cohesion
when in dry state.
S OIL. FINK GRAINED -Soils consisting of the
fine and altered products of rock weathering,
possessmg cohesion and plasticity in their
natural state, the former even when dry and
both even when submerged. In these soils,
more than half of the material by weight is
smaller than 75-micron IS sieve size.
T OTAL SEITLEMENT - The total downward
movement of the foundation unit under load.
2.2 Shallow Foundation
BACK FILL - Materials used or reused to fill
an excavation.
B EARING C A P A C I T Y . SAFE -The maximum
intensity of loading that the soil will safely
carry without risk of shear failure irrespective
of any settkmem that may occur.
B E A R I N G C A P A C I T Y , UL T I M A T E - T h e
intensity of loading at the base of a folrndation
which would cause shear failure of the
supporting soil.
V W
B EARING P RESSURE . A LLOWABLE (GROSS OR
NET) --The gross allowable bearing ~rcssurc

ir the maximum allowable loading mttnrity
on the ground in any given case (with full
cognizance of surcharge) taking into account
the maximum safe bearing capacity, the
amount and kin&of settlement expected and
the capability of the structure to take up this
settlement.
The net allowable bearing pressure is the gross
allowable bearing pressure minus t h e
surcharge intensity.
NOTE -. The concept of gross and net urd in defining
the allowable hearing pressure could also be extcndcd LO
safe bearing capacity, safe bearing prcssurc and ultimate
bearing capacity.
B EARING PRESSURE,SA~E -- The intensity of

the loading that the soil will carry without
undergoing settlement more than permissible
for the structure.

F A C T O R O F S A F E T Y ( W I T H RE S P E C T KJ
BEARING CAPACITY ) -A factor by which the
ultimate bearing capacity (net) must be
reduced, to arrive at the value of safe bearing
capacity (net).
FELTING -A spread constructed In brick
work, masonry or concrete underthc bare
a
wall or column.for the purpose ofdistributing
the load over a larger area.
of
F O U N D A T I O N , R A F T --.A substrucrurc
sup orring an arrangement of columns or
walPs in a row or rows transmitting the lands
to the soil by means ofacontinuousslab. with
.or without dcprcssions or openings.
MAKE-LP GR~vND - Refuse. cxcavalcd soil
oi rock deposited for.thc purpose of filling 8
decrcssion or raising a site above 11~ nntur;lI
surfice level of the ground.
OFFSET -The projection of the lower step
from the vertical face of the ltrpcr step.
IZRMANEKI LOAD -LLodds uhich rcnlain
on the structure for a pcrlod, or ;! rlumher of
periods, long enough to C;~I.W consulidatitrn
settlement of the soil. This load may k

referred lo as rhe service lord.
S HALLOW F OUNDATION - A foundation

whose width is greater than its depth in which
load transfer is primarily through shear resistance of the bearing strata and is normally
within 9m depth. The shear resistance of the
soil above the foundation is neglected.
SPREAD FO~NUATION -A f o u n d a t i o n
which transmits the load to th: groand
through one or more fthnp.
23 Pile Foundation
.%TTER PILE
(RAKER PILE) -The pile which
is installed at an angle to the vertical.

VI-Z-
BEARING PILE -A pile formed in the ground

for transmitting the load of a structure to the
soil by the resistance developed at its tip
and/or along its surface. It may be formed
either vertically or at an inclination (Batter
Pile) and may be required to take uplift
pressure.
If the pile supports the load primarily by
resistance developed at the pile point or base,
it is referred to as End Bearing Pile; if
support is provided primarily by friction
along its surface. it is referred to as Friction
Pile.
BORED CAS r I N-SITU P ILE -The pile formed
within the ground by excavating or boring a
pile within it, with or without the use of a
temporary casing and subsequently filling it
with plain or reinforced concrete. When the
liner IS left permanently it is termed ascased
pile and when the casing is taken out it is
termed as uncased pile.
In insralling a bored pile the sides of the
borehole (when it does not stand by itself) arc
required to be stabilized with the aid of a
temporary casing, or with the aid of drilling
mud of suitable consistency. For marine
situations such piles are formed with
permanent casing (liner).
B ORED C OMPACTION P ILE -A bored cast in&u pile with or without bulb(s) iti which the
compaction of the surrounding ground and
f r e s h l y filled c o n c r e t e i n pile bore is
simultaneously achieved by a suitable
method. If the pile is with bulb(s), it isknown
as under-reamed bored compaction pile.
B ORED PII E -A pile fomled with or without
casirhg by excavatjng or boring a hole in the
ground and subsequently filling it with plain
or reinforced concrete
C U T- OFF LEVEL --It is the level where the

installed pile is cut-off to connect the pile caps
or beams or any other structural components
at that level.
DRIVEN CAST IS-SITU PILE --A pile formed
within th\: ground by driving a casing of
permanent or temporary type and
subsequently filling in the hole so for&ed with
plain or reinforced concrete. For displacing
the subsoil,, the casing is installed with a plug
or a shoe at the bottom end. When the casing
is left permanently, it is termed as cased pile
and when the casing is taken out, it is termed
as uncased pile.
D RIVEN PRE.CAST PILE ---A pile constructed
in concrete (reinforced or prestressed) in a
casting yard and subsequently driven in the
ground when it has attained sufficient
strength.
NATIDNAL
BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
E F F I C I E N C Y O F A PILF. GROUP ---It is the

ratio of the actual supporting value of a group
of piles to the supporting value arrived at by
multiplying the pile resistance of an isolated
pile by their number in the group.
FACTOR
3:2 M~rhods oj SirQ Exploralion

2.2.1 T h e c o m m o n m e t h o d s o f site
exploration are given below:
a) OPEN -I RIAI. pll3 --The method consists
of excavating trial pits and t h e r e b y
cxposmg the subsoil surface thoroughly,
enabling undisturbed samples to be taken
from the sidcsiind bottom of the trial pits.
This is suitable for all types of formations,
hut should be used for small depths (up to
3 m). In the case of cuts which cannot
stand below water table, proper bracing
should be given.
S A F E T Y ---It is the ratio of the

ultimate load capacity of a pile to the safe load
of a pile.
OF
M~IL-II-UNDER-REAMED PILE - A n underreamed pile having more than one bulb. 7 he

piles, having two bulbs may be called double
under-reamed piles.
N E G AT IVE S KIN F RICTION -Negative s k i n
b) .4UGER BORING -The auger is either

power or hand operated with periodic
removal of. the cuttings.
friction is the force developed through the

friction between the pile and the soil in such a
direction as lo increase the loading on the pile,
generally due to drag of a consolidating soft
layer around the pile resting on a stiffer
bearing stratum such that the surrounding soil
settles more.than the pile.
c) SHELL AND AUGER BORING --Both

manual and mechanized rig can be used
for vertical borings. The tool normally
consists of augers for soft 10 stiff clays,
shells for very slilf and hard clays. and
shejls or sand pumps for sandy strata
attached to sectional boring rods.
L T I M A T E LOAD CAPACITY - T h e maxlmum load which a pile can carry before failure
of ground (when the soil fails by shear. as
evidenced from the load settlement curves) or
failure of pile materials.
d) WASH BORING --~ In wash boring. the soil

is loosened and removed from the horc
hole by a stream of water or drilling mud
from the lowerend of the wash pipe which
is worked u and down or rotated in the
bore hole. 9he water or mud flow carties
the soil up the annular space between the
wash.pipe and the casing. and it overflows
at ground level, where the soil in
suspension is allowed to settle in a pond
or tank and the fluid is recirculated as
required. Samples of the settled out sod
can be retained for identification
purposes but this procedure is often
unreliable. However, accurate
identification can be obtained if frequent
dry sampling is resorted to using
undisturbed sample tubes.
U N D E R- R E A ME D P ILE - A bored cast in-situ

or bored compaction concrete pile with
enlarged bulb(s) made by either cutting or
scooping out the soil or by any other suitable
process.
3. SITE INVESTIGATIGN
3.1 General- In areas which have already
been developed, advantage should be taken of
the existing local knowledge. records of trial
its, bore holes, etc. in the vicinity, and the
E chaviour of the existing structures,
particularly those of a similar nature to those
pro+td.
3.1.1 If the existing information is not
Pufficient or is inconclusive, the site should be
explored in detail as per good practice [ Vl2(I) ]* so as to obtain a knowledge of the type,
uniformity, consistency, thickness, sequence
and dip of the strata and of the ground water
conditions. Geolo@cal and agricultural soil
maps of the place give valuable information of
the site conditions. The general topography
will often give some indications of the so11
conditions and their variations. In certain
c~scs the earlier uses of the soil may have a
very important bearing on the proposed new
structures.
l
e) SOUNDING!PROBING
9 GEOPHYSICAL METHOD
g) PERCUSSION BORING AND ROTARY
BORING
3.2.2 N U M B E R
In this section where rcfcrcncc is made to good prac~e

and accepted standards in relation to design or testing
and construction procedures, the appropriate
document lisud al theend ofrhis section may be used as
a guide 10 the interpretation of this term.
?MT VI ItBucNUL DESIGN -8ECmW z F O U N D A T I O N 8
AND
P ITS AND BORINGS
DISI~OSIIION
OF
TRIAL
a) For a compact building site covering an
area of about 0.4 hectare, one bore hole or

trial pit in each corner and OII~ in the
centre should be adequate.
b) For smaller and less important buildings,

even one borchole or tnal pit in the centre
will suffice.
For very large areas covering industrial

and resldtntlal colonies. the geological
I-&.5
nature of the terrain will help in deciding

the number of bore holes or trial pits.
Dynamic or static cone penetration tests
may be performed at every 100 metres by
dividing the area in a grid pattern and the
number of bore holes or trial pits may be
decided by examining the variation m the
penetratron curves. The cone penetration
tests may not be possible at sites having
generally boulderous strata. In such
cases, geophysical methods should be
resorted to.
3.2.3 DEPTH OF EXPLORATION
a) Normally thedepth ofexploration should

he one and a half times the estimated
width or lower dimension of the footing
below the foundation level. Ifthe pressure
bulbs for a number of loaded areas
overlap, the whole of the area may be
considered as loaded and exploration
should be carried out up to one and a half
times the lower dimension. In weak solIs,
the exploration should be continued to a
depth at which the loads can be carried by
the stratum in question without
undesirable settlement or shear failure.
3.3.2 TO P O G R A P H Y -,ln hilly country, the

choice between vertical openings (for
example, borings and trial pits) and
horizontal openings (for examdIe. headings)
may depiztid on the geological structure. since
steeply inclined strata are most effectively
explored by headings and horizon:al strata hy
trial pits or bormgs. Swamps and areas
overlain by waterare best explored by borings
which may have to be put down from a
floating craft.
3.3.3 COST - For deep exploration, ,borings
are usual. as deep shafts are costly. For
shallow exploration in soil, the choice
hetween pits and borings will depend on the
nature of the ground and the information
required for shallow exploration in rock; the
cost of bringing a core drill to the site will be
justified only of several holes are required;
otherwise. trral pits will be more economical.
3.4 Sampling
3.4.1 Mt r turn
DISTURBED
b)
U?;UISTURBED SAMPI.ES
-These are
taken by methods which preserve the
structure and properties of the material.
Such samples are easily obtained from
most rocks, but undisturbed samples of
soil can be obtained only by special
methods. Thin walled tube samples may
be used for undisturbed samples in soils
of medium strength and tests for the same
may be carried out in accordance with
good practice [ VI-2(l) 1.
cl
REPRESENTATIVE
C) In the case of pile foundation, the depth

of exploration should be equal to the
width of the structure beyond the tip of
the pile subject to a maximum depth of
IQ m.
3.3 Choke of Method 7 The ,choice of the
method depends on the following factors.
3.3.1 NAT~IRE 0F CR~UND
a)
--In clayey soils. borings are

suitable for deep exploration and pits for
shallow exploration.
SOILS
In sandy soils. boring is easy, but special

equipment would be required for taking
representative samples below the water
table. Such samples can, however, be
readily taken in trial pits provided that,
where necessary, some form of ground
water lowering is used.
b)
-Drillings are suitable in hard

rocks and pits in soft rocks. Core borings
are suitable for the identification of types
of rock, but they cannot supply data on
joints and fissures which can be examined
only in pits and large diameter borings.
SAMPLES -These are taken

by methods which modify or destroy the
natural structure of the material though
with suitable precautions the natural
moisture content can be preserved.
SAMPLES - T h e s e
samples have all their constituent parts
preserved. but may or may nor be
structurally disturbed.
3.4.1.1 The methods usually employed are:
Nature
of
Type of
Sample
Method of Sampling
Disturbed
Soil
r
1Undisturbed
ROCKS
VI-J- 6
SAMPLING
a)
h) In any case. thedepth to which weathering

processes affect the soil should be
regarded as the minimum depth for the
exploration of sites, and this should be
taken as 2m. But where industrial
processes affect the soil characteristics,
this depth may be more.
OF
Hand samples
Auger samples (for
example. m clay)
Shell samples (for
example. in sand)
Hand samples
Tube samples
Wash samples from
percussion or
rotary drilling
Rock
Cores
NATIONAL
WIWNC
CODt OV RyllA
il) m.sIwRfwr)
so11 S4MPI ES
b) Density,
cl Natural moisture content,
The weight
of sample generalI), required for

purposes is given in Iable I.
testing
d) Consistency limits.
e) Consolidation
b) i~DI~;71~RHr:I) SOIL SAMPI fs .- The

mlnimum diameter of the sampie shall be
40 mm ullh the minimum length/diameter
characteristics.
0 Strength characteristics. and
r;1110 01 3.
g) Sulphate, chloride and pH content of

soil and ground water.
rABl I- I WEIGH 1 OF SOlI. SAMI1.t REQLIRED
I4.J.Z In the case of lightly loaded

structures. the above tests are optional,
mainly depending on site conditions.

(4)
kg
(2)
I)
So11
rden~ificatron.
Cohesive
n;lturA mol\lure
Conlcnt IUblb.
mechantcal
an.ilysrh. and indcx properties
1
San& and pawls
Cohcswe xnls and
12.5
Compac~ron tc3l5
sand,
Grovrll~ soils
3.4.3 R OCK S A M P L E
a) DISI URBED SAMPLES -The sludge from

percussion borings, or from rotary
borings which have failed to yield a core,
may be taken as a disturbed sample.
b) UNDISTURBED
I)
SAMPLES
-Such samples
taken from the rock formation shall be
dressed to a sire convenient for
packing to about 90.X 75 X 50 mm.
BL-OCK
S A M P L ES
2) CORE SAMPLES
3.4.4 P R O T E C T I O N , HA N D L I N G A N D LABELLING. O F S A M P L E S - C a r e
should be
taken in protecting, handling and subsequent
transport ofsamplesand in their full labelling,
so that samples can be received in a fit state for
examination and testing, and can be correctly
recognized as coming from a specified trial pit
or boring.
3.4.5
SA
EXAMINATION
AND
TE S T I N G OC
M PL E S
3.4.5./ The following tests shall he carri-
ed out in accordance with good practice

[ VI-2(2) 1:
a) Particle size distribution,
PART VI STWCTURAI.
A N D
IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS
CLASSIFICATION
4.1 The classification and identification of

soils as materials of construction for
engineering purposes shall be in accordance
with good practice [VI-2(3)].
25
Cohcwc soilsand 25 t o 50
Comprehensi\r
cxamlnalron ol
sand>
c~mklructron matenals including Gravelly soils SO IO 100
1
srahdrzarron
Iii)
than (uo storeysmay be .consrdcred as lightly loaded

srructures
4.
Chemical WSIS
I I)
solI
NOTE ~-Houses. flats and school buildings of not more
DESIGN - SECTlOll 2
FOUNDATIONS
5. MATERIALS
5.1 Cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate,
lime. SURKHI. steel, t i m b e r a n d other
materials that go into the construction of
foundations shall conform to the
requirements of Part V Building materials.
5 . 2
Prorection Agoinsr Deroriorarion
of
Materials- Where a foundation is to be in
contact with soil, water or air, that is, in a

condition conducive to the deterioration of
the materials of the foundation, protective
measures shall be taken to minimize the
deterioration of the materials.
52.1 CO N C R E T E- III the case of concrete
placed against a soil containing harmful
chemicals (sulphates, chlorides), among other
protective measures, the cover may be
increased by I5 to 40 mm over and above the
one permitted for reinforcement. The total
cover may not, however, exceed 75 mm.
5.2.f ./ Preferably concrete of higher @de
shall be used in situations subject toaggressive
environment.
5.2.2 TIMBER-W~~~~ timber is exposed to
soil. it shall be treated in accordance with
good practice [VI-2(4)].
6. TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS
6:f Types of foundatidns Covered in this
section are:
..7
VI-l-
a) S H A L L O W F O U N D A T I O N S
I) Simple spread foundations, such as pad
or spread footings, strip footings;
2) Raft foundations; and
3) Pier foundations.
b) PI L E FOUNDAJIONS
I) Driven cast in-situ concrete piles,
2) Bored cast in-siru concrete piles,
3) Driven precast concrete piles,
4) Under-reamed concrete piles. and
5) Timber piles.
7. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
7.0 Design Information-- For the satisfactory design of foundations. the
following information is necessary:
a) The type and condition of the soil or rock
b)
4
4
to which the foundation transfers the

loads;
The general layout of the columns and
load-bearing walls showing the estimated
loads, including moments and tocques due
to various loads (dead load, live load, wind
load; seismic load) coming on the foundation units;
The allowable bearing pressure of the soils:
The changes in ground water level,
drainage and flooding conditions and also
the chemical conditions of the subsoil
water, particularly with respect to its
sulphate content;
The behaviour of the buildings adjacent to
the site, the type and depths of foundations
anu the bearing pressure assumed: and
Seismic zone of the region.
7. I Design Considerarions
7. I .I D ESIGN L OADS -The foundation shall
be proportioned for the followin:

combination of loads:
a) Dead load t live load; and
b) Dead load t live load + wind load or
Seismic loads, whIchever is critical.
Nolt I -For dead. live. wind. scismbc and other loads.
SIP PNI VI Structural design. Secrlon I 1.oads.
Fur coarw yralned ~011s. scttlcmcnts shall k
NOTE 2
estimated corresponding to 7././(b) and for tine graincd
soil, settlement shall be estimated coircsponding to
permanent loads only.
7.1.2 BE AR ING P R E S S UR E - T h e a l l o w a b l e
bearing pressure shall be taken aseither of the
following, whichever is less:
a) The safe bearing capacity on the basis of
shear strength characteristics of soil, or
b) The allowable bearing pressure that the
soil can take without exceeding the
permissible settlement (see 7.1.3).
Vi-l-
7.1.2.1 RI-AHING C A P A C I T Y B Y CALCOLATION -Where the physical characteristics of

the soil are available. that is, cohesion, angle
of internal friction, density. etc, the bearing
capacitjl shall be calculated from stability
considerations of shear: factor of safety of 2.5
shall be adopted for safe bearing capacity. T he
effect of inlerfcrence of different foundations
should be tdkcn into acpount. The procedure
for determining the ultimate bearing capacity
and allowable bearing pressure of shallo&
foundations based on shcnr and allowdbie
settlement crrteria hhall be in accordance with
g o o d prxtlcc [ VI-I(5) 1.
7.1.2.2 S A F E B E A R I NG CA P AC ITY - For the
design of foundations of lightly loaded
structures and for a preliminary design of any
structure, the safe bearing capacities as given
in Table 2 may be assumed in the absence of
test results at thediscretionof theengineer-incharge.
7.1.2.3 FIELD hlETHOD FOR DETERMINING

B E A R I N G PRESSCIRE - W h c r c
appropriate, plate load tests can bc performed
and allowable pressure determined as per
g o o d p r a c t i c e [ VI-2(6) 1. The allowable
bearing pressure for sandy soils may also bc
obtained by loading tests. k hen kuch ~csts
cannot be done, the allowable hcarlrlg
pressure for sands rndy hc drtcrmincd using
penetration test.
ALLOWABLE
7.1.2.4 Where the bearing materials directly

under a foundation over-lie a stratum having
smaller presumptive safe bearing capactty,
these smaller values shall not be exceeded at
the level of such stratum.
7.1.2.5 CFFECTOF WINDANDSEISMIC FOKCF
Where the bearing pressure due to wind is less
than 25 percent of that due to dead and live
loads, it may be neglected in design. Where
this exceeds 25 percent foundations may he so
proportioned that the pressure due to
combined dead. live and wind loads does not
exceed the allowable bearing pressure by
more than 25 percent.
When earthquake forces are included, the
permissible increase in allowable bearing
pressure of pertaining soil shall be as given in
Table 3, depending upon the type of
foundation of the struct,ure.
7.1.2.6 B E A R I N G CAPACIlY OI- B U R I E D
If the base of a foundation is close
enough to a strata of lower bearing capacity,
the lattcl may fail due to excess pressure
transmitted to it from above. Care should be
taken to see that the pressure transmitted to
the lower strata IS wlthln the prescribed safe
limits. When the footings are closely spaced,
STRATA
TABLE 2 SAFE BEARING CAPACITY

(Clause 7.1.2.2)
T YPE
OF
Rocrs/!So~ts
S AFE B E A R I N G
CAPACITY
R EMARKS
(3)
(4)
(2)
kN/m
a) Rocks
Rocks (hard) without lamination and defects. for
example, granite, trap and dioritc
3 240
Lammated rocks, for example, stone and limestone

in sound condition
Restdual deposits of shattered and broken bed

rock and hard shale. cemented material
Soft rock
620
880
WI
440
(SW Note 2)
b) Non-cohesrve sot/s
Gravel. sand and gravel, compact and offering
high resrstance to penetratron when excavated
by tools
Coarse sand, compact and dry
440
Medmm sand, compact and dry
245
Dry means that the ground water

level is at a depth not kss than
the width of foundation below
the base of the foundation
_
f me sand, silt (dry lumps easily pulverized by the

fingers)
150
Loose gravel or sand-gravel mixture, loose coarse

IO mcdmm sand, dry
245
(See NOIC 2)
fmc sand. loose and dry
loo
c) Cohrsrvr sods
Soft shale. hard or stiff clay m deep bed. dry
440
Medium clay, readily indented with a thumb nail
245
This group is ruaceptibk to lonp

term consolidation aattkmcnt
-
Moist clay and sand-clay mixture which can be

indented with strong thumb pressure
Is0
Soft clay indented with moderate thumb pressure
IO0
Very soft clay whtch can be penetrated several

ccntimctrcs with the thumb
50
Black cotton so11 or other shrinkable or cxpanstvc

clay in dry condition (50 percent saturatton)
Sn Note 3. TO be detenniMd after

invutigation
d) Pear
Peat
S~V Nores 3 and 4. To be detcrmmed after investigation
c) Made-up ground
See Notes 2 and 4. To be dctermined after investigation
Folk or made-up ground

NOTE I - Values Itstcd in the table. arc from shear consrdcratron
only.
Nort 2 -Values arc very much rough for the follovvmg reasons:
a) Effect of charactcrtstics of foundattons (that IS, effect of depth, width, shape. roughness, etc) hu not been conridered.
b) Effect of range of so11 propenter (that is, angle of frictional resistance. cohesion. water tabk,denrity, ete) hat not bacn
considered.
c) Effect of cccentrtctty and mdtcatton of loads has not been considered.
Nort 3 For non<ohcstvc soils. the values Itsted m the table shall be reduced by SO ptrant if the water, table is abon or
near the base of footing
No I F 4 .- -Compactness 01 non-cohcsrvc SOIIS may be determmcd by drivmg a cone of 65 mm dia and 60 a
x angle by a
hammer of 65 kg fallmg from 75 cm. II corrected number ofblows(M)for 3Ocmpenctration islessthan IO, t R
esoiliscalkd
loose; if H lies between IO and 30, II is medium. and pi more than 30, the soil is calkd dense.
P A R T
n STRUCTURAL.
O~slcN SRcflON 1 F0uNO~ll0Ns
n-29
TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE INCREASE IN ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE OR RESISTANCE OF SOILS

fClQusP 7.1.2.5)
T YPE
SL
No.
OF
PERMISSIOI
SOIL MAINLY
INCREASF IN A I l OWABI
Co~stlmNG THE
Foundation
/
Piles Pass- PIks nor
ingThrough Covered
under
Any Sod
b u t Ratmg col (3)
o n So11
Type l
(2)
(3)
i)
7)~ I Rock or Hard Sods -Well
50
ii)
Type II Medium Soils - All~so~ls wirb
(1)
BEAPING PRf wRf PEW
FST
/x
Raft
Foundatlon
Isolated
Combined
Well
o r lsolarcd RCC. Foot- Foundaing Without
IIOIIS
RCC
Foormg 1.ic B e a m s
wIIh
or I:nremT IC Beams forced Strip
Foundations
(4)
graded gravels and sand-gravel mixtures with or without clay binder, and
ded or sandclayey sands poorly
clay mixtures (GB. Cc, SB. SW and
SC) having N above 30. where N is
the standard penetration value
N between IO and 30 and poorly

graded sands or granlly sands with
so
2s
25
50
25
50
25
25
25
little or no fines (SP) with N > 15

iii)
Type III Soft Soils ~ All SOIIS other
25
than SP with N< IO

N OTE I -The allowable bearing prrssurr shall be determined in accordance with [ VI-?(5) ]
NOTE 2 -If any increase in bearing pressure has already been pcrmilted for forces ocher than seismic forcer Ihe total
increase in allowable bearing pressure when seismic force is also Included shall not exceed the Ilrnltq spcclflrd ahtrve
NOTE 3 -In the caac of submerged loose sands and soils falling under classdicarlon SP wtth standard penctrarmn value\
less Iban Ibe valws spceificd in Note 5 below. the vibrations caused by eanhquakc may cause IlqucflcaIlon or ~XCCQI~C
total and differential scttkmcnts. In important projects, this aspect of the problem need be mvcsugarcd and approprldlc
methods ofcompaction or stabilization adopted lo achieve sunable N. Alternatively. deep pile foundation may he pro\ l&d
and taken to depths well into the layers which are not hkcly lo liquefy.
Non 4 -The
p&s
should be designed for lateral loads ncglcctmg lateral reslstjlnce of soil layers llahlc IO llquef\
N OTE 5 -Desirable field values of IV are as follows.

Zones III. IV and V
Zones I and II
Sre ParI VI Slructural Design.

SectIon I Loads
I5
IO
1
the pressure transmitted to the underlying soil

will overlap. In such cases, the pressure in the
overlapped zones will have to be considered.
With normal foundations, it is sufficiently
accurate to estimate the bearing pressure on
the udderlying layers by assuming the load to
be spread at a slope of 2 (vertical) to I
(horizontal).
7.1.3 SE T TLEMENT ~- The permissible values
of total and differential settlement for a given
type of structure may be taken as given in
Table 4. Total settlements of foundation due
to net imposed loads shall be estimated in
accordance with good practice[ VI-2(7)]. The
Yellowing causes responsible for producing
the settlement shall be investigated and taken
into account:
a)
CAUSES OF SETTLEMENT
I) Elastic compression of the foundation

and the underlying soil.
Jo
2)
Consolrdatmn
compression.
mcludmg
.7)
CiROl'YI> WA I t.K I.ou'f.R~\c;

ally repealed lowering and
seconda-1
SptTt-
raising of
water level in loose granular soils tend
10 compact the so11 and cause
settlement of the footing< Prolonged
lowering of the water table in fine
grained swls may introduce mtlement
because of the extrusmn of w;lter from
the voids. Pumping w;IIcr or dr;lining
water by tiles or pipes Irom granular
soils without an adequate mat 01 tlitcr
material as protectjon may. In ;1 period
of time, carry a.sufliclent aniount 01
fine particles away from the soil and
cause settlement.
4) Seasonal swelling and shrinkage of
expansive clays.
5)Ground movement on earth slopes. for
example surface eroslon, slow creep
or landslides.
T A B L E 4 MAXIMIJM AKD DIFFERENTIAL SET?I.EMEF;TS OF BI!II.DINtiS

(C/au%- 7.1.3)
JSOI ATED Fotrsil~r KI.I
RAEI Fo~NI>ArIONS
I
.Ilastic Clay
Sand and Hard Clay
Plasttc Clay
A
h
A
r?
r
Maximum Differential Angula? M a x i m u m Difkrentlai Angula? Maximum Dillerrntial Angular fMaximum Dilkrential Angular
seltkmrnr s e t t l e m e n t d i s t o r t i o n settlement settkmeni drstortron ~rttkmcnt scttkmcnt dirtonion se~tlerneo~ settlerrtcni distortiun
Yf
Sand and Hard Clay

1.
(2)
I31
mm
(4
For steel structure
0003 3L
1/.luil
iiJ
For remforced concrct~ structure
50
00015L
iii)
For muitistorey buildings

a) RC or steel frame buildings with
panel walls
b) For load bearing brick walls
i) L,iH=2*,
ii) L/H = 7
60
iv)
Fur water towers sod rdos
NEIL -7hc values given WI
the t~hk
(7)
#I
(9)
mm
(JOI
(111
(12)
mm
113)
(141
50
0.003 3L
I/300
75
0.003 31
I/.W
1011
II cJ0.l !I
I/?~10
i/m
75
00015L
IlhM,
75
iJ.002 L
I /jw
100
O.lUJ2L
l/5011
0.0021
I , 500
75
0.0021.
I;500
75
0002 5L
I i 400
I25
0.003 il.
I 300
@I
60
0.000 2L
0.000 4 L
15ooo
6tj
o.alo 2L
1-2 5W
60
o.tmo 4L
50
0001 SL
75
OIlI! JL
(51
(6)
mm
may be taken only as I gurdc and
l/b66
the pcrmisHbk
- Not
l/M
100
likely to be encnuntered
0002 5L
lj4(wI
125
tYtKl2 5L
l/Joa
uttkmcnt and differential settlement in each ease should bc dceidcd *IS per rcquircmcnts of thc.doigncr
L d~nu~cs the kngth of ddkcted part of waft) raft or ccntrc-to-otntm dtstxnrt bctvccn columns.
H dsnotcs the hcrght 01 wall lrom luundatron~fooung
*Linear interpolation k permissible between ratros of 2 and 7, column 2.
.
a
6) Other causes, such as adjacent

excavation, mining, subsidence and
underground erosion.
influence of such cunditlons or suitable works

s h a l l he, constructed for the pruposc o f
shielding from their cffec15.
b) CAUSES OF DIFFERENTIAL SHTLEMESTS

I)
Geologic and physical non-uniformity

or anomalies in type, structure,
thickness. and density of the soil
med.um (pockets of sand in clay, clay
lenses in sand? wedge like soil strata,
that is. lenses m soil), an admixture of
organic matter. peat, IlllId;
4 t.OOTINGS OX SI.OIBES -- Where footings
are to be founded along a slope or near

the edge of a slope, the distance of the
sloping surface at the base level of the
footing to the centrc of thz footing should
not be nearer than twicrl the width of%he
footing for normal loadings. W h e n
footings are heavily loaded, a slope
stability analysis is csiential. When the
distance of the slope from the cdgc 01 the
footing has to be ncarcr than prescribed
above. a specialist in the field should bc
consulted.
2) Non-uniform pressure distribution

from foundation to the soil due to nonuniform loading and incomplete
loading of the foundations;
3) Water regime at the construction site.
4) Overstressing of soil at adjacent site by
heavy structures built next to light
ones;
5)
Overlap of stress distribution in soil

from adjoining structuresj
6)
Unequal ex ansion of the soil due to

excavation Por footing;
7) N o n - u n i f o r m d e v e l o p m e n t
extrusion settlements; and
of
8) Non-uniform structural disruptions or

disturbance of soil due to freezing and
thawing. swelling and softening and
drying of soils.
7.1.4 DE P T H O F F O U N D A T I O N S - T h e d e p t h
to which foundations shall becarried depends
upon:
a)
the securing of adequate bearing

capacity:
b)
the depth of shrinkage and swelling in the

case of clayey soils, due to seasonal
weather changes which are likely to cause
appreciable movements;
the depth of frost pnetration in the case

of fine,rand and s&s;
distinct possibility of excavation close by,

and
e) depth of ground water table.

7.1.4.1 A l l f o u n d a t i o n s shall extend to a
depth of at least 50 cm below natural ground
level. On rock or such other weather-resisting
natural ground. removal of the top soil may be
Lall that IS r e q u i r e d .
7.1.4.2 Where there are conditions adjoining
to the subsoil on which the building is to be
erected, which are likely to impair the stability
of the building. the foundations of the same
shall be taken beyond the detrimental
b)
FOOltNGS A.1 I)lt-tt;KIINl I CiFI Is

When adjacent footings arc to be placed
at different levels, the distance between
the edges of footings shall bc such as to
prevent undesirable overlapping of
stresses in ml and disturbance of the soil
under the higher footing due to the
excavation for the lower footing.
cl
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s of 7./.4.3(a) and
7.1.4.3(b) shall not apply under the
following conditions:
I ) Where adequate provision is made for

t h e l a t e r a l suppon (such as with
retaining walls) of the material
supporting the higher footings.
2) When the factor of safety of the
foundation soil against shear is not less
than four.
7.1.5 SH R I N K I N G A N D S W E L L I N G CHARACTFRlSTlCS -In soils like clays which possess
shrinking and swelling characteristics, it is
necessary to place the foundation bearing at
such a depth that the effects of seasonal
changes are not significant; or to make the
foundation capable of eliminating the
undesirable effects due to relative movement.
7.1.6 FROST A C T I O N - Unless the
foundations are specially designed against
frost action, the bearing surface of the
foundation shall be below the level of
otential.damagc from frost, except when it
I&Jrs directly on rock not susceptible to
damage from frost.
7.1.7
A LTERATIO N S D URING C ONSTRUC -
TION
a) Where during construction the soil or
rock to which foundation is to transfer
loads is found not to be the type or in the
condition assumed, the foundation shall
be redesigned and constructed for the
existing type or conditions and the

Authority notified.
b)
Where a foundation bears on gravel, sand

or silt and where the highest level of the
ground water is or likely to be higher than
an elevation defined by bearing surface
minus the width of the footing, the
bearing pressure shall be altered in
accordance with Note 3 in Table ?._
4 Where thiz foundation has not been

placed or located as indicated earlier or is
damaged. or bears on a soil whose
properties may be adversely changed by
climatic and construction conditions, the
error shall be corrected, the damaged
portion repaired or the design capacity of
the affected foundation recalculated to
the satisfaction of the Authority.
d) Where a foundation is placed, and if the
results of a load test so indicate, the
design of the foundation shall be
modified to ensure structural stability of
the same.
7.2 .Timple Spread Foundations
72.0 Footings shall be provided under walls,
pilasters, columns, piers, fire places and
chimneys that bear on soil or rock, except that
footings may be omitted under piers or
monolithic concrete walls if the safe load
hearing capacity of the soil or rock is not
exceeded.
7.2.1 Detailed, design is not required for
spread foundations for light structures, as
normal requirements, such as minimum width
specified in 7.2.2.1; thickness of footing
specified in 7.2.2.2 will generally be sufficient
to bring the bearing pressure within the safe
limit. However, in the case of soils having very
low bearing strengths, it may be necessary to
design the width of the footing. Essentially,
the design provisions specified in 7.1 shall
apply.
NOTE - Iiouscs. flats
and school buildings of not more

than two storcys may be considered as lightly loaded
structurc3.
7.2.2 D IMENSIONS
OF
FWTING
7.2.2.1 The width of footing should not be

less than that given by:
B=2W+3Ocm
where
B = width at base in cm, and
W = width of support wall in cm.
73.2.2 The angle of spread of the load from
the wall Bruce to the outer edge of the ground
?AaT VI SrRucTuIAc
DmIak-scsntm
2 F0uNDAnms
bearing shall not exceed the following values.

In brickwork
I/Z horizontal to
and stone
I vertical
masonry
In lime concrete 2/3 horizontal to
I vertical
In cement
I hon?ontal ttr
concrete
I vertical
When the spread of the foundat ion is only on

one side, as in the case of party walls. the effect
of the eccentricity on cont;lct pressure
distribution shall he tnken into account.
7.2.2.3 THICKNFSS Of-' FOOTING - The
thickness of different types of footings. ii not
deGpncd according to 7.1. should bc a+ given
in Tahlc 5.
7 . X FO~~NDA'I'IONO~: FII t.r,o-1!1 GKO~!NI).In this case, foundaribn shall be taken to a

firm ground or strengthening ol lhe ground
may he done, whichever is economical.
7.2.4 Where the foundation can hc separated
into two independent units. a slipiolnt may be
i n t r o d u c e d t o t a k e c u r e 01 unequal
scttlemcnts.
7.2.2 t..AsD SLIP AREA -~ On a sloping site,
spread foundation shall be on a horizontal
hearing and stepped. At all changes.of levels,
they shall be lapped at the steps for a distance
!east equal to the thickness of the
dt
toundation or twice the height of the step,
whichrvrr is greater. The steps shall not be of
grcatcr height than the thickness of the
foundation unless special precautions are
taken. On sloping ground on clay soils, there
is always a tendency for the upper layers of
soil to nrove.downhill, depending on type of
soil, the angle of slope, climatic conditions,
etc. Special precautionsare necessary to avoid
such a failure.
7.2.6 In continuous wali foundations,
adequate reinforcement shall be provi;ded
wherever there occurs an abrupt change in the
magnitude of the load or there is a variation in
the ground support. In thecase of foundations
for masonry it is preferably to have the steps in
multiples of the thickness of the masonry unit,

namely. brick, block, etc.
7.2,7 For detailed information .regarding
preparation of ground work, reference may be
made to good practice [VI-Z(8)].
7.3 Ra/l Foundariont
7.3.1 D ESIGN C ONSIDERATIONS - D e s i g n
provisions given in 7.1 shall generally apply.
VI.23
7ABL.E 5 THICKNFSS OF FOOTINGS

((iau.w 7.I.Z.J.)
51 NV
l.YPF IJF f+,Oli\(,\
(IJ
(2)
i)
Mav-mry
.1Hil LIhIhh
KEMAKW
F00TlhCa (Mm)
(3)
Ot
3)
25 cm
h)
T wwc rhc maximum projecthou from Ihe lace 01 the

wall
b)
Iwice Ihe maximum uffwt

in a *tepped tootmg
(4)
Select the g r e a t e r af the M-J

values
For footings restinyon soil
For lootlnp5
_~__~_
-------
7.J.l,n r)IMt:\sIohAI. t*4Kf4vr I t I<S

The
SIX a n d >hape ol the foundntlon adopted
alt~t the mngnltude 01 sub?;-ade m o d u l u s
and long term delornlation ut the supporting
s o i l a n d this,
in turn. Influences ;he
dlstrlhut~on 01 contact pressure. lhls itspcct
needs to-be taken into consideration in the
3llill\:~l>
7..? 1 . 7 CCCEhllKICIl~Y O F LOADI\C -A rnlt
gcncrally oqqles the entire a r e a o f t h e
Milding and otten It is not feasible and rather
Uneconomical to proportwn it culnciding thC
ccntroid of the raft with the line
action of
the resultant lorce. In such cabes, the effect 01
t h e esscntricit)
on contact pressure
distribution shall be taken intoconsideratibn.
of
VI.?- 14
restrng
on top01 pile
-._-
?.j./.g R I G I D I T Y O F FOI NL),4~llONS - Rigidity of the foundation tends to iron out

uneven deformation and thereby modifies the
contact pressure distribution. High order of
rigidity is characterlrcd t-b, long momrnIs and
relatlvcly small, uniform settlements. A rigid
foundation may also generate high swondary
stresges in structural members. The effect of
rigidity shall be tahen into account in analysts.
7.3.1.10 KIGIDII~~ O F T H E S U P E R SIRIJCTURF. --~ Free response of the foundations to
suil deformation is restricted by the rigidity of
the superstructure. In the extreme case, a stiff
structure may force a flexible foundation to
behave as rigid. This aspect shall be
c o n s i d e r e d t o evaluate the validity of the
contact pressure distrtbutlun.
7.3.1.11 MODtlLllS O F ELASlICIIY A N D
MODtJLUS
O F
StlBGKADE KtACllON
Appendix A enumerates the methods of

determination of modulus of elasticity (E,).
NAIIDNAL BUlLMNC CODE OF
INDIA
The modulus of subgrade reaction (K)

may be determined in accrodance with
Appendix B.
7.3.2 NE C E S S A R Y I NFORMATION - T h e
following information is necessary for a
satisfactory design and construction of a raft
foundation:
b)
cl
e)
Site plan showing the location of- the

proposed as well as the neighbouring
structures;
Plan and cross-sections of building
showing different floor levels, shafts and
openings, etc, layout of load bearing
walls, columns, shear walls, etc;
Loading conditions, preferably shown
on a schematic plan indicating
combination of design loads transmitted
to the foundation;
Information relating to geological
history of the area, seismicity of the area,
hydrological information indicating
ground water conditions and its seasonal
variations, etc;
Geotechnical information giving subsurface profile with stratification details,
engineering properties of the founding
strata (namely, index properties,
effective shear parameters determined
under appropriate drainage conditions,
compressibility characteristics, swelling
properties, results of field tests like static
and dynamic penetration tests, pressure
meter tests, etc); and
A review of the performance of similar
structure, if any, in the locality.
7.3.3 C HOICE
OF
R AFT TYPE
7.3.3.1 For fairly small and uniform column

spacing and when the supporting soil is not
too compressible a flat concrete,slab having
uniform thickness throughout (a true mat) is
most suitable (see Fig. IA).
SECTION AA
IA Flat Plate
SECTION 8Eh
IB
Flar
Plate Thickened
Columns
Under
SECU~N
cc
tC Two-way Beam
end Slab
SECTION
DO
ID Flat Plate
with Pedestals
Fig. I Common Tcpes of Raji Foundation
7.3.1 ME T H O D S OF A N A L Y S I S - T h e
essential task in the analysis of a raft
foundation is the determination of the
distribution of contact pressure underneath
the raft which is a romplex function of the
rigidity of the superstructure, the supporting
soil and the raft itself, and cannot be
determined with exactitude, except in very
simple cases. This necessitates a number of
simplyfying assumptions to make the
problem amenable to analysis. Once the
distribution of contact pressure is
determined, design bending moments and
shears can be computed based on statics. The
methods of analysis suggested are
distinguished by the assumptions involved.
Choice of a particular method should be
governed by the validity of the assumptions
in the particular case.
7.3.3.2 A slab may be thickened under heavy

loaded columns to provide adequate strength
for shear and negative moment. Pedestals
may also be provided in such cases (see
Fig. I B).
7.3.3.3 A slab and beam type of raft is likely
to be more economical for large column
spacing and unequal column loads
particularly when the su porting soil is very
compressive (see Fig.cp1 and ID).
7.3,3.4 For very heavy structures, provision
of cellular raft or rigid frames consisting of
slabs and basement walls may be considered.
P A R T W S T R U C T U R A L DESIGN -SsLCllDN 1 FDUNDATIONI
7.3.4.1 H IGID FblJNDATlON(CONVENTlONAL
-This method is based on the

assumption of linear distribution of contact
pressure. The basic assumptions of this
method are:
a) the foundations rigid relative to the
supporting soil and the compressible soil
layer is relatively shallow; and
b) the contact pressure variation is assumed
as planar, such that the centroidof the
contact pressure coincides with the line
of action of the resultant force of all
loads acting on the foundation.
METHOD )
vl-B-w
This method may be used when either of the

following conditions is satisfied:
a) The structure behaves as rigid (due to tht
combined action of the superstructure
and the foundation) with relative
stiffness factor K > 0.5 (for evaluation of
K see Appendix C); and
b) The column spacing is less than 1.75/h
(see Appendix C).
The raft is analysed as a whole in each of the
two perpendicular directions. The contact
pressure distribution is determined by the
procedure outlined in Appendix D. Further
analysis is also based on statics.
In the case of uniform conditions when the
variations in adjacent column loads and
column spacings do not exceed 20 percent of
the higher value, the raft may be divided into
perpendicular strips of wi,dths equal to the
distance between midspans and each strip
may be analysed as an independent beam
with known column loads and known
contact pressures. Such beams . will not
normally satisfy statics due to shear transfer
between adjacent strips and design may be
based on suitable moment coefficients, or by
moment distribution.
N O T E O n sofl soils, lor e x a m p l e , n o r m a l l y
consolidated clays. peat, muck. organic S~IIS. etc. the
assumpttons mvolved in UK conventional method arc
commonly justified.
7.3.4.2 FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION

a)
S I M P L I F I E D M E T H O D-In
this method,
it is assumed that the subgrade consists
of an infinite array of individual elastic
springs each of which is not affected by
others. The spring constant is equal to
the modulus of subgrade reaction (k).
The contact pressure at any point under
the raft is, therefore, linearly
proportional to the settlement at the
point. Contact pressure may be
determined as given in Appendix E. This
method may be used wheri all the
following conditions :irc satisfied:
NOTE -One of the recent neneral methods based on the

above menuoned theory i;numerical analysis by either
fmitc difference method or finite element method. This
method is used for accurate analysis of the raft
foundation. The details of this method could be cove4
at a later stage.
7.4 Pier Foundations

7.4.1 D ESIGN C ON S I D ER A T I O N S
7.4.1.1
C;f-h;FRAl
The design of concrete
piers shall conform to the requirements for
column5 specified in Part VI Structural
design, Section 5 Concrete. If the bottom of
the pier is to be belled so as to increase its load
carrying capacity. such bell shall be at least
30 cm thick at its edge. The sides shall slope at
an angle 01 not less than 45 with the horl7ontal. T-he least permissible dimension shall
be 60 cm. irrespectiveof the pier beingcircular,
square or rectangular. Piers of smaller dimensions II permIttad shall he designed as piles
(.WP 8 and 9).
7.4.1.2 PLAIN CONCRETE PIERS -The height

of the pier shall not exceed 6 times the
leastlateral dimension. When the height
exceeds 6 times the least lateral dimension,
buckling effect shall be taken into account,
but in no case shall the height exceed 12 times
the least lateral dimension.
The structure Icombmed action of

superstructure and raft) may be
considered as llexiblt (relative
stiffness factor K > 0.5, see
Appendix C).
When the height exceeds 6 times the least

lateral dimension, the deduction in allowable
stress shall be given by the following formula:
Variation in adjacent column load

does not exceed 20 percent of the
higher value.
where
b) GENERAL METHOD -For the general

case of a flexible foundation not
satisfying tho requirements of (a), the
method based on closed form solution of
IP
elastic plate theory may be used. This

method is based on the theory of plates
on winkler foundation which takes into
account the restraint on deflection of a
point provided by continuity of the
foiritdation in orthogonal foundation.
The distribution of deflection and
contact pressure on the raft due to a
column load is determined ,by the plate
theory: Since the effect of a column load
on an elastic foundation is damped out
rapidly. it is possible to determine the
total effect at a point of all column loads
within the zone of influence by the
met hod of superimposition. The
computation of effect at any point may
be restricted to columns of two adjoining
bays in aI1 directions. The procedure is
outlined in Appendix F.
fc' -ji
/: = reduced allowable strcu,
fc
= allowable stress,
H= height of pier, and

D
= least Metal
WAllOWAL
dimension.
B U I L D I N G MDE OF I N D I A
N OTE --The above provision rball not apply for picn
where the least Lateral dimenrion ir 1.8 m or greater.
7.4.1.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIERS When the height of the pier exceeds 18 times
its least dimension, the maximum load shall
not exceed:
P= P
(15-3$D
where
>
P= permissible load;
P = permissible
load when
calculated as axially loaded
short column;
H= height of the pier measured

from top of bell, if any, to
the level of cut-off of pier;
and
8, I. 1.2 FOR BORED C AST I N- SITU C O N C R E T E

PILE - The minimum grade of concrete shall
be M20 and the cement content shall be 400
kg/m in all conditions. For piles up to 6 m
deep, M25 concrete with minimum cement
content of 350 kg/m3 without provision for
underwater concreting may be used under
favourable non-aggressive sub-soil conditions
and where concrete of higher strength is not
needed structurally or due to aggressive Site
conditions. The requirements of concrete in
aggressive surroundings due to presence of
sulphates, etc, and the concrete mix shall conform to Part VI Structural design, Section 5
Concrete.
8. J .2 ST E EL RE I NF O R C E M E N T - Steel
reinforcement shall conform to any one of
(he types of steel specified in Part Vl
Structural design, Section 5 Concrete.
8 . 2 Design Considerarions-- P i l e
foundation shall be designed in such a way
that the load from the structure it supports
can bc transmitted to the soil without causing
any soil failure and without causing such
settlement, differential or total under
permanent/ transient loading as may result in
srructural damage and/or functlonal distress.
l-he p i l e s h a f t s h o u l d habe a d e q u a t e
structural capacity to withstand all loads
(vertical, axial or otherwise) and moments
which arc to be transmitted to the subsoil.
U= least lateral dimension of

pier.
8 . D R I V E N , BORE11 CAS I IN-&/TIl
CONCRETE PII.ES
8 . 0 General ~~ Piles find application in
foundations to transfer load ,from a structure

to competent sub-surface strata having
adequate load bearing capacity. The load
t r a n s f e r mechanism from a pi!e t o t h e
surrounding ground is comfillcated and is yet
to be fully understood, although application
of pile foundations IS in practice over. many
decades. Broadly, piles transfer axial loads
either substantially by friction along their
shafts and/or substantially by the end
bearing. Construction of a pile foundation
requires a careful choice of piling system,
depending upon the sub-soil conditions, the
load characteristics of a structure and the
limitation ,of total settlement, differential
settlements and a n y o t h e r s p e c i a l
requirement of a project.
8.1 Marerial
8.I.f CO N C R E T E - T h e minlmum g r a d e o f
concrete to be used shall not be less than
Ml5.
8.1.1. I FOR DRIVEN CAST IN-SITUPILE The
minimum grade of concrete shall be M20 and
minimum cement content shall be 400 kg/ ml
in all conditions. For piles up to 6 m deep,
M I5 concrete with minimum cement content
of 350 kg/m3 without provisions for underwater concreting may be used under favourable non-aggressive sub-soil conditions and
where concrete of higher strength is not
needed structurally or due to aggressive site
conditions. The concrete in aggressive surroundings due to presence of sulphates, etc.
and the concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements specified in Part VI StructuralDesign, Section 5 Concrete.
NOTE-when working mar existing ~tructurcs, cam

shall be taken IO amd any damage IO structures.
8.2.1 SOIL R E S I S T A N C E - T h e b e a r i n g
capacity of a pile is dependent on the
properties of the soil in which it is embedded.
A x i a l l o a d f r o m a p i l e i s normally
transmitted to the soil through skin friction
along the shaft and end bearing at its tip. A
horizontal
load
on
a
vertical pile is
transmitted to the subsoil primarily by
horizontal subgrade reaction generated in the
u p p e r p a r t of the shaft. A single pile is
normally designed to carry load along its
axis. The transverse load bearing capacity of
a single pile depends on the soil reaction
developed and the struitural capacity of rhe
shaft under bending. in case the horizontal
loads are of higher magnitude, it is essential
to investigate the phenomena using principles
of horizontal subsoil reaction a d o p t i n g
appropriate values ior horizontal modulus of
[he soil. Alternatively. piles may be installed
in rake. The feasibility of constructing bored
piles in rake under a given subsoil condition
should, howcvcf. be examined critically.
8.2.1.1 The ultimate bearing capacity of a
pile may be cstlmated approximately by
means of a static formula on the basis of ~011
test results, or by using a dynamic pile
formula using data obtained during driving
the pile or by test loading. The settlement of
pile obtained at safe load workrng load from
17
PART W3 STIUCTUIAL DLSICN -SICTlON 1 F O U N D A T I O N S
vu.
load test results on a smgle pile shall not be

directly used in forecasting the settlement of
a structure unless experience from similar
foundations on its settlement behaviour is
available. The average settlement may be
assessed on the basis of subsoil data and
loading details of the structure as a whole
using the principle of soil mechanics.
82.1.2 STATIC FORMULA -By using static
formula, the estimated value of the ultimate

bearing capacity of a typical pile IS obtained,
t h e a c c u r a c y b e i n g dependent o n t h e
reliability 6f the formula and the reliability of
the soil properties for various strata
available. The soil properties to be adopted
in such a formula may be assigned from
results of laborarory tests and field tests as
per good pracrlce [Vl-2( I)]. Two separate
static formulae commonly applicable for
cohcsiti and non-cohesive soils arc indicated
in Appendix G, to serve only as a guide.
Other alternative formulae may be
applicable. depending on the subsoil
characteristics and method of installation of
piles.
X2.1.3 IJYNAMIC t-0KMII.A
t-or driven
piles in non-cohesive soils. such a\ gravei~.
coarse sand ahd other similar dopo$its. ;\I)
approximate value 01. the bcarlng cclpacitl
may bc determined by a dynamic pile tormula.
The Hiley formula is one of the rcliablc lormulae and is most commonly used for concrete piles. Dynamic formulae arc not dlrcctlv
applicable to cohesive soil deposits. such a;
saturated silts and clays, as the resistance to
impact of the toe of thecasing will beexaggerated by their low permeability. while the Irictional resistance on the sides is reduced bv
lubrication. If as a result of test loadings on g
given area a suitable coefficient can beapplied
to a dynamic formula, the results may then be
considered as reasonable.
TEST RESULTS-The ultimate
load capacity. of a single pile is determined
8.2.1.4 L O A D
with reasonable accuracy from test loading as

per good practice [VI-2(9)]. The load test on
a pile shall not be carried out earlier than
four weeks from the time of casting the pile.
8.2.2 N EGATIVE S KIN F R I C T I O N O K D R A GWhen a soil stratum,

D O W N F O R C E
through which a pile shaft has Fnetrated Into,
an underlying hard stratum. compresses as a
result of either its being unconsolidated or its

being under a newly placed fill orasa result ot
remoulding a dragdown force is generated
along the pile shaft up to a point in depth
where the surrounding soil does not move
downwards relatlke to the p~lc shalt. Kecognltion of the existence ot \uch a phcnomcnon
shall bc madeand a suitahlc reduction shall bc
m a d e t o t h e allowable loid. where
approptiatF.
6.2.3 ST R U C T UR A L C A P A C I T Y - T h e p i l e s
shall have the necessary structural strenpih to
t r a n s m i t th,e l o a d s i m p o s e d o n tilrm
ultimately to the solI.
8.2.3.I A X I A L C A P AC I TY - Where a p i l e i s
fully embedded in the soil (having an
undrained shear strength not less than 0.1

kgf/cm) its axial carting capacity is not
hmited by its strength as a long column.
Where piles are installed through very weak
soils (having an undrained shear strength less
than 0.1 kgf; cm), special constderation shall
be given to determine whether the shaft
would behave as a long column or not; if
necessary suitable rcductlons shall be made
in its structural strcngrh considering t h e
buckling phenomenon.
When the finlshcd pile projects above ground
level and is not secured against buckling by
adequate bracing, the effective length WIII be
governed by the fixity conditions imposed on
it by the structure it supports and by the
nature of the soil into which it is installed.
The depth below the ground surface to the
lower point of contraflexure varies wi;h the
type of soil. In good soil the lower point of
contraflcxure may be taken at a depth of 1 m
below ground surface subject to a minimum
of three times the diameter of the shaft. In
weak soil (undrained shear strength lebs than
0. I kgf/cm) such as soft clay and soft silt,
this point may be hiken at about half the
depth of penetration into such stratum but
not more than 3 metres or IO times the
diameter of the shaft, whichever is less. A
stratum of liquid mud should bc treated as if
it was water. The degree of fixity of the
position and inclination of the pile top and
the restraint provided by any bracing shall be
estimated following a c c e p t e d structural
principles.
8 . 2 . 3 . 2 I ATERAL LOAD CAPACITY - A pile

may be subjected to transverse forces for a
number of causes. such as wind, earthquake,
water current, earth pressure, effect of moving
vehicles or ships, plant and equipment, etc.
l-he lateral load carryingcapacitv of a single
pile depends not only on the horizontal subgrade modulus of the surrounding soil but
also on the structural strength of the pile shaft
against bending consequent upon the application of a lateral load. While considering lateral load on piles, the effect o f o t h e r
co-existent loads, including the axial load on
the pile. should be taken into consideration
NATIONAL
IItJllBlNC CDDL
OF INDIA
for checking the structural capacity of the

shaft. A recommended method for the determination of depth of fixity. lateral deflection
and maximum bending moment required for
design is given in Appendix J for fully or
partially embedded piles. Other accepted
methods, such as the method of Reese and
Matlock for fully embedded piles may also be
used.
N OTE A Bcwusc ol Iuntted information on honzonral
modulus of soil, and rrquwementr in the theoretical

analysis. it ts suggested that the adequacy of a design
should be checked hy an actual field load ~crt.
8.2.3.3 R A K E R P I L E S - R a k e r p i l e s a r c
normally provided where vcrttcal piles
cannot resist the required applied horizontal
forces. In the preliminary design, the load un
a raker pile is generally considered to b e
axial. The distribution of load bctwccn raker
and vertical piles in a group may be
determined graphically or by analytical
m e t h o d s . Wh,ere n e c e s s a r y , d u e
consideration should be given to secondary
bending induced as a result of the pile cap
movement. particularly when the cap is rigid.
Free-standing raker piles are subjected to
bending moments due IO their own weight, or
external forces from other causes. Raker
piles embedded in loose fill or consolidating
depcsrt may become laterally loaded owing
to the settlement of the surrounding roil. In
consolidating clay special precautions, like
provision of permanent casing. should be
taken for raker piles,
8..?.4 SP A C I NG OF P I L E S - T h e ccFtre to
centre spacing of a pile is considered from
two aspects as follows:
a) practical aspects of installing the piles;

and
b) The nature of the load transfer to the soil

and possible reduction in bearing capacity
of a group of piles thereby.
8.2.4.1 In the case of piles founded on a very

hard stratum and deriving therr capacity
mainly from end bearing, the spacing will bc
go\crncd by the competency of the end
beartng strata. The minimum spacing in such
cases shall be 2.5 rimes the diameter of the
shalt.
deriving their bearing capacity

mainly from friction shall be sufficiently
apart to ensure that the zones of soil from
which the piles derive their support do not
overlap to such an extent that their bearing
values are reduced. Generally, the spacing in
8.2.4.2 Piles
PART
VI
8lRUCTUEAL
DE8lCN-#Ul3ON 1 FOUNDAllOWl
such cases shall not be less than three times

the diameter of the shaft.
8.2.4.3 In the case of loose sand or filling,
closer spacing than in dense sand may be
possible, in driven piles since displacement
during the piling may be absorbed by vertical
and horizontal compaction of the strata. The
minimum spacing in such strata may be two
times the diameter of the shaft.
NOTE - In rhe case of piles of non<ircUlar crorr-taztion.
the diameter of the circumscribing circle shall be
adopted.
8 . 2 . 5 P ILE
GROUPlNG -_)n o r d e r t o
determine the bearing capacity of a group of
piles,a number of efficiency equations are in

use. However, it is very difficult to establish
the accuracy of these efficiency equations, as
the behaviour of ile group is dependent on
many complex Pactors. It is desirable to
consider each case separately on its own
merits.
8.2.5.1 The bearing ca acity of a pile group
may be either of the Pollowing:
a) Equal to the bearing capacity of
individual piles multiplied by the number
of piles in the group; or
b) It may be less.
The former holds true in the case of friction
piles, cast or driven into progressively stiffer
materials or in end-bearing piles. In friction
piles in soft and clayey soils, it is normally
smaller. For driven piles in loode sandy aoila,
the group value may be hi her due to the
effect of compaction. In IUCa a cas, a load
test should lx. made on a pile from the group
after all the piles have been installed. The
group capacity may then be decided by
takmg into account the intetference effecu.
This would be done by multiplying the total
ca city of a pile group with the group
efp
rcicncy factor.
8.2.5.2 In the case of piles deriving their
support mainly from friction and connected
by a rigid pile cap, the group may bevisualisai
to transmit load to the soil, as if from a
column of soil. enclosed by the piles. The
ultimate capacity of the group may be
computed followmg this concept, taking into
account the frictional capactty along the
perimeter of the column of soil as above and
the end bearing of the said column using the
accepted princtples of soil mechanics.
8.2.5.3 When the cap of the pile.group is cart
directly on a reasonably firm stratum which
supports the plies, it may contribute to the
bearing ca aclty of the group. This additional
capacity a Pong with the mdividual ca city of
the piles multr lied by the number oppilea in
the group shalP not be more than the capacity
worked out as per 8.2.5.2.
w.29
8.2.5.1 Whm a moment is applied on the pile

group either from thesuperstructure or as a
consequence of unavoidable inaccuracies of
installation, the adequacy oi the pile groupin
msisting the applied moment should be
checked. In the case of a single pile subjected
to moments due to lateral forces or eccentric
loading, beams may be provided to restrain
the pile caps eiicctively from lateral or
rotational movement.
8.2.5.5 In the case of a structure supported on
a single pile/ group of piles, resulting in large
variation in the number of piles from column
to column, it is likely. depending on thetype
of subsoil sup orting the piles, to result in a
high order oP differential settlement. Such
high order of differential settlement may be
either catered for in the structural design or it
may be suitably reduced by judicious choice of
variations in the actual pile loadings. For
exam le. a single pile cap may be loaded to a
level Kighet than that of a pile in a roup in
order to achieve reduced dif ferential
settlement between the adjacent pile caps
supported on different number of piles.
8.2.6 F~cr-on OF SAFETY
8.2.6.1 The factor of safety should be
judiciously chosen alter considering the
following:
a! The reliability of the value of the ultimate
bearing capacity of a pile,
b) The type of superstructure and the type of
loading, and
c) Allowable total/differential settiement of
the structure.
8.2.6.2 When the ultimate beuring capacity is
computed from either static formula or
dynamic formula. the factor of safety would
depend on the reliabiliry of the formulae.
depending on a particular site and localityand
the rtiliability of the subsoil parameters
employed in such computation. T h e
minimum factor of safety on static formula
shall be 2.5. The final solution of a factor of
safety shall take into consideration tne load
settlement characteristics of the structure as a
whole on a given site.
8.2.6.3 The factor of safety for assessingtne
safe load on piles from load test data should
be increased in unfavourable conditions
where:
a) settlement is to be limited or unequil
settlement avoided as in the case o f
accurately aligned machinery or a
superstructure with fragile finishings;
b) large impact or vibrating loads are
expected;
I-2.*0
c) the properties of the soil may be expected

to deteriorate with time; and
d) the live load on a stncture carried by
friction-piles is a, considerable portion of
the total load and approximates to the
dead load in its duration.
8.2.7 T RANSIENT L OADING -The maximum
permissible increase over the safe load of a pile
as arising out of wind loading is 25 percent.In
the case 01. lorlcls and moments arising out of
earthquake effects, the increase of safeload
shall be as given in Table 3.
8.2.8 ChXRLOADlNG -When a pile in a
group, designed ,tor a crnain safe load is
tound, during or after execution, lo fall just
short of the load required to be carried by it,
an overload of up to IO percent ot the pile
capacity may be allowed on each pile. The
total overloading on Ihe group should iwt be
more than 10 percent of the capacity of the
group nor more than 4U percent of the
allowable load on a single pile.
8.2.9 R EINFORCEMENT
The design ot the remtorcing cage
qaries depending upon the driving and
installation conditions, the nature of the
subsoil and *the nature of load fo be
transmitted by theshaft-axial, or otherwise.
The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement(any type or grade)within the pile
shaft shall be 0.4 percent of the sectional area
calculated on the basis of the outside area of
the cusing of the shaft.
8.2.0.1
8.2.9.2 The curtailment of reinforcement

along the depth of the pile, in general, depends
on the type of loading and subsoil strata. In
the case of piles subjected to compressive load
only, the designed quanrity of reinforcement
may be curtailed at an appropriate level as per
the design requirements. For piles subjected
to uplift load, lateral load and moments.
separately or with compressive loads, it may
be necessary to provide reinforcement for the
full depth of pile. In soft clays or loose sands,
or where there is likelihood of danger to green
concrete due to driving of adjacent piles, the
reinforcement should be provided up to the
full pile depth, regardless of whetheror not it
is required from uplift and lateral load
considerations. However, in all cases, the
minimum reinforcement specitied in 8.2.9.1
should be provided in the full length of the
pile.
Piles shall always be reinforced with a
minimum amouni of reinforcement as dowels,
keeping the minimum bond length into the
pile shaft and with adequate projection into
the pile cap.
8.2.Y.3 Clear cover to all main retntorcements in pile shaft shall be not less than 50
N A T I O N A L ~IJILDINC COD&
OF INDIA
mm. The laterals ot a rctntorcmg cage may be

in the form of links or spirals. The diameter
and spacing of the same are so chosen as IO
beams are supported during construction till

the masonry above it gains strength. The
value of bending moment shall be increased to
impart adequate rigidity to the reinforcing

cage during its handling and installation. Tbc
minimum diameter of the links or spirals shall
be 6 mm and the spacing of the links or spirals
shall be not less than 150 mm.
Wll
-1 if the beams are not supported. For
30
considering composite action, the minimum
height of wall shall he0.6 times the beam span.
The brick strength should not be less than 30
kgf/cm. For concentrated and other loads
which come directly over the beam, full
bending moment should be considered.
DE S I G N 0F PI1.E CAP
8.2.10.1 The pile caps may be designed hy
assuming that the load from the column is
dispersed at 45 from the top of the cap up to
the mid-depth of the pile cap from the hase of
the column or pedestal. The reactmn from
piles may also be taken to be distributed at 45
from the edge of the pile. up to the mid-depth
of the pile cap. On this basis, the maximum
bending moment and shear forces should be
worked out at critical sections, as specified in
Part VI Structural design, Section 5 Concrete.
8.2.10
8.2.10.2 The pile cap shall be deep enough to

allow for necessary anchorage of the column
and pile reinforcement and the minimum
thickness shall be as specified in l-able 5.
8.2.10.3 The pile cap should normally be rigid
enough, so that the imposed load could be
distributed on the piles in a group equitably
8.2.10.4 In tne case of a large cap, where
differential settlement may be imposed
between piles under the same cap, due
consideration should be given to the
consequential moment.
8.2.10.5 The clear overhang of the pile cap
beyond the outer most pile in the group shall
normally be 100 to I50 mm, depending upon
the pile size.
8.2.10.6 The ca,p is generally cast over a 75

mm thick levellmg course of concrete. The
clear cover for the main reinforcement in the
cap slab shall not be less than 60 mm.
8.2.10.7 The pile should project 50 mm into
the cap concrete.
8.2.11
G RADE B E A M S
8.2.11.1 The grade beams supporting the

wails shall be designed taking due account of
arching effect due to masonry above the

beam. The beam with masonry due to
composite action behaves as a deep beam.
For the design of beams, a maximum bending
12
moment of WI where w is uniformly dis50
tributed load per metre run (worked out by
considering a maximum height of two storcys
in structures with load bearmg walls and one
storey in framed structures) and. I is the
effective span in metres, will be taken if the
PART Vl SPIICTUYAL
DESIGN
-SECTION
2 FOUNIIATIMS
8.2. Il.2 ihe minimum overall depth of grade

beams shall be I50 mm. The reinforcement at
the bottom should be kept continuous and an
equal amount may be provided at top to a
distance of a quarter span both ways from pile
centres. The longitudinal reinforcement both
at top and bottom should not be less than
three bars of IO mm diameter mild steel (or
equivalent deformed steel) and stirrups of 6
mm diameter bars should be spaced at a
minimum of 300 mm spacing.
8.2.11.3 In expensive soils, the grade beams

shall be kept a minimum of 80 mm clear off
the ground. In other soils, beams may rest on
ground over a levelling concrete course of
about 80 mm (see Fig. 2).
8.2.11.4 In the case of exterior beams over
piles in expensive soils, a led&c projection of

75 mm thickness and extendmg 80 mm into
ground (see Fig. 2) shall be provided on the
outer side of the beam.
8.3 For detailed information on driven/
bored cast in-situ concrete piles regarding
control of piling, installation, defective pile
and recording of data, reference may be made
to good practice [VI-2( lo)].
9. DRIVEN
PILES
PRECAST CONCRETE
9.1 ProvisIons of 8 except 8.2.9 shall

generally apply.
9.2 Design of Pile
9.2.1 The design of pile section shall be such
as to ensure the strength an4 soundness ofthe
pile against lifting from the carting bed
transporting, handling, driving stresses
without damage.
9.2.2 Any shape having radial symmetry will
be satisfactory for precast piles. The most
common cross-sections used are square and
octagonal or circular.
9.2.3 Where exceptionally long lengths of
piles are required, hollow sections may
advantageously be used. If the final
conditions require a larger cross-sectional
VW-:
L 50mm
/
50mm T H I C K C O N C R E T E
S L A B O R BRICK O N E D G E
THICK CONCRETE
SCAB OR B R I C K ON EOGE
INTERIOR BEAM
EXTERIOR BEAM
J,\ Hc~nv i!l
t up.~n,i\c s,,,t>
E L I M I N A T E 13 IN
: VERTICCL
CUTS
COURSE
area. the hollow sections may be filled with

concrete after driving in position.
Excessive whippiness in handling
precast pile may generally be avoided by
limiting the length of pile to a maximum of 50
times the least width.
9.2.4
9.2.5 Stresses induced during lifting,

handling and driving must be taken into
account.
9.3 RETNFOKCEMENT
9.3.1 The longitudinal reinforcement shall be
rovided in precast reinforced concrete piles
Iror the entire length. All the main longitudinal
bars shall be of the same length with lap
welded at joints and should fit tightly into the
pile shoe if there is one. Shorter rods to resist
local bending moments may be added, but the
same should be carefully detailed to avoid any
sudden discontinuity of the steel which may
lead to cracks during heavy driving. The area
of the main longitudinal reinforcement shall
ot be less than the following percentages of
t e cross-sectional area of the piles:
a,
a) For piles with length less than 30 times the
least width - 1.25 percent,
b) For piles with length 30 to 40 times the
least width - 1.5 percent, and
c) For piles with length greater than 40 times
the least width - 2 percent.
1-P
9.3.2 The lateral reinforcement is of

particular importance in resisting the driving
stresses induced in the piles and should bein
the form of hoops or links and of diameter not
less than 6 mm. The volume of lateral
reinforcement shall not be less than the
following:
a) At each end of the pile for a distance of
about 3 times the least width- not less
than 0.6 percent of the gross volume of that
part of the pile: and
b) In the body of the pile - not less than 0.2
percent of the gross volume of the pile.
The spacing shall be such as to permit free
flow of concrete around it. The transition
between the close spacing of lateral
reinforcement near the ends and the
maximum spacing shall be gradually over a
length of 3 times the least width of the pile.
9.3.3 The ,cover of concrete over all the
reinforcement, including ties, should not be
less than 40 mm. But where the piles are
exposed to sea-water or water having other
corrosive content, the cover should be
nowhere less than 50 mm. Cover should be
measured clear from the main or longitudinal
reinforcement.
NOTE- When? concrete of the ik is liable to be exposed
to the attack of sulphatcs an B chlorides pmcnt m the
gottnd water, the piles may be coated with a suitabk
ItMtCrial.
9..I.4 Piles should be provided with fiat or

pointed co-axial shoes, if they are driven into
or through ground, such as r,ock, coarse
gravel, clay with cobbles and other soils likely
to damage the concrete at the tip of the pile.
The shoe can be of steel or cast iron,. In
uniform clay or sand, the shoe may be
omitted.
Where jetting is necessary for concrete piles, a
jet tube may be cast into the pile, the tube,
being connected to the pile shoe which is
provided with jet holes. Generally, a central
jet is inadvisable, as it is liable to become
choked. At least two jet holes will be necessary
on opposite sides of the shoe, four holes giving
best results. Alternatively, two or morejet
pipes may be attached to the sides of the pile.
9.4 For detailed information regarding
casting and curing, storing and handling,
control of pile driving and recording of
data, reference may be made to good
practice [VI-2( I I)]
IO. UNDER-REAMED PILES
10.0 General- Under-reamed piles. are
bored cast in- siru piles having one or more
bulbs formed by enlarging the bore holefor
the pile stem (see also 8.0).
10.1 Marerials
10.1.1 The materials
shall be as specified
in 5.
10.1.2 CO N C R E T E -The slump of concrete
shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for
concreting in water-free bore holes. For
concreting by hremie, a slump of 150 to 200
mm shall be used. In case of tremie
concreting for piles of smaller diameter and
length up to 10 m, the minimum cement
content should be 350 kg: m of concrete. For
piles of larger drameter and/or deeper piles,
the mimmum cement content should be 400
kg/m of concrete. For destgn purposes, the
strength of concrete may be taken M IS and
M 20 for concrete with cement content of 350
kg/ m and 400 kg, m respectively. In
addition, the concrete mix shall conform to
the reqmrements specified in Part VI
Structural design, Section S Concrete.
10.2, Design Consideralions
fO.2.1 GE N E R A L - U n d e r - r e a m e d p i l e
foundation shall be designed in such a way
that the load from the structure they support
can be transmitted to the soil without causing
failure of soil or failure of pile material and
without causing settlement (differential or
total) under permanent transient loading as
may result in structural damage and/or
functional distress (see Fig. 3).
10.2.1.1 The diameter of under-reamed

bulbs may vary from 2 to 3 times the stem
diameter, depending, upon the feasibility .of
PART VI STPUCTURAL DeSlGN -SECTION 1
FOUNDATIONS
41 = 45(approx), & = 30-45(approx).

D,, = normally 2 SD
3A Sectton ot !imgleIJndcr- Reamed Pile
Fk.
38 Section o f MUIIIUnder-Reamed 11k
Typical Derails of Bored Casr in-siru

Under- Reamed pile Foundation
construction and design requirements. In

bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles and
under-reamed compaction iles, the bulb
diameter shall be normally 5.5 and 2 times
the stem diameter respectively.
10.2.1.2 For piles of up to 30 cm diameter,
the spacing of the bulbs should not exceed
1.5 times the diameter of the bulb. For piles
of diameter greater than 30 cm, spacing can
be reduced to 1.25 times the stem diameter.
10.2.1.3 The topmost bulb should be at a
minimum depth of two times the bulb
diameter. In expansive soils it should also be
not less than 1.75 m below ground level. The
minimum clearance below the underside of
ile cap embedded in the ground and the
E ulb should be a minimum of 1.5 times the
bulb diameter.
10.2.1.4 Under-reamed piles with more than
two bulbs are not advisable without ensuring
their feasibility in strata needing stabilization
of bore holes by drilling mud. The number of
bulbs in the case of bored compaction piles
should not exceed 2 in such strata.
10.2.1.5 The minimum diameter of stem for
bore hole needing stabilization by drilling
mud should be 25 cm. The minimum
diameter of stem for strata consisting of
harmful constituents, such as sulphates.
should be 30 cm.
10.2.1.6, For batter piles, a batter of30 with
horizontal for piles m dry ground conditions
and 15O with horizontal for water.or drilling
mud filled holes should generally not be
exceeded. The under-reamed compaction

$e;5tre normally constructed up to a batter
b) SANDY SOILS
Qu = A, (112 D Y NY
fX(1/2 D, n y NV ) + y N, z dr
10.2.2 SAFE LOAD-Safe load on a pile can

be determined:
r=l
+ I ?rDyK t a n 6 (dt + di- - J:,-)
a) by calculating the ultimate load from soil

properties and applying a suitable factor
of safety;
where
TD
A, = -, where D is stem d i a m e t e r
4
b) by load test on pile [W-5(9)]; and
in cm;
c) from safe load tables.
A. = .,z_(D", - 0) where D, is the
10.2.2.1 ULTIMATE LOAD C A P AC I TY -The

ultimate load capacity of a pile can be
calculated from soil properties. The soil
properties required are strength parameters,
cohesion, angle of internal friction and soil
density.
n
Y
a) CLAYEY SOILS -For clayey soils, the

ultimate load crzrrying capacity of an
under-reamed pile may be worked out
from the following expression:
under-reamed bulb diameter in

cm;
= number of under-reamed bulbs;
= average unit weight of soil
(submerged unit weight in strata
below water table) in kg/cm;
bearing capacity factors,

depending upon the angle of
internal friction;
depth of the centre of different
under-reamed bulbs below
ground level in cm;
total depth of pile below ground
level in cm;
earth pressure coefficient (usually
taken as 1.75 for sandy soils);
angle of wall friction (may be
Q.=A,N&+ A.N,c,+ C,A, + nC.A,

where
Q. = ultimate bearing capacity of pile
in kg;
A, = cross-sectional area of the pile
stem at toe level in cm;
N, = bearing capacity factor, usually
taken as 9;
cp = cohesion of the soil around toe in
kgf/ cm;
A. = (n/4)(& - D), where D, and D
are the under-reamed and stem
diameter, respectively in cm;
c. = average cohesion of the soil along
the pile stem in kgf/cm*;
A, - surface area of the stem in cm;
A, = surface area of the cylinder
circumscribing the under-reamed
bulbs in cm2;
c. = average cohesion of the soil
around the under-reamed bulbs;
and
=
reduction factor (usually taken
(I
0.5 for clays).
itc is with one bulb only, the third term

will not occur. Por calculating uplift load, the first tctin
will not occur in the formula.
v,_,24
d,
dr
taken as equal to the angle of

internal. friction d);
d,
= depth of the centre of the first

under-reamed bulb in cm; and
d,
= depth of the centre of the last

under-reamed bulb in cm.
NOTE I -For
occur.
uplift bearing on pile tip. A, W~II
not
NOTE 2 - N7 will be as specified in [VI-2(5)] and Np will

be, taken from Fig. 4.
c) SOIL STRATA HAVING BOTH COHESION
AND FRICTION -In. soil strata having

both cohesion and friction or in layered
strata having two types of soil, the
bearing capacity may be estimated using
both the formulae. However, in such
cases load test will be a better guide.
NOTE I ,The above expression holds for the usual

spacing of under-reamed bulbs spaced at not more than
one and a half rimes their diameter.
NOTE 2 -If the
+ y d, NJ
COMPACTION PILES IN SANDY STRATA -
For bored compaction piles in sandy

N A T I O N A L WILDIIW CODE OF INDIA
strata, the formula in (b) shall be applied

but with the modified value of ~$1 asgiven
below:
#JI = (#J f 40)/2
where
C#I = angle of internal trlctlon ofvirgin
soil.
The values of NY, iVq and 8 are taken
corresponding to 41. The value of the
earth pressure coefficient K will be 3.
e)
PILES R E S T I NG ON R O C K -For p&s

resting on rock, the bearing component
will be obtained by multiplying the safe
bearing capqcity of rock with bcarjng
area of the pile stem plus the bearing
provided by the bulb portion.
NOTE --To obtain safe load in compressIon and uplift

from ultimate load capacily generally the factors of safety
will be 2.5 and 3 rcspcctively.
10.2.2.2
SAFE LOAD FROM PILE LOAD
-Safe load on piles in compression,

uplift and lateral resistance can be determined
by load test on piles [see VI-S(9)].
TESTS
IARf W
SRIJCTURAL D181CN - BLCTlON
FO&NDAllONB
10.1.2.3 In the absence of actual load tests

anrl detailed investigations. the safe load on
under-reamed piles of bulb diameter 2.5 times
the stem diameter may be taken, as given in
Appendix K.
11).2.2.4 The lesser of the two safe loads
obtained from 10.2.2.1 and 10.2.2.3 should be
used in design. Higher values may be used if
established by initi,al load tests.
10.2.2.5 OVEW LO A D I N G - W h e n a p i l e
designed for a certain safe load is found to fall
just short of the required load carried by it, an
overload of up to IO percent of the safe load
on the pile may be allowed on each pile. The
total overloading on a group of piles should
not be more than IO percent of the safe load on
a group, nor more than 40 percent of the safe
load on a single pile.
10.2.3 SPA C I N G
10.2.3.1 Generally the centre to centre
spacing for bored cast in-situ under-reamed
piles in a group should be two times the bulb
diameter (20,). It shall not be less than I.5 D..
For under-grade beams,, the maximum
spacing of piles should generally not exceed
,225
In under-reamed compaction piles,

3 m.
generally the spacing should not be less than
I.5 D,. If the adjacent piles are of different
diameter, an average value of bulb diameter
should be taken for spacing.
10.2.4 GROUP EFFICIENCY -- For bored cast
in-siru under-reamed piles at a usual spacing
of 2 D,, the group efficiency will be equal to
the safe load of an individual pile multiplied
by the number of piles in the group. For piles
at a spacing of I.5 D,, the safe load assigned
per pile in a group should be reduced by IO
percent.
In under-reamed compaction piles, at the
usual spacing of I.5 D., the group capacity
will be equal to the safe load on an individual
pile multiplied by the number of piles in the
group.
11.1.1 TIMBFR
The tl,nber shall have the
following charactcrlstlcz-
a) Only structural
tlmher shall be used for

piTes- (SW Part VI S:ructural d e s i g n ,
Sectlon 3 Wood):
b)
The length of an individual pile shall be

I) the specified length t 30 cm for piles
up to and including I2 m in length. and
2) the specified length 2 60 cm for piles
above I2 m in length;
c)
The ratio of heartwood diameter to the

pile butt diameter shall be not less than
0.8; and
Piles to be used untreated shall have as

little sapwood as possible.
11.2 Design Considerations

10.2.5 RE I N F O R C E M E N T
10.2.5.1 The minimum area of longitudinal
reinfprcement in stem should be 0.4 percent.
Reinforcement is to be provided in full length
and further a minimum of 3 bars of 10 mm
diameter mild steel or three 8 mm diameter
high strength steel bars shall be provided.
Transverse reinforcement shall not be less
than 6 mm diameter at a spacing of not more
than the stem diameter or 30 cm, whichever is
less.
In under-reamed compaction piles, a
mmlmum number of four I2 mm diameter
bars shall be provided. For piles of lengths
exceeding 5 m and of 37.5 cm diameter, a
minimum number ofsix I2 mmdiame!er bars
shall be provided. For pries exceeding 40 cm
diameter, a mimmum number of six I2 mm
diameter bars shall be provided. The circular
stirrups for piles of lengths exceeding 5 m and
diameter exceeding 37.5 cm shall be minimum
8 mm diameter bars.
11.2.1
GEMRAI -- See
11.2.2
SOIL
RFSIS~AYCE
10.2.6, The design of pile cap and grade beams

shall conform to the requirements specified
in 8.2.10 and 8.2.11 respectively.
For detailed information on underreamed piles regarding control of pile,

installation, reference may be made to good
practice [W-2( 12)].
10.2.7
Il. TIMBER PILES

11 .I Materials
w2.26
see 8.2.1
11.2.3 STRLJCTURAI. CA P A C I T Y - The pile

shall have the necessary structural strength to
transmit the load Imposed on it to the soil.
Load tests shall be conducted on a single prle
o r p r e f e r a b l y on a group 01 plies. F o r
compaction piles, test should be done on a
group of piles with their caps resting on the
ground [WE VI-2(9)1 !f such test data is not
available, the load carrlcd by the pile shall be
determined by the Engineering News formula
(SPP Notr: 1.
For t i m b e r piles. the load carried s h a l l h e

determined by the Englncertng News lormula ylven
below, Care shall be taken thar while counting rhe
n u m b e r of blows. the hedd of the timber p~lr IS not
brnomed or hrushed and in case of Interrupted driving
counting shall he done after 30 cm of driving.
Norr
For plies driven w~rh drop hammer,

16WH
P=
10.2.5.2 The minimum clear cover over the

longitudinal reinforcement shall be 40 mm. In
aggresive environment of sulphates etc. it may
be increased to 75 mm.
8.0.
s + 2.50
For piles driven with smgle-acting steam hammer.

l6WH
p=-s + 0.25
where
P
safe load on pile in kg,
W =
weight of monkey in kg,
free fall of monkey in m. and
penetration of pile in cm to be taken aa the

average of the last thru blows.
11.2.4 For detailed information on timber

piles reerding spacing, classification, control
of pile driving. storing and handling, reference
NATIONAL l
UlI.DlNC CIIDE Of INDIA
may be made to good practice[W-2( 13)J.

12. OTHER FOUNDATIONS
12.1 Design of foundation units not already
covered by this section, such as well

foundations, machine foundations, etc, may
be designed and constructed in accordance
with good practice [W-2( 14)].
APPENDIX A
(ClausP 7.3.1.11)
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (E,)
AND POISSON5 RATIO &)
A-/. DIITF.K ivl IN Al ION Ot- MOL)lI I.US
O F El.ASTIClTY (E,)
.4-1.1 The modulus of elasticity is a function
01 composition of the soil, its void ratio, stress
history and loading rate. In granular soil> it is
a function of the depth of the strata. while in
cohesive soil it is markedly inlluenced by the
moisture content. Due to its great sensitivity
to sampling disturbance, accurate evaluation
of the modulus in the IaboratoI-y is extremely
difficult. For general cases, therefore.
determination of the modulus may be based
on field tests (A-2). Where properly equipped
laboratory and sampling facility IS avpilablc.
t, may be dctermincd i n t h e l a b o r a t o r y
(SLY ,4-i).
A-2. FIELD DETERMINATION
A-2.1 The value of E, shall be determined

from plate load test in accordance with good
practice [VI-2(6)]:
A-2.1.2 EFFECT OF SIZE -~~ In granular soils

the value of E, corresponding to the size ofthe
raft shall be determined as follows:
Es = Ep
$ [2 B, 2&+ Bp
P
where
Br, B,, represent sizes of foundation and

plate and Ep is the modulus determined by the
plate load test.
A-2.2 For stratified deposits or deposits with

lenses of different materials, results of plate
load test will be unreliable and static cone
penetration tests may be carried out to
determine E,.
A-2.2.1 Static cone penetration tests shall be
carried out in accordance with good practice
[W-2(1)]. Several tests shall be carried out at
regular depth intervals up to a depth equal to
the width of the raft and the results plotted to
obtain an average value of B,.
A-2.2.2 The value of E, may be determined
from the following relationship:
where
where
q = intensity of contact pressure,

B = least lateral dimension of test plate,
s = settlement,
p I= Poissons ratio, and
b = influence factor
= 0.82 for a square plate.
A-2. I. I The average value ofE, shall be based
on a number of plate load tests carried out
over the area, the number and location of the
tests, depending upon the extent and
importance of the structure.
P A R T
Vl STRUCTUPAL
DCSlCN - SLCTlON 2 FOUNDATiONS
Ckd = cone resistance in kgflcm.

A-3.
LABORATORY
DETERMINA-
TlON OF E,
A-3.1 The value of & shall be determined
by conducting triaxial test in the
laboratory in accordance with good
practice [W-2(2)] on samples collected
with least disturbances.
A-3.2 In the first phase of the triaxial test, the
specimen shall be allowed to consolidate fully
91
VI-b-
under an all-round conhning pressure equal

to the vertical effective overburden stress for
the specimen in the field. In the second phase,
after equilibrium has been reached, further
drainage shall he prevented and the deviator
stress shall beincreased from zero vahle to the
magnitude e&mated for the field loading
condition. The deviator stress shall then be
reduced to zero and the cycle of loading shall

be repeated.
A-3.3 The value of 15, shall be taken as the
finpent modulus at tht stress level equal to
one-ha!f the maximum deviator stress applied
during the second cycle of loading.
APPENDIX B
(Clause 9.3. I. I I )
DETERMINATION
O F M O D U L U S O F SURGRADE R.EACTION
&I. G E N E R A L
R.l.1 The modulus of subgrade reaction (k)
as applicable to the case of load through a
plate of size 30 X .W cm or beams 30 cm wide
on the soils is given in Table 6 for cohesionless
soils and in Table 7 for cohesive soils. Unless
more specific determination of k ,is done
(see S2 and &3) these value may be used
for design of raft foundation in cases where
the depth of the soil affected by the width of
the footing may be considered isotropic and
the extra-polatlon of plate load test results is
valid.
B-2. F I E L D D E T E R M I N A T I O N
B-2./ In cases where the depth of the soil
affected by the width of the footing may be
considered as isotropic, the value of k may be
determined in accordance with good pracrlce
[VI-2(15)1 The test shall berarried out wirh 3
plate of size not less than 30 cm.
B-2.2 Theaverage value of kshall be based on
a number of plate load tests carried out over
the area, the number and location of the tests
depending upon the extent and importance ot
the structure.
53, L A B O R A T O R Y D E T E R M I N A T I O N
B-3.1 For stratificd deposits or deposits with
lenses of different materials, evaluation of k
from plate load test will be unrealistic and its
determination shall be based on laboratory
tests [See VI-2(Z)].
S-i.2 In carrying out the test, the continuing

all pressure may be so selected as to be
representative of the depth of the average
rtrcu influena zone (about 0.5 B to B).
28
-_TABLE 6 MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACrlON

(&) FOR COHESIONLESS SOILS
(Clause B-1.1)
*MoDIll us OF SusaRA.nF
R EACTION
(k) m kg/ cm
P\
n
For SubStandard For Dry or
Penetration Moist State merged State
Test Value
(NI
(Blows per
30 cm)
(3)
(2)
(4)
SOIL CHARACTERISTIC
rRclaIivc
Densiry
(I)
Loore
-, IO
IS
Medium
IO IO 30
Dense
30 and over 4.7 to IS.0
0.9
0.9 IO 2.9
1,s IO 4 7
2.9 to IO.8
*The above values apply to a square plate 30 X 30 cm or

beams 30 Cm wide.
-_
__-
TABLE 7 MODUL.US OF SUBGRADE REACTION

(k) FOR COHESIVE SOILS
SOIL CHARACTERISTIC
*MODULUSOF SUB*
G R A D E REACI ION
t Consistency
Unconlincd Corn? (4) in kg/cm
I 61)
pressivc Strfngth,
kg/cm
(2)
(3
Stiff
I to2
2.7
Very Stiff
2 to4
2.7 IO 5.4
Hard
4 trndovcr
5.4 10 IO.8
o The valua apply to a quart plate 30 X 30 cm. The

above valuer arc based on the assumption that the
rverap loading intensity does no! exceed half chc
ultimate bearin& capacity.
--lll_
IIOWAL BUILDI~% CM)0 Of INQIA
I =
53.3 The value of k shall be determmed from

the followrng relationship:
moment of intcrtia
foundation, and
of
the
B = width of the footing.
E.
I
- -(l-r? f3
B-4.
where
CALCULATIONS
B-4.1 When the structure is rigid (see

Appendix C), the average modulus of
subgrade reaction may also be determined as
follows:
E = modulus of elasticity of soil (S W

Appendix A),
E = Youngs modulus 01 foundatron

material,
B
Average contact pressure

k, = .- ---.. _ _ _ _
Average settlement of the raft
= Poissons ratio of soil,
APPENDlX C
(ChUSP 7.3.4.1)
R I G I D I T Y O F S U P E R S T R U C T U R E A N D FOUNDATIUN
C-f. DETERMINATION OF THE

RIGIDITY OF THE STRUCTURE
spacing of the columns in cm,
h,
length ot the upper column in cm.
C-f .I The flcxural rigidity El of the structure

of any section may be estrmated according to
the relation given below (SPP alsu Fig. 5):
h,
length of the lower column in cm,
PI
Ir
- l
moment of inertia of the upper

column in cm,
moment of inertia ot- the lower

column fn cm. and
fr
moment of inertia of the

toundatton beam or raft in cm.
N_- E,l,b2H +zE1b
-1J
(P. + fl)b2
(Jb + f, x
where
E, = modulus of elasticity of the

inlillin~material (wall material) in
@f/cm ,
I, = moment of inertia of the infilling
in cm,
= length or breadth of the structure

in the direction of bending,
= total height of the mfilling in cm,
Ez = modulus of elasticrt of the frame

Y
material in kgf/cm ,
fb
= moment of Inertia of the beam in

cm,
r. =
fi
I.
h.
II
= ht
NOTE -The summation is IO be done over all tttt rcorcyr

includtng rht foundation beam or mft. In the case of the
foundation. ff rcplacesro and /, becomes zero, whereas
for the topmost beam P. becomes rero.
G?. RELATIVE STIFFNESS FACTOR K

C-2.1 Whether a structure behaves as rigid or
flexible depends on the relative stiffness of the
structure and the foundation soil. This
relation is expressed by the relative stiffness
factor K give&below:
a) For the
b)
whole structure, K =
= thickness pf the raft or beam in

cm, and
= radius of the raft in cm.
C-2.1.1 For K > 0.5. the foundation may be

considered as rigid.
C-3. DETERMlNATiON O F C R I T I C A L
COLUMN S P A C I N G
For rectangular rafts K =
C-3.1 Evaluation of the characteristics A is

made as follows:
or beams,
For circular rafts, K =
cl
where
where
EI = flexural rigidity of the structure

over the length (n) in kgflcm.
is= modulus of compressibilit of the

Y
foundation soil in kgf/cm ,
=
b
length ofthescction in the bending
axis in cm,
4,
= length perpendicular to the section

under Investigation in cm,
APPENDIX
= modulus of subgrade reaction in
kp,/cm for footing of width B in

cm (see Appendix B).
B = width of raft fI in cm,

E -_ modulus of elasticity of conc?ete
in kgf/cm. and
= moment of inertia of raft in cm.
(Clause 7.3.4.1)
C A L C U L A T I O N O F P R E S S U R E DISTRIBU7ION
fly C O N V E N T I O N A L M E T H O D
PI. DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION
and y axes passing through the

centroid of the area of the raft.
PI.I The pressure distribution (q) underthe

raft thall be determined by the following
f., f,, e., e; may be calculated from the

following equations:
formula:
e&S +Qx
A
r.-I;
la
total vertical Eoad on the raft,
e, - e,
I
--
total area of the raft,

eccentricities and moments of
inertia about the principal axes
pi
p,
I
._E_
lx
e,
-%
through the centroid of the

section, and
x3 =
vm30
co-ordinates of any given point

on the raft with respect to the x
moment of inertia of the alea o!Jhe

raft respectively about the x and J
axes through the sentroid,
Ixr = _f xy dA for the whole area about x
and y axes through the centroid, and

e,, eY = eccentricities in the xandy directions
of the load from the centroid.
for a rectangular raft, the equation simplifies
to:
where
a and
b = the dimensions of the raft in the x
and y directions respectively.
No* - Ii cnc or Marc of the valuer of(q)
nagative as
calculated by the ahorc formula, it indicates that the
whole area of foundation is not subject to pressure and
only a part 31 the area is in contact with the soi!. and the
above formula will still hold good, provided the
appropriate values of I., I+ i.,, e, and et, are used with
respect to the area in contact with the soli instead of the
whole area.
APPENDIX E
(Clause 7.3.4.2)
CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND
MOMENTS BELOW- FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION
CONTACT rPRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION
E-l.
6Mc
p
,
4p= + --In. I
C
P, =
c + II
E-l.1 The distribution of contact pressure is

assumed to be linear with the maximumvalue
attained under the columns and the minimum
value at mid span.
E-1.2 The contaci pressure for the full width

of the strip under an interior colnmn load
located at a point i can be determined as (see
Fig. 6A):
where
P, = -.
E-l.5 If E-2.3(b) governs the moment under

the exterior columns, the contact pressures
are determined as (see Fig. 6C):
P@=Pc=
r = average length of adjacent span(m),

A = column load in t at point i, and
Mi= moment under an interior columns
loaded at i.
~513 The minimum contact pressure for the
full width of the strip at the middle of the
adjacent spans can be determined as (see Fig.
6A and 6B):
?!I$ - f
4Pe - pmll
4c+,,
~52. BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAM

E-2.1 The bending moment under an interior
column located at i (see Fig. 6A) can be
determined as:
Mi = - % (0.24h i + 0.16)
E-2.2 The bending moment at mid span i*
obtained as (see Fig. 6A):
Mm = MO + Mi
pm=
where
-t pad
Pm2
M, = moment of simply supported beam
EI.4 If E-2.3(a) governs the moment under

the exterior columns, contact pressures under
the exterior columns and at end of strip can be
determined as @cc Fig. 4C):
?*lt
Vl STRVCTV~AL
--SICIWN
1 FlWNDAlWN8
=z[pi (I)+4;- + Pi (r,l

MI = a&rage of ne tive moments M at
each end of tfE bay
VI.21
1.-2.3 The bending moment M, under

exterior columns can be determined as the
least of (see Fig. 6C):
DF_i
P, III
a) M,I = -Tf (0.13 A I, + I .06 AC - 0.50)
ilrl
-________J-
b, Me2
( 4 P, - pml,) c?
(4c + I,) 1
P,-I
,Y \I--
68 P r e s s u r e Dwtrihution river an lnrerlor

Snan
Pit,
I,--
K M o m e n t a n d Prcbburc IJ~str~bu~~on
Fxrcrmr Column
6A Moment
a n d Prcsrurc D~str~hu~~on
Interior Column
31
al
Fig. 6 Moment and Pressure Distrihutirwt at

C0lumn.s
APPENDIX F
(CIuuse 7.3.4.2)
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION- GENERAL CONDITION
F-l. CLOSED FORM SOLUTION OF
ELASTIC PLATE THEORY
F-1.1 For a flexible raft foundation with nonuniform column spacing and load intensity,
solution of the differential equation governing
the behaviour of plates on elastic foundation
(Winklcr Type) gives radial moment (M,)
tangential moment (M,) and deflection (w) at
any point by the following expressions:
w=g.
z,(t)
where
column load,
r
distance of the point u n d e r
investigation from column load
along radius, and
L = radius of effective stiffness
P
WbClt
= plodulur of subgrade reaction for
footing of width B.
PI . . ? he radial and tangential momcntscan

be converted to rectangular co-ordinates:
t? ---I?( I -/.I11
r311 thicknrss.
of cl;lstici!y
modulus
loundation matcrkl.
of
the
where
Passions ratio ol the I~~undation

m; terlal. and
Zd)),
4 --;~nglc with x-axis to the Ilnc JomIng

or igin
1 0 the p o i n t uijder
consideration.
= functions of shear, moment

and deflection (see Fig. 7).
Fl.3 I hc hhcar 3 per- unit width 01 raft can

he dctcrrnincd by :
z4q
14 (f) = lunction for shear (see Fig. 7).

F-l.4 When the edge of the raft IS located
within the radius of influence, the lollowing
corrections are to bc applied. Calculate
moments and shears perpendicular to the edge
of the raf! within the radius of influence,
assuming the raft to be infinitely large. Then
apply opposite and equal moments and shears
on the edge of the mat. The method for beams
on elastic foundation may be used.
0
IL
Fig. 7 Functrons for Shear Moment a n d

Dejlerrion
p-1.5 Finally, all moments and shears

calculated for each individual column and
wall arc superimposed to obtain the total
moment and shear values.
APPENDIX G
(Clause 8.2.1.2)
L O A D CARRYING
G-l. PILES IN CiRANULAR
CAPACITY
SOILS
G-l.1 The ultimate bearing capacity (Q.) of

piles in granular soils isgiven by the following
formula:
where
A, = cross-sectional area of pile toe, in
cm,
D = stem diameter in cm;
4 STRUCNNAL DESIGN-SICTlON
FORMULA
effective unit weight of soil at pile

toe in kgf/cm,.
effective overburden pressure at
pile toe in kg&/cm,
bearing capacity factors
and depending upon the angle of
internal friction c#, at toe,
Q.= A,
PART
--STATIC
F-ouMlAnoNs
summation for n layerr in. which

pile is installed,
coefficient of earth P==U=,
VI.23
effectivf overburden pressure in

kgf/cm for the ith layer, where i
varies from I ton,
angle of tiall friction between pile
and soil, in degrees (may be taken
equal to 4). and
surface area of pile stem in cm in
the ith layer, where i varies from I
to n.
N~E I -For NV factors refer to good practia
(VI-Z(5)].
Notr 2 -N, factor will depend. l prt from nature of roil
on the type of pile atad the method of its construction and
the vslucs a~ given in Fig. 4 and 8.
Nom 3 -The earth ptessttrc cocffiiicnt K depends on the
mturc of soil strata, type of pik l nd the method of its
construction. For driven pikr in loose tomedittm sands.
K valuer of I to 3 should be used.
NO= 4 --The agk of wall frktion inny be taken qua1
rhc l t& of &ar resistance of soil.
IO
maximum effective overburden at the pile tip should

comspond to pile kngth q-1 to I5 to 20 times of the
dirmctcn.
PILES IN COHESIVE SOILS
6-Z.
G-2.1 The ultimate bearing capacity of piles

(Q) in cohesive soil is given by the following:
Q. = A, . IV, . C, + (~2. A,
where
AP = cross-sectional area of pile toe in
cm.
IV, = g;e~3_ ypactty factor usually
7
C,, = average_ cohesion at pile tip in
WI cm,
c =
reduction factor,
average cohesion !hroughout the
length of pile in kgf/cm2, and
A, = surface area of pile shaft in cm2
20
25
30
35
10
ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRlcrlON $

m. 8
b~kCb~ifb~Factors N, f o r
45
NOTE I -The following values of e may be taken.

depending upon the consistency of the roils:
ConsirIency
N Value
Value of Q
I
very
Board piles Driven cast

in-sifu
<4
0.7
Medium
4t*g
0.5
0.7
Stiff
8 to I5
a.4
0.4
> 15
0.3
0.3
of:,~
Stiff to hard
b) For working out safe load, a minimum

factor of safety 2.5 should be used on the
ulrimatc hcarmg capacity estimated by
sutlic formulae.
NOTE 3 - In UIC of #oft to very soft soils which LR not
ren8itivc. drc M~IC of o can be taken up IO I.
G-3. When full static penetration data is

available for the entire depth. the following
correlattons may be used as a guide for the
determination of shaft resistance of a pile:
Clays and peats

where % < 10
Local Side Friction

fi
%-
qc
100
<A<
*
25
-$j- <f,< -gCaarscsandnandgtavek
For non-homogeneous soils, the ultimate

point bearing capacity may be calculated
using the following relationships:
qu =
where
N OTE 2-a) Static formula may be used as a guide only

for bearing capacity estimates. Better
reliance may be put on load test on piles.
Type of Soil
where
4c = static point reaistana in kg/cm, and
fi = local side friction in kg/cm2.
4co + 4ci + (Is2

2
z
qu = ultimate point bearing capacity,

qom = average static cone resistance over a
depth of 2 d below the base level of
the pile,
qel = minimum static cone resistance over
the came 2 d below the pile tip.
43 = average of the minimum cone
resistance valuer in the diagram over
a height of 8 d above the base level of
the pole, and
d = diameter of the pile base or the
equivalent diameter for a noncircular cross-section.
G-3.1 The correlation between standard
penetration test value N knd static point
resistance qC given below may be used for
working out the shaft resistance and skin
friction of piles:
Soil type
Clays, silts, sandy silts and
slightly cohesive silt-sand
mixtures
Clean fine to medium sands
and slightly silty sands
Course sands and sands with
little gravel
Sandy gravels and gravel
APPENDIX H
Since deleted.
qclN
2
3-4
5-6
8-10
APPENDIX J
f Clause 5.S.2)
DETERMINATION OF DEPTH OF FIXITY, LATERAL DEFLECTION
AND MAXIMUM MOMENT OF LATERALLY LOADED PILES
I-I. DETERMINATION bF LATERAL DEFLECTION AT THE PILE HEAD AND DEFT11 OF
FIXITY
J-l. I The long flexible .pile, fully or partial1 embedded, is treated as a cantileverfixed at some depth
below the ground level (see Fig.l(l).
2*3
- F R E E
----FIXED
HEAD
HEAD
P I L E
PILE f
\
2.1 . .
= l-9
DC
E
3
l-7
CLAYS
FIG 10, DETERMINATION OF DEPTH Frxm

Dc!ermine the depth of fiity and hence,the equivalent length of the cantilever using the plots
given in Fig. 10.
J-J.2
(A, and K, art constants given in Tables 8 and 9 below, E is the Youngs modulus of the pile
material in kg/cmJ and f is the moment of inertia of the pile cross-section incm).
NOTE - Fig. 10 is valid for lone flexible p&s where the embedded length L, is >4R or 47.
TABLE 8
VALUES
TY PF OF SOIL
Loose sand
Medium sand
Dense mnd
VCIY loose sand under
repeated loading or
normally loading clays
OF CONTSNT K, &g/cm)
(cz?ureI-1.2)
-
Dry
0.260
0.775
2.075
-
VALUE
-
Submcigcd
0.146
0.525
1JS
_
0.040
UllDNAL BtlILDDtG COOC
OF
INDIA
TABLE 9 VALUES OF,CONSTANT A* ckgkm)

(C%rure 1-1.2)
U NCONFINED COMPRESSIVI
VALUE
STRENOTH IN kg/cm*
7.7s
o-2 to 0.4
48.80
1 to 2
97.75
2 to 4
19550
More than 4
J-J.3 Knowing the length of the equivalent cantilever the
pile head deflection (y) shxll be computed
using the following equations:
y=Q(&+L~)J
. ..for free head pile
3El
(cm)
. ..for fixed bead pile
where Q is the lateral load in kg.
J-2 DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM MOMENT IN THE PILE
J-2. J The fixed end moment (MF) of the equivalent cantilever is higher than the actual mxximum
moment (M) of the pile. The actual maximum moment is obtained by multiplying the fixed end
moment of the equivalent cantilever by a reduction factor, m given in Fig. 11. The fixed end
moment of the equivalent cantilever is given by:
MF -
Q ( I4 + Lt 1
. ..fer free head pile

-for fixed had pile
The actual maximum moment ( M) = m ( UP ).
,L1/R O R Lt/T
1tA FOR FREE HuO PiLt
PART VI STPUCTUPAL DESIGN -SECTION I
FOUNDATIONS
VW?1
_--
116
FOR FIXED HEAD PILE
FIG. 11 DETERMINATION OF REDUCTION FACTORS

C OMPUTATION OF M AXIMUM M OMENT IN Plre
FOR
APPENDIX K
(Clause 10.2.2.3)
SAFE LOAD ON UNDER-REAMED PILES
K-l. The safe bearing, uplift and lateral loads
for under-reamed piles given in Table 10 apply

to both mediumcompact (lo< N< 30) sandly
soils and clayey soils of medium (4 < N < 8)
consistency including expansive soils. The
values for pile diameter equal to two and a
half times the shaft diameter columns (3) and
(4) of Table 10, provide the minimum pile
lengths for single and double under-reamed
piles, respectively in deep deposit of ex ansive
soils. Also the lengths given for 3P 5 mm
diameter double under-reamed piles and more
in other soils an minimum. The values given
for double under-reamed piles in columns (9)
and (13) are applicable only to expansive soils.
The reinforcement shown is mild steel ,and is
adequate for loads in compression and lateral
thrusts columns (8). (9). (16) and (17)]. For
uplift Icolumns (12) and (1311, requisite
amount of steel should be provided. In
ex nsive soils, the reinforcement shown in
Tarle 10 is adequate to take upward dtig due
j.28
to heaving up of the soil. The concrete

considered is M 15.
K-l.1 Safe load for piles of lengths different
from those shown in Table lOcan be obtained
considering the decrease or increase as from
columns (10). (11). (14) and (I 5) of the sp&ific
case.
K-l.2 The loads for piles with more than two
bulbs in cx@nsive soils and more than one
bulb in all other soils (including nonexpansive clayey soils) can be worked out
from Table 10 by adding 50 percent of the
loads shown in column (8) or (12) for each
additional bulb in the values given in these
columns. The additional capacity for
increased len h required to accommodate
bulbs should g obtained from columns (10)
and (14).
K-1.3 Values given in columns (16) and(17)
for lateral thrur% may not be increased or
decreased for change in pile lengths. Also,for
TABLE IO SAFE LOAD FOR VERTICAL UNDER-REAMED PlI ES Ih: SANDY AND CLAYEY SOILS INCLUDING BLACK COrrON SOlLS
DIAMETER
OF PILE
WIDERREAMED
DMMETER
MILD STEEL
SAFE LOADS
R EINFORCEMENT
A
A
/
Lon ludinal
Spacing oClr
Bearing Resistance
ReinPorcement
6mm
Dia 4 Diameter /Single
Double No. of
Double
liMX%SC
tkcfrascl Single
Rings
under
Bars
under
UlldCr
per IO cm per 30 cm
under
reamed
reamed reamed
length
length
reamed
LENGTH
Singk
under
rearncd
Uplift Resistance
Double
under
reamed
Increase
per30cm
length
Lateral Thrust
Decrease Single
per3Ocm
under
length
reamed
Doubk
under
reamed
(1)
(2)
(3)
cm
(4)
m
(5)
cm
(61
mm
(7)
cm
IQ
I
(9)
t
(10)
t
(111
t
(12)
t
(131
t
(14)
t
(15)
t
(16)
t
(17)
L
3.5
3.5
3
4
IO
IO
I8
22
II
12
I2
I8
9.9
I.15
0.7
0.9
4
6
6
9
0.65
cl.115
0.55
1.0
1.2
4
5
6
7
I2
12
12
12
25
30
30
30
16
24
28
3s
24
36
42
52.5
1.4
I.8
1.9
215
I.1
I.4
l-5
1.7
8
12
14
17.5
I2
18
20
25.75
LOS
1.35
1.45
1.60
O&S
1.10
I.15
1.30
2.0
3.0
3.4
4.0
2.4
3.6
4.0
4.8
12
30
42
63
2.4
1.9
21
315
i.Bo
I .45
4.5
5.4
20
25
50
62.5
3.5
3.5
30
75
3.5
37.5
40
45
94
100
LIZ5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.7s
4.0
4.5
50
125
3.5
5.0
0.10
I.5
1.8
multi-under-reamed piles, the values should

not increase beyond those given in column
(17). For longer and/ or multi-under-reamed
piles, higher lateraltirusts may be adopted
after establishing from load test.
K-l.4 Fqr dense sandy (N 2 30) and stiff
clayey (N 2 8) soils, the safe loads in
compression and uplift obtained from Table
10 may be increased by 25 percent. Lateral
thrust values should. not he increased unless
the stahility and strength of top soil (strata up
to a depth of about 3 times the pile shaft
diameter) is ascertained. For piles in loose (4
i: N G IO) sandy and soft (2 < n < 4) clayey
soils, the safe loads should be taken0.75 times
the values shown in the table. For very loose
(N d 4) sandy and very stiff ( V < 2) clayey
soils, the values ,ohtained from the table
shlwld be reduced by 50 pcrccnt.
K-1.5 The safe loads obtained from Table IO,
should be reduced by 25 percent if the pile
bore holes are full of subsoil water of driillng
mud durini concreting. No such reduction
may be made if the water is confined to the
shaft portion below the bottom-most bulb.
K-l.6 The safe. loads in uplift and
compression given in Table 10 or obtained in
accordance with K-I.1 and K-I.3 should he
reduced by I5 percent for piles with bulb of
twice the stem diameter. But no such
reduc!ion is required for lateral loads shown
in Tab!e IO.
K-1.7 The safe load for under-reamed
compaction piles may _be worked out by
increasing the safe load of equivalent bored
cast in-siru. under-reamed pile obtained from
Table 10 by 1.5 times in the case of medium
(10 < N < 30) and I.75 times in the case of
loose to very loose (N 4 10) sandy soils.
Depending upon the nature. and initial
compact of strati. pile geometry and layout of
piles, this increase may be up to a factor of 2
and initial load tests are suggested to arrive at
the final safe load values for design in the case
of sizeable works. The values of lateral loads
should not be increased by more than 1.5
,_$O
times in all cases. In obtaining safe load of

.compactionpjlc, the reduction for pile boreholes full of subsoil water or drilling mud
during concreting should be &ken 15 percent
instead of 25 percent as given in K-1.5. The
reduction for pile with twice the bulb diameter
is to be tak:il 10 percent instead of t5 percent
as given i n K - i . 6 . T h e p r o v i s i o n o f
reinforcement in under-reamed compaction
piles will also be guided as stipulated in
10.2.5.1.
K-1.8 The safe loads in Table 10, and the
recommendation made to obtain safe load in
different cases (K-l.1 to K-1.7) are based on
extensive pile load tests. The loads thus
ohtained rn2.y be taken equal to two-thirds the
loads Lorresponding to deflection of 12 nim
for loads in compression and uplift. The
deflections corresponding to respective safe
loads will be about 6 mm and 4 mm. The
deflection at lateral safe load will he about 4
mm.The values given in Table IO will be
normally on conservative side. For working
out ultimate ,compressive and uplift loads, if
defined as loads corresponding to 25 mm
deflection on loaddeflection curve, the values
obtained from Table 10 can be doubled. But in
the case of lateral thrust, twice the values in
Table 10 should be considered corresponding
to deflection of 12 mm only.
K-l ,9 The permissiLe increase over safe loads
obtained from Table IO should be taken as
stipulated In 10.2.2.4 for respective
conditions. Also, the group capacity should
be obtained in accordance with 10.2.4.
K-1.10 For piles subjected to external

moments and or larger lateral loads than
those given in Table 10, the pile should be
designed properly and the required amount of
steel should be provided.
NOTE - For obtaininn safe loads from Table IO. Nvalue
(standard pcnetratioi test value), a weighted average
should be taken up to a depth equal to the bulb dlamcrer
below the pile toe.
In the case of predominantly silty soils, the

uiding N value for obtammg Safe loads may
% e taken between the values given for sandy
and clayey solls.
NATlONAL
WlLDlNG CODE
O F
INDIA
LIST OF STANDARDS
ahc foll6wing list records rho& stat&r& which are acceptabk as good practice and
ik reqtiiromefts o the Code. The latest version of a
accepted stat&r& in tk
eqforcement oftL? +Co&. The sta&rds listed may be
standard shall be adopted at t
$lbA;k Authority (~1 a gui& in conformahce with tk requirements of tk referred chum in
.
In tk following Itit, tk number appearing in tk first cohrmn within parentkses indicates

tk numbei of tk r)ji&ce irl this paiijsection.
(I) IS: 1892-1979 Code of racticciorsubsurface investigation Por foundations
(/irsr revision)
IS: 2131-1981 Method for standard
penetration test for soils Virjt revision)
.
IS : 2 l32- 1972 Code of practice for thin-
walled tube sampling of soils vrst

M \i.SiWT)
IS : 4434-1978 Code of practice for insiru vane shear test for soils VJrst
rP\*i.Yion)
IS: 4968 Method for subsurface
sounding for soils:
IS:4968 (Part D-1976 Part I
Dynamic method using 50mm cone
without bentonite slurry (first
&Ti.ViOfl)
IS :4968 (Part II)-1976 Part II
Dynclmic method using cone and
bentonitc slurry (fkst revision)
IS: 4968 (Part 1111>1976 Part III

Static cone .penetration test Q?rst
revkion)
IS : 8763-1978 Code of practice for
undisturbed sampling of sands
IS: 9214-1979 Method ofdetermination
of modules of subgrade reaction (Kvalue) of soils in field
(2) IS : 2720 Methods of tests for soila:
IS:2720 ( P a r t I)-1972 P a r t I
Preparation of dry soil sanfplcs for
various tests @rsr revision)
IS: 2720 (Part ID-1973 Part II
Determination of water content
(second revision)
Determination of specifx gravity:
Section I Fine grained soils mrsr
revision)
Section 2 Fine, medium and
c o a r s e grained soils (jht
revision)
IS:2720 .(Part IV)-1975 Part IV

Grain size analysis vrst revhim)
IS: 2720 .(Part V)-1970 Part V
Determination of liquid and plarfic
limits first revision)
IS: 2720 (Part X)-l973 Part X
Determination of unconfined
compressive strength vrsr r&&n)
IS : 2720 (Part XIII)-1972 Part XIII
Direct shear test first revision)
IS: 2720 (Part XV)-I%5 Part XV
Determination of consolidation
properties
IS: 2720 (Part XXVIII)-1974 Part
XXVIII Determination of dry
density bf soils in place by the rand
replacement method @rst revision)
IS:2720 ( P a r t XXIX)-1975 Pati
XXIX Determination of dry density
of soils In place by the core cutter
method (/It-sr revision)
IS:2720 (PartXXXIII)-1975 P a r t
XXX111 Determination of the
density in-place by the ring and water
replacement method
IS : 2720 (Part XXXIV)-1972 Part
XXXIV Determination of density of
soils in-place by rubber-balloon
method
IS: 2720 (Part XXXIX/Sec D-1977
Part XXXIX Direct shear test for
soils containing gravel. Section I
Laboratory test
(3) IS : 1498-1970 Classification and
identification of soils for general
engineering purposes (fvsr revhion)
(4) IS:4Ol-1982 Code of practice f o r
preservation of timber (third reva%on)
(5) IS : 6403-1981 Code of practice for
determination of allowable_ bearing
p~z,;;~ on shallow foundatmns Wst
(6) IS: 1888-1982 Method of load tests on

soils (second revision)
(7) IS : 8009 (Part I)- 1976 Code of practice
for calculation of settlement offoundations: Part I Shallow foundations

subjected to symmetrical static vertical
loads
(8) IS : IO80-1980 Code o f p r a c t i c e f o r

design and construct@ of simple
spread foundations (/?rsr,revision)
(9) IS : 291 I (Part IV)-1979 C o d e o f
practice for design and construction of
pile foundations: Part IV Load test on
piles
(10) IS : 291 I Code of practice for design
and construction of pile foundations.
I S : 2 9 1 I(Part. I/Set I)-1979
Concrete piles Section I Driven cast
in - situ pries yifsf revision)
I S : 2 9 1 I(Part I/Set 2)-1979
Concrete piles Section Bored cast insiru piles (fksf revision)
( I I) IS:2911 (Part l/Set 3)-1979 C o d e oi
practice for design and construction of
pile foundations: Part I Concrete piles.
Section 3 Driven precast piles Wrsr
revision)
(12) IS:2911 (PartIll)-198OCodeofpractice
for design and construction of pile
foundations: Part I11 Under-reamed
pile foundation msf revision)
(13) IS:2911 (Part II)-1980Codeofpractice
for design and construction of pile
foundations: Part I1 Timber piles (jksr

revision)
( 14) IS : 2974 Code of practice for design and
construction of machine foundations
IS:2974 (Part I)-1969 Part I Foundations for reciprocating type machine
(fifsr revision)
I S : 2 9 7 4 ( P a r t II)-1966 Part II
Foundations for impact type foundations (drop and forge hammer
foundations)
lS:2974 ( P a r t Ill)-1975 P a r t III
Foundations for rotary ty
machines (medium and high lpe
reque.ncy)
(firs1 revision)
IS:2974 ( P a r t IV)-1968 P a r t I V
Foundations for rotary type machines of low frequency
IS:2974 ( P a r t V)-1970 P a r t V
Foundations for impact t pe machines other than hammers ( P
orging and
stamping press: pig breaker, elevator
and hoist tower)
IS: 3955-1967 Code of practice for
design and construction of well foundations
IS:9556-1983 Code of practice f o r
,,lin and construction of diaphragm
(15) 15:9214-1979 Method ofdetermination
of subprade reaction (K value) of soils in
the field
PART VI
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION3 WOOD
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
1. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3. SYMBOLS
...
1. MATERIALS
...
5. PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
...
6. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
...
10
7. DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL JOINTS
...
16
8. DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER BEAMS
...
21
9. DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
...
22
PART
V I STBUCTURAL
DKSIGN -SCl%DN
wmlo
W-5. 1

SECTION 3 WOOD
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section deals with the structural designaspect of timber structures. The various species of
Indian timber classified into three groups depending on the structural properties are included.
0.2 This section was first published in 1970. In this revision provisions of this section are updated
and detign of nailed laminated timber beams is included. Information on bolted construction
joints hu alao been added.
03 The information contained in this sectioniskgely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS : 399-1963 Classification of commercial timbers and theirzonal classification (revised)
IS : 683-1970 Code of practice for design of structural timber in buildings(thirdrevision)
IS : 4891-1968 Specification for preferred cut sizes of timber
IS : 1150-1976 Trade names and abbreviated symbols for timber species (second revision)
IS : 23661982 Code of practice for nail-jointed timber constructionfirs1 revision).
IS : ~3-1!NM Code of pmctia for design and construction of nailed laminated timber beams
*Jr rtvlr~oon) (under print)
vu. 2
WA-AL
BUILDING
MDE Df INDLn
1. SCOPE
I.1 This section of the Code relates to the use
of structural timber in structures or elements
of structures connected together by fasteners.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 Structural Purpose Definitions
B ASIC OR U L T I M A T E S T R E S S --The stress
which is determined on small clear specimen
of timber, in accordance with good practice
[VI-3(l)]; and does not take into account
the effect of naturally occurring
characteristics and other factors.
I NSIDE L OCATION -Position in buildings in
which timber remains continuously dry or
protected from weather.
LOCATION - Locatron is generally referred
to as exact place where a timber is used in
building.
O UTSIDE L OCATION -Position in buildings
in which timbers are occasionally subjected to
wetting and drying as in the case of open sheds
and outdoor exposed structures.
P ERMISSIBLE S T R E S S -The basic stress as
modified by modificationfactors according to
defects, location and particulars of design.
S PACED C OLUMN --Two column sections
adequately connected. together by glue, bolts,
screws or otherwise.
WET LOCATION -Position in buildings in
which timbers are almost continuously damp
or wet in contact with the earth or water, such
as piles and timber foundations.
2.2 Definitions
of
Defects in Timber
C HECK -A separation of fibres extending

along the grain which is confined to one face
of a piece of wood.
D EAD K N O T-A knot in which the layers of

annual growth are not completely intergrown
with those of the adjacent wood. It is
surrounded by pitch or bark. The encasement
may be partial or complete.
D ECAY OR R O T- Disintegration of wood
issues caused by fungi (wood destroying) or
other micro-organisms.
D E C A Y E D K N O T-A knot soltcr than the
surrounding wood and containing decay.
D I A M E T E R O F K N O T- T h e m a x i m u m
distance between the two points farthest apart
on the periphery of a round knot, on the lace
on which it becomes visible. In the case of a
spike or a splay knot, the maximum width of
the knot visible on the face on which II appears
shall be taken as 11s diameter.
DISCXXOIJRATION A c h a n g e f r o m t h e
normal colour of the wood which does not
impair the strength of the wood.
.KNOT-A branch base or limb embedded in

the tree or timber by natural growth.
KNOl- HOLE ~ A hole left as a result of the
removal of a knot.
LIVE KNOT -A knot free from decay and
other defects, in which the fibres are firmly
intergrown with those of the surrounding
wood. Syn. Intergrown knot. Cf. Dead
Knot.
L OOSE G RAIN (L.OOSENED GR A I N )--A defect
on a flat sawn surface caused by the
separation or raising of wood fibres along the
growth rings. Cf. Rased Grain.
Loose KNOT-A knot that is not held firmly

in place by growth or position, and that
cannot be relied upon to remain in place. Cf.
Tight Knot.
M O U L D-A soft vegetative growth that
forms on wood in damp, stagnant atmosphere.
It is the least harmful type of fungus, usually
confined to the surface of the wood.
C O M P R E S S I O N W OOD - Abnormal wood

hich is formed on the lower sides of branches
nd inclined stems of coniferous trees. It is
%arker and harder than normal wood but
relatively low in strength for its weight. It can
PITCH POCKET-Accumulation of resin

between growth rings of coniferous wood as
seen on the cross section.
be usually identified by wide eccentric growth

rings with abnormally high proportion of
growth latewood.
S AP S TAIN - Discolouration of the sapwood

mainly due to fungi.
*In this sectton where rkfercna is made togood practice

in relation to design or testing and construction
proczduns, the appropriate document lutcd at thccnd of
the section may bc used as a guide to the intcrprctation of
this term.
SAPWOoD-The outer layer of log, which in

the growing tree contain living cells and food
material. The sapwood is usually lighter in
colour and is readily attacked by insects and
fungi.
S HAKE --~ A partial or complete separation
permissible compressive stress in the

direction of the line of action of the
load m kgf:cm.
permissible stres? in tension parallel to
grain in kgf, cm-.
horizontal shear stress in kgf/cm.
moment 01 inertia Of a section in cm
modil&ition factor for change in
slope of grain.
rnodllication factor lor change in
duration ot loadings.
between adjoinlng layers of tissues as seen in

end surfaces.
S L O P E OF GR A I N -The inclination of the
fibres to the longitudinal axls of the member.

S OUND KNOI -- A tight knot free from decay.
which IS solid across its face, and at least as
hard as the surrounding wood.
SPL.W- A crack extending from one face ol a

piece of wood to another and runs alor~g the
grain of the piece.
T IGHT KNOI A knot so held by growth or
position as to remain f.irm in position in the
piece of wood. Cl. Loose Knot.
= lorm tactors.
h5
and
hh i
h: = modillca(lon factor for bearing stress
W ANE - I.he original rounded surlace of a
tree remalnlng on ;I piece 01 converted timhcr.

WARf-~ A deviation in sawn timhcr from ;I
true plane surface or distortIon due to \trchser
causing departure from a true plant
W
O R M
HOI
s- Cavilics caused h! worms.
3. SYMBOI S
3.1 For the purpose ol this section, the
following letter symbols shall have the
meaning indicated against each:
width of the beam in cm
depth of beam in cm.
depth of heam at the notch 111 cm
dimension of least side of column in
cm.
the least overall width oi box column
m cm.
the least overall dimension of core in
box column in cm.
diameter of bolt.
modulus of elasticity irl flt~:ldlnp
kgf cm.
c;llculated be$ing stress i n c\tremc
fihrc in kgf cm-.
calculated average axial ComprcsSI~c
\t~ess in kgftcm-.
calculat,ed axial tenslIe stress in
hgf. cm-.
permissible bending s\ress on the
extreme fihre in kgf/cm .
permissibl: stress in axial compression
In hgf! cm-.
permissible s t r e s s i n cr~mpre,ssiqn
normal (perpendicular) to gram I~I
kgf, cm.
permissible stress in rqmpression
parallel to grain in kgf/cm-.
span ot il hcam or lrusb in cm.

shank diameter 01 the nail.
ratio ot the thrchncbs 01 the compresalon tlanpc to the depth 01 the hcam.
statical moment of arca ahovc or
bctow the neutral axis ;~hour neutr;lI
BYI) III cm.
a constant for particular thlcknos 01
plank (SW hu and 6..5._,.5).
ratlo 01 the total thickness 01 web 01
webs to the overall width 01 t h e
beam.
effective length of soltd and box
columns in crp: distance between
points of lateral support 01 spaced
columns. in cm.
nominal thickness 01 planks used in
forming box type column in cm.
constant for a particular thickness of
the plank (SW KS and 6.5.2-J).
vertical and reaction or shear at a
section in kg.
a factor determining the value of form
factor K1 [ser 6.4.2(b)].
angle of load to grain directiL)n.
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Species of Timber-The species of
timber recommended for structural purposes
(classified into three groups, namely, Group
A, Group B and Group C) are given in
Table I.
NATIONAL MJILDINC COW.
OF
INDIA
4.1. I The characteristics nf these groups are

as given below:
GROUP A- Modulus_of elasticity in bending
above 126 tonnes cm-;
G ROUP B--Modulus of elasticity iq bending
above 98 and up to 126 tonnes cm; and
GROUP,C--- Modulus of elasticity in bending
above 56 and up to 9X tonnes, cm
4.1.2 Timber species may be Idcntlllcd in

accordance with good practice [VI-?(Z)]
4.2 The availability and general charactcrlstlc5
like durability and treatabillty 01 the spcc~o\
are also given in T-able I. Specie\ t)1 tirnhcr
other than those recommended in I ahlc-I nla!
be used, provided the basic stress charilctcrihtics are determined.
For obtaming basic stress fy,ures of the unItsted
N OTE
species, reference may be made to the Forc~t Kewuch
lnstirute and Colleges, Dehra Dun.
4.3 Mois/ure Content in Tin~hr -- I h e

moisture content 01 timber tor various
positions in buildings shall be as given in
Table 2.
4.5.2 The prohibited defects given in 4.5.2.1

I and permissible defects given i n 4.5..
and 4.5.2.3 shall apply to structural timber.
4.5.2.1 IHC)HIHI I I I) I,FFCJS 1 OOSC
grains. splits. comprcssl\c mood in coniferous
timber. heartwood rot. sap rot. warp. worm
holes made b> powder post bcctlcs and pitch
pockets shall not he permrtted.
I )CfCCI~ to
4.5.?.2 I~.KMI\\IHI t I)t t-1 Cl<
the extent specified In lablc h \hall be
pcrmissiblc.
I)1 I I c \
I he
4.5.3 I O(4 I IO\ ot
influence 01 dclcct\ in timhcr i\ c!:tlclcnt for
different locations in the SI~LIL~I~I;I~ clement.
I hcrelorc thcsc should bc 50 placed during
construction ho that they do not ha\e an>
adverse cflcct on the nlcmbers. in accordance
with food pr;ictice [ \I-J(4)].
4.15.1 %(I IAHII I I Y I\
KFSPEC7
O F
I Y ANI, ~1 Kt A IAHII I1 Y
There
are two choices as given 111 4.6.1.1 and 4.6./.2.
f)t~K/\l3II.t
The species shall be

4.f%/./ I-IKSI C H O I C E
of any one of the following:
a) llntreatcd heartwood of high durability

as lizted in Table I;
b) Treated heartwood of moderate and low
4.4 Sawn Timbtv
durability a n d classes a and b

treatability as listed in Table I;
4.4.1 SIZES - Preferred cut sizes of timber

for use in structural components shall be as
given in Tables 3. 4 and 5.
cl Heartwood. of moderate durability and
4.4.2 T OLERANCES ~ Permissible tolerances

in measurements of cut sizes of structural
timber shall be as follows:
a) For width and thickness:

+3
-0 mm
I) Up to and including
100 mm
2) Above 100 mm
+10
-0
mm
4.5 Grading of Structural Timber

4.5.1 Cut size*Of structural timber shall
be graded, after seasoning, into three
grades based on permissible defects given
m Table 6.
a) Grade 1;
b) Grade 2; and
4.6.1., S~CONI) CHOICE The species s h a l l

he heartwood of moderate durability and
Class dtreatability. Such timbers are listed rn
Table I
5.1 Ba51c stress values Of different group3 of

t i m b e r a r e deterlnined on small clear
specimen accordmg to good practice (VI3(l)]. These values are then divided by the
appropriate factors of sal.ety to obtain the
permissible stresses.
5.2 lhe permissible stresses for Groups A, B
and C for different locatIons appllcahle to
Grade 2 structural timber shall be as given in
lable 7 p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e f~ollow~ng
conditions are satisfied.
a) The timbers should be of high or
moderate durability and be grven the
c) Grade 3.
VI ~TPIJCTUPAL
Sapwood of all classes of durability after

thorough treatment with preservative.
5 . PFKMISSlBI.E WKF.SSt:S
b ) F o r length
PART
Class c treatability after pressure

impregnation as listed in Iable I; and
DESSICN
- SECTION 3
woou
\; 1 5
TABLE I SPECIES I OR STRLCTURAL PURPOSES

CROUP
SPECIE5
BotanicaL
Name
Trade %amc
Wt~wi~ 4r
12 PERCEYI
hhlbl URE.
ILITYt
?North
zone
East Ccntrc West Southzone Zone Zone Zone
Coyrtur
(4)
kg, mr
(51
(61
(7)
I 010
X
Y
-.
Dlpterocarpus mocrocorpus Vesquc

Grcwio iiltopjolio Vahl.
Hupeo Spp. (other than Hopea @dorato)
Meuo ferrea Linn.
Khair
Knla-siris
Knrungkongoo
ping
holiong
dhaman
hopea
mesua
Mvnusups lirtarab
Poeciloncuron indwum Redd.
Rerocarpus suntalinuc Linn f
;31
(9)
(W
2
-.
:
_-
2
Y.
_-
High
High
High
Modera1e
._E
-
z.__
::
X
LOW
Low
hlodrrdte
High
High
H tgh
Moderate
Modrrare
High
High
-Z
-
Z
y
Y
High
Moderate
_
735
YYS
915
73s
7%5
::
._
bullet wood
ballad
red s#ndcn
I 105
I 135
I 105
Srhledwro aleo a Okin (Syn. S rrrjogo Wllld )
kurum
089
Shorea rohusro Gacrtn. f.

Iifex spp.
sat (UP.)
millr
881
930
X
-.
Y
X
-
Z
X
Acucio mlotica Del. (Syn. A. urahta Wtlld )
babul
A~rocarpus/rclrinrfius Wighi. ct Am.

Albizia kbbeck Bent h.
Allingccl rxcrlsa Noronha
Amooro spp.
Ano~eissus ocuminato Bedd.
Dip&knemo butwoceo H.J.Lam (Syn. 6hssra
butyracca Roab.)
Camha brurhiota Merr. (Syn. C. interrlma D C . )
., I
Awturpus 3pp.
Cancarina equisetifolio Fors~.
Chdmskz Celurim W. & A. (Syn. C. !obuhnr A. Jurs.)
cia%ml ro.?qrmzrl Km &II. C &u&w yiit)
P~laqu1un1 cllrprwum Enger
maudani
kakko
juiili
sm8ri
yun
hill mahua
:
Z
Ti-
carallia (maniawga)
pussur
casuarinr
chickrassy
Karani
pali
Maslixia arboreo Clarke
gurjan
785
Balonoc~arpu~ uri/ls
C.! nometra pol~andra Roxb.
Oysoxylvrn molbaricum ikdd.
white mlar
z
755
785
850
675
720
5
-X
x
---
-u
z
Y
_
._
_-
Z
Z
2
3/o (MO)
High
High
Htgh
Y
-Z
I>OW
High
High
High
e
__
High
High
Low
Moderate
F
_.
-.
-
Low
High
Moderate
E.loderate
High
Moderate
Moderrte
High
Moderate
High
High
_..
Y
-Z
II!)
(1))
(8)
X
Y
;
X
-
C
e
__
Low
Moderate
Low
Moderate
Low
High
260 (235)
I70 (70)
I I w (1_ul
I50 (1 IO)
-170
(Y5)
200 (70)
I-
__
-_
High
Moderate
Low
Moderate
24ojkO)
I IO (95)
Moderate
190(9!30)
I 195 ($5)
-
Moderate
Lucalyprus eugemo~des
Lgenia rpp.
Gluta rrovancorica B&d.
Grewia tilii/olio V&a
Kingiodendron pinnarum Harms
(Syn. Hardwickia pinnala Roxb.)
Lugcrsrroemia Inceoiara
%~?~~%Ibergioi&s
Wall.
Roxb.
~ero~~rpus marsupium Roxb.
gllltIl
dhamnn (UP, M P )
:z
pine)
benteak
bullel wood
padauk
625
675
880
720
Qwrnu PP.
lndiun oak
Sho?cQ robusm &sxtn f.
WI (MP)
rohini
ci\it
wall
febrijyo A. Juxr.
Swintonrk#oribunda Griff.
Turom grundi~ Linn. 1.
Tirminak bcffirica Roxb.
Trrninalia chebulo Retz.
Terminal& manii King
TerminoAia ponicuka Roth.
Tewnfnolia uhra Roth (Syn. T. Coreacru W. &
T. i%dQlQ Roth)
Xy/ia xybcarpu Tmb.
Ad&to cordi/otia Roxb. Hk. f.
Rlbiziu proreru Benth.
An~hocepMus Chi~~b A. Rich.
(Syn. A. cu&AI Miq.)
Arrocarpus d&aSha Roxb.
Anrocarptu hererophylhrs brn. (Syn.
au~f. non linn. f.)
Anocu~puc &koocho Roxb.
kadirachlu in&u A. Juss.
MOdUCQ bn&-oiti Mac Bride
tbiokhk SQQ.
Ptortiun serratwn
A.
TOOM cliuta Roem (Syn. Cedrelu

Cetinu dcodora G. Don f.
Cupemw rorulo~o D. Don
iklbergia
largol$ R 9x b
_..
LblbergiQ sissoo Roxb.
Diilenia spp.
EbtocQfjYW SQQ.
loona
X
-
865
1 I55
640
X
-
X
Z
-
640
behra
harda (myrabolan)
::
black chuglam
kindnl
laurel
iruJ
z
x- x x
- x -
;
::
Y
X
-x
G
X
-X
-
Y
Y
e
-
Z
-
7-
i
-
Y
-
X
X
-
k.::
Low
Moderate
b
C
a
C
4Moderatc
High
b
e
High
High
230 WJ)
Low
Moderate
LOW
a
C
Moderate
Moderate
Low
235 (100)
I40 (50)
-_
Moderate
Moderate
x
ii
X
chaplash
515
kslhal
lakuucha
nttm
mahua
kasci
murtcnga
595
Z
_
Y
-
Z
-
E
929
595
z x -x
Z
x -- z 5
i --- -F ix
x- 5: u-- Ti- x- - z
Enbi
Indian chrstnut
loon
dtodar
cypress
rorcwood
skoo
ditlenir
rudrak
z:
865
625
z
515
755
785
625
480
X
Y
Y
Y
-
i!
Moderate
190 (140)
150 (I20)
f 20.5 (150)
High
z--
Y
-
c
-
Z
-
High
t
-
High
c
-
675
640
480
ti
-
c
e
-
High
-
haldu
Safed-SiriS
Kadam
inrcgrl$olirr~
Roxb.)
Y
i
A.,
Engl. (Syn. Bowa smwa Cekbr )
C&phyl/um spp.
Curey arbowu Roxb.
tktanopsis hysrrrx
a00
865
bijasal
&ymidrr
RM
850
cuc~yQlus
jamin
Y
-
T--
.High
High
High
Modtralc
Moderate
Low
High
Moderate
Low
High
High
High
Moderate
Low
-
-e
e
e
e
MCldCratr
Mod&
High
Moderale
High
Moderate
-
HighModeraE
Moderate
High
High
Moderate
Moderate
Low
Low
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Low
-_
It&&)
100~0)
90 (40)
200 (Xl)
I70(150)
TABLE I SPECIES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES- Conrd
(chuse 4.l)
GROUP
SPECIES
/
BolPrllul Name
Trade Name
AVAILABILITY
AVERAGE UNIT
A
WEIGHT AT
I2 f%IICENl fNorth East Ccntrc W e s t SouthMOlSTURf
Zone Zooe Z o n e Zone Z o n e
D~RABILlTTt
~NlENT
T
2
P
g
g
$
::
l Availahililv
(JO)
F f
-.Z r
High
High
t
2
Low
850
530
Y
-
Z
.-
-.
--
(6)
x
-
690
bS7
sllndrn
bonsum
kail
51s
chit
iitmin
hathipsila
375
;:
Moderate
LOW
ii
Moderate
e.
High
Moderate
Moderate
Low
Low
ModCraIC
i
Y
L
01
l~mbcrs IP catcgorlzcd
Moderate
Low
Low
Low
-8
Low
Low
70s
Low
Moderate
a01
Modern&
610
Y
-
Moderate
Hullock
X
_~
Low
Moderate
under three classes a: Indlcaled helow
IS
Moderate
Qadri
Mobi common, 1,415 m(l 000 ronnca) and murc per bear.
C o m m o n . 155 m (2% ~onn~si to I 415 m (1 000 tonnes) per tear. and
1~3s c o m m o n . below 155 m 1250 tonnes) per yrar.
In the case of qxc~rs. where arallabtlq
Moderate
H@
Low
T h e Icrrrlorx( ccllnpri*lng Indta. and Skkklm ,tnd Hhufnn ha&r: been Jivldtd Into IIVC r~ner wh1r.h cover rough!! lhc folIowIng a r e a s :
hc dballahlkity
(12)
arjun
f
?
(11)
-
a ) NI)RTH ZOHC .ldmmu dnd Kn,hmtr. Puhlah. Hlm.+c-hnl Iradcsh. I)elhl. I!lcar PrPdcsh a n d Rap+sihdn.
h) EAST ZONt As;nm. blan~pur, lrlpura, WeSl Bengal. Bihar, Oriau 5lkklm. Elltiuun. Andaman,, h(crlh Fast F r o n t i e r A g e n c y a n d Nagaland;
c) CI \IKF ZONF Mddhya Prsdcrh, Vidharbha areas of Mahard$hlra Snare and rhc Vorth-East parr 01 Andhrd P r a d e s h (Codabar1 delta area);
d) WfSl ZONE Maharashrra Slate lexccpt ltdhar-bha area+). Guprai and Yorrh-West par1 of K a r n a r a k a .
21 Sou IH LIINF - Tarnil hadu. Andhra Pradesh (cxccpt the Godabdrl dclia areal. Kerala and KarnataLa (ertcept north west p a n ) .
1
.(9)
(5)
k8im
(8)
(4)
kg, mJ
515
849
595
625
T R E A T - REFRACTORI- PEPMISSUILE
bTEUAL
ABILITY+ NESS TO AiR
S TRENGTH
SEASO?~ING)
OF NAILS IN
DOL~BLE
SHEAR Ii
nol mdlcatcd under aok zones. Ihe ,nlo~matlon 4s lacking.
(13)
kg
320 (I-G?)
180 (125)
245 (215)
llO(90)
225( ISO)
170(100)
120 (601
Luo (7s)
70 (30)
llO(100)
( w (60)
I30 (loo)
I 275 (90)
tnu~.lsd;!)
The tlm+rs shall be cLlsslficd for durabllxy accqxdmg tc thclr awrage !ifc as follows:
HIGH T.mbers hakinK avcragc lift of 120 m o n t h s dnd over:

Mont r 4TI
Tlmbrrs hawng average Life oi less tnan I Xl months hut nf Ml months or oter, and
rlmber hakin& average lilt of less than ho months.
I.ClU
Di;rablll?y of various spec~cs m thrir teanwood is based on the Gra\tyardtests carried out in the open in whrch test spccrmens ofsizc 60 X 5 X 5 cm ofuntrcated heanwond were buried inthe
ground LJ ha,! their length
* Treatabil~ty - Treatable timbers may be classified as fol! >ws to Indicate appronmiatcly the degree of resistance offered by the heartwood of a species t&l the pcnctration of t!x presenm~e
tlutd under a workmg pressure oI 10.5 t8 cm
a ) Hcdrtuood s~sily rrrJtablr.
b) Heartwood Iredtabls hut compk?r pcnstratwn 01 prewwafne I-XX :~lwa!s att.llnrd;
c) Hear~uood only partially trcatahlr;
d) Heartwood refractory to Ireatmrnt; and
e) Hcartuood VCQ retraclory lo trealmcnt. penetrrt~on oi prcservatlve kmg practlcai only from slds nr e n d
f Refractormrs5 to Air Seasoning - lhe timbers are classillcd. as stated below. depending upon thclr behavlour with resp. I of crackmp and splrflmg durm g normal a:r sedsonmg
suttable for the spcc~cs concerned.
practice
High refractoriness (indicated High in the Tobir).

Moderate refractoriness (indicated Moderate m the I ahlr). and
Low refractoriness (indicated Low in the Table)
]I+mtsGblt !ucral.str,en@h (i? doub!c shear) of,?.55 mm @I natls 8.0 cm long. and 5 mm 4 nails
1 he value9 shown m ttahcs fctcr to 3 mm @ natls.
-
I5 cm lnng at lengthening joints and node joints (values in brackets are far node joIntsI IS gl\sn
suitable treatment where necessary. They

may be used on,any location. If the
location is inside and not in contact with
the ground, low durability timber may be
used after..,proper seasoning and
preservative treatment are given in
;;dordance with good practice [VI-3(5)];
2 RECOMMENI,ED PERCENTAGE
MCIIS.1 [IRE CC)% 1 FKT V.41 t/ES
rAB1.E
(Ciuuw
u\t
SI
NO
I(
(2)
(1)
b) The loads should be continuous and

permanent.
Structural
i)
4.3)
ZOhES
II
III
1v
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
12
14
17
20
elements
s.3 For other grades the permissible stresses

ven in Table 7 shall be multiplied by the
ollowing factors to obtain the permissible
stresses assuming that the conditions laid
down in 5.2 are satisfied:
a) For Grade 1 timber
1.16
b) For Grade 3 timber
0.84
16
14
i2
IO
Doors and
wndws
*The counwy has heen broadly dwided Into the following
f o u r Tones hased on the humidity varialions in Ihe
country.
ii)
Avcragc annual rclat~ve
Average Jnnusl relatwc humid!@ 40 to

50 percent.
5.3.1 When low durability timbers are10 be

used [see 5.2(a)] on outside locations, the
permissible stresses for all grades oftimber,
arrived at by 5.2 and 5.3 shall be multiplied by
0.8.
5.4 Modlfwation Factors for Permissible
humtidlty less
than 40 percent.
For detailed londl clns<lilc;ilIr>n. relerence may be made

to good practice [VI-?(?)]
Stresses
5.4.1 For change in slope of grain when the
IABI [~ 3 PKLt-LRRLL) CLI I SIZLS OI

SrKliCI lJRAl
TIMBERS FOR ROOF TRIISSFS
(FROM 3 TO 20 METRES)
timber has not been graded and has major

defects like slope of grain, knots and checks or
shakes but not beyond permissible value, the
permissible stress given in Table 7 shall be
multiplied by modification factor KI for
different slopes of grain as given in Table 8.
(Cl0Usc~ 4 4 I)
THICK~I \L; ,h
cm
5 . 4 . 2 F OR C HANGE IN D U R A T I O N O F
LoAD - For durations for design load other
than continuous, the permissible stresses

given in Table 7 shall be multiplied by the
modification factor Kz given in Table 9.
6. DESIGN CONSlDERATlONS
6.1 All structural members, asse.mblies or
framework in a building in combination with
the floors, walls and other structural parts of

the building shall be capable of sustaining,
without execeding the limits of stress
specified, the worst combination of all
loadings (spe 6.3).
20
2.5
30
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.0
4
5
6
I3 4
5
6
8
IO
4
5
6
II IO
- 6
8
IO
6
8
IO
- - - 8
IO
I
IO
(1)
6
8
IO
other means.
purpose.
hole
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
~
12
I2
I2
12
2
I?
14
:4
14
14
14
I4
16
16
I6
16
I6
I6
m. I.5 m. 2 m,
TABLE 4 PREFFRREI) (UT SIZES OF

STRUCTLIRAL TIMBER FOR ROOF PURLINS.
KAFTEKS. FI.OOR RFAMS. FTC
from the gross section the projected area of all
munt for thit
(5)
Preferred lengths <)I timber.

2.5 m and 3 m.
material removed by boring, grooving or
VlP
(4)
NOISE
6.2.1 The net section is obtained by deducting
&II not be t&at into
(3)
(21
WlDlN IY cm
IN
cm
NOTE --In amc of nailing, the area of the prcbored
cm
f.
(1)
T HICKNESS
6.2\ Ner Section
WII)1H IN
p
(;,
-
13)
IO
10
h
\
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
12
14
I6 -I2
I4 I6 - - 14
16
I8
20
NOTE --Preferred lengths of timber 2 m, 2.5 m. 3 m and

3.5 m.
NATtONAL WtWNG CODS
OF I N D I A
TARLE 5 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF

sr~ucru~.~~ nMi5Erts FUR PARDON
FRAMING AND COVERING
(Clause 4.4.0
TnarNESS IN
cm. f
(1) (2) (3)
1.0
1.s - 5 2.0
- ;;a410
4
:
;; - _
*I0
-
WIDTH
IN
cm
\
(4) (9 (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

- 5 - 8 IO - - - IO
I2 I6 - 8
IO
I2
I6 - 8
a
IO I2 I6
20 24
IO I2 I6 20 24
6
:
IO I2 I6 20 24
IO I2 I6 20 24
6
8 I2 I6
20
24
IO I2 I6 20 24.
NOTE -Prtfcrrcd lendha of timber : 0.5 m, I m, I .5 m

and2m.
6.2.2 The net section used in calculatingloadcarrying capacity of a member shall be the
least net section determined as above by
passing a plane or a series of connected planes
transversely through the members.
6.2.3 Notches shall in no case remove more
than one quarter of the section.
62.4 In the design of an intermediate or long
column, gross section shall be used in
calculating load carrying capacity of the
column.
6.3 Loads
63.1 The loads shall conform to those given
in Part VI Structural design, Section I Loads.
6.3.2 The worst combination and location of
loads shall be considered for design. Wind and
seismic forces shall not be considered to act
simultaneously.
6.4 Flexural Members
6.4.1 E F F E CT IVE S PAN -The effective span
of beams and other flexural members shall bc

taken as the distance from face of supports
plus one-half of the required length of bearing
at each end except that for continuous beams
and joists the span may be measured from
centre of bearing at those supports over which
the beam is continuous.
64.2 FO R M F A C T O R S FOR FLEXURAL
MEMBERS -The following form facton shall
be applied to the bending stress:
a) RECTANGULAR SECTION - F o r
rectangular sections. for differentdepths
of beams. the form factor Ks Shall be
taken as:
Form factor (KJ) shall not be applied for

beams having depth less than or equalto
30 cm.
B O X BFAMS A N D I- B E A M S - F o r
box
beams and l-beams the form factor Kq
shall bc obtained by using the formula:
K, = 0.8 + 0.8 Y
where
Y=t2(6-8/: +3q2)(l -q,)+q,
c)
d)
SOLIDCIRCULARCROSSSECTIONS-For
solid circular cros% sections, the foFm

factor k~ shall be taken as 1.18.
S Q U A R E CROSS S E C T I O N S -For s q u a r e
cross sections where the load is in the
direction of diagonal, the form factor Kd
shall be taken as 1.414.
6.4.3 W IDTH ---The minimum width of the

beam or any flexural member shall not be less
than 5 cm or one-fiftieth of the span whichever
is greater.
6.4.4 DE,PTH -The depth of beam or any
flexural member shall not be taken more than
three times of its width without lateral
stiffening.
6.4.4.1 STIFFENING -All fkxural members
having a depth exceeding three times itswidth
or a span exceeding 50 times its width or both
shall be laterally restrained from twistingor
buckling and the. distance between such
restraints shall not exceed 50 times its width.
6.4.3 DE F L E C T I O N -The deflection in the
case of all flexural members. (except nxil
laminated beams) supporting brittle materials
like gypsum ceilings, states, tiks and asbestos
sheets shall not exceed I/360 of the span. The
deflection in the case of other flexural
members shall not exaed I /240 of the span
and I / 180 of the freely hanging kngthin the
case of cantilevers.
6.4.6
SH E A R
6.4.6.1
The following formula shall apply:
a) General formula:
b) Rectangular beams:
3v
H=FD
4 Notched beams with tension H =gg2

notches and supports
(see 6.4.6.3)
TABLE 6
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CUT SIZES OF TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL USE
(Cbuw 1.5.2.1)
All
G RA DE
I%
G RA D E
GRADE 3
DEFEcTS
(1)
i)
dimensions are m milhmctrcs.
(4)
(3)
(2)
Wane
Shall be permissible al 11s

deepest portion up to a limit
of l/8 of the wtdth of tbc
surlacc on whrch it occurs
il)
Worm holes
Other than tho.u due to powdcr post butkr am permissibk
iii)
Slope of gratn
Shall not be more than
iv)
Live knots:
WIDTH OF WIDE
FACES OF CUT
SIZES OF TIMBER
Max
v)
I oh 10
(5)
Shall be permissible at its

dapcrt ponmn up to a limit
of l/6 of the width of the
surface on watch II occutx
Shall be pcrmlssibk at its

deepest portlon up to a limit
of I14 of the width of the
surface on which tt occurs
Other than thoscduc to post

butb arr pcrmibsibk
Orher than those due to powda

post beetles arc pcrmissibk
Shall not k morr than I in I5
Shall not be more than I in 12
PFRMISSIBLE MAYIUUU SIZE

PERMISSIIILE M A X IM U M SIZE
PERUISSIBLE MAXIMUM SIZE
OF LIVE KNOT OPI
OF I IVE KNOT ON
OF I IVC KNOT 0%
cf-*-, ,-A-,
Narrow Faces The Rcmainmg Narrow Faces The Rcmainina Narrow I-aces The Rcmninina
and 14 of
and I14 of
CentralHalf
Central Half- and l/4 of
Central Half
the Width
of the Width
the Width
of the Width
the Width
of the W\dth
Face Close
C!osc
Face
of the Wide
Face closc
of the Wide
of the Wldc
Faces
to Edges of
10 Edges of
Faces
to Edger of
FEC.3
Cut SIX of
Cut Sire of
Cut Size of
Timber
Timber
Timber
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
75
IO0
I50
200
250
3iKI
350
400
450
500
550
boo
IO
I3
I9
22
25
27
29
32
33
35
3h
38
IO
13
19
25
29
38
41
44
47
50
52
53
I9
25
38
44
50
54
57
63
66
69
72
75
19
29
38
57
66
7s
81
87
96
99
105
108
30
39
57
75
87
II4
I23
132
25
38
50
57
75
81
87
93
100
103
106
141
I50
156
I59
I14
ChczAr and shah

WlDrH OF THE
PERMISSIBLE DEPTH
FACE OF THE
Mar
1IMBER
MAX
I-P
(1)
0)
75
100
I50
I2
18
200
250
300
350
u10
25
33
40
50
57
46
450
500
550
Ml
76
83
90
I00
(9
(4)
?h
25
35
50
65
81
100
II5
54
75
99
I20
I50
I71
198
225
131
I50
I65
ISI
200
270
300
NAllONM BUILlNNC
CODE OF
INDIA
TABLE 7 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES FOR GRADE 2 TIMBER
(Clal+r 5.2)
PERMISVBLF: SlRESSES. b.pf/Cm
Locar1oh:
r
(2)
(1)
tiroup A
(E= 126)
Group B
(E- 98 IO 126)
Group C
(E- 56 IO 98)
0)
(4)
(5)
I82
I52
120
I23
102
81
84
10
60
I2
17
1;
6
9
Bending and tenSIon along gram
lnsldc locattons
DutsJe locations
wet locations
Shear
Horizontal, all locations*

Along grain, all locations
Compression parallel to Fain
inside locations
Outside locations
Wet locations
120
70
64
106
88
62
58
lnsldc Iocatwns
(h&de locations
Wet Iocatwns
40
22
22
Compressron prepcndlcular to
gram
46
38
I:
The valueb of horirontal shears to be used only lor beams

In all other cases \hcar along grain IO he used
-.-__--.
All unilorm loads within a distance equal

to the depth of the beam from the edge of
the nearest support may be neglected, and
TAHL.E 8 MDDIFIcA~~D~~~ FACTOR K, .ro

ALLOW FOR CHANGE IN SI.OPF OF GRAIN
b)
(Clwse 5.4. I)
SLOPE
M O D I F I C A T I O N FACTOR K,
7---y
Strength of
Strength of
Beams, Jouts
Posts or
and TICS
Columns
(1)
(2)
(1:
rn IO
@NO
0.74
I tn I2
0%
0.82
I m I4
0.98
0.87
g I in IS
l-00
1.00
-~
All concentrated loads m the vicinity of

the supporrs may be reduced by the
reduction factor applicable according to
Table IO.
_
fAMLE IO REDlIC-flON FACTOR FOR
CDNCEN-TRATEI) LO.ADS INTHF V I C I N I T Y
OF SlIPPORTS
[Clouw 6.4.6.2 (b)J
Distance of load
from the nearest
rupporl
Reduction factor
TABLE 9 MODIFICATION FACTOR Kz F O R

CHANGE IN DURATION OF LOADING
151)
or less
20
2.5 D
0.60
0.40
0 . 2 0 N o reduction
30
or more
NOTE .-For i n t e r m e d i a t e d i s t a n c e s . perccntagc

reduction may be obtained by linear interpolation.
(Clause 5.4.1)
DURATION
OF
LOADING
M~LUFICATION
FACTOR Kz
Cbntinuous
I.0
Two months
I.15
Seven days
I.25
Wind and urthquakc
I.33
Irutantancour or impaet
2.00
6.142 In determinmg the vertical reaction V,

the following deductions in loads may bc
made:
Unless the local stress is calculated

and found to be within the permissible stress,
flexural member shall not be cut, notched or
6.4.6.3
bored except as follows:

a) Notches may be cut in the top or bottom
neither deeper than one-fifth of the depth
of the beam nor farther from the edge of
the support than one-sixth of the span;
W Holes not larger in diameter than onequarter of the depth may be bored in the
middle third of the depth and length, and
cl If holes or notches occur at a distance
Beater than three times the depth of the
---
.
I..
members from the edge of the nearest

support, the net remaining depth shall be
used in determining the bending strength.
d)
No allowance need be made for the

difference injntensity ofthe bearing stress
due to bending of a beam.
e) The bearing area should be calculated as
6.4.7 B E A R I N G
the net area after allowance for the

amount of wane as permitted in 4.5.3.
6.4.7.1 The ends ot flexural members shall be
supported in recesses which provide adequate

ventilation to prevent dry rot and shall not be
enclosed. Flcxural members except root
timbers which are supported directly on
masonry or concrete shall have a length of
bearing of not less than 7.5 cm. Members
supported on corbels, offsets and routtimbers
on a wall shall bear immediately on and be
fixed to wall-plate not less than 7.5 X 4.0 cm.
1-l For bearing stress under a washer or a

small plate, the same coefficient specified
m Table I I may be taken for a bearing
with a length equal to the diameter of the
washer or the width of the small plate.
g) When the,direction of stress is a( an angle
to the directton of the grain in any

structural member, then the pcrriussible
bearing stress in that member shall be
citlculatcd by the following formula:
Timber joists or floor planks &all not bc

supported on the top tlanpe of steel beams
unless the bearing stress, calculated on the net
bearing as shaped to fit the beam, is less than
t h e p e r m i s s i b l e c o m p r e s s i v e sirrss
perpendicular to the grain /c,,. specified in
Table 7.
6.5
6.4.7.2 BEARING S I REsS
a)
b)
LENGTH AND POSIIIUK uF WARINGS -At
any bearing on the side grain of timber,

the permissible stress in compression
perpendicular to the grain, fin, is
dependent on the length and position of
the bearing.
The pcrmlssible stresses given in Table 7
for compression perpendicular to the:
grain are also the permissible stresses for
bearings of any length at the ends of a
member and lor bcarmgs I50 mm or more
in length at any other position.
6.5.1 SOI It> COLlJMNS ---Solid column shall

bt: c!sssllled Into shor!. Intermedtatr and long
colurllns descending u p o n t h e i r slendcrn<ss
ratio (S/A ab follows:
Short columns where SJd dues not
exceed It,
Interrncdlate c o l u m n s w h e r e S/d IS
I I and Kw, and
httwe~~~
l.ong columns where S/i, is greater than

Kir
c) For bearings less than I50 mm in length
located 75 mm or more from the end ot a

member as shown in Fig. I the permissible stress may br multiplied by the
modification factor KT given in Table I I.
6.5.1.1 For short columns, the permlsrible

compressive stress shall be calculated as
lollows:
f; =_fip
I
75 mm,
MIN
6.5.12 For intermediate columns the

permissible compressive stress is calculated by
using the following formula:
150mm MAX
BE ARlNG
f+,,[ I- f ($-J]
Fig. 1 Position of End 0earings
TABLE I I MODIFICATION ~KT0R K, FOR REARING STRESSES

.
Lrlythofbewin$,inmm
ModifIIrion fmor. Kl
[C/me 6.1.7.2 tc) und (I)]

IS
25
40
50
75
IKI
IM 01 mom
1.67
1.40
I.25
l.20
I.13
I.10
I.uo
6.5.1.3 For long columns, the pcrmlssible

corn resrive stress shall be calculated by using
the P
ollowing formula:
0.329 E
/e=(s/d)2
6.5.f.4 In the case of solid columns oftimber.
S/d ratio shall not exceed 50.
6.5.1.5 The permissible load on a column of
circular cross section shall not exceed that
permitted for a square column of an
equivalent cross-sectional area.
6.5.1.6 For determining S/d ratio of a
tapered column, its least dimension shall be
taken as the sum of the corresponding least
dimensions at the small end of the column and
one-third of the difference between this least
dimension at the small end and the
corresponding least dimension at the large
end. but in no case shall the least dimension
for the cloumn bc taken as more than one and
a half times the least dimension at the small
end. The induced stress at the small endofthe
tapered column shall not exceed the
permissible compressive stress in the direction
of grain.
6.5.2 B UILT-UP
COLUMNS- BOX COLUMNS
$5.2.1 Box columns shall be classified into

short, intermediate and long columns as
follows:
a) Short columns, where
is less than 8;
6.5.2.5 The following values of U and q.

depending upon plank thickness (I) in 6.5.2.1.
6.5.212, 6.5.2.3 and 6.5.2.4. shall be used:
I
(in cm)
4
0.80
0.60
2.50
5.00
1.00
1.00
6.5.3 B U I L T- UP C O L U M N S- SP A C E D
COLUMNS
6.5.3.1 The formulae for solid columns as

specified in 6J.l are applicable to spaced
columns with a restraint factor of 2.5 or 3,
depending upon distances of end connectors
in the column:
The ccntroid of connectors or of the
connector group in the end block shall be
within one-twentieth of the lengthS from
the column end, and
The ccntroid of connectors or connector
group in the end block shall be between
one- twentieth and one-tenth ofthe length
S from the column end.
6.5.3.2 For intermediate spaced column the
permissible compressive stress shall be:
6.5.3.3 For long spaced columns the formula

shall be:
b) Intermediate columns, where

is bewan 8 and KP; and
fc=
s.
c) Long columns, where J=

is greater than KS.
6522 For short columns. the ocr missibk
oomprcssive stress shatl be Calculated as
follows:
/c = qfcp
6.5.2.3 For intermediate columns, the
permissible compressive stress shall be
obtained using the Eollowing formula:
0.329 E X 2.5
(S/d)
6.5.3.4 For individual members of spaced

columns. S/d ratio shall not exceed 80.
6.5.4 Compression members shall not be
notched. When it is necessary to pass services
through such a member, this shall be effected
by means of a bored hole not larger in
diameter than one-quarter the width of the
face through which the hole is bored provided
that the local stress is calculated and found to
be yithin the permissible stress specified. The
distance from the edge of the hole to the edge
of the member shall not be less than onequarter of the width of the face.
6.6, Slrucrural Members Subject to Bending
65.2.4 For long columns, the permissible

&m rcssive stress shall be calculated by using
the Pormula:
artd Axial Stresses
Structural members subjected both to

bending and axial compression shall be
6.6.1
d e s i g n e d t o c o m p l y with the followrng
formula:
-& + ./.b
.A
fc
is not greater
than I.
6.6.2 Stuctural members subJected both to

bending and axial tension shall be designed to
comply wtth the following formula:
b + b
,/I
fh
IS not greater
than
lengthening .joint shall be as follows (see also

Fig. 2):
SI
No.
Tvpe o f Rquire
Stress in
mew,
the Joint Min
End distance
Tension
compression
12 n
10 n
ii) In direction of
grain
Tension
compre&on
10 n
5 n
i)
Sn
iii) Edge distance
7. DESIGN Ol- COMMCjh STEEL WIRE

SAlI. JOINTS
7.1.1 I he dtmensron of an Individual piece of

timber (that IS any single memher) shall be
within the range given below.
a) I he mrnimum thickness of the main
members rn mono-chord constructron
shallbe 30 mm.
5n
iv) H e t w e e n r o w o f
nails perpendicular to the

grain,
N01t
The 5 n dlsrance between rows perpendicular to

the gracn may be increased subject to rhc avallabrhty of
width ol the member keepmg edge distance constant.
b) The minrmum thickness of an individual

of member i n s p l i t - c h o r d
piece
construction shall be 20 mm tor web
members and 25 mm for chord members.
7.3.2 NODE .lOINTS -The requirement for

spacing of nails in node joints shall be as
spectfied in Fig. 3 where the members are at
right angles and as in Fig. 4 where the
members are inclined to one another at angles
other than 90 and subjected to either pure
compression or pure tension.
c)
7.4 Penetration of Nails
1 he space between two adjacent pieces of

timber shall be restrtcted to a maximum
ot 3 times the thickness of the individual
piece of timber of the chord member. In
case of web members, it may be greater
for jomtng facilitres.
7.1.2 No lengtheningjoint shall preferably be

located at a panel point. Generally not more
than two, but preferably one, lengthening
joint shall be permitted between the two panel
joints of the members.
7.2
Spectficotion and Diameter of Notls
7.2.1 The nails used for timber joints shall

conform to Part V Building matertals.
7.2.2 The diameter of nail shall be within the
limits of one-eleventh to one-sixth of the least
thickness of members being connected.
7.2.3 Where the nails are exposed to the
saline conditions, common wire nails shall be
galvanized.
7.3 Arrangement oj Nuils in the Joints -The,
end distances, edge distances and spacings of
nails in a nailed joint should be such as to
avoid undue splitting of the wood and shall
not be less than those given in 7.3.1 and 7.3.2.
7 . 3 . 1 L E N G T H EN I N G J O I N T S - T h e
requirement of spacing of nails in a
7.4. / For a lap joint when the nails are driven

from the side of the thinner member, the
length of penetration of nails in the thicker
member shall be one and a half times the
thickness of the thinner member subject to
maximum of the thickness of the thicker
member.
7.4.2 For butt joints the nails shall be driven
through the entire thickness of the joint.
7 S Design Considerations
7._5.1 Where a number of nails are used in a
joint, the allowable load in lateral resistance
shall be the sum of the allowable loads for the
individual nails, provided that the centroid of
the group of these nails lies on the axis of the
member and the spacings conform to 7.3.
Where a large number of nails are to be
provided at a joint. they should be so arranged
that there are more of rows rather than more
number of nails in a row..

7.5.2 Nails shall. as far as practicable, be
arranged so that the line of force in a member
passes through the centroid of the group of
nails. Where this is not practicable, allowance
shall be made for any eccentricity in
computing the maximum load on the fixing
nails as well as the loads and bending moment
in the member.
NATKINAL
UlLDINC COOL OF INDIA
5n mm.
EFFECTIVE END
DISTANCE
2 A M o n o c h o r d T y p e Bult Joint Subject tn C o m p r e s s i o n
10 n min.-
5n min.
. .
+-+--t+.t-_+
j--
-+
-+~--c-----+-
5n min.
+__+__t
+.+_+
D I S T A N C E Sn m i n .
Type Butt Joint
LB Monochord
Subject to Tension
n= shank diameter of natl
Fix. 2 Spacirrg of A/ails i n a Lengthmtn~ Joint-Conttnued
PART
V I
SVtII)CTURAL DLQGN - SE(TIUN
WUOU
,,.,.l
EFFECTIVE EWD
DtSTA(rCE ton MIN
EFFECTIVE EDGE
DISTAMCE Sn WIN -I
2C Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subjcc? toCcmprcsrion
2D Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subject to Tension

n = shmnk diameter of nail.
Fig. 2 Spacing of Nails in a Lengthening Joint
w!*
NATWNAL
BUILUNC
5n WIN-
3A
h my be incrcurd to IO n. if tkdaigncd idthof

chord member permiu. OWrwi~ IIK end of tbc
lmdcd rrb mccnkr may k extended by &I, Min.
n = &tank dLmctcr of NIL
Fig. 3 Spacing qf Nail Where Members arc

at Right At@es IO One Anorhcr
?AmT
VI
IIIwcN)AL
DUKN-8unoN
WUOD
YIP
sn
-7wil
r LOADED EOGE
51 may be increased IO IOn. if thedargncd width of chord member permltr.

Otherwise Ihc end of Ihc loaded web member may bc cxrcnded by 5n. Min
Fig. 4 Spacing of Nails al Node Joints Where

Members are Inclined to One Another
73.3 Adjacent nails shall preferably be
.
.
driven from opposite faces. that IS, the nails
are driven alternatively trom either face.
7.5.4 For a rigid joint, a mmimum of 2 nails
for nodal joints and 4 nails for lengthening
joint shall be driven.
7.6.1 The initial upward camber provided at

the centre of the lower chord of nail-jointed
timber trusses shall be nqt less than 1,200 for
timber structures using seasoned wood and
I/ 100 for unseasoned or partially seasoned
wood.
7.5.5 Two nails in a horizontal row are better

than using the same number of nails in a
vertical row.
7.6 Special Consideration in Nail-Jointed
lluss Ckwlruction
7.6.2 The total combined thickness of the

gusset or splice plates on either side of the
joint in a mono-chord type construction shall
not be less than one and a half times the
thickness of the main members subject to a
1-P
N A T I O N A L DUlWNC
CODE OF I N D I A
minimum thickness of 2.5 cm of individual

gusset plate.
N OTE I
-The allowahlc load or lateral strength values of

nails shall be those as given in Table I I.
N OTE 2 -The strengthdata forjointsgiven in this section

apply to gusset or splice or fish plates Kf solid -wood;
however. materials other than sohd wood may be used for
gusset when field tests xe made and their strength
requiiements have been estahhshed.
7.6J.The total combined thickness of all

spacer blocks or plates or bothincluding outer
splice plates, at any joint in a split-chord type
construction shall not be less than one and a
half times the total thickness of all the main
members at that joint.
8.2.3 In order to obtain the overall width of

the beam, the number and thickness of planks
to form vertical nailed laminated beams, and
also type and size of wire nail shall be as
mentioned in Table 12. The protruding
portion of the nail shall be cut off or cleriched
across the grains.
.
TABLE I2 NUMBtK AND SIZE OF PLANKS AND
NAILS FOR NAIL ED LAMINATED BEAMS
SL
No
(cm)
7. 7 Fabrication - Ihe fabrication of nailjointed timber construction shall be done in

accordance with good practice [V l-3(6)].
8. DESIGN OF N A I L L A M I N A T E D
TIMBER BEAMS
8.1 Melhod of Arrangement

8.1.1 The beam is made up of 2 to 3 cm thick
planks placed vertically with joints staggered

in the adjoining planks with a minimum
distance 6f 30 cm. The planks are laminated
with the help of wire nails at regular intervals
to take up horizontal shear developed in the
beam besides keeping the planks in position
(see Fig. 5)
N o THICKhESS TY P E A N D S I Z E
OVERA! I
OF NAIL TO BE
WIUTH
OF
OF EACH
USED
OF BEAM PI A N K S PI.ANK
(cm)
(mm)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
2.5
80 long 3.55 dia
2.0
-do-
2 X 2.5
1X2.0
-do-
2.0
100 long 4.0 dia
3.0
-do-
IO
2.5
I25 long 5.0 dia
II
12
3.0
-do-
IS
3.0
I50 long 5.0 dia
-do
N OTE ~~ A number of combmatiops of the different

thickness of planks may be adopted as long as the
minrmum and maximum thickness of the planks are
adhered to.
8.2 Sizes of Planks and Beams

8.2.1 The p!anks thickness for fabrication of
8.3 Design Considerarions
nailed laminated beams recommended are

2-0, 2.5 and 3-O cm.
8.3.1 Nail laminated beams shall be designed
in accordance with 6.
8.2.2 In case of nailed laminated timber beam
the maximum depth and length of planks shall
be limited to 25 cm and 200 cm, respectively.
8.3.f.l The deflection in the case of nailed

laminated timber beams. joists, purlins,
-.._
,6*-_- -~
t60----
ueZ5mm THICK TIMBER PLANK S

C~75mmc3oOmm
(AU
Fyg. 5
dimcnaiona LIZ! in em unksa ot&rwiac spiftcd)
Phn and Elevation of a Typical Nailed

Laminated lhber &am
b a t t e n s a n d o t h e r flcxural members
supporting brittle materials like gypsum,
ceiling slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall
not exceed I /480 of the span. The deflection
in case of other-flexural members shall not
exceed I / 360 of the span in the case of beams
and joists. and I I225 of the freely hanging
length in case of cantilevers.
8.3.2 Permissible lateral strength of mild steel
wire nails shall be as given in Table I column
13 for Indi;tn Species of timber. which shall
apply to nails that have their points cut flush
with the facts. For nails clenched across the
grains the strength may be increased by 20
percent over the values for nails with points
cut flush.
8.3.3 ARRANGEMENT
OF
NAII s
8.3.3.1 A mimmum number ul four nails in a

vertical row at regular interval not cxcceding
7.5 cm to take up horizontal shear as well as to
keep the planks in position shall be used. Near
the joints ol the planks this distance may,
however. be limited to 5 cm instead of 7.5 cm.
8.3.3.2 Shear shall be calculated .at various
points of the beam and the number of nails
required shall be accommodated within the
distance equal to the depth of the beam. with a
minimum of 4 nails in a row at a standard
spacing as shown in Fig. 6.
8.3.3.3 If the depth of the hcam is more. then
the vertical intcrmedrate spacing of nails may
be increased proportionately.
8.3.3.4 If the nails required at a point are
more than that can he accommodated in a
row, then these shall be provided lengthwise
of the beam within the drstance equal to the
depth of the beam at standard lengthwise
spacing.
8.3.3.5 For nailed laminated beam minimum
depth of 8 cm for 3.55 mm and 4 mm diameter
nails, and 12.5 cm for 5 mm diameter nails
shall be provtded.
8.4 Fabricorion
8.4.1 The fabrication of nailed laminated

timber beams shall be done in accordance
9. DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
JOINTS
9. J Generul- For total prefabrication, bolt
jointed construction is the most befitting idea
for ti,mber structural components. Bolt
jointed constructionunits give better farilities
as regards workshop ease, transport
convenience and re-assembly at site of work.
This technique is best suited for defence
purposes for semi-permanent structures
(sheds) which are required to be erected at
high altitudes and in far off places. Mass
production of structutal components i n
factories can thus be made far rational.
9.2.1 Beams shall be designed in accordance
with 6.
9.2.2 Where a number of bolts are used in a
joint, the allowable load in withdrawal or
lateral resistance shall be the sum of the
allowable loads for the individual bolts.
9.3 Arranpemenr of Bolts
9.3.1 The following spacings in bolted joints
shall be followed (see Fig. 7):
a) SPACTNG OF BOLTS IN A ROW - F o r
parallel and perpendicular to grain
loading = 48.
b) SPACING BETWEEN ROWS OF BOLTS
I) For perpendicular to grain loading :
2.5 d, to 5d, (2.5 ds for r/d, ratio of 2
and 5 h for r/h ratio of 6, where t is
the thickness of main memberand do is
the diameter of the bolt used).
2) for parallel to grain loading : At least
(N-4) d) with a minimum of 2.5 h,
where N is total number of bolts. Also
governed by net area at critical section
6A For 3-55 mm and 4 mm &meter Nails
68 For 5 mm hmctcr NtiL

(AU dimenrioru in mm)
fig. 6
Staudard lrngth wise Spacing in

Nailed klminated Beam
L4,
7A Sprcin( of Bolts in Lenahenlng Joinu
78 Spcinl of Bolu
(Jointr loaded ptxallel to grain)
(Joints
A= (N-4) d, or 2.5 d, whichever is patsr. Also

loverned by net area A( critical aectmn (aran should
be IJO percent of the total area in be4nne under all
bohr).
Node Joinu
I oaded perpendicular to gnin)
6 = I .5 da
or half the distance between rows of bolts,

w hi&ever is greater.
da = diameter of the bolt
1=
N= total number of bolta in the joint.
II
thickness of the mai; member.
Fig. 7 Typical Scing of Bolts in Srructuwl3oinrs

which should be 80 percent of the total
area in bearing under all bolts.
bolts arranged at the joint with respect to

loading direction.
for soft woods in

tension, 5 do for hardwoods in tension
and 4 do tor all species in compression.
9.3.3 Tht bolts shall be arranged in such a

manner SO as to pass the centre of resistance of
bolts through the rntersection ofihc gravity
axis of the members.
9.3.4 Staggering of bolts shall be avoided as
far as possible in case of members loaded
parallel to grain of wood. For loads acting
perpendicular to grain of wood. staggering is
preferable to avoid splitting due to weather
effects.
9.3.5 B O L T I N G -The bolt holes shall be
bored or drilled perpendicular to the surface
involved. Forcible driving of the bolts shall be
avoided which maycausecrackingorsplitting
of members. A bolt hole of 1.0 mm oversize
may be used as a guide for preboring.
cl
END DISTANCE --~7 dj
d)
EDGE DISTANCE
I)
For parallel to grain loading I.5 & or

half the distance between rows of
bolts, whichever is greater.
2) For perpendicular to grain loading,

the loaded edge distance shall be at
least 4 h.
9.3.2 For inclined members. the spacing
given above for perpendicular and parallel to

grain of wood may be used as a guide and
rur VI-+m WXURAL
DUIGN--_CWON
Woo0
,_*23
LlST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standard.s which are acceptable as good practice and accepted
standards in the fulfi~ment of the requirements of the Code. T?te latest version of a standard shall
be adopted at the time of the enfirrcement of rbe Code. The standards listed ma-v be used by the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the&de
In the following list. the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of rhe reference in this partlsecnon.
(1)
IS : 1708-1969 Methods oftesting small

clear specimens of timber (first
of, timber used for different purposes
(second revision)
revision)
( 4 ) 13:3629-1966
Specification for
structural timber in building
IS : 2408-1963 Methods of static tests of

timbers in structural sizes
IS : 2455-1974 Methods of sampling of
model trees and logs for timber testing
and their conversion (first revision)
(5) 1S:401-1982 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e f o r
preservation of timber (third revision)
(6)
IS: 2366-1983 Code of practice for nailjointed timber construction C/irsr
revision)
IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of

commercial timbers flrsr revision)
(7) IS:4983-1984 Code of p r a c t i c e f o r
(3) 13:287-1973 Recommendations f o r
design a n d constructron o f nail

laminated timber beams first revision)
(2)
maximum permissible moisture content
(under prim)

SECTION 4 MASONRY
BUREAU OF lNDL4.N STANDARDS

SECTION 4 MASONRY
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the structural design of non-reinforced masonry elements in buildings.
Results of designs by normal structural analysis for certain loadings and spans have beenprsaanted
in the form of nomograms in order to obviate the need for detailedcakulations in simple
structures, thus facilitating the work of designers.
0. S In the revision of this section, certain provisions have been updated following therevidon of
IS: 1905 on which the earlier version was based. The following major changes have been made in
this revision.
a) The requirements of a masonry element for stability have beenmodfied.
b) In the design of a free standing wall, provision has been made for taking advantage of the
tensile resistance in masonry under certain conditions.
c) Provision regarding effective height of a masonry wall between openingshas been modif&d.
d) Method of working out effective height of a wall with a membrane type DPC has
been modified.
e) Criteria for working out effective length of wall having openings has been modified.
f) fag general guidelines have been given for dealing with concentrated loads for design of
g) Provisions regarding cutting and chases in walls have been amplified.
0.3 Structural design requirements of this section are based on IS: 19051987 Code of practice for
structural use of unreinforced masonry (fhird rev&&n) and IS:43261976 Code of practice
for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings(first revision).
rAITwslxucNau DW-N 4 MA+MRY
1
w-4
CONTENTS
0.
FOREWORD
1.
SCOPE
2.
TERMINOLOGY
3.
MATERIALS
4.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
6.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES
8.
NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS
APPENDIX A
SOME GUIDELINES FOR ASSESSMENT OF

ECCENTRICITY OF LOADING ON WALLS
APPENDIX B
CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVE

STRESS OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST
APPENDIX C GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY

SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRATED LOADS
APPENDIX D GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF
NON-IJJAD BEARING WALL
APPENDIX E
2
#
NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

NAllopLAL BUILDIWG COM OF INDIA
I . SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the structural design
aspects of unreinforced load bearing and nonload bearing walls, constructed with solid or
perforated burnt clay bricks, sand-lime bricks,
stones, concrete blocks, lime based blocks or
burnt clay hollow blocks in regard to the
materials to be used, mximum pe,rmissible
stresses and the methods of design.
1.2 The recommendations of the code do not
apply to walls constructed in mud mortars.
2. TERMINOLOGY
B ED B LOCK - A block bedded on a wall,
column or pier to disperse a concentrated load
on a masonry element.
EJOND - Arrangement of masonry units in
successive courses to tie the masonry together
both longitudinally and transversely; the

arrangement is usually worked out to ensure
that no vertical joint of one course is exactly
over the one in the next course aboveor below
it, and there is maximum possible amount of
lap.
COLUMN.PIERAND BUTTRESS
COLUMN - An isolated vertical load
bearing member, width of which does not
exceed four times the thickness.
PIER - A thickened section forming

integral part of a wall placed at intervals
along the wall, to increase the stiffness of
the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated
load. Thickness of a pier is the overall
thickness including the thickness of the
wall or, when bounded into a leaf of a
cavity wall, the thickness obtained by
treating that leaf as an independent wall
(see Fig. 1).
TMCMNESS
OF PIER, tp
c) BUTTRESS - A pier of sonry built as

an integral part of wall and%rejecting from
either or both surfaces, decreasing incrosssectional area from base to top.
C R O S S- SECTIONAL A REA OF M A S O N R Y
UNIT - Net cross-sectional area of a masonry
unit shall be taken as the gross cross-sectional
area minus the area of cellular space. Gross
cross-sectional area of cored units shall be
determined to the outside of the coring but
cross-sectional area of grooves shall not be
deducted from the gfoss cross-sectional area to
obtain the net cross-sectional area.
CURTAIN WALL - A non-load bearing wall
subject to lateral loads. It may be laterally
supported by vertical or horizontal structural
members where necessary (see Fig: 2).
EFFECTIVE H EIGHT - The height of a wall

or column, to be considered for calculating
slenderness ratio.
EFFECTIVE LENGTH - The length of a wall
to be considered for calculating slenderness
ration.
EFFECTIVE T HICKNESS - The thicknessof a
wall or column to be considered for calculating
slenderness ratio.
H OLLOW U N I T - A masonry unit of which
net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel
to the bearing surface is less than 75 percent of
its gross cross-sectional area measured in the
same plane.
G ROUT - Mortar of pourable consistency.
Jo INT - A junction of masonry units.
a) BED JOINT - A horizontal mortar joint
upon which masonry units are laid.
b) CROSS JOINT - A vertical joint, normal
to the face of the wall.
WlOfH
OF
PlER,Wp
Fig. 1 Definirion of Pier

?ARrvlsFu~ DlISlCK4lUllOW 4 RUSONRV
AGRAMMATIC)
Fig. 2 Masonry Curtain Wall

c) WALL JOINT -- A vertical joint parallel to
rYPES OF tiA LLS
the face of the wall.
a) CAVITY WALL ~ A wall comprising two

leaves, each leaf being built of masonry
units and scparatrd by a cavity and tied
&AI: - Inner or outer section of a cavity wall.
together with metal ties or bonding units

to ensure that the two leaves act as one
structural unit, the space between the
leaves being either left as continuous cavity
or filled with a noqload bearing insulating
and water-proofing material.
b) FACEDWALL ~~ A wall in which facing
and backing of two different materials are
bonded together to ensure common action
under load (see Fig. 3).
A support which
enables a masonry element to resist lateral load
and/or restrains lateral deflection of a masonry
element at the point of support.
L AT E R A L
S UPPORT
IDAI) BEARING WALL ~ A wall designed to

carry an imposed vertical load in addition to its
own weight, together with any lateral load.
M ASONRY .- An assemblage of masonry units

properly bonded together with mortar.
M ASONRY U NIT - Individual units which are
bonded together with the help of mortar to
form a masonry element such as wall, column,
pier, buttress, etc.
P A R T I T I O N W ALL -~ An interior non-load

bearing wall, one storey or part storey in
height.
PANEL W ALL - An exterior non-load bearing
wall in framed construction, wholly supported
at each storey but subjected to lateral loads.
S HEAR W ALL - A wall designed to carry
horizontal forces acting in its plane with or
without vertical imposed loads.
S L E N D ER NESS R ATIO - Rario of effective
height or effective length to effective thickness
of a masonry element.
4
K+
NOTE ~ To ensure monolithic action in faced walls,

shear strength between the facing and the backing
shall be provided by toothing, bonding or other
means.
c) VENEERED W ALL - A wallinwhichthe
facing @attached to the backing but not

so bonded as to result in a commonactlon
under load.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 General - The materials used in masonry
construction shall be in accordance with
Part V Building mater+
3.2 Masonry Units ~ Masonry units used in
construction shall conform to accepted
standards [W4(1)] *
l
In this section, where reference is made to accepted

standards or good practice in relation to mateqial
specification, design, testmg and construction
procedures, the appropriate document listed at the
end of this section may be used as a guide to the
OF INLUA
L STONE FACING
BRICK BACKING
CORlCAETE BLOCK
BACKING
Bf?ICK
F*c~ffi
Fig. 3 Typical Faced Wall
3.2.1 Masonry units may be of the following

types:
a) Common burnt clay building bricks,

b) Stones (in regular sized units),
work construction, unless they have been

thoroughly cleaned and conform to the section
for similar new masonry units.
3.3 Morrar - Mortar for masonry shall conform
to accepted standards [W-4(2)].
d) Concrete blocks (solid and hollow),
3.3.1 Mix proportions and compressive

strengths of some of the commonly used
mortars are given in Table 1,
e) Lime based blocks,
c) Sand-lime bricks,
f) burnt clay hollow blocks,

g) Gypsum partition blocks, and
h) Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks.
NOTE 1 ~ Gypsum partition blocks are used only for
construction of non-load bearing partition walls.
NOTE 2 - Use of other masonry units such as precast
stow blocks not covered by the above specifications
canalso be permitted based on test results.
3.2.2 Masonry units that have been previously
used shall not be reused in brickwork or block-
?MlWavcrvlw
Dl!SlGU-SJ!4XlOW 4 MASONRY
4. I Cenerul -- Masonry structures gain stability

from the support offered by cross walls,flodrs.
roof and other elements such as piers and
buttresses. Load bearing walls are slructurally
more efficient when the load is uniformly
distributed and the structure is so planned that
eccentricity of loading on the members is as
small as possible. Avoidance of eccentric
loading by providing adequate bearing of floor/
roof on the walls providing adequate stiffness in
slabs and avoiding ftity at the supports, etc.,
is especially important in load bearing walls
in multistorey structures. These matters should
receive careful consideration during the
planning stage of masonry structures
5
vu-
TABLE 1 MIX PROPORTIONS AND STRENGTHOFMQRTARS FOR MASONRY
k.
C;RADti.OF
iv&x PRoIwKTI~NS (BY L00.5~ VO L U ME )

Lime
Cement
(2)
%CorB
% Cor B
% Cor B
0
0
0
0
4%
0
0
1 (LP-40)
I CorB
2(a)
2(b)
. H2
1
1
3(a)
3(b)
3(c)
Ml
4(a)
4(b)
4(c)
4(d)
4(e)
4(f)
M2
S(a)
s(b)
5(c)
S(d)
5(e)
S(f)
M3
1
1
0
I
I
1
0
0
0
10
1
I
0
0
0
I0
Sand
(7)
Hl
-I
Pozzohna
(6)
(4)
Lime
Pozzolana
Mixture
(5)
(3)
(1)
MINIMUM
U~RTAR
17
0
0
0
0
2B
1A
18
1 C0rB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 (LP-40)
cl
0
38
1A
IB
I CorB
0
0
0
0
0
0
I (LP-40)
0
0
0
2
3
0
5
6
COMPRFSSIVE
S TRENGTH AT
TODAYS
(8)
N/mm2
10
7.5
6.0
1%
5.0
3.0
3.0
6
9
2
I
0
1%
3.0
2.0
2.1)
2.0
2.0
2.0
7
12
3
1
0
2
1.5
1.5
1 .5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.7
0
0
8
I
0
1
0
1R
0.7
0
2
2
0
1CorB
0.7
0
1
0.7
0
0
1 (LP-40)
2%
0
0.7
1%
0
1 (LP-20)
0
0
i
0
0
7(a)
L2
IB
0
3
0.5
0.5
7(b)
0
0
2
1CorB
1
7(c)
0
1 (LP-7)
0
1%
0.5
0
{
NOTE 1 - Sand for making mortar should be well graded. in case sand is not well graded, its proportion shall be
reduced m order to achieve the minimum specified strength.
6(a)
6(b)
6(c)
6(d)
6(e)
Ll
NATE 2 - For mixes in SI No, 1 and 2, use of lime is not essential from consideration of strength as it does not
increase in strength. However,its use is highly recommended since it improves workability.
result in
NOTE 3 - For mixes in Sl No. 3(a). 4(a), S(a) and 6(a), either lime C or B to the extent of % part of cement
(by volume) or mme plasticizer should be added for improving workability.
bk3TE 4 - For mixes in SI No. 4(b) and 5(b), lime and sand should first be ground in mortar mill and then
ament added to coarse stuff.
N0TE 5 - It is essential that mixes in Sl No. 4(c). 4(d), 4(e), 5(d), S(e), 6(b), 6(c), 7(a) and 7(b) sue prepared by
grinding in a mortar mill.
MOTE 6 - Mix in SI No. 2(b) has been classifttd to be of rame grade as that of Sl No. 2(a), mixes in Sl MO; 3(b)
and 3(c) same as that in S1 No. 3(a), mixes in Sl No. 4(b) to 4(f) same as that in Sl No. 4(a), eItn thou~ thah
compressive strength is less. This is from consideration of strength ofmasonry using difYerent mix propoftkna.
b&TE 7 - A, B, and C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semihydraulic lime and fit Urne reqe&w.@, as
specified in appropriate IS codes.
-
6
u-4
Na7oN4LB- CQolam~
4.2 Lateral Supportsand Stability
Lateral
SUPPORTS
4.21 L A T E R A L
supports for a masonry element such as load
bearing wall or column are intended:
a) to limit slenderness of a masonry.element
so as to prevent or reduce possibiltiy of
buckling of the member due to vertical
loads; and
b) to resist horizontal components of forces
so as to ensure stability of a structure
against overturning.
and of minimum section 6 x 30 mm,

securely fastened to joists and built into
walls as shown in Fig. 5 and 6. The
anchors shall be provided in the direction
of span of timber joists as well as in its
perpendicular direction, at intervals of
not more than 2 m in buildings up to
two storeys and 1.25 m for buildings
more than two storeys in height.
NOTE 1 _ In case precast R C C units are used for
floors and roofs, it is necessary to interconnect them
and suitably anchor them to the cross walls so that
they can transfer lateral forces to the cross walls.
4.2.1.1 Lateral suppori may be in the vertical

or horizontal direction, the former consisting
of floor/roof bearing on the wall or properly
anchored to the same and latter consisting of
cross walls, piers or buttresses.
kTE 2 _ ln case of small houses of conventional

designs, not exceeding two storeys in height, stiffening effect of partitions and cross walls is such that
metal anchors are normally not necessary in case of
timber floor/roof and precast RCC floor/roof units.
4.2.1.2 Requirements of 4.2.1(a) from consideration of slenderness may be deemed to have

been met with, if:
b) In case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is

based on its effective length; a cross wall/
pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more
than half the thickness of the supported
wall or 90 mm, whichever is more, and
length equal to or more than one fifth
of the height of wall, is built at right angle
to the wall (see Fig. 7) and bonded to it
according to provision of 4.2.2.2 (d);
a) In case of a wall, where slenderness ratio

is based on effective height, any of the
following constructions are provided:
1) RCC floor/roof slab (or beams and slab)
irrespective of the direction of span,
bears on the supported wall as well as
CTOSS walls, to the extent of at least
9cm;
2) RCC floor/roof slab not bearing on the
supported wall or cross wall is anchored
to it with non-corrodible metal ties of
60 cm length and of section not less
than 6 x 30 mm, and at intervals not
exceeding 2 m, as shown in Fig. 4; and
3) Timber floor/roof, anchored by noncorrodible metal ties af length 60 cm
c) In case of a column, an RCC or timber

beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on
the column. In this case, the column will
not be deemed to be laterally supported in
the direction at right angle to it; and
d) In case of a column, an RCC beam forming
a part of beam and slab construction, is
supported on the column, and slab
adequately bears on stiffening walls. This
construction will provide lateral support to
the column, in the direction of both
horizontal axes.
/-A
.4 = Cement concrete only at. p&a where anchors are provided ( 20 cm in

width in the direction perpendicular to the plane of paper )
Fig. 4 Anchoring of RCC Slab with Masonry Wall

(When SIab Doer not Bear on Wall)
rAKrnmucnJmAL DESlGN48CTlON
I MUONUY
7
a-4.
METAL ANCHOR 60 cm
LONG,FIXEO TO JOIST
tONCRETE,min.
LENGTH 3Ocm 1
CONCRETE, min.
LENGTH 30 cm -,
5A
Joists at Right Angle to Wall
Fig. 5
5Fj ]oirts Parallel to Wail
Typical Details for Anchor Age-of

Solid Walls
A Timber Jo II
sts
at Right Angles to Wall
6 B Tlmber Joists Parallel to Wall
(Ii
(III
6 C Prrcasr C o n c r e t e Floor Units Pualiel to Wall
irg 6 Typical Details for. Anchorage of Cavity Walk
I---y OR IOOmm WHICHEVER

IS GREATER
Fig. 7 Minimum Dimensions for Masonry Wail or

Buttress Prowding Effective Lateral Support
42.2 ST A B I L I T Y
- A wall or column
n;bject to vertical. and lateral loads may be
consrdered to be provided with adequate lateral
support from consideration of stability,if the
construction providing the support is capable of
resistmg some of the following forties:
a) Sinlp!e static reactions at the point of

lateral support to all the lateral loads; plus
h) 2.5 percent of the total vertical load that
the wall or column is designed to carry at
the po~ri! of lateral support.
4.2.I. i For the purpose specified in 4.2.2, if the
lateral supports are in the vertical direction,
these should meet the requirements given in
4.2. I.:(a) and should also be Lapable of acting
as horrzontal grrders duly anchored to the
cross wall so as to transmit the lateral loads to
the foundations without exceeding the
permissible stresses 111 the cross walls.
4.2.2.~ In case of load bearing buildings up to
four storeys, stability requrrements of 4.2.2
may be deemed to have been met with, if:
height to width ratio of burlding does not
exceed 2;
cross walls acting as stiffening walls continuous from outer wall fo outer wall or
outer wall to a load bearing inner wall,
and of thickness and spacings as given in
Table 2 are provided. If stiffening wall or
walls that are in a line, are interrupted
by openings, length of solid wall or walls
in the zone of the wall that is to be
stiffened shall be at least one-fifth of
height of the opening as shown in Fig. 8;
floors and roof either bear on cross walls or
are anchored to those walls as in 4.2.1.2
such that all lateral loads are safely transmitted to those walls and through them
to the foundation; and
Fig, 8 Opening m Stiffening Wall
d) cross walls are built jointly with the bearing

walls and are jointly mortared, or the two
interconnected by toothing. Alternatively,
cross walls may be anchored to walls to be
supported by ties of non-corrodible metal
of minimum section 6 x 35 mm and length
60 mm with ends bend at least 5 cm;
maximum vertical spacing of ties being
1.2 m (see Fig. 9).
4.2.2.3 In case of halls exceeding 8.0 m in
length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports
shall always be checked by structural analysis.
4.2.2.4A trussed roofing may not provide
lateral support unless special measures are
adopted to brace and anchor the roofing.
However, in case of residential and similar
buildings of conventional design with trussed
roofing having cross walls, it may be aaaumed
that stability requirements are met with by the
cross walls and structural analysis for stability
may be dispensed with.
9
u-4.
_... l.--
TABLE 2 THICKNESS AND SPACING OF STIFFENING WALLS

[CIpuse 4.2.2.2 (b)]
T HICKNESS
OF LOAD
BEARINGWALLTO
BE S T I F F E N E D
H E I G H T* OF S T O R E Y
NOTTOEXCEED
STIFFENING
*
Thickness not less than
storeys
1 to 3
4 to 6
storeys
WALL*
Maximum
spacing
(1)
(2)
cm
(31
m
(4)
cm
(5)
cm
(6)
m
i)
10
3.2
10
4.5
ii)
20
3.2
10
20
6.0
ii0
30
3.4
10
20
8.0
iv)
above 30
5.0
10
20
8.0
l Storey height and maximum spacings asgiven are centre-tozentre dimensions.

4. ;?. 2.5 Capacity of a cross wall, also calied shear
b) clear height of ceiling in basement does not
wall, sometimes to take horizontal. loads and
exceed 2.6 m;
consequently bending moments increases, when
parts of bearing walls act as flanges to the cross
cl walls are stiffened according to provisions
wail. Maximum overhanging length of bearing
of.4.2.2.1;
wall which could effectively function as a
flange should be taken as 12 r or H/6, whichd) in the zone of action of soil pressure on
ever is less, in case of T/f shaped walls and
basement walls, traffic load excluding
6 t or H/16, whichever is less, in case of L/U
any surcharge due to adjoining buildings
does not exceed 5 kN/m* and terrain does
shaped walls, where r is the thickness of bearing
wall and II is the total height of wall above the
not rise; and
level being considered, as shown in Fig. 10.
9 mimmum thickness of basement walls is
in accordance with Table 3.
4,226 EXTERNAL WALLS 01: RASI:ME.NT AND
PLINTH - In case of external walls of baseMTt - In case there is surcharge on basement walls
ment and plinth, stability requirements of
from adjoining buildings, thickness of basementwalk
shall be based on structural analysis.
4.2.2 may be deemed to have been met with, if:
SUBJECTED TO
MAINLY
4.2.2.7WALL.5
a) bricks used in basement and plinth have a
LATERAL LOADS
minimum crushing strength of 5 N/mm2
and mortar used in masonry is of Grade MI
a) FREE STANDING WALL ~ Afree standing
or better;
wall such as compound wall or parapet wall
Fig. 9 Anchoring of Stiffening Wall with Supported Wail
10
Y,
Effective overhanging width of flange =

12 f or H/6 whichever is less, H being
the total height of wall above the level
being considered
Effcctivc overhanging width of flange6 t or H/16 whichever is less, H being

the total height of wall above the level
being considered
EFFECTIVE OVERHANGING
WlDTn OF FLANGE
Fig. IO Typical Details for Anchorage of

Solid Wulls
TABLE 3 MINIMUM THlCKNESS OF BASEMENT WALLS

[C7uure4.2.2.6(e)j
H EIGHT OFTHECROUNDABOVE BASEMENT
F L O O R LEVELWITHWALLLOADING
hilrNIMUMTI-IICKNESSOF
%.
BASEMENTWALL(NOMINAL)
(PERMANENT~AD)
*
1
f
More than50 kN/m
Lessthan50kN/m
(1)
(2)
cm
(3)
m
(4)
m
i)
40
2.50
2.00
li)
30
1.75
1.40
Is acted upon by wind force which tends

to overturn it. This tendency to overturning is resisted by gravity force due to
self-weight of wall, and also by flexural
moment of resistance on account of tensile
strength of masonry. Free standing walls
shall thus be designed as in 5.5.2.1. If
mortar used for masonry cannot b e
relied upon for taking flexural tension
(see 5.4.1.5). stability of free standing wall
shall be ensured such that stability moment

of wall due to self-weight equals or exceeds
1.5 times the overturning moment.
b)
for
W A L L -i Stabili
retaining walls shall normally be achieved
through gravity action butflexural rnrrnerrt
of resistance could also be taken advantage
of under special circumstances at the
discretion of the designer (see 5.42).
11
VI4
RETAINING
4.3 Effective Height
MITE 1 -
4.3.1 WA LL - Effective height of a wall shall

be taken as shown in Table 4 (see Fig. 11).
N OTE - A roof truss or beam supported on a column

meeting the requirements of 4.2.2.1 is deemed to
provide lateral support to the column only in the
direction of the beam/truss.
4 . 3 . 2 C O L U M N - In case of a column,
effective height shall be taken as actual helght
for the direction rt is laterally supported and
twice the actual height for the direction it is
not laterally supported (see Fig. 12).
A roof truss or beam sup rted on a
Ire.
column meeting the requirements of 4.2.
.l IS deemed
to provide lateral support to the column only in the
direction ofthebeam/truss.
NOTE 2 - When floor or roof consisting of R C C

beams and slabs is supported on columns, the columns
would be deemed to be laterally supported in both
directions.
4.3.3 OPENIN GS IN W ALLS - When openings
occur in a wall such that masonry between the
openings is by definition a column, effective
height of masonry between the openings shall
be reckoned as follows:
a) When wall has full restraint at the top:
TABLE4 EFFECTIVfXHEIGHTOFWALLS
(Clause 4.3.1)
SL No.
CONDITION OFSUPPORT
(1)
(a
(3)
Lateral as well as rotational restraint ((that is. full restraint) at

top and bottom. For example, when the floor/roof spans on
the walls so that reaction to load of floor/roof is provided by
the walls. or when an RCC floor/roof has bearing on the wall
(minimum 9 cm), irrespective of the direction of the span
f o u n d a t i o n I footings of a watt give lateral as well as
rotational restraint)
0.75 H
ii)
Lateral as well as rotational restraint (that is, full restraint) at

one end and only lateral restraint (that is, partial restraint) at
the other. For example, RCC floor/roof at one end spanning
or adequately bearing on the wall and timber floor/roof not
spanning on wall, but adequately anchored to it, on the other
end
0.85 H
iii)
Lateral restraint, without rotational restraint (that is, partial

restraint) on both ends. For example, timber floor/roof, not
spanning on the wall but adequately anchored to it on both
ends of the wall, that is, top and bottom
1.00 H
iv)
Lateral restraint as well as rotational restraint (that is, full

restraint) at bottom but have no restraint at the top. For
example, parapet walls with RCC roof having adequate
bearing O&I the lower wall, or a compound wall with proper
foundation on the soil.
1.50
MTE 1 - His the height of wall between centres of support in case of RCC slabs and timber floors. In case of
footings or foundation block, height (H) is measured from top of footing or foundation block. In case of roof
truss, height (H) is measured up to bottom of the tie beam.In case of beam and slab construction, height should
be measured from centre of bottom slab to centre of top beam. All these cases are illustrated by means of
examples shown in Fig. 11.
N OTE 2 - For working out effective height, it is assumed that concreteDPC,

masonry, does not cause discontinuity in the wall.
when property bonded with
NDTE 3 - Where memberane type damp-proof course or termite shield causes a discontinuity in bond, the
effective height of wail may be taken to be greater of the two values calculated as follows:
a) consider H from top of footing ignoring DPC and take effective height as 0.75 H.
b) consider H from top of DPC and take effective height as 0.85 H.
P&W 4 ~ When assessing effective height of walls, floors not adequately anchor& to walls shall not be
considered as providing lateral support to such walls.
MTE 5 - When thickness of a wall bonded to a pier is at least two-thirds oftherthickness of the pier measured
in the same direction, the wall andpier may bedeem;d to act as one structural element.
-_
w-4-
12
NmlobL BUIIDING cum OF INDIA
llA
R'CC FLOOQlQOOF
110 ?lueER FL O O R /R O O F
BElta ON W I L L !RRESP
EC,lE OF ClRECTlDN
OF SPIN
MC llYBER FLOOR *ND
110 F R E E SI..HD,NO WALL
TRUSSED ROOF
Fig. 11 Efhctive Height of Wall
1) Effective height for the direction

perpendicular to p l a n e o f wall
equals 0.75 H plus 0.25 H,, where H
is the distance between supports and HI
is the height of the taller opening; and
2) Effective height for the direction parallel
to the wall equals y, that is, the
distancebetween the supports.
b) When wall has partial restraint at the top
and bottom :
1) Effective height for the direction
perpendicular to plane of wall equals
H when height of neither opening
exceeds 0.5 H and it is equal to 2 H
when height of any opening exceeds
0.5 H, and
2) Effective height for the direction parallel
to the plane of the wall equals 2 H.
4.4 Effective Length - Effective length of a
wall shall be as given in Table 5.
4.5 Effective Thickness - Effective thickness
to be used for calculating slenderness ratio of a
wall or column shall be obtained as in 4.5.1
to 4.5.5.
4.51 For solid walls, faced walls or columns,
effective thickness shall be the actual thickness.
4.5.2 For solid walls adequately bonded into
piers, buttresses, effective thickness for determining slenderness ratio based on effective
height shall be the actual thickness of wall
multiplied by stiffening coefficient as given in

Table 6. No modification in effective thickness,
however, shall be made when slenderness ratio
is to be based on effective length of walls.
4.5.3 For solid walls or faced walls stiffened by
cross walls, appropriate stiffening coefficient
may be determined from Table 6 on the
assumption that the cross walls are equivalent
to piers of width equal to the thickness of the
cross wall and of thickness equal to three times
the thickness of stiffened wall.
4.5.4 For cavity walls with both leaves of
uniform thickness throughout, effective thickness shall be taken as two-thirds of the sum of
the actual thickness of the two leaves.
4.5.5 For cavity walls with one or both leaves
adequately bonded into piers, buttresses or
cross walls at intervals, the effective thickness
of the cavity wall shall be two-thirds of the sum
of the effective thickness of each of the two
leaves; the effective thickness of each leaf being
calculated using 4.5.1 or 4.5.2 as appropriate.
4.6 Slenderness Ratio
4.6.1 WALLS - For a wall, slenderness ratio
shall be effective height divided by effective

thickness or effective length divided by the
effective thickness, whichever is less. In case of
a load bearing wall, slenderness ratio shall not
exceed that given in Table 7.
4.6.2 COLUMNS - For a column, slenderness
ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the
ratios of effective heights to the respective
13
w4-
EFFECl!vE HEIGHT
ABOUT AXIS
EFFECIIVE HEIGHT
A B O U T AxIS
Y X.?OH
Y-Y., OH
X-X.1.OH
Y-Y i I,0 H
12
120
ROOF
COASTRUCTIOS
With precast concrete units of in sifu

concrete floor or roof
With light deck or similar roof
12c
CFFECTIVE HblCHT
A B O U T AXIS
FIO. 120
x - XP I0 H*
Y - ?.== I.0 H,
FIG. 12C
_Y--XC 1.5 Cl,
I-- r=1.5H,
(No tio)
X-X= I.0 H2
T- r= 1.0 H,
I-- ?-= 2.0 H,
( No ties )
IIEICH~
ARO1:T AXIS
FFECTIVE
I'- TP I.OH,
X- X=Z.OH,
Y- Tul.OH1
Fig. 12 Examples of Effective Height of Columns
effective thickness, in the two principal

directions, Slenderness ratio for a load bearing
column shall nor exceed 12.
the designer. Some guidelines for assessment of

eccentricity are given in Appendix A.
4.7 Eccentricity - Eccentricity of vertical

@ding at a particular junction, in a masonry
wall shall depend on factors, such as extent of
bearing, magnitude oflbads, stiffness of slab or
barn, fixity at the support and constructional
details at junctions. No exact calculations are
possible to make accurate assessment of
eccentricity Extent of eccentricity under any
prticular circumstances has, therefore, to be
decided according to the best judgement of
5.1 General - The building as a whole sha! be

analyzed by accepted principles of mechanics
to ensure safe and proper functioning in service
of its component parts in relation to the whole
building. All component parts of the structure
shall be capable of sustaining the most adverse
combinations of loads, which the building may
be reasonably expected to be subjected to
during and after construction.
14
vu-
5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
TABLE 5 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF WALLS

(Clause 4.4)
CONDITIONS
SL NO.
OF SUPPORT
EFFECTIVE LENGTH
(see Fig. 13)
(3)
(2)
(1)
i)
Where a waU is continuous and is supported by cross wall and

there is no opening within a distance ofH/8 from the face of
cross wall (see Fig. 13)
0.8 L
01
Where a waU is continuous and is supported by piers/buttresses
ii)
conforming to 4.2.1.2(b)
Where a wall is supported by a cross wall at one end and
0.9
continuous with cross wall at other e<d

or
Where a wall is supported by a pier/buttress at one end and
continuous with pier/buttress at other end conforming to
4.2.1.3(b)
iid
Where a wall is supported at each end by cross waU

or
Where a wall is supported at each end by a pier/buttress
conforming to 4.2.1.2@)
1.0 L
iv)
Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a crosswaU
1.5 ,L
at the ofher end

Or
Where a wall IS free at one end and continuous with a pier/buttress

at the other end conforming to 4.2.1 Z(b)
is free at one end and supported af the other end by
a cross wail
Where a wall
2.0 I.
01
Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the otherend by

a pier/buttress conforming to 4.2.I.,?(b)
where
L = length of wall from or between centres of cross wall.
piers or buttress; and
H =
actual heigh! of wall between centres of adequate

lateral support.
NOTE - In case there

considered as free. Cross
is an opening taller rhan 0.5 H ma

walls shall conform 10 4.2.2.1(d).
wall, ends of the wall at the opening shall be
5.2 Design Loads - Loads tcr be taken into
5.2.1 The design loads and other forces to be
masonry
taken for the design of masonry structures shall

conform to Part VI Structural design, Section1
Loads.
NoTE - During construction, suitable measures shall
be taken to ensure that masonry is Mt liable t o
designing
for
consideration
components of a structure are:
a) dead load; of walls, columns, floors and

roofs;
b) hve loads of floors and roof;

c) wind loads on walls and sloping roof; and
d) seismic forces.
I\bTk When a building is subjected to other loads,
such as vibration- from railways; machinery, etc.
the?e should be taken into consideration accordingly
to the best judgemcnt of the designer.
PART VI SlRUclliRAL
DESIGN--SECTION I M A S O N R Y
damage or failure due to action of Wind forces, back

filling behind walls or temporary construction loads.
5.3 Load Dispersion

5.3. I GE N
E R A L - The angle of dispersion, of

vertical load on walls shall be taken as not more
than 30~ from the vertical.
5.3.2 ARCHING ACTION - Account may also

be taken of the arching action of well-bonded
15
\ILi
TABLE 6 STIFFENINCCOEFFICIENTFORWALLSSTIFFENEDBY
PIERS,BUTTRESsESORCROSSWALLS
(Clauses 4.5.2 and 4.5.3)
S
SL
NO.
RATIO +
STIFFEN~NC COEFFICIENT
A
r
rP
tP
-=2
tw
(4)
_fir = 3 or more
tw
(5)
(1)
(2)
tw
(3)
i)
1 .o
1.4
2.0
ii)
1.0
1.3
1.7
iii)
10
1 .o
1.2
1.4
iv)
15
1 .o
1.1
1.2
v)
20 or more
1 .o
1.0
1.0
where
s, = centre to centre spacing of the pier or cross wall.
IP = the thickness of pier as dehned in 23.2 (see Fig. 11,
I, = actual thickness of the wall proper (see Fig. I), and
Wp = width of the pier in the direction of the wall or the actual thickness of the crosswall.
WTE - Linear interpolation between the valuesgiven in this tableis permissible but not extrapolation outside
the limits g&t.
TABLE7 MAXIMUMSLENDERNESSRATIO
FOR A L0AD BEARING WALL
(czXlse4.6.1)
sufficient to ensure that stresses in the masonry

(combination of wall stresses, stresses due to
arching action and bearing stresses from the
lintel) do not exceed the stresses permitted in
5.4 (see 6.2.4).
MAXth4UM~T;;D~~~~~s
%%TzF
5.4 Permissible Stresses
( ~.~.~PERMIS~IBLECOMPRES~IVESTRESSMortar
Cement or Portland
Permissible corn ressive stress in masonry shall
Pozzolana Cement
be
based on vaPue of basic compressive stress
in Mortar
(2)
(31
Not exceeding 2
27
20
Exceeding 2
27
13
(1)
masonry walls supported on lintels and beams,

in accordance with established practice.
Increased axial stresses in the masonry
associated with arching action in this way, shall
not exceed the permissible stresses given in5.4.
5.3.3 L INTELS - Lintels that support masonry
construction shall be designed to carry loads

from masonry (allowing for arching and
dispersion, where applicable and loads received
from any other part of the structure. Length of
bearing of lintel at each end shall not be less
than 9 cm or one-tenth of the span, whichever
is more and area of the bearing shall be
16
u-6
ub) as given in Table 8 and multiplying this

value by factors known as stress reduction
factor (k,), area reduction factor (k,) and shape
modification factor (k ) as detailed in 5.4.1. I
to 5.4.1.3. Values of % asic compressive stress
given in Table 8 take into cor)sideration
crushing strength of masonry unit and grades of
mortar and hold good for values of slenderness
ratio not exceeding 6, zero eccentricity and
masonry unit having height to width ratio (as
laid) equal to 0.75 or less.
Alternatively, basic compressive stress may be
basedonresults of prism test given in Appendix B
on masonry made from masonry units and
mortar to be actually used in a particular job.
5.4.1.1 STRESS REDUCTION FACTOR--his
factor, as given in Table 9, takes into consideration the slenderness ratio of the element
and also the eccentricity of loading.
NATfOWL. BUIIDING CODE OF INDIA
Wall is continuous at both ends and ij

supported by cross walls of thickness t,/Z
or 100 mm whichever is more, length of
cross wall is not less than H/6, opening in
wall is not closer than H/8 from cross Call
13A Care 1
Sartw as case 1 except

wall L dircon tinuous
that one end of the
130 Care 2
Same as case 1 except that wall ir discontinuous on both ends
I3C Cnsc 3
ported by a cross wall and ir continuum.

There being no opening within H/g from
Same as case 4 but opening is within H/8

from cross wall and thus that end is taken
as discontinuous
I .:i
13E
case
Tbis illustration is with an opening which

is within H/8 from cross wall
13F Case 6
Wall length is between two openings which

arc closer than H/8 from cross walls
Fig. 13 Effective Length of Wall
t!AurvlsTlt~
.DESIGN-SIUTION
4 MASONRY
17
vu
I-
TABLE 8 STRESS REDUCTION FACTOR FOR SLENDERNESS RAT10AND ECCEtiTRlClTY

(Ck7use 5.4.1.1)
SLEN~V;~ESS
(
NoTE
E CCENTRICITY OF LDADING DIVIDED

T HICKNESS OF THE M E M B E R
&
BY THE
l/24
l/l2
l/6
l/4
l/3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
1 .oo
1 .oo
I .oo
1 .oo
1.00
1 .oo
0.95
0.15
0.94
0.93
0.92
0.91
10
0.89
0.08
0.87
0.85
0.83
0.81
12
0.84
0.83
0.81
0.78
0.75
0.72
0.66
0.66
14
0.78
0.76
0.74
0.70
16
0.73
0.71
0.68
0.63
0.58
0.53
18
0.67
0.64
0.61
0.55
0.49
0.43
20
0.62
0.59
0.55
0.48
0.4 1
0.34
22
0.56
0.52
0.48
0.40
0.32
0.24
24
0.51
0.47
0.42
0.33
0.24
26
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.25
27
0.43
0.38
0.33
o.i2
I- Linear interpolation between values is permitted.
MTE 2 - Where in special cases the eccentricity of loading lies betweenl/3 and l/2 of the thickness of the
member. the stress reduction factor should vary linearly between unity and 0.20 for slenderness ratio of 6 and 20
respectively.
NOTE 3 - Slenderness ratio of a member for sections withinl/8 of the height of the member above or belowa
lateral support may be taken to be 6.
5.4.1.2AREA RED.UCTION FACTOR -
This
factor takes into consideration smallness
of the sectional area of-the element and is
applicable when sectional area of the element is
less than 0.2 m2. The factor k, = 0.7 + 1 .X4, A
being the area of section in m2.
5.4.1.3SHAPE MODIFICATION FACTOR -
This factor takes into consideration the shape

of the unit, that is, height to width ratio (as
laid) and is given in Table 10. This factor is
applicable for units of crushing strength up to
15 N/mm
5.4.1.4 INCKEASE IN PERMISSIBLE COMPRESSIVE
STRESSES ALLOWED FOR ECCENTRIC VERTICAL
LOADS. LATERAL LOADS UNDER CERTAIN
C ONDITIONS ~ In members subjected. to
eccentric and/or lateral loads, increase in

permissible compressive stress is allowed as
follows:
a) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds
l/24 but &es not exceed 116, 25 percent
increase in permissible compressive stress is
allowed in design.
18
u-4.
b) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds

l/6, 25 percent increase in permissible
stress is allowed but the area of the section
under tension shall be disregarded for
computing the load carrying capacity of
the member.
NoTE - When resultant eccentricity ratio of loading
is l/24 or less, compresslve stress due to bending shall
be ignored and only axial stress need be computed
forthe purpose of design.
514.1.5
INCREASE IN
PERMISSIBLE
STRESS
FOR
WALLS
COMPRESSIVE
SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRATED LOADS When a wall is subjected to a concentrated load
(a load being taken to be concentrated when

area .of supporting walls equals or exceeds three
times the bearing area), certain increase in
permissible compressive stress may be allowed
because of dispersal of the load. Since,
according to the present state of art, there is
diversity of views in regard to manner and
extent of dispersal, design of walls subjected to
concentrated loads may, therefore, be worked
out as per the best judgement of the designer.
Some guidelines in this regard are given in
Appendix C.
u4lloNu
l JnDING
ama OF INDlA
-- -TABLE9 BASlCMMPRESSlVESTRESSESFOR MASONRY(AI:TER 28 D4YS)

~ciaUre 5.4. I)
SL MORTAR mPE
N o . ~REF.TABLE 1)
BASIC -CDMPRESS~W
LNITS
OF
STKESSES IN N/mm COHR~SPONI)INC; T O

WHKH HKIGHT TO WI D T H rU~fg DOES N O T Excwn
CRUSHING ST R E N G T H, IN N/mm . IS NOT J_ESS TH A N
3.5
5.0
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
20
MASONRY
0.7s ANI)
25
30
35
40
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
2.21
2.5
3.05
l.h2 I.85
2.1
2.5
1.9
2.2
(11
(2)
(3)
(4)
0)
Hl
8.35
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.16
1.31
1.45 1.591.91
HZ
8.35
0.50
0.74
0.96
LO9
1.19
1.30
Ml
8.35
0.50
0.74
0.96
J.fl6
I.13
1.20
hi2
0.35 0.44
ll.59
0.81 0.94 1.03
1.10 1.17 1.34 1.51
1.65 1.9
M3
0.25
0.41
0.56
0.75 0.87
0.95
1.02
1.10
1.25
1.41
1.55 1.78
0.36
(1.53
0.67 0.76
0.83
0.90
0.97
I.1
1.26
1.4
0.78
0.85 0.9s
Ll
0.25
L2
0.25
7
m fE
0.31
0.42
0.53
0.58
0.61
0.65
(IO)
1.41
1.27
1.47
1.69
0.69 0.73
1.06
1 - The table is valid for slenderness ratio up 10 6 and 1oadin.g with zero eccentricity
bklTE 2 -The values given for basic compressive stress are applicable only when the masonry is properly cured.
NDTE 3 - Line.11 interpolation is permrssible for unirs having crush& strengths between thoc given in the
Table.
MTE 4 - The permissible slress for random rubble masonry may be taken as 75 percent of lht corresponding
stress for coarseed walling of similar materials.
&TE 5 - The strength of ashiar. masonry (natural slonc masonry of massive type with thin joints) is doselv
related to intrinsic strength of the stone and allowable working stress in excess of those given in the table mai
be allowed for such masonry at the discretion of the designer.
-- --
-- -._-
--
--c-___.-.. _
TABLE 10 SHAPE YODII-ICATION FACTOR FOR MASONRY UNITS
HEIGHT
RATIO
(&
W IDTH
U NITS
LAID)
S H A P E ~IODIFICATION Fcrcrow (k 1 FOR UNITS HAVING

C R U S H I N G !~TR~:NCTH & N/mm* Is
-b
TO
OF
(JJ
up to 0.75
5.0
7.5
10.0
(2)
(3)
(4)
15.0
(5)
~I .o
I .o
1.0
1.0
1 .o
1.2
1.1
1.1
I.0
1.5
1.5
1.3
I.2
1.1
2.0 lo 4.0
1.8
1.5
I.3
1.2
!&JTE - Linear interpolation between values ir permissible.
~.~.~PERMISSIBLE
TENSILE
STRESS -
As a
general rule, design of masonry shall be

based on the assumption that masonry is not
capable d taking any tension. However, in case
of lateral loads normal to the plane of wall,
?hU-Vl STUUClVR4L DBiCV-SUllON 4
MASONRY
which causes flexural tensile stress, as for

example, panel, curtain prtition and free
standing walls, flexural tensile stresses as
follows may be permitted in the design for
mSlKXUy:
19
Kc
Grade Ml or - 0.07 N/mm* for bending in

better mortar
the vertical direction where
tension developed is normal
to bed joints.
- 0.14 N/mm for bending in
the longitudinal direction
where tension developed is
parallel to bed joints, provided crushing strength of
masonry units is not less than
10 N/mm
Grade M2
mortar
- 0.05 N/mm* for bending in

the vertical direction where
tension developed is normal
to bed joints.
- 0.10 N/mm* for bending in
the longitudinal direction
where tension developed is
parallel to bed joints, provided
crushing strength of masonry
units is not less than 7.5
N/mm
tensile stress is permitted in masonry in
NOTE 1 - No
case of water-retaining structures in vieN of water
in contact with masonry. Nu, no tensile stress is
permitted in earth-retaining structures, in view of the
possibility of presence of water at the back of such
walls.
NOTE 2 - Allowable tensile stress in bending in the

vertical direction may be increased to 0.1 N/mm* for
Ml mortar and 0.07.N/mm2 for M2 mortarin case of
boundry walls /compound walls at the discretion of
the designer.
5 . 4 . 3 P ERMISSIBLE S HEAR S T R E S S - In
case of walls built in mortar not leaner than
Grade MI (see Table 1) and resisting horizontal
forces in the plane of the wall, permissible shear
stress calculated on the area of bed joint, shall
not exceed the value obtained by the formula
given below, subject to a maximum of 0.5
N/mm* :
f,=O.l +fd/6
where
fd = compressive stress due to dead loads
in N/mm*, and
f, = permissible shear stress in N/mm*.

5.4.4 If there is tension in any part of a section
of masonry, the area under tension shall be
ignored while working out shear stress on the
section.
5.5 Derign Thickness/Cross-Section
5.5.1
TO
WALLS AND
V E R T I C A L LOADS
CO L U M N S
S UB J E C T E D
- Walls and columns
bearing vertical loads shall be designed on the

basis of permissible compressive stress. Design
consists in determining thickness in case of
walls and section in case of columns in relation
to strength of masonry units and grade of
20
mortar to be used, taking into consideration

various factors, such as .slenderness ratio,
eccentricity, area of section, workmanship,
quality of supervision, etc., subject further to
provisions of 5.5.1. I td 5.5.1.4.
5.5.1.1 SOLID WALLS - Thickness used for
design calculation shall be the actual thickness

of masonry computed as the sum of the average
dimensions of the masonry units specified in
the relevant standard, together with the
specified joint thickness. In masonry with raked
joi+, thickness shall be reduced by the depth
of raking, of joints for plastering/pointing.
5.5.1.2CAVITY
WALLS
a) Thickness of each leaf of a cavity wall shall

not be less than 7.5 cm.
b) Where the outer leaf is half masonry unit in

thickness, the uninterrupted height and
length of this leaf shall be limited so as to
avoid undue loosening of ties due to
differential movements between the two
leaves. The outer leaf shall, therefore, be
supported at least at every third storey or
at every 10 m of height whichever is less,
and at every 10 m or lessalong the length.
cl Where the load is carried by both leaves of
a wall of a cavity construction, the

permissible stress shall be based on the
slenderness ratio derived from the effective
thickness of the wall as given in 4.5.4 or
4.5.X The eccentricity of the load shall be
considered with r.espect to the centre of
gravity of the cross-section of the wall.
d) Where the load is carried by one leaf only,

the permissible stress shall be the greater of
values calculated by the following two
alternative methods:
1) The slenderness ratio is based on the
effective thickness of the cavity wall as
a whole as given in 4.5.4 or 4.5.5 and
on the eccentricity of the load with
respect to the centre of gravity of the
cross-section of the whole wall (both
leaves). (This is the same method as
where the load is carried by both the
leaves but the eccentricity will be more
when the load is carried by one leaf
only).
2) The slenderness ratio is based on the
effective thickness of the loaded leaf
only using 4.5.1 and 4.5.2, and the
eccentricity of the load will also be with
respect to the centre of gravity of the
loaded leaf only.
In either alternative, only the actual
thickness of the load bearing leaf shall be
used in arriving at the cross-sectional area

resisting the load (see Z. 5. I. I).
5.5.1.3~~cE~ WALL, - The permissible load
per length of wall shall be taken as the product

of the total thickness of the wall and the
permissible stress in the weaker of the two
materials. The permissible stress shall be found

by using the total thickness of the wall when
calculating the slenderness ratio.
5.5.1.4VENEERED WALL - The facing
(veneer) shall be entirely ignored in calculations
of strength and stability. For the purpose of
determining the permissible stress in the
backing, the slenderness ratio shall be based on
the thickness of the backing alone
~..~.~WALLS
SUBJECTEDTO
C OLUMNS M
LATERALLOADS
A ND
A I N L Y
5.S.Z.lFREE STANDING WALLS

a) Free standing walls, subjected to bind
pressure or seismic forces shall be designed
on the basis of permissible tensile stress in
masonry or stability as in 4.2.2.4. However,
in seismic Zones 1 and II, free-standing
walls may be apportioned without making
any design calculations with the help of
Table 11 provided the mortar used is of
grade not leaner than Ml.
TABLE11 HEIGHTTOTHlCKNESSRATlOOF
FREESTANDINGWALLSRELATEDTOWIND
SPEED
[ChusesJ.5.2.1 (a)nnd,@)l
(1)
(2)
N/m2
the minimum wall thickness should be the
greater of that calculated from either:

1) the appropriate height to thickness ratio
given in Table 11 reduced by 25 percent,
reckoning the height from the level of
the damp-proof course; or
2) the appropriate height to thickness ratio
given in Table 11 reckoning the height
from the lower level at which the wall is
restrained laterally.
5.5.2.2 RETAINING WALLS - Normally
masonry of retaining walls shall be designed on
the basis of zero-tension, and permissible
compressive stress. However, In case of retaining
walls for supporting horizontal thrust from dry
materials, retaining walls may be designed on
the basis of pertissible tensile stress at the
discretion of the designers.
5.5.3 WA L L S AND C OLUMNS S U B J E C T E D
TO V ERTICAL
AS W E LL AS L A T E R A L
columns, stress
L O A D S - For walls a n d
worked out separately for vertical loads as
in 5.5.1 and lateral loads as in 5.5.2 shall be
combined and elements designed on the basis of
permissible stress.
5.5.4 WALLS S UBJECTED TO I N - P L A N E
B ENDING AND V E R T I C A L L~ADS(S~~EAR
W A LLS) - Walls subjected to in-plane bending
and vertical loads, that is, shear walls shall be
designed on the basis of no tension with
permissible shear stress and permissible
compressive stress.
B EARING W ALLS 5.5.5 NO N- L O A D
Load bearing walls, such as panel walls, curtain
walls and partition walls which are mainly
subjected to lateral loads, accordingto present
state of art, are not capable of precise design
and only approximate methods based on some
tests are available. Guidelines for approximate
design of these walls are given in AppendixD.
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Up to 285
10
575
6.1 Methods of Construction
860
1150
6.1.1 G E NE R A L - Construction of the

following types of load bearing and non-load
bearing masonry walls shall be carried out in
accordance with good practice [VI-4(3)].
NOTE 1 - For intermediate values, linear interpolation

is permissible.
NOTE 2 - Height is to be reckoned from 15 cm below

ground level or top of footing/foundation block,
whichever is.higher,and up to the top edge of,the wall.
a) Brickwork,
MTE 3 -The thickness should be measured including

the thickness of the plaster.
_ _ _
--I_.-
c) Hollow concrete block masonry,
b) If there is a horizontal damp-proof course

near the base of the wall, that is, not
capable of developirig tension vertically,
Pmnr3llIucnJRu DESIGN-SEllON
4 MASONRY
b) Stone masonry
d) Gypsum partition blocks,

e) Autoclaved cellular concrete block
masonry, and
f) Lightweight concrete block masonry.
21
VI4
6.1.2 CO N S T R U C T I O N OF
SEISM IC ZONES --
BU I L D I N G S I N
No special provisions
on construction are necessary for buildings

constructed in Zones I and II. Special features
of construction for earthqtbnke resistant
masonry buildings in Zones III, N and V shall
be applicable according to good practice
[VI-4(3)].
6.2 Minimum Thickness of Walls from Consideration Other than Structural -~ Thickness of
walls determined from consideration of
strength and stability may not always be
adequate in respect of other requirements, such
as resistance to fire, thermal insulation, sound
insulation and resistance to damp penetration
for which reference may be made to the
appropriate Indian standards, and thickness
suitably increased, where found necessary.
derable effect on strength of masonry and bad

workmanship may reduce the strength of brick
masonry to as low as half the intended strength.
The basic compressive stress values for masonry
as given in Table 8 would hold good for
commercially
obtainable
standards of
workmanship with reasonable degree of
supervision. If the work is inadequately
supervised, strength should be reduced tothreefourth or less at the discretion of the designer
6 . 3 . 2 BE D D I N G O F M A S O N R Y UNITS Masonry units shall be laid on a full bed of
mortar with frog, if any, upward such that
cross-joints and waU joints are completely filled
with mortar. Masonry units which are moved
after initial placement shall be relaid in fresh
mortar, discarding the disturbed mortar.
6.3.3 B OND - Cross-joints in any course of
one brick thick masonry wall shall be not less
than one-fourth of a masonry unit iahorizontal
direction from the cross-joints in the course
below, In masonry walls more than one brick in
thickness, bonding through the thickness of
wall shall be provided by either header units or
by Other equivalent means in accordance with
good practice [V&l(4)],
AND
A LIGNMENT
All
masonry shall be built true and plumb within

the tolerances prescribed below. Care shall be
taken to keep the perpends properly aligned:
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey
shall not exceed 6 mm per 3 m height.
b) Deviation in verticality in total height of
any wall of a building more than one
storey in height shall not exceed 12.5 mm.
c) Deviation from position shown on plan of
any brickwork shall not exceed 12.5 mm.
w-4.
Deviation from the specified thickness of

bed joints, cross-joints and perpends shall
not exceed one-fifth of the specified
thickness.
MrTt -- These t~lerancer have been specified from
the point of vick. of Iheu etfect on the strength oT
masonry.
rhe permissible s t r e s s r e c o m m e n d e d
in 5.3 may be considered applicable only if
these toldrances are adhered to.
Controi flef;wmarwn
nnd
0ackin.q .- Special provision shall be ma,de to
6.3.1 GENEKAL -- Workmanship has consi-
V ERTICALITY
Deviation of bed-joint from horizontal in a

leng?h of 12 m shall not exceed 6 mm
subject to a maximum deviation of 12 mm.
6.4 J o i n t s ro
6.3 Workmanship
6.3.4
Relative displacement between load

bearing walls in adjacent- storeys intended
k+ be in vertical alignment shall not exceed
6 mm.
control or isolate thermal and other movements

so that damage to the fabric of the buildmg is
avoided and its structural sufficiency preserved.
Design and installation of juints shall be done
according to the appropriate recommendations
in accordance with good practtce [VI-4(5)],
~5.5 chases, Recesses and Holes
6.5. i Chases, recesses and holes are permissible
in masonry only if these do not impair strength

and stability of the structure.
6.5.2 In masonry, designed by structural
analysis, all chases, recesses and holes shall be
considered in structural design and detailed in
building plans.
6.5.3 When chases, recesses and holes have not
been consideredin structural design and are not
shown in drawings. these may be provided,
subject to the constraints and precautions
specified in 6.5.3.1 to 6.5.3.10.
6.5.3.1 As far as possible, services should be
planned with help of vertical chases and use of
horizontal chases should be avoided.
6.>._?.2 For load bearing walls, depth of vertical
and horizontal chases shall not exceed one-third
and one-sixth of the wall thickness respectively.
0.5.3.3Vertical chases shall not be closer than
2 m in any stretch of wall and shall not be
located within 34.5 cm of an opening or within
23 cm of a cross wall that serves as a stiffening
wall for stability. Width of a vertical chase shall
not exceed thrckness of wall in which it occurs.
6 .. 3.4 When umavoidable horizontal chases ot
width not exceeding 6 cm in a wall having
slenderness ratio not exceeding 15 may be
provided. These shall be located in the upper or
lower middle third height of wall at a distance
22
not less than 60 cm frcm a lateral support. No

horizontal chase shall exceed one metre in
lerigth and there shall not be more than 2
chases in any one wall. Horizontal chases shall
have minimum mutual separation distance of
50 cm. Sum of lengrhs of all chases and recesses
in any horizontal plane shall not exceed onefourth the length of the wall.
6.3.3.5 Holes for supporting put-logs of
scaffolding shall be kept away from bearings of
bems, lintels, and other concentrated loads.
If unavoidable, stresses in the affectedarea shall
be checked to ensure that these ate within safe
limits.
6.5.3.6 No
chase, recess or hole shall be

provided in any stretch of a masonry wall,-the
length of which is less than four times the
thickness of wall, except when found safe by
structural analysis.
6.5.3.7Masonry directly above a recess or a
hole, if wider than 30 cm, shall be supported
on a lintel. No lintel, however, is necessary in
case of a circular recess or hole exceeding
30 cm in diameter provided upper half of the
recess or hole is built as a semi-circular arch of
adequate thickness and there is adequate length
of masonry on the sides of openings to resist
the horizontal thrust.
6.5.3.8As far as possible chases, recesses and
holes in masonry should be left (inserting
sleeves, where necessary) at the time of
construction of masonry so as to obviate
subsequent cutting. If cutting is unavoidable,
it should be done without damage to the
surrounding or residual masonry. It is desirable
to use such tools for cutting which depend
upon rotary and not on heavy impact for
cutting action.
6.5.3.9 No chase, recess or hole shall be
provided in half-brick load bearing wall,
excepting the minimum number of holes
needed for scaffolding.
6.5.3.!0 Chases, recesses or holes shall not be
cut into walls made of hollow or perforated
units, after the units have been incorporated in
masonry.
6.6 Corbelling
Where corbelling is required for the
support of some structural element, maximum
projection of masonry unit should not exceed
one-half of the height of the unit or one-half ot
the built-in part of the unit and the maximum
horizontal projection of the corbel should not
exceed one-third of the wall thickness.
6.61
6.6.2 The load per unit length on a corbel shall

not be greater than half of the load per unit
length on the wall above the cobel. The joad on

the wa!l above the corbel, toegther with four
times the load on the corbel, shall not cause the
average stress in the supporting wall or leaf to
exceed the permissible stresses given in 5.4.
66.3 It is preferable to adopt headercourses in
the corbelled portion of masonry from
considerations of economy and stability.
7 S P E C I A L C O N S I D ER A T I O N S
EARTH QUAKE ZONES
I N
7.0 Special features of design and construction

for earthquake resistant masonry buildings,
applicable to buildings in Zones III. IV and V,
are given in 7.1 to 7.5.7. No special provisions
are necessary for building construction of
Zones I and Il. Reference may also be made to
good
p r a c t i c e [VI-4(6)j f o r d e t a i l e d
information.
7.1 Materials.
7.1.1 Well burnt bricks having a crushing
strength not less than 3.5 N/mm2 shall be used.
7.2 Mortars
7.2.1 Mortars not leaner than those given in
Table 1 shall be used for masonry construction.
7.2.2 Where steel reinforcing bars areprovrded,
the bars shall be embedded in cement-sand
mortar not leaner than I:4 or in, cement
concrete of grade M IO.
bk3TE - In coastal areas, the concrete grade shall be
of M 15 concreteand the Wing mortar of1:3 (cementsnd).
7.3 wolfs
7.3.1 Masonry bearing walls build with mortars
as specified in 7.2. I unless designed as
reinforced masonry, shall not be built ofgreater
total height than 15 m subject to a maximum
of four storeys when measured from the mean
ground level to the roof slab of the main tie
level. Where necessary, masonry bearing walls
shall be strengthened in accordance with 7.5.1.
7.3.2 Bearing walls in both directions shall be
straight and symmetrical in plan as far as
possible.
7.3.3 Panel walls shall be checked for their
strength in bending to the ear%quake force
acting on their own mass (see Appendix A).
YJOTE - For panel walls having a starey height not
*ore than 3.5 m and laterally supported at top,
this check need not be exercised.
VI4
23
7.4 Openings in the Bearing Walls

7.4.1 Tops of openings in a storey should
preferably be at the same level so that a
continuous band could be provided over them,
including the lintels throughout the building.
7.4.2 The total width of the openings shall not

be more than half of the length of the walls
between the adjacent cross walls, except as
provided in 7.4.6.
7.4.3 The opening shall be preferably located
away from the corner by a clear distance equal
to at least one-eighth of the height of the
opening where seismic coefficient is less than
0.08 and one-fourth of the height where seismic
coefficient is 0.08 or more.
underneath reinforced coficrete or brickwork

slabs resting :)n bearing walis, provided the slabs
we continuous over parts between crumple
sections, of an?, and cover the width ,?f end
walls fully.
7.5.3 The band shell be made of reinforced
concrete of grade not leaner &an Ml0 or
reinforced brickwork in cement mortar not
leaner than 1:4. The bands shall be to the full
width of the wall and not less than 7.5 cm in
depth and shall be reinforced with steel, as
irtdica?ed in Table 13.
NOT!: - In coastal areas, the concrete grade shall be
M 15
and)
concrete and the
fillirw mortar of I:3 icement:
7.4.4 The horizontal distance between two

openings shall not be less than one-fourth of
the height of the shorter opening where seismic
coefficient is less than 0.08 and one-half of the
height where seismic coefficient ii 0.08 or
more.
25.3.1 In the case of reinforced brickwork,

the thc!:ness of joints containing steel bars
shall be increased so as to have a miuimum
mortar cover of 6 mm ;zro;lnd the bar. In bands
of reinforced brickwork, the area of steel
provided should be equal to that specified
above for rerof<srtx:l concrete bands.
7.4.5 The vertical distance between openings

one above the other shall not be less than
60 cm.
7.5.3.2 Typical details of providing RCC band

at floor/roof .!evel ou hollow block masonry
are shown in Fig. 14.
7.4.6 Where openings do not comply with the

requirements of 7.4.2 to 7.4.5, they shall be
strengthened in accordance with 7.5.5.
7.5-1 SI I<FN(;THt:NINC; OF CORNERS AND

JUNC:TI!)NS - Vertical steel at corners and
Junctions of walls which are up to one and a
half bricks thick shall be provided either of
nuld steel or high strength deformed bars as
specified in Table 14. For thicker walls, the
area of the bars shall be increased proportionately. The reinforcement shall be properly
embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations
and roof slab or roof band so as to develop its
tensile strength in bond and passing through the
lintel bands in all storeys. Bats in different
storeys may be welded or suitably lapped.
7.4.7 If a window or ventilator is to be

projected out, the projection shall be in
reinforced masonry or concrete and well
anchored.
7.4.8 lf an opening is-tall, say, for the full
height of wall. dividing the wall into two
portions, these portions shall be remforced with
horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter
bars at not more than 60 cm intervals, one on
inner and one on outer face, properly tied to
vertical steel at jambs and corners or junctions
of walls where used.
7.4.~ The use of arches to span over the
openings is a source of weakness and shall be
avoided unless steel ties are provided.
7.5
Strengthening Arrangements
All buildings to be constructed of

masonry shall be strengthened by the methods
specified in Table 12. The value of design
seismic coefficient to be adopted shall be BS
given in Part VI Structural design, Section 1
Loads.
7.5.1
7.12 BAN D s ~ These are lintel roof and gable

hands (see 2.1). The specifications of bands are
given in 7.5.3. Roof band need not be provided
VI-J-
24
7.5.4. I Typical details of providing vertical

steel in brickwork and hollow block at corners,
T-junctions and jambs of opening are shown in
Fig. IS and f,ig 16.
7.5.4.2 Details of vertical reinforcement given
in fable 14 are applicable to brick masonry,
stone masonry and hollow block masonry.
7.5.5 STKEHti I FI1;NING
OF JAMBS O F
OPENINGS - Openings in bearing walls shall
be strengthened, where necessary (see7.6.4), by
providing reinforced ccncre:e members or
reinforcing the brickwork around them as
shown in Fig. 17.
8. NOTAVONS AND SYMBOLS

8.1 The Various notations and letter symbols
used in the text of the standard chall have lhe
meaning 1s given in Appendix El.
..-___l_.-_--- --.. -.--.-__-___

TABLE 12 STRENGTHENING ARRANGEMENTS
(cklure 7.5. I)
St DESIGN S E I S M I C
No. COEFFICIENT
(1)
N0.0r ST~REYS
(2)
STRENGTHENINCCMETHODSTO
~EPRovrca~o
(3)
(4)
i) Less than 0.50
I to 4
a) Masonry mortar (see Z2.1)
a, 0.05 to o.O6
I to4
a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)

b) Lintel band (see 7.52)
iii) More than 0.06 to

less than 0.08
a) Sir& d.r$ double storyed with

reinforced concrete or reinforced
brick slab roof
a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)

b) Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
b) Single LII~ double storeyed with

pitch*::1 or other types of roof
a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2.1)

b) Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
Roof band (see 7.5.2)
s; Bracing in plan at tie level*
Cl
3 01 )!
Masonry mortar (see Z2.1)

sl Lintel band (see Z5.2)
c) Roof band and gable band where
necessary (see 7.5.2)
d) Vertical steel at corners and
junctions of wal+ (see 7.5.5)
e) y:;tpi;)eel at Jambs of openings
f) RSacin * in plan at tie level for
pitche 8 roof*
iv) 0.08 and more
i to 4
Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)

:, Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
c) Roof band and gpble band, where
necesav (Me 7.5.2)
d) Vertical steel at corners and
junctions of walls (see 7.5.4)
e) Vertical steel at jambs of openings
(see 7.5.5)
n Bracing in plan at tie level for
pitched roof*
*At tie level all the trusses and thegable end shall be provided withdiagonal braces in plan so as to transmit
the kterai shear due to earthquake force to the gable walls acting as shear walls at the ends.
TABLE 13 BAND REINFORCEMENT

(Clarrse 7.5.3)
D ESIGN SEISMIC
CIXFFICIENT
(1)
R EINFORCEMENT
---.^-lll
High Strength
PLan Mild Steel Bars
Deformed Bars
(3)
(2)
LJNK~
(4)
(5)
i) 0.05 to less than O.08
Two No. 12 mm dia, one

on each face of the wall
with suitable cover
Two No. 10 mm dia. one

with suitable cover
6 mm dia,
IS cm apart
ii) 0.08 and more
Two No. 16 mm dta, one

on each face of the
wall with suitable cover
Two No. 12 mm dia c,nc

with suitable cover
6 mm dia.
IS cm apart
PART V! #lRUClURAl.
DESIGN-SFLTON 4 M4SQhluV
25
w-4.
7 I-KJLLOW BLOCK
\ CORNER PIECES
LAPPED WITH MAIN
BARS AT A POINT
AWAY FROM CORNER
L HORIZONTAL
STEEL
700 mm FOR PLAIN BAR

LOO mm FOR DEFORMED BAR
14A Detail of RCC Band at Floor I+

nn 200 mm Thick Hollow Block Wall
Fig. 14 Typical Details
1.48 Exterior fland Beam
of
Roof Bands for Hollow Block Masonry
TABLE 14 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT

(Cbuses 7.5.4 and 7.5.4.2)
SL
NOOF
STOREYS
D I A M E T E R O F S I N G L E BAROR
E QUIVALENT AREA OF P L A I N
No./ STOREYS
D IAMETER
O F S I N G L E B AR
OR
E~UIVALENTAREAOFHIGH
STRENGTHDEFORMEDSTEEL
TOBEPROVIDED
MlL.nSl-EELTOBE~OVIDED
A
f
Des&n Seismic
Coefficient
More than 0.06
to less than 0.08
(1)
(2)
i)
One
ii)
T&0
Iii)
iv)
Three
r-0Uf
(3)
4,
Design Seismic
Coefficient
0.08 and More
. Design Seismic
Coefficient
Mo?;0tF;80.06
.
Design Seismic
Coefficient
Above 0.08
(4)
(5)
6)
(7)
mm
mm
mm
mm
nil
12
nil
10
TOP
Bottom
nil
nil
t,
nil
nil
:2
Top
Middle
Bottom
t:
16
t:
16
1:
:T12
Top
Third
Second
Bottom
1:
16
16
12
16
20
25
1:
12
10
12
12
12
is
20
NMlONAL BUllDING CODE O F IMIA
--
)-
ri.3
1+
j____.__-
---___
c_~_~~~_
&__._---
El
IA
l/2 A N D ! INDICATE
THE ThICtXNESS O F
BRICK
1~.
1 BR!CK
T H I C K
- i2 BRlCn T H I C K
- 1 BRICK T H I C K q,c
,2
t
(2
l---l
,/ - B A R
S E C O N D LAYER
18.4
18C T-Junction Details forOne and a Halt Brick Wall

BAR
FIRST UVER
Corner Junction Dclailr for One Brick Wall
SECOND LAYER
I
i
18D Jamb Dewis torune Rrlch Walt
\BAR
FIRST LAYER
FIRST IAVEA
SECOhD
LAYER
SECOND LAYER
15B Corner Junction Details for One and a Half Brick Wall
1SE Jamb Details forOric and a Hall hick WAII
Fig. 15 Typical Junction Details for Providing Verhcal Steel in Brick Masonr,
MRrnsm~ L
DMIGN-SEC~KIN 4 MMONPY
27
w-4-
APPENDIX A
(Clause 9.7)
SOME GUIDELINES FORASSESSMENT OF ECCENTRICITY OF
LOADING ON,WALLS
A-l. Where a reinforced concrete roof and
floor ,slab of normal span (not exceeding 30
times the thickness of wall) bear on external
masonry walls, the point of application of the
vertical loading shall .be taken to be at the
centre of the bearing on the wall. When the span
is more than 30 times the thickness of wall,
the point of application of the load shall be
considered to be displaced from the centre of
bearing towards the span of the floor to an
extent of. one-sixth of the bearing width.
4-2. In case of a reinforced concrete slab of
normal span (that is, less than 30 times the
thickness of the wall), which does not bear on
the full width of the wall and cover tiles or
bricks are provided on the external face, there
is some eccentricity of load. The eccentricity
may be assumed to be one-twelfth of the
thickness of the wall.
A-3. Eccentricity of load from the roof/floor
increases with the increase in flexibility and
thus deflection of the slabs. Also, eccentricity
of loading increases with the increase in fiity
of slabs/beams at supports. Precast RCC slabs
are better than inkiru slabs in this regard
because of very little fixity. If supports are
released before further construction on top,
fixity is reduced.
A-4. Interior walls carrying continuous floors
are assumed tu be axially loaded except when
carrying very flexible floor or rqof systems. The
assumption is valid also for interior walls
carrying independent slabs spanning from both
sides, provided the span of the floor on one side

does not exceed that on the other by more than
15 percent. Where the difference is greater, the
displacement of the point of application of
each floor load shall be taken as one-sixth of its
bearing width on the wall and the resultant
eccentricity calculated therefrom.
A-5. For timber and other light weight floors,
even for full width bearing on wall, an
eccentricity of about one-sixth may be assumed
due to deflection. For timber floors with larger
spans, that is, more than 30 times the thickness
of the wall, eccentricity of one-third of the
thickness of the wall may be assumed.
A-6.. In multi-storeyed buildings, flxlty and
eccentricity have normally purely local effect
and are not cumulative. They just form a
constant ripple on the downward increasing
axial stress. If the ripple is large, it is likely to
be more serious at upper levels where it can
cause-cracking of walls than lower down where
it may or may not cause local over-stressing.
bbTE - The resultant eccentricity of the total loads
on a wall at any level may be calculated on the
assumption that immediately nbow a horizontal
lateral support, the resultant eccentricity of all the

vertical loads ahow that level is zero.
~.7. For a wall corbel to sup it some load,
the point of application of tP load shall be
assumed to be at the centreof the bearing on,
the corbel.
APPENDIX B
(Clause 5.4.2)
CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVESTRESS OF MASONRY
BY PRISM TEST
B-l. DETERMINATION
OF COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH OF MASONRY BY PRISM
TEST
g-1.1 When compressive strength of masonry

vrn) is to be established by tests, it shall be
done in advance of the construction, using
prisms built of similar materials under the same
conditions with the same bonding arrangement
as for the structure. In building the prisms,
WrtnmwcNnAL
DKSloKdWllON 4 MAMlNRY
moisture content of the units at the time of

laying, the consistency of the mortar, the
thickness of mortar joints and workmanship
shall be the same as will be used in the
structure. Assembled speclmen shall be at least
40 cm high and shall have a height to thickness
ratio (h/r) of at least 2 but not more than 5.
If the h/r ratio of the prisms tested is less
than 5 in case of brickwork and more than 2 in
case of blockwork, compressive strength values
29
w-4.
indicated by the tests shall be corrected by

multiplying with the factor indicated in
Table 15.
Prisms shall be tested after 28 days between
sheets of nominal 4 mm plywood, slightly
longer than the bed area of the prism, in a
,testing machine, the upper platform of which is
spherically seated. The load shall be evenly
distributed over the whole top and bottom
surfaces of the specimen, and shall be applied
at the rate of 350 to 700 kN/min. The load at

failwre should be recorded.
8.2. C A L C U L A T I O N O F
COMPRESSIVE STRESS
BASIC
B-2.1 Basic of masonry shall be .taken to be

equal to 0.26f, where fm is the value of
compressive strength of masonry as obtained
from prism test.
TABLE 15 CORRECTION FACTORS FOR DIFFERENTh/r RATIOS

(Clause B-1. I)
Ratio of he ht to
thickness (x/t)
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
5.0
Correction factors
for brickwork*
0.73
0.80
0.86
0.91
0.95
1.00
Correction factors
for blockwork*
1.00
1.20
1.30
1.37
lnierpoktion is valid for intermediate values.
APPENDIX
(Clause 5.4.1 S)
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRATED LOADS
c-l.EXTENT O F D I S P E R S A L
CONCENTRATED LOAD
OF
by interpolation between values of increase in

stresses as given in C-2. I and C-2.2.
C-I.1 For concentric loading, maximum spread

of a concentrated load on a wall may be taken
to be equal to bt4 t (b is width of bearing and
t is thickness of wall), or stretch of wall
supporting the load, or centre-to-centre
distance between loads, whichever is less.
C-2.4 In case concentrated loadis from a lintel

over an opening, an increase of 50 percent in
permissible stress may be taken provided the
supporting area is not less than 3 times the
bearing area.
c-2. INCREASE IN PERMISSIBLE STRESS.
c-3. CRITERIA OF PROVIDING BED BLOCK
C-2.1 When a concentrated load bears on a
c-3.1 If a concentrated load bears on one end

of a wall, there is a possibility of masonry in
the upper region developing tension.. In such a
situation, the load should be supported on an
RCC bed block (of M 15 grade) capable of
taking tension.
central strip of wall, not wider than half the

thickness of the wall and is concentric, bearing
stress in masonry may exceed the permissible
compressive by 50 percent provided the area of
supporting wall is not less than three times the
bearing area.
C-2.2 If the load bears on full thickness of wall
and is concentric, 25 percent increase in stress

may be allowed.
C-2.3 For loading on central strip wider than
half thethickness of the wall but less than full
thickness, increase in stress may be worked out
30
C-3.2 When any section of masonry wall is

subjected to concentrated as well as uniformly
distributed load and resultant stress, computed
by making due allowance for increase in stress
on account of concentrated load, exceeds the
permissible stress in masonry, a concrete bed
block (of M 15 grade) should be provided under
the load in order to relieve stress in masonry. In
N4TloNAL BullDlNc COD0 OF INDIA
concrete, angle of dispersion of concentrated

load is taken,to be 45 to the vertical.
c-3.3 In case of cantilevers and long span beams
supported on masonry walls, indeterminate but
very high edge stresses occur at the supports
and in such cases it is necessary to relieve stress
on masonry by providing RCC bed block of

M 15 grade concrete. Similarly when a wall is
subjected to a concentrated load from 2 beam
wh+zh is not sensibly rigid (for example, a
limber beam or an RS joist), a concrete bed
block should be provided below the beam in
order to avoid high edge stress in the wall
because of excessive deflection of the beam.
APPENDIX D
(Cluuse 5.55)
GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF NON-LOAD BEARING WALL
D-l. PANEL WALLS
D-i.1
A panel wall may be designed

approximately 2s under, depending upon its
support conditions and certain assumptions:
a) When there are narrow tall windows on
either side of panel, the panel spans in the
vertical direction. Such a panel may be
designed for 2 ,bending moment of PHI%
where P is ihe total horizontal load on the
panel and H is the height between the
centres of supports. Panel wall is assumed
to be simply supported in the vertical
direction.
b) When there are long horizontal windows
between top support and the panel, the top
edge of the panel is free. In this case, the
panel should be considered to be supported
on sides and at the bottom and the bending
moment would depend upon height to
length ratio of panel and flexural strength
of masonry. Approximate values of
bending moments in the horizontal
direction for tfiis support condition, when
p of flexural strength of wall in
ratio
the vertical direction to that in horizontal
direction is assumed to be 0.5, are given
in Table 16.
c) When either there are no window openings

or windows are of hole-in-wall type, the
panel is considered to be simply supported
on all four edges. In this case also, amount
of maximum bending moment depends on
height to length ratio of panel and ratio
of flexural strength of masonry. in
c1
vertical direction to that in the horizontal
direction.
Approximate
values
for
maximtim b e n d i n g m o m e n t i n t h e
horizontal direction for masonry with
Ir = 0.50, are given in Table 17.
D-2. CURTAIN
WALLS
D-2.1 Curtain walls .may be designed as panel

walls taking into consideration the actual
supporting conditions.
o-3. PARTITION WALLS
D-3.1 These are internal walls usually subjected
to much smaller lateral forces. Behaviour of
such wall is similar to that of panel wall and
these could; therefore, be designed on similar
lines. However, in view of smaller lateral loads,
ordinarily these could be apportioned
empirically as follows:
TABLE 16 BENDING MOMENTS IN LATERALLY LOADED PANEL WALLS,

FREE AT TOP EDGE AND SUPPORTED ON GTHER THREE EDGES
(Clause D-1.1)
Height o f panel. H
0 30
0.50
0.75
1 .oo
1.25
1.50
1.75
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
25
18
14
12
11
10.5
lo
Length of panel, L
Ben&g
moment
NOTE - For H/L ratio less than 0.30. the panel should be designed as a free standing wall and for H/L ratio
exceeding 1.75, it should be designed as a horizontally spanning member for a bending moment value ofPL/8.
?ARTMSIRUCNRA L
DESIGN-SECIION 4 hlASONRY
31
VW-
TABLE 17 BENDING MOMENTS IN LATERALLY LOADED PANELWALLS

SUPPORTED ON ALL FOUR EDGES
[ Oairse D-I. 1 (c)J

Height of panel, H
0.30
0.50
0.75
1 .oo
1.25
1.50
1.75
PL
72
PL
PL
PL
PL
24
18
15
PL
13
PL
3a
Length of panel, L
Bending moment
12
NOTI -. \V~CW I//I. is less than 0.30. value of bending moment in the horizontal direction may be taken as nil
and panel \\;111 may be designed for a bending moment value of PH/8 in the vertical direction; when H/L exceeds
1.75. p:111c1 ~nay be assumed to be spanning in the horizontal direction and designed for bending moment of
PL/X.
a) Walls with adequate lateral restraint at

ho111 ends but not at the top:
2) The panel ,may be of any length

provided the height does not exceed 30
times the thickness; or
1) The panel may be of any height

provided the length does not exceed
40 times the thickness; or
3) Where the length of the panel is over 40

times and less than 110 times the
thickness, the length plus three times
the height should not exceed 200 times
the thickness.
2) The panel may be of any length

provided the height does not exceed
15 times the thickness (that is, it may
be considered as a free standing wall);
or
3) Where the length of the panel is over
40 times and less than 60 times the
thickness, the height plus twice the
length may not exceed 135 times the
thickness.
b) wall with adequate lateral restraint at both
ends and at the top:
1) The panel may be of any height
provided the length does not exceed 40
times the thickness; or
32
cl
When walls have adequate lateral restraint

at the top but not at the ends, the panel
may be of any length provided the height
does not exceed 30 times the thickness.
D-3.3 Strength of bricks used in partition walls

should not be less than 3.5 N/mm2 or the
strength of masonry units used in adjoining
masonry, whichever is less. Grade of mortar
should not be leaner than M2.
APPENDIX E
(Clause 8.1)
NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
followina notations. letter symbols and abbreviations shall have the meaning indicated
against each, unless otherwise specifiedFin the text.
1 I Effective length
A= Area of a section
L= Actual length of wall
b = Width of bearing
Ll, L2 = Lower strength mortars
DPC = Damp proof course
Ml,M2= Medium strength mortars
c = Resultant eccentricity
P= Total horizontal load
fb = Basic compressive stress
PL = Plinth level
f, = Permissible compressive stress
RCC- Reinforced cermnt concrete
f, = Compressive stress due to dead loads
RS = Rolled steel
E-l. Ike
f, = Permissible shear stress
f,= Compressive strength of masonry (in

prism test)
CL = Ground level
H =
Actual height between lateral

supports
H=
Height of opening
Hl,HZ= High strength mortars

h = Effective height between lateral
supports
s, =
Spacing of piers/buttresses/cross walls
SR =
Slenderness ratio
t =
Actual thickness
tp =
Thickness of pier
t,=
Thickness of walI
w=
Resultant load
w, =
Axial load
w, =
Eccentric load
Width of piers/buttresses/cross walls
Ratio of flexural strength of wall in
the vertical direction to that in the
horizontal direction
k,=
Area factor
\v =
k,=
Shape modification factor
k, =
Stress reduction factor
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as good practrce
and accepted standards in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
htest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code.
The standards Listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in.conformance with
the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses
kdicates the number of the reference in thispartlsectibn.
(1)
IS : 1077-1986 Specification for common

burnt clay building bricks(fourth revision)
IS : 2180-1985 Specification for heavy
duty burnt clay building bricks (second
revision)
IS : 2185 (Part 1) 1979 Specificatibn for
concrete masonry units: Part 1 Hollow
and solid concrete blocks (second revision)
(3) IS : 1597 (Part 1) - 1967 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry.:
.Part 1 Rubble stone masonry
IS : 1597 (Part 2) - 1967 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry :
Part 2 Ashlar masonry
brickwork
IS : 2 185 (Part 3) - 1984 Specification for

concrete masonry units _: Part 3 Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks @rst
revision)

construction of hollow concrete block
masonry
IS : 2222-1979 SpecificaticM for burnt

clay perforated building bricks (second
IS : 2849-1983 Specification for non-load

and hollow types) Uirst revision)
revision)
IS :
IS : 43261976 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction

of buildings (Jim revision)

based blocks uirsr revision)

construction of autoclaved cellular concrete block masonry Cftst revision)
2849-1983 Specification for non-load

and hollow types) (first revision)
IS : 33161974 Specification for structural granite (firsr revision)

IS : 3620-1979 Specification for laterite
stone block for masonry (first revision)
clay hollow blocks for walls and partitions
(first revision)
IS : 4139-1976 Specification for sandlime
bricks Qirst revision)
(2)
34
VFI

@eparation and use of masonry mortars
(first revision)

construction of lightweight concrete
block masonry
brickwork
(5) 1s : 3414-1968 Code of practice for
design and installation of joints in
buildings
(6) IS ; 4326-1976 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction
of buildings @st revision)
NATlONAL BUllDING CODE O F INDl.4
-NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART vI STNJCTURAL DESIGN

SECTION5 CONCRETE
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
SECTION 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION SA(a) GENERAL
I. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3. SYMBOLS
SECTION 5A(b) MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECT-ION

AND TESTING
4. MATERIALS
5. CONCRETE
...
10
6. WORKABILITY OF CONCREl-E
...
II
7. DURABILITY
...
II
8. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
...
II
9. PRODUCTION AND CONTROL OF CONCRETE
...
I3
10. FORMWORK
...
I4
11. ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT
..
I4
12. TRANSPORTING, PLACING. COMPACTING AND CURING
...
IS
13. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS
...
16
14. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH TEST OF CONCRETE
...
I7
IS. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
...
I9
16. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES
...
I9
17. LOADS AND FORCES
...
20
18. BASES FOR DESIGN
...
a0
19. STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE
...
21
20. DURABILITY AND FIRE RESISTANCE OF THE STRUCTURE . . .
21
21. ANALYSIS
...
21
22. BEAMS
...
23
23. SOLID SLABS
...
24
24. COMPRESSION MEMBERS
*..
27
...
27
...
35
SECTION 5A(c) GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
25. REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND

DETAILING
26. EXPANSION JOINTS
VI+*
SECTION SA(d) SPECIAL DESlGN REQUIREMENTS FOK S-f RUCTfJRAL

MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
27. GENERAL
35
28. DEEP BEAMS
35
29. RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOlDED SLAB
36
30. FLAT SLABS
37
31. WALLS
43
32. STAIRS
45
33. FOOTINGS
45
SECTION 5A(e) STRUCTURAL DESIGN (I IMI I S IATE MF I HOD)
34. SAFETY AND SERVICEAHIfI~f Y REQIJIRFMEN~l S

35. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN VALfJf:s AND PAKTIA~
SAFETY FACTORS
36. ANALYSlS
37. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: FLEXURE

38. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: COMPRESSION
39. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
40. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: TORSION
41. LIMlT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: DEf~LECTION
42. LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: (RACKING
SECTION 5A(ff STRUCI-URAL DESIGN (WORKING
Sl~RESS M E T H O D )
43. GENERAL
55
..
55
45. PERMlSSIBLE LOADS IN COMPRESSION MEMBERS
56
46. y;$iDyiRG SUBJECT TO COMBINED AXIAL LOAD AND
58
47. SHEAR
59
48. TORSION
60
APPENDIX A REQUIREMENTS FOR DUKABIl.ITY
62
APPENDIX B CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
,,.
APPENDIX C SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS
63
65
APPENDIX R EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
APPENDIX E MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR

AND T-SECTIONS
W-5. 2
69
NATWMWL
WCLUWC
cmrwrmn*
SECTIONSR PKESTRESSEDCOT'iCRETE
SECTION 5B(a) GENERAL
/ sc:oIF
!I
2. TERMlNOLOGk
71
II. S Y M B O L S
...
71
...
72
...
73
74
SECTION 5B(b) MA7EKIALS.
WORKMANSHIP. INSttC I ION
AND 1 !:sllh(;
4. MA1 FRIA1.S
.5
CONCKEIE
6. WORKABILI IY OF CONiKEl E
7
DURABILIT Y
8. C0NCRE.TF
74
M I X PROPOR I IONING
Y. PRODICTION
..
AND CONIROI. OF CONCRETt
IO. FORMWORK
74
75
..
75
. .
75
II. PRESTRESSING
. .
77
13. TKANSPOK I IN<;. PLACING. COMPACI-INCi AND CURING
80
14. C0NCRE.r IN<; I;NDtR SPECIAL. CONDIl-IONS
...
80
15. SAMPLING AND SiTRENGltt TFSI OF CONCRETE
...
80
16. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
...
17. INSPECTION AND I ESTING OF STRUCTURES
...
80
80
...
81
1~. S A F E T Y .4ND SERVICEABILI-I Y KEQUlKEMEN~1.S
...
85
20. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN VAl.UES AND PARTIAL

SAFFlL FACTORS
...
86
21. ANALYSIS
...
87
22. LIMIT Sl-ATE O F C O L L A P S E
...
87
I I . ASSEMB1.Y Ol- PKESr~KESSING
AND REINFORCINC Sl E E L
SECTION 5B(c) GENFRAI. lIESIGN K E Q U I K E M E N T S

18. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 58(d) STKUCTURAL.
APPENDIX A R E Q U I R E M E N T S
APPEbDlX B
PART I
DESIGN: LIMIT STATE M E T H O D
FOR
DURABILITY
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR

SLCTION AND T-SECTIONS
...
STRlICTURAL DESlf$N - SILknON
CONCRETE
93
95
VI-S

SECTION 5 CONCRETE
0. FOREWORD
0.1
This section covers the structural design aspect of plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete.
0.2 The Panel dealing with this section strongly felt the need for a unified Code and the work was
initiated in that direction. As a result of this work, a number of points have emerged which require
careful consideration. It has, therefore, been felt that till such time as these points are sorted out.
status quo be mamtained and plain and reinforced concrete he treated separately from prestressed
concrete; hence they are covered under two sub-sections 5A and 58; 5A deals with plain and
reinforced concrete and 5B with prestressed concrete. SI units have been used in both the sections.
VI-* 4
NATIONAL UJILMNC
CODE OF INDIA
0.3
This section was first published in 1970. This revision is intended to bring it in line with
revised versions of IS:456-1978 and IS: 1343-l 980.
0.3.1
a)
The Section SA incorporates mainly the following changes:
MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP. INSPECTION AND TESTING

I) The
additional materials now permitted are more types of cement, pozrolanas. light
weight aggregates, and cold twisted deformed bars of Grade Fe 500.
2) Regarding durability, guidance concerning minimum cement and maximum waler

cement ratio for different environmental conditions. Including type of cement to be used
for resisting sulphate attack has been given in an appendix. Limitations on the total
chloride and sulphate content of concrete have also been given.
3) Information regarding properties of conkrete such as modulus of elasticity. tenhllr
strength. shrinkage, creep and coefficient of thermal expansion have been given tor
guidance.
4) Recommendations regarding constructions tolerances relating to formwork and placing
of steel have been given.
5) Recommendations regarding acceptance criteria for hardened concrete represented by
core tests has been given.
6) The clauses on load testing of structures has been modified.
b) CiENFRAI. LItSIGN REQUIREMENTS
I) Recommendations regarding prototype testing have bekn added.
2) Recommendations regarding stability of the structure as a whole have been given in
addition to the one regarding the stability of the overhanging members.
3) Some recommendations regarding frame analysis such as substitute frames have bcrn
given.
4) 1 he rules for effective width of flange for T and L beams have been changed.
5) The recommendations regarding slender beams have been changed.
h) The slenderness limits for columns have been changed.
7) Minimum eccentricity for the design of compression members has been specified.
8) Hulcs governing the use of bundled bars have been added.
9) CurtalIment rules for reinforcement in beams and slabs have been given.
IO) Recommendations regarding critical section for shear and minimum web reinforcement
have been added.
I I) The recommendation regarding minimum tensile reinforcement in beams has been

modified.
12) Recommendations regarding side face reinforcement in beams have been added.
13) The clause on span to depth ratio for controlling deflection has been modified and
elaborated to take into account the type and the percentage of reinforcement provided.
Method for calculating the short term as well as long term deflection has been added.
14) Detailing rules for crack control have been given in the Code. These rules are expected to
lead to a satisfactory design for most of the structures under normal environmental
conditions. Detailed investigations of crack width may however be required for unusual
cases or structures in aggressive environments.
IS) Guidance on the determination of effective length of columns in framed structures has
been added.
C)
SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
F OR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND wsfmis
I) Recommendations for the design of deep beams have been added.

l
at VI
sTWC~UML DUICN --N II CONCWTS
VI-S
2) Guidance for the design of ribbed and voided slabs has been included.
3) The clauses on design of flat slabs have been revised. Shear in flat slabs and openings in
flat slabs are now covered in some detail.

4) The clauses on footing have also undergone some changes regarding design for shear and
transfer of load at the base of the column.
LIMIT STATE METHOD - A unified approach has been made to cover members in flexure and
fiexure combined with axial force. A method of design of compression members with biaxial
bending has also been added. Slenderness effects aretaken into account by augmenting the
moments to be considered in design.
STRESS METHOD --The permissible stresses in steel have been modified to make
them more rational and to reflect the provisions of the basic standards on steel. Permissible
stresses in concrete for shear have been completely revised. Values of local bond stress have.
been deleted as these are not required according to new rules. Values of bearing stress in
concrete have also been deleted from the table of permissible stresses, since it has been given in
the clause on design of footings.
WOKKING
0.3.2 In the revision of the Section 5B, an attempt has been made to unify the provisions between
prestressed concrete structures and reinforced concrete structures, as is necessary. As a result
many of the provisions regarding materials, workmanship, inspection and testing and general
requirements of Section 5A apply to prestressed concrete structures and, therefore, only reference
has been made to such provisions in this section. Themajor changes in this section are on the
following lines:
b)
C)
d)
e)
0.4
The concept of limit state which provides a rational approach, taking into account variations
in material strengths and loads on semi-probabilistic basis has been introduced. This in fact is
a rationalization of the ultimate load method covered in the earlier version.
Provision for intermediate degrees of prestress (partial prestress) has been included.
Consequently, the section covers 3 types of structures, the types being associated with the
permissible tensile stress in concrete.
The method of design for shear and torsion has been completely revised, incorporating the
results of the latest research on the subject.
Recommenddtions regarding transmission length of prestressing tendons have been
elaborated.
Recommendations for ensuring lateral stability during handling and erection have been
modified.
Cortsiderations regarding durability have been detailed with guidance concerning minimum
cement content and maximum water cement ratio for different environmental conditions,
including types of cement to be used for sulphate attack. Limitations on total chloride and
sulphate content of concrete have been given.
Assistance has been derived from the following publications in the formulation of this
section:
AC1 318-77 AC1 Standard building. code requirements for reinforced concrete. American
Concrete Institute.
CP I IO : Part I : 1972 Code of practice for the structural use of concrete. Part I Design,
materjals and workmanship. British Standards Institution.
AS 1480-1974 SAA Concrete Structures Code. Standards Association of Australia.
AS 1481-1974 SAA Prestressed concrete code. Standards Association of Australia,
would
0.5 The following handbooks published by Indian Standards Institution
supplement for easy use and understanding of Section 5A:
a) SP : I6 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-197s.
b) SP : 22 Handbook on Concrete Mixes.
c) SP : 24 Explanatory Handbook on Indian Standard Code for Plain and Reinforced
Concrete (IS : 4561978).
d) Handbook on Concrete Reinforcement Detailing (underpreparalionj.
VI-S
NATIONAL BUlLDlNC
CODE OF INDIA
.
I
SECTION 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION 5A(a) GENERAL
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section deals with the general structural use of plain and reinforced concrete.
1.2 Design of special structures like reinforced concrete shell structures, folded plates,
liquid retaining structures, composite
constniction structures. precast concrete
structures shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5(l)]*.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.2 For the purpose ofthis section, the defini-.
tions given m accepled standards [VI-S(Z)]
shall generally apply.
3. SYMBOLS
meaning indicated against each; where other
symbols are used, they are explained at the
appropriate place:
A
b
b er
br
b,
D
Dl
DL
d
6
E,
EL
ES
;I
Area
Breadth of beam, or short,er dimension
of a rectangular column
Effective width of slab
Effective width of flange
Breadth of web or rib
Overall depth. of beam or slab or
diameter of column; di.mension of a
rectangular column in the direction
under consideration
Thickness of flange
Dead load
Effective depth of beam or slab
Depth of compressidn reinforcement
from the highly compressed face
Modulus of elasticity of concrete
Earthquake load
Modulus of elasticity of steel
Eccentricity
Characteristic cbmpressive strength of
concrete
Modulus of rupture of concrc:c
( f l e x u r a l tencllc Strength)
3 a this Se&on
where reference ir made to good

pmctice or accepted ~tanflud~ in relsuon to
material rpccifiitioa, de&n, tcrtini or construction
pmcedurw. the rpproprirtc document listed at the
end of thii Scaion mmy be uud u a guide to the
iaterpmtion of tbi term.
?ART
8Rucw8AL
DlDlGN-UCTlON
4 CGN~
Split tensile strength of concrete

Design strength
Characteristic strength of steel
Effective moment of inertia
Moment of inertia of the gross section
excluding reinforcement
Moment of inertia of cracked section
Stiffness of member
Constant or coefficient or factor
Development length
Live load or imposed load
Length of a column or beam bctwecn
a d e q u a t e lqteral r e s t r a i n t s o r the
unsupported length of a column
Effective span of beam or slab or

effective length of column
Effective length about X-X axis
Effective length about .I-.I axis
Clear span, face fo face of supports
I. for shorter of-the two spans at right
angles
Length of shorter side of slab
Length of ionger side of slab
Distance between points of zero
moments .in a beam
Span in the direction in which
moments are determined. centre to
centre of supports
Span transverse to II. centre to centre
ot supports
1~ for the shorter of the continuous
spans
Bending moment
Modular ratio
Number of samples
Axial load on a compression member
z;Fo$ated maximum bearing pressure
Radius
Spacing of stirrups or standard
deviation
Torsional moment
Shear force
Total load
Wind load
Distributed load per urlit area
Distributed dead load per unit area
Distributed imposed load per unit area
VW 7
Depth 01 neutral axls

Modulus of section
Lever arm
Angle or ratio
Partial safety factor for load
S u p e r s u l p h a t e d cement contormlng to
accepted standardsjvl-S(3)] may be used onI1
under special circumstances -~lth prior
approval of the engineer-in-charge.
Specialist literarurc may be consulted for
guidance regarding the use of these types 01
cements.
Partial safety factor for material

Percentage reduction in moment
Creep strain of concrete
Permissible btress in concrete in
bendlng compresslon
Permissible stress in concrete in direct
compression
Permissible stress in metal in direct
compression
Permissible stress in steel in compresston
Pcrmisslble stress in steel in tension
Permissible tensile stress in shear
reinforccmcnt
Design bond stress
Shear stress in concrete
MaxImum shear stress in concrete
with shear reinforcement
Nnmlnal \hrar \trec\
IJiamcter of
hilr
sFC7 ION 5th) MATL:KIAI.S, WOKKMANSHIP, INSPTCTIOS GtiDTESTlNG

4. MATERIALS
4.1 GP)IYTU/ - All materials used in the
constructton of concrete works shall conform
lo Part V Building materials.
4.1.1 CFM~NT
1 he cement used shall be
any of thr lollowing conforming to accepted
standards [VI-5(3)] with the prior approval of
the engineer-in-charge:
a) Ordinary or low heat Portland cement,
b) Kapid hardening Portland cement.
c) Portland slag cement,
d) Portland porrolana cement,
e) High strength ordinary Portland
cement.
0 Hydrophobic cement.
NOI~ -I w hcJt Purli~nd cemtnl sh,ill h e ubed ulth
adrquatc prclautlunh UII~ regard IO rcm~$nl 01
lurmu,rrh. et<
4.1.2 High alumina cement conforming to
accepted standards [ V l-5(3)] may be used only
under special circumstances with the prior
approval of the cngmeer-in-charge.
\1 T 8
4.2 Ag~regore.r ~-Aggregates shall conform

to accepted standards [VI-5(4)].
42.1 <)thcr tvpes of aggregates, such as slag
and owhrcl -o\erburnt brick or tile, which
may bc found suitable,wilh regard tostrength,
durablht) of concrete and freedom from
harmful effect! may be used for secondary
members, but such aggregates should not
contain more than one percent of sulphates
and should not absorb more than IO percent
of their own mass of water.
4.2.2 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight
aggregates: such as bloated clay aggregates
and sintered fly ash aggregates. may also be
used provided the engineer-in-charge is
satisfied with the data on the properties of
concrete made with them.
NOlE
-Some of the provIsions of the \cctmn would

rcqulrc modlftcarlon when these aggregate% arc used.
specialist literature ma) be consulted for guldancc
4.2.3 Fly ash conforming to accepted

standards [VI-5(5)] may be used as part
replacement of fine aggregate.
4.2.4 SIZF OF A GGREGATE --The nominal
maximum she of coarse aggregate should be
as large as possible within the limits specified
but in no case greater than one-fourth of the
minimum thickness of the member, provided
that the concrete can be placed without
difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement
thoroughly and fill the corners of the form.
For reinforced concrete work, aggregates
having a nominal size of 20 mm are generally
considered satisfactory.
Plums above 160 mm and up to any
reasonable size may be used in plain concrete
work up to a maximum limit of 20 percent by
volume of concrete when specifically
permitted by the engineer-in-charge. The
plums shall be distributed evenly and shall be
not closer than I50 mm from the surface.
4.2.4. I For heavily reinforced concrete
members as in the case of ribs of maln beams,
the nominal maximbm size of the aggregate
should usually be restricted to 5 mm less than
the minimum clear distance between the main
bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to
the reinlorccment whichever is smaller.
Where the reinforcement is widely spaced as
In solid blabs. hmitations of the size of the
aggregate may not be so important and the
nominal maximum size may sometimes be as

great as or greater than the minimum cover.
4.2.5 Coarse and fine aggregate shall
preferably be batched separately. All-inaggregate may be used only where specifically
permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
4.3 Water - Water used for mixing and
curing shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of oils. acids. alkalis, salts, sugar,
organic materials or other substances that
may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Potable water is generally considered
satisfactory for mixing concrete. As a guide,
the following ooncentratlom represent the
maximum permissible values:
a)
To neutralize 200 ml sample of water.

using phenolphthalein as an indicator. it
should not require more than 2 ml of 0. I
normal NaOH. The details of test shall be
in accordance w i t h g o o d p r a c t i c e
[VI-5(6)1,
To neutralize 200 ml sample of water,

using methyl orange as an indicator, it
should not require more than 10 ml of 0. I
normal HCI. The details of tests shall be
in accordance
[VI- S(6)].
with good practice
cl Permissible limiis
for solids shall be as
given in Table I.
TABLE I PERMISSIBLE L.IMITS FOR SOLIDS

(C/we 4.3)
bLlD
Organic
Inorganic
Sulphatcs (as SO,)
Chlorides (as Cl)
Suspended matter
ftRMlbblBLE LlMll
Mar
200 mgl
3 000 mg/l
500 mgi
for pliin concrele

work and 1 000 mgil lor
reinforced conrrr~r work
2 000 mg,
4.3.1.1 The sample of water taken for testing

shall represent the water proposed to be used
for concreting, due account being paid to
seasonal vanation. The sample shall not
receive any treatment before testing other
VI STIWCTUIIAL
4.3.1.2 Average. 28 days compressive strength

of at least three l5-cm c o n c r e t e c u b e s
prepared with water proposed to bc used shall
not be less than 90 percent of the average of
strength of three similar concrete cubes
prepared with distilled water. The cubes shall
be prepared, cured and tested in accordance
4.3.1.3 The initial setting time of test block
made with the appropriate cement and the
water proposed to be used shall not be less
than 30 minutes and shall not differ by + 30
minutes from the initial setting time ofcontrol
test block prepared with the same cement and
distilled water. The test blocks shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with good
practice [VI-S(8)].
4.32 ThepH value
of water shall generally be
not less than 6.

4.3.3 S E A w~~~~-.-Mixing or curing of
concrete with sea water is not recommended
because of presence of liarmful salts in sea
water. Under unavoidable circumstances, sea
water may be used for mixing or curing in
plain concrete or such reinforced concretr
constructions which are permanently under
sea water.
4.3.4 Water found satisfactory for mixing is
also suitable for curing concrete. However.
water used for curing should not produce any
objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
concrete surface. The presence of tannic acid
or iron compounds is objectionable.
4.4 Admixrures ~~ Admixtures may be used
with the approval of the engineer-in-charge.
The admixtures shall conform to accepted
standard [VI-X9)].
2 000 mg! 1
43.1 In case,of doubt regarding development

of strength, the suitability of water for making
concrete shall be ascertained by the
compressive strength and initial setting time
tests specified in 4.3.1.2 and 4.3.1.3.
PART
than that envisaged in the regular supply of

water proposed for use in concrete, The
sample shall be stoied in a clean container
previously rinsed out with similar water.
D E S I G N - SPCTION 5 CWWYtlt
4.5 Pozzolanas - 107zolanic materials may

be used with the permission oi theengineer-incharge.
4.5.1 F l y a s h conlormrng t o acceptcvd
standards [VI-S(5)] or burnt clay poztol;dna
conforming to accepted standards [VI-5( IO)]
may be used as part replacement of unblended
cements provided uniform blending with the
cement is ensured.
4.5.2 Fly ash conforming to
standards [VI-5(5)]and burnt clay
conforming to accepted standards
may be used as an admixture for
accepted
por7olana
[VI-5( IO)]
concrete.
4.6 Reinforcemenr - The reinforcement
vi v 9
shail be any of the following conforming to

accepted standards [VI-5( I I)]:
a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars,
b) Hot-rolled deformed bars,
c) Cold-twisted bars,
d) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric, and
e) Rolled steel made from structural steel.
lower columns in multistorey buildings) the

characteristic compressive strength given in
Table 2 may be increased by multiplying by
the factors given below:
Minimum Age 01 Member
When Full Design
Load/ Swess is Expecred
(Months)
Age Factor
I .o
1.10
I.15
1.20
4.6.1 All reinforcement shall .be free from

loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of
paints, oil, mud or other coatings which may
destroy or reduce bond.
4.6.2 The modulus of elasticity of steel shall
be taken as 200 kNjmm.
4.7 Storuge of Materials -~ Storage of
materials shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5( 1211.
5.1 Grades - The concrete shall be in grades

designed as per Table 2.
TABLE 2 GRAnES OF COKCKEl U
( C l a u s e s 5 . 1 . 5.2.1. X.2.1, 14 I I a n d 3 5 . 1 )
RADE
D ESIGNATION
!+SIFIEI>
CHAHAClENlSTlC
COMPRESSIVF
AT
28
(1)
STRENCrH
DAYS
(2)
N,
mm
10
15
M IO
M I5
M 20
M 25
M 30
M 3 5
M4d-J
g
35
40
N OTE I - In the designation of a co~!crcte mix, letter M

refers IO the mix and the number IO t h e s p e c i f i e d
characteristic compressive, strength of I5-cm cube ar 28
days, expressed m N/mm-.
N~rt 2 - M 5 and M 7.5 grades of concrete may be used

for lean concrete bases and simple foundations for
masonry walls. These mixes need not 6e designed.
NOTE 3 - Grades of concrete lower than M I5 shall not be
used in rtmforccd concrete.
5.1.1 The characteristic strength is defined as

the strength of material below which not more
than 5 percent of the test results are expected
to fall.
S.2 Properties of Concrete
5.2.1 INCREASE
IN
STRENGTH
WITH
it can be shown that a member

will not receive its full design load/stress
within a period of 28 days after the casting of
the member (for example, in foundations and
&E-Where
VI-s.
10
- No increase in respect of agcat loading should

be allowed where high alumina cement concrete is used
NOTE I
N OTE 2 --Where members are sub.iec:ed IO lower direct

load during construction, they should be checked for
stresses resulting from combination of direct load and
bending during constructIon.
Nok 3 -The permissible
stresses or dcalgn strengths

shall be based_ on the increased value of compressive
strength.
3. CONCRETV
;
I?,
5.2.2 TENSILE ST R E N G T H O F CONCRE-IE

-The flexural and split tensile strengths
shall be obtained in accordance with. good
practice [VI-S(7)]. When the designer wishes
to use an estimate of the tensile strength from
the compressive strength, the following
formula may be used:
Flexural strength A, = 0.7 & N/ mm2
where fck is the characteristic compressive
strength of concrete.
5.2.3 E LASTIC D EFORMATION - T h e
modulus of elasticity is primarily influenced
by the elastic properties of the aggregate and
to a lesser extent by the conditions of curing
and age of the concrete, the mix proportions
and the type of cement. The modulus of
elasticity is normally related to the
compressive strength of concrete.
5.2.3.1 In the absence of test data, the
modulus of elasticity for structural concrete
may be assumed as follows:
E=5700&
where
E is the short term static modulus of
elasticity in N i mm, and
&k is the characteristic cube strength of
concrete in N mm.
5.2.4 SHRISKAGE -;The total shrinkage of
concrete depends upon the constituents of
concrete, size of the member and
environmental conditions. For a given
environment, the total shrinkage of concrete
is most influenced by the total amount of
water present in the concrete at the time of
mixing and, to a lesser extent, by the cement
content.
NATIONAl.
BUILDING C O D E
OF INDIA
5.2.4.1
In the absence of test data, the

approximate value of the total shrinkage
straiu for design may be taken as 0.000 3 (see
Section 5B).
5.2.5 C R E E P OF CO N C R E T E -Creep o f
concrete depends, in addition to the factors
listed in 5.2.4, on the stress in the concrete, age
at loading and the duration of loading. As
long as the stress in concrete does not exceed
one-third of its characteristic compressive
strength, creep may be assumed to be
proportional to the stress.
5.2.5.1 In the absence of experimental data
and detailed information on the effect of the
variables, the ultimate creep strain may be
estimated from the following values of creep
coefficient (that is. ultimate c r e e p
strain,elastic strain at the age of loading):
Age at Loading
Creep Coefficienr
2.2
7 days
28 days
I year
I.6
I.1
(For more information, see Section 5B)

NOTE - The ultlmalc creep strain. estimated as
dcscribcd above does not include the elastic strain.
5 . 2 . 6 T H E RM AL E X P A N S I O N
-7he
coefficient of thermal expansion depends on
nure of cement, the aggregate, the cement,
the relative humidity and the size of sections.
The value of coefficient of tlicrmal expansion
for concrete with different aggregates may be

taken as below:
Coefficient i$ Thermal
7jpe of
Aggregate
Expansion for ConcrerelC
Quartzite
Sandstone
Granite
Basalt
Limestone
I.2
0.9
0.7
0.8
0.6
10 1.3x lo-?
to I .2 x IO -
to 0.95 x Joto 0.95 X IO-5
to 0.9 X IO -
6. WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
6.1 The concrete mix proportions chosen
should be such that the concrete isof adequate
workability for the placing conditions of the
concrete and can propurly be compacted with
the means available.
IUOTE - Suggesrcd
ranges of values of workability of

concrete for some placing condlGons. measured in
accordance with good prsc~e[VI-5( I3)]are glvcn below.
Plarmng
Condirions
(1)
C o n c r e t i n g of
rhalluw seaions
with vibrirlion
kc;; 4
Valt4es 01
Workabihry
Placing
D;w;; of
Condif ions
pbilily
(1)
(2)
Concreting of lightly Low

reinforced sections
with vibration
Values uf
Workobilir s
(3)
IO-S seconds.
Vcc-Bee time
~W.gS. compacting factor
Concreting of Iikhtly Medium

reinforced se&Ions
without vibmtion or
hBWily
roidOlU!d
aion with vibration
S- seconds.
3 cc-&e time
t$4J.92. compc1mg factor
g;7S mm, slump for
20 mm* aggfemle
Comere of heavily
rcinfonxd sections
without vibration
Hlsh
AboK 0.92, corn

paning factor
or
7% I25 mm, slump
for 20 mm* apgadrc
*For smalkr aggrcgatc the r~lucs wiil lx lower.
7. DURABILITY
7.1 The durability of concrete depends on its
resistance to deterioration and the
environment in which it is placed. The
resistance of concrete to weatherrng. chemical
attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends
largely upon its quality and constrtuent
materials. Susceptibility to corrosion of the
steel is governed by the cover provided and the
permeability of concrete. The cube-crushing
strength alone is not a reliable guide to the
quality and durability ofconcrete; it must also
have an adequate cement content and a low
water-cement ratio.
7.1.1 One of the main characteristics
influencing the durability of any concrete is its
permeability. With strong, dense aggregates, a
suitably low permeability is achieved by
having a sufficiently low WaterCement ratio,
by ensuring as thorough compaction of the
concrete as possible and by ensuring sufficient
hydration of cement through proper curing
methods. Therefore. for given aggregates, the
cement content should be sufficient to provide
adequate workability with a low watercement ratio so that concrete can be
completely compacted with the means
available.
7.2 Appendix A provides guidance regarding
minimum cement content and permissible
limits of chloride and sulphate in concrete.
obrlit ,
(2)
Very low
(3)
20-10 seconds.
Vce-Bee ume
~~7S-O.gO, compactmg factor

8. I Mix Proporrion - The mix proportions
shall be selected to ensure that the workability
of the fresh concrete is suitable for the
cond~~~on~ 01 handling and placlng, so t h a t

it surrounds all
dfter Lompacrlon
rtlnlorccmcnls and c o m p l e t e l y f i l l s t h e
lormwork. When concrete IS hardened, it shall
have the rcqulrcd strength, durability and
surtace tlnihh.
8.3 Nominal Mix Concrele -- Nominal mix

concrete may be used for concrete of grades
M 5, M 7.5, M IO. M 15, and M 20. The proportions of materials for nominal mix concrete
shall be in accordance with Table 3.
8. I I The determination of the proportions of

cement, aggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made as follows:
TABLE 3 PR~CWORlC$SF&R NOMINAI.
a)
b)
designing the concrete mix; such

concrete shall be called Design mix
concrete; or
By
By adopting nominal concrete mix; such

shall be called Nominal mix
concrete.
concrete
Design mix concrete IS preferred to nominal

mix. If design mix concrete cannot be used for
any reason on the work for grades of M 20 or
lower, nominal mixes may be used with the
permission of engineer-in-charge, which,
however, is likely to involve a higher cement
content.
8. I .2 INFOHMA I I O N RFQUIF~ED
-- I n
specifying a particular grade of concrete, the
following information shall be included:
Type of mix, that is, design mix concrete

or nominal mix concrete;
b)
c)
d)
Grade designation,
e)
Minimum cement content (for design mix

concrete);
0
g)
Maximum water-cement ratio;
Type of cement;
Maximum nomlnal size of aggregate;
Workability; and
h) Mix proportion (for nominal mix

concrete).
8.1.2.1 In appropriate circumstances, the

followlng additional information may be
specified,
a) Type of aggregate,
b) Maximum cement content, and
Cl
Whether an admlxture shall or shall not

be used and the type of admixture and the
conditrons of use.
8.2 Design Mix Concrete

8.2.1 The mix shall be designed to produce
the grade of concrete having the required
workablllty and a characteristic strength not
less than the appropriate values given in Table
2. Ihe procedure given in accepted standards
[VI-5(14)] may be followed.
8.2.2 As long as the quality of the materials
doesnot change, a mix design done earlier
may be considered adequate for later work.
,J2
(chure RJ. 83.1 and 83-T)

GRADE
T O T A L QUANTII-V PROPORIION QUAhTlTY
OF
OF DR Y AGGREOF F I N E
0~ WA T E R
CONCRETE G A T E S B Y MASS
A G GR E G A T E
PER 54 KG
PER 50tXjOi
T0 COARSE
CEMFNT. ~0 m
AGGREGATF
CEZNT.
T A K E N A S rHt
(BY MASS)
M a r
S U M O F THt
IN~IvIO~JAI
M A S S E S O F FINE
AND COARSE
A G G R E G A T E S.
Max
(3)
(4)
llrres
800
625
4RO
Generally
I.2 but rubjcct
to an upper hmrt
60
45
34
hi I5
350
ofI,lf
M 20
250
lower limit of
(1)
k;
MS
M 7 5
M 10
dnda
30
NOTE -The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates

should be adjusted from u per hmit to lower limit progressively as the grading o P the fme aggregates becomes
finer and the maximum sire of coarse aggregate becomes
larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall bc used.
an average grading of fme puregate (see
VI-S(4)]. the proportions shall be I.1 I, I.2 and I .2 i
\ or maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and
40 mm. respcctivcly.
E XAMPLE -For
8.3.1 The cement content of the mix specified

in Table 3 for any nominal mix shall be proportionately increased if the quantity of water
in a mix has to be increased to overcome the
difficulties of placement and compactton. so
that the water-cement ratio as specified is not
exceeded.
N OTE 1 -In the case of vibrated concrete. the llmlt spccitied may be suitably reduced to avoid wgregatlon.
NOTE 2 -The quantity of water used in the concrete mix
for remforced concrete work should be suffioent, but nol
more than sufficient to pruducc a dense concrete of
adequate workability for its purpose. which WIII surround
and properly gnp all the reinforcement. Workablhty of
the concrete should be controlled by maintaining a water
content that is found to give a concrete which is lust
sufficiently wet to bc placed and compacted without
difficulty with the means avadable.
8.3.2 If nominal mix concrete made in

accordance with the proportions given for a
particular grade does not yield the specified
strength, such concrete shall be classified as
belonging to the appropriate lower grade.
Nominal mix concrete proportioned for a
given grade in accordance with Table 3 shall
not, however, be placed in higher grade on the
ground that the test strengths arc higher than
the minimum specified.
NAllONAL
B U I L D I N G CODE O F I N D I A
9. PRODUCTlON A N D C O N T R O L O F
CONCRETE
9. I GrInera --- To avoid confusion and error
in batching, consideration should be given to
using the smallest practical number of
different concrete mixes on any site or in any
one plant.
9.1.1 A competent person shall supervise all
stages of production of concrete. Preparation
of test specimens and site test shall be properly
supervised.
9.1.2 The engineer-in-charge shall be
afforded all reasonable opportunity and
facility to inspect the materials and the
manufacture of concrete and to take any
samples or to make any tests. All such
inspection, sampling and testing shall be
carried out with the minimum of interference
with the process of manufacture and delivery.
9.2 Burching -- In proportioning concrete.
the quantity of both cement and aggregate
should be determined by mass. Where the
mass of cement is determined on the basis of
mass of cement per bag, a reasonable number
of bags should be weighed periodically to
check the net mass. Where the cement is
weighed on the site and not in bags it should
be weighed separately from the aggregates.
Water should be either measured by volume in
calibrated tanks or weighed. Any solid
admixtures that may be added, may be
measured by mass: liquid and paste
admixtures by volume or mass. Batching
plant where used should conform to accepted
standards [VI-5( l5)]. A l l m e a s u r i n g
equipment should be maintained in a clean
serviceable condition and their accuracy
periodically checked.
9.2.1. Except where it can be shown to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge that
sup ly of properly graded aggregate of
uni Porm quality can bc maintained over the
period of work. the grading of aggregate
should be controlled by obtaining the coarse
aggregate in different sires and blending them
in the right proportions when required. the
different sizes being stocked in separate stock
piles. The material shcq-lld be stock-piled for
several hours preferab& a day helore use. The
grading ofcoarseand I?neaggregateshould be
checked as frequently as possible. the
frequency for a gilzen ~c)b beingdetcrmlned b)
the e n g i n e e r - i n - c h a r g e IO cn;urc t\xit the
specified grading 15 maintatwd.
9.2.2 In case unlformit! in the material\ uwd
for concrete making has bcenestahll~hcd ober
a period of trme. the proportIonIng may bc
done by volume batchrng, pro\lded periodic
checks are made 0 n mass Lolume
relationships of the matertats. Where weightbatching is not practicable, the quantities of

fine and coarse aggrega te (not cement) may be
determined by volume. If fine aggregate is
moist and volume batching is adopted,
allowance shall be made for bulking in
accordance with good practice [V l-5( 16)].
9.23 It is important to maintarn the watercement ratio constant at its correct value. To
this end, determination of moisture contents
in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be
made as frequently as possible, the frequency
for a given job being determined by the
engineer-in-charge according to weather
conditions. l-he amount 01 the added water
shall be adjusted -to compensate for any
observed variations in the moisture contents.
For the deter-mination of moisture content in
the aggregates[seeVl-5( Ih)]. To allow for the
variation in mass ofaggregatedue to variation
in their morsture c o n t e n t , s u i t a b l e
adjustments in the masses of aggregates shall
also be made. In the absence of exact data,
only in the case of nominal mixes, theamount
of surface water may be estimated from the
values given in Table 4.
TABLE 4 SURFACE WATER CARRIED BY

AGGREGATE
AG G R E G A T E
A P P R O X I M A T E QUANTITY
S URFACE W A T E R
OF
Percent
(1)
by Mass
(2)
l/m
(9
very we1 sand
75
120
Moderately wee
50
HO
2.5
ill
I 75-2.5
10440
sand
9.2.4 No substitutions in materials used on

the work or alterations in the established
proportions, except as permitted in 9.2.2 and
9.2.3, shall be made without additional tests to
show that the quality and strength of concrete
are satisfactory.
9.3 Mlxrng -Concrete shall be mixed in a
mechanical mixer. The mixer should comply
with accepted standards [VI-SC 17)J. The
mixing shall be continued until there IS a
uniform distribution of the materials and the
mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If
there is segregation after unloading from the
mixer, the concrete should be remixed.
?IOIF I --For gutdance. the mlxlng time may he Ii IO 7

rmnutcs; for hydrophobic cement tt ma) he take!! JI 2; IO
3 minutes.
NOYE 2 - - I n e x c e p t i o n a l clrcumstanccs. \uch a\
mechanical breakdown of mixer, work III remote arra\ or
when the quantity of concrete work 1s very small. hand
mixing may bc permitted sublea to adding IO pcrccnl
extra cement. When hand mixing IS pcrmtttcd, it shall bc
curried out on a water-tight platform and care rhtll be
taken tocnsure that mtxing 1s continued until the concrete
is uniform in colour and constslency.
to shall be ttlat of concrete using the ame

urth t h e ~ilmc
c e m e n t a n d aggregates.
proportions and cured under conditions ol
temperature and moisture slmllar to those
existing on the work. Where possrble, the
formwork shall he left longer 35 II would ;IS.I\I
the curing.
In normal clrrumalancc, and where ordinary
Noit I
Portland Lament i\ ukcd. lorrns may Kenerally he rem<>\ed
after
9.3.1 Workability of the concrete should be

controlled by direct measurement of water
content. Workability should be checked at
frequent intervals [see VI-5( 13)].
a)
b)
10.
F O R M WOKK
C) &am soIlits (props lelt under)
T h e formwork shall be
IO. 1 General
designed and constructed to the shapes, lines
and dlmcnsions shown on thedrawings within
the tolerances given below [XCF also Indian
Standard Code of practice lor falsework for
concrctr structtltes (trr&r prepur0ritrn)).
Dcvtatlon f r o m t h e
specified dimensions of
cross section of columns
and beams
Deviation from dimensions of footings (see
Note):
I) Dimensions in plan
2) Eccentricity
3) I hickness
- bmm
tt2 mm
d)
7 days
Removal 01 props undrr +lah\

I) Spannlng up to 4 5 m
2) Spannmg over 4 5 m
cl
3 day\
7 day\
I4 Jtys
Removal of props under

beams and arches:
I) Spanning up 10 0 m
I4 day5
2) Spannq over 6 m
21 da\>
For other cements, the \trlppmg tome recommended for

ordinary Portland cement may he suirahly modified.
-12 mm
150 mm
0.02 times the
width of the
footing in the
direction o f
deviation but
not more than
SO mm
20.05 t i m e s
the specified
thickness
N O T E Tolcranccs apply to concrrlc dlmrnsions o n l y .

not to positioning trf vertical relnlorcq steel nrdowels.
IO.2 C/caning and Trearmenr q/Forms --~ All

rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and
sawdust, shall be removed from the Interior of
the forms before the concrete is placed and the
formwork in contact with the concrete shall be
cleaned and thoroughly wetted ortreated with
an approved compositlon. Care shall be taken
that such approved composition IS kept out of
contact with the reinforcement.
JO.3 Stripping Time Forms shall not be

struck until the concrete has reached a
strength at least twice the stress to which the
concrete may be subjected at the tirne of
removal of formwork. The strength referred
1.~14
Slabs (prop5 left under)
N OTE 2 The number of props left under, their sires and

dlsposnion shall be such as to be able to safely carry the
full dead load of the slab. beam or arch as the case may he
together with any live load likely to occurdurmpcuring or
further construction.
10.3.1 Where the shape of the element is such

that the formwork has re-entrant angles, the
formwork shall be removed as soon as
possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage cracking occurring due to the
restraint imposed.
II. ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT
I I. I Straightening. Cutting and Bending .Reinforcement shall be bent and

fixed in accordance with good practice
[VI-5( l8)J and shall not be. straightened in a
manner tha! will injure the material.
11.2 All reinforcement shall be placed and
maintained in the position shown in the
drawings.
11.2.1 Crossing bars should not be tackwelded for assembly of reinforcement unless
permitted by engineer-in-charge.
Il.3 Tolerance on Placing of Reinforcemenl ---Unless otherwise specified by the
NATIONAL WILDiNC
CODE OF INDIA
engineer-in-charge, reinforcement shall be

placed within the rollowing tolerances:
a) For effective depth 200 mm +lOmm
or less
+ISmm
b) For effective depth m o r e
than 200 mm
The cov& shall in no case be reduced by more

than one-third of specified cover or 5 mm
whichever is less.
Il.4 W e l d e d J o i n t s o r M e c h a n i c a l
Connections -Welded joints or mechanical
connections in reinforcement may be used but
in all cases of important connections, tests
shall h made to prove that the joints are of the
full strength of bars connected. Welding of reinforcements shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5( 19)3.
11.5 Where reinforcement bars are bent aside
at construction joints and afterwards bent
back into their original positions, care should
be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius
of the bend less than 4 bar diameters for plain
mild steel or 6 bar diameters for deformed
bars. Care shall also be taken when bending
back bars, to ensure that the concrete around
the bar is not damaged.
12. TRANSPORTIBG, PLACING,
COMPACTING AND CURING
i2.1 T r a n s p o r t i n g - C o n c r e t e shall be
transported from the mixer to the formwork
as rapidly as possible by methods which will
prevent the segregation or loss of any of the
Ingredients and maintaining the required
workability.
12.1.1 During hot or cold weather, concrete
shall be transported in deep containers. Other
suitable methods to reduce the loss of water by
evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in
cold weather may also be adopted.
1 2 . 2 P l a c i n g -The concrete shall be
deposited as nearly as practicable in its final
position to avoid rehandling. The concrete
shall be placed and compacted before setting
commences and should not be subsequently
disturbed. Methods of placing should be such
as to preclude segregation. Care should be
taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement
or movement of formwork.
12.3 Compactinn --Concrete should be
thoroughly compacted and fully worked
around the reinforcement, arouild embedded
fixtures and into corners of the formwork
12.3.1 The use of mechanical v i b r a t o r s
complying with accepted standards [VI-5( I?)]
for compacting concrete is recommended
PART VI STRUCTURAL DEWiN ~~ S E C T I O N 3 CONCBETF.
Overvibration or vibration of very wet mixes

is harmful and should be avoided; undervibration is also harmful.
Whenever vibration has IO be applied
externallv, the design of formwork and the
disposition of vibrators should receive special
consideration to ensure efficient compaction
and to avoid surface blemishes.
12.4 Construction Joints -Concreting shdll
b e c a r r i e d o u t c o n t i n u o u s l y u p to
construction joints, the position and
arrangement .of which shall be indicated by
the designer.
12.4.1 When the work has to be resumed on a
surface which has hardened, such surface
shall be roughened. It shall then be swept
clean and thoroughly wetted. For vertical
joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on
the surface before it is dry. For horizontal
joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of mortar about IO to I5 mm thick composed
of cement and sand in the same ratio as the
cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer
of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before
placing of the concrete.
12.4.2 Where the concrete has not fully
hardened, all laitance shall be removed by
scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle
brushes, c a r e b e i n g t a k e n t o a v o i d
dislodgement of particles of aggregate. The
surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free
water removed. The surface shall then be
coated .with neat cement slurry. On this
surface, layer of concrete not exceeding
I50 mm in thickness shall first be placed and
shall be well rammed against old work,
particular attention being paid to corners and
close spots: work thereafter shall proceed in
the normal way.
12.5 Curing
12.5.1 MUIST CU R I N G --Exposed surfaces
of concrete shall be kept continuously in a
damp or wet condition by ponding or b!
covering with a layer of sacking, cama\.
hessian o r s i m i l a r m a t e r i a l s a n d kept
constantly wet for at least seven days from the
date of- placing of concrete.
12.5.2 M E M B R A N E C U R I N G - A p p r o v e d
curing compounds may be used in lieu of
moist curing with the permission of the
engineer-in-charge. Such compounds shall be
applied to all exposed surfaces of the concrete
as soon as possible after the concrete has set.
12.6 Supervision --. It is exceedingly difficult
and costly to alter concrete once placed.
Hence, constant and strict supervision of all
the items of the construction is necessary
W-P
during the progress of the work, including the

proportioning and mixing of the concrete.
Supervision is also of extreme importance lo
check the reinforcement and its pl;lcing before
being covered.
entire batch of the mix or the entire

contents of the transporting bucket If any.
The tremie pipe shall be noI%% than 200
mm in diameter and shall be large enough
to allow a free flow of concrete and strong
enough to withstand the external pressure
of the water in which It IS suspended, even
if a partial vacuum develops inside the
pipe. Preferably, flanged steel pipe of
adequate strength for the job should be
used. A separate lifting device shall be
provided for each tremle pipe with its
hopper at the upper end. Unless the lower
12.6.1 Before any important operation. such

as.concreting or stripping of the formwork IS
started, adequate notice shall be given IO the
construction supervisor.
J3. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL.
CONDITIONS
end of the pipe is equlppcd w i t h a n

approved automatic check valve, the
upper end of the pipe shall be plugged
with a wadding of the gunny sacking or
other approved material before delivering
the concrete to the tremie pipe through
the hopper. zo that when the concrete is
forced down from the hopper to the pipe,
it will force the plug(and along with it any
water In the pip(:) down the pipe and out
of the bottom end, thus establishing a
continuous stream of concrete. It will be
necessary to raise slowly the tremie in
order to cause a uniform flow of the
concrete. but the tremie shalt not be
emptied so that water enters the pipe. At
all times after the placing of concrete is
started and until all the concrete is placed,
the lower end o: the tremie pipe shall be
below the top surface of the plastic
concrete. Thts will cause the concrete to
butld up from below Instead of flowing
out over the surface, and thus avold
formation 01 laltance layers. If the charge
in the tremie IS lost while deposlttng, the
tremie shall be ratsed above the concrete
surface. and unless scaled by a check
valve. tt shall be replugged at the top end.
as at the begInnIng. brlnre refilling for
deposltlng concrete.
13. J Work m Exrreme Weather Condirwns During hot or cold weather, the concreting
should be done in accordance with good
practice rwsc20)j.
J3.2 Under- Wnltv Conrrering
13.2.1 W h e n I( IS n e c e s s a r y t o deposit
concrete under water. the methods,
equipment, materials and proportlons ol the
mix to be used shall be submltted to and
approved by the engineerAin-charge before the
work is started. In no case shall such concrete
be considered as Design mix concrete
13.2.2 The concrete shall contain at least IU
percent more cement than that required for
the same mix placed In thedry. thequantIty of
extra cement varying wllh conditions 01
placing. The volume or mass cif the coarse
aggregate shall be not less than one and a hall
times, nor more than twice that 01 the line
a g g r e g a t e . The tnaterlal:, hhall he UI
proportmned as to produce a concrete having
a <lump of not less thiln IOU mm. and IW more
than I80 mm.
13.2.3 Coffer-dams or forms shall be
sufficiently tight to ensure still water if
practicable, and in any case to reduce the flow
of water to less than 3 m per minute through
the space into which concrete is to be
deposlted. Coffer-dams or forms in still water
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of
mortar through the walls. Dewatering by
umping shall not be done while concrete is
& ing placed or until 24 hours thereaftw.
The top of the

bucket shall be covered with a canvas
flap. The bottom doors shall open freely
downward and outward when tripped.
The bucket shall be filled completely and
lowered slowly to avoid backwash. The
bottom doors shalt not be opened until
the bucket rests on the surface upon
which the concrete is to @z deposited and
b) DROP RCXTOM BUCKET
when discharged, shall be withdrawn

slowly until well above the concrete.
13.2.4 C o n c r e t e s h a l l b e d e p o s i t e d
continuously until it is brought to the required

height. While depositing, the top surface shall
be kept as nearly level as possible and the
formation of scams avoided. The methods to
be used for depositing concrete under water
shall be one of the following:
a)
When concrete is to be
deposited under water by means of a
trcmie, the top section of the tremic shall
be a hopper large enough to hold one
TREMIE-
c)
~- Bags oi at least 0.028 mcapacity

ofjute or other hoarse cloth shall be filled
about two thirds full of concrete. the
spare end turned under so that bag is
square ended and sccurcly tied. They shall
be placed carefully in header and
stretcher courses so that the whole mass is
interlocked. Bags used for this purpose
B AGS
shall be free from deleterious materials.
d)
-A series of round cages

made from 50 mm mesh of 6 mm steel and
extending over the full height to be
concreted shall be prepared and laid
vertically over the area to be concreted so
that the distance between centres of the
cages and also to the faces of the concrete
shall not exceed one rnetre. Stone
aggregate of not less than 50 mm nor
more than 200 mm size shall be deposited
outside the steel cages over the full area
and height to be concreted with due care
to prevent displacement of the cages.
GROUTING
A stable I:2 cement-sand grout urth a

water-cement ratio of not less than 0.6
and not more than 0.8 shall be prepared in
a mechanical mixer and sent down under
pressure (about 0.2 N/mm) through 38
to 50 mm diameter pipes termmatinginto
steel cages, about 50 mm above
the bottom of the concrete. As the
grouting proceeds. the pope shall be raised
gradually up to a height of not more than
600 mm above its starting level after
which it may be withdrawn and placed
into the next cage for further grouting by
the same procedure.
After grouting the whole area for a height
of about 600 mm. the same operation
shall be repeated, if necessary, for the
next layer of 600 mm and so on.
The amount 01 grout to be sent down
shall be sufficient to fill all the vords
which may be erther ascertained or
assumed as 55 percent ofthe volume to be
concreted.
13.2.5 To minimize the formatton of laitance,
great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being
deposited.
13.3 Concrete in Sea- Water -- Concrete in
sea-water or exposed directly along the seacoast shall be at least M I5 Grade in the case ol
plain concrete and M 20 in case of reinforced
concrete. The use of slag or pozzolana cement
is advantageous under such conditions.
13.3.1 Special attention shall be given to the
design of the mix to obtain the densest
possible concrete; slag, broken brick, soft
limestone, soft sandstone. or other porous or
weak aggregates shall not be used
13.3.2 AS far as possible, preference shall be
given to precast members unreinforced, wellcured and hardened. without sharp corners,
IART V I S T R U C T U R A L D E S I G N ~ SCmON 5 CONCRETE
a n d havmg trowel-srnootn linrshea surtaces

free from crazing, cracks or other defects;
plastering should be avoided.
13.3.3 No construction joints shall be allowed
within 600 mm below low water-level or
within 600 mm.of the upper and lower planes
of wave action. Where unusually severe
conditions or abrasion are anticipated, such
parts of the work shall be protected by
bituminous or silica-fluoride coatings or
stone facing bedded with bitumen.
13.3.4 In reinforced concrete structures, care
shall be taken to protect the reinforcement
from exposure to saline atmosphere during
storage and fabrication.
13.4 Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water
I3.4.l GENERAL -The destructive action of
aggressive waters on concrete is progressive.
The rate ofdeterioration which varies with the
alkali-resisting property of the cement used,
decreases as the concrete is made stronger and
more impermeable, and increases as the salt
content of the water Increases.
Where structures are only partially immersed
or are in contact with aggressive soils or
waters on one side only, evaporation may
cause serrous concentrations of salts with
subsequent deterioration, even where the
original salt content of the soil or water is not
high.
NOTE ---Guidance rrgarding reqwremems for concrete
exposed IO srrlpharc attack is given in Appendix A.
13.4.2 DR A I N A G E -At s i t e s w h e r e a l k a l i
concentrations are or may become very high,
Portland cement concrete is not
recommended, and if used, the ground water
shall he lowered by drainage so that it will not
come into direct contact with the concrete.
Additional protection may be obtained by the
use of a chemically resistant stone facing or a
layer of plaster of Paris covered with suitable
fabric, such as jute, thoroughly impregnated
with bituminous material.
14. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH T E S T

OF CONCRETE
14:l General -Samples from fresh concrete

shall be taken as per good practice [VI-5( I3)]
and cubes shall be made, cured and tested at
28 days in accordance with good practice
[VI-5(7)].
NOIE ?F/)r rclatwely small and unimportant buildIn?

and works in which quanllly ofconcretc is less than I5 m
the strength teals may be walvcd by ~hc cnglneer-mcharge no tus discretion.
14.1.1 In order to get a relatively quick& Idea

of the quality of concrete, optional tests on
beams for modulus of rupture at 72 & 2 hours
or at 7 days or compressive strength tests at 7
days may be carried out in addition to 28 days
compressive strength tests. For this purpose,
the values given in Table 5 may be taken for
general guidance in the case of concrete made
u ith ordinary Portland cement. In all cases,
the 28 days compressive strength specified in
Table 2 shall alone be the criterion for
acceptance or rejection of the concrete. If,
however, from lests carried out in a particular
job over a reasonably long period, it has been
established to the satisfaction of the engineerin-charge that a suitable ratio between 28 days
compressive strength and the modulus of
rupture at 72 I? 2 hours or 7 days, or
compressive strength at 7 days may bc
accepted, the e,ngineer-in-charge may suitably
relax the frequency of 28 dayS compressive
strength specified in 14.1, provided the
expected strength values ot the specified early
age arc consistently met.
ThHLt 5 OW IONAL TES1.S REQ IREMENlS OF

CONCKET E
grade shall be In accordance with

following:
@lorlIII_,v 0:. ~oll(.rt~~
Yu~?ltwr of
in the Work. NI
k:~IpIes~
l-5
h-15
16-30
31-50
51 and above
I
!
3
4
4 plus one addItIona
sample ior each additional 50 ml or
part t hcreot
NOIE- At least one sample shall bc tdkcn lrom cvch

thtft.
14.3 Test Specimen Three test specimens

shall be made from each sample lor testing at
28 days. Additional cubes may be required tor
various purposes such as IO determine the
strength of concrete at 7 davs or at the rime of
st,riking tk formwork, or to determlnr the
duration of curing. or to check the testing
error. Additional cubes may also be rcquircd
for testing cubes cured by accelerated
methods in accordance with good practice
[VI-5(6)].
1 4 . 4 Tar S t r e n g t h UJ Sumplu .-- 1 hc test
strength of the sample shall be the average o!
the strength of three specimens. The
Individl;al variation should not be more that)
f 15 percent of the average.
14.5 Stondora Lkk7tton
14.5.1 ST A N D A R D D
EVIATION
5.6~~ o h
TEsr RESlll TS
a) NllMDER of TFSI RI301 1s - The total

M IO
70
I2
I7
M I$
100
I <
21
1.7
2.4
M 20
13.5
M 25
17 0
IO
2.1
%I 30
20 0
21
JO
M 1s
23 5
23
32
M4U
27.0
2,s
3.4
14.2 Frequency. of kvnpling

14.2.! SAMPL~ING PRWHH.:RE --A r a n d o m
sampling procedure shal! be adopted to
ensure that each concrete batch shall have a
reasonable chance of being tested; that is, the
sampling should be sprc3d over the cnttre
period of concreting and cover ail mir.lng
units.
14.2.2 F RE Q U E N C Y ---The m i n i m u m
frequency of sampling of concrete of each
n u m b e r o f lest results rcquircd lo

constitute ar! acceptable record for
calculation of standard deciatton shall
be not less than 30. Attempts should be
made to obtain the 30 test results, as
early as possible, when a mtx is used for
t:,e first tlrnc.
STANUARL) I)tklA I 10N
BROllCHT
I!P
TO
10
f3t
DAIS
I-he
calculation of the srandard deviatron
shall be brought up to date after cvcry
change of mix design and at least once a
month
a ) C o n c r e t e of, rach g r a d ? shal! ha

analysed s e p a r a t e l y to detcrrninr bus
standard dev~atlon.
b) The stanaard deviation of concrete of a
iven grade shall be calculated ~ng the
!ollowing formula from the r,csults of
Individual tests of concrete oftbar grade
obtained as specified In Id 4,
2 )
Estimated standard deviation
s=
0.80 times
strength;
t h e characteristic
and the average strength of all the samples is

not less than the characteristic strength I%L,
2
J-
where
A = deviation of the individual test
strength from theaverage strength
of n samples. and
n = number of sample test results.
c) When significant changes are made in
the production of concrete batches (for
example changes in the materials used,
mix design, equipment or technical
control), the standard deviation value
shall be separately ca!culated for such
batches of concrete.
14.5.3 ASSUMED ST A N D A R D D E V I A T I O N ~~
Where sufficient test results for a particular
grade of concrete are not available, the value
of standard deviation given in Table 6 may be
assumed
l-45
d~;~d~v~ ol sampIGs
tmtS Ihe stanp
1,
15.2 The concrete shall be deemed not to
comply with the strength requirements if:
a) the strcng?h of any sample is less than thr
greaier 01.
I) the characteristic strength minus I.35
times the sttindard deviation; and
2) 0.80 times the characteristic stength: or
h) the average strength of all the samples is
less than rhe characteristic strength plus
3
1.65 - r
\/ nunlhcr ol samples
dard deviation.
times the stan-
However, when adequate past records for a

similar grade exist and justify to the designer a
value of standard deviation different from
that shown in Table 6, it shall be permissible
to use that value.
IS._{ Concrete which does not meet the

strength requirements as specified in 15.1 but
has a strength greater than that required
by IS._ may, at the discretion of the designer,
be accepted as being structurally adequate
without furtller iesting.
TABLE 6 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION
1.4 If the concrete is deemed not to comply

persuant to I5.2, the structural adequacy of
the parts affected shall be investigated (SCY 16)
:111ci any consequential action as needed shall
be taken.
(C/uusc 11.5.J)
GhwE 0F CONCRETE
,I\SSUMCU S;TANDARI)
DEVIATION
Pi/ mm
u IO
u I5
u 20
M 25
u 30
u 35
u40
2.3
3,s
4.6
5.3
6.0
63
6.6
15.5 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed

separately.
15.6 Concrete shall be assessed daily fol
compliance.
-_._-
15.1 The concrete shall be deemed to comply

with the strength requirements if:
a) every sample has a test strength not
15.7 Concrete IS liable to be rejected if it is

porous or honey-combed; its placing has been
interrupted without providing a proper
ConstructIon joint; the reinforcement has been
displaced beyond the tolerances specified; or
construction tolerance have not been met.
However, the hardened concrete may be
accepted after carrying out suitable remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the engineers.
in-charge.
less than the characteristic value; or
the strength of one or more samples,

though less than the characteristic
value is in each case not less than the
greater of:
1) the characteristic strength minus
1.35 times the standard devration;
and
1 6 . I N S P E C T I O N A N D TFSTINC; Of,
STRUCIURES
16.1 inspecrion -Immediately after

stripping the formwork. all concrete shall be
carefully inspected and any defective work 01
small defects either removed or n~+de go: ;:i
before concrete has tl-;oroughly !~.~drned.
/6.2 In case of daub! regarding the grade of

c o n c r e t e u s e d , either d u e t o pooT
workmanship or based on results of cube
strength tests, compressive strength tests o!
concrete on the basts of 16.3 and, or load test
(;)cP 16.5) may be carried out.
16.3 Core Test
16.3.1 The points from which cores are to be
taken and the number of cores required shall
be at the discretion of the engineer-in-charge
and shall be representative of the whole of
concrete concerned. In nocase, however. shall
fewer than three cores be tested.
16.3.2 Cores shall be prepared and tested in
accordance with good practice [VI-s(7)].
16.3.3 Concrete in the member represented
by a core test shall be considered acceptable 11
the average equivalent cube strength of the
cores is equal to at least 85 percent ofthecube
strength of the grade of concrete specified for
the corresponding age and no individua: core
has a strength less than 75 percent.
16.4 In case the core test results do not satisfy
the requirements of 16.3.3 or where such tests
have not been done, load test (see 16.5) may be
resorted to.
i6.S Load Tesls orl Parts of Structures
16.5.1 Load tests should be carried out as
soon as possrble after expiry of 28 days from
the time of placing of concrete.
16.5.2 The structure should be subjected to a

load equal to full dead load of the structure
plus 1.25 times the imposed load for a period
of 24 hours and then the imposed load shall be
removed.
NOTE -Dead load includes self weight of the structural
members plus weight of finishes and walls or parrrtions. If
any. as consldercd in the design.
16.5.3 The deflection due to imposed load

only shall be recorded. If within 24 hours of
removal of the imposed load, the structure
does not recover at least 75 percent of the
deflection under super-imposed load, the test
may be repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If
the recovery is less than 80 percent, the

structure shall be deemed to be unacceptable.
crrteria shall be agreed upon between the

engineer-in-charge and the contractor and the
test shall be done under expert guidance.
5A(c) GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
17. LOADS AND FORCES
17. I General -- In structural design, account
shall be taken of the dead, live and wind loads
and forces, such as those caused by
earthquake, and effects due to shrinkage,
creep, temperature. etc, where applicable.
17.2 The loads shall conform to those given
in Part VI Structural Design, Section I
Loads. The worst combination and location
of loads shall be considered for design.
171.1 In ordinary buildings, effects due to
temperature fluctuations and shrinkage and
creep can be ignored in the design
calculations.
17.3 Olher Forces and Effects - In addition,
account shall be taken of the following forces
and effects if they are liable to affect
materially the safety and serviceability of the
structure:
a) Foundation movements,
b) Elastic axial shortening,
c) Fatigue, and
d) Stress concentration effect due to point
loads and the like.
17.4 Dead Load Counteracring OIher Loads
and Forces -When dead load counteracts
the effects due to other loads and forces in a
structural member or joint, special care shall
be exercised by the designer to ensure
adequate safety for possible stress reversals.
f7.5 Design Loads - Design load is the load
to be taken for use in the appropriate method
of design; it is thecharacteristic load in case of
working stress method and characteristic load
with appropriate partial safety factors for
limit state design.
18. BASES FOR DFSIGN
16.5.3.1 If. the maximum deflection in mm,

shown during 24 hours under load is less than
40?/ D, where I is the effective span in m and
f3. the overall depth of the section in mm,it is
not necessary for the recovery to be measured
and the recovery provisions of 16.5.3 will not
apply.
18.1 General-Structures and structural

members shall be designed to have at all
sections, strengths at least equal to the
structural effects of design loads and forces
that occur during construction and use as
determined by the relevant method of design.
Structures and structural members shall also
meet all the other requirements of the Code.
16.6 Other non-destructive test methods may

he adopted, in which case the acceptance
18.1.1 T h e d e s i g n s h a l l b e m a d e i n
accordance with the principles of mechanics,
Y,P
recognized methods of design and sound

engineering practice. In particular. adequate
consideration shall be given to the effects of
continuity on the distribution of bending
moments and shears due to monolithic
construction.
18.2 Methods of Design -Structures and
structural elements ma) be designed by any of
the following methods:
a) Limit state method,
b) Working stress method. and
c) Methods based on experimental
investigations.
18.3 I?evign on t-xperimental Basis ~- Where

the design is based on experimental
investigation on full sile structure or element.
load tests shall be carrled out to ensure the
following:
a) The structure shall satisfy the
requirements for deflection (.~PP 22.2) and
cracking (see 34.3.2) when subjected to a
load for 24 hours equal to the
characteristics load multiplied by I .33 71.
where yf shall be taken lrom Table 12. for
the limit state of serviceability. If within
24 hours of the remotal of the load, the
structure does not show a recovery of at
least. 75 percent of the maximum
deflection shown during the 24 hours
under the load, the test loading should be
repeated after a lapse of at least 72 hours.
The recovery after the second test should
be at least 75 percent of the maximum
deflection shown during the second test.
NoIt - If the msxlmum JcHectlon m mm. ahown during
24 hours under load IS lcsa than 40 I-/D. where I is the
efktivt span in m and Dthr overall depth of the scctlon
in mm. it is not nechrary for the recovery to be measured.
b) The structure shall have adequate

strength to sustain for 24 hours, a total
ldad equal to the characteristic load
multiplied by 1.33 yf. where yf shall be
taken from Table I2 for the limit state of
collapse.
19. STABILI IY OI- THE S T R U C T U R E
1Y.I Overturning T h e s t a b i l i t y o f a
structure as a whole against overturning shall
be ensured so that the restoring moment shall
be not less than the sum of I.2 times the
maximum overturning moment due to the
characteristic dead load and I.4 times the
maximum overturning moment due to the
characteristic imposed loads. In cases where
dead load provides the restoring moment,
only 0.9 times the characteristic dead load
Y%Rl
\I
STRITUYAI.
DkXCN
SECTlOB
.r
CONCYETL
shall be considered. Restoring moment due to

imposed loads shall be ignored.
19.1.1 The anchorages or counterweights
provided for overhanging members (during
construction and service) should be such that
static equilibrium should remain, even when
overturning moment is doubled.
19.2 Sliding--The structure shall have a
factor against sliding of not less than I.4 under
the most adverse combination of the applied
characteristic forces. In this case only 0.9
times the characteristic dead load shall be
.
taken into account.
19.3 70 ensure stability at all times, account
shall he taken of probable variations in dead
load during construction, repair or other
temporary measures. Wind and seismic
loading shall be treated as imposed loading.
19.4 In designing the framework of a
building, provisions shall be made by
adequate moment connections or by a system
of bracings to effectively transmit all the
horizontal forces to the foundations.
20. DURABILIIY AND FIRE KESISTANCE
OF THE STRUCTURE
-70. I Duruhility -- In general, compliance
with the requirements regarding cover to the
reinforcement and detailmg in associat,ion
with the durability requirements of concrete
m 7 is intended to meet the durability
requirements of most structures. Adequate
additional precautions shall be taken for
structures in exceptionally severe
environments.
20.2 Fire R e s i s t a n c e - T h e m i n i m u m
requirements for adequate protection against
tire are given in accepted standards [V l-5(2 I )].
21. ANALYSIS
21.1 General.- All structures may be
analysed by the linear elastic theory to
calculate internal actions produced by design
loads. In lieu of rigorous elastic anal sis, a
simplified analysis as given in 21.4 for rrames
and as given in 21.5 for continuous beams may
be adopted.
21.2 Effective Spun -Unless o t h e r w i s e
specified, the effective span of a member shall
be as follows:
S IMPLY S UPPORTED B EAM OR
SLAB -The effective span of a member
that is not built integrally with its
supports shall be taken as clear span plus
the effective depth of slab or beam or
centrc to centre of supports, whichever is
less.
COF;TIKIJOIIS BE A M O R SLAB -In t h e
case of continuous beam or slab, if the
VIP
u ldth 01 the support is less than I ! 12 o!

the clear span, the effective span shall be
25 In 2/.2(a). if the supports are wider
than I : 12 the clear span or 6CN m m
whichever IS less. the effective span.shall
bc taken as under:
1) I.orend 5pan with one end fixed and
or for
the o t h e r cdntinuous
Intcrmedlate spans, the effective span
sh;lll bc the c l e a r s p a n b e t w e e n
supports; and
2) For end span with one end free and the

othqr contlpuou5. the cffeclive s p a n
shall be equal to the clear span plus
hall the cffcctlve depth of the beam or
slab or the clear 5pan plus half the
width 01 the discontinuous support.
whicheve! IS less.
b) When design live load does not exceed

three-fourths of the design dead load, the
load arrangement may be design dead
load and design live !oad on all the spans.
NOIF. ~ For beams and slabs CO~II~UOUS over support
21 4./(a) may be assumed.
2 1 . 4 . 2 S U B S T I T U T E F R A M E -- F o r
determining the moments and shears at any
floor or roof level dtie to gravity loads, the
beams a! the level together with columns
above and below wkh their far ends fixed ma)
be considered to constitute the frame.
21.4.3 For lateral loads. simplified methods
may be used to o&in the moments and shears
for structures that are symmetrical. For
unsymmetrical or very tall structures. more
rigorous methods should be used.
hon
h,.;,r,ng, Ihc ellct~~vc \~a \h.ill alway\ he Ihe OIFIBIIIC
h<3urcn 1111 ctlllrea 111 hemngb
I)
I RAP#lt \
In the analysis of a contlnuou5
iranlc. ccn1rc to ccntre distance shall be
UVXI.
/..!.I Rrl AtIvL SIII-)_N\FCS --The r e l a t i v e

;tlttncss ot the memhrs may be based on the
rrlr>rncnl 01 lncl tia of the section determined
on the basis of any one of the following
ilelinitions:
The gross-section of
the member ignoring reinforcement;
GROSS SFCTlON
TRA~SI:~RMTI)SFC~IO~' -The concrete

cross-section
plus the area of
rclnforcement transformed on the basis
of modular ratio; or
SI;CTION - - T h e a r e a o f
concrete in compression plus the area of
reinforcement transformed on the basis
of modular ratlo.
The assumptions made shall be consistent for
all the members of the structure throughout
any analysis.
CRACKED
2j.3.2 F o r d e f l e c t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n s .
appropriate values of moment of inertia as
specified in Appendix B should be used.
21.4 Structural Frames ~~~ The simplifying
assumpiions as given in 21.4.1 to 21.4.3 may
be used irr the analysis of frames,
2I.d.d
a)
.~XRANCiEMEN r OF UVE L O A D
Consideration may be limited to

combinations of:
I) design dead load an all spans with full
design live load on two adjacent spans;
and
2) desrgn dead load on all spans with fuli
design live load on alternate spans.
~,,_y,
22
21.j.l Unless more exact estimate5 are made,

for beams of uniform cross-scctmn which
support substantially uniformly dlstrlbutedloads over three or more spans which do not
differ by more than I5 percent of the lotigest,
the bending moments and shear forces used in
design may be obtained using the coefficients
given in Table 7 and Table 8, respectively.
For moments at supports where two unequal
spans meet or in case where the spans are not
equally loaded, the average of the two values
ior the negative moment at the support may
be taken for design.
Where coefficients given in Table 7 are used
for calculation of bending moments,
redistribution referred to in 21.7 shall not be
permitted.
--
--I- _.
TABLE 7 BENDING hjOMENT COEFFKIEN-IS

(GRAW fl.S.l)
TVPF OF
LOAD
(1)
Dead load
and imposed
load (fixrd)
S PAN MO~~ENTS
S~IYPORT MOMI \ rs
A
Near
.4l 7G--+-z
Mtddlc
Middle Support
Other
o f E n d o f lnterlor Next IO lntcrmr
Span
Span
the End Supporis
Support
(4)
(3)
(2)
0)
+ir
impossd load
(not
fixed)
+Ib-
t- &
_-I
10
I
+ i7
--I
9
I
-12
NOTE - - F o r obtammg r h e bendmg moment, Ihc

coefflcwnl shall be mulrlphcd by!heroraldeslgn loadand
cffcc~w span.
21.5.2 BE A M S ANI) SL A B S O V E R F R E E E N D
%IPPORlS --Where a member is built into a
WAllONAL BUsLDlNC
CODE OF INDIA
tIW-_L
masonry wall which deveiops on!y partial

restraint, the member shall bc designed to
resist a negative moment at the face of the
support of I+// 24 where W is the total design
load and I is the effective span, or such other
restraining moment as may be shown to bcapplicable. For such a condition, shear
coefficient given in Table 8 at the end support
may be increased by 095.
(ChIAQl?s 21.5.1 mf ZL52)

1YPK <IF
ENU AT WPPOHT
SUPPORT
LOA0
N E X T
1 :Hk f:NI)
S!!PPORT
AT A;I
ChIiIR
Ixl~LRlOR
Gtcr SL:pPoH
II)
(2)
O-4
I)iKi lo:cd
lntl 1m-
Side
0)
Sldc
(4)
(5)
0.6
0.55
O5
O-6
0.6
0.b
po,cJ load
(lixrd)
Imposed I0ad
(nor iiAed)
?I .ti
0.45
lhlL.knqrs of flnishrng maternal n o t p l a c e d

monolirhicdll> with the member and the
thlciinrss of any concrete provided to allow
for ~ear I hl< yill not apply to deep beams.
Crilicul Swrion.~ for Monwnl and Sheor
constructlon, the
moments computed at the face of the supports
shall be used in the design of the members at
those sections. F o r n o n - m o n o l i t h i c
construction the design of the member shail be
done keeping in view 21.2.
2111.l F o r m o n o l i t h i c
21.6.2 CR I T I C A L SECTlhh FOR SHFAK - The shears computed at the face of the
support shall be used m the design of the
member at that section except as in 21.6.2.1.
21.6.2.1 When the reaction in thcdirection of
the applied shear Introduces compression into
the end region ofthe member, sections located
at a distance less than d from thr face of the
support may be designed for the same shear as
that computed at distance ti (MP Fig. t).
.?I.7 Hrdisrrrburion of,%iomenls - Kedlstribution of moments may be done in
accordance with 36./.1 for limit state method
and in accordance with 43.2 for working stress
method. However where simplified analysis
using coefficients is adopted, redistribution of
moments shall not be done.
22. B E A M S
22.0 Effeclive Depth ~- Effective depth of a
beam IS the distance between the centroid of
the area of tension reinforcement and the
maximum compression fibre, excluding the
PART
VI STWCTUDAL. DlBiGN -8sLCllON I CONCEtfL
2,.1.1 (;bNI.K.;\l A slab which IS a s s u m e d

!o ;~ct AS a liange of a I -beam or L:beam shall
sc~i\t~ the folloumg:
a)
lhe slab shall be cast lntegraily with the

web, or the web and the slab shall be
effectively bonded together in any other
manner: and
b)
If the main reinforcement of the s!ab is

parallel t o the b e a m , t r a n s v e r s e
remforcement shail be provided as in
Fig. 2; such reinforcement shall not be
less than 60 percent of the main
reinforcement at mid span of the slab.
2 2 . 1 . 2 E F F E C T I V E W IDTH OF F L A N G E I n
the absence of more accurate determination,
the effective width of flange may be taken as
the following but in no case greater than the
breadth of the web plus half the sum of the
clear distances to the adjacent beams on either
side:
a)
b)
For T-beams, b, = I,: 6 t h, f 6 D,
c)
For isolated beams, the effective flange

width shall be obtained as below but in no
case greater than the actual width:
F . )r 1. -beam<. * hr T- 1, I? ,t h, 1 3 I),
T - b e a m , h,=-(I+-q + b,
/I
5.5 I,
-t- 6,.
(/,,I b)+A
I,-bean;, hr = ---- -.--
\,.P
where
h, = effective width of flange.
I, = distance between points of zero
moments in the beam.
ratios ar.e nbt greater than the values obtained

as below:
a)
Cantilever
Simply supported
Continuous
h, = breadth of the web,

L)r = thickness of flange, and
*h = actual width of the flange.
For spans above IO m, the values in (a)

may be multiplied by 10 span in metres,
except for cantilever in which case
deflection calculations should be made.
Ci
Depending on the area and the type ol

steel for tension reinforcement, the
values in (a) or (b) shall be modified In
accordance with Fig. 3.
conlinuous b e a m s nnd frames. I, ma) bc

assumed as O-7 tames the cfkctivc span
d) Depending on the area of compresslon
reinforcement. the value of span to

depth ratio be further modified in
accordance with FIN. 4.
i.
;
/
--_
XT
L- _---,j _
j
--
2;
26
b)
NorE i-or
Basic values of span to effective depth

ratios for spans up to 10 m:
1
:
e-7X
--;--,I
Cl
For llatged beams. the values of (a) or(b)

he modtIled In accordance with Fig. 5
and the reinforcement percentage for
use in Fig. 3 and 4 should be based on
area of section equal to hr d.
NOIF
culatcd.
used,
when dellrrtwns a r e requlrcd to he calr h c method gwcn m Appcndtx H md) k
22.j Slenderness Llrnrrs for Beomr /o Ensun
The deflection
of a structure or part thereof shall not
adversely affect the appearance or efficiency
of the structure or finishes or partitions. The
deflection shall generally be limitod to the
following:
2 2 . 2 Cunlrol q/ UeJJecticm
a)
The final deflection due to all loads

including the effects of temperature,
creep and shrinkage and measured from
the ascast level of the supports of floors,
roofs and all other horizontal members.
should not normally exceed span/ 250.
b) The deflection including the effects of

temperature, creep and shrinkage
occurring after erection of partitions and
the apphcation of finirhcr should not
normally exceed span/350 or 20 mm
whichever is less.
22.2.1 For beams and slabs, the vertical
deflection limits may generally be assumed to
be satisfied provided that the span to depth
I.24
Lureral Slahrlir)~ ~-- A <Imply supported or

continuous beam shall be so proportloned
that the clear distance between the lateral
restraints does not exceed 60 b or 250 h,d
whichever is less, where tlis the effectivedepth
ofthe beamandhthebreadthofthccompression face midway between the lateral
restraints.
For a cantilever, the clear distance from the
free end of the cantilever to the lateral
restraint shallnot exceed 25 b or 100 h/J
whichever is less.
23. SOLID SLABS

23.1 General - The provisions of 22.2 for
beams apply lo slabs also.
NOTE I - For slabs spanning
in two dtrecttons. the shorter of the two spans should be uad for calculating the
span to effective depth ratios.
NOTE 2 - For two-way slabs of small spans

(up to 3.5 m) with mild steel reinforcement, the span to
overall depth ratios given below may generally be
assumed to satisfy vertical deflection limits for ioadlng
cbtss up to 3 000 N I m f300 kg: m).
Simply supported slabs
Continuous slabs
35.
40
For high slrengIh deformed bars of grade Fe 415, the

valuer given above shot&l be multiplied by 0.8.
23.2 Slabs Conrinuous Over Supports - The

slabs continuous over supports shall be
NATIONAL
WlLDlNG COOt OF IkiblA
MILD. STEEL BARS
0.L
0.6
1.2
l-6
24
2.0
2*9 3.0
PERCENTAGE TENSION REINFORCEMENT
Fix. 3 ModQkarion Faclor for Tensiorl Reinforcement
Fi.g. 4 MotlQicarion Farror_for Compression

Reinfurcemenf
0.7s
designed according to the provisions

applicable to continuous beams.
2 3 . 3 Shahs Monolirhic w i t h Supports Bending moments in slabs (except flat slabs)
constructed monolithically with the supports
shall be caltulated by taking such slabs either
as continuous over supports and capable of
free rotation, or as members of a continuous
framework with the supports. taking into
account the stiffness @f such supports. If such
supports are formed due to beams which
justify fixiry at the support of slabs, then the
effects on the supporting beam, such as the
bending of rhe web in the transverse direction
of the beam and the torsion in the longitudinal
direction of the beam, wherever applicable,
shall also be considered in the design of the
beam.
23.3.1 For the purpose of calculation of
moments in slabs in a monolithic structure, it
FART VI STRI:CTURAL DttlCN -- SCCTlON 5
CONCRETE
0.10
0.1
0.4
0.8
@.a
I.0
RATIO OF WEB WIDTH TO FLANGE WIDTH
Fig. 5 Reducrion Factorsfor Rarios of Span

lo Effective Depth for Flanged Beams
will generally be sufficiently accurate to
assume that members connected to the ends of
such slabs are fixed in position and direction
at the ends remofe from their connections
with the slabs.
23.3.2 S L A B S C A R R Y I N G C ON C E N T R A T E D
LOAD
23.3.2.1 If a solid slab supported on two

opposite edges carries concentrated loads, the
maximum bending moment caused by the
concentrated load shall be assumed to be
resisted by an effective width of slab
Y,.P
(measured parallel to the supportlngedges)as

follows:
u = width of contact area of the

concentrated load measured
parallel to the supporting edge.
Provided that the effective width of the
cantilever llab shall not exceed one-third
the length of the cantilever slab mtisured
parallel to the fixed edge.
a) For a single concentrated load, the

effective width shall be calculated in
accordance with the following equatinn
providqd that it shall not exceed the
actual width of the slab:
&,=kx(I+)+rr
Cl
effrctive width of slab;

constant h;r\ing the values given In
Iahle 9 depending upon the rallo of
Ihe width oL the slab (I) to the
efffzcIi\e span i,,.;
A n d provided f u r t h e r t h a t w h e n t h e
concentrated load is placed near rheextreme
ends of the length of cantilever slab in the
dIrection parallel lo the fixed edge, the
effective width shall not exceed the above
value nor shall it exceed half the above value
plus the distance of the concentrated load
from the extreme end measured In the
dIrectIon parallel (0 the fixed edge.
dist;tncc ol the ccnrrold 01 t h e

concentrated load from n e a r e r
5upport;
cllc~,l~ve \pan. and
(I
b)
width o f t h e tont;tcI arc3 of the

c o n c e n t r a t e d l o a d measured
parsll~l to the supported edge;
And pro\lded turrher that In case of a

load r&r the unsupported edge ol a slab.
the eflectivc width shall nor exceed the
abuvc value nor half the above value plus
t h e d i s t a n c e 01 the load from t h e
unsupported edge.
For two or more concentrated loads
placed in a line in the direction of the
span. the bending moment per meIre
width of slab shall be calculated
separately for each load according IO its
a p p r o p r i a t e effective- width of slzb
calculated as in (a) above and added
together for design calculations.
For,two or more loads not in a line in the
direction ol the span, if the effective
width of slab for one load does not
overlap rhe effective width of slab for
another load, both calculated as in (a)
above, then the slab for each load can be
designed separately. If the effective width
of slab for one load overlaps the efkctive
width of slab for an adjacent load, the
overlapping portion of rhe slab shatl be
designed for the combined effect of the
two loads.
d) For cantilever solid slabs. the effective
width shall be calculated in accordance

with the following equation:
h,: = I .2 01 + u
where
ar =
526
distance ol the concrntratcd load

f r o m t h e lace of the c.antileLcr
support, and
filcc
TABLE Y VALUES OF k FOR SIMPLY

SUPPORTED AND COh7TNUWS SMBS
(C4J.w 23JZ.l)
k F OR S I M P L Y
k F OR COHTISUPPORTtD sl ALE.
NUOUS Sl ABS
0.1
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.8
0.8
b.?
I.16
1.16
0.4
1.48
1.44
0.5
I 72
1.68
0.6
I .96
1.84
0.7
2.12
1.96
0.8
2.24
2.08
0.9
2.36
2.16
I .O and above
2.48
2.24
.?.f.J..?.J For slabs other than solid slabs, the

sflective width shall depend on the ratioofthe
transverse and longitudinal flexural rigidities
oi the slab. Where this ratio is one. that I S,
where the transverseand longitudinal flexural
rigidities are approximately equal, the value
of actice width as found for solid slabs may
be used. Rut as the ratio decreases,
proportionately smaller value shall be taken.
23.3.2.3 Any other recognized method of

analysis fsr cases of slabs covered by 23.32.1
and 23.3.2.2 and for all other cases of slabs
may be used with theapproval 01 the englneerin-charge.
23.3.2.4 The critical section for c h e c k i n g
shear shall be as givrn in 33.2.4./.
23.4 Slabs Spanning in Tnw Directions or
Righr Angles - The ,slabs spanning in two
d!rectlons at right angles and carrying
uniformly distributed load may be deslgned
by any acceptable theory or by using
coefficients given in A p p e n d i x C . F o r
determining bending moments In slabs
spanning In two directions at right angles and
carrying concentrated load, any accepted
NATION,,,_
BLILDING
C O D E
Ot WUIA
method approved by the engineer-in-charge

may be adopted. Ribbed slabs spanning in
two directions at right angles may also be
treated as solid slabs provided that the
spacing of ribs is not more than I? times the
flange thickness.
NOIE The most commonly used elastic methods arc
based on Pigcauds or WestcrganrdS theory and the most
commoniy used limit slate ofcollapse method is based on

Johansens yield-line theory.
extremity of the capital, the drop panel or

slab whichever is the least.
b) in beam and s<ab construction, it shall be
the clear distance between the floor and
the underside of the shallower beam
framing into the columns in each
direction at the next higher floorlevel.
cl
Beams - - The
losds o n b e a m s s u p p o r t i n g s o l i d s l a b s
spanning in two directions at right angles a n d
2J.S Loads on Supportirrg
supporting uniformly distributed loads, may

be assumed to be in accordance with Fig. 6.
in columns restrained laterally by struts.

it shall be the Clear distance between
consecutive struts in each vertical plane,
provided that to be an adequate support,
two such struts shall meet the columns at
approximately the same level and the
angle between vertical planes through the
struts shall not vary more than 30 from a
right angle. Such struts shall be of
adequate dimensions and shall have
sufficient anchorage to restrain the
member against lateral deflection.
d) in columns restrained laterally by struts

or beams, with brackets used at the
junction, it shall be the clear distance
between the floor and the lower edge of
the bracket, provided that the bracket
width equals that of the beam strut and is
at least half that of the column.
24.2 Effective Lengrk of Compression Members - In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective length lcr of columns may be

obtained as described in Appendix D.
24.
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
24.3 Slenderness Limirs for Columns
24. I Dejinirions
24. I. I Column or strut is a compression
member, the effective length of which exceeds
three times the least lateral dimension.
SH O R T
AND S LENDER C O M P R E S S I O N
A compression member may be
corisidered as short when both the slenderness
24.1.2
M EMBERS -
ratios z and z are less than 12;

D
b
24.3.1 The unsupported length between end
restraints shall not exceed 60 times the least

lateral dimension of a column.
24.3.2 If.. in any given plane, one end of a

100 b2
length, I, shall not exceed 7
where
where
width of that cross-section. and

D = depth of the cross-section measured
in the plane under consideration.
b=
1,. = effective length in respect of the

major axis,
D = depth in respect of the major axis,
I,, =
effective length in respect of the

minor ails. and
h = width of the vzmber

It shall otherwise be considered as a slender
compression member.
24.4 Minimum Eccenrricity - AH columns

shall be designed for minimum etxentricity
equal to the u n s u p p o r t e d length of
columni SO0 plus lateral dimenslonl30.
subject 10 a minimum of 20 mm.
24.1.3 UNSUPPORIEPLENG~
25.
betweer end restraints except that:

a) in flat slab construction, it shall be clear
distance bttween the floor and the lower
25 I General - Reinforcing steel of same

type and grade shall be used as main
reinforcement in a structural member.
H - T,he
u n s u p p o r t e d l e n g t h . I , o f a comprewon
member shall be taken as the clear distance
PAllT
V I S T R U C T U R A L DUIGN - SLCTIOH 5
CONCRETE
REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING
REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
W-52
However, simultaneous use of two different

types or grades of .&eel for main and
secondary reinforcement, respectively, is
permissible.
25.1.1 Bars may be arranged singly, or in
pairs in contact, or in groups of three or four
bars bundled in contact. Bundles shall not be
used in a member without stirrups. Bundled
bars shall be tied together to ensure the bars
remaining together. Bars larger than 36 mm
diameter shall not be bundled, except in
columns.
25.1.2 The recommendations for detailing
for earthquake-resistant construction given
in [VI-5(22)] should be taken into consideration, where applicable.
25.2 Development of Stress in Reinforcement - T h e c a l c u l a t e d t e n s i o n o r
compression in any bar at any section shall be
developed on each side of the section by an
appropriate development lenith or end
anchorage or by a combination thereof.
25.2.1 DE V E L O P M E N T LENGI-H O F
BARS - The development length Ld is .given
by:
p$
bd
where
C$ = nominal diameter of the bar,
us = stress in bar at the section considered
at design load, and
7~ = design bond stress given in25.2.1.1.
NOTE I - The development length includes anchorage
values of hooks in tension reinforcement.
NOTE 2 - For bars of secnons other than circular, the
development length should be sufficient IO develop the
stress In the bar by bond.
25.2.1.1 Design bond .stress in limit state

method for plain bars in tension shall be as
below:
Grade of
Concrete
M
M
M
M
M
M
15
20
2.5
30
35
40
Design bbnd
Stress. Tbd,
N/mm*
I.0
l-2
;:;
I.7
1.9
For deformed bars conforming fo [VI-5( I I)],

these values shall be increased by 60 percent.
For bar in compression, the values of bond
stress for bars in tension shall be increased by
25 percent.
The values of bond stress in working stress

design, are given in 44.1.
25.2.1.2 B A R S B U N D L E D I N C O N T A C T - T h e
development length of each bar of bundled
bars shall be that for the individual bar,
increased by IO percent for two bars in
contact, 20 percent for three bars in contact
and 33 percent for four bars in contact.
25.2.2 ANCHORING REINFORCING BARS

25.2.2.1 ANCHORING BARS IN TENSION
a) Deformed bars may be used without end
anchorages provided development length
requirement is satisfied. Hooks should
normally be provided for plain bars in
tension.
b) LENDS AND HOOKS - Bends and hooks
shall conform to good practice
[VI-5(18)]:
I) B EN DS -The anchorage value of
bend shall be taken as 4 times the
diameter of the bar for each4Y bend
subject to a maximum of 16 times the
diameter of the bar.
2) HOOKS -The anchorage value of a
standard U-type hook shall be equal to
16 times the diameter of the bar.
25.2.2.2 ANCHORING BARS I& COMPRESSION - The anchorage length of straight bar
in compression shall be equal to the
development length of bars in compression as
specified in 25.2.1. The projected length of
hooks, bends and straight length beyond
bends. if provided for a bar in compression,
shall be considered for development length.
25.2.2.3
M E C H A N I C A L DEVlCES F O R
ANCHORAGE - Any mechanical or other
device capable of developing the strength of

the bar without damage to concrete may be
used as anchorage with the approval of the
engineer-in-charge.
2J _._.
4 ASCHORINC SHEAK REINFOKCEMENT
The development
length shall be as for bars in tension; this
length shall be measured as under:
I) In tension zone, from the end of the
sloping or inclined portion of the bar,
and
2) In the compression zone, from the
mid depth of the beam.
b) SllRRllPS - NotwithstandIng any of
the provisions of this standard, in case of
secondary reinforcement, such as stirrups
a n d t r a n s v e r s e t i e s , complete
development lengths and anchorage shall
be deemed to have been provided when
the bar is bent through an angle of at least
a)
ISCLINED BARS -
90 round a bar of at least its own

diameters and is continued beyond the
end of the curve for a length of at least
eight diameters, or when the bar is bent
through an angle of 135 and is continued
beyond the end of the curve for a length
of at least six bar diameters or when the
bar.is bent through an angle of 180 and
is continued beyond the end of the curve
for a length of at least four bar diameters.
25.2.2.5 BEARING S T R E S S E S A T B E N D S - T h e
bearing stress in concrete for bends and hooks
described in [VI-X18)] riced not be checked.
The bearing stress inside a bend in any other
bend shall be calculated as given below:
BeaGng stress =+
where
& = tensile force due to design loads in a
bar or group of bars;
r= internal radius of the bend; and
cb = size of the bar or, in bundle, the size
of bar of equivalent area.
For limit state method of design,this stress
1.5&k
where j& is the

1+24/o
characteristic strength of concrete and u, for a
particular bar or group of bars in contact shall
be taken as the centre to centre distance
between bars or groups of bars perpendicular
to the plane of the bend; for a bar or group of
bars adjacent to the face of the memberu shall
be taken as the cover plus size of bar(9). For
working stress method of design, the bearing
shall not exceed
stress shall not exceed

25.2.2.6 If a change in direction of tension or
compression reinforcement induces a resultant
force acting outward tending to split the
concrete, such force should be taken up by
additional links or stirrups. Bent tension bar
at a reentrant angle should be avoided,
25.2.3 C URTAILMENT
OF T E N S I O N
REINFORCEMENTINFLEXURALMEMBERS
25.2.3.1 For curtailment, reinforcement shall
extend beyond the point at which it is no

longer required to resist flexure for a distance
equal to the effective depth of the member or
12 times the bar diameter, whichever is
greater except at simple support or end of
cantilever. In addition requirements of
25.2.3.2 to 25.2.3.5 shall also be satisfied.
Nom - A point at which rcinforccmcnt is no longer
rkquirrd to resist flcxun is where the resistance momcnl
of the section. considering only the rontinuing bars, is
equal to the design moment.
PART
VI
STltUCTlJUL DCBICN -8tKllON
S CONCULTS
25.2.3.2 Flexural reinforcement shall not be

terminated in a tension zone unless any one of
the following conditions is satisfied:
4 The shear at the cut-off point does not
exceed two-thirds that permitted,
including the shear strength of web reinforcement provided.
b) Stirrup area in excess of that required
for shear and torsion is provided along
each terminated bar over a distance
from the cut-off point equal to threefourths the effective depth of the
member. The excess stirrup area shall be
not less than O-4 b slfy, where b is the
breadth of beam, s is the spacing andfY is
the characteristic strength of reinforcement in N/mm*. The resulting spacing
shall not exceed d/8 Bb where Et, is the
ratio of the area of bars cut-off to the
total area of bars at the section, and d is
the effective depth.
Cl For 36 mm and smaller bars. the continuing bars drovide double the area
required for flexure at the cut-off point
and the shear does not exceed threefourths that permitted.
25.2J.3 POSITIVE MOMENT REINFORCEMENT
a) At least one-third of the positive moment
reinforcement in simple members and
one-fourth of the positive moment
reinforcement in continuous members
shall extend along the same face of the
member into the support, to a length
equal to Ld/3.
b) When a flexural member is part of the
primary lateral load resisting system, the
positive reinforcement required to be
extended into the support as described in
(a) shall be anchored to develop its design
stress in tension at the face of the support.
At
simple supports and at points of
cl
inflection, positive moment tension
reinforcement shall be limited to a
diameter such that Ld computed for/d
by 25.2.1 does not exceed
Ml
7 +Ll
where
M, = moment of resistance of the
section assuming all reinforcement
at the section to be stressed to fd;
0.87
fy in the case of limit state
/a=
design and the permissible stress
C,~ in the case of working stress
design;
v = shear force at the section due to
design loads;
L= sum of th anchorage beyond the
centre o! the support and the
YIP
e+ivaient anchorage value of any

hook or mechanical anchorage at
simple support; and at a point of
inflection, S, is limited to the
effective depth of the members or
I2 4, whichever is greater; and
b) Lap splices shall be considered as
staggered if the centre to centre distance

of the splices is not less than I.3 times the
lap length calculated as described in (c).
cl
4 = diameter of bar.
The value of MI/ Y in the above expression
may be increased of by 30 percent when the
ends of the reinforcement are confined by a
compressive reaction.
25.2.3.4 NEGATIVE MOMENT REINFORCEMENr -. At least one-third of the total
reinforcement provided for negative moment
at the support shall extend beyond the point
of inflection for a distance no: less than the
effective depth of the member or I2 4 or onesixteenth of the clear span whichever is
greater.
25.2.3.5 ClJi$TAILMENT O F B U N D L E D
BARS - Bars in-a bundle shall terminate at
dilterent points spaced apart by not less than
40 times the bar diameter except for bundles
slopping at a support.
25.2.4 SPECIAI ME MB ER S - Adequate end
anchorage shall be provided for tension
reinforcement in fiexural members where
reinforcement stress is not directly
proportional to moment. such as sloped,
stepped, or tapered footings; brackets; deep
beams: and members in which the tension
reinforcement is not parallel to the
comptession face.
25.2.5 REINFORCEMENT S PLICING - Where
splices are provided in the reinforcing bars,
they shall as far as possible be away from the
sections of maximum stress and be staggered.
it is recommended that splices in flexurai
members should not be at sections where the
bending moment is more than 50 percent of
the moment of resistance; and not more than
half the bars shall be spliced at a section.
Where more than one-half of the bars are
spliced at a section or where splices are made
at points of maximum stress, special
precautionh shall be taken, such as increasing
the length of lap and,or using spirals or
closely spaced stirrups around the length of
the splice
25.2.5.1 LAP
a)
m.icm
Lap splices shall not be used for bars

larger than 36 mm; for larger diameters,
bars may be welded (see 11.1); in cases
where welding is not practicable. lapping
of bars i a r p r than 36 mm may be
permitted, m which case additlonai
spirals should be provided around the
lapped bars.
Lap length including anchorage value of

hooks in flexurai tension shall be Ld (see
25.2.l) or 30 b whichever is greater and
for direct tension 2 Ld or 30 &whichever is
greater. The straight length of the lap
\hlrll noI he lets than 15 r$ or 20 cm,
where
f.d IS the development length as described
in 25.2. I for/d.
NOTF - S p l i c e s i n tcnuon members s h a l l bc
epcloscd m spirals made of bars nor Ierr than 6 mm
diameter with pitch not more Man 100 mm. Hooks
shall bc provided at the ends of bars in terwon
tncmbcrs.
d)
The lap length in compression shall be

equal .to the development length in
compression, calculated as described in
25.2.1, but not less than 24 4.
When bars of two different diameters are

to be spliced. the lap length s&an be
calculated on the basis of diameter of the
smaller bar.
When splicing of welded wire fabric is to

be carried out, lap splices of wires shall be
made so that overlap measured between
the extreme cross wires shall be not less
than the spacingofcross wires plus 10 cm.
B)
in case of bundled bars, iapped splices of

bundled bars shall be made by splicing
one bar at a time: such individual snlices
within a bundle ihail be staggered.
25.2.5.2 WELDEDSPLICES AND MECHANICAL

design strength of a
welded splice (see 11.4) or mechanical
connections shall be taken as equal ta 80
percent of the design strength of the bar for
tension splices and 100 percent of the design
strength for compression spi/ces. However,
100 percent of the design strength may be
assumed in tension when the spliced area
forms not more than 20 percent of the total
area of steel at the section and the splices arc
staggered at least 60 cm.
(ONNECTIONS -The
End
25.2.5.3 E N D - B E A R I N G S P L I C E S
bearing splices shall be used only for bars in
compression. The ends of the bars shall be
square cut arid concentric bearing ensured by
suitable devices.
25.3 Spacing o/ Reinforcement
25.3.0 For the purpose of this clause. the
diameter of a round bar shall be its nominal
diameter, and in the case of bars which are not
round or in the case of deformed bars or
irinlped harS. the diameter shall be taken as
the diameter of a circle giving an equivalent

effective area. Where spacing limitations and
minimum concrete cover (see 25.4) are based
on bar diameter, a group of bars bundledin
effective depth of a solid slab or 450

mm whichever is smaller
The
horizontal distance between
4
parallel reinforcement bars provided
against shrinkage and temperature
shall not be more than five trmes the
effective depth of a solid slab or 450
mm whichever is smaller.
contact shall be treated as a single bar of

diameter derived from thr: total equivalent
3rea.
25.3.1 MI N I M U M D I S T A N C E B E T W E E N
I N D I V I D U A L B ARS -The following shall
apply for spacing of bars:

4 The horizontal distance between two
parallel main reinforcing bars shall
usually be not less than the greatest of the
following:
I) The diameter of the bar if the diameters are equal,
2) The diameter of the larger bar if the
diameters are unequal, and
3) 5 mm more than the nominalmaximum size of coarse aggregate.
NOTE - This does not preclude the use of larger size
of aggregdtcs beyond the congested reinforcement
in the same member; the size of aggregates may be
reduced around congcrtcd rcmforccmcnt to comply
with this provision.
b) Greater horizontal distance than the
minimum specified in (a) should be

provided wherever possible. However
when needle vibrators are used the
horizontal distance between bars of a
group may be reduced to two-thirds the
nommal maximum size of the coarse
aggregate, provided that sufficient space
is left between grou@ of bars to enable
the vibrator to be immersed.
c) Where there are two or more rows of bars,
the bars shall be vertically in line and the
minimum vertical distance between the
bars shall be 15 mm, two-thirds the
nominal maximum size of aggregate or
the maximum size of bar, whichever is the
greatest.
2 5 . 3 . 2 M A X I M U M D I ST A N C E B E T W E E N
B ARS IN T ENSION - Unless thecalculation of
crack widths shows that a greater spacing is
acceptable. the following rules shall be
applied to flexural members in normal
internal or external conditions of exposure.
a) B E A M S - The horizontal distance
between parallel reinforcement bars, or
groups, near the tension face of a beam
shall not be greater than the value given in
Table 10 depending on the amount of
redistribution carried out in analysis and
the characteristic strength of the
reinforcement.
b) SLABS
I) The horizontal distance between
parallel main reinforcement bars shall
not be more than three times t.!re
TABLE 10 CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN BARS

(Churf 25.3.I)
P E R C E N T A G E RIGISTRIBUTION TO
%XllON ~ONSIDCRED
OR
FR O M
--
h
N
250
415
500
N OTE -The spacings given in the tabk arc not
applica,ble t? members subjected to particularly
aggrcrslvc cnvlronmcnrs unless in the calculation of tnc
moment of resistance./, has been limited to MO N I mm in
limit state design and o,, limited
stress design.
IO
165 N/mmin working
M.4 Cover to Reinforcement

25.4.1 Reinforcement shall have concrete
cover and the thickness of such cover
(exclusive of plaster or other decorative
finish) shall be as follows:
a) At each end uf reinforcing bar not less
than 25 mm, nor less than twice the
diameter of such bar;
b) For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a
column, not less than 40 mm, nor less
than the diameter of such bar. Inthe case
of columns of minimum dimension of200
mm or under, whose reinforcing bars do
not exceed 12 mm, a cover of25 mm may
be used;
c) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in a
beam, not less than 2.5 mm, noi less than
the diameter of such bar;
d) For tensile, compressive, shear, or other
reinforcement in a slab, not less than15
mm, nor less than the diameter of such
bar; and
e) For any other reinforcement, not leers
than I5 mm, nor less than the diameter of
such bar.
2.5.4.2 Increased cover thickness may be
provided when surfaces of concrete members
are exposed to the action of harmful
chemicals (as in the ease of concrete in contact
with earth faces contaminated with such
chemicals), acid, vapour, saline atmosphere,
sulphurous smoke (as in the case of steam

operated railways), etc. and such increase of
cover may be between 15 mm and 50 mm
beyond the figures given in 25.4.1 asmay be
specified by the engineer-in-charge.
such reinforcement shall be not less than 0.1

percent of the web area and shall be
distributed equally on two faces at a spacing
not exceeding 300 mm or web thickness
whichever is less.
25.4.2.1 For reinforced concrete members

totally immersed in sea water, the.cover shall
be 40 mm more than that specified in25.4.1.
25.5.1.4
25.4.2.2 For reinforced concrete members,

periodically immersed in sea water or subject
to sea spray, the cover of concrete shall be
50 mm more than that specified in 25.4.1.
25.4.2.3 For concrete of grade M 25 and
above, the additional thickness of cover
specified in 25.4.2 to 25.4.2.2 may be reduced
to half.
25.4.2.4 In all such cases, the cover should
not exceed 75 mm.
25.5 Requiremenrs of Reinforcement for
Sirucrural Members
25.5.1.5 MAXIMUM SPACING OFSHEAR REINFORCEMENT - The maximum spacing of

shear reinforcement measured along the axis
of the member shall not exceed 0.75 d for
vertical stirrups and d for inclined stirrups at
45O. where d is the effective depth of the
section uuder consideration. In no case shall
the spacing exceed 450 mm.
2.5.5.1.6 MINIMUM SHEAR REINFORCEMENT - Minimum shear reinforcement in the
25.5.1.1 TENSION REINFORCEMENT

MINIMUM
REINFORCEMENT
_$+A
- T h e
minimum area of tension reinforcement

shall not be less than that given by the
following:
0.85
I;;i=i,
A,
where
area
of tension
minimum
reinforcement.
b = breadth of the beam or the breadth
of the web of T-beam,
effective depth, and
characteristic s t r e n g t h o f
reinforcement in N / mm2.
A, =
b)
FOR
form of stirrups shall be provided such that:
?5.5.1 BE A M S
a)
TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT IN
SHEAR AND TORSION - T h e

transverse reinforcement in beams shall be
taken around the outer-most tension and
compression bars. In T-beams, and l-beams
such reinforcement shall pass around
longitudinal bars located close to the outer
face of the flange.
BEAMS
R E I N F O R C E ME N T - T h e
maximum area of tension reinforcement
shall not exceed 0.04 bD.
MAXIMUM
25.5.1.2 COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT The maximum area of corn ression

reinforcement shall not exceed B.04 bD.
Compression reinforcement in beams shall be
enclosed by stirrups for effective lateral
restraint. The arrangement of stirrups shall be
as specified in 25.5.3.2.
25.5.1.3 SIDE FACE REINFORCEMENT Where the de th of the web in a beam exceeds
750 mm, si(Pe face reinforcement shall be
provided along the two faas. The total area of
.h
where
Aw = total cross-sectional area of stirrup
legs effective in shear,

S = stirrup spacing along the length of
the member,
h= breadth of the beam or breadth of
the web of flanged beam, and
h= characteristic strength of the stirrup
reinforcement in N/mm which
shall not be taken greater than 415
N/mm.
However, in members of minor structural
importance such as lintels, or where the
maximum shear stress calculated is less than
half the permissible value, this provision need
not be complied with.
25.5.1.7 DISTRIBUTION OF TORSION REIN-
FORCEMENT -When a member is designed

for torsion (see 40 or 48). t o r s i o n
reinforcement shall be provided as below:
a) The transverse .reinforcement for torsion
shall be rectangular closed stirrups placed
perpendicular to the axis of the member.
The spacing of the stirrups shalJ not
x1 +yt
exceed the least of: X I, and
4
%KI mm, where XI and ye are respectively,
the short and long dimensions of the
stirrup.
b)
Longitudinal reinforcement shall be

placed as close. as is practicable to the
corners of the cross-section and in all
cases, there shall be at least one
longitudinal bar in each corner of the ties.
When the cross-sectional dimension of
the member exceeds 450 mm, additional
longitudinal bars shall be provided to
satisfy the requirements of minimum
reinforcement and spacing given in
25.5.1.3.
25.5.1.8 Reinforcement in flanges of Tand L

beams
shall satisfy the requirements
in 22.1.1(b). Where flanges are in tension, a
part of the main tension reinforcement shall
be distributed over the effective flange width
or a width equal to one-tenth of the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange
width exceeds one-tenth of the span, nominal
longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided
in the outer portions of the flange.
2-5.5.2 SLABS --The rules given in 25.5.2. I
and 25.5.2.2 shall apply to slabs in addition to
those given in the appropriate clauses.
e)
A reinforced concrete column having

helical reinforcement shall have at least
six bars of longitudinal reinforcement
within the helical reinforcement.
In a helically reinforced column, the

longitudinal bars shall be in contact with
the helical reinforcement and equidistant
around its inner circumference.
&?I
Spacing of longitudinal bars measured

along the periphery of the column shall
not exceed 300 mm.
h)
In case of pedestals in which the

longitudinal reinforcement is not taken
into account in strength calculations,
nominal longitudinal reinforcement not
less than 0. IS percent of the crosssectional area shall be provided.
NOTE Pedestal is a compresslon member. the
rffcctlvc length of which does not exceed three times
the least lateral dlmenslon.
25.5.3.2
a)
25.5.2.1 M I N I M U M R E I N F O R C E M E N T - T h e
reinforcement in either direction in slabs shall
not be less than 0. I5 percent of the total crosssectional area. However, this value can be
reduced to 0.12 percent when high strength
deformed bars or welded wire fabric are used,
2 . 5 . 5 . 2 . 2 M AX I M U M D I A M E T E R - - - T h e
diameter of reinforcing bars shall not exceed
one eighth of the total thickness of the slab.
25.5.3 C O L U M N S
2.5.5.3.1
b)
LONGITUDINAL
REIN170RCEMENT
a) The cross-sectional area of longitudinal
----A r e i n f o r c e d c o n c r e t e
compression member shall have
transverse or helical reinforcement so
disposed that every longitudinal bar
nearest to the compression face has
effective lateral support against buckling
sub,ject to provisions in (b). The effective
lateral support is given by transverse
reinforcement either in the form of
circular rings capable of taking up
circumferential tension or by polygonal
links (lateral ties) with internal angles not
e x c e e d i n g 135. The ends of the
transverse reinforcement shall be
properly anchored [sea 25.2.2.4 (b)]
ARRANGEMENT
FORCEMEN I
C) The minimum number uf longitudinal

bars provided in a column shall be four in
rectangular columns and six in circular
columns.
d) The bars shall not be less than I2 mm in
diameter.
PART W STPI;CTUPAL
DESIGN - SECTION 5 CONCRETE
T R A N S V F R S E REIN-
If the longitudinal bars are not spaced

more than 75 mm on either side,
transverse reinforcement need only to
go round corner and alternate bars for
the purpose of providing effective
lateral supports (see Fig. 7).
2)
If the longitudinal bars spaced at a

distance of not exceeding 48 times the
diameter of the tie are effectively tied
in t w o d i r e c t i o n s , a d d i t i o n a l
longitudinal bars in between these bars
need to be tied in one direction by open
ties (see Fig. 8).
N OTE -The use of 6
b) In any column that has a larger crosssectional area than that required to
support the load. ths minimum
percentage of steel shall be based upon
the area of concrete required to resist the
direct stress and not upon theactual area.
OF
1)
reinforcement, shall be not less than 0.8

percent nor more than 6 percent OT the
gross cross-sectional area of the column.
ercent :einlbrcemcnt may

in
placing
and
rnvolvc practical dl?ftcult~es
compacting of concrete; hence lower percentap IS
recommended. Where bars from (he columns below
have IO be lapped with those m the column under
consideration. the percentage of steel shall usually
not exceed 4 percent.
TRANSVERSE. REINFORCEMtNl
GENERAL
3) Where the longitudinal reinforcing

bars in a compression member are
placed in more than one row, effective
lateral support to the longitudinal bars
in the inner rows may be assumed to
have been provided if:
i) transverse reinforcement is
0.9444 0 for the outer-most row in
accordance with 25.5.3.2, and
VI-J 33
ii) no bar of the inner row is closer to

the nearest compression face than
three times the diameter of
the largest bar in the inner row (sep
Fig. 9).
4) Where the Longitudinal bars in a
compression member are grouped (not
in contact) and each group adequately
tied with transverse reinforcement in
accordance with 25.5.3.2; the
transverse reinforcement for the
compression member as a whole may
be provided on the assumption that
each group is a single longitudinal bar
for purpose of determining the pitch
and diameter of the transverse
reinforcement in accordance with
25.5.3.2. The diameter of such
transverse reinforcement need not,
however. exceed 20 mm (see Fig. 10).
c) PITCH
2)
DIAMETER -The
diameter of
the polygonal links or lateral ties shall
be not less than one-fourth of the
diameter of the largest longitudinal
bar. and in no case less than 5 mm.
d) HELICAL
1)
2)
D I A M E T E R -The diameter of the

helical reinforcement shall. be in
accordance with 25.5.3.2(c) (2).
reinforcement shall
be of regular formation with the turns
of the helix spaced evenly and its ends
shall be anchored properly by
providing one and a half extra turns of
the spiral bar. Where an increased load
on the column on the strength of the
helical reinforcement is allowed for,
the pitch of helical turns shall be not
more than 75 mm, nor more than
one-sixth of the core diameter of the
column, nor less than 25 mm, nor less
than three times the diameter of the
steel bar forming the helix. In other
cases, the requirements of 2.5.5.3.2
AND DIAMETER OF LATERAL 1 IES
-The pitch of transverse

reinforcement shall be not more than
the least of the following distances:
9 The least lateral dimension of the
compression member;
ii) Sixteen times the smallest
diameter of the longitudinal
reinforcement bar to be tied;
iii) Fortyeight times the diameter of the
transverse reinforcement.
REINFORCEMENT
PITCH -Helical
1) PITCH
25.5.3.3 In columns where longitudinal bars

are offset at a splice, the slope of the &lined
portion of the bar with the axis of the column
shall not exceed I in 6, and the portions of the
Fig. 8
Fig. 7
I
Fig. 9
w.24
Fig. IO
NATIONAL lUlLDING CODE
OF
INDIA
bar above and below the offset shall be

parallel to the axis of the column. Adequate
horizontal support at the offset bends shall be
treated as a matter of design, and shall be
provided by metal ties, spirals, or parts of the
floor construction. Metal ties or spirals so
designed shall be placed near (not more than
eight-bar diameters from) the point of bend.
The horizontal thrust to be resisted shall be
assumed as 1 t times the horizontal
components of the nominal stress in the
inclined portion of the bar. Offset bars shall
be bent before they are placed in the forms.
Where co!umn faces are offset 75 mm or
more, splices of vertical bars adjacent to the
offset face shall be made by separate dowels
overlapped as specified in 25.2.5.1.
?6.
EXPANSION JOINTS
26.1 In view of the large number of factors

involved in deciding the location, spacingarrd
nature of expansion joints, the provision of
expansion joint in reinforced cement concrete
structures should be left to the discretion of
the designer.
26.2 Structures in which marked changes in
plan dimensions take place abruptly shall be
provided with expansion joints at the section
where such changes occur. Expansion joints
shall be so provided that the necessary
movement occurs with a minimum resistance
at the joint. The structures adjacent to the
joint should preferably be supported on
separate columns or walls but not necessarily
on separate foundations. Reinforcement shall
not extend across an expansion joint and the
break between the sections shall be complete.
26.3 The details as to the length ofa structure
where expansion joints have to be provided
can be determined after taking into
consideration various factors, such as
temperature, exposure to weather, the time
and season of the laying of the concrete, etc.
For the purpose of general guidance,
however, it is recommended that structures
exceeding 45 m in length shall be divided by
one or more expansion joints.
S E C T I O N 5A(d) SPECIAL D E S I G N
REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
27. GENERAL
27.1 This part covers special d e s i g n
requirements for some structural members
and syrtems in addition to those given in
PART V l slDtJCWIAL
DZSICN- ~EClWW I CDNcRITI
Sections 5A(c), 5A(e) and 5A(f), except where

modified.
28. DEEP BEAMS
28. I General
a) A beam shall be deemed to be a deep
beam when the ratio of effective span to
overall depth, l/D is iess than:
I) 2.0 for a simply supported beam; and
2) 2.5.for a continuous beam.
b) A deep beam complying with the
requirements of 28.2 and 28.3 shall be
deemed to satisfy the provisions for shear.
28.2 Lever Arm -The lever armz for a deep
beam shall be determineIf as below:
a) For simply supported beams:
z = 0.2 (I + 20) when 1 < $
or
I = 0.6 I
qhcn
b) For continuous beams:

I = 0.2 (I+ 1.5D) when I Q + G 2.5
or
z = 0.5 I
when
where I is the effective span taken as centre to

centre distance between supports or1.15 times
the clear span, whichever IL smaller, and D is
the overall depth.
28.3 Reinforcement
28.3.1 POSITIVE R EINFORCEMENT -The
tensile reinforcement required to rcaist
positive bending moment m any span of a
deep beam shall:
4 extend without curtailment between
supports;
W be embedded beyond the faa of each
support, so that at the face of support it
shall have a development length not less
than 0.8 Ld; where 4 is the development
length (see 25.2.1), for the design stress in
the reinforament;
4 be placed within a zone of dcpthequal to
0.25 D - 0.05 ladjacent to the tensionfaa
of the beam where D is the overall depth
and I is the effective span.
VI-25
28.3.2 NEGATIVE
R EINFORCEM E N T
l-ERMINATION OF REINFORCEMENTFor tensile reinforcement required to

resist negative bending moment over a
support of a deep beam:
It shall be permissible to terminate not
more than half of the reinforcement at
a distance of 0.5 D from the face of the
support where D is as defined in 28.2;
and
The remainder shall extend over the
full span.
b) DISTRIBUTION -When ratio of clear
span to overall depth is in the range I.0
to 2,5, tensile reinforcement over a
support of a deep beam shall be placed in
two 7ones comprising:
I) a 7one of depth 0.2 D. adjacent to the
tension face, which shall cont-iin a
proportion of the tension steel given by
0.5(
$ - 0.5)
where
I = clear span, and
I) = overall depth; and
a Tone measuring 0.3 D on either side
of the mid-depth of the beam, which
shall contain the remainder of the
tension steel, evenly distributed.
For span to depth ratios less than
umty, the steel shall be even11
distributed over a depth of 0.X n
meausred from the tension face.
28.3.3 V ERTICAL REINFORCEMEN.~ -If
forces are applied to a deep beam in such a
way that hanging action is required, bars or
suspension stirrups shall be provided to carry
all the forces concerned.
28.3.4 SIDE FACE RHNFORCEMFN-I .-Side
face reinforcement shall comply with
requirements of minimum reinforcement of
walls (see 31.4).
29. RIBBED. HOI_LOW BLOCK OR
VOIDED SLAB
2 9 . 1 GPnerol-This covers the slabs
constructed in one of the ways described
below:
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping
completed structure; the top of the ribs

may be connected by a topping of
concrete of the same strength as that used
in the ribs; and
cl With a continuous top and bottom face
but containing voids of rectangular, oval
or other shape.
29.2 Analysis of Structure --The moments
and forces due to design loads on continuous
slabs may be obtained by the methods given in
Section 3 for,solid slabs. Alternatively, the
slabs may be designed as a series of simply
supported spans provided they are not
exposed to weather or corros\ve conditions:
wide cracks may develop at the supports and
the engineer shall satisfy himself that these
will not impair finishes or lead to corrosion01
the reinforcement.
29.3 .Shrar ~~- Where hollow blocks are used,
for the purpose of calculating shear stress, the
rib width-may be increased to take account of
the wall thickness of the block on one side of
the rib; with narrow precast uqlts, the width of
the jointing mortar or concrete may be
included.
29.4 DeJeclion --The recommendations for
deflection in respect of solid slabs may be
applied to ribbed, hollow block or voided
construction. The span to effective depth
ratios given in 22.2 for a flanged beam are
applicable but when calculating the final
reduction factor for web width, the rib wtdth
for hollow block slabs may be assumed to
include the walls of the blocks on both sides of
the rib. For voided slabs and slabs constructed
of box or I-section units, an effective rib width
shall be calculated assuming all material
below the upper flange of the unit to be
concentrated in a rectangular rib having the
same cross-sectiona area and depth.
29.5 Size and Posirion of Ribs - In-silu ribs
shall be not less than 65 mm wide. They shall
be spaced at centres not greater than I .5 m
apart and their depth, excluding any topping,
shall be not more than four times their width.
Generally ribs shall be formed along each edge
parallel to the span of one way slabs. When
the edge is built into a wall or rests on a beam,
a rib at least as wide as the bearing shall be
formed along the edge.
cast on forms which may be removed

after the concrete has set;
29.6 Hollow Blocks and Formers - Blocks

and formers may be of any suitable material.
Hollow clay tiles for the filler type shall
conform to accepted standards [VI-5(23)].
When required to contribute to the structural
sttength of a slab they shall:
b) As a series of concrete ribs between

precast blocks which remain part of the
a) be made of concrete or burnt clay; and
w4.36
NATIONAL
IUILDINC CODE O F I N D I A
b) have a crushing strength of at least 14
and hollow clay filler blocks shall conform to

accepted standards [VI-5(23)].
N/mm measured on the net section

when axially loaded in the direction of
compressive stress in the slab.
30. FLAT SLABS

29.7 Arrangement of Reinforcement - The
recommendations given in 25.3 regarding
maximum distance ,between bars apply to
areas of solid concrete in this form of
construction. The curtailment, anchorage
and cover to reinforcement shall be as
described below:
4 At least 50 percent of the totai main
reinforcement shall be carried through at
the bottom on to the bearing and
anchored in accordance with 25.2.3.3.
b) Where a slab, which is continuous over
supports, has been designed as simply
supported, reinforcement shall be
provided over the support to, control
cracking. This reinforcement shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than onequarter of that required in the middle of
the adjoining spans and shall extend at
least one-tenth of the clear span into
adjoining spans.
4 In slabs with permanent blocks, the side
cover to the reinforcement shall not be
less than IO mm. In all other cases, cover
shall be provided according to 25.4.
29.8 The construction with precast joists and
hollow concrete filler blocks and precast joist
JO. I Getieral :The term flat slab means a

reinforced concrete slab. with or without
drops, supported generally without beams, by
columns with or without flared column heads
(see Fig. I I). A flat slab may be solid slab or
may have recesses formed on the soffit so that
the soffit comprises a series of ribs in two
directions. The recesses may be formed by
removable or permanent filler blocks.
30.1.) For the purpose of this clause, the
following definitions shall apply:
a) COLUMN STRIP --column strip means a
design strip having a width of 0.25 12, but
not greater than 0.25 II on each side oft he
column centre-line, where II is the span in
the direction moments are being
determined, measured centre to centre of
supports and 12 is the sp_an transverse to I,.
measured centre to centre of supports.
b) MUDDLE STRIP -Middle strip means a
design strip bounded on each of its
opposite sides by the column strip.
c) PANEL -Panel means that part of a slab
bounded on each of its four sides by the
centre-line of a column or centre-lines of
adjacent spans.
CRITICAL SECTlOh FOR
SHEAR IMMEDI A T EL Y
CRITIC AL SECTION
I A SlabWithout Dropand Column

WithoutColumn Head
CRITICAL SECTION
FOR SHKAR
IB Slab withDrop andColumn withColumnHead
ANY CONCRETE IN THIS AREA TO BE NEGLECTED IN THE

-K-- C A L C U L A T I O N S
-L--d,/
NOTE - D. is the diameter of column or column head to

be considered for design and the d is effective depth of
slab or drop as appropriate.
I IC SlabWithout Drop and Column with column Head
Fig. I I Critical Sections for Shear in Flat Slabs

?MT Vt 8TRUcrulAL
DESIGN
- SLCllOW 3 CONCRETE
I-f
37
30.2 Proporriening
T HICKNESS OF F LAT S LAB - T h e

thickness of the flat slab shall be generally
controlled by considerations of span of
effective depth ratios given in 22.2.
30.2.1
For slabs with drops conforming to 30.2.2,

span to effective depth ratios given in 22.2
shall be applied directly; otherwise the span to
effective depth ratios obtained in accordance
with provisions in 22.2 shall be multiplied by
0.9. For this purpose, the longer span shall be
considered. The minimum thickness of slab
shall be I2S mm.
load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads

cause transfer of bending moment between
slab and column, the flexural stresses shall be
investigated using a fraction, a of the moment
given by:
where
overall dimension of the critical
section for shear in the direction in
which moment acts, and
a2 = overall dimension of the critical
section for shear transverse to the
direction in which moment acts.
01 =
30.2.2 DROPS
-The drops when provided

shall be rectangular in plan, andhave a length
in each direction not less than one-thirdofthe
panel length in that direction. For exterior
panels, the width of drops at right angles to
the non-continuous edge andmeasured from
the centre line of the cqlumns shall beequal to
one-half the width of drop for interior panels.
30.2.3 COLUMN HEADS -Where column
heads are provided, that portion of a column
head which lies within the largest right
circular cone or pyramid that has a vertex
angle of 90 and can be included entirely
within the outlines of the column and the
column head, shall be considered for design
purposes (see Fig. I I).
30.3 Determination of Bending Moment
30.3.f ME T H O D S
D ESIGN -It shall be
OF
NALYSIS
AND
permissible to design
the slab system by one of the following
methods:
a) The direct d?sign method as specified in
30.4, and
b) The equivalent frame method as specified
in 30.5.
In each case the applicable limitations given
in 30.4 and 30.5 shall be met.
30.3.2 B ENDING M OMENTS IN PANELS WITH

M ARGINAL B EAMS
OR
W ALLS -Where the
slab is supported by a marginal beam with a

depth greater than 1.5 times the thickness of
the slab, or by a wall, then;
a) the to&l load to be carried by the beam or
wall shall comprise those loads directly
on the wall or beam plus a uniformly
distributed load equal to onequarter of
the total load on the Slab, and
b) the bending moments on the half-column
strip adjacent to the beam or wall shall be
one-quarter of the bending moments for
the first interior column strip.
T RANSFER OF B ENDING M OMENTS
COLUMNS -When unbalanced gravity
30.3.3
TO
,P
A stab width between lines that are one and

one-half slab or drop panel thickness,I .5 D,
on each side of the column o,r capital may be
considered effective, D being the size of the
column.
Concentration of reinforcement over column
head by closer spacing or additional
reinforcement may be used to resist the
moment on this section.
30.4 Direct Design Method
30.4.1 LI M I T A T I O N S - S l a b s y s t e m s
designed by the direct design method shall
fulfil the following conditions:
a) There shall be minimum of three

b)
cl
e)
continuous spans in each direction,

The panels shall be rectangular, and the
ratio of the longer span to the shorter span
within a panel shall not be greater than 2.0.
It shall be permissible to offset columns to
a maximum of IO percent of the span in the
direction of the offset notwithstanding the
provision in (b),
The successive span lengths in each
direction shall not differ by more thanonethird of the longer span. The end spans
mhy be shorter but not longer than the
interior spans, and
The design live load shall not exceed three
times the design dead load.
30.4.2 T OTAL D ESIGN M OMENT
FOR
SPAN
30.4.2.1 In the direot.design method, the total

design moment for a span shall be determined
for a strip bounded laterally by the centre line
of the panel on each side of the centre line of
the supports.
30.4.2.2 The absolute sum of the positive and
average negative bending moments in each
N A TIONAL BUnDING CODE OF INDIA
direction shall be taken as:
w I.
Mo= 8
where
M, = total moment;
w = design load on an area h In;
1 = clear s an extending from face to
face oPcolumns, capitals, brackets
or walls, but not less than 0.65II;
1, = length of span in the direction of
M.; and
A = length of span transverse to Ii.
30.4.2.3 Circular supports shall be treated as
square supports having the same area.
30.4.2.4 When the transverse span of the
panels on either side of the centre-line of
supports varies, 12 shall be taken as the
average of the transverse spans.
30.4.2.5 When the span adjacent and parallel
to an edge is being considered, the distance
from the edge to the centre line of the panel
shall be substituted for h in 30.4.2.2.
~~$IS$ATIVE
AND
P OSITIVE D E S I G N
30.4.3.1 The ne tive design moment shall be
located at the P
ace of rectangular supports,
circular supports being treated as square
supports having the same area.
30.4.3.2 In an interior span, the total design
moment M, shall be distributed in the
following proportions:
Negative design moment 0.65
Positive design moment 0.35
30.4.3.3 In an end span, the total design
moment M, shall be distributed in the
following proportions:
Interior negative design moment:
ac is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the

exterior columns to the flexural stiffness of
the slab at a joint taken in the direction
moments are being determined and is given by
ZKC
ac_=K
I
where
ZK, = sum of the flexural stiffnesses of
the columns meeting at the joint;
and
K, = flexural stiffness of the slab,
expressed ds moment per unrt
rotation.
30.4.3.4 It shall be permissible to modify
these design moments by up to 10 percent, so
long as the total design moment M, for the
panel in the direction considered is not less
than that required by 30.4.2.2.
30.4.3.5 The negative momeut section shall
be designed to resist the larger of the two
interior negative design moments determined
for the spans framing into a common support
unless an analysis is made to distribute the
unbalanced moment in accordance with the
stiffness of the adjoining parts.
30.4.4 DI S T R I B U T I O N
THE
30.4.5 MOMENTS
CQLUMNS
P~:EL WIDTH Bending moments at critical cross-section

shall be distributed to the column strips and
middle strips as specified in 30.5.5 as
applicable.
Positive design moment:

0.28
0.63 - ;
1+-J&
Exterior negative design moment:
30.4.5.2 At an interior support, the

supporting members above and below the
slab shall be designed to resist the momentM
given by the followin equation, in direct
proportion to their sti#ness unless a general
analysis is made:
M =. o8
FART
VI sIpUCTURAL WSIGN -rlFCllON S C O N C R E T E
(wd +
0.5 wI)h 1. - Wif##
( )
1+
ac
where
Wdr WI
I,
1,
0.65
1+,+
IN
30.4.5.1 Columns built integrally with the.

slab system shall be designed to resist
moments arising from loads in the slab
sybtem.
0,75 - -!L!!L
1+$
BENDING
M OMENTS A CROSS
design dead and live loads

respectively, per unit area;
length of s an transverse to the
direction oPM;
length of the clear span in the
direction of M, measured face to
face of supports;
Y,-P
XKC
ZK.
ac = - where Kc and K,
are as
defined in 3Q.4.3.3; andw~, r2 and

I.,refer to the shorter span
30.4.6 EFFECTS OF PA~ERN LOADING -In
the direct design method, when the ratio of
live load to dead load exceeds 0.5,
4 the sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the
columns above and below the slabZIG,
shall be such that aC is not less than the
appropriate minimum valueaC m,n specified in Table II, or
b) if the sum of theflexural stiffnesses of the
columns, K,, does not satisfy (a), the

positive design moments for the panel
shall be multiplied by the coefficientfl,
given by the following equation:
ac is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the

columns above and below the slab. to the
flexural stiffness of the slabs at a joint taken in
the direction moments are being determined
and is given by:
xck,
ar = -
ZK,
where K, and K. are flexural stiffnesses of

column and slab respectively.
TABLE II MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE

VALUES OF a<
LIVE: LOAD/
LOAD
(1)
DE
A D
R ATIO +
V A LUE OF a, ,nm
(2)
(3)
OS
0.5 to 2.0
I.0
0.5
I.0
0.8
I.0
I.0
I.0
t.25
1.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
2.0
0.8
2.0
i.0
2.0
1.25
2.0
2.0
30
0.5
3.0
0.8
30
1.0,
3.0
1.25
3.0
2.0
.._c____
I.5
40
6
0.6
O.?
0.7
0.8
I.2
I.3
I.5
16
1.9
4.9
I.8
2.0
23
2.8
130
30.5 Equivalent Frame Method

30.5.1 AS S U M P T I O N S -Tire b e n d i n g
moments and shear forces may bedete+ned

by an analysis of the structure as acontmuous
frame and the following assumptions may be
made:
a) The structure shall be considered to be
made up of equivalent frames on column

lines taken longitudinally and
transversely through the building. Each
frame consists of a row of equivalent
columns or supports, bounded laterally
by the centre line of the panel on each side
of the centre line of the columns or
supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to
an edge shall be bounded by the edge and
the centre line of the adjacent panel.
W Each such frame may be analysed in its
entirety, or, for vertical loading, each
floor thereof and the roof may be
analyced separately with its columns
being assumed fixed at their remote ends.
Where slabs are thus analysed separately,
it may be assumed in determining the
bending moment at a given support that
the slab is fixed at any support two panels
distant therefrom provided the slab
continues beyond that point.
c) For the purpose of determining relative
stiffness of members, the moment of
inertia of any slab or column may be
assumed to be that of the gross crosssection of the concrete alone.
4 Variations of moment of inertia along the
axis of the slab on account of provision of
drops shall be taken into account. In the
case of recessed or coffered slab which is
made solid in the region of the columns,
the stiffening effect may be ignored
provided the solid part of the slab does
not extend more than 0.15 I.r, into the
span measured from the centre line of the
columns. The stiffening effect of flared
column heads may be ignored.
30.5.2 LOADING PAITERN

30.5.2.1 When the loading pattern is known,
the str1;cture shall be analysed for the load
concerned.
30.5.2.2 When the live load is variable but
does not exceed threequarters of the dead
load, or the nature of the live load is such that
all panels will be loaded simultaneously, the
maximum moments may be assumed to occur
at all sections when full design live load is on
the entire s&b system.
30.5.2.3 For other conditions of live
load/dead load ratio and when all panels are
NATIONAL
UILLNNG CODE OF INDIA
not loaded simultaneously:

a) maximum positive moment near
midspan of a panel may be assumed to
occur when threequarters of the full
design live load is on the panel and on
alternate panels; and
h) maximum negative moment in the slab at
a support may be assumed to occur when
three-quarters of the full design live load
is on the adjacent panels only.
.30.5;2.4 In no case shall design moments be
taken to be less than those occurring with full
design live load on all panels.
30.53 NEGATIVE
30.5.3.1 At interior supports, the critical

section .for negative moment, in both the
column strip and middle strip, shall be taken
at the face of rectilinear supports, but in no
case at a distance greater than 0.17511 from
the centre of the column whereII is the length
of the span in the direction moments are being
determined, measured centre-to-centre of
supports.
30.5.3.2 At exterior supports provided with
brackets or capitals, the critical section for
negative moment in the direction
perpendicular to the edge shall be taken at a
distance from the face of the supporting
element not greater than one-half the
projection of the bracket or capital beyond
the face of the supporting element.
30.5.3.3 Circular or regular polygon shaped
supports shall be treated as square supports
having the same area.
MO D I F IC A T I O N O F M
M OMENT -Moments determined
A X I M U M
by means
of the equivalent frame method, for slabs
which fulfil the limitations of 30.4 may be
reduced in such proportion that the numerical
sum of the positive and average ne tive
moments is not less than the value o18total
design moment M,, specified in 30.4.2.2.
30.5.5 DI S TR IBUTION OF B ENDING M O M E N T
AcqOss THE P A N E L WIDTH
30.5;5.1 COLUMN STRIP: NEGATIVE MOMENT
A T A N I N T E R I O R S U P P O R T-At an interior
support, the column strip shall be designed to

resist 75 percent of the total negative moment
in the panel at that support.
30.5.5.2
COLUMN STRIP : NEGATIVE MOMENT

AT AN EXTERIOR SUPPORT
a) At an exterior support, the column strip

shall be designed to resist the total
negative moment in the panel at that
support.
PAaT w
STRUTTURAL
DESIGN-StCllON
30.5.5.3 COLUMN STRIP : POSITIVE MOMENT

FOR EACH SPAN - For each span, the column
strip shallbe designed to restst 60 percent of
the total positive moment in the panel.
30.5.5.4 M O M E N T S I N T H E M I D D L E
-The middle strip shall be designed on
the following bases:
a) That portion of the design moment not
resisted by the column strip shall be
assigned to the adjacent middle strips.
b) Each middle strip shall be proportioned
to resist the sum of the moments assigned
to its two half middle strips.
c) The middle strip adjacent and parallel to
an edge supported by a wall shall be
proportioned to resist twice the moment
assigned to half the middle strip
corresponding to the first row of interior
columns.
STRIP
D ESIGN M O M E N T
30.5.4
b) Where the exterior support consists of a

column or a wall extending for a distance
equal to or greater than three-quarters of
the value of h, the length of span
transverse to the direction moments are
being determined, the exterior negative
moment shall be considered to be
uniformly distributed across the length12.
CONCSETE
30.6 Shear in Flat Slab

30.6.1 ,The critical section for shear shall beat
a distance d/2 from the periphery of the
column/capital/ drop panel, perpendicular to
the plane of the slab, where d is the effective
depth of the section (see Fig. I I). The shape in
plan is geometrically similar to the support
immediately below the slab (see Fig. I2A
and 128).
N OTE -For column sections with re-cntrant angles, the
critical section shall be taken as indicated in FIN. I2C
and l2D.
30.6.1.1 In the
case of columns near the free

edge of a slab. the critical section shall be
taken as shown in Fig. 13.
30.6.1.2 When openings in llat slabs are

located at a distance less than ten times the
thickness of the slab from a concentrated
reaction or when the openings are located
within the column strips. the critical sections
specified in 30.6,1 shall be modified so that
the part of the periphery of the critical section
which is enclosed by radial projections of the
openings to the centroid of the reaction area
shall be considered ineffective (see Fig.14).
and openings shall not encroach upon column
head.
30.6.2 CALCULATION OF SHEAR STRESS The shear stress 7, shall be the sum of the
W41
value< c~lculatcd according to 30.6..?./ and

30.6.2 ,
30.6.2.i I-he nomlnal shear stress in flat slabs
shall be taken as V/hod where 1 is the shear
force due to design load, 6, is the periphery ol
the critical sectlon and nis theeffective depth.
30.6.,7.? When unbalanced gravity l o a d .
wind, earthquake or other forces cause
transfer of bending moment between stab and
column. a fraction (1 ~ a) ofthe moment shall
be considered transferred by rccentricity of
the shear about the centroid of the critical
section. Shear stresses shall be taken as
varying linearly about the centroid of the
critlcal scctlon. Ihe vallle o f 0 s h a l l b e
obtained from the equation given tn 30.3.3
.;0.6.3
ft.KMlSSlBl i SHE A K sl KESS
30.6.3.1 When shear reinforcement is not

provided, the calculated shear stress at the
critical section shall not exceed k,r,,
where
but not greater than 1, &
being the ratio of short side to long
side of the column/ capital: and
k, = (0.5 + PC)
TL = 0.25 fi in limit state method of

design, and 0.16 ain working
stress method of design.
13
Fig. I3
13 B
Effecr of Free Edges ON Crrlrral

Section fvr Shear
30.6.j.2 When the shear stress at the critical

section exceeds the value given in 30.6.3.1, but
less than 1.5 7C shear reinforcement shall be
provided. If the shear stress exceeds 1.5 T,.
the fiat slab shall be redesigned. Shear stresses
shall be investigated at successive sections
more distant from the support and shear
reinforcement shall be provided up to a
sectton where the shear stress does not exceed
0.5~~. While designing the shear reinforcement, the shear stress carried by the
concrete shall be assumed to be 0.5 T, and
reinforcement shall carry the remaining
shear.
30.7 Slab Reinforcement
30.7.1 SPACING -The spacing of bars in a
flat slab. shall not exceed 2 times the slab
thickness, except where a slab is of cellular or
ribbed construction.
30.7.2 AKEA OF R E I N F O R C E M E N T - W h e n
drop panels are used, the thickness of drop
panel for determination of area of
reinforcement shall be the lesser of the
following:
a) Thickness of drop, and
b) Thickness of slab plus one quarter the
distance between edge of drop and edge
of capital.
Fig. 14 Effecr of openings on Critical

Secrion for Shear
vi 5.42
JO.?.3 MINIMUM LENGTH~F REINFORCEMENT

a) Reinforcement in flat slabs shall have the
NATIONAL lUlLDING
CODE OF INDIA
minimum lengths specified in Fig. 15.

Larger lengths of reinforcement shall be
provided when required by analysis.
b) Where adjacent spans are unequal, the
extension of negative reinforcement
beyond each face of the common column
shall be based on the longer span.
30.7.4 AN C H O R I N G , RE I N F O R C E M E N T
a) All slab reinforcement perpendicular to a
discontinuous edge shall have an
anchorage (straight, bent or otherwise
anchored) past the internal face of the
spandrel beam. wall or column, of an
amount:
I)
FOR POSITIVE KEINFORCEMENT
-not
less than I5 cm except that with fabric

reinforcement having a fully welded
transverse wire directly over the
support, it shall be permissible to
reduce this length to one-half of the
width of the support or 5 cm,
whichever is greater; and
2)
F O R N E G A T I V E R E I N F O R C E M E N T --~
such that the design stress isdeveloped

at the internal face, in accordance with
Section SA(c).
b) Where the slab. is not supported by a

spandrel beam or wall. or where the slab
cantilevers beyond the support, the
anchorage shall be obtained within
the slab.
30.8 Openings in Flar Slabs -Openings of
any size may be provided in the flat slab if it is
shown by analysis that the requirements of
strength and serviceability are met. However,
for openings conforming to the following, no
special analysis is required:
a) Openings of any size may be placed
within the middle half of the span in each

direction, provided the total amount of
reinforcement required for the panel
without the opening is maintained.
b) In the area common to two column strips,
not more than one-eighth of the width of
strip in either span shall be interrupted by
the openings. The equivalent of
reinforcement intelrupted shall be added
on all sides of the openings.
4 In the area common to one column strip
and one middle strip. not more than oncquarter of the reinforcement in either
strip shall be interrupted by the openings.
The equivalent of reinforcement
interrupted shall be added on all sides of
the openings.
4 The shear requirements of 30.6 shall be
sattsfied.
PART
V l
STRUCTUIAI.
DESIGN - SCCTION 5 CONCWTE
31. WALLS
31. I General - Where reinforced concrete
walls are intended to carry vertical loads, they
should be designed generally in accordance
with the recommendations given for columns.
The provisions with regard to transverse
reinforcement to restrain the vertical bars
against buckling need not be applied to walls
in which the vertical bars are not assumed to
assist in resisting compression. The mimmum
reinforcement shall be as given in 31.4. The
minimum thickness of wall should not be less
than 100 mm.
31.2 Load Carrying Capaciry -The load
carrying capacity of the walls shall be calculated as for columns given in Section5A(e)
or 5A(f) however the strength of the wall may
be increased by the values given below:
Ratio of storey
I.5 or
1.0
0.5 or
more
less
height to
length of wall
Percentage
0
IO
20
increase in
strength
Nom -The length of the wall is the overall length or.
where openmgs occur. the length between adjacent
opening.
3 1 . 3 S l e n d e r n e s s Effecrs - When the

effective height of the wall exceeds 12 times
the wall thickness, the slenderness effects shall
be considered as in columns. Where the wall is
stiffened by cross walls, the slenderness ratios
may be determined as given in Part VI
Structural Design, Section 4 Masonry.
31.4 Reinforremenr --The reinforcement
for walls shall be provided as below:
a) t h e m i n i m u m r a t i o o f v e r t i c a l
reinforcement to gross concrete area shall
be:
I) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger
than I6 mm in diameter and with a
characteristic strength of 415 N/mm
or greater.
2) 0.0015 for other types of bars.
3) 0.0012 for welded wire fabric not
Larger than 16 mm in diameter.
b) Vertical reinforcement shall be spaced
not farther apart than three times the wall
thickness nor 450 mm.
c) The minimum ratio of horizontal
reinforcement to gross concrete area shall
be:
I) 0,002 for deformed bars not larger
than I6 mm in diameter and with a
characteristic strength of 4 I5 N ! mm
or greater.
2) 0.0025 for other types of bars.
w-43
WlfHOUl DROP PANEL
WITH DROP PANEL
.
75 mm
IN0 SLAB CONtlNUllY
AR DIA O R
mm min. ALL BARS
ICDNIINIJIT.Y~PROYOEDI
Minimum Length
lbhrk
---Length
0.14 1.
0.20 1.
0.22 I*
IH) SLAB CONI&
Maximum Lcngtb
1
L
/
I
---0.30
I.
0.33 I. d.20
1.
0.24
I.
.Rcnt brn at exwrior tupporrr may bc used if a general anal+ ig nude.

Non - D ir the dirmettr or Ibe column and tbc dimension of the rcctangul~r column in &bc
direction under canrideration.
Fig. IS Minimum Bend Joint Locations and Extensions for Reinforcement in Fkr Slabs
\I
544
NATIONAL MIlLDING CODE OF INDI A
3) 0.002 for welded wire fabric not larger

than 16 mm in diameter.
cl) Horizontal reinforcemen! shall bespaced
not farther apart than three times the wall
thickness nor 450 mm.
3. S
bread!h of the secflon increased by

7.5 mm for purposes of design (XC Fig. 18).
ellectrve
3 2 . 3 L)qlll 01. .52c~lrilll

l.he d e p t h 01
scctlon shall be taken 3s t h e m i n i m u m
thickness pcrpcndlcular to the soffit of the
staircase.
I AIKS
.1_. I I.;l/;~rrw Sputa of.Sforrs 1 h e effectlbe

3pan of stairs ulthout. stringer beams shall be
taken as the following horizontal distances:
W h e r e huppotted at top and bottom
risers by bcamsspanning parallel with the
risers. the distance centre-to-centre of
beams:
W h e r e \p,rnnlng on to the edge ol a
landing slab. which spans parallel. with
the risers (YCY Fig. 16). a dlstancccqual to
the gomg ol the stairs plus at each end
tither half the width of the landing or one
mctrc. whichever is smaller; and
Where the landing slab span5 in the same
direction as the stairs. they shall be
considered as acting together to form a
single slab and the span determined as the
distance centre to centre of the
supporting beams or walls. the going
being measured horizontally.
?
F
\,
Fig. 18 L o a d i n g WI Srarrs Built into Wal1.s

33. F O O T I N G S
Fig. 16 tjjec,live Span for Stairs Supported

at Eac,h End h_~* Landings Sparking Parallel
rvith rha Risers
32.2 Dislribution of Loading on &airs -In
the case of stairs with open wells, where spans
partly crossing at right angles occur. the load
on areas common to any two such spans may
be taken as one-half in each dIrection as
shown in Fig. 17. Where flights or landings
are embedded mto walls for a length of not
less than I IO mm and are designed to span in
the direction of the flight, a I50 mm strip may
be deducted from the loaded area and the
P
RT
V I STRIICTLRAL DLSICN
SECTION 5 CONCRETE
Footmgs shali be designed to

3;. I General
sustain the applied loads, moments and forces
and the induced reactions and to ensure that
any settlement which may occur shall be as
nearly uniform as possible, and the safe
bearing capacity of the soil IS not exceeded.
(see Part VI Structural design. Section 2
Foundations.)
33.1.1 In sloped or stepped footings the
effective cross section in compression shall be
hmited by the area above the neutral plane,
and the angle of slope or depth and location of
steps shall be such that the design
requirements are satisfied at every section.
Sloped and stepped footings that are designed
125
,as a unit shall be constructed to assure action

as a unit.
3 3 . 1 . 2 T H I C K N E S S A T THE E D G E O F
FOOTING -In reinforced and plain coritrete
footings, the thickness at the edge shall be not
less than I5 cm for footings on soils, nor less
than 30 cm above the tops of piles for footings
on piles.
33.1.3 In the case of plain concrete pedestals.
the angle between the plane passing through
the bottom edge of the pedestal and the
corresponding junction edge of the column
with pedestal and the horizontal plane (sre
Fig. 19) shall be governed by the expressIon:
entire area of the footing on one side of the

said plane.
33.2.3.2 The greatest bending moment lo be

used in the design of an isolated concrete
footing which supports a column, pedestal or
wall, shall be the moment computed in the
manner prescribed in 33.2.3.1 at sections
located as follows:
iI) At the face of the column. pedestal or
wall. for footings supporting a concrete
column, pedestal or wall;
b) Halfway between the centre line lrnd the

edge of the wall. for footings under
masonry walls; and
C) Halfway between the lace of the column

or pedestal and the edge 01 the gussetted
base. for footings under gussetted bases.
where
4 = c a l c u l a t e d m a x i m u m b e a r i n g
pres$ure at the base of the pedestal
in N/mm. and
.Lk = characteristic strength of concrete

at 28 days in N/mm
33.J.4.l Ihe shear strength of footings I S

governed by the more severe of the following
two conditions:
a)
the footing acting essentially as a wide

beam. with a potential diagonal crack
extending in a plane across the entire
width; the critical section for this
condition shall be assumed as a vertical
section located from the face of the
column. pedestal or wall ai a distance
equal to the effective depth of the footing
m case of footings on soils, and a distance
equal to half the effectivedepth of footing
for footings on piles.
b) two-wav action of the footing, with

Fig. 19
33.2 Momenrs and Forces
33.2.1 In the case of footings on piles,
computation for moments and shears may be
based on the assumption that the reaction
from any pile is concentrated at the centre of
the pile.
For the purpose of computing stresses

in footing6 which support a round or
octagonal concrete column or pedestal, the
face of the column or pedestal shall be taken
as the side of a square inscribed within the
perimete; of the round or octagonal column
or pedestal.
33.22
33.2.3 B ENDING M O M E N T
33.2.3.1 The bending moment at any section
shall be determined by passing through the
section a vertical plane which extends
completely across the footing, and computing
the moment of the forces acting over the
v,.,46
potential diagonal cracking alone the

surface of truncated cone or pyr.lmid
around the concentrated load; in tms
case. the footing shall be designed for
shear in accordance with appropriate
provisions specified in 30.6.
332.4.2 In computing the external shear on
any sectlon through a footing supported on
piles, the entlre reaction from any pile of
diameter D, whose centre is located D,,, 2 or
more outside the section shall be assumed as
producing shear on the section; the reaction
from any pile whose centre is located L&i 2 or
more inside the section shall be assumed as
producing no shear on the section. For
intermediate posltions of the pile centre, the
portion of the pile reaction to be assumed as
producir,g she; nnsthe section shall be based
on straight line interpolation between full
value at D,!2 outside the section and zero
value at D,,2 inside the section.
33.2,4.3 The critical section for checking the
development length in a footing shall be
assumed at the same planes as those described
for bending moment In 33.2.3 and also aI ail
u:her vertical planes where abrupt changes of

section occur. If reinforcement is curtailed,
the anchorage requirements shall be checked
in accordance with .?.C.,l.J
33.3 Tensile Reinforcement
-The total
tensile reinforcement at any section shall
provide a moment of resistance at least equal
to the bending moment on the section
calculated in accordance with 33.2.3.
33.3.1 Total tensile reinforcement shall be

distributed across the corresponding resisting
sectlon as given below:
a) In one-way reinforced footing, the
reinforcement shall be distributed
uniformly across the full width of the
tooting;
b) In two-way reinforced square footings,
the remforcement extending in. each
direction shall be distributed uniformly
across the full width of the footing;
c) In two-way reinforced rectangular
footing, the reinforcement in the long
direction shall be distributed uniformly
across the full width of the footing. For
remforcement in the short direction, a
central band equal to the width of the

footing shall be marked along the length
of the footing and portiorc of the
reinforcement determined in accordance
with the equatibn given below shall be
uniformly distributed across the central
band:
Reinforcement in
band
central
width
Total reinforcement in
short direction
P+l
of the long side to the

short side of the footing. The remainder of the
where /3 is rhe ratio
area actually loaded and hhving

side slope of one vertical to two
horizontal; and
AZ = loaded area at the column base.
For wofking stress method of design the
permissible bearing stress on full area of
concrete shall be taken as O-25fct; for limit
state method of design the permissible
bearing stress shall be 0*45&k.
33.4.1 Where the permissible bearing stress
on the concrete in the supponmg or
supported member would be exceeded.
reinforcement shall be provided for
developing the excess force, either by
extending the longitudinal bars into the
supporting member, or by dowels(see33.4.3).
33.4.2 Where transfer of force is
accomplished by reinforcement. t h e
development length of the reinforcement shall
be sufficient ta transfer the compression or
tension to the supporting member in
accordance with 25.2.
33.4.3 Extended longitudinal reinforcement
or dowels of at least O-5 percent of the crousectional area of the supported column or
pedestal and a minimumof four bars shallbe
provided. Where dowels an used, their
diameter shall not exceed the diameter of the
column bars by more than 3 mm.
33.4.4 Column bars of diameters larger than
36 mm, in compression only can be dowelled
at the footings with bars of smaller size of the
necessary arca. The dowel shal! extend into
the column, a distance equal to the
development length of the column bar and
into the footing, a distance. qua1 to the
development length of the dowel.
reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed
in the outer portions of the footing.

33.4 Transfer of Load at the Base of
Column-The compressive stress in concrete
at the base of a column or pedestal shall be
considered as being transferred by bearmg to
the top of the supporting pedestal or footing.
The, bearing pressure on the loaded area shall

not exceed the permissible bearing stressm
direct compression rrlultiplied by a value
equal to
Al
AZ
- but not greater than 2;
where
A, = supporlmg area for hearing of
footing, which in sloped or stepped

footing may be taken as the area of
the lower base of the largest
frustrum of a pyramid or cone
contained wholly within the footing
and having for its upper base, the
PAP1
s TllUCTI;R4L
DLWCN - S E C T I O N J CONCRETE
SECTION SA(e) STRUCTURAL DESIGN:

LIMIT STATE METHOD
34. SAFETY AND SERVICEABILITY
REQUIREMENTS
34.1 General-In the method of design
based on limit state concept, the structure
shall be designed to withstand safely all loads
liable to act on it throughout its life; it shall
also satisfy the serviceability requirements,
such as limitations on deflection and
cracking. The acceptable limit for the safety
and serviceability requirements before failure
occurs is called a Limit State. The aim of
design is to achieve acceptable probabilities
that the structure wtil not become unfit for the
use for which it is intended, that is, that it will
not reach a limit state.
12
34.1.1 All relevant limit states shall be
considered in design to ensure an adequate

degree of safety and serviceability. In general,
the structure shall be designed on the basis of
the most critical liniit state and shall be
checked for other limit states.
$4.1.2 For ensuing the above objective, he
design should be based on characteristic
values for material strengths and applied

loads, which take into account the variations
in the material strengths and in.the loads to be
supported. The characteristic values should
be based on statistical data if available; where
such data are not available they should be
based on experience. The design values are
derived from the characteristic values
through the use of partial safety factors, one
for material strengths and the other for loads.
In the absence of special considerations these
factors should have the values given in 35
according to the material, the type of loading
and the limit state being considered.
34.2 Limit State of Coilbpse-The limit state
of collapse of the structure or part of the

structure could be assessed from rupture of
one or more critical sections and from
buckling due to elastic or plastic instability
(including the effects of sway where
appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to
bending, shear, torsion and axial loads at
every section shall not be less than the
appropriate value at that section produced by
the probable most unfavourable combination
of loads on the structure using the
appropriate partial safety factors.
34.3 Limit States of Serviceabdity
35. CHARACTERlSTlC AND DESIGN

VALUES AND PARTIAL S.IZFETY
FACTORS
3 5 . 1 C h a r a c t e r i s t i c S t r e n g t h o./
Materials-The termcharacteristic strength
means that value of the strength of the
material below which not more than 5 percent
of the test results are expected to 1811. The
characterisctic strength for concrete shall be
in accordance with Table 2, modified by5.2.1
regarding increase in concrete strength with
age. Until the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications for reinforcing steel are
modified to include the concept of
characteristic strength, the characteristic
value shall be assumed as the minimum
yield/$2 percent proof stress specified in the
relevant Indian Standard specifications.
35.2 Characteristic Loads-The t e r m
characteristic load means that value of load
which has a 95 percent probability of not
being exceeded during the life ofthz structure.
Since data are not available to express loads
in statistical terms, for the purpose of this
section loads specified in Part VI Structural
design, Section I Loads may be assumed as
the characteristic loads:
35.3 Design Values
35.3.1 MA T E R I A L S -The design strength of
the materials,fJ is given by:
where
/ = characteristic strength of the

material (see 35.1), and
ym = partial safety factor appropriate to
the material and the limit state
being considered.
34.3.1 DEFLECTION-Limiting VCtlUeS of
deflections are given in 22.2.
34.3.2 CRACKING -Cracking of concrete

should not adversely affect the appearance or
durability of the structure; and acceptable
limits of cracking would vary with the type of
structure and environment. The actual widths
of cracks will vary between wide limits and the
prediction of absolute maximum width is not
possible.
Non-As rspidc thcYollowing may be regarded as
rcasorublr lirmts:
The surfaa width of cracks should not. in gcncml, exceed
0.3 mm. For ~rticulrly aggressive environment, such 9s
tk ~wlc c+pry in Tnbk 19. the urcucd rurfmx width
of cracks at points nearest to the main reinforcement
should not, in pncnl, exc&ii 0304 times the nominal
corn to the main reinforcement. The possibility of some
ctacks be& wider may be taken into account, if
-rY.
34.4 Otkr Limit States-Structures designed
for unusual or special functions shall comply

with any relevadt additional limit state
considered appropriate to that structure.
n-9
352.2 LoADs
-The design load, Fd is given
by:
Fd = F Y1
where
F = characteristic load (see 3S.Z), and
Y = partial safety f&tor appropriate to
the nature of loading and the limit
state being considered.
35.3.3 C ONSEQUENCES OF A TTAINING L I M I T
STATE-where the consequences of a
structure attaining a limit state are of a serious
nature such as huge loss of life and disruption
of the economy higher values foi y,,, and y,
than those given under 35.4.1 and 35.4.2 may
be applied.
35.4 Partial Safety Factors
OF INDIA
PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C TO R y,
L O A D S - T h e v a l u e s o f yr given
Table 12 shall normally be used.
35.4.1
FOR
(Clauses 18.3 and 35.4.1)

L IMIT S TATE
C OMBINATION
OF
COLLAPSE
L IMIT S T A T E S
OF
SERVICEAIJILITY
wLLDL
L L
WL
(1)
(2)
(3
(4)
(3
(6)
(7)
DL + LL
I.5
I.S
I .o-
I.0
D L + W L
1.5or ~
1.5
I.0
I.0
I.2
I.0
0.8
0.8
0.9.
D L + L L + W L 1.2
1.2
N O T E I ~ Whllc considering earthquake effects.

substirurc EL for WL.
NOTE 2-For Ihe limit states of serviceability, the values
of y, given in this Table are apphcable for short term
eflrcrs. Whllc asscssmg the ion term effects due to creep,
the dead load and thar parr o B rhe hvc load hkely 10 be
permanent may only bc considered.
*This value LS 10 bc constdcrcd when stabihty against

overturning or stress reversal Is crctical.
3 5 . 4 . 2 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R yrn
M A T E R I A L Sr RENGI H
and the external loads is maintained.
b) The ultimate moment of resistance
TABLE I2 VALUES OF PARTIALSAFETY FACTOR

y, FOR LOADS
LOAD
4 Equilibrium between the internal forces
FOR
35.4.2.1 When assessing the strength of a
structure or structural member for the limit

state of collapse. the values of partial safety
factor, y,,, should be taken as 1.5 for concrete
and I. I5 for steel.
Nolt y., ~alucr a r e a l r e a d y Incorporawd in r h e
equations and tables glren in this Code for Ilmlt slate
design.
35.4.2.2 When assessing the deflection, the

material properties such as modulus of
elasticity, should be taken as those associated
with the characteristic strength of the
material.
provided at any section of a member is

not less than 70 percent of the moment at
that section obtained from an elastic
maximum moment diagram covering all
appropriate combinations of loads.
c) The elastic moment at any section in a
member due to a particular combination
of loads shall not be reduced by more
than 30 percent of the numerically largest
moment given anywhere by the elastic
maximum moments diagram for the
particular member, covering all
appropriate cotibination of loads.
d) At sections where the moment capacity
after redistribution is less than that from
the elastic maximum moment diagram,
the following relationship shall be
satisfied:
$- +
Q 0.6
where
X = depth of neutral axis,
d = effective depth, and
6M = percentage reduction in moment.
e) In structures in which the structural
frame provides the lateral stability, the
reductions in moment allowed by
condition 36.1./(c) shalt be restricted to

IO percent for structures over 4 storeys in
height.
AN A L Y S I S O F SLABS SP A N N I N G I N
T w o D I R E CT I O N S A T R I G H T A N G L E S- Yield line theory or any other acceptable
36.12
method may be used. Alternatively the

provisions given in Appendix C may be
followed.
37. LIMIT STATE OF
FLEXIIRE
COLLAPSE:
37. I Assump!ions
-- Design for the limit

state of collaose in flexure shall be based on
the assumptibns given below:
36. ANALYSIS
36. I Anal,~~si.s qf Strticturr M e t h o d s o f
analysis as rn 21 shall be used. 1 he material
strength to be assumed shall be characteristic
values in t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f e l a s t i c
properties of members lrrespectlvc of the limit
state being considered. Redistribution of the
calculated moments may be made as given in
36.1.1.
36.1.1 REUISTRIWIIW OF
MO M E N
CO~TISI;OI;S BFAMS ASI) FRAML~ -
T S
IS
The
redistribution of moments may becarried out
sarlsfying the following conditions.
a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain

plane after bending.
b) The maximum stram In concrete at the
outermost compression fibre IS taken as
0.003 S in bending.
c) T h e r e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n t h e
compressive stress distribution In
concrete and the strain in concrete may
bc assumed to be rectangle, trapezoid,
parabola or any other shape which results
in prediction of strength m substantial
agreement with the results of tests. An
acceptable stress-strain curve is given in

Fig. 20. For design purposes, the
compressive strength of concrete in the.
structure shall be assumed to be 0.67
times the characteristic strength: The
partial s a f e t y f a c t o r Ym = 1 . 5
shall be applied in addition to this.
_-___----__-*_--
W-M-
Depth of ccntre of compresivc

force from the extreme fibre
in compression
= 0.42 X.
_--
stress block parameters are as follows (SPP Fig 21):

= 0.36Jr. xu
I
1
,: /y
_---
NOTE --For the stress-strain curve in Fig. 20, the design
Area of stress block
1 /,
I I
#Ii,
In
WI
iti
Y
ty/l .15
where
v)
&r = charactcrlstlc compressive strength of

concrete. and
E,=200000
N/mm2
x. = depth of neutral axis.
22 A Cold Worked Deformed Bar
0-J
ii!
ii
Es = 200000 N/mm2
frg. 22 Kt~presenlalive Stress S t r a i n Curws

jbr Reln/c~rcemrnr
shall not be less than:
Fig. 21 Stress
Block Padmeters
4 The tensile strength of the concrete is
ignored.
The
stresses in the reinforcement are
e)
derived from representative stress-strain
curve for the type of steel used. Typical
curves are given in Fig. 22. For design
purposes, the partial safety factor y,,,,
equal to I. I5 shall be applied.
The maximum strain in the tension
reinforcement in the section at failure
VIP
.fE
-1.15 E,
+ 0.002
where
/; = characteristic strength of steel, and
E, = modulus of elasticity of steel.
Nur~ -The limiting vrlun of the depth of neutral axis
for different grades of steel bscd on the assumptions
m 37.1 arc as follows:
/,
Y..mu d
250
O.J3
415
0.48
500
0 46
N A T I O N A L WlLDlNC
CODE OF IWDlA
The expressions for obtainmg the moments of resistance

for rectangular and T-Sections, based on the
assumptions of 37.1, are given in Appendix E.
38. LlMlT STATI. OF COLLAPSE:

COMPRESSION
38.1 Assumptions-In addition to the
assumptions given in 37.1(a) to 37./(e) for
flexure, the following shall be assumed:
a) The maximum compressive strain in

concrete in axial compression is taken as
0.002.
b) The maximum compressive strain at the
highly compressed extreme fibre in

concrete subjected to axial compression
and bending and when there is no tension
on the section shall be 0.003 5 minus 0.75
times the strain at the least compressed
extreme fibre.
38.2 Minimum Eccentricity-- All members

in compression shall be designed for the
minimum eccentricity in accordance with
24.4. Where calculated eccentricity is larger.
the minimum eccentricity should be ignored.
38.3 Short Axially Loaded Members in
Compression -The member shall be
designed by considering the assumptions
given in 38.1 and the minimum eccentricity.
When the minimum eccentricity as specified
in 24.4 does not exceed 0.0s times the lateral
dimension, the members may be designed by
the following equation:
P, = O-4/%. A, + 0+67f,. A,
where
P. = axial load on the member,
fck = characteristic compressive strength
of the concrete,
A, = area of concrete,
7y= characteristic strength of the
compression reinforcement, and
A , = area of longitudinal reinforcement
for columns.
38.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcemenr - T h e s t r e n g t h o f
compression members with helical
reinforcement satisfying the requirement
of 38.4.1 shall be taken as 1.05 times the
strength of similar member with lateral ties.
38.1.1 The ratio of the volume of helical
reinforcement to the volume of the coreshall
not be Ie& than @36 (An/A, - 1)&/f,,
where
A = gross area of the section,
rmnmuamu
DUWN-SUBlON
A, = area of the core of the helically

reinforced column measured to the
outside diameter of the helix,
/;t = characteristic compressive strength
of the concrete, and
f,= characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding
415 N/mm.
38.5 Members Su&ecI to Combined, Axial
Load and Uniaxiol Bending-- A member
subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending
shall bc designed on the basis of38.1 and 38.2.
NOTf
-The design of member subject to combined axial

load and uniaxial bending will involve lengthy
calculation by trial and error. In order tb overcome these
difhculties interaction diagrams may be used. These have
been prepared and published rn SP : 16 Design aids for
reinforced concrete to IS: 456 1978.
38.6 Members Subject to Combined Axial

Lood and Biaxial Bending-The resistance
of a member subjected to axial force and
biaxial bending shall be obtained on the basis
of assumptions given in 38.1 and 38.2 with
neutral axis so chosen as to satisfy the
equilibrium of load and moments about two
axes. Alternatively such members may be
designed by the following equation:
where
M.., MU, = moment about x and _V axes due
to design loads;
Mu,~,Muyl = maximum uniaxial moment
capacity for an axial load of P,,
bending about x and y axes,
respectively; and
a. is related to P./P,,,
where P,,= 0.45 fct. A, + 0.75 Jy A,.
For values of PJ P., = 0.2 to 0.8, the values of
on vary linearly from 1 .O to 2.0. For values less
than 0.2, ar, is I .O; for values greater than 0.8,
an is 2.0.
38.7 Slender Compression Members-The
design of slender compression members (see
21.1.1) shall be based on the forces and the
moments determined from an analysis of the
structure including the effect of deflections on
moments and forces. When the effect of
deflections are not taken into account in the
analysis, additional moment givenin 38.7.1
shall be taken into account in the appropriate
direction,
38.7.1 The additional moments M, and MIY
CONCRSTS
WSl
flanged sections shall be taken as

the breadth of the web, h,; and
d = effective depth.
shall be calculated by the following formulae:
39.1.1 B EAMS OF V A R Y I N G DEPIH -In the

case of beams of varying depth, the equation
shall be modified as:
whsre
P, =
I,, =
axial load
on the member,
effective length in respect of the
major axis,
I,, = effective length in respect of the
minor axis,
D = depth of the cross section at right
angles to the major axis, and
h = width of the member.
For design of section, 38.5 or 38.6 as
appropriate shall apply.
Norm I --In the case of a braced column wtthour any
transverse loads occurrmg tn us hctght. the additional
moment shall bc,added to an initial moment equal IO sum
ol 0.4 M,, and 0.6 M,J where Mwl IS the larger end
moment and MUI is the smaller end moment (assumed
ncgarlve 11 the column IS bent tn double curvature). In no
case shall the tnttial moment be less than 0 4 M.2; nor the
total moment tncludtng the initial moment be less than
,M..: For unbraccd columns, theaddutonal moment shall
be added to the end moments.
holr 2 I. tinbraced compression members. at any gtvcn

level or slorey. subject to lateral toad arc usually
constramed IO deflect equally. In such cases slenderness
ratlo lor each column may be taken as the average for all
columns acting in the same dtrectton
7. I. I The values given by equation 38.7.1

may be multiplied by the following factor:
_IR.
where
P, = axial load on compression member,
Put = as defined in 38.6, and
Ph = axial load corresponding to the
condition of maximum compressive
strain of 0.003 5 in concrete and
tensile strain of 0.002 in outermost
layer of tension steel.
39. LJMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE:
SHEAR
39.1 Nominal Shear Stress-The nominal
shear stress tv in beams or slabs of uniform
depth shall be obtained by the following

equation:
V
Iv= bd
where
V,, = shear force due to design loads;
b = breadth of the member, which for
,.P
Tb
---
hd
where
TV, V,,. b and dare the same as in 3Y.l:
M, = bending moment at the sectlon,
and
P= angle between the top and the
bottom edges of the beam.
The negative sign In the formula applies when
t h e b e n d i n g m o m e n t M, I n c r e a s e s
numertcally in the same direction as the
effective depth d Increases, and the positive
sign when the moment decreases numerically
in this direction.
39.2 Design Shear Strength 01 Concrere
39.2.1
ITHOUT
SH
RLINFORCE-
E A R
MENT
-The design shear strength ofconcrete

in beams without shear reinforcement is given
in Table 13.
39.2.1.1 For solid slabs, the design shear

strength for concrete shall be kr<, where k has
the values gl\cn helo*
&wall Depprh of Slab, m m
\W or more
27
I .05
1.00
2.50
225
2cil
I IO
I.15
I.20
I.25
t.30
175
I50 or less
VOTE ---This prowlon shall not apply to flat slabs for

which 30.6 shall apply.
39.2.2 SH E A R STRENGTH
U
NDER
XIAL
OF
E M B E R S
OMPRESSION
-For
members subjected to axial compression P,,

the design shear strength of concrete rc. given
in Table 13, shall be multiplied by the
following factor:
3P
~ but not
exceeding 1.5
+ ,&fck
where
P, = axial compressive force in Newtons,
A, = gross area of the concrete section in
mm2, and
fck =
characteristic compressive strength
of concrete.
NAnoNAL l lmnmG
cxmsor~
TABLE 14 MAXIMUM SHEAR STRESS,
TABLE 13 DESIGN SHEAR STRE,NGTH OF

CONCRETE, 7c, N/mm
Tcmax. N/mm
(Clauses 39 2.3. 39 2.3 I and 40.3 I)
(Clnuses39.2.1. 392.2, 39.3.39.4, 40.3.2,40.3.3anJ40.4.3)
COWRETF GRXUE
GRADE OI; CoWHE 5

A
looA_ ,-
hd M. I5
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
0.25 0.35
0.36
0.36
0.37
0.37
0.38
0.50 0.46
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.50
0.51
0.75 0.54
0.56 0 57 0 59 0.59 0.60
1.00 0.60
0.62
0.64
1.25
0.64
0.67
0.70
1.50 0.68
0.72
0.74
0.7b
0.78
0.79
1.75 0 71
0.75
0.78
0.80
0.82
0.84
2.00 0.71
0.79
0.82
0.84
0.86
0.88
2.25 0.71
0.81
0.85
0.88
0.90
0.92
(2)
2.50 0.71
0.82 0 88
2.75 0.71
0.82
3.00 0.71
0.82
0.90
0.92
0.66
0.71
0.91
0.94
0.96
0.67
0.73
0.68
0
0.93
0.96
0.99
Shear re. forcement shall be provided to

carry a f
s ear equal to VU - fC. bd. The
strength of shear reinforcement L- shall be
calculated as below:
74
0.95
0
N/mm
2.5
2.8
3.1
3.5
3.7
4.0
M 20
M25
M 30
M 35
M4O
M 20 M 25 M 30 M 35 M 40
(3)
(1)
TC ma.
M IS
98
a) For vertical stirrups:

v
-The wrm A, 1s the arc? of longitudinal tension

reinforcement which continuer al leas1 one effective
depth beyond the secttdn bein considered except ar
supports where the full arca o f tension rclnforccmenl
may be used provided the dckling conforms 10 25.2.2
and 2S.Z.3.
0.87/,
A,,
S
b) For inclined itirrups or a series of

bars bent-up at different cross-sections:
V, =
1.01
NOTE
0.87 fy At. d
5
(sin [Y + cos n)
c) For single bar or single group of parallel

bars, all bent-up at the same cross section:
VU, = 0.87J, A,, sin (I
where
39.2.3 W ITH SHEAR REINFORCEMENT Under no circumstances, even with shear

reinforcement, shall the nominal shear stress
in beams T,, exceed fc ,,,.. given in Table 14.
39.2.3.1 For solid slabs, the nominal shear
stress shall not exceed half the appropriate
values given in Table 14.
39.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement - When
rv is less than rC given in Table I3;minimum
shear reinforcement shall be provided in
accordance with 2.5.5.1.6.
3 9 . 4 D e s i g n o f Sheor ReinforcementWhen fr exceeds rC given in Table 13, shear
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the
following forms:
a) Vertical stirrups,
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and
c) lnciined stirrups.
VI
STRUCTURAL
DESIGN -SECTION 5
sv = spacing of the stirrups or bent-up

bars along the length of the
member;
TV = nominal shear stress;
7t = design shear strength of the
concrete;
b = breadth of the member which for
flanged beams, shall be taken as the
breadth of the web b,;
/y= characteristic strength of thestirrup
or bent-up reinforcement which
shall not be taken greater than
415 N/mm*,
angle bttween the inclined stirrup
or bent-up bar and the axis of the
member, not less than 45; and
Where bent up bars are provided, their

contribution towards shear resistance shall
not be more than half that of the total shear
reinforcement.
PART
A,, = total cross-sectional area of stirrup

legs or bent-up bars within a
distance s,;
CONCRETE
N OTE I -Where more lhan one type of shear

reinforcement is used 10 reinforce the same portion of the
beam, the total shear resistance shall be compulcd as the
sum of the mistances for the various types separately.
I-P
Norm 2-The arta of the stirrups shall not be Lear than

the minimum qwifieij in ZS.5.1.6.
40. L I M I T S T A T E O F C O L L A P S E :
TORSION
40.1 General-In general, where the
torsional resistance or stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the
analysis of structure, no specific calculations
for torsion will be necessary; adequatecontrol
of any torsional cracking being provided by
the required nominal shear reinforcement.
Where the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in the analysis,
the members shall be designed for torsion.
NOTE --The approach to design in this clause for torsion
is as follows:
Torsional reinforcement is not. calculated separately

from that required for bending and shear. Instead the
total longitudmal reiaforcement 18 determined for a
fictltlous bending moment which is a function of actual
bcndlng moment a n d t o r s i o n ; sirnllarly w e b
reinforcement IS determined for a fictiticius shear which IS
a function of actual shear and torsion.
The design rules laicj down in JO.3 and

40.4 shall apply to beams of solid rectangular
cross section. However, these clauses may
also be applied to flanged beams, by
substituting h, for h in which case they are
generally conservative; therefore specialist
literature may be referred to.
minimum shear reinforcement shall be

provided as per 25.5.1.6.
40.3.3 If tvc exceeds TV given in Table 13. both
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with 40.4.
40.4 Reinforrement in Members Subjecred
to Torsion
40.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when

required, shall consist of longitudinal and
40.4.2 LO N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T - The longitudinal reinforcement shall be
designed to resist an equivalent bending
moment, M,I. given by M,, = Mu + M,,
where
M, = bending moment at the cross section,

and
40. I. 1
40.2 Criric~l Serrion-Sections located less

than-a distance d, from the face of the support
may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is rhe
effective depth.
40.3 Shear and Torsion
40.3.1 EQ U I V A L E N T S H E A R- E u i v a l e n t
shear, V,. shall be calculated Prom the
formula:
where
V, = equivalent shear,
VU = shear,
where
T. is the torsional moment, D is the overall

depth of the beam and b is the breadth of the
beam.
Mt as
defined in 40.4.2 exceeds the numerical value
o f t h e m o m e n t M., l o n g i t u d i n a l
reinforcement shall be provided on the
flexural compression face, such that the beam
can also withstand an equivalent Mtz given by
Me3 = Mt - M,, the moment Mtz being taken
as acting in the opposite sense to the moment
M.
40.4.2.1 If the numerical value of
40.4.3 TR A N S V E R S E R E I N F O R C E M E N T - Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner

longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross
section & given by
FS,
TS
AS, = b>, (0*87/,) + 2.5 d, (0*87/,)
but the total transverse reinforcement shall
not be less than
(fw - T<) b.s,
Tu = torsional moment, and

b = breadth of beam.
The equivalent nominal shear stress, rwr in
this case .shall be calculated as iven in 39. I,
except for substituting VU by V,. t he values of
rrr shall not exceed the values of rC ,,,., given in
Table 14.
40.3.2 If the equivalent nomrnal shear stress,
m does not exceed r., given in Table 13.
VI-s-
0.87 f,
where
Tu = torsiontil moment,
V = shear force,
3 = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
b, = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
width,
N A T I O N A L BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
d, = centre to centre distance between

depth,
b Ts breadth of the member,
43.3 A s s u m p t i o n s f o r D e s i g n o f
Members-In the methods based on elastic
theory, the following assumptions shall be
made:
At any.. cross section, plane sections
before bending remain plane after
bending.
h = characteristic strength ofrhc stirrup

reinforcement,
7C .= equivalent shear stress as specified
in 40.3.1, and
b)
Tc = shear strength of the concrete as per

Table 13.
41. LlMlTSTATEOFSERVlCEABlLITY:
DEFLECTION
4 1 . 1 Flexural Members-In a l l n o r m a l
cases, the deflection of a flexural member will
not be excessive if the ratio of its span to its
effective depth is not greater than the
appropriate ratios given in 22.3. When
deflections are calculated according to
Appendix B, they shall not exceed the
permissible values given in 22.2.
42. LIMtTSTATEOFSERVlCEABlLITY:
CRACKING
42.1 Flexural Members - In general,
compliance with the spacing requirements of
reinforcement given in 25.3.2. should be
sufficient to control flexural cracking.
42.2 Compression Members -~ Cracks due to
bending in a compression member subjected
to a design axial load greater than 0.2.&k A,,
where Jet is the characteristic compressive
strength of concrete and A, is the area of the
gross section of the member, need not bc
checked. A member subjected to lesser load
than 0.2Jk A, may be considered as a flcxural
member for the purpose of crack control (see
42. I).
All tensile stresses are taken up by

reinforcement and none by concrete,
except as otherwise specifically
permttted.
cl The stress-strain relationship of steel and

concrete, under working loads, is a
straight line.
d)
The modular ratio m has the value 280

3 ocbc
where CT,& is permissible compressive stress

due to bending in concrete in N/mm as
specified in Table IS.
NOTE ~ The expression given for m partially takes into
account long-term cffec~s such as creep. Therefore this m
is not the same as the modular ratio derived based on the
value of .!I, given in S.2.3.l.
TABLE IS PERMISSIBLE STRESSES IN CONCRETE

(Clause3 43.3, 44.1. 44.1.2, 44.3 and46.2)
All values in N/mm
G
RADE
OF
C ONCRETE
~RMISMBLE STRESS
IN
C OMPRESSION
Bending
,
Direct
PERMISSIBLE
STRESS IN
BOND
( AV E R A G E ) F O R
PLAIN BARS
IN T E N S I O N
(2)
(3)
(4)
a&c
UCC
*bd
3.0
2.5
M 1s
5.0
4.0
0.6
M 20
7.0
5.0
0.8
0.9
(1)
M IO
S E C T I O N SA(f) S T R U C T U R A L
DESIGN: WORKING STRESS METHOD
u 25
8.5
6.0
43. GENERAL
M 30
IO.0
8.0
I.0
M 3s
I I.5
9.0
I.1
M40
13.0
10.0
I.2
43. I General Design Requirements - The

general design requirtmcnts of Section SA(c)
shall apply to this part.
13.2 Redistribution of Moments-Except
where the sim lifted analysis using
coefficients (see 2P.5) is used. the moments

O v e r the
gu
ports
NOTE 2 -The bond stress given in cold ~lull be incrcwd

by 25 pcrcenl for ban in compression.
for any assumed
arrangement o P loading, includmg the dead

load moments may each be increased or
decreased by not more than 15 percent,
provided that these modified moments over
the supports are used for the calculation of the
corresponding moments in the spans.
FART V I
HOTE I -The valuer of permissible shear swear in

concrete are given in Table I?.
tTlUClUUL DtSlGN-U&ON
5 CONC~LTt

44.1 Permissible Stresses in Concretr-
Permirsiblc stresses for the various gmlr of
concrete shall be taken as .those given in

Tables 15 and If.
Nolr For mcrease in strength with age. 5.2 I shall be

apphcablc (we also Note 3 of 52.1) The valuer of
permlsslblc stress shall be obtained by lnterpolatlon
between. rhc grades of concrete.
DIRKI TENSION F o r m e m b e r s In
direct tension, when full tension is taken by
the reinforcement alone, the tensile stress
shall be not greater than the values given
below:
7ensile Slress.
Grade of Concrult*
N/mm
44.1.1
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
IO
I5
20
25
30
35
40
1.2
2.0
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.4
The tensile stress shall be calculated as

F,
A, + trr A,,
where
E = total tension on the member minus
pretension in steel, if any, before
concreting,
A, = cross-sectional area of concrete
excluding any finishing material and
reinforcing steel;
45. PERMISSIBLE LOADS IN

COMPRESSION MEMBERS
45.1 Pedestals and Short Columns w,irh
Lateral Ties-The axiai load P permissible
on a pedestal or short column reinforced with
longitudinal bars and lateral ties shall not
exceed that given by the following equation:
p = us< A, + a,, A,,

where
oci = permissible stress in concrete in
direct compression.
A, = cross-sectronal area. of Concrete
excluding any finishing material and
reinforcing steel,
OK = permissible compressive stress for
column bars, and
A,, = cross-sectional
longitudinal steel.
area
of the
NC111
1 h e m~mmum cccenrrlciry mcnrloned HI 24 4
may he deemed ~o,be incurporated in theaboveequation.
Shorr C o l u m n s s,irh Helical

Rtw~fi~rcrrrrem - I he permissible load for
columns with helical reinforcement satisfying
the requirement 01 36.4. I shall be 1.05 times
the permissible load for similar member with
lateral ties or rings.
45.2
111 -_ modular r~atio; and

A,, = cross-sectional area of reinforcing
steel in tension.
44.1.2 BOND SIKFSS tC)R DEfXIRMEDRARS
For deformed bars conforming IO accepted
standards [Vi-S( I I)]. the bond stresses given
in Table 15 may be increased by 40 percent.
4 4 . 2 Pernli.~.~ibl~J SIresscs i n SIEP~
Permissible stresses in steel
Rt~in_/krtwc~nr
reinforcement shall not exceed the values
specified in Table 16.
442.1 In flcxural members the value of cl,,
given in Table 16 is applicable at the centroid
of the tensile reinforcement subject to the
condition that when more than one layer of
tensile reinforcement is pr,ovided. the stress at
the centroid of the outermost layer shall not
exceed by more than IO percent the value
given in Table 16.
44.3 In~r~~ase in Permissible Swesses - Where
stresses due to wind (or earthquake),
temperature and shrinkage effects are
combined with tho,e due to dead, live and
impact load, the stresses specified in Tables
15. 16 and I7 may be exceeded up to a limit of
33 f percent. Wind and seismic forces need
not be considered as acting simultaneously.
45.3 Long C o l u m n s - T h e m a x i m u m
permissible stress in a reinforced concrete
column or part thereof having a ratio of
effective column length to least lateral
dimension above 12 shall not exceed that
which results from the multiplication of the
appropriate maximum permissible stress as
specified under 44.1 and 44.2 by the
coefficient C, given by the following formula:
1
C,= ]*25-L
486
where
c, = reduction coefficient;
I,, = effective length of column; and
b= least lateral dimension ofcolumn; for
column with helical reinforcement, b
is the diameter of the core.
For more exact calculations, the maximum
permissible stresses in a reinforced ccncrete
column or part thereof having a ratio of
effective column length to least lateral radius
of gyration above 40 shall not exceed those
which result from the multiplication of the
appropriate maximum permissible stresses
specified under 44.1 and 44.2 by the
PMTlONAL WlLDlNC
CODE
OF
INDIA
coefficient C, given by the following formula:

I
c, = 1.25 - A
160 i,ifi
AC
where imin is the least radius of gyration.

45.4 Composite Columns
a) A LLOWABLF LOAD-The allowable
axial load P on a composite cokmn
consisting of structural steel or cast-iron
column thoroughly encased in concrete
reinforced with both longitudinal and
spiral reinforcement shall not exceed
that given by the following formula:
P = ucc A, + ac A, t am A,,,
occ = permissible stress in concrete in
direct compression;
net area of concrete section; which is

equal to the gross area of the concrete
section - A, - A,,,;
permissible compressive stress for
column bars;
cross-sectional area of longitudinal
bar reinforcement;
allowable unit stress in metal core,
not to exceed 125 N/mm* for a steel

core, or 70 N/mm for a cast iron
core; and
the cross-sectional area of the steel or
cast iron core.
b)
M ETAL C ORE
AND
REINFORCEMENT-
The cross-sectional area of the metal

core shall not exceed 20 percent of the
gross area of the column. If a hollow
metal core is used, it shall be filled with
concrete. The amount of longitudinal
and spiral reinforcement and the
TABLE 16 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES Ilc: STFFI HGINTFORCEMENT

(CllWe #.2,4+.3 and 4.2)
-fVPE OF STRESS IN
STEEL REINFoI~CE~~EVI
~EIMISSIHLC Srarssts
IN
N/mm*
Mild Steel Ban. or Medium Tensile Steel or Hi h Yield Strength

Deformed Mild Steel
Deformed Medium
Defarmed Ban ConBan Conforming to
Ten&c Steel Ban forming to(Gmdc Fe419
Acce ted Standards Conforming to Accc ted Acce ted Standards
Stand&r& [VI-Y I P)]
PVM(l I)]
F I-Y1 01
(1)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(5)
(a) Up to and including 20 mm
140
230
(b) Over 20 mm
I30
Half the guaranteed

yield stress subject to a
maximum of 190
130
I30
I90
Tmrion (u. .or 0,):
ii)
Compression in column bara (*=)
iii)
Compression in bara in a beam or rlab

when the corn reuive r&stance of the
concrctc ir ta Pen into account
iv)
Compression in ban in a bum or &tab

when the comprasivc raistana of thy
concrete ir not taken into account:
a) Up to and
including
The calculated compressive strcu in tk surrounding concrete

multiplied by I .S times the modular ratio or oy whichever is lower
140
I30
b)Gvcr2Omm
230
Half t h e guxrantced
yield streu rubect to a
maximum of I bo
I90
I90
N OTE I -For hi yield rtren h deformed bare of Grade Fe 500 the permiribk ~trcu in direct tension and fkxuralte~lon
shall be 0.55/,. rhe pcrmirrl%Ie (trasa for abear and compmuion reinforcement ~hsll bs as for Omde Fe 415.
;;N:;myor welded wire fabric conforming to accepted standard [VI-5(l I)]. tk pcnnksiblr valun in ten&ion u k
NOTE 3-For the purpcne of this section. the yield strew of atcek, for which there ir no ckarly defmcd yield point rhould be
taken to be 0.2 percent proof rtrcrr.
NOTL 4-When mild steel conformin@ to Grade II i, used. the permkxibk strclKl rhrll be 90 pwccnt of the
iul#t.
rhucr in WI. (3). or if the design details have already been worked out on the baair of mild rteel conforming to r
rule I; the
uu of reinforcement shall be increased by IO percent of that required for Grade I Steel.
?MT W IlRUCtlJBAL
DWON -tWXlTON
I CONCRCTE
requirements as to spacing of bars,

details of splices and thickness of
protective shell outside the spiral, shall
conform to requirements of dS.S.3. A
clearance of at least 75 mm shall be
maintained between the spiral and the
metal core at all points, except that
when the core consists of a structural
steel H-column, the minimum clearance
may be reduced to 50 mm.
Secrion-A member subjected to axial load

and bending (due to eccentricity of load,
monolithic construction, lateral forces, etc)
shall be considered safe provided the
following conditions are satisfied;
~ Ghc,r.l
Ucc.ul
a ) -___- t
provided for by the use of bearing

members, such as billets, brackets or
other positive connections; these shall
be provided at the top of the metal core
and at intermediate floor levels where
required. The column as a whole shall
satisfy the requirements of formula
given under (a) at any point; in addition
to this, the reinforced concrete portion
shall be designed to carry, according to
45.1 or 45.2 as the case may be, all floor
loads brought into the column at levels
between the metal brackets or
connections. In applying the formulae
under 45.1 or 45.2 the gross area of
column shall be taken to be the area of
the concrete section outside the metal
core, and the allowable load on the
reinforced concrete section shall be
further limited to 0.28 fc~ times gross
sectional area of the column.
A L L O W A B L E L OAD
ON
M ETAL C O R E
ONLY-The metal core of composite

columns shall be designed to carry
safely any construction or other loads to
be placed upon them prior to their
encasement in concrete.
46. MEMBERS SUBJECT TO COMBINED
AXIAL LOAD AND BENDING
4 6 . 1 D e s i g n B a s e d o n Untracked
I-F58
Rh
OCC
where
S PLICES AND C O N N E C T I O N S OF ME I AL
C O R E S - M e t a l cores in composite
columns shall be accurately milled at

splices and positive provisions shall be
made for alignment of one core above
another. At thecolumn base, provisions
shall be made to transfer the load to the
footing at safe unit stresses in
accordance with 33. The base of the
metal section shall be designed to
transfer the load from the entire
composite columns to the footing, or it
may, be designed to transfer the load
from the metal section only, provided it
is placed in the pier or pedestal as to
leave ample section of concrete above
the base for the transfer of load from the
reinforced concrete section of the
column by means of bond on the
vertical reinforcement and by direct
compression on the concrete. Transfer
of loads to the metal core shall be
G,~,I = calculated direct compressive stress

in concrete,
uLL = permissible axial compressive stress
in concrete,
uch,ia~ = calculated bending compressive
stress in concrete, and
u,h~ = permissible bending compressive
stress in concrete.
b) the resultant tension in concrete is not
greater than 35 percent and 25 percent

of the resultant comprtssion for biaxial
and uniaxial bending respectively, or
does not exceed three-fourths, the 7 day
modulus of rupture of concrete.
P
for columns wlch IICS

A , + I 5 mA,,
where P. A, and A. nrc as defined III 45.1 and m 1s the
modular ratio.
NOTE I - UW.ll =
2-oo,*. <,, = 5
where M equals the moment
z
and Z equals modulus of section. In the case of sectlons
suhlecr to moments in two dIrections, the stress shall be
calcu!atcd separately and added algcbralcqlly.
OTE
46.2 Design Based on Cracked Secrion ----If

the requirements specified in 46.1 are not
satisfied, the stresses in concrete and steel

shall be calculated by the theory of cracked
section in which the tensile resistance of
concrete is ignored. If the calculated stresses

are within the permissible stresses specified in
Tables 15, I6 and 17, the section may be
assumed to be safe.
NOTE -The maximum stress III concrete and steel may
be found from tables and charts based on the cracked
scclmn theory or directly by determining the no-stress
line which should ratlrfy the following requirements:
The direct load should be equal to the algebraic
sum of the forces on concrete and steel,
The moment of the external loada about any
aference line should be equal to the algebraic sum
of the moment of the forces in concrete (ignoring
the tensile force in concrete) and mcl about the
same line. and
The moment of the external loads about any other
reference lines should be equal to the rlpebrsrc
sum of the moment of the forces in concrete
(ignoring the tensile force in concrete) and steel
abobt the same line.
N A T I O N A L WILMNC
CODL OF INDIA
shall be modifti as:

TABLE 17 PERMISSIBLE SHEAR STRESS IN
CONCRETE, f,, N/mm'
u
(Clouses44.1, 44.3,46,2.4?.2.1.47.2.2,47.3.47.4,48.3.2.
48.3.3. ond 48.4.3,
100 A,
b
G RADE
fi15
M20
OF
M2S
b d
and Toble 15)
C ONCRETE
M30
M35
M40
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
0.25
0.22
0.22
0 23
0.23
0.23
0.50
0.29
0.15
0.34
I.00
0.37
1.25
0.40
1.50
0.42
1.75
0.44
2.00
0.44
2.25
0.44
2.50
9.44
2.75
0.44
0.44
3.00
and above
0.30
0.35
0.39
0.42
0.45
0.47
0.49
0.51
0.51
0.51
O.Sl
0.3)
0.36
0.40
0.44
0.46
0.49
0.51
0.53
0.55
0.56
0.57
0.31
0.37
0.41
0.43
0.48
0.50
0.53
0.55
0.57
0.58
0.60
0.31
0.37
0.42
0.45
0.49
0.52
0.54
0.56
0.58
0:60
0.62
0.23
0.32
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.49
0.52
0.55
0.57
0.60
0.62
0.63
where
rV, V, b and dare the same as in 42.1,
M= bending moment at the section, and
/3 = angle between the top and the
bottom edges of the beam.
The negative siio in the formula applies when
the bending mo,ment Mincreascs numerically
in the same direction as the effective depthd
increases, and the positive sign when the
moment decreases numerically in this
direction.
47.2 Design Shear Strengrh of Concrete
47.2.1 W I T H O U T S H E A R R E I N F O R C E MENT-The permissible shear stress in
c o n c r e t e in btam.s w i t h o u t oherr
reinforcement is given in Table 17.

NOW-A, is rhnt area of Ion irudinal t e n s i o n
reinforcement which continuer at Rast one effective
depth beyond the section bein considered except St
rupponr where the full area o k-ion reinforcement
ma be used provided the derailing conforms to J5Jj.Z
anrK 25.2.3.
47.2.1 ,I For solid slabs the pcrmiesiblc shear

stress in concrete shall hekr. where k has the
value given below:
OvtruN Depth of Slab, MIII
Subjected IO Combined
Dirccr Load and Flexure- M e m b e r s
subjected to combined direct load and flexure
and designed by the methods based on elastic

theory should be, further checked for their
strength under ultimate load conditions to
ensure the desired margin of safety; this check
is specially necessary when the bending
moment is due io horizontal loads.
%
1:20
150 or less
No~~--Thir does not apply lo flat rlrk for which 30.6

shall npply.
47.2.2 S H E A R S T R E N G T H
A XIAL
OF
M EMBERS
C OMPRESSION - F o r
members subjected to axial compression P,
Stress-The nominal
shear stress T in beams or slabs of uniform
depth shall be calculated by the following
cquatioa
47. I Nominal Shear
the permissible shear stress in concrete sc

iven in Table 17. shall be multiplied by the
following factor:
-. 5P
6=1+- but not exceeding I.5

A&t
T = -
bd
where
V =
shear force due to design loads;

b = breadth of the member, which for
flanged sections shall be taken as the
breadth of the web, b,; and
47.1.1 B EAMS OF V ARYING D EPTH --In the
case of beams of varying depth, the equation

?ART VI
I.25
1.30
::
U NDER
47. SHEAR
I*!!
1:;;
E Or morc
46.3 Members
STIUCTURAL DxSSIGN - SLCTION 3 CONCRxTt
where
P=
axial compressive force in Newtonr,
A, * gross aren of the concrete section in

mm, and
&k
= characteristic comprosive strength
of concrete.
47.2.3 W ITH S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T -
When shear reinforcement is provided the

,.P
nominal shear stress rv in beams shall not

exceed TV,,,. given in Table 18.
47.2.3.1 For slabs, I shall not exceed half the
value of rcnul given in Table 18.
S = spacing of the stirrups or bent-up

Tc =
b =
TABLE 18 MAXJMUM SHFAR STRESS. Tc~w, N/mm

(C&us 47.2.3. 47.2.3.1 and 4X3.1)
CONCRETE GRADE
Tc max. NI mm*
M 15
;:
2:s
47.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement When rr is less than ~~ given in Table 17,
provided ip accordance with 2.5.5.1.6.
47.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement When sv exceeds rC given in Table 17, shear
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the
following forms:
a) Vertical stirrups,
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and
Ic) Inclined stirrups,
Where bent up bars are provided, their
contribution towards shear resistance shall
not, be more than half that of the total shear
reinforcement.
Shear reinforcement shall be provided to
carry a shear equal to V- r,.bd. The strength
of shear reinforcement V, shall be calculated
as below:
a) For vertical stirrups

a, A, d
S
b) For inclined stirrups or a series of bars

bent-up at different cross sections:
v, =
ff=
II
1.9
E
M30
M 35
M40
v, =
uw =
un A, d
SV
(sin Q + cos a)
d For single bar or single group of parallel

bars, all bent-up at the same cross
section:
v, = un A, sin a
where
d =
bars along the length of the member;

design shear strength of the concrete;
breadth of the member which, for
flanged beams, shall be taken as the
breadth of the web b,;.
permissible tensile stress ,in shear
reinforcement which shall not be
taken greater than 230 N,/mm;
angle between the inclined stirrup or
bent up bar and the axis of the
member, not less than 45; and
effective depth.
NOTE-Where more than one type of shear

reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of the
beam, the total shear resistance shall be computed as the
.sum of the resistance for the various types separately. The
area of the stirrups shall not be less than the mimmum
specified in 25.5.1.6.
TORSION
48.1 General-In general, where the
torsional resistance or stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the
analysis of structure, no specific calculations
for torsion will be necessary; adequate control
of any torsional cracking being provided by
the required nominal shear reinforcement.
Where the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in the analysis,
48.
NOTE -The approach to design in this clause for torsion
is aI follows:
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated s,eparately

from that required for bending and shear. Instead the
total longttudinal reinforcement is determined for a
fictitious bendmg moment which is a function of actual

b e n d i n g m o m e n t .and torsion; similarly w e b
reinforcement IS determined for a fictwous shear which is
a function of actual shear and torsion.
48.1.1 The design rules laid down in 48.3 and

48.4 shall apply to beams of solid rectangular
cross section. However, these clauses may
also be applied to flanged beams by
substituting b, for 6, in which Case they are
generally conservative; therefore, specialist
literature may be referred to.
48.2 Cririral Secrion - Sections located less
than a distance d. from the faceof the support
may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is the
effective depth.
48.3 Shear and Torsion
48.3.1 EQ U I V A L E N T SHEAR - E q u i v a l e n t
shear, V,, shall be calculated from the
formula:
A , = total ctou-sect ional area of stirrup
legs or bent-up ban within a distance

2%
VIP
v.= v+ 1.6;
where
V, = equivalent shear,
V = shear,
T = torsional moment,
b = breadth of beam.
The.equivalent nominal shear stress, T.,, in
this case shall be calculated as given in 47.1,
except for substituting V by VC. The values of
rur shall not exceed the values of rc maX given in
Table 18.
48.3.2 If the equivalent nominal shear stress
rvc does not exceed rcr given in Table 17,
provided as specified in25.5.1.6,
48.3.3 If rve exceeds rC given in Table 17. both
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with 48.4.
48.4 Reinforcement in Members Subjected
IO
Torsion
48.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when
required, shall consist of longitudinal and

48.4.2 LONGITUDINAL R EINFORCEMENT - The

longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed
to resist an equivalent bending moment, M.I,
given by M,I = M + A4,,
where
M= bending moment at the cross section,
and
where Tisthetorsional
M, = T f+Db!
1.7
moment, D is the overall depth of the
beam and b is the breadth of the beam
?MT
n m- ---s-
48.4.2.1 If the numerical value of M, as

defined in 48.4.2 exceeds the numerical value
of the m0ment.M. longitudinal reinforcement
shall be provided on the flexural compression
face, such that the beam can also withstand an -equivalent moment Mc2 given by
M.2 = M, - M. the moment Me2 being taken as
acting in the opposite sense lo the moment M.
48.4.3 T RANSVERSE R EINFORCEMENT ~
Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross
section A,,, given by
A,,= Ts,_ +
s,
, but
2.5 d, usv
br A& u,v
the total transverse reinforcement shall not be
less than
(rvc _ rc) b.Sv
where
T
v
S
b,
=
=
=
=
UlY
torsional moment,
shear force,
spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
centre to centre distance between
width,
d, = centre to centre distance between
depth,
b = breadth of the member,
an = permissible tensile stress in shear
reinforcement,
=
equivalent shear stress as specified in
7C
48.3.1, and
TC = shear strength of the concrete as
APPENDlX A
REQUIREMENTS FOR DURABILITY
A-l. Minimum cement contents for different

exposures and sulphate attack are given in
Tables 19 and 20, for general guidance.
A-2. To minimize the chances of
deterioration of concrete from harmful
chemical salts, the levels of such harmful salts
in concrete coming from the concrete
materials, that is, cement, aggregates. water

and admixtures, as well as by diffusion from
the environments should be limited.
Generally, the total amount of chlorides (as
Cl) and_ the total amount of soluble sulphates
(as SO,) in the concrete at the time of placing
should be limited to 0. I5 p&cent by mass of
cement and 4 percent by mass of cement,
respectively.
mTABLE 19 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIRED IN CEMENT CONCRETE TO

ENSURE DURABILITY UNDER SPECIFIED CONDITIONS OF EXPOSURE
(Clmu~s 34.3.2 imd A-l)
R E I N F O R C E D COHCRFTE
P L A I N CDNCRETE
EXPOSURE
-
M i n i m u m t Maxunum Minimum1 Maxlmum

Water
Water
Cement
Cement
Cement
Content
Content
C;$$
Ratio
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(kg/m)
(5)
(kg/m)
Mild - For example, completely protected against weather,

or aggressive conditions, except for a brief period of
exposure IO normal weather conditions during construction
220
0.7
250
0.65
For exampk, sheltered from heavy and wind

driven rain and against freezing, whilst saturated with
water; buried concrete in soil and concrete continuously
under water
Severe -- For cxampk. exposed to sea water, alternate
wetting and drying and to freezing whilrt wet. subject to
heavy condensation or corrosive fumes.
250
0.6
290
0.55
310
0.5
360
0.45
Modem/e-
Nom 1 - When the maximum water-cement ratio can be strictly controlled, the cement content giveninthe table may be
reduced by 10 percent.
tc For 40 mm aggregate, it should be reduced by about
IF 2 - The minimum amcnt content is bwd on 20 mm aggrc
10 percent; for 12.5 mm aggregate, it should be increased by a I?
out IO percent.
No
TABLE 20 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE ATTACK

(Clcrrur A-I)
CLASS
I-
C O N C E N T R A T I O N O F SULPHATES
EXPRE~ED AS so,
*
R EQUIREMENTS FOR D E N S E.
F U L L Y CBMPA~D ConC R E T E M A D E W I T H AGGREOATES COMPLYING WITH
A C C EP TED STANDARD
-t-YPE OF &~ENT
\
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
L.ess than 0.2
Less than 30
[VkY4)1
In Soil
v l n Ground
SO, in 2:1 Water (Parts
p e r latlloo)
(Percent;
Water
extract
gl
Minimum
Maximum
Cement
Free Water/
Content Cement Ratio
(5)
OrdiiPcntland cement or Polilsnd
slag cement or Portland pouolana
cement
(6)
kg/m
(7)
280
0.55
(Conrint&
I-F
NAllONAl.
lJlLDtNG
COOL OF
INDIA
TABLE 20 REQUIREMENIS
CLASS
CONCENTRATION
EXPRESSL
OF
D AS
FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE AlTACK-Conrd
SIJLPHATES
SO,
T YPES
OF
C EMENT
REOUIREMENIS FOH LANGE

F;LLY COMPACTED CONC R E T E M ADE WITH ACGREGArES COMPLYING WI,
AKEFTED ST A N D A R D
\[VI-3411
In Soil
Total SO,
(Percent)
(2)
0.2 to 0.5
SO,in 2:
water
extract
b In Ground
Water (Parts
per 100 ooo)
isi 1
(3)
--
(5)
(4)
30 to 120
Ordinay Portland ament or Portland

slag ccmcnt or PortLand pouolnna
cement
Supcrsulphate
0.5 to I.0
I.9.LO 3.1
i
n
i
m
u
m
Free Water!
Cement
Content Cement Ratio
120 IO 250
cerncnf
Supcrsulphatcd cement
(7)
(6)
kg/m
330
0.50
310
0.50
330
0.H)
NOTE I - This table applia only io concrete made wnh 20 mm aggregate complymg wlrh the rquircmcnts of accepted
standard [ IV-5(4)] placed in near-neutral round water ofpH 6 to pH 9, contaming naturally occurring sulphatcs hut no1
contaminants such as ammonium salts. F or 40 mm aggregate. the value may be reduced by about I5 pcrcenr and for
12.5 mm aggregate the vaiuc may bc increased by about 15 pcrccm. Concrete prepared from ordinary Portland cement
would not bc recommended tn acidic conditions @H 6 or less) Supersulphatcd cement gives an acceptable ltfe providtd
that the concrete is dcnx and prcparcd wnh a waler, cement ratio of 0.4 or less. m mmeral acids, down to ptl 3 5
NOTE 2 -- The cement conrents given in Clasr 2 arc the mmlmum recommended. For SO, contents near the upper limit 01
Class 2. ccmem contents above these rmmmum are advised.
Norc 3 - Where the total SOI in co12 cxcccds 0.5 pcrrem. then a 2: I water extract may result ma lower sitcclasslficatton
if much of the sulphatc w prcscnt as low solubility calcium sulphate.
Nort 4 ~ For ~~crc conditions, such as thm. sec~tons under hydrostatic pressure on one sldc only and sections panly
immcrcscd. considerations should bc given to a further reducrlons of wa:cr/ccmcnt ratio, and if ncceasasry an increase in
the cement content to ensure the degree of workability needed for full compaction and thus minimum permeablhty.
NOTE 5 - Portland slag cement conforming to accepted standards [VI-5(3)] with slag content more than 50 percent
cxhlblts better sulphatc resisting properties.
NOTF 6 - Ordinary Portland cement with the additional requirement that C) A content bc not more than 5 pcrccnt and
ZC\A+C.AF (or its solid solution 4CaO. AIzO~,Fc~O~+ZCaO, FczOa) be not more than 20 pcrccnt may bc used in place of
supcrsulpharcd cement.
APPENDIX J3
(Clauses 21.3.2, 22.2.1 and 41.1)
CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
51. TOTAL DEFLECTION
B-1.1 The total d flection shall be taken as
the sum of t h/ short-term deflection
determined in accordance with B-2 and the
long-term deflection, in accordance with 83
and B-4.
B-2. SHORT-TERM DEFLECTION
B-2.1 The short-term deflection may be
calculated by the usual methods for elastic
deflections using the short-term modulus of
elasticity of concrete, Ec and an effective
moment of inertia I,rr given by the following
equation:
fr
Icrr =
1.2 -
( J
Mr z
-_l-$%
Md
;but
1, = moment of inertia of the cracked

sec!ion;
l;r I,
M, = cracking moment, equal to Yt
where _A is the modulus of rupture of

concrete, I,, is the moment of inertia of
the gross section about the centroidal
axis, neglecting the reinforcement,
and yI is the distance from centroidal

axis of gross section, neglecting the
reinforcement, to extreme fibre in
tension;
M= maximum moment under service
loads;
z =
lever arm;
X= depth of neutral axis;
d = effective depth;
6, = breadth of web; and
b = breadth of compression face.
For continuous beams, deflection shali be
calculated using the values of I,, I,, and M,
modified by the following equation:
X,+k, (X1:X2\ +(I-k,)Xo
\
X( = modified value of X.
values of X at the supports,
x0 = value of X at mid span,
k, = coefficient given in Table 21. and
,Y = value of I,, 1,, or M, as appropriate.
x,,x2 =
VALUES OF COEFFICIENT. kl
OS or ksr
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
I.0
I.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
acl=h416j
where
k3 is a constant depending upon the support
conditions,
0.5 for cantilevers,
0.125 for simply supported members,
0J.It.I; ,,d members continuous at one
0.063for fully continuous members.
k 0 ea
tics is shrinkage curvature equal to 7
where ccl is the ultimate shrinkage strain of

concrete (see 5.2.4)
L,=o.7++I
where
TABLE 21
be computed from the following equation:
Ok
0.08
0.16
0.30
0.50
0.73
0.91
0.91
1.0
M I + MI
1:= ~
MFl+MFl
where
moments, and
fixed
end
moments.
Mr1, Mfl =
GI.0 for0.25<P,-P,<I.O
A - PC
= 0.65 - < 1.0 forP,-P, 3 1.0
100 A.,
100 A,,
P, = - andP,= bd
bd
and D is the total depth of the section,
and 1 is the length of span
8-I. DEFLECTION DUE TO CREEP
fU.1 The creep deflection due to permanent
loads, uss fp,,,,) may be obtained from the
following equation:
initial plus creep deflection due

to permanent loads obtained
using an elastic analysis with an
effective modulus of elasticity.
MIMI . support
B-3. DEFLECTION DUE TO SHRINKAGE

&~.I The defkction due to shrinkage acr may
L = A, 0 being the creep

coefficient, and
short-term deflection due to
permanent load using G.
APPENDIX C
(Chses 23.4 ond 36.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN IWO DIRECTIONS
C-f. RESTRAINED SLABS
where
C-1.0. When the corners of a slab are prevented from lifting, the slab may be designed
as specified in C-l.1 to C-1.11.
a. and or are coefficients given in Table
22,
w = total design load per unit area,
C-f .I The maximum bending moments per
M,. MY= moments on strips of unit width

;rdnning 1, and f, respectively,
unit width in a slab are given by the followmg

equations:
1, and l,= lengths of the shorter span and

longer span respectively.
lu, =&I wi2

MY=ay wl;
X
TABLE 22 BENDING MOMENT COEFFICIENTS FOR RECTANGULAR PANELS SUPPORTED ON

FOUR SIDES WITH PROVISION FOR TOR SION AT CORNERS
CASE
No
(1)
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
8.
T YPE
OF
P ANEL AND M
-CONSIDERED
(2)
Interior Panels:
Negative moment at continuous cdgc
Positive moment at mid-#pan
One Short Edge Discontinuous:
Negative moment at continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span
One Long &lge Disconrinuous:
Negative moment at continuow cdgc
Positive moment at mid-span
Awe Adjawr Edges DisconMnww:
Negative moment at continuow edge
Positive moment at mid-cpm
7bo Short &i&es Disconfitwotu:
Negative moment at wntinuouw cd~
Positive moment at mid-opaa
Tbo bng &a Dircontinuow
Negative moment at continuow edge
Positive monyat at mid-rpan
?hree E?ige~ ,Dkon~imwu
(&e L o n g tugw conrimrow):
Neptiye moownt at coatinuora edge
Positive moment at mid-sPan
llvcc Edges Diwontbwau~
(/AIe big Ekigu Conrinww)
Ncc(i*lo mamcot at c+mtiauow edm
9.
SHORT SPAN ~EFFlClENTs

(VALUES OF 4th)
OMENTS
1.0
I.1
1.2
(3)
(4)
(9
1.3 1.4
(6)
(t)
a,
kBNG SPAN
COEFFICIENTS a,
FOR ALL
VALUES
I.5 I.75
(8)
(9)
2.0
(10)
0.032 0.037 0.043 0.047 0.051

0.024 0.028 0.032 0.034 0.039
0.053 0.060 0.065

0.041 0.045 0.049
0.037 0.043 0.048 0.051 0.0s

0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041
0.09 0.064 0.068
0 . 0 4 4 o.Iw1 0.052
0.031 0.044 0.052 0.051 0.063 0.067 0.077 0.085

0.028 0.033 0.039 0.044 0.047 0.051 0.059 0.065
0.047 0.033 0.060 0.065 0.071
0.035 0.040 0.045 0.049 0.053
0.075 0.064 0.091

0.0% 0.063 0.069
0.045 0.049 0.052 0.0s 0.059

0.035 0.037 0 . 0 1 0 0 . 9 1 3 o.w4
o.om
__
--
0.065 o.aL)
0.W 0.049 0.052
-_
0.035 0.034 0.051 0.057 0.063 0.068
o.oa o.a8
o.os7 0 . 0 6 ) 0.071 0.076 0.010 0.01) 0.091 0.097

0.043 0.04a 0.053 4057 0.060 o.m4 0.w 0.073
--
-v-
?di?mmnmcat&tmidqu
0.w 0.051 0.0% 0.06s 0.m
0.076 0.017 0.096
FrSl@tLWC-h-i
?odh-staidqu,
0.0% 0.064 0.072 0.079 0.o.s
0.011 0.m 0.m
C-l.2 Slabs are considered as divided in each

direction into middle strips and edge strips as
shown in Fig. 23, the middle strip being threequarters of the width and each edge strip oneeighth of the width.
that corner. It shall consist of top and bottom

reinforcement. each with layers of bars placed
parallel to the sides of the-slab and extending
from the edges a minimum distance of onefifth of the shorter span. The area of
remforcemcnt in each of these four layers
shall be three-quarters of thearea required for
the maximum mid-span moment in the slab.
C-1.Y Torsion reinforcement equal to half
that described in C-l.8 shall be provided at a
corner contained by edges over only one of
which the slab is continuous.
23A
For Sprn 1.
C-l.10 Torsion reinforcements need not be

provided at any corner contained by edges
over both of which the slab is continuous.
C.I.11 Where &/IX IS greater than 2, the slabs
shall be designed as spanning one way.
C-2 SIMPLY SI!PPORTF.D SLARS
238 For Span I,

Ftg. 23 Division
M, = (zl Hli
of Slab
into Middle and

Edg p Strips
C-I.3 The maximum moments calculated as

in C-l.1 apply only to the middle strips and no
redistribution shall be made.

C-1.4 Tension
mid-span in the
the lower part of
continuous edge,
edge.
C-2-I When simply supported slabs do not

have adequate provision to resist torsion at
corners and to prevent the corners from
lifting, the maximum moments per unit width
are given by the following equation:
reinforcement provided at
middle strip shall extend in
the slab to within 0.25 I of a
or 0. I5 1 of a discontinuous
C-l.5 Over the continuous edges of a middle

strip, the tension reinforcement shall extend
in the upper part of the slab a distance of 0. I5 I
from the support. and at least 50 percent shall
extend a distance of 0.3 1.
C-l.6 At a discontinuous edge, negative
moments may arise. They depend on the
degree of fixity at the edge of the slab but, in
general, tension reinforcement equal to 50
percent of that provided at mid-span
extending 0. I I into the span will be sufficient.
C-l.7 Reinforcemellt rn edge strip, parallel to
that edge, shall comply with the minimum
given in Section SA(c) and the requirements
for torsion given in C-1.8, C-l.9 and C-1.10.
C-1.8 Torsion reinforcement shall be
provided at any corner where the slab is
simply supported on both edges meeting at
MY = by Uli
where
M., M,, w, I., I,aresameas those in C 1 .l,and
a, and Q~ are moment coefficients given i n
Table 23.
tABL.E 23 BENDING MOMENT (OFFICIENTS

FQR SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECtIONS
AT RIGHT ANGLES, SIMPLY S1IPPORTED
ON FOUR SIDES
a1
a,
0.062
0.042
0.041
0.074
0.059
0.084
0.093
0.055
0.05 I
0.099
0.104
0.046
0.037
0.113
0,118
0.029
0.122
0.020
0.014
0 124
-___- _. ._ _. _.__,_____
C.2.1.1 At least SO percent of the tension
reinforcement provided at mid-span should
extend to the supports. The remaining 50
percent should extend to within 0. Il. or 0. II,
of the support, as appropriate.
APPENDIX D
(Clause 24.2)
EFFECTIirE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
D-I. In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective length of columns in framed
structures may be obtained from the ratio of
effective length to unsupported length I.(/1
given in Fig. 24 when relative displacement of
the ends of the column is prevented and in
Fig. 25 when relative lateral displacement of
the ends is not prevented. In the latter case, it
is recommended that the effective length ratio
lcr// may not be taken to be less than 1.2.
NOTE 1 - Figures 24 and 25 arc reproduced from The
Structural Engineer No. 7, Volume 52. July 1974 by the
rmissioa of the Council of the Institution of Structural

&news. U.K.
NO: ,2 - In Fig. 24 and 25. /31 and & are equal to
&AC
where the summation is to be done for the

lx + EK.
men&s framing into a joint at to and bottom rcspcclively; K, and Kb being the fkxura P stlrfness for column
and beam respectively.
D-Z. For normal usage assuming idealized

conditions, the effective lengthI,, in a given
plane may be assessed on the basis of
Table 24.
Fig, 24 Effective Length Ratios/or a Column

in a Frame with no Sway
r1rco 0
0
P
E
P
Fig. 2.5 Effective Lengrh Rafio for u Column

in o Frame Without RestraintAgainst Sway
?Alt VI STBlJClURAL
DUltN-
S E C T I O N S CONCWTI
VW6
TABLE 24 EFFECI-WE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS

DEWIEE
OF
E N D R E S T R A I N T OF
MEMBER
(1)
R E CO MM E ND E D
VALUE of
E F F E C T I V E LENGIH
SVMNX
THEORETICAL VALUE
OF E F F E C T I V E
LENGTH
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.5 I
0.65 I
CRMlRESSlON
Effectively held in position and

restrained a@inst rotation at both
ends
Effectively held in position at both

ends. restrained against rotatton
at one end
Effectively held in position at both

ends. but not restrained against
rotation
1.00 I
1.00 I

mtrained against rotation at one
end. and nt the other mtrained
against rotation but not held in
position
1.00 I
I.20 I
Effectively held in posttion and

resrramed against rotation at one
end, and at the other partially
restrained ngamrt rotation but not
held III position
I.50 I
@T$
L
/
Effectively held ut position at one

end but not restrained against
rotation. and at the other end
restrained ngamst rotation hut not
held tn poswon
2.00 I
2.00 I
Effcctwtly held in position and

restrained against rotation at one
end but not held in position nor
restrained against rotation at the
other end
2.00 I
2.00 I
NOTE - 1 is the unsupported length of compression member.
VbP
~-
APPENDIX E
(Clause 37.1)
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SECTIONS
E-0. The moments of resistance of rectangular and T-sections based on the assumptions
of 37.1.are given in this Appendix.
value. Murh compression reinforcement may

be obtained from the following equation:
Mu- Mu,lirn=fe A, (d-d)
E-I. RECTANGULAR SECTIONS
E-I.1 Sections Without Compression Reinforcemenr - The moment of resistance of

nctangular sections without compression
reinforcement should be obtained as follows:
a) Determine the depth of neutral axis

from the following equation:
xu
_=
0.87 py A,,
0.36 /Ft bd
where
Mu, K,hm, d are same as ,in E-1.1,
fx = design stress in compress;on
reinforcement corresponding to a
0.003 5 (X, MI - d) f
strain of
X. .I
xurmlr is the limiting value of x. from 37.1,
A, = is-e; of compression reinforcement
.
b) If the value of x,/ dis less than the limiting value (see Note below 37.1).calculak the moment of resistance.by the
following equation:
d = depth of. compression reinforcement
from compression face.

The total area of tension reinforcement shal
be obtained from the following equation:
A., = A,,, + Aaz
M, = 0.87/, A,I d
)
the
If
the
value
of
x,/d
is
equal
to
cl
limiting value, the moment of resistance
of the section is given by the following
expression:
M y,,yn
= 0.36 xy (I -0.42 xy ) bdff,r
where
.4,, = area of the total tensile reinforcement,
A,,, = area of the tensile reinforcement for
a singly reinforced section for Mu, I,,,,,
and
A rrz = A,fJ(O.87/;.)
d) If xu/ d is greater than the limiting value,

the section should be redesigned.
In the above equations,
X =
d =
/y=
A,, =
fCk =
b =
M u&m
xu,nux
depth of neutral axis,

effective depth,
characteristic strength of reinforcement,
area of tension reinforcement,
chatact~tic compressive strength
of conorete,
width of the compression face,
limiting moment of resistance of
a sectton without compression
reinforcement, and
limiting value of xu from 37. I.
E-l.2 Section with Compression Reinforcement - Where the ultimate moment of

resistance. of section exceeds the lirriiting _
?AIT V I
8lRUCTURAL DC!UCN~SCCllDN
4 CONCMCTC
E-2. FLANGED SECTION

E-2.1 For x, < Dr. the moment of resistance
may be calculated from the equation givenin
E-1.1.
E-2.2 The limiting value of the moment of

resistance of the section may be obtained by
the following equation when the ratioD,/d
does not exceed 0.2:
hf, h =0.36 ?(I -0.42 7) /ckb&
ti.45 fck (br - b,) d - $
(
J
where
Mu, xu
br
nun,
d andAk are same as in E-1.1,
= breadth of the compression

face/ Ilange,
= breath of the web and

$f = thickness of the flknge.
E-2.2.1 When the ratio Dt/d exctcds 0.2, the
moment of resistance of the section may be
calculated by the following equation:
MyI b=d.36 -(I - 0.42 y) /,,bws#
+ 0.45 f.k (br- b,) y,td - f )
vl20
where yr = (0. I5 x,, + 0.65 Dr), but not greater

than Df, and the other symbsls arc same as in
E-l.1 and E-2.2.
E-2.3 For xU, ,,,,,, > xu > 0, the moment of
resistance may be calculated by the equations
given in E-2.2 when Drlx. does not exceed
0.43 and E-2.2.1 when L&/x. exceeds 0.43; in
both cases substitutinkx., ,,,,, by xU.
NArnNAl
coot OF INDIA
SECTION 5B PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

SECTION SB(a) GENERAL
INITIAL PRESTRESS -The prestress in the

concrete at transfer.
1. SCOPE
I NITIAL T ENSION
1.1 This Section deals with the general

structural use of prestressed concrete. It
covers both work carried out on site and the
manufacture of precast prestressed concrete
units.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the
definitions as given in accepted standards[VI-
5(Z)] shall generally apply; however some of

the important definitions are given below:
ANCHORAGE .--In post-tensioning, a device
used to anchor the tendon to the concrete
member; in pre-tensioning, a device used to
anchor the tendon during hardening of the
concrete.
&)NDEP MEMBER -A prestressed concrete
member in which tendons are bonded to the
concrete either directly or through grouting.
B ON D E D
POST~TENSIONINC -Post tensioned construction in which the annular

spaces around the tendons are grouted after
stressing, thereby bonding the tendonto_ the
concrete section.
C HARACTERISTIC L OAD --Load which has
95 percent probability of not being exceeded
during the life of the structure(see 20.2).
CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH -Strength of
of the test results are expected to fall (see
20.1).
C O L U M N OF
S TRUT -A compression
member of rectanylaf section, the effective
length of which exceeds three times the least
lateral dimension.
C REEP COEFFICEN~ --The ratio of creep
strain to elastic strdm in concrete.
CREEP IN CONCRETE
-Increase with time in

the strain of concrete SubJected to sustained
stress.
F INAL PRESTRESS .The stress which exists
after substantially all losses have occured.
F!NAI. TENSION --The tension in the steel

corresponding to the state of the final
prestress.
-The maximum stress

induced in the prestressing tendon at the time
of the stressing operation.
P OST T ENSIONING -A rrtethod of prestress-
ing concrete in which pre-stressing steel is

tensioned against the hardened concrete.
PRESTRESSEU CO N C R E T E -Concrete i n
which permanent internal stresses are
deliberately introduced, usually by tensioned
steel, to counteract, to the desired degree, the
stresses caused in the member in service.
PRE-TENSIONING -A method of prestressing
concrete in which the tendons are tensioned
before concreting.
SHORT COLUMN -A column of rectangular

section, the effective length of which does not
exceed 12 times the least lateral dimension.
SHRINKAGE Loss -The loss of stress in the
prestressing steel resulting from the shrinkage
of the concrete.
S LENDER
column of
C&WIN - A
rectangular section, the effective length of
which exceeds 12 times the least lateral
dimension.
S TRESS AT T RANSFER -The stress in both
the prestressing tendon and the concrete at the
stage when the prestressing tendon is released
from the pre-stressing mechanism.
T ENDON
-A steel element, such as wire,

cable, bar, rod or strand, used to impart
prestress to concrete when the element is
tensioned.
TRANSFER -The act of transfering the stress

in prestressing tendons from the jacks or
pretensioning bed to the concrete member.
TRANSMISSION LENGTH -The distance
required at the end of a pretensioned tendon
z;neveloping the maximum tendon stress by
3. SYMBOLS
3.1 For the purpose of this Section the
meaning indicated against each; when other
symbols are used, they are explained at the
appropriate place:
A
B
ArC3
Breadth of beam
Breadth of web or rib

Overall depth of beam
Dead load
Effective depth of beam
Effective depth of beam in shear
Modulus of elasticity of concrete
Earthquake load
Modulus of elasticity of steel
Eccentricity
Characteristic load
Bursting tensile force
Design load
Characteristic strength of material
Cube strength of concrete at transfer
Characteristic compressive strength of
concrete
Compressive stress at centtoidal axis
due toprcstress or average intensity of
effective prestress in concrete
Modulus of rupture of concrete
(flexural tensile strength)
Design strength
Characteristics s t r e n g t h o f
prcstresring steel
Maximum prestress after losses
Maximum initial prestress
Ultimate tensile stress in the tendons
Maximum principal tensile stress
Characteristic strength of steel
Live load or imposed..Joad
Bending moment
Modular ratio
Spacing of stirrups
Torsional moment
Shear force
Ultimate shear resistance of concrete
Ultimate shear resistance of a section
untracked in flcxure
Ultimate shear resistance of a section
cracked in flexure
Wind load
Depth of neutral axis
Partial safety factor for load
Partial safety factor for material
Percentage redliction in moment
Shear stress in concrete
Diameter of tendon or bar
SECTION SB (b) MATERIALS,

WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION
AND TESTING
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Cemmt -- The cement used shall be any
of the following conforming to accepted
standards [W-5(3)] with the.prior approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
a) Ordinary Portland cement,
Portland slag cement with not more than
50 percent slag content,

C) Rapid-hardening Portland cement, and
4 High strength ordinary Portland cement.
Aggregates -All aggregates shall

conform to accepted standard[VI-5(3)]
4.2
4.2.1 The nominal maximum size of coarse

aggregate shall be as large as possible subject
to the following:
In no case greater than one-fourth the
minimum thickness of the member,
provided that the concrete can be placed
without difficulty so as to surround all
prestressing tendons and reinforcements
and fill the cornets of the form;
It shall be 5 mm less than the spacing
between the cables, strands or sheathings
where provided; and
Not more than 40 mm; for segregates
having a maximum nominal SIU of 20
mm or smaller are generally considered
satisfactory.
4.2.2 Coarse and tine aggregate shall be
batched separately.
4.3 Water-the requtrements of water used
for mixing and curmg shall conform to the
requirements given in Section 5A. However
use of sea water is prohibited.
4.4 Admixtures -Admixtures may be used
with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
However, use of any admixture containing
chlorides in any form is prohibited.
4.4.1 The admixtures shall conform to the
accepted standards [VI-5(S)]
4.5 Prestressing Steel
4.5.1 The prestressing steel shall be any one of

the following conforming to accepted
standards [W-5(25)]:
a) Plain hard-drawn steel wire,
W Cold-drawn indented wire,
d High tensile steel bar, and
d) Uncoarqd stress relieved strand.
4..5.l.l All prestressingstcel shall he free from

splits, harmful scratches; surface flaws: rough.
jagged and imperfect edges and other defect5
likely to impair its use in prestressed concrete:
TABLE I GRADES OF CONCRFTE

(Clauses 5.1. X2.1. 8.2.1 and 20.1)
slight rust may be permitted provided there is

no surface pitting visible to the naked eye.
I..!..? Coupling units and other similar
fixtures used in conjuction with the wires or
bars shall have an ultimate tensile strength of
not less than the individual strengths of the
wires or bars being joined.
MOWJLUSOFELASTIC~TY -Thevalue
of the modulus of elasticity of steel used for
the design of prestressed concrete members
shall preferably be determined by tests on
samples of steel to be used for the
construction. For the purposes of this clause,
a value given by the manufacturer of the
prestressinp steel shall bc considered as
fulfilling the necessary requirement.
4.5.3
4.5.3.1 Where ir is not possible to ascertain

the modulus of elasticity by test or fromttie
manufacturer of the steel, the following values
may be adopted:
Type of Steel
Modulus of Elasticity,
E, (kN/mm)
Plain cold-drawn wire

High tensile steel bars
rolled or heat-treated
Strands
210
200
I95
4.6 Untensioned Steel - Reinforcement used

as untensioned steel shall be any of the
following conforming to accepted standards
[VI-5( I I)]:
a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars,
b) Hot rolled deformed bars,
c) Cold-twisled bars, and
d) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric.
4.7 Storage of Materials -Storage of
materials shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5( I2)].
5: CONCRETE
5.1 Grades -The co Crete shall be in grades
designated as per Taf le I
5.1.1 The characteristic strength of concrete
is defined as the strength of the concrete below

which not more than 5 percent of the test
results are expected to fall.
5.2 Properties of Concrete
5.2.1 I NCREASE
IN S T R E N G T H
WITH
AGE -Where it can bc shown that a inember
PART Vl S~UCTURAL
DESIGN
.- SWllON J CI?NCRETC
(1)
(2)
M 30
M 35
M 40
M 45
30
15
4b
45
M 50
M 55
hi 60
SO
55
60
NOTE I ---In the dcslgnation of a concrete mut. letter M

rcfcr$ to the mix and the number to the spculied
characteristic compreaslvr strength of I5 cm cube at 28
days. expressed in N/mm.

N OTE 2 -For pretensioned prestrcsscd concrete. the
grade of concrete shall be not less than M 40.
will not receive its full design stress within a
period of 28 days after the casting of the

mem.ber (for example, in foundations and
lower columns in multi-storey buildings); the
characteristic compressive strength given in
Table I may be increased by multiplying by
the factors given below:
Minimum Age of
Member When Full
Design Stress is
Expected
(Months)
I
:
12
Age Factor
1.0
1.10
1.15
I .20
Norm I -Where members are subjected to lower direct

load during construction, they should be checked for
stresses resulting from combination of direct load and
bending during construction.
NUTE 2 -the design strength shall be based on the
increased value of compresswe strength.
5 . 2 . 2 T E N S I L E STRENGTH OF CONCRETEThe flexural strength shall be obtained in

accordance with good practice -[YI-S(7)].
When the designer wishes to use an estimate of
the flexural strength from. the compressive
strength, the following formula may be used:
Flexural Strength/,, = 0.7&k N/mm*
where fcr is the characteristic compressive
strength of concrete.
5.2.3 EL ASTIC DeFORMATION--- The
modulus of elasticity is primarilyinfltienced
by the elastic properties of the aggregate and
to a lesser extent by the conditions of curing
VI-S
.
4
and age of the concrete, the mtx proporttons

and the type of cement. The modulus of
elasticrty i s normally r e l a t e d t o t h e
compressive strength of concrete.
5.2.3.1 In the absence of test data. the
modulus of elasticity for struc:ural concre:e
may be assumed as follows:
E, = 5700 v$%
where EL is the short term static modulus of
elasticrty in N/mm, and r&k is the
characterrstrc cube strength of concrete in
N/mm>.
5.2 4 S H R I N K A G E T h e s h r r n k a g e o f
concrete depends upon the constrtuents of
concrete. size of the member and environmental conditions. For a grven envuonment,
the shrrnkage of concrete is most influenced
by the total amount of water present in the
concrete at the time of mixing and. to a lesser
extent, by the cement content.
5.2.4.1 In the absence of, test data, the
approximate value of shrinkage strain for
design shall be assumed as follows.
= o.ooo3
F.or,pre-tensioning
0.000 2
For post-tensioning =
Log10 (r + 2)
where
I = age of concrete at transfer in days.
NOPE
The value of shrinkage strain for design of posttcnsioncd concrete may bc Increased by 50 percent tin dry
armosphcrlc condlttons. sub]cct to a maximum value of
0oCM11
5.2.4..? For the calculation of deformation of
concrete at some stage before the maximum

shrrnkage is reached, it may be assumed that
half of the shrinkage takes place during the
first month and that about three quarters of
the shrinkage takes place in first six months
after commencement of drying.
5 . 2 . 5 CREEP 0F CO N C R E T E - - C r e e p o f
concrete depends, in addition to the factors
listed in 5.2.4. on the stress in the concrete, age
at loading and the duration of loading. As
long as the stress in concrete does not exceed
one-third of its characteristic compressive
strength, creep may be assumed to be
proportional to the stress.
5.2.5.1 In the absence of experimental data

and detailed information on the effect of the
variabks, the ultimate creep strain may be
estimated from the following values of creep
coefficient (that is. ultimate creep strain/
elastic strain at the age of loading):
Agr ut Loading
7 days
3 days
I year
VP
Creep Coefficienr
2.2
1.6
I.1
Nort
1 he ultimate creep strain estimated as pcr5.2.5.1
doe, not include the elastic stram.
525.2 For the calculation of deformation at

some stage before the total creep is reached, it
may be assumed that about half the total creep
takes place in the first month after loadmgand
that about three-quarters of the total creep
takes place m the first six months after
loading.
5 . 2 . 6 THERMAL E X P A N S I ON - - !he
coefficient of thermal expansion depends on
nature of cement, the aggregate, the cement
content, the relative humidity and the SUP of
sections. For values of coefficient of thermal
expansion fOi concrete with different
aggregates, 5.2.6 of Sectton SA may be
referred to.
6. WORKARII~lTY OF CONCRF-rF
6 I Ihc. concrete mix proportions chosen
should be such that the concrete IS ofadcyuatc
workability for the placing conditions of the

concrete and can properly be compacted with
the means available. Suggested ranges of
values of workability of concrete are given in
Section 5A.
7. DljRABILITY
7.1 The durability of concrete depends on
its resistance to deterioration and the
environment in which it is placed. The
resistance of concrete to weathering, chemical
attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends
largely upon its quality and constituent
materials. The strength alone is not a reliable
guide to the quality of durability of concrete;
it must also have an adequate cement content
and a low water-cement ratio.
7.1.1 One of the main characteristics
influencing the durability of concrete is its
permeability. With strong, denseaggregates, a
surtably low permeability is achieved by
having a sufficiently low water-cement ratio,
by ensuring as thorough compaction of the
concrete as possible and by ensuring sufficient
hydration of cement through proper curing
methods. Therefore, for given aggregates, the
cement content should be sufficient to provide
adequate workability with a low watercement ratio so that concrete can be
thoroughly compacted with the means
available.
7.2 Appendix A provides guidance regarding
minimum cement content and permissible
hmits of chloride and sulphate in concrete.
8. I Mix Proparkm -The mix proportions

shall be selected to ensure that the workability
NATIONAL
UlUMNC EOOL OF INDIA
of the fresh concrete is suitable for the

conditions of handling and placing, so that
after compaction it surrounds all prestressing
tendons and reinforcements if present and
completely fills the formwork. When concrete
is hardened, it shall have the required
strength, druability and surface finish.
8.1. I The determination of the proportions of
cement, alggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made by designing
the concrete mix. Such concrete shall be called
design mix concrete.
10. FORMWORK
IO.1 The provisions of 10 of Section SA shall
generally apply. In addition, 10.1.1 shall also
apply.
10.1.1 Moulds for pre-tension work shall be
sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand.
without distortion, the effects of placing and
compacting concrete as well as those 01
prestressing in the case of manufacture by the
individual mould process where the
prestressing tendon issupported by the mould
before transfer.
For prestressed concrete construction, only
design mix concrete shall be used. The
cement content in the, mix should preferably
not exceed 530 kg, m
8.1.2 INFORMATIOKREQ~JIRED -In s p e c i fying a particular grade of concrete the
information to be included shall be:
a) Grade designation,
b) Type of cement,
c) Maximum nominal size of aggregates,
d) Minimum cement content,
e) Maximum water-cement ratio, and
f) Workability.
8.1.2.1 In appropriate circumstances, the
following additional information may be
specified:
a) Type of aggregate,
b) Maximum cement content, and
c) Whether an admixture shall or shall not
be used and the type of admixture and the
conditions of use.
8.2 Design Mix Concrete
8.2.1 The mix shall be designed to produce
the grade of concrete having the required
workability and a characteristic strength not
less than appropriate values given in Table I.
The procedure in accordance with good
practice [VI-S( 14)] may be followed.
9. PRODUCTION &ND CONTROL OF
CONCRETE
9.1 Quo/i/y of Materials - It is essential for
designers and construction engineers to
appreciate that the most effective use of
prestressed concrete is obtained only when
the concrete and the prestressing steel
employed are of high quahty and strength.
9.2 The provisions of 9 of Section 5A shall
apply; except that no hand-mixing shall be
permitted in prestressed concrete work.
PAW W IlRCcllUL
D E S I G N - U4TlON
CDNCICR
II. A S S E M B L Y O F PRESTRESSINC
AND REINFORCING STEEL
I I. 1 Preslressing Steel
1 i.1. I S TRAIGHTENING
11.1.1.1 The wire, as supplied. shall
preferably be self-straightening w h e n
uncoiled. If it is not so. the wire may need to
be mechanically straightened before use. In
this event; care shall be taken to avoid
alteration in the properties of the wire during
the straightening process and preferably a test
shall be made on a sample of the wire after
straightening.
l/./.1.2 In the case of high tensile alloy steel
bars, any straightening (or bending if the
design provided for curved bars) shall be
carried out by means of a bar-bending
machine. Bars shall not be bent when their
temperature is less than IOC.
l/././.3 In no case heat shall be applied to

facilitate straightening or bending of
prestressing steel.
11.1.2 A RRANGEMENT
P OSITIONING
OF
W IRES
AND
ll.I.2.1 All prestressing steel shall be

carefully and accurately located in !he exact
positions shown in the design drawings. The
permissible tolerance in the location of the
prestressing tendon shall be + 5 mm. Curves
or bends in prestressing tendon required by
the designer shall be gradual and the
pratressing tendon shall not be forcedaround
sharp bends or. be formed in any manner
which is likely to set up undersirable
secondary stresses.
11.1.2.2 The relative position of wires in a
cable, whether curved or straight shall be
accurately maintained by suitable means,
such as sufficiently rigid and adequately
distributed spacers.
11.1.2.3 In the case of post-tension work, the

spacing of wires in a cable shall be adequate to
ensure the free flow of grout.
I I. f .2.4 The method of fixing and supporting
the steel in the mould or the formwork shall be
such that it is not displaced during the placing
or compaction of the concrete or during
tensioning of the steel.
11.1.2.5 The type of fixtures used for
positioning the steel shall be such that it dots
not give rise to friction greater than that
assumed in the design.
11.1.3 J OINTING
11.1.3.1 High tensile wire other than harddrawn wire may be joined together by suitable
means provided the strength of such joints is
not less than the individual strengths of the
wires being joined. Hard-drawn wire used in
prestressed concrete work shall be contmuous
over the entire length of the tendon.
11.1.3.2 High tensile steel bars may be joined
together by means of couplings, provided the
strength of the coupling is such that in a test to
destruction, the bar shall tail before the
coupling.
ll.l.3.3 Welding shall not be permitted in
either wires or bars.
11.1.4 CU-nHNG
11.1.4.1 All cutting to length and trimming of
the ends of wires shall be done by suitable
mechanical or flame cutters. Where flame
cutters are used, care shall be taken to ensure
that the flame does not come into contact with
other stressed wires or concrete.
11.1.4.2 Bars shall preferably be ordered to
the exact length required. Any trimming
required shall be done only after the bar has

been tensioned and the grout has set; ,it
shall then be carried out in accordance
with 11.1.4:1.
1 1 . 1 . 5 PR O T E C T I O N
OF
PRESTRESSING
The grout shall be placed underpressure, and

it shall be ensured that the entire space
between the duct and the prestressing tendon
is properly filled with grout._
Where small ducts are encountered, it is
advisable that. water is flushed through prior
to grouting, care being taken to see that all
water is subsequently displaced by grout. In
the case of butted assemblies, flushing with
water shall be carried out .only after the
jointing material has properly hardened.
Injection shall proceed lrom one end
preferably in case of curved ducts from
lowest point of the curve, and shall
continued until the grout overflows from
other end.
or
the
be
the
11.1.5.2 EXTERNAL PHESTRESSING SIL-FL. The protection of external prestressingsteel is

usually best done by encasing the tensioned
wires, cables or bars in a dense concrete
secured to the main concrete, for example, by
wires left projecting from the latter. If a
cement sand mix is used, the cover,provided
and its density should be adequate to prevent
corrosion.
Altcrnatively, the steel may be encased in
buumen or, where the steel is accessible for
inspection and maintenance, paint protection
may be provided.
11./.5.3 The anchorage shall be adequately
protected against damage or corrosion soon
after the completion of the final stressing and
grouting operations.
11.1.6 COVER
11.1.6.1 In pre-tensioned work, the cover of
concrete measured from the outside of the
preetressing tendon shall be at least 20 mm.
11.1.6.2 In post-tensioned work, where

cables and large sized bars are used, the
minimum clear cover from sheathing/duct
shall be at least 30 mm or the size of the cable
or bar whichever is ,bigger.
-In all
constructions of the post-tensioned type,
where prestressing is initially carried out
without bond, the prestrcssing tendon shall, at
a subsequent date and generally not later than
one week after prestressing, be given -an
adequate protection against corrosion.
1 I. 1.6.3 W h e r e p r e s t r e s s e d c o n c r e t e
members are located in aggressive
environment, the cover specified under
11.1.6.1 and 11.1.6,2 shall be increased
11.1.5.1 INTERNAL PRESTRESSING STEEL -
11.1.7.1 Inthecaseofsinglewiresusedinpretension system, the minimum clear spacing

shall not be less than greater of the following:
a) 3 times the diameter of wire, and
TEEL
AND
N C H O R A G E S
Internal prestressing r.eel is best protected by

a cement or cement-sand grout preferably in
colloidal form. Care shall betaken to prevent
segregation and, for that purpose, only fine
sand shall be used.
by IO mm.
11.1.7 S PACING
b) 1: times the maximumsize of aggregate.
11.1.7.2 In theca$eofcablesorlargebars,the
minimum clear spacing (measured between
sheathings/ducts wherever used) shall not be
less than greater of the following:
a) 40 mm,
b) Maximum size of cable or bar, and
I I .3 Reinforcing Steel
fl.3.1 Provisions for assembly of reinforcement given in Section 5A shall apply.
f f .3.2 The requirements ofcover and spacing
between bars shall conform to Section 5A.
c) 5 mm plus maximum size of aggregate.

If .I.8 GR O U P E D C A B L E S
12. PRESTRESSlNG
11.1.8.1 Cables or ducts may be grouped

together in groups of not more than four as
shown in Fig. 1.
12.1 Presrressing Equipmenr
11.1.8.2 The minimum clear spacing between

groups of cables or ducts of grouped cables
shall be greater of the following:
12.1.1.1 The requirements of 12.1.1 shall

apply to both the pretensioned and the posttensioned methods of prestressing concrete
where
except
specifically
mentioned
otherwise.
a) 40 mm, and
12.1.1 T ENSIONING APPARATUS
b) 5 mm plus maximum size of aggregate.

The vertical distance between groups shall not
be less than 50 mm (see Fig. I).
12.1.1.2 Prestressing steel may be tensioned

by means of levers. screw jacks, hydraulic
jacks or similar mechanical apparatus. The
method of tensioning steel covered by this
section is generally by means of hydraulic or
similar mechanical jacks.
The type of tensioning apparatus shall be such
that a controlled force can be applied.
The tensioning appartus shall not induce
dangerous secondary stresses or torsional
effects on the steel, concrete, or on the
anchorage
Fig. I Spacing of Groups of Cables
11.2 Sheaths and Exrracrable Cores

11.2.1 Sheaths shall be sufficiently watertight to preveni concrete laitance penetrating
in them m quantities likely to increase friction.
Special care shall be taken to ensure watertightness at the joints.
11.2.2 They shall be preferably machinemanufactured and have bores sufficiently
large to allow being easily threaded on the
cable or bar in long lengths.
11.23 The tubes or sheaths shall be of such
strength as not to be dented or deformed
during handling or ccrncref,ing.
11.2.4 The alignment of all sheaths and
extractable cores shaiaii in correct to the
requirements of the drawings and maintained
securely to prevent displacement during
placing and compactitrn raf concrete. The
permissible tolerance in the location of the
sheaths and extractable cores shall be 2 5 mm.
Any distortion of the sheath during
concreting may lead to additional friction.
?Mt
Vl ETIUCTU~AJ.
DESIGN - SECTION S CONCRLTL
12.1.1.3 The anchorage provided for the

temporary gripping of wires or bars on the
tensioning apparatus shall be secure and such
as not to damage the wire or bar.
12.1.1.4 Devices attached to the tensioning
apparatus for measuring the applied force
shall be such that they do not introduce errors
exceeding five percent.
f2.1.2 TE M P O R A R Y G RIPPING D EVICE -.
Prestressing tendons may be gripped by
wedges, yokes, double cones or any other
approved type of gripping devices. The
prestressing wires may be gripped singly or in
groups. Gripping devices shall be such that in
a tensile test, the wire or wires fixed by them
would break before failure of the grip itself.
12.1.3 RELEASING D EVICE -The releasing

device.shall be so designed that during the
period between the tensioningand release, the
tension in the prestressing elements is fully
maintained by positive means, such as
external anchorages. The device shall enable
the trangfer of prestress to be carried out
gradually and so as to avoid large difference
ol tension between wires in a tendon, severe
eccentricities of prestress or the sudden
application of stress to the concrete.
V
12. I .4 ANCHORAGE
12.1.4.1 The anchorage may consist of any
device, patented or otherwise, whichcomplies with the requirements laid d o w n
under 12.1.4.2 to 12.1.4.6.
elongation to arrive at the actual total

elongation as shown in Fig. 2.
Y
12.1.4.2 The anchoring device shall be

capable of holding, without more than
nominal slip, the prestressing tendon
subjected to a load midway between the
proposed initial prestressing load and the
ultimate strength of the pnstressing tendon.
I2.f .43 The anchoring device shall be strong
enough to resist in all respects a force equal to
at least the breaking strength of the
prestressing tendon it anchors.
12.1.4.4 The anchorage shall transfer
effectively and distribute, as evenly as
possible, the entire force from the prertressing
tendon to the concrete without inducing
undesirable secondary or local stresses.
12.1.4.5 The anchorage shall be safe and
secure against both dynamic and static loads
as well as against impact.
12.1.4.6 The anchorage shall have provision
for the introduction of a suitable protective
medium, such as cement grout, for the
protection of the prestressing steel unless
alternative arrangements are made.
12.2 Procedure for Tensioning and Dansfer
12.2.1
STRESSING
12.2.1. J The tensioning of prestressing

tendons shall be carried out in a manner that
will induce a smooth and even rate of increase
of stress in the tendons.
12.2.1.2 The total tension imparted to each
tendon shall conform to the requirements of
the design. No alteration in the prestressing
force in any tendon shall be allowed unless
specifically approved by the designer.
12.2.2.3 Any slack in the prestressing tendon
shall first be taken up by applying a small
initial tension. The initial tension rquired to
removeslackness shall be taken as the starting
point for measuring the,elongation and a
correction shall be applied to the total
cloqation to tompensate for the initial
tcnsloning of the wire. The extent of
correction shall he arrived at by plotting on a
graph the gauge reading as abscissae and
extensions as ordinates; the intersection of the
curve with the r_uis when extended
shall be taken to give the effective elan tion
during intial tensionin and this ef!a
ective
elongation shall be ad%ed to the measured
ELONGATION
Fig. 2 Determinarion of Acruai Elongarion
12.2.1.4 When two or more prestressing
tendons are to be tensioned simultaneous1
care shall be taken to ensure that all sueK
tendons are of the same length from gri to
grip. This provision shall be more carePully
observed for tendons of length smaller than
7.5 m.
12.2.1.5 The placement of cables or ducts and
the order of stressing and grouting shall be so
arranged that the prestressing steel, when
tensioned and grouted, does not adversely
affect the adjoining ducts.
12.2.2 M EASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING
F ORCE
12.2.2.1 The force induced in the prestressing
tendon shall be determined by means of
gauges attached to the tensioning apparatus
as well as by measuring the extension of the
steel and relating it to its stress-strain curve. It
is essential that both methods are used jointly
so that the inaccuracies to which each is singly
susceptible are minimized. Due allowance
shall be made for the frictional losses in the
tensioning apparatus.
12.2.2.2 The ressure gauges or devices

attached to t e tensioning apparatus to
measure the force shall be periodically
calibrated to ensure that they do not at any
time introduce errors in reading exceeding 2
perant.
12.233 In measuring the extension of
prestmsing steel, any slip which may occur in
the gripping device shall be taken into
consideration.
Z2.2.3 B R E A K A G E OF W I R E S - T h e
tikage of wires in any one mtmsed
concrete member shall not exceed S.5 percent
during tensioning. Wire breakages after

anchorage, irrespective of percentage, shall
noi b e c o n d o n e d w i t h o u t s p e c i a l
investigations.
12.2.4 TRANSFER
OF
PRESTREWNG FORCE
12.2.4. I The transfer of the prtistress shall be

carried out gradually so as to avoid large
differences of tension between wires in a
tendon, severe eccentricities of prestressing
force and the sudden application of stress to
the concrete.
12.2.41 Where the total prestressing force in
a member is built up by successive transfers to
the force of a number of individual tendons on
to the concrete, account shall be taken of the
effect of the successive prestressing.
12.2.4.3 In the long line and similar methods
of prestressing, when the transfer is made on
several moulds at a time, careshall be taken to
ensure that the prestressing force is evenly
applied on all the mouldsand that the transfer
of prestress to the concrete is uniform along
the entire length of the tension line.
12.3 Grouring
12.3.1 The requirements of the grout are
fluidity and low sedimentation (or bleeding)
in the plastic state. In the hardened state, it
shall be dense, have low shrinkage and be
durable. The grouting technique adopted
should be such that it can be carried out easily
and effectively.
f2.3.2 Grout shall bc made from any of the

cements specified in 4.1 and water conforming
to 4.3. Fine sand passing I50 Micron IS Sieve
may be added only for ducts of very large size.
If permitted by the engineer-in-charge,
admixtures may be ,added to improve the
performance of the grout. The water-cement
ratio for neat cement grouts should be
approximately 0.50 by mass, but should in no
case exceed 0.55 by mass.
12.32. I The compressive strength of 100 mm
cubes of the grout shall not be less thanI7
N/mm at 7 days. Cubes shall be cured in a
moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours, and
subsequently in water.
12.3.3 GROUTING EQUIPMENI
12.3.3.1 The mixer shall be of high speed
mixing type. capable of mixing with high local
turbulance while imparting only a slow
motion to the body of the grout. A grout
screen should preferably be fitted.
12.3.3.2 The pump and the injection
equipment shall be capable of continuous
operatioti with little, if any, pressure variation

and shall have a system for recirculating the
grout while actual grouting is not in progress.
No compressed air system should be used for
groutingwork. _The puinping equipment shall
_be able to deliver the grout at a nozzle pressure
of at least 0.7 N/mm.
12.3.3.3 All piping to and from the grout
pump shall have a minimum of bends,valves
and changes in diameter, and-the delivery hoa:
shall be as short as practicable.
12.3.3.4 All piping, pumping and mixing
equipment should be thoroughly washed with
clean water after each series of operations or
more frequently, if necessary. In any c8se, the
intervals between the washings shall not
exceed 3 hours.
12.3.4 MIXING -Water shall be measured
and added to the mixer first, followed by
cement. When these are thoroughly mixed,
the additive and sand if any, shall be added.
When all the ingredients have been added,
mixing shall continue for at least two minutes.
1z.3.5 DUCX PREPARATION -Ducts shall be
kept clean at all times. Unwanted opening 8t
anchorages and in any other locatiotushall be
sealed before grouting commences.
In all long dbcts. or in any duct where
considerable changes of level occur and in any
large d&Meter ducts, grout vents shall &!
provided at ail crests and at intervals of 20 m
to 30 m so that grout can be injected
successively through vents as the grout flows
along the ducts. Where water is likely to enter
ducts, valley vents shall also be provided fol
drainage.
12.3.6 GROUT INJECUON -Grouts should
be injected from the lowest point or uphill
wherever practicable so that air,and water in
the duct, being less dense than the ,grout. will
be pushed ahead of the grout mix and be less
liable to become entrapped in the grout mix,
Grout mix shall be allowed to flow through
vent openings until its consistency is
equivalent to that of the grout injected. Vent
openings shall then be firmly closed out after
the other in the direction of flow. Once ood
grout mix has commenced-to flow freely from
the end or ends of the duct,. that end or ends
shall be closed and the pressure built,up inside
the duct to 0.7 N/mm* before closmg the
injection end.
In the case of large ducts where psassurc
grouting cannot he used, a stand pipe or vent
pipe shall be provided and kept topped up
with cement for an hour or two to replace
grout losses due to wastage and subsidence at
the termination of grouting operation.
/3. TRANSPORI IhC;, PLACING,

COMPACTING AND CURING
13.1 Provisions given in Section 5A shall
apply. In addition, the provisions given
in 13.1.1 and 13.1.2 shall also apply.
13.1.1 The use of construction joints in
prestressed concrete work should preferably
be avoided. But if found necessary, their
position and arrangement shall be
predetermined by the designer.
I3.l.t JO I N T I N G
OF
BOWED AS S E M B L I E S
13.1.2. I The joints of butted assemblies shall

be made of either cement grout or cement
mortar or concrete. Grouttng shall be used for
joints up to 12 mm thick. For joints thicker
than I2 mm and preferably for thicknesses
between I8 and 25 mm, mortar shall be used.
The mortar which may be made of one part
cement and one and a half part sand. shall be
of a dry consistency and shall be packed hard
in layers so that it rings true. Where joints
exceeding 75 mm are encountered. the joint
shall be made of concrete.
13.1.2.2 The stressing operations may be
carried out in case of mortar joints
immediately after placing the mortar but the
stress in the mortar shall not exceed 7.0
N/mm*. In the case of grouted joints and
concrete joints the allowable stress in the first
24 hours after placing of the grout or concrete
in the joint shall approximate as closely as
possible to the strength of the grout or
concrete used.
13.1.2.3 The holes for the prestressing
tendons shall be accurately located and shall
be in :rue alignment when the units are put
toget her.
IJ.l.2.4 Full tenstoning shall not be carried
out until the strength of the concrete or
mortar in the joint has reached twice the
transfer stress.
14. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL
CONDITIONS
14.1 Work it1 E x t r e m e Wealher CondiDuring hot or cold weather, the
concreting should be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5(20)].
rions
f.5. SAMPI.ING AND STRENGTH TEST

OF CONCRETE
IS. I The provisions given in Section 5A shall
apply; but the optional test requirements of
concrete and values of assumed standard
VIP
deviation shall be a< gilen :a !able 2 and

T a b l e 3 . respectively. In addition. the
requirement given in I.(.2 shall apply.
TABLE 2 OPTIONAL TESTS REQUIREMENTS OF
CONCRETE
GRADE OF
C ONCRETE
(1)
C OMPRESSIVE
STRENGTHON
I5 cm CuBES.
Min AT
7 DAYS
!a
Moou~us OF
R U P T U R E BI BF~U
TEST. Mir:
A
7
AI 12 -+ Zh 41 1 days
N:mm
N mm
(3)
(4)
N mm)
M 30
200
2I
3.0
M 35
M40
23.5
27 a
2.3
25
3.2
34
M 45
M 50
30 0
2.7
I.6
33.5
2.9
3.8
M 55
M60
37.0
3.1
4.0
40.0
3.3
4.2
-TABLE 3 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION
G RADE OF CONCRETE
M30
M 35
M40
M 45
AWJMED ST A N D A R D
D EVIATION .
N, mm
6.0
63
6.6
7.0
M so
7.4
M 55
7.7
M60
7.8
15.2 Concrete -Strength al Transfer - In

addition to the tests required as per 15.1,
additional cube tests should be conducted at
appropriate intervals to ensure that the
concrete strength in the member at transfer
conforms to the design requtrements. The
frequency of sampling and number of cubes
should be decided by the engineer-in-charge.
The sampling of concrete should preferably
be at the point of placing and the cubes should
be stored as far as possible under the same
conditions as the concrete in the members.
16.1 The provisions of Section 5A shall
apply.
17. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF

STRUCTURES
17.1 The provisions of Section 5A shall
apply, except for the following:
a) For type I and 2 structures (see 19.3.2),
if within 24 hours of removal of the

imposed load, the structure does not
recover at least 85 percent of the
deflection under superimposed load, the
test may be repeated after a lapse of 72
hours. If the recovery is tess than 90
percent, the structure shall be deemed to
be unacceptable.
b) For type 3 structures (see 19.3.2). if
within 24 hours of the imposed load, the

structure does not recover at least 7 5
percent of the deflection under
superimposed load, the teat may be
repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the
recovery is less than 80 percent, the
structure shall be deemed to be
unacceptable.
SECTION 5B(c) GENERAL DESIGN

REQUIREMENTS
18. GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
18.1 The general design requirements for
design of prestressed concrete structures shall
be as given in 17 to 24 of Section 5A except as
modified and supplemented in 18.2 to 18.6.5.
18.2 The effects of prestress shall also be
taken into account in assessing loads and
forces.
18.3 The deductions for prcstressing tendons
as in 18.3.1 shall be considered for the
determination of area, centroid and moment
of inertia of the cross section.
18.3.1 DE D U C T I O N S
FOR
PRESTRESSING
TENDONS -In calculating area, centroid and

moment of inertia of a cross-section,
deduction for prestressing tendons shall be
made as follows:
a) In the case of pre-tensioned members,
where the prestressing tendons are single
wires distributed on the cross section or
strands of wirus of relatively small crosssectional area, allowance for the prestress
ing tendons need not be made. Where
allowance is made, it shall be on the
basrs of (m-l) times the area of the
prestressing tendons, m being the
modular ratio.
b) In the case of post-tensioned members,
deductions shall invariably be made for

prestressing tendons, cable ducts or
sheaths and such other openings
whether they are formed longitudinally
?ARl
VI STlttJCTUBAL DCSICN
- SKIlOW
5 CONCRETE
or transversely. These deductions need

not however be made for determining
the effect of loads applied after the
ducts, sheaths or openings have been
grouted or filled with concrete. Where
such deductions are not made, a
transformed area equivalent to (m- I)
times the area of the pre-stressing
tendon shall be taken in calculation, )rt
being the modular ratio.
Nom m shall be calculated RS E./E. for values ol E,
and EC, see 4.5.3.1 and 5.2.3.1, respectively. Wherever

nccessa, 5. creep effect shall also be taken mto
consideration.
18.4 Instability During Erecrion - 1 n

evaluating the slenderness effects during
lifting of slender beams, the following factors
require consideration:
a) Beam geometry,
b) Location of lifting points,
c) Method of lifting, and
d) Tolerances in construction.
All beams which are lifted on vertical or
inclined slings, shall be checked for lateral
stability and lateral moment on account of
tilting of beam due to inaccuracies in location
of lifting points, and due to the lateral bow.
For calculating the factor of safety against
lateral instability y, reference may be made to
specialist literature. This factor shall not be
less than two.
For determining the lateral moment due to
tilting, realistic values which are not likely to
be exceeded in practice shall be assumed for
the eccentricity of lifting points and the lateral
bow. The maximum tensile stress for
y,/(y,-I) times the lateral moment due to
tilting, shall not exceed 1.5 N/mm
18.5 Presrressing Requirements
183.1 MA X I M U M I N I T I A L PRESTRESS -At
the time of initial tensioning, the maximum
tensile stress, fP, immediately behind the
anchorages shall not exceed 80 percent of the
ultimate tensile strength of the wire or bar or
strand.
1 8 . 5 . 2 LO S S E S IN PRESS R E S S - WhiJe
assessing the stresses in concrete and steel
during tensioning operations and later in
service, due regard shall be paid to all losses
and variations in stress resulting from creep of
concrete, shrinkage of concrete, relaxation of
steel, the shortening (elastic deformation) of
concrete at transfer, and friction and slip of
anchorage. Unless otherwise determined by
actual tests, allowance for these losses shall be
made in accordance with the values specified
under 18.5.2.1 to 18.S.2.6.
VI-5
81
In computing the losses in presrress when

untensioned reinforcement is present, the
effect of the tensile stresses developedby the
untensloned reinforcement due to shrinkage
and creep shall be considered.
/8.j.,./
LOSS OF PRESTRESS DUE JC C R E E P
--The loss of prestress due 10

creep of concrete under load shall be
determined for all the permanently applied
loads including the prebtress.
OF CONCRE I E
The creep loss due IO live load stresses,

erection stresses and other stresses of short
duration may be Ignored. The loss ot prestress
due to creep 01 concrete is obtained as the
product of the modulus of elasticity of the
prestressing steel (SCC 4.5.3) and rhe ultimate
creep strain of the concrete fibre (JPP 5.2.5.1)
mtcgrated along I he line ofcentre of gravity of
the prestressing steel over its entire length.
The total creep strain during any specific
period shall be assumed for all practical
purposes to be the creep strain due to
sustained stress equal to the average of the
stresses at the beginning and end ot the period.
18.5.2.2 L O S S O F PRFSTRESS D U E 10
S H R I N K A G E O F CONCKEIC --.Thr loss O f
prestress due to shrinkage of concrete shall be
the product of the modulus of elasticity 01
steel (see 4.5.3) and the shrinkage strain 01
concrete (Jee 5.2.4.1).
18.5.2.3
L O S S Of PKfSlKtSS fIl:f. f0
R~.L.AXAIIO~ O F STEEL ~- T h e relaxarlon
losses m prestressing steels vary with type of

steel, initial prestress. age and temperature
and, therefore, shall bc determined from
experiments. When experimental values are
not available. the relaxation losses may be
assumed as given in Table 4.
made for a tendon with a load--equal to or

greater than the relevantjacking iorce that has
been applied for a short time prior to rhe
anchoring of the tendon.
13.5.2.4 L O S S O t PRESIRESS ,t)t~tf 10
SHORl~FNIYC OF COYCRETE --. This type ot
loss occurs when the prestressing tendons
upon release from tensioning devices cause
the concrete to be compressed. This loss IS
proportIona to the modular ratio and initial
prestress in the concrete and shall, be
calculated as below, assuming that the
tendons are locared ar their centroid:
a) For pretensioning. the loss of prestress in
the tendons at transter shall be calculated
on a modular ratio basis using the stress
in the adjacent concrete.
b) For mcmhers with post-tensioned
tendQns w h i c h a r e n o t s t r e s s e d
simultaneously. there is a progressive loss
of prestress during transfer due to the
gradual application of the prestressing
forces. This loss ot prestress should be
calc.uiated on the basis of hatfthe product
of the stress in the concrete adjacent to the
tendons averaged along their lengths and
the modular ratio. Alternatively, the loss
ot prestress may be exactly computed
based on the sequence of tensioning.
18.5.2.5 LOSS OF PRESTRESS DUt f0 SI IP IN
ANCHORAGF --Any toss of prestress which
may occur due to slip of wires during
anchoring or due to the strair: of anchorage
shall be allowed for in the design. Loss due to
slip in anchorage is ofspecial importance with
short members and the necessary addltional
elongation should be provided for at the time
of tenslonlng to compensate for this loss.
18.5.2.6
LAOS!,
O F PRES.rRFSS
D U E
J O
~~~~Thc design s h a l l t a k e i n r o
consideration all losses in preslress that may
occur during tensioning due to frlctlon
between rhe prestressing tendons and the
sur,rounding concrete or any fixture attached
to the steel or concrete.
FRIClWN
TABLE 4 RELAXAllON I OsSES F O R

PRESTRESSfKG STEEL
AT I000 HOURS AT 27C
IKlllAL SIRES5
R E L A X A T I O N 1.0~s
0.5 I,
N/mm
0b.h
35
o-7/,
70
o.g/,
NOTE -jp IS
rhc charactcnvic StrCngth
9u
For straight or moderately curved structures

with curved or straight cables, rhe value oi
prestressing force P, at a distance x metres
from tensioning end and acting in the
direction of the tangent to the curve of the
cable, shall be calculated as below:
of prestrcssing
steel.
_
For tendons at higher temperatures or

subjected to large lateral loads, greater
relaxation losses as specified by the engineerin-charge shall be allowed for. No reduction in
the value of the relaxation losses should be
w-32
where
P,
= p r e s t r e s s i n g f o r c e In t h e
prestressed steel at the tensioning
end acting in the direction of the
tangent to the curve of rhe cable:
= cumulative angle in radians
cj The development of stress in the tendon
through which the tangent to the

cable profile has turned between
any two point under consideration,
= coefficient of friction in curve;
unless otherwise proved by tests, p
may be taken as:
O-55 for steel moring on concrete,
O-30 for steel moving on steel,
0.25 for steel moving on lead
= coefficient for wave effect varying
from IS X IO- to 50 X IO- per
metre.
may be assumed to vary parabolically

along the length of the member.
4 For general guidance, it is recommended
that one-half the transmission length
shall overhang the support in a simply
supported beam. Where there is endfixing, the whole of the transmission
length shall overhang.
NOTE I -Expansion of the equation fcr P. for small

values of (pa + kx) may he P. = P. (1 - N* - kx).
N OTE 2 --In circular or similar constructions, where
circumferential tendons arc tensioned by jacks, values of
~1 for calculating friction may hc taken as:
18.6.2 E ND ZONE
18.6.2.1, BEARING STRESS
a) On the areas immediately behind external

anchorages, the permissible unit bearing
stress on the concrete, after accounting
ior all losses due to relaxation of steel
elastic shortening, creep bf concrete, slip
and/or seating of anchorages, etc, shall
not exceed
O.AS for steel moving in smooth concrete

0.25 for srecl moving on steel bearers
0.10 for steel moving on steel rollers
0.48/,, JF orO.R/,i
Pun
N OTE 3
-The effect of reverse friction shall k rakcn into

consideratjon in such casts where the initial tension
applied to a prcstressing tendon is partially released and
action of friction in the reverse direction causes an
alteration in the distribution of stress along the lcnph of
the tendon.
b)
18.6 Considerarions Affecting Design Details

18.6.1 TR A N S M I S S I O N ZONE IN PRETEN-
SIONED MEMBERS
18.6.1, I
T R A N S M I S S I O N L E N G TH
cl
-The
considerations affecting the transmission

length shall be the following:
4 The transmission length depends on a
number of variables the most important

being the strength of concrete at transfer.
the size and type of tendon. the surface
deformations of the tendon, and the
degree of compactness of the concrete
around the tendon.
b) The transmission length may vary
depending on the site conditions and,

thereforc, should be determined from
tests carried out under the most
unfavourable conditions. In the absence
of values based on actual tests, the
following values may ,bc used provided
the concrete is well-compacted, and its
strength at transfer is not less than
35 N/mm and the tendon is released
gradually:
I) For plain and indented wire

2) For crimped wires
3) Strands
1004
65 4
30 4
Norm 1 --#I is the diameter of the tendon.

N OTE a--The recommended volts of transmission
kngth appty 10 wirp of diameter not exceeding 5 mm and
atrandr of diameter not exceeding 18 mm.
6)
whichever is smaller. where fC, is

the cube tirength at transfer, AI,, is
the beating area and Apun is the
punching area.
During tknsioning. the @lowable bearing
stress specified in (a) maji % increased by
25 percent. provided that this temporary
value does not exceed the average cube
strength at transfer, 1;*_
The bearing stress s ified in (a) and (b)
for permanent anJet
temporary bearing
stress may be increased suitably if
adequate hoop reinforcement complying
with Section SA is provided at the
anchorages.
When the anchorages are embedded in
concrete, the bearing stress shall be
investigated after accounting for the
surface friction between the anchorage
and the concrete.
The effective punching area shall
generally be the contact area of the
anchorage devices which, if circular in
shape, shall be replaced by a square of
equivalent area. The bearing area shall be
the maximum area of that portion of the
member which is gc~met&ally simi!ar
and concentric to the effective punching
area.
Where a number of anchorages are used,
the bearing area AL. shall notoverlap.
Where there is already a compressive
stress prevailing over the bearing area, as
in the case of an anchorage placed in the
body of a structure, the total stress shall
not exceed the limiting values specified in
(a), (b) and (c). For stage stressing of
c a b l e s the a d j a c e n t u n s t r e s s e d
anchorages shall be neglected when
determining the bearing area.
/8.6._?.2 BURSTING TENSILE FORCES

a) Thr bursting tensile forces in the end
blocks. or regions of bonded post-
tensioned members, should be aqessed

on the basis of the tendon jacking load.
For unbonded memebrs, the bursting
tensile forces should be assessed on the
bases of the tendon jacking load or the
load in the tendon at the limit state of
collapse, whichever is the greater (see
Appendix B).
The bursting tensile force, FL,,, existing in
an individual square end block loaded by
a symmetrically placed square anchorage
or bearing plate, may be derived from
equation below:
Fbr!
= 0.32 - 0.3 .T0
P,
where
bursting tensile force.
load in the tendon assessed as
abo(le,
side of loaded area, and
side of end block.
b) The force, Ft,,, will be distributed in a
region extending from 0. I ,vO to y0 from
the loaded face of the end block.
Reinforcement rovided to sustain the
bursting tensile P
orce, may be assumed to
be acting at its design strength (0*87J,)
except that the stress should be limited to
a value corresponding to a strain of 0401
when the concrete cover to the
reinforcement is less than 50 mm.
cl In rectangular end blocks, the bursting
tensile forces in the two principal
directions should be assessed on the basis
of 18.6.2.2. When circular anchorage or
bearing plates are used, the side of the
equivalent square area should be used.
Where groups of anchorages or bearing
plates occur, the end block should be
divided into a series of symmetrically
loaded prisms and each prism treated in
the above manner. For designing end
blocks having a cross-section different in
shape, from that of the general crosssection of the beam, reference should be
made to specialist literature.
4 Compliance with the requirements of (a),
(b) and (c) will generally ensure that

bursting tensile forces along the load axis
are provided for. Alternative methods of
design which make allowance for the
tensile strength of the concrete may be
used, in which case reference should be
made to specialist literature.
d Consideration should also be given to the
spalling tensile stresses, that occur in end
blocks where the anchorage or bearing

plates are highly eccentric; these reach a
maximum at the loaded face.
18.6.3 DEIAILING
PR
ES
OF R E I N F O R C E M E N T
rRESSED CONCRETE
IN
18.6..7./ l-he detailing of reinforcement in

prestressed concrete shall generally conform
to the requirements given in Section 5A.
In addition, the requirements of 18.6.3.2
to 18.6.3.3 shall be satisfied.
18.6.3.2 TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT
a) The amount and spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall be governed by shear

and torsion considerations. It is however
desirable to provide transverse
reinforcement in the web when the web is
rhin and cables are located in the web.
b) In case of all members subjected to
dynamic loading, webs shall be provided
with transverse reinforcement, not less
than 0.3 percent of the sectional area of
the web in plan. This percentage of
reinforcement may be reduced, to O-2
percent in members where the depth of
the web is not more than four times the
thickness of web. These values may be
r e d u c e d t o 0.2 and O-15 p e r c e n t ,
respectively, when high strength
reinforcement is used.
4 In case of members not subjected to,
dynamic loading, reinforcement shall be
provided when the depth of the web is
more than 4 times the thickness. Such
reinforcement shall not be less than 0.1
percent of the sectional area of the web in
plan. The reinforcement shall be spaced
at a distance not greater than the clear
depth of the web and the size of such
reinforcement shall be as small as
possible.
4 Reinforcement in the form of links or
helix shall be provided perpendicular to
the line of heavy compression or shock
loading to resist the induced tensile
stresses.
18.6.3.3 L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O RC E ME N T
a) A minimum longitudinal reinforcement
of 0.2 percent of the total concrete area
shall be provided in all cases cxcc t in the
case of pretensioned units oP small
sections. This reinforcement ma be
reduced to Q 15 percent in the case orhigh
yield strength deformed reinforcement.
The percentage of steel provided, both
tensioned and untensioned t a k e n
together, should be sufficient SO t h a t
when the concrete in the prtcomprcssed
tensile zone cracks, the steel is in a
poaiCion [o take up the additional tensile
stress transferred on to it by the cracking

of the adjacent fibres of concrete and a
sudden failure is avoided.
When the depth of the web exceeds 50 cm.
longitudinal distribution reinforcement
not less than 0.05 percent of the area of
the web, shall be provided on each lace.
l-he spacing of the individual bars of such
reinforcemerlt shall not exceed 20 cm.
All untensioned longitudinal
reinforcement shall be restrained in the
lateral direction.
18.6.4 CONllNUITY --In t h e design o f
continuous prestressed concrete structures.
due consideration shall be given to the effect
of the support restraints on both the external
moment and the moment due to prestressing.
1X.6.5 Br I III) A%LMUI 1
Where a hutted
assembly is used. oiwhcrc lihc ctjnditions of
abuttal arc employ4. proper r,r,)vi\ion shall
b e m a d e to transfer all shear stresses.
Whcreber the shear stresheh exceeds the limits
\pccif.ied under 22.4, this provision s h a l l
include kevrng of all abuttrng faces.
SECTION 5&d) STR UClU RAL

DESIGN : LlMIT STATE hlEIHOD
19. S A F E T Y A N D SERVICEAHILITY
REQUIREIMEN I-S
19.1 Limit Slate l&sign ---The structural
design shall be based on limit state concepts.
In this method ofdesign. the structure shall be
designed to withstand safely all loads liable to
act on It throughout its life; it shall also satisfy
the serviceability requirements, such as
limitations on deflection and cracking. The
acceptable limit for the safety and
serviceability requirements before failure
occurs is called a Limit State. The aim of
design is to achieve acceptable probabilities
that the structure will not become unfit for the
use for which it is intended. that is, that it will
not reach a limit state.
19.1.1 All relevant limit states shall be
considered in design to ensure an adequate
degree of safety and serviceability. In,general,
the structure shall be designed on the basis of
the most critical limit state and shall be
checked for other limit states.
19.1.2 For ensuring the specified objective,
the design should be based on characteristic
values for material strengths and applied
loads, which take into account the variations
in the material strengths and in the loads tobe
supported. The characteristic values should
PART VI STYLCTLRAL
DESIGN
- SDt?llON 5 CONCILTE
be based on statistical data if available; where

such data are not available, they should be
based on experience. The design values are
derived from thecharacteristic values through
the use of partial safety factors, one tor
material ?;tre.ngths and the other for loads. In
the absence of-special considerations, these
factors should have the values given in 20.4
according to the material, the type of loading
and the limit state being considered.
19.2 Limir Statrq/Collap.w The limit state
of collapse of the structure or part of the
structure could be assessed from rupture of
one or more critical sections arrd from
buckling due to elastic or plastx Instability
iincluding the rltects o f s w a v w h e r e
appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to
bcndlng, shear, torsion and axial loads at
every section shall be not less than
appropriate value at that scction\produced by
the probable most unfavourable combination
of loads on the structure using theappropriate
partial safety factors.
19.3 Limit
States of Serviceahllilj~
19.3.1 L IMIT STATE OF S~~RVICEABILITY:

DEFL.EC~ION -~ -The deflection of a structure
or part thereoi shall not adversely effect the
appearance or efficiency of the structure or
finishes or partitions. The deflection shall
generally be limited to the following:
The final deflection due to all iodds

including !he effects of temperature.
creep and shrinkage and measured from
the as cast level of thit supports of floors,
roofs and all other hormzontal members,
should not normally exceed span/250..
b) The deflection including the effects of

temperature, creep and shrinkage
occuring after erection of partitions and
the application of finishes should not
normally exceed span/350 or 20 mm
whichever is less.
c) If finishes are to be applied to prestressed
concrete members, the total upward
deflectinn should not exceed spani300.
unless uniformity of camber between
adjacent uniformity of camber between
adjacent units can be ensured.
19.3.2 L IMIT S TATE OF S E R V I C E A B I L I T Y :
C R A C K I N G -Cracking of concrete shall
not effect the appearance or durability of
the structure. The criteria of limit state of
cracking for the three types of prestressed
concrete members shall be as follows:
a)
For Type 1, no tensile stresses.
b) For Type 2, tensile stresses are allowed

but no visible cracking.
c)
For Type 3. cracking is allowed, but

should not affect the appearance or
1-P
durability of the structure; the acceptable

limits of cracking would vary with the
type of structure and environment and
will vary between wide limits -and the
prediction of absolute maximunt width
is not possible.
KOTE -For
design ol rypc 3 members. as a guide,
thk following may bc regarded as reasonable limits
The surface width ol cracks should not. in general.

exceed 0.1 m m f o r m e m b e r s e x p o s e d lo a
parllcularly aggressrve environment such as the
scwre category m Appendix A and not exceeding
0.2 mm lor all other members
19.3.3 The flexural tensile stress at any

section of the structure, both at transfer and
under the most unfavourable combination of
design loads shall satisfy the criteria for the
corresponding type of structure.
19.3.4 LI M I T S TA TE O F S E R V IC E A B I L I T Y :
M AXIMUM C O M P R E S S I O N -The compressive stresses both at transfer and under design
loads shall be limited to the values given in
22.8 for all types of structures.
19.3.5 OT H E R L IMIT S T A T E S - S t r u c t u r e s
designed for unusual or special functions shall
comply with any relevant additional limit
states considered appropriate to that
structure.
20. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN
VALUES AND PARTIAL SAFETY
FACTORS
20. I C h a r a c t e r i s t i c S t r e n g t h o/
Morerials -The term characteristic stress
means that value of the strength of the
of the test results are expected to fall. The
characteristic strength for concrete shall be in
accordance with Table I, modified by 5.2.1
regarding increase in concrete strength with
age. Until the relevant Indian. Standard
specificatidns for prestressing and reinforcing
steel are modified to include the concept of
characteristic strength, the characteristic
strength shall be assumed as the minimum
ultimate tensile stress/ breaking load for
prestressing steel and as the minimum
yield/ @2 percent proof stress for reinforcing
tteel. specified in the relevant Indian Standard
specifications.
20.2 Characteristic Loads -The term
characteristic load means that value of load
which has a 95 percent probability of not
king exceeded duringthe life of the structure.
Since data are not available to express loads in
statistical terms, for the purpose of the
section. the dead loads, live loads, wind loads
and scismrc forces as given in Part VI
Structural design, Section I Loads shall be

assumed as the characteristic loads.
20.3 Design Values
20.3.1 M ATERIALS -The design strength of
the materials, fd is given by
where
/
ym
= characteristic strength of the

material (see 20.1), and
=
partial safety factor appropriate to

the material and the limit state
being considered (see 20.4).
20.3.2 LOADS -The design load, Fd is given

by
F.j = FY,
where
F y characteristic load (see 20.2), and
7 = partial safety factor appropriate to
the nature of loading and the limit
state being considered (see 20.4).
20.3.3 CONSEQUENCES OF ATTAINING LIMIT
S T A T E - W h e r e the consequences of a
structure attaining a limit state are of a serious
nature such as huge lo& of life and disruption
of the economy, higher values forym and y,
I han those given under 20.4.1 and 20.4.2 may
be applied.
X.4 Partial SaJety Factors
20.4.1 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R ym
FOR
M ATERIAL S T R E N G T H
20.4.1.1 When assessing the strength of a

structure or structural member for the limit
state of collapse, the values of partial safety
factor y,,, should be taken as and I.5 for
concrete and I. I5 for steel.
NOTE - ya
values arc already incorporated
in the
equations and tables given in this section.
20.4.1.2 When assessing the deflection, the

material properties such as modulus of
elasticity of concrete should be taken as those
associated with the characteristic strength of
the material and safety factor shall not be
applied.
20:4.2 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R 7, F O R
L O A D S-The value of y, given in Table 5
shall normally be used.
NATIDNAL BUIUXNG CDDC
OF
INDIA
OFPARTIALSAFETYFACTOR
wlxm-y
..
TABLE5 VALUES
cD&ZilON
batIT STATES
OF SEllVlC&ABlLITV
"%~~~"
e-
DL LL WL
(2)
(1)
DL
DLi WL
(3)
LL
1.5
13or
DL
(9
(4
LL
(6)
WL
(7)
I.5 - 14 1.0 1.5.
I.0
1.0
04
0.8
$e9Note I)
DL+LL+WL
I.2
1.2
I.2
I.0
Non 1 -Thie value of 0.9 ir to be coasidercd when

ttability againat overturning or atrem revereal ie critical.
N O T E 2 - W h i l e conridering earthquake effect&
rubrtitute EL for WL.
NOTE 3 -For the limit etatee of aerviceahility. the values
of yr given in this table are rppliubk for short term
effects. While wumin the long tcrmc effects due to
creep, the dead load an&f that part of the live load likely to
be permanent may only be conridered.
21. ANALYSIS
21.1 Analysis of Structure-Methods of
analysis as given in Section 5A shall be used.
The material strength to be assumed shall be
characteristic values in the determination of
elastic properties of members irrespective of
the limit state being considered.
Redistribution of the calculated moments
may be made as given in 21.1.1.
21.1.1 REDISTRIBU~ON 0F MOMENTS IN
C ON T I N U O U S B EAMS A N D FRAMES-The
redistribution of moments may be carried out
satisfying the following conditions:
a) Equilibrium between the internal forces
and the external loads is maintained,
b) The ultimate moment of resistance
provided at any section of a member is
not less than 80 percent of the moment at
that section obtained from an elastic
maximum moment diagram covering all
appropriate combinations of loads,
cl The elastic moment at any section in a
member due to a particular combination
of loads shall not be reduced by more
than 20 percent of the numerically largest
moment given anywhere by the elastic
maximum moments diagram for the
particular member, covering all
appropriate combination of loads,
4 At sections where the moment capacity
after redistribution is less than that from
the elastic maximum moment diagram,
the following relationship shall be
satisfied:
&I4
1oo GO.5
5-+?.UT VT
S T R U C T U R A L DESIGN -IIU~IDN 5 CONCUTB
where
X = depth of neutral axis,
reduction
in
&M = percentage
moment.
4 In structures in which the structural
frame provides the lateral stability, the
reduction in moment allowed by
condition 2l.f.l(c) shall be restricted to
20 percent for structures up to 4 storeys in
height and 10 percent for structures over 4
storeys in height.
21.1.2
Two
A NALYSIS
DIRECTIONS
OF
S LABS S P A N N I N G IN
R IGHT ANGLES--In
AT
general, the provisions of Section 5A shall

apply.
22. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE
22.1 Limit State of Collapse : Flexure
22.1.1 AMJMPTIONS -Design for the limit
state of collapse in flexure shall be based on
the assumptions given below:
a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain
plane after bending.
The
maximum strain in concrete at the
b)
outermost compression fibre is taken as
O$lO35 in bending.
cl The relationship between the compressive
stress distribution in concrete and the
strain in concrete may be assumed to
be rectangle, trapezoid; parabola or an)
other shape which results in prediction of
strength in substantial agreement with the
results of tests. An acceptable stressstrain curve is the same as Fig. 20 of
Section 5A. For design purposes, the
compressive strength of concrete in the
structure shall be assumed to be 0.67
times the characteristic strength.The
partial safety factor ym = l-5 shall be
applied in addition to this.
NOTE -For the strr-strain curve (see Fi .20 of Section
f rectangular
5A). the design rtresr block parnmcten or
action are as followa (see Fig. 21 of Section 5A).
Arca of strcar block = 0.36/d,
Depth of centre of comgraaivc force from the
extreme tibrc in compmuton = tI42 xu
where
hk
= characteristic compreuive strength of

concrete, and
= depth of neutral axis.
4 The tensile strength of the concrete is
ignored.
The stresses in bonded prestressing
tendons, whether initially tensioned or
untensioncd. a n d i n a d d i t i o n a l
reinforcement are derived from the
representative stress-strain curve for the
type of steel used given by the
manufacturer or typical curves given in
Fig. 3 for prestressifig tendons and in
Section 5A for reinforcement. For design
purposes, the partial safety factor y,,,
equal to I.15 shall be applied.
f) If tendons are unbonded in posttensioned members, the stress in the
tendons may be obtained from a rigorous
analysis or from tests.
O-95 tp
o-9
tp
;::i :;
08 tp
0 1 0.1 0.2
o-05
0.5
0 7 fp
In
z
a
Iii
Fig. 3
22.4 Limit State of Collapse : Shear -The

ultimate shear resistance of the concrete
alone, V,, should be considered at both
sections cncracked and cracked in flexure, the
lesser value taken and, if necessary, shear
reinforcement provided.
STUAlN
3A Wirer (Stnm Relieved), Stranda and BNE
0.05
22.2 Limit State of ColIapse : Compression - Prestressed concretg compression

members in framed structures, where the
mean stress in the concrete section imposed by
tendons is less than 2.5 N/mm, may be
analysed as reinforced concrete compression
members in accordance with Section5A; in
other cases specialist literature may be
referred to.
22.3 Limit State of ColrCpse : Tension Tensile strength of the tension members shall
be based on the design strength (0.87 times
characteristic, strength of prestressing
tendons) and the strength developed by any
additional reinforcement. The additional
reinforcement may usually be assumed to be
acting at its design stress (4.87 times
characteristic strength of reinforcement);in
special cases it may be necessary to check the
stress in the reinforcement using strain
compatibility.
STRAIN
38 Wira (AS-D~~W@
Representative SIMS strain CkWS

for Restressing Steels
22.1.2 DESIGN FORMULAE --In the absence

of an analysis based on the assumptions given
in 221.1, the moment of resistance of
rectangular sections anti flanged sections in
which the neutral axis lies within the flange
may be obtained by the procedure givenm
Appendix B.
For flanged sections iit which the neutral axis
lies outside the flange, the moment of
resistance rhall be determined using
assumptions given in 22.1.1.
22.4.1 SECTIONS U NCRACKED IN F LEXURE The ultimate shear resistance of a section

untracked in flcxure, V, = KO. is given by
Vco = 0.67 bD Jr; + 0.8/,,/,
where
b = breadth of the member which for T. I
and L beams should be replaced by
breadth of the rib b,;
D = overall depth of the member,
I;= maximum pri .pal tensile stress
f& taken as positive;
given by @24 3
and
/cP = compressive stress at centroidal axis
due to prestrcss, taken as positive.
In flanged members where the centroidal axis
occurs m the flange, the principal t nsile stress
should be limited to 024?fck at the
intersection of the flanged web, in this
calculation, O-8 of the stressdue to prestress at
this intersection may be used. in calculating
Vco.
For a section untracked in flexure and with.
inclined tendons or vertical prestress, the
component of prestressing force normal to the
longttudinal axis of the member may be added
to v,.
22.4.2 SECTIONS CRACKED IN F LEXURE The ultimate shear resishnce of section
cracked in flexure, V, = V,, is given by
NATlONAL
8UllDlNC
CUDL O F I N D I A
where
fpc = effective prestress after all losses
have occurred, which shall riot be
put greater than 0.6f,,
fp= c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t r e n g t h o f
prestressing. steel,
i, = ultimate shear stress capacity of
concrete obtained from Table 6,
=
b
breadth of the member, which for
flanged sections shall be taken as
the breadth of the web b,,
d = distance from the extreme
compression fibre to the centroid
of the tendons at the section
considered,
M, = moment necessary to produce zero
stress in the concrete at the depth,
given by:
MO = 0.8 fP, &
where.fp, is the stress due to prestress

only at depth d and distance .V from
the centroid of the concrete section
which has second moment of area/.
and
shear force and bending moment
respectively, at the section considered due to ultimate loads.
VC, = should be taken as not less than
0-I brl&TABLE6 DEWGNSHEARSTRENGTHOF
CONCRETE. Tc, N/mm*
(Clause 22.4.2)
M30
C ONCRETE G RADE
A
M 35
(1)
(2)
(3
(4)
0.25
O-50
0.75
0.37
0.50
0.59
I al
I.25
0%
0.71
0.37
0.50
059,
0.67
b73
I.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2-75
076
0.80
084
0.88
o-91
0.94
0.78
0.82
0.86
090
0.93
0.96
0.38
c51
060
@68
0.74
079
0.84
@88
0.92
0.95
loon
bd
M*Ezd
098
0.96
099
I.01
34Xl
Note---A, is the area of prcstrcssing tendon.
The value of V,, calculated at a particular

section may be assumed to be constant for a
distance e ual to d/ 2, measured in the
direction o? increasing moment, from that
particular section.
PART VI STRIJCTUPAL
DESIGN- SECTION 5 CONCRETE
For a section cracked in flexure and with

inclined tendons, the component of
prestressing force normal to the longitudinal
axis of the member should be ignored.
22.43 SHEA-R REINFORCEMENI
22.4.3.1 When V, the shear force due to the
ultimate loads, is less than VC, the shear force
which can be carried by the concrete,
minimum shear reinforcement should be
provided in the form of stirrups such that:
A,,
0.4
-=bsv
0.87fy
where
A,, = total cross-sectional area of stirrup
legs effective in shear ;
b = breadth of the member which for T, I
and L beams should be taken as the
breadth of the rib, b,;
S = stirrupspacing. along the length of
the member; and
h= characteristic strength of the stirrup
reinforcement which shall not be
taken greater than 415 N/mm.
However, shear reinforcement need not be
provided in the following cases;.
a) where V is less than 0.5 Vc; and
b) in members of minor importance.
22.4.3.2 When the shear force V, due to the
ultimate loads, exceeds V,, the shear force
which can be carried by concrete, shear
reinforcement shall be provided such that
A,,
-= y- K
S"
0.87f,d,
In rectangular beams, at both corners in the

tensile zone, a stirrup should pass around a
longitudinal bar, a tendon or a group of
tendons having a diameter not less than the
diameter of the stirrup. The depthd, is then
taken as the depth from the extreme
compression fibre either to the longitudinal
bars or to the centroid of the tendons
whichever is greater.
The spacing of stirru s along a member
should not exceed 0.75s, nor 4 ttmes the web
thickness for flanged members. When V
exceeds I .8 V,, the maximum spacing should
be reduced to 0.5d,. The lateral spacing of the
individual legs of the stirrups provided at a
cross-section should not exceed0.75d,.
22.44 M AXIMUM S HEAR FORCES--In no
circumstances should the shear forceV, due to
14.~9
ultimate loads, exceed the appropriate values

given in Table 7 tiultiplicd by bd.
designed to withstand a moment MC2 given by
Limit State of Collapse: Torsian
the moment ML2 being taken as acting in the

opposite sense to the moment M.
22.5
22.5.1 GENERAL - In general, where the

torsional resistance oi stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the analysis
of the structure, no specific calculations for
torsion will be necessary; adequate control in
torsional cracking being rovided by the
required nominal shear reinPorcement. Where
the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in theanalysis,
22.5.2 APPLICATION OF D ESIGN R ULES FOR
TORSION -The design rules laid down
in 22.5.3 to 22.5.5 apply to:
a)
beams of solid rectangular cross-section

(D>b).
b)
hollow rectangular beams with D>b and

with a wall thickness- t >b/4
cl
T-beam and l-beams.
In all these cases the average intensity of

prestress in the concrete shall be ltss than
0.3&
Me2 =M,-A4
22.5.3.3 Where the numerical value of M is

less than or equal to that of M,,rhe.beam shall
be designed to withstand an equivalent
transverse bending moment M,I (not acting
simultaneously with MI), given by
and acting about an Bxis at right angles to the

axis of M. where xlis the smaller dimension of
a closed lioop used as torsional shear
reinforcement and r is as defined in 22.5.4. f.
22.5.4 TR A N S V E R S E R E I N F O R C E M E N T
22.5.4.J TORSIONAL MOMENT AND SHEAR
BY CONCRETE - The reduced
torsional moment carried by the concrete, T.I,
is given by
C A R R I ED
22.5.3 LONGITUDINAI. RE I N F O R C E M E N T
22.5.3. I The longitudinal reinforcement shall
be designed to resist an equivalent ultimate
bending moment M.I given by:
where
M., = M + M,
where
---
M .= applied ultimate bending moment at
the cross-section acting i n

combination with T,
TC
M, = T7
I + b
, the sign of M,
being the same as that of Mi
D = overall depth of the beam, and

h= breadth of the member which for
T and I beams shall be taken as the
breadth of the web,&.
22.5.3.2 Where the numerical value of M is
less than thit of M,.the members shall also be
In the above expressions,
T, = t o r s i o n a l m o m e n t carrried by
concrete,
b = breadth of member, which for T and

I beams shall be taken as the breadth
of the web, b,
TABLE 7 MAXIMUM SHEAR STRESS

(ChUJP 22.1.1)
C ONCRETE G R A D E
M30
M35
M40
M 45
M50
3.5
3.7
4.0
4.3
4.6
M55andovcr
Maximum
Shear Stress,
4.0
N/mm*
,_S_ 90
D = overall depth of beam,

= characteristic compressive strength
of concrete,
T = torsional moment applied to a crosssection under ultimate load
conditions,
=
V
shearing force at a cross-section
calculated for the specified ultimate
loads,
v, = theoretical shear strength at crosssection, a s s u m i n g t h e m o s t
unfavourable conditions for inclined
cracking, that is, smaller or V,, and
V,, (see 22.4.1 and 22.4.2), and
fcp = average intensity of effective
prestress in concrete.
fit
22.5.4.2 The shear force carried by the

concrete Vci is given by :
where
V, = smaller of V,, and VCl obtained as
in 22.4.1 and 22.4.2.
22.5.4.3 DESIGN OF TRANWERSE REINFORCEMENT -; The area of cross-section, A,
of the closed stirrup enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall be taken as the larger
of the following two values:
M sv
AS = 1.5 b, d,f,
Ac _ (T-T,, ) sv
0.87 bIdI fv
ti the above expressions,
MI is as defined in 22.5.3.1,
x=
V
T
spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,

corner bars in the direction of
the width,
depth,
charact,cristic strength of shear
reinforcement,
is as defined in 22.5.4.1, V,I is as
defined in 22.5.4.2, and
and Td are as defied in 22.S.4.1.
PART n $nuclIJnAL nuJcN-8Ecllou
There shall be at least one lonfiitudinal bar not

less than 12 mm in diameter m each corner of
the stirrups.
2 2 . 5 . 5 D ISTRIBUTION OF T O R S I O N
R E I N F O R C E M E N T - When a member is
designed for torsion, torsion reinforcement
shall be provided as below:
8) All transverse reinforcement
rovided
for torsion shall be in thePorm of
closed stirrups perpendicular to the
axis of the members.
b) The spacing, sr. of the stirrups shall not
exceed (XI + vi)/4 or 200 mm whichever is
smaller, where XI and ye are respectively,
short and long dimensions of the stirrup.
d Each end of the bar forming the stirrup
shall be anchored in accordane with
Section 5A.
4 Torsional reinforcement shall be
continued to a distance not less than
(D + b,) beyond the point at which it is no
longer theoretically rea uired, where D is
the overall depth and %,, is the effective
width of the web of a flanged member.
22.6.1.1 SHORT TERM DEFLECTION- T h e

instantaneous deflection due to design loads
may be calculated using elastic analysis based
on the untracked section and the modulus of
elasticity of concrete as given in 5.2.3.
A, = ( V-V&
0.87 f&i
di =
0.4
- 0.87/,
22.6.1 T YPE ~ANDIYPE 2 M E M B E R S
where
6, =
A,,
_
--=
bs,
22.6 Limit State of Serviceability: Defection
and A, = A, + 2 A,
S =
22.5.4.4 MlNlMUM REINFORCEMENT- The

value of A,, shall-not be taken lesser than that
given by:
5maI-n
22.6.1.2 LONG TERM DEFLECTlON - The

total long term deflection due to the
prestressing force, dead load and any
sustained Imposed load may be calculated
using elastic analysis, taking into account the
effects of cracking and of creep and shrinkage
(src 5.2.4 and 5.2.3. Due allowance shall be
made for the loss of pitstress (see18.5.2) after
the period considered. The deflections should
comply with the limits given in19.3.1.
22.6.2 T Y P E 3 ME M B E R S - Where the
permanent load is less than or equal to 2S
percent of the design imposed load, the
deflection may be calculated as in 22.6.1 .I.
When the permanent load is more than 25
percent of the design imposed load, the
vertical deflection limits for beams and slabs
may gemraily be assumed to be satisfied
vk.21
provided that the span to effective depth

ratios are not greater than the values obtained
as below:
4 Basic. values of span to effective depth
ratios for spans up to 10 m:
Cantilever
2:
Simply supported
26
Continuous
b) For spans above. IOm, the values in (a)
may be multiplied by IO/span in metres,

except for cantilever in which case
deflection calculations should be made.
22.7 Limit State of Serviceability : Cracking
22.7.1 In members made up of precast units,
no tension shall be allowed at any stage at
mortar or concrete joints. For member which
is free of joints, the tensile stress shall not
exceed the values specified below for the 3
types of members.
a) TYPE I --/No tensile stress
b) TYPE 2 - The tensile stress shall not
exceed 3 N/mm. However, where part of
the service loads is temporary in nature,
this value may be exceeded by 1.5
N/mm*, provided under the pernanent
component of the service load, the stress
remains compressive.
C) TYPE 3 - For type 3 members in which
cracking is permitted, it may be assumed
that the concrete section is untracked and
that hypothetical tensile stresses exist at
the maximum size of cracks. The
hypothetical tensile stresses for use in
these calculations for members with
either pre-tensioned or post-tensioned
tendons are given in Table 8 modified by
coefficients given in Fig. 4.
TABLE 8 HYPOTHETICAL FLEXURAL TENSILE
STRESS FORTYPE3MEMBERS
TVFE OF
TENDONS
L IMITING S TRESS
C O N CRETE
GRADE
A
OF
CRACK
W IDTH
FOR
%l30h435M4OM45MSO
and
above
Pn-tensioned
tendons
Grouted positensioned
tendons
Prc-tensioned
tendons
distributed in
the tensile zone
and positioned
close to the tension faces of
concrete
vl-22
(2)
mm
(3)
(4)
(9
I
0.2
0.1
0.2
4. I 4.4 4.0
5.0 5.4 5.8
0.
(6)
0.6
I
400
4 200
800
600
~.rCOO
DEPTH OF MEMBER 1N mm
NUrE - The values in Table 8 shall be multipkd by the
factors obtained from the figwe depending on the depth
of the mcmbcr.
Fig.
4 Depth Factors-for Tensile Stress for

Tvpe 3 Members
NOTF -When
additional reinforcement is distributed

within the tension zone and positioned CIOSC to the
tcnsron faec of concrete, the hypothetical tensile stresses
may be increased by ah amount which is proportional to
the cross-sectional area of the additional rcmforcrment
expressed as a pcrcentagc of the cross sectional area of tht
concrete. For I percent of additional reinforcement, the

stress may be increased by 4 N/mm for mcmbcrs with
prc-tcnsioncd and grouted post-tensioned tendons and by
3 N mm- for other members. For other percentages of
addrtronal reinforcement the stresses may be increased m
proportron excepting that the total hypothetical tensile
stress shall not exceed 0.25 trmes the characteristic
compressive strength of.concrcte.
22.8 Limil Stbte of.ServiceabilitJ
: Maximum
Cvmpression
22.8.1 M A X I M U M S T R E S S
C
U NDER
S ERVICE
ONDITIONS
22.8. f .1 COMPRESSIVE STRESS IN FLEXURE -
The maximum permissible compressive

stress, prestress and service loads after
deduction of the full losses in the specified
prestress shall be determined by a straight line
relation as in Fig. 5 but different stress limits
shall apply to the concrete of the structure
depending on whether it falls in a part of the
section where the compressive stresses are not
likely to increase in service (Zone 1) or in part
of the section where the compressive stresses
are iikely to increase in service (Zone II) (see
Fig. 5).
rtONE I,
(7)
*i 3.6 4.1
3.8 4.4 5.0
4.4
5.4
4.8
5.B
0.1
5.3
5.8
6.3.
0.2
6.3
6.8
7.3
'ck
Fig. 5 Computation of Maximum Permissible

Compressive Stress in Fluxure due to
Final Prestresk
For Zone i, the straight line relation of
permissible stress shall be determined by the
NATIOIAL BllLDlNC CODE OF INDIA
straight line joining a point given by a

permissible stress of 0.41 fCk for concrete of
Grade M 30 to another point given by a
permissible stress of 0.35 fCt for concrete of
grade M 60.
0.37 lci
For Zone II, the determining points of the

graph shall be reduced to 0.34&k and 0.27 fik
respectively.
22.8.1.2 STRESS IN DlRECTCOMPRESSlON~~
Except in the parts immediately behind the
anchorage, the maximum stress in direct
compression shall be limited to 0.8 times the
permissible stress obtained from22.8.1. I.
fck
6A POSI
Tensioned Work
22.8.2 M AXIMUM STRESSATTRANSFER

22.8.2.1 COMPRESSIVESTRESSIN FLEXURE The maximum permissible compressive stress
due to bending and direct force at thetinie of
transfer of prestress shall be determined from
a graph in which a straight line joins a point
given by 0.54&i for a concrete of Grade M30
to a second point giving a permissible stress of
0.37 5, for concrete of Grade M 40
(seeFig.6A) fc, being cube strength of concrete
at transfer which in no case shall be less than
half the corresponding characteristic
compressive strength of concrete. These
values apply to post-tensioned work;for pretensioned work the variation represented by
Fig. 6B will apply.
N OTE - The strength of concrete at the time of transfer,
fit, shall bcestabhshed by tests carried out on cubesat the
age 01 the concrete at transfer for bridges and such other
mayor structures and in other cases. if more convenient,
from the straight line raph, joining the characteristic
compressive strength oI@ concrete and cube strength at 7
days. The transfer of prestress shall be made only after the
concrete has attained a strength of at least half the
characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
0.51 lci
El
0.44
lci
M60
M&O
f,k
68
Pre-Tensioned Work
FIN. 6 Computation of Maximum Permissible

Compressive Stress in Flexure at Tran.$er
22.8.2.2 STRESS IN DIRECT COMPRESSION Except in the parts immediately behind the
anchorages, the maximum stress in direct
compression shall be limited to 0.8 times the
permissible stress obtained from22.8.2.1.
APPENDIX A

REQIIREMENTS FOR DURABILITY
A-l. Minimum crment contents for different
exposures and sulphatc attack are given in
Tables 9 and 10 for general guidance.
A-2. To minimize the chances
of deterioration
of concrete froin harmful chemical salts, the
levels of such harmful salts in concrete coming
from the concrete materials.-that is. cement,
FART VI STRUCTURAL
D E S I G N - StCllON 5 CONCBLR
eves, water and admixtures as well as by

i!%~on from the environments should be
limited. Generally, the total amount of
chlorides (as CT)and the total amount of
soluble sul hates (as SO;)in the concrete at
the time oPplacing should be limited to 0.06
percent by mass of cement and 4 percent by
mass of cement, respectively.
VP
TABLE 9 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIRED IN CEMENT CONCRETE TO ENSURE DURABILITY

UNDER SPECIFIED CONDITIONS OF EXPOSURE
(Cluuse A-l)
ExPosuRt
MIHIMUM
C EMENT
C ONTENT
kg/m
M AXIMUM
W ATER
C EMENT
RATIO
Mrld
For example, completely protected against weather, or aggressive conditions,

except for a brief period of exposure to normal weather conditions during
construction
300
0.65
Moderate
For example, sheltered from heavy and wind driven rain and against freezing.
whilst saturated with water, buried concrete in soil andconcretecontinuously
under water
300
0.55
.%WVu
For example. exposed to sea water, alternate wetting and drying and to freezing
whdst wet Subject to heavy condenkatlon or corrosive fumes
360
0.45
The mmlmum cement content IS based on 20 mm nominal maximum size of aggregate. For 40 mm aggregate,
NOW
minimum cement content should be reduced by about 10 percent under severe exposure condition only: for 12.5 mm
aggregate the mmlmum cement content should be Increased by about 10 percent under moderate and severe exposure
condltlons only.
TABLE IO REQUIREME.NTS FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE AT-TACK

(C/uuse A-f)
C ONCENTRATION OF SULPHAIES
E XPRESSED AS S O ,
Cl AS5
TYPE OF
CEMENT
\
In Ground Water
In Soil
/
Minttnnte2tnent Maxtmum Free
Water/Cement
Ratio
lTotal
(parts per ooooo)
. I
(Percent)
Water kxtract
g/t
(I)
(2)
R EQUIREMENTS FOR D E N S E, FULLY

COMPACTEDCONCW~~~ MADE WITH
AG G R E G A T E S C OMPLYING WITH
ACTEPTEDSTANDARD [VI-5(4)]
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
kg/m
i.
Less than @2
2.
0.2 to 0.5
0.5 to I.0
1.9 to
3.1
Less than 30 Ordinary portland

cement or portland slag
cement
280
0.55
30 to 120
Ordinary portkind
cement (see
Note 5) or pottland slag cement
330
0.50
120 to
250
ordinary ptmland
cement (see
Note 5)
330
0.50
NOTE I -This table applies only to concrete made with 20 mm aggregates complying with the requirements of accepted
standard [VI-5(4)] placed in near-neutral ground waters ofpH 6 topH 9. containing naturally occurringsulphatcs but not
contaminants, such as ammonium salts. For 40 mm aggregate the value may be reduced by ahout 15 percent and for
12.5 mm aggregate the value may be increased by about I5 percent. Concrete prepared from Ordinary Portland cement
would not be recommended in acidic conditions @H 6 or less).
NOTE 2 L The cement contents given in Class 2 arc the minimum recommended. For SO, contents near the upper limit of
Class 2, cement contents above these minimum are advised.
NOTE 3 - Where the total SO, in col(2) exceeds 0.5 percent, then 42: I water extract may result in a lower stte cluriftcation
if much of the sulphatc $ present 81 low rolubility calcium sulphnte.
N OTE 4-For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydra-static pressure on one side only and sectiona putly
immersed, considerations should be given to P further reduction of water/cement ratio. and if necessary an incruu in the
cement content to ensure the degree of workability needed for full compaction and thus minimum pemtcability.
N OTE S-For Class 3 ordinary Portland ammt with the additional requirement that C,A content be not more thrn 5
percent and 2 CBA t GAF (or its slid solution 4Ce0, Also,, Fc~ol t 2&O. FesOj) not more than 20 percent is
recommended. If this cement is used for Class 2 minimum cement contentmay be reduced to 310 kg/m.
W-P
NATIONAL
BIJIIDINC CDDL OF INDIA
APPENDIX B
(Clauses 18.6.2.2 and 22.1.2)
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SECTIONS
B-f. The moment of resistance of rectangular
T-sections in which neutral axis
lies within the flange may be obtained as
follows:
sections or
M =jPy A, (d - 0.42 x,)

where
M = moment of resistance of the section,

fPy = ultimate tensile stress in the tendons,
TABLE I I CONDITIONS AT THE ULTIMATE

LIMIT STATE FOR RECTANGULAR BEAMS
WITH PRE-TENSIONED TENDONS OR WITH
POST-TENSIONED TENDONS HAVING
EFFECTIVE BOND
h/P
bd/.r
STRESS
IN
TEN~MXN
R ATIO OF THE D EPTH

oi NEUTRAL A XIS
AS PROFORTION
OF THE DESIGN
StRENCiTH
TO THAT OF THL
CENTROID OF THE
TENDON I N T H E
T ENSION Z O N E
x./d
,
Prc-tcn- Post-tenrioning
sionin
sionin
with Effcctwith Effectivc Bond
ive Bond
0.87 fp
Pm-ten- Port-tensioning
area of pretensioning tendons,

X = neutral axis depth
A,, =
For pretensioned members and for posttensioned members with effective bond
between the concrete and tendons, values of
fPu and xu are given in Table 1 I. The effective
prestress after all losses should not be less than
0.45& where_& is the charactheristic strength
of prestressing steel.
For post-tensioned members with unbonded
tendons the values of,& and xu Are given in
Table 12.
TABLE I2 CONDITIONS AT THE ULTIMATE

LIMIT STATE FOR POST-TENSIONED
RECTANGULAR BEAMS HAVING
UNBONDED TENDONS
4.6
__
bdl,.
S TRESS IN T E N D O N S
RATIO OF DEPTH O F
PROPORTION OF N E U T R A L A XIS T O T H A T
T H E EFFECTIVE PREO F T H E CENTROID O F
STRESS f&f, FOR
THE TENDONS IN THE
V A L U E S OFI/~
TFNSION ZONE x.1 d F O R
V A L U E S OF//~
AS A
E F F E CT IVE S P A N
E FFECTIVE S P A N
(1)
0.025
0.05
(2)
1.0
1.0
(3)
1.0
I.0
(4)
0.054
0.109
(5)
0.054
0.109
0.10
1.0
I.0
0.217
0.217
(2)
0.15
1.0
1.0
0.326
0.316
0.025
1.23
(9
I.34
0.20
0.25
1.0
I.0
0.95
0.9
0.435
0.542
0.414
0.488
0.05
I.21
0.10
I.18
0.30
0.40
1.0
0.9
0.85
0.75
0.655
0.783
0.558
0.653
0.15
0.20
I.14
I.11
E F F E C T IVE D E P T H
)(
EFIZCT~VE
DE P T H
M20
(4)
(5)
0.10
(6)
0.10
(7)
0.10
1.32
I .45
I .45
0.16
0.16
0.18
1.26
1.45
0.30
0.32
0.36
1.20
I.16
I.36
1.27
0.44
0.56
0.46
0.58
0.52
0.64
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those-standards which are acceptable as good practice and
standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the Code. The stadards listedmay be
used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in
the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this part/section.
(I IS: 3370 Code of practice for concrete
(3) IS: 269-1976 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r

.ogdinary and low h e a t P o r t l a n d
cement (third revision)
IS: 8041-1978 Specification for rapid
hardening Portland cement (firsr
revision)
IS: 22 IO-1962 Criteria for design of

reinforced concrete shell structures
and folded plates
IS: 3201-1965 Criteria for design of
precast trusses
IS. 4090- 1967 Criteria for the design of
reinforced concrete arches
IS: 4995 (Part II)-1974 Criteria for the
design of reinforced concrete bins for
the storage of granular and powdary
materials: Part II Design criteria
IS: 4998 (Part I)-1975 Criteria for
design o f r e i n f o r c e d c o n c r e t e
chimneys: Part I Design criteria
1s: 4 5 5 - 1 9 7 6 apecifiration f o r
Portland slag cement (third revision)
Portland pozzolanz cement (sec~~?d
revision)
structures for the storage of liquids:

IS: 3370 (Part l)-1965 Part I General
requirements
I S : 3 3 7 0 ( P a r t II)-1965 Part II
Reinforced concrete structures
(2) IS: 4845- 1968 Definitions and ter-
minology relating to hydraulic

cement:
IS: 6461 Glossary of terms relating to
cement concrete:
IS: 6461 (Part I)-1972 Part I
Concrete aggregates
I S : 6 4 6 1 ( P a r t II)-1972 Part II
Materials (other than cement and
aggregate)
IS: 6461 (Part III)-1972 Part III.
Concrete reinforcement
IS: 6461 (Part IV)-1972 Types of
concrete
IS: 6461 (Part V)-1972 Part V
Formwork for concrete
Equipment, tools and plant
Mixing, laying, compaction, curing
and other construction aspects
Properties of concrete
IS: 6461 (Part IX)-1973 Part IX
Structural aspects
IS: 6461 (Part X)-l973 Part X Tests
and testing apparatus
Prestressed concrete
IS: 6461 (Part XII)-1973 Part XII
Miscellaneous
VT-P
IS: 81 12-1976 Specification for high

strength ordinary Portland cement
IS: 8043- I978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
hydrophobic Portland cement first
revision)
IS: 6452-1972 Specification for high
alumina cement for structural use
IS: 6909-1973 Specification f o r
supersulphated cement
(4) IS: 383-1970 Specification for coarse
and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete (second revision)
(5) IS: 3812-1981 Specification for fly ash:
For use as pozzolana and admixture
fifst revision)
(6) IS: 30251964 Methods of sampling
and tesr (physical and chemical) for
water used in industry
(7) IS: 516-1953 Methods of tests for
strength of concrete
IS: 58161970 Method of test for
splitting tensile strength of concrete
cylinders
IS: 9013-1978 Method of making,
curing and determining compressive
strength of accelerated cured concrete
test specimens
(8) IS: 4031-1968 Methods of physical
tests for hydraulic cement
(9) IS: 9103-1979 Specification for
admixtures for concrete
( IO) IS: i 344 I982 Specification for calcined
clay pw~olana (sarond revision)
NATIONAL 8UlLDlNG CODE OF INDIA
(I I) IS: 432 (Part l)-1982 Specification for

mild steel and medium tensile steel
bars and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement: Part I Mild
steel and medium tensile steel bars
(rhird twlision)
1s: 1139-1966 Specification for hot
rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel

and high yield strength steel deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement
(revisd)
IS: 1786-1979 Specification for coldworked steel high strength deformed

bars for concrete reinforcement
revision)
IS: 1566-1982 Specification for hard-
(secw7d
(20) IS: 786I-Code of practice for extreme

weather concreting:
I S : 786I(Part I)-1975 P a r t I
Recommended p r a c t i c e f o r h o t
weather concreting
I S : 7 8 6 1 ( P a r t II)-1981 Part II
R e c o m m e n d e d practice ior cold
weather concreting
drawn steel wire fabric for concrete

reinforcement (srcor~d rt~visiun)
I S : 226- I975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
structural sieel (standard quality)
fiti reGsion)
(12) IS: 4082-1977 Recommendations on
stackmg and storage of constructlon
materials at site first rcwision)
(21) IS: 1642-1960 Code of practice for 11re

safety of buildings (general): MaterLis
and details of construction
(13) IS: 1199-1959 Methods of sampling

and analysis of concrete
(23) IS: 3951 (Part I)-1975 Specification for

structural holloti clay tiles for lloors
and roofs: Part I Filler type (firs/
(14) IS: 10262-1982 Recommended guidelines for coricrete mix design

(15) IS: 4925-1968 Specification for
concrete batching and mixing plant
(16) IS: 2384 (Part III)-1963 Methods of
test for aggregates for concrete:
Part 111 Specific gravity, density,
voids, absorption and bulking

earthquake r e s i s t a n c e design and
construction
re\Giun)
o f
buildings (lir.q/
revision)
IS: 6061 Code of practice for

construction of floor and roof with
joists and-hollow filler blocks:
IS: 6061 (Part I)-1971 Part I With
hollow concrete filler blocks
IS: 6O6l (Part II)-1981 Part II With
h o l l o w c l a y f i l l e r blocks(/;rsr
revision)
(17) IS: 1791-1968 Specification for batch

type concrete mixers (firsr revismn)
IS: 2505-1980 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
concrete vibrators, immersion type
(24) IS: 1785 Specificatton for plain harddrawn steel wire for prestressed
concrete.
I S : 1785 ( P a r t II)-1983 P a r t I I
Asdrawn wire yirsr revision)
IS: 2506-1964 Specification for screed

board concrete vibrators
IS: 2514-1963 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
concrete vibrating tables
IS: 4656-1968 Specification for form
vibrators for cOncrete

indented wire for prestressed concrete
(/irst relision)

bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement

welding of mild steel plain and
deformed bars for reinforced concrete
constructionfirsr relwiun)
IS: 9413-1979 Recommendations for
welding cold-worhed steel bars for
reinforced concrete construction
R T
Vl
STRIJC-TIJPAI.
DCSICN - SECTlOW 5 CONCRETE
flirsl revision)
IS: 2090-1962 Specification for high

tensile steel bars used in prestressed
concrete Cfirsr rrvision)
uncoated stress relieved strand for
prestressed concrete (/Yrst wvision)
,P
NATIONALBUILDINGCODE

SECTION6STEEL
,
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
. . .
1. SCOPE
. . .
2. TERMINOLOGY
3. MATERIALS
4. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
. . *
5. DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
14
6. DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
. . .
I5
7. DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO BENDING
. . .
25
8. COMBINED STRESSES
. . .
47
9. CONNECTIONS
49
10. PLASTIC DESIGN
54
II. DESIGN OF ENCASED MEMBERS
. . .
57
12. FABRICATION AND ERECTION
. . .
59
13. STEEL-WORK TENDERS AND CONTRACTS
. . .
63
CHART SHOWING HIGHEST MAXIMUM

TEMPER.ATURE
. . .
64
CHART SHOWING LOWEST lWlNIMlJh4

TEMPERATURE
. . .
65
APPENDIX C
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
. * .
66
APPENDIX D
METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE

LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS
. . .
68
LIST OF REFERENCES ON THE ELASTIC

FLEXURAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF
STEEL BEAMS
. . .
73
PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF INDIAN STANDARD

MEDIUM WEIGHT BEAMS
...
73
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR

STEELWORK TENDERS AND
CONTRACTS
74
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX F
APPENDIX G
...

SECTION 6 STEEL
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the structural design aspect of steel structures in buildings.
0.2 This section covers the use of.hot-rolled structural steel sections, steel tubes and
cold-formed light gaugs steel in buildings. It permits the design by working stress
method and plastic theory.
0 . 3 This. section is based on IS:800-1984 Code of practice for general construction in
steel (second revision) (Amendment No. I) and IS: 806-1968 Code of practice for use
of steel tubes in general building constructionCfirsr revision).
0.1 This-revision is intended to bring it in line with revised version ofIS:800-l984.
0.5
1.n this revision the following major modifications have been effected:
a) Resides a genera1 rearrangement of the clauses, formulae and the values

have been given in SI units only.
b) Symbols used in this Standard have been aligned to the extent possible with
IS0 3898-1976 Basis for design of structures-Notation--General
symbols.
c) In view of the development and production of new varieties of medium and

high tensile structural steels in the country, the scope of the Code has been
modified permitting the use of any variety of structural steel provided the
relevant provisions of the Code aresatisfied.
d) Indian Standards are now available for rivets, bolts and other fasteners and
reference has been made to these standards.
In view of the fact that the Code specifies a number of grades of steel with
different yield strengths, the design parameter, the geometrical properties
and permissible stresseshave been expressed to the extent possible in terms
of the yield strength of the material. Speciftc values have also been given for
commonly used steels.
PART VI STRCCITJRAL DESIGN-SECTlON
6 STEEL
W-6..
f)
Recommendations regarding expanrion joints have been added.
g) Keeping in view the developments in the design of steel structures there has
been a general i&sion in the permissible stress values for steels and
fasteners.
h) In IS: 800-1962, design by plastic theory had been permitted. Inthis revision
detailed design rules have been included for design using plastic theory.
j)
Specific provisions relating to limiting deflection have been added.
k) Effective length of columns has been dealt with in a greater detail. For
normally encountered struts, a table has been given strictly on the basis of
end conditions. The effective length of columns in framed structures and
stepped columns in mill buildings have been specified on more exact basis.
m) The secant formula far axial compression has been dropped. In its place the
Merchant Rankine formula has been specified with value ofn. empirically
fixed as 1.4.
n) fknding stresses - The method of calculating the critical stresses in bending
comprhOnf,b has been simplified by expressing the formulae in terms of
geometrical properties of the section. Merchant Rankine formula recommended f6r calculating permissible stresses in a,xial compression has been
used for calculating permissible stresses in bending compression from the
critical stresses, with value of n empirically fixed as 1.4.
0.3.1
More rigorous analytical procedurez? than envisaged in this Code are

available and can be made use of for finding effective lengths of compression members in determining elastic critical loads.
I. SCOIE
1.1 This section covers the use of structural
steel in general building construction inclu&
ing the use of hot rolled steel sections and steel
tubes.
NOTE--$ecial requirenwnts ,as applicable IO s1wI lubes
arc included undei appropriate clauses.
1.2 .Special provisions applicable to the use of

cold-formed light gauge steel sections shallbe
in accordance with good practice [VI-H I I]*
1.3 Theprovisions of thiS section are gcnerally applicable to rivetted. bolted and wcldc&
construction.
2. T E R M I N O L O G Y
2. I For the purpose of this section the following definitions shall apply.
Buckling Load--The load at which a member
or a structure as a whole collapses in service or
buckles in a load test.
Dead Lout/s--The self weights of all permanent cons1ructions and installations including
the self weights of all walls, partitions, floors
and roofs.
,!$ective Lateral Restraint--Restraint which
produces sufficient resistance in a plane perpendicular to the plane of bending to restrain
the compression flange of a loaded. strut,
beam or girder from buckling to either side at
the point of application of the restraint.
Elastic Critical M o m e n t - - - T h e e l a s t i c
moment which will initiate yielding or cause
buckling.
Factor of Sqfity-The factor by which the
yield stress of the material of a member is
divided to arrive at the permissible stress in
the material.
Guuge-The transverse spacing between
parallel adjacent liaes of fasteners.
Imposed (Live) Load-The load assumed to
be produced by the intended use of occupancy
including distributed. concentrated, impact
and vibration and snow loads but excluding,
wind and earthquake loads.
*In this se&on where reference isndetogood practice
or accepted standrrdsin relation to design. testing. construction prdeedu~ and material specification. the
appropriate document listed at the end of this section may
k used 1s 8 pidc to thi interpretatioti of this terin.
Load Foctor -The numerial factor hy which

the working load is to be multiplied LO obtain
an appropriate design ultimate load.
Main ,Vernhrr A structural member which
is primarily responsible for carrying and distributing the applied Itiad.
Pitch The ccntre to centre distance between
individual fasteners in a line of fastcncr.
.Wonc/~r~~ Mcwbrr Secondary lncmbcr is
that which is provided for-stability and or
restraining the main members from buckling
or similar modes of failure.
Yield Stress The minimum yield stress of the
material in tension :IS specified in relevant
Indian Standards.
2.1.1 WEI.I)ING IEHMs-
-Unless otherwise
defined in this sectiyn the welding terms used
shall have the nieaning given in accordance
with good practice [VI-h,(2)].
2.2 .Syr~tho/.s Symbols used in this Code
shall have the following mcnnings with respect
to the structure or*member or condition.
unless otherwise defined elsewhere in this
Code:
A
a. h
B
h
Clll
C
c
Cl. (2
D
d
d.
4
Cross-sectional area (A used with

subscripts has been defined at
appropriate place)
Respectively the greater and lesser
projection of the plate beyond
column
Length of side of cap or base
Width of steel flange in encased
member
Coefficient
The distance centre to centre of
battens
Distance between vertical stiffeners
Respectively the lesser and greater
distances from the sections neutral
axis to the extreme fibres
Overall +pth of beam
Depth 01 girder--to be taken as
the clear distanee between flange
angles or where there are no flange
angles the clear distance between
flanges ignoring fillets
Diameter df the reduced end of the
column
i) For the web of a beamwithout
horizontal stiffeners-the clear
distance ktween the flanges,
VI.63
dz
g
h
I
Kb or Kc
kt, kz
k
L
I
M
a
Mpc
MO
N
P
P&
p*
PC
\ PP
neglecting fillets or the clear

distance between the inner toes
of the flange angles as
appropriate
ii) For the web of a beam with
horizontal stiffenkrs-t he clear
distance between the horizontal
stiffener and the tension flange;
negleciing fillets or the inner
toes of the tension flange angles
as appropriate
Twice the clear disthnce from the
neutral axis of a beam to the compression flange. neglecting fillets
or the inner toes of the flange
angles as appropriate
The modulus of elasticity for steel,
taken as 2~ 105 MPa in this Cbde
Yield stress
Elastic critical stress in bending
Elastic critical stress in compression, also known as Euler critical
stress
Gauge
Outstand of the stiffener
Moment of inertia
Flexural stiffnesses
Coefficients
Distance from outer face of flange
to web toe of fillet of member to be
stiffened
Span/ length of member
Effective lendth of the member
Bending moment
Maximum moment (plastic)
capacity of a section
Maximum moment (plastic)
capacity of a se&ion subjected to
bending and axial loads
Lateral bucklipg strength in the
absence of axial load
Number of parallel planes of
battens
Coeffikient in the Merchant Rankine formula, assumed as I .4
Aitial~ force, compressive or tensile
Cdlculated maximum load capacity of a strut
Calc&ted maximum load capacity as a tension member
Euler load,
Yield strength diaxkily loaded

s&on
The reaction .of the beam .-at the
sup@rt
vbb
Radius of gyration of the section

Transverse distance betweencentroids of rivets groups or welding
Staggered pitch
Mean thickness of Compression
flange (T used with subscripts has
been defined at appropriate place)
Thickness of web
Transverse shear
Longitudinal. shear
Calculated maximum shear capacity of a section
Total load
Pressure or loading on the underside of the base
Plastic modulus of the section
Ratio of smaller to larger moment
Stiffness ratib
Slenderness ratio of the member;
ratio of the effective length (I) to
the appropriate radius of gyration
(r)
Characteristic slenderness ratio
Maximuni permissible compressive stress in an axially loaded

strut not subjected to bending
Maximum permissible .tensile
stress in an axially loaded tension
member not subjected to bending
Maximum permissible bending
stress in slab base
Maximum permissible -compressive stress due to bending in a
member not subjected to axial
force
Maximum permissible tensile
stress due to bending in a member
not subjected to axial force
Maximum permissible stress in
concrete in compression
Maximum permissible equivalent
stress
Maliimum permissible bearing
stress in a member
Maxinium permissibk bearing
stress in a fastener
Maxinium permissible stress in
steel in compression
.Maximum permissible stress in
axial tension in fastener
Calculated average axial compressive stress

Calculated average stress in a
member due to an axial tensile
force
Calculated compressive stress in a
member due to bending about a
principal axis
Calculated tensile stress in a
member due to bending about
both principal axes
Maximum permissible average
shear stress in a member
Maximum permissible shear stress
in. a member
Maximum permissible shear stress
in fastener
Ratio of the rotation at the hinge
point to the relative elastic rotation of the far end of the beam
segment containing plastic hinge
Coefficient
Ratio of total area of both the
flanges at the point of least bend-
ing movement to thscorresponding area at the point of greatest

bending moment
Ratio of moment of inertia of the
compression flange alone to that
of the sum of the moments of inertia of the flanges each calculated
about its own axis parallel to the
y-y axis of the girder, at the point
of maximum bending moment.
NW E The subscript x. .y denote the X-X and y-y axis of
rhe section respectively. For symmetrical sections, x-x
denotes the major principal axis whilst J-J denotes the
minor principal axis.
2.3 Plans and Drawings
Plans, drawings and stress sheetshall be

prepared according to good practice [VI-
2.3.1
WI.
may be required for the

proper preparation of shop drawings. Any
special precaution to be taken in the erection
of structure from thedesignconsideration,thc
same shall also be indicated in the drawing.
connections, as
SHOP BKAWIMS -Shop drawings.

giving complete information necessary for the
fabrication of the component parts of the
structure including the location, type, size.
length, and detail of all welds, shall be prepared in advance of the actual fabrication.
They shall clearly distinguish between shop
and field rivets, bolts and welds. For addi-
2.3.1.2
tional information to be included ondrawings

for designs based on the use of welding, reference shall be made to appropriate Indian
Standards. Shop drawings shall be made in
accordance with good practice [Vl43)]. A
marking diagram allotting distinct identification marks to each separate part of steel work
shall be prepared. The diagram shall besuffrcient to ensure convenient assembly and erection at site.
2.3.2 Symbols for welding used on plans
and shop drawings shall be according to
IS:813-1961.
3. MATERIALS
3. I All materials used in structural steel construction shall conform to Part V Building
materials. Structural steel, rivets, welding
consumables, steel castings, bolts and nuts,
washers and steel tubes shall be in accordance
with accepted standards[W-6(5)].
3.2 Tubes-Tubes made by other than hot
finishing processes, or which-have been subjected to cold working, shall be regarded as
hot finished if they have subsequently been
heat-treated and are supplied in the normalized conditions.
NOTE-Grade ERW YSt 22 tuttcs conforming to
ampted standard;[VI4(J)) with a carbon content kss
than 0.30 percent. may be considered as hot finished for
the purposes of 2.2.
2.3.1.i PLANS-.-T~~ plans (design drawings)

shall show the complete design with sizes, sections, and the relative locations of the various 1. GENERALDESIGN REQUIREMENTS
members. Floor levels, column ccntres, and
offsets shall be dimensioned. Plans shall be 4.1 Types of &ads
drawn to a scale large enough to convey the 4.1. I For the purpose of computing the maxiinformation adequately. Plans shall indicate mum stresses in any structure or member ofa
the type of construction to be employed; and structure, the following loads and load effects,
shall be supplemented by such data on the shall be taken into account, where applicabkz
assumed loads, shears, moments and axial
a) Dead loads;
forces to be resisted by all members and their
VI45
Imposed loads;
Wind loads;
Earthquake loads;
Erection loads; and
Secondary effects due to contraction or
expansion resulting from temperature
changes. shrinkage, creep in compression members, differential settlements
of the structure as a whole and its
components.
41.2 The dead loads, imposed loads (live
loads), dynamic effects, wind 1,oads. seismic
loads and snow loads to be assumed in design
shall be according to Part VI Structural
design, Section 1 Loads.
4.1.2.1 Imposed loads. arising from equipment. such as cranes and machines to be
assumed in design shall.be as per manuiacturem/suppliers data (see 4.4.2.4).
4.1.2.2 The erection loads and temperature
effects shall be calculated in accordance
with 4.2 and 4.3
4.2 Erection Loads
4.2.1 .All loads required to be carried by the
structtire or any part of it due to storage or
positioning of construction material and erection equipment including all loads dua to
operation of such equipment, shall be considered as erection loads. Proper provision
shall be made. including temporary bracings
to take care of all stresses due to erection
loads. The structure as a whole and all parts of
thestructureinconjuctionwiththetemporary
bracings shall be capable of sustaining these
erection loads. without exceeding the permissiblc stresses as specified in this code subject to. the allowable increase of stresses as
indicated in 4.9. Dead load, wind load and
also such parts of the live load as would be
imposed on the structure during the period of
erection shall be taken as acting together with
the erection loads.
4.3 .Tenrperatrtre ,FJkts
4.3.1 Expansion and contraction due to
changes in temperature of the materials of a
structure shall be considered and adequate
provision made for the effects produced.
4.32 The temperature range varies fordifferent localities and under different diurnsil and
seasonal conditions. The absolute maximum
and minimum temperatures which may be
VW
expected in different localities in tne country

are indicated on the maps of India in Appendices A and B. respectively. These appendices
may be used for guidance in assessing the
maximum variations of temperature for
which provision for expansion and contraction has to be allowed in the,structure.
4.3.3 The temperatures indicated on the maps
in Appendices A and B are the air temperatures in the shade. The range of variation in
temperature of the building materials may be
appreciably greater or less than the variation
of air temperature and is influenced by the
condition of exposure and the rate at which
the materials composing the structure absorb
or radiate heat. Thisdifference in temperature
variations of the material and air should be
given due consideration.
4.3.4 The co-efficient of expansion for steel
shall be taken as 0.000 012 per degree centigrade per unit length.
4.4.1 GE N E R A L - All parts of the steel
framework of the structure shall be capable of
sustaining the most adverse combination of
the dead loads, prescribed imposed loads,
wind loads, earthquake loads where applicable and any other forces or loads to which the
building may reasonably be subjected without
exceeding the permissible stresses specified in
this standard.
4.4.2 L OAD C OMBINATIONS
4.4.2.1 Load combinations for design purposes shall be the one that produces maximum forces and effects and consequently
maximum stresses from the following combinations of loads:
a) Dead load + imposed loads,
b) Dead load 4 imposed loads i- wind or
earthquake loads, and
c) Dead load + wind or earthquake loads.
NOIP --In case ofqructum bcaringcranc loads, imposed
lids shall include the crane &ect as given in 1.1.2.1,
4.4.2.2 Wind load and earthquake loads shall

be assumed not to act simultaneously. The
effect of both the forces shall be given
separately.
4.4.2.3 The effect of cranes to be considered
under imposed loads shall include the vertical
NATIONAL WU.DING CODE Op INDIA
loads, eccentricity effects induced by the vertical loads, impact factors, lateral (surge) and
the longitudinal horizontal thrusts acting
across and along the crane rail. respectively.
4.4.2.4 The crane loads to be considered shall
be as indicated by the customer. In the
absence of any specific indications the load
combination shall be as follows:
il) Verti,cal loads with full impact from one
loaded crane or two cranes in case of
tendum operation together with vertical
loads. without impact, from as many
loaded cranes as may be positioned for
maximum effect, alongwith maximum
horizontal thrust (surge) from one crane
only or two cranes in case of tandum
operation;
b) For multibay multicrane gantries loads as specified in (a) above, subject to
consideration of cranes in maximum of
any two bays of the building cross
section;
cl The longitudinal thrust on a crane track
b) Semi-rigid design. and

c) Fully rigid design.
4.4.4 SIMPLE DESIGN - This method applies
to structures in which the end connections
between members are such that they will not
develop restraint moments adversely affecting
the membersand thestructureasa wholeand
in consequence the structure may, for the purpose of design. be assumed to be pin-jointed.
4.4.4. I The method of simple design involves
the following assumption&
a) Beams are simply supported;
b) All connections of beams, girders or

trusses are virtually flexible and are proportioned for the reaction shears applied at the appropriate eccentricity;
cl Members in compression are subjected

to forces applied at the appropriate
eccentricities (see 6.3.3) with the effective length given in 6.2; and
4 Members in tension are subjected to

longitudinal forces applied over the net
area of the section, as specified under
rail shall be considered for a maximum

of two loaded cranes on the track; and
4.6.2 and 5.2. I.
4 Lateral thrust (surge) and the longitudinal thrust acting respectively across and
along the crane rail shall not be assumed
to act simultaneously. The effect of both
the forces, shall, however, be investigated separately.
4.4.2.5 While investigating the effect of earthquake forces the resulting effect from dead
loads of all cranes parked in each bay positioned for maximum effect shall be considered.
4.4.2.6 The crane runway girders supporting

bumpers shall be checked forbumper impact
loads.
4.4.2.7 Stresses developed due to secondary
effects such as handling. erection, temperature effects. settlement of foundations
shall be appropriately added to the stresses
calculated from the combination of loads
stated in 4.4.2.1. The total stresses thus calculated shall be within the permissible limits as
specified in 4.9.
4.4.3 METHODS OF DESIGN - - The following
methods may be employed for.the design of
the steel framework:
a) Simple design.
PART
n muciuEAL
DlSIoN-SCCIWN
6 -
4.4.5 SEMI- RIGID D ESIGN - This method,

as compared with the simple design method,
permits a reduction in the maximum bending
moment in beams suitably connected to their
supports, so as to provide a degree of direction
fixity, and in the case of triangulated frames, it
permits account being taken of the rigidity of
the connections and the moment of interaction of members. In cases where this method
of design is employed, calculations based on
general or particular experimental evidence
shall be made to show that the stresses in any
part oft he.structure are notin excess of those
laid down in the code. Stress investigations
may also be done on the finished structure for
assurance that the actual stresses under specific design loads are not in excess of those laid
down in the standard.
FULLV RIGID D ESIGN - This method
as compared to the methods of simple and
semi-rigid designs gives the greatest rigidity
and economy in the weight of steel used when
applied in appropriate cases. The end connections of members of the frames shall have
sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles
between such members and the members they
4.4.6
tion shall be calculated by deducting

from the area of the gress-cross section
the following:
connect virtually unchanged. Unless otherwise specified, the ,design shall be based on
theoretical methods ofilastic analysis and the
calculated stresses shall conform to the relevant provisions of this standard. Alterna$ively, it shail be based on the principles of
plastic design as given in 9.
i) The sectional area in excess of effective plate width, as given in 4.5.2, and
ii) The sectional areas of all holes in the
sectioli, except that for parts in compression (see 4.6).
4.4.7 E XPERIMENTALLY B ASED D ESIGN Where structure is of non-conventional or

complex nature, the design may be based on 4.5.2 PLATE T~CKNESS
full scale or model tests subject to the follow- 4.5.2.1 If- the projection of a plate or flange
ing donditions:
beyond its connection to a web, or otherlink
A full scale test of prototype structure of support or the like, exceeds the relevant
may be done. The prototype shall be values given in (a), (b) and (c) below, the area
accurately measured before testing to of the excess flange shall be neglected when
determine the dimensional tolerance in ciiculating the effective geometrical properall relevant parts of the structure; the ties of the section.
tolerances then specified on.the drawing
256 7i
shall be such that all successive struca) Flanges and plates - subject to a
fi maximum of
in compression
tures shall be in- practical conformity
I6 TI
with
&stiffened
with the prototype. Where the design is
edges
based on failure loads, a load factor of
not less than 2.0 on the loads or load
b) Flanges and plates 20 T, to the innermost face
in compression
combinations given in 4.4.2 shall be
of the
with
stiffened
.edges
used. Loading devices shall be prestiffening
viously calibrated and care shall be exercised to ensure that no artificial
cl Flanges and plates in tension 20 TI
restraints are applied to the prototype NOTE I - Stiffened flanges shall include flanges comby the loading systems. Thedistribution p& of channels or l-sections or of plates with continuand duration of forces applied in the test ously stiffened edges.
shall be representative of those to which NOTE 2 - TI denotes the thickness of the.flange of a
the structure is deemed to be subjected. sectton or of a plate in compression. or the aggregate
b) In the case where design is based on the

testing of a shall scale model structure,
the model shall be constructed with due
regard for the principles of dimensional
similarity. The thrusts, moments and
deformations under working loads shall
be determined by physical measurements made when the loadings areapplie$ to simulate the conditions assumed
in the dqign of the actual struciure.
4.5 Geometrical Properties
4.5.1 GENERAL - The geometrical properties of the gro& arid the etfective cross sections
of a member or part thereof shall be calculated
on the following basis:
a) The properties of the gross cross section
shall be calculated from the specified
size of the member or part thereof.
b)- he properties of the effkctive cross sec-
thickness of plates; if connected together in accodance

with the provisions of 8, IS appropriate.
NOTE 3 - The width of the outstand of members referred
ahove shall be taken is follows:
TYP
Plates
Angle, charinels, Z-sections

and stems of tee sections
Flmgeofbe8mmdtac
Width of Outstand
DiStance from the free
edge to the first row of
rivets or welds
Nominal width
Half the nominal width
S8CtiOlU
4.5.2.2 Where a plate is connected to other

parts of a built up member along lines generally parallel to fhe longitudinal axis of the
member, the width between any two adjacent
lines of connections or supports shall not
exceed the following:
a) For plates in uniform compression 1%. subject to a maximum of 90 T,
4T
However. where the width exceede -
560 T,
subject to a maximum of 35 ?i
for welded plates which are not
stressed relieved. or.
800 T, subject to a maximum of 50 TI,
z-
for other plates.
the excess width shall be assumed to be

located centrally and its Sectional area
shall be neglected when calculating the
effective geometrical properties of the
section.
bb For plates in uniform tension - 100 TI.

However where the width exceeds 68 I,
the excess width shall be assumed to be
located centrally and its sectional area
shall be neglected when calculating the
geometrical properties of the section.
exposed to weather shall be not lessthan

2.6 mm thick, provided in each case the
tube is applied with:
I) one coat of zinc primer conformiug
to accepted standards [Y 1-6 (6)] followed by a coat. of red oxide-zinc
chromate ready mixed paint conforming to accepted standards[VI-6
WI. and
ii) two coats of semi-gloss brushing, finishing, ready mixed paint conforming to accepted standards (VI-6(6)].
This painting system has to be renewed after
every two years in the case of tubes exposed to
weather. In case some other metallic corrosion protecting material is used, such asaluminium painting, the renewal of coating may be
done after longer intervals.
4.6 Holes
In this rule, TI shall be taken to be the

thickness of the plate, irrespective of
whether the plate is a flange or a web-of
the member.
4.6.1 DIAMETER - In calculating the area to

be deducted for rivets, bolts or pins, the
diameter of the hole shall be taken.
4.5.2.3 The provisions contained in 4.5.2.1

and 4.5.2.2 shall not be applicable to box
girders (where width/depth is greater than
0.2). In such cases strength is not usually governed by lateral buckling. However, in such
cases check s.hould be exercised for local buckling and yield stress of material.
4.6.1.1 In making deduction for rivets less

than or equal -to 25 mm in diameter, the
diameter-of the hole shall be assumed to beI .5
mm in excess of the nominal diameter of the
rivet unless specified otherwise. If the diameter of the rivet is greater than 25 mm, the
diameter of the hole shall be assumed to be 2.0
rivet unless specified otherwise.
4.5.2.4 For only the diaphragm of the box

girder. all the provisions pertaining to size,
thickness, spacing, etc, asgiven in 4.5.2. I and
4.5.2.2 for plate girders shall be applicable.
4.5.2.5 STEEL TUBES
a) For tubular steel work painted with one

priming coat of red oxide-zinc chromate
paint after fabrication and periodically
painted and mtiintained regularly, wall
thickness of tubes used for construction
exposed to weather shall be not less than
4 mm. and for construction not exposed
to weather shall be not less than 3.2 mm;
where structures are not readily accessible for maintenance. the minimum
thickness shall be 5 mm.
b) Steel tubes used for construction

exposed to weather shall be not less than
3.2 mm thick and for construction not
.4.6.i.2 In making deduction for bolts, the

diameter of the hole shall be assumed to be1.5
bolt, unless otherwise specified.
4.6.1.3 For counter sunk rivets or bolts the,
appropriate addition shall be made to the
diameter of the hole.
4.6.2 DEDUCTION FOR HOLES
4.6.2.1 Except as required in 4.6.2.2 the&rear
to be deducte$ shall be the sum of the sect
tional area of the maximum number of holea
in any cross section at right angles to the
dire&ion of stress in the member for:
8) all
axially loaded tcnaion members,
b) plate girdem with d/t ratio exceeding

the limita specifscd in 7.7.3.X:
NOTE - In a built-up member where the chains of holes

where
considered in individual parts do no.tcor.respond with the
1 = thickness of web, and
critical chain of holes for the members as a whole, the
d =depth of the girder to be taken asthe clear value of any rivets or bolts joining the parts betweensuch
distance between flange angles or where chains of holes shall be taken intoaccount in determining
there are no flange angles the clear.dis- the strength of the member.
tance.between flanges ignoring fillets.
4.7 Maximum Slenderness Rario
4.6.2.2 Where bolt or rivet holes are staggered, the area to be deducted shall be the sum 4.7.1 The maximum slenderness ratio
I
of the sectional areas of all holes in a chain A
=- of beam, strut or tensionmem1 )
of lines extending progressively across the
(
2
ber given in Table I shall not be exceeded. In
member, less !_!_for each line extending betthis /,is the effective length of the member
+!
ween holes at other than right angles to the (see 6.2) and r is appropriate radius of gyradirection of stress, where, S, g and I are respec- tion based on the effective section as defined
tively/he staggered pitch, gaugeand thickness in 4.5. I.
associated with the line under consideration
TABLE I
[see Fig. 1 A]. The chain of lines shall be
M A X I M U M SLENDERNFSS R A T I O
.
chosen to produce the maximum such deducMAXIMUM
tion. For non-planer sections, such as angles SI. M~MUER
SLENDERwith holes in both legs, the gauge, g, shall be No.
NESS
the distance along the centre of the thickness
R ATIO A
of the section between hole centres [see (1)
(3)
*
(2)
Fig. I B].
i) A member carrying compressive
I80
loads resulting from dead
loads and imposed loads
DIRECTION OF FORCE
S
24
ii)
A tension member in which a

reversal of direct stress due to
loads other than wind or seismic
forces occurs
180
iii)
A member subjected to
compression forces resulting
from wind/earthquake forces
provided the deformation of
such member does not adversely
affect the stress in any
part of the structure
250
iv)
Compression flange of a beam
300
v)
A member normally acting as

a tie in a roof truss or a
bracing system but subject to
possible reverse of stress
resulting from the action of
wind or earthquake forces
350
vi)
Tension members (other thar

oretensioned members)
400
-_-
4.8 Corrosion Protection - Minimum

lb) Angh
DEDUCTION = (Sum of
l ndD)-
mionrl areas of hokr B. C
[$+22]
Rg. I Staggered Pitch, s, and Gauge, g
VI.20
Thickness of Metal
4.8.1 GE N ER A L - Ex&pt
where the provisions of subsequent clauses require thicker

elements of members, the minimum thickness
of metal for any structural element shall be, as
specified under 4.8.2 to 4.8.4.
4.8.2 S T E E L W O R K D I R E C T L Y EXPOSED TO
W E A T H E R - Where the steels is directly
load is taken intoaccount. the permissible

stresses specified may be exceeded by 25
percent.
exposed to weather and is fully accessible for
cleaning and repainting, the thickness shall be
4.9.2.2 ERECTlON LOADS
not less than 6 mm and where the steel is
directly exposed to weather and is not accessi- a) SECONDARY EFFECTS--WITHOUT WIND
O R E AR T H Q U A K E L O A D S - F o r c o n ble for cleaning and repainting, the thickness
structions where secondary effects are
shall be not less than 8 mm. These provisions
conSidered without wind or earthquake
do not Apply to the webs of Indian Standard
loads. the permissible stresses on the
roiled steel joists and channels or to packings.
member or its connections as specified
4.8.3 STEELWORK NOT D I R E C T L Y E X P O S E D
may be exceeded by 25 percent.
TO WEATHER
4.8.3.1 The thickness of steel in main

membersnot directly exposed to weather shall
be not less than 6 mm.
4.8.3.2 The thickness of steel in secondary
members not directly exposed to weather shall
be not less than 4.5 mm.
b)
4.8.4 R OLLED S TEEL. BEAMS AND C HANNELS - The contrblling thickness as specified
under 4.8.2 and 4.8.3 for rolled beams and
channels shall be taken as the mean thickness
of flange, regardless of the web thickness.
4.9.2.3 in no case shall a member or its connections have less carrying capacity than that
needed if the wind or earthquake loads or
secondary effects due to erection loads are
neglected.
48.5 The requirements of thicknesses specitied under 4.8.2 to 4.8.4 do not apply to special
light structural work or lo sealed box section
4.9.3
SECONDARV EFFECTS COMBINED WITH

W I N D 0R EA R T HQ U AKE LOADS -- W h e n
secondary effects are considered together

with wind or earthquake loads. the
increase in the permissible stresses shall
be as specified in 4.9.2.1.
FOR
THEIR
I N C REASE
IN
PERMlsslBLE ST R E S S E S
ESIGN
ANTRY
OF
UPPORTING
IRDERS
TRUCTURES
AND
-While
considering the simultaneous effects of vertical and horizontal surge loads of cranes for
has been made or to steelwoik exposed to the combination given in 4.4.2.3 and 4.4.2.4
the permissible stresses may.be increased by
highly corrosive industrial fumes or vapour or
10 percent.
saline atmosphere. Insuch cases the minimum
thickness of structural and secondary
4.9.4 Where the wind load is the main load
or to steel work in which special provision

against corrosion. such as use of special paints
members shall be mutually settled between the

customer and the designer.
4.9
Increase C$ Stresses
acting on the structure, no increase in the

permissible stresses is allowed.
4.10
Fluctuation of Stresses
4.9. I GENERAL -- Except as specified in4.9.2

to 4.9.4, all parts of the structure shall be so
proportioned that the working stresses sh&il
not exceed the specified values.
4.10.1 Members subjected to fluctuations of

stresses are liable to suffer from fatigue failure
caused by loads much lower than those which
would be necessary to cause failure under a
4.9.2 INCREASE oh: PERMISSIBLE STRESSES single application. The fatigue cracks are
caused primarily due to stress concentrations
IN M E M B E R S PROPORTIONED FOR OCCAintroduced by constructional details. DisconSIONAL LOADINGS
tinuities such as bolt or rivet holes, welds and
4.9.2.1 WIND OR EARTHQUAKE LOADS
other local or general ch+nges in geometrical
form cause such stress concentrations from
a) STRUCTURAL STEEL AND STEEL-CASTwhich fatigue cracks may be initiated, and
INGS - When the effect of wind or earthquake- load is taken into account, the these cracks may subsequently propagate
permissible stresses specified may be through the connected or fabricated
members.
exceeded by 33 + percent.
b) RIVETS. BOLTS AND TENSION RODS -
When theeffect ofthe wind orearthquake
Ail details shall, therefore, be designed to

avoid, as far as possible, stress concentrations
likely to result in excessive reduction of the

fatigue strength of mcmbcrs or connections.
Care shall bc taken to avoid sudden changes
of shape of a member or part of a member,
especially in regions of tensile stress or local
secondary bending.
411.2 When the walls, or walls and floors

and/or roof are capable of Cllcctively transmitting all of the horizontal forces directly to
the foundations, the structural framework
may be designed without considering the
effect of wind.
Except where specifically stated to the contrary, the permissible fatigue stresses for any
particular detail are the same for all steels.
4.11.3 W ind and earthquake forces arc

reversible and therefore calls for rigidity in
both longitudinal and transverse directions.
To provide for torsional effects of wind and
earthquake forces bracings in plan should be
provided and integrally connected with the
longitudinal and transverse bracings to
impart adequate torsional resistance to the
structure.
410.2 When subjected to fluctuations .of

stresses the permissible stresses shall be the
basic stress stipulated in accordance with
good practice [VI-6(7)] for different.fmin/.fL,x
and for different number of stress cycles and
classes
of constructional details.
,
The following provisions shall also be considered while determining the permissible stress
in members sybjected to fluctuations of stress:
a)
Whilecomputingthe valueof.f~i&,~.~ the

effect of wind or earthquake temperature
and secondary stresses shall be ignored.
b) For plain steel in the as-rolled condition

with no gas cut edges the constructional
detail shall be considered as Class A of
[VI-h(7)].
c)
For members of steel with yield stress 280

Mls and over, and fabricated or connected with bolts or rivets the construction details shall be considered as ClassUC
of [VI-6(7)].
For members of steels with yield stress
below 2110 M Pa, fabricated or connected
with bolts or rivets the construction
details shall be considered as Class D of
w-6(7)1.
d) The value of fmlLI shall not exceed the
permissible tensile or compressive fatigue
stress as determined from [VI-6(7)].
Where co-existent bending and shear
stresses are present&, shall be taken as
the principal stress at the point under
consideration.
4. I I Resistance IO Hcdonral Forces
411.1 In designing the steel framework of
building, provisions shall be made by adequatemoment connections or by a system of
bracing to effectively transmit to the founda*
tions all the horizontal forces, making due
allowance for the stiffening effect of the walls
and floors, where applicable.
I-P
4. I I,3.! In shed type buildings, adequate provisions shall be made by wind bracings to
transfer the wind or earthquake loads from
their. points of action to the appropriate supporting members. Where the connections to
the interior columns are so designed that the
wind or earthquake loads are not transferred
to the interior columns. the exterior columns
shall be designed to.resist the total wind or
,earthquake loads. Where the connections to
the interior columns are so designed that the
wind or earthquake effects are transferred to
the interior columns also, both exterior and
interior columns shall be designed on the
assumption that the wind or earthquake load
is divided among them in proportion to.their
relative stiffnesscs. Columns also should be
tested for proper anchorage to the trusses and
other members to withstand the uplifting
effect caused by excessive wind or-earthquake
pressure from below the roof.
4.11.3.2 Earthquake forces .are proportional
to the mass of structural component and the
imposed load. Therefore earthquake forces
should be applied at the centre of gravity of all
such components of loads and their transfer to
the foundation should be ensured.
4.11.3.3 In buildings where high-speed travelling cranes are supported by the structure or
wherea building or structure is otherwise subjected to vibration or sway, triangulated bracing or especially rigid portal systems shall be
provided to reduce the vibration or sway to a
suitable minimum.
4. I1.4 FOUNDATIONS .- The-foundations of
building or other structure shall be so
designed as to ensure such rigidity and
strength as have been allowed for in thedesign

of the supcrstructurc, including rcsislance to
all Ibrccs.
4.II.s OV E R H A N G O F W A L L S - W h e r e a
wall is placed ccccntritally upon the flange of
a supporting steel beam, the beam and its
conn&ons shall ho designed for torsion.
unless the beam is cncascd in solid concrete
and rcinforccd in combination with an ad.joinitig solid floor slab in such a way as,to prcvcnt
the beam dclorming t&sionally.
of the structure and lead. to damage to finishings. Generally; the maximum deflect@
should not exceed I/325 of the span, but this
limit may be exceeded in cases wheie grcater
deflectioti would not impair the strength or
efficiency ofthe structure or lead to damage to
finishings.
4.13.1.3 In the case of crane runway girder
Ihe maximum vertical deflection under dead
and iniposed loads shall not exceed the following values:
Where manually operated cranes
Are operated and for similar
loads
b)
Where electric overhead travelling L

750
cranes operate, up 10 501
cl
Where electric overhead travelling L

I 000
cranes operate. over 50r
d)
Other moving loads such as

charging cars, etc.
4.12.1 Ihcat;lbilityolthcstructurcasi~
whole
or ol any part 01 it shall bc invcstigatcd, and
weight or anchorage shall br provided so that
the least rcslorinp moment and anchorage.
shall be not less than the sum of I .2 tirncs the
maximum ovcrturniny moment due to dead
load and I .4 times the maximum overturning
moment due to imposed loads and wind orearthquake loads.
4.12.1.1 In cases where dead load provides
the restoring moment, only 0.9.times thcdead
load shall be considered. Restoring moment
due lo imposcdloads shall be ignored.
a)
500
L
600
where
,!_ = Span of crane runway girder.
4.13.2 L IMITING H ORIZONTAL D E F L E C T I O N
4.12.1.2 To ensure stability at all times.

account shall be taken of probable variations
in dead load during construction, repair or
other temporary measures. The effect on the
load from the deflected or deformed shape of
the structure or of individual elements of the
lateral load resisting systems. may be considered as required.
4.13.2. I At the caps of columns in single sto-
NATE I - Incomplyinpwiththcrcquiretnentsof~./3./,il
is necessary to ascertain that the resulting pressures and
.shear forces to be communicated by the foundutions to
the supporting soil would not cause failure.
4.13.2.2 The horizontal deflection at column

cap level of columns supporting crane runway
girders in the building shall not exceed limits
as may be specified by the purchaser.
kl0.W 2 -- All individual members of the structure which

have been designed for their dead and imposed loads.
wind orearthquake loads lo the permissible stresses stipulated in this code shall be deemed lo be adequately
covered for this margin of stability. .
413.3 TUBES -- The requirement of the limiting defleaion of Ii325 of the span may be
deemed to be satisfied if the bending stress in
compression or tension does not exceed
rey buildings, the horizontal deflection due to

lateral forces should not ordinarily exceed
l/325 of the actual length I of the column.
This limit may be exceeded in cases where
greater deflection would not impair the
strength and efficiency of the structure or lead
to damage to finshing.
4.13 Limiting Deflection
3l y D
4.13.1 L IMITING V ERTICAL D EFLECTION
diameter of the tube in cm and I is the effective

length of the beam in cm.
4. I3.1.f The deflection of a member shall be

calculated without considering the impact factor or dynamic effect of the loads causing
deflection.
4.13.1.2 The deflection of member shall not
be such as to impair the strength or efficiency
kgf/cmr, where D is the outside
4.13.3.1 PURLINS
a) The requirements under 15.4.2 regarding
limiting deflection may be waived in the
design of simpletubular purlins provided
that the following requirements are
satisfied:
VIP
Nqrure
End
c?/
Mitiitriutn Value CJ\

S&tiotr Moclttl~r.v
A
Fi.ying
f Grade
YSI 22
cm
WLi
Simply
supported I I 200
WLj
Effectively
continuous 16 X00
Grade
YSt 25
cm
IILl
13 2.10
WL/
19 u4u
Mittitttutn
Out.~itk
Ikwierrr
Grade . . ./or
YS1 32
u^rorles:
lx/ .
cm
YB 23
O/fCJ
w 32
cm
WI./
L/SO
16 4(w)
L/70
WI.1
24 600
where
W= the total distributed load in kg on
the purlins arising from dead load
and snow but excluding wind, and
L=
the distance in cm between the centres of the steel principals or other
supports.
b)
is provided at the centre of the building or

building section. the length of the building section may be restricted to 180
metres in case of covered buildings and
120 metres in case of open gantries (see
Fig. 2).
A purlin shall be considered as effectively

continuous at any intermediate point of
support if it is actually continuous over,
that point or if it has there a joint able to
provide a fixing moment of not less than
WI_! 12. where W and I. arc as defined
above.
4.14 Expansion Joints

4.14. I In view of the large number of factors
involved in deciding the location. spacing and
nature of expansion joints. provisions of
expansion joints should be left to the discretion of the designer.
I_
1eOm
END OF BUILDING/SECTION
Fig. 2 Maximum Length of Building with

One Set of Column Bracing
b)
If one set of column longitudinal bracing

is provided near centre of the building/
section, the maximum centre line distance between the two sets of bracing may
be restricted to 48 metres for covered
buildings (and 30 metres for open gantries) and the maximum distance between
centre of the bracing to the nearest expansion joint/end of building or section may
be restricted to 90 metres (60 metres in
case of open gantries). The maximum
length of the building section thus may bc
restricted to 22X metres for co* ered buildings [and I50 metres for open gantries
(SW Fig. 3)].
4.14.2 Structures in which marked changes in

plan dimensions take place abruptly shall be
provided with expansion joints at the section
where such changes occur. Expansion joints
shall be so provided that the necessary move-
ment occurs with a minimum resistance atlhe

joint. The structure adjacent to the joint
should #preferably be supported on separate
columns but not necessarily on separate
foundation.
Fig. 3 Maximum Length of Buildings/ Section

with Two Sets of Column Bracings
4.l4.3 The details as to the length of a structure where expansion j&in& have to be provided may be determined after taking into
consideration various factors Such as temperature. exposure to weather and structural
design, etc. For the purpose of general guidance the following provisions have been
recommended:
c) The maximum width of the c o v e r e d
a)
5.1. I The permissible stress in axial tension,
If one ret of column longitCldit4 braciq
building section should preferably be restricted to 150 metres beyond which suitable provisions for the expansion joints
may be made.
5. DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
5. I Axial Stress
uo,. in MPa on the net effective area of the

sections shall not exceed:
the members are connected together along

their length as specified in 9.10.3.3.
uor =O. 6 ./.y
5.2.1.4 Where the angles are back-to-back

but are not tack riveted or welded according
to 8.10.3.3 the proyisions under 5.2.X.2
and 5.2.1.3 shall not apply and each angle
shall be designed as a single angle connected
through one leg only in accordance with
5.2. I. I.,
where
f , = minimum yield stress of steel in MPa
5.1.2 Fort TUBES -- The permissible direct
stress in axial tension on the net area of the
sections shall not exceed the values given
below:
5.2.1.5 When two tees are- placed back-toCrude
(I.~
(M Pa)
123
147
186
YSt 22
YSt 25
YSt 32
5.2 Design Detail.!
5.2.1 NE T EFF~CI-WE AREAS FOK ANGLES

AND TEES IN T E N S I O N
5.2.1.1 In the case of single angle connected
through one leg the net effective sectional area
shall be taken as:
A, + AIk
w h e r e
N OTE - The area of the leg of an angle shall be taken as

the product of the thicknessand the length from theoutcr
corner minus half the thickness and the area of the leg of a
teeas the product ofthe thicknessand thedepthminusthe
thickness of the table.
6 DESIGN OF COMPRESSION
MEMBERS
6.1 Axial Stresses in Vncased Struts
AI = effective cross-sectional area of the
connectid leg,
AI = the gross cross-sectional area of the
unconnected leg, and
k= 3At
3A, + A2
Where leg angles are used, the effective sectional area of the whole of the angle member
shall be considered.
5.2. I.2 In the case of a pair of angles back-toback (or a single tee) connected by one leg of
the angle (or by the flange of the tee) to the
same side of a gusset, the net effective area

shall lx taken as
A, + Azk
where
A I and AZ are as defined in 5.2. I. I, and
k =
back but are not tack ritieted or welded as per

9.10.3.3 the provisions under 5.2.1.3 shall not
apply and each tee shall be designed as a single
tee connected to one side of a gusset only in
accordance with 5.2.1.2.
5A I,
5A, + A2
The angles shall be connected together along

their length in accordance with the reqoirements under 9.10.3.3.
5.2.1.3 For double angles or tees placed backto-back and connected to each side of a gusset
or to each side 9f part of a rolled section the
rreas to be taken in computing the mean tenrile stress shall be the effective area provided
6.1.1. The direct stress in compression on the

gross sectional area of axially loaded compression members shall not exceed 0.6f nor
the permissible stress uacr calculated using the
following formula:
oar = 0.6
/CC.fY
[U CC)+ (r .?)n]n
where
permissible stress in axial
compression, in MPa;
fy = yield stress of steel, in MPa;
U ,,< =
f CC = elastic critical stress in

compression,
TE
=-,
h2
E = modulv of elasticity of steel,
2 X 10 MPa;
A (cl/r)= slenderness ratio of the meml&, ratio of the effective
length to appropriate radius
of gyration; and
n = factor assumed as 1.4.
Values of uoc for some of the Indian

Standard structural steels are given in
Table 2 for convenience.
TABLE2 PERMISSIBLE STRESS o.< (MPa) IN AXIAL COMPRESSION

FOR STEELS WITH VARIOUS YIELD STRESS
[C/owe &I.I]
h10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
I30
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
220
230
240
250
132
I31
I28
124
118
Ill
bO2
93
85
76
68
61
55
49
44
40
36
33
30
27
25
23
21
20
If
I38
137
134
129
123
II5
I06
96
87
78
69
62
55
50
45
40
36
33
30
27
25
23
21
20
I8
I44
142
140
134
127
II8
I09
98
88
79
71
63
56
50
45
41
37
33
30
28
25
23
21
20
I50
148
I45
139
132
122
II2
IO1
90
80
72
64
57
II
45
41
37
33
30
28
25
23
21
20
I8 I8
260
280
300
320
I56
I54
I51
I45
136
126
I15
103
92
82
73
64
57
51
46
41
36
33
30.
28
25
23
21
20
I8
168 180 192

I66 177 189
162 172 I83
I54 I64 174
I45 I53 I61
133 139 146
120 I25 130
107 I I I II5
95
98 IO1
84
86
88
74
76
77
66
67
67
58
59
60
52
53
53
46
47
4Y
42
42
42
37
38
38
34
34
34
30
31
31
28
28
28
25
26
26
23
23
24
21
22
21
20
20
20
I8
I8 I8
61.2 FOR T UBULAR S E C T I O N S - The direct

stress in compression on the cross sectional
area of axially loaded steel tubes shall not
exceed the values given in Table 3.
340
360
380
400
420
450
480
204
201
194
183
168
I52
135
II8
103
90
79
69
61
54
48
43
38
34
31
28
26
24
22
20
18
215
212
204
192
176
I58
139
121
I05
92
80
70
61
54
48
43
38
35
31
28
26
24
22
20
19
227
224
215
201
183
I63
142
124
108
93
81
71
62
54
48
43
39
35,
31
28
26
24
22
20
I9
239
235
225
210
I90
168
I47
127
109
94
82
71
62
55
49
43
39
35
31
28
26
24
22
20
19
251 269 287

246 263 i80
236 251 266
218 231 243
197 207 216
173 180 I87
I50 I55 160
129 I35 136
III II4 116
96
97
99
83
84
85
72
73
73
63
63
64
55
56
56
49
49
49
43
44
44
39
39
39.
35
35
35
32
32
32
28
28
28
26
26
26
24
24
24
22
22
22
20
20
20
19
I9 I9
510
540
305
297
280
255
225
193
I64
139
II8
100
86
74
64
56
50
44
39
35
32
28
26
24
22
20
I9
323
314
295
267
233
I99
168
I41
I19
IO1
87
75
65
57
50
44
39
35
32
28
26
24
22
20
I9
Effective length as given in Table 4 may also

be adopted where columns directly form part
of framed structures.
6.2.3. E CCENTRIC B EAM C O N N E C T I O N S- I n

cases
where the beam connections are eccent6.2 Effective Length of Compression
ric
with
respect to the axes of the columns, the
Members
same conditions of restraint shall be deemed
6.2.1. GENERAL - The slenderness ratio of a to apfily, provided the connections are carried
strut shall be calculated as the ratio of the across the flange or web of the columns as the
effective length, I, to the appropriate radius of case may be, and the web of the beam lies
gyration, r. The effective length, 1, shall be within, or in direct contact with the column
derived from the actual length,L. The actual section. Where practical difficulties prevent,
strut length shall be taken as the length from this, effective length shall be estimated to
the centre-to-centre of inter-sections with sup- accord with the case appropriate to no resporting members, or the cantilevered length in traint. in that direction.
the case of free-standing struts.
6.2.4 MEMBER< OF TRUSSES - In thecaaeof
6.2.2 EFFECTIVE L ENGTH - Where accurate bolted, riveted or welded trusses and braced
frame analysis is not done, theeffective length
frames, the effective length Vof the compresof a compression member in a given plane
sion members shall be taken as between 0.7
may be determined by the procedure given in
and I .O times the distance between centres of
inter-sections, depending on the degree of end
Appendix C. However, in most cases t h e
effective length in the given plane assessed on restraint provided. In the case of members of
the basis of Table 4, would be adequate. trusses buckling in the plane perpehdicular to
I-Cl6
TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE STRESS IN AXIAL

COMPRESSION, IN MPa
(Clause 6.12)
(S-mx TUBES CONFORMING TO IS:1 161-1979 GRADE)
YSr 22
YSt 25
YSt 32
lfr
(1)
0
10
20
30
40
(2)
123
119
115
1.11
la7
(3)
147
142
137
133
128
50
60
70
80
90
103
98
95
91
86
123
118
113
107
98
151
144
100
110.
120
130
140
80
73
66
59
53
89
80
71
63
55
91
85
14
65
57
150
160
170
1x0
48
42
37
33
49
43
38
34
51
44
39
35
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
300
350
30
27
24
22
29
18
16
10
7
30
27
24
22
2 0
18
16
10
7
-___
- (4)
186
179
172
165
158
31
27
55
22
20
18
16
10
7
the plane of the truss the effective length shall

be taken as 1.0 times the distance between
points of restraints. The design of discontinuous angle struts shall be as specified in 6.5.
6.2.5 S TEPPED C O L U M N S -- A method determining the effective length of stepped columns
is given in Appendix D.
6.3 Design Details
6.3. I THICKNESSOF E LEMENTS -The thickness of an outstanding leg of any member
in compression shall be in accordance
with 4.5.2.1 and 4.5.2.2.
6 . 3 . 2 E F F E C T I V E SECTIONAL AR E A Except as modified, under 4.5.2 the gross sectional area shall be taken for all compression
members connected by welds and turned and
fitted bolts and pins except that holes, which
are not fitted with rivets. weld or tight-fitting
bolts and pins, shall be deducted.
6.3.3 E CCENTRICITY FOR S TANCHION AND
S OLID C O L U M N S
6.3.3.1 For the purpose of determining the
stress in a stanchion or column section. the
PART VI SHtUCllJRAL DESIGN-&XXlDN
6 STEEL
beam reactions or similar loads shall b e

assumed to be applied 100 mm from the face
of the section or. at the centre of bearing
whichever dimension gives the greater eccentricity, and with the exemption of the following two cases:a) In the case of cap connections, the load
shall be assumed to be applied at the face
of the column shaft or stanchion section;
or edge of packing if used, towards the
span of the beam; and
b)
In the case of roof truss bearing on a cap,

no eccentricity need be taken for simple
bearings without connections capable of
developing an appreciable moment.
6.3.3.2 In continuous columns, the bending

moments due to eccentricities of loading on
the columns at any floor may be taken as:
4 ineffective at the floor levels above and

below that floor: and
b) divided equally between the columns

lengths above and below that floor level.
provided that the moment of inertia of
either column section, divided by its effective length does not exceed I.5 times the
corresponding value of the other column.
In case where this ratio is exceeded, the
bending moment shall be divided in proportion to the moments of inertia of the
column sections divided by their respective effective lengths.
6.3.4 .SPLICES
6.3.41 Where the ends of compression
members are faced for bearing over the whole
area, they shall be spliced to hold the connected members accurately in position, and to
resist any tension when bending is present.
The ends of compression members faced for
bearing shall invariably be machined to
ensure perfect contact of surfaces in bearing.
6.3.4.2 Where such membersare not faced for
complete bearing the splices shall be designed
to transmit all the forces to which they are
subjected.
6.3.4.3 Wherever possible, splices shall be
proportioned and arranged so that the centroidal axis of the splice coincides as nearly as
possible with the centroidal axes of the
members jointed in order to avoid eccentricity; but where eccentricity is present in the
joint. the resulting stress shall be providedfor.
J
TABLE 4 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS

OF CONSTANT DIMENSIONS
[C/we 6.24
DEOREE OF E ND R ESTRAINT
COU?W.SSlON MEMBSR
(1)
OF
RECOMMI?NDED
VALue OP
EFFHXIVE
LENOlll
Srumx
(2)
(31
a) Effectively held in porition and

restrained against rotation at
both ends
0.65 L
b) Effectively held in position at

both ends and restrained a&nst
rotation at one end
0.80 L
.
cl
Effectively held in position at

both ends. but not restrained
against rotation
I.00 L
\
I
:
#
I
d) Effectively held in position and

one end. and at the other end re8traioed agaiart rotation but oot
kid in poktiott
1.20 L
TABLE 4 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS

OF CONSTANT DIMENSIONS - Conrd
D EGREE OF END RESWMINT
Cokmtmuob~ MEMBER
OF
(1)
RECOMMENDED
VALUE OF
EFFEXTWE
LENGG
(2)
SYMBOL
(4%
!
I

one end. and at the other end
putidly ratmined ayinrt rotation
but not held in position
I.50 L
f) Effectively held i n p o s i t i o n a t
one end but not restrained
against rotation, l nd at the other
end restrained ayinst rotation
but not held in poaition
ZOOL
cl
g) Effectively held in position ml

rcrtmined against rotation at
one end but not held in position
nor restrained 8Ipinst rotation
at the other end
NOTE I - L is
2.00 L
I
/
1
/
//I d
the uttsupported length of compression member.
NOTE 2 - For brttsned st~ta the effecti& ~I@I ahall be inctaned by 10 w
MRT
SNUCRRAL
DIIIQN-S-N 4 #tUL
vJ9
6.4 Column Buses
6.4.3.2 For solid round steel columns, in

cases where the loading on the cap or under
6.4.1 GUSSETED BASES - For stanchion the base is uniformly distributed over the
with gusseted bases, the gusset plates, angle whole area including the column shaft, the
cleats, stiffeners, fastenings, etc. in combinaminimum thickness of the square cap or base
tion with the bearing area of the shaft shall be shall be:
sufficient to take loads, bending moments and
reactions to the base plate without exceeding
t= lOJ-F&
specified stresses. All the bearing surfaces
shall be machined to ensure perfect contact. where
I = the thickness of the plate, in
6.4.1.1 Where the ends of the column shaft
mm;
and the gusset plates are not faced for comW
=
the
total axial load, in kN;
plete bearing, the fastenings connecting them
B
=
the
length
of the side of cap or
to the base plate shall be sufficient to transmit
base,
in
mm;
all the forces to which the base is subjected.
ob8 = the permissible bending stress in
6.4.2 C OLUMN AND B ASE PLATECONNECslab bases (for all steels, shall be
TIONS - Where the end of the column is
assumed as 185 MPa); and
connected directly to the plate by means of full
do = the diameter of the reduced end,
penetration butt welds the connection shall be
if any, of the column, in mm.
deemed .to transmit to the base all the forces
and moments to which the column is 6.4.3.3 When the load on the cap or under the
base is not uniformly distributed or where end
subjected.
of the column shaft is not machined with the
cap
or base, or where the cap or base is not
6.4.3 S LAB B ASES - Columns with .slab
square
in plan, calculations shall be made
bases. need not be provided with gussets, but
based
on
the allowable str&s of 185 MPa.
fastenings shall be provided sufficient to
retain the parts securely in plate and to resist
6.4.3.4 The cap or base plate shall not be less
all moments and forces, other than direct
than 1.5 (do i- 75) mm in length or diameter.
compression, including those arising during
transit, unloading and erection. When the slab 6.4.3.5 The area of the shoulder (the annular
alone distributes the load uniformly, the mini- bearing area) shall be sufficient to limit the
mum thickness of a rectangular slab shall be stress in bearing, for the whole of the load
given by the following formulq:
communicated to the slab, to the maximum
values given in 7.3. and resistance to any bendQFJq,
ing communicated to the shaft by the slab
shall be taken as assisted by bearing pressures
developed against the reduced end of the shaft
where
in conjunction with the shoulder,
r = the slab thickness, in mm;
w = the pressure or loading on the
6.4.3.6 Bases for bearing upon concrete or
underside of the base, in MPa;
masonry need not be machined on the underside
provided the reduced end of the shaft
II = the greater projection of the plate
terminates
short of the surface of the slab, and
beyond column, in mm;
in all cases the area of the reduced end shall be
b = the lesser projection of the plate
neglected in calculating the bearing pressure
beyond the column, in mm; and
from the base.
U& = the permissible bending stress in
6.4.3.7 In cases where the cap or base is fillet
slab bases (for all steels, shall be
welded direct to the end of the column without
assumed as 185 MPa).
boring and shouldering, the contact surfaces
6.4.3.1 When the slab does not distribute the
loading uniformly or where the slab is not
rectangular, special calculationsshall be made
to show that the atre+a are within the speciGdlimita.
shall be machined to give a perfect bearing

and the imlding shall be sufficient to transmit
the forces aa required in 6.4.3 and its subclauses for faatehing to stab bases. Where full
stnngth T-butt . welds arc provided no
machining of contact surfaces shall be

required.
6.41 BASE P LATES AND B EARING P LATES The base plates arid grillages of stanchions
and the hearing and spreaders of beams and.
girden rhaI1 be of adequate.strength, stiffness
and area, to spread the load upon the concrete, masonry, other foundation, or other
supports without exceeding the permissible
s&s on such foundation under any combination of load and bending moments.
6.5 Angle Struts
6.5. I SINGLE ANGLE S T R U T S
a) Single angle discontinuous struts connected by a single rivet or b61t may be

designed for axial load only provided the
compressive stress does not exceed 80
percent of the values given in Table 2 in
which the effective length /of the strut
shall be taken as centre-to-centre of intersection at each end and r is the minimum
radius of gyration. In no case. however.
shall the ratio of slenderness for such single angle struts exceed 180.
,values obtained from Table 2 for the ratio

of slendeiness based on the appropriate
radius of gyration. The angles shall he
-connected together in their lengths so @s
to ktisfy the requirements of 6.9 and
9.10.3.
b) Double angle discontinuous struts backto-back, connected to one side of a gusset

or section by a one or more bolts or rivets
in each angle. or by the equivilent in
welding. shall be designed as for single
angles in accordance with 6.5.1 (a) and
the angles shall be connected together in
their length so as to satisfy the requirements of 6.Y and 9.10.3.
Single or
double angle continuous struts such as those
forming the tlanges. chords or ties of trusses
or trussed girders, or the legs of towers shall be
designed as axially loaded compression
members, and the effective length shall be
taken in accordance with 6.2.4.
63.3 CONTINIIOIJS M E M B E R S --
ST R E S S E S - If the siruts
to axial loads, loads which
cause transverse bending, thecombined bendb) Single angle discontinuous struts con- ing and asial stresses shall be checked in
nected by a weld or by two or more rivets accordance with X./.1., For determining the
or bolts in line along the angle at each end permissible axial and bending stresses. for use
may be designed for axial IoZid only pro- in applying 8.1. I, the effective length shall be
vided the compression stress does not taken in accordance with 6.2 and 7.6.1,
exceed ,the values given in Table 2. in respecti\,ely.
which the effective length /shall be taken
6.6 SIW/ Ccrsr ings The use of steel casting
as 0.85 time the length of thestrut. centrebe limitrd to bearings, junctions and other
tocentre of intersection at each end and
similar prts and the working stresses shall
r is the minimum radius of gyration.
6.3
ai
,,
6.14 COMHIYSII
carry, in addition
not esceed the working stresses given in this

standard for steel of yield stress 250 MPa.
t)OUHLE &&TILE STRUTS
For double angle discontinuous struts.

back-to-back conn~ctrd to both sides of
6.7 Lacing
the gusset or section by not less than t\\o

bolts or rivets in line along the anglrts at
each. or by ther equivaltnt in \vrlding. the
load may be wgarded as applied asial!y.
The effective length /in the plane of end
gusset shall be taken as bCtwern 0.7 and
0.85 times the distance between intersections. depending on the degree of the restraint provided and in the plane
perpendicular to that of the end gusset.
the effective length I shall be taken as
equal to the distance between centres of
intersections. The calculated average
compressive stress shall,n& exceed the
members comprising
two main components laced and tied should
where practicable. have a radius of gyration
about the axis perpendicular to the plane of
lacing not less. than ttie radius of gyration
about the axis in the plane of lacing (see
Fig. 4A).
rmr
VI
SrEu-
DCSIQN-SECIION
( SlUL
6.7. / tiESERA1.
6.7.1.1 Compression
6.7.1.2 As far as practicable the iacingsystem

shall not be varied throughout the length of
the strut.
6.7. I.3 Except for tie plates as specified in6.8
double laced system (UP Fig. 4B)Md. single
laced systems on opposite sides of the main
components shall not be combined with cross

members perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the strut unless forces resulting from
deformation of the strut members are calculated and provided for in the lacing and its
fistenings (.vee Fig. 40.
6.7.1.4 Single laced systems on oppositesides
Of fhc components shall preferably be in the
same direction so that one be the shadow of
the other. instead of being mutually opposed
in direction (see Fig. 4D).
6.7.2 D ESIGN
OF
6.7.2.3 The slenderness ratio A of the lacing

bars for compression members shall not
exceed 145. In riveted construction, the effective length of lacing bars for thedetermination
of the permissible stress shall be taken as the
length between the inner end rivetsof t he bars
for single lacing. and as 0.7 of this length for
double lacing effectively riveted at intersec-
L ACIN G
6.7.2.1 The lacing of compression members

shall be proporfioncd to resist a total transverse shear Vat any point in the length ofthe
member equal to at least 2.5 percent of the
axial force in the member, which shear shall
be considered as divided equally among all
transverse lacing systems in parallel planes.
6.7.2.2 For members carrying calculaIed
bending stress due to eccentricity of loading.
applied ind moments and/or lareralloading,
the lacing shall be proportioned to resist the
shear due to the bending in addition to that
specified under 6.7.2.1.
UC)30 ON
FACE AA
Fig. IA Lacing Details

V3
LACING
Fig. 4C Double Laced and Single heed

Systems Combined with Cross Members
ON
FACE 80
Fig. 4B Double
Lacing System
LACING
ON LACING O N
PACE 0
FACE A
PREFERRED
LACING ON LACING
FACE 8
FACE A
NOT PREF ERREO
Fig. 4D Single Laced System on Opposite

Sides of Main Compahents
NATIONAL BUILZNNQ CODE OF INWA
tion. In welded construction, the effective

lengths shall be taken as 0.7 times the distance
between-the inner erids of welds connecting
the lacing bars to the member.
6.7.3 WIDTH OF L ACING B ARS - Iit rivetad
construction, the minimum width of lacing
bars shall be as follows:
Nominal
Width o$
Rivet Dia
Lacing &rrs
mm
mm
22
65
20
60
18
55
16
50
6.7.4 THICKNESS OF L ACING BARS - The
thickness of flat lacing bars shall be not IesS
than one-fortieth of the length between the
inner end rivets or welds for single lacing, and
one-sixtieth of this length for double lacing
riveted or welded at intersections.
6.7.4. I Rolled sections or tubes of equivalent
strength may be used instead of flats.
6.7.5 A NGLE OF IN C L I N A T I O N - L a c i n g
bars, whether in double or single systems,
shall be inclined at an angle not less than 40
degree nor more than 70 degrees to the axis of
the members.
NOTE - The requiredsection for lacing barsforcompression members or for tension members subject to bending
shall be determined by using the appropriate permissible
stresses subject to the requirementsin6.7.3and6.7.4. For
tension members under stress. only the lacing bars shall
be subject IO the requirements of 6.7.3. 6.7.4 and 6.7.5.
6.7.6 S PACING
6.7.6. / The maximum spacing of lacing bars,

whether connected by riveting or welding,
shall i&o be such that the minimum slenderness ratio A (= I/r) of the components of the
members between consecutive connection is
not greater than 50 or 0.7 times the most
unfavourable slenderness ratio of the member
as a whole, whichever is less. where /is the
distance between the centres of conneciion of
the lattice bars to each component.
6.7.6.2 Where lacing bars aie not lapped to
form the connection to the components of the
members; they shall be so connected that there
is no appreciable interruption in the triangulation of the system.
6 . 7 . 7 ATTACHMENT T O MAlN ME M B E R S The riveting or welding of lacing bars to the
main members shall be sufficient to transmit
the load in. the bars. Where welded lacing bars

overlap the main members, the amount of lap
measured along either edge of the lacing bar
shall be not less than four times the thickness
of tKe bai or the members, whichever is less.
The welding should be sufficient to transmit
the load in the bar and shali, in any case, be
provided along each side of the bar for the full
length of lap.
6.7.7.1 Where lacing bars are fitted between
the main members, they shall be connected to
each member by fillet welds oneach side of the
bar or by full penetration butt welds. The
lacing bars shall be so placed asto be generally
opposite the flange or stiffening elements of
the main member.
6.7.8 E ND T IE P LATES -- Laced compression
members shall be provided with tie plates at
the ends of lacing systems and at points where
the systems are interrupted (see also 6.8).
6.8 Battening and Tie Plates
6.8. I
GENERAL
6.8.1. I Compression members composed of

two main components battened should preferably have their two main components of the
same cross section and symmetrically disposed about their X-xaxis. Where practicable,
the compression members should have a
radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the batten not less than the
radius of gyration about the axis in the plane
of batten.
6.8.1.2 Battened compression members not
complying with the requirements specified in
this clause or those subjected, in the plane of
the battens, to eccentricity of loading. applied
moments or lateral forces (see Fi$. 5) shall be
designed according to the exact theory of elastic stability or empirically from the verification of tests. so that they have a load factor of
not less than 1.7 in the actual structure.
6.8.1.3 The battens shall be placed opposite
each other at each end of the members and
points where the member is stayed in its length
and shall, as far as practicable. be spaced and
proportioned uniformly throughout. The
number of battens shall be such that the
member is divided into not less than three
bays within its actual length from centre-tocentre of connection.
6.x..?:.? TIE PIATES - Tie plates shall be
dcsigncd by the same method as battens. In no

GI\C shall a tic plate and its fastenings be
incapahlc of carrying the forces for which the
lacing has been designed.
?.8.2.3 SIZE -. When plates.are used for battens, the end battens and those at points where
the member&stayed in its length shall havean
cl.fcctive depth. longitudinally, of not less than
the pcrpcndicular distance between the centroidh of the main members. and intermediate
hattcns shall have an effective depth of not less
than three quarters of this distance. but in no
cast shall the effcctivc depth ofany batten be
Its\ than twice the width of one member in the
plane of the battens. The effective depth of a
batten shall be taken as the longitudinyl distancc betwpcn end rivets or end welds.
The thickness of batten or the tie plates shall
bc not less than one-fiftieth of the distance
between the innermost connecting lines of
rivets or weld.
6.8.2 ihSI(;N
6.8.2.1 BATTENS -- Battens shall be designed
to carry the bending momcntsand shcarsarising from transvcrsc shear force Vof 2.5 percent of the total axial force on the whole
compression member, at any point in the
length of the member. divided equally
between parallel planes of battens. I.he main
members shall also bc chcckcd for the same
shear force and bending moments as for the
battens.
Battens shall be of plates, angles, channels, or
l-sections and shall be rivctcd or welded to the
main components so as 10 resist simultaneously a longitudinal shear
,=
vc
v. C
_and a moment M = 2 N
N.S
where
V = the transverse shear force as
defined above;
C = the distance centre-to-centre of
battens. longitudinally;
N = the numbers of parallel planes of
battens; and
S = the minimum transverse distance
between the centroids of the rivet
group/welding.
I-,24
6.X.2.4 fhe requirement of si7e and thickness

specified above does not apply when angles,
channels or l-sections are used for battens
with their legs or flanges ptirpendicular to the
main member. However. it should be ensured
that the ends of the compression members are
tied to achieve adequate rigidity.
6.8.3
SP
A C I N G
OF
BATTESS
6.8.3. I In battened compression members
not specifically checked for shear stress and

bending moments as specified in 6.8.2,/. the
spacing of battens centre-to-centre of end fastenings shall be such that the slenderness ratio
A of the lesser main component over that
distance shall be not greater than 50or greater
than 0.7 time the slenderness ratio of the
member as a whole, about its x-x axis (parallel
to battens).
NOIF --- With regard 10 elfective length of rhe battened
compression member as a whole. reference may he made
to Table 4.
6.8.3.2 The number of battens shall be such
that ttie member i;divided into not less than
three parts longitudinally.
6 . 8 . 4 ATTACHMEST.IO
MA I N M
EMBERS
6.8.4. I WELDED co!GNEcTloNs--Where tie
or
batten plates o\,crlap the main members, the

amount of lap shall be not less than four times
the thickness of the plate. The length of weld
N A T I O N A L Ml&DING CODE DP INDU
connecting each edge o! the oatten plate to the

member shall, in aggregate: be not less than
half the depth of the batten plate. At least
one-third of the weld shall bc placed at each
end of this edge. The length of weld and depth
of batten plate shall be measured along the
longitudinal axis of the main member.
In addition. the welding shall be returned
along the other two edges oithe plates transversely to the axis of the main member for ;I
length not less than the minimum lap specified
above.
6.9.1 Compression members composed of

two angles. channels, or tees, back-to b&k in
contact or separated by a small distance shall
be connected together by riveting. bolting or
welding so that the ratio of slenderness of each
member between the connections is no:
greater than 40 or greater than 0.6 times the
most unfavourable ratio of slenderness of the
strut as a whole, whichever is less (SPV also 8).
6.0.2 In no case shall the-ends of the strut he

connected togcthcr with less than two rivets or
bolts or their cqui\~aIcnt in welding, and there
shall be not less than two additional conncc-
tions spaced cquidi>tant in the Icngth of strut.

Where the mcmbcrs arc scparatcd back-toback. the rivets or bolts through thcsc conncctions shall pass through solid washers or
packings. and whcrc the Icgs oI the connected
angles or tables of the conncctcd tees ;Lre IQ
mm wide or over, or whcrc webs of channels
arc 150 mm wide or over, not less than two
rivets or bolts shall be used incach connection
one on lint of each gauge mark.
6.0.3 Whcrc thcsc connections are made b!
wcldinp. solid packin# shall bc used to effect
tile &~inting unless the m e m b e r s arc sufficicntly close togthcr to permit welding, a n d
the members shall bc conncctctl by welding
a l o n g b o t h p a i r s o f cdgcs of the main
components.
6.Y.4 The rivets, bolts or welds in thcsc conncctions shull bc sufficient to carry the shear
force and moments. if ilIly, specified for battcncd struts,iind in no case Sllilll tlifz rivets or
b o l t s b e less than 16 mm ctiemctcr for
mcmbcrs up to and including IO 1)1m thick;20
P A R T
VI STRUclupAL DESIGN-SRCIlON
6 OTgeL
mm diameter for members up to and including I6 mm thick; and 22 mm diameter for

members over I6 mm thick.
6.Y.4.1 Cbmprrssion members connected by
-such riveting, bolting or welding shall not be
subjected to transverse loading in a plane perpendicular to the washer-riveted, bolted or
welded surfaces.
6.9.5 Where the components are in contact
back-to-back. the spacing of the rivets, bolts
or intermittent welds <hall -not exceed the
m;tximum spacing IIor compression members
as pi\lcn in 6.1.4 and 6.2.6 of ls:Xl6-1969.
7 . I)ESIGN OF RltlMBE-:l<S SIIBJECTED
1-o BESI)IN<i
7. I
H& -calculated stress in a
tirrll~rol
member sub_jcctcd to bending shall not exceed

any of the appropriate makimuni permissible
stresses piLen in 7..? for bending!, 7.3 for bearing, 7.4 for shear ilnd in 8. I lor the combination of stresses.
7.2.1 MA\IMIIM HI \I)I\(; STl<tsS5FS - T h e

maxyilllum bending strchs in tension (ub,. E,,l) or
in compression ((~1.~ =I) in extreme fibrecalculated on the effective section of a beam shall
not exceed the maximum permissible bending
stress in tension (Obl) or in compression (a~=)
obtained as follows nor the values specified in
7.2.2. 7.2.X 7.2.5 and 7.2.6. as appropriate:
(Ib, O r at.- = 0.64/,.
7 . 2 . 2 MAXIMUM PERMISSIb1.E BWDING
C O M P R E S S I V E S TRESS
NELS
WITH
QUAL
IN
B E A M S ANI> CH A N-
F L A N G E S -~~ F o r a n I-
beam or channel with equal flanges bent

about theaxis of maximum strength (X-X
axis), the maximum bending compressive
stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the
effective section shall not exceed the values of
maximum permissible bending compressive
stress ubr given directly in Table 5A or 5B,
Table 5C or 5D and Table 5E or SF, as
appropriate, for steels with yield stress,/, of
250 M Pa, 340 MPa and 400 MPa. respectively. For &eels with yield stresses other thafi
those covered in Tables 5A to SF. maxim&
permissible bending compressive stress shall
be obtained in accordance with 7.2.3 and
7.2.4.
NOTE - Tablk 5A lo SF have been derived in accordoncc
with 7.2.3 and 7.24,
TABLE 5A MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ak (MPa),

IN EQoAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Clause 7.2.2)
with j, = 250 MPa, L > 20 or > 8 5

I
-i-
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
15
80
85
90
95
la0
I10
I20
130
140
I50
160
170
I80
I90
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
210
280
290
300
_-
.,,26
IO
12
I4
I60
159
I58
I57
156
154
153
I52
I50
149
147
I46
145
142
139
137
134
I32
129
127
124
122
I20
II8
I I6
II3
III
109
107
106
104
102
100
I60
158
157
155
I53
152
I50
148
147
145
I43
I41
I40
I36
I33
I30
127
I24
121
II8
II5
II3
I IO
IO8
I05
103
IO1
99
97
95
93
91
89
159
157
I56
I54
152
I50
148
I45
I43
I41
I39
137
135
I31
127
124
120
II7
II3
II0
I07
I04
102
99
97
94
92
90
88
86
84
R2
80
I59
157
I55
I53
I50
I48
I46
I43
I41
I38
I36
I33
I.11
127
122
Ilrn
II4
I IO
107
I04
100
97
94
92
89
87
84
82
80
78
76
74
72
I6
I8
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
I58
156
I54
152
149
147
I44
I41
I38
I36
133
130
128
I23
I I8
II3
I09
105
IO1
98
94
91
88
86
83
80
78
76
74 72
70
68
66
I58
156
I54
ISI
148
145
142
I39
I36
I33
I30
128
125
119
I I4
I09
IO5
loo
96
93
89
86
83
80
78
75
73
70
68
66
65
63
61
I58
156
I53
I50
148
I44
I41
138
135
I32
128
I25
I22
116
III
I06
IO1
%
92
88
85
R2
78
76
73
70
68
66
64
62
62
58
57
I58
I55
I53
149
I46
143
I39
I36
I32
128
124
I21
II7
tll
I04
99
93
88
84
I58
I55
.I52
149
145
142
I38
I34
I30
126
122
II8
I I4
107
100
94
R8
83
78
157
I55
I52
74
70
66
63
60
58
55
53
51
49
47
47
44
42
157
155
I51
I48
I44
I40
I35
I31
126
122
II7
II2
IO8
99
91
84
78
72
66
62
58
54
50
47
45
42
40
38
36
35
35
32
30
157
I54
I51
148
Ii4
I39
I35
I30
I26
I21
I I6
III
107
98
Qo
62
75
b9
64
59
55
51
48
44
42
39
37
35
33
32
32
29
27
I57
I54
ISI
ldl
I41
I19
13s
I30
125
120
II5
I IO
Kn
96
88
80
73
b7
61
56
52
48
44
41
38
36
34
32
30
28
27
25
24
157
154
I51
147
143
I39
I34
129
I25
80
76
73
70
67
64
62
59
57
55
53
53
50
48
I57
I55
I52
I48
I44
I40
I36
I32
I28
I23
II9
I I4
I IO
102
94
88
81
lb
71
66
62
58
35
52
49
47
45
43
41
39
39
36
35
I48
145
I41
I37
I33
128
124
120
I lb
I I2
104
97
90
84
79
74
69
65
62
59
56
53
51
48
46
44
43
43
39
38
NATIONAL
IP
II5
I 10
I05
95
87
79
72
65
60
55
50
46
43
40
37
34
32
30
28
26
25
24
22
BUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
TABLE SB MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MPa).

IN EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(C/oust 7.2.2)
withj, = 250 MPa, L 5 20 and dll85
I
I
10
12
14
16
40
45
50
55
Ml
lb1
161
160
159
I58
65
156
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
120
130
140
I50
160
I70
110
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
155
154
153
152
151
I50
149
147
144
142
140
138
136
134
I31
129
127
125
I23
122
120
II8
116
I14
113
III
109
161
160
158
157
156
154
153
152
I50
I49
147
146
145
142
I39
136
133
131
128
160
159
158
156
154
I53
I51
149
148
146
144
142
141
137
134
131
128
124
121
I19
116
113
III
108
106
I03
101
99
97
95
93
91
89
lb0
159
157
I55
I53
I51
149
141
145
I43
141
139
137
133
129
126
122
II9
I I5
II2
109
106
104
101
99
96
94
92
89
87
85
84
82
I60
I58
156
154
152
I50
149
146
143
141
139
137
134
130
126
I21
II8
I I4
110
107
104
101
98
95
92
90
87
85
83
81
79
77
75
126
123
121
118
116
114
112
II0
I08
106
104
102
110
9d
I8
I60
158
156
154
152
149
I47
144
142
139
137
134
I32
127
122
II8
II3
I09
IO6
102
99
95
92
90
87
84
82
80
77
75
73
72
70
PART VI STRWTURAL D&SIGN-SECIION
6 SpEgL
20
I60
I58
156
I53
I51
I48
146
I43
I40
138
135
132
129
124
I I9
I I4
I10
I05
I01
98
94
91
88
85
82
80
77
75
73
71
69
67
65
25
I59
157
155.
I53
I50
147
I44
141
I38
135
131
I28
125
I I9
II3
108
I03
98
93
89
8.5
82
79
76
73
70
61
65
63
61
59
58
56
30
159
157
I55
152
149
I46
143
I40
136
I33
129
126
122
II5
109
I03
97
92
87
83
79
75
72
69
66
63
61
59
57
55
53
51
49
35
40
50
60
80
100
I59
157
I55
152
149
I46
142
139
135
I31
127
124
120
I13
I06
99
94
88
83
79
74
71
67
64
bl
58
56
54
52
50
48
46
45
159
157
154
I52
!49
I45
I42
138
I34
I30
126
122
I I8
III
104
97
91
85
80
75
71
67
63
60
57
55
52
50
48
46
44
42
41
I59
157
154
I51
I48
I45
I41
137
133
129
125
I21
II6
IOU
IO1
94
87
81
7s
70
66
62
58
55
52
49
47
44
42
41
39
37
36
I59
I57
154
151
I48
I44
I41
137
132
I28
I24
120
II5
107
99
91
85
78
73
68
63
59
55
52
49
46
43
41
159
I57
I54
ISI
148
144
140
136
132
127
123
II9
II4
105
97
89
82
76
70
64
60
55
51
48
45
42
40
I59
157
I54
ISI
I48
I44
I40
I36
I32
127
I23
II8
113
I05
96
88
81
74
68
63
58
54
50
46
43
40
38
35
33
31
30
20
27
39
37
35
34
32
37
35
33
32
30
29
TABLE~C MAXIMUM PERbitsslB~~ BENDINGSTRESSES.U~(MP~),

(C/mm 7.2.2)
with/, = 340 MPa. L >2.0or
Dl T-,
40
45
50
55
60
6s
70
75
It0
85
90
95
100
I IO
I20
1.30
140
I50
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
IO
I2
14
16
I8
20
25
215
?I3
210
ZO8
205
203
200
198
I95
193
190
I88
I85
180
176
I71
I67
I63
I58
I55
I51
I47
I44
I40
I37
I34
I31
128
125
122
120
117
II5
214
211
208
204
2i)l
l9Lt
I95
192
188
I85
I82
179
I76
170
I65
I59
I54
I50
I45
I41
137
133
I29
I25
122
II9
II6
II3
I IO
107
I05
102
100
212
209
205
202
198
194
I96
I86
183
179
I75
172
I68
162
I55
I49
14.4
139
134
129
I25
121
II7
II3
II0
107
I04
IO1
98
95
93
90
88
212
208
204
200
195
191
I86
I82
178
174
I69
165
I62
I54
147
141
I35
129
124
I20
II5
III
107
103
I00
97
94
91
88
86
83
81
74
211
207
203
198
193
188
183
179
I74
169
I65
I60
I56
148
I41
134
127
122
II6
III
107
103
99
95
92
89
86
83
80
78
76
73
71
211
206
202
197
I91
I86
I81
I76
170
I65
I61
I56
ISI
I43
I35
I28
I21
II5
II0
I05
100
96
92
88
85
82
79
76
74
72
69
67
65
210
206
201
I%
190
185
179
173
I68
I62
I57
I52
147
138
I30
122
II6
II0
164
99
94
90
86
83
79
76
74
71
68
66
64
62
tXl
210
205
I99
194
188
181
I75
169
I63
I57
151
I45
I40
I30
I21
II3
I05
99
93
88
83
79
75
72
69
66
63
61
58
56
54
52
51
.?> 75
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
209
204
198
I99
192
193
I85
I86
180
178
173
I71
I66
I64
I57
I59
I50
I53
I44
I47
I41
137
I31
I35
I24
I20
II5
II0
I06
IO1
93
98
87
92
80
86
80
75
70
76
72
66
62
68
59
64
56
61
53
58
51
56
48
53
-46
51
&t
49
47
42
41
46
4439
209
204
198
I91
I85
I71
170
I63
1%
149
142
I35
I29
II7
107
98
90
83
77
71
66
62
58
55
52
49
47
44
42
41
39
37
36
209
203
197
I91
I84
I76
I69
I61
I54
I46
139
132
I26
II4
I03
93
85
78
72
66
61
57
53
50
47
44
42
39
37
36
34
32
31
209
203
197
I90
183
I76
I68
I60
I53
145
138
I31
124
112
IO1
91
82
75
68
63
58
54
50
46
43
41
38
36
34
32
31
29
28
209
203
197
I90
183
I75
I67
I59
ISI
144
136
129
122
109
98
88
79
72.
65
59
54
50
46
43
40
37
35
32
31
29
27
26
25
209
203
197
I90
I83
I75
I67
I59
I51
143
136
128
I21
108
97
87
78
70
63
58
53
48
44
41
38
35
33
31
29
27
25
24
23
TABLE 5D MAXIMUM. PERMlSSlBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MPa),

(Clause 7.2.2)
with jy = 340 MP8. L (2.0rnd
I
D/T*
Ilr,
+
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
I20
130
140
I50
160
I70
180
I90
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
IO
I2
I4
217
215
213
211
209
207
205
203
201
199
I97
I95
193
188
184
180
177
I73
169
I66
162
I59
155
I52
149
I46
143
I41
138
I35
I35
I30
128
216
214
211
209
206
203
201
198
I95
193
I90
I87
I85
180
I75
170
I65
I61
I57
I53
149
I45
I41
I38
I35
132
128
126
123
120
II7
I15
I I2
215
212
209
206
203
200
197
194
I90
187
184
I81
I78
172
166
I61
I56
I51
146
142
137
133
130
126
123
II9
II6
II3
II0
108
I05
103
lo0
214
211
208
205
201
197
194
I90
186
183
I79
I75
172
I65
I59
I53
I47
142
I37
132
128
124
120
II6
II3
I09
I06
103
100
98
95
93
90
I6
di_ e75
_
I
I8
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
214 ,213
211
210
207
206
203
202
199
198
I95
193
I91
189
187
184
183
180
179
I75
175
I71
I71
167
167
163
159
I55
I52
147
I46
540
I40
134
134
128
129
122
124
II7
120
II3
II5
108
II I
I04
108
100
I04
97
IO1
94
98
91
95
88
92
85
89
82
87
80
84
78
82
76
213
210
206
201
197
192
I87
182
177
173
167
163
I59
I50
142
I35
128
122
I I7
III
107
102
98
94
91
88
85
82
79
77
74
72
70
213
209
205
200
I95
189
I84
178
I73
168
162
I57
I52
142
133
I25
II8
II2
I06
100
95
9i
86
83
79
76
73
70
68
65
63
61
59
212
a8
204
199
193
188
182
I 76
170
I64
I58
I53
147
137
I27
II9
III
I04
98
92
87
82
78
74
71
68
65
62
60
58
56
54
52
212
208
203
198
193
187
I81
174
168
162
I56
I50
I44
133
123
II4
lb6
99
92
E6
81
76
72
69
65
62
59
57
54
52
50
45
46
212
208
203
198
192
I86
180
I73
167
I60
I54
148
142
I30
120
II0
102
95
88
82
77
72
68
64
61
58
55
52
50
48
46
44
42
212
208
203
197
I91
I85
178
172
I65
I58
ISI
145
138
I26
II6
I06
97
89
82
76
71
66
62
58
55
52
49
46
44
42
40
38
37
212
208
203
197
I91
184
178
I71
I64
I57
I50
143
137
124
II3
103
94
86
79
73
67
63
58
54
51
48
45
43
40
38
36
35
33
212
207
202
197
I91
I84
I77
I70
163
I56
148
142
I35
122
I10
100
91
83
75
69
63
59
54
50
47
44
41
38
36
33
32
31
29
212
207
202
197,
I90
184
I77
169
162
I55
148
I41
I34
121
I09
99
89
81
74
67
61
56
52
48
45
42
39
36
34
32
30
29
27
TABLE SE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, (I& (MPa).

1N EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Cluuse 7.2.2)
with/, = 400 MPa. 2 > 20 or 367
I
DIT-C
IO
12
248
244
240
235
231
247
242
237
232
226
221
216
211
206
201
!Yh
191
I87
I78
170
I63
I56
I50
I44
133
245
240
234
229
223
217
2iI
205
199
194
I88
I83
178
169
Iti
I53
I46
139
I33
I27
134
129
I:?
i :7
250
247
244
240
236,
233
229
226
222
219
216
212
2W
203
1%
I91
IHJ
179
174
169
I65
rtc
156
15:
I48
124
I20
110
II2
!OY
I 06
I:)3
I(Y)
1;
*in
0:
Ii3
IOY
I05
IO1
14 I6
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
Ilr,
+
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
RO
85
90
95
loo
I IO
120
130
140
150
I60
170
I hrt
1%:
3%
Ii<!
220
230
240
250
zbo
270
210
290
300
137
I34
III
I?8
I?5
i.L ?
222
217
213
2W
20s
201
197
189
I82
I76
169
I63
I58
I52
14;
i 4.3
:38
I34
130
126
123
II9
I I6
II3
I!@
rti
)tiS
-._
._
I44
!
j
j
i
!
.-A.-
226
i41
.._..
r?l
YS
Y:
#Y
fir
r6
id
245
239
233
226
220
213
20
200
194
I88
182
177
I71
lb1
I52
I44
I37
I30
124
II8
II3
IO8
104
100
96
Y:
89
II+
X?
n!
76
76
74
244
238
231
224
217
210
203
196
190
I83
177
I71
I65
I55
I45
137
129
122
II6
II0
IO5
100
96
J2
LII:
ri
h c
W
76
i4
71
69
67
243
237
230
223
216
208
201
193
I86
l7Y
173
166
I60
149
140
I31
123
II6
I09
I04
97
94
90
86
82
79
76
73
70
68
66
64
62
243
236
228
22!
212
204
I%
I88
180
172
I65
I58
I51
I39
129
I19
III
IO4
97
92
86
82
78
74
71
67
65
62
60
57
55
53
52
242
235
227
219
210
202
193
I84
176
I67
I60
I52
I45
I33
I21
II2
I03
96
89
83
78
74
70
66
63
60
57
54
52
50
48
46
45
242
235
227
218
209
200
191
182
I73
164
I56
149
I41
I28
I lb
IO6
98
90
83
78
72
68
64
60
57
54
52
49
47
45
43
41
40
242
239
226
217
208
I99
I89
I80
171
lb2
I54
I46
138
I25
II3
I03
94
86
79
73
68
64
60
56
53
50
47
45
43
41
39
38
36
241
234
226
216
207
197
I88
I78
I68
I59
I51
142
I35
121
108
98
88
81
74
68
63
58
54
51
47
45
42
40
38
36
34
33
31
241
234
225
216
206
I97
187
I77
I67
I58
149
140
I33
I I8
I06
95
85
77
70
64
59
55
51
47
44
41
39
37
35
33
31
30
28
241
233
225
216
206
I96
I86
I75
I66
I56
147
138
130
115
I03
92
82
74
67
61
55
51
47
43
40
37
35
33
31
29
27
26
25
241
233
225
215
205
I95
I85
I75
lb5
I55
146
137
129
I I4
IO1
90
@n
72
(05
59
54
49
45
41
38
36
33
31
29
27
2b
24
23
.._____.__.__
NATIONAL BUXUDING
CODS OF INDIA
TABLE 5F MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MR),

(Clmur 7.2.2)
with/,=4OOMPa.?_(20mnd
1
D/T+
Ilr,
I < 67
r-
IO
I2
I4
I6
I8
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
252
248
245
241
237
234
230
226
223
219
215
212
208
202
I95
I89
I83
I78
172
167
162
I58
I53
149
I45
141
I38
I34
I31
I28
I25
122
II9
250
246
242
238
234
229
225
220
216
212
207
203
I99
I91
184
177
I71
I65
159
I54
149
I44
I39
I35
131
17
123
I20
II7
II4
I II
IO8
I05
249
245
240
236
231
225
220
215
210
205
201
1%
I91
I83
I75
167
lb0
I54
I48
142
I37
I32
I28
I23
II9
115
II2
I08
I05
I02
99
97
94
249
244
239
234
228
222
217
211
206
200
I95
1%
I85
176
167
I59
I52
I45
I39
I33
127
122
Iltl
II4
II0
I06
I02
99
96
93
90
88
85
248
243
238
232
226
220
214
208
202
I%
I90
I85
I79
169
I60
I52
144
I37
I31
I25
II9
II4
II0
105
I02
98
94
91
88
85
83
80
78
248
243
237
231
225
218
212
205
199
192
I86
I80
I.75
I64
I54
I46
I38
I31
124
II8
112
I08
I03
99
95
91
88
85
82
79
77
74
72
247
242
235
229
222
215
207
200
I93
I86
I79
172
I66
I54
I44
I34
126
II8
III
I05
99
94
90
86
82
79
75
72
70
67
65
63
61
247
241
234
227
220
212
205
197
I89
I81
174
I67
I60
I48
I36
126
II7
I09
I02
96
90
85
81
77
73
70
67
64
61
59
57
55
53
246
241
234
227
219
211
203
I95
I86
I78
I71
I63
I56
I43
I31
I21
Ill
I03
96
90
84
79
75
70
67
64
61
58
55
53
51
49
47
246
240
233
226
218
210
202
I93
I85
176
I68
I61
I53
I40
127
II7
I07
99
92
85
79
74
70
66
62
59
56
53
51
49
47
45
43
246
240
233
225
217
209
200
191
I82
174
I65
I57
I50
I35
I23
Ill
I02
93
8S
79
73
68
63
59
56
53
50
47
45
43
41
39
37
246
240
233
225
217
208
I99
190
I81
172
I64
I55
I48
I33
I20
I08
98
89
82
75
69
64
60
55
52
49
46
43
41
39
37
35
33
246
240
232
225
216
207
I98
I89
I80
I71
162
I53
I45
I30
II7
I05
95
86
78
71
65
60
55
51
48
44
42
39
37
35
33
31
29
246
239
232
224
216
207
I98
I88
I79
I70
I61
I52
I44
I29
II5
I03
93
84
76
69
63
58
53
49
45
42
39
37
34
32
30
29
27
+
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
I20
I30
140
I50
160
170
I80
I90
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
FART
253
251
248
245
242
239
236
233
230
227
225
222
219
213
208
203
I98
I93
I88
I83
179
I75
I71
167
I63
I59
I56
I52
149
I46
I43
140
I37
V I
Sl?lLUXWRAL
DESIGN-SECTKBN 6 SIXEL
VI3
7.2.2.1 In Tables 5A to 5F:

D = overall depth of beam;
d, = depth of web (see 2.2);
I = effective .length of compression.
flange (see 7.6):
r, = radius of gyration of the section
about its axis of minimum strength
(_PJJ axis);
T = mean thickness of the compression
flange, is equal to the area of horizontal portion. of flange divided by
width; and
t = web thickness.
For rolled sections, the mean thickness is that
given in appropriate Indian Standards.

In case of compound girders withcurtailed
flanges, D shall be taken as the overall depth
of the girder at the pointof maximum bending
moment, and Tshall be taken as the effective
thickness of the compression flange and shall
be calculated as:
T = K, X mean thickness of the horizontal
portion of the compression flange at the point
of maximum bending moment. CoefficientKI
is defined in, 7.2.4.
7.2.3 MA X I M U M P E R M I S S I B L E B E N D I N G
C O M P R E S S I V E S TRESS IN B EAMS AND P L A T E
G IRDERS - For beams and plate girders,
bent about the axisof maximum strength (x-x

axis). the maximum bending compressive
stress on the extreme fibre. calculated on, the
effective section shall not exceed, the maximum permissible bending compressive stresd
uhcin M Pa obtained by the following formula:
(ItI< = 0.66
.rCh. .rY :
[ V;.hY + @I.) ]li
where
elastic critical StreSS in bending,
calculated in accordance with 7.2.4
or by an elastic flexural-torsional
buckling analysis, in MPa;
j;..= yield stress of the steel in M Pa;
and
n 7 a factor assumed as 1.4.
Values of oh as derived from the above for.fi,h =
mula for someofthe Indian Standard structural steels are given in Ta.ble 6.
7.23. / TUBES - In tubes, the tensile bending

stress and the compressive bending stress in
extreme fibres shall not exceed the values
given below:
Grade
(rhr or Uhf (MPa)
(1)
YSt 22
YSt 25
YSt 32
W-632
(2)
I37
162
201
72.4 ELASTIC CRITICAL S.tKEss--If an elastic flexural analysis is not carried out, the
elastic critical stress ,J.I, for beams .and plate
girders with /. smaller than I, shall be calculated using the following formula:
where
26.5 X 105 MPa

(~I0
kl = a coefficient to
allow for reduction in

thickness or breadth of flanges
between points of effective lateral
restraint and depends on I&, the ratio
of.the total areaof both flanges at the
point of least bending moment to the
corresponding area at thC point of
greatest bending moment between
such points of restraint. Values of k I
for different values of $ are given in
Table 7.
I. r, = as defined in 7.2.2. I.
0. T
kz = a coefficient to allow for the inequal-
ity of flanges, and depends on w. the

ratio of the moment of inertia of the
compression flange alone to that of
the sum of the moments, of inertia of
the flanges, each calculated about its
ownaxisparallel to they-yaxisofthe
girder, at the point of maximum
bending moment. Values of k2 for
different values of w are given in
Table 8.
Cl, c2 = respectively the lesser and greater dis-
tances from the section neutralaxic

to the extreme fibres.
r, = moment of inertia of the whole section about the.axis lying in thz plane
of bending (v-y axis), and
I, = moment of inertia of the whole sec-
tion about the axis normal to the

plane of bending (r-x axis).
Values of Xand Y are given in Table 9 for
appropriate values of D/T and l/r,.
7.2.4. I Values of fcb shall be increased by 20
percent when T/r is not greater than 2.0 and
dl/t is not greater than I 344/flwhere dl is
asdefined in 7.2.2.1 and 2.2and t the thickness
of web.
NATmNAL.BunDlNocoD~QMDu
TABLE6 VALUESOFo~CALCULATEDFROtHf,~ FORDIFFERENTVALUESOF f,

(Clause 7.2.3)
All units in MPa.
_.__
260
220
230
240
250
13
I9
25
30
36
41
45
so
54
58
61
65
68
71
74
77
79
82
84
86
89
90
92
94
96
97
99
100
102
jO3
I04
105
to6
108
109
II0
Ili
III
II2
II4
II5
117
II11
II9
I20
I21
122
123
124
125
126
126
127
128
128
129
I3
I9
25
30
36
41
46
so
54
58
62
66
69
72
75
78
81
84
86
88
90
93
94
96
98
I00
IO1
103
I04
106
IO7
108
110
III
I12
II3
114
II5
116
II8
119
I21
122,
12. /
I2
126
127
128
129
129
130
I31
132
132
133
134
I3
I9
25
31
36
41
46
51
55
59
63
67
70
73
77
80
82
85
88
90
92
94
97
99
100
102
I04
105
107
108
110
III
113
114
I15
II6
II7
II8
119
121
123
124
126
127
129
130
I31
132
133
134
I35
136
136
137
138
139
I3
I3
I9
I9
25 25
31
31
36
36
41
42
46 47
51
51
55 56
6060
64 .64
67 68
71
72
74 75
78 79
81
82
84 85
87 88
89 91
92 93
94 96
98
96
99 100
IO1
103
103 105
I04 107
I06 108
IO8 II0
II0 II2
III II4
II3 II5
II4 II7
II5 II8
II7 120
II8 I21
II9 122
I20 123
121
I25
122 .I26
I24 128
126 130
128 132
I30 133
I31 I35
133 136
I34 138'
I35 I39
136 I40
137 I41
138 143
139 I44
I40 I45
I41 I45
142 I46
143 147
143 I48
280
300
320
340
360 -380
I3
I9
2S
31
37
42
47
52
57
61
65
70
73
77
81
84
87
90
93
96
99
I01
104
106
108
III
II3
II5
II6
II8
120
122
123
I25
126
128
129
130
I32
134
136
138
I40
142
I44
145
147
I48
I50
ISI
IS2
IS3
154
IS5
156
IS7
13
I9
2S
31
37
42
48
53
57
62
67
71
75
79
82
86
89
93
96
99
!02
104
107
II0
II2
II4
II6
I19
t2l
123
I25
126
128
130
I31
133
135
136
I37
I40
142
I45
147
IS0
IS1
153
154
156
IS7
159
I60
I61
163
I64
I65
I66
I3
I9
25
31
37
43
48
53
58
63
67
72
76
80
84
88
91
85
98
IO1
I04
107
II0
II3
IIS
II8
I20
122
I25
127
129
I31
133
134
136
I38
I40
I41
143
I46
148
ISI
153
IS5
IS8
If?0
Ihl
163
I65
166
168
169
I71
172
173
174
13
I3
I9
I9
26
26
31
32
37
37
43
43
48
49
54
54
59
59
64
64
68
69
73
74
77
78
81
82
85
87
89
91
93
94
97
98
,100 102
103 IO5
106 I09
110 II2
II3 II5
II5 II8
120 "?I
121
124
123 I26
I26 I29
I2H I31
130 I34
133 136
I35 13h
137 I41
13Y 141
141
145
143 14'
I44 149
146 I51
148 ,152
ISI
I56
IS4 159
IS7 162
IS9 I65
162 I68
I64 170
166 172
168 I75
170 I77
172 179
174 ISI
17s I83
177 184
178 186
180 187
I81
I89
182 I90
400
420 450
480
.-20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
IO0
110
I20
130
140
IS0
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
'400
420
440
460
480
500
520
540
560
580
600
620
640
660
680
700
720
740
PART
VI
STRUCIIIIIAL DESIGN-SECIIGN
6 SIXEL
I3
I9
26
32
38
43
49
54
60
65
70
74
79
83
88
92
96
100
103
107
III
It4
II7
120
123
126
I29
IJ2
I35
137
I40
142
I44
147
149
I51
ISJ
IS5
157
160
I64
167
170
I73
176
I78
ISI
183
I85
187
189
I91
I93
I95
196
I98
!3
I3
19
I9
20
26
26
26
32
12
32
38
3LI
38
44
q
44
49
so
so
5s
55
56
60
61
61
65
66
67
71
72
70
75
76
77
80
WI
82
84
86
87
89
91
92
95
97
93
97
100 IO1
IO2
IO4 106
IO5
tO8 II0
I09
112 114
II2
II4 II6 II&
It6 118 120 122
II9 I21
I24 126
I22 124 127 130
126 128 I31
133
129 I31
134 137
I!2 134 I37 140
IJS 137 I41
I44
137 I40 144 147
I40 I43 147 IS0
I43 146 150 153
145 148 IS2 IS6
148 ISI
IS5 IS9
ISO IS3 IS8 162
IS2 156 161
166
IS5 IS8 163 I68
157
I60 I66 I70
ISY 163 I68 173
161
I65 170 175
165 169 I75 I10
I69 173 I79
I85
I72 I77 I83 189
175 180 187 193
178 183 I90 197
181
I87 194 201
I84 189' 197 204
IX7 192 200 208
189 I95 203 211
192 198 206 II4
194 200 209 217
196 202 211 220
198 204 214 222
200 207 216 225
202 209 218 228
204 210 220 230
205 212 222 232
I3
I3
I9
26
32
38
44
49
55
60
66
71
76
80
85
90
94
98
102
106
110
510
540
._
I3
13
20
20
26
26
32
32
38
38
44
44
50
50
56
56
62
62
67
67
73
72
78
73
04
83
P9
88
Y4
93
99
98
IO? IO?
IO' IOX
II\
III
II6 Iii
121
120
124 I20
128 I30
132 i 14
I36 I38
139 142
I45
143
149
147
150 ,153
IS3 IS6
IS7 160
I60 163
163 166
166 169
169 172
172 1.75
I74 I78
181
177
I80 I84
189
185
IY5
I90
194 200
199 204
203 209
207 213
217
211
215 221
218 225
222 229
225 232
228 235
231 238
234 242
236 244
239 247
241 250
fconrim wd)
33'
TABLE 6 VALUES OF (r* CALCULATED FROM fa+ FOR DIFFERENT VALUES OF f, -Conrd
(Clause 7.2.3)
All unit8 in MR.
220
230
240
250
260
280
300
320
340
360
380
400
420
450
480
510
540
/A
t
760
780
800
850
900
950
1000
I 050
I 100
I I50
1200
I300
I400
I 500
1600
I 700
I800
I900
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
3sOO
4000
4%x
5000
SSOO
6Ow
$
kI
I29
I30
130
I31
I32
I33
I34
I35
I35
I36
I36
13-7
I38
I39
I39
I40
I40
I40
I41
I41
142
142
142
I43
143
I43
I44
I44
IU
I44
I.0
I.0
134
135
135
I37
138
I38
I39
I40
140
142
I43
I44
I39
I40 I45
141 I46
I41 147
142 147
I43 149
I44 149
IU I50
I45 I51
146 I51
I46 52
I46 Ij2
I47 I53
147 I54
I48 I54
I48 I54
149 I55
149 I55
149 I56
I50 I56
IS0 I57
I50 IS7
I51 I57 I63
I51 I57
I44 149 I58 167

145 I49 I59 I68
145 I50 I59 169
147 I52 161
I71
148 153 I63 172
149 I54 164 174
I45 I50 I55 I65 I75
ISI
I56 167 177
I52 I57 I68 I78
I52 I58 I68 179
I53 I59 169 I80
I54 I60 I71 182
155 161
172 I83
I56 162 173 184
157 I63 174 I85
157 I63 175 I86
I58 I64 176 187
I58 I64 I76 188
I59 I65 177 I89
I60 I66 178 190
I60 I66 I79 I91
I61 167 179 IYI
I61 167 I80 192
I61 I68 I80 I93
162 I68 I81 194
I63 169 182 194
I63 169 I82 I95
I63 170 I83 I95
I70 I83 I96
208
I64 170 I83 196
175
176
177
180
I82
I83
I85
I87
188
I89
I90
I92
I94
I95
197
I98
199
200
200
202
203
204
204
205
206
207
208
208
I84
IHS
I86
188
IPI
193
I95
196
I98
199
200
203
205
206
208
209
210
211
212
213
215
216
216
217
218
219
220
221
221
209 222
192 I99 207 214

I93 201 208 216
194 202 210 217
i97 205 213 221
200 208 216 224
202 211 219 227
204 213 222 230
206 215 224 233
207 217 226 235
209 219 228 237
210 220 230 239
213 223 233 243
215 225 236 246
270 228 238 241
219 229 240 250
220 231 242 252
221 232 243 254
222 234 245 256
223 235 246 257
225 237 248 259
226 238 250 261
227 239 251 263
228 240 252 264
229 241 253 265
231 243 255 267
232 244 257 269
233 245 258 270
233 246 259 271
234 247 259 272
234 247 260 273
224 234
226 236
228 238
232 243
236 247
240 251
243 255
246 258
248 261
251 263
253 266
257 270
260 274
263 768
266 281
268 283
270 285
272 287
273 289
276 292
278 295
280 297
282 299
283 300
286 303
287 306
289 307
290 309
291 310
291 310
TABLE 7 VALUES OF k, FOR BEAMS WITH CURTAILED FLANGES

( Clause 7.2.4)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
I.0
I.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
253
255
257
263
268
273
277
281
285
288
291
297
302
306
309
313
316
318
321
325
328
331
333
335
339
342
344
346
347
348
244
246
248
253
25a
262
266
270
273
276
279
284
288
292
295
298
301
308
305
309
312
314
316
318
321
324
3J6
327
328
329
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.2
NOTE - Flmaer should not be reduced in breadth to give a value of 9 lower than 0.25.
;::
VA
TABLE 8 VALUES OF k, FOR BEAMS WITH UNEQUAL FLANGES

(Clam 7.2.4)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
NATIONAL
BUILDING
0.0
-1.0
CODE OF
lNDl.4
NOTE --Guidance for calculating elastic buckling

foices may be found in the references listed in Appendix
E.
7 . 2 . 5 B E A M S B E N T A B O U T T H E Axis O F
M I N I M U M S T R E N G T H (P.V AXIS) -The m a x imum permissible bending stress in tension oh,
or in compression uhr in beams bent about the
axis of minimum strength shall hot exceed
0.66f,. where/; is the yield sfress of steel.
7.2..6 AN G L E S AND T E E S - T h e b e n d i n g
stress in the leg when loaded with the flange or
table in compression shall not exceed 0.66.L..
When loaded with the leg in compression, the
permissible betiding stress shall be calculated
from 7.2.3 and 7.2.4 with kz = - I.0 and
T = thickness of leg
in flexure. shall not exceed the value T,.,., given

below:
T\n# = 0.45,/;.
where
Tvrn = maximum permissible shear stress.
and
,/r = yield stress of steel.
7.4.2 AVERAGE S HEAR S TRESS - The average shear stress in a member calculated on the
cross section of the web (sre 7.4.2.1) shall not
exceed:
a)
b)
7.2.7 S TEEL TUBES-In tubes. the tensile

bending stress and compressive bending stress
in the extreme fibres shall not exceed the
values given below:
Grade
(1).
YSt 22
YS1 25
YS1 32
Oh,, Or Ohr
FOR UNSTIFFE-NED WEBS -- the value T.

obtained by the formula rv. = 0.4 fy. and
FOR s fIFITI:UtlI WEISS the values given
in Tables IOA, IOB and IOC as appropriate,Cor yield stress values 250, 340 and
400 M Pa. respectively.
The values rvti for stiffened webs for a

steel whose yield stress is not given in
Tables IO/\, IOH and IOC shall he determined by using the following formulae,
provided that the average s1rcss rv,, shall
not exceed 0.4ff,.
(MPa)
0)
137
162
201
i) For webs where the distance between

the vertical stiffeners is less than d
d.Z.
7.3 Bearing S~tws -The bearing stress in any

part of a hcam when calculated on the net area
of contact shall not exceed the value of 0,
dctcrmined by the following formula:
a =
T
ii)
\b
lirrc
7.3.l The average bearing stress on the net

projected area of contact shall not exceed the
values given below:
Grudr
Up (MPU)
(1)
(2)
YS1 22
YSt 25
YSt 32
I67
I86
245
7.4 Shear Stwsre.!

7.4.1 MA X I M U M S H E A R STRESS - T h e
maximum shear stress in a member having
regard to thedistrihution ofstresses inconformity with the elastic behaviour ofthe member
PART VI STRUCXURAL
D E S I G N - S E C T I O N 6 SIEEL
0.41, iI .3
i 01
c
4000
I+/2
For webs where the distance between

.the vertical stiffeners is more than d
f-
Ill;IXilTlLlIIl pcrniissihlc hearing stress.

and
= yield stress of steel.
CT P=
fy
zc
where
TvIl = maximum permissible average shear
stress.
= distance between vertical stiffeners.
= I) FOR VERTICALLY STIFFENED
WEBS WITHOUT HORIZONTAL
STIFFENERS --- the clear distance
between flange angles or. where
there are no flange angles. the
clear distance between flanges.
ignoring fillets. Where tongue
plates (see Fig. 6) having a thick-
VI,=
TABLE 9 VALUES OF X AND Y FOR CALCULATINGfd

(Clause 7.2.4)
,
-
X
8
IO
I2
I4
I6
I8
2 222
I 856
1590
I 389
I 232
I 107
I005
920
849
788
735
689
649
582
527
482
444
412
385
360
339
320
104
288
275
262
251
241
231
222
214
207
200
2 006
I 708
1449
I254
I I04
985
889.
810
743
687
639
597
560
499
451
411
379
3SQ
326
305.
286
270
256
243
231
220
211
202
194
I86
I80
173
I67
I 965
1612
1357
1 I66
I 020
904
811
735
672
618
573
534
499
443
398
361
331
3n6
284
265
249
235
222
210
200
I91
lit2
175
I67
IhI
155:
149
144
I 897
I 546
1293
I I05
961
847
757
682
621
570
526
488
455
402
359
325
297
274
254
236
221
20s
197
I86
I71
I69
I61
I54
148
142
137
132
127
I II49
I 499
1248
I %I
918
806
717
644
584
533
491
454
423
371
339
298
271
249
230
214
200
I88
177
I68
I59
I52
145
I38
I33
I27
122
IIR
II4
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
80
100
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
120
130
I40
I50
I60
170
180
I90
200
210
220
2.30
240
250
2Ml
270
280
290
300
824
: 103
822
607
437
301
188
094
014
945
886
833
187
708
644
591
546
508
474
445
420
397
376
358
341
326
312
299
288
277
267
_ 257
249
I 814 I 759 I 728 I 709 I 697 I 683 I 675 I 667 I 663

I 465 I411 I 380 I 362 I 349 I 335 I 327 I 319 I315
1214 II61 II31 III3 II01 1086 1078 1070 1067
IO28
976
947
929
917
902
894 ,886
883
886
835
806
788
776
762
754
746
743
679
667
653
645
637
634
775
726
697
687
838
610
592
581
567
559
551
547
615
567
540
522
511
497
489
481
478
556
509
482
465
454
440
432
424
421
506
461
434
417
406
392
385
317
373
464
420 394
371
366
353
345
337
334
428
385
360
343
332
319
311
304
300
331
314
304
290
283
275
272
398
356
347
307
283 2 6 8
257
244
237
229
226
308
270
247
232
222
209
202
194
I91
277
240
218
204
194
IRI
I74
I67
163
251
217
195
I81
172
I60
153
I45
142
230
197
I77
163
154
142
I35
145
124
212
I81
161
I48
I39
127
121
II3
I IO
197
I67
148
135
I26
II5
109
IO2
98
184
I55
137
I25
I I6
IO5
98
92
88
172
145
127
II5
I07
96
90
83
80
162
I36
I I9
107
99
89
X3
76
73
I53
I2U
II?
IO1
93
82
16
70
66
145
lil
105
94
87
71
71
64
61
I38
I I5
99
89
82
72
66
60
56
132
I09
94
R4
77
67
62
55
S2
I26
I04
90
80
73
64
58
52
49
121,
99
85
76
69
60
55
48
45
II6
95
R2
72
66
57
52
46
42
III
91
78
69
63
54
49
43
40
107
88
75
66
60
52
46
41
38
I03
84
72
64
57
49
44
38
35
ness 01 not less than twice- the

thickness of the web plate are
used, the depth dshall be-taken as
the depth of the girder between the
flanges less the sum of the depths
of the tongue plates or eight times
the sum of the thickness of the
tongue plates, whichever is less.
656
309
060
816
736
627
541
471
414
367
327
294
265
219
184
I57
I35
II8
104
92
82
73
66
60
55
50
46
42
39
36
34
32
92
-
YOI t I -- For the minimum thickness of ucb plates

rnd the design of web stiReners. .FW 7.7.3 and 7.7.4.
NOIF: 2 - The allovahlc s~rck given in Tahlcs
IOA. IOB and IO< apply provided any reduction of the
web cross section is due only 1.0 rivet holes. etc. Whew
large aperturca are cut in the web. a apecal analysis shall
hc made to cnsurc that the maxtmum pcrmissibleaverape
shear strcsscs laid down in thts standard are not exceeded.
NOTE 3 - Compliance with this subclause shall be
deemed to satisfy the requirements of 7.4.1.
2) F O R V E R T I C A L L Y S T I F F E N E D
wmb wtTH ~ORIZDNTAL S T I FFENERS - as described in 7.7.4.3.
the clear distance between the tension flanges (angles flange plate or
tongue plate) and the horizontal
stiffener.
t = the thickness of the web.
. -36
7.4.2.1 The crosk sections

of the web shall be
.
taken as follows:
For rolled
l-beam and
channels
For plate
girders
The depth of the

beam multiplied by
web thickness
The depth of the
web plate multiplied
by its thickness
NATIONAL IIUIUNNG CODE Oc INDIA
TABLE IOA PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS sw, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
/,=250 MP8
(Clause 7.4.2)
STRESS tv, (MPa) FOR DIFFERENT DISTANCES c BETWEEN STIFFENERS
dir
0.3d
0.4d
0.5d
O.&i
0.7d
0.8d
0.9d
I.Od
<Id
I.2d
1.3d
l.4d
I .5d
90
95
100
105
I00
Ii&l
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
I00
100
100
lo0
I00
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
I00
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
I00
100
100
100
!I9
IO0
100
99
98
MO
100
99
97
100
9!2
110
115
120
I25
IO0
I00
100
I00
100
100
100
100
IO0
I00
100
I00
I00
100
I00
100
IO0
100
100
I00
100
100
100
I00
I00
100
I00
98
100
I00
98
97
99
98
96
95
98
96
95
93
%
95
93
92
93
94
92
91
94
93
91
90
I30
135
140
I50
100
100
100
100
I00
loo
100
100
I00
100
I00
100
100
IO0
100
100
100
99
97
99
98
96
94
97
96
95
92
96
94
93
90
94
92
91
88
92
90
89
86
90
89
87
84
89
8-l
86
83
88
86
85
81
160
170
I80
I90
I00
I00
I00
100
100
loo
I00
100
I00
100
98
97
98
96
94
92
94
92
90
88
92
89
87
84
89
87
84
82
88
85
82
85
82
80
83
80
77
81
78
75
80
76
73
78
75
72
200
210
220
230
100
100
I00
100
100
99
98
96
95
93
91
90
90
88
86
84
86
83
81
79
82
81
80
81
240
250
260
270
100
I00
100
99
95
93
92
90
88
86
85
84
83
82
81
81
77
74
.I00
.J
98
96
Non-applicable zone.
I-
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.
7.4.3 S TEEL T UBES - The maximum shear

stress in a tube calculated by dividing the total
shear by an area equal to half the netcrosssectional area of the tube shall not exceed the
values given below:
Grade
(1)
YSt 22
YSt 25
YSt 32
Tvm
ir
(MPa)
(2)
88
1-08
132
7.5 Effective Span of Beams - The effective

span of a beam shall be taken as the length
between the centres of the supports, except in
cases where the point of application of the
reaction is taken as eccentricity to the support,
when it shall be permissible to take the effective span as the length between the assumed
points of application of reaction.
.7.6 Effective Length of Compression Flanges
rmnmmmu
DUIQN-8EllON 6 m
Fig.6 Tongue plates

7.6.1 For simply supported beams and
girders where no lateral restraint of the compression flanges is provided, but where each
end of the beam is restrained against torsion,
the effective length I of the compression
flanges to be used in 7.2 shall be taken as
follows:
a) With ends of compression I = span
J7
TABLE 108 PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS t, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
/I=340 MPa
(Ckwr 7.1.2)
Sruess rv, (MPa) FOR DIPP~RENT DISTANCLS c BETWEEN SnFFENeRs
d/r
0.3d
0.4d
O.Jd
0.6d
0.7d
O&f
0.9d
I.Od
I.ld
I.2d
l.3d
l,4d
l.5d-
75
80
85
I36
I36
1%
I36
I36
I%
1%
I%
I%
I%
I36
I36
I36
I36
136
1%
I%
1%
1%
I36
1%
I%
I36
I36
136
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I34
I36
I36
I33
90
95
100
105
136
I36
I36
I36
f36
I36
I%
I36
I%
I%
I%
I%
I36
I%
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
1%
I36
I36
I35
I36
I36
I35
133
I36
135
132
I30
I35
I33
130
128
133,
I31
128
126
I32
129
127
I24
I31
128
126
I23
110
II5
I20
125
1%
I36
I36
I36
I36
I36
l.36
I36
I%
1%
1%
1%
I36
I36
I36
136
I36
I36
I35
I33
I35
I33
I31
I29
I33
I31
129
127
I31
129
127
125
128
126
124
I21
126
123
121
I I9
124
121
II9
II6
122
I I9
II7
II4
120
II8
II5
II3
I30
I35
I40
I50
1%
1%
I36
1%
I36
I36
lj6
I36
I36
I36
I36
I35
I35
I34
132
129
I31
I29
127
124
127
126
I24
120
I25
123
I21
II7
122
120
II8
II4
I19
II7
I I5
I IO
116
I I4
II2
107
I I4
III
I09
I04
II2
I09
107
102
II0
IO8
IO5
100
I60
170
I80
I90
I36
I36
I36
I36
136
I36
I35
I33
132
129
127
124
126
I23
I I9
II6
I20
II7
II3
II0
I I6
II2
108
I05
II3
I09
IO5
100
II0
106
102
106
IO1
97
102
98
93
99
95
90
9i
92
87
95
90
84
200
210
226
2%
136
I36
I36
135
I30
128
126
I23
121
II8
II6
II3
II3
110
107
103
106
I03
99
IO1
97
93
96
240
250
266
270
I34
I32
1%
!28
I21
II9
II6
II4
II0
107
I04
102
100
97
94
91
%
r-J-
rNon-applicable zone.
92
89
b)
tlanges unrestrained against

lateral bending (that is, free
to rotate in plan at the
bearings)
With ends of compression I = 0.85 X
flanges partially restrained
span
against lateral bending
(that is, not free to rotate in
plan at the bearings)
d With ends of compression I = 0.7X

flanges firlly restraGed
span
against lateral bending
(that is, not free to rotate in
plan at the bearings)
Restraint against torsioir can be provided by:
i) web or flange cleats, or
ii) bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction
with the bearing of the beam. or
v&P
iii) lateral end frames or other external supports to the ends of the compression
flanges (see Note below), or
iv) their being built into walls.
Where the ends 01 the beam are not restrained

again9 toCon. or where the load is applied to
the compression flange and both the load and
flange are free to move laterally, the above
values of the effective length shall be increased
by 20 percent.
NOTE-The end restraint elcmcn~ shall be capable of safely resisting, in addition IO wind and other
applied external forces, a horiromal force acting at
the bearing in a direction normal IO the compression
flange of the beam at the level of the centroid of the
flange and having a value equal to not less than 2.5
nereent of the maximum force occurring in the flange.
N ATIONAL BUlLDIN CODE 4YF INDIA
TABLE IOC PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS r, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
j,=400 MPa
(C/m&w 7.4.2)
S TRESS 7. (MPa)
dir
FOR
D IFFERENT D ISTANCES c BETWEEN S TIFFENERS
0.3d
0.4d
0.5d
0.6d
0.7d
0.8d
0.9d
I.Od
t.ld
I.2d
I .3d
l.4d
1%.
70
75
80
85
I60
t60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
160,
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I58
I60
I60
I59
I56
I60
I60
I57
154
160
I59
I56
I52
90
95
100
105
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I57
I60
I59
I57
I54
I60
I57
I55
I52
I57
I54
I51
149
15s
I52
I49
I46
I52
149
I46
I43
I51
147
I44
I41
149
I46
I43
I39
II0
II5
120
125
I60
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I60
I59
I57
I59
I56
I54
I52
155
I52
I50
147
I52
149
147
I44
149
147
I44
I41
I46
I43
I40
I37
I43
I40
I37
I34
I40
I37
I34
I31
I38
I35
I32
128
136
I33
129
I26
I30
I35
I40
IS0
160
I60
I60
I60
160
I60
I60
I60
I60
160
I58
I55
I55
I53
I51
147
I50
147
I45
I41
I45
I43
I40
I35
I41
I39
I36
I31
I39
I36
I33
I28
I34
I32
I29
I23
I31
128
I25
II9
128
I25
122
II5
I25
122
II9
II2
I23
I20
II6
110
160
170
180
190
I60
160
!60
I60
I60
I58
I55
I52
ISI
148
I44
I40
I43
I39
I35
I31
I36
I32
127
I23
I30
126
I21
II6
126
I21
II6
Ill
I23
II7
II2
II7
II2
IO6
II3
107
IO1
I09
IO3
97
106
100
93
I03
97
90
200
210
220
230
160
I60
I57
I55
149
I46
I43
I40
I37
I33
I30
126
I27
I23
II9
II4
II8
II4
I09
IO5
Ill
I06
IO1
I06
240
250
260
270
I53
ISI
148
146
137
I34
131
128
I23
I I9
I I6
112
II0
I06
102
98
100
96
I
Non-applicable zone.
?-
rl
7.6.2 For beams which are provided with

members giving effective lateral restraint to
the compression flange at intervals along the
span, in addition to the end torsional restraint
required in 7.6.1 the effecitve length of the
compression flange shall be taken as the maximum distance, centte-to-centre, of the restraint members.
7.6.3 For cantilever beams of projecting
length Lthe effective length to be used in 7.2
shall be taken as follows:
a) Built-in at the support,
free at the end
b) Built-in at the support,
restrained against torsion
at the end by continuous
construction (see Fig. 7A)
IART V i SIllUCNML DESIGN-SUXION
I = 0.85 L
I = 0.75 L
(muI.
cl
Built-in at the support.

restrained against lateral
deflection and torsion at
the free end (see Fig. 7B)
4 Continuous at the support,
unrestrained against torsion
at the support and free at
the end (see Fig.. 7C)
e) Continuous at the support, with partial restraint
against torsion of the
support and free at the end
(see Fig. 7D)
t) Continuous at the support.
restrained against .torsion
at the support and free at
the end (Jp4 Fig. 7E)
L = length of cantilever.
I = 0.5 L.
I= 3L
I= 2 L
I= L
VI439
Fig, 7A Cantilever Built-in at Support, Restrained Against Torsion at the End
FACE BEAMS
Fig. 78 Cantilever Built-in at Support, Restrained Laterally at the End
,s*
NMIONAL
BUILDIN
CODI
OF
INDlA
Fig. 7C Cantilever L.1 Continuous at the

Support, Unrestrained Against Torsion at
the Support and Unrestrained at the End
Fig. 70 Cantilever L.3 Continuous at the

Support, Partially Restrained Against
Torsion at the Support and Unrestrained at
the End
TIONS
At INTERSECTIONS
Fig. 7E Cantilever Span Continuous at the Support. Fully Restrained Against Torsion
at the Support and Unrestrained at the Free End
If there is a degree of fixity at the free end, the

effective length shall be multiplied by:
0.5
0.85
in (b) and (c) above, and by
0.15
in (d), (e) and (f) above.
0.85
7.6.4 Where beams support slab construcPART Vi
STRUCTURAL DESIGN-SECTION 6 BFEEL
tion, the beam shall be deemed to be effectively restrained laterally if the frictional or
positive connection of the slab to the beam is
capable of resisting a lateral force of 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the compression
flange of the beam, considered as distributed
uniformly alohg the flange. Furthermore, the
slab construction shall be capable of resisting
this lateral force in flexure and shear.
vudl
7.6.5 For beams which are provided w i t h

members giving effective lateral restraint of
the compression flange at intervals along the
span, the effective lateral restraint shall be
capable of resisting a force of 2.5 percent of
the maximum force in the compression flange
taken as divided equally between the number
of points at which the restraint members
occur.
7.6.6 In a series of such beams, with solid

webs, which are connected together by the
same system of restraint members, the sum of
the restraining forces required shall be taken
as 2 percent of the maximum flange force in
one beam only.
7.6.6.1 In the case of a series of latticed
beams, girders or roof trusses which are
connected together by the same system of
restrain! meqbers, the sum of the restraining
forces required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of
the madimum force in the compression flange
plus 1.25 percent of this force for every
(Including holes for pins and black bolts)

occurring in a plane perpendicular to the
direction of stress at the section being
considered (see 4.6).
The effectiv: sectional area of tension

flanges shall be the gross sectional area with
deductions for holes as specified in4.5.2. I and
4.6 of this Code.
The effective sectional area for parts in
shear shall be taken as specified in 7.7.3.4.
7.7.2 FLANGES
7.7.2.1 In riveted or bolted construction.
flange angles shall form as large a part of the
area of the flange as practicable (preferably
not less than one-third) and the number of
flange plates shall be kept to a minimum:
member of the series other than the first up to

a maximum total of 7.5 percent.
7.7 Design of Beams and Plate. tiirders nirh
Solid Webs
7.7.1 SEC
NAL P ROPERTIES - Solid web
girders sht
ld preferably be proportioned on
the basis of the moment of inertia of the gross
cross section with the neutral axis taken at the

centroid of that section, but it shall be
permissible to use the net moment of inertia.
In arriving at the maximum flexural stresses,
the stresses calculated on the basis of the gross
moment of inertia shall be increased in the
ratio of gross area to effective area of the
flange section. For this purpose the flange
sectional area in riveted or bolted
construction shall be taken to be that of the
flange plate, flange angles and the portion of
the web and side plates (if any) between the
flange angles; in welded construction the
flange sectional area shall be taken to be that
qf the flange plates plus that of the tongue
plates (if any) up to a limit of eight times their
thickness, which shall be not less than twice
the thickness of the web.
7.7. I.1 The effective sectional area of
compression flanges shall be the gross area
with deductions for excessive width of plates
as specified for compression members (see
452.1 and 4.5.2.2) and for open holes
w-P2
b)
In exfiosed situations where flange plates

are used, at least one plate of the top
flange shall extend the full length of the
girder. unless the top edge of the web is
machined flush with the flange angles.
Where two or more flange plates are used
on the one flange, tacking rivets shall be
provided, if necessary. to comply with the
requirements of 9.10.2 and 9.10.3.
Each flange plate shall be extended
beyond its theoretical cut-off point. and
the extension shall contain sufficient
rivets or welds to deve!op in the plate the
load calculated for the bending moment
on the girder section (taken to include the
curtailed plate) at the theoretical cut-off
point.
The outstand of flange plates, that is the

projection beyond the outer line of
connections to flange angles. channel or
joist flanges. or. in the case of welded
constructions, their projection beyond
the face of the web or tongue plate, shall
not exceed the values given in 4.5.i.
d) In the case of box girders, the thickness of
any plate. or the aggregate thickness of
two or more plates when these plates are
tacked together to form the flange, shall
satisfy the requirements given in 4.5.2.
cl
7.7.2.2 FLANGE S P L I C E S - Flange joints

preferably should not be located at points of
maximum stress. Where splice plates are used,
their area shall be not less than 5 percent in
excess of the area of the flange clement
spliced; their centre of gravity shall coincide.
NATIOSAL
B U I L D I N G COD6 OF ISDIA
as nearly as possible, with that of the element

spliced. There shall be enough rivets or welds
on each side of the splice to develop the load in
the element splices plus 5 percent but ifi no
case should the strength developed be less
than 50 percent of the effective strength ofthe
material spliced. In welded construction,
flange plates shall be joined by complete
penetration butt welds, wherever possible.
These butt welds shall develop the full
strength of the plates.
7.7.2.3 CONNECTION OF FLANGES TO WEB The flanges of plate girders shall be connected
to the web by sufficient rivets, bolts or welds
to transmit the maximum horizontal shear
force resulting from the bending moments in
the girder, combined with any vertical loads
which are directly applied to the flange.
7.7.2.4 DlSPERSlON OF LOAD THROUGH
- Where a load is directly
applied to a top flange, it shall be considered
as dispersed uniformly at an angle of 30
degrees to, the horizontal.
pression flange to the neutral axis: t h e

greater of
I/ 180 of the smaller dimension in each
panel,
and _!!?_??a but not less than d2
250
4000
d)
When there is also a horizontal stiffener

at the neutral axis of the girder: the
greater of
I/ 180 of the smaller dimension in each
panel,
and
d2JX
6 400
but not less than dz

400
In (b), (c) and (d) above, d2 is twice the clear

distance from the compression flange angles.
or plate, or tongue plate to the neurral axis.
FLANGE TO WEB
7.7.3 W EB P LATES
7.7.3.1 MINlhlllM THI<KNtSS - - - T h e
thickness of the web plate shall be not less
than the following:
In the case of welded crane gantry plate

girders intended for carrying cranes with a
lifting load of 15 tonnes or more, the thickness
of web plate shall be not less than 8 mm.
The minimum thickness of web plates for
different yields stress values are given in Table
11 for information.
NOTE-In no case shall the greater clear dimension of a web panel exceed 270 I, nor the lesser clear
dimension of the same panel exceeo IHO I, where I 1s
the thickness of the web plate.
a) For unstiffened webs: the grrater of

__dl dXYX
816
a n d .dlG_
1344
but not less than _!!_

85
where
dl = depth of web as delined in 2.2, and
TVu, Sa[ I= calculated average stress in the web
due to shear force.
b)
For vertically stiifened webs: the greater

of
I! 180 of the
dimension
and dlfi
3 200
C)
smallest clear panel
but not less than __$_

200
For webs stiffened both veitically and

horizontally with a horizontal stiffener at
a distance from the compression flange
equal to 2/ 5 of the distance from the com-
IART vl SIRUCI-URAL
DFSIGN-SECXION
STEEL
7 . 7 . 3 . 2 R I V E T E D C O N S T R U C T I O N -~ F o r
girders in exposed situations and which do not
have ilange plates for their-entire length, the
top edge of the web plateshall be flush with or
above the angles, as specified by the engineer,
and the bottom edge of the web plate shall be
flush with or set back from the angles. as
specified by the engineer.
7.7.3.3 W E LD ED CONS IKI!CTION -- The gap
between the web plates and flange plates shall
be kept to a minimum, and for fillet welds
shall not exceed I mm at any point before
welding.
7.7.3.4 EFFECTIVE SECTIONAL AREA
a)
OF PLATE GIRDER - The effective

cross-sectional area shall be taken as the
full depth of the web plate multiplied by
the thickness.
WEB
vI-,43
--TABLE II MINIMUM THICKNESS OF WEB

(Clause 7.7.J.I)
Mlmmum Thickness of Web fw Yield Suess/, (in MPa) of
/
&-
220 _-__-- 1 , 230 d, 240 d, 250 ;r, 260 JI 280 do
t 344
US
c1.K
A
200 200 200
L-L3 ml
85
cl:
85
_
85
83
200
300 ____ d, 320 d,
80
cl. - J? - dz
I98 191.
-3
78
d?
340
dx 360 d, 380 d, 400 d, 420 d, 450 d, 480 d, 510 d, 540 d,
-__--_-_,-73
71
69
67
66
6361 60
58
75
dz
dz
_
185 179
dz
_
d>
cl1
174 169 164
d:
dz
dz
d:
dl
dl
d:
--__--
160
156
ISI
146
142 I38
cl: J: d> d:
cl:
d>
dz
d:
d:
dz d> d, dz dz
d>
d2
d*
c/:v%;___-~_-_-__----_4 000
250 250 250 250 248 239 231 224 217
211 205 200 195 I89 I83 177 172
cl*v%;
_
6 400
~lr
$1~
d:
t/z
d,
d,
d:
dz
d:
d>
d!
d:
d?
dz
dz
d?
_:_%.__---____-----4OU 400 400 400 396 382 3 7 0 358 348 338 328 320 312 302 292 284 276
NOII
Where webs arc varied in thickntx m the
depth of rhc ,ectlorl hk the USC 01 tongue pl;ctcs or the
like. or uhrrc the pruportion of Ihc ucb included in
the flange arca I\ 25 p e r c e n t or more of lhr otrrall
d e p t h . t h e above approxtmailon IS nol pcrmlbslhlc
and the maxtmum shear stress shall bc compuicd.
b)
KOI.1.F.D BEAMS AND CIIANXELS -- T h e

effective cross-sectional area for shear
shall bc taken as the lull depth of the
beam or channel multiplied by its web
thickness. For other sections the mahimum shear stress shall be computed from
the whole area of the cross section. having
regard to the actual distribution of shear

slress.
c)
Webs which have openings larger than

those normally used for rl\cts or other
fawnlr,gs r e q u i r e special anal!Gs t o
cnsurc that the prrrnissibk btrcss ;l\ \pccified 111 this Standard art not cxcecdcd
7.7.3.5 SPLICCS IS WEBS -- S p l i c e s i n t h e

webs of the plate girders and rolled sections
shall be Jesrgnrd to resist the shears and
moments iit the spliced section.
In riveted con\tructlon, splices plates shall
be provided on each side of the web. In welded
constructton. web splices shall preferably be
made with complete penetration butt welds.
7.7.3.6 Where additional plates are required
to augment the strength of the web, they shall
be placed on each side of the web and shall be
equal in thickness. The proportion of shear
force, assumed to be resisted by these plates
shall be limited by the amount of horizontal
shear which they can transmit to the flanges
through their fastenings, and such reinforcing
plates and their fastenings shall be carried

beyond the-points at which they become theoretically necessary.
7 . 7 . 4 I NT E R M E D I A T E W E B S T I F F E NE R S
P LATE G
FOR
IRDERS
2.7.4.1 GEN E R A L - When the thickness of

the web is less than the limits specified in
7.7.3.1 (a) vertical stiffeners shall be provided
throughout the length of the girder. When the
thickness of the web is less than the limits
specified in 7.7.3. I (b) horizontal stiffeners
shall be provided in addition to the vertical
stiffeners.
In no case shall the greater unsupported
clear dimension of a web panel exceed 270 I
nor the lesser unsupcrted clear dimension of
the same panel exceed I80 I. where I is the
thickness of the web plate.
7.7.4.2 VERTICAL STIFFENERS - Where vertical stiffeners are required, they shall be provided throughout the Length of the girder at a
distance apart not greater than I.5 d and not
less than O-33 d, where d is the depth as defined
in 7.4.2 (definition I). Where horizontal stiffeners are provided d in mm shall be taken as
the clear distance between the horizontal stiffener and the tension flange (farthest flange)
ignoring fillets. These vertical stiffeners shall
be designed so that .I is not less than
l.5x
&Xl
(1
where
I = the moment of inertia of a pair of
stiffeners about the centre of the web,
or a single stiffeners about the face of
the web,
f = the minimum required thickness of

the web, and
c = the maximum permitted clear distance between vertical stiffener. for
thickness r.
NOTE-H the thickness ofthe web is made greater, or
the-pacing of stiffeners made smaller than that required
by the standard, the moment of inertia of the stiffener
need not be correspondingly increased.
Intermediate vertical stiffeners may be

joggled and may be single or in pairs placed
one on each side of the web. Where single
stiffeners are used, they should preferably be
placed alternatively on opposite sides of the
web. The stiffeners shall extend from flange to
flange, bpt need not have the.en& fitted to
provide a tight bearing on the flange.
7.7.4.3 HORIZONTAL STIFFENERS - Where
horizontal stiffeners are used in addition to
vertical stiffeners, they shall be as follows:
One horizontal stiffener shall be placed
on the web at a distnace from the compression flange equal to 215 of the distance from the compression ,flange to the
neutral axis when the thickness of the web
is less
7.7.4.5 EXTERNAL FORCES ON INTERMEDIATE STIFFENERS - When vertical intermediate stiffeners are subjected to bending
rnoments and shears due to eccentricity of
vertical loads, or the action of transverse forces, the moment of inertia of the stiffeners
given in 7.7.4.2 shall be increased as shown
b e l o w :
a)
Bending moment on stiffener due to

eccentricity of vertical loading with
respect to the vertical axis of the web:
Increase of I = 5o MD2 cm4.. and

Et
b) Lateral loading on stiffener:

Increase of I = o3 vD3 cm*
Et
where
M = the applied bending moment
kNm;
D = overall depth of girder; in mm;
E = Youngs modulus, 2 X IO5 MPa;
r = thickness of web, mm; and
V = the transverse force in kN to be
taken by the stiffener and deemed to

be applied at the compression flange
of the girder.
than the limits specified in 7.7.3.1
(b). This stiffener shall be designed so that

I is not less than 4c.P where land t are as
defined in 7.7.4.2 and c is the actual distance between the vertical stiffeners;
b) A second holirontal stiffener (single or

doublej &all be placed at the neutral axis
01 rhe girder when the thickness of the
web is less than the limit specified in
7.7.3. I (c). This stiffener shall be designed
so that / is not less than dz. 13 where dz also
in mm, /and I are as defined in 7.7.4.2 and
d2 is as defined in 7.7.3.1;
c)
Horizontal web stiffener shall extend

beiween vertical stiffeners but need not be
continuous over them; and
4 Horizontal stiffeners may be in pairs

arranged on each side of the web, or
single.
7.7.4.4 OUTSTAND OF STIFFENERS -
Unless
the outer edge of each stiffener is continuously
stiffened, the outstand of all stiffeners
from the web shall be not more than
256.r for sections and 12 f for flats where r
L/z
is the thickness of the section or flat.
P A R T
VI SIRUCI~IRAL
DESIGN--sTcTK)N
6 SlEEL
7.7.4.6 CONNECTIONS OF 1NTERMEDlATE

STIFFENERS TO WEB - Intermediate vertical
and horizontal stiffeners not subjected to
external loads shall be connected to the web
by rivets or welds, so as to withstand a shearing force, between each component of the stiffener .and the web of not less than
% kN/m
where
r = the web thickness in mm, and
h = the outstand of stiffener in mm.
For stiffeners subjected to external loads. the

shear between the web and stiffeners due to
these loads shall be added io the above values.
7.7.5 L OAD B EARING W EB S T I F F E N E R S
7.7.5.1 ALL SECTIONS - For any section,
load bearing stiffeners shall be provided at
points of concentrated load (including points
of support) where the concentrated load or
reaction exceeds the value of
amt. B
where
oa = the maximum permissible axial stress
for columns as given under 6. / for a
slenderness ratio
clear of the root of the flange or flange

angles or clear of the welds does not
exceed the bearing stress specified in 7.3;
cl
$6
I= web thickness;
B = the length of the stiff portion of the
bearing plus the additional length
given by dispersion at 45 to the level
of the neutral axis, plus the thickness
of the scatin; angle, if any. The stiff
portion of a bearing is that length
which cannot deform appreciably in
bending and shall not be taken as
greater than the depth of beam for
simply supported beams and the full
depth of the beams continuous over a
bearing;; and
d,
Stiffeners shall be symmetrical about the.

web, where possible and at points of support shall project as nearly as practicable
to the outer edges of the flanges;
4 Load bearing stiffeners shall be provided

with sufficient rivets or welds to transmit
to the web the whole of the concentrated
load;
e)
The ends of load bearing stiffeners shall

be fitted to provide a tight and uniform
bearing upon the loaded flange unles>
welds or rivets designed to transmit the
full reaction or load arc provided between
the flange and stiffener. At points of SUPport this requirement shall apply at both
flanges;
= clear depth of web between root

fille1.s.
Bearing stiffeners shall not be joggled and

shall be solidly packed throughout; and
Load bearing stiffeners shall be symmetrical

about the web, where possible.
For plate girders, where load bearingstiffeners at supports are the sole means 01
providing restraint against torsion (SCB
7.6.4) the moment of inertia, I. of the
stiffener about the centre line af thz web
plate. shall be not less than.
7.7.5.2 PLATE GIRDERS --~ In addition to the

requirements of 7.7.5.1, load bearing stiffness
shall be provided also at the supports H here
,
either:
a ) t h e w e b i s overstressed in shear [SCV
7.7.3.l (a)], or
b) the web is otherwise overstressed at
support or at the web connection.
7.7.5.3
DESIGN
O F t.OAO. BE.ARING
STIFFENERS
a)
b)
Load bearing stiffeners shall be designed

as columns assuming the section to consist of the pair of stiffeners together with a
length of web on each side of the crntre
line of the stiffeners and equal. where
available. to 20 times the web thickness.
The radius of gyration shall be taken
about the axis parallel to the web of the
beam or girder. and the working stress
shall be in accordance with the appropriate allowable value for a compression
member assuming an effective length
equal to 0.7 ofthe length of the stiffeners;
The outstanding lggs of each pair of stiffeners shall be so proportioned that the
bearing stress on that part of their area
k646
DzX R
250
w
where
D = overall depth of the girder,
T = maximum thickness of compression
flange,
R = reaction of the beam at the support,
and
W = total load on the girder between
supports.
In addition, the bases of the stiffeners in
conjunction with the bearing of thegirder shall
be capable of resisting a moment due to
the horizontal force specified in the Note
under 7.6. I.
7.7.5.4 STIFFENERS FOR TUBES
a) Where the tubular steel beam rests on
abutment or other supporting member, it
shall be provided with a shoe adequate to
transmit the load to the abutment and to
stiffen the.end of the tube.
NATIONAL
IUILDING COD1
DF INDIA
b)
Where a concentrated load is applied to a

tubular member transverse to its length or
the effect of load concentration is given
by the intersection of triangular truss
members. consideration shall be given to
the local stresses set upand the rnethod of
application of the load, and stiffening
shall be provided as necessary IO prevent
the local stresses from being cxc,essive.
The increase in the intensity oflocal bend.ing stresses caused by concentrated loads
is particularly marked if either thcdiameter ofconnected member or the connected
length of a gusset or the like is small in
relation to the diameter of the tubular
member to which it is connected.
procedure given in 7.9. I angle purlins of roofs

with slopes not exceeding 30 degrees may be
designed, if the following requirements which
are based on a minimum imposed load of0.75
kN/ m2 are fulfilled:
a)
The width of the other leg or width of the

purlin is not less than f./60;
4 The maximum bending moment in a purlin may be tak& as WL/ IO where W is the
total distributed load on the purlin
including wind load. The loads shall be
assumed as acting normal to the roof in
which case the bending about the minor
axis may be neglected. L shall be taken as
distance centre-to-centre of the rafters or
other supports of the purlins; and
7.8 Box Gir&rs

The design and detailing
of box girders shall be such as to give full
advantage of its higher load carrying capacity.
The diaphragms and horizontal stiffeners
should conform to 7.7.3 and 7.7.4.
7.8. I All diaphragms shall be connected such
as to transfer the resultant shears to the web
and flanges.
7.8.2 Where the concentrated or moving load

does not come directly on top of the web the
local effect shall be considered for the design
of flanges and the diaphragms.
7.9 Purlins
7.9.1 All purlins shall be designed in accordance with the requirements for uncased
beams ( see 7.2.1 and Table I);and the limitations of bending stress based on lateral instability of the compression flange and the
limiting deflection specified under 4.13 may
be waived for the design of purlins. The maximum fibre stress shall not exceed the values
specified in 7.2. I except as provided under 4.9
for increase of stress. The calculated deflections should not exceed those permitted for
the type of roof cladding used; In calculating
the bending moment advantage may be taken
of the continuity of the purlin over supports.
The bending stresses about the two axes
should be determined separately and checked
in accordance with 8.1.1. Open web purlins
shall be designed as trusses.
7.9.2 ANGLE PURLINS OF STEEL CO N F O R Mro GRADES FE 4104). FE 410-S OR F E
ING
4 1 0 - W A N D SLOVES NOT E X C E E D I N G 300

Prrcti - As an alternate to thegeneraldesign
PART VI SlWJClURAL DESIGN-SEfXKNi 6
STEEL
The width of leg or thedepth of the purlin

in the plane appropriate to the incidence
of the maximum load or maximum component of the load is not less than L/45;
Under the bending moment calculated as

in (a) abo?e, the maximum fibre stress
shall not exceed the appropriate value of
uhC or bbr given in 7.2 except as provided
under 4.9 for increase of stresses. The
calculated deflection should not exceed
those permitted for the type of cladding
used.
7. IO Side and End Sheering Kails - - Side and

end sheeting rails shall be.designed for wind
pressures and vertical loads, if any; and the
requirements of, as regards limiting deflection
and lateral stability of beams, the same provisions as given in 7.9.1 shall apply.
8. COMBINED STRESSES
8.1 Combination of Direct Stresses
8.1.1 COMBINED A XIAL C OMPRESSION A N D
B ENDING - Members subjected to axial compression and bending shall be proportioned to

satisfy the following requirements:
a)
Oar. cd.
-+
Cmx.~&x. cd.
cmy. U bcyxd.
Rlc,
cd.
I 1.0
I- - aav
.0.60,c,
However. if the satio _?C!!_ is less than

out
d7
0.15, the following expression may be used in

lieu of the above:
oar. cd
onrx. co/.
m-Y. cd <
, o
----+ -----_++_.
= slenderness ratio in the plane of

bending
= represent x-x and y-y planes
The value of Ohcx and ahry to be used in the x,y
= a coefficient whose value shall be
above formulae shall each be lesser of the cnl
taken as fo!lows:
values of the maximum permissible stresses
ah< given in 7 for bending about the approp- 4 For members in frames where side sway is
riate axis.
not prevented:
C,,, = 0.85
b) At a support and using the values ahcx and
For
members
in
frames where side sway is
at,< at the support:
b)
prevented and not subject to transverse
a.,_, co/
ohcr. rol
obey.
cd
< I o
loading between their supports in the
----_+__.
0.60_/; +
Ohs-x
Obey
plane of bending:
aoc
ohrx
ObCY
C, = 0.6 - 0.4 /? L 0.4
For an encased strut where an allowance is

made for the force carried by the concrete in
accordance with I/. 1.1. the ratio of alu. ca, shall
00
be replaced by the ratio of the calculated axial
force on the strut to the maximum permissible
axial force determined as per II. 1.2.
8.1.2 CO M B I N E D A XIAL T E N S I O N A N D
B E N D I N G ~- A member subjected to both
axiai tension and bending shall be proportioned so that the following condition is
satisfied:
oar. 01
ohrx. c d
Ubry.
cd
< I
------_+-_
0.60 00,
0.66
0.66
Ob,x +
N OTE I - p is the ratio of smaller to the larger

moments at the ends of that portion ofthe unbraced
member
NOTE 2
single curvature.
c)
Obfy
an.
rol
ob<.
cd
Obr.
<al
oar
aor
Obr
Obr
fee
VI.648
= calculated average axial compressive stress

= calculated average axial tensile
stress
= calculated bending compressive
stress in extreme fibre
= calculated bending tensile stress
in extreme fibre
= permissible axial compressive
stress in the member subject to
axial compressive load only
= permissible axial tensile stress in
the member subject to axial tensile load only
= permissible bending compressive
stress in extreme fibre
= permissible, bending tensile stress
in extreme fibre
= elastic critical stress in compression
-- p is positive when the member is bent in
reverse curvature and negative when it is bent in
8.1.3 S YMBOLS -- The symbols used in8.1.i

and 8.1.2 shall have the following meaning:
UPC, co/
in the plane of bending under
consideration.
For members in frames where side sway is

prevented in the plane of loading and subjected to transverse loading between their
supports; the value of C, may be deter
mined by rational analysis. In the absence
of such analysis, the following values may
be used:
For members whose ends are restrained
against rotation
C, = 0.85
For members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation
c, = 1.00
8.1.4 B ENDINGAND S HEAR - lrrespectiveof

any increase in the permissible stressspeGified
in 4.9, the equivalent stress ur, rrr,., due to coexistent bending (tension or compression)and
shear stresses obtained from the formula
given in 8.1.4. I shall not exceed the value.
(I( = 0.9j;
where
or = maximum permissible equivalent
stress.
8.1.4. I The equivaknt stress (I~, ra~. is obtained
from the following formula:
at,
Cd =
Obt2,
M. + 3Tvm2,
= ,, Obc.2 , Cd. +
Cd.
or
3r,, Cal*
NATIONAL BUILDINQ
CODll Op INDIA
8.1.5 COMBINED, BEARING. BENDP~G AND

S HEAR S TRESSES - Where a bearing stress is
combined with tensile or compressive, bending and shear stresses under the most unfavourable condition of loading, the eqdivalent
stress uI, c,,/. obtained from the following formulae, shall not exceed (Ye. = 0.9&
stresses shall not exceed the values given

below:
Grade
a (MFa)
YSt 22
ust 25
YSt 32
186
224
284
9. CONNECTIONS
or. co/ =
Ubc
Ubc.
cd.
cd. +
9.0 General - As much of the work of fabrication as is reasonably practicable shall be

completed in the shops where the steel work is
fabricated.
up2, ad. +
2 +3 Tvm .? , cd
up, cd
8.1.6 1118.1.4 a n d 8.1.5 Obr, cr,,. ; Ubc,c.l., Tvm,cd.

a n d 0,. cam. are the numerical values of the
co-existent bending (compression or tension),
shear and bearing stress. When bending
occurs about both axes of the member, Ubr.cd
and uhc. c0~ shall be taken as the sum of the two
calculated fibre stresses, ur is the maximum
permissible equivalent stress.
8.1.7 S TEEL T U B E S
a ) COMBINED -BENDING AND AXIAL
STRESSES --- Members subject to both
bending and axial stresses shall be proportioned that the quantity:
or
i-
uoc,
cd
(Jbr. 01
I I.0
ubr
= calculated axial stress, that is. axial

load divided by appropriate area of
member;
uor = permissiblt stress in member for

axial 4oa&
Ub<, <,I =
calculated bending stress in the

extreme fibre; and
ub = permissible bending stress in t h e

extreme fibre.
b)
-lrres-
COMBINEDBENDINGANDSHEAR
pective of any permissible increase of

allowable stress. the equivalent stress, ur
due to co-existent bending and shear
PART
Vl
SIlUCllJRAL
DESIGN-SECllDN
SlTZL
9.1 Rivets, Close Tolerance Bolts, High

Strength Friction Grip Faireners. Black Bolts
and Welding -- Where a connection is subject
to impact or vibration or to reversal of stress

(unless such reversal is due solely to wind) Of
where for some special reason, such as continuity in rigid framing or precision in alignment of machinery-slipping of bolts is not
permissible, then rivets, close tolerance bolts,
high strength friction grip fasteners or welding
shall be used. In all other cases bolts in clearance holes may be used provided that due
allowance is made for any slippage.
9.2 Composite Connections - In any con-
nection which takes a force directly communicated to it and which is made with more than
one type of fastening, only rivets and turned
and fitted bolts may be considered as acting
together to share the load. In all other connections sufficient number of one type of fastening shall be provided to communicate the
entire load for which the connection is
designed.
9.3 Members Meeting at a Joint - For trian-
gulated frames designed on the assumption of

pin jointed connections, members meeting at
a joint shall, where practicable, have their
centroidal axes meeting at a point; and wherever practicable the centre of resistance of a
connection shall be on the line ofaction ofthe
load*so as to avoid an eccentricity moment on
the cohnections.
9.3. I However, where eccentricity of
members or of connections is present, the
members and the connections shall provide
adequate resistance to the induced bending
moments.
29
9.3.2 Where the design is based on nonintersecting members at a joint all stresses
arising from the eccentricity of the members
shall be calculated and the stresses kept within
the limits specified in the appropriate clause of
this code.
9.4 Bearings Brackets - Wherever practicable, connections of beams to columns shall
include a bottom bracket and top cleat. Where
web cleats are not provided, the bottom
bracket shall be capable of carrying the whole
of the load.
9.5 Gussers -- Gusset plates shall be designed

to resist the shear, direct and flexural stresses
acting on the weakest or critical section. Reentrant cuts shall be. avoided as far as
practicable.
9.6 Packings
9.6.1 R I V E T S on BOLTS THR&JGH PA C KINGS - Number of rivets or bolts carrying
calculated shear through a packing shall be
increased above the number required by normal calculations by 2.5 percent for each 2.0
mm thickness of packing except that, for
packings having a thickness of 6 mm or less,
no increase need be made. For double shear
connections packed on bothsides, the number
of additional rivets or bolts required shall be
determined from the thickness of the thicker
packing. The additional rivets or bolts should
preferably be placed in an extension of the
packing.
9.6.2 PACKINGS IN WELDEDCONSTRUCTION

- Where a packing is used between two
parts, the packing and the welds connecting it
to each part shall be capable of transmitting
the load between the parts. Where the packing
is too thin to carry the load or permit the
provision of adequate welds, the load shall be
transmitted through the welds alone, the
welds being increased in size by an amount
equal to the thickness of the packing.
9.6.3 PACKING S UBJECTEDTO D IRECT COMPRESSlObi ONLY - Where properly fitted
packings are subjected to direct compression
only, the provisions under 9.6. I and 9.6.2 shall
not apply.
9.7 Separators and Diaphragms - Where
two or more .rolled steel joists& channels are
used side by side to form a girder, they shall be
connected together at intervals of not more
JO
than I 500 mm except in the case of grillage

beams encased in concrete, w4ere suitable
provision shall be made to maintain correct
spacing. Bolts and separators may be used
provided that in beams having a depth of 300
mm or more, not fewer than 2 bolts. are used
with each separator. When loads are required
to be carried from one beam to the other or are
required to be distributed between the beams,
diaphragms shall be used, designed with sufticient stiffness to distribute the ioad
9.8 Lug Angles
9.8.1 Lug angles connecting a channelshaped member shall, as far as possible be
disposed symmetrically with respect to the
section of the member.
9.8.2 In the case of angle members, the lug

angles and-their connections to the gusset or
other supporting member shall be capable of
developing a strength not less than 20 percent
in excess of the force in the outstanding leg of
the angle, and the attachment of the lug angle
to the angle member shall be capable of developing 40 percent in excess of that force.
9.8.3 In the case of channel members and the
like, the lug angles and their connection to the
gusset or other supporting member shall be
capable of developing a strength of not less
than IO percent in excess of the force not
accounted for by the direct connection of the
member, and the attachment of the lug angles
to the members shall be capable ofdeveloping
20 percent in excess of that force.
9.8.4 In no case shall fewer than two bolts or
rivets be used for attaching the lug angle to the
gussest or other supporting member.
9.8.5 The effective connection of the lug angle
shall, as faras possible, terminateat the end of
the member connected and the fastening of
the lug angle to the member shall preferably
start in advance of the direct connection of the
member to the gusset or other supporting
member.
9.8.6 Where lug angles are used to connectan
angle member, the whole area of the member
shall be taken aseffective not withstanding the
requirements of 4 and 6.
9.9 Permissible Stresses in Rivers and Bolts
9.9. I C A L C UL ATION
OF
NATIONAL
S TRESSES - In calBU~LMNQ CODE d INDIA
culating shear and bearing
stresses the effective diameter of a rivet shall be taken as the

hole diameter and that of a bolt as its nominal
diameter. In calculating the axial tensile stress
in a rivet the gross area shall be used and in
calculating the axial tensile stress in a bolt or
screwed tension rod the net area shall be used.
9.9.2 G R O S S
N ET AREAS
AND
OF
RIVETS
AND BOLTS
9.9.2. I The gross area of a rivet shall be taken

as the cross-sectional area of the rivet hole.
9.9.2.2 The net sectional area of a bolt or
screwed tension rod shall be taken as the area
of the root of the threaded part of crosssectional area of the unthreaded part whichever is lesser.
NOTE - The net sectional areas of bolts are given in
Ivt_6(s)l.
9.9.3 A REA OF R IVET AND B OLT H OLES The diameter of a rivet hole shall be taken as
the nominal diameter of a rivet plus 1.5 mm
for rivets of nominal diameter less than or
equal to 25 mm, and 2.0 mm for rivets of
nominal diameter exceeding 25 mm, unless
otherwise specified. The diameter of a bolt
hole shall be taken as the nominal diameter of
the bolt plus 1.5 mm unless specified
otherwise.
9.9.4 STRESSES
WELDS
IN
R I V E T S, B O L T S
AND
9.9.4.1 The calculated stress in a mild steel

shop rivet or in a bolt of property class 4.6 ( see
[V1-6(8)] shall not exceed the values given in
Table 12.
TABLE I2 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE STRESS
IN RIVETS AND BOLTS
DESCRt PTtON OF
A XIAL
SHEAR.
BEARFASTENERS
T ENSION
zr(
ING. utf
(1)
Power-driven
rivets
Hand-driven
rivets
Close tolerance
and turned bolts
Bolts in clearance
holes
%
MPe
(3)
MPa
(4)
MPa
100
I00
300
80
80
250
I20
100
300
I20
80
250
9.9.4.2 The permissible stress in a high tensile

steel rivet shall be those given in Table I2
?AaT
VI mucnraAL
DUIDN--ICCfiON 6 m
multiplied by the ratio of the tensile strength

of the rivet material to the tensile strength as
specified in accepted standard[W-6 (9)].
NOTE-Fxu field rivets the permissible stresses shall be
reduced by IO percent.
9.9.4.3 The permissible stress in a bolt (other

than a high strength friction grip bolt) of
property class higher than 4.6 shall be those
given in Table 12 multiplied by the ratio of its
yield stress or 0.2 percent pro.of stress or 0.7
times its tensile strength, whichever is the
lesser than 235 MPa.
9.9.4.4 The calculated bearing stress of rivet
or bolt on the parts connected by it sliall not
exceed: (a) the valuef, for hand driven rivets
or bolts in clearance holes, and (b) the value
1.2 fY for power driven rivets or close tolerance and turned bolts. fY is the yield stress of
the connected parts,
Where the end distance of a rivet or bolt (that
is, the edge distance in the direction in which it
bears) is less than a limit of twice the effective
diameter of the rivet or bolt, the permissible
bearing stress of that rivet or bolt on the connected part shall be reduced in the ratio of the
actual and distance to that limit.
9.9.4.5 COMBINED SHEAR AND TENSION Rivets and bolts subject to both shear and
axial tension shall be so proportioned that the
shear and axial stresses calculated in accordance with 9.2. I do not exceed the respective
allowable stresses T,,J and ou and the
expression
TV/.
or/. cd.
cd.
-+au
Iv/
>
{
does not exceed 1.4.
9.9.4.6 HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP

BOLTS -- The provisions contained in 9.9.4.1
to 9.9.4.5 do not apply to high strength friction grip bolts, which shall be used in conformity with accepted standard [VI-6( IO)].
9.9.4.7 WELDS - Permissible stress in welds
shall be as specified in accepted standards
[Vl-6( I I,].
9.10 Rivets and Riveting
9.10.1 PITCH
a)
OF
R IVETS
MINIMUM PITCH - Thedistance between

centres of rivets should be not less than
Vt+51
2.5 times the nominal diameter of the

rivet.
b) MAXIMUM PITCH
9 The distance between centres of any
two adjacent rivets (including tacking rivets) shall not exceed 32 r or 300
mm, whichever is less. where I is the
thickness of the thinner outside plate.
TABLE 13 EDGE DISTANCE OF HOLES

D IAMETER
DISTARCE
OF
TO
SHEARED OR
H AND F LAME
HOLE
CUT EDGE
(1)
mm
13.5 and below
15.5
17.s
19.5
21.5
23.5
25.5
29.0
32.0
35.0
(2)
mm
!9
25
29
32
32
38
U
51
57
57
DISTANCE TO
RoLLED,
MACHINE
FL&ME CUT,
SAWN OR
P LANED EDGE
(3)
mm
17
22
2s
29
29
32
38
U
51
51
ii) The distance between centres of two

adjacent rivets, in a line lying in the
direction of stress, shall not exceed
16 I or 200 mm, whichever is kss in
tension members and 12I or 200 mm,
whichever is less in compression
members. .In the case of compression
members in which forces are transferred through butting faces, this distance, shall not exceed 4.5 times the
9.10.3.1 Tacking rivets shall have a pitch in
diameter of the rivetsfor a distance line not exceeding 32 times the thickness of the
from the abutting faces equal to 1.5
outside plate or 300 mm, whichever isless.
times the width of the member.
Where the.plates are exposed to the weather,
iii) The distance between centres of any the pitch in line shall not exceed16 times, the
two consecutive rivets in a line thickness of the outside plate or 200 mm,
adjacent and parallel to an edge whichever is less. In both cases, the lines of
of an outside plate shall not exceed rivets shall not be apart at a distance greater
(100 mm+4r) or 200 mm, whichever than these pitches.
is less in compression or tension
9.10.3.2 All the requirements specified
members.
in 9.IO.3.I shall apply to compression
iv) When .rivets are staggered at equal members generally, subject to the stipulation
intervals and the gauge does not in this code affecting the design and constiucexceed 75 mm, the distances specified tion of compression members.
in (ii) and (iii) between centres of
9.10.3.3 In tension members composed of
rivets, may be increased by 50
two flats, angles, channels or tees in contact
percent.
back-to-back or separated back-to-back by a
9.10.2 E DGE D I S T A N C E
distance not exceeding the aggregate thicka) The minimum distance from the centre of ness of the connected parts, tacking rivets,
any hole to the edge of a plate shall be not with solid distance pieces where the parts are
less than that given in Table 13.
separated, shah be provided at pitch in line
b) Where two or more parts are connected
together a line of rivets or bolts shall be
provided at a distance of not more than
37 mmf4r from the nearest edge, where
I is.the thickness in mm of the thinner
outside plate. In the case of work not
exposed to weather, this may be increased
to 12r.
9.10.3 TA C K I N G R I V E T S - I n c a s e s o f
members covered under 9.10.1 (b)(ii). when
the maximum distance between centres of two
adjacent rivets as specified in9.10.1 (b)(ii) is
exceeded, tacking rivets not subjected to calculated stress shall be used,
not exceeding 1 000 mm.

9.10.3.4 For compression members covered
in 6, the tacking rivets shall be at a pitch in line
not exceeding 600 mm.
9.10.4 C O U NT ERSUNK H EADS - For countersunk heads. one-half of the depth of the
countersinking shall be neglected in calculating the length of the rivet in bearing. For rivets
in tension with countersunk heads, the tensile
value shall be reduced by 33.3 percent. No
reduction need be made in shear.
9.10.S LONG GRIP R IVETS - Where the grip
of rivets carrying calculated loads exceed 6
NATIONAL WIIBING COD1 OF tnnu
times the diameter of the holes, the number of

rivets required by normal calculation shall be
increased by not less than one percent for each

additional 1.5 mm of grip; but the grip shall
Wherever practicable, the centre ot resistance

of the connection shall lie on the line of action
of the load so as to avoid eccentricity moment
of the connection.
not exceed -8 times the diameter of the holes.
9.13.3, WELC)ED CONNECTIONS
9.11 Bolts and Bolting
9.13.3. I A weld connecting two tubes end to

end shall be full penetration butt weld. The
effective throat thickness of the weld shall be
taken as the thickness of the thinner part
joined.
9. I .I. I . IV8 CHES.

EDGE D I S T A N C E S F O R
TACKIHG BOLTS - The requirements for
bolts shall be the same as for rivets given in
9.10 and its sub-clauses.
9.11.2 B LACK B OLTS - The dimensions of
black bolts shall conform to those given in
accepted standards [VI-6 ( 12)].
9.11.3 CLOSE T OLERANCE B OLTS - Close
tolerance bolts shall conform to accepted
standards [VI-6(g)].
9.11.4 TURNED B ARREL Boe~s -The nominal diameter of the barrel shall be in multiples
of 2 mm and shall be at least 2 mm larger in
diameter than the screwed portion.
9.11.5 WASHERS - Washers with perfectly
flat fades should be provided with all close
tolerance bolts and turned barrel bolts. Steel
or malleable cast iron tapered washers shall be
provided for a11 heads and nuts hearing on
bevelled surfaces.
LOCKING OF N UTS - Wherever there
is risk of the nuts becoming loose due to vibration or reversal of stresses, they shall be
9.1 I.6
securely locked.
9.12 Wclds and Welding - For requirements
of welds and welding, reference shall be made
to accepted standards [VI-6(13)].
9.13 Connections in Tubular Structures
9.13.1 GENERAL - Connections in structures using steel tubes shall be provided by
welding, reveting or bolting. Wherever possible. connections between tubes shall be made
directly tube to tubt without gusset platesand
other attachments, Ends of tubes may be flattened as specified in 26.16 or otherwise
to provide for welded, riveted or

bohed connections.
formed
943.2
EC C E N T R I C I T Y
OF
M E M B E R S -Tubes
meeting at a point shall. wherever practicable,

have their gravity axes meeting at a point so as
to avoid eccentricity.
9.I3.2.1
ECCENTRlClTY OF CONNECTIONS -
9.13.3.2 A weld connecting the end of one

tube (branch tube) to the surface of another
tube (main tube) with their axes at an angle of
not less than 30 shall be of the following
types:
a) A butt weld throughout,
b) A fillet weld throughout. and
c)
A fillet butt .weld. the weld being a fillet

weld in one part and a butt weld in
another with a continuous change from
the one form to the other in the intervening portions.
Type (a) may be used whatever the ratio of the

diameters of the tubes joined. provided complete penetration is secured either by the use of
backing material, or by depositing a sealing
run of metal on the back of the joint or,by
some special method of welding. When type
(a) is not employed. type (b) should be used
where the diameter of the branch tube is less
than one-third of the diameter of the main
tube. and type (c) should be used where the
diameter of the branch tube is equal to or
greater than one-third of the diameter of the
main tube.
For the purpose of stress calculation. the
throat thickness of the butt weld portion shall
be taken as the thickness of the thinner part
joined, and the throat thickness of the fillet
weld and the fillet butt weld shall be taken as
the minimum effective throat thickness of the
fillet or fillet-butt weld.
9.13.3.3 ANGLE BETWEEN TUBES - A weld
connecting the end of one tube to the surface
of another, with the axes of the tubes idtersetting at an angle of less than 30. shall be
permitted only if adequate efficiency of the
junction has been demonstrated.
9.13.3.4 CONNECTIONS WHERE THE AXES OF
IWOTUBES DO NOT INTERSECT - A weld
THE
VI3
connecting the end of one tube to the surface

of another where the axes of the two tubes do
not intersect, shall besubject to the provisions
under 9.13.3.2 and 9.13.3.3, provided &at no
part of the curve of intersection of the eccentric tube with the main tube lies outside the
curve of intersection of the corresponding
largest permissible non-eccentric tube with
the main tube.
9.13.3.5 CONNECTIONSOFTUBESWITH FLATTENED ENDS - Where the end of the branch
tube is flattened to an el!iptical shape, 9.13.3.2
to 9.13.3.4 shall apply; and for the application
of 9. I3.3.2 to 9./3.3.4 the diameter of the flattened tube shall be measured in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the main tube.
IO. I Genera/
10.1.1 The structure or part of a structure
may be proportioned on the basis of plastic
design based on their maximum strength
using the provisions contained in this section.
Reference may also be made to good practice
[VI-6 (14)].
IO.i.2 The requirement of this standard
regarding the maximum ,permissible stress
shall be waived for this method. However, the
design shall comply with all other rquirements of this standard.
IO./.3 Members subjected to heavy impact
and fatigue shall not be designed on the basis
of plastic theory.
10.1.4 Steel conforming to Grade Fe 410-Oaf
[VI-6 (IS)] shall not be used when the structure is designed on the basis of plastic theory.
10.2 Design
10.2.1 LOAD F ACTORS -S~tructuresor portions of structures proportioned using plastic
design shall have sufficient strength as determined by plastic analysis to support the working loads multiplied by load factors as given
below:
Dead load
Dead load -I- imposed load
Dead load + load due to
Load Factor,
Min
1.7
1.7
wind or seismic forces

Dead load + imposed load + load
due to wind or seismic forces
bbS4
relevant provisions of this code.

10.2.3 B E A M S
102.3. I The calculated maximum moment
capacity, Mp, of a beam shall be

MP =Z, ./y
where
Z, =
plastic modules of the section,

yield stress of the material,
I; =
and
10.2.3.2 P l a s t i c p r o p e r t i e s o f I n d i a n
Standard medium weight beams are given
in Appendix F for information.
10.2.4 TENSION MEMBERS - The calculated
maximum load capacity P., of a tension
member shall be P., = 0.85 A&.
10. PLASTIC DESIGN
Working Loads
lO.2.2 DE F L E C T I O N - Detlections under

working loads shall be in accordance with
where
= effective cross-sectional area of the
member;
A*
/y = yield stress of the steel.

10.2.5 STRUTS -- The calculated maximum
load capacity P,,c of a strut shall be
Pm = 1.7 A, uor
where uac is the maximum permissible

stress in axial compression as given in 6.1
using effective length / equal to the actual
length L.
10.2.6
MEMBERS S UBJECTEDTO C O M B I N E D
B E N D I N G A N D A X I A L F O R C E S (BEAMCo~uhw MEMBE R S)
10.2.6. I The calculated maximum moment
capacity Mpc of a member subjected to combined bending and axial forces, where P/P,
exceeds 0. IS, shall be reduced below the value
given in 10.2.3 and it shall satisfy the following
requirements:
a) BEAMS - $+ PCM <

Y
b)
1.0
I.18 Mp
STRUTS - A member where

P/ Py in addition to exceeding 0. I5 also
1+/3---o
exceeds
SLENDER
I+@+Ao
1.7
shall not be assumed to contain plastic
113
binges although it shall be permissible to

design the member as an elastic part of a
plastically designed structure. Such a

member shall be designed according to
the maximum permissible stress requirements satisfying:
_P_ +
PO?
c)
Mpc. Cm
d I.0
X(1 -P/P*)
STOCKY STRUTS - A strut not covered in

(b) above shall satisfy
M
P C <I
MP
where
P
= an axial force, compressive or tensile

in a member;
Mpc
= maximum moment (plastic) capacity

acting in the beam-column;
Mp
= plastic moment capacity of the

section;
M,
= lateral buckling strength in the

absence of axial load
= MP if the beam column i s laterlirly
braced;
P,
P,
= buckling strength in the plane of

bending if axially loaded (without
any bending moment) and if the
beam column is laterally braced as
p e r 10.2.5.1;
= yield strength of axially loaded section = Alfy;
A,
= effective cross-sectional area of the

member;
cm
= a coefficient as defined in 8.1.3;
= radius of gyration about the same

axis as the applied moment;
Aa
= characterisitc slenderness ratio
= ratio of end moment, each measured

in the same rotational direction and
chosen with the numerically large

amount in the denominator (fi range
#IWCKIRAL DUION--ltcFI)N
= ac.tual strut length.
10.2.6.2 A member assumed to contain plastic hinges and subjected to combined bending
and axial compression with P/ Py not exceeding 0. I5 shall have a value of P/ Py not exceeding (0.6 + 0.4 /~)/Ao where ho and /3 are as
defined above.
10.2.7 S HEAR .- The calculated maximum
shear capacity VY of a beam or a beam-column
shall be
VY = 0.55 Avfy
where A, is the effective cross-sectional
area resisting shear for calculating the average
shear stress or the maximum shear capacity of
the members.
10.2.8 ST A B I L I T Y - The elastic buckling
load of a frame or its components designed on
the basis of plastic theory shall be at least three
times the pla.stic collapse load. If an accurate
estimate of the elastic buckling load is not
available, this provision shall be deemed to be
satisfied for frames of up to three storeys if the
compressive force P, in each memberdoes not
exceed:
033
lr= El
.P
tive length I is determined according to 6.2.
Py
?AaT VI
for buckling in any direction, where the effec-
= Euler load
= IrzEAs for the plane of bending;
IUrY
from-i- I for double curvature, 0 for

one end pinned, to -I for single cur:
vature); and
6 m
For frames of over three storeys, the calculated plastic collapse load shall include an
assessment of the moment caused by the possible combination of high axial force and
transverse deflection.
10.2.9 MI N I M U M T H I C K N E S S
10.2.9.1 COMPRESSION OUTSTANDS - A
flange or other compression element required
to participate in a plastic hinge shall not project beyond its outer most point of attachment
by more than 136. TI/ \/7;:
where TI is the thickness of flange of a section

or plate in compression or the aggregate
thickness of plates if connected in accordance
with 9.
For the purpose of this clause, web stiffeners at plastic hinges shall be proportioned as
compression elements.
vs
10.2.9.2
The distance between adjacent parallel lines of

attachment of a compression flange or
another compression element to other parts of
member. when such flanges or elements are
required to participate in a plastic hinge
action. shall not exceed 512. TI/ fi where
TI is as defined in J0.2.9.1.
10.2.9.3
UNSUPPORTED WIDTHS
length and the spacing of the adjacent

supports shall not exceed
96oV4
YEb) If the length along the member in whch
the applied moment exceeds 0.85MP. is
greater than or equal to
64Ov.r,
W E B S I N S H E A R --
If the depth d,
of a web subjected to shear and required to
participate in a plastic hinge exceeds
- 688. I G
then the compressive axial force P on the
member shall not exceed the value
P = Pv
0.70 --
4
-+C&)
The maximuk permissible value of dl in any

plastic hinge zone shall he
IIZO. I
-.
Jz10.2.9.4
WEB UNDER BENDING AND COM-
When the web is subjected to

bending and compression. the following conditions shall be satisfied:
PRESSION --
a)
Where P/ Py exceeds 0.27. then the depth

JI shall not exceed
688.
t . and
-.
47
b) When P/ Pu is less than or equal to 0.27.

then the depth dl shall not exceed
II20
P
- 1600
-
J.1
a ( PJ
c fi
10.2./O LA IERAL BRACING
10.2.10.1 Members shall be adequately

braced to resist lateral and torsional displacement at the plastic hinge locations associated
with failure mechanism. Lateral bracing mass
be dispensed within the region of the last hinge
to form in the failure mechanism assumed as
the basis for proportioning the given member.
a) If the length along the member in which
the applied moment exceeds 0.854,. is
less than
&IoU.f,
4Xat least one critical flange support shall be
provided within or at the end of this
,56
dx
the critical flange shall be supparted in
such a manner that no portion of this

length is unsupported for a distance of
more than
64otJ.T
fi
c)
Later@ restraints for the remaining elas-
tic portions of the member shall be

designed in accordance with 5 and 6 as
appropriate. using stresses derived from
the plastic bending moments multiplied
by 1.7.
In this clause MP shall be assumed as MP or
UPC as appropriate.
u may be taken as unity or calculated by the
following expression:
v=&&
where 8 is the ratio of the rotation at the hinge
point to the relative elastic rotation oftire far
ends of the beam segment containing theplastic.hinge.
NOTE -The lateral restraints provided bythisclausc will
ensure that a section delivers its full moment and deformation capacity. This may bc too great for some daign
circumstances. With the approcal of the appropriate
authoricy the daign engineer may I& the methods which
allow a reduced amount of bmcing lo be used, provided
that this reduction is jus~ificd by rational and widely
accepted means and that any associated reductions in
moment and deformation capacity arc fully considered in
the design.
10.2.11 WEB S T I F F E N I N G
10.2. I I. I EXCESSIVE SHEAR FORCES - Web
stiffeners or doubler plates shall be provided
when the requirements of10.2.7 are not met,
in which case the stiffeners or doubler plates
shall be capable of carrying that portion of the
forces which exceeds the shear capacity of the
wib.
10.2.ll.2 CONCENTRATED L OADS - Web
stiffeners shall be provided at points on a
member where the concentrated force delivered by the flanges of another member framing into it will produce web crippling opposite
the compression flange or high tensile stressin
the connection of the tension flange. This
requirement shall be deemed to bt! satisfied if
web stiffeners are placed:
a) opposite the compression flange of the
other member when
/<
b)
Al
Th + 5k
opposite the tension flange of the other

member when
7j < O-4.
d A/
where
I= thickness of web to be stiffened,
h= distance from outer face of flange
to web toe of fillet of member to be
stiffened,
Tb = thickness of flange of delivering
concentrated load,
T/= thickness of flange of member to be
stiffened, and
A, = area of .flange delivering concentrated load.
The area of such stiffeners, AH, shall
be such that
The ends of such stifferners shall be fully butt
welded to the inside face of the flange adjacent
to the concentrated tensile force. It shall be
permissible to fit the stiffeners against the
inside face of the flange adjacent to the concentrated compression force without welding.
When the concentrated force is delivered by
only one beam connected to an outside face of
a strut, the length of the web stiffener shall
extend for at least half the depth of the
10.3 Connections and Fabrication

10.3. I CONNECTIONS
10.3.1.1 All connections which are essential
to the coitinuity, assumed as the basis of the

design analysis shall be capable ofresisting the
moments. shears and axial loads to which they
would be subjected by either full or factored
loading.
10.3.1.2 Corner connections (haunches). tappered or curved for architectural reasons shall
be so proportioned that the full plastic bending strength of the section adjacent to the
connection may be developed.
10.3. I.3 Stiffeners shall be used. as required.
to preserve the flange continuity of interrupted members at their junction with other
members in a continuous frame. Such stiffeners shall be placed, in pairs em opposite sides of
the web of the member which extends continuously through the joint.
10.3.2 FARBICATION --The provisions of 12
with respect to workmanship shall govetn the
fabrication of structures, or portions of structures, designed on the basis of maximum
strength, subject to the following limitations:
a) The use of sheared edges shall be avoided

in locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at factored loading. If used they shall
be finished smooth by grinding, chipping
or planing.
b) In locations subject to plastic hinge rota-.
iion at factored loading, holes for rivets
or bolts in the tension area shall be silbpunched and reamed or drilled full size.
If. DESIGN OF ENCASED MEMBERS
11. I Encased Columns
member, and the welding connecting it to the

web shall be sufficient to develop a force of
/p. A,,.
If. 1.1 C ONDITIONS OF D ESIGN - A member

may be designed as an encased column when
the following conditions are fulfilled:
10.2.11.3 PLASTIC HINGES - Web stiffeners

shall be provided at all plastic hinges where
the applied load exceeds 0.06 A,& where A,
is as explained in10.2.7.
a) The member is of symmetrical I-shape or

a single l-beam for channels back-toback. with or without flange plates;
b) The overall dimensions of the steel MC10.2.12 LOAD C APACITIESOF C O N N E C T I O N S

tion do not exceed 750 X 450 mm over
- The calculated load capacities of welds,
plating where used, the larger dimension
bolts and rivets shall be taken as I .7 times the
being measured parallel to the web;
values calculated using permissible stress
c) The column is unpained and is solidly
specified in 9.9.4.
37
encased in ordinary sense concrete with

20 mm aggregate (unless solidity can be
obtained with a larger aggregate):
Am Ac = cross-sectional area of steel and
4 The minimum width of solid casing is
ox, UC = permissible Stresses in steel and
equai to b0 + 100 mm, where b0 is the

width of the steel flange in millimetres;
e) The surface and edges of the steel column

hake a concrete cover of not less than 50
mm;
where
concrete, and
concrete in compression.
N OTE - This clause does not apply to steel struts of
overall sectional dimensions greater than IO00 mmXSO0
mm, the dimension of I000 mm being measured parallel
to the web or to box sections.
The casing is effectively reinforced with 11.2 Encased Beams

steel wires. The wire shall beat least 5 mm 11.2.1 CO N D I T I O N S O F D E S I G N - Beams
in diameter and the reinforcement shall and girders with equal flanges may be
be in the form of stirrups orbinding at not
designed as encased beams when the following
more than 150 mm pitch so arranged as to conditions are fulfilled:
pass through the centre of the covering of
the edges and outer faces of the flanges a) The section is of single web and l-form or
of double open channel form with the
and supported by longitudinal spacing
webs not less than 40 mm apart;
bars not ,jess than four in number; Bnd
The beam is unpainted and is solidly
8) Steel cores in encased columns shall be b) encased in M 15 (min) concrete, with 10,
accurately machined at splices and provimm aggregate (unless solidity can be
sions shall be made for alignment of
obtained
with a larger aggregate);
column. At thk column base provision
shall be made to transfer the load to the

footing at safe unit stresses.
11.1.2 DESIGN
OF
MEMBER
11.1.2. I The steel section shall be considered
as carrying the entire load but allowance may

be made by assuming the radius of gyration t
of the column section about the axis in the
plane of its web to be 0.2 (bo + 100) mm, where
b0 is the width of the steel flange inmillimetres. The radius of gyration about its other
axis shall be taken as that of the uncased
section.
11.1.2.2 The axial load on the encased
column shall not exceed 2 times that which
would be permitted on the uncased section,
nor shall the slendereness ratio of the uncased
section fo! its full length centre-to-centre of
connections exceed 250.
11.1.2.3 In computing the allowable axial
load on the encased strut, the concrete shall be
taken as assisting in carrying the load over its
rectangular cross-section, any cover in excess
of 75 mm from the overall dimensions of the
steel section of the cased strut being ignored.
21.1.2.4 The allowablecompressivc Kurd Pin
case of encased columns &all be determined
aa follows:
d The minimum width of solid casing =

(bo + 100) mm, where bo is the width of
the steel flange in mm;
4 The surface and edges of the flanges of the

beam have a concrete cover of not less
than 50 mm; and
d The casing is effectively reinforcedwith

steel wire of at least 5 mm diameter and
the reinforcement shall be in the form of
stirrups or binding at not more thanI50
mm pitch. and so arranged as to pass
through the centre of the covering to the
edges and soft3 of the lower flange.
11.2.2 D ESIGN OF MEMBER - The steel section shall be considered as carrying the entire
load but allowance may be made for the effect
of the concrete on the lateral stability of the
compression flange. This allowance should be
made by assuming for the purpose of determining the permissible stress in compression
that the equivaleit moment of inertia (I__)
about the y-y axis is equal to Ax, where A is
the area of steel section and r, may be taken as
0.2 (b,+ 100) mm. 0ther properties required
for.referring to 7.2 may be taken as for the
uncared section. The permissible bending
rtms so determined shall not exceed I .5 times
that permitted for the uncased section.
NOTE - This clause does not apply to beams and girders

having a depth greater than IO00 mm, or a width greater
than.500 mm or to box sections.
find it necessary, the edges shall be ground

afterwards.
12.2.4 H OLING
11.3 Composite Construction
11.3. I Composite construction shall be done

in accordance with good practice [VI-6(16)].
12. FABRICATION AND ERECTION
12.1 General - Tolerances for fabrication

and erection of steel structures shall conform
to accepted standards [VI-6 (17)]. For general
guidance on fabrication by welding, reference
may be made to good practice [VI-6 (13)].
12.2 Fabrication Procedures
12.2. I S TRAIGHTENING - All material shall
be straight and, if necessary, before being

worked shall be straightened and/ or flattened
by pressure, unless required to be of curvilinear form and shall be free from twists.
12.2.2 CL E A R A N C E S - The erection clear-
ance for cleated ends of members connecting

steel should preferably be not greater than 2.0
mm at each end. The erection clearance at
ends of beams without web cleats shouldbe
not more than 3mti at each end, but where,
for practical reasons, greater clearance is
necessary, suitably designed seatings should
be provided.
12.2.4.1 1 Holes_through more than one thickness of material for members, such as compound stanchion and girder flanges shall,
where possible, be drilled after the members
are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted
together. Punching may be permitted before
assembly, provided the holes are punched 3
mm less in diameter than the required size and
reamed after assembly to the full diameter.
The thickness of material punched shall be not

greater than I6 mm. For dynamically loaded
structures, punching shall be avoided.

12.2.4.2 When holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts,
these parts, when so specified by the engineer,
shall be separated rifter drilling and the burrs
removed.
12.2.4.3 Holes in connecting angles and
plates, other than splices, also in roof
members and light framing, may be punched
full size through material not over 12 mm
thick, except where required for close tolerance bolts or barrel bolts.
12.2.4.4 Matching holes for rivets and black

bolts shall register with each other so that a
12.2.2.1 Where black bolts are used, the holes
gauge of I .5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be
may be made not more than I.5 mm greater depending on whether the diameter of the
than the diameter of the bolts, unless other- river or bolt is less than or more than 25 mm)
wise specified by the engineer.
less in diameter than the diameter of the hole
will pass freely through the assembled
12.2.3 CU-ITING
members in the direction at tight angle to such
12.2.3. I Cutting may be effected by shearing, members. Finished holes shall be not more
cropping or sawing. Gas cutting by mechani- than I .5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in
cally controlled torch may be permitted for diameter larger than the diameter of the rivet
mild steel only. Gas cutting OC high tensile or black bolt passing through them, unless
steel may also be permitted provided special otherwise specified by the engineer.
care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be
rkmoved by machining so that all metal that 12.2.4.5 Holes for turned and fitted bolts
has been hardened byflame is removed. Hand shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the
flame cutting may be permitted subject to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel subapproval of the inspector.
ject to H 8 tolerance specified in good practice
[Vl-6(18)]. Preferably parts to be connected
12.2.3.2 Except where the material is subsewith close tolerance or barrel bolts shallbe
quently joined by welding, no loads shall be
firmly held together by tacking bolts or
transmitted into metal through a gas cut
clamps and the holes drilled through all the
surface.
thicknesses at one operation and subsequently
12.2.3.3 Shearing, cropping and gas cutting, reamed to size. All holes not drilled through
shall be clean, reasonably square, and free all thicknesses at one operation shall be drilled
from any distortion. and should the inspector to a stnalkr size and reamed out after
PAST
VI SRucluaAL
DLsI;N-SWflON
6 STUL
v14S9
assembly. Where this is not practicable, the

parts shall be drilled and reamed separately
through hard bushed steel jigs.
the bolt being within the thicknessorthe parts

bolted together.
12.2.4.6 Holes for rivets or bolts sha!! not be

formed by gas cutting process.
12.6.1 Welding shall be in accordance with

good practice [V I-6( !9)].
j2.3 Assembly - The component parts shall

be assembled and aligned in such a manner
that they are neither twisted nor otherwise
damaged, and shall be so prepared that the
specified cambers, if any, provided.
12.6.2 For welding of any particular type of

joint, welders shall give evidence acceptable to
the purchaser of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as described in any of
t h e I n d i a n Standards--!Sfg!7-1966. IS:
1393-1961, IS: 7307 (Part I)-1974, !~:73!0
(Part !)-I974 and IS:7318 (Part I) 1974, as
relevant in accordance with good practice
[VI-6(20)].
12.4 Riveting
12.4.1 Rivets shall heated uniformly throughout their length, without burning or excessive
scaling. and shall be of sutficient length to
provide a head of standard dimensions. They
shall, when drtven. completely fill the holes
and, if countersunk, the countersinking shall
be fully filled by the rivet, any protrusion of
the countersunk head being dressed off flush,
if required.
12.4.2 Riveted members shall have al! parts

firmly drawn and held together before and
during riveting, and special care shall be taken
in this respect for a!! single-riveted connections. For multiple riveted connections, a service bolt shall be provided in every third or
fourth hole.
12.4.3 Wherever practicable. machine riveting shall be carried out by using machines of
the steady pressure type.
12.4.4 Al! loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced before
the structure is loaded, and special care shall
be taken to inspect a!! single riveted
connections.
12.4.5
Special cart shall be taken in heating
and driving long rivets.

12.5 Bolring
i2.5.1 Where necessary, washers shall be
tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give
the heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory
bearing.
12.5.2 The threaded portion of each bolt shall

project through the nut at least one thread.
12.5.3 In all craes where the full bearing area
of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be
provided with a washer of sufficient thickness
under the nut to avoid any threaded portion of
,w60
12.6 Welding
12.7 Machining c$ Burrs, Caps and Bases

12.7.1 Column splices and butt joints of
struts and compression members depending
on contact for stress transmission shall be
accurately machined and close-butted over
the whole section with a clearance not exceeding 0.2 mm locally at any place. In column
caps and bases, the ends of shafts together
with the attached gussets. an&s. channels,

etc. after riveting together should bc accurately machined so that the parts connected
butt over the entire surfaces of contact. Care
should be taken that these gussets. connecting
angles or channels arc fixed uith such accuracy that they are not reduced in thrckness by
machining by more than 2 0 mm.
f2.7.2 Where sufficient gussets and rivets or
welds are provided to transmit the entire loading (see 6) the column ends need not be
machined.
12.7.3 Ends of all bearing stiffeners shall be

machined or ground to fit tightly at both top
and bottom.
12.7.4 SLAB BASES AND C APS -S!ab bases
and slab caps, except when cut from material
with true surfaces. shall be accurately
machined over the bearing surfaces and shall
be in effective contact with the end of the
stanchion. A bearing face which is to be
grouted direct to a foundation need not be
machined if such face is true and parallel to
the upper face.
12.7.5 To facilitate grouting, holes shr!! be
provided where necessary in stanchion bases
for the escape of air.
12.7.6 The ends of a!! tubes for columns.
NMloMLauaullocowQ~
transmitting loads through the ends, should

be.true and square to the axisof the tube and
should be provided with B cap or base a&rately fitted to the end of the tube and
screwed, welded or shrunk on.
12.7.6.1 ,The cap or base plate should betrue
and square to the axis of the column.
12.8 Solid Round Steel Columns
12.8.1 Solid round steel columns with shouldered ends shall be provided with slab caps
and bases machined to fit the shoulder, and
shall be tightly shrunk on or welded in
position.
12.8.2 The tolerance between the reduced

end of the shaft and the hole, in the case of
slabs welded in position, shall not exceed 0.25
12.9.6 In thecase of surfaces to be welded, the

steel shall not be painted or metal coated
within a suitable distance of any edges to be
welded if the paint specified or the metal coating w.ould be harmful to welders or impair the
quality of the welds.
12.9.7 Welds and adjacent parent metal shall
not be painted prior to deslagging, inspection
and approval.
12.9.8 Parts to be encased in concrete shall
not be painted or oiled. If not galvanized, all
tubes shall, unless otherwise specified, be
painted or oiled or otherwise protectively
coated before exposure to the weather. If they
are to be painted in accordance with any special requirements, this shall be arranged
between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
12.10 Marking
12.83 Where slabs are welded in position, the

reduced end of the shaft shall be kept just
sufficiently short to accommodate a filletweld
around the hole without weld-metal being
proud of the slab.
12.8.3.1 Alternativel,y, the caps and bases
may be welded direct to the column without
bearing or shouldering.
12.8.3.2 All bearing surfaces of slabs
intended for metal-to-metal contact shall be
machined perpendicular to the shaft.
12.9 Painting
12.9.1 Painting shall be done in accordance
with good practice [VI-6(2l)].
12.9.2 All surfaces which are to be painted,
oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and
thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose scale
and loose rust. \
12.9.3 Shop contact surfaces need not be
painted unless specified. If so specified, they
shall be brought together while the paint is
still wet.
12.9.4 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after shop assembly. shall receive the full
specified protective treatment before assembly. This does not apply to the interior of
sealed hollow sections.
12.9.5 Chequered plates shall be painted but
the details of painting shall be specified by the
purchaser.
P A R T
VI sTpUCllXML DESIGN-SICXION
4 .TrEEL
12.10. I Each piece of steel work shall be distinctly marked before delivery, in accordance
with a marking diagram, and shall bear.such
other marks as will facilitate erection.
12.11 Shop Erection
12.11.1 The steelwork shall be temporarily
shop erected complete or as arranged with the
inspector so that accuracy of fit may be
checked before despatch. The parts shall be
shop assembled with sufficient numbers of
parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in
place.
12.11.2 In the case of parts drilled or
punched, through steel jigs with bushes resulting in all similar parts being interchangeable.
the steelwork may be shop erected in such
position as arranged with the inspector.
12.12 Packing - All projecting plates or bars
and all ends of members at joints shall be
stiffened. all straight bars and plates sha!l be
bundled, all screwed ends and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed and all rivets,
bolts, nuts, washers and small loose parts shall
be packed separately in cases so as to prevent
damage or distortion during transit.
12.13 Inspection and Testing
12.13.1 Tbe inspector shall have free access
at all reasonable times to those parts of the
manufacturers works which are concerned
with the fabrication of the steelwork and
shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for
VIY
satisfying himself that the fabrication is being

undertaken in accordance with the provisions
of this standard.
12.14.4. I For safety precautions during trottion of steel structures reference shall be made
to good practice [W-6(22)].
12. I3.2 Unless specified otherwise, Inspec-
12.14.4.2 During erection, the steelworkshail

be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and,
when necessary, temporarily braced to provide for all load to be carried by the structure
during erection including those due to erec-
tion shali be made at the place of manufacture

:prior to despatch and shall be conducted so as
not to interfere unnecessary with the operation of the work.
12. I3.3 The manufacture? shall guarantee
compliance with the provisions.of this standard, if required to do so by the purchaser.
12.13.4 Should any structure or part of a
struct,ure be found not to comply with any of
the provisions of this standard, it shall be
liable to rejection. No structure or part of the
structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted
for test, except incasos where the purchaser or
his authoriscd representative considers the
defect as rcc6fiablc.
12.13.5 Defects which may appear during
fabrication shall bc made good with the conscnf of and according to the procedure laid
down hy the inspector.
12.13.f~ All gaugesand templates necessary to
satisfy the inspector shall be supplied by the
manufacturer. The inspector, may. at his discretion, check the test results ohtalned at the
manuf.tcturcrs works by indcpcndcnt tests at
the Ciovcrnment Test House or elsewhere, and
should the material so tested be found to be
unsatisfactory, the costs of such tests shall bc
borne by the manufacturer, and if satisfactory. the costs shall be borne by the purchaser.
12. I4 Sirrl Erecvion.
I,. 14. I tI.AN I AND E.~~I~PMFK I
The suitability and capacity of all plant and cquipment used for erection shall be to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
12.14.2 STORING A N D HANDI ING -- A l l

structural steel should be so stored and
handled at the site that the members are not
subject&d to excessive stresses and damage.
12.14.3 SE~TIING 01~~ - The positioning and
levelling of all steelwork. the plumbing of
stanchions and the placing ofevery part ofthe
structure with accuracy shall be in accordance
with the approved drawings and to the satisfaction of the engineer.
12.14.4
v1462
SECURITY DURING.ERECTION
tion equipment and its operation.

12.14.4.3 No riveting, permanent bolting or
welding should be done until proper alignment has been obtained.
12.14.5 FIELD C O N N E C T I O N S
12.14.5. I FIELD RIVETING - Rivets driven at
the site shall be heated and driven with the
same care as those driven inthe shop.
12.14.5.2 FIELD BOLTING - Field bolting
shall be carried out with the same care as
required for shop bolting.
12.14.5.3 FIELD WELDING - All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
fabricatlonexccptingsuchasmanifestlyapply
to shop conditions only. Where the steel has
been delivered painted, the paint shall be
removed before field welding, fora distance of
at least 50 mm on either side of the joint.
I.!. 1.F Pmnting A,frer E r e c t i o n
:... 15. I Hefore painting of such steel which is
dcIIvcrcd tirlpalnttxl, is commenced, all surfaccs to bc p:lt:lted shall be dry and thoroughly
cleaned from all loose scale and rust.

I,. i5.2 i-he specified protective treatment
shn!i be completed after erection. All rivet and
bolt llcads and the site welds after deslagging
shall be cleaned. Damaged or deteriorated
paint surfaces shall lirst be made good with
the same type of paint as the shopcoat. Where
specified, surfaces which will be in contact
after site assembly shall receive a coat of paint
(in addition to any shop priming) and shall be
brought together while the paint is still wet.
12.15.3 Where thi steel has received a metal
coating in the shop, this coating shall be completed on site so as to be continuous~over any
wilds and site rivets or bolts, but subject to the
approval of the engineer protection may be
completed by painting on site. Bolts which
have been galvanized or similarly treated are
exempted from this requirement.
12.15.4 Surfaces which will be inaccessible

after site assembly shall receive the full speci-
fied protective treatment before assembly.

12.15.5 Site painting should not be done in
frosty or foggy weather, or when humidity is
such as to cause condensation on the surfaces
to be painted.
12.15.6 Paints used shall conform toaccepted
standards [VI-6(6)].
12.16 Bedding of Stanchion Bases and Bearings of Beams and Girders on Stone, Brick or
Concrete (Plain or Reinforced)
12.16.1 Bedding shall be carried .out with
Portland cement, grout or mortar, as described under i2.16.4 .or fine cement concrete
in accordance with IS: 456-1978.
12.16.2 For multi-storeyed buildings, this
operation shall not be carried out until a sufficient number of bottom lengths of stanchions
have been properly lined, levelled and
plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in
position.
12.16.3 Whatever me;hod is employed the
operation shall not be carried out until the
steelwork has been finally levelled and
plumbed, the stanchion bases being supported
meanwhile by steel wedges; and immediately
PART Vl SIIUCTURAL
D E S I G N - S E C T I O N 6 STEEL
before grouting, the space under the steel shall

be thoroughly cleaned.
J2.16.4 Bedding of structure shall be carried
out with grout or mortar which shall be of
adequate strength and shall completely fill the
space to be grouted and shall either be placed
under pressure or by ramming against fixed
supports.
2.16.5 FLATTENED E NDS - in tubular construction, the ends of tubes may be flattened
or otherwise formed to provide for welded,
riveted or bolted connections provided that
the methods adopfed for such flattening do
not injure the material. The change of section
shall be gradual.
12.16.6 SEALING OF T UBES -When the end
of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue
of its connection. by welding to another
member, the end shall be properly and completely sealed.
12.16.6.1 Before sealing, the inside of the tube
should be dry and free from loose scale.
13. STEEL - WORK TENDERS AND
CONTRACTS
13.1 General Recommendations
13.1.1 A few recommendations are given in
Appendix G for general information.
APPENDIX A
(Clause 4.3.2)
CHARTSHOWINGHIGHESTMAXIMUMTEMPERATURE
The territorial waters of India extend into thesea to a distance of twelve nautical miles measured from the
appropriate base line.
Based upon Survey of Indiamap with the permission of the Surveyor General of India.
@J Government of India Copyright 1990.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal details rests with the publishers.
VI.&64

.
APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.3.2)
CHART SHOWING LOWEST MINIMUM TEMPERATURE
92
08
-I
96
MAP OF INOlii
SHONIHC uwEs1 NwINuN
LEtPERAm IsoPLmNs l
USED Oh' DATA DP TO 1958 SUPPLIEI

BY IND~EP~~mICAL
I.
PROJECYION: IA'fBWI CONICAL

ORl7loHORPHIC~
HCHIRAPPALLI
The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to adistance of twelve nautical miles measured from the
appropriate base line.
Based upon Survey of India map with the permission of the Surveyor General of India.
Q Government of India Copyright IWO.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal detailsresta with the publishers.
IANT V I
!3TRUClURAL DESlCN-SkClON
SZ'ECL
vrP
APPENDIX C
(Clause 6.2.2)
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
C-i. In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective I&gth of columns in framed
structures may be obtained from the ratio I/L,
of effective length I to unsupported length L
given in Fig. C-l when relative displacement
of the ends of the column is prevented and in
Fig. C-2 when relative lateral displacement of
the ends is not prevented. In the later case, it is
recommended that the effective length ratio
I/L may not be taken to be less than 1.2.
In Fig. C-I and Fig. C-2, PI and /32 are equal to
where the summation is to be done for the

members framing into a joint at top and bottom respectively; K, and &being the flexural
stiffnesses for the column and beam,
respectively.
HINGED 1.0
0:9
0.8
0.6
P1
FIXED
0' 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
P 2-
Fig. C-l &gective Langrh Ratios,for a Column in a Frame with No Sway
1-P
NATIONAL WKDING COiE OF INDIA
HINGEDl.0
0.9
0.7
0.6
t
P, OS5
0.2
0.1
FIXED
HlNGED
0
0
0
ks
E:
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6 0.7
0.6
0.9
1.0
f%-
Fig. C-2 Effective Length Ratios for a Column in a Frame Without Restraint
Against Swa)
APPENDIX D
(Cluuse 6.2.5)
METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS
el SINGLE STEPPED COLUMNS

D-l.1 Effective lengths in the plane of stcpping (bending about axis x-x) for bottom and
top parts for single stepped columns shall be
taken as given in Table D-f.
L2
n2= _,
LI
fW = Average value of moment of

inertia for the lower. and middle
parts
= IILI + 12
NOTE - The provisions of D-I. I arc applicabk to intermediate columns as well with steppings on either side.
provided appropriate values of f, and f2 are taken.
D-2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR

DOUBLE STEPPED COLUMNS
P2.f Effective lengths in the plane ofsteppings (bending about axis x-jr) for bottom,
middle and top parts for a double stepped
column shall be taken as follows:
Coefficient XI for effective length of bottom
part of double stepped column shall be taken
from the formula:
L2
LI + L 2
I, = Average value of moment of
inertia for middle and top parts
= I2L2 + I3 L3
Ll + L,
Value of coefficient E2 for middle part of
column is given by formula
rl=
kl
c2
and coefficient E, for top part of the column is

given by
where
where
zi:& go arc taken from Table D-6,
1, =
c, = b
LI
PI
-9
P3
P2
II Pa
/J(Pl+h+h)
NOTE - The provisions of DZ. I are applicable to ihtermediate columns as well with stepping on either side,
provided appropriate values of II. Ia and h arc taken.
2= K
NATIONAL
BtlIUMNO CODE Oc INDIA
TABLE D-I EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF SlNGLED

STEPPED COLUMNS
(Clause D-I. I)
SL
NO.
D EGREE OF E N D
R ESTRAINT
SKETCH
(1)
(2)
(3
a)
COLUMN
(4)
Effcctivcly h e l d i n
position and restrained
against rotation at
both ends
PAnAMalEns FOR
ALL CASU
(9
r, = rlc3
Cl
WhCtC
7;,2 and &I
are to be
taken as per Tabk
D-2
Effectively held in
position at both ends
and restrained against
rotation at bottom end
only
l
I
cl
d)
Effectively held in
against rotation at
bottom end, and top
end held against rotation but not held in
position
Effectively held i n
gakt rotation at bottom end, and top end
neither held against
rotation nor held in
position
= PI+P2
PI
&=
,r,< 3
Cl
WhCE
&I and XII are to be
taken as per Table
D-3
& to be taken aa per

Tabk D-4
6=b,g3
Cl
J
LI
L2
Cl=-
;=lr6 x
II
-ii--
Effective length of
bottom part aC
column in p&e d
stepping = tt LI
Efkctiw leqtb of
top part of column
in plane of steppinS
= E*Lz
& to be taken as per

Table D-5
I, = s-g,
Cl
I469
TABLE D-2 COEEFICIENTS OF EFFECTlVE LENGTHS&z AND& FOR COLUMNS WITH BOTH.
ENDS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN &OSlTlON AND RESTRAINED AGAINST ROTATION
( 7abk D-I)
C~EFFICIENTS~II AND &, FOR 4/L, EQUAL T O
h
I1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.05
0.74
0.94
1.38
I.60
1.87 2.07 2.23 2.39 2.52 2.67
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.64
0.62
0.60
0.70 0.79 0.93 1.07 1 . 2 3 I.41

0.68 0.74 0.85 0.95 I.06 I.18
0.66 0.71 0.78 0.87 0.99 1.07
0.5
1.0
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.8
2.0
CoQjWenr kll (PI = 0)

3.03 3.44 3.85
4.34
4.77
I.50 I.60
1.28 1.39
I.16 1 . 2 6
1.72
1.48
1.34
1.92 2.11 2.28 2.45 2164

1.67 1.82 1.96 2.12 2.20
I.5O 1.65 1.79 I.94 2.08
0.59 0.65 0.70 0.77

0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70
0.82 0.93 0.99 1 . 0 8 I.17

0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95
1.23
1.00
1.39
1.10
1.53
1.20
1.66
1.30
1.79
1.40
1.92
1.50
0.05
0.65
0.67 0.71
0.85
I.01
Coeflcienr k , , (PI = 0)
1 . 1 7 I.31 I.41 1.50 1.57
1.67
1.74
1.78
1.82
1.86
0. I
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.64
0.62
0.60
0.58
0.57
0.65
0.64
0.,63
0.63
0.61
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.64
0.64
0.78
0.66
0.66
O.ti
0.64
1.45
1.23
I.09
I.01
0.94
1.55
1.33
1.20
I.10
I.04
I,62
I.41
1.2s
I.19
I.12
1.68
1.48
1.35
1.26
I.19
I.71
I.54
I.41
1.32
I.25
0.
1.0I
0.67
0.55 0.76
0.58
2.40
0.80 2.60
0.88 2.86
0.93 3.18
I.01
3.41
1.05
0.65
0.65
0.64
0.63
0.63
0.60
I.00 0.61
1.20
0.92
0.73
0.67
0.66
0.65
1.05
0.83
0.73
0.68
0.68
I.15 I.25 1.33

0 . 9 2 I.01 I.09
0.81 0 . 8 9 0,94
0.75 0.82 0.88
0 . 7 2 O.i7 0.83
0.62
1.42 0.63
I.61 10.65
. 7 8 0.67
1 . 9 2 0.70
2.04 0.73
2.20
Pz
11
4
4+9
N OTE - lntcrmediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
TABLE D-3 COtiEFICIENTS OF EFFECTIVE LENGTHS T;,, AND &I FOR COLUMNS WITH
BOTH ENDS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN POSITION AND RESTRAINED AGAINST
ROTATION AT BOTTOM END ONLY
(Tab/e DI)
C OEFFICIENTS El2 AND El, FOR La/L, EQUAL TO
h
c
I
II 0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4
0.5 0.6 0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0. I.2
I.4
1.6
I.8
2.0
Coeficicnr kI2 (PI = 0)
0.05
0.1
0.3
0.5
I.0
0.97 1.66 2.10 2.43

0.83 I.21 1.57 1.95
b.78 0.90 I.09 1.27
0.78 0.86 0.99 I.16
0.78 0.85 0.92 0.99
0.05
0.67 0.67 0.82
0. I 0.67 0.67 0.73
0.3
0.67. 0.67 0.67
0.5
0.67 0.67 0.67
1.0
0.67 0.67 .O.67
2.72 2.92 3.08 3.24

2.14 2.33 2.46 2.60
I.44 I.60 1.74 1.86
1.22 1.35 1.47 1.57
I.06 I.13 I.20 1.27
coeflciurr t,, (Pz
3.48
2.76
1.98
1.67
1.34.
= 0)
3.73 4.22 4.85 5.36

2.91 3.28 3.61 4.03
2.11 2.35 2.51 2.76
1.76 I.96 2.15 2.34
I.41 1.54 1.68 1.82
I.16 I.35 I.48 I.58 1.65 1.69 1.74 I.81

,0.93 I.11 I.25 1.36 1.45 I.52 1.57 1.66
0.71 0.80 0.90 0.99 1.0.8 I.15 1.22 1.33
0.69 0.73 0.81 0.17 0.94 1.01 1.07 I.17
0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.91 0.99
I.84
1.72
I.41
1.26
1.07
1.86
1.77
I.48
1.33
I.13
6.00
4.43
2.99
2.5o
1.97
6.58
4.85
3.25
2.76
2.10
1.88
I.80
I.54
1.39
I.19
I.%
I.82
1.59
I.44
1.24
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

_. .
NAIIONAL BUILDING CODE
OF INDIA
TABLE M COEFFICIENT OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH 1, FOR COLUMNS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN

POSITION AND RESTRAINED AGAINST ROTATION AT BOTTOM END AND TOP END
HELD AGAINST ROTATION BUT NOT HELD IN POSITION
I Table PI1
1s
.
C OEFFICIENT El ioR illi, E&AL TO
Cl
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
I.86 1.76
1.90 1.80
2.00 2.00
2.25 2.38
2.66 2.91
3.17 3.50
3.70 4.12
I.67
1.74
2.00
2.48
-
0.8
1.0
I.69
2.00
1.65
2.00
1.2
I:4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.5
5.0
I.61 1.58 I.55 I.53 _

--r
-*_------__
I.60 1.55 I.50 I.46 1.43 I.40 1.37 1.32 I.18
IO
20
_II.10 1.05
I1
1,
Ll
,
B
h +s
TABLE D-5 COEFFICIENT OF EFFECTIVE LENGTHS &, FCR COLUMNS WITH TOP END FREE
AND BOTTOM END EFFECTIVELY HELD IN POSITION AND RESTRAINED
AGAINST ROTATION
C OEFFICIENTS El FOR h/it EQUAL TO
Cl
,
0.4 0.6 0.8
1.0
I.2
I.6
1.8
2.0 2.5
5.0
IO
20
0
0.2
I.4
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
20
25
3.0
2.0
2.0
20
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
2.0
214
273
3.77
4.90
6.08
7.25
.2.0 2.0
2.24 2.36
3.13 3.44
4.35 4.86
5.67
_
7.00
_
_
_
20 20
2.47 2.57
3.74 4.00
_
_
_
_
_
_
2.0
267
_
_
-
2.0
2.76
_
_
-
2.0
285
_
_
_
20
294
_
_
_
P A R T Vl STRUCNRAL DESIGN--SEIXWN 4 SWXL
2.0
3.02
_
_
2.0
_
_
-
20
_
_
_
2.0
_
_
_
20
- t,
-
TABLE D-6 VALUES OF i,, i, AND i,

(cewr D-2. I)
SL
No
D EGREE OF E N D
R ESTRAINT
iff&tivc\y held in
o&ion a n d fesagainst
rained
otation at both
IIdS.
2,
SKETCH
COLUUN
PAMMETES
OR ALb CASES
k,
2, = I,,
I, = i,,
where irr is taken

from Table D-2
here ~II is takes
il, = it*
where XII is taken
from Table P2
from Table D-2
b)
lffcctivcly held i n
bosition a t both
nds and restrained

gains1 rotation at
lottom end only.
kl,= k,,
where kg, is taken
from Table D-3
kL= i,,
k, = kn
here kit is taker

from Table D-3
where 21, is taken

from Table D-3
I
3ffectively held ir
rosition and res
rained
ap8insl
,olation 81 bottom
:nd. and top end
rid against rota.
ion but not held in
position.
k, = k,
where
is taken
from Table D-4
with C, = 0
z,
Xl = I,
where 1, is taken
from Table D-4
with Cr = 0
k, =
where xl is taken
from Table D-4 with
7,
~ffcctively held in
m&ion and rcsrgainsl
rained
utation at bottom
mnd. and top end
Either held sgainsl
ntation nor @ml
ran&ion.
kr - 2
kz = 2
LJ
LI + L2
k, = k,
where XI is taken
from Table D-5 with
VI22
NATIONAL
WUUNG
CoDI
OF I N D I A
i--
APPENDIX
(C/ause 7.2.4./)
LiST OF REFERENCES
ON THE ELASTIC
STEEL
FLEXURAL
TC3RSIONAL
BUCKLING
OF
BEAMS
Textbooks
References Wor to 1%1
T1h40SHENKO(S
P)and GERE(J M). Theory of elastic stability. Ed 2, 1%1. McGraw-
LEE (G C), A survey of literature on the lateral instability of beams. Welding Research
Council Bulktin, Sarics No. 63, Aug 1960.
HiU, New York.

BLEICH
(F), Buckling strength of metal
structures, 1952. McGraw- HiIl, New York.
Values of Elastic Critical Loa& and E#ective

Factors
Length
JOHNSTON (B G), Ed. Guide tddesigncriteria for metal compression-members. Column

-Research Council. 1966, Ed 2. John WiIey,
New York.
TRAHAIR
(N S). The bending strasa rules
of the draft AS CA 1. J Inst. Engra Aust. 38;
No. 6, June 1966.
GALAMBOS (T V). Structural mcmbersand

frames. 1968. Prentice-Hail, New Jersey.
TRAHAIR
(N S). Elastic stability of I-beam
clement in rigid-joi~td frames. J Inst. Engrs
Aust. 38; No. 7-8. July-Aug 19ti, 171.
Handbook of structural stability. Column

Research Committee of Japan. 1971. Corona
Publishing Co, Tokyo.
Abt ( H G) and Bulson (P S). Background to
buckling.
TRAHAIR (N S). Elastic stability of propped

cantilevers. Civ Eng Trans, institution of
Engineers, Australia, V CE 10. No. 1; April
]968.
Stability of strucfure under static and

dynamic loads. American Society of Civil
Engineers, 1977 Ed.
Safe load tables for laterally unsupported

angles. Australian
Institute of Steel
Construction.
APPENDIX
F
(Ctause 10.2.3.2)
PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF INDIAN STANDARD
WEIGHT
DESiLiNA.
r{osl
WEICiHT
SEcTIONAL
AREA
DEPTH
sTc-
WIDTII
OF
FLAN-
TION
(D)
:)
MEDIUM
BEAMS [VI-6(23)]
THICK- TItICK
NEss
NESS
OF
F;~NWEB
tiE
(1)
RACYIOF
GYnATION
~?5s
(n
sEC-
pus.
TION
TIC
Mow.
Lus
TtON
MODU-
SHAPE
FAC-
&D
T
SSG
LUS
6
(1)
k%:2
ISMB
ISMB
ISMB
ISMB
103
!25
150
175
ISMB
11.5
13.4
IS
19.5
!4.7
17.0
19.1
24.9
200
25.4
32.3
ISMB 225
ISMB 250
31.2
37.3
39.7
47.6
ISMB
300
46.1
58.7
ISM B
ISMS
ISMB
ISMB
ISMB
ISMB
350
400
450
500
550
600
52.4
61.6
72.4
86.9
MM
123
66.7
78.5
92.3
.111,
132
1%
(4)
mm
100
I 23
150
175
2iN
225
250
300
350
400
450
m
S50
600
(5)
mm
70
70
7s
85
100
I 10
125
140
140
140
150
1$0
NM
2to
(6)
(7)
(8)
mm
13.1
mm
4.5
5.0
5.0
5.8
5.7
6.5
6.9
7.7
cm
4.14
5.16
6.13
7.13
8.32
9.31
10,40
12,40
14.2
t6.o
17.4
[7.2.
J9.3
20.8
8. I 14.30
8.9 -16.2
9.4 18.2
10.2 20.2
I 1.2 22.2
12.0 24.2
7.5
8.0
8.0
9.0
10.8
11.8
12.5
(9)
( 10)
cm)
cm
1.55
56.4
71,2
1.51
1.57
95.7
1,76
144.3
2.15
224
2.34
*
2.65
410
2.86
599
2.84
779
2;82 I On
3.01 I 350
3.52 I 810
3.73 23S0
4.12 3060
(11)
cml
58.6
813
I 10
166
2S4
348
466
683
w
I 176
1533
207S
2712
3511
(12)
(13)
(14)
1.16
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.13
1.14
1.14
1.14
1.14
IJ5
1.14
1.1s
1.1s
1.1s
9.33 22.2
8.75 2S.0
9.3830.0
9.44 s. 17
9.26 3s.1
9.32 34.6
10.00 36.2
10.7 3s.9
9.$6 43.2
8.7s 44.9
8.62 47.9
10.47 *.O
9.66 49. I
10.10 So.o
APPENDIX G
. j Clause 13. I. I)
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STEELWORK TENDERS AND CONTRACTS
G-O. GENERAL
G-0.1 The recommendations given in this
Appendix are in line with those generally
adopted for steelwork construction and are
meant for general information.
Conditions affecting the position or continuity of members;
Id Limits of length and weight of steel

members in transit and erection;
h) Drawings of the sub-structure, proposed
G-0.2 These recommendations do not form

part of the requirements of the standard and
compliance with these is not necessary for the
purpose of complying with this Code.
or existtng, showing:
9 levels of stanchion, foundations, if

already determined;
ii) any details affecting the stanchion
bases or anchor bolts;
G-0.3 The recommendations are unsuitable

for inclusion,as a block requirement in a contract, but in drawing up a contract the points
mentioned should be given consideration.
iii) permissible bearing pressure on the

foundation; and
G-l. EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION
iv) provisions for grouting (see 12.16).
G-l.1 Before the steelwork design is commenced, the building designer should be satisfied that the planning of the building, its
dimensions and other principal factors meet
the requirements of the building owner and
comply with regulations of all authorities concerned. Collaboration of building designer
and steelwork designer should begin at the
outset of the prqject by joint consideration of
the plamting and of such questions as the
stanchion spacing, materials to be used for the
construction, and depth of basement.
In the case of new work, the substructure

should be designed in accordance with the
relevant codes dealing with foundations
and substructure;
G-2. INFORMATION REQUIRED BY

THE STEELWORK DESIGNER
j)
The maximum wind velocity appropriate

to the site (see IS: 875-1964); and
k) Environmental factors, such as proximity

to sea coast, and corrosive atmosphere.
Reference to bye-laws and regulations
affecting the steelwork design and
construction.
G-2. I General
G-2.2 Further Informarion Relating to

Buildings
4 Site plans showing in plan and elevation
a)
of the proposed location and main dimensions of the building or structure;
b) Ground levels, existing and proposed;

cl
Parttculars of buildings or other constructions which may have to remain on

the actual site of the new building or
structure during the erection of the
steelwork;
4 Particulars of adjacent buildings affecting, or affected by the new work;
d Stipulation regarding the erection

sequence or time schedule;,
WY
Plans of the floors and roof with principal

dimesions, elevations and cross sections
showing heights between floor levels.
b) The occupancy of the floors and the positions-of any special loads should be given.
c)
The building drawings, which should be

fully dimensioned, should preferably be
to the scale of I to lOOand should show all
stairs, fire-escapes, lifts, etc, suspended
ceilings, flues and ducts for heating and
ventilating. Doors and windows should
be shown, as the openings may be taken
into account in the computation of dead
load.
Requirements should be given in I -spect

of any maximum depth of beams or minimum head room.
h) Whether the connections are to be bolted,

riveted or wetded. Particular attention
should be drawn to connections of a special nature. such as turned bolts, high
strength friction grip bolts, long rivets
and overhead welds:
Large-scale details should be given of any

special features affecting the steelwork.
d) The inclusive weight per ml of walls.

floors, roofs, suspended ceilings, stairs
and partitions, or particulars of their construction and finish for the computation
of dead load.
The plans should indicate the floors
which are to be designed to carry partitions. Where the layout of partitions is
not known, or a given layout is liable to
alteration, these-facts should be specially
noted so that allowance may be made for
partitions in any position.
e) The superimposed loads on the floors
j)
Quality of steel (see 4). and provisions for

identification;
k)
Requirements in respect of protective

paintings at works and on site, galvanizing or cement wash;
m) Approximate dates for commencement

and completion of erection;
n)
Details of any tests which have to be made

during the course of erection or upon
completion; and
P)
Schedule of qtiantities. Where the tenderer is required to take off quantities, a list
should be @en of the principal items to
be included in the schedule.
appropriate to the occupancy, as given in

IS: 875-1964 or as otherwise required.
Details of special loads from cranes, runways? tips, lifts, bunkers, tanks, plant and
equipment.
Ix) The grade of fire resistance appropriate to
G-3.2 Additional information Relating to

Buildings
a) Schedule of stanchions giving sizes,

lengths and typical details of brackets,
joints, etc;
the occupancy as may be required.

G-3 INFORMATION REQUIRED BY
TENDERER (IF NOT ALSO THE
DESIGNER)
b) Plan of grillages showing sizes, lengths
G-3. I General
c)
Plans of floor beams showing sizes,

lengths and levels eccentricities and end
moments. The beam reactions and details
of the type of connection required should
be shown on the plans;
d)
Plan of roof steelwork. Fora flat roof, the

plan should give particulars similar to
those of a floor plan. Where the roof is
pitched, details should be given of trusses,
portals, purlins, bracing, etc;
supply;
e)
Whether the steelwork contractor will be

required to survey the site and set out or
check the building or structure lines,
foundations and levels;
The steelwork drawings should preferably be to a scale of I to 100 and should

give identification marks against all
members; and
Particulars of holes required for services,

pipes, machinery fixings, etc. Such holes
should preferably be drilled at works.
and, levels of grillage beams and particulars of any stiffeners required;
4 All information listed under G-2.1;

b) Climatic conditions at site--seasonal variations of temperature, humidity, wind
velocity and direction;
c) Nature of soil. Results of the investigation of sub-soil at site of building or

structure;
d) Accessibility of kite and details of power

e)
Setting-out plan of foundations, stanchions and levels of bases;
l3) Cross sections and elevations of the steel

structure, as necessary, with large-scale
details of special features;
?MT VI mUCIUBAL DESIGN-SLCTION
STEEL
G-3.3 Irformation Relating to Execution of

Building Work
G-3.3.1 Supply of materials.
VP
G-3.3.2 Weight of steelwork for payment.
G-7 I N S P E C T I O N
G-3.363 Wastage of steel.
G-7.0 References may be made to good practice [VI-6(24)]
G-3.3.4 Insurance. freight and transport

from shop to site.
G-3.3.3 Site facilities for erection.
G-7.1 Access to Conrracrors Works- ThL

contractor should offer facilities for the
inspection of the work at all stages.
G3.3.U Tools and plants.

G-3.3.7 Mode and terms of payment.
G-3.3.8 Schedules.
G-3.3.9 F ORCED M AJEURE - Clauses and
provisions for liquida!ion and damages fbr

delay in completion.
G-3.3. IO Escalation clauses
G - 4 DETAIL.lN(i
G-4. I In addition to the number olcopies ot
the approved drawings or details required
under the contract. dimensioned shop drauings or details should be submitted in duplicate to the engineer who should retain one
copy and return the other to the steel supplier
or fabricators with his romments. if any.
G-5 T I M E SCHEi)ilI.l.
G-5.1 As the dates on which subsequent
trades can commence, depend on the progress
of erection of the steel framing. the time schedule for the latter should be carefully drawn
up and agreed to by the parties concerned at a
joint meeting.
G-6 PROCEDURE ON SITE
G-6.1 .The steelwork contractor should be
responsible for the positroning and levelling of
all steelwork. Any checking orapproval ofthe
setting out b) the general contractor or the
engineer should not relieve the steelwork contractor 01 his responsibilities in this respect.
VI476
G - 7 . 2 Inspecrion qj Fahricarion -- Unless

otherwise agreed. the inspection, should be
carried out at the place of fabrication. The
contractor should be responsible for the accuracy of the work and for any error which may
be subsequently discovered.
G-7.3 Inspection on Site - To facilitate
inspection, the contractor should, during all
working hours. ha\e a foreman or properly
accredited ctiarge hand available on the site.
together Nith a complete se1 ofcontract drawings and any further drawings and instructions u hich may have been issued from time to
time.
G-8 MAINTENANCE
G-8.1 Gerwrol .- Where steelwork is to be
encased in solid concrete. brickwork or
masonry. the question of maintenance should
not arise, but where steelwork is to be housed
in hollow fire protection or is to be unprotected. particularly where the steelwork is
exposed to a corroding agent. the question of
parntlnp or protective treatment of the steelwork should be given careful consideration at
the construction stage. having regard to the
special circumstances Of the case.
C-8.2 Connections - Whereconnectionsare
exposed to a corroding agent. they should be
periodicall), Inspected. and any corroded
parts should be thoroughly cleaned and
painted.
G-8.2.1 Where bolted connections are not
solidly encased and are subject to vibratory
effects of machinery or plant. they should be
penodically inspected and all bolts tightened.
NAIIONAL WILDING
CODE
O F INDIA
LIST OF STANDARDS
?he following list records those standards which are acceprabk as goodpracriceand accepted
srondardsin the fulfilmenr of the requiremenrs of the Code. The laresr version of a srandardshall
be odopred at rhe rime of the enforcement of rhe Code. The standards listed may be used by rhe
Aurhority as a guide in conformance with rhe requirements bf the referred clauses in the Code.
h the following lisr, rhe number appearing in rhe first column within parenrheses indicates the
numbtr vf rhe reference irr rhis parrlsecrion.
(I) IS : 801-1975 Code of piactice for use of
cold formed light gauge steel structural
members in general building construction
(firsr revision).
IS : 8 I I- I%5 Specification for cold formed
structural steel sections
light gauge
(revised).
(2) lS:812-1957 Glossary of terms relating
to welding and cutting of metals.
(3) lS:696-1972 Code of practice for general engineering drawings [second
revision).
IS : 962-1967 Code of practice for architectural and building drawings (firsr
revision).
(4) lS:813-1961 Scheme of symbols for
welding
( 5 ) Slruc,rural Steel
IS: 226-1975 Specification for structural
steel (standard quality) v(/th revision)
IS : 961-1975 Specification for structural
steel (high tensile) (second revision)
IS: 1977-1975 Specificationforstructural
steel (ordinary quality) (second revision)
IS : 2062-1980 Specification for structural steel (fusion welding quality) (second
revision)
IS : 2155-1982 Specification lor cold

forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6
to 16 mm diameter) (firsrrevision).
IS : 1149-1982 Specification for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes
(third revision)
Welding Consumables
IS : 8 I4 Specification for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural
steel
IS :814 (Part I)-1974 Row welding
products other than sheets (/ourrh
revision)
IS: 814 (Part 2)-1974 For welding
sheets gourrh revision)
IS : 1395-1982 Specification for low and
medium alloy steel covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding (thirdrevision)
IS : 1278-1972 Specification for filler
rods and wires for gas welding (second
revision)
IS : 7280-1974 Specification for base
wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels
IS : 3613-1974 Specification for acceptance tests for wire-flux combinations for
submerged-arc welding of structural
steels first revision)

structural steel (medium and high
strength qualities)
IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding

rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded
arc welding of structural steel
IS: 1161-1979 Specification for steel

tubes for structural purposes (third
revision)
IS : 6560-1972 Specification for molybdenum and chromium-molybdenum

low alloy steel welding rodsand base electrodes for gas shielded arc welding
Rivets
Steel Castings
IS: 1929-1982 -Specification for hot

forged steel riyets for hot closing ( I2 to 36
mm diameter) firsr revision)
IS : 1030-1982 Specification for carbon

steel castings for general engineering purposes (Grade 23-45) (third revision)
P A R T
VI SRUCIIJRAL DLSIGN-SRCllON 4 SISEL
VI,
Bob and Nuts

IS : 1363 Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C
IS :.I363 (Part I)-1984 Hexagon head
bolts (site range M5 to M36) (second
revision)
IS : 1363 (Part 2)-1984 Hexagon head
screws (size range MS to M36) (second
revision)
IS : 1364 Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade A
and B
IS : I.364 (Part 2)-1983 H e x a g o n
screws (sire range M3 to M36) fsewnd
revihion)
IS : 1367-1967 Iechnical supply condition\ for threaded steel fastener,

Sit bolts (Jrst rebY.\ion).
IS : 3757-1972 Specification for hightensile friction grip bolts (firsr retision)
IS : 6623-1972 Specification for high tensile friction grip nut\
Washers
IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for
plain washers and lock washers (/irsr
revision)
IS : 5370-1969.Specification
for plain
washers with outside diameter== 3 x inside
diameter
IS : 5372-1975 Specification lor taper
washers for channels (ISMC) (first
re\*ision)
IS : 5374-1975 Specification for taper
u-ashers f o r l - b e a m s (ISMB) (firs!
re\:ision).
IS : 6610-1972 Specification for heavy
washers for steel structures

Standard colours
No. 445 Venetian red
No. 446 Red oxide
No. 448 Deep Indian red and red oxide
(colour unspecified) (revised)
No. 449 Light purple brown
No. 451 Chocolate
No. 473 Gulf red
mixed paint, air drying, red oxide-zinc
chrome. priming (firsr revision)
(7) IS : IO24- I979 Code of practice for use of
welding in bridges and structures subject
to dynamic loading [first revision).
(8) !S : i 3h4- 1967 Specificatton for hexagon
head bolt\. scrrBs and nuts of product
grade A and H
IS : 1367-1967 Technical supply conds
tions for threaded fasteners fir-c:
revision).
(9) IS : 114%1982 Specification for hotrolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm dlarnet e r ) f o r s t r u c t u r a l purposzs (rhrrd
revision)
(IO)IS : 4000-1967 Code of practice for

assembly of structural joints usrng hrph
tensile friction grip fasteners
(I I) IS : 816-1969 Code of practice for use of
metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel (firsr retision)
IS : 1323-1982 Code of practice for osyacetylene welding for structural work in
mild steel (second re\*ision)
(12) IS : 1363-1984 Specification for hexagon
head bolts. screuIs and nuts of product
grade C (Part I to 3) (second re\.ision)
(13) IS : 816-1969 Code of practice for use of
metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel (firsr ret-isiotIJ
IS : 6649-1972 Specification for high tensile friction grip washers
IS : 9595 1980 Recommendations for

metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels
(6) IS : 104-1979 Specification for ready

mixed paint. brushing. zinc chrome.
priming (second revision)
(14)SP6:(6)-1972 IS1 Handbook for StrUCtural Engineers: Part 6 Application of plastic theory in design of steel structures
,7g
INDtA
(15) IS : 1977-1975 Specification for structur;tI steel (ordinary quality) [sf*cont/

~rcJvi.viilll)
(16) IS : 3Y35-1966 (ode 0i praclicc for composjtc construction
( 17) IS : 72 I5 1074 Specification for tolcrancc\ It\r I;rhrication
of htcel 4tructurcs
(under rrvision)
lolcrsnces for erection of steel struct ures (uudcr pwpururion)
(IX) IS : Y IY Recommendation for limits and

fits for engineering
IS : Y 19 (Part I )-I963 General engineering (/i'r.\i rrhion)
(IY) IS X lh-1969 Codb of practice lor u\c o f
m e t a l a r c welding lor general con\truclion in mild \fcel f/ir.sr w\*ision)
IS : XIY-lY.57 Code of practlcc lor rcsistancc spot welding tar light assemblies in
IS : 1024-IV79 Code of practw for use of
welding in bridges and btructuws hubjcct
to d) namic loading (/tr.sr rr\Vsron)
!S : 1261-iY5Y Codc ,)f practice for seam

welding in mild \tecl
!S : l323-IYH? Code of practice for oxyacctylcne aelding for structural Hark in
mild steel {.~c~ond rc,\isron)
: 9595lY80 Rccommcndatlons
for
metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
mangancsc steel
(20) IS : 8 I7-.I966 Code of practice for traln-
FAIT
VI
SlXUCNJtAL
IS : 1393-1961 Code of practice fortraining and testing of oxy-acetylene welders

IS : 7307 (Part I j-1974 Specification for
approval tests of welding procedures:
Part I Fusion welding of steel
approval testing of welders working to
approval welding procedures: Part I
Fusion welding of steel
approval tests for welders when welding
procedure approval is not required: Part
I Fusion welding of steel
(21) IS : 1477 Code of practice for painting of
ferrous metals in bui!dings
IS : 1477 (Part I)-1971 Pre-trea!ment
Ifj:rst revision).
IS : 1477 (Part 2)-1971 Painting first
mild ael
IS
ing and testing of metal arc welders

(revi.&)
DESIGN-SUJTION-4
=EtZL
revi.uion).
(22) IS : 7205-1973 Safety code for erection

on structural steel work
(23)IS : 808 (Part I)-1978 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections: Part I MB series
(beams) (.recond revision)
(24) Handbook for fabrication, erection and
inspection of steel structures (under
preparation)
IS : 7215-1974 Tolerancesforfabrication
of steel structures.
129

SECTION 7 PREFABRICATION AND
SYSTEMSBUILDING
CONTENTS
'0.
FOREWORD
.*.
I.
SCOPE
...
2.
TERMINOLOGY
*..
3.
MATERIALS. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
...
4.
MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL

TREATMENT AND FINISHES
...
COMPONENTS
..*
fREFABKICATION SYSTEMS AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES . . .

7.
JOI X7-S
...
8.
TESTS FOR COMPONEN I-S, STRUCTURES
...
hlANUFAC1IJRE. STORAGE, TRANSPORT AND ERECTION

OF PRECASl. F.f.EMENTS
...
10.
EQUIPMEN r
...
18
Il.
PREFABRICAI~ED STRUCTURAL UNITS
...
18
PAST
V I STltUCTURAL D-SIGN - SDCllON I PREFABllICATlON
A N D SYSTIMS BUWC
VI.,!
PART VI STRUCTURAL ,DESIGN

SECTION 7 PKEFARKICAI-ION ANI) SYSTEMS BWIL.DING
0. FOREWORD
0.1 Prefabrication. though desirable in terms of large scale housing. has yet to take a firm hold in
the country. Two aspects of prefabricatton specifically to be borne in mind are the system13 be
adopted for the different categories of buildmgs and the sires of then components. Here the
principle of modular co-ordination is of value andIts use is recommended.
0.2 Advantages of recent trends in prefabrication have been taken note of and alsothe hazards
attended to such constructlon. A few recommendatrons on the nerd to avoid progressrvc c~I!;~pse
of the structure have been mcluded This has become necessarym view 01 such collapses m the
past. A specific pomt to be borne m mind, therefore, is the need to make the structure reasonably
safe agamst such a collapse.
0.3 Prefabricated construction, being a new technique, some of the essentialrrqu:rernents for the
manufacture of the prefabricated components and elements are also includedm th:s section.
0.4 Since the aim of prefabrication is to effecteconomy. improvement in quality and speed in
construction, the selection of proper materials for prefabrication is also an important factor in the
popularisation of this new technique. The use of locally avarlable materials with required
characteristics and those material which, due to their innate characteristics likehghuwetght,easy
workability, thermal insulation, non-combustibihty, etc. effect economy and improved quality
may be tried. However, this section pertains to prefab elements withcementatious materials.
0.5 The design of prefabricated buildings shall include provision for all installations of piping,
wiring and accessories for service equipment to be installed in the building.
0.6 This section was first published in 1970. In thisrevtsion the following main changes have
been made:
a) A brief provision regarding importance of architectural treatment and finishes as applicable
to prefabricated buildings is included;
b) A brief clause is added on the requirements of materials for use in prefabrication;
c) The clause on prefabrication systems and structural elements is elaborated;
d) The clausq on testing of component.s is now revised to include testing of structure or part 01
structure;
e) A brief clause on the manufacture of cellular concrete is added.

VI-t
NATIONAI. BUll.DlhC CODE
O F
INDIA
1. SCOPE
MULTIMODULE - A module whose size is a

selected multiple of the basic module.
1.1 This section gives recommendations

regarding modular planning, component
sizes, joints, manufacture, storage, transport
and erection of prefabricated elements for use
in buildings.
PREFABRICATE - To fabricate components

or assembled units prior to erection or
installation in a building.
2; TERMINOLOGY
BASIC MODULE - The fundamental module
used in modular co-ordination, the size of
which is selected for general application to
building and its components.
NOTE - The value of the b&z mbdule has been chosen as
100 mm for the maximum flexibility and convenience.
The symbol for the basic module is M.
C E L L U L A R CONCRETE -The material

ccnsisting of an inorganic binder (such as lime
or cement or both) in combination with a
finely ground material containing siliceous,
acid (such as sand), gas generating material
(for example, aluminium powder), water and
harmless additives (optional); and steam
cured under high pressure in autoclaves.
PREFABRICATED BU I L D I N G - T h e
completely assembled and erected building, of
which. the structural parts consist of
prefabricated individual, units or assemblies
using ordinary or controlled materials,
including service facilities; and in which the
service equipment may be either prefabricated
or constructed in-situ.
SHEAR CONNECTORS - Structural elements,
such as anchors, studs, channels and spirals,
intended to transmit the horizootal shear
between the prefabricated member and the
cast .in-situ concrete and also to prevent
vertical separation at the interface.
UNIT- Building material formed as a simple

article with all three dimensions specified,
complete in itself but intended to be part of a
compound unit or complete building.
Examples are brick block, tile, etc.
3. MATERIALS, PLANS AND

SPECIFICATIONS
A building product formed
as a distinct unit having specified sizes in three
3.1 Mureriuis - All materials shall conform
dimensions.
to Part .VBuilding materials.
C OMPOSITE M EMBERS - Structural
3.1.1 While choosing the materials for premembers comprising.prefabricated structural
units of steel, prestressed concrete or fabrication, the following special characteristics are to be considered:
reinforced concrete and cast in-situ concrete
connected together in such a manner that they
a) Easy availability;
act monolithically.
b) Light weight for easy handling and
transport, and to economise on sections
INCREMENTS - Difference between two
and sizes of foundations;
homologous dimensions *of components of
c) Thermal insulation property;
successive sizes.
d) Easy workability;
M ODULE - A unit of size used in
e) Durability in all weather conditions;
dimensional co-ordination.
f) Non-combustibility;
MODULAR CO-ORDINATION - Dimensional
g) Economy in cost, and
co-ordination employing the basic module or
a multimodule.
h) Sound insulation.
NOTE - The purporer of modular coordination arc:
a) to reduce the kricty of cqmponmt rizcs produad,
3.1.2 The materials used in prefab
and
components can be various and the modern
trend is to use concrete, steel, treated wood,
b) toallow the building da er greater flexibility in
the arrangement of corn F;%ncnts.
aluminium, cellular concrete, light weight
concrete,ceramic products, etc. However, this
M O D U L A R 6~1~ -A r e c t a n g u l a r c o - section pertains to prefab concrete elements.
ordinate reference system in which the
-distance between consecutive lines is the basic 3.2 Plans and Specfficorions - Complete set
module or a multimodule. Thismultimodule of drawings as specified in Part II
may differ for each of the twodimensions of Administration shall be submitted to the
Authority for approval.
the grid.
COMPONENTS -
?ADT VI SYRUCNIRAL DESIGN - !3KllON 7 ?REFMlUCAllON
AND SYSYEMS
BUILDING
VI-7-y
3.2.1 Such drawings shall describe the

elemcnrs of the structure or assembly
including all required data of physical
properties of component materials.
3.2.2 Details of connecting joints shall be
giGen to an enlarged scale.
3.2.3 Site or shop location of services, such as
installation of piping. wiring or other
accessories shall be shown separately,
32.4 The drawings shall also clearly indicate
locatibn of handling arrangements for lifting
and handling the prefabricated elements.
4. MODC;I.AR C O - O R D I N A T I O N ,
ARCHITECTL!RAL TREATMENT
AND FINISHES
4. I Moduiar Co-ordination -- The basic
module is to be adopted. After adopting this.
further work is necessary to outline suitable
range of muitimodules with greater
increments, often referred to as preferred
Increments. A set of rules as detailed below
would be adequate for meeting the
rcquirerncnt?
of conventional and prefahrlcated <onstru,ction. ?hese rules relate to
rtic I~,llowing haslc elements:
lhc planning grid in both directions of
I!I~ hor\/c.nrai plan shall be:
I) 3 btl for residential and institutional
buildings:
2) for industrial buildings:
15 M for hpans up to 12 m.
30 M for spans between 12 m and
IK m. and
60 M for spans over I8 m.
lhe centre lines of ioad bearing walls
shall coincide with the grid lines:
In case of external walls. the grid lines
shall coincide with the cenire tine of the
wall or a line on Ihe wall 5 cm from the
internal face;
I-he planning module in the vertical
direction shall be I M up to and includin
a height of 2.8 M: above the height o?
2.8.m. it shdll be 2 M;
Preferred increments for sill heights.
doors. windows and other fenestration
shall be I M; and
In the case of internal columns, the grid

lines shallcoincide with the centre lines
of columns. In case of external columns
and columns near the lift and stair wells,
ihe grid lines shall coincide with centre
lines of ihe column in the topmost storey
or a line in the column !? cm from the
internal face of the column in the
topmost 5torey.
4.2 /J rchitecwrol Treatmew and Finishe -The process of architectural design requires
the designer to relate tlie resources of knowledge
of building technology to the human, social
and cultural conditions dt a particular stage of
economic growth. In doing this the designer
seeks to make a comprehensible statement out
of tangible matter and intansle ideas
(bricks, timber, steel and cement plus the
social order and cultural disciplines) and
expresses this unity in plastic form. Adoption
of industrlalised approach in the execution OI
building programmes on mass scale hecomes
necessary if the objective is to achieve
economy in cost, efficiency of design,
reduction in time for construction. etc. This in
turn requires development of prefabrication
techniques which does necessarily mean that it
is not possible to achieve or evolve
aesthetically sati+ying designs. In fact, a
careful and judicious handling of materials
and use of finishes on a prefabricated building
can help the designer a great deal in ensuring
that the appearance of the building is not
monotqnous and unappealing. The purpose
of finishes and architectural treatment is not
only to give prefabricated buildings an
individual character but also to effect better
performance, and greater user satisfaction.
Treatment and finishes have to be specified
keeping in view the requirements of
protection, function and aesthetics of internal
and extcrntil spaces and surfaces. Thinking on
these aspects must be incorporated right at the
design inception stage so that the entire
building or complex of buildings can be
conceived of in totality - in terms of
architectural expression, structural design,
function, etc.
While deciding the type of architectural
treatment and finishes for prefabricated
buildings, the following points should be kept
in view:
4 Suitability for mass production

techniques;
b)
Recognition of the constraints imposed

by the level of workmanship available;
cl Possibility of using different types of

finishes;
d) lht: use of finishes and architectural

treatment for the creation of a particular
architectural character in individual
buildings and in groups of buildings by
the use of colour, texture. projections
and recesses on surfaces, etc;
e) The incorporation of structural
elements likeJoists, columns, beams, etc.
as architectural ieatures and the
treatment of these for better overall
performance and appearance;
0 Simultaneous design of structural sub-
system and finishes;

f3) Satisfactory finishing of surfaces; and
h) The use of light weight materials to
effect economy in the structural system.
fI LINTELS
I) LENGTH -Nominal length shall be
in multiples of I M;
2) WIDTH - Nominal width shall be in
multiples of M/4; and
3) DEPTH - Nominal depth shall be in
multiples of M/4.
g) SUNSHADES; CHAJJA PROJECTIONS
I) LEwXH~Nominal length shall be in
multiples of 1 M.
2) PROJECTION - Nominal length shall
be in multiples of I M.
Some of the normally acceptable methods of

finishes are:
9) Moulded concrete surface to design,
b) Laid-on finishing tiles fixed during
casting,
cl Finishes obtained by washing, tooling,
grinding, grooving of hardened
concrete,
S.2 Tolerances on the dimensions of
4 Exposed aggregates in-sttu, and
components shall be as follows:
e) Finishes added in-situ.
a) L ENGTH - 20. I percent subject to a
minimum of ?5 mm and a maximum of
ltl0 mm.
5. COMPONENTS
5.1 The preferred dimensions of precast
b) C R O S S- SECTIONAL D IMENSIONS elements shall be as follows:
53 m or +O.I percent, whichever is
greater.
a) F LOORING AND R OOFING SCHEME Precast slabs or other precast structural
4 STRAIGHTNESS OF Bow - I; 750 of the
flooring units:
length subject to a minimum off5 mm
and
a maximum of -+20 mm.
1) LENGTH - Nominal length shall be in
multiples of 3 M;
S
QUARENESS
-When considering the.
4
squareness of the corner, the longer of
2) WIDTH -Nominal width shall be in
the two adjacent sides being checked
multiples of I M; and
shall be taken as the base line. The
3) OVERALL THICKNESS - Overall
shorter side shall not vary in length from
thickness (thrt is, the thickness of
the perpendicular by more than 5 mm.
structural flooring units plusin-situ
For the purpose of this requirement, any
concrete decking) shall be in multierror due to lack of straightnessshah be
ples of M/4.
ignored; squareness shall be measured
b) BEAMS
with respect to the straight lines which
are nearly parallel with the features
,I) LENGTH -Nominal length shall be
being checked when nominal angle is
in multiples of 3 M;
other than 90; the included angle
2) WIDTH -Nominal width shall be in
between the check lines should be varied
multiples of M/4; and
accordingly.
3) OVERALL DEPTH -Overall depth
e) TWIST - Any corner shall not be more
of the floor zone (that is, from soffit
than the tolerance given below from the
of the beam to the top of in-situ deckplane containing the other three corners:
ing) shall be in multiples of M/4.
Up to 60 cm in width
5 mm
4 COLUMNS
and up to 6 m in length
1) HEIGHT-Overall height (that is,
Over 60 cm in width and
10 mm
floor to floor or the clear height) shall
for any length
be in multiples of 1 M for heights up
FLAT~~ESS - The maximum deviation
to 2.8 m; and for heights above 2.8 m.
from a I .5m straight edge placed in any
it shall be in multiples of 2 M; and
position on a nominal plane surface
2) LATERAL DIMENSIONS -~eralllate
shall not exceed 5 mm..
ral dimension or diameter of columns
shall be in multiples of M/4.
6. PREFABRICATIONSYSTEMS AND
WALLS
d)
* STRUCTURAL SCHEMES
THICKNESS - The nominal thickness of
6.1 The word system is referred to a
walls shall be in multiples of M/4.
particular method of construction of
e) S T AI RC AS E
buildings using the prefabricated components
WIDTH - Nominal width. shall be in
which are inter-related in-functions and are
multiples of 1 M.
produced to a set of instructions. With certain
PAD1
w SlRUCTURAL
DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?REFABRICAllON AND SYSTEMS
lJlLDlNC
w-7-
constraints, several plans are possible, using

the same set of components. The degree of
flexibility varies from system to system.
However, in all the systems there is a certain
order and discipline.
6.2 The following characteristics, among
others, are to be considered in devising a
system:
Intensified usage of spaces;
Straight and simple walling scheme;
Limited sizes and numbers of
components;
d) Limited opening in bearing walls;
e) Regulated locations of partitions;
0 Standardized service and stair units;
g) Limited sizes of doors and windows with
regulated positions;
h) Structural clarity and efficiency;
j) Suitability for adoption in low rise and
high rise blocks;
k) Ease of manufacturing, storing and
transporting;
m)Speed and ease of erection; and
n) Simple jointing system.
6.3 Prefabrication Swtems - The system of
prefabricated construction depends on the
extent of the use of prefab components, their
materials. sizes and the technique adopted for
their manufacture and use in building.
6.3.i OWN PKEFAB
SYSTEM -- This system

is based on the use of the basic structural
elements to form whole or part of a building.
The standard prefab concrete components
which can be used are:
a) Reinforced concrete channel units,
b) Hollow core slabs,
c) Hollow blocks and battens,
4 Precast planks and battens,
d Precast joists and tiles,
D Cellular concrete slabs,
IS) Prestressed; reinforced concrete slabs,
h) Reinforced/ prestressed concrete beams,
j) Reinforced/ prestressed concrete
columns,
k) Precast lintels and chujjas,
m) Reinforced concrete waffle slabs/shells,
n) Room size reinforced,! prestressed concrete panels,
p) Reinforced: prestressed concrete
walling elements, and
q) Reinforced: prestressed concrete
trusses.
VI-T-
No rr
sate.
-- The elements may be cast at the site or off the
Foundation for the columns could be of

prefabricated type or of the conventional cast
in-situ type depending upon the soil
conditions and loads; and the columns may
have hinged or fixed- base ccumections
depending upon the type of components used
and the method of design adopted:
6.3.1.1 There are two categories of open
prefab system depending on the extent of
prefabrication used in the construction as
given in 6.3.1.2 and 6.3.1.3.
6.3.1.2 P A R T I A L P R E F A B O P E N S Y S TEM - This system basically emphasises the
use of precast roofing and flooring
components and other minor elements like
lintels, chu@s, kitchen sills in conventional
building construction. The structural system
could be in the form of in-situ framework or
load bearing walls.
6.3. I .3 FULL PREFAB OPEN SYSTEM - In this
system almost all the structural components
are prefabricated. The filler walls may be of
bricks or of any other local material.
6.3.2 L ARGE P ANEL P R E F A B
SYSTEM -This system is based onthe useof
large prefab. components. The components
used are precast concrete large panels for
walls, floors, roofs, balconies, staircases,.etc.
The casting of the components could be at the
site or off the site.
Depending upon the extent of prefabrication,
this system can also lend itself to partial
prefab system and full prefab system.
4.3.2.1 Structural scheme with precast large
panel walls can be classified as:
a) CROSS WALL SYSTEM - In this scheme,
the cross walls are load hearing walls
whereas the facade walls are non-load
bearing. This system is suitable for high
rise buildings.
b) LONGITUDINALWALL SYSTEM - Inthis
case, cross walls are non-load bearing
whereas longitudinal walls are load
bearing walls. This system is suitable for
low rise buildings.
NOTE - A combination of the above systems with ali
load bearing walls can also be adopted.
6.?.2.2 Precast concrete walls could he:
a)
b)
WALLS-which could
be solid, hollow of ribbed; and
H O M O GENEOUS
NON-HOMOGENEOUS
WALLS -these
could be composite or sandwich panels.

NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE OF IIQ)IA
6.3.2.3 Based on the structural functions of

the walls. the walls could be classified as:
a) load bearing walls,
b) non-load bearing walls, and
c) shear wails
NOTE -This system derives its stability and stiffness

from the box units which arc formed by four adjacent
walls. Walls arc jointed to make rigid connections among
themselves. The box unit rests on plinth fodndation
which may be of conventional type or precast type.
6.4 Design. Considerations - The precast

structure should be analyzed as a monolithic
one and the joints in them designed to take the
forces of an equivalent discrete system.
Resistance to kofizontal loading shall be
provided by placing shear walls(in,diaphragm
braced frame type of construction) in two
directions at right angles or otherwise. No
account is to be taken of rotational stiffness, if
any, of the floor-wall joint in case of precast
bearing wall. buildings. The individual
components shall be designed,taking into
consideration the appropriate end conditions
and loads at various stages of construction.
The components of the structure shall be
6.3.2.5 TYPES OF PRECAST FLOORS designed for loads in accordance with Part VI
Depending upon the composition of units, Structural design, Section 1 Loads. In
precast flooring units could be homogeneous addition members shall be designed for
or non-homogeneous.
handling, erection and impact loads that
might be expected during handling and
a) Homogeneous floors could be solid slabs. erection.
cored slabs, ribbed or waffle slabs.
6.4.1 In some conventional forms of
b) Non-homogeneous floors could be construction, experience, has shown that the
multi-layered ones with combinations structures are capable of safely sustaining
of light weight concrete or
abnormal conditions of loading and
reinforced, prestressed concrete, with
remaining stable after the removal of primary
filler blocks.
structural members. It has been shown that
Depending upon the way the loads are some forms of building .structure and
particularly some industrialized large panel
transferred, the precast floors could be
classified as one way or two way systems have little reserve strength-to resist
forces not specifically catered for in the
systems.
design. In the light of this, therefore,
One way system transfers ioads to
recommendations made in 6.4.2 to 6.4.9
supporting members in one direction
should be kept in mind for ensuring stability
only. The precast elements which come
of
the structure.
under this category are: channel slabs,
hollow core slabs, hollow blocks and
6~4.2 Adequate buttressing of external wall
battens, battens plank system, channels
panels is important since these elements are
and tiles system, light weight cellular -not fully restrained on both sides by floor
concrete slabs, etc.
panels. Adequate design precautions may be
taken by the designer. Experience shows that
Two way systems transfer loads in both
the external. wall panel connections are the
the directions imparting loads on the
weakest points of a precast panel building.
four edges. The precast elements under
this category are room sized panels, two 6.4.3 It is equally important to provide
way ribbed or waffle slab systems, etc.
restraint to all load bearing elements at the
comers of the building. These elements and
the external ends of cross-wall units should be.
6.3.2.6, STAIRCASE SYSTEMS - Staircase
stiffened ; either by introducing columns as
system could consist of single flights withinbuilt risers and treads in the element only. The connectmg units or by jointing them to nonflights are normally unidirectional stmctural wall units which in emergency may
transferring the loads to sppporing landing support the load. Jointing of these units
should be done bearing in mind the need for
slabs or load bearing walls,
load support in an emergency.
6.3.3, BOX TYPE CONSTRUCTION - In this
6.4.4 In prefabricated construction, the
system,room size units are prefabricated and possibility of gas or other explosions which
erected at site.,Toilet and kitchen blocks could can remove primary structural elements
also be similarly prefabricated and erected at leading to progressive collapse of the structure
site.
shall be taken into account. It is, therefore,
6.3:2.4 Based on their locations and
functional requirements the walls are also
classified as:
external walls, which can be load
bearing or non-load bearing depending
upon the lay-out, are usually .nonhomogeneous walls of sandwiched type
to import better thermal comforts; and
b) internal walls providing resistance
against vertical loads, horizontal loads,
fire, etc, are normally homogeneous
walls.
?ABT Yl SYRWUIAI. DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?lIEFA~RICAYlON
AND SYSTEMS WILDING
w-7.
1
I
necessary to congider the possibility of

progressive collapse in which the failure or
displacement of one element of a structure
causes the failure or displacement of another
element and results in the partial or total
collapse of the building.
64.5 Provision in the design to reduce the
probability of progressive collapse is essential
m buildings of over six storcys and is *of
relatively higherpriority than for buildings of
lower height.
6.4.6 It is necessary to ensure that any local
damage to a structure does not spread to other
parts of the structure remote from the point of
mishap and that the overall stability is not
im aired, but it may not be necessary to
stiPfen,all parts of the structure against local
damage or collapse in the immediate vicinity
of a mishap, unless the design briefs
specificillly requires this to be done.
the details of all pre-formed units and their

seatings to ensure that they are sufficiently
robust to withstand the maximum stresses
that can arise from site conditions. Precast
concrete construction generally shall be
capable of withstanding the impact forces that
can arise from bad workmanship on site.
6.5 Bearingfor Precast Units - Precast units
shall, have a bearing at least of 100 mm on
masonry supports and of 73 mm at least on
steel or concrete. Steel angle shelf bearings
shall have a 100 mm horizontal leg to allow for
a 50mm bearing exclusive of fixing clearance.
When deciding to what extent, if any, the
bearing width may be reduced in special
circumstances, factors, such as loading, span,
height of wall and provision of continuity,
shall be taken into consideration.
7. JOINTS
6.4.7 Additional protection may be required

in respect of damage from vehicles; further, it
is necessary to consider the effect of damage to
or displacement of a load-bearing member by
an uncontrolled vehicle. It is strongly
recommended that jmportant structural
members are adequately protected by
concrete kerbs or similar method.
7.2 The design of joints shall be made in the

light of. their assessment with respect to the
following considerations:
4 FEASIBILITY - The feasibility of a joint
shall be determined by its load-carrying
capacity in the particular situation in
which the joint is to function.
64.8 In all aspects of erection that affect

structural design, it is essential that .the
designer should maintain a close liaison with
the builder/ contractor regarding the erection
procedures to be followed.
W P RACTICABILITY - Practicability of
6.4.9 Failures that have occurred during

construction appear to be of two types. The
first of these is the pack-of-cards type of
collapse in which the absence of restraining
elements, such as partitions, cladding or
shear walls, means that the structure is not
stable during the construction, period. The
second is the situation in which one element
falls during erection and lands on an element
below. The connections of the lower element
then :give way under the loading, both static
and dynamic, and a chain reaction of further
collapse is set up.
6.4.9.1 A precaution against the first form of
failure is that the overall stability of a building
shall be considered in all its erection stages as
well as in its completed state. All joints that
may be required to resist moments and shears.
during the erection. stage only, shall be
designed with these .in mind. Temporary
works required to provide stability during
constructionshall be designed carefufly.
6.4.9.2 Toguard against the second form of
failure, that is, the dropping of a unit during
erection, particular attention shall be given to
w-7-
joint shall be determined by the amount

and type of material required in
construction; cost of material,
fabrication and erection and the time for
fabrication and erection.
4 SERVICEABILITY - Serviceability snall
be determined by the joints/ expected

behaviour to repeated or possible overloading and exposure to climatic or
chemical conditions.
d) RRE-PROOFING
e) APPEARANCE
7.2 The following are the requirements of an
ideal structural joint:
a) it shall be capable of beingdesigned to
transfer the imposed load and moments
.with a known margin of safety;
b) It shall occur at logical locations inthe_
structure and at points which maybe
most readily analysed and aasily
reinforced;
c) It shall accept the loads without marked
displacement or rotation and avoid high
local stresses;
d) It shall accommodate tolerances .in
elements;
NATIONAL
JlLDINC
CODE OF INDIA
e) It shall require little temporary support,

permit adjustment and demand only a
few distinct operation to make;
f) It shall permit tffecti\;e inspection and
rectification;
g) It shall be reliable in service with other
parts of the building; and
h) It shall enable the structure to abliorb
sufficient energy during earthquakes so
as to avoid sudden failure of the
structure.
7.2. I Precast structures may have continuous
or hinged connections subject to providing
sufficient rigidity to withstand horizontal
loading. When only compressive forcesare to
be taken, hinged joints may be adopted. In
case of prefabricated concrete elements, load
is transmitted via the concrete. When both
compressive force and bending moment are to
be taken, rigid or welded joints may be
adopted; the shearing force is usually small in
the column and can be taken up bythe friction
resistance of the joint. Here load transmissiqn
is accomplished by steel inserted parts
together with concrete.
7.2.2 When considering thermal shrinkage
and heat effects, provision of freedom of
movement or introduction of restraint may be
considered.
7.3 Joining techniques/ materials normally
employed are:
a) Welding of cleats or projecting steel,
b) Overlapping reinforcement, loops and
linking steel grouted by concrete,
c) Reinforced concrete ties all round a
slab.
4 Prestressing.
d Epoxy grouting,
f-l Bolts and nuts connection, and
id A combination of the above.
TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/

STRUCTURES
8.1 Testing on Individual Components The component should be loaded for one
hour at. its full span with a total load
(including its own self weight) ofI:25 times
the sum of the dead and imposed loads used
in design. At the end of this time it should not
show any sign of weakness, faulty
construction or excessive deflection. Its
recovery one hour after the removal of the
test load, should not be less than 75 percent
of the maximum deflection recorded during
the test. If prestressed, it should not show any
visible cracks up to woiking load and should

~~;o;rcovery of not less than 85 percent in
8.2 Load Testing of Structure or Part of
structure -Loading test on a completed
structure should be made if required by the
specification or if there is a reasonable doubt
as to the adequacy of the strength of the
structure.
8.2.2 In such tests the structure should be
subjected to an imposed load equal to l-25
times the specified imposed load used in
design, and this load should be maintained
for a period 6f 24 hours before removal.
During the tests, struts equal in strength to
take the whole load should be placed in
position leaving a gap under the rriember.
8.2.f.l If within 24 hours of the removal of
the load, a reinforced concrete structure does
not show a recovery of at least 75 percent of
the maximum deflection shown during the24
hours under load, test loading should be
repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the
recovery is less than 80 percent, the structure
shall be deemed to be unacceptable.
8.2.1.2 If within 24 hours of the removal of
the load, prestressed concrete structure does
no! show a recovery of at least 85 percent of
the maximum deflection show? during the 24
hours under load, the test loading should be
repeated. The structure should be considered
to have failed, if the recovery after the second
test is not at least 85 percent of 0% maximum
deflection shown during the second test.
9. MANUFACTURE, STORAGE,
TRANSPORT AND ERECTION OF
PRECAST ELEMENTS
9.1 Manufacture of Precast Concrete
Elements
9.1. I A judicious location of precasting yard
with storage facilities, suitable transporting

and erection equipments and availability of
raw materials are the crucial factors which
should be carefully planned and provided for
effective and economic use of precast concrete
components in constructions.
9.1.2 M ANUFACTURE - The manufacture of
the components can be done in a centrally
located factory or in a site precasting yard set
up at or near the site of work.
9. I .2. I FACTORY PREFABRICATION Factory prefabrication is resorted to in a
centrally located plant for manufacture of
standardized components on a long term
basis. It is a capital intensive production
where work is done throughout the year
?APT Yl STRUCTURAL. DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?PEFASPICAllON AND SYSYEMS lUlLDING
n-7--
preferably under a closed shed to avoid effects

of seasonal variations. High level of
mechanization can always be introduced in
this system where the work can be organized
in a factory-like manner with the help of a
constant team of workmen.
The basic disadvantage in factory
prefabrication is the extra cost incidente of
transportation of elements from plant to site
of work where sometimes even the shape and
size of prefabricates get limited due to lack of
suitable transportation equipment, road
contours. etc. The organized labour of
permanent nature with regular benefits lead to
huge establishment cost which add to ultimate
;ost of production.
Y.I.,.? si I E PKI:.I:AHHICATION - In t h i s
scheme, rhe components are manufactured at
site or as near the site of work as possible.
This system is normally adopted for a specific
job order for a short period. The work is
normally carried out in open space with
locally available labour force. The equipment
machinery and moulds are of mobile nature.
Though there& definitecconom~with respect
to coht of trnnsportation. this system suffers
from hniic drawback of its non-suitability to
any higl; dcgrcc of mcchanilation and no
c:lahoratc arriingenlcnts lor quality control.
Normal henctits ot colltir:uily of work is not
;~vailahlc in this sys~cm 01 construction.
V.I.3 I he \,arious processes involved in the
m,~nulactt~rc 01 prccart clemcnts may
b e
classiflcd ilS ICJIIOWS.
9.IJ.l
\lAIS IKOCI~SS
cl Manufacture of inserts and other

finishing items to be incorporated in the
main precast products;
d)
d
Finishing the precast products; and

Testing of products.
9.1.3.3 SLBSIDIARY PROCESS -Ail- o t h e r

work involved in keeping the main production
work to a cyclic working:
a)
Storage of materials;
b) Transport of cement and aggregates;
c)
Transport of greer. concrete and reinforcement cages;
d)
Transport and stacking the precast

elements;
e)
Repairs and maintenance of tools, tackles

and machines: and
r)
Generation of steam, etc.
9.1.4 For the manufacture of precast

elements all the above processes shall be
planned in a systematic way to achieve the
following:
a) A cyclic technological method of working

to bring .in speed and economy in
manufacture;
b)
Mechanization of the process to increase

productivity and to improve quality;
c) The optimum production satisfying the

quality control requirements and to beep
up the expected speed of construction
aimed;
d) Better working conditions for the people

on the job; and
e) To minimize the effect of weather on the

manufacturing schedule.
9.1.3..? .\L:sll I,IKI PROCESS - - P r o c e s s

necessary for the successlrll completion of rhe
processes covered by the main process:
Y.1 5 The various stages of precasting can be

classified as in Table I on the basis of the
machine complexes required for the various
stages. This permits mechanization and
ratlonali7ation of work In the various stages.
In the precasting, stages 6 and 7 given in
Table I fo:m the main process in the
manufacture of precast concrete elements.
For these precasting stages there are man)
technological processes to suit the concrete
product under consideration which have
been proved rational. economical and time
saving. The technological line or process is
the theoretical solution for the method of
planning the work involved by using machine
complexes. Figure I illustrates diagramatically the various stages involved in a plant
process.
a) Mixing and manufacture oi fresh

concrete (done in a mix.ing qtation or b!; a
batching plant):
Y.1.6 The various accepted methods of

manufacture of precast units can be broadI>
classified into two methods:
b) Prefabrication of reinforcement cage

(done in a stee! yard oi uorkshop):
a) The Stand Method where the moulds

remain stationary at places,, when the
a) Providing
and asscmbltng the mou!tis.

placing reinforcement c,~pc in position
f o r reinforced concrete w o r k . a n d
stressing the wires i n the cilse 01
prestrcs&d elcmcnts;
b) Fi.xing of Inserts and tubes. where

necessary;
c.) Pouring the concrete into the moulds;
4 Vibrating the concrete and finishing;

e) Demoulding the forms and stacking the
precast products; and
Curing (steam curing. if necessary).
VI
,!Q
NATIONAL BlILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
__ --_. ..-..--.-TABLE I STAGES 8F PRECASTING CONCRETE PRODUCTS

(chlues 9.1.J and 9.11(g)]
No.
SL
P RECASTING
STAGE No.
(1)
9
(2)
I
ii)
NAME OF PIKCESS
Or~amo~s
IN V O L V ED
0)
(4)
Procurement and storage of

construction materials
Unloading and transpon of cement. coarse and fina

aggraga-and staeband storing tham in bins, silos
or storage sheds
Testing of raw materials
Tuting of all materials including steel
iii)
Design of concrete mix
Tating of raw materials, plotting of grading curves

and trial of mixes in laboratory
iv)
Making of reinforcement cages
Unloading of reinforcement bars from wagons or

lorries and stacking them in the steel yard, cutting,
bending, tying or welding the reinforcements and
making in the form of a cage, which cank directly
introduced into the mould
v)
Oiling and laying of moulds in

position
Moulds are cleaned, oiled and assembled and placed

at the right place
vi)
Placing of reinforcement cages,

inserts and fixtures
The reinforcement cages afe placed in the moulds with

spacers, ctc
vii)
Preparation of green concrete
Taking out aggregates and cement from bins, silos, etc.

batcliing and mixing
viii)
Transport of green concrete
Transport of green concrete from the mixer to the

moulds. In the case of precast method involving
direct transfer of concrete from mixer to the mould
or a concrete hopper attached lo the mould this
prefabrication stage is not necessary
ix)
Pouring and consolidation of

concrete
Concrete is poured and vibrated to a good finish
x)
IO
Curing of concrete and demoulding
Either a natural curing with water or an accelerated

curing using steam curing and other techniques. In
the case of steam curing using twnches or autoclaves,
this stage involves transport of moulds with the green
concrete into the trench or autoclave and taking
them out after the curing and demoulding elements
from the moukl. In the case of pre-tensioned elements cutting of protruding wires also falls in this
stage. In certain cases the moulds have 10 be partly
removed and inserts, have 10 be removed after
initial set. The total demoukiing is done after a
certain period and the components are then allowed
to be cured. All these fall in this operation
xi)
II
Stacking of precast elements
Lifting of precast elements from the mould and Iransporting to the stacking yard for further transport by
trailer or rail is part of this stag?
xii)
12
Testing of finished components
Tests are carried out on the components individually

and in combination to ensure the adequacy of their
strength
xiii)
I3
Miscellaneous
a) Generation of steam involving storing of coal or oil

necasary for generation of steam and providing steam
pipe connection up to the various technological lines
b) Repair of machines used in the production
NOTE -For ready mixed concrete, stages I. 2. 3 and 7 are not applicable.
?ARt vl STRUCTUIAL DESIGN ..L SECTION 7 ?REFABUCATlON AND SYSTSmd BIRLDINC
n-7-f 1
MOULD OILING
{1
i
BINDING
1
STRESSING
*
FILLING CONCRETE
1
COMPACTING
1
CURING AND
DETENSIONING
MOULD CLEANING
1
CURING
IN
YARD
_1
BY ROAD
BY RAIL
TESTING
TABLE 2 PpECASTlNG METHODS

(Clat@s P.l.b,md 9.9.1)
S L P RECASTING M
NO.
(1)
I)
ETHOD
(2)
*Individual mould method
W HERE U S E D
W EIGHTS
ADVANTAGES AND
REMARUS
(3)
(4)
(5)
a) Rib slabs, beams, girders. window panels,

box type units and
special elements
Any desired dimensions

and weight up to 20
tonnes, except for prestressed elements. as
below:
Length:
Less than 7 200 mm
Breadth.
Less than I 800 mm
Thickness:
Less than 300 mm
W e i g h t :
Up to 5 tonnes
(Precasting method
using moulds which
inay be,easily assembled
out of bottom and sides,
transportable, if neces- b) Prestressed railway
sleepers, parts of presary. Thii may be either
stressed girders, etc
in timber. ot in steel
using needle or mould
vibrators and capable
of taking prestressing
J
forces)
ii) Battery form method
(The shuttering panels
may be adjusted into
the form of a battery at
the required distances
equal to the thickness
of the concrete member)
iii) Stack method
D IMENSIONS AND
a) Strengthening of the
cross section possible
b) Openings are possible

in two planes
Interior wall panels, shell

elements. reinforced
concrete battens, rafters.
purlins and. roof and
floor slabs
Length: I8 m
Breadth: 3 m
Weight: 5 tonncS
Floor and roof slab

panels
Length: .4ny desired length

Breadth: I to 4 m
Weight: 5 tonnes
For casting identical reinforced or prestressed

panels one over the
other with separating
media interposed in
bet wcen
Length: 6 m
Breadth: 4 m
Weight: 5 tonnes
Suitable for manufacturi n g the external wall

pa&_+
iv) Tilting, mould method

(This method iscapable
of being kipped vertically using hydraulic
jacks)
Specially suitable for mass

productionaf wall panels where shuttering
cost is reduced to a large
extent and autoclave or
trench steam curing
may be adopted b)
taking the steam pipes
through the shuttering
panels
Long line prestressing bed

method
Double tees, rib slabs,

purlins, piles and beams
Length: Any desired

Breadth: 2 m
Height: 2 m
Weight: Up to IO tonnes
Ideally suited for pretensioned members
vi) Extrusion
method
(Lorg concrete mould
with constant cross section concreting and
vibration will be done
automatically just as in
concrete roads)
Roof slabs, foam concrete

wall panels and beams
Length: Any desired

Breadth. Less than 2 m
Height: Less than 3 m
May be used Hith advantage in the case of unremforced blocks, foam

concrete panels
v)
PART W SUKJCTURAL
DESIGN --SECTION 7 PIWFABRICATION
AND Sk3TEM.S lUlLDING
VL7
13
various processes involved are carried out

in a cyClic order at the same place, and
The
Flow Methodwhere the precast unit
b)
under consideration is in movement
according to the various processes
involved in the work which are carried
out in an assembly-line method.
The various accepted precasting methods are
listed in Table 2 with details regarding the
elements that can be mariufactured by these
methods.
9.2 Preparation and Storage of Materials Storage of materials is of considerable
importance in the precasting industry, as a
mistake in planning in this aspect can greatly
influence the economics df production. From
experience in construction, it is clear that
there will be very high percentages of loss of
materials as well as poor quality due to bad
storage and transport. So, in a precast factory
where everything is produced with special
emphasis on quality, proper storage and
preservation of building materials, especially
cement, coarse and fine aggregates, is of prime
importance.
9.2.1 S TORAGE OF C EMENT -Storage of
cement can be effected either in specially
erected storage sheds whqe cement can be
stored in the form of bags or in silos where it is
stored loose. For details, see Part VII
Constructional practices and safety.
9.2.2 S TORACE
A GGREGATES
OF
C OARSE
AND
FINE
-The coarse and fine

aggregates can be stacked either in open or in
bunkers. In the case of open storage, the
Parallel - Boxes method with dividing walls
up to about 3 metres in height, is considered to
be the most convenient and economical. The
dividing walls can be made up of precast
R.C.C. retaining walls or steel or timber
panels inserted between the columns. In
planning this method of storage, the following
points shall be kept in mind:
a) The stored aggregate shall be protected
from mixing up with the local earth, clay
or coal; and
The
various bins or boxes shall be
b)
properly designated about the size and
type of material to be stored. Mistakes
occurring due to dumping of one
class/size of aggregates in the wrong bin
should be avoided.
Yetanother method of open storage is by
heaps under ,which a tunnel is provided with
conveyor belt system to extract fromthe heap
whatever material is required for preparation
and mixing of concrete.
In planning the storage of,coarsr and tine
aggregates, bins, silos, etc. shall have a
..
,714
minimum storage capacity and shall be

designed to suit the supply requirements of the
factory. As far as batching silos are
concerned, 2 to 4 hours storage capacity shall
be provided.
9.3 Moulds
9.3.1 Moulds for the manufacture of precast
elements may be of steel, timber, concrete and
plastic or a combination thereof. For the
design of moulds for the various elements,
special importance should be given to easy
demollding and ,assembly of the various
parts. At the same time rigidity, strength and
watertightness of the mould, takin into
consideration forces due to pouring of green
concrete and vibrating, are also important.
9.3.2 TOLERANCES -The moulds have to be
designed in such a way to take into
consideration the tolerances given in 5.
9.3.3 S LOPES OF THE M OULD W ALLS -For
easy demoulding of the elements from the
mould with fixed sides, the required slopes
have to be maintained. Otherwise there is a
possibility of the elements getting stuck up
with the mould at the time of demoulding.
9.4 Accelerated Hardening -In most of the
precasting factories, it is economidal to use
faster curing methods or artificial .curing
methods, which in turn will allow the elements
to be demoulded much earlier permitting
early re-use of the forms. Any of the following
methods may be adopted:
a)
BYHEATING T H E A G G R E G A T E S A N D
W ATER B EFORE M IXING T H E
CONCRETE-BY h e a t i n g o f t h e
aggregates as well as water to about 70C
to 80C before making the concrete mix
and placing the same in the moulds,

sufficiently high earlier strengths are
developed to allow the elements to be
stripped and transported.
b)
S TEAM C URING -Steam curing may be

done under high pressure and high
temperature in an autoclave. This
technique is more suited to smaller
elements. Alternatively, this could be
done using low pressure steam having
temperature around 80C. This type of
curing shall be done asspecified in 9.5.2.
For light weight concrete products when
steam cured under high pressure, the
drying shrinkage is reduced considerably.
Due to this reason, high pressure steam
curing in autoclave IS specified for light
weight low densities ranging from 300 to
I 000 kg/ m3. For normal heavy concretes
as well as light weight concretes of higher
densities, low pressure steam curing may
NATIONAL
BUlLDiNG &DE OF INDIA
be desirable as it does not involveusmg

high pressures and - temperatures
requiring high investment in an autoclave
(see also 9.5.2).
S TEAM INJECTION D URING M IXING OF
C ONCRETE ---In t h i s m e t h o d l o w
pressure saturated steam is injected into
the mixer while the aggregates are being
mixed. This enables the heating up of
concrete to approximately 6OC. Such a
concrete after being placed in the moulds
attains high early strength.
d) HEATED AIR METHOD --In this method,
the concrete elements are kept in contact
with hot air with a relative humidity not
less than 80 percent. This method is
specially usefL1 for light weight concrete
products using porous coarse aggregates.
e) H OT W ATER M ETHOD -In this method,
the concrete elements are kept in a bath of
hot water around 50C to 80C. The
general principles of this type of curing
are not much different from steam curing.
E LECTRICAL M ETHOD -The pa&age of
current through the concrete panels

generates heat through its electroresistivity and accelerates curing. In this
method, the concrete is heated up by an
alternating current ranging from 50 volts
for a plastic concrete and gradually
increasing to 230 V for the set concrete.
This method is normally used for massive
concrete products.
C ONSOLIDATION BY S PINNING -Such a
method is generally used in the
centrifugal moulding of pipes and such
units. The spinning motion removes
excess water, effects consolidation and
permits earlier demoulding.
P RESSED C ONCRETE -This method is
suitable for fabricatiod of small or large
products at high speed of production.
A 100-200 tonnes press compresses the
wet concrete in rigid moulds and expells
water. Early handling and a dense wear
resistant concrete is obtained.
V ACUUM T REATMENT -This
method
removes the surplus air and water from

the newly placed concrete as in slabs and
similar elements. A suction up to about 70
percent of an atmosphere is applied for 20
to 30 minutes per centimetre thickness of
the units.
CONSDLIDATION BY. SH O C K - T h i s
method is suitable for small concrete
units dropped repearedly from a height in
strong moulds. The number of shocks
required to remoue excess water and air
may vary from 6 to 20 and the height of
lift may be up to as much as half the depth
of the mould.
9.4.1 After the accelerated curing of the

above products by any of the above accepted
methods, the elements shall be cured further
by normal curing methods to attain fullfinat
strength.
9.5 Curing
9.5.1 The curing of the prefabricated
elements can, E effected by the normal

methods of _curmg by sprinkling water and
keeping the elements moist. This can also be
done in the case of smaller elements by
immersing them in a specially made water
tanks.
9.5.2 STEAM CURING
9.5.2.1 The steam curing of concrete products
shall take place under tarpaulin in tents, under
hoods, under chambers, in tunnels or in
special autoclaves. The steam shall have a
uniform quality throughout the length of the
member. The precast elements shall be so
stacked, with sufficient clearance between
each other and the bounding enclosure, so as
to allow proper circulation of steam.
9.5.2.2 The surrounding walls, the top cover
and the floor of steam curing chamber or
tunnel or hood shall be so designed as not to
allow more than 1 kcal/m*,h/C.
9.5.2..3 The inside face. of the steam curing
chamber, tunnel or hood shall have adampproof layer to maintain the humidity of steam.
Moreover, proper slope shall be given to the
floor and the roof to allow the condensed
water to be easily drained away. At first, when
steam is let into the curing chambers, theair
inside shall be allowed to go out through
openings provided in the hoods or side walls
which shall be closed soon after moist steam is
seen jetting out.
9.5.2.4 It is preferable to let in steam at the
top of the chamber through perforated
pipelines to allow uniform entry of steam
throughout the chamber.
9.5.2.5 The fresh concrete in the moulds
should be allowed to get the initial set before
allowing the concrete to come into contact
with steam. The regular heating up of fresh
concrete product from about 20C to 35C
should start only after a waiting period
ranging from 2 to 5 hours depending on the
setting time of cement used. It may be further
noted that steam can be let in earlier than this
waiting period provided the temperature of
the concrete product does not rise beyond
35C within this wiiting period.
9.5.2.6 The second stage in steam curing
?MT Yl SYUUCTURAL D@lGN - SECllON 7 PREFABRICATION AND SYSTEMS
BUILDING
VI_,1 5
process is to heat up the concrete elements,

moulds and the surroundings in the chamber:
4 In the low pressure steam curing the airspace around the member is heated up to
a temperature of 7YC to 80C at a
gradual rate, usua.lly not faster than 30
deg per hour.
This process takes around Ii to 2f hours
depending upon outside temperature.
b) In the case of curing under high pressure
steam in autoclaves, the temperature and
pressure are gradually built up for a
period of about 4 hours.
inherent dangers of breakage and damage

caused by supporting other than at two
positions, and also by the careless placing of
packings (for example, not vertically one
above the other). Ribs, comers and intricate
projections from sohd section should be
adequately protected. Packing pieces shall not
discolour, disfigure or otherwise Ermanently
cause mark on units or members. Stacking
shall be arranged or the precast units should
be protected, so as to prevent the
accumulation of trapped water or rubbish,
and if necessary to reduce the risk of
efflorescence.
9.5.2.7 The third stage of steam curing is to 9.6.1 The following points shall be kept in
maintain the uniform temperature and view during stacking:
pressure for a duration depending upon
4 Care should be taken to ensure that the
thickness of the section. This may vary from 3
flat elements are stacked with right side
to s$ hours in the case of low pressure steam
up. For identification, top surfaces
curmg and 4 to 7 hours in the case of high
should be clearly marked.
pressure steam curing.
Stacking
should be done on a hard and
b)
suitable
ground
to avoid any sinking of
9.5.2.8 The fourth stage of steam curing is the
support when elements are stacked.
gradual cooling down of concrete products
and surroundings in the chamber and
4 In case of horizontal stacking, packing
normalization of the pressure to bring it at par
materials must be at specified locations
with outside air. The maximum cooling rate,
and must be exactly one over the other to
which is dependent on the thickness of the
avoid cantilever stress in panek.
member, should normally not exceed 30 deg
4 Components should be packed in a
per hour.
uniform way to avoid any undue
projection of elements in the stack which
9.5.3 Before the concrete products are
normally ,is a source of accident.
subjected to any accelerated method of
curing, the cement to be used shall be tested in
accordance with accepted standards (see 9.7 Handling Arrangements
9.7.1 Lifting and handling positions shall be
Part V Building materials) especia.lly for
soundness, setting time and suitability for clearly defined particularly where these
sections are critical. Where necessary special
steam curing.
facilities, such as bolt holes or projecting
9.5.3.1 In the case of elements manufactured loops, shall be provided in the units and full
by accelerated curing methods, concrete instructions supplied for handling.
admixtures to reduce the water content can be
allowed to be used. The normal aeration 9.7.2 For precast prestressed concrete
agents used to increase the.workability of members, the residual prestress at the age of
concrete should not be allowed to be used. Use particular operation of handling and erection
of calcium chloride should be avoided for shall be considered in conjunction with any
reinforced concrete elements.
stresses caused by the handling or erection of
member. The compressive stress thus
9.53.2 In al1 these cases. the difference computed shall not exceed SO percent of the
between the temperature of the concrete cube strength of the concrete at the time of
product and the outside temperature should handling and erection. Tensile stresses up to a
1101 be rnk>re than 60C for concretes up to
limit of 50 percent above those specified in
M 30 and 75% for concretes greater than
Part VI Structural design, Section 5 Concrete
M 45 In t hr case nf light weight concrete, the shall be permissible.
ditference in temperature should not be more
than 600-C for concretes less than M 25. For 9.8 Identification and Marking-All precast
concretes greater than M50, the temperature units shall bear an indelibie identification,
differences can go up to 75C.
location and orientation marks as and where
necessary. The date of manufacture shall also
9.6 Stacking During Transport and
be marked on the units.
.Storage Fvery precaution shall be taken
against over-stress or damage, by the provision 9.8.1 The identification markings on the
nf sunable packings at agreed points of drawings shall be the same as that indicated in
support. Particular attention isdirected to the the manufacturers literature and shall be
w,_* 6
NATIONAL
LWDINC CODE OF INDIA
shown in a table on the setting schedule

together with the length, type, site of the unit
and the sizes and arrangement of all
reinforcement.
9.9 Transport -Transport of precast
elements inside the faetory and to the site of
erection is of considerable importance not
only from the point of view of economy but
also from the point of view of design and
efficient management. Transport of precast
elements must be carried out with extreme
care to avoid any rk and distress in elements
P as possible in the same
and handled as ar
orientation as it is to be placed in final
position.
9.9.1 T RANSPORT INSIDE
FACTORYTransport of precast elements moulded inside

the factory depends on the method of
production, selected for the manufacture as
given in Table 2.
THE
9.9.2 TRANSPORT F ROM S TACKING YARD

I NSIDE THE F ACTORY TO THE S ITE OF
ERECTION -Transport of precast concrete
elements from the factory to the site of
erection should be plannedm such a way so as
to be in conformity with the traffic rules and
regulations as stipulated by the Authorities.
The size of the elements is often restricted by
the availability of suitable transport
equipment, such as tractor-cum-trailers, to
suit the load and dimensions of the member in
addition to the load-carrying capacity of the
bridges on the way.
9.9.2.1 While transporting elements in
various systems, that is, wagons, trucks,
bullock carts, care should be taken to avoid
excessive cantilever actions and desired
supports are maintained. Special care shauld
be taken at location of sharp bends and on
uneven or slushy roads to avoid undesirable
stresses in elements.
9.9.2.2 Before loading the elements in the
transporting media, care should be taken to
ensure that the base packing for supporting
the elements are located at specified positions
only. Subsequent packings must be kept
strictly one over the other.
9.10 Erection -In the erection of precast

elements*, all the following items of work are
meant to be included:
a) Slinging of the precast element;
b) Tying up of erection ropes connecting to
the erection hook,
c) CIeaning of the elements and the site of
erection;
d) Cleaning of the steel inserts before
incorporation in the joints, lifting up of
~nmucnmu
omaa-ascllom
e)
r)
8)
h)
j)
k)
the elements, setting them down into the

correct envisaged position;
Adjustment to get the stipulated level,
line and plumb;
Welding of cleats;
Changing of the erection tackles;
Putting up and removing of the necessary
scaffolding or supports;
Welding of the inserts, laying of
reinforcements in joints and grouting the
joints; and
Finishing the joints to bring the whole
work to a workmanlike finished product.
9.10.1 In view of the fact that the erection

work in various construction jobs using
prefabricated concrete elements differs from
place to place depending on the site
conditions, safety precautions in the work are
of utmost importance. Hence only those
skilled foremen, trained workers and fitters
who have been properly instructed about the
safety precautions to be taken should be
employed on the job. For additional
information, see Part VII Constructional
practices and safety.
9.20.2 Transport of people, workers or
visitors, by using cranes and hoists should be
strictly prohibited on an erection site.
9.10.3 In the case of tower cranes running on
rails, the track shall not have a slope more
than 0.2 percent in the longitudinal dtrection.
In the transverse direction the rails shall lie in
a horizontal plane.
9.Z0.i The track of the crane should be daily
checked to see that all fish plates and bolts
connecting them to the sleepers are in place
and in good condition.
9.20.5 The operation of all equipment used
for handling and erection shall follow the
operations manual provided by the
manufacturer. All safety precautions shall be
taken in the operations of handling and
erection.
9.11 A tkiochved Celluh (concrete -The
manufacture of cellular concrete products
differs from that. of dense concrete in certain
respects as given below:
a) The manufacture of celhrlar concrete
being a highly controlled process has to
be done in a factory;
b) The princi al raw materials are cement or
lime and P
me inateriab (silicious sand, fly
ash, granulated bIast furnace slag);
c) The siIicious,materiaI is ground fine& in a
ball-mill and the slurry is prepared with
rmmAnlcAmoN@JDsYsmMs
mmg4lNG
VW.
*.
e)
8)
predetermined quantity of cement or lime

and water. Gas generating materials and
harmless additives are also added in the
required amount before the concrete is
poured into the moulds;
The cellular concrete is cast in standard
moulds and the various components are
cut to the required size before it is
autoclaved;
Curing is done in autoclaves at high
temperatures (18OOC to 2ooPC) ahd at
high pressures (7 to 15 kgf/cm). The
components are taken out after they are
fully autoclaved;
Each slab is provided with tongue at one
side and groove at the other or any other
provision is made to transfer load from
one unit to another; and
In view of the above, there will be some
changes in the stages of manufacture
given in Table 1.
10. EQUIPMENT
10.1 General-The equipment used in the

precast concrete industry can be classified into
the following categories:
a) Machinery required for quarrying of
coarse and fine aggregates;
W Conveying equipment, such as belt
conveyors, cham conveyors! screw
conveyors, bucket elevators, hoists, etc;
cl Concrete mixing machines;
4 Concrete vibrating machines;
e) Erection equipment, such as cranes,
derricks, hoists, chain pulling blocks, etc;
9 Transport machinery, such as tractorcum-trailers, dumpers, lorries, locomotives, motor boats and rarely even
helicopters;
s) Workshop machinery for making and
repairing steel and timber moulds;
h) Bar s@ghtening, bending and welding
machmes to make reinforcement cages;
3 Minor tools and tackles, such as wheel
barrows, concrete buckets, etc; and
JO Steam generation plant for accelerated
curing.
In addition to the above, pumps and soil
corn actmg machinery are required at the
builJring site for the executton of civil
engineering projects involving prefabricated
components.
Each of the above groups can further be
classified into various categories of machines
and further to various other types depending
on the souree of power and capacity.
,,Y
IO.2 Mechanization of he Consrruction and

Erection Processes -The various processes
can be mechanized as in any other industry for

attaining the advantages of mass production
of identical elements which in turn will
increase productivity and reduce the cost of
production in the lon run, at the same time
guaranteeing quality for the end-product. On
the basis of the degree of mechamxation used,
the various precasting factories can be divided
into three categories:
a) With simple mechanization,
b) With partial mechanization, and
c) With complex mechanization leading to
automation.
10.2.1 In simple mechanization, simple
mechanically operated implements are used to
reduce the manual labour and increase the
speed.
10.2.2 In partial mechanization, the manual
work is more or less eliminated in the part of a
process. For example, the batching plant for
mixing concrete, hoists to lift materials to a
great.height and bagger and bulldozer to do
earthwork come under this category.
10.2.3 In the case of complex mechanization
leading to automation, a number of processes
leading to the end-product are all mechanized
to a large extent (without or with a.little
manual or human element involved). This
type of mechanization reduces manual work
to the absolute minimum and guarantee the
mass production at a very fast rate and cheap
price.
10.2.4 The equipment shall conform to
accepted standards as listed in Part VII
Constructional practices and safety.
II. PREiABRICATD STRUCTURAL
11.1 For the design and construction of
composite structures made up of prefabricated structural units and cast in-si&
concrete, reference may be made to good
practice [VI-7(l)]*.
11.2 For design and construction of preust
reinforced and restressed concrete ttianlu_
lated trusses re?crence may be made to good
practive [VI-I(2)].
* In thisrction, wberc rcfcrcncc h made togood practice
o r *ted rtantt~rds in rrlrtion to muefisl
spccificitiqn, design, testing o r conrtructioo

proadum, the appropriate document listed at tbc end
of this section may k used as l guide to the
interpretation of this tem~.
NAllONAL
CootoF~
11.3 For brief design and construction of

floors and roofs using precast doubly-curved
shell units, waffle units, ribbed or cored units
[VI-7(3)].
11.4 For construction of floors and roofs
with joists and filler blocks reference may be

made to good practice [VI-7(&)3.
11.5 For the requirements of autoclaved
reinforced cellular concrete floor, roof and
wall slabs reference may be made to accepted
standards [VI-7(>)].
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as good practice and accepted
standards in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a standard
shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standardsJisted may be used by the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this part,fsection.
1) IS: 3935-1966 Code of practice for

composite construction
2) IS: 3201-1965 Criteria for the design and

construction of precast concrete trusses
3) IS: 6332-1971 Code of practice for

construction of floors and roofs using
precast doubly-curved shell units
design and construction of floors and
roofs using precast reinforced; preslressed concrete ribbed or cored units
precast reinforced concrete waffle units
4) IS : 6061 (Part I)-197 1 Code of practice
for construction of floor and roof with
joists and hollow filler blocks : Part I
With hollow concrete filler blocks
?ARt Vl STPUCTURAL
IS : 6061 (Part II)-1971 Code of practice

for cbnstruction of floor and roof with
joists and hollow filler blocks : Part FK
With hollow clay filler blocks
5) IS : 6073- 1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor
and roof slabs
wall slabs
IS: 6441 (Part VI)-1973 Methods of test
for autoclaved cellular concrete products:
Part VI Strength, deformation and
cracking of flexural members subject to
bending-Short duration IoadinR test
IS : 6441 (Part VII)-1973 Methods of test
for autoclaved cellular concrete products:
Part VII Strength, deformation and
cracking of flexural members subject to
bending-Sustained loading test
D E S I G N - SECTlOW ? ?RECABRlCAllON A N D SYSTEMS llUll.DINC
VP
0m
-.
GROUP
B U R E A U
O F
I N D I A N STANQ,ARDS
MANAK BHAVAN, 9BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHl-I 10002
.SP 7(3) : 1983

FIRST REPRINT AUGUST 198s
SECOND REPRINT JANUARY 1991
Q BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 1984
UDC 69 : 006.76
ISBN 81-7061-013-3
PRICE Rs 100.00
-
PRINTED IN INDIA AT CENTRAL ELECTRIC PRESS, NEW DELHI 110028 AND

PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHI 110002
FOREWORD
Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of
development, be it housing, transport, mdustry, irrigation, power, agriculture,
education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outlay in any Plan. Half of the total money spent onconstruction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative,
educational, medic@, municipal and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about
half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. In a Five-Year Plan of, say,
Rs 1 560 billion, about Rs 780 billion would be spent on construction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings of various types and occupancies. It
is imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returns are assured and
wastage in construction is avoided.
Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of
operations involved in construction, such as administrative, organisational, financial
and technical.aspects, be studied in depth. For this study, a Panel of Experts was
appointed in 1965 by the.Planning Commission and its recommendations are found in
the Report on Economies in Construction Costs published in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely, controllingand regulating buildings
through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooksreceived the attention of the
Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed that some of the prevailing
methods .of construction are outmoded; some designs are overburdened with safety
factors and there are other design criteria which, in the light of newer techniques and
methodologies, could be rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activityin the country wherever
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building materials and
the latest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not
These studies resulted in a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared
departments, municipal bodies and other construction agencies. The Indian
Standards Institution.was entrusted by the Planning Commission with the preparation
.of the National .Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council in
1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare the various parts
of the Code. The Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects,
t6wn planners, materials experts, structural, construction, electrical illumination,airconditioning, acoustics and public health engineers. These experts were drawn from
the Central and State Governments, local bodies, professional institutions and private
agencies. The first version of the COW was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the IS1 to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, designing and construction activities. For this,
State-wise implementation conferences were organized with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, buiiding and plumbing services Installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These conferences have been useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the
interests concerned. These conferences have also helped in the establishment of
Action Committees to look into the actual implementation work carried out by the
construction departments, loGa bodies and other agencies in different States. The
Action Committees representing all interests in individual States met regularly to
review and consider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks, manuals,
etc, as well as buildingbyelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city and town levels,
zillaparishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in tine with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. Arising out of this,
V
considerable progress has been made by most of the statesin revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of ISl.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other local bodies in the States
consideration.
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising buildingbyelaws and PWD
above.
information contained in various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
of minimum provisions designed to prqtect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and healthaspects of buildings; so long as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods ofdesign and construction is
administrative regulatiqns, development control rules and general building
structural design; rules for Pesign of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
public during construction; and rules ,for erection of signs Bnd outdoor display
structures.
building* and architectural control. The increase in population in the years to come
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades andconsequently at
this period. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance and special
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in
The changes incorporated in the present Code have beenspecified in the Foreword to
VI

fire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities in- the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibratton, air filter, automatic control, energy conservation for air-conditioning; and
The process of preparation of
knowledge on various aspects of building construction.
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, usersviews over a
period of time pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in to the Code from time to time to make it a living
document.
It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.
requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee for Corrective Action.
I part of the Nationai Building Code of India 1983 arid contains

nal Practices and Safety which would guide the construction
40,execute the various constructional operations in a safe and
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC64

CHAIRMAN
W-51 .Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
REPRESENTING
MEMBERS
DR B. M. AHUJA
SHRI V. ASRANI PAHALAJ
The Institution of, Surveyors, New Delhi
SHRI J. P. BAJAJ
SHRI SASIDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B A L W A N T SINGH
New Delhi 110 017)
The
Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
SHRI J. R. BHALLA
In personal capacity (A-2136Safdarjang Enclave,
SHRI M. S. BHATIA
New Delhi 110 016)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation
SHRI H. U. WJLAN~
Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI H. K. YADAV(A/ternate)
SHRI C. S. CHANDRASEKHARA
SHRI R. CHANNABASAPPA
SHRI A. ~HATTERJI
Committee), Bombay
Public Works Department, Govt of Tamil Nadu
CHIEF ENGINEER (BUILDINGS )
(P AND .D CIRCLE) (Alternate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (DESIGNS)
Designs Organization), New. Delhi
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (Alternate)
In personal capacity (A-9133 Vasant Vihar,
S HRI D. N. CHGPRA
New Delhi 110 057)
M. N. Dastur & Co Private Limited, Calcutta
S HRI D. S. DESAI
P~OF DINESH M OHAN
Roorkee
S HRI R. C. MANGAL (Alternate)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
DIRECTOR
DIRECTOR (CIVIL ENGG)
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (Alternate)
DIRECTOR S TANDARDS (CIVIL)
Research, Designs & Standards Organization
D IRECTOR ( ENGG S ERVICES & PROJECTS) Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
CITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI J. DURAI RA J
In personal capacity (DI/ 141 Satya Marg,
New Delhi 110 021)
G ENERAL SECRETARY
SHRI S. S. GILL
Public Works Department, Government of Punjab
SHRI V. K. GUPTA
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
SHRI K. DEVARAJAN (Alternate)
S HRI N. JAGANNATH
Steel Authority of India Limited, New belhi
SHRI !. C %ZPUR
Danfoss (India) Limited, Bombay
L)R R. X. GUPTA (Alternate)
Regional Research Laboratory (CSIR), Jorhat
Sari A. C. KHAZANCHI
North
Eastern Council, Shillong
SIli<! [. KKISHNAN
VIII
MEMBERS
REPRESEnTING
SHKI M. Z. KWEN
SHKI D. S. HAKPAL.ANI
Tata Consulting Engineers, Bombay
(AIrernate)
S HRI MADAN MO H A N
S HRI MAHENDRA RA J
S HRI A. D. PAVATE (Alrernate)
S HRI G. C. .MATHUR
SHRI M. M. MISTRY. (Alternate)
S HRI G. D. MATHUR
Directorate General of Factory Advice Service and

New Delhi
D R S. MAUDGAL
S HRI P. N. MEH~OTRA

New Delhi
In personal capacity (A -101 Anand Bihar,
S HRI G. B. MEYON
S HRI K. K. NAMBIAR

In personal capacity (RatnanaJaya,lcS First Crescettr
S HRI R. NATRAJAN
S HRI M. D. PATEL
S HRI I. K. MODI (Allernare)
P RESIDENT
SHRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RAGHU
S HRI A. RAMAN
Qntral Public Works Department, New Delhi

SHRI D. RAGURAMAN (Alternate)

S HRI N. V. RAMAN
SBRI ZACHARIA G EORGE (Alternate)
S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIAN~
S HRI V. S. RANE
S HRI B. K. RO Y
S HRI D. P. ROY C HOWDHARY
SHRI D. P. GHOSH (Alternate)
S HRI T. K. SARAN
SHRI T. S. RN-NAM (Alternate)
S HRI H. J. SH A H
S HRI R. G. GANDHI (Alrernure)
S HRI R. L. SURI
S HRI M. THYAGARAJAN
SHKI B. T. UN W A L L A
SHKI Y. K. MEHT~ (Ahernate)
Brig D. R. KATHUKIA (Ahernute)
DK H. C. VISVESVAKAYA
New Delhi J JO 092)

Park, Gandhi Nagar, Adyar, Madras 600 020)
Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun

Ministry of Works & Housing. (CPHEEO)
Madras
In personal capacity (.I/3 East Pate1 Nagur, New
Delhi 110 008)
PI&C Works & Housing Department, Gowmx%m
West Bengal
Bureau of Public Enterprises (,Ministry of Finance),
New Delhi
Suri & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,
New Delhi
Indian Institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
The Concrete Association of India, Bombay and
Cervent Research Institute of India, New Delhi
IX
MEMBERS
SHKI D. AJ~THA SIMHA, Deputy Dtrector
General [Former Director (Civ
Engg) 1
SHIU Gl RAMAN, Director (Civ Engg)
REPRESENTING
Director General, ISI (Ex-officcio Member)
FORMER SECRETARY
SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA

Deputy Director General [Former Director (Civ Engg)],kW
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Director (Civ Engg),ISI
JOINT SECRETARY
SHRl J. VENKATARAMAN
Sr. Deputy Director (Civ Engg),ISI
Panel for Constructional Practices and Safety, BDC 64 : Pl 1

CONVENER
SHR~ D. N. CHOPRA
MEMBERS
SHRI V. S. AGRAWALA
LT-COL G. D. BADLANI (Alrernate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (TRAINING )
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(TRAINING) (Alfernare)
DIRECTOR (CIVIL ENGINEERING )
SHRI H. N. GUPTA
SHRI G. VAIDYANATHAN (Alfernate)
BRIG HARI~H CHANDRA
SHRI V. M. DHARAP (Alternate)
SHRI P. N. M EHROTRA
SHRI G. B. MENON (Alternate)
In personal capacity (A-9133 Vusant Vihor,

New Delhi 1100.57)

Director General of Factory Advice Service Bt
Labour Institute (Ministry of Labour),
Bombay
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL

PRACTICES & SAFETY
PART I
DEFINITIONS
Section 1 Loads
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Section 6 Steel
PART VIII
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES
Installation of Lifts and Escaiators
PART 1X PLUMBING SERVICES

Section I Water Supply
PART X
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL

PRACTICES AND SAFETY
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
1. SCOPE
...
...
3. GENERAL
...
4. STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIA LS
...
5. UNLOADING RAIL ROAD WAGONS AND MOTOR VEHICLES .,.
12
SECTION i CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES

2. PLANNING
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING PRACTICES
SECTION 3 SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION OF ELEMENTS OF A BUILDING

6. GENERAL
.*.
13
7. TERMINOLOGY
...
13
8. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE OF SIDE WALLS AND

TEMPORARY ENCROACHMENTS
*.*
14
9. TESTING
...
14
...
14
10. INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF

HAZARDOUS DEFECTS
?ARt Vll
CONSTWClIONAL
?RACTKW
AND
SAFITY
II. FOUNDATIONS
...
14
12. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS_ AND COMMON HAZARDS

DURING EXCAVATION
...
IS
13. PILING AND OTHER DEEP FOUNDATIONS
...
16
14. WALLS
...
18
1.5. COMMON HAZARDS DURING WALLING
...
19
16. ROOFING
...
20
17. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION

OF CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES (HIGH RISE
BUILDINGS)
...
21
18. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION

OF STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
...
24
19. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
...
26
20. FINISHES
...
28
21. FRAGILE FIXTURES
...
28
22. SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS
...
28
23. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND LIFTS
...
29
...
29
2s. CONSTRUCTION
...
30
26. GENERAL
...
30
27. PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION
...
30
28. PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION
...
31
29. SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS
...
31
30. WALLS
...
31
31. FLOORING
...
31
32. CATCH PLATFORM
...
32
33. STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND LADDERS
...
32
34. DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN SPECIAL TYPES AND

ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURES
...
32
35. LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
...
33
36. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
...
33
37. MISCELLANEOUS
...
33
38. FIRST-AID
I..
34
...
35
MACHINERY
SECTION 4 SAFETY IN DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
APPENDIX A
PROGRAMME EVALUATION AND REVIEW

TECHNIQUE AND CRITICAL PATH METHOD
VW
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES

AND SAFETY
0.
FOREWORD
0.1 This part of the Code emphasizes the importance of carrying out all constructional operations in a safe and efficient manner. Workers in large number,both skilled
and unskilled, are engaged in the innumerable construction works. Due to increased
tempo of such a building activity and large scale mechanization, hazards of accidents
have increased considerably. It has, therefore, become imperative that adequate safety
rules are laid down for every phase of construction work.
Planning the various constructional operations before hand and making adequate
arrangements for procurement and storage of materials, and the machinery to get
work done is as important as carrying out these constructional operations in accordance with good practice. Lack of planning or defective planning may result in
avoidable delay in the completion of work and consequently increased hazards from
the point of view of fire, health and structural soundness.
0.2 The first version of this art was repared in 1970. As a result of experience
gained in implementation andPeedback Jrata received as well as the reparation of new
standards in the field of constructional practices and safety a neeBto revise this part
was felt. This revision incorporates a number of important changes and additions.
0.2.1 Information regarding handling operations, that is unloading, stacking, lifting,
loading and conveying of building mater&, has also been given now along with the
storage practices.
0.2.2 Additional information regarding the use of ladders; safety requirements for
floor and wall openings, railings and toe boards; piling and other deep foundations;
constructions involving use of hot bituminous materials; and erection of structural
steel work and concrete framed structures, etc, has been given.
0.3 The information contained in this part is largely based on the following Indian
Standards:
IS: 3696 (Part I)-1966 Safety code for s&folds and ladders: Part I Scaffolds
IS: 3696(Part II)- 1966 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders: Part II Ladders
IS: 3764-1966 Safety code for excavation work
IS: 4082-1977 Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials at site (fzrst revision)
IS: 4130-1976 Safety code for demolition of buildingsvrst revision)
IS: 4912-1978 Safety requirements for floor and wall openings, railings and toe
boards (/Trst revi.&@
IS: 5121-1969 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS: 59161970 Safety code for constructions involving use of hot bituminous
materials
IS: 72051974 Safety code for erection of, structural steel work
IS: 7969-1975 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
IS: 8989-1978 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures
PART VlI CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
vu-
1.
the case may be even thotqh the build@

my otherwIse be entirely under the junsdietion of the
builder/ contractor.
SCOPE
1.2 This part qf the Code covers the constructional practices in buildings; storage,
stacking and handling of materials and safety
of personnel during construction operations
for all elements of a building and demolition
of buildings.
authority 88.
2. PLANNING
2.1.2.1 In every case within the provisions of

The Workmens Compensation Act, 1923;
The payment of Wages Act, 1936; The Payment of Bonus Act 196J; The HOWS of
Employment Regulations; etc, the terms of
contract between the owner and the contractor yill determine the responsibilities and liabilities of either party, in the concerned
matters.
2.1 General
2.2 Construction Control
2.2.1 PL A N N I N G-For timely, economical
2.2.1 PROFESSIONAL ARCHITECTURE OR

ENGINEERING S ERVICES
2.2.i:Z All new work or aiteration shall be
planned, designed and qrvised by licensed
personnel, namely, townplanner, architect,
engineer as specified in Part II Administration. All applications for permits and
issuance of certificates shall be as given in
Part II Administration.
SECTION 1 CONS-I-R UCTIONAL

PRACTICES
and reasonably smooth completion of construction or demolition work, it is necessary

that, from the stage of preparing to start on
such activity, the owner takes recourse to a
systematic hnd well-knit plan for execution.
This shall, intir-alia, include planning for the
agency or agencies for designing and building
of structures or parts thereof; appropriate
scheduling of fire prevention measures and
fire protection facilities, obtaining of sanction
or permission from all the controllingauthcrities on submission to them of the required
plans, specifications and information; timely
prccurement of the construction materials
and equipment, and proper stacking, storage
and handling of construction materials at site.
For jobs of any magnitude, aid may be had of
the modern techniques of management and
planning such as Progravme Evaluation
and Review Technique (PERT) and Critical
Path Method (CPM) (see Appendix A).
2.2.2 RESPONSlBlLiTlES-Except where the
owner is himself the agency for the construction or demolition work, the terms of contract between the owner and his agency or
contractor for execution of the work and the
designer or architect shall be clearly defined
and preferably put in writing. This shal!not,
however, absolve the owner from any ofhis
responsibilities under the regulations. as
owner (see also Part II Administration).
NOTE I-The contract may be either item rate orpe?enmgc rate above or below the rates given in the notdied
schedule, or lump sump for the entire work or on any
other formal terms.
2-The construction materials and equipment

may be stipulated.to be supplied wholly by the owner or
the contractor or partly by either party.
NQTE
NOTE 3-The owner may engage labour at piece-work

or daily rates.
NOTE &Contracts
for provision of fire protection facilities should be awarded at anearly stage to avoid delay
in the supply of essential fire protection equipment.

NOTE S-Contract should specify the essential fire safety
requirements which are to be observed and establish the

right to administration and enforcement by theowner/
VII-
2.2.2.2 IN S P E C T I O N A L RESPONSIBILITYFor -the quality of materials used, even

though procured by the contractor and
for the soundness of construction, the
owner has to take responsibility, unless
a licensed architect/ engineer (referred
to in 2.2.1.1) h a s b e e n e n g a g e d t o
supervise and will be responsible for
these technical aspects (see Part 11
Administration).
2.3 Construction of All Elements-Construction of all elements of a building shall be
in accordance with codes of good practice
[VII(l)]*. It shall also be ensured that the
elements of structure satisfy the appropriate
fire resistance requirements as specified in
2.4 Low Cost Housing-The requirements
regarding structural safety, health safety and
fire safety shall be in accordance with this
code, though certain relaxations may be
made in the planning and general building
requirements. For detailed information,
retirence may be made to good practice
cw~)l.
2.5 Site Preparation-While preparing the

site for construction, brush and other wood,
debris, etc, shall be removed and promptly
disposed of so as to minimize the attendant
hazards.
l
In this part, where reference is made togood practicein

relation to design, testing, construction procedures or
other information appropriate document listed at the
end of ,this part may be used as a guide Jo the
interpretation of thii term.
2.5.1 Temporary buildings for construction

offices and storage shall be so located as to
cause the minimum fire hazards and shall be
constructed from non-combustible materials
as far as possible.
2.6 Access for Fire Fighting Equipment
Vehicles-Acccs$ for fire fighting equipment
shall be provided to the construction site at
the start of construction and maintained
until all construction work is completed.
2.6J Free access from the street to fire.
hydrants/ static water tanks, where available,
shall be provided and maintained at all
times.
2.6.2 No materials for construction shall be
placed within 3 m of hydrants/ static water
tanks.
2.6.3 During building operations, free access
to permanent, temporary or portable first-aid
fire fighting equipment shall be maintained at
all times.
2.7 Access to the Upper Floors During
Construction-In all buildings over two
storeys high, at least one stairway shall be
provided in usable condition at all times.
This stairway shall be extended upward as
each floor is completed. As far as possible,
there shall be a handrail on the staircase.
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING
AND HANDLING PRACTICES
3. GENERAL
3.2 Materials shall be stored, stacked and
handled in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of forei n matter and
to ensure the preservation of their quality
and fitness for the work.
3.2 Materials shall be segregated as to kind,
size and length and placed in neat, orderly
piles that are safe against falling. If piles are
high they shall be stepped back at suitable
intervals in height. Piles of materials shall be
arranged so as to allow a passageway of not
less than I m width in between the piles or
stacks for inspection or removal. All passageways shall be kept clear of dry vegetation,
3.2.1 Materials shall be stacked on well
drained, firm and unyielding surface. Materials shall not be stacked so as to impose any
undue stresses on walls or other structures.
3.2.2 Materials shall be stacked in such a
manner as not to constitute a hazard to
passerby. At such places the stacks shall
have suitable warning signs in day time and
red lights on and around them at night.
3.2.3 Stairways, passageways andgangways

shall not become obstructed by storage of
building materials, tools or accumulated
rubbish.
3.3 Manual Handling-When heavy materials have to be handled manually each
workman shall be instructed by his foreman or supervisor for the proper method of
handling such materials. Each workman
shall be provided with suitable equipment
for his personal safety as necessary. Supervisors shall also take care to assign enough
men to each such job depending on the weight
and, the distance involved.
3.4 Protection Against Fire
3.4.1 Timber, coal, paints and similar mate-
rials present fire hazards. Where possible

these materials should be segregated from
each other so that fire spread is minimized.
3.4.2 Flammable liquids like petrol, thinner,

etc, shall be stored in conformity with relevant regulations.
3.4.3 Explosives like detonators, gun
powder, etc, shall be stored in conformity
with relevant regulations for storage and
handling of explosives.
4. STORAGE, STACKING AND
HANDLING OF MATERIALS
4.2 The storage stacking and handling of
materials generally used in construction shall
be as given in 4.2 to 4.27.
4.2 Cement
a)
S TORAGE
AND
S TACKING- Cement shall
be stored at the work site in a building or
a shed which is dry, leakproof and as

moisture- roof as possible. The building
or shed Por storage should haveminimum number of windows and close fitting doors and these should be kept
closed as far as possible.
Cement received in bags shall be kept in
such a way that the bags are kept free
from the possibility of any dampnessor
moisture coming in contact with them.
Cement bags shall be stacked off the
floor on wooden planks in such a way as
to keep them 150 to 200 mm clear from
the floor and space of 450 mm minimum
shall be left alround between the exterior
walls and the stacks. In the stacks the
cement bags shall be kept close together
to reduce circulation of air as much as
possible. Owing to pressure on bottom
layer of bags sometimes warehouse
pack is developed in these bags. This can
VU-
be removed easily by rolling the bags

when cement is taken out for use.
The height of stack shall not be more
than 15 bags to prevent the possibility of
lumping up under pressure. The width of
the stack shall be not more than four
bags length or 3 metres. In stacks more
than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall
be arranged alternately lengthwise and
crosswise so as to tie the stacks together
and minimize the danger of toppling
over.
For extra safety during monsoon, or
when it is expected to store for an
unusually long period, the stack shall be
completely enclosed by a water proofing
membrane such as polyethylene, which
shall close on the top of the stack. Care
shall be taken to see that the
waterproofing membrane is not damaged
any time during the use.
Drums or other heavy containers of
cement shall not be stacked more than
two layers high.
The manner of storage shall facilitate the
requirement that lots of cement received
are removed and used more or less in the
order in which they are received.
HANDLING--Hooks shall not be used
for handling cement bags unless specifically permitted by the engineer-incharge.
For information regarding bulk handling
of cement, see 4.4.
4.3 Lime
4.3.1 QUICKLIME BEFORE S LAKING
a) STORAGE AND STACKING --Quicklime
should be slaked as soon as possible. If
unavoidable it may be stored in compact
heaps having only the minimum of
exposed area. The heaps shall be stored
on a suitable platform and covered to
avoid direct contact with rain or being
blown away by wind. In case quick lime
is stored in a covered shed, a minimum
space of 300mm should be provided

alround the heaps to avoid bulging of
walls.
Unslaked lime shall be stored in a place
inaccessible to water and because of fire
hazards, shall be segregated from the
combustible materials.
N OTE-Quick lime should be slaked as soon as possible
as it deteriorates rapidly on exposure by taking up moisture and carbon dioxide from atmosphere.
VII-
b) tiANDLING----See 4.4.
4.3.2 HYDRATED LIME
4 STORAGE
AND STACKING -Hydrated

lime is generally supplied in containers,
such as j&e bags lined with polyethylene
or high density polythylene woven bags
lined with polyethylene or craft paper
bags. It should be stored in a building to
protect the lime from dampness and to
minimize warehouse deterioration.
b)
HANDLING -- see 4.4.
4.3.3 D RY
a>
S LAKED L I M E
STORAGE AND STACKI,NG-
If the lime js
to be used within a few days, it may be

stored on a platform suitablycovered for
protection from rain and wind. If it is
required to be stored for a longer period
not exceeding 2 months, it may be kept
in a dry and closed godown.
b)
HANDLING
-See
4.4.
4.4 Handling of CemPnt and Lime-Workmen, handling bulk cement or lime shall wear
protective clothing, respirators, and goggles;
shall be instructed in the need of cleanliness
to prevent dermatitis, and shall be provided
with hand cream, petroleum jelly, or similar
preparation for protection of exposed skin.
Bulk cement stored in silos or bins may fail to
feed to the ejection system. When necessary
to enter a silo or bin for any purpose, the
ejection system employed shall be shutdown
and locked out. When necessary for a workman to enter such storage area, he shall wear
a life-line, with another workman outside the
silo or hopper attending the rope.
4.5 MasonrJ3 Units

a) S TO R A G E A N D SrACKING-Bricks shall
not be dumped at site. They shall be
stacked on dry firm ground in regular

tiers directly as they are unloaded to
minimize breakage and defacement of
bricks. For proper inspection of quality
and ease in counting, the stacks shall be
50 bricks long and 10 bricks high, the
bricks being placed on edge, and preferably, the width of each stack shall be two
bricks. Clear distance between adjacent
stacks shall preferably be not less than
0.8 m.
In the case of bricks made from clays
containing lime KA NKAR, the bricks in
stack should be thoroughly soaked in

water (docked) to prevent lime bursting.
Bricks of different types and classification sha,ll be stacked separately.
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
Concrete blocks, stone blocks, etc, shall

be stored in stacks of such height as will
not damage the blocks in the lower layers
nor there be fear of toppling of stack.
b) H ANDLING- Bricks shall be loaded or
unloaded a pair at a time unless

palletized.
4.6 Aggregate
a)
STORAGE AND STACKING--Aggregates

shall be stored at site on a hard dry and
level patch of ground. If such a surface is
not available, a platform of planks or old
corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of
bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete
shall be made so as to prevent the admixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other
foreign matter.
Stacks of fine and coarse aggregate shall
be kept in separate stockpiles sufficiently
removed from each other or separated by
dividing walls to prevent the material
from getting intermixed. Fine aggregate
shall be stacked in a place where loss due
to the effect of wind is minimum.
b) HANDLING-when withdrawals are

made from stock piles, no over hang
shall be permitted.
Employees required to enter hoppers
shall be equipped with safety belts and
life-lines, attended by another person.
Machine driven hoppers, feeders, and
loaders shall be locked in the off position
prior to entry.
4.7 F!v Ash
a) S TORAGE AND S TACKING -Fly ash shall
be stored in such a manner as to permit
easy access for proper inspection and
identification of each consignment. Fly
ash in bulk quantities shall be stored in
stack similar to fine aggregates, avoiding
any intrusion of foreign matter. Fly ash
in bags shall be stored in stacks not more
than 15 bags high.
b) H ANDLING -See 4.4.
4.8 Timber
4.8.1 ST O R A G E A N D STACKING-T~~~~~
shall be stored in stacks upon well treated
and even surfaced beams, sleepers or brick
pillars so as to be above the ground level by
at least 150 mm to ensure that the timber will
not be affected by accumulation of water
under it. Various members shall preferably
be stored separately in different lengths, and
material of eoual lengths shall be piled
PART YII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
together in layers with wooden battens,

called crossers, separating one layer frcm
another. The crossers shall be of sound
wood, straight and uniform in thickness. In
case, where separate crossers are not available smaller sections of the available structural
timber may be employed in their place. In
any layer an air space of about 25 mm shall
be provided between adjacent members. The
longer- pieces shall be placed in the bottom
layers and shorter pieces in the top layers but
one end of the stack shall be in true vertical
alignment.. The crossers in different layers
shall be in vertical alignment. The most suitable width and height of a stack are recommended to be about 1.5 and 2*0m. Distance
between adjacent stacks is recommended to
be at least 450 mm. In case the stacking with
the help of battens is not possible, the timber
may be close piled in heaps on raised foundations with the precautions specified above.
The stacks shall be protected from hot dry
winds or direct sun and rain. Heavy weights,
such as metal rails or large sections of wood,
are recommended to be placed on the top of
the stack to prevent distortion or warping of
the timber in the stack. In case timber is to be
stored for about a year or more, to prevent
end-cracking in the material, the ends of all
members shall be coated with coal tar, aluminium leaf paints (hardened gloss oil), microcrystalline wax or any other suitable material.
Care must be taken that handler or workmen
are not injured by rails, straps, etc, attached to
the used timber. This applies particularly to
planks and formwork for shuttering.
4.9 Steel
a) STORAGE AND STACKING-Steel reinforcement shall be stored in a way as to
prevent distortion and corrosion. It is
desirable to coat reinforcement with
cement wash before stacking. to prevent
scaling and rusting.
Bars of dirrerent classification, sizes and
lengths shall be stored separately to
facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths as
to minimize wastage in cut from standard
lengths.
In case of long storage or in coastal
areas, reinforcement bars shall be
stacked above ground level by at least
15 cm and a coat of cement wash shall be
given to prevent scaling and rusting.
Structural steel of different sections,
sizes and lengths shall be stored separately. It shall be stored above ground
level by at least 15cm upon platforms,
skids or any other suitable supports to
avoid distortion of sections. In case of
coastal areas or in case of long storage,
suitable protective coating of cement
wash shall be given to prevent scaling

and rusting.
For each classification of steel, separate
areas shall be earmarked. Also ends of
bars and sections of each class shall be
painted with separate nominated
colours.
HANDLING-Tag lines shall be used to
control the load in handling reinforcements or structural steel when a crane is
employed. Heavy steel sections and bundles shall be lifted and carried with the
help of slings and tackles and shall not be
carried on the shoulders of the workmen.
b)
4.10 Doors, Windows and Ventilators

a)
ST O R A G E A N D S T A CK I N G - M e t a l
doors, windows and ventilators shall be
stacked upright (on their sills) on level
ground preferably on wooden battens
and shall not come in contact with dirt or
ashes. If received in crates they shall be
stacked according to manufacturers
instructions and removed from the crates
as and when required for the work.
Metal frames of doors, windows and
ventilators shall be stacked upside down
with the kick plates at the top. These
shall not be allowed to stand for long in
this manner before being fixed so as to
avoid the door frames getting out of
shape and hinges being strained and
shutters drooping.
During the period of storage of aluminium doors, windows and ventilators,

these shall be protected from loose
cement and mortar by suitable covering,
such as tarpaulin. The tarpaulin shall be
hung loosely on temporary framing to
permit circulation of air to prevent moisture condensation.
Wooden frames and shutters shall be
stored in a dry and clean covered space
away from any infestation. The frames
shall be stacked one over the other in
vertical stacks with cross battens at regular distances to keep the stack vertical
and straight. The door shutters shall be
stacked in the form of clean vertical
stacks one over the other and at least
80mm above the ground on pallets or
suitable beams to ensure that they will
not be affected by accumulation of water
under them. The top of stack shall be
covered by protecting cover and weighed
down by means of scantlings or other
suitable weights. For detailed. information reference may be made to good
practice [VI1(3)].
VII-
Precast concrete door and window

frames shall be stored in upright position
adopting suitable measures against risk
of subsidence of soil/support.
b) HANDLING-W~~~~ unloading, shifting,
handling and stacking timber door and

window frames and shutters, care shall
be taken that the pieces are not dragged
one over the other as it may cause damage to their surface particularly in case of
the decorative shutters. The pieces
should be lifted and carried preferably
flat avoiding damage to corners or sides.
4.1 I Roofing Materials

4.11.1 Roofing sheets shall be stored and
stacked in such a manner as not to damage
them in any way. Damaged sheets shall not
be stacked with sound materials. All damaged sheets shall be salvaged as early as
possible.
4.11.2 A SBESTOS C EMENT S HEET
a) STORAGE AND STACKINGS-Asbestos
cement sheets shall be stacked to a.h:zight
of not more than one metre on fi1.m and
level ground, with timber or other packing beneath them. If stacked in exposed
position, they shall be protected from
damage by the winds.
b)
HANDLIN G
-Not more than two sheets

shall be first pushed forward alon the
8 the
valley line say about one fourth of
sheet length and preferably carried by
two workmen. Asbestos cement sheets
shall be lowered or raised gently and not
thrown.
4.21.3 CGI S HEETS
-CGI sheets
shall be stacked in not more than 100
bundles per stack built solidly, each bundle consisting of 10 sheets. Bundles shall
be so laid that the corrugations run in the
same directions in every course. One end
of the stack shall be raised by IO toI5 cm
to allow water flowing freely. If the
sheets are not to be used in the near
future, these shall, be stacked under roof
cover.
STORAGE AND STACKING
b) HANDLING-In bulk handling of CGI

sheets, workmen shall be provided with
suitable hand protection.
4.12 Boards
4.12.1 G YPSUM B OARDS
a)
STACIYING - G y p s u m
boards shall be stored flat in a.covered
clean and dry place.
S T O R A G E AND
avo.ided. In case of long storage, the

sheets shall be turned over periodically
and treated with french chalk; if
necessary.
. b) HANDLING--&Y 4.11.2(b).
4.12.2 PLYWOOD, FIBRE BOARD, PARTICLE
BOARD, BLOCK BQARD,ETC
STACKING --Plywood,
fibre board, particle board, block board,
etc, shall not be stored in the open and
exposed to direct sun and rain. The
boards silall be stacked on a flat dunnage,
on the top of which a wooden frame shall
be constructed with battens of 5X2.5 cm
(Min) in such a way that it supports all
four edges and corners of the boards with
intermediate battens placed at suitable
intervals to avoid warping. If required,
the stack shall be adequately raised above
ground level to ensure that it ,will not be
affected by accumulation of water under
it.
The board shall be stacked in a solid
block in a clear vertical alignment. The
top sheet of each stack shall be suitably
weighed down to prevent warping, wherever necessary.
4 STORAGE AND
NOTE --Plastic and rubber sheets have a tendency

to break down during storage.
b) HANDLING --While handling plastic and

rubber sheets, workmen shall lift the
sheets and Carl-y them flat to avoid sharp,
bends or folds of the sheets.
4.14 Glass Sheets
a)
b) HANDLING-The board shall be
unloaded and stacked with utmost care

iivoiding damage to the corners and surface. In case of decorative plywood.and
decorative .boards, the surfaces of which
are likely to get damaged by dragging
one sheet over another, *it is advisable
that these are lifted as far as possible in
pairs facing each other.
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICFaS
AND SAFETY
tar& that all glass sheets whether stored

in crates or not shalt be kept dry. Suitable covere&&orage space shall be provided for the safe storage of the glass
sheets. The glass sheets shall be lifted and
stored on their long edges and shall be
put into stacks of not more than 25
panes, supported at two points by fillets
of wood at about 300 mm from each end.
The first pane laid in each stack shallbe
so placed that its bottom edge is about
25 mm from the base of the wall or other
support against which the stack rests.
The whole stack shall be as close and as
upright as possible. To prevent slipping
on smooth floor, the floor shall be
covered with gunny bags.
b) HANDLING-W~~~~~~ handling glass
panes, waste glass pieces and fibre glass

shall be provided with suitable hand protection. In removing glass sheets from
crates, great care shall be taken to avoid
damages. Glass edges shall be covered or
otherwise protected to prevent injuries to
workmen.
4.13 Plastic and Rubber Sheets

a) S TORAGE AND STACKING-Plastic and
rubber sheets shall be stored according
to manufacturers instructions.
The coolest store room available shall be
utilized for the storage of the sheets. The
store rooms where the sheets are stored
shall be well ventilated and kept as dark
as possible. Direct light should not be
allowed to fall on them.
The sheets shall be stored away from
electric generators, electric motors,
switchgears and other such electrical
equipment as they produce harmful
gases which may damage the sheets.
Contamination of the sheets with vegeta:
ble and mineral oils; greases; organic solvents; acids and their fumes; alkalies;
dust and grit shall be prevented. Where
greasy contamination occurs this shall be
removed immediately with kerosene or
similar liquid and the sheets thoroughly
wiped dry and dusted with french chalk.
Undue stretch and strain, kinks, sharp
bends or folds of the sheets shall be
S T O R A G E A N D STACKING-It is hpm-
4.15 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
a)
T O R A G E AND
T A C K I N G-
The
pipes
shall be unloaded where they are

required, when the trenches are ready to
receive them.
Storage shall be provided at the bottom
tayer to keep the stack stable. The stack
shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes
placed lengthwise and crosswise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack is advisable in smaller diameter pipes for
conserving space in storing them. The
height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m.
Each stack shall contain only pipes of the
same class and size.
Cast iron detachable joints and :fittings
shall be stacked under cover and separated from the asbestos cement pipes and
fittings.
VII-
Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away

from grease, oil, heat and light.
The ends of pipe should be protected

from abrasion particularly those specially
prepared for jointing either sptgot or
socket solvent welded joints or soldered
for use with couplings.
If due to unsatisfactory storage or handling a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged
portion should be cut out completely.
b) HANDLING --Pipes in the top layer shall

be handled first. At a time only one pipe
shall be handled by two labourers while
conveying to the actual site and shall be
carried on shoulders. Fittings shall be
handled individually.
4.16, Polyeth~~lene Pipes
AND S T A C K I N G - - B l a c k
polyethylene pipes may. be stored either
under cover or in the open. Natural
polyethylene pipes, however, should be
stored under cover and protected from
direct sunlight.
Coils may be stored either on edge or
stacked flat one on top of the other, but
in either case they should not be allowed
to come into contact with hot water or
steam pipes and should be kept away
from hot surface.
Straight lengths should be stored on
horizontal racks giving continuous support to prevent the pipe taking on a permanent set.
Storage of pipes in heated areas exceeding 27OC should be avoided.
b) HANDLING-Great care shall be exer-
cised in handling these pipes in wintry

conditions as these become brittle in very
cold weather.
4 STORAGE
b) HANDLING-Removal of pipe from a
pile shall be accomplished by working

from the ends of the pipe.
4.17 Unplasticized PVC Pipes
a) ST O R AG E AND S T A C K I N G - P i p e s
should be stored on a reasonably flat ,surface free from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported
throughout its length. The pipe should
be given adequate support at all times. In
storage, pipe racks should be avoided.
Pipe should not be stacked in large piles
especially under warm temperature
conditions as the bottom pipes may distort thus giving rise to difficultyirrjointing. Socket and spigot pipes should be
stacked in layers with sockets placed at
alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lopsided stacks.
It is recommended not to store a pipe
inside another pipe. On no account
should pipes be stored in a stressed or
bent condition or near a source of heat.
Pipes should not be stacked more than
1.5 m high. Pipes of different sizes and
classes should be stacked separately.
In tropical conditions, pipes should be
stored in shade. In very cold weather, the
impact strength of PVC is reduced making it brittle.
ll.lo
4.18 Pipes of Conducting Materials
a)
S TORAGE
AND S TACKING --Pipes shall

be stacked on solid level sills and contained in a manner to prevent spreading
or rolling of the pipe. Where quantity
storage is necessary, suitable packing
shall be placed between succeeding layers
to reduce the pressure and resulting
spreading of the pile.
In stacking and handling of pipes and

other conducting materials, the following
minimum safety distances shall be
ensured from the overhead power lines:
11 kV and below
1.40 m
Above 11 and below 33 kV
3.60 m
Above 33 and below 132 kV 4.70 m
b) HANDLING-RR~~O~~~ of pipes from a
pile shall be accomplished by working

from the ends of the pipe. During transportation, the pipes shall be so secured as
to insure against displacement.
4.19 Piling and Poles

AND S TACKING -Piling and
poles shall be carefully stacked on solid,
level sills so as to prevent rolling or
spreading of the stack.
The storage area shall be maintained free
of vegetation and flammable materials.
4 S TORAGE
b) HANDLING -When placing piling or
poles on the stack, workmen shall work

from the ends of the piles/poles. Similar
precautions shall be observed in removal
of piles/poles from the stack. Tag lines
shall be used to control piling and poles
when handling for any purpose.
In stacking and handling of piling and
poles, precautions as laid down in 4.18(a)
shall be followed.
NATIONAL BUILDING CDDE OF INDIA
to 3 tiers. ,Leaky drums shall be segregated. Empty drums shall be stored in

pyra midal stacks neatly in rows.
a) S T O R A G E AND S T A C K I N G - Paints,
varnishes, lacquers, thinners and other b) H A N D L I N G - S e e 19.13.1.2 and 19.3.4.
flammable materials shall be kept in
properly sealed or closed containers. The 4.22 Bituminous Roofing Felts
containers shall be kept in a well ventilated
location, free from excessive heat, smoke, a) S TORAGE AND STACKING -Bituminous
roofing felts shall be stored away from
sparks or flame. The floor of the paint
other combustible flammable materials,
stores shall be made up of 1Ocm thick
For long storage it shall ,be kept under
loose sand,
shade.
Paint materials in quantities other than
required for daily use shall be kept
b) HANDLING -Bituminous roofing felts
stocked under tegular storage place.
should be handled in a manner to prevent
cracking and other damages.
Where the aint is likely to deteriorate
with age, tRe manner of storage shall
facilitate removal and use of lots in the 4.23 Flammoble Materials
same order in which they are received.
a) STORAGE AND STACKING-In addition
to the requirements as laid down in 3.4.2
Temporary $ectrical wirings/ fittings
and 3.4.3, the following provisions shall
shall not be Installed i? the paint store.
also apply:
When electric lights, switches or electrical
equipment are necessary, they shall ,be of
1) Outdoor storage of drums requires
explosion proof design.
some care to avoid contamination
because moisture and dirt in hydraub) HANDLING-ventilation adequate to
lic brake and transmission fluid, gasoprevent the accumulation of flammable
line, or lubricants may cause malvapours to hazardous levels of concentrafunction or failure of equipment, with
tion shall be provided in all areas where
possible danger to personnel. The
painting is done.
storage area should be free of accumulations of spilled products, debris
When painting is done in confined spaces
and other hazards.
where flammable or explosive vapours
may develop, any necessary heat shall be
2) Compressed gases and petroleum
provided through duct work remote from
products shall not be stored in the
the source of flame.
same building or close to each other.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame
and exposed heating elements, shall not b) H ANDLING -Petroleum products delivered to the job site and stored there in
be permitted in area or rooms where
drums shall be protected during handling
spray painting is done nor shall smoking
to prevent loss of identification through
be allowed there.
damage
to drum markings, tags, etc. UnCare should be taken. not ,to use any
identifiable
petioleum products may
naked flame inside the paint store.
result
in
improper
use, with possible fire
Buckets containing sand shall be kept
hazard,
damage
to
equipment or operatready for use in case of fire. Fire extining
failure.
guishers when required shall be of foam
Workmen shall be required to guard
type conforming to accepted standards
.carefully against any part of their cloth[vII(4)]*.
ing becommg contaminated with flamEach workman handling lead based
mable fluids. They shall not be allowed to
paints shall be issued l/2-litre milk per
continue
work when their clothing
day for his personal consumption.
becomes so contaminated.
4.21 Bitumen, Rood Tar, Asphalt, etc
4.24 Water-Water to be stored for construction purposes shall be stored in proper
a) ST O RA GE AND S T A C K I N G-Drums or tanks
to prevent any organic impurities. The
containers containing all types of aggregate
of storage tanks shall be
bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc, shall be determinedcapacity
after
taking
into account the
stacked vertically on their bottoms in up requirements of fire fighting.
4.20 Poinrs. Varnishes and Thinners
la this part, where reference is made to accepted standards in relation to material specification or other information, the appropriate document listed at the end of
this plvrt may be used as a guide to the interpretation of
thii term.
?ART VII CONSTRUCllONAL
?EMZTM.ZS
A N D SAFETY
4.25 Tiles
a) STORAGE AND STACKING -All tiles shall
be stacked on well-treated and hard sur-
2 l
face in layers and in different tiers. These

shall not be dumped at site and shall be
stacked in .such a way that mould surface
of one faces that of another. The height
of stack shall not be more than I m.
Tiles of different quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately to facilitate easy removal for use in work.
Tiles, when supplied by manufacturers in
wooden crates, shall be stored as such
and the crates opened one at a time when
required for use.
b) HANDLING-Removal of the tiles shall
start from top layer only. Only on finishing top course next course be tackled.
Tiles should be handled in pairs and shall
not be thrown.
4.26 Sanitary Appliances
AND S TACKING - All sanitary
appliances shall be carefully stored under
cover to prevent damage. When accepting and storing appliances, consideration
shall be given to the sequence of removal
from the store to the assembly positions.
Vitreous fittings shall be stacked
separately from the metal ones.
4 S TORAGE
stocks. Freshly arrived materials shall never

be placed over materials which had arrived
earlier.
4.28.4 Appropriate types of fire extinguishers
shall be provided at open sites where combustible materials are stored and for each
storage shed/ room where flammable/combustible materials are stored. For guidance in
selection of the appropriate types of fire extinguishers reference may be made to good
practice [VII(S)]. It is desirable that a mini-.
mum of two extinguishers are provided at
each such location.
4.28.5 Workers handling excavated earth
from foundation, particularly if the site
happens to be reclaimed area or marshy area
or any other infected area, shall be protected
against infection affecting their exposed body
portions.
4.28.6, H OUSE K EEPING -Stairways, walkways, scaffolds, and accessways shall be kept
free of materials, debris and obstructions.
The engineer-in-charge/the foreman shall
initiate and carry out a programme requiring
routine removal of scrap and debris from
scaffolds and walkways.
4.28.7 Where stacking of the materials is to

be done on road side berms in the street and
shall be handled one at a time. Traps, other public place, the owner shall seek perwater seals and gullies shall be handled mission from the Authority for suchstacking
separately. While ,handling sanitary and also for removing the remnants of the
fittings they shall be free from any oil same after the construction is over, so as to
spillings, etc. The hands of the workers avoid any hazard to the public.
b) HANDLING -Bigger sanitary appliances
shall also be free from any oily substance.

Before lowering the appliances in their
position the supporting brackets,
pedestals, etc, shall be checked for their
soundness and then only the fixtures be
attached.
4.27 Other Materials-Small articles like

screws, bolts, nuts, door and window fittings.
polishing stones,. protective clothing, spare
parts of machinery, linings, packings, water
supply and sanitary fittings, and electrical tittings, insulation board, etc, shall be kept in
suitable and properly protected containers or
store rooms. Valuable small materials shall
be kept under lock and key.
4.28 Special Considerations
4.28.1 Materials constantly in use shall be
relatively nearer the place of use.
4.28.2 Heavy units like precast concrete
members shall be stacked near the hoist or
the ramp.
4.28.3 Materials which normally deteriorate
during storage shall be kept constantly moving, by replacing old materials with fresh
J2
5. UNLOADING RAIL ROAD WAGONS

AND MOTOR VEHICLES
5.1 Loading and Unloading dail Road
Wagons
5.1.1 Appropriate warning signals shall be
displayed to indicate that the wagons must
not be coupled or moved.
5.1.2 The wheels of wagons shall always be
spragged or chained while the wagons are
being unloaded. The brakes alone shall not
be depended upon.
5.1.3 Special lever bars shall preferably be
used for moving rail wagons rather thanordinary crow bars.
5.1.4 Where gangplanks are used between
wagons and platforms of piles (heaps), cleats
at lower end of gangplank, or pin through
end of gangplanks, shall be used to prevent
sliding. If gangplank is on a gradient, cleats
or abrasive surface shall be provided for the
entire length.
5.1.5 When rail road wagons are being

loaded or unloaded near passageways or
walkways, adequate warning signals shall be
placed on each end of the wagon to warn
pedestrians.
5.2 Loading and Unloading from Motor
Vehicles
5.2.2 The motor vehicles shall be properly
blocked while being loaded or unloaded;
brakes alone shall not be depended upon to
hold them.
5.2.2 When motor vehicles are being loaded
or unloaded near passageways or walkways,
adequate warning signs shall be placed on
each end of the vehicle to warn the
pedestrians.
5.3 Handling Heavy/ Long Items
5.3.1 Loading and unloading of heavy items,
shall, as far as possible, be done with cranes
or gantries. The workman shall stand clear of
the material being moved by mechanical
equipment. The slings and the ropes used
shall be of adequate load carrying capacity,
so as not to give way and result in accidents.
5.j.2 While heavy and long components are
being manually loaded into motor vehicle,
wagons, trailer, etc, either wooden sleepers or
steel rails of sufficient length and properly
secured in position shall be put in a gentle
slope against the body of the wagon/vehicle
at 3 or 4 places for loading. These long items
shall be dragged, one by one, gently and uniformly along these supports by means of
ropes, being pulled by men with feet properly
anchored against firm surface. As soon as the
items come on the floor of the vehicle, the
same may be shifted by crowbars and other
suitable leverage mechanism, but not by
hands to avoid causing accident to the
workmen.
5.3.3 Similar procedure as outlined
under 5.3.2 shall be followed for manual
unloading of long or heavy items.
SECTION 3 SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION OF ELEMENTS OF A BUILDING
6. GENERAL
6.1 The provisions of this section shall apply
to the erection/ alteration1 of the various parts
of a building or similar structure. The construction of the different elements shall conform to provisions of 2.3.
62 Other Laws-Nothing herein stated shall
be construed to nullify any rule , regulations,
safety standards or statutes ofshe local state
PAaT ,I
CONSTRUCTIONAL
FRA,X,C,tS AN,, SAFE,~
governments or those contained in the

various Acts of the Government of India. The
specific rules, regulations and Acts pertaining
to the protection of the public or workmen
from health and other hazards wherever
sepcified by the Local/State Authority or in
the Acts of the Government take precedence
over whatever is herein specified in case of a
doubt or dispute.
7. TERMINOLOGY
7.1 For the purpose of this part the following
A UTHORITY H AVING JURrsDICTIoN -The
Authority which has been created by a statute and which for the purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize a
committee or an official to act on its behalf;
hereinafter called the Authority.
C O N S T R U C T I O N E Q U I P M E N T-All equip-
ment, machinery, tools and temporary retaming structures and working platforms, that is,
tools, derricks, staging, scaffolds, runways,
ladders and all material, handling equipment
including safety devices.
F LOOR H OLE-An opening measuring less
than 30 cm but more than 2.5 cm in its least
dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement,
or yard, through which materials but not persons may fall; such as, a belt hole, pipe opening or slot opening.
F LOOR O PENING -An opening measuring
30cm or more in its least dimension, in any
floor, platform, pavement or yard through
which person may fall; such as hatch way,
stair or ladder opening, pit or large manhole.
G UARD R AILING-A barrier erected along
exposed edges of an open side floor opening,
wall opening, ramp, platform, or catwalk or
balcony, etc, to prevent fall of persons.
M ATERIAL H ANDLING H OISTS -A platform, bucket or similar enclosure exclusively

meant for the lifting or lowering of construction material the hoists being operated from
a point outside the conveyance.
PILE RIG -The complete pile driving equipment comprising piling frame, leader,
hammer, extractor winch and power unit.
Complete pile driving rig may be mounted
on rafts or pontoon or rails. Pile rig may also
be a. mobile unit mounted on trailers or
trucks, or a special full revolving rig for raking piles.
P LATFORM-A working space for persons,
elevated above the surrounding floor or
ground, such as balcony or platform for the
operation of machinery and equipment.
J3
SCAFFOLD
-A temporary erection of timber

or metal work used m the construction, alteration or demolition of a building, to support
or to allow the hoisting and lowering of
workmen, their tools and materials,
guards are to be provided. In case these protective devices project beyond the property,
the consent of the Authority and that of the
owner of the adjoining property shall be
obtained.
T OE BOARD-A
9. TESTING
vertical barrier erected

along exposed edge of a floor opening, wall
opening, platform, catwalk or ramp toprevent fall of materials or persons.
WALL HOLE -An opening in any wall or partition having height of less than 75cm but
more than 2.5 cm and width unrestricted.
WALL OPENING -An opening in any wall or
partition having both height of at least 75 cm
and width of at least 45cm.
9.1 Tests -No structure, temporary support,

scaffolding or any construction equipment
during the construction or demolition of any
building or structure shall be loaded beyond
the allowable loads and working stresses as
provided for in Part VI Structural design.
9.1.2 Whenever any doubt arises about the

structural adequacy of a scaffolding, support
or any other construction equipment, it shall
be tested to two and a half times the superim8. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE posed dead and live loads to which the mateOF SIDE WALLS ANDTEMPORARY rial or the equipment is subjected to and the
ENCROACHMENTS
member/material shall sustain the test load
without failure if it is to be accepted.
8.1 Temporary Construction-The plans.
and specifications of temporary, construc- 9.2 Notwithstanding the test mentioned
tions, which are likely to interfere with facili- above, if any distress in any member is visities or right of way provided by the ble, the member shall be rejected.
Authority, shall be submitted to the Authority for approval showing clearly the layout, IO. I N S P E C T I O N A ND RECTIFICA- . .
design and construction.
TION OF HAZARDOUS DEFECTS
8.1.1 Temporary structure referred to in8.1
10.1 Ins ection-The Authority shall
shall apply to the following types of inspect tge construction equipment and if
structures:
during the inspection, it is revealed that
illegal conditions exist, the Authority
a) Structures with roof or walls made of unsafe/
straw, hay, ulugrass, golpatta, hogle, shall intimate the owner and direct him to
darma, mat, canvas cloth or other like take immediate remedial measures to remove
materials not adopted for permanent or the hazard/violation.
continuous occupancy.
10.2 Rectification-The owner shall proceed
b) Site-work sheds, truck-runways, trestles, to rectify the defect, hazardous condition or
foot-bridges, etc.
violation within 24 hours of the receipt of the
notice from the Authority. The Authority
8.2 For detailed information regarding fire shall have full powers to rectify the unsafe
safety aspects in respect of construction, condition and all expenses incurred in this
location, maintenance and use of temporary connection is payable by the ,owner of the
structures [mentioned in 8.Z.Z(a)] including ,property. Illegal encroachments and nonpandals used by public for outdoor assem- payment of money due, in respect of the recbly, reference may be made to good practice tification of unsafe conditions may vest a lien
DW91.
8.3 Special permits shall be obtained for the

storage of the materials on side walks and
highways. It shall be ensured that the material dump or the storage shed does not create
a traffic hazard, nor it shall interfere with the
free flow of the pedestrian traffic. Special
permits shall also be obtained for the use of
water and electricity from the public facilities. Whenever such utilities are made use of,
adequate safety precautions regarding drainage and elimination of contamination and
hazards from electricity shall be taken.
8.4 In order to ensure safety for the adjoining property, adequate temporary protective
lJ.14
on the property with the Authority (seeat30

Part 11 Administration).
10.3 When the strength and adequacy of any

scaffold or other construction equipment is
in doubt or when any complaint is made, the
Authority shall get .the same inspected before
use.
II. FOUNDATIONS
11.1 General-The distribution of the supporting foundation shall be such as to avoid
any harmful differential settlement of the
structure. The type and design of the foundation adopted shall ensure safety to workmen
during construction and residents of the

neighbouring property. Sufficient care shall
be taken in areas, where withdrawal of
ground water from surrounding areas could
result in damages to such foundations. During the construction of the foundation, it
shall be ensured that the adjoining properties
are not affected by any harmful effects.
11.2 Adjoining Properties - The person
causing excavation shall, before starting the
work, give adequate notices in writing to the
owner of the adjoining properties, safety of
which is likely to be affected due to excavation.
After. having given such notices, wherein
details regarding the type of protective
works that are anticipated to be incorporated
in the excavation are shown, written permission shall be obtained for such excavation
from the adjoining property owners. Where
necessary, the person causing excavation
shall make adequate provision to protect the
safety of adjacent property. If on giving such
notices and the precautionary measures having been approved by the Authority, the
adjoining property owner still refuses to give
necessary facilities to the person causing
excavation for protecting/ providing both
temporary and permanent supports to such
property, the responsibility for any damage
to the adjoining property shall be that of the
adjoining property owner. The person causing excavation shall be absolved of responsibility for any loss of property or life in the
adjoining property.
In driven piles vibration is set up which may
cause damage to adjoining structures or service lines depending on the nature of soil condition and the construction standard of such
structures and service lines. Possible extent
of all such damages shall be ascertained in
advance, and operation and mode of driving
shall be planned with appropriate measures
to ensure safety.
Where in the vicinity of a site where bored or
driven piling works are to be carried out there
are old structures which are likely to be damaged, tell-tales shall be fixed on such structures to watch their behaviour and timely
precautions taken against any undesirable
effect.
Il.3 During construction, inspection shall
be made by the engineer-in-charge to ensure
that all protective works carried out to safeguard the adjoining property are sufficient
and in good order to ensure safety (see
Part 11 Administration).
11.4 Before carrying out any excavation
work/ pile driving, the position, depth.and
size of underground structures, such as water
pipes, mains, cables or other servicesin the
PART Yll CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
vicinity to the proposed work, may be obtained from the Authority to prevent accidents to workmen engaged in excavation
work and calamities for the general public.
Prior to commencement of excavation
detailed data of the type of soils that are likely
to be met with during excavation shall be
obtained and the type of protective works by
way of shoring timbering, etc, shall be decided
upon for the various strata that are likely to be
encountered during excavation. For detailed
information regarding safety requirements
during excavation reference may be made to
good practice [VII (7)].
12. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND
COMMON HAZARDS DURING
EXCAVATION
12.1 Location of Machinery and TooisExcavating machinery consisting of both
heavy and light types shall be kept back from
the,excavation site at a distance which would
be safe for such type of equipment. Heavy
equipment, such as excavating machinery
and road traffic shall be kept back from the
excavated sites at a distance of not less than
the depth of trench or at Ieast 6 m for trench
deeper than 6 m. Care shall also be taken to
keep excavating tools and materials far away
from the edge of trench to prevent such items
being inadvertently knocked into the trench.
12.2 Excavated Materials- Excavated
materials shall be kept back from the edges
of the trench to provide clear berm of safe
width. Where this is not feasible, the protective works designed for the trenches shall
take into consideration, the additional load
due to overburden of materials.
12.2.1 OTHER SURCHARGES -Proximity
of buildings, piles of lumber, crushed rocks,
sand and other constructional materials,
large trees, etc, may impose surcharges on
the side of the trench to cause sliding, etc.
Under these conditions additional protective
works shall be provided to support the sides
of the trench.
12.3 T)rpe of Strata-Adequate precautions, depending upon the type of strata met
with during excavation (like quick sand,
loose fills and loose boulder) shall be taken
to protect the workmen during excavation.
Effect of climatic variations and moisture
content variations on the materials under
excavation shall be constantly watched and
precautions taken, where necessary, immediately to prevent accidents at work site.
12.4 Overhang and Slopes- During any
excavation, sufficient slopes to excavated
sides by way of provision of steps or gradual
slopes shall be provided to ensure the safety

of men and machine working in the area.
12.5 Blasting for foundation of building is
prohibited unless special permission is
obtained form the Authority. Where blasting
technique has to be resorted to, prior inspection for the stability of slopes shall be carried
out. After blasting, overhangs or loose
boulders shall be cleared by expert workers
carrying out blasting prior to continuation of
the excavation by normal working parties.
12.5.1 Burrowing or mining or what is
known as gopheringshall not be allowed. In
any trench where such methods have been
followed, the cavities left shall be eliminated
by cutting back the bare slope before removing any further material from the section of
the trench.
12.6 Health Hazards-Where gases or fumes
are likely to be present in trenches, sufficient
mechanical ventilation, to protect the health
and safety of persons working there, shall be
provided. If necessary, the personnel working there, shall be provided with respiratory
protective equipment when work in such
unhealthy conditions has to be carried out.
The precautionary measures provided shall
be inspected by the local health authorities
prior to commencement of the work.
12.7 Safety of Materials-Materials required
for excavation, like ropes, planks for gangways and walkways, ladders, etc, shall be
inspected by the engineer-in-charge who shall
ensure that no accident shall occur due to the
failure of such materials (see Part V Building materials).
12.8 Fencing and Warning Signals-Where
excavation is going on, for the safety of public and the workmen, fencing shall be erected,
if there is likelihood of the public including
cattle frequenting the area. Sufficient number
of notice boards and danger sign lights shall
be provided in the area to avoid any member
of public from inadvertently falling into the
excavation. When excavations are being
done on roads, diversion of the roads shall be
provided with adequate notice board and
lights indicating the diversion well ahead.
Where necessary, recourse may be had
for additional precautionary measures by way
of watchmen to prevent accident to the general public, especially during hours of
darkness.
12.9 Effect of Freezing and Thawing-Due
to expansion of water when freezing, rock
fragments, boulders, etc, are frequently loosened. Therefore, the side walls of the excavation shall be constantly watched for signs
of cracks during a thaw. When depending in
n!6
whole or in part on freezing to support the side

walls, great care shall be taken during thaws to
provide suitable bracing or remedy the condition by scaling of the loose material from the
sides.
12.10 Vibrations from Nearby SourcesVibration due to adjacent machinery, vehicles, rail-roads, blasting, piling and other
sources require additional precautions to be
taken.
12. I I Precautions While Using Petroleum
Powered Equipment-At the site of excavation, where petroleum powered equipment is
used, petroleum vapours are likely to accumulate at lower levels and may cause fire
explosion under favourable circumstances.
Care should, therefore, be taken to avoid all
sources of ignition in such places.
13. PILING AND OTHER DEEP
FOUNDATIONS
I3.1 Gpneral
13.1.1 SAFETY P R O G R A M M E -All operations shall be carried out under the immediate charge of a properly qualified and
competent foreman who shall also be responsible for the safety arrangements of the work.
13.1.2 For work during night, lighting of at

least 100 lux intensity shall be provided at
the work site.
13.1.3 Every crane driver or hoisting
appliance operator shall be competent to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge and no
person under the age of 21 years should be
in-charge of any hoisting machine including
any scaffolding winch, or give signals to
operator.
13.1.4 Working in compressed air, in case of
deep foundations, requires several precautions to be observed to safeguard the workmen against severe hazards to life,
compressed air disease and related ailments.
For detailed information regarding safety
requirements, reference may be made to
good practice [VII(S)].
13.2 Piling Rig
13.2.1 Pile drivers shall not be erected in
dangerous proximity to electric conductors.
If two pile drivers are erected at one place
these shall be separated by a distance at least
equal to the longest leg in either rig.
13.2.2 The frame of any rig shall be structurally safe for all anticipated dead, live or
wind loads. Whenever there is any doubt
about the structural strength, suitable test
shall be carried out by the foreman and the
results of the test recorded. No pile driving

equipment shall be taken into use until it has
been inspected and found to be safe.
1.3.2.3 Pile drivers shall be firmly supported
on heavy timber sills, concrete beds or other
secure foundation. If necessary, to prevent
danger, pile drivers shall be adequately
guyed:
When the rig is not in use, extra precautionary measures for stability, such as securing
them with minimum four guys, shall be
adopted to prevent any accidents due to
wind, storm. gales and earthquake.
13.2.4 Access to working platforms and the
top pulley shall be provided by ladders.
Working platforms shall be protected against
the weather.
13.2.4.1 In tall driven piling rigs or rigs of
similar nature where a ladder is necessary for
regular use, the ladder shall be securely fastened and extended for the full height of the
rig.
13.2.5 Exposed gears, lly wheels, etc, shall

be fully enclosed.
13.2.6 Pile driving equipment in use shall be
inspected by a competent engineer at regular
intervals not exceeding three months. A
register shall be maintained at the site of work
for recording the results of such inspected Pile
lines and pulley blocks shall he inspected by
the foreman before the beginning of each
shift, for any excess wear or any other defect.
13.2.6!1 Defective parts of pile drivers, such
as sheaves, mechanism slings and hose shall
be repaired by only competent person and
duly mspected by foreman-in-charge of the
rig and the results recorded in the register.
No steam or air equipment shall be repaired
while it is in operation or under pressure.
Hoisting ropes on pile drivers shall be made
of galvanized steel.
13.2.7 Steam and air lines shall be controlled
by easily accessible shut-off valves. These
lines shall consist of armoured hose or its
equivalent. The hose of steam and air
hammers shall be securely lashed to the
hammer so as to prevent it from whipping if
a connection breaks. Couplings of sections of
hose shall be additionally secured by ropes or
chains.
13.2.8 When not in use the hammer shall be
in dropped position and shall be held in place
by a cleat, timber or any other suitable
means.
13.2.9 For every hoisting machine and for
every chain rig hook, shackle, swivel and pulPART VII CONSTRICTIONAI. P R A C T I C E S AND
SAFETY
ley block used in hoisting or as means of

suspension, the safe working loads shall be
ascertained. In case of doubt, actual testing
shall be carried out and the working load
shall be taken as half of the tested load.
Every hoisting machine and all gears referred
to above shall be plainly marked with the
safe working load. In case of a hoisting
machine having a variable safe working load,
each safe working load together with the
conditions under which it is applicable shall
be clearly indicated. No part of any machine
or any gear shall be loaded beyond the safe
working load except for the purpose of
testing.
13.2.10 Motor gearing, transmission, CleCtriCal wiring and other dangerous parts of
hoisting appliances should be provided with
efficient safe guards. Hoisting appliances
shall be provided with such means as ~111
reduce, to the minimum, the risk of accidental descent of the load and adequate precautions shall be taken to reduce to the
minimum, the risk of any part of suspended
load becoming accidentally displaced. When
workers are employed on electrical instahations which are already energized, insulating
mats and wearing apparel, such as gloves,
etc, as may be necessary, shall be provided.
Sheaves on pile drivers shall be guardedSO
that workers may not be drawn into them.
13.2.10.1 When loads have to be inclined:
a) they shall be adequately counterbalanced, and
b) the tilting device shall bt -cured against
slipping.
13.2.11 Adequatee precautions shall be
taken to prevent a pile driver from overturning if a wheel breaks.
13.2.12 Adequate precautions shall be taken
by providing stirrups or by other effective
means, to prevent the rope from coming out
of the top pulley or wheel.
13.2.13 Adequate precautions shall be taken
to prevent the hammer from missing the pile.
13.2.14 If necessary, to prevent danger, long
piles and heavy sheet piling should be
secured against falling.
132.15 Wherever steam boilers are used, the
safety regulations of boilers shall be strictly
followed and safety valves shall be adjusted
to TN/cm in excess of working pressure
accurately.
13.2.16 Where elctricity is used as power for
Piling rig, only armoured cable conforming
to the relevant Indian Standard shall be used
and the cable shall be t h o r o u g h l y
waterproofed.
w.1
shall be properly tied to the junctions with

coir ropes of sufficient strength or mechanical joints to ensure that joints do not give
way due to the load of workmen and material. Joining the members of scaffolds only
13.3 Operation of Equipment
with nails shall be prohibited as they are
13.3.1 Workers employed in the vicinity of likely to get loose under normal weathering
pile drivers shall wear helmets conforming to conditions. In the erection or maintenance of
tall buildings, scaffoldings shall be of nonaccepted standards [VII(9)].
combustible material especially when the
23.3.2 Piles shall be prepared at a distance at work is being done on any building in occuleast equal to twice the length of the longest pation. After initial construction of the scaffolding, frequent inspections of scaffolding
pile from the pile driver.
shall be carried out to ensure that no damage
has occurred to scaffolding, especially due to
13.3.3 Piles being hoisted in the rig should
the
weathering of coir ropes which would
be so slung that they do not have to be swung
round, and may not inadvertently, swing or endanger workmen working on the scaffolding.
whip rdund. A hand rope shall be fastened to The platforms, gangways and runways proa pile that is being hoisted to control its vided on the scaffoldings shall be of sufficient
movement. While a pile is being guided into strength and width to ensure safe passage for
position in the leads, workers shall not put the workmen working on the scaffolding. The
their hands or arms between the pile and the joints provided in these gangways, platforms,
inside guide or on top of the pile, but shall etc, shall be such as to ensure a firm foot-hold
to the workmen. -Where necessary, cross bars
use a rope for guiding.
shall bc provided to the full width of gangway
or
runway to facilitate safe walking. For
13.3.4 Before a good pile is hoisted into
position it shall be provided with an iron ring detailed information regarding safety requireor cap over the driving end to prevent ments for erec tion, use and dismantling of
brooming. When creosoted wood piles are scaffolds, reference may be made to good
being driven, adequate precautions shall be practice [Vll( I I)].
taken, such as the provision of personal pro- 14.2.1 The engineer-in-charge shall ensure
tective equipment and barrier creams, to pre- by frequent inspections that gangways of
vent workers receiving eye or skin injuries scaffolding have not become slippery due to
from splashes of creosote.
spillage of material. Loose materials shall
not be allowed to remain on the gangways.
Z3.3.5 When piles are driven at an inclina- Where necessary, because of height or restion to the vertical, if necessary, to prevent
tricted width, hand-rails shall be provided on
danger, these should rest in a guide.
both sides. Workers shall not be allowed to
work on the scaffolding during bad weather
13.3.6 No steam or air shall be blown down and high winds.
until all workers are at a safe distance.
14.2.2 In the operations involved in the erec14. WALLS
tion or maintenance of outside walls, fittings,
etc, of tall buildings, it is desirable to use one
14.1 General-Depending on the type of or more net(s) for the safety of the workmen
wall to be constructed the height of construc- when the workmen are required to work on
tion per day shall be reStricted to ensure that
scaffoldings.
the newly constructed wall does not come
down due to lack of strength in the lower 14.3 L&&t-s---All ladders shall be conslayers. Similarly, in long walls adequate tructed of sound materials and shall be capaexpansion/crumple joints shall be provided ble of carrying their intended loads safely.
The ladders shall have not only adequate
to ensure safety.
strength but rigidity as well. If a ladder shows
14.2 Scaffoold-Properly designed and constendency JO spring, a brace shall be attached
tructed scaffolding built by competent to its middle and supported from some other
workmen shall beprovided during the cons- nori-yielding fixed oblect. No ladder iXWmg a
truction of the walls to ensure the safety of missing or defective rung or one which
workei-s. The scaffolding may be of timber or depends for its support solely on nails, shall
metal sections and the materials in scaffold- be used. Ladders shall not be used as guys,
ing shall be inspected for soundness,
braces or skids or for any other purpose for
strength, etc, at site by the engineer-in-charge which they are not intended. They shall not
prior to erection of scaffolds. Steel scafFolds
be used in horizontal position as runways.
intended for use in normal building construc- They shall not be overcrowded. Wherever
tion work shall conform to accepted stand- possible, ladders shall not be spliced. Where
ards [VI& lo)]. Bamboo and timber scaffolds splicing is unavoidable, it shall be done only
13.2.17 All checks as given in the Indian
Standards and any manuals issued by the
manufacturers shall be carried out.
J*
N A T I O N A L BUlLDING CODE OF iNDL4
under the supervision of engineer-in-charge.

Ladders leading to landings or walkways
shall extend at least one metre above the
landing and shall be secured at the upper end,
To prevent slipping, a ladder shall be secured
at the bottom end. If this cannot be done, a
person shall be stationed at the base whenever it is in use. As a further precautions,
the pitch at which a lean-to-ladder is used
shall be such that the horizontal distance of
its foot from the vertical plane of its top shall
be not more than one quarter of its length. If
the surface of the floor on which the ladder
rests is smooth or sloping, the ladder shall be
provided with non-slip bases. If the use of a
ladder is essential during strong winds, it
shall be securely lashed in position. No
ladder shall be placed or leant against window pane, sashes or such other unsafe or
yielding objects, nor placed in front of doors
opening towards it. If set up in driveways,
passageways or public walkways, it shall be
protected by suitable barricades. When
ascending or descending, the user shall face
the ladder, use both his hands and place his
feet near the ends of the rungs rather than
near the middle. It is dangerous to lean more
than 30cm to side in order to reach a larger
area from a single setting of the ladder.
Instead, the user shall get down and shift the
ladder to the required position.
Metal ladders shall not be used around electrical equipment or circuits of any kind where
there is a possibility of coming incontact with
the current. Metal ladders shall be marked
with signs reading CAUTION. DO NOT USE
NEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
Wooden ladders shall be inspected at least

once in a month for damage and deterioration. Close visual inspection is recommended
in preference to load testing. This condition
is particularly applicable to rope and bamboo ladders wherein fraying of ropes and
damage to bamboo is likely to occur due to
materials falling on them. When a ladder has
been accidentally dropped it shall be
inspected by the engineer-in-charge prior to
re-use. Overhead protection shall be provided for workmen under ladder. For detailed
information regarding safety requirements for
use of ladders, reference may be made to good
practice [VII( 12)].
14.4 Opening in Walls-Whenever making
of an opening in the existing wall is contemplated, adequate supports against the collapse or cracking of the wall portion above or
roof or adjoining walls shall be provided.
1 4 . 4 . 1 G UARDING OF W ALL O P E N I N G S A N D
HOLES -Wall opening barriers and screens
shall be of such construction and mounting
that they are capable of withstanding the
PART wl
CONSTRUCTIONAL
PRACTICES
A ND
SApETy
intended loads safely. For detailed information reference may be made to good practice
[V11(13)]. Every wall opening from which
there is a drop of more than 120cm shall be
guarded by one of the following:
RAIL, ROLLER, PICKET FENCE, HALF

DOOR OR EQUIVALENT BARRIER ---The
guard may be removable but should

preferably be hinged or otherwise
mounted so as to be conveniently
replaceable. Where there is danger to
persons working or passing below on
account of the falling materials, a removable toe board or the equivalent shall
also be provided. When the opening is
not in use for handling materials, the
guards shall be kept in position regardless of a door on the opening. In addition, a grab handle shall be provided on
each side of the opening. The opening
should have a sill that projects above the
floor level at least 2.5 cm.
b) Extension platform into which materials
may be hoisted for handling, shall be of
full length of the opening and shall have
side rails or equivalent guards.
14.4.2 Every chute wall opening from which
there is a drop of more than 120 cm shall be
guarded by one or more of the barriers specitied in 14.4.1 or as required by the
conditions.
14.5 Projection from Walls-Whenever projections cantilever out of the walls, temporary formwork shall be provided for such
projections and the same shall not be
removed till walls over the projecting slabs
providing stability load against overturning
are completely constructed.
15. COMMON HAZARDS DURING
WALLING
15.1 Lifting of Materials for Construction - Implements used for carrying materials
to the top of scaffoldings shall be of adequate
strength and shall not be overloaded during
the work. Where workmen have to work
below scaffoldings or ladder, overhead protection against &he falling materials shall be
provided. Care shall be taken in carrying large
bars, rods, etc, during const.ruction of the
walls to prevent any damage to property or
injury to workmen.
15.2 Haulage of Materials
15.2.1 In case of precast columns, steel
beams, etc, proper precautions shall betaken
to correctly handle, use and position them
with temporary arrangement of guys till
grouting of the base.
J9
1S.2.2 Manila or sisal rope shall not be used

in rainy season for hoisting of heavy materials as they lose their strength with alternate
wetting and drying.
15.3 Electrical Hazards-No scaffolding,
ladder, working platform, gangway runs, etc,
shall exist within 3m from any uninsulated
electric wire.
15.4 Fire Hazards-Gangways and the
ground below the scaffolding shall be kept
free from readily combustible materials
including waste and dry vegetation at all
times.
1.5.4:1 Where extensive use of blow torch or
other flame is anticipated scaffoldings,
gangways, etc, shall be constructed with fire
resistant materials. A portable dry powder
extinguisher of 3-kg capacity shall be kept
handy.
15.5 Mechanical Hazards- Care shall be
taken to see that no part of scaffolding or
walls is struck by truck or heavy moving
equipment and no materials shall be dumped
against them to prevent any damage. When
such scaffoldings are in or near a public
thoroughfare, sufficient warning lights and
boards shall be provided on the scaffoldings
to make them clearly visible to the public.
15.6 Fragile Materials-During glazing
operations, adequate precautions shall be
taken to ensure that the fragments of fragile
materials do not cause any injury to workmen or general public in that area by way of
providing covering to such material, side protection at work sate, etc.
16. ROOFING
Id.1 Prevention of accidental falling of
workmen during the construction of roofs
shall be ensured by providing platforms,
catch ro es, etc. If the materials are to be
hoisted From the ground level to the roof
level, adequate precautions shall be taken by
way of correct technique of handling, hoists
of sufficient strength to cater for the quantity
of stores to be hoisted and prevention of
overloading such hoists or buckets, prevention of overturning of hoists or buckets.
Where in a multi-storeyed building, the floor
of one storey is to be used for storage of
materials for the construction of roofs, it
shall be ensured that the quantum of stores
kept on the floor along with the load due to
personnel engaged in the construction work
shall not exceed the rated capacity of the
floors.
16.2 While roofing work is being done with
corrugated galvanized iron or asbestos
U?O
cement sheets, it shall be ensured that joints

are kept secured in position and do not slip,
thus causing injury to workmen. Workers
should not be allowed to walk on asbestos
cement sheets but should be provided with
walking boards. While working with tiles, it
shall be ensured that they are not kept loose
on the roof site resulting in falling of tiles on
workmen in lower area. In slopes of more
than 30 to the horizontal, the workmen shall
use ladders or other safety devices to work on
the roof.
16.3 If any glass work is to be carried out in
the roof, it shall be ensured that injury to
passerby due to breaking of glass is prevented. During wet conditions, the workmen
shall be allowed to proceed to work on a
sloping roof, only if the engineer-in-charge
has satisfied himself that the workmen are
not likely to slip due to wet conditions.
16!4 Flat Roof-ln any type of flat roof construction, any formwork provided shall be
properly designed and executed to ensure
that it does not collapse during construction.
During actual construction of roof, frequent
inspection of the formwork shall be carried
out to ensure that no damage has occured to
it.
16.5 While using reinforcement in roofs, it
shall be ensured that enough walking platforms are provided in the reinforcement area
to ensure safe walking to the concreting area.
Loose wires and unprotected rod ends shall
be avoided.
16.6 Guarding o$ Floor Openings and Floor
Holes
16.6.1 Every tern orary floor opening shall
have railings, or sR all be constantly attended
by someone. Every floor hole into which erztrercan acctdently fall shall be guardec! by
a) a railing with toe board on all exposed
sides, or
b) a floor hole cover of adequate strength
and it should be hinged in place. When
the cover is not in place, the floor hole
shall be constantly attended by some one
or shall be protected by a removable
railing.
26.6.2 Every stairway floor opening shall be
guarded by a railing on all cx osed sides,
except at entrance to stairway. Bvery ladder
way floor opening or platform shall be
guarded by a guard railing with toe board on
all exposed sides (except at entrance to opening), with t& passage through the railing
either provided with a swinging gate or so
offset that a person can not walk directly into
the opening.
16.6.3 G UARDING OF O P E N- SIDE F LOORS

P LATFORM -Every open-sided floor or
platform 120 cm or more above adjacent floor
or ground level shall be guarded by a railing
(or the equivalent) or all open sides, except
where there is entrance to ramp, stair-way, or
fixed ladder. The railing shall be provided
with a toe board beneath the open sides
wherever:
AND
a) persons may pass;

b) there is moving machinery; or
c) there is equipment with which falling
materials could create a hazard.
For detailed information, reference may be
made to good practice [VII( 13)].
17. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF
CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES
(HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS)
17.1 Handling of Plant
17.1.1 MIXERS
Z7.1,Z.f All gears, chains and rollers of mixers shall be properly guarded. If the mixer
has a charging skip the operator shall ensure
that the workmen are out of danger before
the skip is lowered. Railings shall be provided on the ground to prevent anyone walking under the skip while it is being lowered.
17.1.1.2 All cables, clamps, hooks, wire
ropes, gears and clutches, etc, of the mixer,
shall be checked and cleaned, oiled and
greased, and serviced once a weak. A trial run
of the mixer shall be made and defects shall
be removed before operating a mixer.
17.1.1.3 When workmen are cleaning the
inside of the drums, and operating power of
the mixer shall be locked m the off position
and all fuses shall be removed and a suitable
notice hung at the place.
17.1.2 CRANES
17.1.2.3 .A11 practical steps shall be taken to

prevent the cranes being operated in dangerous proximity to a live overhead power line.
In particular, no member of the crane shall
be permitted to approach within the minimum safety distances as laid down in 4.18(a).
If it becomes necessary to operate the cranes
with clearances less than those specified
above, it shall be ensured that the overhead
power lines shall invariably be shut offdurmg the period of operation of cranes. Location of any underground power cables in the
area of operation shall also be ascertained
and necessary safety precautions shall be
taken.
17.1.2.4 Cranes shall not be used at a speed
which causes the boom to swing.
17.1.2.5 A crane shall be thoroughly examined at least once in a period of 6 months
by a competent person who shall record a
certificate of the check.
17.1.2.6 The operator of the crane shall
follow the safe reach of the crane as shown by
the manufacturer.
17.1.2.7 No person shall be lifted or transported by the crane on its hook or boom.
17.1.2.8 Toe boards and limit stops should
be provided for wheel barrows on the load
ing/unloading platforms. Material should be
loaded securely with no projections.
17.1.2.9 Concrete buckets handled by crane
or overhead cableway shall be suspended
from deep throated hooks, preferably
equipped with swivel and safety latch. In the
concrete buckets, both bottom drop type and
side drop type, closing and locking of the
exit door of the bucket shall always be
checked by the man-in-charge of loading
concrete in the bucket to avoid accidental
opening of the exit door and consequent falling of concrete.
17.1~2.10 Interlocking or other safety devices
shot&I be installed at all stopping points of the
hoists. The hoists shaft way should be fenced
properly.
17.1.2.1 Crane rails where used shall be

installed on firm ground and shall be.properly secured. In case of tower cranes, it shall
be ensured that the level difference between
the two rails remains within the limits prescribed by the manufacturer to safeguard
against toppling of the crane.
17.1.2.11 When the bucket or other memebrs

being lifted are out of sight of the crane operator, a signalman shall be posted in clear view
of the receiving area and the crane operator.
17~1.2.2 Electrical wiring which can possibly

touch the crane or any member being lifted
shall be removed, or made dead by removing
the controlling fuses and in their absence
controlling switches.
17.1.2.12 A standard code of hand signals

shall be adopted in controlling the movements of the crane, and both the driver and
the signaller shall be thoroughly familiar with
the signals.
?ART VII CONSTTWCIIONAL
?RACTlCIS
A N D SAFSTT
u-21
The driver of the crane shall respond to signals only from the appointed signaller but
shall obey stop signal at any time no matter
who gives. it.
17.1.2.23 If a travelling gantry crane is operating over casting beds, a warning signal
which sounds automatically during travel
should be provided to avoid accidents to
workmen crossing or standing in the path of
the moving loads.
17.1.3 TRUCKS
17.1.3.1 When trucks are being used on the
site, traffic .problems shall be taken care of. A
reasonably smooth traffic surface shall be
provided. If practicable, a loop road shall be
provided to permit continuous operation *of
vehicles and to eliminate their backing. If a
continuous loop is not possible, a turnout
shall be provided. Backing operations shall
be controlled by a signalman positioned so as
to have a clear view of the area behind the
truck and to be clearly visible to the truck
driver. Movement of workmen and plant
shall be routed to avoid crossing, as much as
possible, the truck lanes.
i 7.2 Formwork
17.2.1 Formwork shall be designed after tak-
ing into consideration spans, setting temperature of concrete, dead load and working load
to be supported and safety factor for the
materials used for formwork.
17.2.2 All timber formwork shall be carefully inspected before use and members
haing cracks and excessive knots shall
be discarded.
17.2.3 As timber centering usually takes an
initial set when vertical load is applied, the
design of this centering shall make allowance
for this factor.
17.2.4 The vertical supports shall be adequately braced or otherwise secured in position that these do not fall when the load gets
released or the supports are accidently hit.
17.2.5 Tubular steel centering shall be used
in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. When tubular steel and timber
centering is to be used in combination. necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any
unequal settlement under load.
17.2.6 A thorough inspection of tubular steel
centering is necessary before its erection and
members showing evidence of excessive resting, kinks, dents or damaged welds shall be
discarded. Buckled or broken members shall
be replaced.. Care shall also be taken that
u-22
locking devices are in good working order

and that coupling pins are effectively aligned
to frames.
17.2.7 After assembling the basic unit,
adjustment screws shall be set to their
approximate final adjustment and the unit
shall be level and plumb so that when additional frames are installed the tower shall be
in level and plumb. The centering' frames
shall be tied together with sufficient braces to
make a rigid and solid unit. It shall be
ensured that struts and diagonals braces are
in proper position and are secured so that
frames develop full load carrying capacity.
As erection progresses, all connecting devices
shall be in place and shall be fastened for full
stability of joints and units.
17.2.8 In case of timber posts, vertical joints

shall be properly designed. The connections
shall normally be with bolts and nuts. Use of
rusted or spoiled threaded bolts and nuts
shall be avoided.
17.2.9 Unless the timber centering is supported by a manufacturers certificate about
the loads it can stand, centering shall be
designed by a competent engineer.
f 7.2.10 Centering layout shall be made by a
qualified engineer and shall be strictly followed. The bearing capacity of the soil shall
be kept in yiew for every centering job. The
effect of weather conditions shall also be
taken into consideration as dry clay may
become very plastic after a rainfall and show
marked decrease in its bearing capacity.
17.2.11 Sills under the supports shall be set
on firm soil or other suitable material in a
pattern which assures adequate stability for
all props. Care shall be taken not to disturb
the soil under the supports. Adequate drainage shall be provided to drain away water
coming due to rains, washing of forms or
during the curing of the concrete to avoid
softening of the supporting soil starta.
17.2.12 All centering shall be finally,
inspected to ensure that:

a) footings or sills under every post of the
centering are sound.
b) all lower adjustment screws or wedges
are snug against the legs of the panels.
c) all upper adjustment screws or heads of
jacks are in full contact with the
formwork.
d) panels are plumb in both directions.
e) all cross braces are in place and locking
devices are in closed and secure position.
0 in case of CHHAJAS and balconies, the
props shall be adequate to transfer the

load to the supporting point.
17.2.13 During pouring of the concrete, the

centering shall be constantly inspected and
strengthened, if required, wedges below the
vertical supports tightened and adjustment
screws properly adjusted as necessary. Adequate protection of centering shall be secured
from moving vehicles or swinging loads.
17.2.14 Forms shall not be removed earlier
than as laid down in the specifications and
until it is certain that the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself and
all loads that will be imposed on it. Only
workmen actually engaged in removing the
formwork shall be allowed in the area during
these operations. Those engaged in removing
the formwork shall wear helmets, gloves and
heavy soled shoes and approved safety belts
if adequate footing is not provided above 2 m
level. While cutting any tying wires in tension, care shall be taken to prevent backlash
which might hit a workman.
17.2.14.1 The particular order in which the
supports are to be dismantled should be followed according to the instructions of the
site engineer.
17.3 Ramps and Gangways
17.3.1 ,Ramps and gangways shall be of adequate strength and evenly supported. They
shall either have a sufficiently flat slope or
shall have cleats fixed to the surface to prevent slipping of workmen. Ramps andgangways shall be kept free from grease, mud,
snow or other slipping hazards or other
obstructions leading to tripping and accidental fall of a workman.
17.3.1.1 Ramps and gangways meant for

transporting materials shall have even surface and be of sufficient width and provided
with skirt boards on open sides.
17.4 Prestressed Concrete
27.42 In pre-stressing operations, oparat-
ing, maintenance and replacement instructions of the supplier of the equipment shall
be strictly adhered to.
ever possible, to avoid serious damage if a

hydrualic line fails.
17.4.4 Pulling-headers, bolts and hydraulic
jacks/rams shall be inspected for signs of
deformation and failure. Threads on bolts
and nuts should be frequently inspected for
diminishing cross section. Choked units shall
be carefully cleaned.
17.4.5 Care shall be taken that no one stands
in line with the tensioning elements and jacking equipment during the tensioning operations and that no one is directly over the
jacking equipment when deflection is being
done. Signs and barriers shall be provided to
prevent workmen from working behind the
jacks when the stressing operation is in
progress.
17.4.6, Necessary shields should be put up
immediately behind the prestressing jacks
during stressing operations.
17.4.7 Wedges and other temporary anchoring devices shall be inspected before use.
17.4.8 The prestressing jacks shall be periodically examined for wear and tear.
17.5 Erection of Prefabricated Members
17.5.1 A spreader beam shall be used wherever possible so that the cable can be as perpendicular to the members being lifted as
practical. The angle between the cable and
the members to be lifted shall not be less than
60.
17.5.2 The lifting wires shall be tested for

double the load to be handled at least once in
six months. The guy line shall be of adequate
strength to perform its function of contro!ling the movement of members being lifted.
17.5.3 Temporary scaffolding of adequate
strength shall be used to support precast
members at predetermined supporting points
while lifting and placing them in position and
connecting them to other members.
17.5.4 After erection of the member, it shall
be guyed and braced to prevent it from being
tipped or dislodged by accidental impact
when setting the next member.
17.4.2 Extreme caution shall be exercised in

all operations involving the use of stressing
equipment as wires/strands under high tensile stresses become a lethal weapon.
17.5.5 Precast concrete units shall be

handled at specific picking points and with
specific devices. Girders and beams shall be
braced during transportation and handled. In
such a way as to keep the members upright.
17.4.3 During the jacking operation of any

tensioning element(s) the anchor shall be
kept turned up close to anchor plate, wher-
17.5.6 Methods of assembly and erection

specified by the designer, shall be strictly
adhered to at site. Immediately on erecting
PART VII
CONSTRUCTldNAL
PRACTICES
AND
SAFETY
any unit in position, temporary connections

or supports as specified shall be provided
before relasing the lifting equipment. The
permanent structural connections shall be
established at the earliest opportunity.
17.6 Heated Concrete- When heaters are
being used to heat aggregates and other
materials and to maintain proper curing
temperatures, the heaters shall be frequently
checked for functioning and precautions shall
be taken to avoid hazards in using coal, liquid,
gas or any other fuel.
17.7 Structural Conriections
17.7.1 When reliance is placed on bond
between precast and in situ concrete the contact surface of the precast units shall be suitably prepared in accordance with the
specifications.
17.7.2 The packing of joints shall be carried
out in accordance with the assembly
instructions.
17.7.3 Levelling devices, such as wedges and
nuts which have no load bearing functionih
the completed structure shall be released or
removed as necessary prior to integrating the
joints.
17.7.4 If it becomes necessary to use electric
power for in situ work, the same should be
stepped down to a safe level as far as possible.
k7.8 General- 17.8.1 Workmen working in
any position where there is a falling hazard
shall wear safety belts or other adequate
protection shall be provided.
18. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
18.1 Safety Organization -The agency
responsible for erecting the steel work should
analyze the proposed erection scheme for
safety; the e&ion scheme should cover
safety aspects right from the planning stage up
to the actual execution of the work.
18.2 Safety ,of Men
18.2.1 GENERAL-While engaging men for
the job the supervisor should check pp. and
make sure that they are skilled inthepataicular job they hhve to perform.
vII.24
IR.2.l.l The helmets shall be worn properly

and a! all times during the work and shall
conform to the accepted standards [V11(9)].
18.2.1.2 The safety goggles shall be used
while performing duties which are hazardous
to eye like drilling, cutting and welding. The
goggles used shall conform to the accepted
standards [VII( IS)] and should suit individual workers.
18.2.1.3 The welders and gas cutters shall be
equipped with proper protective equipment
like gloves, safety boots, aprons and hand
shields [see VII(l4)]. The filter glass of the
hand shield shall conform to the accepted
standards [VII( 1 S)] and should be suitable to
the eyes of the particular worker
18.2.1.4 When the work is in progress, the
area shall be cordoned off by barricades to
prevent persons from hitting against structural components, or falling into exca$ated
trenches or getting injured by falling objects.
18.2.1.5 Warning signs shall be displayed
where necessary to indicate hazards, for
example (a) 440 VOLTS, (b) DO N O T
SMOKE, (c) M E N W O R K I N G A H E A D ,
etc. Hand lamps shall be of low voltage preferably 24 V to prevent electrical hazards.
28.2.1.6. All electrically operated hand tools
shall be provided with double earthing.
18.2.2 Anchors for guys or ties shall be
checked for proper placement. The weight of
concrete in which the anchors are embedded
shall be checked for uplift and sliding.
18.2.2.1 Split-end eye anchors shall only be
used in good, solid rock.
28.2.2.2 The first load lifted by a guy derrick
,shall be kept at a small height for about 10
minutes and the anchors immediately
inspected for any signs or indications of
failure.
18.2.3 When a number of trusses or deep
girders is loaded in one car or on one truck,
all but one being lifted shall be tied back
unless they have been tied or braced to prevent their falling over and endangering men
unloading.
18.2.4 The erection gang shall have adequate
supply of bolts, washers, rivets, pins, etc, of
the correct size. Enough number of bolts
shall be used in connecting each piece using a
minimum of two bolts in a pattern to ensure
that the joint will not fail due to dead load
and erection loads. All splice connections in
columns, crane girders, etc, shal! be completely bolted or riveted or welded as specified in the drawing before erection.
18.2.5 Girders and other heavy complicated

structural members may require special erection devices like cleats and hooks, which can
be shop assembled and bolted or riveted or
welded to the piece and may be left permanently in the place after the work.
18.2.6, If a piece is laterally unstable when

picked at its centre, use of a balance beam is
advisable, unless a pair of bridles slings can
be placed far enough apart for, them to be
safe lifting points. The top flange of a truss,
girder or long beam may be temporarily reinforced with a structural member laid flat on
top of the member and secured temporarily.
18.2.7 On deep girders, and even on some
trusses, a safety bar running their.full length
will aid the riggers, fitters and others
employed on the bottom flange or bottom
chord to.work with greater safety. This can
be a single 16 mm diameter wire rope through
vertical stiffenersof such members about one
metre above the bottom flange and clamped
at the ends with wire rope clamps. If the holes
cannot be provided, short eye bolts can be
welded to the webs of the girder at intervals
to be removed and the surface chipped or
ground to leave it smooth after all work on
the piece has been completed.
18.2.8 Safety belts shall always be available
at work spbt to be used whenever necessary.
The rope shall be chemically treated to resist
dew and rdtting. These shall not be tied on
sharp edges of steel structures. They shall be
tied generally not more than 2 to 3m away
from the belt.
18.2.9 On a guy derrick or climbing crane
job, the tool boxes used by the erection staff
shall be moved to the new working floor each
time the rig is changed. On a mobile crane
job, the boxes shall be moved as soon as the
crane starts operating in a new area too far
away for the men to reach the boxes conveniently. While working a tall and heavy guy
derrick, it is advisable to control tension in
guys by hand winches to avoid jerks, which
may cause an accident.
18.2.10 The proper size, number and spacing
of wire rope clamps shall be used, depending
on the diameter of the wire rope. They shall
be properly fixed in accordance with codes of
good practice [VII(16)]. They shall be
checked as soon as the rope has been
stretched, as the rope, especially if new, tends
to stretch under the applied load, which in
turn may cause it to shrink slightly in diameter. The clamps shall then be promptly tightened to take care of this new condition. In
addition, the clamps shall be inspected frequently to be sure that they have not slipped
and are tight enough.
?Alf wl CONSTWJCTIONAL ?RA- AND MFBlT
18.2.11 When the men can work safely from \

the steel structure itself, this is preferable to
hanging platforms or scaffolds, as it eliminates additional operations, which in turn,
reduces the hazard of an accident.
18.2.11.1 To aid men working on floats or
scaffolds, as well as menin erection gangs, or
other gangs using small material, such as
bolts and drift pins, adequate bolt baskets or
similar containers with handles of sufficient
strength and attachment to carry the loaded
containers, shall be provided.
18.2.11.2 The men should be trained to use

such containers, and to keep small tools
gathered up and put away in tool boxes when
not in use. Material shall not be dumped
overboard when a scaffold is to be moved.
Rivet heaters shall have safe containers or
buckets for hot rivets left over at the end of
the day.
18.2.12 During the erection of tall buildings,
it is desirable to use nylon nets at a height of 3
to 4 m to provide safety to men.
18.2.13 S AFETY A GAINST F IRE-A fire protection procedure is to be set up if there1s to
be any flame cutting, burning, heating, riveting or any operation that could start a fire.
For precautions to be observed during welding and cutting operations. reference may be
made to good practice [V11(17)].
18.2.13.1 The workers should be instructed
not to throw objects like hot rivets, cigrette
stubs, etc, around.
18.2.13.2 Sufficient fire extinguishers, preferably of soda acid type shall be placed at
strategic points. Extinguishers shall always
be placed in cranes, hoists, compressors and
similar places. Where electrical equipments
are involved, CO2 or dry powder extinguishers shall be provided.
18.2.14 Riding on a load, tackle or runner
shall be prohibited.
18.2.15 .The load shall never be allowed to

rest on wire ropes. Ropes in operation should
not be touched. Wtre rope with broken
strand shall not be used for erection work.
Wire ropes/manila ropes conforming to
acceptable standards [VII(18)] shall be used
for guying.
18.2.16 LIFTING APPLIANCES -Precautions
as laid down in 17.1.2 shall be followed.
18.2,17 SLINGING
18.2.17.1 Chains shall not be joined by .bolting or wiring links together. They shall not be
VP
shortened by tying knots. A chain in which

the links are locked, stretched or do not move
freely shall not be used. The chain shall be
free of ,kinks and twists. Proper eye splices
shall be used to attach the chain hooks.
18.2.27.2 Pulley blocks of the proper size
shall be used to allow the rope free play in the
sheave grooves and to protect the wire rope
from sharp bends under load. Idle sling
should not be carried on the crane hook
alongwith a loaded sling. When idle slings are
carried they shall be hooked.
28.2.17.3 While using multilegged slings,
each sling or leg shall be loaded evenly and
the slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid
a wide angle between the legs.
18.2.28 RIVETING OPERATIONS
18.2.18.1 HANDLING RIVETS-Care shall be
taken while handling rivets so that they do
not fall, strike or cause injury to men and
material below. Rivet catchers shall have
false wooden bottoms to prevent rivets from
rebounding.
18.2.18.2 RIVETINO DOLLIES-Canvas, leather

or rope slings shall be used for riveting dollies. Chain shall not be used for the purpose.
18.2.18.3 RIVETING HAMMERS-Snaps and
plungers of pneumatic riveting hammers
shall be secured to prevent the snap from
dropping out of place. The nozzle of the
hammer shall be inspected periodically and
the wire attachment renewed when born.
18.2.18.4 FIRE PROTECTION-The rivet heating equipment should be as near as possible
to the place of work. A pail of water shall
always be kept ready for quenching the fire
during riveting operations and to prevent
fires when working near inflammable
materials.
18.2.19 WELDING
AND
G AS C UTTING
18.2.19.1 For safety and health requirements

in electric gas welding and cutting operations, reference may be made to good practice [VII( 19)]. The recommendations given
in 18.2.19.2 to 18.2.19.4 are also applicable.
18.2.19.2 All gas cylinders shall be used and
stored in the upright position only and shall
be conveyed in trolleys. While handling by
cranes they shall be carried in cages. The
cylinders shall be marked full or empty as
the case may be. Gas cylinders shall be stored
away from open flames and other sources of
heat. Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored
near combustible gas, oil, grease and similar
Y*I-26
combustible materials. When the cylinders

are in use, cylinder valve key or wrench shall
be placed in position. Before a cylinder is
moved, cylinder valve shall be closed. All
cylinder valves shall be closed when the
torches are being replaced or welding is
stopped for some reason. The cylinder valve
and connections shall not be lubricated.
18.2.19.3 Gas cutting and welding torches
shall be lighted by means of special lighters
and not with matches. The cables from
welding equipment should be placed in such
a way that they are not run over by traffic.
Double earthing shall be provided. Before
undertaking welding operations near
combustible materials, suitable blanketing
shall be provided and fire extinguishers kept
nearby. Welding shall not be undertakenm
areas where inflammable liquids and gases
are stored.
18.2.19.4 Gas lines and compressed air lines
shall be identified by suitable colour codes
for easy identification, to avoid confusion
and to prevent fire and explosion hazards.
18.3 Safety of Structure
18.3.1 GENERAL-The structure itself should
be safeguarded during its erection. The first
truss of the roof s stem shall be guyed on
each side before theyhoisting rope is detached
from it. After the subsequent trusses and roof
purlins are erected, protective guides shall be
firmly established and the required wind
bracings shall be erected to prevent the whole
structure being blown over by a sudden gale
at night. Bracing and guying precautions
shall be taken on .every structure until it is
complete. Guying shall be specifically done
for trusses and structural components which
after their erection form an erection device.
On structures used for temporary material
storage overloading shall be avoided.
18.3.1.1 Erection of columns shall be
immediately followed by vertical bracing
between columns before the roof structure is
erected.
19. .MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
19.1 Staircase Construction-While
staircase is under construction, depending on
the type of construction, namely, concrete or
brickwork, etc, suitable precautions shall be
taken by way of support, formworks, etc, to
prevent any collapse. Workmen or any other
person shall not be allowed to use such
staircases till they are tested and found.fit for
usage by the Authority/engineer-in-charge.
Till the permanent handrails are provided,
temporary provisions like ropes, etc, shall be
NATIONAL BUILDlNG
CODE OF INDIA
provided on staircases prior to commencement of use of such staircases.

19.2 Lift Wells--Till the installation of the
lift is completed, lift wells shall be protected
with check boards or railings together with
notice boards, danger lights, etc, to prevent
persons accidentally falling into the wells.
The handrails provided shall be capable of
withstanding pressure exerted due to normal
bumping of an individual against the same.
19.3 Construction Involving the Use of Hot
Bituminous Tar Materials
19.3.1 S AFETY P ROGRAMME
19.3.1.1 GENERAL-On ah major works, an
experienced and competent foreman or
supervisor shall be placed in-charge of the
work, and shall be made responsible for the
strict observance of the safety rules. He shall
stock the necessary protective equipment, fire
extinguishing equipment, first-aid kit, etc. He
shall also keep a record of the accidents taking place on any particular job, with reasons
thereof, and shall suggest suitable remedial
measures to the management for prevention
thereof.
19.3.1.2 PROTECTIVE ~~~~Rl~~i----Workers
engaged on jobs involving handling of hot
bitumen, tar, and bituminous mixtures shall
use protective wears, such as boots and
gloves, preferably of asbestos or otherwise of
rubber; goggles and helmet. No workers shall
be permitted to handle such materials without wearing the needed protective covering.
19.3.1.3 FIRE FIGHTING ARRANGEMENTSWhen heating and handling of hot bituminous materials is to be done in the open,
sufficient stocks of clean dry sand or loose
earth shall be made available at the work site
to cope with any resultant fires. When such
materials are not available, nor are any suitable type of fire extinguishers provided at the
work site in the open, and reliance has to be
on using water for fighting any fire; the water
supply available should be in abundance and
the water shall be applied to the. fire in the
form of spray. When heating of bituminous
materials is carried out in enclosed spaces,
sufficient number of property maintained dry
powder fire extinguisher or form extinguisher
conforming to accepted standards
[VII(20)] shall be kept in readiness on the
work site.
19.3.2 S P R A Y E R , SPREADER / PA V E R
19.3.2.1 SPRAYER-The sprayer shall be
provided with a fire resisting screen. The
screen shall have an observation window,
Piping for hot tar and bitumen shall beadeFART
MI CONSTIIUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
quately insulated to protect workers from

injury by burns. Flexible piping work under
positive pressure shall be of metal which shall
be adequately insulated. Workers shall not
stand facing the wind directions while spraying hot binder, lest it may fall on them causing burns.
19.3.2.2 SPREADER/ PAVER -Spreaders in
operation shall be protected by signals, signs
or other effective means. People should be
warned against walking over hot mixture
laid. Gravel spreaders shall always keep a
safe distance from sprayer. Elevated platforms on spreaders shall be protected by suitable railing and be provided with an access
ladder.
19.3.3 EQ U I P M E N T
B I T U M E N A.ND TARS
FOR
EATING
OF
19.3.3.1 Tanks, vats, kettles, pots, drums

and other vessels for heating tar, bitumen
and other bituminous materials shall be:
a) adequately resistant to damage by heat,
transportation, etc;
b) capable of holding a full load without
danger of collapse, bursting or
distortion;
c) provided with a close fitting cover suitable for smothering a fire in the vessel OI
protection from rain; and
d) leak proof, and provided with suitable
outlets which can be controlled for taking out the hot material.
19.3.3.2 Suitable indicator gauges shall be
used to ascertain level and temperature of the
material in the boiler. On no account shall
workers be allowed to peep into the boiler for
this purpose. For ascertaining levels, in small
plants, dipstick may also be used.
19.3.3.3 Gas and oil-fired bitumen and tar
kettles or pots shall be equipped with
burners, regulators and safety devices of
types approved by the Authority. Heating
appliances for vessels shall distribute the heat
uniformly over the heating surface so as to
avoid overheating. In case of bituminous
mixtures using mineral aggregates filler
together with bitumen, it is preferable to have
some means for .stirring as well. Only vessels
heated by electricity shall be used inside
buildings. Tar boilers shall never be used on
combustible roof.
19.3.3.4 Buckets for hot bitumen, bituminous materials or tar shall have:
a) the bail or handle firmly secured,. and
b) a second handle near the bottom for
tipping.
19.3.3.5 Bitumen or tar boilers mounted on

wheels for easy transport or towing shall
preferably be provided with hand pumps for
spraying purposes.
19.3.3.6 Vessels in operation shall be kept at
a safe distance from combustible materials.
When vessels are used in confined spaces. the
gases, fumes and smoke generated shall be
removed by exhaust ventilation or by forced
ventilations. Vessels that are being heated
shall not be left unattended. Pieces of bituminous material shall not be thrown into the
hot vessels so as to cause splashing. Covers
shall be kept closed when vessels are not in
use. Containers shall not be filled with hot
bitumen or tar to a level that might cause
danger when they are carried or hoisted.
Enough space shall be left in vessels for
expansion of binder when heated.
19.3.3.7 Bitumen, tar shall be kept dry and to
avoid fire due to foaming, boiler shall have a
device that prevents foam from reaching the
burners or anti-foaming agents shall be used
to control the same. Alternatively to avoid
fire due to foaming, the heating shall be at low
temperature till the water entrapped, if any, is
completely evaporated. Any water present in
the boiler shall also be drained before using it
for heating binders. No open light shall be
used for ascertaining the level of binder in

boilers. If a burner goes out, the fuel supply
shall be cut off and the heating tube shall be
thoroughly blown out by the fan so as to
prevent a back fire.
19.3.3.8 Cutbacks shall not be heated over
an open flame unless a water jacket is used.
While they are being heated the vessel shall
be kept open.
19.3.3.9 Piping shall not be warmed with
burning rags and instead blow-lamps or
similar devices shall be used.
19.3.3.10 Spilled bitumen or tar shall be
promptly cleaned up around boilers.
19,3.3.11 inspection openings shall not be
opened while there is any pressure in the
boiler.
19.3.3.12 When tanks are cleaned by steam,
adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent any build up of pressure.
19.3.4 HANDLING B ITUMEN /TAR-Bitumen/tar shall not be heated beyond the
temperature recommended by the manufacturer of the product. While discharging
heated binder from the boiler, workers shall
not stand opposite to the jet so as to avoid
the possibility of hot binder falling on them.
The container shall be handled only after
vl1.28
closing the control valve. While handling hot

bitumen, tar, workers shall exercise scrupulous care to prevent accidental spillage thereof. The buckets and cans in which the hot
material is carried from boiler shall be
checked before use to ensure that they are
intact ,and safe. Mops and other applicators
contaminated with bituminous materials
shall not be stored inside buildings.
19.3.5 BITUMEN PI.AS~S---Safety requirements shall be in accordance with good practice [V11(21)].
20. FINISHES
20.1 Painting, Polishing and Other Finishes-only the quantity of paint, thinner and
polish required for the days work should be
kept at the work spot.
20.1.1 All containers of paint, thinner and
polish which are not in actual use should be
closed with tight fitting lids and kept at a safe
place away from the actual work site.
20.1.2 A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher
conforming to acceptable standards
[Vll(22)] shall be kept handy.
20.1.3 Metal receptacles with pedal operated
metal lids shall be kept handy at the work site
for depositing used cotton ragsi waste. The
contents of such receptacles shall be disposed

off before the end of each days work at a safe
place, preferably by burning under proper
supervision.
20.1.4 All containers of paint shall be
removed from the work site and deposited in
the paint store before the close of days work.
Used paint brushes shall be cleaned and
deposited in the store alongwith the
containers.
20.1.5 Some paints/polishing and finishing
materials are injurious to the health of workmen. Adequate protective clothing, respiratory equipment, etc, shall be provided for the
use of workmen during such operations
where necessary.
21. FRAGILE FIXTURES
2Ll It shall be ensured that sufficient
number of workmen and equipment are provided to carry the fragile fixtures like. sanitary
.
fittings, glass panes, etc, to prevent injury to
workmen due to accidental dropping of such
fixtures.
22. SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS
22.1 Safety in compressed airwork, drilling,
blasting and welding operations shall be in
accordance with good practice [VlI(23)].
NATIONAL BUILDING COD1 OF UUDiA
23. IX..E;X..;gtL
INSTALLATIONS
23.1 Temporary Electrical Wiring

23.1.~ Frayed and/ or bare wires shall not be
used for temporary electrical connections
during construction. All temporary wiring
shall be installed and supervised by a competent electrician. Adequate protection shall be
provided for all electrical wiring laidon floor
which may have to be crossed over by construction machinery or by the workmen. All
flexible wiring connecting the electrical
appliances shall have adequate mechamcal
strength and shall preferably be enclosed in a
flexible metal sheath. Overhead wires/cables
shall be so laid that they leave adequate head
room.
23.1.2 All electrical circuits, other than those
required for illumination of the site at night,
shall be switched off at the close of days
work. The main switch board from which
connections are taken for lighting, power
operated machinery, etc, shall be located in
an easily accessible and prominent place. No
article of clothing nor stores shall be kept at
the back of or over the board or anywhere
near it. One 3-kg/4.5-kg CO2 extinguisher or
one S-kg dry powder extinguisher shall be
provided near the switch board.
23.2 Permanent Electrical InstallatmnsBesides the fire safety measures for electrical
installations covered under 23.1, safety in
electric installations in buildings and installations of lifts shall be in accordance with Part
VIII Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations and Part VIII Building services,
Section 5 Installation of lifts and escalators.
24.1 Sanitation
a) Adequate toilet facilities shall be pro-
vided for the workmen within easy access

of their place of work. *The total number
to be provided shall be not less than one
per 30 employees in any one shift.
b) Toilet facilities shall be provided from
the start of building operations, and connection to a sewer shall be madeas soon
as practicable.
cl Every toilet shall be soconstructed that
the occupant is sheltered from view and
protected from the weather and falling
objects.
d) Toilet facilities shall be maintained in a
sanitary condition. A sufficient quantity
of disinfectant shall be provided.
?ARt VII
CONSlRlJCTlONAL
?McTscu
AN0 SA?ETV
An adequate supply of drinking water

shall be provided, and unless connected
to a municipal water supply, samples of
the water- shall be tested at frequent
intervals by the Authority.
Washing facilities shall be installed, and
when practicable shall be connected to
municipal water supply and shall discharge to a sewer.
Natural or artificial illumination shall be
provided.
24.2 Fire Protection
24.2.1 In addition to the provision of fire
extinguishers, as specified in this part of the
Code, other fire extinguishing equipment
shall also be provided and conveniently
located within the building under construction or on the building site, as required by the
Authority.
24.2.1.1 All fire extinguishers shall be maintained in a serviceable condition at all times
in accordance with good practice [V11(5)].
24.2.1.2 It shall be ensured that all workmen
and supervisory staff are fully conversant
with the correct operation and use of fire
extinguishers provided at the construction
site.
24.2.2 Access shall be provided and maintained at all times to all fire. fighting equipment, including fire hose, extinguishers,
sprinkler valves and hydrants.
24.2.3 Where the building plans require the
installation of fixed fire fighting equipment,
such as hydrants; stand pipes, sprinklers and
underground water mains or other suitable
arrangements for provision of water shall be
installed, completed and made available for
permanent use as soon as possible, but in any
case not later than the stage at which the
hydrants, etc. are required for use as specitied in 24.2.3.1 to 24.2.3.4.
24.2.3.1 A stand pipe system (landing
valves), permanent in nature shall be
installed and made available before the building has reached the height of 15 m above the
grade, and carried up with each floor.
24.2.3.2 The standpipe (landing valve/ internal fire hydrant) and its installation shall
conform to the accepted standards[V11(24)]:
24.2.3.3 The standpipe shall be carried up
with each floor and securely cap ed at the
top. Top hose outlets, should at aPI times, be
not more than one floor below the floor
under construction.
24.23.4 A substantial box, preferably of

metal, should be provided and maintained
near each hose outlet. The box should contain adequate lengths of hdse to reach all
arts of the floor as well as a short branch
%ted with 12 or 20mm nozzle.
24.3.3 Individuals engaged in work involving
24.2.4 Close liaison shall be maintained with

the local Fire Brigade, during construction of
all buildings above I5 m in height and special
occupancies, like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous
and mixed occupancies with any of the aforesaid occupancies having area more than
500 mz on each floor.
25.1 Specification and requirements of construction machinery used in, construction or

demolition work shall conform to accepted
standards [V11(25)].
25.2 For safety requirements for working
with construction machinery, reference may
be made to good practice [VH(26)].
24.2.5 It is desirable that telephone system or

other means &f inter-communication system
be provided during the construction of
all buildings over 15 m in. height or buildings
having a plinth area in excess of 1 000m2
24.2.6, All work waste, such as scrap timber,
wood shavings, sawdust, paper, packing
materials and oily, waste shall be collected
and disposed of safely at the end of each
days work. Particular care shall be taken to
remove all waste accumulation in or nearvert,ical shaft openings like stairways, lift-shaft,
etc.
24.2.7 An independent water storage facility
shall be provided before the commencement
of construction operations for fire-fighting
purposes. It shall be maintained and be available for use at all times.
24.2.8 F IRE Cur-OFFS-Fire walls and exit
stairways required for a building should be
given construction priority. Where firedoors,
with or without automatic closing devices,
are stipulated in the buiiding plans they
should be hung as soon as practicable and
before any significant quantity of combustible material is introduced in the building.
24.2.8.1 As the work progresses, the provision of permanent stairways, stairwayenclosur,es, fire walls and other features of the
completed structure which will prevent the
horizontal and vertical spread of fire should
be ensured.
24.3 Clothing
shall be ensured that the clothes
worn by the workmen be not of such nature
as to increase the chances of their getting
involved in accident to themselves or to
others. As a rule, wearing of CHA DDA RS
or loose garments shall be prohibited.
24.3.1 It
24.3.2 Workmen engaged in processes which

splash liquid or other materials which will
injure the skin shall have enough protective
clothing to cover the body.
n,-3
use of naked flames (such as welding) &all

not wear synthetic fibre or similar clothing
which increases the risk of fire hazards.
25. CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY
25.3 Petroleum powered air compressors,

hoists, derricks, pumps, etc, shall be so
located that the exhausts are well away from
combustible materials. Where the exhausts
are pipes to outside the building underconstruction, a clearance of at least 15cm shall
be maintained between such piping and combustible material.
SECTION 4 SAFETY IN DEMOLITION
OF BUILDINGS
26.
GENEHAL
26.1 This section lays down the safety

requirements for carrying out demolition/
dismantling work.
26.2 Planning and Permit-Before beginning the actual work of demolition a careful
and detailed study shall be made of the structure to be demolished including its surroundings. While working out the plan of
demolition, safety of adjoining structures
shall be ensured. The final .plan of sequence
of operation shall be approved by the
engineer-in-charge. Variance from the
approved plan shall not be permitted without
the approval of the engineer-in-charge.
26,2.1 Before commencing demolition work,
permit where required, shall be obtained
from the Authority and posted prominently
at site.
27. PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO
DEMOLITION
27.1 If the structure to be demolished is one
which may have got hidden damages, caused
by fire, flood or earthquake, measuresneces
sary to prevent accidental collapse by wayoi
bracing, shoring, etc, shall be provided.
27.2 When demolition by explosives has to
be resorted to, this shall be done only after
the approval of the Authority and after taking necessary precautions. For detailed information reference may be made to good
practice [VI1(27)].
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODE
OF INDIA
27.3 Prominent danger signs shall be posted

all round the property and all openings giving access to the structures shall be kept barricaded or manned except during the actual
passage of workmen or equipment. However,
provision shall be made for at least two inde-pendent exits for escape of workmen during
any emergency. During night, warning lights
shall be placed on or above all barricades.
27.4 All gas, water, electricity, steam and
other service lines shall be shut off outside
the property line after notifying the service
companies and concerned authorities and
obtaining their approval. Any temporary service connections required for the demolition
work shall be separately taken and arranged
in such a manner as to afford safety to the
workmen.
27.5 When work is not in progress, watchmen shall be provided to prevent unauthorized entry of the public in the danger zone.
27.6 All necessary safety appliances shall be
issued to the workers prior to starting of
work.
27.,7 Suitable safety precautions for fire shall
be provided. Clothing for workmen shall
conform to 24.3.
27.8 Protection of the Public
Safety distances to ensure safety of
the pubiic shall be clearly marked and prominently sign posted. Every sidewalk or road
adjacent to the work shall be closed or protected. All main roads, which are open to the
public shall be kept open to the public clear
and unobstructed at all times. Diversions for
pedestrians shall be constructed, where
necessary for safety.
27.8.1
27.8.2 If the structure to be demolished is

more than two storeyed or 7.5m high, measured from the side walk or street which can
not be closed or safely diverted., and the
horizontal distance from the inside of the
sidewalk to the structure is 4.5 m or less, a
substantial sidewalk shed shall be constructed over the entire length of thesidewalk
adjacent to the structure, of sufficient width
with a view to accommodating the pedestrian
traffic without causing congestion. The sidewalk shed shall be lighted sufficiently to
ensure safety at all times. For detailed information reference may be made to good practice [V11(28)].
27.8.3 When the horizontal distance from
the inside of the sidewalk to the structure is
more than 4.5m and less than 7.5.m, a sidewalk shed or fence may be built or in place of
such a shed or fence a substantial railing shall
PART
VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
be constructed on the inside of the sidewalk

or roadway along the entire length of the
demolition side of the propert with movable
bars as may be necessary ror the proper
prosecution of the work.
28. PRECAUTIONS DURING EMOLIDEMOLITION
28.1 Prior to commencement of work, all
material of fragile nature like glass shall be
removed.
28.2 All openings shall be boarded up.
28.3 Dust shall be controlled by suitable
means to prevent harm to workmen.
28.4 Stacking of materials or debris shall be
within safe limits of the structural member.
Additional supports, where necessary, shall
be given.
28.5 Adequate natural or artificial lighting
and ventilation shall be provided for the
workmen.
2Y. SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION
OPERATIONS
2Y.I The demolition shall always proceed
systematically storey by storey, in the descending order. All work in the upper floor
shall be completed and approved by the
engineer-in-charge prior to disturbance to
any supporting member on the lower floor.
Demolition of the structure in sections may
be permitted in exceptional cases if proper
precautions are ensured to prevent injuries to
persons and damage to property.
30. WALLS
30.1 Walls shall be removed part by part in
reasonably level courses. They shall not be
allowed to fall in large masses which
endangers the adjoining property or exceeds
the safe loads of the floors below. Debris
shall be removed at frequent intervals to prevent overloading of any structural member.
30.2 Stages shall be provided for the men to
work on if the walls are less than one and a
half brick thick and dangerous to work by
standing over them.
30.3 Adequate lateral bracing shall be provided for walls which are unsound.
31. FLOORING
31.1 Prior to removal of masonry or concrete floor adequate support centering shall
be provided.
Vll.31
32.2 Planks of sufficient strength shall be

provided to give workmen firm support to
guard against any unexpected floor collapse.
32.3 When floors are being removed no person shall be allowed to work in an area
directly underneath and access to such area
shall be barricaded.
32. CATCH PLATFORM
32.2 In demolition of exterior walls ofmultistorey structures, catch platform of sufficient strength to prevent injuries to workers
below and public shall be provided.
32.2 Materials shall not be dumped on the
catch platform nor shall they be used for
storage of materials.
33. STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND
LADDERS
33.1 Stairs with railings, passageways and
ladders shall be left in place as long as possible and maintained in a safe condition.
34. DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN
SPECIAL TYPES AND ELEMENTS
OF STRUCTURES
34.1 Roof Trusses-If a building has a
pitched roof,the structure should be removed
to wall plate level by hand methods. Sufficient
purlins and bracing should be retained to
ensure stability of the remaining roof trusses
while each individual truss is removed
progressively.
34.1.1 Temporary bracing should be added,
where necessary, to maintain stability. The
end frame opposite to the end where dismantling is commenced, or a convenient intermediate frame should be independently and
securely guyed in both directions before work
starts.
not be cut until after the arch or series of

arches in the floor have been removed. The
floor should be demolished in strips parallel to
the span of the arch rings (at right angles to the
main floor beams).
34.4 Brick Arches-Expert advice should be
obtained and, at all stages of the demolition,
the closest supervision should be given by persons fully experienced and conversant in the
type of work to ensure that the structure is
stable at all times.
However, the following points may be kept in
view.
34.4.1 On no account should the restraining
influence of the abutments be removed before
the dead load of the spandrel fill and the arch
rings are removed.
34.4.2 A single span arch can be demolished
by hand by cutting narrow segments progressively from each springing parallel to the span
of the arch, until the width of the arch has
been reduced to a minimum which can then be
collapsed.
34.4.3 Where deliberate collapse is feasible,
the crown may be broken bythe demolition
ball method working progressively from edges
to the centre.
34.4.4 Collapse of the structure can be
effected in one action by the use of explosives.
Charges should be inserted into- bore holes
drilled in both arch and abutments.
34.4.5 In multi-span arches, before individual arches are removed, lateral restraint
should be provided at the springing level.
Demolition may then proceed as for single
span; where explosives are used it is preferable
to ensure the collapse of the whole structure in
one o eration to obviate the chance of leaving
unsta!le portion standing.
34.1.2 On no account should the bottom tie

of roof trusses be cut until the principal rafters
are prevented from making out ward
movement.
34.5 Cantiber (Not Part of a Framed Strutwe) -Canopies, cornices, staircases and balconies should be demolished or supported
before tailing down load is removed.
34.2.3 Adequate hoisting gears suitable for

the loads shall be provided. If during demolition any thing is to be put on the floor below
the level of the truss, it shall be ensured that
the floor is capable of taking the load.
34.6. In Situ Reiqforced Concrete-Before

commencing demolition, the nature and condition of the concrete, the condition and position of reinforcement, and the possibility of
lack of continuity of reinforcement should be
ascertained.
34.2 Heuvy Floor Beams-Heavy baulks of

timber and steel beams should be supported
before cutting at the extremities and should
then be lowered gently to a safe working place.
Demolition should be commenced by removing partitions and external non-load bearing

cladding.
34.3 Jack Arches-Where tie rods are present

between main supporting beams, these should
34.6.2 REINFORCED C ONCRETE B EAMS - A

supporting rope should be attached to the
vu-32
NATIONAL lUlLDING
CODE OF INDIA
beam. Then the concrete should be removed

from both ends by pneumatic drill and the
reinforcement exposed. The reinforcement
should then be cut in such a way as to allow
the beam to be lowered under control to the
floor.
34.6,2 REINFORCED CONCRETE COLUMNS The reinforcement should be exposed at the
base after restraining wire guy ropes have
been placed round the member at the top. The
reinforcement should then be out in such a
way as to allow it to be pulled down to the
floor under control.
346.3 REINFOKCED CONCRETE W ALLS These should be cut into strips and demolished as for columns.
34.6.4 S USPENDED FLOORS AND KooFsthe slab should be cut into strips parallel to
the main reinforcement and demolished strip
by strip. Where ribbed construction has been
used, the principle of design and method of
construction should be determined before
demolition is commenced. Care should pe
taken not to cut the ribs inadvertently.
34..7 Precast Reinforced Concrete-Due precautions shall be taken to avoid toppling over
of prefabricated units or any other part of the
structure and whenever necessary temporary
supports shall be provided.
34.8 Prestressed .Reinforced Concrete
Before commencing of the demolition work,
advice of an engineering expert in such demolition shall be obtained and followed.
35. LOWERING, REMOVAL AND
DISPOSAL OF MATER.IALS
35.2 As far as possible no material shall be
dropped. They shall be lowered either by containers, ropes and tackles or chutes properly
designed. Chutes, if provided at anangle of
more than 45O from the horizontal, shall be
entirely closed on all the four sides except for
opening for receiving the material. The chute
opening shall be kept locked except when in
use. The top opening of chute for dumping of
material shall be protected with guard rkils.
Debris may also be dropped through holes in
the floor, if absolutely necessary. When such a
method is adopted precautions shall be protected with guard rails. Debris may also be
dropped through holes in the floor, if absoiutely neclssary. When such a method is
adopted precautions shall be taken to avoid
overloadmg of the floor. Such area, where the
debris is dropped, shall be adequately pro.md to prevent.mjury to persons.
35.2 Debris shall oe removed at the earliest to
ensure safe and adequate working space.
PART VII CONSTRUCtlONAL ?RACTlCE
AND
SAFETY
Debris shall be removed from the site in stages

as not to be of nuisance to the public. Care
shall be taken that material like glass, nails,
etc, are not strewn about and cause injury to
workmen or public.
35.3 Stacking of material shall cater for fire
prevention.
36, MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
36.1 -When-demolition is to be performed by
mechanical devicec, such as weight ball,
power shovels, the following additional precautions may be observed:
a) The atea shall be barricated for a min-
imum distance of one and a half times the

height of the wall;
b) While the mechanical device is in operation, no workman shall be allowed to
enter the building being demolished;
cl The device shall be so located as to avoid
damage by falling debris; and
d) The mechanical device when being used
shall not cause any damage to adjacent
structure, power line, etc.
37. MISCELLANEOUS
37.1 No demolition. work should becarried
out during night as far as possible, especially
when the structure to be demolishedis in an
inhabited area. if such night work has to be
done, additional precautions by way of additional red warning signals, working lights
and watchmen, shall be piovided to avoid
any injury to workmen and public.Demolition Work shall not be carried out during
storm and heavy rain.
37.2 Warning devices shall be installed in the

area to warn the workers in. case of any
danger.
37.3 Safety dewices like industrial safety
helmets confoim&. to the accepted standards [VII(9)] and goggles made of celluloid
lens, shall be issued to the workmen.
Foreman-in-charge of the work areas shall
ensure that all the-rrorkmen are wearing the
safety devices before commencing any work.
37.4 Constructiouz&heds and tool boxes shall
be so located ar&~ protect workers from
injuries from the .f&lling debris.
37.5 Where there&a likelihood of injuries to
hands of workmen&hen demolishing RCC,
steel structures, etc,aloves of suitable materials shall be worn by workmen.
37.6, Sufficient pr&ection by way of both
overhead cover and screens shall be provided
ll-33
to prevent injuries to the workmen and the

public.
37.7 Safety belts or ropes shall be used by
workmen when working at higher levels.
37.8 Grading of Plot- When a building has
been demolished and no building operation
has been projected or approved, the vacant
plot shall be filled, graded and maintained in
conformity to the established street grades at
curb level. The plot shall be maintained free
from the accumulation of rubbish and all
other unsafe and hazardous conditions which
endangers the life or health of the public; and
provisions shall be made to prevent the
accumulation df water or damage to any
foundations on the premises or the adjoining
property.
38. FIRST-AID
38.f A copy of all pertinent regulations and
notices concerning accidents, injury and firstaid shall be prominently exhibited at the
work site.
38.2 Depending on the scope and nature of
the work, a person, qualified in first-aid shall
be available at work site to render and direct
first-aid to casualities. He shall maintain a
list of individuals qualified to serve in firstaid work. Enough first-aid kit, including a
stretcher and cot with accessories shall be
provided at site. A telephone may be provided to first-aid assistant with telephone
numbers of the hospitals prominently
displayed.
Complete reports of all accidents and action
taken thereon shall be forwarded to the competent authorities.
BUlLDlNG
CtBDC GF INDIA
APPENDIX A
(Clause 2.1.1)
PROGRAMME EVALUATION AND REVIEW TECHNIQUE, AND
CRITICAL PATH METHOD
*g)Construction safety aspects _specially in
case of pile foundations.
*h) Blasting if required (for deep
foundations).
*j) Fire protection measures.
A-O. INTRODUCTION
A-O.1 Programme Evaluation and Review

Technique (PERT) and Critical Path
Method (CPM) are modern management
tools or devices, which have made it possible
to achieve considerable savings in cost and
time of construction. They can be used with A-l .2 Time Needed for Each Activity-An
advantage for demolition, constructional assessment is to be made to find out the time
safety and fire protection measures, by needed for each activity and their to list out.
including them in the list of activities (also those activities, which can be executed
called events) along-side with other events concurrently (or simultaneously) with each
of the project.
@her. For example, while designing of the
building is in hand, correspondence for land
A-O.2 Advance Planning
purchase can also go on side by side; or while
work in foundations is in progress, order for
A.0.2.1 PERT and CPM enable us to joinery can be placed.
achieve judicious employment and utilization
of resources, such as labour, materials, and
A-1.3 Crirical Acrivity- It should then be
equipment by pre-determining the various seen as to which of the activities are critical,
stages, listing out the various activities and that is which items are such that a single days
drawing out Arrow Network Diagram.
delay will mean overall delay. on the project.
Contrary to this, it will be seen from CPM
A-O.3 Synchronization of Sub-Projects
Network that certain activities can be delayed
to a certain extent without delaying the
A-0.3.1 Another extremely important completion of the project. This is a.very useful
advantage of CPM is that various factors and valuable information for the Project
influencing completion of a project can be Manager. That is where resources scheduling
scientifically planned to be coordinated such becomes easier and economical and a time
that the completion of various sub-projects saver. It eliminates chances of idlelabour and
and services, such as furniture, sewage, elec- higher expenses which are results of
tricity and water supply synchronises.
haphazard planning.
A-l. PREPARATION OF CPM CHART
(LISTING OUT THE ACTIVITIES) A-2. UPDATING
A-1.1 The most important step in preparation of CPM network is to list out the activities involved to the minutest details, For
example, a few activities in case of a building
project are given below:
a) Designing of building by architect, engineer and approval of plans by the

Authority.
b) Making the* land available.
cl Outlining detailed specifications.
4 Procurement of materials,, such as
sand, cement, stone and timber; and
plants, such as concrete mixer, vibrators, water pump for curing.
Soil explorations and trial pits.
Excavation in foundations, including
demolition, if needed.
PART
VII
CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE
AND
SAFETY
A-2.1 In implementing the CPM there are

bound to be gaps between the planned CPM
and actual progress or position on ground.
This should be checked periodically-weekly,
fortnightly or monthly depending on nature
and size of project.
A-3. GENERAL
A-3.1 In case of projects being executed by
contractors for the owners, or departments, it
is recommended that it should be an essential
condition of the contract to submit a CPM
Chart along with the quoted tenders. This
will ensure that. the construction work will be
according to a systematic, engineer-like and
well-knit plan of execution.
*These can be further subdivided and number of activities increased.
,l-35
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following lis~ records those standards which are acceptable as good practice and
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be
used by the Authorit,y as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in
the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this Part VII.
(I) a) Foundations
IS: 1080-l 980 Code of practice for
design and construction of simple
spread foundations vrst revision)
structural safety of buildings : Shallow foundations (second revision)
IS:291 I Code of ,piactice for design
and construction of pile foundations:
IS:2911 (Part l/Set I):1979 Part 1
Concrete piles, Section I Driven
cast in-situ concrete piles @rst
revision)
IS:291 I (Part I/ Set 2)-1979 Part I
Concrete piles, Section 2 Bored cast
in-situ concrete piles ( f i r s t
revision)
IS:291 I, (Part I/ Set 3)-1979 Part 1
Concrete piles, Section 3 Driven
precast concrete piles (first
revision)
IS:2911 (Part IjSec 4)-1984 Part I
Concrete piles, Section 4 Bored
precast concrete piles (firsr
revision)
IS:2911 (Part II)-1980 Part II
Timber piles (first revision)
IS:2911 (Part Ill)-1980 Part 111
Under-reamed piles (first
revision)
IS:2911 (Part IV)-1979 Part IV
Load test on piles
IS:2974 Code of practice for design
and construction of machine
foundations:
IS:2974 ( P a r t I)-1982 P a r t 1
Foundations for reciprocating type
machines (second revision)
IS:2974 (Part II)-1980 Part 11
Foundations for impact type
machines (Bammer foundations)
(jirsr revision)
Foundations for rotary type
machines (medium and high frequency) (first revision)

Foundations for rotary type
machines of low frequency (First
revision)
Foundations for impact type
machines other than hammers
(forging and stamping presses,
pig breakers, elevators and hoist
towersj
lS:9456-1980 Code of practice for
design and construction of conical
and hyperbolic paraboidal types of
shell foundations
15:9556-1980 Code of practice for
design and construction of diaphragm walls
b) Masonr.,
IS:)597 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry:
IS:1597 (Part l)-1967 Part I Kubble stone masonry
IS:1597 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t II
Ashlar masonry
I S:2 I IO- 1980 Code of practice for insitu construction of walls in buildings
with soil-cement @rst revision)

brickwork
preparation and use of masonry mortars wrsr revision)
construction of hollow concrete
block masonry
lS:3630-1966 Code of ,,practice for
construction of non-load bearing
gypsum block partitions
reed walling
NATIONAL IWILDING CODE OF INDIA
IS:444 I - I980 Code of practice for use

of silicate type chemical resistant
mortars yirst reGsion)
lS4442~1980 Code of practice for use
of sulphur type chemical resistant
mortars @rst revision)
lS:4443-1980 Code of practice for use
of resin type chemical resistant mortars (f?rst revision)
construction of autoclaved cellular
concrete block masonry
construction of light weight concrete
block masonry
Wood
design and construction of wood
stairs in houses (first revision)
nail-jointed timber construction
(fksr revision)
IS:491 3-1968 Code of practice for

selection, installation and maintenance of timber doors and windows
design and construction of nailed
laminated timber beams
construction of timber ceilings
d) Concrete
IS:456-1978 Code of practice for
plain and reinforced concrete (rhird
revision)
lS:457-1957 Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced concrete for dams and other
massive structures
IS:2502-1963 Code. of practice for
bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement
preparation and use of lime concrete
(jksr revision)
IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete

structures for the storage of liquids:
IS:3370 (Part I)-1965 Part 1 General requirements

IS:3370 (Part IQ-1965 Part II
Reinforced concrete structures
IS:3370 (Part Ill)-1967 Part III
Prestressed concrete structmes
PART VII CONSTRUCTIOSAL
PRACTICE AND SAFETY
IS:3558-1983 Code of practice for use

of immersion vibrators for consolidating concrete (/irsr relision)
lS:5817-1970 Code of practice foi
preparation and use of lime pozzolana mixture concrete in buiidings
and roads
lS:7246-1974 Recommendations fat
use of tabte vibrators for consolidating concrete
lS:7861 Code of practice for extreme
whether concreting:
IS:7861 ( P a r t I)-1975 P a r t I
Recommended practice for hot
weather concreting
IS:7861 ( P a r t II)-1981 P a r t I I
Recommended practice for cold
weather concreting
IS: 10262- I982 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design
IS:lO359-1982 Code of practice for
manufacture and use of lime pozzolana concrete blocks for paving
Steel
lS:800-1984 Code of practice for general steel construction ( s e c o n d
IS:80 I-1 975 Code
of practice for use of

cold formed light gauge steel
structural members in. general
building construction (first rev&on)
of steel in gravity water tanks
of steel tubes in general building construction (jksr revision)
assembly of structural joints using
high tensile friction grip fasteners
corrosion protection of light gauge
steel sections used in building
design and construction of steel
chimneys
IS:8629 (Parts I to III)-1977 Code of
practice for protection of iron and
steel structures from atmospheric
corrosion
1339077-1979 Corrosion protection of
steel reinforcements in RB and RCC
construction
IS:9 172-l 979 Recommended design
practice for corrosion prevention of
steel structures
,L3
Flboring and Roofing

magnesium oxychloride composition
floors (second revision)
IS: I 196-1978 Code of practice for
laying bitumen mastic flooring
(second revision)
IS: I 197-1970 Code of practice for

laying of rubber floors (/Trsr revision)
laying and maintenance of linoleum
floor @rsr revision)
laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision)
construction of jack-arch type of
built-up floor or roof (first revision)I&2119-1980 Code of practice for
construction of brick-cum-composite
(Madras terrace) floor or roof (/ksr
revision)
l.k2204-1962 Code of practice for
construction of reinforced concrete

shell roof
laying in-situ cement concrete flooring (fkst revision)
roofing with wooden shingles
design and construction of stone slab
over joist floor
roofing with Mangalore tiles
IS:3007 Code of practice for laying of
asbestos cement sheets:
IS:3007 (Part I)-1964 Part 1 Corn-gated sheets
IS:3007 ( P a r t II)-1965 P a r t 1I
Semi-corrugated sheets
construction of timber floors
IS:51 19 Code of practice for laying
and fixing of sloped roof covering:
IS:51 19 (Part I)-1968 Part 1 Slating
laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile
flooring
laying of hard wood parquet and
wood block floors

construction of timber ceilings
lS:5766-1970 Code of ractice for
laying burnt clay brick Rooring
IS:6061 Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists
and filler blocks:
IS:6061 (Part I)-1971 Part I With
hollow concrete filler blocks
IS:6061 ( P a r t II)-1981 P a r t I I
With hollow clay filler blocks
(fksr revision)
lS:6061 (Part lIl)-1981 Part [II
Precast hollow clay blocks joists

and hollow clay filler blocks
lSZ6061 (Part IV)-1981 Part 1V
With precast hollow clay block
slab panels
precast doubly-curved shell units
laying mosaic parquet flooring
design and construction of floors and
roofs using precast reinforced/prestressed concrete ribbed or cored units
construction of reinforced brick
floors and roofs
IS: 10505- 1983 Code of practice for
precast reinforced concrete waffle
units
8) Finishes
ls:l346-1976 Code of practice for
waterproofing of roofs with bitumen
felts (second revision)
IS: 1414-I962 Code of practice for fixing wall coverings
IS: 1477 Code of practice for painting

of ferrous metals in buildings:
13:1477 (Part I)-1971 Part I Pretreatment (jirsr revision)
tS:1477 ( P a r t ll)-1971 P a r t I I
Painting (j?rsr revision)
ls:1609-1976 Code of practice for
laying damp-proofing treatment
using bitumen felts (second revision)
IS:4101 (Part Ill)-1969. Part 111

Wall tiling and mosaics
I&1661-1972 Code of practice for

application of cement and cement
lime plaster finishes yirst revision)
laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish
flat-roof finish: Mud P H U S K A

fixing of polystyrene wall tiles
lS:4365-1967 Code .of ,practice
application of bitumen mastic E:
waterproofing of roofs
lS:4597-1968
Code of practice for
_...
finishing of wood and wood based
products with nitrocellulose and
cold catalysed materials
laying of epoxy resin floor toppings
laying in-d.4 granolithic concrete
floor topping
white-washing and colour washing
1836494-1972 Code of practice for
waterproofing of underground water
reservoirs and swimming pools
13:7198-1974 Code f practice for
damp-proofing usinga itumen mastic
lS:7290- I979 Recommendations for
use of polyethylene film for waterproofing of roofs
lS:9918-1981 Code of practice fo! insiru waterproofing and dampproofing treatments with glass fibre
tissue reinforced bitumen
(fht revision)
IS:2338 Code of practice for finishing

of wood and woodbased materials:
lS:2338 (Part 15-1967 Part I Operations and workmanship
Schedules
application of lime plaster finish
IS:2395 Code of practice for painting
concrete, masonry and plaster
surfaces:
IS:2395 (Part I)-1966 Part I Operations and workmanship
IS:2395 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t I I
Schedules
external rendered finishes
IS:i441-1963 Code of practice for
fixing ceiling covering
IS:2524 Code of practice for painting
of non-ferrous metals in buildings:
IS:2524 (Part I)-1968 Part I pretreatment
IS:2524 (Part II)-1968 P a r t I I
Painting
laying lime concrete for a waterproofed roof finish cfirst revision)
general design details and preparatory work for damp-proofing and
water proofing of buildings
iS:3140-1965 Code of practice for
painting asbestos cement building
products
glazing in building
IS:4 IO1 Code of practice for external
facing and veneers:
IS:4101 (Part I)-1967 Part 1 Stone
facing
IS:4101 (Part I&l%7 P a r t I I
Cement concrete facing
PART VII
CONSTRUCTlONAL
PRACTICE AND SAFETY
h)
Piping
Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes

laying of cast iron pipes
laying of glazed stoneware pipes
sanitary pipe work above ground for
buildings flrsr revision)
laying of welded steel pipes for water
supply
laying of asbestos cement pressure
pipes
IS:7634 Code of practice for plastics
pipe work for potable water supplies:
IS:7634 (Part I)-1975 Part I Choice
of materials and general
recommendations
IS:7634 (Part II)-1975 Part II Laying and jointing polyethylene (PE)
pipes
lS:783-I959
vu-39

Laying and jointing of unplasticized PVC pipes
IS:1200 (Part XIX)-1981 PartXIX

Water supply, plumbing, drains
and sanrtary fittings (third
revision)
j ) Measuremenrs
IS:IZOO(Part XX)-1481 Part XX

Laying of gas and oil pipe lines
IS:I200 Method of measurement of

building and civil engineering works:
(third revision)
IS:lZOO (Part XXI)-1973 PartXKl

Woodwork and joinery (second
IS:1200 (Part I)-1974 Part I Earthwork (third revision)
revision)
IS:1200 (Part II)-1974 Part II Concrete work (third revision)

IS:IZOO (Pa!t Ill)-1976 P a r t I l l
Brickwork (third revision)
IS:lZOO (Part IV)-1976 Part IV
Stone masonry (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part V)-1972 P a r t V
Formwork (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part VI)-1974 Part VI
Refractory work (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part VII)-1974 Part VII
Hardware (second revision)
Steelwork and ironwork (third
lS:IZOO (Part XXIII)-1977 P a r t

XXIII Piling (third revision)
IS:1200 ( P a r t XXIV)-1983
Part XXIV Well foundations (third
revision)
IS:1200 (Part IX)-1973 Part IX
Roof covering including cladding

(second revision)
IS:1200 (Part X)-l973 Part X
Ceiling and linings ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS:1200 (Part XI)-t977 Part XI
Paving and floor finishes dado and

skirting (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XII)-1976 Part XII
Plastering and pointing (third
revision)
IS:1200 (Part X111)-1976 PartXlll
White washing, colour washing, distempering and other finishes (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XIV)-1970 PartXIV
Glazing (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part XV)-1976 Part XV
Painting, polishing, varnishing, etc
IS:1200 (Part XVI)-1979 PartXVI
Laying of water and sewer
lines including appurtenant items
(third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XVII)-I%9 PartXVII

Roadwork including air field
pavements (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part XVIII)-1974 Part
XVIII Demolition and dismantling
(third revision)
I,_*0
revision)
lS:3861-1975 Method of measurement of plinth, carpet and rentable

areas of buildings (/Trsr revision)
k)
Others
IS:IOBI-1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and
aluminium) doors, windows and
ventilators
chimneys for domestic heating
appliances
of fixing devices in walls. ceilin@ and
floors of solid construction
IS:2470 Code of practice for design
and construction of septic tank&:
IS:2470 (Part I)-1968 Part I Small
installations (jksr revision)
Large installations first revision)
18:2527-1963 Code of practice for fixing rain-water gutters and down pipes
for roof drainage
design and installation of joints in
buildings
glazing in buildings
of immersion vibrators for consolidating concrete
composite construction
earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings (first rivision)
selection, installation and
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE W INDIA
maintenance of timber doors and

windows
(12)
IS:6313 Code of practice for antitermite measures in buildings:

IS:6313 (Part I)-1981 Part I Constructional measures (firs1 revision)
IS:6313 (Part II)-1981 Part II Preconstructional chemical treatment
measures wrsr revision)
IS:6313 (Part III)-1981 Part 111
Treatment for existing building
(13)
IS:6924-1973 Code of practice for the

construction of refuse chutes inmultistoreyed buildings
l&7246-1974 Recommendation for
use of table vibrators for consolidating concrete
IS:8 147- 1976 Code of practice for use
of aluminium alloys in structures
patent glazing
(16)
(14)
(15)
(first revision)
(2)
18:8888-3978 Guide for requirements

of low income housing
(3)
lS:4082-1977 Recommendations on
stacking and storage of construction
materials at site (j!rsr revision)
IS : 3696 Safety code for scaffolds and

ladders:
IS:3696 (Part I&1%6 Part II
Ladders
IS : 4912-I 978 Safety requirements for
floors and wall openings, railing and
toe boards
equipment for eye and face protection
during welding (flrsr revi+m)
IS : 5983-1980 Specification foreyeprotectors (fIrsr revision)
IS : 236 I - 1970 Specification for bulldog grips flrsr revision)
(17)
IS : 30 I6- 1982 Code of practice for fire

precautions in welding and cutting
operations wrsr revision)
(18)

manila ropes (second revision)
wire ropes for general engineering

(19)
IS : 8 18- 1968 Code of practice for

safety and health requiremtnts in
electric and gas welding and cutting
operations
(20)
IS:933-1976 Specification for

portable chemical fire extinguisher,
foam type (second revision)
18:2171-1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, dry
powder type (second rcvison)
(4)
lS:933-I 976 Specification for portable chemical fire extinguisher, foam

type (sewnd revision)
(5)

selection, installation and maintenance of portable first-aid fire
appliances (second revision)
(21)
IS : 5916-1970 Safety code for
1$:8758-1978 Recommendations for

fire precautionary measures in construction of temporary structures and
pandals
(22)
lS:2171-1976 Specification for

portable fire extinguishers, foam type
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
IS : 3764-l 966 Safety code for

excavation work
1s : 4 138- 1977 Safety code for working
in compressed air vrst revision)
industrial safety helmets (first
revision)
(10)
(11)

scaffoldings
IS : 3696 Safety Code for scaffolds and
ladders:
I S : 3 6 9 6 ( P a r t I)-1966 Part I
Scaffolds
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
constructions involving use of hot

bituminous materials
(second revision)
(23)

safety, and health requirements in
electric and gas welding and cutting
operations wrst revision)
resistance spot welding for light
assemblies in mildsteel
seam welding in mild steel.
IS : 30 16 1982 Code of practice for fire
Precautions in welding and cutting
operations (first revision)
IS : 408 l-1 967 Safety code for blasting
and related drilling operations
VIl-41
IS : 4138-1977 Safety code for working

in compressed gas vrsr reiGion)
IS : 9595- 1980 Recommendations for
metal arc welding of carbon and
carbon manganese steels
IS: 10138-1982 Recommended
procedure for CO2 gas shielded metalarc welding of structural steels
(24)

installation of internal fire hydrantsin
multi-storey buildings
landing valves (internal hydrants)
flrsf revision)
(25)
is:274 ( P a r t s 1 & ll)-1981

Specification for shovels: Part I
General purpose shovles, Part 11
Heat-treated shovels (third revision)
lS:663- 1980 Specification for adzes
(second revision)
lS:704-1984 Specification for crowbars and claw-bars (second revision)
(under print)
lS:841-1983 Specification for hand

hammers (second revision)
IS:844 Specification for screw
drivers:
lS:844 ( P a r t ll)-1979 P a r t I I
Dimensions (second revision)
IS:844 (Part III)-1979 Part 111
Dimensions for screw drivers for
recessed head screws (second
revision)
1 S: 1630- 1960 Specification for

masons, tools for plaster work and
painting work
IS: 1759- 1980 Specification for POWRAHS (first revision)
ISt1791-1968 Specification for batch

type concrete mixers (/ksf revision)
IS:1930 Specification for chisels and
gouges:
Dimensions for firmer gouges (first
revision)
Dimensions for firmer chisels @rsr
revision)

Dimensions for mortice chisels
@St revision)
Dimensions for turning chisels (first
revision)
u-42
IS: 193 1 - 1972 Specification for engineers files (tht rev&ion)

1$:2028-1981 Specification for open
jaw spanners (second revision)
IS:20291901 Specification for ring
spanners (second revision)
IS:2030-1971 Specification for box
spanners (/Irsr revision)
18:2093-1974. Specification for distributors for hot tar and bitumen
yirst revision)
lS:2094-1974 Specification for heaters for tar and bitumen (fhr revision)
18:2431-1963 Specification for steel
wheel barrows (single wheel-type)
lS:2434-1973 Specification for handoperated drums asphalt mixer @sr
revision)
18:2438-1963 Specification for roller

pan mixer
IS:2439-1963 Specification for metal
hand rollers (fixed-weight type)
.IS:2505-1980 Specification for concrete vibrators, immersion type
(second revision)
18:2506-1964 Specification for screed
board concrete vibrators
IS:2514-1964 Specification for concrete vibrating tables
IS:2587-1975 Specification for pipe
vices (open side type and fixed sides
type) (jhr revision)
blacksmiths vices (f?rsl revision)
lS:2722- 1964 Specification for portable swing weigh hatchers for concrete
(single and double bucket type)
13:2852-1964 Specification for carpenter s augers
lS:3066-1965 Specification for hot
asphalt mixing plants
asphalt paver finisher
lS:3365-1965 Specification for floor
polishing machines
IS:33661965 Specification for pan
vibrators
1833559-1966 Specification for pneumatic concrete breakers
IS:3587-1976 Specification for rasps
(first revision)
IS:3650-198 I Specification for combination side cutting pliers (second
revision)
i&3938- I979 Specification for elect-
ric wire rope hoists (/Trsr revision)

IS:4003 Specification for pipe
wrenches:
IS:4003 (Part Q-1978 Part I General purpose
IS:4003 ( P a r t II)-1978 P a r t II
Heavy duty
18:4017-1967 Specification for carpenters squares
lS:4057-1967 Specification for carpenters metal bodied bench planes
pincers (i?fst revision)
IS:4 I83- I967 Specification for metal
hand rammers
IS:41841967 Specification for steel
wheel barrows (with two wheels)
lS:4508-1968 Specification for shortened single ended. ring spanners
IS:46561968 Specification for form
vibrators for concrete
18:4915-1968 Specification for
welders chipping hammer
IS:50661969 Specification for glass
pliers
18:5067-1969 Specification for fencing pliers
lS:5087-1969 Specification for wire
stripping pliers
lS:5098-1969 Specification for cross
cut and rip saws
18:5123-1969 Specification for tenon
and dovetail saws
lS:5169-1969 Specification for hacksaw frames
lS:5200-1969 Specification for bolt
clippers
IS:5658-1970 Specification for snipenose pliers
IS:5663-I 970 Specification
for brick
. . .
and masons chisels
lS:5684-1970 Specification for pipe
vices (chain type)
18:5697- 1970 Specification for ripping chisels
lS:5889-1970 Specification for vibratory plate compactor
18:5890-1970 Specification for mobile
hot mix asphalt plants, light duty
lS:589I-1970 Specification for handoperated concrete mixer
PART
VII CONSTRUCTIONAL
PRAChCE AND SAFETY
lS:5995- 197 1 Specification for pipe

grip pliers
lS:6007-1971 Specification for pipe
vices (hinged type)
18:6078- I977 Specification for Iinemans pliers (/Irsr revision)
IS:6087-1971 Specification for metal
cutting shears
IS:61 18-1971 Specification for slip
joint pliers
IS:6149-1984 Specification for single
ended open jaw adjustable wrenches
yirsl revision) (under print)
18:6375-l 97 I Specification for wood

splitting wedges
IS:6389- I972 Specification for combination wrenches
lS:6428-1972 Specification for pile
frame
lS:6430-1972 Specification for mobile
air compressor for construction
purposes
IS:6433-1972 Specification for guniting equipment
IS:6546 I972 Specification for claw
hammers
IS:68361973 Specification for hand
snaps and set-ups for solid rivets
13:6837-1973 Specification for three
wheel type pipe cutter
IS:6841-1973 Specification for wrecking bars
13:6861-1973 Specification for engineers scrapers
lS:6881-I973 Specification for link
type pipe cutters
IS:6891-1973 Specification for carpenters auger bits
lS:6892- I973 Specification for
blacksmiths hick iron
18:7041-1973 Specification for carpenters plain brace
IS:7042-1973 Specification for carpenters ratchet brace
lS:7077-1973 Specification for bending bars
lS:7958-I976 Specification for hand
vices
lS:8202- 1976 Specification for carpenters wooden bodied nose planes
without ramshorn handle
lS:8203-1976 Specification for carpenters wooden bodied nose planes
IS:8205-1976 Specification fr carpenters wooden bodied try planes

13:8206-1976 Specification for carpenters wooden bodied smoothing
$an
IS:8209-1976 Specification for cut irons and
cap irons for carpenters wooden bodied
bench planes
IS:8671-1977 Specification for nail puller

@6>
IS:7293-1974 Safety code for working

with construction machinery
@7>
IS:408 l-1967 Safety code for blasting

and related drilling operations
(a)
IS:4130-1976 Safety code for demolition of buildings
NATIONAL Bl!II.DINC
CODE OF INDIA
PART 1
DEFINITIONS
PART II
ADMINISTRATION
PART I11 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND

PART V
BUILDING MATERIALS

S e c t i o n I .Loads
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and ,Reinforced Concrete
Section 6 Steel
. PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII
Section I
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES
Electrical Installsitions

Section 1 ,Water Supply
PART X
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES

SECTION 1 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
CONTENTS
0. F O R E W O R D
...
I. S C O P E
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
.3. ORIEN7ATlON O F B U I L D I N G
...
4.
LIGHTING
...
5. VENTILATION
...
30
...
39
APPENDIX
A S K Y
PART WI BUILDING
COMIONINI -I-AB1.F.S
SERVICES-SECTION I LIGHTING AND
VENTlLATlON
VIII-I-

SECTION 1 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
0. F O R E W O R D
0.1 Illumination levels for different tasks are recompended to be achieved either by daylighting
or artificial lighting or a combination.of both. This section, read together with Part VIII
Building services. Section 2 Electricai installations, adequately covers the illumination levels
required and methods of achieving the same.
Ventilation requirements to maintain air quality and control body odours in terms of air changes
per hour and to ensure thermal comfort and heat balance of body are laid for different
occupancies and the methods of achieving the same by natural or mechanical means are covered
in this section.
Climatic factors which normally help in decidink the orientation of the buildings to get desirable
benefits of lighting and ventilation inside the buildings are also covered in this section.
O..? The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. Some provisions have been updated
following the revision of IS : 2440. IS : 3 103 and IS : 3362 on which the earlier version was based.
Information has also been included in the light of the new Indian Standard, IS: 7662 (Part I)1974, brought out on the subject. These have been incorporated in this revision. The major
changes in this revision are:
4 Rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms.

b) Provisionsrelating to orientation of buildings have.been elaborated to cover the influence of
climatic factors on optimum orientation of buildings.
C) lhe rcquircments relating torealization of aims of good lighting with regard to planning the
brightness pattern within an interior have been added.
d) Provisions relating to ERC and IRC have beenrevised and reference to relevant Indian
Standards have been made for method of evaluating ERC and IRC.
e) The requirements regarding availability of daylight in multistorey blocks of different relative
0
g)
h)
j)
k)
ml
orientat ion have been introduced.

Artifical lighting prqvisions have been amplified to cover stepwise guidance for the design of
interiors to meet the recommended levels of illumination.
lhe conccp: of designing air-conditioned and lightiri$ system integrally has been introduced.
lIesign requirements for ventilation regarding limits of carbon dioxide concentration to be
permitted in air for any space, and recommended values for air changes have been specified
in a more rational lashion.
To facilitate better design of ventilation, the requirements regarding desirable wind speed fir
thermal comfort for ensuring the air changes as well as effective method .of controlling the
thermal conditions in industries have been introduced.
The requirements relating to ventilation for contaminants control have been specified in a
detailed manner to cover the recommended values of capture velocities for some of the
manufacturing processes.
Provisions relating to evaluation of ventilation by combined wind action and stack effect
have been specified in a more rational fashion.
0.J The
. . information contained in this section is largely based on the following Indian
Standards:
IS: 2440-1975 Guide for dayligting of buildings (sr~ond reCion)

1s: 3103-1975 Code o! practice for Industrial ventilation (,/ir.sf wirion)
IS : 3362-1977 Code of practice for natural ventilation of residential buildings yirsl revision)
IS:&46 (Part II)-1966 Code of practice tor interior illumination : Part II
values of illumination and glare index
IS : 7662 (Part I)-1994 Recommendations for orientation of buildings
industrial buildings
VIII-I-
NATIDNAL
Schedule for
Part I Non-
Ull.DlNC CDDE OF INDIA
horizon is brighter than the zenith, and when
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers requirements and
methods for lighting and ventilation of
buildings;
B, is the brightness at zfnith, the brightness at

an altitude (0) in the region away from the sun,
is given by the expression:
Be = B, Cosece
2. TERMINOLOGY
when 8 lies between 15 and Ix). and B Y is

constant when 8 lies between 0 and 15.
2.1. Lighting
D AY LIGHT AKEA -- The superficial area on

the working plane illuminated to not less than
a specified daylight factor, that is, the area
within the ielevant contour.
ALTITUDE (6) - The angular distance of any

point of celestial.sphere, measured from the
horizon, on the great circle passing through
the bodyand the zenith.
AZIMUTH (4) - The angle measured between

meridians passing through the north point
and the point in question (point C in Fig. I).
D AYLIGHT FACTOR - It is a measure of the

total daylight illumination at a point on a
given plane expressed as the ratio (or
percentage) which the illumination at the
point on the given plane bears to the
simultaneous illumination on a horizontal
plane due to clear design sky-at an exterior
point open to the whole sky vault, direct
sunlight being excluded.
DAY LIGHT PENETRATION - The maximum
distance to which a given daylight factor
contour penetrates into a room.
D I R E C T S O L A R ~LLIJMINATION - T h e
illumination from the sun without taking into

account the light from the sky.
REFERENCES
O-Observers station
S-Geographical south
C-Celestial body
E--Geographical east
Z-Zextith
W---Geographical west
NA-Nadir
NP- Celestial north pole
N-Geographical north SP-Celestial south pole
Fig. I
Azimuth of a Cdesrial Body
B R I G H T N E S S R ATIO OR C O N T R A S T - T h e
variations or contrast in brightness of ihe
details of a visual task, such as white print on
blackboard.
CANDELA
(cd) -The Sl unit of luminous
intensity.
Candela = 1 lumen per. ste@dian.
The area of circle round

the point of fiiation and its diameter subtends
ari angle of about 2 degrees at the eye. Objects
EXTERNAL' REFLECTED CoMPoNENr

(ERC) -The ratio (or percentage) of that
part of the daylight illumination at a point on
a given plane which is received by direct
reflection from external surfaces as compared
to the simultaneous exterior illumination on a
horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere
of an unobstructed clear design sky.
G LARE -A condition of vision in which
there is discomfort or a reduction in the ability

to see significant objects or both due to an
u_nsuitable distribution or range of luminance
or to extreme contrasts in space ana rime.
ILLUMINATION - At a point on a surface, the
ratio qf the luminous flux incident on an
infinitesimal element of the surface containing
the point under consideration to the area of
the element.
NOTE -The unit of measurement of illumination is hix
which is I lumen per square m&e.
C ENTRAL F IELD -
within this area are most critically seen in both

their details and colrour.
C LE AR D ESIGN S KY -The distribution of

luminance of such a sky is non-unifoim; the
PUT VI0 SWDlNG SERYILpIcSKWlN
I LlCllllNC
AND
IN T E R N A L R
EFLECTED
OMPONENT
(IRC) - The ratio (or percentage) of that part

of the daylight illumination at a point in a
given plane which is received by direct
reflection or inter-reflection from the internal
surfaces as referred to. the simultaneous
exterior illumination on a horizontal plane
V E N T I L A T I O N
VIII-L-
due to the entire hemisphere of an

unobstructed clear design sky.
LIGHT OU T P U T RATIO (q) -- The ratio ofthe
flux emitted from the luminaire to that
emitted from the lamp(s) (nominal lurninous
flux). It is expressed in percent.
J_UMEN(lm) - Sl unit of luminous flux. The
luminous flux emitted within. unit solid angle
(one steradian) by a point source having a
uniforni intensity of one candela.

P~JN.J.OFA.S~KFACE JN A
GIVEN DI R E C T I O N ) (BR I G H T N E S S ) - T h e
NMJNANCE (AT A
quotient of the luminous intensity in the iven

direction of an infinitesimal element o7 the
surface containing the point under
consideratjon by the orthogonally projected
area of the element on a plane perpendicular
to the given direction. The unit is candela per
square metre (cd, m2).
L U M I N O U S F L U X (4) -- T h e qtiantity
characteristic of radiant flux which expresses
its capacity to produce visual sensation
evaluated according to the values of relative
luminous efficiency for the light adapted eye:
a)
b)
~F-FECJJVE LUMJYOIIS.
J.LUX (an)
- -
Total luminous flux which reaches the

working plane.
NOMINAL
L.UMJNOUS FJ+IIX($,) - Total
luminous flux of the light sources in the

interior.
MAJNTENAWE FACJOR (6) - The ratio of

the average illuminance on the working plane
after a certaih period of use of a lighting
installation to the average illuminance
obtained under the same conditions for a new
installation.
MERJUIAN --It is the great circle passing
through the zenith and poles for a given point
of observation
N ORTH ANJI SOUTH P OINTS --The point in
the respective directions where the meridian

cuts the horizon.
O R IENTATJON
OF B U ILDJNGS ---In the case of

non-square buildings, orientation refers to the
direction of the normal to the long axis. For
example, if the length of the building is eastwest, its orientation is north-south.
P E R I P H E R A L F I E L D-It is the rest of t h e

visual field which enables the observer to be
aware of the special framework surrounding

the bbject seen.
A central part of the peripheral field, subtendin
an ande of about 30 degrees on either side ofthc
fixatton, is chiefly involved in the perception o
NOTE -
VIII-I-
R E F L E C T E D G L A R E - Ihe variety of iJJ

effects on visual efficiency and comfort
produced by unwanted reflections in and
around the task area.
R E F L E C T I O N F A C T O R ( RE F L E C T A N C E ) -
The ratio of the luminous flux reflected by a

body (with or without diffusion) to the flux it
receives.
r,- reflection factor of the ceiling.
rw - reflection factor of the parts of thd
wall between the working surface
and the luminaires.
R E V E A L - T h e side of an opening for a
window.
R OOM J NDEX (k,) - An index relating to the
thape of a rectangular interior, according to
the formula:
k, =
L. w
(L+w)
ffm
where L and W are the length and width

respectively of the interior, and H, is the
mounting height; that is, height of the fittings
above the working piane.
NOPE I - For rooms wherethelengthexceeds 5 times the
width, L shall be taken as L = 5W.
NOTE 2 .- If the reflection factor of the upper stretch of
the walls is less than half the reflection factor of the
ceiling, for indtrect or for the greater part of indirect
Jlghtmg, the value H, is measured between theceilingand
the working plane
S KY C OMPONENT (SC) -The ratio (or
percentage) of that part of the daylight
illumination at a point on a given plane,which
is received directly from the sky as compared
to the simultaneous exterior illumination on a
horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere
of an unobstructed clear design sky.
S OLAR L OAD - The amount of heat received
into a building due to solar radiation which is

a f f e c t e d b y .orientation, m a t e r i a l s o f
construction and reflection of external
finishes by colour.
U T I L I Z A T I O N F A C T O R (COEFFJCJENT O F
U T I L I Z A T I O N ) (cc) - The ratio of the total
luminous flux which reaches the working

plane (effective luminous flux, (Pn) to the total
luminous flux of the light sources ih the
interior (nominal luminous flux. Q,).
V I S U A L F I E L D - The visual field in the
binocular which includes an area
approximately 120 degrees vertically and 140
degrees horizontally centering on the point to
which the eyes are directed. The line joining
the point of fixation and the centre of the

pupil of each eye is called its primary line of
sight.
EXHAUST OF A IR - Removal of air from a

building and its disposal outside by means of a
mechanical device, such as a fan.
W ORKING P LANE -A horizontal plane at a

level at which work will normally be done (see
4.1.3.3 and 4.1.3.4).
F RESH A IR OR O UTSIDE A IR -Air of that

quality, which meets the criteria of Table 1
and in addition shall be such that the
concentration of any contaminant in the air is
limited to.within one-tenth the threshold limit
value (TLV) qf that contaminant.
2.2 Ventilation
A IR C HANGE P ER HOUR -The amount of
air leakage into or out of a building or room in
terms of the number of building volumes or
room volumes exchanged.
AXIAL,FLOW FAN - A fari having a casing in

which the air enters and leaves the impeller in
a direction substantially parallel to its axis.
CENTRIFUGAL FAN - A fan in which the air
leaves the impeller in a direction substantially
at right angles to its axis.
C O N T A M I N A N T S - Dusts, fumes, gases,
mists, vapours and such other substances
present in air as are likely to be injurious or
offensive to the occupants.
DILUTIONVENTILATION - Supplyofoutside
air to redtice the air-borne concentration of
contaminants in the building.
D RY B ULB T EM PE RATURE - The temperature of the air, read on a thermometer, taken
in such a way as to avoid errors due to
radiation.
E FFECTIVE T EMPERATURE ( E T ) - A n
arbitrary index which combines into a single
value the effect of temperature, humidity and
air movement on the sensation of warmth or
cold felt by the human body and its numerical
value is that of the temperature of still
saturated air which would induce an identical
sensation.
Where it is reasonably believed that the air of

quality is unexpectable as indicated above,
samplingand analysis shall be carried out by a
competent authority havingjurisdictiori and if
the outside air of the quality specified is not
available, filtration and other treatment
devices shall be used to bring its quality to or
above the levels mentioned in Table 1.
G ENERAL V ENTILATION - Ventilation,
either natural or mechanical orboth, so asto
improve the general environment of the
building, as- opposed to local exhaust
ventilation for contamination control.
H UMIDIFICA TION - 1 ne process whereby
the absolute humidity of the air in a building is
maintained at a higher level than that of
outside air or at a level higher than that which
would prevail naturally.
H U M I D I T Y , AB S O L U T E - The weight of
water vapour per unit volume.
H U M I D I T Y, RELATIVE -The ratio of the
partial pressure ot density of the water vapour
,in the air to the saturated pressure or density
respectively of water vapourat- the same
temperature.
L OCAL E XHAUST V E N T I L A T I O N - Ventilation effected by exhaust of air through an
exhaust appliance, sl[ch as a hood with or
without fan located as closely as possible to
TABLE I MAxlMuMALLOWABLECONTAMINANTCONCEN~ATIONSFORVENTlLATlONA~R
(Clause 2.2)
(1)
A NNUAL AVERA.GE
(ARITHMETIC MEAN)
SHORT TERM LEVEL

(NOT TO EXCEED
MORE THAN ONCE A
YEAR)
AVERAGING PERIOD
(2)
(3)
wm'
(4)
fig/m'
Suspended particulates
60
IS0
24
Sulphur oxides
80
400
24
20 000
100
30 000
500
I 800
4ooo
500
3
24
Carbon monoxide
Photochemical oxidant
Hydrocarbons (nbt including methanes)
Nitrogen oxide
200
Odour: Esseritially unobjectionable.

*
- - - - - PUT Vlll
WL,DlNC SERVICL%-SECTION
I LIGHTING AND VENTlLATlON
VIII-I-
the point at which contaminants are released,

so as to capture effectively the contaminants
and convey them through ducts to asafe point
of discharge.
MAKE-LIP AIR -Outside air supplied into a
building to replace the air.
M E C H A N I C A L VENTII.ATION -- Supply of
outside air either by positive ventilation or by
infiltration by reduction of pressure inside due
to exhaust of air. or by a combination of
positive ventilation and exhaust of air.
NAUIKAL. VENTII.ATION --- Supply of outside
air into a building throtigh window or other
openings due to wind outside and convection
effects arising from temperature or vapour
pressure differences (or both) between inside
3. ORIENTATION OF BUILDING
3.1 The chief aim of orientation of buildings
is to provide physically and psychologically
comfortable living inside the building by
creating conditions which suitably and
successfully ward off the undesirable effects of
severe weather to a considerable extent by
judicious use of the recommerlifations and
knowledge of climatic factors.
3.2 Basic Zones
3.2. I For the purpose of orientaticn it would
be convenient to divide the country into three
broad climatic zones:
a) hot and arid,
b) h nt/ warm and humid, and
c) co!d.
and outside of the building.

POSITIVE VENTII.A~IION -- T h e s u p p l y o f
outside air by means of a mechanical device,
such as a fan.
PKOPEI I.CK FAN -~ A fan in which the air
leaves the impeller in a direction substantially
parallel to its axis designed to operate
normally under free inlet and outlet
conditions.
SPRAY -HFAII SY ST E M - A s y s t e m o f
atomizing water so as to introduce free
moisture directly into a building.
SI-A(K ~FFFCl - Convection effect arising
from temperature or vapour pressure
difference (or both) between outside and
inside oft he room and the difference of height
between the outlet and inlet openings.
Tll~t~stiol 1) t.lMIl VAI IJF (7L.V) -.. Refers
to air-borne concentration of contaminants
currently accepted by the American
Conference of Goverhmental Industrial
Hygienists and represents conditions under
which it is believed that nearly all occupants
may be repeatedlv enposed. day after day.
without adverse effect.
VEI OCITY ChpTL!RE -.- Air velocity at any

point in front of the exhaust hood necessary to
overcome opposing air currents and to
capture the contaminants in air at that point
by causing the air to tlow mto the exhaust
hood.
Vi~~-i-ii.~i~ic~x ---- Supply of outside air into.
or the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
WEI Btrt.~ TEhlPERATljRE -- The steady

temperature linally given by a thermometer
having its bulb coveredwith gauze or muslin
moistened with distilled water and placed in
Bn air stream of not less than 4.5m/s.
\lll-I- 6
32.2 It is to be remembered that there may

not be uniform climatic factors in a particular
zone. They might even vary during day and
night in the same zonal region. Each zone, all
the same, poses certain basic problems.
3.3 Climatic Factors -- From the point of
view of lighting and ventilation, the following
climatic factors influence the optimum
orientation of the building:
a) solar radiation and temperature,
b) clouds.
c) relative humidity, and
d) prevailing winds.
3.4 Solar Radiation and Temperature
The best orientation from solar point of
view requires that the building as a whole
should receive the maximum solar radiation
in winter and the minimum in suinmer. For
practical evaluation, it is necessary to know
the duration of sunshine. and hourly. solar
intensity on the various external surfaces on
representative days of the seasons. The total
direct diurnal solar loads per unit area on
vertical surface facing different directions are
given in Table 2,for two days in the year, that
is. I6 May and 22 December. representative of
summer and winter. for latitudes
corresponding to some important cities all
over India. From Table 2. tlie total heat intake
can be calculated for all possible orientations
of the building for these extreme days of
summer and winter.
3.4. I
3.4. I. I Wherever possible, suitable sunbreakers have to be provided to cut off the
incursion of direct sunlight to prevent heat
radiation and to avoid glare.
3.4.2 In order to ascertain good and bad
aspects and to decide whether or not to take
NATIONAL BI:II.DINC CO& OF INDIA
temperatures. With the introduction of

electric fan to effectively circulate air and
owing to faking into account the riseiri cost Gf
construction of buildings, it would perhaps be
better to shift the emphasis on protection
f:om solar radiation where temperatures are
very high: When, however, thereIS less diurnal
variation between morning and mean
maximum temperatum along with high
humidity, as in coastal areas, the emphasis
should be on prevailing winds.
advantage of the suns rays, gay temperatures

of the region, for which orientation is to be
decided. should be studied in relation to the
following broad classification of temperature
ranges:
Below 15C Cold
SunB rays advantageous
1s to 20 c Cool
20 to 30 C Temperate
3.6.1.1 For the purpose of orientation, it is

necessary _to study the velocity and direction
of the wind at each hour and in each month
instead of relying on generalizations of a
month or a period or for the year as a whole.
This helps to spot the right winds for a
particular period of day or night.
30 to 35 C Hot
Protection from suns
Above 35C Very
rays advantageous
hot
3 . 5 ClOU~JS
3.S.J The clouds reduce not onlv the direct
radiation from sun but also -make sun
protection devices of little advantage. It is,
therefore, desirable to take note of cloudy
periods of. t he year and if t hey are long enough
and also coincide with hot periods. then. the
ideas of sun protection shpuld be given up,
although high day temperatures may demand
such protect,ion.
3 . 6
Winds
3.6.j.2 It is generally found that variation up

to 30 with respect to the prevalent wind
direction does not mateiially affect indoor
ventilation (averageindoor air velocity) inside
the building.
3.6.2 A comparative study of relative
humidity can be made under the following
categories:
0 - 25 Percent
Very dry
25 - 50 Percent
Dry
50 - 75 Percent
Humid
75 -- 100 Percent
Very humid
Relative Humitlir.ta and Pre\wiling
3.6.1 The discomfort due to high relative
humidity in air when temperatures are also

high can be counteracted, to a great extent. by
circulation of air with electric fans or by
ventilaton. In the past. simultaneously with
heavy construction and surrounding
verandahs t6 counter the effect of suns
radiation, there was also an over emphasis on
prtvailing winds to minimize the adverse
effects of high humidity wirh high
3.6.3 When relative humidity is of the

category of dry and very dry. advantage can
be taken of evaporative cooling in summers to
cool the air before .introducing it into the
building. This, however, raises the relative
humidity to some extent. But when thi
atmosphere is already humidoc very humid
TABLE 2 DAILY TOTAL DIRECT SOLAR RADIATION OS VERTICAL SURF4CES IN _e. callcm /DAY
FOR TWO REPRESENTATIVE DAYS
(C/awe _J.4./1
13N
RX
_A
I6 May 22 D2c
I6 May 22 Dee
23%
193
16 Mav 22 Dee
29-s
.Ih---- -- 16 May 22 Dee
North
I87
140
83
64
46
North East
228
3s
214
27
194
20
IPlc
I5
180
East
25
I87
232
173
540
1.57
247
146
25.1
126
South East
100
291
II5
294
IJI
29s
158
297
IA8
281
348
377
+t3
South
I8 ?98
64
South West
100
291
II5
294
141
95
IS8
west
225
I87
232
I73
240
I57
247
146
North West
228
35
214
27
19-I
20
I88
IS
P4Rt VIII
B~~II.DtNC SERVICFS--EF.:CTIOY
ICiTIW
AND
WVTlI.4TIOI
297
390
I88
253
ly
./
281
./
/r&l
9
VIII-I- 7
it is desirable either to regulate.the rate of air

movement with the aid of electric fans or to
take advantage of prevailing winds.
3.7 Aspecrs of Dqvligfiring- Since the clear
design sky concept for daylighting takes care
of the worst possible situation, orientationis
not a major problem for daylighting in
multistoreyed buildings, except that direct
sunshine and glare should be avoided.
However, due allowance should be given to
the mutual shading effects of opposite facades.
-3.8 Planting of Trees-Planting of trees in
streets and in open spaces should be done
carefully to take advantage of bot h shades and
sunshine without handicapping the flow of
natural winds. Their advantage in abating
glare and in providing cool and, or warm
pockets in deveioped areas should also be
taken. Some trees shed leaves in winter while
retaining thick foliagein summer. Such trees
will be very advantageous, particularly where
southern and western exposures are
concerned, by allowing maximum sun during
winter and effectively blocking it in summer.
orientation of buildings and recommendations
for various climatic zones of country.
. [VIII-I( I)]*.
4. LIGHTING
4.: Principles of Lighting

4.1.1 A IMS OF G OOD L IGHTING - Good
lighting is necessary for all buildings and has
three primary aims. The first aim is to
promote work and other activities carried out
within the building; the second aim is to
promote the safety of the people using the
building; and the third aim is to create,_in
conjunction with the structure and
decoration, a pleasing environment conducive
to interest of the occupants and a sense of their
well-being.
4.1 .I.1 Realization of these aims involves:
a) careful planning of the brightness and

colour pattern within both the working
areas and the surroundings so that
attention is drawn naturally to the
important areas, detail is seen quickly and
accurately and the room is free from any
sense of gloom or monotony (see.4.1.3);
*In this section where reference is made 10 good
praaice or accepted standards in relation to design.
testing, construction procedures and other information,
the appropria:e documenbs listed at the end of this
section may be used ac guide to the interpretation ofthis
term.
VIII-I-
b) using directional lighting where
appropriate to assist perception of task

detail and to give good modellng;
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from
light sources to eliminate visual
discomfort;
4 in artificial lighting installations,
minimizing flicker from certain types of
lamps and paying attention to the colour
rendering properties of the light;
4 correlating lighting throughout the
building to prevent excessive differences

between adjacent areas so as to reduce the
risk of accidents; and
fl installation emergency lighting systems,

where necessary.
4. I . 2 P L A N N I N G T H E B R I G H T N E S S
P ATTERN - The brightness pattern seen
within an interior may be considered as
composed of three main parts-the task itself,
immediate background of the task and the
general surroundings of walls. ceiling, floor,
equipment and funishings.
4.1,2.1 In occupations where the visual
demands are small, the levels of illumination
derived from a criterion of visual performance
alone may be too low to satisfy the other
requirements. For such situations,therefore,
illumination recommendations are based on
standards of welfare, safety and amenity
judged appropriate to the occupations; they
are also sufficient to give these tasks
brightness which ensured that the visual
performance exceeds the specified minimum.
Unless there are special circumstances
associated with the occupation, it is
recommended that the illumination of ail
working areas within a building should
generally be 150 lux, even though the visual
demands of the occupation might be satisfied
by lower values.
4.1.2.2 Where work takes place over the
whole utilizable area of room, the

illumination over that area should be
reasonably uniform and it is recommended
that the diversity ratio. of minimum to
maximum illumination should be not less
than @7
NOTE -This diversity ratio does not take into account
the effects of any local lighting provided.
4.f.2.3 When the task brightness appropriate

to an occupation has been determined, the
brightness of the other parts of the room
should be planhed to give a proper emphasis
to visual comfort and interest.
SATIOSAL BLILDINC C O D E O F I N D I A
A general guide for the brightnessrelatio.nship

within the normal field of vision should beas
follows:
4 For high task brightness Maximum
(above 100 cd/ ml)
3 to 1
1) Between the visual task
and the adjacent sources
like table tops
lot0 1
2) Between the visual task
and the remote areas of
the room
For
low and medium task brightness
b)
(below 100 cd/m): The task should be
brighter than both thebackground and
the surroundings; the lower the task
brightness, the less critical is the
relationship.
4.1.3 RECOMMENDED V ALUES OF I LLUMI NATION - Table 3 gives recommended values
of illumination commensurate with the
general standards of lighting described in this
section and related to many occupations and
buildings. These are vaiid under most of the
conditions whether the illumination is by
daylighting, artificial lighting or a combination of the two. The great variety of
visual tasks makes it impossible to listthemall
and those given should be regarded as
representing types of task.
4.1.3.1 The different locations and tasks are
grouped within the followingiour sections:
.a) Industrial buildings and process;
b) Offices, schools and public buildings;
c) Surgeries and hospitals; and
d) Hotels, restaurants, shops and homes.
4. I .3.2 The illumination leveis recommended
in Table 3 are those to be maintained at all
time on the task. They represent good practice
and should be regarded as giving the order of
illumination commonly required rather than
as having some absolute significance. They
may be exceeded where standards of visual
performance or amenity higher than those set
m this section are called for, provided other
requirements of this section, such as freedom
from visual discomfort, are satisfied.
4.1.3.3 Where a visual task.is requiredto be
carried out throughout an interior, general
illumination to the recommended value on the
working plane is necessary; where the precise
height and location of the task are not known
or cannot be easily specified,. the
recommended value is that on horizontal
plane 85 cm above level.
NOTE - For an industrial task: working ptane for the
purpose of general illummation levels is that on a work
place which is generally 75 cm above the floor level. For
PABT VIII WlLMNC SCIIVlCE8-SKTION
LIGHTING
certain purposes, such as viewing the objects of arts, the

illumination levels recommended are for .the vertical
plane at which the art pieces are placed.
4.1.3.4 Where the task is localized, the

recommended value is that for the task only; it
need not, and sometimes should not, be the
general level of illuminationused throughout
the interior. .Some processes, such as
industrialinspection process. call for lighting
of specialized design, in which case the level of
illumination is only one of the several factors
to be taken into account.
4.1.4 GLARE - Excessive contrast or abrupt
and large changes in brightness produce the
effect of glare. When glare is present, the
efficiency of vision is reduced and small
details or subtle changes in tone cannot be
perceived. It may be:
a) direct glare due to light sources within the
field of vision,
b) reflected glare due to reflections fr6m light
sources or surfaces of excessive
brightness, and
C) veiling glare where the peripheral field is
comparatively very bright.
4.1.4.1 An example of glare sources in
daylighting isthe view of the bright sky
through a windowor skylight, especially when
t h e surr,ounding wall or ceiling i s
comparatively dark or weakly illuminated.
Glare can be minimized in thbcase either by
shielding the open-sky from.direct sight by
louvers, external hoods or deep reveals,
curtains or other shading devicesorby crosslighting the surroundings to a comparable
level. A gradual transition of brightness ,from
one portion to the. other within the field of
vision always avoids or minimizes the glare
discomfort.
4.1.5 LIGHTING FOR M OVEMENT ABOUT A
B UILDING - Most buildings are complexes
of working areas and other areas, such as
passages, corridors, stairways, lobbies and
entrances. The lighting of all these areas
should be properly correlated. to give safe
movement within the building at all times.
4.1.5.1 CORRIDORS. PASSAGES AND
STAIRWAYS - Accidents may result if $eople
leave a well-lighted working area and pass
immediately into corridors or on to stairways
where the lighting is inadequate, as the time
needed for adaptation to the lower level may
be too long to permit obstaclebor the treads of
stairs to be seen sufficiently quickly. For the
same reason, it is desiiabk that t h e
ilhmtination of rooti which open off II
working area should be fairly hi& even
though the rooms may be used only
occasionally.
A N D VCNTILATIDN
VIII-L-
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION

(Clauses 4.1.3. Md 4.1.3.2.)
ILLUMINATION
lux
V ISUAL T ASKS
k.
(0
(3).
(2)
A. lnduattlal Buihlin~ and ProWam
1)
2)
General Factory Areas:

a) Canteens
b) Cloak-rooms
c) Entrances. contiors, stairs
Factory Ourdoor Arear:
I50
100
100
Stockyards, main entrances and exit roads, car parks, internal factory roads
3)
4)
AircraJl Facror:es and Maintenance Hangars:

a) Stock parts productions
450
b) Drilling, riveting, screw fastening, shce: aiuminium layout and template work,
wing sections, cowhng, welding sub-assembly, final assembly and inspection
300
c) Maintenance and repair (hangars)
300
Assembly Shops:
a) Rough wor&, for exampk, frame assembiy and assembly of heavy machinery
dj Medium work, for exampk, machmed parts, engme assembly, vehicle body assembly
c) Fine work, for exampk. radio and teiepnone equipment, typewnter andoffice
machinery assembly
d) Very fine work, for exampk. assembly of very small precision mechanisms and
mstruments
5)
6)
20
150
300
7qo
1500.
bkeries:
a) Mixing and make-up rooms,oven rooms and wrapping rooms*
Iso
b) Decorating and Icing
200
Boiler Houses (indwriat):

100
a) Coal and ash handiing

b) Boiler rooms:
I) Boiler fronts and operating areas
20 to 50
2) Other areas
c) Outdo& ptants:
I) C&miks
20
2) Platforms
50
Booh&n%ng:
a). Pasttng, punching and stitching
200
WJ Binding and folding and mis&aneous machutes
300
c) Finishing, blocking and inlaying
300
Boor mrd Shoe Factories:

8) sorting and @WI*O+al8idrahotikuxdwhemnaeuuy.
! Supplementary bul li@ng may be required for yule @aas and inatrumcttt part&.
$ Bpa&l attention sbotdd be paid to the wbur quality of the light.
Wl.1
INDIA
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Con&)
VISUAL -hSKS
St.
No.
ILWMINATION
lux
(1)
(2)
(3)
b) Clicking and closing preparatory operations
700
c) Cutting table and presses, stitching
IBlKJ
d) Bottom stock preparation, lasting and bottoming, finishing
700
e) Shoe rooms
700
9) Breweries and Distilleries:

a) General working areas
I50
200
b) Brewhouse. bottling and canning plants
Spcci8l lighting
c) Bottle inspection
10)
Canntig and Reserving Factories:

a) Inspection of beans,
ria.
barley. cte
450
b) Preparation: Kettle areas. mechanical cleaning, dicing, trimming
300
c) Canned and bottkd goods: Retorts
200
d) High speed labdiing lines
300
c) Can inspection
450
I I) Carper Factories:
a) Winding and beaming
200
b) Designing, jacquard card, cutting, setting pattern, tufting, topping, cutting.

hemming and fringing
300
c) Weaving, mending and inspection
450
12) Ceramics (see Pottery)

13) Chemical Works:
a) Hand furnaces, boiling tanks, stationary driers, stationary or gravity crystallixen.
mechanical driers, evaporators, filtration plants, mechanical crystallizing, bkaching
extractors, percolators. nitrators and electrolytic cells
Is0
b) Controls, gauges, valves, etc

c) Control rooms:
200 to 300
I) Vertical control panels
ml
2) Control desks
14)
Chocolore and Confecrionery Factories:

I50
a) Mixing, blending and boiling

b) Chocolate husking, winnowing, fat extraction, crushing and refining, feeding bean
cleaning, sorting, milling and cream making
.mo
c) Hand decorating inspection, wrapping and packing
300
IS) Clothing Factories:

4sot
a) Matchingup
b) Cutting, sewing
l Suppkmcntary local lighting may be required for gauge glasses and i,nstrtnuant patmk.
mpa&l
l tmntion should be paid to the cobur quality of the light.
?Mt VDI BUIWNC
SERVK-B--(IWllDN
I WCllllNC
A N D
VENllLATIDN
(CWNillLUdl
VW-~ 1
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Confd.)
SL
VISUAL TASKS
No.
(2)
(1)
ILLuktlN~rt0~
LUX
(3)
c) Inspection:
I) Light
450
2) Medium
loo0
3) Dark
I500
d) Hand tailoring:
I) Light
450
2) Medium
1000
3) Dark
I 500
16) Collieries (Surface Builrling):

a) Coal preparation plant:
I) Working areas
150
2) Other areas
100
3) Picking belts
300
4) Winding houses
I50
b) Lamp rooms:
I ) Main areas
100
2) Repair sections
150
3) Weight cabins
150
c) Fan houses
100
17) Duiries;
a) General working areas
b) Bottle inspection
c) Bottle filling
200
Special lighting
450
18) Die Sinking:

a) General
b) Fine.
300
I. 000
19) Dye Works:

a) Reception, grey perchmg
700
b) Wet processes
I sot
c) Dry proasses
2w
d) Dyers oflicices
e) Final perching
20)
700:
2ooo:
Elecrriciry GenerarinK Stations (Indoor Locarions).

a) Turbine halls
200
b) Auxiliary equipment, battery rooms, blowers, auxiliary generators, switchgear and

transformer chambers
100
*Supplementary local lighting may be required for sight glasses.

tSupplemetary local lighting should be used where necessary.,
$penal attention should be paid to the cobur quality of the light.
TABLE 3 RECOMbiENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Cod.)

VISUAL
%.
b_LUI$4llON
TASKS.
(3)
(2)
(1)
c) Boiler houses (hscluding operating floors) platforms. coal conveyors, pulverizers,

feeders, pmcipitatorm. soot and slag blowers
d) Boiler house and turbine house
7Oto 100
100
e) Basements
f) Conveyor houses, conveyor gantries and junction towers
g) Conrol rooms:
m
7010 loo
,
2wto3oo
300
Is0
IS0
1) Vertical control panels

2) Control desks
3) Rear of control panels
4) Switch houses
h) Nuclear reactors and steam raising plants:
IS0
Is0
200
I) Reactor areas, boilers and galleries

2) Gas circular bays
3) Reactor charge/ discharge face
21)
Elecrncily Generating Star
ions (Ourdoor
Locations):
a) Coal unloading areas
20
b) Coal storage areas
20
c) Conveyors
50
d) Fuel oil delivery headers
50
e) Oil stomp tanks
50
f) Cat-walks
50
g) Platforms, boiler and turbine desks
SO
100
h) Transformers and outdoor switchgear
22)
Engruving:
loo0
a) Hand
b) Machine (see Die Sinking)
23)
Farm Building
(Dairies):
50
a) Boiler houses
b) Milk rooms
I50
c) Washing and sterilizing rooms
150
50
d) Stables
I50
e) Milking parloun
24)
25)
Flour Milk
a) Roller, purifier, silks and packing floors
IS0
b) Wetting tables
300
Forges:
I50
General
26)
Foundries:
a) Charging floomT tumbling, cleantng, pourmg, shaking out, rough moulding and
rough core maktng
150
b) Fine moulding, core making and inspection
300
(cotllhl4ed)
W IT VIII RUlLDfNC SERVICE&SuII1oN
l.UfElwC
A N D
VENllLAlRlN
v,,,_p ,
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF iLLUMINATlON (ConrJ.j

VISUAL
(1)
i-ASKS
iLLUMlNAllON
IUX
(2)
(3)
27) Garages:
70
a) Parking areas (interior)

b) Washing and polishing, greasing, general servicing and pits
I50
c) Repairs
300
28) Gas W&k:

a) Retort houses, oil gas plants, water gas plants. purifiers, coke screening and coke
handling plants (indoor)
30 to so*
IO0
b) Governor, meter, compressor, booster and exhauster houses

c) Open type plants
20.
50
I) Cat-walks
2) Platforms
29) .Gauge and 7001 Rwms:
7w
General
3@) Glass Works and Processes:
I00
a) Furnace rooms, bending,annealing lehrs

6) Mixing rooms, forming (blowing, drawing, pressing and rolling)
I50
c) Cutting to size. grinding, polishing and toughening
200
d) Finishing (bevelling, decorating, etching and si;vermg)
300
e) Brilliant cutting
700
f) Inspection:
200
700
I) General
2) Fine
31) Glove Making:
300
a) Pressing, knitting, sorting and cutting

b) Sewing:
300
450
700
I) Light
2) Medium
3) Dark
c) Inspection:
450
loo0
I) Light
2) Medium
3) Dark
I 500
32) Har Making:
a) Stiffening, braiding, cleaning, refining, forming, sizing, pouncing, flanging
I50
Bnisbing and ironing

b) Sewing
300
450
700
1) Light
2) Medium
3) Dark
*Supplementary IocabJighting should be used at important points.
tsuppkmentary local lighting and optical aids should be used where necessary.
(Conrittued)
NATIONAL BUILDING CDDc. OF
INDIA
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES.OF ILLUMINATION (Cu&.)
I%.
VlstrAl IAStiS
lux
(1)
(2)
(3)
33) Hosiery and Knirwor:

300
a) Circular and flat knitting machines, universal winders. cutting UUI. folding and
pressing
b) Lock-stitch and overlocking machines:
I) tight
.m
2) Medium
3) Dark
450
700
Iso0
c) Mending
3+)
d) Examining and hand finishing. light, medium and dark
700
c) linking or running on
450
Inspection Shops ( EngiMering):

a) Rough work, for example. counting and rough checking of stock parts, CIC
Is0
b)- Medium work. for example. go and no go gauges and sub-assemblies
300
c) Fine work, for example, radio and telecommunication equipment, calibrated scales,
precision mechanisms and instruments
700
d) Very f& work for exampk. gauging and inspection of small intricate parts
e) Minute work for example, very small instruments
I sot)
1uoo
35) Iron and Steel W&s:
IO to 20
a) Marshalling and outdoor stockyards

b) Stairs, gangways. basements, quarries and loading docks
IO0
c) Slavards. melting shops, ingot stripping soaking pits. blast-fucnace working areas.
pickmg and ckanmg lines, mechanical plant and pump houses
IO0
d) Mould pteparation rolling and-wire mills, mill motor rooms, power and blower houses
I50
e) Slab inspection and conditioning. cpki strip mills, sheet and plate finishing, tinning.
galvanixmg machine and roll shops
200
300
f) Plate inspection
Special lighting
g) Tinplate inspection
36) Jewellery and Watchmaking:
700
a) Fine processes
b) Minute process
3ooo*
c) Gem cutting polishing and setting
5oot
37) Laboratories a n d Test Roomt:

a) General laboratories and balance rooms
300
b) Electrical and instrument laboratories
450
38) &undriu and Dry&m&g Works:

a) Rcaiving, sorting, washing. drying ironing (calendering) and dcspatch
200
b) Dryclaning and bulk machine work
200
c) Fine hand ironin& pressing, inspection. mending and spotting
300
Wptial aids should be used whefe neasary.

fSpc&l attention to colour quality of light may be necessary.
(ConIinueJ)
mm
VI1
BumalNG
suvL6.-lFecrmN
I LJCtlllNC
AND
VENtlWtlDN
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Co&.)

SL
No.
(1)
39)
ILLLJ~UNATKIN
lux
VISUAL TKXS
(2)
(3)
Leather Dressing:
a) Vats, ckaning, tanning, stretching,
cutting, fleshing and stuffing
b) Finishing, staking, splitting and scarfing
I50
200
baths Working
a)
Pressing and glazing
b) Cutting, scarfing and sewing

c) Grading and matching
41) Madrine and Fit&g
450
700
1OW
Shops:
a) Rough bench and machine work
I50
b) Medium bench and machine work, ordinary automatic machincs, rough grinding,
mcdium buffing and polishing
300
c) Fine bench and machine work, fine automatic machines, medium grinding, fine
buffing and poliihing
42) Moror
Vehicle Plants:
a) Gcncral
sub-assemblies, chasis assembly and car asscmbIy
b) Final inspection
c) Trim shops, body sub-asscmblics and body assembly
d) Spray booths
43)
Point Works:
a) General, automatic proccsscs

b) Special batch mixing
c) Colour matching
44)
450
700.
Point Shops and Spraying Booths:
a) Dipping, tiring and rough spraying
45)
200
I50
b) Rubbing, ordinary painting, spraying and finishing
300
c) Fine painting and finishing
450
d) Retouching and matching
7ooL
Poper works:
a) Paper and board making

I) Machine houses calcndeiing, pulp milh, preparation plants,
cutting, finishing and trimming
2tm
2) Inspection and sorting (overhauling)
MO
b) Paper converting procascs:

I) .Corrugatcd board, cartons containers and paper sack manufactum.
toting and hminatcd proceUa
200
2) Aswciatcd printing
300
*Special attention should be paid to the cobur quality of the Ii&t.
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION(Conrd.)

ILLUMIKATI~N
IUX
VISUAL TASKS
23.
(3)
(2)
(1)
46) PharmaceutiwLr and Fine Chemical Works:

a) Raw material storage
200
b) Control laboratories and testing
300
c) Pharmaceuticals manufacturing
Grinding, granulating, mixing and drying, tableting, sterilizing and
washing, preparation of solutions andfiihng, labelling,
capping, cartoning and wrapping, abd inspection
d) Fine chemical manufacture:
I) Plant processing.
300
2) Fine chemical finishing

47) Plasric Works:
a) Manufacture (see Chemical Works)
b) Processing
I) Calendering and extrusion
2) Moulding-compression and injection
3) Sheet ,fabrication:
i) Shaping
ii) Trimming, machining, polishing
iii) Cementing
300
200
200
Jo0
200
48) Plating Shops:

a) Vat and baths, buffing, polishing and burnishing
b) Final buffing and polishing
Is0
Special lighting
49) Porrery and Clay Products:

a) Grinding, filter pressing, kiln rooms, moulding, pressing, cleaning, trimminn.
glazing and tiring
b) Enamelling, colouring, decorating
150
450.
SO) Prinling Works:

a) Type foundries:
I) Matrix making, dressing type, hand and machine casting
2) Front assembly and sorting
2s
450
b) Printing plants:
I) Machine composition and imposing stones
2) Presses
3) Composition room
4) Proof-reading
200
300
4%
300
c) Electrotyping
1) Block-making, electroplating, washing and backing
2) Moufding, fmishing and routing
200
300
d) Photo-engraving
I) Bloc~making, etching and masking

2) Finishing and routing
200
300
l Sperial attention should be paid to the cofour quality of the light.

(Conrinuedl
?MT VW B U I L D I N G SSWlCrp--8-N
I LIGHTING AND VENTlLATlON
VlJ
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES & ILLUMINATION (ConrJ.)
SI
No
VISIIAI
',-ASKS
iI.I.UMINA+lON
lux
(1)
(2)
(3)
e) Colour pnnting:
inspection area
700,
5 I) Rut&v Rc~ces.w~~
a) Fabric preparation creels
200
h) Dlppmg. moulding. compounding and calendering
150
c) Tyre and tube making
200
52) Shwr Mural Work.v:
a) Bench work. sctibmg. pressing, punchmg, shearing, stampmg, spurning and folding
h) Sheet inspection
200
Special lighting
5 3 ) ,SON/~ For~rorIcx
Ke~tlr houses and anclllarles. glycertnr evaporarlon and di\tillatlon,and continuous
Indoor soap making plants:
I)
I50
General area>
200 IO 300
2) Control panels
Batch or continuous soap cooling curling and drying. soap mllhng and ploddmg:
I)
I 50
cieneral area,
2) (ontrol panels and key rqulpment
200
IO
300
Soap stampmg. wra$pmg and packmg. granules makmg. granules storage and
handling. lillinp and packmg granuleaI50
I) General arcds
200 to 300
2) Conlrol panels and machmt~
200
Fdihle products processmg and packing

54)
55)
Sfrrrl~rurcll SIlTi !tihrr1 ,,,),I Plu,rrs:

.I) (icnetal
I50
h) Markmg oft
300
li*rlr/e Ilrll.+ ((;rrrrvr or I.~fv~rr)a ) B a l e hreaklng. hlowmg, cardmg. rovlnp. sluhhtng. spmmng (ordlnaq
windmp. heckling, sprcadmg and cahllng
counts).
I.50
h) Warpmg, slashmg!. dressing and dyemg. Jouhlmg (lancy) and spurning (I~nc counts)
200
c ) Hraldmg (drawlnp-tn)
700
d) Wrlcmg:
I) I.llterned cloths and line counfs. darh
300
3) Ilain grcy cl<,th
200
c) Cloth m\pec,,on
56)
700
2) Iar~erned ilo[hs and line c,,unts. hght
700*
7i~\fl/l~ /%fIl/.\ (.SI/i, ,I .Y, ?Ifi,cYr<x)

.I) Sr~~hmg. lug~r~\c tm~mg. condutonmg
or scttmg or tw$ist
h) Sptnnmg
i) Wrndlng. twrs~~np. rcwmtimg .rnd coinmg. qu~h~np and slashing,
I ) Llghl thrcati
2 ) IXuk thrrad
200
450
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Cum%)

VISUAL TASKS-
ILLUbl~xATtDN
(3)
(2)
MO
d) Warping
e) Healding (drawing-in)
700
f) Weaving
700
1m
g) Inspection
57)
Texrile
Mills ( Woollen):
a) Scouring, carbonizing, teasing preparing, raising,brushing pressing, back-washing,

gilling. crabbing and blowing
150
b) Blending, carding, combing (whtte), tentering, drying and cropping
200
c) Spinning, roving, winding, warping, combing(coloured) and twisting
450
d) Healding (drawing-in)
700
e) Weaving
700
450
300
I) Fine worsteds
2) Medium worsteds and fine wooliens
3) Heavy woolkns
700
f) Burling and mending

g) Perching:
700
2000+
1) Grey
2) Final
58)
Textile Mills (Jute):
a) Weaving. spinning, flat, jacquard carpet loom and copwmding
200
b) Yarn calendering
150
59) Tobacco Fortories:
All processes
60)
mot
UphoLrrermg:
Furnrture and vehicles

61)
62)
63)
300
Worehouses ond Bulk Srores:
a) Large material loading bays
loo
b) Small material racks
I50
c) Packing and despatch
I50
Welding
und Soldering
a) Gas and arc welding and rough spot welding
150
b) Medium soldering brazing and spot welding, for example, domestic hardware
300
c) Fine soldering and spot welding, for example,instrumprts. radio set assembly
7&t
d) Very fine soldering and spot welding, for exampk, radio valves
I50
Woodworking Shops
a) Rough sawing and bench work
l Speciaf attention shored be paid to the coiour quality of the light.

tSpedal attention should be paid to thecobur quality of the light in all processing areas.
( ( onrmued
?ART VIII WlLMNC SPIVICDFSECTIDN I L I G H T I N G
AND
VENTILATIDN
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION(Conrd.)

VISU~I.
I%.
(1)
TA S K S
ILLUMINATION
lux
(2)
(3)
b) Sizing, planing, rough sanding. medium machine and bench work,glueing, veneeiing
200
c) Fine bench and machine work;.fine sanding arid finishing
300
and cooperage
B. Offkea, Schoob and Puhiis Buildinp

64)
Airport Buildings:
a) Reception areas (desks)
300
b) Customs and immigration halls
300
c) Circulation areas and lounges
150
65)
Assembly and Concert:

a)
66)
67)
100
Foyers and auditoria
b) Platforms
c) Corridors
70
d) Stairs
100
Banks:
a) Counter, typing and accounting book areas
300
d) Public areas
150
Cinemas:
150
a) Foyers
b) Auditoria
50
c) Corridors
70
100
d) Stairs
68)
Libruries*
70
a) Shelves (stadrs)
69)
to I50
450
to 15ot
b) Reading rooms (newspapers and magazines)
I50t0300
c) Reading tables
300 to 700
d) Book repair and binding
300 to 700
e) Cataloguing, sorting and stock rooms
1SOto300
Museums An Galleries:
a) Museums:
I) General
2) Displays
I50
Special lighting
b) Art galleries:
I) General
2) Painting
*For/details reference may be made to good practia [WI-l(s)].
tOn vertical surfaces.
1% fticrica with separate picture lighting, In small @icries without wall lighting the illumination should bein~r~ucd to
0011 vertical surface. Special attention shbuld be paid to the colour quality of the light.
(co&su~
WI-I-20
NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE OF INMA
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATiON(Cbmf.)

l~LUhtlfd~Ti0~
lux
hXlAL TASKS
SL
No.
(3)
(2)
(1)
7 0 ) o//ice:
a) Entrance balls and reception areas
I50
b) Conference rooms and executive office
300
c) General office
300
d) Business machine operation
450
e) Drawing office:
1) General
300
2) Boards and tracing
450
f) Corridors and lift cars
70
g) Stairs
loo
h) Lift landings
I50
j) Telephone exchanges:
I) Manual exchange rooms (on desk)
2) Main distribution frameroom
7 I)
200*
I50
School and Colleges:
a) Assembly halls:
I) General
IS0
2) When used for examinations
300
3) Plateforms
300
b) Class and lecture rooms:

300
I) Desks
200 to 3001
2) Chalk boards
c) Embroidery sewing rooms
700
d) Art rooms
450:
e) Laboratories
300
1) Libraries:
70 to Isot
1) Shelves, stacks
2) Reading tables
300
See appropriate trades
g) Manual training
h) Offices
300
j) Staff rooms and common rooms
150
70
k) Corridors
100
m) Stairs
7 2 ) Thearres:
I50
a) Foyers
70
b) Auditoria
*Spedal lighting will be required for switchboard.
ton vertical surfacrrs.
ZSpecial attention should be paid to thedirecton and the colour quality of the light.
(Conrinucd)
?ART Vlti
B U I L D I N G St?.UVICE)-SECTION
I LIGHTING AND VEMlLATlON
vttt-t?
-.
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF lLLUMINATION(ConrJ.)
No.
(2)
0)
c) Corridors
d) Stairs
73) lknlal
Surgeries:
a) Waiting rooms
b) Surgeries:
I) General
2) Chairs
c) Laboratories
a) Waiting rooms and consulting rooms
h)
Iw
70
Corridors
IO0
c) Stairs
d) Sight testing (acult).) wall charts and near VI\IO~ type?,
Jell*
7 5 ) Hospirals:
I
a) Reception and waiting rooms
51)
b), Wards:
1) General
!#I
2) Beds
I 50
c) Operating theatreq:
I) General
2) Tables
d) Laboratorlcs
e) Radiology deparrmcnts
f) Casualty and outpatient depxtment\
g) Stairs and corr&rs
h) Dispcnsarles
c. Hotels, Restaurants, Shops and Homes
76) H o t e l s :
a)
Entrance halls
I 50
Reception and accounts
so0
c)
Dining rooms (tdhlrb)
100
d)
Lounges
I50
e) Bedrooms:
loo
X0
SO0
I) Grncral
2) Dressing table\. hcd heads.
Writing rooms (rabies)
g)
Corridors
c IC
70
*The charts should be so illuminated tha: their brightness is suhsrantiall> uniiorm over their whole ared.
_-___ _... _-.-.
--_.-______ _ -
((c,t,l,llo.Jl
--.__..
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Conrd.)

VISUAL
0)
TANKS
I~~utdltd~T~N
luX
(2)
(3)
100
200
2ov
70
100*
loti*
b) Stairs
j) Laundries
k) Kitchens
m) Goods and passenger lifts

n) Clock-rooms and toilets
p) Bathrooms
7 7 ) Resrauranrs:
a) Dining rooms:
1) Tables
100
2) Cash desks
300
300
b) Self-carrying counters
c) Kitchens
200.
d) Cloack-rooms and toilets
100.
78) Shops and Srores:

150
a) General areas
to 3oot
200
b) Stock rooms
7 9 ) Hoines:
a) Kitchens
200
b) Bathrooms
100:
c) Stairs
100
d) Workshops
200
70
e) Garages
700
r) Sewing and darning
IS0
g) R.eading (casual)
h) Homework
and
300
sustained reading
*Supplementary local lighting should be provided over kitchm quipmcnt and at mirrors.
$%tppkmmtary local lighting should be used as required for counter and
display areas.
$Suppkmentary local lighting should be provided at mirrors.
It is important, when lighting stairways. to

prevent disability from glare caused bydrrect
sight of bright sources to emphasize the edges
of the treads and to avoid confusing shadows.
The same precautions should be taken in the
lighting of cat-walks and stairways on
outdoor industrial plants.
4.1.5.2 E N T R A N C E S -- The problems of
correctly grading the lighting within a
building to allow adequate time for
adaptation wkn passing from one area to
another area Ne particularly acute at building
entrances. These are given below:
a) By day, people entering a budding will be
adapted to the very high levels of

?MT VW B U I L D I N G
SEltVICES--SE(TIO?I
I LICHTINC
brightness usually present outdoors and

there is risk of accident -if entrance areas,
particularly any steps, are poorly lighted.
This. problem may often be overcome by
arranging windows to give adequate
natural lighting at the immediate
entrance, grading to lower levels further
inside the entrance area. Where this
cannot be done. suppismentary artificial
lighting should be installed to raise the
illumination 10 an appropriate value.
b, At night it is desirable to light entrance
halls and lobbies so that the illumination
level reduces towards the exit and so that
no bright fittings are in the line of sight of
pcopte leaving the building. Any entrance
A N D VENTlL4TION
vlll-I-L3
steps to tne uuudmg snould be well-ltghted

by correctly screened fittings.
principles of good lighting, reference may be
made to good practice [VIII-l(2)].
4.2 Daylighting - The primary source of
lighting for daylighting is the sun. The light
received by the earth from the sun consists of
two parts, namely, direct solar inumination
and- sky radiation. For the purposes of
daylighting design, direct solar illumination
shall not be considered and only sky radiation
shall be taken as contributing to illumination
of the building interiors during the day.
42.1 The relative amount of sky radiation
depends on the position of the sun defined by
its altitude, which in turn, varies with the
latitude of the locality, the day ofthe year and
the time of the day, as indicated in Table 4.
4.2.2 The external available horizontal
illumination which may be assumed for design
purposes in this country, broadly covering
India from north to south, may be taken 8 000
lux. Since the design is based on the solar
position of 15 altitude, the corresponding
illumination from the Design sky has been
found to be nearly constant all over the
country. However, the prevalent atmospheric
haze which varies from place to place may
necessitate a 25 percent increase in the value of
8 000 lux design illumination suggested in this
Code, where haze conditions prevail at design
time.
4.2.3 The daylight factor is dependent on the
sky luminance distribution, which varies with
atmospheric conditions. A clear design sky
with its non-uniform distribution of
luminance is adopted for the purposes of
design in this section.
4.2.4 C O M P O N E N T S
F ACTOR - Daylight factor
OF
A Y L I G H T
is the sum of all

the daylight reaching on an indoor reference
point from the following sources:
a) The direct sky visible from the point,
b) External surfaces. reflecting light
directly* to the point, and
c) Internal surfaces reflecting and interreflecting light to the point.
NOTE - Each of the thm components when expressed
as a ratio or percent of the simu,ltaneous external
illumination on the horizontal plane, defines respectively
l
External surface refkction may be computed

approximately only for points at theccntre of the room,
and for detailed analysis procedurea are complicated
and these may be ignored for actual calculatPns.
vll1.P
the sky component (SC), the external reflected

component (ERC) and the internal reflected component
(IRC) of the daylight factor.
The daylight factors onthe horizontal

plane only are usually taken, as the working
plane in a room is generally horizontal;
however, the factors in vertical planes should
also be considered when specifying
daylighting values for s@cial cases, such as
daylighting on class-rooms, blackboards,
pictures and paintings hung on walls.
4.2.5 SKY C OMPONENT (SC)- Sky component for a window of any size is computed
by the use of the appropriate table of
Appendix A.
a) The recommended sky component level
should be ensured generally on the
working plane at thefollowing positions:
I) at a distance of 3 to 3.75 m from the
window along the central line
perpendicular to the window,
2) at the centre of the room if more
appropriate, and
3) at fixed locations, such as school
desks, black-boards and office tables.
b) The daylight area of the prescribed sky
4.2.4.1
component should not normally be less
than half the total area of the room.

4.2.5.1 The values obtainable from the tables
are for rectangular, open unglazed windows,
with no external obstructions. The values
shall be corrected for the presence ofwindow
bars, glazing and external obstructions, if any.
This assumes the maintenance of a regular
cleaning schedule.
CORRECTIONS FOR WINDOW
BARS-The corrections for window bars
4.2.5.2
shall be made by multiplying the values read

from tables in Appendix A by a factor equal to
the ratio of the clear opening to the overall
opening.
4.2.5.3 CORRECTION FOR GLAZING - Where
windows are glazed, the sky components
obtained from Appendix A shall be reduced
by 10 to 20 percent, provided the panes are of
clear glass, tolerably clean. Where glass is of
the frosted (ground) type, the sky components
read from Appendix A may be reduced by 15
to 30 percent. Higher indicated correction
corresponds to larger windows and/or near
reference points. In the case of openings and
glazings which are not vertical, suitable
correction shall be taken into account.
4.2.5.4 CORRECTION FOR EXTERNAL
OBSTRUCTIONS - T h e r e i s n o s e p a r a t e
correction, except that the values from tabks
in Appendix A shall be read only for the
unobstructed portions of the window.
NATtONAL
UtLDtNC CODWe OF IWIMA
TABLE 4 SOLAR-ALTITUDES (TO THE NEAREST DEGREE) FOR INDIAN LATITUDES

(Clause 4.2.1)
PERIOD
OF
YEAR
22 JUNE
21 M A R C H
AND
23 SE?TEMBER
07 00 08 00 09 qo IO 00
II 00 I2 00
07 00 08 00 09 00 IO 00 II 00
1700
I600
I500
I400
1300
1700 1600
ION
I8
31
45
58
70
77
IS
30
44
59
I3N
I9
32
46
60
i2
80
I5
29
44
l6N
20
33
47
61
74
83
I4
29
I9Pl
21
34
48
62
75
86
I4
22N
22
35
49
62
75
89
25N
23
36
49
6j
76
2IIN
23
36
49
dl
3lN
24
37
50
WN
25
37
49
&
L
22 .DECEM~IER
0700 08000900
1000
1700
1600
1500
1400 1300
72
80
23
35
46
53
57
58
70
77
21
33
43
51
54
43
56
68
74
I9
31
41
48
51
28
42
55
66
71
I8
29
48
45
48
I4
28
41
53
64
68
I6
2:
36
42
45
88
I3
27
40
52
61
65
I4
25
34
39
42
76
86
I3
26
39
50
59
62
I3
23
31
37
39
75
82,
13
25
37
48
56
56
11
21
28
34
36
73
79
12
25
36
46
53
56
IW
26
31
33
IS00
1400 1300
I2 00
1100 1200
-
J2%-IEKNAL
KEFLECTED COMPONEST
(ERC) -The value of the sky component
corresponding to the portion of the window
obstructed by the external obstructions can be
found by the use of methods described in
Appendix B of accepted standards
[VIII-l(3)].
or more efficient, provided their sills are

raised by 30 to 60 cm above the working plane.
hr011- -- It is tobcnotcd thatwhlieplacingwmdowwitha
These values when multiplied by the

coriection factors, corresponding to the mean
elevation of obstruction from the point in
question as given in Table 5, can be taken as
the external reflected components for that
point.
4.2.8.3 For a given penetration. a number of

small openings properly positioned along the
sqme. adjacent or opposite walls will give
better distribution of illumination than a
single large opening. The sky component at
any point. due to a number of openings m;\y
be easily determined from the corresponding
sky component contour charts appropriately
superposed. The sum of the individual sky
component for each opening at the point
given the overall component due to all the
openings. The same charts may also facihtate
easy drawmg of sky component contours due
to multiple openings.
4.1.6
TABLE5
CORREC'TlOI'i FAC-l-OR FOREKC

(Cluuse 4.,7.6)
MFAN ANU F OF
~ORKCCll0h FACIOR
EI.tVAl IOh
3.U86
I 5
0.086
0.142
0.192
0.226
0.274
0.304
0.314
0.334
25
35
45"
55"
65"
75"
w
4.2.6.1 For method of calculating ERC,

reference may be made to accepted standard
[see Examples IO and 1 I given in Appendix B
of VIII-l(3)].
4 . 2 . 7 Ilril.EKhAl, REFt.EcI-F-Jt) COMPONENT
(IRC) -- The component of daylight factor
contributed by reflection from the inside
surfaces \,aries directly as the window area
and inversely as the total area of internal
suifaces, and depends on the reflection factor
of the floor, wall and roof SUI faces inside and
of the ground outside. For rooms whitewashed on walls and ceiling and windows of
normal sizes, the IRC will have sizeable value
even at points far away from the window.
External obstructions, when -present, will
proportionately reduce IRC. Where accurate
values of IRC are desired, reference to a
precise method of evaluation given in
Appendix B of accepted standard [VIII-l(3)]
may be made.
2.2.8 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF OPENINGS
AF F O R D G OOD LiGHTtNG
7.0
4.2.8.1 Generally, while taller openings give

greater penetrations, broader openings give
better distributldn of light. It is preferable that
some are& of the sky at an altitude of 20 to 25
degrees should light up the working plane.
4.2.8.2 Broader openings may also be equally
WI-I-26
high sill level might help natural Ilghtmg. this is likely to

reduce venlilatlcn at wcvk levels. While deqming the
opening for ventilation also, a compromise may be made
by providing the sill level about I5 cm below the head
level of workers.
4.2.X.4 Unilateral lighting fromside openings

~111. in general, be unsatisfactory if the
effective width of the room IS more than 2 to
2.5 times the distance from the floor to the top
of the opening.
4.2.8.5 Openings on two opposite sides will
give greater uniformity oi internal daylight
illumination, especially when the room is 7 m
or more across. They also minimize glare by
illuminating the wail surrounding each ofthe
oppobing openmgs. Side openings on one side
and clerestory openings on the opposite side
may be provided where the situation so
requires.
4. ?.5.6 Cross-lighting with openings on
adjacent walls tends IO in&ease the diffused
lighting within a room.
4.2.8.7 Openings in deep reveals tend to
minimize glare effects.
4.2.8.8 Openings shall be provided with
chajiahs, louvers, baffles or other shading
devices to exclude, as far as possible, direct
sunlight entering the room. Chajjahs, louvers,
etc, reduce the effective height of the opening
for which due allowance shall be made. Broad
and low openings are, in general, much easier
to shade against sunlight entry. Direct
sunlight, when it enters, increases the inside
illumination very considerably. Glare will
result if it falls on walls at low angles. more so
than when it falls on floors, especially when
the floors are dark coloured or less reflective.
4.2.8.9. Light qontrol media, such as
translucent glass panes (opal or mate)
surfaced by grinding, etching or sandblasting,
configurated or corrugated glass, certain
types of prismatic glass and glass blasts are
NATIONAL BI:II.UlkC CODE OF INDIA
often used. They should be provided, either

fixed or movable outside or inside, especially
in the upper portions of the openings. The
lower portions are usually left clear to afford
desirable view. The chief purpose of such
fixtures is to reflect part.of the light on to the
roof and thereby increase the diffuse lighting
within, ligbi up the farther areas in the room
and thereby produce a more uniform
illumination throughout. They will also
prevent the opening causing serious glare
discomfort to the occupants but will provide
some glare when illuminated by direct
sunlight.
4 . 2 . 9 A VAILABILITY OF D A Y L I G H T I N
MULTISTOREY BLOCK - Proper planning
and layout of building can add appreciably to
daylighting- illumination inside. Certain
dispositions of building masses offer much
kss mutual obstruction to daylight than
others and have a significant relevance,
especially when intensive site planning is
undertaken. The relative availability of
daylight in multistorey blocks of different
relative orientations are given inTable 6.
4.2.10 For specified requireinents for
daylighting of special occupancies and areas,
[Vlll-l(4)].
the recommended practice is to design for a

level of illumination on the working plane on
the basis of the recommendedlevels f6r visual
tasks .iiven in Table 3 by a method called
Lumen mettiod. In order to make the
necessary detailed calculations concerning the
type and quantity of lighting equipment
necessary, advance information on the surface
reflectances of walk, ceilings and floors is
required. Si@larly, calculations concerning
the-bightness ratio in the. interior call for
details of the interior decor and furnishing.
Stepwise guidance regarding designing the
interior lighting systems for a building using
the *Lumen method is given in 4.3.2.1
to 4.3.2.4.
4.3.2.f
DETERMINATION OF THE ILLUMINATION LEVEL - Recommended value of
illumination shall be taken from Table 3,

depending upon the type of work to be carried
out in th& location in question and the visual
tasks involved.
4.3.2.2
SELECTION OF THE LIGHT SOURCES

s e l e c t i o n of l i g h t
L U M I N A I R E S- T h e
AND
sources and luminaires dependson the choice

of lighting system, namely, general lighting,
directional lighting and localized or local
lighting.
4.3.2.3
4.3 Artijicial Lighting

4.3 I
A RTIFICIAL L I G H T I N G RESIGN FOR

INTERIORS - For general lighting purposes,
4.3.2
DETERMINATION OF THE LUMINOUS
FLUX
Artificial lighting may have to
be provided.
4 where the recommended illumination

levels have to be obtained by artificial
lighting only,
b) to supplement daylighting when the level
of illumination falls below the
recommended value, and
cl where visual task may demand a higher
level of illumination.
a) The luminous flux (a) reaching the

working plane depends upon the
following:
1) lumen output of the lamps.

2) type of luminaire,
3) proportion of the room (room index)
(M.
4) reflectance of internal surfaces of the
room,
TABLE 6 RELATIVE AVAILABILITY OF DAYilGHT ON THE WINDOW PLANE AT GROUND

IN A FOUR-STOREYED BUILDING BLOCKS (CLEAR DESIGN-SKY ASBASIS,
DAYLIGHT AVAILABILITy TAKEN AS UNITY ON AN UNOBSTRUCTED
FACADE. VALUES ARE FOR THE CENTRE OF THE BLOCKS)
DISTANCE OF SEPARATION
BETWEEN Bmxs
pM1 VIII
INFINITELY LONG
PAKALLEL BLOCKS
PARALLEL -KS
F ACING E ACH &HER
(LENGTH =2 X H EIGHT )
P ARALLEL &LOCKS
FACINO GAGS BETWEEN
DppoSlTE BLOCKS
(LENGTH = 2 x H EIGHT )
0.5 Ht
0.15
0.15
0.25
1.0
Ht
0.30
0.32
0.38
t.5 Ht
0.40
0.50
0.55
2.0 Hl
0.50
0.60
0.68
l lWDlNC SKRVICFS--SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
LEVEL
w-2
5) depreciation in the lumen output ofthe

lamps after burning their rated life,
and
6) depreciation due to dirt collection on
luminaires and room surface.
b)
C O E F F I C I E N T O F UTILIZAI3ON
UTILIZATION FACTOR
c) CALCULATION FOR DETERMINING

LUMINOUS FLUX
E., = -+or,
EVA
9 = ___ for new condition
cc
and
#I = -- for working condition

rd
OR
1) The compilation of tables for the
utilization factor requires a

considerable amount of calculations,
especially if these tables have to cover a
wide range of lighting practices. For
every luminaire, the exact light
distribution has to be measured in the
laboratory and their efficiencies have
to be calculated and measured exactly.
These measurements comprise:
THE
where
EVA
9= The total luminous flux of
the light sources installed in

the room in lumens;
Ew = the average illumination
level required on the
working plane in lux;
A = area of the working plane in
m*;
9 the luminous flux radiated by the

luutc$res directly to the measuring
P= the utilization factor in new

conditions; and
ii) the luminous flux reflected andrereflected by the ceiling and the walls
/to the measuring surface, and
d = maintenance factor.
In practice, it is easier to calculate
straightaway the number of lamps or
luminaiies from:
iii) the inter-reflections between the

ceiling and wall which result in the
measuring surface receiving
additional luminous flux.
Ea,A Nlam, = pdcpw
All these measurements have to be
made for different reflection factors of

the ceiling and the walLs for all necessary
room indices. These tables have also to
indicate the maintenance factor to be
taken for the luminous flux
depreciation throughout the life of an
installation due to ageing of the lamp
and owing to the deposition of dirt on
the lamps and luminaires and room
surfaces.
where
Q, IImpS= luminous flux of each
lamp in lumens
~bmimirc = luminous flux of each

luminaire in lumens
NImp = total number of Iamps
N~umin.irc = total number of luminaires.
2)
The values of the reflection factor of

the ceiling and of the wall are as
,follows:
White and very light
colours
0.7
Light, colours
0.5
Middle tints
0.3
Dark cdlours
0.1
Forthe walls, taking into account the

influence of the windows without
curtains, shelves, almirahs and doors
with different colours, etc, should be
estimated.
Ill-I-~*
4.3.2.4 ARRANGEMENT OFTHE LUMINAIRES -
This is done to achieve better uniformly

distributed illumination. The location of the
luminaires has an important effect on the
utilization factor.
a) In general, luminaires are spaced*a*metre
apart in either direction, while tlie
distance of the end luminaire from the
wall is + nmetre. The distance ais more
or less equal to the mounting height H,
between the luminaire and the working
plane. The utilization factor tables are
calculated for this arrangement of
luminaires.
b)
For small rooms where the room index

(k,) is less then 1, the distance a should
N A T I O N A L WU.OlNC
CIBDE OF INDIA
always be less than I&,,, since otherwise

luminaires cannot be properly located. In
most cases of such rooms, fouror. two
luminaires are placed for good general
lighting. If, however, in such rooms only
one luminaire is installed in the middle,
higher utilization factors are obtained,
but the uniformity ofdistributionis poor.
For such cases, references should be made
to the additional tables for k,=06 to l-25
for luminaires ioeated centrally.
I N T E G R A T I O N O F LIGH-ITNG A N D AIRCONPITIONING SYSTEM -,lt is desirable to
4.3.3
design air-conditioning and lighting system

integrally. The fundamental idea in this
integration is that the return air after airconditioning the space is passed through
luminaires or other lighting fittings so that it
is brought into close contact with the means of
illumination. Hence, a large part of the heat
generated by the lighting is removed at source
and only a small portion of the warmth is
dissipated within the premises. Detailed
design of integration of lighting and airconditioning system shall ,be done in
accordance with good practice.
4.34 A RTIFICIAL L IGHTING
D AY
TO
S UPPLEMENT
LIGHTING
4.3.4.1 The need for general supplementary

artificial lighting arises due to diminution of
daylighting beyond design hours, that is, for
solar altitude below 15 or when dark cloudy
conditions occur.
4.3..4.2 The need may also arise for.providing

artificial lighting during the day in the
innermost parts of the building which cannot
be adequately provided with daylighting, or
when the outside windows are not of adequlrts
size or when there are unavoidable external
obstructions to the incoming daylighting.
4.3.4.3 The neqd for supplementary lighting
during the day arises, particularly when the
daylighting on the working plane fallsbeJow
100 lux and the surrounding luminance drops
below 19-cd/m and the working lane
illumination level to a range of 100 to 15g lux.
4.3.4,4 The requirement of supplementary
artificial lighting increases with the increase in
daylighting availability. Therefore,
conditions near sunset or sunrise or
equivalent conditions due to -clouds or
obstructions, etc, represent the worst
conditions when the supplementary lighting is
most needed.
4.3.4.5 The requirement of supplementary
artificial lighting when daylighting
availability becomes poor canbe determined
from Fig. 2 for an assumed ceiling height of
3.0 m, depending upon floor area,
fenestration percentage and room surface
reflectance. Cool daylight fluorescent tubes
are recommended with semi-direct
luminaires. To ensure a good distribution of
illumination, the mounting height should be
between 1.5 and 2.0 m above the work plane
for a separation of 2.0 to 3.0 m between the
OPENINGS.
PERCENT
0
0
.,.I....,..
SO
100
150
.I*,
200
230
FLOOR AREA, ,n2
Fig. 2 Supplemenrary Arrificial Lighring_for 40 W Fluorescent Tubes

?Mt VlIl
BUILDING SCBVICK4-SECIION I LlGHTINi
A N D
VENllLATN)N
vlll-I-*9
luminaires. Also the number of lamps should

preferably be more in the rear half oft he room
than in the vicinity of wirrdows. The following
steps may be followed for using Fig. 2 for
determining the number of fluorescent tubes
required for supplementary daylighting.
a)
Determine fenestration percentage of the

floor area, that is,
- Wind0.w
- - - -Area
- - x 100
Floor Area
b)
In Fig. 2, refer to rhe curye corresponding

to the percent fenestration determined
above and the set of reflectances of
ceiling, walls and floor actually provided.
c) For the referred curve of Fig. 2 read,

along the ordinate. the number of 40 W
fluorescent tubes required, corresponding
to the given floore area on the abscissa.
3.3.5 For detailed information on the design
aspects and principles of artificial lighting,
[vlll-l(2)].
amount of air required to keep the

concentration down to I percent is very small.
The change in oxygen content is also too small
under normal conditions to have any ill
effects; the oxygen content may vary quite
appreciably without noticeable effect. if the
carbon dioxide concentration is unchanged.
5 ._.*
7 a1 VITIATION BY BODY ODOURS - Where
no products of combustion or other
contaminants are to be removed from air, the
amount of fresh air required for dilution of
inside air to prevent vitiation of air by body
odours. depends on the air space available per
person and the degree of physical activity; the
amount of air decreases as the .air space
available per person, and it may vary from
20 to 30 m per person per hour. In rooms
occupied by only a small number of persons
such an air change will automatically be
attained in cool weather by normal leakage
around windows and other openings and this
may easily be secured in warin weather by
keeping the openings open.
No standards have been laid down under the
Factories Act 1948 asregards the amount of

4.3.6 For specific requirements for lighting of
special occupancies and areas, reference may
be made to good practice [Vlll-l(5)].
4.j.7 Electrical installation aspect for
artificial lighting shall be in accordance with
5. VENTILATION
5.1 Generul- Ventilation of buildings is
required to supply fresh air for respiration of
occupants, to dilute inside air to prevent
vitiation by body odours and to remove any
products o f c o m b u s t i o n o r o t h e r
contaminants in air and to provide such
thermal environments as will assist in the
maintenance of heat ,balance of the body in
order to prevent discomfort and injury to
health of the occupants.
fresh air required per worker or the number of

air changes per hour. Section I6 relaling to
over-crowding requires that at least 14 to
l6m of space shall be. provided for every
worker and for the purpose of that section no
account shall be taken of any space in a work
room which is more than 4.25 m above the
floor level.
NEIL -~ Vitration of the atmosphere can also occur in
factories by odours given off due to contaminants of the
product itself, say for example. from tabacco processing
in a Bidi factory. Here the ventilatwn will have to be
augmented to keep odours within unobjectionable levels.
5.2.2.1 R E C O M M E N D E D V A L U E S F O R A I R
CHANGES -- The following standards of
general ventilation are recommended based

on maintenance of required oxygen, carbon
dioxide and other air quality levels and for the
control of body odours when no products of
combustion or other contaminants are
present in the air:
5.2 Design Consideratiuns
AIR CHANGES SCHEDULE
5.2.1 RESPIRATION - Supply of fresh air to
Space to be ventilated
provide oxygen for the human body for

elimination of waste products and to maintain
carbon dioxide concentratiofi in the air within
safe limits rarely calls for special attention as
enough outside air for this purpose normally
enters the areas of occupancy through crevices
and other openings.
5.2.1.1 Even in the worst ventilated rooms,
the content of carbon dioxide in air rarely
exceeds 0.5 to I percent and is, therefore,
incapable of producing any ill effect. The
Ylll-I-30
Air changes
per hour
*Assembly Halls/Auditoria
3 - 6
*Bed Rooms/ Living Rooms
3 - 6
Bath Rooms/Toilets
*Cafes/ Restaurants
Cinemas/Theatres
Class Rooms
6- I2
l2- I5
(Non-smoking) 6 - 9
3 - 6
*Smoking
space to be verrrilared
Air changes
per hour
Factories (Medium metal work) 3 - 6

* Garages
!2 - 15
* Hospital Wards
3 -- 6
* Kitchens (Common)
6-9
* Kitchens (Domestic)
3-6
Laboratories
3-6
* Offices
3-6
5:2.3 HEAT B ALANCE OF BODY -- Specially
in hof weather, when thermal environment
inside the room is worsened by heat given off
by machinery, occupants and other sources,
the prime need for ventilation is to provide
l
such thermal environment as will assist in the

maintenance of heat balance of the body in
order to prevent discomfort and injury to
health. Excess of heat either from increased
metabolism due to physical activity of persons
or gains from a hot environment has to be
offset to maintain normal body temperature
(37C). Heat- exchange of the human body
with respect to the surroundings is determined
by the temperature and humidity gradient
between the skin and the surroundings and
other factors, such as age of persons, clothing,
etc, and the latter depends on air temperature
(dry bulb temperature), relative humidity,
radiation from the solid surroundings and
rate of air movement. The volume of outside
air to be circulated through the room is,
therefore, g o v e r n e d b y t h e p h y s i c a l
considerations ofcontrolling the temperature,
air distribution or air movement. A i r
movement and air distribution may, however,
be achieved by recirculation of the inside air
rather than bringing in all outside air.
However, fresh air supply or the circulated air
will reduce heat stress by dissipating heat from
body by evaporation of the sweat, particularly
when the relative humidity is high and the air
temperature is near body temperature.
5.2.3.1 LIMITS OF COMFORT
AND HEAT
comfort is that
condition of thermal envuonment under
which a person can maintain a bodily heat
balance at normal body temperature and
without perceptible sweating. Limits of
comfort vary considerably according to
studies carried out in India and abroad. In
terms of effective temperature, the upper limit
of comfort may be 27.W for every day work
in industry. This is also the temperature for
most efficient production. Air movement is
T O L E R A NC E
-Thermal
necessary in hot and humid weather for body

cooling. A certain minimum desirable wind
l
Contaminants from concentrated sources, suchasheat,

smoke and fumes shall be collected separately by local
exhuast ventilation.
speed is needed for achievingtherms1 comfort

at different temperatures and relative
humidities. Such wind speeds are given in
Table 7. These are apphcable to sedentary
work in offices and other places having no
noticable sources of heat gain. Where
somewhat warmer conditions are prevalent,
such as in godowns and machine shops and
work is of. lighter intensity, and higher
temperatures can be tolerated without much
discomfort, minimum wind speeds for just
acceptable warm conditions are given in
Table 8; For obtaining values of indoor wind
speed above 2.0 m/s, mechanical means of
ventilation may have to be adopted.
5.2.3.2 There will be a limit of heat tolerance
when air temperatures are excessive and the
degree of physical activity is high. This limit is
determined when the bodily heat balance is
upset, that is, when the bodily heat gain due to
conduction, convection and the radiation
from the surroundings exceeds the bodily heat
loss, which-is mostly by evaporation of sweat
from the surface of the body. The limits of
heat tolerance for Indian workers are based
on the study conducted by the Chief Adviser
Factories, Government of India, Ministry of
Labour and are given in his report on Thermal
Stress in Textile Industry (Report No. 17)
issued in 1956. According to this Report,
where workers in industrial buildings wearing
light clothing are expected to do work of
moderateseverity with theenergy expenditure
in the range 235 to 330 kcal/ h, the maximum
wet bulb temperature shall not exceed 29C
and adequate .air movement subject to a
minimum air velocity of 30 m/min shall be
provided, and in relation to the dry bulb
temperature, the wet bulb temperature of air
in the work room, as far as practicable, shall
not exceed that given in Table 9.
5.3 Methods of Ventilation - General
ventilation involves providing a building with
relatively large quantities of outside air in
order to improve general environment of the
building. This may be achieved in one of the
following ways:
a) natural suply and natural exhuastof air;
b) natural supply and mechanical exhaust of
air;
c) mechanical supply and natural exhuast of
air: and
d) mechanical supplyand mechanical
exhaust of air.
5.3.1 CO NT ROL OF H EAT -Although it is
recognized that general ventilation IS one of
the most effective methods of improving
thermal environmental conditions in
factories, in many situations, the application
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
w4.31
solar radiation fallihg on the roof surfaces,

which, in turn, radiate heat inside the
building. In such situations, insulation of the
roof or providing a false ceiling or double
roofing would be very effective in controlling
heat. Some reduction can also be achieved by
painting the roof in heat reflective shadek.
-oSfventilation should be preceded by and

considered along with some of the following
other methods of coritrol. This would
facilitate better design of buildings for general
ventilation, either natural or mechanical or
both, and also reduce their cost.
5.3.1.1 I S O L A T I O N - SOmetimeS it iS
possible to locate heat producing equipment,
such as furnaces in ,such a. position as would
expose only a small number of workers to hot
environment. As far as practicable, such
sources of heat in factories should be isolated.
Hot surfaces of equipment, such as pipes,

vessels, ctc, in the building should also be
insulated to reduce their surface temperature.
5.3.1.3 SUBSTITUTION - Sometimes, it is
possible to substitute a hot process by a
method that involves application pf localized
or more efficiently contrplled method of
heating. Examples include induction
hardening instead of conventional heat
treatment, cold rivetting or spot welding
instead of hot rivetting, etc.
In situations where ralatively few people are

exposed to severe heat stress and theil
activities are confined to limited areas as in the
case of rolling mill operators and crane
operators, it may be possible to enclose the
work areas and supply conditioned air to such
enclosures.
5.3. I .4 RADIANT SHIELD ING - Hot surfaces.

such as layers of molten metal emanate
radiant heat, which can best be controlled by
5.3.1.2 I N S U L A T I O N - A considerable
portion of heat in many factories is due to the
TABLE 7 DESIRABLE WIND SPEEDS (m/s) FOR THERMAL COMFORT CONDITIONS

(Clauw 5.23.1)
D RY B ULB
T EMPERATURE , OC
RELATIVE
30
&
60
*
10
80
*
0.06
0.53
L
0.24
1.04
0.06
0.53
1.47
0.19
0.85
2.10
t
t
t
t.
50
*
*
0.06
*
0.24
32
0.20
0.46
0.94
I.59
2.26
3.04.
33
0.11
I.85
3.20
1.36
2.72
2.12
3.00
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
28
29
30
31
34
35
40
H UMIDITY (PERCENTAGE )
901
None.
tHigher then those acceptable in practice.
l
TABLE 8 MINIMUM WIND SPEEDS (m,s) FOR JUST ACCEPTABLE WARM CONDITIONS
(C/owe 5.23. I)
RELATIVE HWIDW (PERCENTAGE)
D RY BULR
T EMPERATURE, C
30
40
50
L
60
70
80
30
31
4
28
29
32
33
34
*
0.15
35
36
0.06
0.23
0.24
0.94
0.09
0.60
I.60
0.29
1.04
2.26
0.a
I.85
3.05
0.94
2.10
t
1.36
2. IO
3.05
2.70
*
0.04
0.46
0.68
1.72
90
None.
t Higher then those qcceptubie in predice.
l
VWI-32
NATIONAL BUILDING WOE OF INDIA
TABLE 9 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WET BULB

TEMPERATURES FOR GIVEN DRY BULB
TEMPERATURES
(C&use 5.2J.2)
lhv
BUI.R TEMPERATIIRE
sources, is known and a suitable value for the

allowable temperature rise is assumed, the
volume of outside air to be prqvided for
removing the sensible heat may be calculated
from:
MAXIM~J~~ WET-B~II.H
TF:MPERA.IIIR~
30
29.0
35
28.5
QI= Quantity of air in m3/ h,
28.0
K, = sensible heat gained inW, and
45
27.5
50
27.0
where
t = allowable temperature rise
in C
Nor~ I - These are limits bqyond which the industry

should not allow the thermal conditions to go for more
than I h continuously. Thelimits are based on a series of
studies conducted on Indian subjects in psychrometric
chamber and on other data on heat casualtics in earlier
studies conducted in Kolar Gold Fields and elsewhere.
NOTE 2 - Figures given in this table are not intended to
convey that human efficiency at 50C will remain the
same as at 30C. provided appropriate wet bulb
temperatures are maintained. Efficiency decreases with
rise in the dry bulb temperature for a given wet hulb
temperatyre attained and effortsshould be made to bring
down the dry bulb temperature as wtll. as much as
possible. Long exposures to temperature of SOC dry
bulb;2PC wet bulb may prove dangerous.
of
Nan: 3 - Refrigeration orsome other method

cooling
is recommended in all cases where conditions would be
worse than those shown in this table.
placing a shield having a highly reflecting

surface between the source of heat and the
worker, so that a major portion of the heat
falling on the shield is reflected back to the
source. Surfaces such as of tin and aluminium
have been used as materials for shields. The
efficiency of the shield does not depend onits
thickness, but on the reflectivity and
emissivity of its su.rface. Care should be taken
to see that the shield is not heated up by
condtiction and for this purpose adequate
provision should be made for the free flow
upwards of the heated air between the hot
surface and the shield by leaving the necessary
air space and providing opening at the top and
the bottom of the sides.
5.32 VO L U M E O F A I R R E Q U I R E D - T h e
volume of air required shall be calculated by
using both the sensible heator latent heat gain
as the basis. The larger.of the two figures
obtained should be used in actual practice.
s.J.2.!
VOLUME OF AIR REQUIRED FOR

R E M O V I N G S E N S I B L E H E A T - When the
amount of sedsibk heat given off by different

sources, namely, the sun, the manufacturing
processes, machinery, occupants and other
?Alf WI BWl.Dl~C
SERtiCcs-SECllDN
I l.lCHTlNC
A N D
3.3.2.2 temperature rise refers mainly to the

difference between the air temperatures at the
outlet (roof exit) and at the inlet openings for
outside air. As very little data exist on
allowable temperature, rise values for
supply of outside air in summer months, the
values given in Table 10 related to industrial
buildings may be used ior general guidance.
T A B L E I O A L L O W A B L E 7EMPERATlJRE RISE
VAl.IJES
lCMIFRA1 UHF R~srHEIGHT ok OUTLET OPI-NIUC;
m
6
3 to 4.5
4.5 to 6.5
12
6.5 IO
II
NOTE I --The conditions are limlterl to light or medium

heavy manufacturing processes, freedom from radiant
heat and inlet openIn@ not more rhan 3 to 4.5 m above
floor level.
NOTE
2 ---. At the working Tone between floor level and

I.5 m above floor level, the recommended maximum
allowable temperature rise for air is 2 to 3Cabove theaIr
temperature at the inlet openings.
5.3.2.3 VO;.UME
R E M O VING
OF AIR REQUIRED FOR

LA~FNT HEAT -- If the latent. heat
gained from the manufacturing processes and

occupants is also known and a suitable value
for the allowable rise in thevapour pressure is
assumed:
4 127.26X KI
Q2 = -h
where
QI = quantity of air in m/ h
Kt = latent heat gained tn W, and
VENll~AtloN
Vlll-I-33
h = allowable vapour pressure
difference in mm of mercury.
N~IE ---. In majority of the cases. the sensihle heat gain
will far exceed the latent heat eain. so that the amount of
outside air to be drawn by ventila;ing equipment can be
calculated in most cases on the basis of theequation given
In 5.3.2.1.
5.3.2.4 Ventilation is also expressed as m/ h

per mof floor area. This relationaship fails to
evaluate the actual heat.reiief provided by a
ventilation system, but it does give a
relationship which is independent-of building
height. This is a more rational approach,
because, with the same internal load, the same
amount of ventilation air, properly applied to
the work zone with adequate velocity, will
provide the desired heat relief quite
independently of the ceiling height of the
space, with few exceptions. Ventilation rates
of 30 to 60 ml/h per m2 have been found to
give good results in many plants.
5.4 Nafural V e n t i l a t i o n
The rate of
ventilation by natural meanq t h r o u g h
windows or other openings depends on:
direction and velocity of wind outside and

sizes and disposition of openings (wind
action), and
b)
convection effects arising from

tempgrature of vapur pressure difference
(or both) between inside and outside the
room and the difference of height between
the outlet and inlet openings (stack effect).
5.4.1 VE N T I L A T I O N oh NON-I~IDUSI~RIAI.
B UILDINGS - Ventilation in non-industrial
buildings due to stack effect. unless there is a

significant internal load, could be neglected,
except in cold regions, and wmd a&on may
be assumed to be predominant.
5.4.1.1 In hot arid regions, the main problem
in summer is to provide during day protection
from suns heat so as to keep the Indoor
temperature lqwer than those outside under
the sun and for this purpose windows and
other openings are generally kept closed and
only minimum ventilation is provided for the
control of odours or for removal of products
of combustion.
5.4.1.2 In hot humid and warm humid
regions, the problem in the design of nonindustrial buildings is to provide free passage
of air to keep the indoor temperaturesas near
to those outside in the shade as possible, and
for this purpose the buildings are oriented to
face the direction of prevailing winds and
windows and other openings are kept open on
both windward and leeward sides.
5.4.1.3 Adequate number of circulating fans
should be installed to serve all interior
nI-I-34
working areas during summer months in the

hot arid and hot/ warm humid regions to
provide necessary air movement at times
when ventilation due to wind action alone
does not afford sufficient relief.
5.4.1.4 In winter months in cold regions,.the
windows and other openings are generally
kept shut, particularly during night; and
ventilation necessary for the control of odours
and for the removal of products of
combustion can be achieved either by stack
action or by some infilteration of outside air
due to wind action.
5 . 4 . 2 VENTILATI~.)~ OF INDUSTRIAI.
B U I L D I N G S - In providirig n a t u r a l
ventilation of all indus:G: buildings having
significant internal heat loads due to
manufacturing process, proper consideration
should be given to the size.and distribution of
windows and other inlet openings in relation
to outlet openings so as to give, with due
regard to orientation, prevailing winds, size
and configuration of the building and
manufacturing processes carried on,
maximum possible control of thermal
environment.
5.4.2.1 in the case of industrial buildings
wider than 30 m, the ventilaton through
windows may be augmented by roof
ventilation.
5.4.3 G
ENERAL
VENll1 Al ION
5.4.3.1
ULES
FOR
YAT~RAI
BY WIND ACT-ION
a) Inlet openings in the building should

be. well distributed and should be
located on the windward side at a low
level and outlet openings should be
located on the leeward side near the
top, so that incoming air stream is
passed over the occupants. inlet and
outlet openings at high levels may only
clear the top air without producing air
movement at the level of occupancy.
When outlets Serve also as inlets, they
shall be located at the same level.
Maximum air movement at a
particular plane is achieved by keeping
the sill height of the opening at 85
percent of the height of the plane. The
following levels of occupancy are
recommended:
I) For sitting on chair = 0.75 m
2) For sitting on bed
= 0.60 m,
3) For sitting on floor -- 0.40 m.

b) Inlet opening should not, as far as
possible, be obstructed by adjoining
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF IWMA
buildings, trees, signboards or other

obstructions or by partitions inside the
path of air flow.
c) Greatest flow per unit asea of openings
is obtained by using iniet and outlet
openings of nearly equal areas.
For a total area of openings (inlet and
.outlet) of 20 to 30 percent of floor area,
the average indoor wind velocity ib
around 30 percent of outdoor velocity.
Further increase in window size
increases the available velocity but not
in the same proportion. In fact, even
under most favourable conditions the
maximum average, indoor wind
velocity does not exceed 40 percent of
the outdoor velocity.
d) Where the stream of wind is quite
constant and dependable, the openin s
may be readily arranged to take fuf 1
advantage of the wind. Where the wind
direction is quite variable, the
openings shall be so arranged that as
far as possible there is approximately
equal areas on all sides and the
openings shall be located.at the same
levels. Thus; no matter whatthe wind
direction is, there are always some
openings directly exposed to wind
pressure and others to air suction and
effective lnovement through building
is assured.
&l-t - For data on outdoor wind speeds at a place,
rrierence may be made to Climatological and Solar Data
for Design of Bulldings for Comfort in India, published
by the Central Building Research Instnute, Roorkee.
3.4.3.2 BY S-l A C K E F F E C T - N a t u r a l ventiiation by stack effect occurs when air inside a
building is at a different temperature than air
outside. Thus in heated buildings or in buildings wherein hot processes are carried on and
in ordiriary buildings durmg summer nights
and durmg premonsoon periods, the inside
temperature is higher than that of outside,
cool outside air will tend to enter through
openings at low level and warm Gr will tend to
leave through openir,gs at high level. It would.
therefore. be advaruagcous to provide vcnrilators as close to ceilings as possibie. Ventilators
can also be provided in roofs as, fol example.
cowl. ventpipe. covered roofand ridge vent.
5.5.1
GkNERAL. - Where adequate air

changes speclfied in 5.2.2.1 or for providiug
thermal envil-oruncnt within the limits
specified in Table 9 whichever is higher,
cannot be obtained by natural ventdation,
mechanical ventilation either by exhaust ot air
P A R T
VIII BtJlLDlNC SERVICti-SECTIUN t LICHTINC
AND
or by positive ventilation or a combination of

the two shall be provided; and in case of
positive ventilation where necessary, air
befsie being brought into the area of
occupancy may be cooled by evaporative
cooling or by air-conditioning (see Part VIII
Building services, Secton 3 Air-conditioning
and heating).
521.1 Fans and other equipment for
.mechanical ventiIation may be located in
eonvenient positions having regard to the
intake of fresh air, accessibility for
maintenance and noise control.
5.5.2 EXHAUST OF AIR - Exhaust fans are
provided in walls on one side of the building
or in the attic and roof to draw large volumes
of air through the building. These fans are
usually of propeller type,since they operate
against little or no resistance. It is important
that windows and other openings.near the
fans are kept closed, as otherwise the fans
would draw outside air from these openings
and .cause what is termed as shortcircuiting!
Adequate inlet openings shall be provided on
opposite side of the building so as to limit inlet
velocities.
5.5.2.1 When fans are centrally located on an
attic or other unused space and arranged to
draw proportionately from several areas of
occupation or from exhaust appliances with
duct work, these are predominantly
centrifugal type so as to overcome the
resistance from duct work.
5.5.3 POSITIVE V ENTILATION - Positive
ventilation is provided by centrally located
supply fans which are usually of the
centrifugal type or sometimes axial flow
types, since this application requires duct
work with a wide range of satisfactory and
quiet operation against high pressures.
Considerable advantage may be achieved by
incorporating the ducts and risers with air
discharge outlets into the building structure
and by having the interior surfaces carefully
finished to render them smooth and-airtight
and treated to preveut the possibility of dust
being scoured from the walls by the passing
air.
5.5.3.1 l!nit ventilators may be provided for
individual rooms and may be placed against
outside wall near the central line of the room.
5.5J.2 Both central system and .unit
ventilators could be equipped to provide,
besides the function of ventilating, cooling by
evaporative cooling or by cooling coils.
c+p~cal installations are equipped with a
system of controls that permits ventilating
arrdcooling effect to be varied, while the fans
are crperating continuously, in accordance
with the room requlements.
VENTILATIQN
VIII-I-u
5.5.4 COMBINED S YSTEMS - The combined

systems with positive ventilation and with
exhaust of air have the advantage of providing
better control conditions and better
distribution of air over the entire area of
occupancy, particularly in wider buildings. By
sqpplying sufficient volumes of air i n
proportion to heat load generated in the
respective areas at suitable velocities at the
required areas through duct work and by
extracting the air in the return ducts i n
proportion to the supply air quantities and
recirculating the air or a part of it after
property mixing it with cool fresh air,
completely satisfactory ventilation is
obtained. In a combined system, it is
preferable to provide slight excess of exhaust
if there are adjoining occupied spaces and a
slight excess of supply if there are no such
spaces. IJnit exhausters can also be used to
match unit ventilators exteriors and located
along the outside wail.
55.5 EVAPORATIVE COOLING - In regions
where high day-time temperatures prevail
with reasonably low humidities, evaporative
cooling may be employed effectively to lower
the temperature of the air to near the wet bulb
temperature and produce an air supply cool
enough to take care of the indoor sensible heat
loads without exceeding the upper safe limits
given in Table9 or the temperature risevalues
at area of occupancy given in Table 10. By
positive ventilation, this air may be supplied
to produce cooler environments with lower air
volume than would be required under 5.3.2 as
greater temperature rise than given under
Table10 may be tolerated. Although the
relative humidity of supply air will be
increased, due to the large sensible heat loads,
the resultant relative humidity of the air will
be sufficiently lowered after mixing with the
inside air to produce body cooling.
5.5.5.1 Evaporative coohng with positive

ventilation using a central system consisting
ef a water spray chamber and a fan to supply
outside air into the area of occupancy through
a distribution duct is preferable to spray head
system which will only humidify the air within
space. Where a spray head system only
humidifies the air, the cooling capacity of the
air will be improved very little; and none of the
air which absorbs the heat given off by men
and machinery and other sources is removed
from the building under these conditions.
5.5.6 AIR -C O N D I T I O N I NG -Where the
desired temperatures and humidities cannot
be obtained by mere ventilation, airconditioning may be resorted to (see Part VIII
Building services, Section 3 Air-conditioning
and heating).
5 . 5 . 7 VENT-IL.ATION FOR C O N T A M I N A N T- S
C O N T R O L -- When contaminsnts are given
off during the manufacturing process.
efficient local exhaust ventilation arid 1 or
dilution ventilation to reduce their
concentration below the thrcs??old value
(TLV) shall be provided.
5.5.7. I Recommended capture velocities for
some of the manufacturing processes which
are likely to give rise to the contaminants
depending upon their condition of dispersion,
are given in Table I1 as a guide.
5.5.7.2 MAKE-LIP AIR ~- Sufficient make-up
air shall be brought into the work room by
natural filtration or by positive ventilation at
suitable points in relation to the extiuast
points to replace the air exhausted by local
exhaust ventilation or by dilution ventilation,
and the air may be efficiently filtered or
treated. when necesssary.
TABLE II RANGE OF RECOMMENDED CAPTUREvELCKTIIES

(C1ou.r 5.5.1.1)
SI No
O F DISPEHSIOH
CONlAMhAHT
ONDITION
EXAMPLE\
OF
(4)
(3)
(1)
(2)
Released at with practically no velocity

into quiet air
Evaporalipn from tanks degreasing,
ii)
Released at low v&city into moderately

rtill air
Spray booths; intermittent container

filling low speed conveyor transfers; welding plating pickling
0.5-I .o
iii)
Active generation into zone of rapid air
Spray painting in shallow booths;

barrel filing; conveyor loading.
crushers
1.0-2.5
Giinding ahrasive blasting, tumbling
2.5-10
motion
iv)
Released at high initial velocity into zoneof very rapid air motion
ms
0.25-0.5
CtC
-_ __V,*l.,.36
NATIIX~~ BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
5.5.7.3 Detailed design of local exhaust

ventilation and dilution ventilation shall
bedone in accordance with good practice
[VIII-l(6)].
bawd on 0.65 cffectivutur of

openings. This should be reduced toO.SOifconditionsarc
not favourable.
Non -The equation is
5.6.Z.3 When areas of inlet and outlet

opening are.unqual, A given in equationi
under 5.6.1.1 and 5.6.1.2 wiil be the smaller
area and the volume of air will be increased
according to the percentage given in Fig. 3.
5.6 Determining Rate of Ventiiatioon

5.6.1 ~~ATURALVENTILATION - This is
diffk@t to measure as it varies from-time to
time. The amount of outside air through
windows and other openings depends on the
direction and velocity of wind outside (wind
action) and/or convection effects arising from
-temperature or vapour pressure differences
(or both) between inside and outside of the
building (stack effect).
5.6. I. I WIND ACTlON - For determining the
rate of ventilation based on wind a.ction the
wind may -be assumed to come ,from any
direction. within 45 of the direction of
prevailing wind. Ventilation due to external
wind is. given by the following formula:
RATIO OF OUTl.ET TO INLET OR VICE-VERSA
Q= K A V
(Reprmted by permission from Ashrae Guide and Data

Book 1963)
where
Fig. 3
Q = the rate of air flow in m/.h;

K = coefficient) of effectiveness, which
may be taken as 0.5 for wind
perpendicular to openings and 0.3
for wind at an angle less than 45 to
the openings;
A = free area of inlet openings in m;
and
v = wind speed in m/h.
N OTE 1 --The value of the coefficient of effectiveness K
depends on the directIon of the wind relative to t h e
opening and on the ratio between the areas of two

openings. Figure 3 gives the increase in values of K by the
percentage of unequal areas expressr.d as ratios of the two
openings.
N O T E 2 -For wind data at a place, the local

Meteorological Department may be consulted.
STACK EFFECT .Ventilation due to
convection effects arising from temperature
difference between inside and outside is given
by:
5.6.1.2
Q = 7.0 Ad h (tr-to)
where
Q = the rate of air flow in m/ h;
A = free area of inlet openings in m*;
h = vertical distance between inlets and
outlets in m;
tr = average temperature of indoor air at
height h, in C; and
f0 = temperature of outdoor air in C.
P A R T VW IUILDING SERVI(W=-SECTION
I.IGHtlNC
&crease in Fiow Caused by Excess of

one Opening over Another
5.6.1.4 When both forces (wind and thermal)
act together in the same direction, even

without interference, the resulting air flow is
not equal to the two flows estimated
separately. Flow through any opening is
probortional to the square root of the sum of
the two heads acting on that opening.
Wind velocity and direction, outdoor
temperature, and indoor distribution can not
be predicted with certainty, and refinement in
calculation is not justified. A simple method is
to calculate the sum of the flows produced by
each force separately. Then using the ratio of
the flow produced by thermal forces to the
aforementioned sum, the actual flow due to
the combined forces can be approximated
from Fig. 4. When the two flows are equal, the
actual flow is about 30 percent greater than
the flow caused by either force acting
independently (see Fig. 4)
Judgemerit is necessary for proper location of
openings in a building specially in the roof,
where heat, smoke and fumes are to be
removed. Usually windward monitor
openings stiould be closed, but if wind is so
slight that temperature head can overcome it,
all openings may be opened.
5.6.1.5 For method for determining the rate
of ventilation based on probable indooi wind
speed with typical illustrative example for
residential building, reference may be made to
accepted standards [see A-4 ofVIII-l(7)].
AtiD vENTIt,ATION
37
vm.1.
where
Q = volume of air in m/h,
A = free area of inlet openings OF ducts
in m, a n d
&__ _
P= average velocity of air in m/h.
5.6.2.2 When ventilation is achieved only by
exhuast of air, the volume of exhaust air shall
be measured in thesame manner as in the case
of positive ventilation by measurement of air
velocity and area ofexhuast ducts or openings
and multiplying one with the other.
U
2U
40
ho
80
100
F-LOW WI IO IEMIFWAILIHE
D,FFFKFNCL A4 IFK(Elril Ot- TO1 At
(Reprinted by permission from Ashrae Guide and Data

Book 1963
I Fig. 4 Determination .qf Flow Caused b.v

Combined Forces of Wind and
Temperature D#vetw
~7~6.3 CO M B I N E D EFFECT
M
ETHODS
OF
OF D I F F E R E N T
ENTILATION - When
combination of two or more methods of

general ventilation is
used, the total rate of
shall be reckoned as the highest of

the following three. and this rule shall be
followed until an exact formula is established
by research:
ventilation
a) !.25 t i m e s t h e r a t e o f n a t u r a l
ventilation (see 5.6.1)
5.6.2 M E C H A N I C A L VENTILATION
5.6.2.1 The volume of outside air by positive
ventilation shall be measured using proper

instruments, such as properly calibrated
anemometer, velocity meter and pitot tube.
To measure the average velocity of air flow, it
is necessary to make a traverse of the
instrument over the cross-sectional area of the
inlet openings or ducts and obtain the average
velocity from these results. The volume of air
is given by:
Q= Ati
nt-t-38
b)
Rate of positive ventilation (see 5.6.1.0,

and
4 Rate of exhast of air (see 5.6.2.2)

O V E M E N T -The rate ot air
movement of turbulent type at the working
zone shall be measured either with a Kata
thermometer {dry silvered type) or heated
t h e r m o m e t e r o r p r o p e r l y ,calibrated
thermocoup.le a n e m o m e t e r . W h e r e a s
anemometer gives the air velocity directly, the
Kata thermometer and heated thermometer
eive cno\ing p?:ver of air and the rate :.r 3;~
Iro\rmlXnt 1s found b; rcfcrznce to a suitable
nomogram using the ambient temperature.
5 . 6 . 4 A IR M
NATIONAL lUlLDiNG
CODE OF INDIA
APPENDIX A
(C/awes 4.2.5, 4.2.5.2. 4.2.S.3 and 4.2.5.4)
SKY COMPONENT TABLES
A-/. DESCRIPTION OF TABLES
A-I.1 The three sky component tables are as
given below:
Table 12 Percentage sky components
on the horizontal plane due to
a vertical rectangular opening
for the clear design sky.
opening on a line perpendicular to the plane of

the opening through one of its lower corners,
a n d I and h are the width and height
respectively of the rectangular opening (see
Fig. 5).
+--l------I
I

the vertical plane
ze:pendicular to a vertical
rectangular opening for the
clear design sky.
on the vertical plane parallel
to a vertical rectangular
opening for the clear design
sky.
A-l.2 All the tables are for an unglazed
opening illuminated by the clear design sky.
A-l.3 The values tabulated are the
components at a point P distant from the
?ART Vlll
LA
-Ih
El
0
/\
A-l.4 Sky component for different h/J and

/!.d values are tabulated, that is, for windows
of different size and for different distances of
the point P from the window.
A-13 By suitable combination of the values
obtained ft-om the three tables, for a given
point for a given window, the sky component
in any plane passing through the point may be
obtained.
LWDINC SERVICES-SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTliATlON
vlll-*-39
TABLE
I 2 PCK(ENlA(rt SKI COMPO\l.WS OX 1 HE HOKIZONTAL P L A N E DlE -10 A VERTICLE

1 HE CLEAR DESIGN. SKY
RECTANGULAR
OPENING
FOR
(clause A-l..0
IId
0. I
02
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
I.0
I.1
0.036
0.07 I
0.104
0 i33
0.158
0.179
0.198
0.213
0.225
0.235
I.2
1.3
0.243
0.250
0.256
0.918
0.950
0.977
0.999
I.976
2.048
2.108
2.157
3.361
3.446
4.553
4.659
h/d
\
0. I
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.141
0.300
0.460
0.277
0.589
0.403
0.859
0.905
1.322
0.516
I.102
1.702
0.614
I.315
2.04 I
0.699
1.499
2.337
0 770
I .653
0.82V
1.782
0.878
I .888
2.590
2.804
2.984
3.134
3.258
3.992
4.204
3.383
0.5
0.604
I.189
I.741
2.247
2.700
3.099
3.444
3.740
0.6
0.732
1.443
2. I14
2.732
3.289
3.781
4.211
4.582
4.900
5.171
5.401
5.5%
5.761
1.665
2.44 I
3. I59
3.808
4.385
4.89 I
5.330
5.708
6.034
6.31 I
6.548
6.751
0.7
0.844
0.8
0.942
I.858
2.727
3.532
4.262
4.914
5.488
5.989
6.423
6.798
7.119
7.395
7.632
0.9
I.026
2.025
2.974
3.855
4.657
5.375
6.01 I
6.567
7.05 I
7.470
7.832
8. I44
8.413
9.102
I.0
1.099
2.169
3.188
4. I35
5.000
5.776
6.465
7.071
7.600
8.060
8.458
8.803
I.1
I.161
2.294
3.372
4.377
5.296
6.124
6.86 I
7.510
8.079
8.576
9.008
9.383
9.709
I.2
I.215
2.401
3.531
4.586
5.553
6.425
7.204
7.893
8.498
9.027
9.489
9.892
10.243
1.3
1.262
2.493
3.668
4.767
5.775
6.687
7.503
8.226
8.863
9.422
9.912
10.339
10.713
1.4
1.302
2.573
3.787
4.924
5.968
6.915
7.764
8.517
9.183
9.769
10.283
10.733
Il.127
I.5
1.337
2.643
3.89 I
5.060
6.136
7.114
7.991
8.772
9.664
10.073
10.609
11.080
ll.49j
1.6
I .267
2.703
3.981
5.179
6.283
7.287
8.190
8.996
9.710
IO.341
10.897
I 1,386
I I.817
1.7
1.394
2.756
4.060
5.283
6.412
7.440
8.366
9.192
9.927
10.577
Il.151
Il.657
12.104
1.8
I.417
2.803
4.129
5.375
6.526
7.574
8.520
9.366
IO.119
10.786
Il.376
Il.898
12.359
1.9
I.438
2.844
4.190
5.4%
6.626
7.693
8.656
9.520
10.289
10.972
Il.577
12.1 I2
12.587
2.0
I.456
2.880
4.244
5.527
6.714
7.798
8.778
9.656
10.440
I I.137
II.755
12.303
12.789
3.0
1.559
3.087
4.553
5.937
7.223
8.403
9.478
10.448
Il.321
12.103
12.804
13.431
13.993
4.0
1.600
3.168
4.676
6.100
7.426
8.646
9.759
10.768
I I.678
12.498
13.235
13.897
14.493
5.0
I .620
3.208
4.735
6. I79
5.525
8.765
9.897
10.925
I I.854
12.693
13.448
14.128
14.742
10.0
1.648
3.263
4.818
6.289
7.662
8.930
10.089
II.144
12.100
12.965
13.747
14.454
I5.W
INF
1.657
3.282
4.846
6.327
7.710
8.986
IO. I55
I I.220
12.186
I3.Oul
13.&Sl
14.587
15.217
Iid
T.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
0.261
I.018
2.197
0.264
I .033
0.268
I .(#6
2.231
2.259
3.516
3.574
4.853
3.623
4.928
6.020
I.8
1.9
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
IO.0
INF
0.270
0.272
0.274
I .056
2.282
I .065
2.302
I .072
0.276
I .079
0.284
I.110
0.286
I.118
0.287
1.122
0.288
t.125
2.42 t
3.699
2.333
3.753
2.401
3.664
2.318
3.728
3.873
3.909
2.429
3.922
0.288
I.125
2.436
4.990
6.208
7.307
5.043
6.28 I
5.088
5.126
6.121
7.198
6.397
7.551
5.312
6.661
7.902
5.366
6.739
5.387
6.769
8.162
9.019
8.292
9.170
8.405
9301
6.344
7.48 I
8.502
8.047
9.217
9.780
to.454
9.950
10.642
11.254
Il.797
IO.098
IO.806
Il.434
8.006
9.164
to.214
I I. 162
hf
\
0.t
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
5.901
6.924
0.8
0.9
7.836
8.645
I.0
1.1
9.361
9.992
1.2
10.549
Il.040
I t .473
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
I.8
4.765
t t .857
12.1%
t 2.498
7.071
8.01 I
8.846
9.5li5
10.239
IO.816
It.326
Il.777
12.176
12.531
12.846
13.127
I.9
12.766
13.006
2.0
3.0
13.220
14.4%
t 3.603
14.947
4.0
5.0
15.030
15.296
15.674
15.514
t 5.798
to.0
tNF
15.806
13.378
16.201
16.342
11.050
Il.577
12.044
12.458
12.826
13. I54
13.446
12.279
12.707
13.088
13.427
13.708
13.943
13.730
14.002
14.246
15.353
15.951
15.718
16.347
16.252
l6.&
16.831
16.664
17.118
17.278
7.400
II.992
12.487
12.927
13.319
13.669
13.983
14.264
14.516
9.415
10.228
IO.951
Il.593
8.587
9.515
10.343
I I.078
Il.732
9.029
10.045
10.957
t 1.776
12.314
12.509
13.167
t 2.8j3
t 3.295
t3.75lj
14.289
14.768
l5.W
14.208
14.498
14.758
13.708
14.078
14.409
14.707
14.975
18.3Ot
19.241
12. I63
12.670
13.122
13.525
13.885
16.048
16.706
17.040
16.346
16.676
17.033
17.382
17.330
17.518
I7.6mU
17.885
18.064
17.695
18.222
18.410
12.017
12.786
13.478
14. to2
14.666
15.176
t 5.638
2.437
3.937
5.410
6.798
6.802
i.087
8.092
9.276
to.280
tt.243
i2. t I4
9.268
to.345
10.355
t t 323
t I.335
12.209
12.900
13.609
13.013
13.742
12.224
13.030
14.251
14.832
14.404
15.359
t 5.838
16.790
19.051
16.274
16.673
t 7.037
19.432
19.740
20.142
20.740
rn.623
21.293
20.491
m.770
21.681
22.046
22.390
22.838
15.590
15.944
16.265
16.058
16.441
3.935
5.408
15.006
l5.US
13.762
14.427
15.033
15.585
16.056
16.516
16.937
16.091
16.554
16.980
17.325
19.943
21.322
t 7.372
m.046
21.495
22.148
23.676
22.393
24.238
26. t I I
24.463
TABLE I3 PERCENTAGE SKY COMPONENTS ON THE VERTICAL PLANE PERPENDICULAR TO A VERTICAL RECTANGULAR OPENING FOR THE
CLEAR DESIGN SKY
(Clause .4-/J)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
I.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
i.4
I.J
1.6
I.7
1.8
I.9
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
0. I
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.036
0.141
0.277
0.401
0.491
0.303
0.594
0.863
I .059
I.197
I.298
1.372
I.429
0.506
0.993
I .445
1.779
0.734
I .442
0.971
1.910
2.793
I.207
2 314
O.Oil
0.103
0.126
0.142
0.154
0.162
0.169
0.174
0.178
obl8l
0. I83
O.lSj
0.186
0.188
0.189
til89
0.554.
0.600
0.634
0.660
0.680
0.695
0.707
0.716
1.582
1.592
2.626
2.655
2.678
2.697
I.601
1.608
2.712
2.724
I.614
I.619
2.735
2.743
1.623
1.642
1.648
2.751
2.785
2.794
0.761
I.650
I .652
2.798
2.801
0.161
1.652
2.802
0.723
0.729
0.734
0. I90
0.738
0.741
0.744
0.191
0.191
0.746
0.748
0.193
0.194
O.-l%
0.759
0.760
IO.0
0. I94
0.194
MP
0.194
I .472
1.505
1.532
2.015
2.187
2.316
2.413
2.487
2.545
2.591
1.552
1.568
2.100
2.597
2.947
3.204
3.397
3.543
3.655
3.743
3.812
3.866
3.910
3.945
3.973
3.996
3.460
3.937
4.288
4.552
4.754
4.909
5.030
5.126
5.202
5.263
3.475
4.326
4.938
5.389
5.729
5.990
6.192
6.350
6.475
6.575
6.655
0.8
0.9
1.0
I.1
1.2
I.432
I.643
3.236
4.743
5.958
6.842
7.498
7.997
2.836
3.618
I.011
3.964
5.3%
6.691
7.707
8.464
9.W2
9.490
9.841
5.818
7.359
2.166
4.276
6.279
7.467
8.503
9.358
10.013
10.523
10.924
9.22%
IO.177
10.907
I I .476
I I .926
II.243
Il.498
lJ.705
12.264
12.573
2.820
4 180
5.166
5.514
6468
6.887
7.209
7.46d
7.657
7.814
7.939
8.382
8.683
6.921
9.110
9.26I
8.040
8.122
8.189
9.384
9.484
9.566
9.634
9.690
9.737
9.777
5.312
5.352
3.385
5.412
6.720
6.773
6.816
6.852
6.882
4.045
4.056
5.434
5.453
5.469
8.244
8.290
8.328
6908
6.929
8.360
8.387
4.109
4.124
4.129
5.566
5.574
7.030
7.058
7.069
8.517
8.54
5.58 I
5.582
7.080
7.061
4.016
4.032
4.135
4.136
5.544
8.568
8.582
a.584
9.81 I
9.972
10.018
IO.036
10.053
10.0%
10.120
10.342
IO.521
10.666
10.785
10.883
11.873
12.01 I
12.124
IO.963
II.031
12.219
12.298
II.087
Ii.135
II.175
II.371
I2364
12.420
Il.427
I I;449
I.470
Il.473
12.807
12.998
13.155
13.285
l3.3$
13.484
13.5661
12.468
13.625
13.690
12.699
12.767
13.950
14029
12.793
12.818
14.060
l4.@M
14.ms
l2.822
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
1.5
1.6
I.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
10.0
INF
2308
IS54
&690
8.507
9.883
10.922
II.723
. I2350
12847
13.245
13.5%
13.827
14.041
14.217
14.364
14.486
14.589
14.675
14.749
14.81 I
l5.lm
15.212
IS.248
15.283
IS.288
2433
4.802
7.0%
8.900
IO.472
11.5%
12465
13.147
13.690
14.126
14.478
14.766
15.003
15.1%
I5.36I
I 5.497
15.51 I
IS.708
15.791
15.861
16.21 I
16.316
16.357
16.398
l6.404
2544
5.022
7.385
9.420
10.999
12.204
13.138
13.873
14.459
14.931
15.314
15.628
15.887
16. IO1
16.280
16.430
16.556
16.663
16.755
16.833
17.224
17.343
17.390
17.436
17.443
2.642
5.219
7.677
9.801
II.476
Iii52
13.746
14.531
III59
15.666
16.079
16.418
16.698
16.931
17.125
17.289
17.427
17.545
17.645
17.731
18.164
18.298
18.351
l8.4oj
18.41 I
2.730
5.393
7.936
IO. 146
II.897
13.244
14.296
15.129
li.7%
16.337
16.778
17.141
17.442
17.692
17.902
18.079
18.229
18.357
18.466
18.560
19.036
19.185
19.243
19.302
19.311
2.808
2878
2.940
5.812
5.549
5.688
8.14
8.375
8.560
IO.451
IO.724
10.968
12.273
12.610
12.912
13.686
l4.on4
14.441
14.793
15.241
15.646
15.670
16.161
16.606
16.375
16.902
17.381
16.948
17.504
18.012
17.999
17.416
18.531
17.802
18.407
l8..%l
li. 123
18.747
19.320
19.032
18.391
19.621
19.272
18.616
19.875
19.475 20.090
18.806
18.968
19.648
20.274
19.795
IQ. I05
20.43 I
IQ.224
19.922
20.567
IT.325
20.031 20.684
Pp44
20.5w
21.289
ZQ.008
20.772
21.483
m.073 2 0 . 8 4 4
21.562
20.138
20.917
21.641
20.148
20.928
21.654
3.309
3.5%
3.641
3.461
7.211
6.547
6.85b
7.000
10.335
10.651
9.657
10.110
13.743
13.323
12.421
13.024
16.360
14.712
15.835
15.462
17.924
III.552
16.583
17.478
19.665
20.397
18.111
19.148
21.127
21.961
19.361
m.538
23.397
20.387
21.701 22.360
23.408 24.446
22.6&o
21.237
24.303
21.946
25.441
23.508
25.072
26.309
22.543 24.208
25.735
2X070
23.049
24.809
26.308
27.441
23.480
25.326
26.808
28.336
23.850
25.772
24.169
26.161
27.245
28.866
24.444
2 7 . 6 2 9 2i.340
26.501
27.%9
29.765
24.684
26.799
24.893
21.062
28.270
30.149
28.537
30.4%
25.077
27.294
30.108
32.676
26.082
28.619
30.745
26.439
29.128
33.687
31.049
26.592
29.359
34.232
31.419
29.624
35.049
26.758
26.785
29.672
31.490
35.274
3.6'1)
j.284
IO.160
13.889
16.542
18.771
26.653
22.253
ti.625
24.810
25.841
26.74s
27.542
28.M
2Jl.880
29.44s
29.955
30.&b
30.835
31.217
32.742
35.064
35.872
37.513
39.172
TABLE I4 PERCENTAGE SKY COMPONENTS ON THE VERTICAL PLANE PARALLEL TO A VERTICLE RECTANGULAR OPENING FOR THE CLEAR
DESIGN SKY
(Clause A-1.5)
lid
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
I.0
I.1
1.2
I.3
0.728
1.429
2.068
2.529
1.429
2.803
4.061
4.970
2.078
4.007
2.600
5.221
7.580
9.312
10.529
Il.415
12.074
12.573
3.167
6.220
9.040
II.133
12.606
13.681
14.482
3.660
7.073
10.28s
12.707
3.964
7.790
4.265
8.385
12.212
15.164
17.256
18.793
19.949
4.513
8.876
12.934
16.097
18.350
20.008
21.257
4.717
9.278
13.528
16.870
19.262
21.027
4.083
9.609
14.016
17.507
20.02I
21.879
23.285
5.m
9.880
14.417
18.025
5.132
IO. I03
14.747
20.830
21.511
22.043
22.462
22.212
22.952
23.531
23.989
22.795
23.062
23.278
24.353
24.b5b
24.884
23.454
23.599
25.077
25.236
25.368
h/d
\
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
I.1
I.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
I.6
I.7
2.852
3.086
3.259
3.389
3.489
3.565
3.625
3.872
3.709
3.739
3.763
3.783
I.8
3.799
3.812
1.9
2.0
3.824
3.833
3.0
4.0
3.876
3.888
5.0
IO.0
3.893
3.897
INF
3.898
5.608
6.Orn
6.413
6.672
5.913
7.249
8.186
8.867
9.373
9.755
6.869
7.024
7.139
10.046
10.272
10.447
7.233
7.307
IO.586
10.696
10.784
7.366
7.414
7.453
7.485
10.856
10.914
IO.962
7.512
7.534
ll.ao2
I I.035
7.553
7.639
7.663
II.062
II.192
7.672
7.681
7.682
II.228
I I.241
12.955
13.250
13.481
13.663
13.807
13.924
14.018
14.095
14.158
14.21 I
14.254
14.291
14.463
14.511
14.529
I I.254
Ii.546
Il.256
44.548
IS.090
15.556
15.917
16.200
16.423
16.602
16.745
16.861
16.9%
17.034
17.099
17.153
14.401
IS.656
16.588
Il.296
17.840
18.263
18.594
18.857
19.067
19.236
19.373
19.485
19.578
11.337
14.042
IS.952
I7 353
18.402
19.201
19.817
20.297
20.674
20.973
21.213
21.406
21.563
21.692
21.798
19.655
19.719
19.773
21.960
22.022
17.471
17.494
20.027
20.098
20. I25
22.316
22.398
22.430
17.515
17.518
20.150
20. I54
22.459
22.464
17.199
17.412
21.886
23.718
23.817
23.900
23.970
24.302
24.398
24.432
24.466
24.471
25.478
25.570
25.647
26.016
26.121
26.161
26.199
26.205
22.359
23.380
24. I73
24.795
25.288
25.681
25.998
26.255
26.465
26.638
26.781
24.365
25.206
25.866
26.391
26.8 IO
27.148
27.424
27.649
26.900
27.001
27.835
27.989
28.1 I8
28.226
27.086
27.491
28.318
28.757
27.6%
27.650
27.693
28.884
28.932
28.978
27.699
28.985
20.652
22.592
24.%3
25.195
26.078
26.773
27.326
27.770
28.128
28.420
28.6ul
28.857
29.022
18.458
21.177
23. I89
24.716
25.895
26.816
27.542
28.121
28.587
28.%3
29.271
29.523
29.732
29.276
29.374
29.1906
30.~52
30.175
31.279
29.846
29.983
30.930
29.160
30.035
30.085
30.093
30.783
30.986
31.041
31.049.
0.1
5.225
0.2
10,286
t 5.020
18.8 I6
21.613
5.301
10.439
5.365
10.565
5.418
10.671
15.246
19.1 t3
21.978
15.434
19.360
15.591
23.689
25.267
26.486
24. to9
25.73 t
26.987
27.441
28.196
28.798
27.972
28.572
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
29.283
29.676
29.998
30.262
1.6
1.7
1.8
30.482
30.665
1.9
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
to.0
INF
30.8 I8
30.94Ft
31.058
31.592
31.748
31.808
31.867
31.876
29.375
29.818
30.286
30.621
30.897
31.226
31.317
31.477
31.613
31.728
32.29 t
32.457
32.521
32.584
32.593
22.275
24.462
26. t 24
27.412
28.424
29.226
29.,869
30.388
30.8 to
31.157
31.443
31.680
31.879
32.046
32. t 88
5.463
5.501
10.760
15.724
10.835
15.836
19.568
22.538
24.761
26.458
19.742
22.746
19.890
22.923
25.229
26.984
27.775
28.810
28.084
29.141
29.633
30.293
30.826
31.261
31.618
31.914
29.982
32.160
32.366
32.539
32.686
33.074
33.142
32.8 t I
33.427
33.61 I
33.683
33.208
33.218
33.753
33.764
32.308
32.898
25.014
26.742
30.658
31.204
31.651
32.018
32.322
32.575
32.888
32.967
33. I I9
33.249
33.889
34.082
34.157
34.231
34.243
28.350
29.426
30.283
30.973
31.532
31.989
32.365
32.677
32.937
33. t56
33:340
33.497
33.631
34.294
34.496
34.574
34.652
34.w
5.533
10.899
15.931
20.015
5.687
I I.207
16.390
20.624
23.082
25.412
27.192
23.836
26.229
28.214
28.578
29.672
29.720
30.927
31.889
30.544
31.246
31.816
32.283
32.667
32.986
33.253
33.477
33.666
33.828
33.965
32.670
33.309
33.836
34.374
34.641
34.950
35.21 I
35.435
35.626
34.551
.34.8bO
34.943
35.791
36.640
36.915
37.028
35.024
35.037
37.144
37.162
5.733
5.749
Il.296
16.523
I I .330
16.574
20.868
20.801
24.056
26.561
28.517
30.065
31.303
32.302
33. I I7
33.796
34.350
34.813
35.202
35:532
35.812
36.052
24.140
26.662
28.634
30.198 ,
31.451
32.467
33.297
33.981
34.550
35.035
35.436
35.776
36.067
36.316
35.259
36.438
37.380
37.699
37.834
37.978
36.532
36.7 19
37.715
38.063
38.214
38.382
38.003
38.4 t I
5.765
Il.362
5.766
Il.365
16.623
20.933
24.222
26.759
lb.627
20.939
24.229
26.768
28.748
XI.327
3115%
28.758
30.339
32.627
32643
33.49 t
33.473
34.173
34.756.
35.247
35.663
36.017
36.321
36.5Li4
36.812
37.01 I
31.610
34.193
34.779
3s.n t
35.689
36M6
36.352
36.617
36.847
38.107
38.510
38.696
37.048
38.157
38.579
38.78 i
38.927
38.978
39.057
39. t 72
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as goud practice and
accepted standardr in the fulfirment of the requirements of the Co&. The latest version of a
standardshall be adopted UI the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the rejerred clauses in the
code.
In the following list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number {f the refirence in this part/section
(I)
IS : 7662 (Part I)-1974 Kecommendations for orientation of buildings: Part I

Non-industrial buildings
(2)
IS:3646 (Part I)-1966 Code of paractice

for interior illumination: Part I Principles
of good lighting and aspects of design
(3)
5)

library lighting
hospital lighting
IS : 2440-1975 Guide for daylighting of

butldings (second revision)
IS:6665-I972 Code of practice lor

industrial lighting
(6)

industrial ventilation (first revi.k.m)
(7)

natural ventilation 01 residential
buildings first revision)
daylighting of factory buildings

daylighing of educational buildings
IS: 1944 (Parts I and ll)-1970 Code of

practice for lighting of public
thoroughfares virst revision)
NRIIDNAL
IllilLDiNCi
CIJDE
OF
IYDIA

SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
1. SCOPE
..
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
...
4. PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATlONS
...
7
IO
5. DISTRIBUTlON OF SUPPLY AND CARLEING

6. WIRING
...
16
7. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
...
27
30
8. EARTHING
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF INSTAI,LATIONS
10. TELECOMMUNICATION AND OTHER MISCEL.LANEC)IJS
SERVICES
II. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF RIJILDINGS
...
31
..,
35
...
36
APPENDIXA
ARCH1TECTURA.L SYMROLS FOR EL,ECTRlCAL.

INSTALLATIONS
...
42
APPENDIXB
EXTRACTS FROM INDIAN ELECTRICITY

RULES, 1956
...
45
APPENDIXC
. . . 50
?ART VIII BIWDINT. S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 EI.FCTRICAI
IYST4i.i 4110Ns
\!ll-2-
-PART VIII BLIILDING S E R V I C E S

SECTlON 2 ELECTRICAL INSTAL,1~ATIONS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers essential requirements for electrical installations in buildings.
0.2 This section was first published in 1970. It is now revised to up-date the provisions and to bring
it in line with the latest version of Indian Standards on which it was based..This section now includes
general guidance for electrical wiring installations in industrial locations where voltage supply
normally exceeds 650 volts.
0.3 The importance of preplanning and exchange of information among all concerned agencies
from the earlier stages of the building work has been emphasized. This section has to be read
together with Part VIII Building services. Section 1 Lighting and ventilation for making provision
for the desired levels of illumination as well as ventilation for the different locations in different
occupancies.
0.4 Utmost importance should be given in the installation of electrical wiring to prevent short
circuiting and the hazards associated therewith.
0.5 The information contained in this section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS : 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations:
IS : 732 (Part l&1982: Part I Definitions and general requirements (second revision)
IS : 732 (Part I&1982: Part II Design and construction (second revision)
IS :732 (Part III)-1982: Part III Inspection and testing of installations (secondrevision).
IS : 2032 (Part X1)-1969: Graphical symbols used in electrotechnology: Part XI
Electrical installations in buildings (architectural symbois).
IS : 4648-1968 Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings.
VIII-2.
1. SCOPE
C A B L E, POLYTHENE-INSULATED -A cable
which the insulation of the conductor or
conductors is a polythene compound.
in
1.1 This section covers the essential

requirements for electrical installations in
buildings to ensure efficient use of electricity
including safety from fire and shock. This
section also includes general requirements
relating to lightning protection of buildings.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, fhe
ACCESSORY - Any device, associated with
the wiring and electrical appliance of an
installation, for example. a switch, a fuse, a
plug, a socket-outlet, a lamp-holder, or a
ceiling rose.
A PPARATUS - Electrical apparat-us
including all machines, appliances and fittings
in which conductors are used or of which they
form a part.
APPLIANCE - An energy-consuming device
or equipment (other than a lamp) fixed or
portable, in which the electrical energy is
converted into light, heat, motion or any other
form of energy or substantially changed in its
electrical character.
BUNCHED -- Cables are said to he.bunched
when two or more are contained within a
single conduit, duct, or groove or, if not
enclosed, are not separated from each other.
C ABLE - A length of single-insulated
conductor (solid or stranded), or two or more
such conductors, each provided with its own
insulation, which are laid up together. The
insulated conductor or conductors may or
may not be provided with an overall
mechanical protective covering.
CABLE ARMOURED -A cable provided with
a wrapping of metal (usually in the form of tape
or wire) serving as a mechanical protection.
CABLE. FLEXIBLE - A cable containing one
or more cores, each formed of a grou of
wires, the diameters of the cores and oP the
wires being sufficiently small to afford
flexibility.
CANE, PVC-INSULATED - A.cabie in which

the insulation of the conductor is a
,polyvinylchloride compound.
CABLE , PVC-SHEATHED - A cable in which
mechanical protection is provided for the core
or cores by a sheath of a polyvinylchloride
compound.
CABLE, TOUGH RUBBER -SHEATHED (CABLE,
TRS) - An insulated cable consisting of one
or more vulcanized insulated cores
surrounded by a close-fitting rubber sheath.
CABLE-WHEATHERPROOF -A c a b l e S O
constructed that when installed in uncovered
locations, it will withstand all kinds of
weather variations.
CIKGUIT -- An
arrangement of conductor or
conductors for the purpose of conveying
energy and forming a system or a branch of a
system.
CIRCLJIT BR E A K E R-A device, capble of
making and breaking the circuit under all
conditions, and unless otherwise specified, so
designed as to break the current automatically
under abnormal conditions.
C IRCUIT F I N A L, SUB-An outgoing circuit
connected to one-way distribution fuseboard
and intended to supply electrical energy at
one or more points to current, using
appliances without the intervention of a
further distribution fuse board other than a
one-way board. It includes all branches and
extensions derived from that particular way in
the board.
C LEAT - An insulated incombustible

support normally used for insulated cable.
C ONDUCTOR , AERIAL - Any conductor
which is supported by insulators above the
ground and is directly exposed to the weather.
NOTE - Four classes of aerial conductors arc recopizcd:
a) Bare aerial conductors,
h) Covered aerial conductors,
CABLE, LEAD-COVERED - A cable provided

with ii lead sheath for the purpose of
excluding moisture from the conductors and
insulation thereof; such sheath consisting
either of commercially pure lead or,
alternatively, of pure lead to which a small
percentage of rare metals has hcen added for
hardening purposts.
c) Insulated aerial conductors, and
CABLE, METAL-SHEATHED - An insulated

able with a metal sheath.
CONDUCTOR, INSULATED - A conductor

adequately covered with insulating n$aterial
PART VIII l~lLDlNC
SERVICES-SECTlOW
ELCClWCAt.
d) Weatherproof neutral-screened cable.
C O N DUCTOR, B A R E- A conductor not

covered with insulating material.
CONiXJCTOR,'hRTHED- A conductorwith
no provision for its insulation from earth.
INS~ALLAWJNS
VIII-2-
of such quality and thickness as to prevent

danger.
C~NBUCTOR QF A C ABLE OR C O R E - T h e
conducting portion consisting of a single wire
or group of wires, assembled together and in
contact with each other or connected in
parallel.
C ONNECTOR - A mechanical clamp
shrouded in insulating material for
connecting the conductor of a cable or of a
flexible cord to that of another cable or of
another flexible cord.
CQNNECYOR Box
OR
J OINT
BOX
- A box
forming a part of wiring installation, provided

to contain joints in the conductors of cables of
the installation.
C ONNECTOR
FOR
P ORTABLE APPLIANCES ---
A ccmbination of a plug and socket arranged

for
attachment to a portable electrical
appliance or to a flexible cord.
CONSUMERX ,TERMINALS - The ends of the
eiectrical conductors situated upon any
consumers premises and belongrng to him at
which the supply of energy is delivered from
the service line.
CORD, FLEXIBLE - A flexible cable having
conductor of small cross-sectional area. 1 wo
flexible cords twisted together are known as
twin flexible cord.
C ORE
OF A C ABLE -A single conductor of a

cable with its insulation but not including any
mechanical protective covering.
Cur-OuT -Any appliance for automatically

interrupting the transmission of e n e r g y
through any conductor when the current rises
above a pre-determined amount, for example.
fusible cut-out.
D A M P SITtiATION -A situation in which
moisture is either permanently present or

intermittently present to such an extent as to
be likely to impair the effectiveness of an
installation conforming to the requirements
for ordinary situations.
D EAD --At or about earth potential or
disconnected from any live system.
D IRECT E A RT HING S YSTEM -A system of
earthing in which the parts of an installation

are so earthed as specified but are not
connected within the installation to the
neutral conductor of the supply system or to
earth through the trip coil of an earth leakage
circuit-breaker.
DISCONNECFORS - A device used to open
(or close) a circuit when either negligible
VIII-2.
current IS interrupted (or established) or when

the significant change in thevoltage across the
terminals of each of the pole of the
disconnectors occurs; in the open position it
provides an isolating distance between the
terminals of each pole.
DIHANCE AREA OR R E SI ST AWE AREA (F O R
E AR rH ELECTKOI~E ON L Y) -~ The area of
ground (around an earth electrode) within

which a voltage gradient measurable with
ordinary commercial instruments exists when
the electrode is being test.ed.
DIS rRIBUTIoN FIJSE-BOARD -- A n
assemblage of parts including one or more
fuses arranged for the distribution of electrical
energy to final sub-circuits.
E AR rfI - A connectlon to the general mas$

of earth by means of an earth electrode. An
object is said to be earthed when it is
electrically connected to an earth electrode;
and a conductor is said to be solidly earthed
when it IS electrically connected to an earth
electrode without a fuse, switch, circuitbreaker, resistance or impedance in the earth
connectlon.
EAR I tt CON I IYUI IY Co~uucroIr -- T h e
conductor, includmg any clamp, connecting
to the earthing lead or to each other those
parts of an Installation which are required to
be earthed. It may be in whole or rn part the
metal conduit or the metal sheath or Irmour
of the cables, or the special continuity
conductor of a cable or tlexible c o r d
incorporating such a conductor.
EARI H EI.F,~TROIJ~:
A metal piate. pipe or
other conductor electricali! connected to the
general mass of the earth.
E AR WING LEAD -. The final conductor by
which the connection to the earth electrode is
made.
E
A R T H
LEAKAGE CIRCliIT-BREAKER
system of earthlng in which the

parts of an installation, specified, to be
earthed are so earthed through one or more
earth leakage circuit-breakers or relays.
SYSTEM -- A
E N C L O S E D DISTRIBUTION FU S E B O A R D An enclosure containing bus-bars, with fuses

for the purpose of protecting, controlling of
connecting more than one outgoing circuit.

fed from more than one or more incoming
circuits.
E XPOSED M ETAL --All metal parts of
an
installation which are easily accessible other

than:
a) parts separated from live parts by doubk
insulation;
NATIONAL DbILDt~~ (ODE
OF
INDIA
b) metal name-plates, screw heads, covers, or

plates, which are supported on or attached
or connected to substantial nonconducting material only in such a manner
that they do not become alive in the event
of failure of insulation of live parts and
whose means of fixing do not come in
contact with any internal metal; and
cl parts which are separated from live parts
by other metal parts which are themselves
earthed or have double insulation.
Fll TING, L I G H T I N G ~- A device for
supporting or containing a lamp or lamps (for
example, fluorescent or incandescent)
together with any holder, shade, or reflector,
for exmaple, a bracket, a pendant with ceiling
rose, an eiectroiier, or a portable unit.
F LAMEPROOF ~NCLOSlIRE - An enclosure
which will withstand without injury any
explosion of inflammable gas that may occur

within it under practical conditions of
opefation within the rating of the apparatus
(and recognized overloads, if any, associated
therewith) and will prevent the transmission
of flame which may ignite any inflammable
gas that may be present in the surrounding
atmosphere.
NOIF I --An electrical apparatus is not considered as
flamproof unless it comphes with the appropriate

statutory regulations.
NOTF 2---Other types of fitting are also in vogue in
wiring installations. for example, increased safety.
FUSE - A device that, by the fusion of one or

more of its specially designed and
proportioned components, opens the circuit
in which it is in&-ted when the current
through it exceeds a given value for a
sufficient time. The fuse comprises ail the
parts that form the complete device.
F USE-ELEMENT -That part of a fuse which
is designed to melt and thus open a circuit.
F U S E- SW I T C H - A composite unit,
comprising a Sitch with the fuse contained in
or mounted on the moving member of the

switch.
INFLAMMABLE - A material capable .
being easily ignited.
of
I N S U L A T E D - Insulated shaii mean

separated from adjacent conducting material
or protected from personal contact by a nonconducting substance or an air space, in either
caseoffering permanently sufficient resistance
to the passage of current or to disruptive
discharges through or over the surface of the
subtance or space, to obviate danger or shock
or injurious leakage of current.
PART VIII IIIIILDINC
I N S T A L L A T I O N ( EL E C T R I C A L) -Ail & h e
electrical wiring, accessories, fittings,
consuming devices, control and protective
gear, and.,other apparatus associated with the
wiring situated in any premises in which
electricity is supiiied or is to be supplied
through any one service connection to
consumer(s).
INSULATION , DOUBLE
OF A CONDUCTOR -
A conductor is s;iid
to have double insulation when insulating
material intervenes not only between the
conductor and its surrounding envelope
(if a cable) or immediate support (if bare)
but also betwen the envelope or support
and earth.
b) OF AN APPLIANCE ..- An appliance having

accessible metal parts is doubly insulated
when protective insulation is provided in
addition to the normal functional
insulation in order to protect against
electric shock in case of breakdown of the
functional insulation.
INSIJLATION (ELECTRICAL ) - Suitable nonconducting material, enclosing, surrounding
or supporting a conductor.
L INKED S WITCH - Switches linked together
mechanically so as to operate simultaneously
or in definite sequence.
L IVE OR ALIVE -Electrically charged so as
to have a potential different from that of
earth.
L O C A T I O N S, IN D U S T R I A L -. Locations
where tools and machinery requiring

electrical wiring are installed for manufacture
or repair.
L O C A T I O N S, NON-INUDSTRIAL - Locaiions
other than industrial locations, and shall
include residences, offices, shops,

showrooms, stores and similar premises
requiring electrical wiring for lighting, or
similar purpose.
M ULTIPLE E ARTHED N EUTRAL SYSI-EM ---
A system of earthing in which the parts of an

installation specified to be earthed are
connected to the general mass of earth and, in
addition, are connected within the installation
to the neutral conductor of the supply system.
N E U T R A L O R N E U T R A L CONDUCTORIncludes the neutral conductor of a threephase four-wire system, the conductor of a
single-phase or dc installation which is
earthed by the supply undertaking (or
otherwise at the source of the supply), and the
middle wire or common return conductor of a

three-wire dc or single-phase ac system.
SERVICES--SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
W-2--
P L U G -- A device carrying three metailic

contacts in the form of pins, intended for
engagement with corresponding socket
contacts and arranged for attachment to a
flexible cord or cab!e.
POINI - A point shall consist of the branch
wiring from the branch distribution board.
together with a switch as required, as far as
and including the ceiling rose or socket-outlet
or suitable termination. A three-pin socketoutlet point shall include, in addition, the
connecting wire or cable from the earth pin to
the earth stud of the branch distribution
board.
?iERVICE - The conductors and equipment
required for delivering energy from the
electric supply system to the wiring system of
the premises served.
SOCKET-OUTWI - A device carrying three
metallic contacts deSigned for engagement

with correspondmg plug pins and arranged
for cor.nection to fixed wiring.
Swl~l<7~~ - A manually operated device for
closing and opening or for changing the
connection of a circuit.
Swl I-(HHOARI) ~- A n a s s e m b l a g e o f
switchgear with or without instruments but
the term does not apply to a group of local
switches on a final sub-circuit where each
switch has its own insulating base.
SW1 ICHGFAK Main switches, cut-outs or

fuses. conductors and other apparatus in
connection therewith. used for the purpose of
controlling or protecting electrical circuits or
machines or other current using appliances.
Ils,AN 1~ Whl 1 SPACE -~ All portions of a
wall. except that occupied by a door in its
normal open position. or occupied by a fire
place opening. but excluding wall spaces
which are less than I m in ext.ent measured
along the wall at the floor line.
\()I 1 AGI-, L.oW - The voltage which does
not normally exceed 250 volts.
Vol I AGE. MEDIUM -- The voltage which
normally exceeds 250 volts but does not
exceed 650 volts.
VOLIAGE. ,HIGU - T h e v o l t a g e w h i c h
normally ekceeds 650 volts (but less than
33 kV).
W E A T H E R P R O O F - Accessories, lighting
fittings. current-using appliances and cables
are said to be of the weatherproof type, if
they are so constructed that when installed in
open situation they will withstand the effects
VIII-Z-
of rain, snow, dust and temperature

variations.
2.2 Conventional Symbols -- T h e
architectural symbols that are to be used in all
drawings, wiring plan;, etc. for electrical
installations in buildings shall be as given in
Applendix A.
2.2.1 For other graphical symbols used in
electrotechnology, reference may be made to
good practice [VIII-2 (I I].*
3. I Conformit). with Indian Electricity Act
19/O and It; Rules I956 Amended
L$J
-to-&e -
The installation shall generally be carried out in

conformity with the requirements of the Indian
Eltwricit~~ Act, 1910 as amended up-to-date and
the indian Elcc~trici!,~ Rules. 1956 framed thereunder and also the relevant regulations of the
Electric Supply Authority concerned as
amended from time to time. Extracts from the
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, referred to in
this section. are given in Appendix B.
3.2 Materials -- All materials, fittings,
appliances, etc, used in electrical installations,
shall conform to Part V Building Materials.
3.3 Local Supply Authority
a) In all cases, that is, whether the proposed

electrical work is a new installation or
extension of an existing one, or a modification involving major changes. the
electricity supply undertaking shall be
consulted about the feasibility. etc, at an
early date.
b) ADDITION
TO
AN
I N S T A L L A T I O N- A n
addition. temporary or permanent, shall

not be made to the authorized load of an
existing installation. until it has been
definitely ascertained that the currentcarrying
capacity and the condition of existing
accessories, conductors, switches. etc,
affected, including those of the supply
authority are adeauate for the increased
load.
3.4 Power Factor Imbrovement in Consumers

Installaiion
3.4. I Conditions of supply of electricity boards
or licensees stipulate the lower-limit of power

factor which is generallv 0.85 and consumer is
* In this section where reference
is made togood practice

in relation to design or testing, and construction and
material procedures. thcappropriatedocument listed at
the end of this section may be used as a guide to the
mteroretation of this term.
NATIONAL
IltIIntNC COtlE 01;
INDIA
obliged to improve and maintain the power

factor of his installation to conform to this
condition.
3.4.2 Principal causes of lowpower factor are
many. For guidance to the consumers of
electric energy who take supply at low and
medium voltages for imporvement of power
factor, reference shall be made in accordance
with good practice [VIII-2(2)].
3.5 Execution of work - Unless otherwise
exempted under the appropriate rule of the
Indian Electricity Rules, the work of electrical
install&ions shall be carried out by an
electrical contractor licensed and under the
direct supervision of a person holding a
certificate of competency and by persons
holding a valid permit issued and recognized
by any Indian government.
3.6 Safety procedures and practices shall be
kept in view during execution of the work in
accordance with good practice [VIII-2(3)].
4. PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS
4.1 Generai - The design and planning of an
electrical wiiing installation involve
consideration of all prevailing conditions, and
is usually influenced by the type and
requirement of the consumer. It is
recommended that the advice of a competent
electrical engineer be sought at the planning
stage with a view to providing for an
installation that will prove adequate for its
intended purpose, and safe and efficient in its
use. The information given under 3 shall also
be kept in view.
4.1.1 The design and planning of an electrical
wiring installation shall take, into
consideration, some or all of the following:
4 the type of supply, occupancy, envisaged
load and the earthing arrangement

available;
b) the atmospheric condition, such as
cooling air temperature, moisture or such
other conditions which are likely to affect
the installation adversely;
c) the possible presence of inflammable or
explosive dust, vapour or gas;

d) the degree of electrical and mechanical
protectton necessary;
e) the importance of continuity of service,
including the possible need for standbv
rupply;
the probability of need for modification or
future extension;
PART
WI MJlLDlnQ MllVIClS-ICCtlON
iit) the probable operation and maintenance

cost taking into account the electricity
supply tariffs available;

h) the relative cost of vaious alternative
methods;
9 the need for radio and telecommunication
interference suppression;
k) ease of maintenance;
m) safety aspects; and
n) energy conservation.
4.1.2 All electrical apparatus shall besuitable
for the services these are intended for.
4.J.3 CO-OKDINATION - P r o p e r c o ordination and collaboration between the
architect, civil engineer and the electrical and
mechanical engineer shall beeffected from the
planning stage of the installation. The
provisions that will be needed for the
accommodation of substation, transformer,
switchrooms. service cable ducts, rising mains
and distribution cables, sub-distribution
boards, openings and chases in floors and
walls for all required electrical installations,
etc, shall be specified in advance.
4.1.4 Before starting wiring and idstalletion
of fittings and accessories, information should
be exchanged between the owner of the
building/archbect/electrical contractor and
the local supply authority in respect of tariffs
applicable, types of apparatus that may be
connected under each tariff, requirement of
space for installing meters, switches, t?tc, and
for total load requirements of lights, fans and
power.
4.1.5 While planning an installation,
consideration should be taken of the
anticipated increase in the use of electricity for
lighting, general purpose socket-outlet,
kitchen heating, etc.
It is essential that adequate provision should
be made for all the services which may be
required immediately and during the intended
useful life of the building, for the householder
may otherwise be tempted to carry out
extension of the installation himself or to rely
upon use of multiplug adopters and long
flexible cords, both of which are not
recommended.
4,2 L o c a t i o n a n d Rrqulremrnr o f
Substation- Information on locationand
re uirements of a substation should cover the
fol8 owing:
4 . 2 . I TO T A L P L I N T H ( C O V E R E D ) ,
AREA - Electrical mbstatianr ml borr~lly
be required in case of oft%e buildrngn with m
1 Cl.~RICAl,lNlJTALL4llONS
VIII-l. -
total plinth (covered) area of 5000m2; even

buildings with smaller plinth (covered) areas
with large loading or under local regulations

may require a substation.
4 . 2 . 2 LO A D C E N T R E
G RAVITY OF B U I L D I N G S
AND
C ENTRE
4.2.4 ROOM, SPACES R EQUIRED - Generally the following rooms/spaces are required
in a substation:
a) Supply companys switchgear room

and/or space for meters.
OF
b)
4 The ideal
location for an electrical

substation for a group of buildings would
be at the load centre and shall be located
on the ground floor.
CAPACWY
AND SIZE - The capacity of a

substation depends. upon the area of the
b.uilding and its type. The capacity of
transformers may be determined based on
the following load requirements:
Lo& Requkrneni
b) In multi-storeyed buildings, the substation
per PIinrh Arm

( Watts/ rn3
shall preferably he installed on the lowest

floor level, but direct access from the street
for installation or removal of the equipment
shall be provided. The floor level of the

substation or switch room shall be above
the highest flood level of the locality. In this
case the load centre would be somewhere
between the geometrical centre and the air

conditioning plant room. if provided.
c j The substation should preferably -be
located in a separate building and should

be adjacent to the generator room, if any.
Location of substation in the basement
floors should be avoided, as far as
possible. In case electric substation has to
be located within the main building itself
for unavoidable reasons, then it should be
located on ground floor with easy access
from outside. Oil-filled transformers,shall
not be housed on any floor above ground
floor (see Part IV Fire protection).
It is preferable to locate the electrical
substation a d j a c e n t t o t h e airconditioning plant room if provided in
such a way that the distance from the
controlling switchboard of the airconditioning plant room and
corresponding switches in the electrical
substation are kept to the barest
minimum.
Normal lighting
Lighting with lifts, pumps but
w i t h o u t c e n t r a l airconditioning
30.0
Additional capacity for

technical buildings like
laboratories, hospitals, etc
II.0
Additional capcity for airconditioning
After calculating the electrical load on the

above basis, a load factor of 70 percent is to be
applied to arrive at the minimum capacity of
substation. The area required for substation
and transformer room for different capacities
is given in Table I.
c)
d) The availability of power lines nearby may

also be kept in view while deciding the
location of the substation.
1111 . 8
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH ROOM - In Case

of substation having onetransformer and
one source of supply. the owner is required

to provide one high voltage switch. In case
of single point supply with two or more
transformers the number of switch
required will be one for incoming supply
and one for each transformer. In case of
duplicate supply two switches shall be
prpvided with mechanical/electrical
inlocking arrangement where necessary in
cables with switches. In case the number of
incoming and outgoing switches exceed
five, bus coupler of suitable capacity
should invariably be provided. The floor
area required in case of a single switch is
roughly 4mX4m and for every additional
switch the length wou!d be increased by
I m.
For transformers having large oil content

(more than 2 000 hires). Rule 64 of Indian
Electric-i!,! Rules. 1956 shall apply.
For detailed information regarding

location of transformers reference may be
made to good practice [VIII-2(2)].
\
4 . 2 . 3 LAYOUT O F SLIBSTATION - I n
allocating the area of substation, it is to be
noted that the flow of electric power is from
supply companys room to HT room, then to
transformer and finally to the low voltage
switchgear room. The layout of the room shall
be in accordance with this flow.
100
(of air-conditioned area)
L.dW VOLTAGE SWITCH ROOM - The

floor area required in respect of low
voltage switchgear room may be
determined keeping in view the number
and type of incoming/outgoing bus coupler
switches including likely expansion in
future.
NATIONAL
BIII.DINC CODI. OF INIBIA
TABLE I AREA REQUIRED FOR TRANSFORMER ROOM AND SUBSTATION

FDR DIFFERENT CAPACITIES
[C/we 4.2.#(b)]
TOTAL SUBSTATION AREA

(ok C4WMNG HT. LT
PANELS. TRANSFORMER
Rook BUT WITHOUT
GENER ATOR S)
CAPACITY OF TRANS.
FORMER(S) IN kVA.
(1)
(2)
(1
(m 1
i)
lX16p
14.0
90
ii)
WI60
28.0
iii)
1x250
IS.0
iv)
2x250
IX400
30.0
16.5
2MoO
33.0
49.3
II8
91
121
93
125
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
3x400
9.0
13.5
9
13.5
9.0
13.5
18.0
14.5
19.0
14.5
19.0
14.5
14.0
14.5
19.0
I72
W630
3X630
54.0
xiii)
WfIOO
3x800
39.0
58.0
xiv)
2xlOfm
39.0
I81
149
xv)
3x1000
50.0
197
x)
xi)
xii)
(9
(ml
130
54.0
36.0
ix)
MINIMUM
F+r WIDTH
I67
36.q
w5W
3x500
!hOOiL9TlbD
132
176
135
NOTE I -,The length and breadth of the transformer room, HT room, LT room can be sekcted, depending upon the actwl
kngth and width of the transformers, supply companys panels, consumers HT and LT panels. The above dimensions are
overall area required for sub-station excluding gencratmg set.
NOTI? Z-The clear height required for substation equipment shall be minimum of 3.6.mcucr,
Non 3 -The wea and height required for substation quipmentsgiven in the table are for general guidance only and may
be fiiy fixed according to actual requirements.
Separate substation building is generally

not required if total load is less than
IOOkVA. However, a suitable size of

lockable space should & iarmarked for
installing control switchgear in buildings.
GENERATOR
chosen the capacity and number of

generating sets, a space shown in Table 2
may be provided for their installation.
The generating set should invariably be
ho@ed in the substation building to
enable transfer of electrical load qOickly as
well as to avoid transfer of vibration and
noise to the main building.The generator
house should have proper ventilation, firefahting quipment, etc.
REQUIREMENTS OF ROOMS
i)
PART VIII
The areas given above in
respect of
the different categories of rooms
holds good if they are provided with
l
lULDlNG SCWICLB-SLcTlON
[ CIOW 1.2.4 (f)]

SL
No C A P A C I T Y
AREA
C LEAR HEIOHT BELOW

THE
The
capacity of standby generating set shall be
chosen on the basis of essential light load,
essential air-conditioning load, essential
equipment load and essential services
load, such as one lift out of the bank of
lifts, one or all Water pumps,.etc. Having
R O O M F OR S T A N D B Y
TABLE 2 ADDITIONAL AREA REQUIRED

FOR GENERATOR IN ELECTRIC SUBSTATION
(1)
(1;;
($
25
ii)
48
56
56
65
72
IO0
SOFFIT
OF THE
B EAM
:T:
3.6
3.6
iii)
100
3.6
iv)
I50
4.6
248
4.6
v)
NOTE -The ama and IA&t required for pnarrtiu wt
room given in the above uble arm for ~nenl auldancc
only and may bt fmally fixed according to actual
reakrcmcnts.
windows and independent access

doors in accordarice with local
regulations.
ii) All tb! rooms shall be provided with
rtttlons up to the ceding and shall
E ve proper ventilation. Special care
should be taken to ventHate the
transformer rooms and where
necessary louvers at lower level and
2 #iLtCTRlCAL IWllALWlIONS
exhaust fans at hi h&r level shall be
provided at suitabfe locations.
9 .
VIII-z--
In order to prevent storm water

entering the transformer and switch
rooms through. the soak-pits, the
floor level, the substation shall be at
least l5cm above the highest flood
water level that may be anticipated in
the locality.
iv) The minimum height of high voltage
switchgear room shall be 3.6 m.
iii)
4.3 Location of Switch Room - In large

installations other than where a substation is
provided, a separate switch room shall be
provided; this shall be located as closely as
possible to the electiical load centre and
suitable ducts shall be laid with minimum
number of bends from the point of entry of the
main supply cable to the position of the main
switchgear. The switch room shall also be
placed in such a position that risingducts may
readily be provided therefrom to the upper
floors of the building in one straight vertical
run,. In larger buildings, more than one rising
duct may be required and then horizontal
ducts may also be required for running cables
from the switch room to the foot of each rising
main. Such cable ducts shall be reserved for
the electrical services only which may,
however, include medium ahd low voltage
installations, such as call-bell systems;
telephone installations should be suitably
segregated.
4 . 4 L o c a t i o n a n d Requiremenis o f
Distribution Panels - The electrical control
gear distribution panels and other apparatus,
which are required on each floor may
conveniently be mounted adjacent to the
rising mains, and adequate space should be
provided at each floor for this purpose.
5. D;~BRlM3;T10N O F S U P P L Y A N D
5.0 General - In the planning
and design of
an electrical wiring installation, d u e
consideration shall lx? made of all the
prevailing conditions. It is recommended that
advice of a competent electrical engineer be
sought at the initial stage itself with a view to
providiug for the installation that will prove
adequate for its intended purpose, and safe
and efficient use.
5.1 System of Supply
All electrical apparatus shall be suitable

for the voltage and frequency of supply.
5.1.1
II.2 In case of connected load of IO0 kVA

and above, the relative advantage of high
voltage three-phase gupply should be
considered. Though ,the use of high volta
supply entails the provision of space for tl!ee
W.P
ital cost of providing suitable transformer

su!station at the consumers premises, the
following advantages- %re gained:
a) advantage in tariff,
b) more effective earth fault protection for
heavy current circuits;
cl elimination of interferenee with suplies to
other consumers permitting the use of
large size motors, welding plant, etc; and
4 better control of voltage regulation and
more constant supply voltage.
ca
NOTE - Additional safety precautionr required to be

observed in HV installations shall alao be kept in view.
In very large Industrial buildings where

heavy electric demands occur at scattered
locations, the economics of electrical
distribution at high voltage from the main
su bstaion to other subsidiary transformer
substations or to certain items of plant, such
as large motors and furnaces, should be
considered. The relative economy attainable
by use of medium or high voltage distribution
and high voltage plant is a matter for expert
judgement and individual assessment in the
light of expereince by a professionally
qualified electrical engineer.
5.1.3
5.2 Substation Equipmenr and Accessories -
All substation equipment and accessories and

materials, etc, shall conform to relevant
Indian standards wherever they exist,,
otherwise they shall be approved by the
Authority.
5.2.1 H IGH V OLTAGE S W I T C H G E A R
5.2.1.1
The selection of the type of high

voltage switchgear for any intiallation inreralia depends upon the following:
a) voltage of the supply system;
b) the prospepctive short-circuit current at
the point of supply;
c) the size and layout of electrical
installation;
d) the accommodation available; and
e) the nature of industry.
Marketing and breaking capacity of
switchgear shall be commensurated with shorcircuit potentialities of the supply system and
the supply authority shall be consulted onthis
subject..
5 . 2 . 1 . 2 GuideIinea dn various taypes of
switchgear equipment and their chotce for a
particular application shall be inaccordance
with accepted standards [see VIII-2(.(s)].*
l
In thil saction, Where refcrtncc in made IO acepted

standard: in relation to matwirl rpe@Rwtion, tiw
rpptoprlau document llated at the od of thin mctlon
may be wed u guide to the Lntwptetation of thL term.

NAtRNAL DUlLDING CDDC Dt
INDIA
5.2.1.3 In extensive installations of

switchgear, banks of gears shall be segregated
from the each other by means of fire-reststing
barriers in order to t-event spreading.of the
risk of damage by Ptre or explosion arising
from switch failure. Where a bus-section
switch is .installed. it shall aslo be senreeated
from adjoining banks in the sage-way
[seevlll-2(S)].
5.2.1.4 It should be possible to is&ate any
section from the rest of the switchboards such
that work might be undertaken on this section
without the necessity of making the
switchboard dead. IsoWing switch- used for
the interconnection of sections or for the

purpose of isolating circuit-breakers of other
apparatus, shall also be segregated within its
compartment so thatno live part is acoesaibk
when work in a neighbouring section is io
progress,
5.2.1.5 in the case of duplicate or ring main
supply, switches wrth interlocking
arrangement shall be provided to ercvcnt
simultaneous switching of two different
supply sources.
5.2.2 C ABLES
5.2.2.1 The smallest size of the cable that shall
be used, will depend upon the method of
laying cable, permissible matitnum
temperature it shall withstand, the
prospective short-circuit current to which the
cable may be subjected, the charactersitics of
the overload protection gear installed, load
cycle and thermal resistivity of the soil [see
also. VIII-2(6)]. Short-circuit rating curves
given in Appendix A will serve as an
approximate guide for selection of the size of
cables.
N O T E-Guidelines for correlation of the ratings of
cables and characteristics of protective device are under
consideration.
5.2.2.2 The advice of the cable manufacturer

with regard to installation,, jointing and
scaling shall be followed.
5.2.2.3 The H T cables shall either be laid on
the cable rack/ built-up concrete
trenches/ tunnel/ basement or directlyburiedin the ground depending upon the specific
requir ment. All cables shall be installed in
actordante with-good practices [VIII-2(6)].
5.2.3 TRANSFORMERS
5.2.3.1 The maximum size of any transformer
used to suppl a medium voltage installation
from a htgT? voltage network is generally
selected on the basis of present load, possible
future load, operation and maintenance cost
and other system eonditions and is limited by
ity of
t h e switch-r used for coWo
7Y
w tha
short-circuit making and breakitg
medium voltage distribution syrtcm.

5.2.3.2. See 4.2 for details of locatiot! arid
requirements of substation. Where, two or
more transformers are to be ~inrtalled in a
substation to supply a medium voltage
distribution system, the distribution system
shall be divided into separate ScctiOnS crab of
which ,shaff k normally fed from one
transformer only unless the medium voltage
switchgear has the requisite rhon-circait
capacity. Provision may, however, be made to
interconnect reprrate sections, through a bus
coupler in the event of failure or
disconnection of one trat&rmer.
The transformers, that may at any time
operate in parallel. shal1 be so aekcted as to
share the load in propo&on to tktir m
load ratings.
5.2.4 Low VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
5.2.4.1 Switchgear and fuaegear shall have
adequate breakin
capacity of the tr
connected.
5.2.4.2 lsolation and protection of outgoing
circuitsforming mai~distributionsystemmay
be effected by means of circuit-breakers, or
fuses or switch and fuseunits mounted on the
main switchboard. The choice between
alternative types of equipment may be
influenced by the following considerations:
4 In certain installations supplied with
electric power from remote transformer

substations, it may be necessary to protect
main circuits with circuit-breakers
operated by earth leakage trips, in order to
ensure effective earth fault protection.
b) Where large electric motors, furnaces-r
othrr heavy electrical equipment is
installed, the main circuits shall be
protected by metal-clad circuit-breakers
or contactors fitted with suitable
instantaneous and time delay over current
devices together with earth leakage and
back-up protection where neccessary.
4 In installations other than those referred
to in (a) and (b) or where overloading of
circuits may be considered unlikely,HRC
type fuses will normally afford adequate
protection for main circuits. Where means
of isolating main circuits separately is
required, the fuses shall be mounted in
fuse switch or switch fuse units or with
switches forming part of the main
switchboards.
5.2.4.3 Sometimes it may be necessary to
provide suitable connection. for the power
WRt VIII W I L D I N G =VKU-SICTION 2 CLKTBlCALINSTALLATlONY
vtir.*.l
factor improvement capacitor at the

substation bus. Suitable capacitor may be
selected in consultation with the capacitor as
well as switchpear manufacture and necessary
switchpearifeedet circuit-breaker s h a l l b e
p!ovided for controlling of cnnaritor hank.
5.2.4.4 Adequate passage ways shall be
allowed to afford to all switchhoards for
operation and maintenanceand proper means
shall he provided for isolating the equipment
to allow access for maintenance and other
purposes. Sufficient additional sapce shall be
allnwvrd to provide fnr anticipated future
extensions.
5..?.4..5 Electrical installations in a rnom or
cubicle or in an arc3 surrounded by wall fence,
access t_o which is cnntrollcd by lock and key
shall be considercti accessible to authorized
persons only.
A wall or fenre less than 2.25 mctres in height
shall, not he considered as preventing access
unless it has other features that provide a
degree of isnlatinn enuivalent to a 2.25 metres
fence.
These shndd he installed at a height where It IS

convenient tn note the meter reading; it
shnnld preferably not be-installed below one
metre from the gtciund. The energy meters
should either be provided with a protective
covering, enclnsinp it completely except the
Rlass window through which the readings are
or shnnld be mounted inside a
noted
completelv enclosed panel provided with
hirqed nr sliding doors with arrangement for
locking.
5.3.2 M AIN S WITCHES
AND
SWITCHBOARD
5.3.2.1 All main switches shall be either of

metal-clad enclosed pattern or of any
insulated enclosed pattern which shall be
fixed at close nroximitv to the point of entry
of supply.
a) The location of the main board should be
such that It is easily accessible for fireman

and other personnel to ouickly disconnect
the supply m case of emergencies.
b) Main switch hnard shall be installed in
.5.3././ Ihcre shall be a circuit-hreaker or

miniature circuit-hreakers or a load break
switch fuse on each live conductor of the
supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring
thqhout the installation shall he such that
there is no hreak in t,he nentral wire in the
form of a switch or fuse unit. The neutral shall
also he distinctly marked. In this connection.
R u l e 32(2) of the Inrjiian Fh~tricitl~ Rules.
1956 (,pf>e Appendix R) shall also be referred.
:..~.I.2 The main switch shall be easily
accessible and situated as near as practicable
tn the terminatinn of service line.
.F._I./..j On the main switch. where the
conductors include an earthed conductor of a
two-wire svstem or an earthed neutral
conductor or a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected thereto,
an indication of a permanent nature shall be
provided to identify the earthed neutral
conductor. In this connection. Rule 32(I) of
the Indinn Elecvrkir v Rulm, (see Appendix B)
shall be referred.
5.3.1.4 FAFPGY METERS -- Energy meters
shall be installed in residential building3 at
such a place which is readily accessible to the
owner of the building and the Authority.
rooms nr cuphoards so as to safeguard

aeainst operation by unauthorized
personnel.
Open type switchboards shall be placed
only in dry situations and in ventilated
rooms and they shall not be placed in the
vicinity of storage batteries or exposed to
chemical fumes.
d) In damp situation or where infammable or
explosive dust. vapnur or gas is likely to be
present. the switchhoard shall be totally
enclosed nr made flameproof as may be
neceessitated b y t h e p a r t i c u l a r
circumstances [&Tee Vlll-2(7)].
e) Switchboards shall not be erected above
gas stoves or sinks. or within 2.5 m or any
washing unit in the washing rooms or
laundrieri, or in hat.htooma. lavatories or
toilets. or kitchens.
f-l In case of switchboards unavoidably fixed
in places likely tn be exposed to weather,
to drip. or to abnormal moist atmosphere,
the outer caamg shall be weatherproof and
shall be provided with glands or bushin I
or adopted to receive screwed condu ft,
according to the manner in which the
cables are run.
g) AdeqUate illumination shall bt provided
for all working spaces about the
switchboards when installed indoors.
3.3.2.3 Metal-clad swltchgcar shall preferably be mourned on any oi the following

types of boards:
a) Hin @d-type mrtal hoarh-These

shal f consist of a box n&e--of sheet
metal not less than 2mm thick and shall

be provided with a hinged cover to enable
the board to swmg open for examination of the wiring at the back. The joints
shall be welded. There shall be a clear
distance of not less than 2.5cm between
the teak wood board and the cover, the
distance being increased for larger
boards in order that on closing of the
cover, the insulation of the cables is
not subjected to damage and no short
length of cables is subjected to excessive
twisting or bending in any case. The
board shall be securily lixed to the wall
b means of rag bolta, pluyls, or wooden

#I Yug;8 and shall be provided with a lockmg arranpment and en eanhrng tmd.
All wires passing through the metal
board shall be protected by a rubber or
wooden bush at the entry hole. The earth
stud should commensurate with the size
of earth lead/ leads. Alternatively, metal
boards may be made of suitable size
angle iron of minimum size 35 mm X
33 mm X 6mm or channel iron of minim u m s i z e 35mm X 2Smm X 6mm
framed work suitably mounted on front

with 8 3mm thick mild steel plate and
on back with 1.5mm thick mild steel
sheet. No a paratus shall project beyond
any edge oPpanel. No fuse body shall be
mounted within 2.5cm ot any edge of
the panel.
N~IE -Such type 01 boards are particularly suitable
for small switchboard for muummg nrrtil-crad sw~hgear connected to supply al law \Orreprs.
b) Fixed-t.ype metal hourds -- I hrse shall
be 01 seasoned leak or other approved

quality with all joints dovetailed.
RECESSING OF WARDS- Where so
s ecified, ihe uwltcnboalws shall be recessed in
t RE wall. Ample cawn shall be provided at the
5.3.2.4
back for connection and at the front between

thti switchgear mountings.
5.3.2.5 In large installations of medium voltage, before proceeding with the actual
construction of the boards. a proper drawing
shaking the detailed dimensions and design
including the disposition of the mountings,
which shall be syrqmerrically and neatly
arranged for arriving at the overall dimensions, shall be prepared along with the building drawings.
5.3.2.6
a) Equipment which is on the front ofa

switchbourd shall be so arranged that inadvertent personal contact with live
parts is unhkely during the manipulation
of sv/itches, changing of fuses and the
like operations.
b) No ap aratus shall project beyond any
edge of! the panel. No fuse body shall be
mounted within 2.5cm of any edge of
the panel-and no. hole other than the
holes by means of which the panel is
fixed shall be diilled closer than 1.3cti
4
d)
COnSiSt Of aI3 ar@e O r CrMrle~ IrOIl traIrlc
fixed on the wall or on floor and

supported on the wail at the top. it
necessary. There shall be a clear distance
of one metre in front bt the swrichboards.
If there are any atrachmems of bare
connections at the back of the
switchboard Rule 51( 1) (c) of hdiun
Elrcrrici!.v Rules, lciS6 shall apply. The
connect~onsl between the switchgear
mounting and the outgoing cable up co the
wall shall be enclosed in a protecrion pipe.
Fio~ t - Sucn ~ypc of boaros are partrcularly suirable for large switchboards lor muunrmg large
nun&l of switchgears o r h i g h capacity metalclad switcbgear or both.
l-or s m a l l installa.
tions connected to a single-phase 24ovoll~
supply. wooden boards may be used as
main-boards or sub-boards. I hese shall
c ) Wooden booms --
ARRANGEMENT OF AIPARAIIJS
e)
fl
from any edge of the panel.

The various live parts, unless they are
effectiveiy screened by substantial barriers of non-hygroscopic, non-inflammable insulating material, shall be so
spaced rhar an arc cannot- maintain
between such parts and earth.
The arrangement of the gear shall be
such that they shall be readily accessible
and their connecrions to all insttuments
and apparatus shall also be easily identifiable.
In every case rn which switches and fuses
are fitted on rhe same pole, these fuses
shall be so arranged that the fuses are
not alive when their resipective switches
are ih off position.
No fuses other than fuses in instrument
circuit shail be fixed on the back of or
behind a switchboard panel or frame.
5.3.2.7 MARKING OF AIIARATUS (SEE ALSO

[VIII Ulc)].
a) Where a board is connected to voltage
higher rhan 250 V, all the apparatus
mourned on it shall be marked on the
followmg colours to ind,icate the different poles or phases to which the
apparatus or its different. terminals may

have been connected:
Alternating
Current
Direct Current
Three-wire systemThree-phases red, yellow; blue 2 outer wire, positive red and
negative blue
I Neutral-black I Neutral-black
Where four-wire three-phase wiring is
done, the neutral shall be in one colour
and the other three wires in another
colour.
Where a board has more than one switch,
each such switch shall be marked to
indicate which section of the installa-tion
it controls. The main switch shall. bc
marked as such and where there is more
than one main switch in the building.
each such switch shall be marked to indicate which section of the installation it
controls.
All markings shall be clear and
permanent.
5.3.3 MA I N ANT) BRANCH DISTKI~UTION
BOARDS ~ The rating or setting of over-
current protection devices shall be so chosen

as to be suitable for protection of cables and
conductors used in the circuit.
_5.3.3./ Main and branch distribution boards
provided, the number of fans in the circuit

shall not exceed ten. Power sub-circuits shall
be designed according to the load but in no
case shall there be more than two 15A outlets
on each sub-circuit.
In industrial installations the branch
distribution board shall. be totally segregated
for single-phase distribution and wiring.
5.3.4.3 In industrial and other similar installations requiring the use of group control for
switching operation circuits for socket outlets may be kept separate from fans and
lights. Normally, fans and lights may be
wired on a common circuit, however, if need
is felt separate circuits may be provided for
the two. The load on any low voltage subcircuit shall not exceed 3000 watts. In a case
of new installation, all circuits and sub-circuits shall be designed by making a provision
of 20 percent increase in load due .to any
future modification. Power sub-circuits shall
be designed according to the load but in no
case shall there be more than four outlets
on each sub-circuit.
5.3.4.4 In wiring instaHations at special
places like construction sites, stadium,
shipyards, open yards in industrial plants,
etc, where a large number of high wattage
lamp may be required, there shall be no
restriction of load on any circuit but
conductors used in such circtiits shall be of
adequate size for the load and proper circuit
protection shall be provided.
shall be of any type mentioned under 5.3.4.

5.3.5 LOCATION 0F DlsrRIeu-noN BO A R D S
5.3.3..? Main distribution board shall be
provided with a circuit-breaker on each pole
of each circuit, ors switch with a fuse on the
phase or iivc conductor and a link on the
neutral or earthed conductor of each circuit.
The switches shall always be linked.
5 . 3 . 4 BKAN(.H DISTRIINI 1.10~ B~AWS
5.3.4.1 Branch distribution boards shall be
provided with a fuse or a miniature circuit
breaker or both of adequate rating: setting

chosen in accordance with 5.J.3 on the live
conductor of each sub-circuit and the earthed
neutral conductor shall be connected to a
common link and be capable of being,disconnected individually for testing purposes.
At least one spare circuit of the same capacity
shall be provided on each branch distribution
board.
5.3.4.2 In residential instaliatiun, lights and
fans may be wired on a common circuit.Such
sub-circuit shall not have more than a total of
ten points of lights, fans and 5A socket
outlets. The load of such circuit shall be restricted to 800 watts. If a separate fan circuit is
WI-*-~4
2) The distribution fuse-boards shall be
located as near as possible to the centre of

the load they are intended to control.
b) These shall be fixed on suitable stran-
chion or wall and shall be accessible for

replacement of fuses, and shall not be
more than 2m from floor level.
c) These shall be of either metal-clad type,

or all-insulated type. But, if exposed to
weather or damp situations, these shall
be of the weatherproof type and, if
installed where exposed to explosive dust,
vapour or gas, these shall be of flameproof type in accordance with accepted
s t a n d a r d s [VIII-2(9)]. In corrosive
atmospheres, these shall be treated with
nnl i-corrosive preservative or covered
H lth suitable plastic compound.
d) Where two or more distribution fueeboards feeding low voltage circuits are
fed from a supply of medium voltasp,
these distribution boards shall be:
1) fixed not less than 2m apart; or
hATlDNAL BIILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
2) arranged so that it ie not possible to
open two at a time, namely, they are

interloekcd and the metal case is
marked Danger 415 volts and identified with proper phase marking and
danger marks; or
N OTE-The wiring of such low voltage distribution boards shall be segregated from each
other and not run in the same conduit.
3) installed in a room or enclosure accessible to only authorized persons.
e) All distribution boards shall be marked
Lighting or Power, as the case may be,

and also marked with the voltage and
number of phases of the supply. Each
shall be provided with a circuit list giving
diagram of each circuit which it controls
and the current rating of the circuit and
size of fuse element.
In wiring branch distribution board,.

total load of consuming devices shall be
divided as far as possible evenly between
the number of ways in the board leaving
spare circuits for future extension.
5.3.6 PROTECTION
OF
C IRCUITS
a) Appropriate protection shall be pro-
vided at switchboards and distribution

boards for ati circuits and sub-circuits
against short circuit and over current
and the piotective apparatus shall be
capable of interrupting any short circuit
current that may occur, without danger.
The ratings and settings#of fuses and the
protective devices shall be co-ordinated
so as to afford selectivity in operation.
b) Where circuit-breakers are used for protection of a main circuit and of thesubcircuits derived therefrom, discrimination in operation may be achieved by adjusting the protective devices of thesubmain circuit-breakers to operate at lower
current settings and shorter time-lag
than the main circuit-breaker.
Where HRC type fuses are used for
back-up protection of circuit-breakers,
or where HRC fuses are used for protection of main circuits, and circuit-breakers for the protection of sub-circuits
derived therefrom, in the event of
shortcircuits protection exceeding the
short-circuits capacity of the
circuit-breakers, the HRC fuses shall
operate. earlier than the circuit-breakers;
but for smaller overloads within the
short-circuit capacity of the circuitbreakers, the circuit-breakers shall
operate earlier than the HRC fuse
blows.
PART VIII
4 If rewirable type fuses are used to pro-
tect sub-circuits derived from a main circuit protected by HRC tyfie fuses, the
main circuit fuse shall normally blow in
the event of a short-circuit or earth fault
occurring on a sub-circuit, although discrimination may be achieved in respect
of overload currents. The use of rewirable fuses is restricted to the circuits
with short-circuit level of 4 kA; for
higher level either cartridge or HRC
fuses shall be used.
e) A fuse carrier shall not be fitted with a
fuse element larger than that for which
the carrier is designed.
The curtznt rating of a fuse shall not
exceed the current ratirig of the smallest
cable in the circuit protected by the fuse.
8) Every fuse shall have its own case or
cover for the protection of the circuit
and an indelible indication of its appropriate current rating in an adjacent conspicuous position.
h) For detailed information regarding
selection, installation and maintenance
of fuses, reference may be made to good
practice [VIII.-2(10)].
5.4 Voltage pnd Frequency cf Supply--It
should be ensured that all equipment connected to the system including-any appliances to be used on it are suitable for the voltage and frequency of supply of the system.
The nominal values of low and medium
voltage systems in India are 240 V and
;;5HV, ac, respectively, and the frequency
NoTts--lhe design of the wiring system and the sixes
of the cables should be decided taktng into account two
factors:
a) vot.rAGE tmop-lhls should be kept as !ow as ecouomy permits to ensure proper functioning of all
electrical appliances and equipment including
motors; and
b) First cost against operating losses
5.5
Raring of Cables and Equipmenrs
5.5.1 The current-carrying capacity of different types of cables shall be chosen in

accordance with good practice [VIII-2(I I)].
5.5.2 The current ratings of switches for domestic and similar purposes are5A and MA.
5.5.3The current ratings of isolators and
normal duty switches and composite units of
switches and fuses shall be selected from one
of the following values:
16;25, 32, 63, 100, 160, 200,. 320, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000 and I250A
W.DlNC YEJI~ICFS-SECTION 2 ELFiCllllCAL INSTALLAT IO NS
Vlll-25
5.5.4 The ratings of rewirabie and HRC

fuses shall be in accordance with good practice [VIII-2( l2)].
5.5.5 The current ratings of.miniature circuit-breakers shall be chosen from the values
given below:
6, IO. ICI, 25, 32. JO. 63 and IOOA

3.5.6 The current rating of the distribution
fuse board shall be selected from one of the
following values:
6, 16, 25, 32. 63 and 100 A.
5.6 Lighting and Levels of Illumination
5.6. I GENERAL - Lighting installation shall
take into consideration the many factors on
which the quality and quantity of artificial
lighting depends. The modern concept is to
provide illumination with the helpof.a large
number of light sources not of higheriiluminatibn level. Also much higher levels ofillu-mination are called for than in the past, often
necessitating the use of fluorescent lighting
suitably supplemented with incandescent
fittings, where required.
5.6.2 FIVIVRE DEMAND- However, if for

financial reasons. it is not possible to provide
a lighting mstallation to give the recom-
mended illumination levels, the wiring

installation at least should be so desigried
that at a later date, it will permit the provision for additional lighting fittings or conversioh from incandescent to fluorescent
lighting fittings to bring Ihe installation to
the required stqpdard. It is essential that
adequate provisions should be made for all
the electrical services which may be required
immediately and during the intended useful
life of the building.
b) offices. schools and public buildings;

c) surgeries and hospitals; and
d) hostels, restaurants. shops and residential
buildings.
5.6.4.1 It is important that appropriate levels
of illumination for these.and the types and
positions of fittings determined to suit the
task and the disposition of the working
planes.
5.6.5 For specific requirements for lighting of
special occupancies. reference shall be made
to good practice [VI It-2( I3)].
5.7 In locations where the system voltage
exceeds 650 volts, as in the case of industrial
locations. for details of design and construction of wiring installation, rqference may be
made to good practice [Vtll-2( 14)].
Electric wiring installations in hospitals

shall be done in accordance with good
practice [VIII-2( 15)].
5.8
ELECTRICAL-LAYOUT IN
RESIDENTIAL HUlLDINGS 2 For guidelines
5.9 GUIDELINE FOK
for electrical installation in residential

buildings. reference may be made to good
practice [VIII-2( I6)].
A typical distribution scheme in a residential
building with separate circuits for.lights and
fans and for power appliances is given in
Fig. I.
5.10 For detailed inforniation regarding
the installation of different electrical
equipments. reference may be made to good
practice [Vlll-2( IT)].
6.
WIRING
5.6.3 PRINCIPI.ES OF L IGHTING - - . - W h e n

considering the function of artificial lighting,
attention shall be given- tci the following
principle characteristics before designing an
installation:
6.1 Provtkion f o r M a x i m u m L o a d - A l l
conductors, switches and accessories shall be
of such size as to be capable of carrying,
without their respective ratings being exceeded. the mriximum current which will
normally flow through them.
4 illumination and its uniformity;

.
b) special distribution of light. This in-eludes
6.1.2
a reference to the composition of diffused

and directional light, direction of
incidence, the distribution of Iumin#nces
and the degree of glare; and
c) colour of the light and colour rendition.
The variety of purposes which have to
be kept in mind while planning the lighting
installation could be broadly grouped as:
ES T I M A T I O N
O F L O A D R E Q U I R EIn estimating the current to be

carried by any conductor the following
ratings shall be taken, unless the actual
values are known or specified for these
elements:
M E N T S-
Element
5.6.4
a) industrial buildings and processes:
VWs-16
incandescent lamps
Ceiling fans
Table fans
IylMMb- c a II
lamps, fans, appfiances both fixed and transportable, motors, etc. have been selected
and best methods of wirin& determined.
Ordinary socket outlet points

Fluorescent tubes:
Length: 600 mm
1200 mm
1500 mm
Power socket-outlet
90
too0
6.1.2 Electrical installation in a new building

shall normally begjn immediately on the
completion of the main structural building
work and before finishing work such as plastering has begun except in the case of surface
wiring which can be carried out after the
plaster work. Usually, no installation work
should start until the building is reasonably
weatherproof, but where electric wiring is to
be concealed within the structures as may be
the case with a reinforced concrete building,
the necessary conduits and ducts shall be
positioned firmly by tying the conduit to the
reinforcement beforeconcrcting. When shutters are removed after concreting, the c.onduit ends shall he given suitable anti-corrosive treatment ,and holes blocked off by
putties or caps to protect conduits from
getting blocked.
6.2 Selecrion qf Size qf Conductors-The
size of conductors of circuits shall be so
selected that the drop in voltage from
consumers terminals in a publicsupply (or
from the bus-bars of the main switchboard
contrdlling the various circuits in a private
generation plant) to any point on the
installation does not exceed three percent of
the voltage at the consumers terminals (or at
two bus-bars as these may be) when the
conductors are carrying the maximum current
under the normal conditions of service.
6.2.2 If the cable size is increased to avoid
voltage drop in the circuit, the rating of the
cable shall be the current which the circuit is
designed to carry. In each circuit or sub-&-.
cuit the fuse shall be selected to match the
cable rating to ensure the desired protection.
6.3 Branch Switches--Where the supply is
derived from a three-wire or four-wire
source, and distribution is done on thetwowire system, all branch switches shall be
placed in the outer or live conductor of the
circuit and no single phase switch or fuse
shall be inserted in the middle wire, earth or
earthed neutral conductor of the circuit.
Single-pole switches (other than for multiple
control) carrying not more than 15A may be
of tumbler type or flush type which shall be
on when the handle. @ ,pob is down.
6.4 Layout and Installhtion Drawing
electrical layout should be consIdered after proper locations ofall outlets for
6.4.1 The
PART
VIII
BUIIBINC
SER~IS-SECTION
6.4.2 All runs of wiring and the exact positions of all points.of switch-box& a-nd other
outlets shall be first, marked on the plans of
the.Ybuilding ,and approved by the engineerin-charge or the owner before actual commencement of the work.
6.4.3 Industrial layout drawings shouldindi,cate the relative civil and mechanicaldetajts.
6.4.4 LAYOUT OF WIRING-The layout. of
wiring should be designed keeping in view*
disposition of tKe lighting system to meet the
illumination levels. Power and heating
sub-circuits shall be kept separate and distinct ,from lighting and.fan sub-circuits. All
wirings shall be done on the distributioq
system with main and branch distribution
boards at convenient physical and electrical
load centres. All types of wiring, whether
concealed or unconcealed should be as near
the ceiling as possible. In all types of wirings
due consideration shall be given for neatness
and good appearance.
6.4.5 Balancing of circuits in three-wire or
poly-phase installation shall be arranged
before hand.-Conductors shall be so enclosed
in earthed metal or incombustible insulating
material that it is dot posslbre to have ready
access to them unless the points between
which a voltage exceeding 250 volts may be
present are 2m or more apart, in which case
means of accesc: shall be marked to indicate
the voltage present.
Where terminals or other fixed live parts
be.deen which a voltage exceeding 250V
exists are housed in separate enclosures or
items of .apparatus which, although separated are within reach of each other, a notice
shall be placed in such a position that anyone
gaining access to live parts is warned of the
magnitude of the voltage that exists between
them.
NOTE ---The above requirements apply equally to threephase circuits in which the voltage between hnes or to
earth exceeds 250 vhlts and to groups of two or moF
single-phase circuits, between which medium voltage
may be present, derived therefrom. They apply also to
3-wire dc or 3-wirr single-phase ac circuits m which the
voltage betweal lines or to earth exceeds 250 ~01:s and
to groups of Z-wire circuits, between which medium voltage may be present. derived therefrom.
voltage wiring and associated

apparatus shall comply, in all respects,with
the requirements of Rules 50 and 51 and 61 of
the Indian Electricir,* Rides, t?56.
6.4.6 Medium
6.5 Conductors and Accessories
CONDUCTORS -Conductors shall be

of copper or aluminium: Conductors for
6.5.1
ltLeCTPlCALINSTAl.LAllONS
i7
\lu-2-A ,
power ,and lighting circuits shall be of

adequate size to carry the designed circuit
load without exceeding the permissible
thermal limits for the insulation. The
conductor for final sub-circuit for fan and
light wiring shall have a nominal crosssectional area not less than 1 .OO mm copper
and 1.50 mm* aluminium. The cross-sectional
area of conductor for power wiring shall be
not less than 1.50.mm copper and 2.5mm
aluminium. The minimum cross-sectional
area of conductor of flexible cord shall be
0.50 mm: copper.
6.5.2 F L E X I B L E C ABLES AND F L E X I B L E
CORDS - Unless flexible cables and cords are
protected by flexible conduits or tough rubber
or PVC sheath, they shall not be used in places
where they are liable to be subjected to
mechanical damage.
6.5.3 C ABLE ENDS -When a stranded conductor having a nominal sectional. area less
than 6mm2 is not provided with cable sockets, all strands at the exposed ends of the
cable shall be soldered together or crimped
using suitable sleeve or ferrules.
6.5.4 R ATING OF L A M P; FAN AND S O C K E T
O UTLET P OINTS -In estimating the current
to be carried by any conductor, incandescent
and fluorescent lamps shall be rated at 60
watts, ceiling fans, table fans and ordinary
socket-outlet points at 100 watts, and power
socket-outlet points at 1000 watts, unless the
actual values are known or specified.
Exhaust fans, if any, shall be rated according
to their capacity.
6.5.5 S P E C I A L RISK--Special forms of
construction, such as flameproof enclosures,
shall be adopted where there is risk oft he fire
or explosion.
6.5.7 C ONNECTION TO A N C I L L A R Y
B UILDINGS - Unless otherwise specified,
electrical connections to .ancillary buildings,
such as out-houses, garages, etc. adjacent to
the main building at a distance not greater
than 3m and when no roadway intervenes
shall be taken in an earthed Gf pipe ofsuitable
size in the exposed portion at a height of not
less than 2.5 m or by underground cables. This
applies to both runs of mains or sub-mains or
final sub-circuit wiring between the buildmgs.
When the distance between the buildings
exceeds 3 m or a roadway intervenes, separate
mains or sub-mains shall be run from the main
building to ancillary buildings and the
portion, of the same exposed to weather shall
be carried in weatherproof cable on GI bearer
wire at a height not less than 4m above the
ground or underground cable.
PART Ylll
6.5.8 EX P A N S I O N JOINTS -The conduits

shall not normally be allowed to cross
expansion joints in a building. Where such
crossing is found to be unavoidable, special
care must be taken to ensure that theconduit
runs and wiring are riot in any way. put to
strain or damaged due to expansion of
building structure.
6;6 Joints and Looping Back
6.6.1 Where looping back system of wiring is
specified, the wiring shall be done without
any junction or connector boxes on the line.
Where joint box system is specified, all joints
in conductors shall be made by means of
suitable mechanical connectors in suitable
joint boxes. Wherever practicable, looping
back system should be preferred. Whenever
practicable, only one system shall be adopted
for a building, preferably a looping back
system.
6.6.2 In any system of wiring, no bare or
twist joints shall be made at intermediate
points in the through run of cables unless the
1,ength of a final sub-circuit, sub-main or
main is more than the length of the standard
coil as given by the manufacturer of the
cable. If any jointing becomes unavoidable
such joint shall be made through propercutouts or through proper junction boxes open
to easy inspection,but in-looping back systern no such junction boxes shall be allowed.
6.6.3 Where joints in cable conductors or
bare conductors are necessary, they shall be
mechanically and electrically sound. Joints in
non-flexible cables shall be accessible for
inspection; provided that this requirement
shall not apply to joints in cables huried
underground, or joints buried or enclosed in
non-combustible building materials. Joints in
non-flexible cables shall be made by
soldering, brazing, welding or mechanical
clamps, or be of the compression type; provided that mechanical clamps shall not be
used for inaccessible joints buried or enclosed in the building structure. Allmechanical clamps and compression type sockets
shall securely retain all the wires of the
conductors. Any joint in a flexible cable or
flexible cord shall be effected by means of a
cable coupler.
6.6.4 Every joint in a,cable shall be provided
with insulation not less effective than that of
the cab!e cores and shall be protected against
moisture and mechanical damage. Soldering
fluxes which remain acidic or corrosive at the
completion of the soldering operation shall
not be used.
For joints in paper-insulated metal-sheathed
cables, .a wiped metal sleeve or joint box,
WILDING SERVICM-SECTION 2 ELKTIKAL INSTAl.LATIORS
wlr-il
filled with insulating compound, shall be
provided.
Where an aluminium conductor and a copper conductor are joihed togefher, precautions shall be taken against corrosion and
mechanical damage to the conductors.
6 . 6 . 5 PUI_I_ AI JOINTS A N D T E R M I N A L S- Every connection at a cable termination shall
be made by means of a terminal, soldering
socket, or compression type socket and shall
securely contain and anchor all the wires of
the conductor, and shall not impose any
appreciable mechanical strain on the terminal or socket.
Flexible cords shall be so connected to devices and to fittings that tension will not be
transmitted to joints or terminal screws. This
shall be accomplished by a knot in the cord,
by winding with tape, by a special fitting
designed for that purpose, or by other
approved means which will prevent a pull on
the cord from being directly transmitted to
joints or terminal screws.
6.7.3 FIXING TO WALI.S AND CEILINGSplugs for ordinary walls or ceilings shall be of
seasoned wdbd-not less than 5cm long and

2.5 cm square on the inner end and 2cm
square on the outer end. They shall be
cemented into walls to within 6.5mm of the
surface, the remainder being finished
according to the nature of the surface with
plaster or lime plugging.
6.7:4 Where owing to irregular coursing or
other reasons the plugging of the walls or
ceilings with wood plugs presents difficulties,
the wood casing. wood batten, metal conduit
or cleat (as the case may be) shall be attached
to the wall or ceiling in an approved manner.
In the case of new buildings, wherever
possible, wooden plugs shall be fixed in the
walls before they are plastered; keeping in
mind the thickness of plaster to obtain a flush
surface.
6.7.5 10 achieve neatness, plugging of walls
or ceilings may be done by an approved type
of asbestos metallic or a fibre fixing plug
(raw1 plugs).
6.7 Passing 73trough Walls and Floors
6.8 Wiring qf Dislt-ihution
6.7.1 Where conductors pass through walls,

one of the following methods shall be employed. Care shall he taken to see that wires
pass freely through protective pipe or box
and that the wires pass through in a straight
line without any twrst or cross in wires on
either ends of such holes:
6.8.1 All connections between pieces of
a) A wooden box extending through the
whole thickness of the wall shall be

buried in the wall and casings or conductors shall be carried so as to allow
1.3cm air space on three sides of the
casing or conductor.
b) The conductor shall be carried either in
a rigid steel conduit or a rigid

non-metallic conduit conforming to
accepted standards [VIII-2(18)] or in a
porcelain tube of such a si7e which permits easy drawing in.
Boards
apparatus o r b e t w e e n a p p a r a t u s a n d
terminals on a board shall be neatly arranged
in a definite sequence. following the
arrangements of the apparatus mounted
thereon, avoiding unnecessary crossings.
6.8.2 Cables shall be connected to a terminal
only by soldered or welded or crimped lugs
using suitable sleeve, lugs or ferrules unless
the terminal is of such a form that it is
possible to securely clamp them without the
cutting away of cables stands. Cables in each
circuit shall be bunched together.
6.8.3 All bare conductors shall be rigidly
fixed in such a manner that a clearance of at
l e a s t 2.5cm i s m a i n t a i n e d b e t w e e n
conductors of opposite-polarity or phase and
between the conductors and any material
other than insulation material.
6.8.4 If required, a pilot lamp shall be fixed

and connected through an independent
through floors shall be protected from
singlepole switch and fuse to the bus-bars of
mechanical injury by means of rigid steel
conduit. non-metal conduit or me- . the board.
chanical protection to a height not less *
than 1.5-m above the floors and flush with 6.8.5 In a hinged type board, the incoming
and outgoing cables shall be fixed at one or
the ceiling below. This steel conduit shall
more points according to the number of
be earthed and securely bushed.
cables on the back of the board leaving
suitable space in, between cables, and shall
6.7.2 Where a wall tube passes outside a
building so as to be exposed to weather, the also, i f p o s s i b l e , b e f i x e d a t t h e
outer end shall be bell-mouthed and turned
corresponding points on the switchboard
panel. The cables between these points shall
downwards and properly bushed on the open
be of such length as to allow the switchboard
end.
cl Insulated conductors while passing
\111.2.*0
panel to swing through on angle of not less

than 90.
6 . 9 T o u g h Ruhhcr-Sheathed
Sheathed Wiring S.wtem
be fitted on all down-drops within l.5m.

from the floor.
or PCC-
6.Y. I GENERAL. --Wiring with tough

rubber-sheathed cables is suitable for low
voltage installations. and shallnot be used in
places exposed to sun and rain nor in damp
places, unless wires are sheathed in protective
covering against atmosphere and well
protected to withstand dampness. Wiring
with PVC-sheathed cables is suitable for
medium voltage installation and may be
installed directly under exposed conditions of
sun and-rain or damp places. Where attack
from white ants is prevalent, anti-termite
treatment shall be given.
6.9.2 All sheathed cables on brick walls,
stone or plaster wallsand ceilings, steel joists,
or any structural steel work shall be run on
well-seasoned and varnished, straight teak
wood battens finished not less than IOmm
thick and the width of which is such as to suit
total widthof cables laid on the batten. Prior
to erection, these shall be painted with one
coat of varnish or suitable paint matching
with the surroundings. These battens shall be
secured to the walls and ceilings by flat-head
wood screws to wood plugs or other plugs at
an interval not exceeding 75 cm; the flat-head
wood screws shall be countersunk within
wood batten and smoothed down with file.
6.9.3 LINK C LIPS - Link clips shall conform
to accepted standards [VIII-2( Is)]. Link clips
shall be so arranged that one single clip shall
not hold more than two twin-core TRS or
PVC-sheathed cables up to I.5 mm- above
which a smgle clip shall hold a single twincore cable. The clips shall be fixed on
varnished wood battens with any rust
resisting pins or screws and spaced at
intervals of 1Ocm in the case of horizontal
runs and 15cm in the case of vertical runs.
For the wiring and runs of.pains exposed to
heat and rain, clips specially made for
outdoor use from a durable metal, resistant
to weather and atmospheric corrosion, shall
be used.
6.9.b PR O T E C T I O N O F T R S OR PVCSHI~ATHED WIRING F R O M M E C H A N I C A L
D AMAGE
a) In cases where there are chance: of .AII~

damage to the wirings, such wirings shall
be covered with sheet metal protective,
c&ering, the base of which is made flush
with the plaster orbrickwork. as the case
may be, or the wiring shall be drawn
through a conduit complying *with all
requirements of conduit wiring system
(see #6.10).
PART Y,,, BIII.DfNC
b) Such protective covering,shall in all cases
619.3 HFNI)s IN WIKI\\<; T h e w i r i n g s h a l l

not in any circumstances he bent so as to form
a right angle but shall be rounded off at the
corners to a radius not less than six times the
overall diameter of the cable.
6.9.6 BURIED CABLES -- The tough rubbersheathed cables shall not be buried directly in
plaster; where so specified, they may be taken
in teak wood charinelling of ample capacity
or cement chase or conduit buried in the wall.
6.9.7 Sl RIPPING OF
OlJrFtt
COVERING -
While cutting and stripping of the outer

covering of the cables, care shall be takenthat
the sharp edge of the cutting instrument does
not touch the rubber or PVC-sheathed
insulation of conductors. The protective outer
covering of the cables shall be stripped of1
near connecting terminals. and this protective
covering shall be maintained up to the close
proximity of connecting terminals as far as
practicable. Care shall be taken to avoid
hammering on link clips with any metal
instruments, after the cables are laid. Where
junction boxes are provided. they shall be
made moisture-proof with an approved
plastic comnound.
WOODE N' BAT-TENSAll wood batten before erection shall begiven

two coats of varnish.
6.9.8 PROTECTIONOF
6.10 Conduit Wiring System

6.10.1 S URFACE C ONDUIT W IRING S Y S T E M
WITH RIGID StEEl. CONDUITS
a) TYPEANDs~zEOFC~ND~~~~ -Allconduit
pipes shall conform to accepted standards

[VIII-2( IS)], finished with galvanized or
stove enamelled surface. All. conduit
accessories shall be of threaded type and
under no circumstance pin grip type or
clamp type accessories be used. No steel
conduit less than 16 mm in diameter shall
be used. The number of insulated
conductors that can be drawn into rigid
steel conduit are given in Table 3.
b) ERANCHINGOFCABLES -Cablescarrying
direct current may, if desired be bunched

whatever their polarity but cables carrying
alternating current, if installed in metal
conduit shall always be bunched so that
the outgoing and return cables are drawn
into the same conduit.
--Conduit pipes shall

be joined by means of screwed couplers
CONDUIT JOINTS
S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 ELE(TRI(AL INSTAI.I.APlOn(S
VIII-?.
91
TAB1.E 3 MAXIMtiM PERMISSIB1.E NUMBER OF 25OV G R A D E S I N G L E - C O R E C A B L E S

7HAI CAN BE DRAWN INTO RlGlD STEEL COXDUITS
(Clause 6.10.1)
SUE
OF
SIZE OF CO N D U I T
h
CALlI E
Nominal Cro\sSectional Area

mm
fmml
Number and Dia- / 16

20
25
32
40
50
63 3
meter (in mm)
(Number of Cables, MUX)
of Wires
ti~YY?ti~$Yv?-Y?
I.0
1; 1.12
13
I.5
I/ I.40
12
IO
12
-.
10
~~
-
2
2
_.
-
5
4
4
3
8
6
__
8
2-s
4
IO
7 I.70
16
2
35
7 2.24
._
7 2.50
50
IO
20
10
14
20
18
12
10
- - - - - -
14 - - - - - - - - - - -
--
~~
_
6
6
_
_
-
_
-
_
-
_
-
-~
--
--
2.
-- 5
NOII I
I he table \h,lwr the maxImum capacity of conduits for the simultaneously drawing of cables. The columns
headed S apply 10 runs of condu~c H hlch have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between draw-in boxes, and which do
not deflect Irom the slralght by an ;~nple of more than IY I-he columns headed B apply to runs of conduit which
dellcct Irom rhe ktralghf by an .~nglc of more than 15.
No~t 2
In ca\c an ~nspcct~cln typr draw-In box has been provided and if the cable is first drawn through one
ctrcllght condu~r. then through the draw-ln box. and then through the second straqht conduit, such systems may be
com~dcrcd 35 that 01 a \tr.~lphr ct~ndu~t even If the condulr deflects through the straight by more than 15.
screwed a c c c s s 0 r I e s
[SN VIII-2( IS)]. In iong distance
cind
only
straight
runs ol conduit. inspcxzlion type couplers
at reasonable intervals shall be provided
or r u n n i n g t h r e a d s w i t h c o u p l e r s a n d
jam-nuts (in the latter cast the bare

threadelf portion shall be treated w~f h
arIck-rorrosive preservative) shall be
provided. Threaded on conduit pipes in
all cases shall be between I I mm to
27mm long sufficient to accommodate
pipes to full threaded portion of couplers
or accessories. Cut ends of conduit pipes
shall have no sharp edges nor any burrs
left to avoid damage to the insulation of
conductors while pulling them through
such p&ides.
PROTECI-ION
A G A I N S T DAMPNEbs -- In
order to minimize condensation or

sweating inside the tube, all outlets of
conduit system shall be properly drained
and ventilated, but in such a manner as to
.prevent the ,entry of insects as far as
possible.
33
LL
\ II,-?-
PRO7ECTlON Of- C O N D U I T A G A I N S T
KL~SI ~~- The outer surface of the conduit
pipes, including all bends, unions, tees,

junction boxes, etc, forming part of the
conduit system shall be adequately
protected against rust particularly when
such system is exposed to weather. In all
cases, no bare threaded portion of
conduit pipe shall be allowed unless such
bare thceaded portion is treated with anticorrosive presenrative or covered with
suitable plastic compound.
FIXIN<; OFCONDl!IT -Conduit pipesshall
be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured
to suitable wood plugs or other plugs with
screw5 In an approved manner at an
Interval of not more than one metre, but
on either side of couplirs or bends or
similar fittings. saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 30cm from the centre of such
fittings. The saddle should not be less than
0.56mm f o r c o n d u i t s up t o 2 5 m m
diameter and not less than 0.9mm for
larger diameter.
NATIOSAL BlII.DINC (ODE
O F
JNDIA
g)
-All necessary bends

in the system including diversion shall be
done by bending pipes; or by .inserting
suitable solid or insDection tvoe normal
bends, elbows or similar fittings; or fixing
cast iron inspection boxes whichever is
more suitable. Conduit fittings shall be
avoided as far as possible on conduit
system exposed to wealher; where
necessary, solid type fittings shall be used.
Radius of such bends in conduit pipes
shall be not less than 7.5cm. No length of
conduit shall have more .than the
equivalent ,of four quarter bends frdh
out@ to outlet, the bends at the outlets
not being counted.
h)
OUTLETS--The
switch or regulator box

shall be made of metal on all sides, except
on the front. In the case of cast boltes, wall
thickness shall be atleast 3 mm and in case
of welded mild steel sheet boxes, the wall
thickness shall not be less thah 1.18mm
for boxes upto a size of 20 cm X 30 cm and
above this I .6 mm MS boxes shall be used.
Clear depth of the box shall not be less
than 60mm and this shall be increased
suitably to accommodate mounting of fan
regulators in flush pattern. All fittings
shall be filled in flush pattern. All switches
except piano key type switches, socket
outlets and fan regulators shall be fixed on
wooden/metal strips which shall be
screwed or welded to the box.
C O N D U C T O R S -All conductors used in

conduit wiring shall preferably be
stranded. No single-core cable of nominal
cross-sectional area greater than 130 mm*
enclosed alone in a conduit andused for
alternating current.
m)
BENDS IN CONDUIT
ERECTION AND EARTHING OF CONDUIT -
The conduit of each circuit orsection shall

be completed before conductors are
drawn in. The entiresystem of conduit
after erection shall be tested for
mechanical and electrical contin,uity
throughout and permanently connected to
earth conforming to the requirements as
already specified by means of suitable
earthing clamp efficiently fastened to
c nduit pjpe in a workman like manner
f r a perfect contimty between each wire
ind conduit. Gas or water pipes shall not
be used as earth medium. If conduit pipes
are liable to mechanical damage they shall
be adequately protected. In a conduit
system pipe must be continuous when
passing through walls or floors.
lnspeetion type conduit fittings,-such as
inspection boxes, draw boxes, bends.
elbows and tees shall be so installed that
they can remain accessible for such
?ART
till
BUILDING SCRVICFS-SECTION
2 El.C<TRKAI.
purposes as to withdrawal of .existmg

cables or the installing of traditional
cables.
6 . 7 0 . 2 RE C E S S E D C O ND U I T W I R I N G
SYSTEM WI T H RGID ST E EL Comut-rRecessed conduit wiring system shall comply
with al! the requirements for surface conduit
wiring system specified in 6.10.1 (a) to Q)
and in addition, conform to the requirements
specified below:
4 M A K I N G OF C H A S E- - T h e chase in the
wall shall be neatly made and be of ample
dimensions to permit the conduit to be
fixed in the manner desired. In the case of
buildings under construction, chases shall
be provided in the wall, ceiling, etc. at the
time of their con&uction and shall be
filled up neatly after erection of conduit
and brought to the original finish of the
wall. In case of exposed brick/rubble
masonry work, special care shall be taken
to fix the conduit and accessories in
position along with the building work.
FIXING
OF CONDUIT IN CHAFE-The
b)
conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of
staples or by means of saddlesnot more
than 60cm apart. Fixing of standard
bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as
practicable and all curves maintained by
bending the conduit pipe itself with a long
radius which will permit easy drawing-in
of conductors..-AIll threaded joints of rigid
steel conduit shall be treated with
preservative compound to secure
protection against rust.
INSPE
C T I ON BOXES -Suitable inspection
4
boxes shall be provided to permit
periodical inspection and to facilitate
removal of wires, if necessary. These shall
be mounted flush with the wall. Suitable
veniilafing holes shall be provided in the
inspection box covers. The minimum
sizes of inspection boxes shall be 75 mm X
75mm. Minimum 65mm depth boxes
shall be used in roof slabs and the depth
of boxes in other places shall be in
accordance with good practice
[VW2(20)].
TYPkS OF ACCESSORIES TO BE USED --All
outlet, such as switches and wall sockets,.

may be either of flush mounting type or
of surface mounting type.
i) FLU.SH M O U N T I N G TYPE-All f l u s h
mounting outlets shall be of cast-iron
or mild steel boxes with a cover of
insulating material or shall be. a box
made of a suitable insulating material.
The switches and other outlets shall be
mounted on such boxes. Tht! metal
box shall be efficiently earthed withconduit by a suitable means of earth
attachment.
lNSTAI.l.ATIOSS
vIII-?.ad
ii) SURFACE MOUNTING TYPE-If Surface

mounting type outlet box is specified,
it shall be of any suitable insulating
material and outlets mounted in an
approved manner.
6.10.3 NON - METALLIC S URFACE C O N D U I T
W IRING
TYPE AND SIZE OF CONDUITS--All
rigid non-metallic conduits used shall
conform to accepted standards [VIII-2( IS)]
and shall be used with c o r r e s p o n d i n g
accessories [see VIII-2(20)]. All flexible nonmetallic conduits shall conform to accepted
standards [VIII-2( 18)]. The conduits shall
provide adequate mechanical protection for
the enclosed cables. The interior of the
conduits shall be free from obstructions.
6./0.3.f
Flexible non-metallic conduits shall be used

only at terminations, wherever specified.
The conduits shall be circular in crosssection. The conduits shall be designated by
their nominal outside diameter.
The dimensional details of Kigid nonmetallic conduits are given in Table 4.
The conduit wiring system shall be complete
in all respect including accessories.
No non-metallic conduit less than 20mm in
diameter shall be used.
6.10.3.2 C O N D U I T A C C E S S O R I E S - Kigid
conduit accessories shall be normally of grip
type. Flexible conduit accessories shall be of
threaded type.
6.10.3.3 WIRING CAPACITY - The maximum

number of PVC insulated alumjnium
conductor cable of 250 voltage grade that can
be drawn in one conduit of various sizes is
given in Table 4.
6 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 B U N C H I N G O F CABI.ES -For e a s e o f
maintenance, cables carrying direct current
or alternating current shall always be
bunched so that the out-going and return
cables are drawn into the same conduits.
6.10.3.5 CONDUIT .lOINTS --All joints shall
b e sealedicemented w i t h a n a p p r o v e d
cement. Damaged conduit pipes/ fittings
shall not be used on the tiork. Cut ends of
conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges nor
any burrs left to avoid damage to the
insulation of conductors while pulling them
through such pipes.
The Engineer-in-Charge with a view to
ensuring that the above provision has been
carried out may require that the separate
lengths of conduit,etc,after they have been
prepared, shall be submitted for inspection
before being fixed.
6.10.3.6
PRO7ECFION
AGAINST C O N D E N S A -
TION-
The layout of conduit should be such

that any condensation or sweating inside the
conduit is drained out. Suitable precaution
shall also be taken to prevent entry of insects
inside the conduit.
6.10.3.7 P.AINTING - After installation all
accessable surface of metallic-accessories
shall be painted.
1ABL.E 4 MAXIMUM PERMISSIB1.E NlMBFR OF 250 VOI:IS GRADE SINGL.E~CORE

MAY BE DRAWN IN.10 RIGID NOS.MF 1 Al l.I( COKl)Ill-S
SlZt OF
SI/I Ot
CABI F
CO\l)tLl t (mm)
fi
Nommal CrossSecttonal Area

mm
I
.o
I-S
CABLES THAT
Number and
Diameter (in
mm) of Wires
r16
xl
2.5
Vumher ol cables. .k!ax)
32
40
50
I I.121
I3
IO
2Q
I4
I.40
2.5
( I 1.80)
( 3 1.06)
IO
I4
(I, 2.24)
(7.0,85*)
IO
14
(I 2.80)
( 7 1.40)
II
IO
( I 3.5st1
(7 I40*)
I2
I6
7 I.70
25
7 2.24
35
7 2.50
50
7 3.0ot
I9 I.80
-.
*For copper rondurtors onl!

For alummlum conductor\ only.
vttt.2.24
_
_
._
NATIONAL
Bt ILDIYC <DDE OF ISDIA
6.10.3.8 FIXING OF CONDUIT
4 Conduit pipes shall, be fixed by heavy
gauge non-metallic saddles, secured to

suitable wood plugs or other approved
plugs with screws in an approved manner
at an interval of not more than 6Ocm. but
on either side of couplers or bends o r
similar fittings saddles shall be fixed at a
closer distance from the centre of such
fittings.
b) Where conduit pipes are to be laid along
the trusses, steel joists, etc, the same shall

be secured by means of ordinary clips or
girder clips as required by the Engineerin-Charge where it is not possible to drill
holes in the truss members, suitable
clamps with bolts and nuts shall be used.
The width and the thickness of the
ordinary clips or girder clips shall not be
less than as stated below:
For clamps or ordinary clips:

Size of
Con&it
20-25 m m
32 mm and
Width of
Saddle C?ip
Thkkness
q/ (lip
I9 mm
25 mm
O.Y2 mm
0.12 mm
above
6 . 1 0 . 3 . 9 Girde, c/rp~~-~ For all sizes 01
conduit. the sire ofclamping rod may be 7 mm
diameter.
6.10.3.9 B EN DS IN coNDi;Ir -All bends i n
the system may be formed either by bending
the pipes by an approved method of heaiing
or by inserting suitable accessories such as
bends, elbows or similar fittings or by fixing
non-metallic inspection boxes whichever is
most suitable. Where necessary solid type
fittings shall be used.
Radius of bends in conduit pipes shall not be
less than 7.5cm. No length of conduit shall
have more than the equivalent of four
quarter bends from outlet to outlet.
Care shall be taken while bending the pipes to
ensure that the conduit pipe is not injured and
that the informal diameter is not effectively
reduced.
6.10.3 10 OUTLETS -The switch box shall
be made of either rigid PVC moulding or
mild steel or cast iron on all sides except at
the front.
PVC boxes- shall conform to accepted
standards [VIII-2(20)] These boxes shall be
free from burrs, fins and internal roughness.
The thickness of the walls and base of PVC
boxes shall be not less than 2mm. The clear
depth of PVC boxes shall not be less than
50 mm.
PART
The specifications ror meraruc ooxes shall be

as per requirements of 6.10.1(h).
The regulator boxes shall h6wever be made
of only mild steel or cast iron.
The phenolic laminated sheet govers for all
All tittings shall be fitted in flush pattern.
6.10.3.11
ERECTION OF CONDUIT AND

EARTHING OF METALLIC ACCESSORIES -
The erection of conduits of each circuit shall

be completed before the cables are drawn-in.
An earth continuity conductor shall be
drawn inside the conduit to provide for
earthing of noncurrent carrying metallic
parts of the installation. Gas or water pipe
shall not be used as earth medium.
6.10.3.12 SPECIAL. PRECAUTIONS-If the
pipes are liable to mechanical damages, they
should be adequately protected.
Non-metallic conduit shall not be used for
the following applications:
a) in concealed; inaccessible places of
combustible construction where aabient
temperature exceeds 60C;
b) in places where ambient temperature is
less than 5C;
cl for suspension of fluorescent fittings and
other fixtures; and

d) in the areas exposed to sunlight.
6.10.4 NON-MEIALLIC
W IRING SvsrtM
RECESSED C O N D U I T
6.10.4.1 Recessed non-metallic conduit

wiring system shall comply with all the
requirements of surface non-metallic conduit
wiring system specified in 6.103. I to 6.10.3.12
except 6.10.3.8. In addition, the following
requirements 6. /0.4.2 to 6.10.4.6 also shall be
complifd with.
6.10.4.2 FIXING OF CONDUIT IN CHASEThe conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of
stapples or by means of non-metallic saddles
placed at not more than 80cm apart or by
any other approved means of fixing. Fixing
of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided
as far as practicable and all curves shall be
maintained.by sending the conduit pipe itsdlf
with a long radius which will permit easy
drawing in of conductors. At either side of
bends, saddles/stapples shall be fixed at a

distance of 15cm from the centre of bends.
I N S P E C T IO N BOXES - S u i t a b l e
inspection boxes to the, nearest minimum
requirements shall be provided to permit
periodical inspection and to facilitate
6.10.4.3
VIII Bl!II.UIN(j SERVKM--SECTION 2 EI.L(TRM Al. INSTAI.I.ATIONS
II,.*3
replacement of wires, if necessary. The

inspection junction boxes shall be mounted
flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Where
necessary deeper. boxes of suitable
dimensions shall be used. Suitable ventilating
holes shall be provided in the inspection box
covers, where required.
6.10.4.4 The outlet boxes such as switch
boxes, regulator boxes and their phenolic
laminated sheet covers shall be as per
requirements of 6.10.3. I(h).
They shall be mounted flush with the wall.
6.10.4.5
TYPES
OF
A(cESSoKIrS TO
R F
All outlets such as switches. wall

sockets, etc. may be either flush mounting
type or of surface mounting type.
USED---
above shall preferably be provided with interlocked type

switch.
7.2.4 In an earthed system of supply, a

socket-outlet with plug shall be of three-pin
type with.the third terminal connected to the
earth. When such socket-outlets with plugs
are connected to any current consuming
device of metal or any non-insulating
material or both, conductors connecting such
current-consuming devices shall be of flexible
cord with an earthing core and the earthing
core shall be secured by connecting between
the earth terminal of plug and the body of
current-consuming devices.
In industrial premises three phase and
neutral socket-outlets shall be provided with
a earth terminal either of pin type or
scrapping type in addition to tht: main pins
required for the purpose.
7. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

7.1 Ceiling Hoses and Similar Attachments
7.1.1 A ceiling rose or any other similar
attachment shall not be used on a circuit the
voltage of which normally exceeds 25OV.
7.2.5 In wiring installations, metal clad

switch, socket-outlet and plugs shall be used
for power wiring.
?iOlt A
recommended schedule of socket-outlets in a

rcsldential bulldog IS given below:
7.l.2 Normally, only one flexible cord shall

be attached to a ceilmg rose E>cciaIIy
designed ceiling roses shall be used for
multiple pendants.
7.1.3 A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse
terminal as an integral part of It.
7.2 Socket-Outlets and Phqy -- Each I5 A
socket-outlet provided in bulldings for the
use of domestic appliances such as airHater cooler. etc. shall he
conditioner.
provided with Its obn mdl\ldual fuse. with
suitable discrimination with back-up fuse or
miniature circuit-breaker prmlded In the
distribution, sub-distribution board. The
(one
for .each)
I per IOm
socket-outlet shall not necessarily embody

the fuse as an integral part of it.
7.3 Lighting Fittings
7.2.1 Each socket-outlet shall also be
controlled by a switch which shall preferably
be located immediately adjacent thereto or
combined therewith.
7.2.2 The switch controlling the socketoutlet shall be on the live side of the line.
7.2.3 Qrdinary socket-outlet may be fixed at
any convenient place at a height above 20cm
from the floor level and shall be away from
danger of mechanical injury.

NoTE~I~ situations where a socket-outlet is accessible
to children, it is necessary to install an interlocked plug
and socket or alternatively a socket-butkt which
automatically gets screened by the withdrawal of plug.
In industrial premises socket-outlet of rating 2OA and
Vlll-2-26
7.3.1 A switch shall be provided for control

of every lighting fitting or a group of lighting
fittings. Where control at more than one
point is necessary as many two way or
intermediate switches may be provided as
there are control points.
7.3.2 In industrial premises lighting fittings
Shall be su ported by suitable pipe/conduits,

brackets Pabricated from structural steel,
steel chains or similar materials depending
upon the type and weight of the fittings.
Where a lighting fitting is supported by
one or more flexible -cords, the maximuq
weight to which the twin flexible cords may
be subjected shall be as follows:
N A T I O N A L IJUILDIN~ (DDE 6F INDIA
.
..
Nominal
crossSecrional Area
of Twin
Flexible
Cord
Number
and Diameter in
mm of
Wires
mm*
8%
I:0
1.5
2.5
4
composition or other material approved

for the purpose. Hand lamps shall be
equipped with a substantial guard
attached to the lampholder or handle.
Metallic guards shall be earthed suitably.
b) A bushing or the .equivalent shall be
provided where flexible cord enters the
base or stem of portable lamp. The
bushing shall be of insulating material
unless a jacketted type of cord is used.
cl All wiring shall be free from short-circuits
and shall be tested for these defects prior
to being connected to the circuit.
d) Exposed live parts within porcelain
fixtures shall be suitably recessed and so
located as to make it improbable that
wires will come in contact with them.
There shall be a spacing of at least
125 mm between live parts and the
mounting plane of the fixture.
Maximum
Permissible
Weight
* 4
1610.2
24 10.2
3210.2
4810.2
8Oi 0.2
128iO.2
3
5.:
8.8
14.0
7.3.3 No flammable shade shall form a part

of lighting fittings unless such shade is well
protected against all risks of fire. Celluloid
shade or lighting fitting shall not be used
under any circumstances.
7.3.4 General and safety requirements for

electrical lighting fittings shall be in
accordance with good practice [VIII-2(21)].
7.8 Fans, Regulators and Clamps

.7.8.1 CEILING F ANS
7.3.5 The lighting fittings shall conform to

accepted standards [VIII-2(9)].
-Ceiling fans including

their suspension shall conform to accepted
standards [VllI-2(24)] and to the following
requirements:
7.4 Fitting- Wire--The use of fittings-wire

shall be restricted to the internal wiring of the
lighting fittings. Where fittings-wire is used
for wiring fittings, the sub-circuit loads shall
terminate in a ceiling rose or box with
connectors from which they shall be carried
into the fittings.
4 Control of a ceiling fan shall be through
7.5 Lumpholders--Lampholders for use on

brackets and the like shall be in.accordance
with accepted standards [VIII-2(22)] and all
those for use with flexible pendants shall be
provided with cord grips. All lampholders
shall be provided with shade carriers. Where
centre-contact Edison screw lampholders are
used, !he outer or screw contacts shall be
connected to the middle wire, the neutral, the
earthed conductor of the circuit.
7.6 Outdoor Lumps-External and road
lamps shall have weatherproof fittings of
approved design so as to effectivelyljrevent
the ingress of moisture and dust. Flexible cord
and cord grip lampholders shall not be used
where exposed to weather. In verandahs and
similar exposed situations where pendants are
uspd, these. shall be of fixed rod type.
7!7 Lumps-All lamps unless otherwise
required and suitably protected, shall be
hung at a height. of not less than 2.5 m above
the floor _kvel. All electric lamps and
accessories shall conform to accepted
staitdards [VIII-2(23)].
a) Portabk lamps shall be wired with
flexible cord. Hand lamps shall be
equipped with a handle of moulded
PART VIII WlLDINC
,
S~3WICFS--Sf?CTl0N
IWXTRICAI.
its own regulator as well as a switch in

series.
b; All ceiling fans shall be wired with normal
wiring to ceiling roses .or to special
connector boxes to which fan rod wires
shall be connected and suspended from
hooks or shackels with insulators between
hooks and suspension rods. lhere shall be
no joint in the suspension rod, butifjoints
are unavoidable then such joints shall be
screwed to special couplers of Scm
minimum length and both ends of the
pipes shall touch together within the
couplers, and shall in addition be secured
by means of split pins; alternatively, the
two pipes may be welded. The suspension
rod shall be of adequate strength to
withstand the dead and impact forces
imposed on it. Suspension rods should
preferably be procured along with the fan.
d Fan clamps shall be of suitable design
according to the nature of construction of

ceiling on which these clamps are to be
fitted. In all cases fan clamps shall be
fabricated from new metal of suitable
sizes and they shall be as close fitting as
possible. Fan clamps for reinforced
concrete roofs shall be buried with the
casting and due care shall be taketi that
they shall serve the purpose. Fan clamps
for wooden beams, shall be of suitable
flat iron fixed on, two sides of the beam
and according to the size and sectiou of
~NSTALLkTlONS
VIII-2--
the beam one or two mild steel bolts
than 2.4m. The minimum clearance
passing through the beam shall hold both

flat irons together. Fan clamps for steel
joist shall be fabricated from flat iron to
fit rigidly to the bottom flange of the
beam. Care shall.. be taken during
between the ceiling and the plane of the

blades shall be not less than 3OOmm.
fabrication that the metal does not crack

while hammering to shape. Other fan
clamps shall be made to suit the position,
but in all cases care shall be taken to see
that they are rigid and safe.
A Typical arrangement of a fan clamp is
given in Fig.,
NOTE-AH
fan clamps shall be so fabricated that fans

revolve steadily
7 . 8 . 2 E X H A U S T F A N S - F o r fixing of an
exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be provided
in the wall to suit the size of the frame which
shall be fixed by means of rag-bolts
embedded in the wall. The hole shall be
neatly plastered with cement and brought to
the original finish of the wall. The exhaust
fan shall be connected to exhaust fan point.
which shall be wired as near to the hole as
possible by means of a flexible cord, care
being taken that the blades rotate in the
proper direction.
7.9 Artachmenr of Fittings and Accessories
7.9.1 In wiring other than conduit wiring, all
ceiling roses, brackets, pendants and
accessories attached to walls or ceilings shall
be mounted on substantial teak wood blocks
twice varnished after all fixing holes are
made in them. Blocks shall npt be less than
4 cm deep. Brass screws shall only be used for
attaching fittings and accessories to their
base blocks.
7.9.2 Where teak or hardwood boards are
used for mounting switches, regulators, etc,
these boards shall be well varnished with
pure shellac on ail four sides (both inside and
outside), irrespective of being painted to
match the surroundings. The size of such
boards shall depend on the number of
accessories that could conveniently and
neatly be arranged. Where there is danger of
attack by white ants, the boards shall be
treated with suitable anti-termite compound
and painted on both sides.
2B
Slab with Beam
All dimensions in millimetres.

NOTE
I - RCC slab steel reinforcement not shown.
NOTE 2 - Fan clamp shall be placed in position such

that its projecting arms in the line of lenght of beam.
Fig, 2 Tvpical Design of Fan Clamps
4 Canopies on top and bottom of
suspension rods shall effectively conceal

suspensions and connections to fan
motors, respectively.
e) The lead-in-wire shall be of nominal
cross-sectional area not less than 1 .O mm*

copper or l.5mm2 aluminium and shall
be protected from abrasion.
Unless otherwise specified, the clearance
between the bottom most point. of the
ceiling fan and the floor shall be not less
vIII-2-L0
7.10 Inrerchangeabilily-Similar part of all

switches, lampholders, distribution fuseboards, ceiling roses, brackets, pendants,
fans and all other fittings shall be so chosen
that they are of the same type and interchangeable in each installation.
7.11 Equipmenr-Electrical equipment
which form integral part of wiring intended
for switching or control or protection of
wiring installations shall conform to the
relevant Indian Standards wherever they
exist.
7.12 Fannage
7.12.1 Where ceiling fans are provided, the
bay sizes of a building, which control fan
point locations, play an important part.
7.12.2 Fans normally cover an area of 9 m2 to
10 m2 and therefore in general purpose office
NATIONAL WILDING COOE OF INDIA
buildings, for every part of a bay tobe served

by the ceiling fans, it is necessary that the bays
shall be so designed that full number of fans
could be suitably located for the bay,
otherwise it will result in ill-ventilated
pockets. In general, fans in long halls may be
spaced at 3m in both the directions. If
building modules do not lend themselves for
proper positioning of the required number of
ceiling fans, other types of fans, such as air
shall be provided although result will be

disproportionate to cost on account of fans.
circulators or bracket fans would have to be

employed for the areas uncovered by the
ceiling fans. For this, suitable electrical outlets
7.12.4 Exhaust fans are necessary for spaces,

such as community toilets, kitchens and
canteens, and godowns to provide tbe
7.12.3 Proper air circulation could be

achieved either by larger number of snialler
fans or smaller number of-larger fans. The
economics of the system as a whole should be
a guiding factor in choosiiig the number and
type of fans and their locations.
6.30mm MS ROD7
/Cl COVER HINGED
3cm-rl ,_
/ /
TOCl FRAME
CEMENT CONCRETE
.25cm
1 l2.7mm4
II
;y.ol
I.:..:.
. .2.. :, ,*_ , .s
i:
I
,J
(
CHARCOAt
LAY,7
l/l
1.25m
2.km
IYrnm 4 GI P I P E
M,iN
12mm4 ,c
HOLE -J
NOTE
-Three or four buckets of water lo be ~OUKXI into sump everyfewdaysto keep thesoilsurroundmgtheearth
or pipe permanently moist.
p&te
Fig. 3 Pip L&thing

I-AR, VIII BI!II.D#NC SIXIVKXS-SECTION
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS
V,llP
required number ol air changes (see Part VII I

Building services, Section 1 Lighting and
ventilation). Since the exhaust fans are
located generally on the outer walls of a
room, appropriate openings in such walls
shall be provided fopin the planning stage.
7.12.5 Positioning of fans and light fittings
shall be chosen to make these effective
without causing shadows on the working
planes.
8, EARTHING
8.1 Gene&-The object of an earthing
sys!em is to provide as nearly as possible a
system o! conductors at a uniform potential
and as nearly zero or absolute earth potential
as possible. lhc purpose of this is to ensure
that in general all parts of apparatils other
than live parts shall be at earth potential as
630mm MS ROD
wel! as to ensure that persons coming in

contact with rt shall also beat earth potential
at. all times.
8.1.1 Earthing associated with current-
carrying conductor is normally essential for

the security of the system and is generally
known as system earthing, while earthing of
non-current carrying. metal work and
conductor is essenttal for the safety of human
life, of animals and of property and it is
generally known as equipment earthing.
8.2 EorrA El~trodcs -- Earth electrode
either in the form of pipe electrode or plate
eiectrode should be provided at all premises
for providing an earth system. Details of
typical pipe and plate earth electrodes are
grven in Fig. 3 and 4.
8.3 As far ds possibie. all earth connections
shall he visible for inspection and shall be
I COVER HINGED
TO Cl FRAME
c0tENf
CONCRETE
12.9 mm 9
r GI PIPE
BOLT. NUT. CHECK WJT

AHD WASHER TO BE OF
COPPER FOR COPPER PuTE
AW W FOR Gl PLATE -
60~60cmfiS~Xtrnrn
60 x 6Ccm E 3-15
COPPER PLATE
E N L A R G E D DETAIL A
.
. i
carefully made; if they are poorly made or

indequate for the purpose for which they are
intended, loss of life and property or serious
personal injury may result.
8.4 Equipment and Portions of Installations
which shall be Earthed
8.4.1 E QUIPMENT TO BE EARTHED - Except
for equipment provided with double
insulation, all the non-current carrying metal
parts of electrical installations are to be
earthed properly. All metal conduits,
trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear,
distribution fuseboards, lighting fittings and
all other parts made of metal shall be bended
toghether and connected by means of two
separate and distinct conductcrs to an
efficient earth electrtode.
8.4.2 S T R U C T U R A L ME T A L W O R K Earthing of the metallic parts shall not be
effected through any structural metal work
which houses the installation. Where metallic
parts of the installation are not required to be
earthed and are liable to become alive should
the insulations of conductors become
defective, such metallic parts shall be
separated by durable non-conducting
material from any.structural work.
8.5 System of Earthing - Equipment and
p.ortions of installations shall be deemed to be
earthed only if earthed in accordance with
either the direct earthing system, the multiple
earthed neutral system or the earth,leakage
circuit-breaker system. In all cases,the relvant
provisions of Rules 33 and 61 of theIndiun
Electricity Rules, 1956 (see Appendix B) shall
be complied with.
8.6 The earthing of electrical installations for
non-industrial and industrial buildings shall
[vlll-2(3s)J.
9.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF

INSTALLATION
9. I General Requirements
9.1 .i Before the completed installation, or an
addtion to the existing installation, is put into
ser ice, inspection and testing shall be carried
oui in accordance with the Indian Electricig
Rules. 1956. In the event of defects being
found, these shall be rectified. as soon as
practicable and the installation retested.
9.1.2 Periodic inspection and testing shall be
carried out in order to maintain the
installation in a sound condition af$r putting
into service.
9.1.2 Where an addition is to be made to the
fixed wiring of an existing installation, the
PAW 1 III SIILPiN(;
SERVKlli-SfCTlOh
2 ELFKTRICAL
latter shall be examined for compliance with

the recommendations of the Code.
911.4 The individual equipment and
matterials which form part of the installation
shall generally conform to the relevant
Indian Standard Specification whereever
applicable. If there is no relevant Indian
Standard Specification for any item, these
shall be approved by the appropriate
authority.
9.1.5 C OMPLETION D RAWINGS - O n
completion of the electric work, a wiring
diagram shall be prepared and submitted to
the engineer-in-charge or the owner. All
wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly, the
main switch board, the runs of various mains
and submains and the position of all points
and their controls. All circuits shall be clearly
indicated and numbered in the wiring
diagram and all points shall be given the
same number as the circuit in which they are
electrically connected. Also the location and
number of earth points and the run of each
loads should bc clearly shown in the
completion drawings.
9.2 Inspection of the Installation
9.2.1 GE N E R A L -- On completioin of wiring
a general inspection shall be carried out by
competent persofin31 in- order to varify that
the provisions of this Code and that of Indian
Electricit)* Rules, 1956 have been complied
with. This, among other things. shall include
checking whether all equipments, fittings,
accessories, wires/ cables, used in the
installation are of adequate rating and
quality to meet the requirement of the load.
General workmanship of the electrical wiring
with regard to the layout and finish shall be
examined for neatness that would facilitate
easy identification of circuits of the system,
adequacy of clearances, soundness, contact
pressure and contact area. A complete check
shall also be made of all the protective
devices, with respect to their ratings, range of
settings and co-ordination between the
various protective devices.
9.2.2
ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
9.2.2.1 SUBSTATION INSTALLATIONS - In

substation intallations, it shall be checked
whether:
I)
The installatton has been carried out in

accordance with the approved drawings;
2) Phase to phase *and phase to earth
clearances are provided as required;
3) All equipments are efficiently earthed
and properly connected to the required
number of earth electrodes;
INSTALLATlONS
VIII-21
4J
5)
6)
7j
The requued ground clearance to liveterminals is provided;

Suitable fencing is provided with gate
with lockable arrangements;
The required number of caution boards
tire-fighting equipments, operating rods,
rubber mats, etc, are kept in the
substation;
ln case of indoor substation sufficient
ventilation and draining arrangements
are made;
All cable trenches are provided with noninflammable covers;
Pree accessibility is provided for all
equipments for normal operation;
All name plates are fixed and the
equipments are fully painted;
A l l c o n s t r u c t i o n materia1.s a n d
temporary connections are removed;
Oil-level, bus bar tightness, transformer
tap position, etc. are in order;
Earth pipe. troughs and cover slabs are
provided for earth electrodes/earth pits

alld the neutral and LA earth pits are
marked for easy identification;
14) Earth electrodes are of GI pipes or Cl
pipes Jr copper piates. For earth

connections. brass bolts arrd nuts with
lead washers are provided in the
pi[Jes, pk+teS;
15) Earth pipe troughs and oil surnps~ pits are
free from rubbish and dirt and stone jelly

and the earth connections are visible and
easily accessible;
tll and LT panels and switchgears are all
vermin and damp-proof and all unused
openings or holes are blocked properly;
17) lhe e a r t h b u s b a r s h a v e t i g h t
18)
connections and corrosion-free joint

surfaces;
Control switch-fuses are provided at an
accessible height from ground;
1)) Auequate headroom is available in the

transformer room for easy topping-up of
oil, maintenance, etc;
20) Safety devices. horizontal and vertical
barriers. bus bar covers; shrouds,

automatic safety shutters/doors
interlock. handle interlock arc safe and in
reliable operation in all panels and

cubicles;
21) Clearaces in the front, rear and sides of
the mais HV and LT and sub-switch
boards are adequate;
23) The switches operate freely; the 3 blades
make contact at the same time, the arcing
horns contact in advance; and the handles
are provided with locking arrangements;
24) Insulators are free from cracks, and are

clean;
25) In transformers, there. is any oil lcalr;
26) Connections to bushing in transformers
for tightness and good contact;
27) Bushings are free from cracks and are
clean;
28) Accessories of transformers like
breathers, vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc,
are in order;
29) Connections to gas relay in trahsformers
are in order;
30) Oil and winding temperature are set for
specific requirements in transformers;
31) In case of cable tellers, a d e q u a t e
arrangements to pump out water that has
entered due to seepage or other reasons;
and
32) All incoming and outgoing circuits of HT
and LT panels are clearly and indelibly
labelled for identifications.
9.2.2.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE INSTALLATION -
In medium voltage installtions, it shall be

checked whether:
I) All blocking materials that are used for
safe transportation in switchgears,
contactors, relays, etc. are removed;
2) All connections to the earthing system
are feasible for periodical inspcctlon;
3) Sharp cable bends are avoided and cables
arc taken in a smooth manner in the
trenches or alongside the walls and

ceilings using suitable support clamps at
regular intervals;
Suitable
linked switch or circuit breaker
4)
or lockable push b,utton is provided near
the motors/apparatus for controlling
supply to the motor/apparatus in an

easily accessible location;
5) Two separate and distinct earth connections are provided for the motor
apparatus;
6) Control switch-fuse is provided at an
accessible height from ground for
controlling supply to overhead travelling
crane, hoists, overhead bus bar trunking;
7) The metal rails on which the crane
travels are electrically continuous and
earthed and bonding of rails and
earthing at both ends are done;
8) Four core cables are used for overhead
travelling crane and portable
equipments, the fourth core being used
for earthing, and separate supply for
lighting circuit is taken,
9) If flexible metallic hose is used for wiring
to motors and other equipment, tk
NATIONAL
BUILLUNC COOE OF INDIA
wiring is enclosed to the full lengths, and

the hose secured properly by approved
means;
10) The cables are not taken through areas
where they are likely to be damaged or
chemically affected;
11) The screens and armours of the cables
are earthed properly;

12) The belts of the belt driven equipments
are properly guarded;
13) Adequate precautions are taken to
ensure that no live parts are so exposed
as to cause danger;
14) Ammeters and voltmeters are tested, and
1% The relays are inspected visually by
moving covers for deposits of dusts or
other foreign matter.
9.2.2;3 O V E R H E A D LINES -- F o r o v e r h e a d
lines it shall be checked whether:
1) All conductors and apparatus including

live parts thereof are inaccessible;
2) The types and size of supports arc

suitable for the overhead lines/conductors used and are in accordance with
approved drawing and standards;
3) Clearances from ground level to the
from the overHead lines, cut-outs of

adequate capacity are provided.
9.2.2.4 I.IGCIrINci CIKCLIIS - -The lighting
circuits shall be checked whether:
1) Wooden boxes and panels arc avoided in
factories for mounting the ligh!ing
boards and switch controls. elc;
2) Neutral links are provided in douhle pole
switch-fuses which are used lor lighting
control. and no fuse is provided in the
neutral;
3) The plug points in the lighting circuit are
all of 3:pin type, the third pin being
suitably earthed;
4) Tamper-proof interlocked switch socket
and plug are used for locations easily
accessible;
5) L.ighting wiring in factory area is taken
enclosed in conduit and conduit properly
earthed. or alternatively, armoured cable
wiring is used:
6) A separate earth wire is run in the
lighting installation tn provide earthing

for plug points, tixtures and equipments;
7) Proper connectors and junction hnxcs
are used wherever joints arc tc hc made

in -conductors or cross o v e r o f
conductors takes piace;
lowest conductor of overhead lines, sag

conditions, etc, are in accordance with
the relevant standard;
81 Cartridge fuse units are fitted with
4) Where overhead lines cross the roads or

cross each other or are in proximity with
one another, suitable guarding is
provided at road crossings and also to
protect against possibility of the lines
coming in contact with one another;
boards. switchboards, sub-main hosrds

and switches as necessary;
5) Every guard wire is properly earthed;

6) The type, size and suitability of the
guarding arrangement provided is
adequate;
7) Stays are provided suitably on the overhead lines as required and are efficiently
earthed or provided with suitable stay
insulators of suitable voltages;
8) Anti-climbing devices and Danger
Board/ Caution Board Notices are
provided on all HT supports;
9) Clearances along the route are checked
and all obstructions s u c h a s
trees/ branches and shrubs are cleared on

the route to the required distance on
either side;
10) Clearance between the live conductor
and the earthed metal parts are
adequate; and
11) For the service connections tapped-off
?ART WI
UIlDlNC SERVICES--SECTIOd
cartridge fuses only;

9) C l e a r anC permznerlt i d e n t i f i c a t i o n
marks ilre painted in all distriblltion
10) Tk pol:rrity having heen checked ant{ PII
fuws and single pole switches are

connected on the phz$e conductor only
and wiring i5 correctly connected tn
socket-outlets;
111 S p a r e k n o c k o u t s p r o v i d e d i n
distribution boards and switch fllses sre
blocked,
12) The ends of conduits enclosin,g the
wiring leads are provided with ebonite or
other suitable bushes;
13) The fittings and fixtures used for out-
door use are all of weather-proof

construction, and similarly, fixtures.
fittings and switchgears used in the
hazardous area are of flame-oronf
application;
14) Proper terminal connectors are used for
termination of wires (conductors and
earth leads) and all strands are insrrrted
in the terminals;
15) Flat ended screws are used for fixing
conductor to the accessories,
2 ELECTRIC4L INSTAl.LATlONS
vIII-2--~-
16) I.lse of flat washers backed up by spring

wa\herc for making end connections is
de\iril hlc.
any class of insuiation, the polarization

index should be greater than 1.5.
9.-f.?._? CAHLES -Cable installations shall be
checked as below:
Y.3 I (il \I ~41 - After i n s p c c i i o n , t h e

lollowing tcits shall be carried out. before an
inst;lllatlon or an addition to the existing
instllation IS put into service. Any testing of
the electrical Installation in an ahead!
cxikting installation shall commence after
obtaining permit to work from the engineerln.-cll;irgc and after ensuring t h e s a f e t y
provIsions.
YJ._? I IS I I u(;
o..i._l./ ~u~~~tt~o~t~t)~ .- HI a n d 1.T
\uirchhoardx
Iiltlrc;ltcd
shall bc tcstcd in the manner
hc!ou:
I) All high koltagc switchboards shall be

tchtcd lor diclcctrio t e s t a s per good
practice 1 VIII-1(26)].
2) All earth &.onnections shall be checked

for continuity.
3) ~Il:c opcratiolr of a,ll protective devices

sh~l! hc tc\tcd hy means of secondary
p!-!mary injection tats.
OI
4) I he operation of the breakers shall be

1catl.d from ali control stations.
5) I n d i c a t i o n signallinp lamps s h a l l b e
chrcked lor propel- working.
6) Ihc operation of the breakers shall hc

tc5lcd for all interlocks.
1 Ihc cloulng and opening timings of the

hrcahcrs shall hc tested w h e r e v e r
rcquircd lor auto-transfer schemes.
X)
resi<tancc of main and isolator

c7)ntacts shall hc measured.
It shall be ensured that the cables

c o n f o r m t o t h e relevan: I n d i a n
Standards. Tests shall also be done in
accordance with good practice [Vlll2(6)]. The insulation resistance before
and after the tests shall be checked.
fhe insulation resistance between each
conductor and against earth shall be
measured. The insulation resistance
varies with the type of insulation used
and with the length of cable. The
following empirical rule gives reasonable
guidance:
IO X voltage in kV
Insulation
resistance in = - - -megohms
length in km
9.3.2.4 MOl.ORS AND CXHER EQUIPMENTS 1 he following tests are made on motor and
other equipment:
1) The insulation resistance of each phase
winding again? the frame and between
the windings shall be measured. Megger
of 500 V or IO00 V rating shall be used.
Star points should be disconnected.
Minimum acceptable value of the
insulatlon resistance varies with the rated
power and the rated voltage of the
motor.
.I-he following relation may serve as a
reasonable guide:
K,=
<ontact
1,) I hc specific gravity and the voltap< ot

the r-ontrol battery shall be measured.
c)..i._._? I H .\X\t OKhll K S
I ransformcrs are
tcqtcd i n the minncr indicated below:
20 x Er1
_~._~~
-.
I 000 + 2 P
where
K, T- insulatron resistance in megohms at
25C.
En = rated phase to phase voltage.
f - rated power in kW.
I)
If the resistance is measured at a temperature
ditferent from 25C. the valllr shall be
corrected to 25C.
7-J Insulation resistance on HI and 1.T

windings shall be mcasurcd at the end of
ant @nutc as also at the end of 10
minutes nl measuring the polari7atinn
index. Ihe absolute value of insulation
resistance should not be the sole criterion
for determining the state of dryness of
the insulation. Polarization index values
should lorm the basis for determining
!he state of dryness of insulation. For
.34
VIII-_-
The insulation resistance as measured at

ambient temperature does not always give a
reliable value, since moisture might have
been absorbed during shipment and storage.
When the temperature of such a motor is
raised, the iirsulation resistance will initially
drop considerably, even below the acceptable
minimum. If any suspicion exists on this
score, motor winding must be dried out.
NAIIONAI. BI II.I)INC
CODE
O F
IYDIA
9.3.2.5 WIRING INSTALLATION - T h e

following tests shall be done:
4 The insulation resistance. shall be
measured by applying between earth and

the whole system of conductor or any
section thereof with ali fuses in place and
all switches closed, and except in earthed
concentric wiring, all lamps in position or
both poles of installation otherwise
electrically connected together, a dc
voltage of not less than twice the working
voltage, provided that it does not exceed
500 volts for medium voltage circuits.
Where the supply is derived from threewire (ac,or dc) or a poly-phase system, the
neutral pole of which is connected to
earth either direct or through added
resistance the working voltage shall be
deemed to be that which is maintained
between the .outer or phase conductor
and the neutral.
b) The insulation resistance in megohms of

an installation measured as in (a) shall be
not less than 50 divided by the number of
points on the circuit, provided that the
whole installation need not be required to
have an insulation resistance greater than
one megohm.
cl Control rheostats, heating and power
appliances and. electric signs, may, if

desired, be disconnected from the circuit
dtiring the test, but in that event the
insulation resistance between the case or
framework, and all live parts of each
rheostat, appliance and sign shall be not
less than that specified in the relevant
Indian Standard specification or where
there is no such specification, shall be not
less than half a megohm.
d) The insulation resistance shall also be
m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n a l l coijd.jctors
connected to one pole or phase conductor
of the supply and all the conductors
connected to the middle wire or to the
neutral on to the other pole of phase
conductors of the supply. Such a teSt
shall be made after removing all metallic
connections between the two poles of the
installation and in these circumstances
t h e i n s u l a t i o n resistance between
conductors of the installation shall be not
less ahan that specified in (b).
9.3.2.6 COMPLETION CERTIFICATE - - O n

completion of an electrical installation (or an
extension to an installation) a certificate shall
be furnished by the contractor, countersigned by the certified supervisor under
whose direct supervision the installation was
carried out. This certificate shall be in a
prescribed form as required by the local
electric suppjy authority. One such
recommended form is given in Appendix C.

P4RI \I11
I I
ILDld; SERIICES-SECTION
9 . 3 . 2 . 7 E A R T H I N G - For checking the

efficiency of earthing, the following tests are
done:
4 The earth resistance of each electrode

shall be measured.
b) earth resistance of earthing grid shall be

measured.
c) All electrodes shall be connected to the

grid and the earth resistance of the entire
earthing system shall be measured.
These tests shall preferably be done during

the summer months.
IO. .TELECOMMUNICATION AND
OTHER MISCELL.ANEOUS
SERVICES
10. I Telecommunication
Service
10.1.1 House wiring of telephone subscribers

offices in small buildings is normally
undertaken by the Telephone Department on
the surface of walls. But in large multistoreyed buildings intended for commercial,
business and office use as well as for
residential purposes, wiring for telephone
connections is generally done in a concealed
manner through conduits.
IO. I .2 The requirements qf telecommunication facilities like Telephone connections,
Private Branch Exchange, Intercommunication facilities, Telex and Telegraph lines are
to be planned well in advance so that suitable
provisions are made in the building plan in
such a way that the demand for
telecommunication services in any part of the
building at any floor are met at any time
during the life of the building.
10.1.3 Layout arrangements, methods for
internal block wiring and other requirements
regarding provisions of space, etc, may be
decided defending as the number of phone
outiets and other details in consultation with
Engineer/ Architect and user.
10.2 Public Address System- See Part IV
Fire protection.
10.3 Common Antenna System for TV
Receivers
10.3.1 In multistoreyed apartments, houses
and hot& where many TV receivers are
located, a common master antenna system
may preferably be used to avoid
mushrooming of individual antennas.

10.3.2 Master antenna is generally provided
at the top most convenient point in any
building and a suitable room on the top most
1 ELLURICAI. INSTALLATIONS
vlll-2-- -
floor or terrace for housing the amplifier

unit, etc, m a y a l s o b e p r o v i d e d i n
consultation with the architect/engineer.
10.3.3 From the amplifier rooms, conduits
are laid in recess to facilitate drawing coaxial cable to individual flats. Suitable Tap
Off boxes may be provided in every
room/ flat as required.
II. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
11.1 General
11.1.1 While every structure, theoretically,
has a chance of being struck by lightning, the
degree of this chance varies depending on a
number of associated factors, such as
lightning incidences, surroundings and types
of terrain. For a certain group of occ,upancies
which form a source of danger, such as those
housing explosive factories of stores or
flammable materials, complete protection
against lightning shall be provided. In other
cases, it may be necessary to decide whether
this protection is called for, under a given set
of circumstances.
f1.1.2 It is emphasized that certain buildings
are either self-protecting or need only little
additional expenditure for providing
lightning protection. The first category
includes structures which are entirely of
meta! and which are adequately earthed.
While the second category includes structures
with frames of steel or reinforced concrete
which may easily be protected.
11.1.3 With many structures, however, there
will be little doubt as to the need for lightning
protection. The examples of such structures
are:
a) those in or near which large number of

people congregate;
b) those concerned with the maintena.nce of
essential public services;
cl those areas where lightning strokes are
prevalent;
4 very tall or isolated structures;

e) s t r u c t u r e s o f h i s t o r i c o r c u l t u r a l
importance; and
0 structures containing explosives and
highly flammable materials.
11.1.4 There are a number of factors,

affecting the risk of the structure biting struck
by lightning and consequential effects of a
stroke, which are capable of assessment.
There would be other factors which are not
capable of such assessment in relative terms.
VIII.26
yet these may over-ride all other

considerations; for example, a requirement
that there should be no avoidable riskto life,
or the overwhelming importance or value of
the structure. In such cases lightning
protection shall always be provided. In other
cases, however, it may be desirable to make a
decision on an assessment in terms of the
chances of the strticture being struck. For this
purpose, various factors denoting chances of
the structure being struck by lightning and the
total effect of these factors shall be assessed.
As an aid to making a judgement a set of
indices is given (see 11.2.2) for the various
factors which are capable of being assessed.
I I .2 Risk Assessment
11.2.1 FA C T OR S CAPABLE OF ASSESSMENTThe factors given in 11.2.1.1 to lf.2.1.7 have
been found capable of assessment and require
consideration.
11.2.1.1 USAGE OF S T R U C T U R E - T h e
lightning hazard to human beings within a
structure or building is a very important
factor in deciding how far to go in providing
lightning protection. Schools, hospitals,
auditoria, railway statipns, etc, are places
where a large number of people congregate
and, therefore, are structurb of greater
importance than small buildings and houses.
11.2.1.2 TYPE O F C O N S T R U C T I O N -The type
of construction of the structure has a large
influence upon the extent of protection. A
steel framed building to some extent is selfprotecting and may not require any
additional protection, while brick buildings
or buildings with thatched roof require
greater degree of protection.
11.2. I.3 CONTthTS OR CONSEQUENTIAL
EFFECTS -In addition to direct loss due to
destruction of buildings by lightning, fire
resulting from lightning. killing of live-stock,
etc. there may be indirect losses which
sometimes accompany the destruction of
buildings and their contents. An interruption
to business or to farming operations,
specially at certain times of the year, may
involve losses quite distinct from and in
addition to the losses arising from the direct
destruction of property. There are also cases
where whcle community depends for safety
and comfort in some respect on the integrity
of a single structure. as for instance on the
brick chimney of a water-pumping plant. A
stioke of lightning to the unprotected
chimney of a plant of that sort might have a
serious consequence from lack of sanitary
facilities, drinking water, water for irrigation,
fire protection, etc. The contents of the
building should also be considered as to
whether they are replaceable, whether
explosive, combustible or non-combustible.

Flammable vapour or explosive dust may
present a hazard in a building that is
otherwise immune to lightning. Contents like
hay or cotton may make protective measures
specially desirable.
11.2.1.4 DEGREE OF ISOLATION -The
relative exposure of a particular building will
be an element in determining whether the
expense of protection is warranted. In closely
builtup towns and cities, the hazard is not as
great as in the open country. In the latter, farm
barns in many cases are the most prominent
targets for lightning in a large area.
11.2.1.5 TY PE O F TERRAIN-III hilly or
mountainous area, a building is more
susceptible to damage than a. building in
plains and flat. terrain. In hilly areas itself, a
building upon high ground is usually subject
to greater hazard than the one in a valley or
otherwise sheltered area.
terion. This may be taken as 40. If the value

of the risk index is higher than 40, protection
should ordinarily be considered as necessary;
if it is omitted, sound reasons in support
would be needed. If the risk index is lower
than 40, then in the absence of other overriding considerations, protection may be
omitted without undue harm. For risk
indices near about 40, decision will have to be
based on the importance of structure. It is
necessary to caution that the figure of 40
should not be interpreted as a sharp dividing
line meaning that no protection is needed
when the risk index is 39 while it is always
needed when it is 40. The risk index, it may
be em-phasized, is merely an aid to
judgement, that is, a method of
quantitatively assessing to some extent the
chance and the conse-quences of damage; it
should be used only in this manner.
TABLE 5 INDEX FIGURE A (USAGE OF
STRUCTURE)
(Clause 11.2.2)
11.2.1.6 HEIGHT OF STRUCTURE -Height of

the structure is an important factor for the
purpose of lightning protection. Taller
structures are subject to greater hazards than
smaller structures and. therefore, lightning
protection is more desirable in tall structures.
11.2.1.7 LlGH.rNlNG PREVALENCE -The
of Fig. 5 shows the average number of
thunderstorm days in a year in India. Itmay
be seen from this map that the number of
thunderstorm days in a year varies from 10 to
100 in different parts of the country.However,
the severity of lightning storms, as
distinguished from their frequency of occurence is much greater in some locations than
in others. Hence, the need for protection
varies from place to place. although not
necessarily in direct proportion to the
thunderstorm frequency.
map
11.2.2 I NDEX F IGURES -In Tables 5 to 1 I,

index figures are given for each of the factors
mentioned in 15.2.1 which denote a relative
degree of severity or importance for each of
the fctors. In any given case, index figures
should be obtained for all the seven factors
from these tables. The sum of these index
figures is termed as Risk Index. The higher
the risk index the greater will be the need for
protection and vice versa.
11.3 Risk Index
11.3.f In order to have a practical utility of
this valuation, it is necessary to fix someCri?ARt WI BUItJXNC SUtVICLS-SECTION 2 ELECTltlCAL
Use
Nd
TO
WHICH STRUCTURE
IS Pm
VALUE OF
INDEX A
i)
Houses and other builing of

comparable size
ii)
ljouses and other buildings of

comparable size with outside
serial
iii)
Small and medium size factories, workshops and laboratories
iv)
Big industrial plants, telephone

exchanges, office blocks,
hotels, blocks of flats and
other than those included in
Sl No. (5) and (6)
v)
Places of assembly, for example,

places of worship, halls,
theatres. museums, exhibitions. departmental stores,
stations, airports and
stadium structures
vi)
Schools, hospitals, childrens _

and other such homes
IO
11.3.2 The variety of structures and their

relations to surroundings is so great that any
method of assessment is not free of anomalies and those who have to decide on
protection should use their judgement. It
may, for instance, be found that the risk
index for a steel framed building is very 1.0~
and no protection is required but the addition of an air termination and earthing
system may improve the degree of protection
very greatly at a very small extra cost and
may be worthwhile. In other instance, structure may have natural protection from surrounding formation, extensive metaliic
structure or earth wires, etc. and due allowance for this protection could be taken in
INSTALLATIONS
37
VW-2-I .
deciding the degree of protection to be

provided to the structure.
11.3.3 A low risk index may arise for chimneys made of bricks or concrete. These
should, however, be provided with protection if they are free standing or projecting
TABLE
INDEX FIGURE E (TYPE

CONSTRUCTION)
TAB1.E 8 INDEX FIGUREr D ( D E G R E E

ISOl?ATION)
(Clause 11.2.2)
SL
T YPE
fl)
OF
CONST~UCWON
i)
OF
ii)
VAL.r!E OF
INDEX B
(2)
Steel framed, encased with any
roof other than metal*
(3)
ii)
Reinforced concrete pith any

roof other than metal
iii)
Brick, plain concrete or masonry with any roof other than

metal or thatch
iv)
Steel framed, encased or reinforced concrete with metal

roof
v)
Timber framed or clad with any

roof. other than metal or
thatch
vi)
Brick, plain concrete masonry,

timber framed but with
metal roofing
vii)
Any building with a thatched

roof
IO
i)
DWHEE OF IS O L A T I O N*
VALUE OF
INDEX D
No.
(c1au.W I i.2.2)
SL
No.
OF
iii)
Structure: located in a large

area of structures or trees of
the same or greater height.
for example, in a large town
or forest
Structure located in an area
with a few other structures
or trees of similar height
S t r u c t u r e c o m p l e t e l y i s o l a t e d IO
or exceeding at least twice
the .height o f s u r r o u n d i n g
striIctures or trees
*If nearby structures are very much higher than the

protected structures or if their nature is such as would
offer good protection, for example, extensively high
metalhc structures as of switch-yard, earth wires of
transmission system and high vertical cliffs, due
weightage may be given to such factors in deciding the
necessity of protection on the basis of risk index.
7ABLSY
I N D E X FIGURE E
TERRAIN)
( T Y P E
O F
(Clause 11.2.2)
SL
TV
PE OF
TERRAIN
No.
*A structure of exposed metal which is continuousdown

to ground level is excl ded from the tableas it requires no
lighjning protection beypnd adequate earthing
arrangements.
T A B L E 7 I N D E X FlGlJRES C ( C O N T E N T S
OR CONSEQUENTIAL EFFECTS)
(I)
(2)
V ALUE OF
INDEX E
(3)
Flat terrain at any level
Hill teriain
iii)
Mountain terrain between 500

to IOOOm
iv)
Mountain terrain above IO00 m
IO
i)
ii)
(Clause 11.2.2)
CON1 c N IS OR TYPIC OF
B UILDING
VALUE OF
IN D E X C
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Ordinary domestic or office

buildings, factories and workshops not containing valuable. or specially susceptible
dontents
Industrial and agricultural

buildings with specially
susceptible* contents
SL
No.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
TABLE IO INDEX FIGURE F(HElGHT

OF STRUCTURE)
(Clause 11.2.2)
SL
NO.
(2)
m
-
(3)
m
IO
IO
IS
iii)
I5
20
iv)
20
25
v)
vi)
25
30
II
30
35
I6
vii)
35
40
I9
viii)
40
45
22
ix)
45
55
30
Power stations, g a s w o r k s ,
telephone exchanges, radio
stations
Schools, hospitals, childrens

and other such homes, p!aces
of assembly
i)
ii)
IO
*This means specially valuable

lant or materials
vulnerable to fire or the results of P
ore.
Vlll-2-38
VAI.IIE OF
INDEX F
Exceeding Not Excczding

(1)
Industrial key plants, ancient

monuments and historic
b u i l d i n g s , m u s e u m s . aVt
galleries or other buddings
with specially valuable contents
H EIGHT OFSTRUCTURE
AWVE QROUND*
(4)
Structuns higha than 55m require protection in all

cases.
NATIDNAL
BUILDING CODt OF INDIA
more than 4.5 metres above the adjoining

structures. Chimneys are, therefore, excluded from the risk index method of assessment.
TABLE I I INDEX FIGURE G (LIGHTNING

PREVALENCE)
(Clciuse x1.2.2)
VALUE OF
NUMBER OFTHIJNDERST~RM
SL
IN D E X G
DAYS PER YEAR
No.
Exceeding Not Exceeding
(4)
(3)
(2)
(I)
4
5
i)
g
10
5
ii)
13
I5
iii)
10
18
20
I5
iv)
21
Vl
20
11.3.4 A few examples of calculation of risk

index .for different structures are given in
Table 12.
11.4 For detailed requirements of lightning
protection of various structures, reference
may be made to good practice [VIII 2(28)].
TABLE 12 EXAMPLJZS OF CALCULATION OF RISK INDEX FOR

EVALUATING NEED FQR PROTECTION
(ckwe f1.3.4)
SL
No.
RISK INDEX
(TOTAL OF
INDEX
FIGURES
VALUE OF INDEX FIGURES
EXAMPLE (ISOCERAUNIC
LEVEL. EXCEEDING 20)
(see TABLE I I)
RECOMMENDATKINS
AroG)
(2)
(1)
9 Small residcndial building
(9
(4)
4
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(9)
21
( 10)
35
No protection
required
ii) Oft% building in. a thickly

,ated locahty (he&t
21
41
As
iii) Hotel building (height 31 m)

exceeding twice the height
of surrounding structures
IO
16
21
60
Protection essential
iv) Building of historical hnportance completely isolated

(height 50 m)
10
30
21
83
Protection essential
v) Structural of high historial

importance (height exceeding 55 m)
--
_-
--
Protection essensial as the

height exeds 55 m (see
Table IO)
Protection may
be omitted
even though
risk index is
morethan
because the
building is
protected by
surroundingi
in a thickly populated
locality (height less than
IO m)
the figure is
near about
40. protec
tion will depend upon
the importance of the
building
4
21
48
1
2
6
2
6
Structural, such as hydroelectric. power stations,
suf!icientl;f protected .by
surroundrng
means
structural, for example,
high vertical cliffs, high
high vertical, cliffs, high
metallic structures or earth
wire of transmissionsystem
(height I5 m)
NOTE - Thevalues in co13 to9,arriveat byreferenceto Tables 5 to I I and themapofthunderstormdays(Fig 5),are
added together. The resultant figure in col 10, using 40 as the criterion, indicates the need for protection.
P A R T
VIII BUILDING SEZRVICEY--sM-TlON
2 ELCCTPICAL INSTALI.ATIONS
Vll -2-39 ,
ANNtJAt.
THUNDER,
STORM
DAQ
N AME OF
PLACE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Gilgit
Skardu
Culmarg
Srinagar
Dras
Kargil
ieh
Jammu
3
26
30
Bikaner
Phalodi
Stkar
Barmer
Jodhpur
Ajmcr
Jaipur
Kankroli
Mount Abu
Udatpur
Neemuch
Kota
Jhalawar
Mussoorie
Roorkee
Najibabad
Mukteswar
Meerut
Bareilly
A!igarh
Agra
Mainpuri
Bahraich
Gonda
Lucknow
Kanpur
Fatehpur
Jhanst
Allahabad
48 Varanasi
49 Azamgarh
50 Gorakhpur
51
::
54
18 D e l h i
72
73
Asansol
Burdwan
Kharagpur
Calcutta
Sagar Island
:;
39
76
E
34
lmphol
49
2;
98
I03
75
49
33
Deesa
Dwarka
Jamna8ar
Rajkot
Ahmadabad
Dohad
Porbandar
Veraval
Bhavnagar
Baruda
Surat
:;
40
61
::
94 Y5
95
I
96
1 97
1
98
99
31
22
I
1
1
Gwalior
Guna
Nowgong
Satna
Sagar
Rhopal
Jabalpur
Ijmaria
Ambikapur
lndore
:
8
1:
17
3
I:
8
4
110
Motihari
lPt$thanga
38
tn
:i
::
34
70
ii
41 :: 59
36
43
28
26
:z
Ntzamabad
Hanamkonda
Hyderabad
Khammam
Kalingapatam
Vishakhapatnam
Rentichintala
Masultpatam
Ongole
Kurnool
Anantpur
Nellore
Bidar
Gulbarga
Bijapur
:8
42
20
2s
:;
IR
I5
34
9
31
17
Belgaum
Raichur
::
157 I58
I59
I60
I61
162
I63
Karwar Hot!avar
Chikalthana
Mangalore
Hassan
Bangalore
Mysore
164
I65
166
167
168
Kozhikode
Palghat
Cochin
Alleppey
Trivandrum
8:
46
33
267
^_
2:
I73 Cuddalore
174 Coimbatore
I75 Tiruchchirappalli
I76 Nagappattinam
177 Kodaikanal
178 Madurai
179 Pamban
1 I80 1 Tuticorin
1 1811
Cape
Comorin
13 1
27 5
24
::
46
44
39
35
69
2:
4:
I I
I I I
I69 Vellore
170 Madras
I71 172 Ootacamund Salem
81
An&t1
120 IDaham,
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
I48
149
I50
151
I52
io
32
22
I4
6
23
I I
333
Balasore
Chandba
Ii
.
Bhubaneswar
P uri
Gopalpur
Jharsuguda.
Sambalpur
.Titlag em
_.._.._
Rajgalrayur
20
32
45
IO
34
I6
12
I53
I54
Hnuh.no.hnA
Ill
II2
II3
II4
II5
II6
II7
II8
I I9
123 Akola
124 Amraoti
I25 Nagpur
126 Gondia
I27 Aurangabad
128 Bombay
129 Alibag
130 Ahlhadnagar
I31 Parbhani
I32 Pune
I33 Mahabaleshwar
134 Ratnagiri
I35 Sholapur
136 Miraj
I 3 7 Vengurla
156
Bellary
155 Gadag
1 l-II P a c h m a r h i
104 Seoni
I05 Pendadah
I06 Raipur
107 Chhindwara
I08 Kanker
109 Jagdalpu r
Katmandu
55 Gaya.
S6 Daltonganj
57 Hazaribagh
5 8 Ranchi
59 Chaibasa
60 lamshedpur
61 Purnca
6 2 S&our
28
68
Kohtma
3;
Darjeeling
fi;p;zurt
79
t:
39
36
30
24
.*
63
:;
78
IO
I4
17
it
53
34
Dumka
Dhubri
Tezpur
Dibrugarh
Sibsagar
Shillong
Cherrapunji
Silchar
::
ANNUAI:
THUNDER.
STORM
DAYS
OF
PL A C E
::
I3
49
4
46
I2
40
26
9
27
32
33
34
3.5
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
N AME
63
9 Dharmsala
IO Amritsar
I I Pathankot
12 Mandi
13 Ludhiana
14 Simla
I5 P a t i a l a
I6 A m b a l a
17 Hissar
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SL
NO.
24 69
Ji
40
41
::
39
5
14
1 68
:::I>:::
184
IMinicoy
20
1I
L+
L
Based upbn Survey of India map with the permission of the Surveyor General of India. @Government of Indiaaipyright 1990.
The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to a distance of twelve nauticaln&lea measurad from the appropriate base line.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal details shown on the map rests with the publisher.
FIG. 5 M AP OF INDIA SHO.WING
THE
PLACES
FOR
AVERAGE N UMBER
OF
T HUNDERSTORM D AYS IN A Y EAR
NOTE-The Data in this Map have been compiled by kind courtesy of the IndianMete.orological Department at the request of
the Central Water and Power Commission (Power Wing)
PART VIII
lJlCtiNG SPVlcgP-SMXION
2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
VIII&
41
APPENDIX A
(Clause 3.2)
A
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

IN BUILDING
A-2.1.4 D I S T R I B U T I O N F U S E
. BO A R D W ITH S W I T C H E S
A-f WIRING
A-f.0 Remarks upwards and downwards
apply only when the drawing is read the right
way up.
A-1.0.1 An arrow on the slant line indicates
the direction of the power flow.
A-1.0.2 The wiring terminates at the circle
or the black dot.
A - 2 . 2 . 1 M AIN F U S E B O A R D
W ITHOUT S W I T C H E S
A - 2 . 2 . 2 MA I N F U S E B O A R D
WITH SW I T C H E S
A-l. I General Wiring

A-1.2 Wiring on the Surface
A-2.2 Power circuit Fuse

Boards
4-2.2.3 DI S T R I B U T I O N FUSEB OARDS W ITHOUT S W I T C H E S
A-l.3 Wiring under the Surface (u1y

A-2.2.4 DISIRIBLI~ION FIISEB OARD W ITH S W I T C H E S
B-l.4 Wiring in Conduit

A-1.4. I CONDUIT ON SURFACE
A-1.4.2 C ONCEALED C O N D U I T
luoU
NOPE --The type of conduit may be indicated, if
A-3 SWITCHES AND

SWITCH-OUTLETS
A-3. / One- Way SH itch
A-3. I. I SINGLE -POLE
necessary.
A-1.5 Wiring Going Upwards
A-3.1.2 TWO-POLE
A-3.1.3 THREE-POLE
A-l.6 Wiring Going Downwards
,,
A-l. 7 Wiring Passing Vertically

Through a Room
0
A-2 FUSE BOARDS
A-2.1 Lighting Circuit Fuse.
Boards
A-2.1.1 MAIN FU S E B O A R D
WITHOUT
SWITCHES
A-3.2 Single- Pole Pull Switch

A-3.3 Multiposition Switch for
Different Degrees of Lighting
A-3.4 Two- Way Switch
A-3.5 Intermediate Switch

A-2.1 I MAIN F U S E B O A R D
WITH S W I T C H I N G
A-2.1.3 D I S T R I B U T I O N F U S E
BCIAR~ WITHOUT S W I T C H E S
,,I-$
A-3.6 Period Limiting Switch

PIATIONAL B U I L D I N G &DE OF INDIA
A-3.7 Time Switch
A-5.2 Lump, Mounted on u Wall

lx
A-3.8 Pendant Switch

A-5.3 Lamp, Mounted on a
Ceiling
A-3.9 Push Button
NOTE -The use of the push button may be indicated, if
A-5.4 Counter Weight Lamp

Fixture
desired.
A-3.10 Luminous Push Button
0
A-3.11 Restricted Access Push
But ton
I
A-5.5 Chain Lamp Fixture

x
k-5.6 Rod Lamp Fixture
NOFE-The use of the push button may be indicated, if
desired.
A-5.7 Lump Fixture with Built-in

Switch
A-4 SOCKET-OUTLETS
A
A
n
AC
K
n
A-4.1 Socket-Our.et, 5A
A-4.2 Socket-Outlet, ISA
A-4.3 Combinhd Switch and
Socket-Outlet, 5A
A-4.4 Combined Switch and
Socket-Outlet, ISA
fv
A-4.5 Interlocking Switch and

Socket-Outlet, 5A
K
n
A-4.6 Interlocking Switch and

Socket-Outlet, ISA
k-8.8 Lump Fed from Variable

Voltage Supply
A-5.9 Emergency Lump
A-5.10 Panic Lamp

A-5.11 Bulk-Head Lamp
A-5.12 Water-Tight Lighting
Fitting
A-5.13 Batten Lump Holder
A-5 LAMPS AND LlGHTING

APPARATUS
A-5.0 Symbols A-5.1 to A-5.18 represent
either the lamp .or a group,of lamps or the
s. If it is desired to specify that
to the wall or coiling, a
or horizontal line respectively may be
added to the symbol.
A-5.14 Rejector
A-5.1 Lamp or Outlet for Lamp
A-5.16 Flood Ligh;
A-5.15 Spot Light
x
A-5.1.1 G ROUP
aI-WLAMPs
P A R T
OF
T HREE
x
3X4oW
A-5.1 7 FIourescent
VIII BlIILDlNC SERVICES-SCCllO~ 2 ELF17lIlCAL INSTALWTIONS
.
..
A-5.17.1 GROUP OF
T H R EE 40-W
b-_-l 3X4oW
F L U O R ES C E Nw
T
LAMPS
A-9. TELECOMMUNICATION
APPARATUS
A-9. I Socket-Outlet for Tele-
communications
A-6. ELECTRfCAL APPLIANCES

A-9.2 Aerial
A-6. I General
A-9.3 Loudspeaker
NOTE--U necessary, use designation to specify.
A-9.4 Radio Receiving Set

A-6.2 Hearer
Ill]
A-6.3 Storage Type Electric _+jjzJ

Water Heaters
A-9.5 Amplifying Equipment
A-9.6
AI-7. BELLS, BUZZERS AND SIRENS
Televisiqn Receiving Set
A-9.7 Control Board Vor Public

Address System)
A-7.1 Bell
A-10. CLOCKS
A-7.2 Buzzer
A-l 0. I Synchronous Clock
A-7.3 Siren
A-10.2 Impulse Clock Outlet

A-10.3 Master Clock Outlet
A-7.4 Horn or Hooter

A-11. FIRE ALARMS
A-7.5 Indicator (At jcr, insert
number of ways)
A-I I. 1 Manually Operated Fire

Alarm
A-8 FANS
A-l 1.2 Automatic Fire Detector
Switch
A-8. I Ceiling Fan
A-11.3 Bell Connected to Fire

Alarm Switch
A-8.2 Bracket Fan
A-Ii.4 Fire Ahzrm Indicator
A-8:3 Exhausr Fan
A-8.4 Fan Regulator

*II-Y
A-12. EARTHING
k-12.1 Earth Point
APPENDIX B
[Clauses3.1.1, 5.1.1, 5.1.3,5.2.3(b), 8.5. and iO.l.IJ
EXTRACTS FROM INDlAN ELECIRICITY RULES, 1956
B-I. The following arc the extracts of some
of the rules:
Rule No. 33 Earthed Terminal on

Consumers Premises
Rule No. 32. Identijication of lkarrhed and

birthed Neutral Conductors and Position of
1) The supplier shall provide and, maintain
Switches and Cut-Outs TIlerein

Where the conductors include an earthed
conductor of a two-wire system or an earthed
neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected there-to,
the following conditions shall be complied
with:
1) An indication of a permanent nature shall
be provided by the owner of the earthed

or earthed neutral conductor, or the
conductor which is to be connected
thereto, to enable such conductor to be
distinguished from any live conductor.
Such indication shall be provided:
a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral
conductor is the property of the
supplier, at or near the pointof
commencement of supply;
b) Where a conductor forming part of a
consumers system is to be connected
to the suppliers earthed or earthed
neutral conductor at the point where
such connection is to be made;
cl In all other cases, at a point
corresponding to the point of
commencement of supply or at such
other point as may be approved by an
Inspector or any officer appointed to
assist the Inspector and hold
authorized under sub rule (2) of rule
4-A.
2) No cut-out, link or switch other that-tea
linked switch arranged to operate
simultaneously on the earthed or earthed
neutral conductor and live conductors
shall be inserted or remain inserted in any
earl hed or earthed neutral conductor of a
two-wire system or in any earthed or
earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire
system or in any .conductor connected
thereto with the following exceptions:
a) A link-for testing purposes, or
b) A switch for use in controlling a
generator or transformer.
Nor! .- For the purpose of this rule, the relevant Indian
Standards relating to marking and arrangement for
switch gear. bus-bar. main connections, and auxiliary
wiring may be referred IO.
P A R T VIII BUILDING .SERVICES-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAl.
on the consumers premises for the

consumers use a suitable earthed
terminal in an accessible; position at or
near the point of commencement of
Jupply as defined under rule 58:
Provided that in the case of medium. high
or extra-high voltage installation, the
consumer sha!l, in addition to aforementioned earthing arrangement, provide
his own earthing system wtth an
independent electrode, and maintain the
same.
Provided further that the supplier may
not provide any earthed terminal in the
case of installations already connected to
his system on or before the 30th June,
1966 if he is satisfied that the consumers
earthing arrangement is efficient.
2) The consumer shall take all reasonable
precautions to prevent mechanical
damage to the earthed terminal and its
lead belonging to the supplier.
3) The supplier may recover from the
consumer the cost of installation of such
earthed terminal on the basis laid down in
sub-rule (2) of Rule No. 82.
Rule No. 50 Supp!v and Use of Energy
I)
The energy shall not be supplied. transformed, converted or used or continued

to be supplied, transformed, converted or
used unless the following provisions are
observed:
a) A suitable linked switch or a circuit
breaker of requisite capacity to carry
and break the current is placed as near
as possible to, but after the point of
commencement of supply, as defined
under Rule No. 58, so as to be readily
accessible and capable of being easily
operated to completely isolate the
suppty to the installation, such
equipment being ,in addition to any
equipment installed for controlling
individual circuits or apparatus.
Provided that where the point of
commencement of supply and the
consumers apparatus are near to each
other, one linked switch or circuitbreaker near the point of
INSTALLATIONS
v,,,.z-4~
commencement of supply shall be

considered sufficient for the purpose
of this rule;
b) A suitable linked switch or circuit-
breaker of requisite capacity to carry

and break the f&l load current is
inserted on the gecondary side of a
transformer, in the case of high or
extra high voltage installation.
Prbvided, however, that the linked
switch on the primary side of the
transformer may be of such capacity
as to carry the full load current and
to break only the magnetisinp
current of the transformer;
Provided further that the provision
of the clause shall not apply to
transformers installed in sub-station
upto a n d i n c l u d i n g lOOk\iA
belonging to the sUpplier.
Provided also that the provision of a
linked switch on the primary side of
the transformer shall not apply to
the unit auxiliary transformer of the
generator.
cl Except in the case of composite
control gear designed as a unit; every
distinct circuit is protected against
excess energy by means of a suitable
cut-out or a circuit-breaker of
adequate breaking capacity suitably
located and so constructed as to
prevent danger from overheating,
arcing or scattering of hot metal
when it comes into operation and to
permit of ready renewal of the fusible
metal of the cut-out without danger.
4 The supply of energy to each motor
or .a group of motors or other
apparatus, meant for operating one
particular machine, is controlled by a
suitable linked switch or a circuitbreaker or an emergency tripping
device with manual reset of requisite
capacity placed in such a position as
to be adjacent to the motor or a
group of motors or other apparatus,
readily accessible to and easily
operated by the person in charge and
so connectedin the circuit of that by
its means all supply of energy can be
cut-off from the motor or a group of
motors or apparatus and from any
regulating switch, resistance or other
device associated therewith.
e) All insulating material is chosen with
special regard to the circumstances of
its proposed use, the mechanical
strength being sufficient for the
purpose. and so far as is practicable,
is of such a character or so protected
9-I
as to maintain adequately the

insulating properties under all
working conditions in respect of
temperature and moisture; and
r) Adequate precautions are taken to
ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
4 When energy is being supplied,
transformed, converted or used, the
consumer or the owner of the
concerned installation shall be
responsible for the continuous
observance of the provisions of subrule (1) in respect of his installation.
b) Every consumer shall use all
reasonable means to ensure that
whert energy is supplied by a supplier
no person other than the_ supplier
shall interfere with the service lines
and apparatus placed by the supplier
on the premises of the consumer.
R u l e ICO. 51 P r o v i s i o n s Applicable to
Medium, High or Extra-High Voltage
Installations
The following provisions shall be observed

where energy at medium, high or extra high
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or
used:
1)
All conductors (other than those of

overhead lines) shall be completely
enclosed in mechanically strong
metal casing or metallic covering
which is electrically and
mechanically continuous and
adequately protected against
mechanical damage unless the said
condtictors are accessible only to an
authorised person or are installed
and protected to the satisfaction of
the Inspector so as to prevent danger.
Provided that rigid non-metallic
conduits conforming to Indian
Standards Specification No.
lS:2509-1963 Rigid Non-metallic
Conduits for Electrical Installation,
may be used for medium voltage
installation subject to any conditions
as the Inspector or officer appointed
to assist an Inspector may think fit to
impose.
b) A l l m e t a l workd e n c l o s i n g ,
supporting or associated with the
installation, other than that designed
to serve as a conductor shall, if
considered necessary by the
Inspector, be connected with earth.
4 Every switchboard shall comply with
the following provisions namely:
i) a clear space of not less than one
a)
.metre in width shall be provided
in front of the switchboard:

ii) if there are any attachments or
bare connections at the badk of

the switchboard, the space (i;
any) behind the switchboard
shall be either less than 10
centimetres, or more than 75
centimetres in width, measured
from the farthest outstanding
part of any attachment or
conductor;
iii) if the soace behind the switchboard exceeds 75 centimetres in
width, there shall be passage
way from either end of the
switchboard clear to a height of
1.8 metres.
low voltage in cases where the voltage
between phases or outers normally

exceeds Ii5 volts and of systems .ai
medium voltage:
.
a) i-he neutral conductor of a threephase four wire system, and the
middle conductor of a two-phase
three-wire system shall be earthed by
not less than two separate and
distinct connections with earth both
at the generating station and at the
sub-station. It may also be earthed
at one or more points along the
distribution system or service line in
addition t_o any connection with
earth which may be at the
consumers premises.
b)
In the case of a system comprising

electric supply lines having
concentric cables, the external
conductor of such cables shall be
earthed by two separate and distinct
connections with earth.
c)
The connection with earth may

include a link by means of which the
connection may be temporarily
interrupted for the purpose of
testing or for locating a fault.
d)
9 In a direct current three-wire
2) Where an application has been made to a
3)
4)
supplier for supply of energy to any

installation, the shall not commence, or
where the supply has been discontinued,
recommence the supply unless he is
satisfied that the consumer has complied
in all respects with the conditions of
supply, set out in sub-rule (1) of this rule
and Rules No. 50 and 64.
Where a supplier proposes to supply or
use energy at medium voltage or to
recommence supply after it has been
discontinued for a period of six months,
he shall, before connecting or
reconnecting the supply, give notice in
writing of such intention to the
Inspector.
If at any time after connecting the supply
the supplier is satisfied that any
provision of sub-rule (1) of this rule, or
of Rules No. 50 and 64 is not being
observed, he shall give notice of the samein writing to the consumer and the
Inspector specifying how the provision
has not been observed, and may
discontinue the supply if the Inspector so
directs.
Rule No. 58 Point of Commencement of

SuPPlY
The point of commencement of supply of
energy to a consumer shall be deemed to. be
the point at the outgoing terminals of the cutouts inserted by the supplier in each
conductor of every service line other than an
earthed or earthed neutral conductor or the
earthed external conductor of a concentric
cable at the consumers premises.
Rule No. 61 Connection with Earth

1) The following provisions shall apply to
the connection with earth of systems at
e)
system the middle conductor

shall be earthed at the
generating station only, and the
current from the middle
conductor to earth shall be
continuously recorded by means
of recording ammeter, and if at
any time the current exceeds one
thousandth part of the
maximum supply current,
immediate steps shall be taken
to improve the insulation of the
system.
ii) Where the middle conductor is
earthed by means of a circuitbreaker with a resistance
connected in parallel, the
resistance shall not exceed
lOohms and on the opening of
the circuit-breaker, immediate
steps shall be taken to improve
the insuiation of the system, and
the circuit-breaker shall be
reclosed as soon as possible.
iii) The resistance shall be used only
as a protection for the ammeter
in case of earths on the system
and until such earths are
removed, immediate steps shall
be taken to locate and remove
the earth.
In the case of an alternating current
system. there shall not be inserted in

AL)
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICEi-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSlALLATlONS
\'lll-i-y '
the connection with earth and

impedance (other than that required
solely for the operation of switch
gear or instrument), cut-out or
circuit-breaker,Bnd the result of any
test made to ascertain whether the
current (if any) passing through the
connection with earth is normai,
shall be duly recorded by the
supplier.
No person shall make connection

with earth by the aid of, nor shall he
keep it in contact with any water
main not belonging to him except
with the consent of the owner thereof and of the Inspector.
g) Alternating current systems which

a r e c o n n e c t e d w i t h e a r t h ,as
a.foresaid m a y b e e l e c t r i c a l l y
interconnecttd, provided that each
conqection with earth is bonded to
the metal sheathing and metallic
armouring (if any) of the electric
supply lines concerned.
2)
The frame of every generator, stationary

motor, portable motor, and the metallic
parts (not intended as conductors) of all
transformers and any other apparatus
used for regulating or controlling energy
and all medium voltage energy consuming
apparatus shall be earthed by the owner
by two separate and distinct connections
with earth.
3) All metal casings or metallic covering
containing or protecting any electric

supply-line or apparatus shall be
connected with earth and shall be so
joined and connected across all junction
boxes and other openings as to make
good mechanical and electrical
connections throughout their whole
length:
Provided that where the supply is at low
voltage, this sub-rule shall not apply to
isolated wall tubes or to brackets,
electroliers, switches, ceiling fans or other
fittings (other than portable hand lamps
and portable and transportable
apparatus) unhis provided with earth
terminal.
Provided further thatwhere the supply is
at iow voltage and where the installations
are either new qr renovated all. plug
sockeks shall be of the three-pin type,
having permanently and efficiently
earthed.
This sub-rule shall come into force
immediately in the case of new
installations and in the case of existing
installations the provisions of this subrule shall be complied with before the
I,,-*-48
expiry of a period of two years from the

commencement of those rules.
4) All earthing systems shall before electric

supply lines or apparatus are energised,
be tested for electrical resistance to ensure
efficient earthing.
5)
All earthing systems belonging to the

supplier shall, in addition, be tested for
resistance on dry day during the dry
season not less than once every two years.
6)
A record of every earth test made and the

result thereof shall be kept by the supplier
for a period of not less than two years

after the day of testing and shall be
available to the Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A
when required.
Kule .&o. 64 tise of Energy at High and Extra-
High Loltage
I) The
inspector shall not authorise the

suppiicr to commence supply, or where
the supply has been discontinued for a

period of one year and above, to recommence the supply at high or extrahigh voltage to any consumer unless:
a) all conductors and apparatus intended
for use at high or extra-high voltage
and situated on the premises of the
consumer are inaccessible except to an
authorised person and all operations
in connection with the said conductors
and apparatus are carried out only by
an authorised person;
b) the consumer has provided and agrees
to maintain a separate building or a
locked weather-proof and fire-proof
enclosure of agreed sign and location,
to which the supplier shall at all times
have access for the purpose of housing
his high or extra-high voltage
apparatus and metering equipment, or
where the provision of a separate

building or enclosure is impracticable,
the consumer has segregated the
aforesaid apparatus of the supplier
from any other part of his dwn
apparatus:
Provided that such segregation shall
be by the provision of fire-proof walls,
if the Inspector considers it ta be
necessary;
Provided further that in the case of an
outdoor installation the consumer
shall suitably segregate the afotiid
apparatus belonging to the supplier
from his own to the satisfaction of the
Inspector.
NATIONAL
BUILDING
.CODC OF IbDlA
c) all pole type sub-stations are

constructed and maintained in
accordance with rule 69.
2) The following provisions shall be

observed where energy at high or extrahigh voltage IS supplied. converted,
transformed oi used:
a) All c.onductors or live parts-of any
apparatus -shall ordinarily be

inaccessible.
All winding%. at high or extra-high
voltage of motors or other apparatus
within reach from any position in
which a person may require to be shall
be suitably protected so as to prevent
danger.
c) Where transformer or transformers
are used. suitable provision shall be
made, either by connecting with eaith
a point of the circuit at the lower
voltage or otherwise, to guard against
danger by reason of the said circuit
becoming accidentally charged above
its normal voltage by leakage from or
contact with the circuit at the higher
voltage.
4 i) A sub-station or switch-station
with apparatus having more than
2000 litres of oil shall no:
ordinarily be located in the
basement where proper oil
drainage arragements cannot be
provided.
ii) Where a sub-station or switch
station with apparatus having
more than 2000 litres of oil is
installed whether indoors or
outdoors, the following measures
shall be :aken, namely:
(a) baffle walls shall be erected
between the apparatus
contaming more than 2000
litres of oil and the adjacent
apparatus to prevent spread of
<ire and avoid damage;
PART v,,b
(b) a drain valve of adeauate size

which shall be capable of being
safely operated even when the
apparatus has caught fire shall
be provided, and such a valve
shall be easily accessible to
being operated and at the same
time not susceptible to
being operated inadvertantly;
(c) the drain valve shall let out the
oil to a covered drainage system
which shall take away the oil to
a place away from the danger
zone;
iii) the above measures shall be taken
inaddition to o!her fire protection
arrangements to be provided for
quenching the fire in thrapparatus;
iv) cable trenches inside the substations and switch-stations
containing cables shall be filled
with sand, pebbles or similar noninflammable materials, or
completely covered with noninflammable 4abs.
d Unless the conditions are such that all

the conductors and apparatus for use
at high. or extra-high voltage may be
made, dead at the same time for the
purpose of cleaning of for other work
thereon, the said conductors and
apparatus shall be so arranged that
they may be made dead in sections,
and that work on any section made
dead may be carried on by an
authorised person without danger.
t) Only persons authorised. under sub-
rule ( !) of ru!e 3 may carry out the

work on live lines and apparatus;
g) Adequate precautions shall be taken to

prevent unauthorised access to any
part of the installation designed to be
electrically charged at high or extrahigh voltage.
l:ll_DlNG ~iEqblc~s_SE~~lON 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
mu-i-$
APPENDIX C
FORM OF COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I ! We certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by me/ us and tested and that to
the hest of my/ our knowledge and belief, it complies withlndiati Electricity Rules 1956.
Electrical Installation at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_ . . ..1...............................................,.,................................................
Voltage and system of supplv
Particulars of Works:
4 Internal Electrical
Installation.
No.
Total load
Type or system of wiring,
i) Light point.
ii) Fan point.
iii)
Plug point.
3-pin 5 A.
3-pin 15 A
b: Others.
Description
hpl kW
Type of starting.
I) Motors:
i)
ii)
iii)
2) Other plants:
C) If the work involves
installations of over head
line and/ or underground
cable.
I)
i) Type and description of overheadline.

ii) Total length and No. of spans.
iii) No. of street lights and its description.
2)
,, i) Total length of underground cable and its size.

ii) No. of joints:
End joint:
Tee joint:
Straight through joint:
,50
VIII-i.
NATlOYAl.
BUILDING CODE
Of INDIA
Earthing.
i) Description of earthing electrode
ii) No. of earth electrodes
iii) Size of main earth lead
Test Results:
a) Insulation Resistance
i) Iqsuiation resistance of the whole system of conductors to
earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
ii) Insulation resistance
Between phase
Between phase
Between phase
between the phase conductor and neutral.

R and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
Y and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
B and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
iii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductors.

in case of polyphase supply.
Between phase R and phase Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Megohms.
Between phase Y and phase B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
Between phase B and phase R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
b) Polarity test:
Polarity of non-linked smgle pole branch switches
cl Earth continuity test:

Maximum resistance between any point in the earth continuity conductor including metal
conduits and main earthing lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.
4 Earth electrode resistance:

Resistance of each earth electrode.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
..,..................Ohms.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ohms.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.
e) Lightning protective system.

Resistance of the whole of lightning protective system to earth before any bonding is
effected with earth electrode and metal in/on the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.
Signature of Supervisor
Signature of Contractor
Name and Address
Name and Address
............................................... ............................................................................................
.................................................. . .......... .............
................................................................
.........
...................................................................................
..............................................
............................................................................................................
..............................
PAIT VW SUILMNC SEJWICES-SECTION
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS
VW-51
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following lisr records those srandards which are acceptable as 'good pracrice and accepted
standards in the fuifihgnr of the requirements sf rhe Code. The latest version oJa srandord
shall be adopted al rhe time oflhe enforcerbent of the Code. The standards listed ma-v be used by
the Authority as a guide in conformance with rhe requiremenrs oj the referred clauses in the
Code.
in Ihe /kIlowing list, rhe number appearing in the first column parentheses indicates rhe numbe
of the rejkzc in ti:5 pun/section.
1: IS : 8270 (Part 1)-l 976 Ciuide tol- prepara-
tion of diagrams, charts and tables for

electrotechnology: Part I Definitions
and classification
lS : 2032 Graphical symbols used in electrotechnology:
IS:2032 (Part II)-1962:Part II Kind
of current dtstribution systems and
method of connection
IS : 2032 (Part Ill)-1Y62: Part 111 Circuit element and variability
IS:2032 ( P a r t IV)-1964:Part I V
Rotating machines and transformers
IS : 2032 (Part V)-1965: Part V
Genera-ting station and substations
IS: 2032 (Part VI)-1965: Part VI
Motor starters.
lS:2032 ( P a r t VII)-1974:Part VI1
Switchgear and auxiliaries (firsr
revision)
IS:2032 (Part VIII)-1965:Part VIII

Semiconductor devices
2) IS: 7752 (Part I)-1975 Guide for improvement of power factor in consumers installations: Part 1 Low and
medium supply voltage
3) IS : 52 16- 1969 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work
4) IS: 10118 (Part Ii)-1982 Code of practice
for selection, installation and maintenance of switchgear and controlgear:
Part II Selection
5) IS: 1646-1982 Code of practice for fire
installations (first revision)
6) IS : 1255- 1967 Code of practice for
installation and maintenance of paper
insulated power cables (up to and
inchiding 33 kV) firsr revision)
7) IS : 2148-1968 Specification for flameproof enclosures of electrical apparatus
yirst revision)
8) IS : 375-1963 Specification for marking
and arrangement for switchgear bus-bars

main connections and auxiliary wiring
(revised)
VIII-Z-
52
9) I S : 1777~1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial lighting fittings with metal
reflectors Qfirsf revision)
IS : 1947- 1980 Specification for floor
lights (jirsf revision)
IS : 2206 Specification for t tame-proof
electric lighting fittings:
1S : 2206 (Part I)-1962: Part I Wel!glass and bulkhead types

I S : 2 2 0 6 ( P a r t II)-1976:Part II
Fittings using giass tubes
industrial lighting fittings with plastic
reflectors
IS : 352%1Y66 Specification for waterproof electrical lighting Gttings
IS : 35S3- 1966 Specification for watertight electric lighting fittings
IS : 40 12- I967 Specification for dustproof electric lighting fittings
IS : 40 I3- 1967 Specification for dusttight eiectric lighting fittings
IS : 5077-1969 Specification for decorative lighting outfits
10) IS: 3106-1966 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
fuses (voltage not exceeding 650 volts)
11) IS : 3961 Recommended current ratings
for cables:
IS : 396 I (Part l)-1967 : Part I Paperinsulated lead-sheathed cables
IS: 3961 (Part llj-lY67: Part II PVCinsulated and PVC-sheathed heavy
auty cables
IS: 3961 (Part III)-1968: Part 111
Rub-ber insulated cables
IS: 3961 (Part IV)-1968: Part 1V
Polyethylene insulated cables
1S : 3961 (Part V)-1968 : Part V PVCinsulated light duty cables
12) IS : 2086-1963 Specification for carriers
and bases using in rewirable type electric
fuses up to 650 volts (revised)
IS:9224 (Part II)-1979 L o w v o l t a g e

fuses: Part II Supplementary requirements for fuse with high breaking capacity for industrial application
13) IS: 2672-1966 Code of practice for library lighting
IS : 4347-1967 Code of practice for hospital lighting
IS : 6665-1972 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS : 8030-1976 Luminaries for hospitais
14) IS : 732 (Part II)-1983 Code of practice
for electrical wiring installations : Part II
Design and construction (secondrevision)
15) IS: 7733-1975 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations in hospitals
16) IS : 4648- 1968 Guide for electrical layout
in residential buildings
17) IS : 900-1965 Code of practice for installation and mamtenance of induction
motors (revised)
IS : 3072-1975 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of switchgear
(firsI revision)
18) IS : 1653-1972 Specification for rigid steel
conduits for electrical wiring (second
revision)
IS : 2509-1973 Specification for rigid
non-metallic conduits for electrical installations (firsr revision)
19) IS : 24 12- 1974 Specification for link clips
for electrical wiring (firsr rev&ion)
20) IS : 34 19- 1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid non-metallic conduits first
revision)
IS : 9537 Conduit for electrical installations :
IS : 9537 (Part I)-1980 : Part 1
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 : Part II Rigid
steel conduits.
IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid steel conduits for electrical
wiring first revision)
I : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Boxes for enclosers
f electrical accessories : Part 11 Boxes
f!ade of insulated materials
21) IS : 19 13 (Part I)- 1978 General and safety
requirements for luminaries: Part I
Tubulor fluorescent lamps (second revision)
PART VIII BlIILDINC
22) IS : 1258-1979 Specification for bayonet

lampholders (second revision)
23) IS : 418-1978 Specification for tungsten

filament general service electric lamps
(third revision)
1s : 1534 (Part I)-1977Specification for
ballasts for fluorescent lamps: Part I
For
switch start circuits (second revision)
IS :. 1569- 1 9 6 3 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
capacitors for electric discharge lamps
(fluorescent and mercury vapour)
IS : 2183- 1973 Schedule for high pressure
mercury vapour lamps fj?rsr prevision)
IS : 22 I5- 1968 Specification for starters for fluorescent lamps (second
revision)
IS : 2418 Specification for tubhlar
fluorescent lamps for general lighting
service:
IS:2418 (Part I)-1977:Part I Requirements
ments and tests Cfirsr revision)
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t II)-1977: Part II
Standard lamp data sheets (fksr
revision)
IS: 2418 (Part III)-1977:Part III
Dimensions
Dimensions of G-5 and G-13 bi-pin
caps (first revision)
IS:2418 (Part IV)-1977:Part IV Go
and no go gauges for G-5 and G-13 bipin caps first revision)
IS : 3323- 1980 Specification for bi-pin
lamp holders and tubular fluorescent
lamps firsf revision)
IS : 3324-1965 Specification for holders
and starters for tubular fluorescent
lamps
24) IS : 374-1979 Specification for electric
ceiling type fans and regulators (rhird
revision)
25j IS : 3043-1966 Code of practice for earthing
26) IS:8623 (Part I)-1977 Factory-built assemblies of switchgear and controlgear
for voltage up to and including 1000 V ac
and 1200 V dc : Part I General requirements
27) IS: 10028 (Part II)-1981 Code of practice
for selection, installation and maintek
ancc of transformers: Part II Installation
28) IS : 230%!969 Code of practice for the
protection of buildings and allied
structures against lightning (/?rsf
revision)
SERVICFS-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
lil.Z-~3
NATIQNALBUILDINGCODE

SECTION 3 AIR-CONDITIONING AND
HEATING
CONTENTS
0.
FOKEWOKD
...
1.
SCOPE
...
2.
TERMINOLOGY
...
3.
PLANNING
...
4.
AIR-CONDITIONING
...
5.
EVAPORATlVE COOLING
..;
I7
6.
PACKtiED AIR-CONDITIONERS
...
I7
7.
ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
...
17
,8.
HEATING
.a.
18
...
I8
...
18
...
I9
9. SYMBOLS, UNITS AND COLOUR CODE

10.
ENERGY CONSERVATION AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT
II. INSPECTlON COMMISSIONJNG

?MT VIII BUIUNNC SERWCB~-S~CTION $ A~R~TOND~TION~NC
AND
A N D TESTl.NG
H E A T I N G
VIII-3.
PART V.111 BUILDING SERVICES

SECTION 3 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section deals with installation and safety aspects of air-conditioning and heating units in
buildings. In this section, emphasis iqalso laid on the importance of preplanning, which would be
very useful for an orderly development of building activity.
0.2 The space requirements for the plants for air-conditioning work vary considerably with the
system adopted. It is advisable to consult an air-conditioning engineer in this connection at the
stage of preplanning.
0.3 The outside design conditions for airconditioningand heating design work for 16 important
cities have been included in this revision. It is expected to arrive at these conditions for some more
VIII+
NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE' OF ,ND,.
cities and also to establish similar data for all these cities for themonsoan months. Till such
information is collected for other cities. it is recommended that design work in these cities be
carried out according to the present (local) practice.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in1970. Additionalinformation hasbeen included
in the light of the new series of Indian Standards brought out on the subject, These havebeen
incorporated in this revision. This revision containsthe following major modifications/additions
with respect to provisions of the 1970 version of this section:
a) The n.eed to take care of fire hazard arising out of the air-handling unit and the returnail
passage through the corridors has been emphasized.
b) The requirements regarding glazing,have been elaborated to cover constructional features of

sun breakers and thermal performance of different shading devices.
c) The values and units of overall coefficient of heat transferior exposed roof and floors of nonairconditioned space have been modified.
4 Inside design conditions for winter given in Table, 2 have been made applicable, depending
upon the value of the ambient winter temperature.
d Outside design conditions for 16 important cities in the country have been covered forthefirst
time. This would lead to a more pragmatic design of the air-conditioning system for agiven set
of comfort conditions.
0 Detailed constructional and installation requirements of duct work have been introduced.
Is) A new clause drawing reference to the requirements of fire protection has been added.
h) Information regarding noise and vibration, air filters and automatic control has been added.
j) The requirements regarding evaporative cooling have been spelt out more specifically.
k) New provisions covering requirementsof packaged air-condtioners and room air-conditioners
with regard to aspects such as uses, capacity, location, installation, etc, have been-introduced.
m) Information regarding energy conservation and energy management, inspection,

commissioning and testing has been included.
n) A reference to relevant standard covering norms for symbols and units has been included. The
need for a scheme of colour code painting for air-conditioning installations has been
emphasized.
0.5 The information contained in this section is based largelyonthe following Indian Standards:
IS : 659-1964 Safety code of air-conditioning (revised).
IS : 7896- 1975 Data-for outside design conditions for air-conditioning for summer
months.
0.6 Assistance has also been derived from. the following Indian Standards and foreign codesto
prepare a revised draft of this section:
IS : 139 I-197 I Specification for room air-conditioners@rsr revision).
IS : 3315-1974
IS
Specification for evaporative air coolers (desert coolers)(first
revi+m).
: 814X-1976 Specification for packaged air-conditioners.
BS 5720 : 1979 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in

buildings.
Canadian Heating. Ventilation andAir-ConditionimgCode 1977.
Building Code of the City of New York.
?AYT VU!
l l:II.DIN~ SERVlCES-SECTION 3 AIPCONDITIONlNC
AND
HEATING
VIII-$-
1. SCOPE
1.1 This. section covers the design,
construction and installation of airconditioning and heating systems and
equipment installed in buildings for the
purpose of providing and maintaining
conditions of air. temperature, humidity,
purity and distribution suitable for the use
and occupancy of the space.
the air-cooled condenser is built as a separate

package for remote field installatioti and
interconnection shall also be considered as a
packaged air-conditioner.
P LENUM -An air compartment or chamber
to which one or more ducts are connected and
which forms part of an air distribution system.
P O S I T I V E V E N T I L A T I O N -The supply of
outside air by. means of a mechanical device,
2. TERMINOLOGY
such as a fan.
R E C I R C U L A T E D A I R- R e t u r n a j r p a s s e d
through the conditioner before being
resupplied to the conditioned space.

A I R- C O N D I T I O N I N G - T h e p r o c e s s o f
treating air so as to control simultaneously its
temperature, humidity\, purity and
distribution to meet the requirements of the
conditioned space.
D UCT S YSTEM -A continuous passageway

for the transmission of air which, in addition
to ducts, may include duct fittings, dampers,
plenums. fans and accessory air handling
equipment.
EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING -The removal
of sensible heat from the air by the adiabatic
exchange of heat between air and a water
spray or wetted surface.
F IRE D A M PE R -A closure which consists of
a normally held open damper installed in an
air distribution system or in a wall or floor
asse.mbly and designed to close automatically
in the event of a fire in order to maintain the
integrity of fire separation.
F IRE S E P A R A T I O N --A construction
assembly that acts as a barrier against spread
of fire and may not be required to have a fireresistance rating or fire-protection rating.
F IRE W A LL-A
fire resistance rated wall,

having protected openings, which restricts the
spread of fire and extends continuously from
the foundation to at least Im above the roof.
P A C K A G ED A I R- CONDITIONER -An encased
assembly as a self-contained unit primarily for
floor mounting, designed to provide free
delivery of conditioned air to an enclosed
space, room or zone (conditioned space). It
includes a prime source of refrigeration for
cooling and dehumidification and means for
the circulation and cleaning of air, with or
without external air distribution, ducting. It
m a y a l s o iriclude m e a n s f o r h e a t i n g ,
humidifying or ventilating air.
These machines are equipped with a watercooled or air-cooled condetiser. For the
purpose of this definition, the unit for which
VllCF 4
REFRIGERANT-The fluid used for heat

transfer in a refrigerating system, which
absorbs heat at a low temperature and a low

pressure of the fluid and rejects heat at a
higher temperature and a higher pressure of
the fluid, usually involving changes of state of
the fluid.
REHEATING~T~~ process by which air,
which has been cooled down in order to
condense out part of the moisture it contains.
is heated again in erder to raise its
temperature td a suitable level.
R O O M A I R- C O N D I T I O N E R - An encased
assembly designed as a self-contained unit
primarily for mounting in a window or
through the wall or as a console. It is
designed to provide free delivery of
conditioned air to an enclosed space. room or
zone (conditioned space). It includes a prime
source of refrigeration for cooling and
dehunlidification a n d m e a n s f o r t h e
circulation and cleaning of air. It may also
include means for hearing. h u m i d i f y i n g ,
ventilating or exhausting air.
SHADL FAC
I OK The ratio of instantaneous

heat gain through the shading device to that
through a plain glass sheet of 3 mm thickness.
SUPPL.Y AND REI-~JRN AIR G R I L L E S-Fittings
fixed at the openings through which air is
delivered into and returned from the airconditioned enclosure by an air-conditioning
plant or unit.
T EM P E R A T U R E ,
D RY B ULB - T h e
temperature of a gas or mixture of gases
indicated by an accurate thermometer after
correction for radiation.
TEMPERATLIRE,
WE-F BULB - Thermodynamic wet-bulb temperature is the temperature

at which liquid or solid water. by evaporating
into air, may bring the air to saturation
adiabatically at the same tempeiature. Wetbulb temperature (without qualification) is
the temperature indicated by a wet bulb

psychrometer c o n s t r u c t e d a n d .uscd
according to specifications.
m) information regarding type of dampers
T HERMAL T R A N S M I T T A N C E - Thermal
transmission through unit area of the given
building unit divided by the temperature
difference between the air or some other iluid
on either side of the building unit in steady
state conditions.
n) chimney or gas vent size, shape and height;
Z E R O S T A T I C PRESSURE -The static

pressure at the outlet of the air cooler.made
equal to the static pressure at the inlet of the
air cooler.
definitions of other lerms. referenccshall hc
made to good practice [VIII-3(I)].*
.NoIE -- For
_?. PLANNlNCi
3.1 All plans, specifications and data for airconditioning and heating systems of all
buildings and serving all occupancies within
the scope of the Code shall be supplied to
Authority, where called for (see Part II
Administration).
3 . 2 T h e p l a n s f o r h e a t i n g a n d airconditioning systems shall include all details
and data necessary for review of mstallation,
such as:
4 building: name. type and location;

b) owner : name;
cl orientation; north point on plans;
d) general plans; dimensions and height of all

rooms;
e) intended use of all rooms;
1) detail or description of wall construction,

including insulation and finish;
is) detail or description of roof, ceiling and
floor construction, including insulation

and finish;
used in air-conditioning supply grille

system;
P) internal equipment load, such .as number
of people. motor, heaters md lighting

load; and
9) location and grade of the required fire
separations.
3.3 Prcylanning-ln the event of buildings

not being air-conditioned at time of
construction and proposed to be airconditioned at a later stage, provisions for
structural and other requirements bf the
system shall be made at the planning stage
(SCP 3.3.1 to 3.3.9).
3.3.1 EQUIPMEN 1 ROOM FOR CENTRAL AIR~~IVL>I~I ION.~N(; PLANI
3.J.1.1 In selecting the location for plant
room. the aspects of efficiency, economy and
good practice should be kept in mind and
.where possible it shall bq made contiguous
with the building. This room shall be located
as centrally as possible with respect to the area
to be air-conditioned and shall be free from
obstructing columns..
In the case of.large installations (500 tonnes
and above), it is advisable to ha\;e a separate
isolated equipment room where possible. Theclear headroom below soffit of beam should
be a minimum of 3.6m from finished floor
level. In the case of smaller plants, this may be
reduced to 3 m.
3.3.1.2 The floors of the equipment rooms
should be light coloured and finished smooth.
For floor loading, the air-conditioning
engineer shall be consulted (see also Part VI
Structural design, Section I Loads).
h) detail or description of windows and
3.3.1.3 Generally,. in the case of all plants,

structural provIsIons shall be made for
supporting t.he water pipes from the floor
ceiling slabs.
j)
3.3.1.4 All equipment rooms, wherever.

necessary, shall have provision for mechanical
ventilation For space requirements, airconditioning engineer shall be consulted.
outside doors, including size, weather

stripping, storm sash, sills, storm doors,
etc;
layout showing the location, size and

construction of the cooling tower
(apparatus), ducts, distribution system;
k) information regarding location. sizes and

capacity of air distribution system,
refrigeration and heating plant, air
handling equipment;
* In this section. where reference -is made lo good

practice in relation to design. Jesting. construct,ion
procedures and other informatlon, the appropriate
document listed at the end of this section may be used
as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
PART Vlll BUILJXNC
3.3.1.5 Adequate floor drain for disposal of

waste water from the equipment room shall be
provided.
3.3.1.6 Wherever required, the structure of
the equipment room should be windowless to
prevent noise transmission. Wherever
possible and necessary acoustic treatment
should be given to prevent transmission of
SERVICES-SECTION 3 AlPCONDlTlONlNG
AND HEATING
VIII-3-
equipment noise. The slant machinerv shall

be founded on anti-vibratory supporis.
3.3.1.7 Pipe supports shall be such that they
are isolated from the structure-and do not
transmit vibration to the building.
3.3.2
EQUIPMENT .RooM FOK AIK H.,VSDLING UNl.1.S
3.3.2.1 This shall be located as centrally as

possible to the area air-conditiuned,
contiguous to the corridors or otherspaces for
carrying air ducts. For floor loading, airconditioning engineer shall be consulted (see
also Part VI Structural design, Section I
Loads).
3.3.2.2 In the case of large and multistoreyed
buildings, independent air handling unit
rooms should bc provided. wherethe design
Calls tbr the same. The .area to be served by
the air handling unit should be decided
depending upon the provisions of fire
protection measures adopted.

3.3.2.3 Provision should be made for the
entry of fresh air. The fresh air intake shall
have louvers/ wind cheaters which make the
quantity of air intake as independent of
prevalent wind direction as possible. In the
case of tall buildings, vertical shafts should be
provided to handle fresh air and water pipes.
3.3.2.9 The floor should be light coloured,

smooth finished with terrazo tiles or
equivalent.
3.3.2.10 Where necessary, structural design
should avoid beam obstruction to the passage
,of supply and return air ducts.
3.3.2.11 The air handling units should be
acousticaliy treated. The access door to the
room should be of single leaf acoustically
treated type and should have a sill. It should
opsn outwards.
3.3.3 R I S E R S
3.3.3. I In the case of centralized air handling

units, catering for a number of floors, air
risers for supply ducts and return air are
necessary. The risers shall commence from the
roof of the air handling room and shall extend
up to the slab of the last floor.
3.3.3.2 The walls of risers in the
corridor/space shah beconstructed only up to
1 m from finished floor level. They shall be
built up to the ceiling only after installation of
ducts.
3.3.4 O PENINGS FOR SUPPLY AIR D U C T S
RETURN AI R
AND
3.3.2.4 In all cases air intakes shall be so

located as to avoid contamination from
exhaust outlets or other sources in
concentrations greater than normal in the
locality in which the building is located.
3.3.4.1 For supply air ducts and return air,

openings are necessary on each floor. They are
connected through an opening to the riser.
Adequate clearance shall be provided for the
installation of supply and intake ,duct and
their connection to the risers.
3.3.2.5 No air from any dwelling unit shall be

circulated directly or indirectly to any other
dwelling unit,. public corridor or public
stairway.
3.3.4.2 Duct supports in the form of recessed

anchors of projecting mild steel flats with
holes drilled for support bolts shall be cast
with the ceiling slab.
3.3.2.6, Exterior openings for outdw~ air

intakes and exhaust outlets shall be shielded
from weather and insects, and shall be fitted
with corrosion resistant screens of mesh of
suitable size. Such screens shall be accessible
for maintenance.
3.3.4.3 False ceiling shall be provided after

the ducts are laid. The supports for the duct
and the false ceiling shall be independent.
3.3.2.7 All air handling rooms shall have

floor drains. The fIodr drain shall be trapped
but in this case the trap shall provide a water
seal between the air-conditioned space and
the drain line.
3.3.2.8 The passage of return amthrough the
corridors directly to the plant room may be
provided only when sufficient fire protection
arrangements like an effective means for
detecting smoke and controlling its spread are
made. In addition, return air shall not be
allowed to pass through any exit staircases.
VIII-3.6
3.3.4.4 Where a duct penetrates the masonry

wall it shall either be lined on outside with
felt to isolate it from the masonry, or an air
gap shall be left around it.
3..3._5 SUPPI.Y AND R ETURN A IR OPENINGFor side and ceiling outlets, provisron in
walls and ceiling shall be left in consultation
with an air-conditioning engineer.
3.3.6 SHAFT FOR PIPES -Provision shalI be
made for a suitable shaft for condenser chilled

water and refrigeration pipes from the main
equipment room to the air handling unit
rooms and/or cooling tower, where
necessary..
NATIONAL BUII.DINC
CODE OF INDIA
3.3.7
COOLiNG TO W E R
3.3&7.1. It is often necessary to make

provision for mechanical draft cooling tower
on the roof and the location for the same shall,
be decided in consultation with the. airconditioning engineer. The cooling tower
shall not be located on the ground, as apart
from adverse effects on its efficiency, it is also
a source of objectionable noise. If it has to be
located on the ground, it should be located far
away in an open space to avoid reverberations
from tall structures.
3.3.7.2 The floor area required for various
types of cooling towers shall be as given
below:
a) Natural draft
cooling tower
b)
Induced draft
cooling tower
c) Fibre reinforced
plastics cooling
tower
O-15 to 0.20.mz/t of
refrigeration
0.10 to 0*13m/t of
refrigeratiorl
O-07 to 0*08m/t of
refrigeration
3.3.7.3 Obstruction to free air flow to the
cooling tower shall be avoided.

34.7.4 Structural provision for the cooling
tower shalltake into a.ccount the loads coming
on the same.
3.3.7.5 Special .design requirements are
necessary where noise to the adjoining
building is to be avoided.
3.3.7.6, Provision for make-up water tank to
the cooling tower shall be made. Make-up
water tank to the cooling tower shall be
separate from the tank serving drinking water.
3.3.7.7 Water having contaminants which
can adversely affect the plant shall, generally,
be treated.
3.3.8 GLAZING -In view of high energy cost,
adequate protection shall be provided by
keeping away the heat load through glazirig
and other methods.
3.3.8.1 Whi$ considering the orientation of
the buildinj: (see Part VIII Building services,
Section I Lighting and ventilal.ion) glazing in
walls subjected to htivy sun exposure shall be
avoided. In case it is not possible to do so,
double glazing or heat resistant glass should
be used.
3.3.8.2 Where sun breakers sire used, the
following aspects shall be kept in view:
a) The sun breakers shall shade the
PART VlIl MJILDINC
maximum glazed area possibie, especially

from the altitude and azimuth angle at the
sun which is likely to govern the heat load.
b) The sun breakers shall preferably be light
and bright in colour so as to reflect back as
much of the sunlight as possible..
c) The sun, breakers shall be preferably lm
away from the wall face, with free
ventilaiioni particularly from top to
bottom, being provided, for carrying
away the heat which is likely to get
boxed between the sun breakers and the
main building face.
4 The sun breakers shall be sotinstalled as to
have minimum conduction of heat from

sun breakers to the main building.
3.3.8.3 Where resort is taken to provide

reflecting surfaces for keeping out the heat
load, care should be taken regarding the
hazards to the traffic and people on the road
from the reflected light from the surfaces.
3.3.8.4 The values of shade factor for various
types of shading devices are given in Tablel.
TABLE I THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF
DIFFERENT SHADING DEVICES
S L NAM E OF THE
No. SHADING DEVKE
(I)
(2)
i) Plain glass sheet
(3.0 mm thick)
TRANS-
MITTANCE
(9
W/( m2 C)
5.23
SHADE
FACTOR
(4)
I.00
5.00
0.6s
a) White paint
5.22
0.35
b) Yellow paint
5.22
o-37
c) Green paint
5.22
0.40
iv) Heat absorbing glass
4.65
0.45
v) Plain glass sheet +

Venetian blind
inside
3.72
ii) Plain glass+ wife

mesh outside
iii) Painted glass
a) Light colour
035
b) Dark colour
040
vi) Plain glass sheet +

curtain inside
3.14
a) Light
0.35
b) Dark colour
vii) Plain glass sheet
040
5.23
a) 100 percent shaded
.0*14
b) 75 percent shaded
0.34
c) 60 perent shaded.
0.56
3.3.9 ROOF INSULATION -The exposed roof

should be insulated with suitable insulating
S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 3. AIRCONDITIONINC AND -HEATING
VIIH-
materiais. l-he insulation should bc properly

waterproofed
10 prewmt loss of insulating
properties.
4./. f.f In conditions when ambient winter

temperatures
are appreciably
lower than
25C, inside conditions in winter may be
reduced to the conditions given in Table 3 to
3..3.9. I The
reduce the extent of winter heating,
overal! thermal
transmittance
exposed roof should be kept as
minimum as possible and under normal
conditions, the desirable value should not
exceed 0.58 W, (m~ C],
from
the
3.3.9.2 The ceiling surface of floors which are

not to be air-conditioned
shall be suitably
insulated
to give an overall
thermal
transmittance not exceeding 1, !6 W/(m*C)
4,1.1.2 As far as possible, t hermal shock of

more than 11C should be avoided,
4.1.2 OUTSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONSThe

outside design conditions (dry bulb and wet
bulb temperatures) for summer months for
different cities are given in Table 4.
4.1.2.1
4. AIR-CONDITIONING
4. I Design Conditions
4.1.1
INSIDE DESIGN conditions.For

dry bulb and wetair-conditioning,
bulb temperatures may be adopted as given in
Table 2 for summer and in Table 3 for winter
(see 4.1.1.1).
comfort
SELECTiONThe design values of

I percent, 2.5 percent or 5 percent exceeded
temperature given in I_able3 may be selected,
depending upon the percentage of occurrence
as appropriate to the occupancies, process
and variation
of temperature
control
required.
4./,3 For air-conditioning systems other than
comfort air-conditioning,
design conditions
required by the. processes involl cd may be
adopted.
4.1.4 Adequate movement of air shall always
be provided in an air-conditioned enclosure,
but velocities in excess of 0.5m~s in thezone
between floor level and the 1.5m level shall
generally be avoided; in the case of comfort
air-conditioning,
0.25m; s shall
be the
in
~hjs
permissible limit 01 air rnov~mCnt
zone, except in the vicinity of a supply or
return air grille.
4.2 Jfittimum
(lu[side Fresh Air [he total

minimum outside fresh air introduced into an
ecclosure by an air-conditioning plant or unit
shall be reiateci to the number of occupants in
the enclosure at any time, whether they are
smokers or non-smokers and to the cubic
contents of the enclosed space in the manner
TABLE
3 INSIDE
D~SIGN CONDITIONS
WINI Eit
(Clausrs 4.1.1 .4.1.1.1
oltls!llM
CONIMIIONS
SI
so.
FOR
and 4.1.2.!)
MINIMUM
0)!41)[ I IOKS
~~
Tempera-
Wet Bullr
1 cmpwa-
ture
tu re
(3
(3)
(4;
-c
t-
L-
2;4
178
II(.3
I $4)
Ii)
21.7
~~.z
17.3
IJ4
hi)
164
19.4
j~.()
iv)
22:8
[5.3
t9.7
10+
23.3
144
vi)
236
13.4
Dry
(1)
8
VIII.;-
BiIlb
th
Bulb wet Bulb
leniptw1mptwtiturc
turc
(5)
4.2.1 Table 5 shall be used only when the

contamination
of the air in the conditioned
enclosure results solely from respiratory and
other physiological activities of occupants or
due to their smoking.

In hospital operation
theatres,
the
extent and quality of outside air shall depend
4,2.2
upon the type of anaestfiesia used. Where the

!ype of ana~sthesia used varies in the same
operating theatre, depending on the emergency, 100 percent outside air (see4.2.2.1)
should normally beused and no recirculation
of air should be allowed, since anaest het ic
gases are explosive. The refrigerant used shall
be such as not to form an explosive mixture
with the common anaesthesja used in merjjc~l
NATIONAL
IIx LDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
Ir\Bl.E .t OllXlDE DEYICS C~O~Dll~iOSis
( c/r;u.w 4. / 2)
I - O R SLiMMER
2.55
jr.,
105
Ahmadabad
42.X
41 7
40.7
2Y.5
Amrltsar
42.5
41.5
J(i. 3
in.4
27.Y
26.)
Zh.3
25.3
Bhopal
41 7
40.X
3Y ic
3x.5
%.:
24.x
24.4
23.x
Bomba!
34.5
32.8
33.h
32.X
2d.J
28.0
27.X
27:l
CalculIa
39.5
3x.3
37.4
35.h
29.3
29.2
2X.X
2x.4
tlr.(
I;
27.h
?.V,
5;
lo;
21.2
2h.Y
2h.4
Coimbatore
3h.7
35 Y
34 Y
31.7
2x.3
27.4
2h.7
25.Y
Delii1
43.0
JI 9
.+I.;
40.3
2X.1
27.2
26.4
25.h
Hbdcrabad
3Y.5
3x 7
17.Y
36.7
3.3
24.4
23.4,
23 5
.lodhplu
43,s
42.5
41.3
10 0
27.Y
27.2
2h.5
25x
3Y.5
?H 3
?7.7
7 2
2h.5
27.4
I.ucknow
42.X
39.2
Madra\
42.9
hagpur
41.)
37.4
411.0
41.0
3h.Y
4i.l
35.5
2X.5
2li.2
27.X
3Y.Y
27.5
2h.2
2S.h
15.1
27.X
27 4
27
256
42.4
41.1
39.)
3X.3
2X. I
Roorkee
42.5
41.4
4O.h
W.2
27.8
?h Y
26.1
Trivandrum
32.9
32.4
3 1.x
31 0
27.2
26.')
2h.l
!h J
36.0
30 4
29 7
2) 3
2X.X
Patna
Vishakhapatnam
3X.4
37.0
surgery. and shall conform to accepted

standards [Vlll-3 (2)]*.
4.2.2./ Modern practice indicates lhat
outside air rate for operation theatres is
governed by factors like type of filters used in
the supply air circuit and type of air
distribution patterns used in rooms. With the
arrangement of absolute filter and iammar
air flow in operation theatres, outside air
intake may be restricted up to 30 percent.
4.2.3
VOLUME
DETEHMINATIOX OF AVAILABI E
O F POSlT.lVE VENTILA rlOV - - - In
air-conditioned enclosures, the volume of

positive ventilation shall be measured using
appropriate instruments, such as a properly
calibrated anemometer, velocity meter and
pitot tube, which primarily measure the
average velocity of air in the outside air
intake duct. The average velocity of a i r
multiplied by the area of the duct crosssection gives the volume of outside air drawn
by the air-conditioning plant. This is the
volume of positive ventilation supplied. The
locations of openings for sources of positive
ventilation shall be free from any source of
contamination which may be adjacent
thereto.
4.3 Design and lnsiallarion HequiremenuT h e d e s i g n a n d installatibn of airconditioning equipment shall satisfy the
requirements given in 4.3.1 to 4.4./f.
*In this section. where reference is made to accepted
standards in relation IO material specifications, the
app.ropriate document listed in the the appendix to the
Code may be used as a guide 10 the intcrpretalmn of
this term.
PART Vlll BLJILDINC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 3 AlRCONDITlONlNC
35
4.3.1 The design a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n ot

compressors, condensers, cvaporatols,
piping and other apparatus forming a part of
t h e r e f r i g e r a t i n g s y s t e m o f a n airconditioning installation shall conform I O
good practice [VIII-3 (Z)].
4.3.2 Where steam is used for heaiing or reheating air for air-conditioning bg direct
contact with a heating coil, the p!essurc of
steam shall not exceed I .5 kg/ cm-.
A n y h e a t i n g co11 used in an airconditioning system shall withstand: a
hydrostatic pressure five times the workrng
pressure of steam for a period of one minute
without failure or leakage.
4.3.3
4.3.4 All boilers used in producing steam for

h e a t i n g p u r p o s e s s h a l l s a t i s f y the
requirements of the Indian Boilers Act and
other Central or State Acts and Kegulations
in the matter of use of boilers.
4.3.5 For a very special application
(occupancy) involving the use of explosives,
more detailed technical guidance shall be
sought regarding location of the equipment.
4.4 Duct Work
4.4.1 All ducts, duct connectors, associated
fittings. and plenums used in the air duct
system shall be constructed of steel,
aluminium alloy or some other approved
metal, or materials such as clay or asbestos
cement or similar non-combustible material.

The material and constructional
AND HEATING
VIII-3 -
requirements ot metal air ducts in airconditioning systems shall conform to
4.4.3 Joints and seams of all ducts shall be

mechanically secure and made subsequently
air-tight (see also 4.4.2). Slip joints shall have
a :ap of at least 25mm and shall be fastened
individually.
accepted standards [VIII-3(3)].

4.4.2 Air duct systems shall be made
substantially air-tight throughout, and shall
have no openings other than those required
for proper operation and maintenance of.the
system. Access openings shall be provided
where debris, paper or other combustible
material may accumulate in plenums and
ducts. Removable grilles requiring only the
loosening of catches or screws for removal
may be considered as access openings,
Fastening on walk-in access doors shall be
such that the door may be readily opened
from the inside without the use of keys.
4.4.4 Vibration isolation connectors of

suitable length in duct systems shall be made
of non-combustible material.
4.4.5 Coverings, linings and associated
adhesives and insulation of air ducts,
plenums and other parts of air duct systems
shall be of non-combustible material when
exposed to heated air or radiation from heat
sources.
TABLE 5 MINIMUM- FRESH AIR REQUIREMENTS

(Clause 4.2 and 4.2.1)
SL.
No.
APPLICAIION
SMOKING
AIX
RE Q U I R E M E N T , ci, min
h
Recommended
Minimam
Per m of
Floor Area
(6)
_
_
Banking space
Occasional
0.28
(5)
0.28
0.21
iii)
Board rooms
Very heavy
I .40
0.56
iv)
Department stores
None
0.21
0.14
v)
Directors rooms
Very heavy
0.84
Drug stores*
Considerable
1.40
0.28
0.015
_
0.21
0.21
_
0.03
0.30
0.60
0.70
0.28
0.10
-
0.70
0.10
_
_
1.20
0.60
-
(1)
9
ii)
vi)
Apartments
(3)
Some
(4)
0.56
(2)
vii)
Factoriest
viii)
Garages
ix)
Hospitals
None
_
a) Operating rooms
(all fresh air)
None
b) Private rooms
None
None
Heavy
c) Wards
x)
xi)
0.28
-
Hotel rooms
0.84
0.56
0.84
Kitchens:
a) Restaurant
.b) Residence
_
0.56
1.40
0.42
0.84
0.42
0.28
Considerable
0.70
0.84
0.42
0.70
0.08
0.08
Restaurants:
a) Cafeteria*
Considerable
0.34
b) Dining room
Considerable
0.42
0:28
0.34
Retail shop
None
0.28
0.21
Theatre
None
Some
-
0.2 I
0.42
0.14
0.28
-
xii)
Laboratories*
Some
xiii)
Meeting rooms
Very heavy
xiv)
Offices:
a) General
b) Private
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
Toilets (exhaust)
None
Some
0.38
0.60
*In case exhaust air required is more than fresh air specified, fresh air requirements will take exhaust
considerations into account.
tbiay begoverned by focal byclaws (sees/so Part VIII Building services, Section I Lightingand ventilation).
.,,,3.10
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
4.4.5.1 Duct coverings need not meet these

requirements where they are entirely located
outside of a building and do not penetrate a
wal! or roof, and do not create an exposure
hazard.
4.4.5.2 Duct covezings and linings shall be
interrupted at tlie area of operation of a fire
damper or fire door, when 8 fire damper or
fire door is used -in the duct penetration of a
fire partition or fire wall.
4.4.5.j Linings.of ducts shali be so installed
that they will not interfere with the operation
of fire dampers and other closures.
4 . 4 . 6 U n d e r g r o u n d d u c t s sha!l b e
constructed to provide interior drainage and
shall not be connected directly to a sewer.
4.4.7 No attic, basement. room or concealeJ
space in a building shall be used as an
integra! part of a duct system unless it
conforms to all the requirements for ducts:
Such arrangements shall be subject to the
approval of the air-conditioning engineer.
Plenum chambers which conform to all -the
requirements fgr ducts may be located ,in
such portion of the building; such chambers
shall not be used for storage or occupational
purposes. A concealed space formed by a
ceiling and f!oor above may be used as a
plenum chamber, provided the installation
conforms to fire-resisting and fire protection
requirements.
4.4.8 Ducts sha!l not be built into a building
in such a way as to impair the effectiveness of
the fireproofing around steel or iron
structural members, such 2s placing ducts
between the fire proofing and the members
protacted. except in the case of beams or
joists protected by a fire-resisting ceiling.
4.4.9 Where ducts installed above a fireresi5tir.g ceiling are provided with openings
in the ceiling, it is important that such
openings be limited in size and adequately
protected to preserve the required fire
resistance. Such openings shall have
approved means for protection.
4.4.10 putts shall not be located where they
will be Subject to damage or rupture. Where
so located, they shall be suitab!y prqtected.
4.4.11 Ducts shall be, subsfaniially
supported. Hangers and brackets for
supporting ducts shall be of metal.
4.5 Electrical and Of her Requirements
4.5.f C O N F O R M I T Y WITH iNDI4N ELECTRIKITY AC T. RU L E S AND ST A ND A R D S- A l l
electrical work in connection with the wiring

PART VM
BIJILDIN(; SKRVICES-SECTION
and installation of electrical equipment shall

be carried out in accordance with Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrica!
installations.
4.5.2 CO N D U I T S-Wheie conduits are used
for carrying insulated electrical conductors
and when such conduits pass from a non-airconditioned area-into an air-conditioned area
or into a fan chamber or duct, a junction box
shall be installed or other means shall be
adopted to break the continuity of such
conduit at the point of entry or just outside
and the conduit should be sealed round the
conductors to prevent air being carried from
one area into the other through the. conduit
and thereby giving rise nqt only to leakage
and inefficiency but also to the risk of
condensation of moisture inside &he conduits.
The same method applies equally to other
types of wiring, like wood sheathing or ducts
which allow air to pass through around the
conductors.
4.5.3 In the case of air-conditioning p!ants
where re-heating is done. a safety device shah
be incorporated*in the installaton to cut off
automatically the source of heating, such as
steam or electricity by means of a thermostat
or some other device, as soon as the
temperature of the room reaches a
predetermined high level not exceeding 44C
unless a higher temperature is tequiled for an
industrial piocess carried out in the airconditioned encloslire.
4.5.4 In the case of air-conditioning plants
where heating or re-heating by means of an
electric heater designed to operate in ,an air
current is done, a safety device shall be
incorporated in the installation to cut off the
supply of electricity to the heating device
whenever there is failure of the air current in
which the heater is required, to operate.
Serious harm to the plant and sometimes
fires may be. caused by negligence in this
respect.
4.5.4.1 The surface temperature of all
electric heaters used in an air-conditioned
plant should be limited, preferably to 4O!YC,
and in any case it shall not exceed 538C,
when measured in still air.
4.6 Fire Protection Requirements -- Fire
protection requirements of air-conditioning
systems shall be in accordance with Part IV
Fire protection.
4.6.1 Air-conditioning of enclosures. where
extremely combustible articles like

cinematograph films, explosives, etc. are
stored, shall be governed by appropriate
State Regulations in this respect where such
regulations exist. Normally, such enclosure
~IR-CONDITIONIN~ *ND
E,T,NC
VIII;F~1
should not, be air-conditioned by a plant or
a) Choice of fan with low sound power level
unit which also air;conditlons other

enclosures meant for human occupancy.If
this io unavoidable, effective means, sucha8
automatic shutters, shall be adoptcd.to close
tightly all duct communications between
such enclosure and other enclosuresand thr
b)
due to fire or other causes, Fire dampers are

customarily held open by fusible links.
4.6.1.1 In particular, a projection room

attached to a cinema theatre shall be isolated
automatically in the manner indicated above
from the auditorium.
air-cqnditioning lant itself, as soon as

tompwituns reacR a dangerously high level
e)
4.7 Noise and Vibration

-General noise is
unwanted sound. All ventilating and airconditioning systems will produce noise and
this may cause annoyance or disturbance.
4.7.1.1 NOISE SOURCES

sound may arise from:
is)
4.7.1 SOUND CONTROL
--
Undesirable
a) Central plant, for example, boiler pumps,

fans, compressors, cooling towers,etc;
b) Distribution noise owing ,to:
i) air velocity in the duct, particularly
through dampers or restriction or air
leakage;
ii) drumming from duct walls;
iii) excessive fluid velocity in pip% and
valves; and
iv) pick up of noise or vibration from
plant rooms, etc. and transmission
along duct work or pi e work, cross
talk or noise transP er from one
occupied space to another.
cl Noice souices in occupied rooms. for
example, local fans, induction unit, high
velocity unit, self-contained unit
air-conditioners air flow through grilles
and diffusers; and
4 Architecturii considefation, that is. open
plan, false ceilings.
4.7.1.2 D E S I G N PR I NC I P L E S - N o i s e c a n b e
transmitted through internal duct work,
external grilles (both inlet and exhaust)
external louvers, open windowa; etc. Noise
levels can be reduced in the room by
appropriate selection or acoustic shrouding
of machines. In sbme cases treatmeqt of plant
room walls and ceilings can alleviate the
problem, but this is not usually economical
or even adequate. The following points
should .be taken into account in selecting
equipment to meet the required noise levels.
W-*12
h)
consistent with the required perfomance

and ensuring operation at maximum
efficiency. To achieve this, smooth entry
and exit flow are important;
By lining plenum chambers with sound
absorbent material high attenuation can
be obtained quite cheaply, particularly if
inlet and outlet do not face each other;
For the addition of purpose-made
alterations that fit into the line of duct
work, adequate space is needed;
Duct work should be lined with sound
absorbent material;
Duct sizes should be chosen to be
compatible with the frequencies of the
sound to be absorbed;
Consideration should be given to the
possibility of noise transmission from the
duct, which may necessitate increasing
the mass of the duct construction;
Use of nitred bends preferably lined
(preferable to, lining dtJct work);
Avoidance of the need for excessive
throttling air at grilles, diffuser dampers;
and
Acoustic freatment of air inlet and outlet
external to the building.
4.7.1.3
C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S O F SOIJND
ABSOKHFNT MATERIAI.
a) High sound absorption coefficient over

the required frequency range;
b) Preferably non-combustible or at least
will not sustain flame nor. produce toxic
fumes when burnt;
c) Non-hygroscopic;
d) Will not sustain morlld growth or vermin;
d Does not absorb odours;
f-l Sound absorbent material. its covering
and its adhesive should not disintegrate
under vibration or ageing and should not
be eroded by the air flow, taking into
account, extremes of temperature and
humidity likely to be encountered:
g) Surface of all sound absorbent materials
should be covered with a suitable
membrane sealed at all joints to prevent
the entrainment of particles from sound
absorbing media, as such entrainment
can lead to hazard in many applications;
and
W Sound attenuating padsshould,whenever
possible be mounted vertically; if this is
not possible, it should be retained in a
suitable enclosure to prevent collapse.
N A T I O N A L BiJll.diNG CODE OF INDlA
4.7.2 VIBRATION CO N T R O L
these ir normally confined to the smaller

systems u to a maximum air flow of about
5 m/e. TRey nre constructed in various size
ran er, such PI 450 x 450 mm, 500 x 500 mm
an(P 600 x 6OOmm, and operate at face
4.7.2.1 SOURCES -Vibration
in a building
is an undesirable sensation resulting from
low frequency pressure however bein
transmitted through both the structure and
theair? In m.ost situations it is the vertical
vibrations that are important, since floors
have the greatest flexibility in this direction.
velocities between 1.0 and 2.5 m/s.

The charucteriutics of thilr type of filters are
get out as follows:
4.7.2.2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES -- In selection of

equipment for an installation, cons,ideration
should be given to building design and the
way it will be used.
Most supports are made of either steel
springs dr rubber pads. Incorrect selection
can lead to the transmission of vibration
greater than that with rigid supports. Thus, it
is important to select the correct stiffness of
anti-vibration mount.
Vibration dampers should be fitted between
machinery and ail pipe work and duct work
efficiency of these filters is up to 95

percent. They may be of fabric, processed
from plastics or brush type. They
normally operate wi!h initial resistance of
25 to 55 Pa rising to 50 to 125 Pa with
use. Their efficiency increases with dust
load, but volume flow is reduced. They
VlSCoUS IhiPINGEMENT FILTER - The

-efficiency range of these filters is 80 to 90
percent. These are serviced by washing
and re-oiling, and are generally uped for
industrial or engine air intakes;
PERMANENT DRY TYPE FILTER -The
are serviced by washing, or by

compressed air ot vacuum cleaning;
DRY REPLACEABLE MEDIA TYPE - T h e
including the supports when app!icable.

4.7.3 LAVOUI CO N S ID E R A T I O N ~-OR SO U ND
A ND
VI B R A T I O N
efficiency range of these filters is 95

percent. They consist of fabric or wadding
media on metal frames. They are serviced
by replacing filter media upon a rise of 1.5
to 2 times the initial resistance, which is
normally between 35 and 100 Pa. They are
commonly used as main filters or asprefilters to high efficiency filters; and
T H R O W A W A Y T Y P E -The efficiency of
these filters is up to 95 percent. They are
generally of panel construction with filter
media of fabric, plastics, glass or metal
fibre mounted in a rigid wood, metal or
cardboard frame. They are used i n
sma,ller plants w h e r e s e r v i c i n g
requirement of permanent type would be
disadvantageous.
a) Single glazing on floors immediately
above or below high level plant rooms

might be unsuitable;
b) Critical rooms for noise, for example,
conference rooms, lecture theatre, etc,

should be sited away from the plant
room;
c) Restricted or confined areas, for
,example, courtyards or alleys should be
avoided when siting equipment outside.
The equipment should be so oriented that
noise will be radiated away from the
likely areas of complaint;
4 Avoid unbalanced reciprocating
machinery in plant room above ground;
d Careful choice and siting of externally
mounted item of equipment, for example,
mechanical draught cooling tower; and
lnstallation of all rotating machinery on
suitable anti-vibration mountings and
insulation of duct work and pipe -work
from their support and from direct
contact with the building structure.
4.7.4 It is important that expert advice be
sought in dealing with noise Bnd vibration
problems, as most economical solutions
should be used without impairing the
performance.
4.8.1.2 A U T O M A T I C A I R F I L T E R S - T h e s e
are primarily usedon larger systems, where
they usually ive economic advantage over
panel filters. +hese filters arc obtainable down
to a rating of 0.5 m/s. Air flow velocity is
usually betwvn 2.00 and 2.75 m/s. Velocities
higher than this can give a reduction in overall
size, but leads to a penalty in increased
resistance and possibility of carryover of the
filter fibres or the wetting oil.
4.8 Air Fillers
4.8.1.
TYPES
OF
EQUIPMENT
4.8.1.1 PANEL OR
?ARt
UNIT FILTERS - Ufie
V I I I WJI~INC SERVICD--ICCIION
of
9 AIRCONDITIONING
viscous TYPE - The

efficiency of these filters is u to 90
percent. Operation is nortnal Py timeswitch controlled and the filters maintain
a constant operatjng resistance of 50 to
125 Pa according to type.
Servicing of these filters require6 removal
AUTOMATIC
by hand of the dust de orited m a rlud@

from- the viscour R uid tank add
AND
HUTING
VIII-%
1)
&a
mechanical maintenance is required for

timer mechanism, motor bearing, etc; and
a)
the air flow rate for which filter is

designed;
AUTOMATIC DRY TYPE -These can be
b)
the face velocity, which is the average

velocity of air (m/ s) entering the effective
face area of the filter;
resistance, that is, the difference between

static pressure upstream and downstream
specified for clean and dirty conditions:
d)
efficiency, that is, measure oi the ability

of the filter to remove dust irom the air;.
e)
dust holding capacity, which is the mass

of dust t.hat a filter can retain air flow
during a rise in pressure drop from its
initial clean resistance :o some arbitrary
maximum value, usually twice the value
oi pressure drop when clean;
obtained with various grades of filter

media giving efficiencies between 95 and
98 percent depending on media. Air flow
pressure drop for the media are 100 to
125 Pa standard and 125 to 150 Pa
increased density. Servicing consists
mainly of replacement of media.
4.8.1.3 E L EC T R O S T A T I C C L E A N ER S -- T h e
efficiencies of these devices are 9S to 99
percent. These are efficient in removal of
large quantities of dust, especially in smaller
particle range. Electrostatic cleaner is a two
stage unit, the first stage being a series of tine
wires that give the dust particles a ,positive
electrical charge and the second stage, a
series of parallel plates generally coated with
a water soluble viscous solution charged
negative or negative and positive alternately.
Servicing is by switch off and washing down
and recoating as necessary. Cells require
regular inspection for burnt plates, as also
inspection and replacement of ionizing wires,
rectifiers, etc, as necessary. This equipment
operates on high voltage and suitable
interlocks ace required to ensure that access to
live-parts is possible only when-power is off.
4.8.1.4 HIGH EFFiCltNCY PARTICIJLATE AlK
(HEPA)
OK
ABSOLU
F I L T ER S
- The
efficiencies of these filter5 is 99 to 99.995

percent. They are invariably panel filters,
most commonly 600 x 600 x 300 mm, rated
for 0.500 m/s at initial resistance of 125 to
300 Pa. Standard absolute filters use treated
or glass paper media in honeycomb
formation in mild steel or wooden case.
other filters are constructed of materials
giving suitability for operation in high
humidities, high temperatures and chemicahy
corrosive atmosphere and are generaily used
in conjunction with a pre-filter. The life of
these filters can vary from a few months to
several years, depending on iocation and
efficiency of the pre-fil!er.
4.8.1.5 CAR BON PACK FILTER -This is used
to remove odours, fumes, vapours, gases. etc.
from air. Carbon may be activated or
catalytic and is, to some extent, selective. Air
flow face velocity is comparatively low
usually of the order of I .75 m, s. These filters
quickly become clogged with atmospheric
dust and use of throwaway pattern or those
suitable for regeneration by the manufacturer
is recommended.
4.8.1 SE L E C T I O N F A C T O R S - W h e n
selecting a filter, the\following parttculars
should be considered:
UL3-14
economic considerations should take

into account the initial capital cost, cost
of replacement of maleriah during
cleaning operations and of the labcur
involved; and
possible fire hazards.
4.8.3 L O C A T I O N AND INsrAt.!.A.t ION
4.8.11.1 Filters are normaliy placed upstream
of the main supply fan between the pre-heat
coil. (if fitted) and the cooiing coil. Besides
producing clean room air, they protect
cooling coils and other apparatus
fiom
deposition of dust. The system should be
arranged to provide an even air velocity
distribution across the filter face.
4.8.3.2 Where a high degree of fi!trLttion is
required, high efficiency fiiters, normal!y
used in conjunction with pre-iilters. are
placed downstream of the fan and should be
the last item of equipment before the
discharge point. This ensures that any air
leakage is outward and that contaminated air
is not drawn into the system. Another
advantage is also that any contamination
from the air handiing equipment is captured
by the final filter.
4.8.3.3 Fresh air intakes should be as remote
as possible from the concentration of surface
or roof dirt and positioned to avoid intake of
fumes and cdours. Weather louvers with a
wire mesh bird screen should be fitted. In
some cases, the louvers may need acoustic
treatment to reduce noise from or into the
system.
4.8.3.4 Adequate access to facilitate
servicing of the filters should be provided and
doors, iadders. elec:ric lighting. etc. should
be included where necessary. A manometer
indicating differential pressures across the
filter bank should be fitted to determine the
need for filter change.
4.8.3.5 All ducts should be clean and free

from dust before filters are installed.
4.8.3.6 The frame holding the filter media
when in position should form an effective
seal, so that no air bypasses the filter.
4.8.3.7 Doors and hatches giving access to
live high voltage: conductors of electrostatic
precipitators should be equipped with locks
under control of an authorised person.
4.9 Automatic Controls
4.9.1 T YPES OF E QUIPMENT -The basic
components that are designed, selected and
installed to work together to form a complete
control system, together with their functions,
are shown in Table 6.
TABLE 6
BASIC COMPONENTS OF A CONTROL

SYSTEM
FUNCTIOH
E L E M ENT O R
COMPONENT
Sensing and measuring

element of the
controller, for example,
sensor,detector
Measuring changes in
Controller mechanrsm
Translating the changes

into forces or energy
of a kind that can be
used by the final
control element
Connecting members of
the control circuit;
wiring for electric,
piping for pneumatic,
linkages for mechanrcal
Transmitting the energy

or forces from the point
of translation to the
point of corrective
action
Controlled device or
actuar, such as motor
o r
v a l v e
Using the force or energy
Sensing and measuring

element of the
controller
Detecting the completion

of the change
Controller mechanism,
connecting means, and
actuator or control
device
Terminating the call

for corrective change,
to prevent overcorrection
one or more controlled

conditions or variables
to motivate the final

cohtrol element and
effect a corrective
change in the controlled condition
4.9.2
C E N T R A L I Z E D C O N T R O L / MO N I T O R I N G
E QUIPMENT -The centralized control
compatible with the requirements of the

remote panel, transmission system, or the
central equipment;
cl output devices, which provide a means for
converting a command instruction,
appearing at the remote panel, into a
signal suitable for performing an
operational function on external
equipment; and
4 remote data collection panels or remote
enclosure, which act as termination points
for the remote ends of the transmission
links and for connections to the remote
input and output devices.
4 . 9 . 2 . 2 T RANSMISSION LINKS - T h e
transmission link provides the means for
communication between the central
equipment and the remote data collection
panel, and may be classified according to a
number of variables which include:
a) medium (wires or cables, teleDhohe lines,
microwave);
b) transmission mode (one direction only,
one direction at a time, etc );
c) data sequence,
4 wire or cable types;
e) signal types; and
0 message format.
4.9.2.3 CENTRAL EQUIPMFNT - This may
comprise:
a) an interface, which provides a connection
point and the signal conversion between

the central processor and transmission
links;
b) the central processor, which is the
collection of equipment at the central

control room containing the logic for
management of the centralized control
and monitoring system; the processor has
the means to receive, transmit and
present information, with the ability to
process all data in an orderly fashion, and
may or may not include a computer; and
system, which is shown diagrammatically in

Fig.1, comprises three main parts, namely,
the remote location equipment, the
transmission links and the central equipment.
cl peripheral devices, such as typewriters,
4.9.2.1 REMOTE
This includes:
4.913
LOCATION EQUIPMENT -
a) input devices or sensors, which .measure

the condition of a variable;
b) signal conditioning devices, which
convert the sensor signal to a type
?MT WI B U I L D I N G S E & I C E S - S E C T I O N 3 AIPCONDITIONINC
printers, displays (digital type, projectors,

or cathode ray tubes, etc).
SE L E C T I O N FACI-ORS
COMMON FACTORS -There are a

number of factors ta be considered in the
selection of almost all control system
components. These common factors include:
a) supbly and working electricity voltage,
phases: freauency and number of wires;
4.9.3.1
AND H E A T I N G
V,,!P
4 . Y . 4 L_OCA~ION AND ACCESS
air mains pressure and
b)
compressed
quality;
cl
maximum and/ or minimum temperature,

humidities .or pressures to which
components may be subjected;
d)
restrictions on location, mounting

positions, etc. or possible problems owing
to duct, vibration. etc;
4.Y.4.1 All sensing elements .should be so
located that they measure truly representative

conditions. All instruments, such .as
thermostats, humidistats and pressurestats
should be securely fixed in position free from
vibration and risk of mechanical damage.
4.Y.4.2 Arrangements should .be made. to
ensure air flow over the instrument wherever
this is necessary for correct operation.
e) dimensions and weights; and
required accessories or fittings.
r-----7
F R O M OThER
INPUTS
R E M O T E LOCATl6N
EQUIPMENT
TO OTHER
OUTPUTS
REMOTE DATA
COIIECTION P A N E L
-_c T O O T H E R
DATA COLLECTION
PANELS
fi A?S%i Is i?jN: ITE:, 5 EE%;
C O A X I A L C A B L E S , TELEPHONl?
- - - -L I N
- ES
- , - E T-C . -. - - - -
TRANSMISSION
LINKS
C E N T R A L EOUIPMENT
It72fz>l
INTERCOM
SYSTEMS
OPERATOR
INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 1 Simpl[fied dlloik Diagram of Ctwralized Control System
lll.J-16
NATIDNAL BUlLlXNC CDDi OP INDIA
4.9.4.3 Duct inspection type thermostats and

humidistats should have the sensingelemeni
correctly positioned ia the air .stream,
adequately rupported and iacated where it is
not subjected to radiation from heeting coils.
5.4 For detailed information. regarding
4.9.4.4 Where possible, controiiersand other

items requiring adjustment or maintenance
should be mounted approxiinateiy I.5 m
above floor level.
6. PACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONERS
4.9.4.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPER .Dampers in air systems should be properly

installed to avoid air leakage around-the
damper frame and minimize leakage losses
through the damper blades within design
limits when the biades.arc in closed position.
4.10 Inspection and Maintenance
4.10.1 INSPECTION -
No air-conditioning,
refrigerating or ventilating system requiring a
permit shall be operated until it has been
tested and found safe by the approved
Agency. All tests shall be conducted in
accordance with good praciice. Ail systems
requiring permits shall be inspected by the
approved Agency upon their completion. if
the system is found safe and in conformity
with the requirements of the Code and the
approved application. a certificate shall be
issued by the approved Agency upon request.
4.10.2 M AINTENANCE -- Maintenance of
installations shall be done in accordance with
good practice [Viii-3(2)].
5. EVAPORATIVE COOLING
5.1 in view of the rise in energy cost, the use
of evaporative coolers has become necessary,
particularly for the hot and arid region. in
areas where the air is very hot and dry it is
possible to reduce the dry bulb temperature
by passing air over a wetted surface. This
type of coolers can not be used in damp
climates, because the moisture content of the
air leaving the coolers is very high, thus
raising the humidity above comfort level.
5.2 Fresh outside air should be used with no
recirculation, be_cause by recirculating the air
leaving the evaporating cooler, the wet bulb
temperature shall continue to increase and
shall result in unsatisfactory conditions.
5.3 Capacity - The nominal capacities 01
the evaporative air coolers bar u on the
delivery of air dt zerosratic pressure shall be
as under:
750, 1000, 1200, 1500, 180. 2op0,
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, and
8000 m/.h.
PART Vlli B U I L D I N G SUVICFS-SECTION
constructional and performance

requirements and methods of testing
eva orative air coolers, reference liray be
ma!e to good practice [VIII-3(4)].
6.1 Window air cooled packaged units are

available u to a limited capacity. Floor
mounted seP f-contained packaged unit1 are
gade to meet the requirementr for large
capacities. This unit comprises a compressor,
condenser (water-cooled or air-cooled),

evaporator, fans, filter and controls. It may
also include means for heating, humidifying
or ventilating air. These units are designed
for application in residences and in the
smaller commercial market-shops,
restaurants, small office suits, etc.
6.2 Capacity -Commercial packaged airconditioners are available in sizes of the
nqminai Looiing c a p a c i t y IOOOOW
(approximately 9OOOkcai/ h) and above.
6.3 Factors affecting cooling load estimates
as specified in 7..? shall be taken into account
while making the heat calculation.
6.4 Locatioiz-The packaged units can bc
mounted within the air-conditioned space or
remote in a separate enclosure. Provision
shall be kept for proper servicing facility
around the unit.
6.5 Installation -The packaged units are
normally mounted on-a resilient pad which
prevents vibratitin of the compressor from
being transmitted to the buiidmg.
requirements and method for establishing
rating of packaged air-conditioners,
reference may bc made to good practice
[VIII-3(5)].
7. ROOM AIR.-CONDITIONERS
7.1, These arq self-contained air-conditioning
untts, comprlsmg a compressor, evaporator
fan and air-cooled condenser. This unit is
used for single rooms having limited
occupancy. These are suited for.bedroo?s,
office cabins, general office areas, hotel
robms and hospitals and similar ap@catione
where normal comfort condttlons are
required.
7.2 Capacity- doom air-conditioners are
available in nominal capacities of I 500,
2 250, 3 000, 3 750, 4 500, 5 250, 6 000, 7 500
and 9 000 kcai/ h.
3 AIlbCONDITIONING
A N D HISATING
VIII-3. - v
7.3 Factors Affecting Cooling Load

Estimates
a)
OCCUPANCY - N u m b e r o f p e o p l e ;
smoking and non-smoking
b)
Extent of glazivg and orientation
C) E X P O S U R E -Roof, ceiling. floor, walls,
steam boiler units (oil or gas fired) and gas

units. The construction and operation of
these individual units shall satisfy the local
byelaws. with regard to safety in operation
and safety of occupants.
8.3 Safety controls should be used with
electric strip heaters.
part itions
d)
IN T E R N A L L O A D S -Lighting and-.other
heat generating source :ike equipment
and machinery.
V E N T I L A T I O N - Requirement for fresh
air
7.4 Location - Room air-conditioner shall

be mounted at the window sill level on an
external. wall where hot air from the aircooled condenser can be discharged to
outside without causing a nuisance. There
should not be any obstruction to the iniet of
air for the condenser.
7.5 Installation-The opening for the airconditioner shall preferably be made a part
of window or wall construction from the
planning stage.
7 . 6 t_inliratiorts----These
recommended for:
are no! g e n e r a l l y
a) operation theatres where 100 percent
fresh air is needed and fire hazard exists,

depending on the type of anaesthesia
being used.
b)
the width of the area exceeds 6m.

requiring close control of
temperature and relative humidity.
cl area
internal zones where no exposed wall is

available for the installation of room air
conditioners.
sound recording rooms where criteria for

acoustics are stringent.
special applications lil;e sterile rooms for

htispitals and clean room applications
where high filtration efficiency is desired.

requirements and methods for establishing
ratings of room air-conditioners,. reference
may be made to good pl,acticc [VIII-3 .@)I.
8. HEATING
8.1 Ccniral S~etns--- The installation for
the air-condiiioning system may be used
advantageously for the cen:ral h e a t i n g
system with such additions as a hot water or
steam boiler, heating coils, thermostats. etc.
8.2 (/nit S y s t e m s - T h e c o m m o n u n i t
systems include . individual heating units;
,,,_i_l8
Y . S Y M B O L S . UNlTS A N D COLOLJR
CODE
9.1 !Jnits and symbols to be used in
refrigeration sha!! be adopted in accordance
with good practice [VIII-3(7)].
9.2 Colour code for identification for
various items in air-conditior!ing installations
for easy interpretation and idtntification may
be necessary. This shall promote greater
safety and shall lessen chances of error,
confusion or inaction in times of emergency.
The scheme of colour code painting for airconditioning instal!ationc shall be as decided
by the Authority.
10. E N E R G Y C O N S E R V A T I O N A N D
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
IO. 1. Energy conservation signifies the
optimum use of energy to operate the
ventilation and air-conditioning system of a
building. General standards of comfort or
particular environmtntal r e q u i r e m e n t s
within the building should not be sacrificed
in an endeavortr to achieve low consumpticn
of energy. Some of the more important
aspects of establishing energy conservation
requirctients f o r v e n t i l a t i n g a n d aircnnditioning systems are given below.
10.1.1 The design of thr sy:stem and its
associated controls should take into account
the following:
a) tbc natu1.e of the app.lcation:
r P of constructlbn;
b) t h e t)p
c) external i?nd internal load patterns:
d) .desired space conditions:
e) permissible control limits:
r) control methods for minimizing use of
prlm2t-y energy;
g) opportunities fw heat recovery; and
h) economic factors (including probable
future cost and avai!ability of fuel).
10.1.2 ?he operation of the sys!em in the
following circumstances should be
considered when assessing the complete
design:
a) in summer;
b) in winter;
N A T I O N A L BUILDING
CODE OF ikDIA
c) in intermediate seasons;
d) at night;
ej at weekends;
fj under frost conditions; and
g) if electricity stlpply failure occurs and
when the supply is restored.
10.1.3 Consideration should be given to
changes in building load and the system
designed, so that maximum operational
efficiency is maintained under part-load
conditions. Simi!arly. the total system should
be .separated into smaller increments having
similar load requirements, so that each area
can be separately controlled to .maintain
dptimum operating conditions.
10.1.4 The temperature of heating and
cooling media circulated within the system
should be maintained at the level necessary to
achieve the required output to match th!:
prevailing load conditions with the minimum
expenditure of energy.
10.1.5 Recovered energy should be used as
much as possible.
10.1.6 Operation and maintenance
procedures should be properly planned.
10.1.7 Equipment which requires preventive
maintenance should be furnished with all the
necessary information.
10.1.8 The designer should aim to select the
simplest system of control capable of
producing the space conditions required. It is
uneconomical to provide controls with a
degree of accuracy greater than that required
by the application. Consideration should be
given to the provision of centralized
monitoring and control, thus achieving
optimum operation.
II. INSPECTION, COMMlSSlONlNG
ANri TESTING
Zl.1 Inspection, commissioning and testing
should be carried out meticulously if a
satisfactory installation is to be handed over
to the client. It should be ensured that these
are carried out thoroughly and that all results
are properly documented. Ii is recommended
that the whole commissioning procedure
should be under the guidance and control of
a single Authority.
Il.2 Inspection and Testing ar Works -The
air-conditionihg system will consist of
PMT VIII B U I L D I N G SERVICES-SECTION 3 AIRCONDITIONlNG
various items of equipment produced by

various manufacturers. Each manufacturer
should give facilities for the inspection of his
equipment during manufacture and on
completion.
Il.3 Inspection and Testing on Site - Prior
to setting to work and regulation,
preliminary checks, testing and charging of
the complete system should be carried oirt. It
is important that all water systems should
have.been thorougly flushed through and
hydraulically pressure tested toI.5 times the
working pressure for a period of not less than
30 minutes.
High pressure air duct system should also
have been tested in accordance with the
prodedures.
I I .4 Commissioning
f I.4.l In applications where temperatureand
humidity are to be maintained within close
limits, it may be necessary to simulate the
maximum heat loads to ensure plant
performance. but in any case a load of at least
50 percent is required when commissioning
the refrigeration plant.
f1.4.2 R E G U L A T I O N -Regulation is the

process of adjusting the rates oftluid flow in a
distribution system within specified
tolerances. System regulation is the final stage
in a sequence that starts with the design itself.
It is essential that the flows of fluids through a
system are corredly regulated and balanced
and conform to design parameters: otherwise
the system cannot perform as intended and
the desired internal environmental conditions
will not be met.
Locating the necessary dampers in the right
places is one of the basic requirements for
effective system regulation. To carry out
satisfactory regulation of a system, a
schematic diagram showing all mains.
branches, valves, etc, with the required flow,
pressure drop and velocity appertaining to
each run of duct or pipe, is rcqoired covering
all fluid flows in the system. Adequate means
of measuring flow or velocity should be
provided.
11.5 Performance Testing- Performance
testing is the evaluation of thepefortiance of a
commissioned installation. If the installation
is to perform as required by the designer, tests
are to be carried out under actual operating
conditions, usually after the building has
settled down and been occupied.
AND
HEATING
.,,I29 *
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those start&r& which are acceptuble as good practice and
accepted standark in the ful/irmct of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adoptedat the thnk of eforcement of the Co&. The standards listed may be used
Code.
In thefollowing list the number amearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in th9 part/s&ion.
(1)
18:3615-1967 Glossary of terms used in

refrigeration and air-conditioning
(2) IS:660-I 963 Safety code for mechanical

refrigeration (revised)
(3) IN:655- I963 Specification for metal air

ducts (revised)
(4) lS:3315-1974 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
,,,.P
evaporative air coolers (desert coolers)

@rst revision)
(5) IS:8 148- 1976 Specification for packaged
air conditioners
(6) IS: I39 I - 197 I Specification for room airconditioners
(7) IS:483 I- 1968 Recommendation on units
and symbols for refrigeration
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CDDC
Oi tNDlA

SECTION4 ACOUSTICS,SOUND
INSULATION ANDNOIS~E
CO.NTROL
CONTENTS
0.
FOREWORD
...
I.
SCOPE
...
2.
TERMINOLOGY
...
3.
PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST OUTDOOR NOISE
...
4.
PLANNING AGAINST INDOOR NOISE
...
5.
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
...
6.
EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
...
7.
HOSPITAL BUILDINGS
...
II
8.
OFFICE BUILDINGS
...
I4
9.
HOTELS AND HOSTELS
...
16
...
I7
IO. INDUSTRIAL BUlLDlNGS

II. LABORATORIES AND TEST HOUSES
1..
12. MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS

13. PUBLIC ADQRESS SYSTEM
APPENDIX
CONSTRUCTIONAL M EA S U R ES FOR
I N S U L A T I O N O F BUlLDINGS
SOUND
APPENDIX B SOUND REDUCTION AND SOUND

lI$!iULATlON VALUES FOR VARIOUS TYPES
OF MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
PART WI BUILDING SERVICES-SECllON 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
21
22
24
25
29
vlll-c
l-Aft-( VIII BUILDING SERVICES

SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section coLers the acoustical, sound insulation and noise control requirements in
buildings. Emphasis is laid on planning of buildingsvis-a-vis its surroundings to ieduce noise
and in addition sound insulation aspects of different occupancies are covered for achieving
acceptable noise levels.
VIII4
N A T I O N A L W I L D I N G C O D E O F INMA
0.1 1 his section was first published in 1970. In this revision mainly the following changes have
been made:
a) The approximate measured noise levels due to various types of traffic (air, rail and road) are
given; and planning and design features of buildings against outdoor noise is elaborated;
b) Impact sound insulation in residential buildings is modified to grade system of impact sound
insulation;
d Recommendations regarding planning of open plan schools. against noise is given;

4 Planning of office buildings with light weight partitions is specified;
d
Planning and design aspects of hotels and hostels, laboratories and test houses, and other
miscellaneous buildings, such as law courts and council chambers, libraries, museums and
art galleries, auditoria and theatres have been given:
r)
Hearing damage risk criteria in industrial buildings is now modified based on permissible
exposure limits for a steady state noise level;
iit) The public address system is now elaborated to cover public address system at passenger
terminals.
0.3 There are two types of noises, -that is, air-borne and structure-borne noise.
0.3.1 To reduce the intensity of air-borne noise, sound absorbent materials may be used. An
absorbent material is one which reduces the intensity of sound reflected from its surface. It may
be applied to walls, floors, ceilings or used as furnishing to reduce the sound level by absorption.
However, the materials selected for sound absorption shall be consistant with fire safety
requirements of the buildings.
0.3.2 To reduce the transmission of air-bornt noise, sound insulating materials may be used.
Sound insulating materials block the passage of noise through them by virtue of their mass and
physical properties. The extent of noise reduction provided by a single homogeneous panel is
proportional to the mass per unit area. For high values of sound insulation, normally heavy
panels are required. Thin sheets of materials do not have adequate mass for providing any
appreciable sound transmission loss by themselves. However, when thin sheet materials are used
in a. double panel construction with an intervening air cavity, this special construction can give
extremely high sound transmission loss values considering the weight of the partition, if designed
properly. PO,-ous materials lack the mass required to provide any appreciable scund
transmission loss, but readily allow sound at most frequencies to be transmitted through them.
0.3.3 To reduce the transmission of structure-borne noise (such as noise generated by impacts)
special construction methods and elastic discontinuity in the structure may be used.Structureborne noise reduction is effected bycorner.joints, changes in cross-section, changes in materials.
etc, in construction. The reduction by these construction methods is, however, not appreciable
specially when a large amount of noise reduction is required over a short distance. In such cases.
introduction of an elastic discontinuity in the structure can result in a very large amount of noise
reduction. The noise transmission is affected only above a certain lower frequency which
depends on the material thickness and the elastic properties of thema:erial Bonded fibrous
mateials. rubber elastomers, cork, etc. are suitable for curtailing structure-borne noise
transmission.
0.4 This section is largely based on the following Standards:
lS:l950-1962 Code of practice for sound insulation of non-industrial buildings
IS:?483- I965 Code of practice for noise reduction in industrial buildings
IS:4954-196X Recommendations for noise abatement in town planning
BSCP 3: Chapter III: Part 2:19?2 Code of basic data for design of buildingssound insulation and noise reduction
PART VIII BLILDINC
SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
VIW-
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers recommendations
regarding planning against noise, acceptable
noise levels and the desired sound insulation
in buildings with different occupancies.
information on public address system is also
covered.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the following definitions shall apply:
A BSORPTION COEFFICIENT-Ratio of sound
energy absorbed to the incident sound energy

on a material.
BEL-Bel is the fundamental division of a
logarithmic scale used to express the ratio of
two specified or implied quantities, the
number of bels denoting such a ratio being
the logarithm to the base 10 of this ratio.
D ECIBEL (dB)-IIt is one-tenth of a bel.
Example:
Sound power level = IO log,0 5 in decibels.

<I
Sound pressure level = 10 loglo
$
0 L)
= 20 log, f in decibels
0
where
w = measured acoustical power, Watts
(W)
w, = reference acoustical power
(=IO_?W)
P = measured sound pressure level,
Pascals (Pa)
reference
sound pressure level
po =
(2 X IO-Pa)
DECIBEL[dB ( A ) ] - S o u n d l e v e l s a s
measured on a sound level meter with
weighting network A.
Nolr;---Except where mentwned. In rhls sectlm the

sound levels specified are III dH(A).
E C H O-A distinct and clearly discernible
reflected sound received at a point within, the
enclosure when any sound emanates from
any part of that enclosure. A quick succession of such echoes is called fluttei or flutter
echo.
E F F E C T I V E PERcEivED NO I S E L E V E L I N
DECIBEL (EPN dB)-The number for rating
VIII4
the noise of an indiridual aircraft flying overhead is the effective perceived noise level in
decibels (EPN dB). The effective perceived
noise decibel value takes into account the
subjectively annoying .effects of the noise
including pure tones and duration. In principle, it is a kind of time-integrated loudness
level.
FREQUENCY-Frequency IS the number of

vibrations per second and the.unit is Hertz
(Hz).
INTENSITY -1irtensity at a point is the average rate at which sound energyis transmitted
through a unit area around the point and
perpendicular to the direction of propagation
of sound.
Llo-For assessing traffic. noise, because

its fluctuating nature a unit known as L,o
used. I!.,o is the sound level in dB which
exceeded IO percent for a given period
time. For traffic noise, f.10 is the average
all hourly I!,,() values.
of
is
is
of
of
L,- LC, is the level of a constant sound

which, in a given situation and time period,
has the same sound energy as a time varying
sound. It is the time weighted, mean square,
A-weighted sound level of a sufficiently long
sample of traffic noise in dB(A).
LCIUMESS - Loudness is the sensation produced in the human ear and it depends on the
intensity of sound and also its frequency.
NOISE --Noise is defined as unwanted sound.
N O I S E E X P O S U R E F O R E C A S T (NEF)-The
noise exposure forecast at any location is the
summation of the noise levels in EPN dB
from all aircraft types, on all runways, suitably weighted for the number of operations
during day time and night time.
OCI AVE -BAND NO I S E L E V E L S - N o i s e i s

usually measured in groups of frequencies. A
convenient grouping is in octave-bands, such
that the highest frequency in the band is
double the lowest frequency. The centre
frequency of each octave band is usually
specified. The internationally preferred
centre frequencies for noise measurements
are 31.5. 63. 125, 250, 500. 1000, 2000, 4000
and 8000 Hz.
PlrCti - Pitch is the frequency sensation as
perceived by a human ear. Pitch is defined as
that aspect of auditory sensation in terms of
which sounds may be arranged on a scale
extending from low to highas on a musical
scale.
P
UBLIC
ADDRESS SY S T E M ( P A SYS-
TEM)-T~~ complete chain of sound equipment (comprising essentially of microphones,

amplifiers and loudspeakers) requited to

reinforce the sound emanating from a source
in order to provide adequate loudness for
comfortable hearing by the audience.
REVERBERATION-P~~~~~~~~~~
of a sound in
an enclosure (pa&ally or completely
enclosed) after the source of sound has
stopped.
R E V E R B E R A T I O N TIME-The time taken by
the reverberant sound to decay to onemillionth of the sound intensity level existing
at the time the source of sound is stopped.
SOUND IN S U L A T I O N O F A PARIITIOS --The

difference in sound levels on the two sides of
a partition used as a sound barrier, measured
in I;3 octave bands, with centre frequency
from 100 to 3 I50 Hz.
public gardens, etc. The second is the principle of shading or screening. This consists of
deliberately interposing a less vulnerable
building to screen a more vuherable one or
by providing a solid barrier, such as a wall.
between the source and the location to be
protected.
3.2.1 FO R A IR .TRAFFlC-For guidance,

approximate noise levels due to various types
of aircrafts, measured on ground, when the
aircrafts fly overhead at a height of 450m.
are given in Table I.
l-ABLE I
TYPICAL NOISE LEVELS OF

SOME AIRCRAFT TYPES
SI
11 vc
OF
AIKC,KA~
No.
NOIE ~~ All sound insulation values referred to in this
section are the average of the measured values over frequency range 100 10 j I50 Hc
3. PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST
OUTDOOR NOISE
3.! Genera/-Planning against noise should
be an integral part of town and country
planning proposals, ranging from regional
proposals to detailed zoning, and threedimensional layouts and road design withm
built-up areas. Noise nuisance should be
fully recognized in zoning regulations.
3.1.1 Noise is either generated by traffic
(road, rail and underground railway) or it
arises from zones and buildings within builtup areas (industry; commerce, offices and
public buildings). For planning, the noise
survey should examine all thepossible causes
of noise and consider the various factors
causing actual nuisance.
FI VOVEK N~ISF
LEVFI S .A.1 450 m
WI IH TA K E- O F F
THH!I\I ( E P N dB)
Boelr,g 707
III
Boeing 737
107
iii)
Boeing 74?-200
IO?
iv)
Air bus A 300
101
\)
Concorde SST
I14
1)
ii)
3.22 FOR R AIL TRAFFIC-Noise levels of

some typica! railway traffic are given in
Table 2.
TABLE 2 TYPICAL NOISE LEVELS OF

RAILWAY TRAINS
Sl
No
T Y P E ot TKAI\
i)
ii)
Steam train. 60 kmph
NOISE LEVEI AI
3Om. MEAWHEU
Oh rHE SIIX OR IS
THE DIRECTION O F
T R A I N, dB (A)
85
Diesel tram. 60 kmph
83
iii)
Electric train. 60 kmph
77
3.f.2 Noise by night, causing disturbance of

sleep, is more of nuisance than noise by day.
For this reason, housing colonies that adjoined
areas with heavy traffic movement during the

night are liable to cause serious complaints.
Also, the factories that work by night are
liable to cause serious complaints if housing
estates adjoined them. While planning, care
should be taken that housing colonies are
adequately setback from busy air?+, state
and national highways factories. m a i n
railway lines and marshaliing yards.
3.1.3 There are two aspects of defence by
planning. The first is lo plan so as to keep the
noise at a distance. Under this aspect comes
the separation of housing from traffic noise
by interposing buffer zones, and the protection of schools and hospitals by green belts,
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION 4
ACOUSTIC$
32.3 FO R KOAV .TRAFFIC--The l e v e l o f

noise generated by road traffic depends upon
such factors as the number of vehicles passing per hour, the type of traffic, the preponderance of heavy vehicles, average speed,
gradient and smoothness of traffic flow. The
smoothness of traffic flow also affects variabiliiy.of the noise and is governed by such
things as roundabout5 and traffic lights, and
the volume of traffic and pedestrian movement with their effect5 on stopping, starting
and overtaklng. The level of traffic noise fluctuates continuously and the way it does has a
considerable effect on the nuisance caused.
For assessing traffic noise, noise is measured
in dB(A). Because of the fluctuating nature of

traffic noise. a unit known as LIO or Lq (see
2.1) may be used. Typical noise levels due to
SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL.
VI114
different:volcmes of traffic flow with a varying mix of vehicles are given in Table 3.
TABLE 3 TYPICAL NOISE LEYELS DUE TO
FREE-FLOWING ROAD TRAFFIC
i,,,, 30m bROM
E DGE ok ROAD
SI
so.
dB(A)
(3)
(2)
(1)
65
.SOOO vehicle\ per 18 h o u r

da) (IO percent heavy
\chi<lcs). 50 kmph
IJ
75
10000 rchiclcs per IX hour
111)
day (40 percent ha\!

vch~clc\). XI) kmph
77
20000 whlcle\ per !I( h o u r

d a y (40 perccnc hear)
vrhwler). X0 hmph
IL)
tours for areas around airports. It has been

accepted generally that noise exposure forecast levels greater than NEF 40 are unacceptable to people while levels less than NEF 25
are normally acceptable.
3.3.1.J While it is theoretically possible to
provide sufficient insulation to achieve an
acceptable indoor noise environment in the
area of very high outdoor noise. there is a
level above which aircraft noise seriously
affects living conditions no matter how much
sound insula:ion has been applied to the
dwelling unit. For this reasoq it is recommended that no residential development be
allowed beyond the NEF 35 level.
3.3.1.4 D u r i n g s u m m e r m o n t h s , t h e
windows are normally kept open for
adequate ventilation. In ,view of this, no
matter how much sound insulations is
provided for the building structure. the noise
level inside the room can never be less than
IO dB below the outdoor noise level. For very
critical buildings, such as buildings necessary
for maintaining and supplementing the
airport services, and for commercial
development. such a5 hotels, it is possible to
provide sealed windows and to centrally aircondition the entire building. However, it is
3.3. I
FON
AIR I ICAl I-14
sources
of
considered.
il)
aircralt
Near airports two
&)l\c
should be
l~lyovcr noise is that

I-I YOVI R SOl~sl
which occurs under flight paths close to
airports i1r.d is the most serious and conl-
p r o b l e m . A s the aircralt pa\ses

olerhcad the noise level at any particular
location
rises IO a pc;~k and then
decrceses.
111011
b)
lhc noi\c cnnmIttcd b\

aircralt during ground opcration~. i;;
less variable in direction than fl)ovcr
:loisc. but ic usually of a longer dura:ion.
GROIINII ?.OlSl:
an
3.3. I. I Aircrat t noise may disturb sleep, resi

arid communication. and as such may hc considered potentially harml~ul to health. It is
important that no new dc\cloprncnt ia carri4 o u t w i t h i n arcas whcrc the clpectcd
noise Ic\cls will c;~use mental and physical
latigue or permanent loss of hearing. In case
development in such areas is essential. adcquate sound insulation shall bc pro\idcd for
the building.
3.3.1.2 As the problem? cau,cd by alrcraft
noise/have become more acute. a number of
methods have been devised for evaluating
noise exposure in the vicinity of airports.
Thq all combine many factors unto a single
number evaluation. A commonly u$ed criterion is the noise exp&ure forecast (NEF). The
NEF is used primarily to develop noise conYlll-4-
not feasible for most of the residential

developments in the country. In such cases
proper zoning regulations and siting of
vulnerable buildings away trom aircraft noise
aie of vital importance.
3.3.2 RAIL 7RAFFICPm-iqhis is a very serious
source of noise in built-up areas. both by day
and by night. Railway cuttings reduce the
spread of noise, whereas embankments
extend it. The elevated railway on viaducts or
embankments is very common in built-up
areas. The elevation increases exposure to
noise but in addition the construction of the
viaduct may effect the propagation of noise.
In this respect solid embankments are
preferable to built-up arches, which tend to
act as sound boxes. Worst of all are the steel
bridges, which greatly magnify the noise due
to vibration. Uphill gradients are another
feature tending to increase noise, especially
of heavy goods trains.
3.3.2./ Wherever possible. no residential or
public building zone should abut on to railwa\ lines. especially on the marshalling yards
which are particularly objectionable because
of the \hrili. clanging and intermittent noise
the! generate. otten at night. The appropriate
/one\ along side railway lines are industrial
and commercial buildings other than office
buildings. Where. these precautions are not
practicable and housing hag to abut on to
railway lines, every attempt may be made to
house as lew people as possible in the vicinity
of the railway lines.
NATlUWAL BClLDlNC COUE
OF
INDIA
3.3.2.2 The underground transportation

system is being introduced in Bndia.
Experience with subway trgins in the,westt?rn
countries has indicated that they can be both
noisy and uncomfortable to passengers. Also
wayside vibration can be a major cause of
disturbance for the neighbouring
community. Very high noise levels are
propagated to long distances by the
underground high speed railway, as a result
o.f wheel rail interaction. Both air-borne
noise and ground or structure-borne
vibration are potential sources of complaints.
Noise control measures, therefore, need to _be
considered for the following:
a) In stations, where high noise levels are
produced at the arrival and departure of
trains;
b) In tunnels, during high speed train
movement:
cl Where an underground rail transit system passes close to existing structures or
high rise buildings adequate attention
should algo be paid to the problem of
ground vibration transmitted to the
building, and proper isolation should be
provided for critical areas; and
4 In transit cars, where sound insulation is
of vital importance to provide comfortable condition5 for the commutators.
3i3.3 ROAD T RAFFIC
3.3.3. I Convoys of long-distance heavy
trucks at night moving past through built-up
areas cause serious noise complaints. On
busy roads. the noise of continuous traffic
may be a worse nuisance than that of railways. At least the same precautions may,
therefore, be taken in the planning of dwellings in relation to arterial and truck roads as
with railways. Care may be taken that local
housing roads do not provide short cuts for
heavy traffic through residential areas. Hilly
roads present the additional noise pf gear
changing. Trees with heavy foliage .planted
on both sides of%carriageway help slightly to
muffle the noise, provided the foliage extends
for a considerable distance (30m or more).
3.3.3.2 Road traffic may give rise to serious
nuisance particularly on busy thoroughfares,
between continuous high buildings in- main
streets, at the tiaffic lights, riear bus stops, on
steep slopes and in parking spaces and
enclosed yards.
3.3.3.3 For zoning and plaiming new buildings in urban areas it is recommended that
external LO is limited to a maximum of
70dB(A) when the dwellings are proposed to
have sealed windows and 6OdB(A) when the
dwellings art: proposed. to have open windows. Indeed it ip desirable to confine major
?ART VIII
BUILDING SERVICES-StcnON 4
ACOUSl'lCS,
new residential development io locations

subject to LIO levels substantially lower than
those given above.
It .is recognised, however, that within the
large urban arms, the use of sites where the
external LO is greater than 60-70 d&A) cannot always be avoided. In that case it issuggested to utilize such design solutions as
barrier ,blocksin order to reduce external LIO
noise levels to at least 60-70dB(A) at any
point 1 .O m from any inward looking fbcade.
When ihe_ orientation of site and the density
of development are such that this can&lot be
fully achieved, some form of dwelling insulation will have to be .provided. It should be
appreciated that where open windows are a
must, the occupants would have to put up
with .discomfort if the above conditions are
not inet.
3.3.3.4 Certain other methods can often be
utilized to provide economical arid effective
protection frJm noise:
4 Method may be.adopted to improve the
smoothness of flow and reduce number

of stopping and starting. This leads to an
improvement even if it leads to increased
flows. Flow linking of traffic lights, for
example,, may reduce noise nuisance.
b) Use of roads passing through residential
areas may be prohibited to heavy commercial vehicles. An alternative would be
to limit use by commercial vehicles to
certain times of the day.
cl Use of honking may be prohibited near
sensitive buildings, such as hospitals and
the like.
3.4 Zoning--The zoning of the different cities shall be done by the town planning
authorities, taking into account besides other
aspects, the noise levels from different occupancies. Wherever necessary, experts in the
field may be consulted. For detailed information on noise reduction for town planning
schemes, reference may be made to good
practice [VIII-4(I)]*
3.5 Green Belts and Lan&aping-Where
relief from noise is to be provided by means
of #green belts these may be of coniiderable
width and be landscaped. (In case of railway
tracks, a minimum distance of 5Om to 70m
may be provided between the brfildings and
the tracks.) The extent of relief ;hat may be
derived from the above may be estimated
only after considering other environmental
*In this section where reference is made to good prac-
tice in relation to design, testing and construction procedures, the appropriate document listed at t.he end of this
section may be used as a guide to the interpretation of
this term.
. SDUND INSULATION AND NOISE
CONTROL
n&4 .
factors. Only thick belts of planting (greater

than 30 m) are of real value. Strong leafy
trees may be planted to act as noise baffles.
Shrubs or creepers may also he planted for
additional protection between tree trunks;
artificial mounds and .bankr should be
formed where practicable. As little hard paving and a$ much grass as possible may be
used. The creation of green belt is particularly advisable on the perimeter of aerodromes, along railway lines and arterial
roads, through or past built-up areas and
adjolning noisy industrial zones.
4. PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST
INDOOR NOISE
4.1 Acceprahle Indoor Noise Levels in Builclings--.The generally acceptable noise level5
inside buildings from point ,of view of cnmfort, economy and practical consideration
under the conditions prevailing in this country may be !aken a:; given in Tabie 4.
.fAHI.I.
4 A((l:ll AHI.1: INI)OOK SO!SF

t.EvEI.S,FOK VAKIOI!S Hllll 1)IYGS
under individual occupancies (5 to 9) as

applicable to the respective character and
sources of noise in different buildings.
4.4 Sound Insulation of Non-indusrrial
Buildings by Constructional Measures-The
desired (acceptable) noise levek and the
recommended insulation values for the various areas may be achieved by providing
sound insulation treatments by constructional measures. The details of the same are
given in Appendix A. The recominendations
given in Appendix A are applicable to nonindustrial buildings like residences, educational buildings. hospitals and office
buildings.
5. RES!DENTIAL
BIJILDlNGS
5. I Sources of Noise Nuisance

5.1. I O~;IHKI~K kOlSE -The main sources
of outdoor poise irl residential areas are traffic jaeroplane, railway<. roadways), children
playing, hawkers, services deliveries, road
repairs blaring loud-speakers and various
types of nioving machinery in the neighbourhood and building operations
Sl
N:,
(1)
1) Audttorla and concert halls
11) Kadm and IV studtos
iti) Music room\
iv) Hospitals and ctnema
t heat rcs
Apartments, hotels and
homes
vi) Conference room\.
small ofltccs and ltbrartes
20~25
20-25
25-N
35.40
35-40
3%40
WI) Court rooms and

class room5
40-4s
v i i i ) Larpe pub!ic nfhces.

banks and storm
45-W
ir) Rcsraurants
w-55
4.2 I ulneralhlc Huilclin~gs Some b u i l d i n g s

or parts of buildings are specially vulnerable
to noise. for examplr. recording and radio
s!udios. hospitals and research laboratories.
These should not bc sited near loud noise
scurces. Most vulnerable buildings contain
some nryas which are themselves noisy and in
such buildings the lest vulnerable elements
should be planned to act 9; noise buffers.
Most noisy buildings also contain quiet
itccom.nlodation. which equally may be
pla:lned to act as a buffer between the noisy
part ol the building anh adjoining vulnerable
buildinp\.
4.3 rhe details of site and internal planning
and insulation reyuircmcnts ,arc covered
VIII4
5.1.2 lsDooK NO I S E -~ As far as indoor

noises are concerned, conversation of the
occupants, footsteps, banging of doors, shifting of the furniture. operation of the cistern
and water-closets, playing of radios, gramophones. etc, cbntribute most of the noise
emanating from an adjacent room or an adjacent building. Noise conditions vary from
time to time and noise which may not be
objectionable during the day may assume
annoying proportions in the silence of the
night when quiet conditions are essential.
S./.,?./ In the case of flats the main sdurces
of noise are from other flats and from stairs,
lifts and access balconies. Plumbing noise is
another cause. In semi-detached buildings.
outdoor noises from streets are noticed more
than indoor noises from neighbours.
52.1 Sn E PIASNING -The most desirable

method is to locate the residential buildings
in a quiet area away from the noisy sources
like the industrial areas, rail tracks, aerodromes. roads carrying heavy traffic, etc.
5.2././ To minimize ground reflection. the
dwqllings should be surrounded by the maximum amount of planting and grassed areas
and the minimum amount of hard surfacing.
This app!ies particularly to high density
areas. Where for maintenance reasons a large
amount of hard paving is necessary, it should
NATIONAL
WILOINC C&E OF INDIA
be broken .up by areas of planting and grassing. Narrow hard paved 6ourJs should b e
avoided between adjacent tail buildings.
5.2.1.2 Roads within a residential area
should be kept to a minimum both in width
and length, and should be designed to discourage speeding. Area-wise planning, with
zbnes from which vehicular traffic is altogether excluded will greatly help to reduce
noise. Through traffic roads should bt
excluded from residential areas, but where
sites have to be developed adjacent to existing inajor .roads the same pr.inciples should
be observed in the siting of blocks as with
railway lines as covered under 3.3.3.3.
5.21/.3 Play zreas for older children shouid
be sited as far away from dwellings as possi
ble. Special care should be taken with old
peoplesdwellings. They should not be placed
immediately adjacent to service entries. play
spaces, or to any entrances where children
may tend to congregate.
5.2.2 INTERNALPLANNING ---The orientation of buildings in a locality should be
planned in such a way as to reduce the noise
disturbance from neihhbourhood areas. The
non-critical areas, such. as corridors. kitchens. bathrooms, elevators and service spaces may be located on the noisy side and the
critical areas. such as bedrooms and living
space, on the quiet side.
5.2.2.I WINDOWS AND DOORS~-- W i n d o w s
and doors should he kept awa,y from the
noisy side of the buiiding as glvcn below
wherever possible:
a!
When windows of a building. particularly those of bedrooms in apartments or

flats, face roads carrying heavy traffic or
other noises where the external noise is
of the order of 80 to 90 dR(A). the building should be located a! a distance of
about 30 m from the road, but a distance
of 45 m or more, where possit~le, should
be aimed at for greater relief from noise;
b) When the windows are at right angles to
noise,
the distance from the road should be
arranged to be about I5 to 25 m; and
In case another building. bourdary wall
or trees and planta!ions i n t e r v e n e
between the road traffic and the house,
Oat further noise reduction is achieved
and in such cases the above distances
may be reduced suitably.
from adjoining IiLing rooms, and there is less

risk of disturbance of sleep.
In semidetached houses, the staircase, hall
and kitchen should adjoin each other on each
side of the party wall, thus providing a sound
baffle between rooms requiring quiet
conditions.
Qpen fireplaces on party walls should be
avoided as far as possible; bedrooms should
not be planned alongside access balconies,
and preferably not underneath them. Where
the approach is by an internal corridor, a
sound baffle may usefully be provided by
arranging internal passages and bathrooms
between the corridor and the living room or
bedrooms.
Water-closets should not be planned over living rooms and bedrooms, whether within ihe
same .dwelling or over. otherdwellings. Soil
pipes should not be carried in ducts which
adjoin living rooms or bedrooms unless the
side of the duct next to these rooms is a solid
wall containing no inspection openings.
Refuse chutes sholild not be planned next to
living rooms or bedrooms.
5.2.3.1 REDUCTlDN OF AIR-BORNE NO&EThe average sound insulation for air-borne

noise (over the frequency range 100-3150 Hz)
between individual rooms or apartments of a
building unit shall be as given in Table 5.
These values may, however, be suitably

increased, where required, for critical areas.
.._-T/\BLE 5 SOUND INSIJLATION B E T W E E N
INDIVIDUAL ROOMS (AIR-BORNE)
NO
dB( 100-3 I50 Hz)

(1;
5.2.2.2 LAYOUT PLANS-It is desirable that

rooms adjoining party walls and above/below
party floors should be of similar use. By this
means,, bedroonis are not exposed to noise
(3)
(2)
Between the livine room in

one house or llat-and the
living room and bed-rooms
in another
50
ii)
Elsewhere ixtween houses

or flats
45
Between one room and

in rhe same house
or flat
35
the direction of the above type of
cl
A VERAGE S O U N D
~NSU~_A~I~N I N
SITIIArIoV
SI
iii)
mother
NOTE !--Where communicating doors are provided, all

doors should be so designed as lo piovidc recommended
insulation between the rooms.
NOI E 2. - There are cases when a set of houses or flats
have to be built for the people who work at night and
sleep during the day. It is desirable 10 consider the design
of at least one such :oam in each of the houses or flats
which will provide an insulation of about 45dB in that
room.
NOTE S-The insuhtion values referred to are applicable

with doors and windows shut.
P A R T VIII BUILDING SERVICES-SECTION 4 ACOIISTICS. S O U N D INSUI.ATlON
AND
NOISE
CONTROL
5.2.3.2 S U P P R E S S I O N OF N OISE , AT T H E
S OURCE ITSELF-AI1 items of equipment
that are potentially noisy should be selected
with care. Water-closet cisterns should not be
fixed on partitions next to bedrooms or living rooms. Plumbing pipes should be isolated
from the structurks. Lift motors should be
mounted on resilient supports. Access doors
from machine rooms to internal staircases
should be well fitting and of .solid
construction.
52.3.3
REDUCTION OF AIR-BORNE NOISE

TRANSMITTED THROUGH THE STRUCTU-
RE-Reduction of aii-borne noise requires

the use of rigid and massive walls without
any openings. Openings are the major cause
of penetration of noise through a barrier.
While designing it should be borne in mind
that all components should provide a sound
transmission compatible with that of the rest
of the barrier so that an equivalent amount of
sound energy is transmitted through each
portion of the barrier.
Ventilating ducts or air transfer openings
where provided should be designed to minimize transmission of npise. For this purpose,
some sound attenuating devices may be
installed in these openings.
All partitions should be sealed effectively
where they butt against rest of the structure.
All doors and windows should be properly
gasketed where a high degree of sound insulation is desired.
5.2.3.4 REDUCTION OF STRUCTURE-BORNE
NOISE-This requires ihe use of discontinuous or non-homogeneous materials in the
construction of the structure.
5.2.3.6 Main staircases in blocks of flats are

often highly reverberant. Some of the surfaces at least (for example, the soffits of stairs
and landings) should be finished with sound
absorbent materials wherever required,
6. EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
6.1 Sources qf NDise Nuisance
6 . 1 . 1 O U T D O O R NOISE-The o u t d o o r
sources of noise produced on school
premises, which cause disturbance .within the
school, include the noise arising from
playgrounds, playing fields and operi-air
swimming pools. Though playgrounds are
used mainly during break periods, they are
also used for games and physical education at
times when teaching is in progress in the
adjoining class rooms.
6.1.2 INDOOR NOISE-lndoor sources of
noise are as follows:
a) Singing, instrumental and reproduced
b)
cl
d)
e)
5.2.3.5 R E D U C T I O N O F IMPACT N OI S E - - T h e
floor of a room immediatelv above the bedroom or living room shall$isfy the grade 1
impact sound ,inSulation given in Figure I.
For example, ISOmm thick concrete floor
with thick carpet (12 mm) covering would
satisfy this requirement.
j)
b
100
200
460
600
1600
F R E O U E N C V (Hz1
Fig. 1 Grades for Impact Sound

insulation
IJO
3150
music which may take place in classrooms and in dining and assembly halls
particularly in primary schools. In secondary . schools, specialized music rooms
are generally provided;
The movement of chairs, desks and
tables at the end of one period may disturb a class engaged in a lesson in a room
below;
The shutting and opening of doors and
windows which may occur at any time
during teaching periods;
Wireless and television reproduction in
clash-rooms, and films with sound track;
Wood and metal workshops, machine
shops (engineering laboratories), typing
rooms etc, which produce continuous or
intermittent sound of considerable
loudness;
Practical work carried out in general
teaching areas;
Gymnasia and swimming pools;
School kitchens and dining spaces where
food preparation and the handling of
crockery and utensils -persist for. the
greater part of the school day;
Corridors and other circulation spaces;
and
Plumbing and mechanical services.
6.2 Recommendations
6.2.1 SITE P L A N N I N G - w h e r e o u t d o o r
noise nuisance eitists from local industry,
busy roads, railways, airfields, sport grounds
or other sources beyond the control of the
N A T I O N A L BI;1LDlNC
CODS OF INDIA
school authority, school buildings should be

sited as far away as possible from the sources
of noise.
6,2.1.1 Rooms should be planned in a

manner so that the minimum amount of glazing is placed on the side facing the external
noise.
6.2.1.2 Noises arising from the activities of a
school and from the use of the buildings after
school hours may constitute a nuisance to
occupants of surrounding property: therefore, it is desirable to place pltiygrounds,
workshops, swimining pools, music rooms,
assembly halls and gymnasia as far away as
possible from buildings which require a quiet
erivironment.
6.2.2 IF;TERNAL PLANNING ---The following
principles should be observed in the detailed
planning of .educational buildings:
GROUPING-N~~~~
b)
WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS--in-
rooms should be
separated from quiet ones, if possible. In
general, it is desirable that rooms should
be grouped together in accordance with
the classification given in 6.2.4.1.
dows of noisy and quiet rooms should

not open on to the same courtyard or be
near to one another. Roof lights and ventilators over noisy rooms should be
avoided, if they are likely to be a source
of nuisance to adjacent ugper: floors.
0 DOORS-SW~~~ d o o r s itit0 r o o m s
should only be used where no problem of
sound transmission exists. Reduction of
insulation between rooms and corridors
due to doors must be borne in mind. The
type and method of fitting of doors. is
impqrtant and .necessary care shall be
paid in this respect.
NOISE R E D U C T ION WITHIN ROOMSSound absorbent materials play a useful part
6.2.3
in reducing the built-up or air-borne noise at

source. In rooms, such as class-rooms,
assembly halls and music rooms, a fairly
short reverberation time under occupied conditions is one of the requirements of the
acoustic design. The maximum reverberation
times permissible for this purpose are usually
short enough to give adequate noise control
but in addition, the reverberation time
should not be e;ycessive under empty conditions, because noise may occur in these
rooms with very few occupants. Table 6 gives
the reverberation times often arranged in
occupied rooms for acoustic reasons and the
maximum times recommended in the empty
rooms for noise reduction; the times given
are for a frequency of 500 Hz, but they
should not be greatly exceeded at any frequency. When rooms are used for a variety of
purposes, the reverberation period appropriate to the major use should be adopted.
TABLE 6 REVERBERATION TIMES
IN SCHOOLS
SL RO O M
No.
R EVERBERATION T IME S
15
Usual for
Maximum* for
Acoustic
Noise Control
Reasons
(Empty)
(Full)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
I)
;;;mbly
I .o- I .25
according to
size
I .5-2.5
according to
volume of hall
where. essential.
2)
0.75-I .25
I.5
OPEN PLANNING AND CIRCULATION

AREAS - Where open planning is used
Music
teaching
rooms
3)
Td;;yia
4 Sliding partitions should only be

d
by the rooms should be controlled. Preferably baffled ventilation system or double windows should be used. (Fan-lights
over doors should. be fixed and glazed.)
f) FURNITURE-In all educational buildings, regardless of the character of the
floor finish, rubber buffers should be fitted to the legs of chairs and tables.
used
to permit spaces, such as assembly halls,

dining rooms or entrance halls to be used
in association with each other Qr for
circulation, ihe degree of disturbance
caused by interfering noise to teaching
areas needs careful consideration; traffic
through such areas should be strictly
controlled; full use should be made of
sound absorbent treatments to reduce
the spread of noise from one space to
another (see 6.2.3).
If rooms have lar&e glazed panels or ventilation openings facing directly on the
circulation areas, human traffic passing
PART Vlll SIWDING
and
rooms
I.5
swimming
pools
4)
Dining
1.25
5) Class-rooms 0.75
1.25
6) Headmasters 0.5-l .OO

room and
staff rooms
I.0
*Shorter reverberation times are desirable for noise control whenever possible.
6,2.3.I Special attention should be given to
n.oise reduction in schools for the deaf and

schools for the blind. Deaf children are
SERVICES-SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOW
CONTROL
vttt2~
taught by means ef hearing aids which cannot be used satisfactorily in high noise levels
or in reverberant conditions. Blind children
depend on good hear&g for understanding
speech and for detecting changes in environment. In both these types of schools, noise
levels should be kept low and reverberation
times short. As an example, the reverberation
times in empty class-rooms should not
exceed one second in schools for the blind or
0.5 second in schools for the deaf.
612.4 SOUND INSULATIOK
6.2.4.1 AIR-BOKNE Notsr--For purposes of
sound insulation, rooms in educational
buildings may be classified as follows:
Class A - Noise produ- Workshops
Kitchens
cing
Dining rooms
Gymnasiums
Indoor swimming
pools
Assembly hails
Class B -- produLecture halls
cing but
needing quiet Music rooms
Typing rooms
at times
General classClass C -- Average
rooms Practical
rooms Laboratories Offices
Class D - Rooms nee- Libraries
Studies
ding quiet
Class E - Rooms nee- Medical rooms
ding privacy Staff rooms
6.2.4.2 The recommended minimum sound
reduction (average over 100-I35OHz) between
rooms of the same class is as follows:
- 25 dB
Class A
Class C or D- 35 dB
Class B or E - 45 dB
6,2.4.3 Where a room is likely to have.a dual
use, for example. a dining room to be used as
a class-room, the higher sound insulation
value should be used.
6,2.4.4 The recommended minimum sound
insulation between rooms in different classes
is 45dB subject to the following:
a) In schools or institutes with a technical
bias where noisy activities, such as sheet
metal work, plumbing and woodwork;
are likely to be practised extensively in
normal hours, workshops shotrId be
regarded as a special category requiring
more than 45 dB insulation from rooms
of any other class.
b) Assembly halls and music rooms are special cases in that, as well as producing
noise, they also require protection from
YrJ*
it and may need more than 45dB insula-
tion from rooms in Class A, if the latter

are Very noisy.
cl Circulation spaces may vary from a long
and frequented corridor to a small private lobby and it is therefore difficult to
give precise recommendatrons to cover
them. For partitions between rooms in
Class C and most corridors, 35dB insulation for the partition itself is adequate.
For partitions between rooms in other
ciasses and corridors, more or less insulation may be necessary, depending upon
the specific usage.
d) The problem of noise in circulation areas
is as a rule greatly mitigated in schools
by the fact that classes usually change
rooms together at regular times. In colleges and evening institutes, however,
this is much less true and in such buildings particular attention should be paid
to insulation between rooms and
corridors.
6.2.4.5 O P E N P L A N S C H O O L S - A n e w
concept in school planning is the use of a
large teaching area with simultaneous
instructions imparted to several groups of
students. These open plan teaching areas
offer a different set of problems. Because of
the limitations in achieving a great deal of
attenuation across the space and related
difficulties in noise control and speech
interference, lectruing to a large number of
students is not possible without interfering
with neighbouring groups. The shape of such
spaces may be as linear as possible with a
width to height ratio of 5:l or greater. In
addition, special measures are required to be
introduced to reduce the level of intruding
speech to an acceptable value so that the
various teaching groups are not disturbed and
adequate privacy is maintained. judicious
positioning of partial height barriers can
improve :he sound attenuation between
teaching groups and the use of reflective
screens can reinforce the speech locally without
reflecting it to unwanted areas.
6.2.4.6 IMPACT NOI S E- In these case of
schools, the concrete floor of the r.oom

immediately above the teaching rooms shall
meet Grade 11 standard for impact insulation
shown in Figure 1. For example a covering of
6 mm linolium or cork tiles on concrete floor
(hollow or solid) weighing not less than
220 kg/m* will usually meet the above
requirement.
7. HOSPITAL BUILDING
7.1 Getrerul-Problems of noise control vary
from hospital to hospital but .the principks
outlined below apply to ali types. A quiet
environment in hospitals is desirable for
NATIONAL
BUlLMNC CObC OF INDIA
patients who are acutely ill. Staff require

quiet conditions for consultations and
examinations and also in their living and
sleeping quarters. There have been rapid rises
in noise levels in hospitals due to the higher
levels of outdoor noise, to increasing use of
mechanical and mobile equipment (some of
which is now brought much nearer to the
patient in order to facilitate nursing
procedure) and the introduction of
loudspeaker, radio, television and call
systems. Noise control in the hospital is made
much more difficult by the extensive use of
hard . washable. surfaces which reflect and
intensify the noise. in most hospitals,
windows to the open air. and fanlights to
corridors are usually open for the purpose of
ventilation, admitting noise from outside and
allowing it to spread through the building.
b)
c) Noises from fixed or mobile equipment

and services not directly concerned. with
hospital routines. These include all .the
fixed services as given below:
Plumbing and sanitary fittings;
:; Steam, hot.and cold water and central heating pipes;
3) Ventilation shafts and ducts;

4) Fans;
Boilers;
2; Pumps;
7) Air compressors:
Pneumatic tubes;
;; Electrical and mechanical motors
and equipment;
10) Lifts;
11) i.aund;y eqitipment; and
12) Main kitchen equipment (refrigerators. mixers. steam boilers. etc).
7.2 Sources of Noise Nuisance

7 . 2 . 1 Ournoo~ NorsE-This m a y
classified into two main categories:
a)
be
Noise from sources outside the hospital

premises, for example, traffic and
industrial noises; and
b) Noise from sources outside the building
but usually within the control of the hospital authority, for example. ambuiances, motor-cars and service vehic!es. fuel
and stores deliveries, laundries. refuse
cdilection, trucks and trolleys.
7.22 isrxw~ No~st----A hospital is a complex building with many services and the
numerous internal sources of structure-borne
and air-borne noises are grouped into three
main categories:
3) Noises consequent upon hospital routines. This category includes sources
which transmi! noise through both
structure-borne and air-borne .paths,
many of which may be quite near to
patients particularly those in wards. such
as the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
h)
7;
8)
9)
Wheeled trolleys of various kinds.

for food and medical supplies;.
Sterilizing equipment;,
Sluice room equipment including
bedpan washers;
Ward kitchen equipment;
Footsteps:
Doors bhnging;
The hahdling of metal or glass
equipment:
Noises caused during maintenance
and overhaul-of engineering services;
and
Vacuum- cleaners. mechanical
polishers. etc.
?ARt VIII WILDlNC
Loudspeaker, radio or television, audible

call system. telephone bells and buzzers,
and other air-borne noises, such as loud
conversation; and
7.3 Rec,o,llrllerrtlution.~
7.3.1 SIIF PI n\\l\(;---Hospital sites with
their high degree of sensitivity to outside
noise should be as far away from outside
sources as may be compatible with other
considerations, such as accessibility and
avaiiabihty_of services. The building should
be so arranged on the site that sensitive areas
like wards, consulting and treatment rooms,
operating theatres and staff bedrooms are
placed away from outdoor-soureesof noise, if
possible, with their windows overlooking
areas of acoustic shadow.
7.3.2 DETAILE D PI.AhNINC--There is a very
large number of unit and room classification
in hospital design and in planning the units in
relation to each other and to the common
services. (such as X-ray departments,
operating theatre suits and main kitchens).
noise reduction in the sensitive areas should
be weighed carefully against other design
ftictors. Special care in overal! planning and
internal planning against noise is required in
the planning within the building of units
which are themselves potential noise sources,
f o i e x a m p l e , childrens wards and
outpatients* departments, parts of which
require protection against noise.
7.3.2.l Unloading bays, refuse disposal
areas, boiler houses. workshops and iaundries are examples of service units which
should be as far from sensitive areas as
possible.
7.3.2.2 The kitchen is a constant source of
both aircborne and structure-borne noise and
should preferably be in a separate building
S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 4 ACOISTICS. SOl!ND
INSULATION AND NOISE QNTROL
11123
away from or screened trom the sensitive

areas. If this is not possible and the main
kitchens must form part of a multi-storey
building, noise control is easier if they are
placed below and not above the wards and
other sensitive rooms so as to facilitate the
insulation of the equipment and machinery in
order to reduce the transmission of structureborne noise to a minimum.
partitions between rooms should

normally have an insulation value of at
least 40dB. Higher values of insulation
of at least 45dB are necessary where a
noisy room is adjacent to one requiring
quiet. Doors should be solid with close
fitting in the frames.

b) There is little insulation value in double
swing doors and where these are fitted to

a noisy room the opening should be
planned so that it is screened from areas
requiring quiet by a baffle lobby lined
with absorbent material. Very high
insulation values may be necessary in
special cases and exceptional measures
may be required.
7.3.2.3 In ward units, the kitchens, sluice.

rooms, utility rooms, sterilizing rooms and
other ancillary rooms, need to be placed
quite near to the beds if they are to fulfil their
purposes. which are all sources of noise.
Some form of noise baffling between open
wards and looms of this kind will be needed
C)
7 . 3 . 3 REDIJCTION OF NOISE AT SOUHCE-In view of the difficulty of suppressing noise
in hospital buildings, it is important to
eliminate noise at its source wherever
possible.
7.3.3./ lJSE OF RFSII.IENI MATERIAI. -Mats
of rubber or other resilient material on
draining boards and rubber-shod equipment
will greatly reduce noise from utility rooms,
sluice rooms and ward kitchens. The use of
plastics or othkr resilient materials for sinks.
draining boards, utensils and bowls would
also reduce the noise. Many items of
equipment especially mobile equipment, such
as trolleys and beds, may be silenc.ed by
means of rubber-tyred wheels and rubber
bumper and the provision of resilient floor
finishes (.w 73.4.1). The latter also reduces
footstep noise. Silent type curtain rails, rings
and runners should be used. Lift gates and
doors should be fitted with buffers and silent
closing gear. Fans and other machinery
should be mounted on suitable resilient
mountings to prevent the spread of noise
through the structure.
Solid floors with floating finishes and

resilient surfaces are necessary particularly between wards and other parts of
the building. Ordinary timber board on
joist floors should never be used.
4 Conduits, ventilation duets, chases, etc.

should be constructed so as not to form
easy by-pass for disseminating noise
about the building. and should be provided -with sufficient sound insulation.
Pipe ducts should bc completely sealed
around the pipes where they pass
through walls or floors. Ducts carrying
waste or water pipes should be lined with
sound insulating material to prevent
noise from the pipes passing through
duct walls into the rooms through which
they pass.
7.3.4.1 Af3SOKlWoS --Most
surfaces in hospitals should be easily cleanable. so as to prevent the build-up of bacteria which may
cause cross-infection. Many sound absorbent
materials of a soft nature and difficult to
clean are unsuitable for use in some hospital
areas and lose much of their effectiveness. if
painted for hygienic reasons.
7.3.3.2 OTfiEK MEAstIR~S-- Noise from

water or heating pipes may be reduced by
installing systems which operate at
comparatively low pressures and velocities.
Silencing pipes and specially designed
ffushing action reduce water closet noise at
source and make structural measures easier
to apply. The ventilation system should be
designed so as not to create a noise problem.
Silent closers should be fitted to doors.
Some porous materials with very thin nonporous coverings (like mineral wool cohered
with thin plastic sheets) have good sound
absorption and when covered with a perforated sheet metal facing can be used in most
arcas requiring a washable acoustical treatment. In noisy areas. such as corridors and
waitms rooms. however. a wider choice ol
absorbents is available.
7 . 3 . 4 REL)I!CI-IOK
TIIHAI.. MEANS
In the ward, bed curtains. window curtains,

etc. add to the absorbent properties of the
room and help reduce reverberation in otherwise hard surlaced surroundings.
O F N O I S E RY sfRt$-
7 . 3 . 4 . 1 IN S U L A T I O N - - S i n c e t h e v a r i o u s
departme+ or units may be planned in
many ways, only general .guidance on the
insulation values for wall&and partitions are
given as below:
a) It is recommended that walls or
1,124
7.3.5 Sensitive areas such as operation theatres. Doctors consultation roqms. intensive
care units (ICU) require special consideration
against noise control. Apart from outdoor
noise. a common problem is the transmission
NATIDNAL
B U I L D I N G C7bDC OF M#A
of sound. between the consulting room and

the waiting room. To ensure silence. a sound
reduction of 45dB(A) between the rooms
shall be provided. If the doors are directly
connected by a single communicating door it
will not be possible to.achieve these values of
insulation. To obtain 40-45 dB(+) insulation
between communicating rooms, it is necessary to provide two doors separated by an air
gap. such as a lobby or corridor.
8. OFFICE BUILDINGS
8.1 Gene&--Modern office .buildings are
often noisier than older buildings due to the
use of thinner and more rigid forms of construction. harder finishes. more austere furnishings and use of business machines.
8.2 Sourc,es 01 Noise iluisatwr
82.1 OCITDOOK NOISE --The outdoor noise
is mainly traffic noise, noise from an industry

if any located nearby or from any other
source depending upon the location of the
office building. The methods of defence
against outdoor noise as given in 3 shall also

be used in addition torhose given in 8.
8 . 2 . 2 I N D O O R NOISE-Main sources of
indoor noise include the following:
a)
Office machines, such as typewriters, and

calculating, tabulating and punching
machines;
b) Telephonic conversation;
C)
Noise from the public admitted to the

building;
d)
Footsteps, voices and slamming of doors

in circulation spaces, lift doors and gates;
e) Sound reproduction in staff training

rooms and cinemas and machine noise in
projection rooms, recreation rooms, etc;
f)
The handling of crockery and utensils in

canteens and kitchens; and
g) Ventilation plant and lift machinery.

8.3 Recotnttten~ialariotts
8.3:! .SITE PLANNING-kooms d e m a n d i n g
qwet conditions should~ be placed on the
quiet side of the site. Even on quiet thorough-
fares, these rooms should not be planned at

street level. They should also not be planned
on enclosed yards u$ed for the parking of
cars, scooters, etc. Where, however, the problems cannot be resolved by pianning, the provision of double windows may be necessary.
8 . 3 . 2 D E T A I L E D P L A NN I N G
8 . 3 . 2 . 1 N O I S E RE-DUCTION W I T H I N
R O OM S-The reverberation time should not
PART VW BUILDIN(;
exceed one second in all general offices of the

types listed in 8.3.2.2 to 8.3.2.6, In small private offices, the reverberation time should
not exceed 0.75 second, in very large offices
the reverberation time may be increased to
1.25 seconds. For canteens, the recommended maximum reverberation time is 1.25
seconds.
8 . 3 . 2 . 2 L A R G E G E N E R A L. O F F I C E S - T h e
grouping -of_ departments and machines
together in one room should be avoided
wherever possible. Where supervision is
necessary the provision of glazed screens carried up to the ceiling should be considered. If
it is essential to the work of an office for
machine operators and clerks to work side by
side in the sarne room, the machines should
be enclosed by panels or low screens lined
with absorbent material and the ceiling
should be sound absorbent. In addition, the
machines should be as quiet as possible in
operation and mounted on suitable resilient
mountings.
SOI I
A qwet area should br planned lor prolonged
tclepliomc convcrsatwn.
8.3.2.3 LIGHT WEIGHT CONSTRUCTIONModern construction methods and economy
dictate the use of light weight construction

for many oifice buiidings. While the light
weight materials lead to fast fabrication and
erection and also effect considerable
economy in the building structure, they may
l e a d t o t r e m e n d o u s s o u n d htsulation
problems between adjacent offices and areas.
Light weight construction is also frequently
employed for the subdivision of large space
into executive cabins and secretarial areas.
Where such construction is considered
desirable, efforts should be made to provide a
double-skin panel. The panels should be
isolated from each other as far as possible
either by the use of separate framing or by
the use of elastic discontinuities in the
construction, and a sound absorbing material
may be introduced in the air cavity between
the panels. The partitions should be full
height up to the bottom of the roof above
and any openings required for air movement
should be provided with sound attenuators
compatible with the rest of the partition.
When light weight floors are provided in
multi-use buildings, adequate attention shall
be paid to the question of air-borne and
structure-borne noise transmission from the
upper floors to the floors below. For effective
reduction of air-borne. noise, a double panel

hollow floor construction may be employed
with some heavy sound damping material
introduced between the panels and the panel
isolated from each other. The sound damping
material could be sand, mineral wool, etc. In
case impact noise isolation is also required,
SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
WI415
the upper panel should be effectively isolated

from the rest of the floors and building
structure. The choice of the isolation layer
would of course depend upon the IDwest
frequency of interest.
components accurately. On the other hand, the

electronic system enables both the level and the
spectrum of the background noise to.befinally
adjusted to suit individual job requirements.
Another point to be kept in mind when going

in for light weight construction is to ensure
that the light weight panels are not in. resonance with the natural frequencies of any
mechanical equipment installed inside the
building. Light weight materials have high
natural frequencies well within the audio
range and may resonate or vibrate due to an
applied vibratory force. This vibratory force
is caused by mechanical equipment, road
traffic, rail traffic, etc. Special measures also
need be taken to isolate either the source or
the building so as to reduce the amount of
vibration transmitted to the building
structure.
8 . 3 . 2 . 5 oFf-ICE M A C H I N E KC)oMs-It i s
important that machines likqpewriters. calculators, data processing machines, etc.
should be quiet in themselves and also be
fitted with resilient pads, to prevent the floors
or tables on which they stand from acting as
large radiating panels. It is desirable to locate
machines further apart and to appll; sound
absorbent treatment to the ceiling. Since
office machines give a series of clicks and
taps high in pitch, the absorbent treatment
chosen should be efficient. in the high
frequencies.
8.3.2.4 CPEN PLAN OFFiCEs-A new concept in office planning is the use of open plan
offices. Large open floor spaces are converted into an office area with senior executives, jlrnior executives and secretarial staff
all seated within the satie area without the
use of any partitions or walls. While this
method of planning is appreciited, it leads to
a problem of inadequate acoustical privacy
between adjacent work spaces. Special design
measures are. therefore, required to reduce
the level of intruding sounds at work places
to acceptable low value so that people are not
disturbed and adequate privacy is
maintained.
Some special measures which might be
considered for such open plan offices are the
use of an acoustical ceiling together with
partial height barriers between work spaces,
all designed to provide adequate privacy
between adjacent work spaces. In addition
use may have to. be made of a backg[ound
masking noise system which provides a
constant level of a generally acceptable
background noise in the entire office area.
The masking noise system is a very useful
concept in open plan office design because by
raising the background level at every
workplace, intruding noises are made less
disturbing. A background music system

cannot .serve as a noise masking system
because the music does not have a constant
spectrum 1 or sound level. In fact t h e
background noise masking system muit be
introduced radually without the feeling of
employees.et he airconditioning systCm can
also be used to generate background masking
noise if the noise level fronlthe fans, ducts and
grills k suitably tailored to generate the desired
frequency spectrum. However, it is not simple
to predict the noise level of airconditioning
8.3.2.6 BANKING HALLS-If banking halls

are large and lofty. noise nuisance tends to be
aggravated. It is advisable to avoid high
reflective ceilings. The worst effects may be
reduced by segregating the noise from the
quiet operations and screening one from the
other and by applying sound absorbent materials to Che surfaces of the ceilings, screens
and nearby wall6 Resilient flooring is also
recommended.
8.3.2.7 PUBL+C OFFICES AND WAITING
SPACES- Noise nuisance may be minimized

by the provision of resilient flooring, sound
absorbent ceilings and heavy full height
screens between the public space and the
clerical office.
8.3.2.8 CANTEESS -~The provision of a
sound absorbent ceiling. resilient flooring
and the use of plastics trays and tables with
quiet tops are recommended.
8.3.2.9 CIKCULAIION SPACES -The effective
length of long corridors should be limited by
providing swing doors at intervals. Hard
floof finishes and board and batten floors in
corridors shouid be avoided. The provision
of a sound absorbent ceiling in corridors is
recommended. Floor ducts should be
planned on one side of corridors.
The noise from slamming of doors may be
reduced by fitting automatic quiet action
type door closers. Door buffers are useful but
may reduce insulation of air-borne sound due
to the inevitable gaps between buffers. Continuous soft, resilient strip let into the door
frames is preferable. The use of quiet action
door latches is recommended.
Staircases and lifts should be isolated from

quiet rooms and shall have silent type doors.
iYATlONAL
BUILDING CObE OF INDIA
8.3.3 RE Q U I R E M E N T O F S OUND INSIILATION - With open window (siigle or double)

the net insulation will be 5-IOdB, and with
sealed double windows it will be 40-45 dB.
Intermediate values are obtainable with
closed openable windows (single or double)
but only, of course, at such times as ventilation may be dispensed with. Having to
choose between ventilation and noise exclusion is a serious handicap to efficient working
in offices. In large office blocks on noisy
sites, consideration should be given to the
provision of sealed double windows and
mechanical ventilation at IeaSt in the offices
on the sides of the building exposed to noise.
8.3.3.4 It is recommended thatthe minimum

sound insulation (air-borne) for floors should
be 45dB, and the floors should have a resilient finish.
9. HOTELS AND HOSTELS
9. f Gencrul-- Hotels and hostels are primarily used as dwelling units, and hotels also
provide for public entertainment. The most
serious risk _of course is disturbance to sleep,
and adequate care, therefore, need be taken
to protect the occupants from disturbing outdoor and indoor noise.
OUTDOOR NOISE-Hotels near railway stations, airports. highways and those
situated in highly urbanized areas are specially vulnerable to outdoornoise. The outdoor noise in many of the areas is of a high
level even late at night and in the early morning. The noise could also be due to othkr
types of activities such as building construction activity (pile driving, concrete mixing
etc) and various types of portable utility
equipment, such as compressors or
generators.
9.1.1
8.3.3.1 The insulation necessary between

adjoining rooms, both horizontally and vertically. depends upon the amount of noise
created within the rooms, the amount of
intruding noise and whether it is important
that conversation should not be overheard
between rooms. Generally a sound insulation
value of 30dB between one room and
another room in office is recommended.
8.3.3.2 The following list may be consider&d
as broad .classification of noise producing
rooms and rooms requiring quiet though
many offices fall into both categories. Where
rooms in opposing categories are planned
adjacent 10 each other, a sound reduction of
at least 45dB should be provided between
them.
N o i s e P r o d u c i n g Rooms Requiring Quiet
Rooms
Entrance halls, stair- Executives rooms

cases and corridors Conference rooms
used by the public and Board rooms
Lifts and lift halls Interview rooms
Offices for one or two
Motor and plant
rooms
persons
Lavatories
Public offices
Medical officers rooms
Canteen and kitchens
Office machine ro&ns Sick rooms
and typing pools
Recreation rooms
Rest rooms
Large general offices Libraries
Ci+mas and projec: Telephoning rooms
tion rooms
a) Rooms requiring quiet (as
45 dB
listed above) on a quiet site
where privacy is required
b) Rooms requiring quiet (as
40 dB
listed above) but on a noisy
site or where a lower degree
of privacy is tolerable
20-30 dB
c) Clerical offices in which
noise does not constitute a
major nuisance
mm vw
mrmc
~ERVICW-~KTION
.4cous~ic$
9.1.2 I NDOOR NOISE---In so far as indoor

noise is concerned, the noise could be due to
the occupants theniselves, which is transmitted from one room.to the other. It could also
be due to public functions and late night use
of restaurants located in the hotel as also due
to miscellaneous utilify equipment installed
for providing and maintaining the services in
the hotel, such as airconditioning equipment,
pumping equipment, power laundry and kitchen. Sometimes hotels equipped with
standby generators are a potential source of
noise. Only other source which could lead to
disturbance to the occupants is the plumbing.
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 SITE PLANNINGW~~I~ it is desirable,
to locate the hotel, or hostel away from an
area where there is a high ambient noise level,
many a times these have to be located in
noisy areas for public convenience. Hotels
near airports and railway stations are becoming .popular because they are convenient for
passengers in transit. Hotels located in the
commercial areas of a city are also a commercially viable proposition and many a time this
factor outweighs the other problems associated with such a location. When a reasonably quiet location is not possible, it is
desirable that adequate measures be considered to provide a comfortable acoustical
environment for the occupantst
9.2.2 INTERNAL P LANNING -Where a hotel

is located iti a noisy environment, the provision of sealed windows (single or double) and
SOUND INSUWTION.
AND
NOISE
CONTROL
17
VI114 *
an airconditioning system is desirable for

rooms exposed to noise. The requirements
for the windows, would of course depend
upon the level and character of noise in the
area.
The genera1 recommendation for satisfactory
acoustical design of hotels and hostels are
given in 9.2.2.1 to 9.2.2.7.
9.2.2.1 H.otels of all classes shall by necessity
provide. good protection against indoor
n6ise. Since hotels can be considered as flats,
the standards of protection recommended for
flats are also applicable to hotels. Partition
between guest rooms and between rooms,
corridors and floors shall not be less than :OO
mm brick wall plastered or equivalent. The
floors shall have proper impact insulation.
Special attention should be paid to built-in
wall cupboards as these are potential areas of
sound leakage. These will not serve as sound
insulating partitions and may not be relied
upon to increase the insulation value of partitions against which they may be built. In fact,
partitions between adjoining rooms should
be continuous behind the cupboards. Use of
silent type door gear and cupboard catches is
also highly desirable.
9.2.2.2 Door openings on opposite sides of
corridors shall be staggered and doors be
provided with gaskets on head, sides and
threshold. Inter-communicating .doors
should be double doors, fully gasketed.
Doors should also have quite action latches.
Whenever possible. rooms should be entered
through a baffle lobby. Wherever possible,
corridor walls should not have ventilators
unless they are double glazed and nonopenable.
9.2.2.3 Corridors and staircases may have
resilient floor coverings and sound absorbent
ceilings are desirable unless the corridor is
fully carpeted. Staircases and lift wells may
be cut off from corridors by means of swing
doors and. if possible. isolated from guest
rooms by linen stores or similar rooms.
Room service pantries ori floors can also be a
source of noise and may be separated from
corridors by baffle lobbies, unless the rooms
themselves have baffle lobbies.
9.2.2.4 Except within the same s u i t e .
bathrobms should not be planned next to
bedrooms. Where this is unavoidable, internal pipe shafts with heavy walls, unpierced
on bedrooms side may be used as means of.
spparation. It is important to choose quiet
type ofsanitory fittings and to design the
plumbing system so as hot to create noise.
that is by avoiding sharp bends, restrictions
of flow. quick-action valves chat might cause
water hammer, etc.
v*11+1*
9.2.2.5 Airconditioning system should be

quiet in operation. Care should also be taken
that the airconditioning ducts do not lead to
a cross-talk problem between rooms.
Suitable acoustical lining wouId need. to be
provided in the ducts consistant with the fire
safety requirements of the buildings.
9.2.2.6, Large hotels often have banquet halls
and conference halls which are separately
hired out for public and private functions.
Late night restaurants and night c!ubs are
also popular and functions in ail ihese areas
may go on well into the night. It is therefore
essential that these rooms be effectively isolated from bedrooms and effective insulation
from all possible noise source. is considered.
Here it is not only necessary to consider the
air-borne sound insulation but it is also
necessary to consider the question of
structure-borne and impact noise transmitted
from areas where there might be dancing late
into the night.
9.2.2.7 While most of the noise problems
encountered in hotels are applicable to hostels, the latter are normally of more economical construction and, therefore, cannot cater
for special sound insulation provisidns. However, as far as possible, precautions should be
taken to provide comfortable conditions in
hostel rooms. This is specially true for student hostels where each room is also a living
room. Students might play music or have
loud discussions.late into the night. This may
disturb sleep or study of other students.
Proper precautions should, therefore, be
taken to provide satisfactory conditions.
10. INDUSTRIAL BlJlLDlNGS
IO.1 General- Industrial buildings are
primarily producers rather than receivers of
noise. The level of industrial nbisecommonly
exceeds that from any other source with the
exception of aircraft. As compared with traffic noise. its effects are less widespread but it
is often more annoying in character.
10.1.1 Many industrial noises contain very
strong high frequencies whines, screeches and
clatter - these components are relatively
more attenuated by passage through the air
and by the insulation of light structure than
are lower frequencies.
IO.12 Intermittent noises are either isolated
explosions or reports, or noises of a periodic
nature, such as those of pressure relief valves
or blow off, or the noises of work occurring
at random intervals, for example. hammering. grinding and sawing operations; the latter class may be especially irritating because
of high pit.ch.
SATIONAL
UILMNC CODE OF INDIA
10.2 Soumcs of Industrial Noise
JO.3 Noise Criteria
10.2.1 Noises in industrial buildings are

mainly of indoor origin. Noise in factories
and workshops is generally saused by
machine tools and by operations invoived in
making and handling the product and they
are classified into the following groups,
depending upon how the noise energy is
generaied.
10.3. I. HEARING D A M A G E - R ISK C R I T ERIA- Continuous exposure to high noise
10.2.1.1 IMPAU -- IVoise caused by impact is

the most intense and widespread of a!! industrial noises. it is normally coupled with
resonantresponse of the structural members
connected to the impacting surface. Cdmmon
sources of this type of noise are forging, riveting.. chipping, pressing, tumbling, cutting,
weaving, etc. intense impact noise may also
be produced during handling of materiais.as
in the case of sheared steel plates failing one
over another in collecting trays in a steel factory. Impact noise is usuaiiy intermittent and
impuisive in character, but it may also be
continuous as in the case of tumbling.
10.2.1.2 ~RIC-I ION ---. Most 01. the noise due
to friction is produced in such processes as
sawing, grinding and sanding. Friction also
occurs at the cutting edge on lathes and other
machine tools and in brakes and from bearings. The spectrum of frictional noise often
predcminates in Iligh frequency and is very
unpleasant in character.
10.2.1.3 KO.TAl.ION ANI) RECII;KOCA-\-ION -.-A rotating or reciprocriting machine generates noise due to unbalanced forces and, or
pressure fluctuations in the fluids inside themachines. in many cases. the moving surfaces radiate noise directly and in other cases,
the pressure fluctuations are transmitted to
the outer casings of the machine from where
they are radiated as noise. Interaction of
rotating component with the fluid stream can
also give rise to pure tone components, such
as the whine in a turbine. Since most machine
casings have radiation efficiencies of unity in
the higher frequency range, the amoilnt of
sound radiated is often substantial.
10.2.1.4 AiX lUKBUl.ELCE --Noise may be
generated by rapid variaton in air pressure
caused by turbulene from high velocity air,
steam or gases. Common examples are the
exhaust noise from pneumatic tools and jet
engines. The noise is intense, and broad
based in character and the frequency cri:eria
depends on the size of the jet: The intensity
increases rapidiy with the velocity of the air
stream.
10.2.1.5 NOISES WITH PIJKE TONE COMPOIGENTS- Whinning noise from turbines and
humming noise from transformers come
under this group.
levels may result in permanent noise induced

hearing loss in the course of time. Damagerisk criteria specify the maximum levels and
duration of noise exposure that may be
considered safe. Generally accepted damage-
risk criteria for exposure to continuoas,
steady.broad band noise are shown in Table
7.Wheneierthe sound level at the workers
position in a factory exceed the levels and the
duration suggested, feasible engineering
controls shall be utilized to reduce the sound
to the limits shown. If such controls fail to
reduce sound levels within the levelsof Table
7, persohai hearing protection equipment
shall be provided and used to reduce sound
levels within the level shown.
J 0 . 3 . 2 INTERFEREME WITH CO M M U N I C A --In factories where audible warning
signals are used, or where an operator follows the operation of his machine by ear, the
background noise should not be so loud as to
mask the signal or desired sound (the information sound) to be heard. Noise may be the
cause of accidents by hindering communication or by masking warning signals.
T IO N
JO.4 Methods yf Reducing Noise

10.4.1 NO I S E CONI-ROL
BY
A T I O N-
Machines, processes and work areas which

are approximately equaliy noisy should be
located together as far as possible. Areas that
are particularly noisy should be segregated
from quiet areas by buffer zones that produce
and may tolerate intermedia!e noise ieveis.
10.4.2 NOISE REDUCTiON BY L AY OUT -- 7he
office space in a factory should be as far as
possible segregated from the production area
and located preferably in a separate building.
7 his building ThouId not have a-wall common
with the productlon area. Where a common
wa!l is unavoidable, it should be heavy with

few connecting doors and no permanent
openings.
10.4.3 NOISE t?E~Ucl~loS H I- SOUXCF
10.4.3.1 SI:LECI~K)N ok MACHINEKY ---Noise
should be reduced as near the source as possib!e. While the operational processes in a,,factory may be fixed and may have no quieter
ai:ernative, careful selection of the machine
tools and equipment to be used may considerably help attaining lower noise levels in the
machine shop.
10.4.3.2 REDUCING NOISE FROM POTEKTlAL

S OURCES -- Impact that is not essential to a
process
should be quietened. Noise from

10
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND IWWL.ATION AND NOlSE CONTROL
VIII+--
handling and dropping of materials on hard

surface may be reduced by using soft resilient
materials on containers, fixing rubber tyres on
trucks, trolleys, etc. Machine noise may be
kept to a minimum by proper maintenance.
Proper lubrication will reduce noise by
friction conveyors, rollers, etc.
10.4.3.3 The noise from the radiating surfaces
may be reduced by reducing the radiating
area. For example, if the area is halved, the
TABLE 7 PERMISSlBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR
STEADY-STATE NOISE
(Clause I0.J. /)
Sotl\~) LEVFI dB(A)
(Slow Response)
T I M E PERMI ITED. T
(I)
(2)
h min
16-00
x5
ij-S1,
12-00
IO-34
99-11
8-00
6-58
$--3--29
3-02
:z:o
::jy
l-31
I - 19
I-09
noise intensity will be reduced by 3 dB and at

IOW frequencies the reduction .will be much
greater.
10.4.3.4 Supporting structures for vrbratrng
machines and other equrpment should be
frames rather than cabinets or sheeted enclosures. If an enclosure is used;- precaution
should be taken to isolate it and line it on the
inside with sound-absorbent material. The
noise radiated by machinery guards can be
minimized by making them of perforated
? let or of wire mesh.
10.4.3.5 R E D U C I N G T R A N S M I S S I O N O F
M E C H A N I C A L V I BR A T I O N -- A v i b r a t i n g
sources does not usually contain a large
radiating surface but , the vibration is
conducted along mechanically rigid paths to
surfaces that can act as effective radiator. If the
rigid connecting paths are interrupted by
resilient materials, the transmission of
vibration and consequently the nois: radiated
may be greatly reduced. The reduction
depends on the ratio of the driving (forcing)
frequency of the source to the natural
frequency of the resilient system. 7 he natural
frequency may be determined from static
deflection under actual load as given in Fig. 2.
The higher the ratio between the two
frequencies, the lessen is the transmissibility,
which is defined as the ratio of the force
transmitted through the resilient isolater to
the exciting force applied to it.
Transmissibility and the equivalent noise
reduction for various frequency ratios are
given in Fig. 3. For satisfactory operation, a
ratio of 3 : I or more between the driving and
natural frequencies is recommended.
II5
o-is
N~IF I .- Where the table does not reelect the actual

exposure ttmcs and levels, the permissible exposure to
contrnuous noise at a single level shall not exceed the
ttme. 7(in hours) computed from the formula:
I6
T = 70.2(L%57-
Where f. is the
work place sound level measured in dB(A)
Not E 2 - When the daily notse exposure is composed of

two or more pertods of different leveis. their combmed
effect should be considered rather than the individual
effect of each. The combined levels may not exceed a daily
noise dose, D of untty where I> is computed from the
formula:
Cl
C:
D ZX + r_
Cn
+f ..., + sr
n
Where, Cr. CZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C, indtcate the total duration of

exposure (in hours) at a given steady-state noise level; and
Tr. T: .,....... T, are the noise exposure limits (in hours for
the respective levels given in the table or computed by the
equation in Note I. Exposure {o continuous noise shall
not exceal I IS dB(A) regardless of any value computed
by the formula for the daily noise dose, D or by the
equation in the Note 2.
_
Vh14-20
Materials for isolators and their position are

given below:
a)
FOR I S O L A T O R S Vibration isolators are usuallv made of resilient materials like steel-in the form of
springs, rubber, cork and felt.
MATERIAL
1) Because of the large range of deflec-
tions obtainable in coil springs, they

may isolate vibrations over a large
spectrum of low frequencies. Metal
springs transmit high frequency
(from about two hundred to several
thousand c/s) very readily. Transmission of these frequencies can be
reduced by eliminating direct contact between the spring and the supporting structure. Rubber or felt
pads may be inserted between the
ends of the spring and the surfaces to
which it is fastened.
2) Rubber in the form of pads may be

used to isolate very effectively
engines, motors, etc. It may be used
in compression or in shear. Some
NATIONAL
BIILDING CODF: OF INDW
machine may be bolted directly to an

independent heavy inertia concrete base
and the available vibration .isolators
used below the concrete base,
1) Large press and drop hammers
which create serious impact vibration in heavy machine shops may be
mounted rigidly on very massive
biocks of concrete having weights
many times greater than the weights
of the supported machines. The
inertia blocks may, in turn, be isolated from the building structure by
large wooden blocks and with thick
pads of cork.
NATURAL FREQUENCY IN c, s
Fi2, 2 Relation BetweenStatic Deflection and

Natural Frequency
IO
2) In critical instal!ations (set ,Note),

attempt should be made to locate
the resilient mounts in a plane
which contains the centre of gravity
of the mounted assembly. It is also
preferable to locate the mounts laterally as far away as possible from
the centre of the machine.
NOTF -- Critical installations are those installations where transmission of vihration from these
installations will seriously hamper the normal
working.
3) Rigid mechanical ties be!ween
5
6
FORCING FRQUENCY
vibrating machine and building

structure, short-circuit or reduce
the effectiveness of isolators. Loose
and flexible connections should be
inserted in all .pipes and conduits
leading from the vibrating machnie.
Where flexible connections are
impracticable, bends should be
inserted into !he pipes or the pipes
themselves should be supported on
vibration mounts for a considerable
distance from the source.
Fig. 3 Transmissibility and Equivalent Noise

Reduction for Qifferent Ratior of
Forcing and Natural Frequencies
r u b b e r moun!ings use rubber-inshear as the primary elastic elements and rtibber-in-compression

as a secondary element which furnishes snubbing action if the
mounting is subjected to an
overload.
3)
Felt or cork or both may be used as

resilient mats or pads under
machine bases. The load per unit
area shall be chosen to- produce
enough deflection for the isolation
required; and shall be such tha! at
this defelcion; it is not loaded
beyond its eleastic limit.
The normal
position of the isolators is between the
machine and its foundation.However, if
bj POSI I IOY OF ISOLATOR -
the forcing frequency of the machine is

low (less than IO c si and vibration isolators with the requisite defelctions for
this location are not available. the
PART WI BLILDINC SEIWICES-SECTION 4
ACOUSTICS
4 )
I-LEXIBILITY O F FOUNDATIOK - The effect of flexibility of !he
foundation on the isolator transmissibility shall beconsidered in the

selection of practical vibration isolating mountings. The simplified
vibration isolation theory assumes
a completely rigid foundation.
,However, in practice, this can never
be achieved. The foundation is
never actually completely rigid.
Generally, the relatively low stiffness of the isolation system permits
the assumption of t-he foundation to
be rigid. However, if the stiffness of
the isolator is allowed to become
comparable to the.foundation stiffness (or greater), the deflection of
the isolator will become smaller and
the foundation will also deflect with
increased transmissibility and
decreased isolator efficiency. In a
SGUYD INStiLATION
AND NOISE CONTROL
V1P
dynamic sense, supporting fondation or floors should have natural

frequency as high and be as stiff as
possible compared to the system
being isolated: Ciood design practice requires that the isolators
should be designed assuming a rigid
foundation with the stipulation that
rhe selected machine isolation system frequency should be welt%elow
the foundation frequency. This
point should specially he kept in
mind when installing machines at
upper levels in buildings because
supported slabs ~ generally have
lower natural frequencies (low stiffness) than slabs on grade in basement or ground floor locations.
50.4.4 NOISE KEDIJC-I
AND BAKKIE~~s
I O N
ar EKI.~SI_~KES
10.4.4.1 ENCI.OSIJKES ----Air-borne noise

generated by a machine may be reduced by
placing the machine in an enclosure or behind
a barrier. The enclosure may be in the form of
close-fitting acoustic box aicund the machine
such thatthe operator performs his normal
work outsid$ the box and thus is not subjected
to the high noise levels of the machine. The
enclosure may be mdde of sheet metal lined
inside with an acoustical material.
Where size of thus machine, workingarea and
the operation de not permit close-fitting
enclosures, the machine may be housed in a
room of its own. The inside of the enclosure
should be lined with sound-absorbing materials to reduce the noise level of the contained
sound. The bounding wal:s of the enclosures
shall also have adequate transmission !oss to
provide desired insertion loss.
10.4.4.2 BARRIERS --A partial reducticn of
noise in certain directions may be obtained.by
barriers or partial enclosures or partial
height walls. Two-sided or three-sided barrier.
with or without a top and invariably convered
on the machine siddwith a caustic absroption
material should face a wall covered with
sound-absorbing niaterial. If the top of the
enclosure is open, the reduction may bc
increased by placing sound-absorbing
material on the ceiling overhead.
10.4.5 AC O U S T I C A L ARSORPTION DEVICFS
10.4.5.1 ACOUSTICAL TREATMEPT OF CEILSIDE WALLS - In order to.reduce
the general reverberant noice level in m+xhnie
shops;acoustical material may be placed on
the ceilingand side walk. With this treatment
3 to6 dB r:duction of middle and high frequency noise may be achieved. While the
noise level at the source, affecting the opera-
I NG S AND
111422
tor, may no! be reduced materially, the treatment would bring down the general noise leve!
away from the source in reverberant field.
10.4.5.2 FtiNCTlOkAL SOUND ABSORBERS- For efficeint noise reduction functional
sound absorbers may be clustered as near the
machines as possible. These tiu?li;fs may be suspended and distributed in any pattern to
obtain !ower noise levels within the machine
shop. Compared on the basis of equal total
exposed surface areas, functic;nal sound
absorbers have slightly higher noise reduction
coefficients (arithmetic average of absorption
coefficients at 250, 500. I 00 and 2 (OOO Hz)
than conventional acoustical materials place6
directly on ceilings and wal!s.
?I. I.ARORATORIES
HOUSES
AND
TEST
I I. I Sources of Yoise
/I././ CJlJl-DOCR NOISE - ln a test house or
laboratory, where research workers and
scientists are engaged in performing sophisticated experiments, the externa! noise is
mostly contributed by noise emmitting buildings (workshops. machine rooms), aerodromes. railway stations and gene@ traffic
noises. lhe outdoor sources of noise in a college-labora:ory include noises produced in a
playground as we!l.
11.1.2 Ixr)oOR NCISE - -- T h e f o l l o w i n g
sotirces mainly contribute.to indoor noises in
research institutions. college laboratories:
Workshop. machine rooms, cafeteria,

ctci
b) Airconditioners and exhaust fans;
c) Noise produced within !he test house or
laboratory while performing experiments; and
d) Typing or other machine loises. telephone service lift. sanitary services, etc.
a)
I/.,./ S!TE PL A N N I N G - - -
While
planning
for a labcratory or test house. care should be

taken in the design that no noise emmittlng
installations should exist in its neighbourhood. However, where outdoor noises exist,
such as from local factory. heavy traffic.
aerodromes. railway lines. sport grounds or
busy markets, buildings should be kept as far
as possible away from the source of noise.
11.2.1.1 The window and door openings
tow;ards the nqise sources should be minimum. Minimum amount of glaring shollld be
placed on wails directly facing the noise
sources.
YATIDNAL lUllDING
CODE
O F WDIA
Il.22
INTERNAL PLANNING
11.2.2.1 Noisy places should be kept separate

from the quiet ones. The location of
laboratories or test houses shouid be so
chosen that it is cut off from the noigy zones.
Where there are offices attached to a
laboratory, provision should be made to treat
the offices and to use acoustical partitions. to
achieve a sound insulation of at least 35dB.
11.2.2.2 In a laboratory, mosfly hard refleding surfaces and bare furnishings are found;
which produce very reverberant conditions.
The ncise condition still deteriorates when
noise producing instruments are switched on
or a heavy object is dropped on the floor.
Under these conditions. sound. absorbing
treatment of the space is very essential. Sound
absorbing ceilings are recommended to
deaden-such noises. Rubber buffers may also
be fitted to the legs of furniture.
11.2.2.3 In large span laboratories or test
houses where scientists and .researchers are
engaged in work and/or simultaneously busy
in calculations or desk work requiring high
degree of mental concentration, use of sound
absorbing screens is recommended.
11.2.2.4 Noise reduction between the test
house or laboratory and corridors or general
circulation space should be well kept in mind
and due care should be taken of the type of
doors and the manner of their fittings etc.
Transmission of noise through service ducts,
pipes, lifts and staircases should also be
guarded. Telephones should preferably be
placed in a separate small enclosure or acoustically efficient telephone booth.
11.2.2.5 To isolate a laboratory or a test
house from structure borne noises originating
from upper floor, sandwitch type floor construction is recommended.
11.2.2.6 Wherever the provision of double
glazed windows is necessary+0 reduce the heat
losses care shouli be taken to provide sealed
double windows rather than double glazing in
a single window.
NOIE - Double glazed windows for sound insulation
should have a minimum gap of 100 mm between the two
glasses.
MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS
12.1 L_arc* Courts And Councii Chambers It is important that law courts and council
chambers be protected from the intrusion of
outdoor noise and from indoor noise arising
both from ancillary offices and circulation
spaces. The general recommendations on site
planning given in 3 appiy to law courts and
municipal buildings. .buf in the larger
buildings at least, further protection against
f2.
?ARt 8111 SIIWINC SERVICES-SECIION
4 A C O U S T I C S . SOCND
outdoor noise can beobtained bv blanninn

offices and other rooms around- the COUP?
rooms or chambers, and separating the offices
from the central rooms by means of corridors.
This arrangement is usual:y convenient to the
function of the buildings.
12.1 .I The wait between thecorridorsand the
central rooms should have a sound insulation
value of nof less than 50 dB for example 225
mm brick t_o insulate against airborne noise in
the 6orridors. Entrances from halls or corridors into court riioms or council chambers
sholild be through baffle lobbies with two sets
of quiet action doors. Sound absorbing treatment on ceilings and upper parts or walls of
entrance lobbies is recommended.
12.1.2 The whole of the floor of the court
room or chamber including steps and seating
areas se1 aside for the public should have a
resilient floor finish to reduce the noise of
footsteps and shuffling. of feet. Any tip-up
seats should be quiet in action.
12.1.3 Sound absorbing treatment applied
for acoustic purposes serves alsoto reduce the
build-up of noise within the room and, part of
the treatment should be applied in a band to
the perimeter of the ceiling to absorb intruding outdoor noise; it is often desirable to keep
the cenIre part of the ceiling free of absrobent
material for acoustic reasons.
i2..2 L i b r a r i e s , M u s e u m s a n d Art
Galleries -- Quiet conditions for- reading and
study are essential in these types of buildings

and, since their occupancy is not noise
producing, intruding noise is more noticeable
and distracting.Evefy opportunity therefore
should be taken to plan.for noise defence.
both in respect of siting of the bui!ding and
internal planning. When possible, stack
rooms, store rooms and administrative offices
should be planned to, screen reading rooms,
print rooms and lecture rooms from noise
sources. In public libraries, the reference
library and lecture rooms should receive first
consideration; the lending library, newspaper
and periodical rooms have a high=
background noise and are secondary. is
importance.
12.2. I In Ial ge libraries, museums and art galleries echoes from lofty. large domed or concave ceilings are often a nuisance. Small
noises such as footsteps, coughs, chair scraping.and closing of books are reinforced by
reverberation. and concave surfaces even
when treated with.a sound absorbent may
focus these no,ises. Treated fiat ceilings if not
too high obviate these troubles. Books on
shelves in libraries constitutea valuable wall
absorbent.
INSULATION
AND
NOISE
COXlROL
V1114-y
12.2.2 Floor finishes are important. The

impact noise of footsteps on marble, terrazzo
or wood block flooring, and especially on
hardwood strip and batten flooring, can be
disturbing both within the room in which the
noise is generated and the rooms below. On
solid floors, resilient floor finishes, such as
rubber, cork and linoleum on an underlay, are
highly desirable. In the childrens se&tins of
libraries 2nd museums they are essen!ial. In
eristing buildings, rubber, linoleum or vinyl
asbesto tiles laid over the floor in the traffic
areas are often a solution to the problem.
/2.2.3 Reference libraries in universities,
research establishments, office buildings and
science buildings having machines and testing
benches, should be planned in a quiet part of
the building. Walls enclosing the !ibrary
should normally have a sound reduction
value of not less than 50 dB (for example 225
mm brick) and baffle lobbies should be
planned between the library and halls and
corridors. Walls facing on to corridois or
other noisy areas should not have fanlights or
borrowed lights unless they are double glazed
and non-openable.
12.3 Audiloria utd Tlwarrrs ~~~ .?he sources
of noise that have to be considered in concert
halls, opera houses, theatres, cinemas and
similar auditorium buildings are as follows:
Outdoor noise er.tering through walls.
roots. doors, windows or ventilation
openings;
b)
Noise from any other hall ;n the same

building. especially if let out separately
for revenue;
c)
Noise from foyers, service rooms and

other ancillary rooms, particularly
rehearsal rooms; and
d)
Noise from airconditioning plant, etc.

and the cross-transmission of other
internal noises via ventilating duct
system.
12.3.1 Because of greatly increased outdoor

noise, all auditorium buildings now need
more care in siting than formerly. For
listening to speech or music, a very low
background noise level is desirable: in concert
halls especially the quietest possible
TABLE 8 MAXIMlJM
conditions should be provided because the

pauses and moments of silence which are an
essential element of music cannot otherwise
be given full value. Therefore, sites at crassroads or close to steel railway bridges or near
churches where bell ringing is practised
should be avoided unless very-high standards
of structural sound insulation are
contemplated. Sites adjoining under ground
railways may also prove unsatisfactory at
basement levels owing to low-pitched noise or
rumble transmitted through the ground;
special isolation measure need to be adopted
for isolating large buildings from ground
vibration of this scrt.
12.3.2 Whenever possible, for concert halls
and theatres on city sites a noise survey of the
site .should be made; a suitable sound
reduction value for the structure of the
building can then be chosen so as to keep
down to certain maximum noise levels within
the auditorium. The maximum octave-band
sound pressure levels(SPL) recommended are
given in Table 8.
12.3.3 The minimum standard of sound
reduction likely to be required in an auditorium in a city to protect it against external
noise is of the order of 65 dB for a concert hall
or 55-60 dB for a theatre (when averaged over
the range of 100-3159 Hr, with a slope of not
more than 5 dB per octave so as not to fail
short at the crucial low frequencies). This
reduction should be provided on all sides, but
it would be reasonable to make the roof insulation 5-10 dB less provided the building is not
unduly exposed to noise from aircraft in
flight. Surrounding the auditorium with ancillary rooms and foyers is an obvious and invaluable planning method of obtaimng the
required insulation against outdoor noise.
12.3.4 Ventilation intakes and returns are
vulnerable features in the defence against
external noise, they should be positioned so as
to avoid expcsure to noise, and in addition a
sufficient length of both inlet and outlet ducts
should be provided with carefuily designed
silencers. The ventilation system should also
be designed togvoid transmitting or adding to
internal noise.
12.3.5 The most serious internal noise problem arises when there are two halls meant for
-SOUND PRESSLRE LEVELS DUE TO EXTERNAL

MECHASlC.4L EQUIPMENT NOISE IN AUDITORIA (dB)
(Clause /.?.3.?)
CESIKE
l.yt,r OF A~WTWII~M
FRt(JljEhCY,Hz)
A
500
1000
zoo0
, 63
I25
250
Concert hails
[dB(A)-251
51
29
?I
24
20
Drama l.hcatres
[db(A)-301
55
44
35
?Y
vttt4*4
AND
4000
nGF
17
14
13
22
20
I8
NATIDNAL lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
separate use in the same building, especially if

one of them a concert hall; the-latter is a very
loud potential source of noise and requires a
high standard of protection against extraneous noise. In thesecircumstances it isdoubtful
whether a single wall can be adequate for
insulating the two halls unless it is designed
with a wide unbridged cavity. Separation by
planning is preferable.
12.3.6 Other sources of internal noise are
rehearseal rooms, scenery bays, and
workshops, stages of other halls where
rehearsals or erection of stage sets might be in
progress and foyers and bars where loud
conversation might occur. The insulation of
the internal walls should be adequate to
protect the auditorim from these noise sources
and the insulation should not be by-passed by
openings, doorways, etc. The general noise
due to banging of doors also needs to be taken
care of; soft sealing materials should be
provided for all doors to ensure quiet closing.
12.3.7 For detailed acoustical design of
auditoria and conference halls reference may
be made to good practice [VII-4(2)].
13. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
13.1 The installation and use of ampligfying
systems for public and private functions have
been greatly on the increase. To get optimum
performance out of the equipment attention
to essential detailsby professional engineers is
necessary.
13.2 The installation of sound distribution
systems in closed auditoria and other enclo-
PART Vlll W I L D I N G S&RVICES-SECTION
sures calls for careful choice of equipment,

positioning of the systems and other precaulions to obtain optimum performance of the
system. The sound distribution system may
comprise of a central loudspeaker system or a
distributed loudspeaker system depending
upon the acoustics of the enclosure and purpose of use.
13.3 The installation of sound distribution or
public address system at passenger terminals
(bus, train or air terminals) requires careful
attention. Most passenger terminals have
hard walls. floors, ceiling, etc. and are,
therefore, highly reverberant spaces. Use of
sound absorbing materials should be resorted
restored to on some convenient surfaces to
bring down the reverberation time as far as
possible. However, even after the application
of sound absorption materials, the terminals
could be reverberant enough to constitute a
serious problem for the public address system.
Care has to be taken to position loudspeakers
such that direct sound coverage is available
for every area. Use of the reverberator builtup sound level should not be relied upon as
this provides very poor speech intelligibility.
Also, care must be taken to ensure that the
system is capable of generating sound levels
high enough t o o v e r c o m e t h e h i g h
background noise levels at the terminals. At
least 25 dB signal to noise ratio is required for
adequate speech intelligibility in reverberant
spaces with the reverberation sound in excess
of 1.5 seconds.
13.4 For details of such a system. reference
may be made to good practice [Vll-4(3)].
4 ACOGSTICS, S O U N D INSULAflON AND N O I S E C O N T R O L
v111+*5
APPENDIX A
(Cirusl~
CONSTRUCTIONAI.
MEASURES
FOR SOUND INSULATI~ON OF BUILDINGS
A-1. MAI-ERIAL
A - l . 1 S o u n d lnsu!rrlion Vulws of Nonpordus Rigid Purlitions -. T h e s o u n d
insuiation of non-porous. homogeneuus rigid
constructions, such hs plastered solid brick
masonry walls varies as the iogarithm of the
weight per tini! area and would thus increase
the thickness of wall. There is, however, a
limit beyond which it requires an excessive
increase in thickness to produce on:y a small
increase in sound insulation (.yeeTable 9). The
relation between the weight ofa rigid par!ition
and its Sound insillaticn is approximately
such that every time the we&lit is doubled
there is an increase in sound insulation of
about 6 dB. Sound insulation values in
relation to weight per square metre of wali are
giver. in Table 9.
A-l .2 Sound lnsulaiion qf Porous Materials
A - / . 2 . / POHOIJS R.IGII:J MAIEKIALS -- The
relation between weight p& square metre and
the sound insuiation values given in Table 9
does not apply in the case of porous rigid
materials. like porous concrete masonry:
cinder concrete:. etc. because of their sound
absorptive properties which provide about IO
percent higher insulation than the non-porous
variety of the same weight. In order to secure
the best insclation from such porous ma!erials, it is recommended that :he porous partition should be plastered at least on one side
and if possible on both the sides.
A-/.2.2 N O N- RI G I D OK FLEXIYLE Po~or~s
Mt\ WKIAI.S -- These are materials, such as
Iclt. mineral wool and quilt. and they by themselves provide low sound insulation as compared to rigid .materials and, therefore, they
arr- not generally used for the purpose of noise
reduction and isolation. However, a composit
constructon employing a combination of rigid
materials and porous absorbers may be
adopted where weight is an importanr factor.
Such a conE:ruction produces better insutation ner unit weight of the partition.
. I - . HALLOWANDCOMPOSITEWALL
CONSTRUCTION
A-2.1 Heavy Weight Consrrustion - Where
a high degree of found insulation i?; required,
neither a non-porous rigid material nor a
porous materiai by itself can provide the
desired insulation in a reasonable thickness
and weight. For example, zbout I@0 cm thick.
brick wall (I 950 kg/m-) would be required to
v111426
4.4)
secure an isolation of about 60 dB. A doub1.e

wall construction with each wall about 25 cm
thick w&h an intervening air space of II) cm
however. provide about the same
woc!d.
insulation at half the weight. When cavity
walls are provided, the provision of sound
absorption inside the cavity also helps in
improving the sound insulation-of the wall
provided the two walls are acoustically
decoupled from each other all along the
perimeter.
9 SOUND INSi!LATION VALUES
ACCORDING Tr3 WEIGHT OF MATERIAL PER
SQUARE METRE
1 ABLE
(C/uustJ A-1.1)
St.:I(I-A.\l. [)thhllY Ok WA1.i ~iHAiiShI?ISIOS i_OSS(SOUND
AlttT.4 IN
kg; m
INSULATION
V ALUE A V E R A G E
FOR
128 and 2 048 Hz) dB

(2)
(1)
5
22.a
25
33.2
5;)
37.6
IO0
42.0
150
44.1
200
46.4
250
47.9
300
49.1
350
50.0
400
50.9
450
51:6
500
52.3
550
52.9
600
53.6
A-2.2 Light Weighr Construction - For

light weight construction, a variety of materials, such as metal lath and p!aster, fibreboards, plywood and plasterboards fixed on
studs with an intervening space may be
employed. For equal weight these p:ovide
greater insulation than solid masonry. Tests
conducted on such partitions haveshown that
sound is mainly transmitted thrcugh the studs
and very little thrcugh air space. Strunural
cross-connections or ties between the two partitions should, therefore, & avoided, but
where they cannot be avpided only the minimum number required should be used. These
ties where provided should be made of wire or,
MPDNAL
BUILDING
CODE
UF
IWDl4
even mere preferably, of a suitable flexible

material. Construction with sfaggcred studs
(see Fig. 4) which makes the two part&&s
independent. is recommekded.
few as possible and made preferably of a flexible material, provided

adequate discontinuity is maintained between the floor, thewall
and the ceiling.
c)
Fig. 4 Typical Sectional Plan of a Sound

Proof Partition
A-2.3 Filling of .Cavity in kartitions - The

tilling of the cavity in a partition with acoustic
materials like mineral woolor glass wool does
not always produce satisfactbry results. If the
acoustic tili is rigidjt may form a bridge acioss
the two partitions and thereby considerably
reduce the insulation. In the case of hol!ow
light weight partitions, in which the two papels are not structurally separated, theacoustic
fill helps to increase the insulation only
slightly. However, .when the two pahels are
decoupied by means of staggered studs, resilient supports, etc. the acoustic fill can effect
considerable increase in the insulationvalue,
and should be provided.
A-2.4 Composite Wall - Composite walls ot
laminated construction may be designed to
obtain any sound insulation desired; the maximum value is obtained when all the layers of
alternate porous and rigid materials are separated by an air-space in which case the value
approaches the sum of the value of individual
units, provided the air space is bigger thanthe
wave len th of the sound at the lowest frequency oPinterest and the layers of rigidmaterial are isolated from each other. Such a
construction, however, occupies more space
and needs great carein installation in oider to
obtain .the anticipated efficieqcy. Such composite wail may be used in special eases where
high sound insulation is necessary.
A-2.5 The desired sound insulationmay be
achieved in an one or more of the following
three ways:
a)
B,y a d o p t i n g a continuotis
construction by using homogeneous materials where the extent
of sound insulation is controlled
by the weight per squaie rnetre.
Where. the requirements are not
relatively stringent and are of the
ordlr of 50 dB,.solid construction
of 20 cm to 30 cm bricki is
comidered suitable.
b) By adopting semi-discontinuous
construction where air cavities are
employed with cross-connections
between the two partitions. the
cross-connections being kept as
PART
VIII
SUILDINC
SEllVICES--SECTION
ACOUS?lCf%
By adopting a fully discontinuous

construction where complete discontinuity in the structure is intro-.
duced by means of an air cavity.or
an elastic acoustic material, and
the air cavity is filled with an
acoustic material. This method
would meet the requirements of
the highest insulation within reasonable weight per square metre:
A-2.6 i3verall Insulation- In providing

sound insulatidn in any room the question of
overall sound insulation should be considered. Some areas, like sound-proof doors,
windows, etc, may,provide insulation lqwer
than that of the other surfaces and thus would
adversely affect the overall insu!ation. All the
areas should, therefore, be designed keeping
in view the sound energy transmitted through
the individual components so as to attain the
desired overall sound insulation.
A - 2 . 7 Exa.mpks o f S o u n d R e d u c t i o n
Values- Values of sound reduction for types
of (a) continuous construction, (b) semidiscontinuous construction, and(c) discontinuous construction, are given in .B-I. Sound
reduction values obtainable with various
iypes .of windows are given in B-2.
A-3 SOUND INSIJLATION OFFLOORS
AND CEILINGS BY CONSTRUCTION
MEASURES
A-3.1 Sound Insulation of Floors and Ceillings-Both air-borne and structure-borne
sounds may be transmitted through floors and
ceilings. In most of the cases where the ceilings
and floor constructioti is of the solid type like
cement concrete these have sufficient weight
and rigidity to provide adequate insulationf&r
air-borne sounds, but offer poor insulation
for structure-borne or impact sounds. Insulation .against impact sounds may be done as
iriditiated in A-3.1.1 to A-3.1.3.
IVY USING A RESILIENT S U R F A C E
MATERIAL O N FLOORS -This helps to damp
A-3.1.1
the impact noises, but has no appreciable

effect on air-borne sound. Linoleum, insulation board, cork, asphalt mastic and carpet
are some of the mater@ usually employed;
the softer the material used, gieater is the
insulation effected. An improvement.of 5 to
10 dB over a bare.concrete floor is obtained
with suL;h material.
9iDUYD INSUWTiON
AND NOISE CONTROL
v1114~
FLOOR BOARD
1.
~-3.1.2 BY PR O V I D I N G A FL O A T I N G
FLOORCONSTRUCTION
a)
CONCRETE FLOORS-
This is an
additional floor constructed and
isolated or floated fram the existing concrete floor by means of a
resilient material and;therefore.
does not let the impacts and consequent vibration to be transmitted
to the room below. It also provides
useful improvement in the insulation of air-borne sounds. A typical
construction is shown in Fig. 5.
The cement concrete used may be
about Scm thick which is poured
over a resilient material like
quilted mineral or glass wool. It is
important that a waterproof paper
be used in between, and both the.
quilt and paper lapped so as to
prevent concrete from getting
through.
MINERAL OR
f GLASS-WOOL
.OUILT
EXISTING SUB
FLOOR OF WOOD
PLASTERBOARD
WOODEN JOIST
6A
<
FLOOR COVERING
FLOOR BOARD
MINERAL OR
GLASSWOOL
QUILT
EXISTING SUBLOOR OF WOOI
PiASTERBOARG
VWOODEN JOISTS PLASTER 1
6B
FLOOR
\.COVERING
FLOOR BOARD/
MINERAL OR
(GLASS-WL
OUILl
_ EXISTING SUBFLOOR OR WOOD
BOARDING
PLASTERBOARD
\. WOODEN JOISTS L PLASTER \SAND PI!GGIN(;
6C
Fig. 6 Existing Timber Floors, Floating
Consrrucrion
kl OOR COVERING,
,- FLOOR BOARD
MINL RAI. 1(
Gl.ASSWOCL
QUILT
SAND PUGGING
Fig. 5
b)
WO~DES EI.OOKS I n
floors constructed on wooden joists

the problem of sound insulation
becomes more difficult particularly in
the presence of heavy mechanical
impact sounds. Sketches in Fig. 6 show
methods of insulating such floors
employing mineral or glass wool quilt
for isolation purposes. Resilient
mountings may be used to obtain even
more satisfactory results. A further
improvement in the insulation of such
floors is achieved by employing a puggrng or a deadening material in the
air-space between the wood joists (set,
Fig.6 and 7). Either sound absorbem
type materials like mineral wool or
other materials like sand or ashes; may
be used, the latter being more effective
because of the fact that, the efficiency
of the puggingdepends on the weight
of the material used. In order to obtain
useful improvement at least 70kg! m
of sand pugging is usually employed.
Mineral wool pugging (at least I5
kg/m) is used mainly in conjuction
with thin walls.of IO cm thickness or
less.
v~ll+2*
PLASlER ON
EXPANDED METAL
the case of
WOOCEN JOISTS
7,4 When
FLOOR
Supporting Walls Are IOcm Thick or Less
COVERING
Fl.OOR BOARD
MINFRAL OR
. GL~;As,yOOL
MINERAL WO OL
PUGGIVG
PLASTERBOAR,)
WOODEN JOISTS
7~ When
L PLASTE R
Supporting Walls Arc
20 cm Thick or More
Fig. 7 New Timber Floors, Floaring

Construction. with Pugging
A-3.1.3 B Y USlsG .4 StJSPESDED CE I L I N G
Wll-H AI R- SPACE -This helps to improve the
insulation of both air-borne and strucrureborne sounds by attenuating and isolating

them from the room below. Typical constructions for wooden floors are shown in Fig. 8A,
88 and 8C. which provide increasing degree
of insulation. For solid floors, metal hangers
of acoustic clips may be used to support the
ceiling below, as shown in Fig. 8D. The extent
of improvement effected depends on the
NATIONAL BUiLDlNC
CODE OF INDIA
rklooK (DVtKlsc; r8 LOOK KDAKD
.,FLOOR COVEKiNG,- FLODK RDAKD
l2mm
IBKE-ROAKD
PI.AS.IEKBOAKD
O K EXPA%DtD
MElAl
PLASTEKJ
LWODDES JOISI
8
PLAS~lERilDARI~
OR EXPA%DED
MEIAI
PI.AS lEK 1
8C
\ WODDEI, JDIS
L
I
ISOLA I OK
HANGFK HOUSING
HASGEK
J%OOK COVERING c l-LOOR BOARD
PLASTEK
EAl SE (El1 I\(;
IIElAll
A l S
8l.I
Fig. 8 Timber Floors, Floating Construction with Suspended_ ceiling
weight of the ceiling as well as on the structural rigidity with which it is connected to the
solid or wooden floor. Thus the highest insulation could be achieved by using a heavy
ceiling which is arranged to be independent of
the floor by supporting it on resilient mountings. In cases of very heavy impacts which are
difficult, to eliminate altogether, both the
methods prescribed in A-3.1.2 and A-3.f.3
may be adopted. Sound insulation values of
typical floors and ceilings are given inB-3 and
B-4.
?AIT VIII
BUILDING
SERVICES--SECTION
4 ACOUSllCS,
A-3.2 Skiriing- The type of skirting fixed

will affect the. insulation of the floor-a great
deal. The larger the contact area it provides
between floor and the walls, the lower would
be the insulation. A typical method of fixing
skirting is shown in Fig. 5. An air gap or a
resilient material between the skirting and the
floor is used in this method, or the lower edge
is chamfered to reduce the contact area.
Again, most of the inner portion of the
skirting is scooped out to minimize contact
with the walls.
SOUND INSULAIWW
AND NOISE CONTROL
VII1429
APPENDIX B
(Clauses A-2.7 and A-3.1.3)
SO( JND INSIJLATION VALUES FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

EXAMPLESOFSOUNDREDUCB-l.
TION VALUES
SI
NO
M.&II HIAI OK
I YIF or CO\~IHI:CIIo\
A\FHA(;~.
Wtlctl~ I
k g m2
AVEI<AC;C
SO\ XII KF-
I>IK
I IO\ dB
Sinjfie Panel Conr inuous Constructions

I Y.O-mm particle
2h
12.0
board
1)
2) 3-mm sheet @is:,

3) iO-mm gypsum
9.5
25
10.0
25
plasterboard
6) Double partition of 10 cm
brick with 5 cm cavity thin
wire ties and 12.5 mm plaster
both sides
7) Cupboards used as partitions
I)
4)
17.0
28
5)
h.0-mm asbestos
cement sheet
12.25
26
6)
*mm wood-wool
cement slab piastered 12.5mm
70.0
35
7)
200-mm h o l l o w 2 4 5
dense concrctc
45
both ,side
plastered and sedarated by a

5-cm air-space associated with
suspended ceiling arid floating
fl00rs:
across the walls

b) Measured through thefloor
2) As in (I ). but with a third
IO-cm brick, plastered:

a) Measured across rhe walls
?70
45
9)
X-cm brickwork,
plastcrcd 12.5~mm
both sides
490
50
IO) -W-cm brickwork.
930
55
The values given for these three items

are fdr walls without wall ties. Wire ties
effect a slight reduction (about 5dB)and
strip metal tie a considerable reduction
in these values. To achieve sound insulation values above 55dB. considerable
attention need be paid to the question of
flanking transmission. The construction
must be fully discontinuotis to achieve
the above values.
I2.5-mm
both sides
plastcrcd
S(rrii-tlD~.orilitluolrs Conslrsucrions
3(!-mm boarding on timber
30-35
.joists. with 12.5 mm gypsum
plasterboard ceiling with
skim-coat plaster
ZO-mm boarding on timber

joists. with expanded metal
Lath and 20 mm gypsum
35-40
As in (2). plvs pugging OR trays

at 80kg. m. the pugging to
4548
As in (2). plus floating floor 43-45

boarding on batteq.on resilient quilt
35
Timber stud partition with
metal lath and 20 mm, plaster
both sides (80 kg/m-)
.30
VIII-.%-
B-2
SL
be air tight (for esample, sand

and mortar)
51
NATE -Variations in sound insulation due to the use

of different plasters do not appear to be significant.
SOUND REDUCTlON VALUES

OF 1-Y PICAL WINDOWS
D ESCRIPTION
OF
WINWW
No.
sanded plaster cedmg
4)
60-70
65-75
floor
IO-cm brickwork,
plastcrcd 12.5~mm
both sides
3)
85-75
each air-space 5 cm, measured

across the walls or through
the floor
3) As in (I). but with wallsof
b) Measured tlirough the
Xl
7)
50-60
65-75
leaf or 5-cm concrete between

the two discontinuous shells;
block plastcrcd
I2.5-mm both sidcx
1)
25-35
lhwdnuous C0nswucri0.w
Two leaves of 6-cm concrete
a) Measured
6.5-mm plate glass
50-55
AV E R A G E
SXINO REDUC.
TION dB
5
domestic room or in classrooms occupied by pupils
10
2) Open, but with openings reduced to about 0.5 m*
25
3) Closed, single 3.0 mm glass
(9.5 kg/m*)
4) Closed, double. 3.0 (9.5 35
kg/ m) glass, 100 mm apart
1) Open, in average furnished
NATIDNAL
BUILDING
CODE OF INDu
5) Closed, double 3X mm (9.5
40
6)
kg, m-) glass, 150 mm apart

Closed. single 5.5 mm (17
kgj m2) Plate glass
25
7) Closed. double 5.5 mm plate
45
plasterboard. on battens in
felt-lined clips
B-4.
glass, 15 cm apart
IO-15
SOUND INSULATION OF
TlMBER FLOORS
SI.
IHEAIMEYI
IMPKOVE-
MEW
No.
B-3
SL
OVER FLOGK
DESCKIBED IS
SL No. I
IMPACT SOUND INSULATION OF

TYPlCAL FLOORS OTHER THAN
T!MBER FLOORS
l-HE.41 MEN1
IMPHOvEMCNr
OVEK BA K E
CON(KF E
No.
FIWOKS d B
Resilient Sut--ace Material

on Concrete
Boarding on joist with ceiling of lath and plaster, or

plaster on plasterboard
2) As in (1).
Bare concrete
2)
Linoleum
3)
Wood blocks or thin carpet

or rubber
4)
Carpet or underfelt
4)
5-10
IO
5)
Floaring Floor
6)
a) 5-cm Dense Concrete

Screcd on :
Mineral wool/ glass wool quilt

2.5 cm nominal thickness
(density 80-120 kg/ m)
15-20
2)
Mineral wool batt (density

8 0 kg/m), t w o n o m i n a l
25 cm layers
25
I)
Clips, unlined
5-10
2)
Asbestos or felt pads, 12.5 mm
5-10
3)
Fibreboard pads, 12.5 mm
10
4)
Felt pads, 2.5 cm or rubber

pads, 12.5 mm
IO-15
5)
Mineral wool batts, 2.5 cm

nominal thickness
15-20
6)
Glass wool batts, 2.5 cm nominal thickness or rubber

pads 2.5 cm
15-20
Suspended Ceiling (see Notes

I and 2 under 8-4
1)
2)
10 mm (single coat or 12.5 mm

(two coats) plaster on 12.5
mm frbereboard on 50 x 50
mm battens in clips
5 mm (single coat) or 12.5 mm

(two coatsj plaster on IOmm
7)
8)
9)
h) Boarding on battens on:
S-10
Carpet or
underfelt
3)
1)
plus
0
5-10
As in ( I ), plus floating floor

or boarding on battens on
12.5 mm fibreboard
As in (I), plus floating Boor

of boarding on battens on
2.5 cm mineral wool batts
IO-15
As in (I), plus pugging of sand

or ashes 80kgim or mineral
wool IOkg/ m
8-10
As in (I), plus pugging of

sand or ashes IOOkgjm
IO
As in (I). but with floor

replaced by boarding on cross
battens on 2.5 cm
minerai wool batts
5-10
As in (7) plus pugging of

sand 5Okg/ m*
20
Boarding on joists with separate

joists for ceiling
5
10) Carpe! on underfelt with boarding on joists for ceiling as above
IO-15
If) Boarding cn joists, pugging

of sand or ashes IOkg! m
with ceiling as above
is
12) Floating float, boarding

on battens on 2.5 cm mineral
wool baits on subboarding,
with joists and ceiling
as above
15-20
NOTL I
-Suspended ceiling alone will not be effective

or give the value shown unless precautions are
also taken to prevent transmission of impact
noise by indirect paths, for example, by the use
of a floating floor or by isolating the structural
floor from the walls of the room below, or by
using fully discontinuous cons:ruction.
NOTE 2 -The values of the treatments given in 53 and
B-4 may in appropriate cases be added; for

example, the value of pugging may be added to
the value of a floating floor, giving a rotal noise
reduction of 20 dB.
II
,*a~ v,,, ,ULD,NC SERVtCE_G&TtON 4
ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE, CONTROL
v1114 -
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records thosC standards w,hich are acceptable as good practice and
accepted standards in the fu~filment oJp the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standardshall he adoptedat the time of enforcement ofthe Code. Thestandards listedmay be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements qf the-rejerred clauses in the
Code.
In thefollowing list the number appearing in the.first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this part/section.
(1) lS:4954-1968 Recommendations for

noise abatment in town planning
3) IS:l881-1961 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e for
Instaliation of indoor amplifying and
sound dlstrlhution systems
(2) IS:25261963 Code of practice for

acoustical design of auditorium5 and
conference halls
1114.3*
N A T I O N A L IILIILDINT. (DDE OF INDIA

SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND
ESCALATORS
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
I. SCOPE
...
2.
TERMINOLOGY
...
3.
GENERAL
...
4.
ESSENTIAL REQUlREMENTS
...
5. ELEmRKAL WIRING AND APPARATUS
...
14
6.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
...
15
7.
TESTING
...
21
8. RUNNING AND MAINTENANCF
...
22
9.
...
22
ESCALATORS
PART VIII BUILDING SEJlViC~-SECTION
5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCLATORS
VIIM- 1
PART VI1 BUlLDlNG SERVICES

SECTION 5 I NS7ALLATION OF Li FIS AND ESCALATORS
O..?
I hi5 section walr iirst publlshcd in 1970. It is revmd to bring it in line with the latest Indian
Standards
(III which it was based. 1 he major changes in this revision are addition of outlmc
dimensions 01 ditlcrcrlt ~ypcs of lifts and detailed requirements of escalators in buildings.
03 Emphasis has been iaid on coordination between the architect/engineer and the lift
manuthcturrr to arrive at the number and position of lifts for attaining optimum efficiency in
serving the bullding with safety.
0.4 The information contarned in this section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS:18bO-1980 Code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance of electric
passenger and goods lifts (second revision)
lS:2332-1972
Nomenclature of floors and storeys yirsr revisit)
lS:3534-1976
Outline dimensions of electric lifts firsf revtiion)
IS:4S91-1Y6X
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of escalators
VIII-5.
f. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the essential
requirements for the installation of lifts
(passenger lifts, goods lifts, hospital lifts and
service lifts) and escalators so as to ensure safe
and satisfactory performance.
1.2 This section gives information that
should be exchanged among the architect, the
consulting engineer and the lilt escalator
manufacturer from the stage of planning to
installrition including maintenance.
2.1 For the purpose of this section. the

BAI (\I I I< A s h o r t piller slender a b o v e
and hrllginc beiow.
row ot balusters meant for:
supportrng moving hand rails.
HALUSTR,\I)L - A
BASi: MFN r SIoREy (B) -~- The lower storey

of a building below or partly below the ground
l e v e l .
C~r.1 INDICAIOK --- A visual and audible

device in the car to indicate to the attendent
the lift landings from which calls have been
made.
C AK BOLIYWORK -- The enclosing bodywork
of the lirt car which comprises the sides ahd
roof. and is built upon the car plaiform.
which slides horizontally and consists of two

or more panels which open from the centre
and are usually so interconnected that they
move simultaneously.
D OOR . Mll)-HAR Col.I.~i~s~t%t.E - A
collapsible door -with vertical bars mounted
hrtueen the normal vertical members.
DOOK, Sr!W.E S;l.tt>t: .--- A single panel door
which slides horizontally.
DOOK. SWIKG .-- The swinging type single
panel door which is opened manually and
closed by means of a spring closer hhcn
released.
EWAI A IOR --- A power-driven, inclined,
continuous stairway used for raising ot
lowering passengers.
F-I.OOR -- -I he lower surface in a storey on
which one normally walks in a building. The
general term floor. unless o t h e r w i s e
specifically mentioned, shall not refer to a
mrzanine floor.
GOOLX 1.1~1. .-- 4 lift designed primarily for
the transport of goods, but which may carry a
lilt attendent or other persons necessary for
the unloading and loading of goods.
GI;IOI \ (1.1~1) - 1 he members used to guide
the movcmen! of a lift-car or counterweight in
a vertical direction.
CAR FRAME_ -~- The supporting frame or sling

to which the platform of the lift car. its safety
gear. guide shoes and suspension ropes are
attached.
A lift normally installed in

HOSPI-I AI. 1.1~7
a hospital, dispcnbary, clinic and designed 10
accommodate one number bed; stretcher
along IIS depth, with sufficient space.alround
to carry a minimum of three attendcnts in
addition to lift operator.
CAR PLAIFOKM ~~~ The part of the lift car

which forms the floor and directly supports
the load.
LAVWNG C A L L PUSI~ (LM ) .-- A p u s h

button fitted at a lift landing, either for calling
the lift car or for actuating the call indicator.
COMRPL.ATF - A pronged plate that forms

part of an escalator landing and engages with
the cleats of the steps at the limits of travel.
L ANDING D OOR (LIFT-) -The hinged or

sliding portion of a lift well enclosure,
controlling access to a lift car at a lift landing.
CONTRACT. SPEED ( LI I-T) -- The mean of the

maximum speeds attained by the lift car in the
upward and downward directions with rated
load in the lift car.
L IFT - An appliance designed to transport

persons or materials between two or more
levels in a vertical or substantially vertical
direction by means of a guided car or
platform.
CONTROL - The system governing starting,

stopping, direction of motion, acceleration,
speed and retardation of moving member.
D ETERMINING F^NTRANCE LEVEL -This will
be the inside floor level at the entrance to the
building.
LIFT CAR -- The load-carrying unit with its

floor or platform, car frame and enclosing
bodywork.
D O O R, CENTRE~PENING SLIUING -A d o o r
L IFT L ANDING - That portion of a building

or structure used for the reception and
discharge of passengers or goods or both into
or from a lift car.
~.4RT WI
OF
CWILDINC
SERIICES-SCCTION
IKSTALLATION
LJFTS
AND
E.SCA~.AT~RS
VIII-5-
L IFT M ACHINE -The part of the lift equipment comprising motor (s) and the control
gear the&with, reduction gear (if any), brake(s)
and winding drum or sheave, by which the
lift car is raised or lowered.
LIFT PIT -The space in the lift well below
the level of the lowest lift landing served.
LIFT WELL. - The unobstructed space within
an enclosure provided for the vertical
movement of the lift car(s) and any
counter-weigh-t(s), including the lift
pit and the space for top clearance.
LIFT WELL ENCLOSURE - Any structure
which separates the lift well from its
surroundings.
LIFTING BEAM -A beam, mounted immediately below the machine room ceiling, to
which lifting tackle can be fixed for raising
parts of the lift machine.
M EZZANINE - An intermediate floor
between two floors above ground level.
M EZZANINE F LOOR ---The floor of an
intermediate storey or a mezzanine.
O PERATION --~ The pethod of actuating the
control.
carrying materials and shall not carry any

person.
STOREY - The space between the surface of
one floor and the surface of the adjacent
floor vertically above or below it. Here the
term Floor will include the Roof but will
exclude mezzanine floors.
S TOREY FOR S PECIFIC U SE - Thesmre the
storeys which are named according to the
functions and the specific uses they arc put
to. For example, a duct storey is one through
which service pipes and electrical conduits
may be taken.
S UBSIDIARY STOREY(S) - A storey which
occurs below the determining entrance level
but above basement storeys.
S U S P E N S I O N R OPES (LIFT) -The ropes by
which the car and counter-weight are
suspended.
TOTAL. HEADROOM - The vertical distance
from the level of the top lift landing to the
floor of the machine room.
TRAVEL. (LI F T) -- The vertical distance
between the bottom and top lift landings
served.
3. G E N E R A L
O VERHEAD B EAMS ( LI F T ) - The members,

usually of steel, which immediately support
the lift equipment at the top of the lift well.
P ASSENGER LIM --- A lift designed for the
transport of passengers.
R ATED LOAU (LI F T ) --The maximum load
which the lift car is designed and installed to
carry safely at its rated speed.
R A T E D L O A D ( ES C A L A T O R ) -- T h e l o a d
which the escalator is designed and installed
to lift al the rated speed.
R ATED S PEED ( LI F T-- Also known as car
speed. The speed attained by the lift in the up
direction with rated load in the lift car.
R ATED S PEED ( ES C A L A T O R ) -- The speed at
which the escalator is designed to operate in
the up direction. It is the rate of travel of the
steps, measured along the angle of inclination,
with rated load on the steps or carriage.
SERVICE LIFT ( DU M BW AITER ) - A lift with
a car which moves in guides in a substantially
vertical direction; has net floor area, total
inside height, .whether or not provided with
fixed or removabk shelves, and capacity not
exceeding I m*, 1.25 m and 250 kg
respectively; and is exclusively usa for
.
4
VIII-S-
3:1 The appropriate aspect of lift and

escalator installation shall be discussed during
the preliminary planning of the building with
all the concerned parties, namely, client,
architect, consulting engineer and/ or
lift/escalator manufacturer. This enables the
lift/escalator manufacturer to furnish the
architect and/or consulting engineer with the
proposed layout or vice-versa.
3.2 Information IO he Provided t_v Architect
or Engineer - As a result of prehminary discussion, the drawings of the building should
give the following particulars and finished
sizes:
number of lifts and size and position of

lift well;
b) particulars of lift well enclosure;

number and type of
cl
size, position,
landing doors;
4
f.9
number of floors served by the lift;
f)
l3)
number of entrances;
h)
provision of access to machine room,
height between floor levels;
total headroom;
..
provision of ventilation and, if possible,

natural lighting of machine room;
k) height of machine room;
m) depth of lift pit;
n) position of lift machine, above or below
lift well;
P) size and position of arty trimmer joists or
stanchions adjacent to the lift well at each
floor;
9) size and position or supporting steel work
at roof levels;
r) size and position of any footings or
grillage foundations, if these are adjacent
to the lift pit; and
s) in the case of passeuger lifts whether the
lift cage is required to carry household
luggage, such as refrigerator, steel
almirah, etc.
3.2.1 The architect/engineer should advise
6)
Serving.. ........ floors.. ......entrance.. .....
7) Number of floors served...................

8) Mctiiod of control............ ..*....................
9) Position of machine room......................
10) Sizes and position(s) of lift well(s) ......
11) P&ion of amterWigh t. ..........................
2) Size of car platform.............................
or
Internal size of lift car......................
13) Construction, design and finish of car
bodywork........................
14) Car entrances:
a) Number, size and type of
doors.. ........
the lift manufacturer, if the Authority (see 4.1)

has any special requirements regarding lifts
in buildings in the administrative area
concerned.,
b) Power or manual operation.. .......

1% Car light.. ....................................
3.2.2 The information contained under 3.2
17)
and 3.2.1 is applicable for the installation

of lifts only and in the case of escalator
installations, the drawings shall provide the
appropriate information.
3.2.3 The architect/engineer should inform
the lift/escalator manufacturer of the dates
when the erection of the lift/escalator may be
commenced and is to be completed so that
sufficient time is allowed for the manufacture
and erection of the lift/escalator.
3.2.4 When submitting application for a
building permit to the local Authority, the
building plans shall include the details of lifts
(No. of lifts duly numbered, location, type,
type of doors, passenger capacity and speed).
3.3 When enquiring for and ordering an
electrical lift in accordance with this section,
the particulars given below shall be
furnished:
Particulars of Lijts
I) Passenger, goods or service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Number of lifts required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Load: number of persons . . . . . . . . . . . kg. . . . . . .
4) Rated speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s
5) Travel in m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16) Ventilation of the car..
25) Booklet giving complete details of maintenance schedule and circuit diagram
whizre so specified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Working Dmwings IO be Prepared 6-v the
Lift/ Escalator Manufacturer - The hft/escalator manufacturer requires sufficient information for the preparation of working
drawings and is usually obtained from architects drawings supplemented by any information obtained from the site and by collaboration with the other contractors
(see 3.2 and 3.3).
3.4.1 Working drawings showing the layout
of lift/escalator duly numbered. detail\ of
builders work, for example. holes in walls for
guide fixing. holes in machine room floor for
ropes and conduits, recesses for landing sills,
supports for lift/escalator machine and loads
imposed on the building should be submitted
by the lift/escalator manufacturer to the
architect, engineer for written approval.
3.5 Eiectrit,al Requiremen/ --. For illformation
of the electrical enginder, the lift/escalator
m a n u f a c t u r e r s h o u l d a d v i s e t,he
architect/engineer of h&+ electrical requirements.
This information should be available
early in the planning stage so that the electrical
supply requirements of the lift(s)/cscalator(s)
may be included in the electrical provisions of
the b u i l d i n g a n d t h a t s u i t a b l e
cables and switchgear may be provided.
shall be made to accepted standards

[VIII-5 (I)]*.
4.4 The outline dimensions of machme
room, pit depth, total headroom, overhead
distance and sill are specified in Tables I to 4
as given below:
Passenger lifts Table 1
Goods Lifts
Table 2
Hospital lifts
Table 3
Service lift5
Table 4
Firemans lifts (see Note 4)

for a
NOIF I The above tables have been establIshed_ ^^
maximum travel ol 30 m. t-or hetghts m excess ot .(U m.
lltt experts may be consulted.
hOI1
2
MInImum f l o o r - t o - f l o o r height f o r
horvontally slldlng d o o r s I\ f + 7 5 0 m m a n d ior
vertically hy-passmg door IS I 5 f + 250 mm, where f IS
clear entrance height i&mm.
NOIF 3 When more than one lift comes in a bank of
hft. the machine room dimensions will he as follows:
Width = h X (+ (N-l)100
+ 1500
D e p t h -= D + 2 5 0 0
where
IV = number of lifts in a bank of lifts,
C = width for each hft in mm. and
3.6 The requirements given under 4 to 8 deal

with installation of lifts and 9 deal with the
installation of escalators.
4. ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
4 . 1 C o n f o r m i t y w i t h Lifts A c t a n d
Rules -- The installation shall be generally
carried out in conformity with Lifts Act and
Rules thereunder, wherever they are in force.
4.1.1 It is the responsibility of the owner of
the premises where the lift will be installed, to
obtain necessary permission from the local
Authority before and after the erection of
lifts and for subsequent operation of lift(s).
4 . 2 Confirmity (cith I n d i a n Electricity
Rules - All electrical work in connection
with installation of electric lifts shall be
carried out in accordance with the provisions
of Indian Eleciricity Act, 1910 a n d t h e
provisions of the Indian Electricit.$Rules. and
shall also comply with the other provisions of
4.3 For detailedspecification of lifts reference
VIII-S- 6
D = depth for each lift in mm.

Norr 4 Firemans lift shall be provided for dil
budding more than 24 meters in height. The capacity of
the fireman lift shall not be less than 8 passengers. The
dimensions of fireman lift shall be same as the
corresponding dlmenslons for passenger lifts as specified
in Table I.
4.5 Factor of Sqfety -- The minimum tactor

of safety for hny part of the lift shall not he less
than five. Higher factor of safct! for various
parts shall be applicable in acc*orJaIIcc with
accepted standards [VI I l-5( I 11.
4 . 6 . 1 GI:IDE RA I L S Car and counterweight

guide rails shall be of steel. Where the nature
of processes carried on in the building give
rise to acid fumes or corrosive substances the
steel rails shall be treated for corrosion.
In this section where leierence is made to accepted

standards in relation to material specificat*on. the
appropriate document referred to at the end of the
Sectlon may be used as a guide to the interpmtation of
the standard.
NATKINA~
TABLE I DIMENSIONS OF PASSENGER LIFTS

(All dimensions in millimetres)
TOP LANDING--\
1
BOTTOM LANDING 7
SOTTOM LANDING RAVEL
ELEVATION
EI..EVATION
FOR LIFT SPEED UP IO

1.50 m/s
FOR LIFT SPEED UP TC

2.5 m/s
1I
I ()\I>
Persons
\
kg
-A_- .cA
(1)
(2)
(3)
272
I loo
40X
I 100
(4)
700
I 000
544
I 300
I 100
IO
I.7
16
680
X84
I 350
I 300
I 100
20
I 088
I 360
2000
2 000
I 300
I 550
2000
L.lFT WELL
ENTRANCE
Y-----7
.~7
(5)
(6)
I
I 600
800
I 900
! 900
900
2 loo
I 900
800
2 SO0
2 500
2 500
300
(7)
800
I 900
I 900
2 loo
2400
800
900
I 300
i 000
Nort I ~- The total headroom has been ca!culated on the basis of car height of 2.2 m.
NOTE 2 -- In the case of manually-operated doors, clear
the landing door.
NOTE
3 -
enterance
will be reduced by theamount of projection
ofhandle on
Four-and six-passenger lifts are generally limited to a speed of I m/s
4.6.1.1 C A R G U I D E R A I L S -For paSSXlgt?r

and gopds lifts having a contract speed of
more than 0.5 m/s, the car guide rails shall
have working surfaces machined.
4.6.1.2 COUNTERWEIGHT 6UlDE RAILS For passenger and goods lifts having a
contract speed of more than 1.5 m/s, the
counter weight guide rails shall have their
working surfaces machined.
4.6.1.3 Guide rails shall be continuous
throughout the entire length right from the
bottom of the pit floor to the top most floor
served plus additional length as may be
required for operation of safety against over

run. They shall be provided with adequate
brackets or equivalent fixing of such design
and spacing that the rails shall not deflect
more than 5 mm under normal operations.
4.6.2 B UFFERS - Buffers of spring or oil
shall be fitted under .the lift car directly or on
the pit floor with suitable concrete or steel
foundation. Oil resistant rubber buffers may
be used with lifts having a contract speed not
exceeding 0.25 m/s. Buffers shall be located
symmetrically with reference to the vertical
centre line of the car frame with a tolerance of
50 mm. Spring or oil buffers shall be used with
PART VIM BCIIL.DING SERVICES-SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS
VIII-5-
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF GOODS LIFTS (FOK SPEEDS UP TO 0.5 m/s)

All dimensions in millimetres.
I-JE
A
C
4
- ---I i
LAN DING
TRAVEL
LANDING
PLAN
ELEVATION
LOAD
kg
(1)
500
(2)
ENTRANCE
LIFT WELL
C AR INSIDE
A
B
D'
(3)
I 200
I 800
(5)
(6)
I 500
2 loo
I loo
1400
loo0
I loo
I 400
I 500
I 700
zoo0
2 JO0
I 700
2000
I 700
zoo0
2500
2800
I 700
2 800
3300
2000
zoo0
3 300
2500
2500
3ooo
4oal
2500
2ooo
3ooo
2soo
3ooo
so00
2500
3600
NOTE I - The width of the machine-room shall be qual
3900
2soo
IO the lift well width *C subject to a minimum of 2 500 mm.
NOTE 2 - The total headroom has been calculated on the basis of a car height of 2.2 m.
NOTE 3 - Clear entrance widthEis based on vertical lifting car-door and vertical bi-parting doors. For collapsibie midbar doors the clear entrance width will get reduced by 200 mm or over depending on the lift design.
vp5-
NATlONAi BUILDING
CODE OF INDIA
TABLE 4 DlMENSlONS OF SERVICE LlFTS (FOR SPEEDS UPTO 0.5 m/s)

(All dimensions in millimetres.)
MACHINE ROOM = C
T R A VE L
ELEVATION
LOAD
LIFT WELL
ENTRANCE
r----7
CAR INSIDE
*
kg
(1)
100
Is0
200
250
(2)
(3)
700
Roe
900
loo0
700
800
900
IO00
H.
(4)
800
900
loo0
I 200
(5)
I 200
1300
1400
I500
(6)
900
loo0
(7)
700
800
I loo
900
I 200
1000
NOTE I - Entrance width E is based on assumption of provision of vertical bi-parting doors (no car door is normally
provided).
VW10
N&J WNAL BUILDING CODE 0) ISDIA
lifts having rated speed in excess of 0.25 m/s

and up to and including 1.5 m; s. Only oil
4.7.2 I_IR WELL ENCLOSURES
buffers shall be used with lifts having rated

speed in excess of I.5 rn, s. Wooden blocks
suitably treated may also be used for service
lifts for speeds up to 0.5 mi s.
4.7.2.1 Lift well enclosures shall be provided

and shall extend on all sides from floor-tofloor or stair-to-stair. The enclosure shall be
of sufficient mechanical strength. It shall be
incombent on part of the civil contractor to
provide vertical walls in proper plumb.
4 . 6 . 2 . 1 S T R O K E -The minimum stroke of

oil buffers shall be such that the car or the
counterweight on striking the buffers at I IS
percent of the rated speed shall be brought to
rest with an pverage retardation of not more
than IO m/ s-.
4.6.2.2 RETA~CDATION - Oil buffers shall
develop an average retardation not in excess
o f torn/s and shall develop> no peak
retardation greater than 25 m/s- having a
duration exceeding 1 i25 of a second with any
load in the car from rated load to ti minimum
load of 68 kg when the. buffers are struck with
an initial speed of not more than I I5 percent
of the rated speed.
4.6.2.3 The ratio of ,effective length to the
least radius of gyration (L/ R) of compression
members of oil buffers shall not exceed 80.
4.7 LI~I Wells and Lifr Well Enclosures
4.7.1 LIFT
WELLS
4.7.2.2 The inner sides of the lift well

enclosures facing any car entrance shall, as
far as practicable form a smooth, continuous
flush surface de\;oid of projections or
recesses.
This rcquircmrnt may be met in existing lift
K<)II
uell\~ h\ fillirlti
anv
rtlcesses
or soaces
bttween
projrctic;n\. or Calterr;ativcly by covering them with
suit&k bhcet matcridl. If it is not possible IO r e n d e r
Ilush any projection or top!. 01 rccessc~. thtiy should be
bcvellcd on the under sldr lo an angle of 60. from the
horirontal by mcan~ of metal plater. cement rendering or
o t h e r lirc-rebistlng m a t e r i a l s . Where a car-levelling
de\ ice 1s <)pcratIve alth car door opcnmg. such interior
\urfaccs shall alnay\ form ;i smooth tlubh surtacc helow
cdch IandIng kvcl lor a depth to at least thr depth of the
c~~lcvrll~ng ,onc plus the distance through which the 1111
car may trabcl OI IIS own momentum when the powrr IS
cut oil.
3.7.2.3 Where an open lift hell w o u l d

increase the fire risk in a building, the lift well
enclosure s h a l l b e o f f i r e - r e s i s t i n g
construction as specified in Part IV Fire
protection.
4.7.1.1 No equipment except that forming a

part of the lift or necessary.for its operation
and maintenance shall be installed in the lift
well. For this purpose, the main supply lines
shall be deemed to be a part of the lift and the
underground cable, if laid along the lift well
shaft,shall be properly clamped to the wall.
4.7.2.4 W h e r e w i r e g r i l l e o r s i m i l a r
constructions is used, the mesh or opening
4.7.1.2 Every counterweight shall travel in

juxtaposition to its car in the same lift well.
4.7.2.5 Where the clearance between the
4.7.1.3 It is undesirable that any room,

passage or thoroughfare be permitted under
any lift well. Where .such conditions are
unavoidable, spaces for other uses may be
permitted under the lift well, with the prior
approval of the Lift Inspectorate Authority
and the following provisions shall be made:
a) spring or oil buffers shall be provided for

lift car and counterweight;
b) The pit shall be sufficierntly strong to
withstand successfully the impact of the

lift car with rated load or the impact of
the counterweight when either is
descending at rated speed or at governor

tripping speed; and
The car and the counterweight shall be
provided with a governor-operated safety
gear.
?ART
VIII
WIIDINC
SERVICXS-SECTION
INSTAI.I.AlIOh
shall be not greater than 3 cm and the lift well

enclosure shall be of sufficient strength to
resist accidental impact by users of the
staircase or adjoining floors or by materials

or trucks being moved in the viciriity.
inside of an open-type lift well enclosure and
any moving or movable part of the lift
equipment or apparatus is less than 5 cm, the
openings in the enclosure shall be further
protected by netting of square m e s h o f
aperture not greater than one cen:imetre and
of wire not smaller than one millimetre.
4.7.2.6 There stiail be no opening in-the lift
well enclosure permitting access to the lift car
by passing under the counterweight.
4.7.2.7 Sufficient space shall be provided
between the guides for the car and the side
walls of t.he tift well enclosure to allow safe
and easy access to the parts of the safety
gears for their maintenance and repairs.
4.7.2.8 In case of a completely enclosed lift
well, a notice with the word Lift may be
placed outside of each landing door.
4.7.2.9 INDICATOR - Where lifts are
installed in totally enclosed wells, position
indicators are recommended to be provided

at each coor; however, where position
indicators are not provided, at least direction
indicators or In Use indicators shall be
provided at each landing.
4.10.2 Where the space between the car gate

and inside the adjacent lift well enclosure
exceeds 13 cm, car door of entrances shall be
provided with means to prevent it from being
opened except when the lift car is at a landing
served by such car entrance.
4.8 Lift Pits
4.10.3 Any vision panel in a car door shall be

fire-resisting and shall be of safety wired or
similar glass. The area between division bars
or other support shall not exceed 0.1 m2. The
bottom rail of a framed and glazeddoor shall
4.8.1 A lift pit shall be provided at the
bottom of every lift.

4.8.2 Pits shall be soundly constructed and
maintained in a dry and clean condition.
Where necessary, provision shall be made for
permanent drainage and where the pits
e x c e e d s I . m , suitable discending
arrangement shall be provided to reach the
lift pit. And a suitable fixed ladder or other
discending facility in the form of permanent
brackets grouted in the wall extending to a
height of 0.75 m above the lowest floor level
shall be provided. A light point with a switch
shall also be provided for facility of
maintenance and repair work.
4.9 Landing Doors- Every lift shall, on
each side from which there is access to a
landing, be fitted with a landing door. Such
door shall be fitted with efficient interlocking

or other devices so as to secure that the door
cannot be opened except when the lift car is at

the landing and that the lift car cannot be
moved away from the landing until the door is
closed and locked. Where mid-bar collapsible
doors are used for landing entrance. they shall
be not less than 30 cm deep. Any projections

on or recesses (including vision panels) ,in
sliding car doors shall be kept to a minimum
in order to avoid finger trapping between
sliding parts of the door and any fixed part of
the structure.
4.10.4 Where partitions are installed in lift
cars for the purpose of restricting the
platform net area for passenger use, they
shall be permanently bolted, reveted or
welded in place. Doors shall not be used for
this purpose. Partitions shall be so installed
as to provide for.approximately symmetrical
loading.
4.10.5 Efficient automatic devices shall be
provided and maintained in each lift whereby
all power shall be cut-off from the motor
before the car or counterweight lands on the
buffers.
not be power operated.
4.10.6 The levelling difference between the

car and the landing shall be within_+4 cm
where no levelling device is provided.
4.9.1 Where landing doors are mannually

operated and no indicators are provided,
vision panels of similar construction as in
4.10.3 shall be provided.
4.10.7 A suitable battery operated alarm

system-shall be installed inside the lift car SO
as to raise an alarm at a convenient place for
getting assistance in case passengers are
4.9.2 No automatic fire door or shutter

which operates by means of a fusible link or
otherwise due to the action of heat shall be
allowed in any landing, opening or the
liftway enclosure of any lift, if such opening
gives access to any exit from the building.
4.9.3 In the case of passenger lifts, for
buildings above 15 m in height solid doors
shall preferably be provided and in case of
buildings above 24 m in height collapsible
doors shall not be provided. Solid swing
doors may also be used where sliding space is
not available parallel to the entrance door.
4.10 Lifr Cars
4.10.1 Sliding doors (non-collapsible) are

recommended when power operation is used,
but if space is limited, collapsible doors may
be installed but they shall not be power
operated.
W-12
trapped inside the lift car.

4.10.8 Entrance of the lift car shall be at least
2.0 m in height. A roof, solid or perforated,
capable of supporting two persons, that is,
2 x 68 kg shall be provided. Perforations shall
be sufficiently close in mesh not exceeding
40 mm to provide reasonable protection

against falling articles to any person travelling
in the car. The floor shall be of a smooth and
non-slip surface.
4.10.9 Each lift car shall be fitted with a light
and light shall be left burning during the
whole time the lift is available for use.
4.10.10 Where the lift car has.solid enclosure
and doors, provision shall be made for a fan
and for adequate ventilation. To permit
switching off the power supply to the lift
without switching off the fan and light, a
separate switch shall be provided for fan and
light. Ventilation openings shall be provided
N A T I O N A L
~UILDINC
CODE
OF
INDIA
shall be displayed permanently on the outside

of the door and on or near the machinery.
in the enclosure walls above 1.8 m level and

below 0.3 m level. Total area of openings
shall not be less than 0.035 m for each
square metre of area of the car floor divided
suitably between the top and the bottom
levels.
Where standby generator is provided, it is

necessary to connect! fireman lift to the
standby generator. Depending upon the
capacity of the standby generator one or
more other lifts may also be connected to the
SUPPlY.
4.10.11 Car doors when closed, shall guard
the full opening except in the case of vertical

opening car doors of goods lifts, which may
be limited to 2 mand each door shalLbe
equipped with an electric contact which shall
prevent the movement of the car andthe
circuit shall not be completed until the
leading edge of the door is within 50 mm of
the nearest face of the door Jamb or when the
leading edges of the centre opening doors are
within 50 mm of contact of each other.
All lifts shall be provided with a standard

craoking system to be used in case of power
failure to bring the car to the nearest floor. A
duplicate key shquld be made available near
the machine room in a glass enclosure.
4.11.5 The machine room shall be equipped
with an insulated portable hand lamp
provided with flexible cord for examining the
machinery.
4.10.12 The car and the door, if power

operated, shall be provided with sensitive
reopening arrangements on the moving edges
which are likely to come in contact with
person(s) entering or coming out of the car.
The operating mechanism for the car door
shall operate with a force not exceeding
12.5 kg. Sliding car doors shall be guided at
top and bottom. Means shall be provided to
prevent. all sliding car doors from jumping
the tracks and suitable stops shall be
provided to prevent the hanger carriage from
leaving the end of the track.
4.11.6 If any machine room floor or

platform does not extend to the enclosing
walls, the open sides shall be provided with
hand rails or otherwise suitably guarded.
4.11.7 The machine room shall be provided
with a direct independent and convenient
access from the top most landing with the
access doors opening outwards (see 6.7).
4.11.8 The machine room shall not be used
as a store room or for any purpose other than
housing the lift machinery and its associated
apparatus and equipment.
4.11 M a c h i n e R o o m s a n d O v e r h e a d
Slruclures
4.11.9 All machines. pulleys, overspeed

governors and similar units shall be so
supported and held as to prevent any of these
4.11.1 The lift machine, controller and all
oiher apparatus and equipment of a lift

installation, excepting such apparatus and
equipment as function in the lift well or other
positions, shall be placed in the machine
room which shall be adequately lighted and
rendesed fire-proof and weather-proof.
machines or parts thereof becoming loose or

displaced affecting their safe working.
4.11.10 M a c h i n e r o o m f l o o r m a y b e
provided with a trap door, if necessay. The
manhole should not be less than 50 x 50 cm.
4.11.2 The motor generators controlling the
4.11.11 The height of the machine room shall
speed of multi-voltage or variable voltage

machines, secondary sheaves, pulleys,
governors, floor selecting equipment may be
placed in a place other than the machine.
room, but such position shall be adequately
lighted, ventilated and rendered fire-proof
and weather-proof.
be sufficient to allow any portion of equipment to be accessible and removable for repair
and replacement and shall be not less than
2 m clear ftom the floor or the platform
of machine whichever is higher.
4.11.12 H OUSING OF O V E RHEAD P U L L E Y S
-The penthouse or other space in
which the overhead pulleys, overspeed
governors and similar machinery are housed
shall have a clearheight of at least 1.2 tn and
shall allow safe and covenient access and
where practicable, have a substantial
platform or floor and be provided with
permanent a.nd adequate artificial
illumination.
4.11.3 The machine room shall have
sufficient floor area as will permit free access

to all parts of the machines and equipment
located therein for purposes of inspection,
maintenance 01 repair.
4.11.4 The room shall be kept closed, except
to those who are concerned with the
operation and maintenance of the
equipment. When the electrical voltage
exceeds 220/23OV dc, a danger notice plate
?APT VIII SlIU.DINC SLltVICES-SECTION 5 INSTALLATION
4.12 Floor Number Board- The number-
ing of floors should conform to the system

OF
LIFTS
AND
ESCALATORS
VllI-5.13
given in Fig. 1 (IA, IB, lC, ID, IE, IF, IC,

lH, IJ and IK).
nomenclature of floors and storeys, reference
may be made to good practice [VIII-5(2)].
4.13 Fire Sujiy~* -- Lifts shall also conform
IF
to the requirements specified in Part IV Fire

protection.
5. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND
APPARATUS
5.1 All electric supply lines and apparatus in
connection with the lift installation shall be so
1G
1H
11
1K
I+, I Nomenclature of Floors and .StoreJ*s

NATRINAI.
UILWNC CODE OF INDIA
constructed and shall be so installed,

protected, worked and maintained that there
may be no danger to persons therefrom.
Installation of electric wiring shall conform to
Electrical installation.
5.2 No bare conductor shall be used in any
lift car as may cause danger to persons.
5.3 Suitable caution notice shall be affixed
near every motor or other apparatus in which
energy used is at a voltage exceeding 220
volts.
5.4. Circuits which supply current to the
motor shall not be included in any twin or
multicore trailing cable used in connection
with the control and safety devices.
5.4.1 A trailing cable which incorporates
conductors for the control circuits shall be
separate and distinct from .that which
incorporates lighting and signalling circuits
in case of buildings less than 30 metres in
height. In case of building more than 30
metres in height or where high speed (1.52
m/s or more) lifts are employed. use of single
travelling cable for lightmg and control
circuits is permitted, provided that all
conductors are insulated for the maximum
voltage in the cable.
5.4.2 The cables used in lift installation shall
conform to accepted standards [VIII-5(3)].
5.5 Eurrhing
5.5.1 The terminal for the earthing of the
frame of the motor, the winding machine, the
frame of the control panel, the cases and
covers of the tapper switch and similar
electric appliances which normally carry the
mains current shall be at least equivalent to a
IO mm diameter bolt, stud or screw. The
cross-sectional area of copper earthing
conductor shall be not smaller than half that
of the largest current carrying conductor
subject to an upper%limit of 65 mm.
5.5.2 The terminal for the earthing of the
metallic cases and covers of door interlocks,
door contacts, call and control buttons, stop
buttons, car switches, limit switches, junction
boxes and similar electrical fittings which
normally carry only the control current shall
be at least equivalent to a 5 mm brass screw,
such terminal being one specially provided
for this purpose, and the earth conductor
shall be at least equivalent to a 7/0.750 mm
conductor.
S.b.3 The earthing conductor shall be secured
to earthing terminal in accordance with good

practice [VIII-S(4)]. and also in conformity
P A R T
VIII BIII.DIN(; SERVItLS-SWTION
S INSTAI.I..\TION
with the latest provisions of /n&n Electrici?13

Rules.
5.5.4 The exposed metal parts of e!ectrical
apparatus installed on a lift car shall be
sufficiently bonded and earthed.
5.5.5 Where screwed. conduit screws into
electrical fittings carrying control current
making the case of cover electrically
continuous with the conduit, the earthing of
the conduit may be considered to earth the
fitting. Where flexible conduit is used for
leading into a fitting, the fitting and such
length of llexiblc conduit shall be effectively
earthed.
5.56 One side of the secondary winding of
bell transformers and their -cases shall be
cart hed.
6 DESIGN CONSIDEKAI-IONS
6.1.1 Two basic constderations. namely, the

quantity of service required and the quality
of service desired. determine the type of lifts
tn be provided in a particular building.
Quantity of service gives the passenger
handling capacity of the lifts during the peak
periods and t-he quality of service is measured
in terms of waiting time of passengers at
various floors. Both these basic factors
require proper study into the character of the
building. extent and duration of peak period,
frequency of service required. type and
method of control, type of landing doors, etc.
6.1.2 The number of lifts, their capacity and
speed required for a building is governed by
such considerations as number of the floors
to be served, number of passengers to be
handled (see 6.1.3). floor area and floor
heights. In large buildings, the provisions of a
battery of lifts is advisable wherever feasible.
Consideration should also be given to leaving
space for additional lift installation to cater
for future traffic development.
6.1.3 OC C U P A N T L.OAD -- The number of
persons within any floor area or the occupant
load shall be based on the actual number of
occupants, but in no case less than those
NOIE The occupant load of mezzxtine floor should
he taken into account fur working out the occupancy for
a particular floor to which -the mezzanine floor
discharges its loads.
6.1.4 Q UANTITY OF S ERVICE T T h e

quantity of service is a measure _ of the
passenger handling capacity of a vertical
transportation system... it, is measured in

O* I.IFIS
AND
ESCAI.ATDWS
ll1.s~~
The following shall be the guiding factor for
TABLE 5 OCCUPANT LOAD

(Ck7u.w 6.13)
(2)
(1)
determining this aspect:
(3)
i)
Residential
12.5
ii)
Educational
iii)
Institutional
1st
iv)
Assembly:
a)
with fried or loose se& and

dana floor
h) without seating facilities

including dining rooms
v)
Qualily of Service or Rating

Acceptable lnrerval
Excellent
20-25 seconds
30-35
Good
Fair
35-40
40-45
Poor
NOW - l-or rehidcntial buildings. longer intervals up to
WI xxonds should be permissible.
0.6$
S PEED - T h e r e c o m m e n d e d c a r
speed for the different types of lifts in
different occupancies are given in Table 6.
6.1.6 CA R
I.51
Merchantile:
6.1.7
DE T E R M I N
CAlAClTY --- T h e
a) street floor and sales

baement
vii)
VIII)
O F
A N D L I N G
Business and industrial

Storage
Hazardous
For the details of clacsdication of occupancies,

NOII
rclcrencc may he made to Part IV Fire protection.
l
A T I O N
handling capacity is
calculated by the following formula:

vi)
Unsatisfactory
Over 45
1 he gross area shall mean plinth area or covered area.
fOccupant load in dormitory portions of homes I& the

aged. orphanages, insane asylums, etc. where sleeping
accommodation is provided. shall becalculated at not less
than 7.5m* gross arca/ person.
where
Hz Handling capacity as the percentage of- the peak. population
handled during 5 minute period,
Q = average numbei of passengers

carried in a car,
T = waiting interval in seconds, and

fThe grossarea shallinclude:in addition to the main
assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room
or space in the same strorey or in the storeys above and
below. where entrance is common to such rooms and
spaces and they are available for use by the occupants OC
the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the
grossareaforcorridors,closetsor other subdivisions, the
areashall includeallspace servingthe particular assembly
occupancy.
terms of the total number of passengers

handled during each five minute peak period
of the day. A five-minute base period is used
as this is the most practical time over which

the traffic may be averaged. The passenger
h a n d l i n g c a p a c i t y (H) for different
occupancies, expressed in percent of the
estimated population that has to be handled
in the building in the five-minute peak
period, should be approximately as follows:
Class i3/ Occupancy
H( percent)
Diversified (mixed) office

occupancy
IO-15
Single purpose office

occupancy
15-25
Residential
6.1.5 Q UALITY OF S E R V I C E - fhe quality of

service is generally measured by the
passenger waiting time at the various floors.
VWJ-16
P = total population to be handled

during peak morning period (it is
related to the area for which
particular bank of lift serves)
6.1.7.1 The value of Q depends on the
dimensions of the car. It may be noted that
the car is not loaded always to its maximum
capacity during each trip and, therefore, for
calculating H the value of Q is taken as 80
percent of the maximum capacity of the car.
6.1.7..? The waiting interval, T is calcuated
by the following formula:
where
R, = round trip time, that is, the average
time required by each lift in taking
one full load of passengers from
ground floor discharging them in
various upper floors and coming
back to ground floor for taking the
fresh passengers for the next trip;
and
N = number of lifts
NATIONAL BIIILDINC
CODE OF INDIA
car width. Ii has been proved that the

ideal door width is that of 100 cm and
that of the ideal car width is
approximately 200 ,cm. Under these
conditions, the car can comfortably hold
four people, shotrider-to-shoulder in a
straight line, permitting the two central
located persons to make an exit without
disturbing the fest -of-the passengers.
N O T E-R, is the sum of the time mquired in the

following processes:
a) Entry of passengers on the ground floor,

W Exit of the passengers on each floor of discharge,
Door closing time before each time operation,
d) Door opening time bn each discharging operation,

e)
Acceleration periods.
Stopping and levellipg periods,
b) The utilization of centn opening doors
has been a definite factor in improving

passengers transfer time, since when
using this type of door the passengers, as
a general. rule, begin to move before the
doors have been completely opened. .On
the other hand, with a stde opening door
the passengers tend to wait until the door
has completely. opened before moving.
The utilization of centre -opening door
also favours the doors opening and
closing time periods. Given the same door
speed, the centre opening door is .much
faster than the side opening type. It is
beyond doubt that the centre opening
door represents an increase in
transportational capacity in the operation
of a lift.
I4 Periods of full rated speeds between stops going up,

and
h) Periods, of full- rated speeds between stops going

down.
6.1.7.3 It is observed that the handling

capacity is inversely proportional to waiting
interval which in turn is proportional to R,.
Reducing the Rc of a lift from 120 to 100
seconds increases its handling,capacity by 20
percent.
6.1.7.4 The round trip time can bc decreased
not only by increasing the speed of the lift but
also by improving the design of the
equipment related to opening and closing of
the landing and car,; doors, acceleration,
deceleration, levellmg and passenger
movement.
These factors are given below:
a) The most important factor, in shortening
the time consumed between the entry and
exit of the passengers to the lift car is the
correct design of the doors and the proper
6.2 positioning of Lifis -. ^A t h o r o. u. g. h

investigation should be madetar assessmg tne
most suitable position for lifts(s) while
planning the building. It should take mto
account future expansions, if any. Though
each builidng has to be .considered
individually for purposes of location of lifts,
factors influencing the locations of passenger
and goods lifts are given in 6.2.2. to 6.2.4.
TAHLE 6 CAR SPEED FOR LIFTS IN DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES

(Cluuse 6.1.6)
9.
NO.
TVPE
OF LIE-I
0C.t IllAAN(Y
CAB? SPEED
SkHVEl>
(2)
(1)
(3)
i) Passenger lifts
(4)
Low and medium class flats (residential)

Office building, hotels
Large flats (high)
Hospital
Shops and departmental stores*
ii) Goods lift5

iii) Hospital bed
lifts
l
No. OF FI.OOHS
,4-5
6-12
13-20
Normalt
(5)
m,s
0.5
0.50.75
0.75-1.5
above I.5
2-2.5
0.2s-d.s
Serving many flbrs

Short travel lifts in small hospitals
Normal
Long travel lifts in general hospitals
I
0.25
.0.5
The high speed isdesirableespecially where restaurant orotherfacilitiesareprovided on the top hooras thetrafficwould
at times demand a lifi or lifts to be used entirely between the ground and the top lloon.
tS(ower speeds may be used for heavier loads.
?ARt
VIII BlJII.DIN(;
SERVICES-SECTION
S INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS.
Vllld-17
The location of lifts may also conform to the

travel distance requirements specified in
6.2.1 A RRANGEMENT OF LIFTS -The lifts
should be easily accessible from all entrances
to the building. For maximum efficiency,
they should be grouped near the centre of the
building. It is preferably not to have all the
lifts out in straight line and, if possible, not
more than three lifts should be arranged in
this manner. It has to be kept in mind that
the corridor should be wide enough to allow
sufficient space for waiting passengers as well
as for through passengers.
2A Straight Line Arrangement for Three Lifts
6.2.1.1 In some cases when there are more

than three lifts, the alcove arrangement is
recommended. With this arrangement, the
lift alcove lead off the main corridor so that
there is no interference by traffic to other
groups or to other parts of the ground floor.
This arrangement permits the narrowest
possible corridors and saves space on the
upper floors. Walking distance to the
individual lift is reduced and passenger
standing in the centrc of the group can
readily see all the lift doors and landing
indicators. The ideal arrangement of the lifts
depends upon the particular layout of the
respective building and should be determined
in every individual case. The recommended
arrangements are given in Fig. 2.
6.2.2 P ASSENGER LIFT-S
6.2.2.1 LOW AND PhEDlUM CLASS ~I.ATS --
Where a lift is arranged to serve two, three or

four flats per floor, the lift may be placed
adjoining a staircase. with the liftcntranccs
serving direct on to the landings. Where the
lift is to serve a considerable number of flats
having access to balconies or corridors, it
may be conveniently piaccd in a well
ventilated tower adjoining the building.
6.2.2.2
OI-TICE BUILL)lNGS. H0.IEi.S

HIGH CLASS FLATS - It is desirable
ZC Arrangement for Six Lifts
A N D
to have
at least a battery of two lifts at two or more
convenient points of a building. If this is not
possible, it is advisable to have at least two
lifts side by side at the main entrance and one
lift each at different sections of the building
for inter-communication. When two lifts are
installed side by side, the machine room shall
be suitably planned with sufficient space for
housing the machine equipment. The
positioning of lifts side by side gives the
following advantages:
a) all machines and switchgear may be
housed in one machine room.
b) the lifts can be inter-connected more
conveniently from an installation point of
view, and
III-P
N A T I O N A L BUILDING. CODk OF INDIA
.
..
cl greater convenience in service owing to
the landing openings on each floor being

adjacent.
6L2.2.3 SHOPS AND DEPARTMI?NTAL
STORES -Lifts in shops and stores should
be situated so as to secure convenient and
easy access at each floor.
6.2.2.4 HOSPITALS - It is convenient to
place the passenger lifts near the staircases.
6.2.3. GOODS Lrms-The location of lifts
in factories, warehouses, and similar
buildings should. be planned to suit the
progressive movement of goods throughout
the buildings, having regard to the nature of
processes carried out in the building, the
position of the loading platforms, railway
sidings, etc. The placing of a liftin. a fume or
dust laden atmosphere or where it. may be
exposed to extreme temperatures, should be
avoided wherever possible. Where it is
impossible to avoid installing a lift in an
adverse atmosphere, the electrical equipment
should be of suitable design and construction
to meet the conditions involved.
6.2.4 HOSPITAL BED LIP~S - Hospital bed
lifts should be situated conveniently near the
ward and operating theatre entrances. There
shall be sufficient space near the landing door
for easy movement of stretcher.
6.3 Shape and Size of Lift Car - The shape
and size of the passenger lift car bears a
.distinct relations to its efficiency as a medium
of traffic handling. The width of the lift well
entrance is, in reality, the basic element in the
determination of the best proportions
(see 6.1.7). The width of the car is
determined by the width of the entrance and
the depth of the car is regulated by the
loading (see 4.3). Centre opening doors are
the most practicable and the most efficient
entrance units for passenger lifts.
6.4 The detailed design considerations for
different types and selection of the lifts shall
[VIII-5(5)].
6.5 Postioning of Mahcine Room
6.5.1 The machine room should as far as
possible, be placed immediately above the lift
well as this has several advantages, such. as
reduced load on the building, lower capital
cost of the lift, a smaller lift well for a given
size lift car and reduced powerconsumption
compared with a machine room in the
basement, renewal of suspension ropes is less
frequent and the cost of such renewals is less
because shorter ropes are required and time
taken for fitting them is less.
impracticable for architectural or other

reasons, the machine room may be placed
below the lift well or in the basement, but
guidance of a lift engineer should be followed
on each instance, to minimize the
disadvantage of its being so placed.
6.5.3 High-speed. lifts with gearless machine
should, in all cases, .have machine room
above the lift well.
6.5.4 Where the machine room occupies a
prominent position on roof of a building,
provision should be made for lightning
protection in accordance with good practice
[VIII-5(6)].
6.5.5 Wherever the machine room is placed
it should be properly ventilated.
6.5.6 If located in the basement, it should be
separated from the lift well by a separation
wall.
6.6 Structural Considerations
6.6.1 Lift well enclosures, lift pits, machine
rooms and machine supports besides
conforming to the essential requirements in
4, should form part of the building
construction and comply with the lift
manufacturers drawings.
6.6.2 MACHINE R OOM -Fioors shall be
designed to carry a load of not less than
500 kg/ mz over the whole area and also any
load which may be imposed there on by the
equipment used in the machine room or by
any reaction from any such equipment both
during periods of normal operation and repair
(see Part VI Structural design, Section I
Loads).
6.6.3 The total load on overhead beams shall
be assumed as equal to all equipment resting
on the beams plus twice the minimum load
suspended from the beams.
6.6.4 The deflection of the overhead beams
under the minimum static load calculated in
accordance with .,,6.6.3 shall not exceed
l/ 1500 of the span.
6.6.5 The beams supporting the slab which
carries lift machinery, carry the entire weight
and as such shall be designed to take these
loads. In addition, the beam at all other floor
levels which correspond to the beams at
machine room floor shall also be. made
stronger to take the reaction from the guides
when the lift is made to stop consequent on
the breaking of the wire ropes or the
application of the safety device.
6.5.2 If a machine room on the lift well is
6.6.5.1 Suitabie lifting beams immediately

below the machine room ceiling may be
PART
OF UFlY4 A N D E S C A L A T O R S
VIII B U I L D I N G SERVICES-SkTION
5 INSTALLATION
VW.19
provided for carrying tackle to facilitate

lifting of any heavy part of a heavy lift (say
about I/ 500 kg capacity); and capacities
below that, suitable suspension hooks may
be provided.
6.6.6 In the case of large lift installations, the
roof of the machine room also should be
designed to take up the pulley which could be
used for lifting up parts of the lift machinery
for inspection and repair.
6.7.3.5 Headroom ckarance of not less than

2m measured from the nosings of the
stairway, shall be pr6vided on every stairway.
6.7.3.6 Heights of stairs over 5 m in length
shall be provided with intermediate landings.
NOTE - Where compliance withany of the requirements
specified in6.7.1 to6.7.J is impracticable. applications
for variation shall be mad6 to the Authority. who may.
vary such mquirements.
-%ri
6.6.7 The equivalent dead loads imposed

upon the building by the lift installations
should be shown on the lift manufacturers
drawing so that the architect/engineer may
make provisions accordingly.
6.7.4 Access to a machine room in a

basement may be provided from a corridor.
6.7 Access to Machine Room and L.# Pits

6.7:I Access to a machine room above a lift
well may be either from the roof or by an
6.7.6 The lift pit should be capableof being

examined by a separate access. In the case of
a battery of two lifts, it is possible to examine
the lift pit.through the adjoining one.
internal staircase.
6.7.2 Access between a secondary floor and a
machine room my be by ladder. Where a
machine room entrafice is less than ,I.5 m
above or below the adjacent floor or roof
surfaces, a substantial perpanently attached
ladder may bc used. Ladders shall be fixed at
least I5 cm clear of any wall, beam o r
obstruction and shall extend at least to the
landing level. Above the landing level and for
a height of at least 1.15 m. either the ladder
stringers shall be extended or suitable hand
grips shall be provided.
6.7.3 Where the machine room entrance in
I.5 m or more above or below the adjacent
floor or roof surface, access shall be provided
by means of stairs in accordance with the
requirements given in 6.7.3.1 to 6.7.3.6.
6.7.3.f The angle of inclination of the stair
shall not exceed 50 from the horizontal and
the clear width of the stair shall be not less
than 60 cm.
6.7.3.2 The tread shall have a non-slip
surface which shall. be not less than 15 cm
wide for opin stair construction and not less
than 20 cm wide for closed stair
construction.
6.7.3.3 The riser df the stair shall not exceed

25 cm.
6.7.3.4 A hand rail shall be provided on the
outer stringer of all stairways fixed at a
convenient height, but not less/than 50 cm
high measured vertically from the nosings,
and not less than one metre high on landings
and platforms. Such hand rail shall have at
least 5 cm clearance between nearest
permanent object at the corrlsponding side
of the stair.
Vlll-20
6.7.5 Access to a machine room via the lift

well shall be prohibited:
6.8 Fire Protection-To prevent fire from

spreading by means of the liftwell, lift well
encloSures shall conform to the requirements
given in Part IV Fire protection. T h e
machine room should be constructed of a
suitable grade of fire-resisting m&rial and
precautions should be taken to minimize
spread of fire from the machine room into
the lift well.
6.9. Quiet. Operation - Every precaution
should be taken with passenger lifts to ensure
quiet operation of the lift doors and
machinery. The insulating of the lift machine
and any motor generator from the floor by
rubber cushions, or by a precast concrete slab
with rubber cushions, prevents transmission
of most of the noise (see PartVi11 Building
services. Section 4 Acoustics sound insulation and noise control)
6.10 Supply Cables and Switches - Each lift
should be provided wi!k a main switch or

circuit breaker of a capacity determined by
the lift manufacturer and the incoming
supply cable should terminate in this switch.
For a single lift, this switch should be fixed
adjaceni to the machine roqm entrance. In a
machine room common to more than one
lift, each main switch should be conveniently
situated with respect to the lift it controls.
Switches and fuses (which may form part of a
distribution switch-board) should b e
provided for $olating the supply cables to the
machine room.
6.10.1 Where a supply cable serves more
than one. lift, a diversity factor may be used
for determination of conductor size. The
actual diversity factor adopted should be
decided by the lift manufacturer.
NATIONM. DUILDlNC CObE O F
INDIA
MANUALLY OPERAiED DOOhS

(WITHOUT CLOSURES) - A door open akm
6.11 Control System
6X2.6
6.11.1 The control systems that may be

adopted are:
should be provided to draw attention to a cat

or landing door which has barn kfk opm.
a) attend and dual control,
6.11.2.7
b) automatic push button control,
car arrives at a landing,. th& doors, will

automatically open and then close after lapse .
of a time interval. T%is time interval can be
overruled by the use of a car push button to
give instant door closing. An open door push
button. is provided in the car to reverse
closing motion of thedoors or hold them
open.
cl collective control,
4 single push botton collective control,
e) down collective control,
r) directive collective control for one car,

Ls) directive collective control for two to three
cars, and
h) grou,p supervisory control.
6.12.2.8
DOORS -
6.11.2 FE A T U R E S O F C O N T R O L S Y S T E M S
6.11.2.2 C A R P R E F E R E N C E- S o m e times it
is necessary to give a special personal service
or a house service. When this type of service
is required, it should be specified as car
preference. The transfer from normal
passenger control to a car preference is by a
key operated switch in the car. The operation
is then from the car only and the doors
remain open until a car call is registered for a
floor destination. All landing calls are
bypassed and car position indicators on the
landings for this lift are not illuminated. The
removal of the key when the Qecial
operation is completed re,storcs the control to
normal service.
6. I I .2.2
LANDING CALLS AUTOMATIC
For collective operation

automatic bypassing of landing calls can be
provided. This device will bypass landing
calls when a car is fully loaded but the calls
are not cancelled.
BYPASS
6.11.2.3
DOWN -
MOTOR GENERATOR SHUT
Lifts controlled by variable voltage

systems automatically shut down when
subject to an overriding control which puts
them out of service under certain conditions;
for example, no demand for lift service. They
are automatically put back into service as
required.
6.11.2.4 .BASEMENT SERVICE - For lifts with
collective control when s rJl.ce is required
below the first floor, toa sement(s), the lift
maker shall be aware oft3e service required.
6.11.2.5 HOSPITAL SERVICE - This requires
c&r preference as specified in 6.11.2.1.
Otherwise such lifts can have. the same
control system as. for normal passenger lifts,
the choice depending on the number of floors
served, service required and the number of
lifts.
PART VIII B U I L D I N G SEItVlC&S-SECTION
AUTOMATICALLY POWER CLCX3Eti

DOORS - For pasacnger operation when the
CONTROLLED POWER CLOSED
When there are conditions that

particularly affect the safety of passengers,
the closing of the doors should only be made
by the continuous pressure of push buttons in
the car or on landings.
6.If .2.9 SAFE OPERATION OF DOORS - The
safety of passengers shall be ensured.
6. II .2. IO As all lift cars are illuminated when
in service, it, is recommended that this
illumination be used to signal the arrival of a
car at a landing in #reference to special
signals such as Ll FT HERE signs since signal
lamp can fail when the lift is still operating
satisfactorily.
6.11.2.11 SERVICE.SWITCHES - W h e n
switches are provide to take car out o!
service, that is because the remaining cars in
the group can cater for the required
passenger traffic, it is essential that such
switches should not stop the firemans
control from being operative in the event of
the lift being designated as a firemanss lift.
6.11.2.12 FIRE SWI T CH -When required
fire switch shall be provided, the function of
which is to enable the tire authority to take
over complete control of one or more lifts in
an installation.
6.11.2.13 PUSH BUTTONS AND SIGNALS Every push buttons and signal shall be clearly
marked so that its function is clearly
understood by all passengers.
7 . TESTlNG
7.1 Tesr on Site - The lift shall pass the
following tests when carried out at site and
before it is put into normal service. The
necessary test weights and instrumentsshall
.be provided by the lift manufacturer, and the.
electric power at the declared voltage (and
frequency) required for adjusting and testing
shall be supplied by the purchaser:
a) Test to determine that the insulation
resistance between power and control
91
5 INSTALLAllON OF UFTS A N D
ESCALATORS
lines and earth not iess ihan 0.5 MO

when measured with a dc voltage of 500
Volts. The test should be caairied out with
the conductors so connected together as
to ensure that all parts of every circuit are
simultaneously tested.
NOTE -The dampness of the building may prevent a
reading of 0.5 MUI f!qm being obtained, in which event
the lift may be provlstonally accepted by the urchaser
with an insulation resistance of 0.25 MCI an Bre-tested
before being finally accepted.
b) Test to determine that the earthing of all
conduct switich casings and similar metal

work is continuous and of low resistance.
Test should be made from all terminal
points by means of a subtantial current to
ensure that the resistance of earth path is
sufficiently low to enable fuses or circuits
to operate under faulty conditions.
4 Test to determine that the motor, brake

control equipment and door locking
devices function correctly.
4 Test to determine that the lift car raises

and lowers rated load.
4 Test to determine that the iift car a: least

achieves the contract speed.
r) Test to determine that the safety gear
stops the lift car with rated .load.

Overspeed tests shall be made with ropes
attached and all elec:ric a p p a r a t u s
operative except the overspced switch on
the governor. The stopping distance of
the lift car is the actual slide as observed
from the marking on guides.
N OTE -The safetv aear of the lift havine ac mo!or

driven machine may Ibc tested by manually TrIpping the
governor where the speed attained by a loaded lift car
descending, with brake released, is sufficient to operate
the governor.
8. RUNNING AND MAINTENANCE

8.1 The lift installation should receive
regular cleaning, lubrication, adjustment and
adequate servicing by authorized competent
persons at such intervals as the type of
equipment and frequency of service demand.
In o r d e r t h a t t h e l i f t i n s t a l l a t i o n i s
maintained at all times in a safe condition, a
proper maintenance schedule shall be drawn
up in consultation ylith the lift manufacturer
and rigidly followed. The provision of a log
book to record all items relating to general
servicing and inspection is recommended for
ropes when in service. Attention should also

be directed to the thorough examination of
the groove of drums, sheaves and pulleys
when installing a new rope. A groove
deepened by rope wear is liable to lead to
hrly failure of a new rope unless the groove
is returned.
8.3 Any accident arising out of operation of
maintenance of the lifts should be duly
reported to the Authority ib accordance with
the rules laid down. A notice may be put in,
the machine room to this effect.
Y. ESCALATORS
9.1 Escalators are deemed essential where
the movement of people, in large numbers at
a controlled rate in the minimum of space, is
involved, for example, railway stations,
airports, etc. In exhibitions, big departmental
stores and the like, escalators encourage
people to circulate freely and conveniently.
9.1.1 As the escalators operate at a constant
speed, serve orily two levels and have a
known maximum capacity, the traffic study
is rather easy. Provided the population to be
handled in a given time is known, it is easy to
predict the rate at which the popuiation can
be handled.
9.1.2 F o r n o r m a l p e a k p e r i o d s , t h e
recommended handling capacities for design
purposes should be taken as 3 200 to 6 400
persons per hour depending upon the width
of the esca;a:or.
9.2 Essentiai Requirenwnts
Y.2.1 Angie of inclination shail not be in
excess of 30 from the horizontai excepting
that with an escalator having a vertical rise
not exceeding 6 m an ang!e up to 35 may be
permitted.
9.2.2 The width between balustrades shall be
measured on the.inciine up to a point 68.5 cm
vertically above the nose line of the steps, and
shall not be less than the width of the step. It
shall not exceed the width of the step by more
than 33 cm with a maximum of 16.5 cm on
either side of the escalator.
all lifts. It is essential tha! the electrical circuit

diagram of the lift with the sequence of
operation of different components and parts
should be kept readily available for the
persons responsible for the maintenance and
replacement where necessary.
9.2.3 Escalators shall be provided on each

kide with solid balustrades. On the step side
the balustrades shall be smooth and
substantially flush except for protective
moulding parallel to the run of the steps and.
p r o p e r l y bevelled v e r t i c a l m o u l d i n g s
projecting not more than 6.5 mm, that cover
joints of panels.
8.2 Particuhr attention may be directea for

thorough periodical examination of wire
9.2.3.1 There shall be no abrupt changes in

the width between the balustrades on the two
Ill22
N A T I O N A L BUlLDlNC CODE OF INDIA
sides of. the escalator. Where a change in

width is unavoidable, s&h change shall not
exceed 8 percent of the greatest ividth. In
changing the direction of the balustrades
resulting from a reduction in width the
maximum gllowable angle of change in
balustrades shall not exceedI5 degrees from
the line of the excalator travel.
9.2.3.2 The clearance on either side of the
steps between the steps and the adjacent skirt
guard shall be not more than 5 mm and the
sum of the clearances on both sides shall be
not more than 6 mm.
9,2.3.3 A solid guard shall be provided.in the
intersecting angle of the outside balustrade
(deck board) and the ceiling or soffit except
where the intersection of the outside
balustrade (deck board) and the ceiling or
soffit is more than 60 cm from the centre line
of the handrail. The vertical face of the guard
shall project at least 36 cm horizontally from
the apei of the angle.
9.2.4 HANDRAILS
adjoihing slots shall be not more than

9.5 mm.
9.2.6 LANDING - Landing shall be made
out. 0f antislip material.
9.2.7 C OMBPLATES -There shall be a
combplate at the entrance and at the exist of
everv escalator. The combplate teeth shall be
meshed with and set into the slots in the tread
surface so that the points of the t&th are
always below the uppir surface of the treads.
Combplates shall be adjustable verticalIy.
9.2.8 T RUSSES OR G IRDERS -The rruuss ot
girder shall be designed to safety sustain the
step? and running gear in operation. Ih the
event of failure of thl track system it shall
retain the running gear in its guides.
9.2.9 STEP WHEEL . TRACKS -This shall be
designed to prevent displacement of steps
and running gear if a step chain breaks.
9.2.10 R ATED L OAD -The rated load in
kilogram on an escalator shall be computed
by the following formula:
9.2.4.1 Each balustrade shall be provided

with a handrail moving in the same direction
and at substantially the same speed as the
steps.
Y.2.4.2 Each moving handrail shall extend at
normal handrail height not. less than 30 cm
beyond the line of points of combplate teeth
at the upper and lower landings.
9.2.4.3 Hand or finger guards shall be
provided at the point where the handrails
enters the balustrade.
9.2.4.4 The horizontal distance between the
centre lines of two handrails, measured on
the incline, shall not exceed the width
between the balustrades by more than 15 cm,
with a maximum of 7.5 cm on either side of
the escalator.
9.2.5 STEP TREADS
9.2.5.1 The depth of any step tread in the

direction of travel shall not be less than 40 cm
and the rise between treads shall be not more
than 22 cm. The widtti of a step tread shall be
not less than 40 cm nor more than 102 cm.
9.2.5.2 The maximum clearance between
step treads on the horizontal run shall be
4 mm.
9.2.5.3 The tread surface of each step shall be
slotted in a direction parallel to ttie travel of
the steps. Each slot shall be not more than
6.5 mm wide and less than 9.5 mm deep; and
the distance from centre to centre of
MET Viii BUILDING SUVICES-SCCllON
Rated load = 2.1 W A

where
W = width in cm between the balustrades,

and
A = horizontal distance between the upper
and lower combplate teeth in metres.

The rated, speed shall not be more than
38 metres per minute.
9.2.11 D ESIGN F ACTOR OF S AFETY - The
factor of safety based on static load shall be
at least the following:
a) for trusses and all structural members
including tracks-five
b) for driving. machine parts:
I) where made of steel or brone-eight,
2) where made of cast iron and other
materials- ten; and
c) for power-transmission members- ten.
Step chain composed of cast-steel links
which, if throughly annealed, shall be
permitted with a factor of safety of at least
twenty.
9.2.12 D RIVING M ACHINE , MOTEOR. AND
BRAKE
9.2.12.2 The driving machine shall be

connected to the.main drive shaft by toothed
gearing, a coupling, or a chain.
9.2.12.2 An ekctric motor shall not drive
more than one escalator.
INSTALLATION ,OF UFTS AND ESCAL&TORS
WI-P
9.2.123 Each escalator shall be rovided

with an electrically released, metg a&ally
applied brake capable Of stopping the up or
down travelline escalator with any load tip to
rated load. Thur brake shall be iocated either
on the diiving .machitie or on the main drive
shaft.
Where a chain is.used to connetthe driving
machiti io the main drive shaft, a brake shall
be provided on this shalt, It is @ot required
that this brake be of the electrically released
type if an cledrrically released brake is
provided ori the driving machine
9.2.12.4 SPEED. GOVERNOR - A speed

governor shall be provided, the operwtion of
which shallcause the interruption of power
to thq driving machine should the speed of
the steps exceed a predetermined value which
shall be not more than 40 percent above the
rated speed.
NOTE -The ovenpeed governor is not quired where a
low clip alternating curtint yuiml cage induction
motor II used and the motor is directly connected to the
driving machine.
9.3 For operation and safety devices,

electrical work, precautions and tests reference may be made togood practice[VI11:5(3)].
LIST OF STANDARDS
The folibwing list records those stan&rrds which ate acceptabb as good pructlce and
accepted stanakis in the furfirment of the requirements of the. Code. l%e latqt version of e
star&d shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. T&e stanciclrds4sted may be used
by the Authority as a gui& in conformance with the requircmcnts of the referred &uses in the
co&?.
In the followinz list the munber aooearinr in the first dobrnn wiihrii parentheses indicates the
number if the ref+ence in this par~/secti&.
1)
lS:4666-I.980 Specification for.electric

passenger and goods lifts (/%-St re\;ision)
Is: 6383-1971 Specification for electic
service lifts
2)
IS:2332-1963 Nomenclature of floors

and storeys
3)
1S : 4289- 1967 Specification for. lift

cables
4)

earthing
IS : 1860- 1980 Code of practice for

installation, operation and
maintenance. of electric passenger and
goods lifts. (second revision)
installation, operation and
maintenance of electric service lifts
IS:2309-f969 Code of practice for the
protection of buildings and allied
structures against lightning first
revision)
7) lS:4591-1968 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e for
installation and maintenance of
escalators.
5)
About the Book......

With the objective of finding out areas of
economies in construction costs, the
Planning Commission set up a Panel of
Experts in 1965 to study in depth the whole
gamut of construction activities. The outlay
on construction works and particularly on
buildings forms a very large portion of the
national investment. One of the facets of
building construction, namely, controlling
and regulating building through municipal
byelaws and departmental handbooks,
received the attention of the Panel and
study of these regulatory practices revealed
that some of the prevailing methods of
construction were outmoded,some designs
overburdened with safety factors and there
were 4her design criteria which in the light
of newer techniques and methodologies
could be rationalized. Building handbooks
of public works departments and other
similar agencres, building byelaws and
regulations of municipal bodies which
largely regulate the building activity in the
country were outdated. They did not cater
to the use of new building materials and
the latest developments in building designs
and construction techniques. It also
became clear that these codes and byelaws
were more often than not specification
oriented and not performance oriented,
thereby hindering the use of modern
techniques and also restricting the creative
faculties of architects and structural
engineers.
The studies of the Panel led to the
conclusion. that a unified building code at
the national level should be formulated
reflecting the latest trends in building
construction activity. At the suggestion
of the Planning Commission, this task was
taken up by the ISI and Guiding Committee
finalized the Code to serve as a guide to
(Continued on.flap 2)
Rs.
250.00

OF INDIA 1983
GRC .P S--PART IX
GROUP 5
B U R E A U
O F
I N D I A N
S T A N D A R D S
MANAK BHAVAN, 9BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHI-l 10002
SF 7 (5) : 1983
FIRST REPRINT JANUARY 1991
SECOND REPRINT FEBRUARY 1999
0 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
UDC 69 : 006.76
ISBN 81-7061-032-X
PRICE Rs 250.00
PRINTED IN INDIA AT CENTRAL ELECTRIC PRESS, NEW DELHI 110028 AND

PIJBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARC,
NEW DELHI I10002
FOREWORD
Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of
development, be it housing, transport, industry, irrigation, power, agriculture,
education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outlay in any Plan. Half of the total money spent on construction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative,
educational, medical, municipal and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about
half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. In a Five-Year Plan of, say,
Rs I 560 billion, about Rs 780 billion would be spent on construction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings of various types and occupancies. It
is imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returnsare assured and
wastage in, cotistruction is avoided.
Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of
operations involved in construction, such as administrative. organisational. financial
and technical aspects, bi: studied in depth. For this study, a Panel of Experts was
appointed in 1965 by the Planning Commission and its recommendations are found,in
the Report on Economies in Construction Ccsts pubiished in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely. controlling and regulating buildings
through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooks received the attention of the
Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed that some of the prevailing
methods-of construction are outmoded; some designs are overburdened with safety
factors and there are other design criteria which, in the lightdf newer techniques and
methodologies, could b.e rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activity in the country wherever
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building materials and
the lritest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not
These studies resulted in, a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared
departments, municipal bodies and other construction agencies. The Indian
Standards Institution.was entrusted by the Planning Commission with the preparation
of the National Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council in
1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare thevarious parts
of the Code. The Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects,
town planners, materials experts, structural, construction, electrical illumination,airconditioning, acoustics and public health engineers. These experts were drawn from
the Central and State Governments. local bodies, professional institutions andpri,vate
agencies. The first version of the Code was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the.ISl to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, designing and construction activities. For this,
State-wise implementation conferences were organized with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, building and plumbing services installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These conferences have been useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the
interests concerned. These conferences have also helped in the establishment of
Action Committees to -look into the actual implementation work carried out by the
construction departments, local bodies and other agencies in different States. The
Action Committees representing all interests in individual States met regularly to
review and cgnsider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks, manuals,
etc, as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city and town levels,
zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in line with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. 4rising out of this,
V
considerable progress has been made by most of the states in revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of 1st.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other localbodies in the States
consideration.
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising building byelawsand PWD
above.
<.information contained in various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
of minimum provisions designed to protect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; so long as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is
administrative regulations, development control rules and general building
structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
public during construction; and rules for erection of signs and outdoor display
structures.
building and architectural control. The increase in population in the years to come
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades andconsequently at
this period. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance andspecial
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness andslumllike conditions in
The changes incorporated in the present Code have been specified in theForeword to
VI

tire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete andprestressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities in the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibration, air filter, automatic control, energy conservat.ion for air-conditioning; and
knowledge on various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, users views over a
period of time pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in to the Code from time to time to make ita living
document. It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.
requirements in accordance wi!h the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee for Corrective Action.
This publication forms part of the National Building Code of India 1983 and
contains Part IX Plumbing Services with all its sections dealingwith:
Water Supply
Drainage and Sanitation
Gas Supply
The information contained in this publication will essentially serve the public
health/ plumbing engineer.
VII
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC 64

CHAIRMAN
W-51 Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
REPRESENTING
MEMBERS
DR B. M. AHUJA
S HRI V. ASRANI P A H A L A J
The Institution of Surveyors, New Delhi
S HRI J. P. BAJAJ
S HRI S ASIDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B ALWANT SINGH
New Delhi 110 017)
S HRI J. R. BHALLA
In personal capacity (A-2136 Safdarjang Enclave,
S HRI M. S. BHATIA
New Delhi 110 016)
Housing and Urban Developrhent Corporation
S HRI H. U. BIJLANI
Ltd, New Delhi
S HRI H. K. YADAV(A/ternate)
S HRI C. S. CH A N D R A S E K H A R A
S HRI R. CHANNABASAPPA
S HRI A. CHATTERJI
,CHIEF ENGINEER ( BUILDINGS )
SUPERINTE_NDING ENGINEER
(P AND D CIRCLE) (Alternate)
C HIEF E NGINEER ( DESIGNS)
S HRI D. N. CH~PRA

Committee), Bombay
Public Works Department, Govt of Tamil Nadu
Designs Organization), New Delhi
(Alternate)
S HRI D. S. DESAI
P ROF D INESH M O H A N
SHRI R. C. MANGAL (Alternate)
D IRECTOR
D IRECTOR (CIVIL ENGG)
In persona1 capacity (A-9/33 Vasant Vihar,

New Delhi 110 057)
M. N. Dastur & Co Private Limited, Calcutta
Roorkee
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (Alternate)

D IRECTOR S TANDARDS ( CIVIL )
D IRECTOR ( ENGG S ERVICES & PROJECTS )
C ITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI J. DURAI R A J
Research, Designs & Standards Organization

Bombay
G ENERAL S ECRETARY
S HRI S. S. GILL
S HRI V. K. GU P T A
In personal capacity (DI/141 Satya Marg,

New Delhi 110 021)
Public Works Department, Government of Punjab
Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
SHRI K. DEVARAJAN (A!ternate)

S HRI N. JAGANNATH
S HRI J. C. KAPIJR
D R R. K. GUPTA (Alternate)
Steel Authority of India Limited, New I%lhi

Danfoss (India) Limited, Bombay
SHRI
A. C. KHAZANCHI
SHRI P. KRISHNAN
VIII
Regional Research Laboratory (CSIR), Jorhat

North Eastern Council, Shillong
REPRESENTING
Tata Consulting Engineers, Bombay
MEMBERS
SHKI M. Z. KURIF
SHRI D. S. HARPAI.,\NI
SHRI MADAN MO H A N
(Ahernafe)
Directorate General of Factory Advice Service and
New Delhi
S HRI M A H E N D R A RAJ
S HRI A. D. PAVATE
S HRI G. C. MA T H U R
S HRI M. M. MISTRY
S HRI G. D. MA T H U R
(Airernare)
(Alternate)
-DR S. MAUWAL
S HRI P. N. MI~HROTRA
S HRI G. B. MEN~N
S HRI K. K. NA M B I A R
S HRI R. NA T R A J A N
S HRI M. D. PA T E L
S HRI I. K. MODI (Alternote)
P RESIDENT
SYRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RAGHU
S HRI A. RAMAN
SHRI D. RWXRAMAN
S HRI N. V. RAMAN
Forest Research Institute and Colleges,Debra Dun

Ministry of Works & Housing (CPHEEO)
(Alrernure)
S HRI Z ACHARIA G EORGE

S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIANI

Madras
(Alrerde)
S HRI V. S. RANE
S HRI B. K. RO Y
S HRI D. P. ROY C H O W D H A R Y
S HRI D. P. GHOSH
S HRI T. K. SARAN

New Delhi
In personal capacity (A-101 Anund Lihar,
New Delhi II0 092)
ln personal capacity (~munuku~~,l6, First Crescenr
Park, Gandhi Nugur. AJ?vr? Mu&us 600 020)
In persona1 capacity (S/3 East Pure1 Nugur, New

Delhi 110 008)
Public Works & Housing Dqanmxq Gowxnment
West Bengal
(Alternate)
S HRI T. S. RA~AM
S HRI H. J. S H A H
S HRI R. G. GANDHI
S HRI R. L. SURI
SHRI
M.
SHRI
B. T. U N W A L L A
Bureau of Public Enterprises (Ministry of Finance),

New Delhi
(Alternate)
(Alternate)
THYAGARAJAN
SHRI Y. K. M EHTA (Ahernure)

Brig D. R. K ATHURIA (Ahernure)
D R H. C. VISVESVARAYA
Suti & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,

New Delhi
Indian Institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
The Concrete Association of India, Bombay and
Cement Research Institute of India, New Delhi
MEMBERS
REPRESENTING
SHKI D. A.IIIHA SI M H A. Deputy Director

Director General. IS1 (Ex-qj,FcYo Member)
General [Former Director (Civ Ed 1
SHKI G. KAMAN. Director (Civ Engg)
I
FORMER SECRET.4 R Y
SHKI D. AJITHA SIMHA
Llrpul~r Director Genernl [Former Dirrcror (Civ Engg)]JSI
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Ditwtor (Ci\* Engg). IS I
.lOi,VT SECRETA R 1
SHKI J! VENKATARAMAN
S r . I>epur~* Director (Ci\v Engg).lSI
Panel for Plumbing Services, BDC 64:P16
CONVENER
REPRESENTING
SHRI BALWANT SINGH
In
personal capacity (N-29 Punchshilu Park,
New Delhi 110017)

MEMBERS
SHRI S. N. A G A R W A L
SHRI V. A. AN A N D A D O S S
S HRI J. R. BHALLA
C HAIRMAN
S HRI S. P. CHAKARBARTI
SHRI S. K. SHARMA (Alrernure)
SHRI J. DCRUZ
SHRI S., A. SWAMY (Abemare)
SHRI B. R. N. GUPTA
SHRI K. P ARBHAKAR RAo(AItemare)
H YDRAULIC E NGINEER
D EPUTY H YDRAULIC E NGINEER
(Alternate)
JOINT DIRECTOR , STANDARDS (ARCH),
DEPUTY DIRECTOR STANDARDS
( ARCH)II (Alremute)
SHRI K. K ANDASWAMI
PROF P. KHANNA
DR M. MARIAPPAN
SHRI V. P. DESHPANDE (Alremure)
SHRI P. N. MEHROTRA
SHRI G. B. MENON
SUPERINTENDING SURVEYOR OF WORKS
(DAZ)
SURVEYOR OF WORKS II (DAZ)
(Alternate)
SHRI S. A. VICHARE
The Bombay Gas Company Limited, Bombay

Ministry of Works & Housing
Tamil Nadu Water Supply & Drainage Board,
Madras
Ce;;iikuilding Research Institute (CSIR),
Engineer-in Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters
Bombay
Research Design & Standards Orgar&tion, Lucknow
Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay
National Environmental Engmeering Research
In personal capacity (B-6/38-1
Sqf&tjang Enclove,
New Delhi llOO29)

PART 1
DEFINITIONS
PART ii ADMINISTRATION
PART iii DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
Section 1 Loads
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Section 6 Steel
PART Vii CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART Viii
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
BUILDING SERVICES
Electrical installations
Air-conditioning.and Heating
Acoustics, Sound insulation and Noise Control
installation of Lifts and Escaiators

Section 1 Water Supply
PART N
SlGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES

SECTION1
WATERSUPPLY
CONTENTS
0. FOIIEWOIID
...
1.
SCOIE
...
7
_.
I-EI~MINOLOGY
. .
.<.
APfLICATfON F-OK OBl AINING StlffLY CONNECTfO\
4. LICENSING OF PLUMBEI~S
...
.s. WA.fER SIJfP1.Y REQUIREMENTS FOR BUIL.DfNGS
6. DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
...
7. ~MATERIALS. Ff-11 INGS AND APPI.fANCES
...
8.
CONVEYANCE AND DISTRIBU-I-ION Of- WATER WITHIN

THE PREMISES
Y. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS F-OR PIPE WORK
...
10.
LAYING OF MAINS AND PIPES ON SITE
...
If
II.
JOlkTlNG OF PIPES
...
I2
1. STORAGE OF WATER
...
I2
1-3.
HOT WATER SlJPPLY INSTALLATIONS
13
14.
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF THE SUPPLY

SYSTEM
...
24
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS IN HIGH ALTITUDES

AND, OR SUB-ZEIIO TEMPERATURE REGIONS
...
25
16. INSPECTION AND TESTING
...
26
f7. GUIDELINES TO MAINTENANCE
...
28
...
28
...
29
...
30
...
31
IS.
APPENDIX A APPLICATION FORM FOR TEMPORARY,
PERMANENT SUPPLY OF WATER/FOR

ADDITIONS AND, OR ALTERATIONS FOR
SUPPLY OF WATER
APPENDIX B FORM FOR LlCENSED PLUMBERS COM-
PLETION CERTIFICATE
APPENDIX C UNIVERSAL PIPE FRICTION DIAGRAM
A P P E N D I X D NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAMS
EQUATION
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
IX-I-1

SECTION1 WATER SUPPLY
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the requirements of water supply, plumbing connected to public water
supply. design of water supply systems, principles of conveyance and distribution of water within
the premises, hot water supply system, inspection and maintenance of water supply systems. This
section also covers design of water supply systems in high altitudes and/ or sub-zero temperature
regions.
0.2 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. The first revision is intended to update the
provisions in the light of the revision of the standards on which it was based and a number of new
standards being formulated on the subject. This revision incorporates mainly the following
changes:
a)
Rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms.
b) Universal pipe friction diagram and nomogram of Hazen and Williams equation have been
added for discharge computation, deleting the discharge curves based on Chezys formula.
c)
A detailed clause giving guidance on the design of water supply system for muitistoreyed
buildings has been introduced.
d) in regard to storage tanks for flushing, the requiiements have been modified to indicate that
no separate storage need be provided for flushing and domestic purposes for health reasons
and a single storage tank may be provided.
e)
Provisions relating to domestic hot water supply installations have been modified amplified.
A detailed clause covering recommendations to be considered while planning and designing

water supply systems peculiar to high altitude and or sub-zero temperature regions of the
country, has been introduced.
g) Requirements relating to inspection, testing and maintenance applicable to hot water supply
system have been added. .
0.3 This section has been based largely on the following Indian Standards:
IS : Il72-I983 Code of basic requirements for water supply. drainage and sanitation (tlrircl
,rli.siorl).
IS : 2065-1983 Code of practice for water supply, in buildings (src~trtl rr~li.sic>n).
IS : 6295-1971 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and orsub7ero temperature regions.
IS : 7558-1974 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations.
0.3.1 Assistance has also been derived fromthe.Manuai on Water Supply and Treatment (second
edition), issued by Ministry of Workq and Housing, New Delhi in 1976.
IX-I-
b) Any part of a piping system other than a

main.
1. SCOPE
1.1 The section covers the basic requirements of water supply for residential, business, industrial and other types of buildings,
including traffic terminal stations. This
section also deals with general requirements
of plumbing connected to public water
supply and design of water supply systems.
1.2 This section does not take into consideration the requirements of water supply
for industrial plants and processes, which have
to be provided for separately. It also. does
not provide for requirements of water supply for
other purposes, such as fire fighting, and
street cleaning.
2. TERMINOLOGY
AIR GAP--The distance betweenthe lowest
point Of a water inlet or feed pipe to an
appliance and the spill-over level (or the
overflowing level) of the appliance.
AUTHORITY HAVING
C ISTERN-A fixed container for water in

which water is at atmospheric pressure. The
water is usually supplied through a float
operated valve.
COMMUNIGATION PIPE-That part of a
service pipe which vests in the water
undertakers. It starts at the water main and
terminate at a point which differs according to
the circumstances of the case.
CONSUMER-Any. person who uses or is
supplied water or on whose application such
water is supplied by the Authority.
CONSUMERS PIPE --The portion of service
pipe used for supply of water and which is not
the property of the Authority (see Fig. 1).
D-
J U R I S D I C T I O N -_The

the-Code/ Part may authorize a committee or
called the Authority*.
A V A I L A B LE HEAD-The head of water
available at the point of consideration due to
mains pressure or overhead tank or any other
source of pressure.
BACKFLOW
a) The flow of water or other liquids.
m i x t u r e s or substances into the
distributing pipes of-a system Of suPPlY of
potable water from any source or sources
other than its intended source.
b) The flow of a liquid in a direction reverse
of that intended.
BACKFLOW PR E VENTION L)EvtCE TAnY
approved measure or fitting or combmatlon
of fittings specifically designed to prevent
backflow or backsiphonage in a Water setke.
BACK SIPHONAGE-The flowing back of
used, contaminated, or polluted water from a
plumbing fixture or vessel into a water supply
due to a reduced pressure in such pipe (see
Backflow).
BRANCH
a) Special form of sewer tile and pipe used
for making connections to a sewer or
water main. The various types are called
T. Y, T-Y, double Y, and V branches.
according to their respectiveshapes.
PAD1 IX PLUMBING SFBVICES-SECTION
I WATER SUPPLY
Noic -- The illustration 15 not intended to Indicate

recdmmended positions of underground storage tanh
(where prowded), pipes. etc. and this uill dcpcnd on
local situations.
C R O S S- CO N N E C T I O N --A connection
between two normally independent pipelines
which permits flow from either pipelinemto
the other.
D IAMETER -The nominal internal diameter
of pipes and fittings;
a
IX-I-
DIRECT TAP-A tap which is connected to a.

supply pipe and is subject to pressure from the
water main.
H OT W ATER T ANK-A vessel for storing hot

water under pressure greater than
atmospheric pressure.
D O W N T A K E T A P-A tap connected to a

system of piping not subject to water pressure
from the water main.
acoustic insulation.
EFFE~IVE OPENING -The minimum crosssectional area at the point of water supply,
measured or expressed in terms of:
(a) the diameter of a circle; and
(b) the diameter of a circle of equivalent crosssectional area, if the opening is not
circular.
F EED C I S T E R N -A storage vessel used for
supplying cold water to a hot water apparatus,
cylinder or tanks.
FITTINGS- Fittings shall mean coupling,
flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions,
waste with plug, P or S trap with vent, stop
ferrule, stop tap, bib tap, pillar tap, globe tap,
ball valve, cistern storage tank, baths,waterclosets, boiler, geyser, pumping set with
motor and accessories, meter, hydrant, valve
and any other article used in connection with
water supply, drainage and sanitation.
F LOAT O PERATED V ALVE- Ball valves or

ball taps and equilibrium valves operated by
means of a float.
FLIJSHING CISTERN -A cistern provided
with a device for rapidly discharging the
contained water and used in connection with a
sanitary appliance for the purpose of cleaning
the appliance and carrying away its contents
into a drain.
NOTE -The nominal size of a cistern is the quantity of
water discharged per flush.
F ROST L INE -The line joining the points of

greatest depths below ground level up to
which the moisture in the soil freezes.
G E N E R A L W A S H I N G P L A C E -A w a s h i n g
place provided with necessary sanitary
arrangement and common to more than one
tenement.
L AGGING -Material
used for thermal or
L ICENSED P L U M B E R -A
person licensed
under the provisions of this code.
M AIN ( WATER M A I N) -A pipe laid by the
water undertakers for the purpose of giving a
general supply of water as distinct from a
supply to individual consumersan< includes
any apparatus used in connection with such a
pipe.
O FFSET -A
pipe fitting used to connect two

pipes whose axes are parallel butnot in line.
P ERIOD OF SuppLy-,The period of the day
or night during which water supplyis made
available to the consumer.
PIPE WORK -Any installation of piping with

its fittings.
PLUMBING
a) The pipes, fixtures and other apparatus

inside a building for bringing in the water
supply and removing the liquid and water
borne wastes.
b) The installation of the foregoing pipes,
fixtures and other apparatus.
P LUMBING S YSTEM -The plumbing system
shall include the water supply and distribution pipes; plumbing fittings and traps; soil,
waste, vent pipes and anti-siphonage pipes;
building drains and building sewers including
their respective connections, devices and
appurtenances within the property lines of the
premises; and water-treating or water-using
equipment.
is satisfactory for drinking, culinary and domestic
purposes and meets the requirements of the
Authority.
P O T A B L E WATER-W~~~~ which
-An apparatus for heating water

with supply control on the inlet side and
delivering it from an outlet.
PREMISES -Premises shall include passages,

buildings and lands of any tenure,. whether
open or enclosed, whether built on or not, and
whether public or private in respect of which a
water rate or charge is payable to the.
Authority or for which an application is made
for supply of water.
H IGH A LTITUDES -Elevations higher than

1 500 m above mean sea level (MSL).
RESIDUAL HEAD-The head available at any

particular point in the distribution system.
H O R I Z O N T A L PIPE-Any pipe of fitting

which makes an angle of more than 45 with
S ERVICE P IPE-Pipe that runs between the

distribution main in the street and.the riser in
case of a multi-storeyed building or the water
G EYSER
the Lertical.
IX-I- 4
VATl6NAL BUILDING CODE
OF INDIA
meter in the case of an individual house and is

subject to water pressure from such main.
thing used for storage, treatment and supply

of water.
STOP - COCK --A COCK fitted in a pipe line for

controlling the flow of water.
3. APPLICATION FOR OBTAINING

SUPPLY CONNECTION
T A P-Stop tap includes stop-cock,

stop valve or any other device for stopping the
flow of water in a line or system of pipes at
will.
3.1 Every consumer, requiring a new supply

of water or any extension or alteration to the
existing supply shall apply in writing in the
prescribed form (see Appendix A) to the
Authority.
S TOP
S TORAGE T ANK -A container used for

storage of water which is connected to the
water main or tube-we11 by means of supply
pipe.
S U B- ZE R O T E M P E R A T U R E RECIONSRegions where temperatures fall below 0C
and freezing conditions occur.
SUPPLY PIRE-SO much of any service pipe
as is not a communication pipe.
SUPPORTS-Hangers and anchors or devices

for supporting and securing pipe and fittings
to walls, ceilings, floors or structural
members.
VERTtCAL PIPE -Any pipe which is installed
in a vertical position or which makes an angle
of not more than 45 with the vertical.
W ARNING PIPE-An overflow pipe so fixed
that its outlet, whether inside or outside a
building, is in a conspicuous position where
the discharge of any water therefrom can be
readily seen.
WASH -OUT VALVE - A device located at the
bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining
a tank for cleaning, maintenance, etc.
W ATER OUTLET-A water outlet, as used in
connection with the water distributing SYStem, is the discharge opening for the water (a)
to a fitting; (b) to atmospheric pressure
(except into an open tank which ispart of the
water supply system); and (c) toany wateroperated device or equipment requiring water
to operate.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM -Water supply sy%.
tern of a building or premises consists of the
water service pipe, the water-distribution
pipes, and the necessary connecting pipes,
fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances
in or adjacent to the building or premises.
WATERWORKS-Waterworks for public
water supply include a lake, river, spring, well,
pump with or without motor and accessories,
reservoir, cistern, tank, duct whether covered
or open. sluice, water main, pipe, culvert,
engine and any machinery, land. building ora
?ARt Ix ?LUkPINC
SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
3.2 Bulk Supp(,*-- In the case of large housing colonies or where new services are so
situated that it will be necessary for the
Authority to lay new mains or extend an
existing main, full information about the
proposed housing scheme shall be furnished
to the Authority; information shall also be
given regarding their phased requirements of
water supply with full justification. Such
information shall include site plans, showing
the layout of roads, footpaths, building and
boundaries and indicating thereon the
finished line and level of the roads or
footpaths and water supply lines and
appurtenances.
3.3 C o m p l e t i o n Cert@ate-On comple-.
tion of the plumbing work for the water
supply system, the licensed plumber shall give
a completion certificate in the prescribed form
(see Appendix B) to the Authority for getting
the water connection from the mains.
4. LICENSING OF PLUMBERS
4.1 Execution of Work-The work which is
required to be carried out under the provisions of this section, shall be executed only by
a licensed plumber under the control of the
Authority and shall be responsible to carry
out all lawful directions given by the
Authority. No individual shall engage in the
business of plumbing unless so licensed under
the provisions of this section.
individual, firm, partnership or
corporation shall engage in the business of
installing, repairing or altering plumbing
unless the plumbing work performed in the
course of such business is under the direct
supervision of a licensed plumber.
4.1.1 No
4.2 Examination and Certtyication-The

Authority shall establish standards and
procedure for the qualification, examination
and iicensing of plumbers and shall issue
licences to such persons who meet the
qualifications thereof and successfully pass
the examination.
4.3 For guidelines for registration of plumbers including the minimum standards for
qualifications for the grant 01 licenccs.
s
IX-I--
reference -may be made to accepted standards

[IX-l( I>].*
5: WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
FOR BUILDINGS
5.1 Water Supple for Residences--The requirements regarding water supply, drainage
and sanitation for residencesshall assume that
a minim1.m water supply of 200 litres per head
per day is assured together with a full flushing
system.
NOlE -The minimum value of water supply given as 200
litres per head per day may be reduced to 135 litres.pcr
head per day for houses for Lower Income Group (LIG)
and Economically Weaker Sections of Society (EWS).
dcpcnding upon prevailing conditions.
5.1. I Out of the 200 litres per head per day,

45 litres per head per day may be taken for
flushing requirements and the remaining

quantity for other domestic purposes.
S.2 Waler Supply for Buildings Other than
Residences- Minimum requirements of
water supply for buildings other than
residences shall be in accordance with
Table 1.
I WATER REQUIREMENTS FOR
BUILDINGS OTHER I-HAN RESIDENCES
TABLE
SI
NO.
TYPE OF BUILDING
(1)
i)
(2)
Factories where bathrooms are
required to be provided
ii)
Factories where no bathrooms are

required to be provided
iii)
Hospitals (including laundry) per bed:

a) Xumber of beds not exceeding 100
b) Number of beds exceeding IO0
1
1
I\
vi)
vu)
Viii)
ix)
x)
Surses homes and mcdiral quarters

Hostels
Ilotels (per bed)
Offices
Rr\taurants (per seat)
Cincmas, concert halls and theatres
(per seat)
Schools:
a) Day schools
b) Boarding schools
COSSUMPrtnh PER
H EAD P E R
DA Y
(3)
litres
45
30
340
450
135
I35
180
45
70
15
5.3 barer Supp(r Requiremenrs ?f Traffic

li~rm~nal Stalk ys
S-3.1 lhe uater supply requirements of

traffic terminal stations (railway stations, bus
statlons. harbours, airports, etc) include
*In th,q bectlon where reference is made to accepted
stal:dards in relation to material specification, testidg or
other mtormation. the appropriate document listed at the
end of this section may be used as a guide to the
intcrpretaiion of the term.
IX-I-
provisions for waiting rooms and waiting

halls. They do not, however, include requirements for retiring rooms.
5.3.2 Requirements of water subply for
traffic terminal stations shall be according to
Table 2.
TABLE 2 WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
FOR TRAFFIC TERMINAL STATIONS
SL
NO.
N ATURE OF
STArIONjTERMlNAL
(1)
(2)
i) Intermediate stations
(excluding mail and
express stops)
ii) Junction stations and
intermediate stations
where mail or express
stoppage is provided
W HERE
W HERE
B ATHING
BArHlNG
FACILII-IES FACILIIIES
A RE N O T
ARE
P ROVIDED P ROVIDED
(3)
litresj
capita
(4)
litres/
capita
45
23
70
45
iii) Terminal stations
45
45
iv) International and

domestic airports
70
70
NOIF I --The number of persons shall be determined

by the average number of passengers handled by the
station daily; due consideration may be given ta the
staff and vendors likely to use the facilities.
NOTE 2-Consideration should be given to seasonal
average peak requirements.
5.4 Water Supply for Fire Fighting Purposes

5.4.1 The Authority shall make provision to
meet the water supply requirements forfire

fighting in the city/area, depending on the
population density and types of occupancy.
5.4.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of
the building for water supply requirements for
fire fighting purposes within the building,
depending upon the height and occupancy of
the building, in conformity with the
requirements laid down in Part IV Fire
protection.
5.4.3 The requirements regarding water
supply in storage tanks, capacity d fire
pumps, arrangements of wet riser-cumdowncomer and wet riser installations for
buildings above 15 m in height, depending
upon the occupancy use, shall be in
accordance with Table 3 of Part IV Fire
protection.
6. DESIGK OF DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEMS
6.1 General-- All buildings shall conforti
to the following general requirements in
NATIONAL. BUILD~NC CODE OF INDIA
regard to water supply, drainage and sanitation:

a) All premises intended for human
habitation, occupancy or use shall be
provided with the supply of pure and
wholesome water, neither connected with
unsafe water supply nor subject to the
hazards of backflow or back-siphonage.
b) Plumbing fixtures, devices and appurtenances shall be supplied with water in
sufficient volume and at pressures
adequate to enable them to function
satisfactorily and without undue noise
under all normal conditions of use.
There should be at least a residual head
of 0.018 N/mm2 at the consumers tap.
NOTE-The residual head shall be taken at the
highest/farthest outlets in the building.
cl Plumbing shall be designed and adjusted
to use the minimum quantity of water

consistent with proper performance and
cleaning.
d) Devices for heating and storing hot water
shall be so designed and installed as to
minimize danger arising from
overheating.
e) The plumbing fixtures, installed in a
building intended for human habitation,
occupancy or use, shall be connected to a
public sewer, where such sewer exists in
the street or alley on which the building
abuts, or where a sewer passes near the
basement, or where the public sewer is
within 30m of the building line.
6.1.2 The requirements of water supply for
cooling towers, in respect of both quantity
and pressure,may be taken into account in
the overall design of the storage tank and
rising main for meeting other major requirements like domestic, fire fighting, etc.
6.2 Estimate of Demand Load-Estimates
of total water supply requirements for buildings shall be based on the occupant load
consistent with the provisions of 5.
6.2.1 For residential buildings, the requirements of water shall be based on the actual
number of occupants; where this information is not available, the number of OCCUpants for each residential unit may be based
on a family of five. For assessing the population in other occupancies, reference may
be made to Part IV Fire protection.
6.2.2 In making assessment of watersupply
requirements of large complexes, the future
occupant load shall be kept in view. Use
may be made of the following methods for
estimating future requirements:
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTlOti
I WATER SUPPLY
a) demographic method of population

b)
cl
4
e)
0
g)
projection,
arithmetic progression method,
geometrical progression method,
method of varying increment or incremental increase,
logistic method,
graphical projection method, and
graphical comparison method.
6.3 Rate of Flow-The data required for

determining the size of the communication
and service pipes are:
a) the maximum rate of discharge required,
b) the length of the pipe,
C) the head loss by friction in that length,
and
d) the roughness of the interior surface of
the pipe.
6.4 Discharge Computation
Several formulae, diagrams and tables
of calculated values are available for the
measurement of flow through pipes. However, almost all studies based on the
Reynolds number of flow, pipe roughness
and flow pattern (like turbulent, transient,
leminar) yields accurate and mutually
consistent results over a very large range of
flow compared to empirical formulae which
have limitations regarding their range of
applicability. Although non-dimensional
parameters are used, these rational formulae
based on Reynolds number need
information on viscosity and the calculations
are more involved. To obviate the involved
calculations, a universal pipe friction
diagram has been provided in Appendix C.
Therefore, for accurate estimation of various
parameters, the universal pipe friction
diagram should be preferred.
6.4.1
6.4.2 Temperature of water and

consequently the viscosity at a place is an
estremely variable factor, depending upon
season and time. Further, commercially
available standard sizes of pipes are only to
be used against the sizes arrived at by actual
design. Therefore, several empirical formulae
are used, even though they,give less accurate
results. The Hazen and Williams formula
and the charts based on the same may be
used without any risk of inaccuracy in view
of the fact that the pipes normally to be used
for water supply are of smaller sizes.
Nomogram of Hazen and Williams equation
has been provided in Appendix D.
IX-I-
6.5 Distribution Systems in MultistoreJJed

Buildings-The water supply system in
multistoreyed buildings may be one or a
combination of the system g&en in 6.5.1
to 6.5.3.
the lead pump, the supplementary pump

starts automatically.
6.5.1 M U L T I P L E O V E R H E A D S T O R A G E
7.1 Standards for Materials, Fittings and

Appliances- All materials, water fittings
and appliances shall conform to Part V
Building materials.
S Y S T E M -ln this system, the tanks are

provided on the terrace. A m a n i f o l d
downtake is taken out from the storage tank

and laid out horizontally in a loop on the
terrace to ,carry a designed peak load. The
pressure in the loop at peak demand must not
become negative. Vertical downtakes, as
many as necessary, may be taken out from
the loop and linked, one each, to a downtake
for a zone of 4 storeys. These downtakes are
designed for the peak demand they may have
to serve. A pressure reducing valve is
provided in each downtake, in an easily
accessible place like a duct, catwalk, etc, to
limit the head to a maximum of 25 m.
6.5.2 BREAK P R E S S U R E T ANK S Y S T E M - - I n
this system, t h e e n t i r e b u i l d i n g i s
donveniently divided into suitable zones of 5
to 8 storeys each. For each such zone, a break
pressure tank is provided, the capacity of

which is such that it holds IO to 15 min
supply for all the floors in the zone plus a
minimum of 2 kl for flushing and other
domestic purposes. The dowptake from the
master overhead tank feeds the break
pressure tank.
6.5.3 H Y D R O P N E U M A T I C S YSTEM -In this
system, t h e s u p p l y i s t h r o u g h a
hydropneumatic pressure vessel fitted with
accessories like non-return valves and
pressure relief valves. Each zone of supply is
restricted to about 7 storeys or 20m head,
whichever is less. The capacity of the pump is
such that it can, cope up with the peak
demand. Normally, three pumps, called the
lead pump, the supplementary pump and the
standby ump, are prdvided. The standby
pump is i,preferably diesel driven to serve
when there is a power failure. The
hydropneumatic pressure vessel is an airtight vessel, cylindrical in shape and
fabriCated from mild steel plates conforming
to accepted standards [1X-1(2)]. The design
and fabrication of the vessel shall be done in
accordance with good practice [1X-1(3)]*.
The capacity of the vessel is equivalent to
3 min requirements. An air compressor is
also necessary to feed air into the vessel so as
to maintain the required air-water ratio. As
sbon as the demand exceeds the capacity of
*In this section where reference is made to god practice in relation to design, testing, constructlon procedures or other informatiov, the appropriate document
listed at the end of this sectlon may be used as a guide to
the interpretation of thii term.
IX-I-
7. MATERIALS,. FITTINGS AND

A P P L I A N C E S
7.2 Mathials for Pipes-Pipes may be of

any of the following materials:
a) cast iron, vertically cast or centrifugally
(spun) cast,
W steel (iriternally lined or coated with
bitumen or a bituminous composition,
and out-coated with cement concrete or
mortar, where necessary),
C) reinforced concrete,
4 prestresrcd concrete.
e) mild steel tubes or tubulars (galvanized),
0 copper,
8) brass,
h) wrought iron,
j) asbestos cement,
k) lead (see 7.2.2),
mJ polyethylene (see 7.2.3), or
n) unplasticized PVC (see 7.2.3).
7.2.1 The material chosen shall be resistant
to corrosion, both inside and outside.
2.2.2 Lead piping shall not be used to convey domestic water supply. Lead piping may,
however, be used for flushing and overflow
pipes.
7.2.3 Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC
pipes shall not be installed near hot water
pipes or near any other heat sources. t;;or
temperature limitations in the use of polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes to
convey water, reference may be made to
accepted standards [1X-l(4)].
8. CONVEYANCE AND DlSTRIBUTlON
OF WATER WITHIN THE PREMISES
8.1 Basic Principles - Wholesome water
supply provided for drinking and culinary
purposes shall not be liable to contamination
from. any less satisfactory water. There shall,
therefore, be no cross-connection whatsoever
between the distribution system -for
wholesome water and any pipe or fitting
containing unwholesome water, or water
liable to contamination, or of upcertain
YATIONAL BUILDING
C O D E OF INDIA
quality, or water which has been used for any

qther purpose. The provision of reflux or
non-return valves or closed and sealed stop
valves shall not be construed as a permissible
substitute for complete absence of crossconnection.
8.2 The design of the pipe work shall be such
that there is no possibility of backflow
towards the source of supply from any cistern
or appliance, whether by siphonage or
otherwise. Reflux non-return valves shall not
be relied upon to prevent such backflow.
8.3 Where a supply of less satisfactory water
than wholGme water becomes inevitable as
an alternative or is required to be mixed with
the latter, it shall be delivered only into a
cistern and by a pipe or fitting discharging
into the air gap at a height above the top edge
of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore
and in no case less than 15 cm. It is necessary
to maintain a definite air gap in all appliances
or taps used in water-closets.
8.4 All pipe work shall be so designed, laid
or fixed and maintained as to remain completely water-tight, thereby avoiding wastage,
damage to property and the risk of contamination.
8.5 No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to
pass into or through any sewer, scour outlet
or drain or an) manhole connected therewith
nor through any ash pit or manure pit or any
material of such nature that is likely to cause
undue deterioration of the pipe, except where
it is unavoidable.
8.5.1 Where the laying of any pipe through
corrosive soil or previous material is
unavoidable, the piping shall be properly
protected from contact with such soil or
material by being carried through an exterior
cast iron tube or by some other suitable
means as approved by the Authority. Any
existing piping or fitting laid or fixed, which
does not comply with the above
requirements, shall be removed immediately
by the consumer and relaid by him in
conformity with the above requirements and
to the satisfaction of the Authority.
Where piping has to be laid across recently

disturbed ground, the ground shall he
thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a
continuous and even support.
8.7 In designing and planning the layout
of the pipe work, due attention shall be
given to the maximum rate of discharge
required, economy in labour and materials,
protection against damage and corrosion.
water hammer, protection from frost, if
required, and to avoidance of airlocks, noise
transmission and unsightly arrangement.
8.8 To reduce frictional losses, piping shall
be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of
jointing shall be such as to avoid internal
roughness and projection at the joints,
whether of the jointing materials or
otherwise.
8.9 Change in diameter and in direction
shall preferably be gradual rather than
abrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend
or curve in piping shall be made which is
likely to materially diminish or alter the
cross -section.
8.10 N O boiler for generating steam or
closed boilers of any description or an)
machinery shall be supplied direct from a
service or supply pipe. Every such boiler or
machinery shall be supplied from a f e e d
cistern.
9. GENRAL REQUfREMENTS FOR
PIPE WORK
9.1 Mains--The following principles shall
apply for the mains:
4 Service mains shall be of adequate size

to give the required rate of flow.
b) The mains shall be divided into sec-
tions by the provisions of sluice valves

and other valves so that water may be
shut off for repairs.
c) To avoid dead ends, the mains shall be

arranged in a grid formation or in a
network.
d) Where dead ends are unavoidable, a

hydrant shall be provided to act as a
wash-out.
8.5.2 Where lines have to be laid in close

proximity to electric cables or in corrosive
soils, adequate precautions/ protection
should be taken to avoid corrosion.
e) The wash-out valve shall not discharge
8.6 Underground piping shall be laid at

such a depth that it is unlikely to be
damaged by frost or traffic loads and
vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable
to subsidence, but where such ground
cannot be avoided, special precautions shall
be taken to avoid damage to the piping.
Air valves shall be provided at all

summits, and wash-out at ION points
between summits.
directly into a drain or sewer, or into

a manhole or chamber directly connected to it; an effectively trapped
chamber shall be interposed, into which
the wash-out shall discharge.
IX-I-
Mains need not be liid at unvarying

gradients, but may follow the general
contourof the ground. They shall, however, fall continuously towards the
wash-out and rise towards the air
valves. The gradient shall be such that
there shall always be a positive pressure
at every point under working conditions.
The cover for the mains shall be at least
90cm under roadways and 75cm in the
case of footpaths. This cover shall be
measured from the top of the pipe to
the surface of the ground.
The mains shah be located sufficiently
away from other service lines like electric and telegraph cables to ensure
safety and where the mains cannot be
located away from such lines, suitable
protective measures shall -be accorded
to the mains.
9.2 Communication Pipes
Every premises that is supplied with
water by the Authority shall have its
own separate communication pipe. In
the case of a group or block of premises
belonging to the same owner the
same communication pipe may supply
water to more than one premises with
the prior permission of the Authority.
b) The communication pipe between the
water main and the stop-cock at the
boundary of the premises shall be laid
by the Authority.
d Connections up to 5Omm diameter
may be made on the water main by
means of screwed ferrules, provided the
size of the connections does not exceed
one-third the size of the water main.
In all other cases, the connection shall
be made by a T-branch -off the water
main.
4 As far as practicable, the communication
pipe and the underground service pipe
shall be laid at right angles to the main and
in approximately straight lines to facilitate
location for repairs.
e) Every communication pipe shall have a
stop-cock and meter inserted in it. The
waterway of each such fitting shall not be
less than the internal sectional area ofthe
communication pipe and the fittings shall
be located within the premises at a
conspicuous place accessible to the
Authority which shall have exclusive
control over it.
9.3 Consumer Pipes
a) No consumer pipe shall be laid in the
premises to connect the communication
lx-P
c)
e)
r)
f3)
h)
k)
pipe without the approval of the

Authority.
The consumer pipe within the premises
shall be laid underground with a suitable
cover to safeguard against damage from
traffic and extremes of weather.
To control the branch pipe to each
separately occupied part of a building
supplied by a common service pipe, a stop
tap shall be fixed to minimize the
interruption of the supply during repairs.
All such stop valves shall be fixed in
accessible positions and properly
protected. To supply water for drinking or
for culinary purposes, direct taps shall be
provided on the branch pipes connected
directly to the consumer pipe. In the case
of multi-storeyed buildings, downtake
taps shall be supplied from overhead
tanks.
Pumps shall not be allowed on the service
pipe, as they cause a drop in pressure on
the suction side, thereby affecting the
supply to the adjoining properties. in
cases where pumping is required, a
properly protected storage tank of
adequate- capacity shall be provided to
feed the, pump.
No direct boosting (by booster pumps)
shall be allowed from the service pipes
(communication and consumer pipes).
Consumer pipes shall be so designed and
constructed as to avoid air-locks.
Draining taps shall be provided at the
lowest points from which the piping shall
rise continuously to draw-off taps.
Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to
reduce the production and transmission
of noise as much as possible.
Consumer pipes in roof spaces and unventilated air spaces under floors or in
basements shall be protected against
corrosion.
Consumer pipes shall be so located that
they are not unduly exposed to accidental
damage and shall be fixed in such
positions as to facilitate cleaning and
avoid accumulations of dirt.
All consumer pipes shall be so laid as to
permit expansion and contraction or
other movements.
9.4 Prohibited Connections

a) A service pipe shall not be connected into
any distribution pipe; such connection
may permit the backflow of water from a
cistern into the service pipe, in certain
circumstances, with consequent danger of
contamination and depletion of storage
NATIDNAL
b)
d)
e)
capacity. It might also result in pipes and

fittings being subjected to a pressure
higher than that for which they are
designed, and in flooding from overflowing cisterns.
No pipe for conveyance or in connection with water supplied by the Authority shall communicate with any other
receptacle used or capable of being used
for conveyance other than water
supplied by the Authority.
Where storage tanks are provided, no
person shall connect or be permitted to
connect any service pipe with any distributing pipe.
No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any water-closet or a
urinal. All such supplies shall be from
flushing cisterns which shall be supplied
from storage tank.
No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot water system or to
any other apparatus used for heating other
than through a feed cistern thereof.
10. LAYING OF MAINS AND PIPES

ON SITE
10.1 The mains and pipes on site shall be laid
in accordance with good practice [1X-l(5)].
10.2 Excavation and Refilling-The
bottoms of the trench excavations shall be
so prepared that the barrels of the pipes,
when laid, are well bedded for their whole
length on a firm surface and are true to line
and gradient. In the refilling of trenches,
the pipes shall be surrounded with fine
selected material, well rammed so as to resist
subsequent movement of the pipes. No
stones shall be in contact with the pipes; when
resting on rock, the pipes shall be bedded
on fine-selected material or (especially
where there is a steep gradient) on a layer
of concrete.
20:5.1 Service pipes shall be connected to

the mains by means of right-hand screw
down ferrule or T-branches. The ferrules
shall conform to accepted standards
[1X-l(6)].
10.5.2 Precaution against contamination of
the mains shall be taken when making a
connection and, where risk exists, the main
shall be subsequently disinfected. The
underground water service pipe and the
building sewer or drain shall be kept at a
sufftcient distance apart so as to prevent
contamination of water. Water service pipes
or any underground water pipes shall not be
run or laid in the same trench as the drainage
pipe. Where this is unavoidable, the following
conditions shall be fulfilled:
bottom of the water serviceDiDe, at all
ai The
points, shall be at least 3Ocm above the
top of the sewer line at its highest point.
b) The water service pipe shall be placed on a
solid shelf excavated on one side of the
common trench.
c) The ,number of joints in the service pipe
shall be kept to a minimum.
4 The materials and joints of sewer and
water service pipe shall be installed in such
a manner and shall possess such necessary
strength and durabtlity as to prevent the
escape of solids, liquids and gases
therefrom under all known adverse
conditions, such as corrosion strains due
to temperature changes, settlement,
vibrations and superimposed loads.
10.2.1 The pipes shall be carefully cleared

of all foreign matter before being laid.
10.3 Laying Underground Mains- Where
there is a gradient, pipe laying shall proceed
in an uphill direction to facilitate joint
making.
10.3.1 Anchor blocks shall be provided to
withstand the hydraulic thrust.
10.4 Iron surface boxes shall be provided
to give access to valves and hydrants and
shall be supported on concrete or brickwork
which shall not be allowed to rest on pipes.
10.5 Laying Service Pipes
PART IX PLUMBING
S~VICES-SECTION
WAlltR
iUPPLY
20.5.3 The service pipe shah pass into or

beneath the buildings at a depth of not less
than 75cm below the outside ground level
and, at its point of entry through the struca
ture, it shall be accommodated. in a sleeve
which shall have reviously been solidly built
into the wall oP the structure. The s ce
between the pipe and the sleeve shall betp
tiled
with bituminous or other suitable material for
a minimum length of 15 cm.at both ends.
10.6 Pipes Laid Through Ducts, Chases,
Notches or Holes-Ducts or chases in walls
for piping shall be provided during the
building of the walls. If they are cut into
existing walls, they shall be finished sufficiently smooth and large enough for fming the
piping.
20.6.1 Piping laid in notches or holes shsll
not be subjected to external pressure.
10.7 Lugging of P&es- Where lagged Piping
outside buildings is attached to walls,It s&ll
be entirely covered alround w&h water-proof
and fire insulating material and shall not be in
direct contact with the wall. Where it passes,
lx_J
through a wall, the lagging shall be continued

throughout the thickness of the wall.
11. JOlNTING OF PIPES
11.1 Cast Iron Pipes-Jointing may be
done by any of the following methods:
a) spigot and socket joints, or
b) flanged joints.
11.1.1 SPIGOT AND SOCKET JOINTS-The
spigot and socket joints of cast iron or steel
pipes are usually caulked with lead. The
common form of joint is made by first
caulking in spun yarn, which shall be clean and
sterile then filling the remainder of the
joint space by running in molten lead,
taking care that no dross enters the joint and
then thoroughly caulking the lead. The lead
shall conform to the accepted standards
[1X-1(7)]. The lead ne d not extend into the
joint further than thi back of the groove
formed -in the socket. For detailed information regarding the jointing of cast iron pipes
[1X-1(5)].
1l:l.l.l Rubber ring joints may also be
suitable wherever there is a provision for

them in the spigot made by the manufacturer.
11.1.2 FLANGED J OINTS -Flanged joints
shall be made by jointing rings of good
quality, smooth and hard compressed fibre
board of thickness not less than 1.5 mm
and of such width as to fit inside the circle
of bolts. Alternatively, the jointing .rings
may be of rubber, or rubber insertion, or
gutta-percha, or may be of corrugated noncorrosive alloy together with a suitable
jointing paste.
11.1.3 For joints in smaller diameter cast
iron, wrought iron and steel piping, copper
alloy-screwed unions or ferrules shall be
used.
11.2 Steel Pipes -- PlainTended steel pipes
may be jointed by welding.
11.3 Wrought Iron and Steel Screwed
Pipes--Screwed wrought iron or steel
piping may be jointed with screwed and
socketed joints. Care shall be taken to remove
any burr from the end of the pipes after
screwing. A jointing compound approved
by the Authority and containing no red
lead composition shall be used. Screwed
wrought iron or steel piping may also be
jointed with screwed flanges.
Il.4 Asbestos Cement Pipes- A s b e s t o s
be jointed with flexible
joints
cement pipes may
1x+1*
11.5 Copper Pipes

11.5.1 Screwed copper piping shall also be
jointed by screwed copper alloy fittings. The
screw threads of the pipe shall be cleaned out
and the joint made bl, screwing the fittings
after treating the thread with r;L\v linseed oil
or other suitable jointing compound.
11.5.2 Plain copper piping shall be jointed

with compression (manipulative or nonmanipulative) or with capillary joints, in each
case using copper or copper alloy fittings or
by welding. Only manipulative compression
joints are suitable for use with fully annealed
copper pi?ing.
If.5.3 Copper piping may be autogenous
welded or bronze welded. Piping may be
jointed directly or by the use of weldable
copper or copper alloy fittings. Copper to be
welded shall be de-oxidized copper and not
tough pitch copper.
11.5.4 Copper piping of small diameter shall
be jointed to cast iron, lead, wrought iron or
steel piping by the use of copper alloy
screwed unions and ferrules. For screwed
copper piping of diameter larger than 40 mm,
a flanged joint shall be used.
11.6. Leud Pipes-Lead and lead alloy
piping shall be jointed with wiped solder
joints.
il.7 Cnnr*rete Pipes-Concrete pipes shall

be jointed in accordance with good practice
[IX-l(S)].
11.8 Po(ve!h_vlene and Unplasticized PVC
Pipes- Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC
pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good
practice [1X-1(8)].
12. STORAGE OF WATER
12.1 In a building, provision is required to be
made for storage of water for the following
reasons:
4 to provide against interruptions of the
supply caused by repairs to mains, etc;

b) to reduce the maximum rate,of demand on
the mains;
4 to tide over periods ofintermittent supply;
and
d) to maintain a storage for the fire fighting
requirement of the building (see Part IV
Fire protection).
17 Materials Used-Reiervoirs and tanks

I;.2
for the reception and s!orage of water shall be
constructed of reinforced concrete. cast iron.
wrought Iron or galvanized mild steel plates or
sheets and shall be made water-tight without

the use of putty. The materials used shall be of
sufficient strength and thickness.
22.2.1 Tanks made of galvanized steel may be
of welded, riveted or pressed construction.
The metal shall be galvanized or coated
internally with a bituminous composition or
other suitable m$erial, of a kind which.does
not impart a taste or odour to the water,
especially if this has been chlorinated, and it
shall be coated externally with a good quality
anti-corrosive weather-resisting paint.Leadbased paint shall not be used in the tank.
Lead-lined tanks shall not be used.
Rectangular pressed steel tanks shall conform to accepted standards [1X-1(9)].
12.3 Every tank shall be covered with a close
fitting, dust tight, insect and fly (mosquito)
proof lid and shall be provided with a
suitable ball valve conforming to accepted
standards [ IX- I( 1 O)].
12.4 Every tank shall be provided with an
efficient mosquito-proof warning pipe.
12.9 Each storage tank shall be provided
with a stop valve or stop tap at every outlet
other than the overflow pipe.
12.6 Every storage tank shall be easily
qccessiblc and placed in such a position as to
enable thorough inspection and cleaning tobe,
carried out. If the storage capacity required is
more than 5 OtIKl litres, it is advantageous to
arrange it in a series of tanks so
interconnected that each tank can be isolated
for cleaning and inspection without
I interfering with the supply of water. In large
storage tanks, the outlet shall be at the end
; opposite the inlet to avoid stagnation of the
water.
12.7 The outlet pipe shall be fixed 50 to

75mm above the bottom of the tank and
fitted with a strainer, preferably of copper.
12.8 In the case of underground storage
tanks, the design of the tank shall be such
as to provide for the draining of the tank
when necessary and water shall not be
allowed to collect around the tank. The
tank shall be perfectly water-proof and shall
be provided with a cement concrete cover,
having a manhole opening, with a properly
fitting hinged cast iron cover on a leak-proof
cast iron frame.
12.8.1 For jointing steel pipe to a storage
tank, the end of the pipe shall be screwed,
passed through a hole in the tank and secured
by backnuts. both inside and outside. The
pipe end shall be flush with the face of the
inside backnut. Forjointing copper pipe to
?A@1 IX ?LUMNNC
SERVICES-SECTION I
WATER
SUPPLY
or copper tank, a connector of nonferrous material shall be used. The connector

shall have a shoulder to bear on the outside
of the tank and shall be secured by abacknut
inside.
steel
12.9. The quantity of water to be stored

shall be calculated taking into account the
following factors:
4 hours of supply at sufficiently high
pressure to fill up the overhead storage

tariks;
b) frequency of replenishment of overhead
tanks, during the 24 hours;
c) rate and regularity of supply; and
4 consequences of exhausting storage
particularly in case of public buildings
like hospitals.
If the water supply is intermittent and the
hours of supply are irregular, it is desirable
to have a minimum storage of half a days
supply for overhead tanks.
I2.Y.l The particulars of water supply
requirements of residential buildings and of
buildings other than residences are given
under 5.1 and 5.2. It has been stipulated that,
where there is full flushing system, a
minimum of 200 litres per head per day shall
be assured out of which about 45 litres per
day per head may be taken as flushing
requirement and remaining 155 litres for
other domestic purposes.
12.10 When only one communication pipe
is provided for water supply to a building,
it is not necessary to have separate storage
for flushing and sanitary purposes for health
reasons. In such cases when only one storage
tank has been provided, tapping of water
may be done at two different levels (the
lower tapping for flushing) so that a part of
the water will be exclusively available for
flushing purposes [see also 9.4(d)].
13. HOT WATER SUPPLY
INSTALLATIONS
13.1 Design Corrsideration
13.1.1 G ENERAL --In electric water heating
practice for domestic purposes, the accepted
method is to use storage heaters in which
water is steadily heated up to a predetermined
temperature and stored until required
for use. The heating by eiectricity of a large
quantity of water, such as water required
for a hot bath, within the time normally
taken to run the water into the bath, requires
a heater of too high a rating to be practicable in
normal domestic premises.
IX.,_13
23.1.2 ST O R A G E T E M P E R A T U R E
TABLE 4 RATE OF HOT WATER FLQW
13.1.2.1 The design of hot water supply system and its appliances shall be based on the
temperatures at which water is normally
required for the, various uses, namely:
Sink
Hot bath
Warm bath
Tepid bath
6OOC
43O C as run, for use at 41 3 C
37oc
29.5 C
13.1.2.2 In order to minimize the danger of

scalding, precipitation of scale from hard
water, standing heat losses, risk of steam
formation and the possibility of damage to
porcelain or other fittings and to surface
finishes, a storage temperature of 60cC is
recommended. If storage capacity is limited,
a higher temperature up to 65C may be
adopted, when soft water is used.
13.1.3 STORAGE C APACITY -The size ofthe
storage vessel is governed by the maximum
short time demand of the domestic premises.
Depending on local conditions this shall be
50-75 litres at 60 C in a dwelling with a bath
tub and 25 litres at 60C for a shower or a
tap (for bucket supply). The capacity of the
storage vessel shall not be less than 20
percent in excess of the required maximum
short time demand. In larger houses where a
single hot waterbeater is intended to supply
hot water to. more than one bathroom or
kitchen or both, the maximum short time
demand shall be estimated and the capacity
decided accordingly. Small electric or gas
storage heaters of 15-25 litres capacity may
be used to supply one or two points of draw
off depending on the use of hot water.
Values ,of volume of hot water required for
a bath, when ,cold water is mixed with it
are given in Table 3.
TABLE 3 VOLUME OF HOT WATER REQUIRED
FOR A BATH WHEN COLD WATER
IS MIXED WITH IT
Storage temperature,
OC
75
70
65
60
55
50
Percentage of hot
water required
51
55
60
66
73
82.5
Quantity of hot water 59

in litres required for
a 115-litre bath
63
69
76 84
.95
13.1.4 RATE OF FLOW-With storage type

installation, the recommended minimum
rates of flow for different types of fixtures
are given in Table 4.
13.1.5 DESIGN OF S T O R A G E VESSELStorage tanks shall be oblong or cylindrical in
shape and shall be installed, preferably with
d4
(C&use 13.1.4)
SL
Fixtures
No.
(I)
(2)
i )
ii)
iii)
iv)
R ATE OF
FLOW
(3)
litres/min
Bath tub
Kitcheti sink
Wash basin
Shower (spray type)
:i:
:
the long side vertical in order to assist the

effective stratification or layering of hot or
cold water. T e ratio of height to width or
diameter shal Pnot be less than 2 : I. An inlet
baffle should preferably be fitted near the cold
inflow pipe in order to spread the incoming
cold water.
!
13.1.6 M A T E R I A L S F O R S T O R A G E V E S S E L
P IPES -Under no circumstances shall
ungalvanized (black) mild steel pipes an@
fittings, such as sockets, bushes, etc, be used in
any part of a hot water installation, including
the cold feed pipe and thevent pipe. Materials
resistant to the chemical action of water
supplied shall be used in construction of
vessels and pipes. Each installation shall be
restricted to one type of metal only,such as all
copper or all galvanized mild steel. When
water supplied is known to have appreciable
salt content, galvanized iron vessels and pipes
shall not he used. However, it is advisable to
avoid use of lead pipes in making connection
to wash basins.
AND
13.1.7 IMMERSION H EATER INSTALLATION

13.1.7.1 If a domestic storage vessel is to be
adopted to electric heating by the provision of
an immersion heater and thermostat, the
following precautions shall be observed:
LOCATioN OF IMMERSION HEATERSwThe
immersion heater shall be mounted with

its axis horizontal, except in the case of the
circulation type which is normally
mounted with its axis approximately
vertical.
b) In a tank with a flat bottom, a space of
not less than 75 mm below the immersion
heater and 50mm below. the cold feed
connection shall be provided to allow for
accumulation of sludge and scale, where
it will. not affect the working of the
immersion heater.
d In a cylindrical-storage vessel with
inwardly dished!.bottom, the inlet pipe
shall be so arranged that the incoming
cold water is not deflected directly into the
hot water zone. The lowest point of the
immersion heater shall. be 25 mm above
the centre line of the cold feed inlet, which,
iu turn, is usually l,OOmm above the
cylinder rim.
NATIDNAL
BUILDING CODE OF INDtA
- Wherethe
thermostat dqs not form an integral part
of the imwrsion. heater, it shall be
mounted with its axis horizontal, at least
50 mm away from and not lower than the
immersion heater.
e) DUAL HEATER INSTALLATIONS --If
desired, the principle of the dual heater
may be adopted. In this case, one heater
and its thermostat shall be installed at a
low level as indicated in (b) and (c). The
second heater and its thermostat shall be
similarly disposed in the upper half of the
cylinder at a level depending on the reserve
of hot water desired for ordinaty domestic
use. The bottom heater shall be under
separate switch cohtrol.
f)
LOCATIONOFTHERMOSTAT
CLEARANCEAROUNDSTbRAGEVESSEL-
Adequate clearance shall be provided

between the tank and the cupboard, door
or walls tq allow convenient insertion and
adjustmelrt of the immersion heater and
thermostat and to give space for thermal
insulation.
13.1.7.2 RATINGOFIMMERSIONHEATERSThe rating of an immersion heater shall be

f;;;;rtined according to the following
a) proposed hot water storage capacity (the
maximum. with cold water as indicated
in 23.1.3 shall be taken into account),
b) rate of utilization (draw off frequency),
c) permissible recovery period, and
d) inlet water temperature.
13.1.8 THERMAL I NSULATION -The hot
wate: storage vessel and pipes shall be
adequately insulated wherever necessary to
minimize heat l@s. The whole external
surface of the storage vessel including the
cover to the handhole, shall be provided with
a covering equivalent to npt less than 75 mm
thickness of thermal insulating material
having a conductivity of not more than
0.05 W/(m*.C)/ mm at mean teinperztture
of 50 C.
13.2 Cold Waler Supf$v to Heateb~
13.2.1 A storage water heater (pressure type)
shall be fed from a c6M tiater storage tank and
under no circumstances connected directly to
the water main, except the type which
incorporates a feed tank with ball valve: and
overflow pipe arrangement (cistern type
heaters) or non-pressure type heaters.
23.2.2 S TORAGE C ISTERNS
13.2.2.1 The storage capacity of acoldV+er
tank shall be at least twice the capacity of the
PART
IX
hot water heater. The capacity of the storage

tank may, however, be 1.5 times when the .
number of heaters connected to one common
tank exceeds 10.
13.2.2.2 The storage tank for supply of cold
water to hot water heaters shall be separate,
if practicable. In the case of a common tank
which also supplies cold water to the fixtures,
this cold water supply connection shall be so
arranged that 50 percent of the net capacity,
worketi out as in 13.2.2.1, shall be available
for supply to the hot water heaters.
13.2.2.3 In the case of multistoreyed buildings where a common overhead tank over
the stair/lift well is generally installed, it is
advisable to have one or morelocal tanks for
supply to the hot water heaters. This arrangement shall help in reducing the length
of the vent pipes (see Fig. 2).
13.2. .4 In tall multistoreyed buildings
wherrf the static pressure increases with the
height, the total static. pressure on the hot
water heaters on the lowest floor shall not
exceed the rated working pressure of the
hot water heater installed. Should the height
of the building so require, additional tanks
shall be provided on the intermediate floors
to restrict the static head to permissible
limits (see Fig. 3).
13.2.2.5 As an alternative to the arrangements stated in 13.2.2.3 and 13.2.2.4 an
individual storage tank in each flat. may be
provided for supply to hot water heaters (see
Fig. 4).
13.2.3 C OLD W ATER F E E D
13.2.3.1 The feed pipe connecting cold water
iank with the hot water heatcrshall not be of
less than 20 mm bore and it shall leave the cold
water tank at a point not less than 5 cm above
the bottom of the tank and shall connect into
the hot water heater near its bottom. The feed
pipe shall not deliver cold water to any other
conneCtion, but into thi: h,ot water cylinders
only.
13.2.3.2 In the.case of multistoreyed buildings, a common cold water feed pipe inay be
installed, but each hot water heater shall be
provided with a check valve (horizontal type-.
checkyalve shall be preferred to vertical type
for edsy maintenance).
13.2.3.3 Care shall be taken in installing the
piping to prevent air locks in the piping and
negative pressure in the hot water heat=.
Cold water feedpipe shall not be cross
cbnnected with any other source of suppl!
under pressure (see Fig. 2).
P L U M B I N G SERVICES-SECTIOI; 1 WATER SUPPLI (
ic
IX-l---
LEGEND
OVERHEAD TANK OVER STAIRWELL
y OR LIFT SHAFT COMMON FOR
ALL SHAFTS
&l
i
HWH
VENT
COLD WATER SUPPLY
---_-
HOT WATER SUPPLY
HOT WATER HEATER

LAVATORY BASIN
HWH
LB
S
SHOWER
..w
WATER TANK OVER PLUMBlNG

SHAFT INDIVIDUAL FOR EACH
6th FLOOR
SUPPLY TO
HWH
S
.
L--..-_-/..-.l
+./J--_
ieB
I I
..
HWH
LB
FLOOR
-..--b-MAIN
0VERHEA;TANK
Fig.2 Installation fbr 8-Storq,led Building
13.3 Hot Water Piping
13.3.1 EX~ASSIOS PI P E
OR
ENT
PIPE
13.3.1.1 Each pressure type hot water heater

or cylinder shall be provided with a vent pipe
1X-l
l6
of not less than 20 mm bore. The vent pipe

shall rise above the water line of the cold
water tank by at least IS cm plus 1 cm for
everv 3Ocm height of the water line above
the Lottom of the heater. The vent shall discharge ;lt ;I ICWI higher than the cold tiatcr
OVERHEAD TANK OVER STAIRWELL OR

LIFT WELL COMMON FOR ALL SHAFTS
SUPPLY TO TANK NO. 1,2,3
HWH
VENTS-
WATER TANK OVER PLUMBING SHAFT

INDIVIDUAL FOR EACH SHAFT
TANK 1 FLOOR 14 -20

TANK 2 FLOOR 7 - 1 3
TANK 3 FLOOR GF - 6
14th TO 20th
FLOOR
HWH
VENTS 14th FLOOR
liliii!l!l L+7
L..
I!
HWH s
..a
7th TO 13th
FLOOR
i
LB
HWH
VENTS=
, 7th FLOOR
L_--Ll-_.J
-_-_
L
AGROUND FLOOR
TO 6th FLOOR
,J
LEGEND
COLD WATER SUPPLY ---.

HOT WATER SUPPLY ---HOT WATER HEATER
HWH
LAVATORY BASIN
LB
SHOWER
S
-.-.-MAIN TO
OVERHEAD TANK
Fig. 3 Installation for Al-Stot:I.ed Buiklitt,q
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 1
WATYII SUPPI.\
,&,..1
c OVERHEAD TA N K O V E R S T A I RW EL L
iIR LIFT SHAFT COMMON FOR
ALL SHAFTS
LEGEND
COLD WATER SUPPLi --_
HOT WATER SUPPLY ---HWH
HOT WATER HEATER
LB
LAVATORY BASIN
SHOWER
OVERHEAD TANK
h FLOOR
SUPPLY TO
FLOOR
---
A_
MAIF TO OVERHEAD TANK
Fig. 4 Installation for &Storyed Building with Individual Water Tanks
tank and preferably in the cold water tank

supplying the hot water heaters. Care shall
be taken to ensure that any accidental discharge from the vent does not hurt or scald
any passerby or persons in the vicinity.
13.3.1.2 The vent pipe shall be connected
to the highest point of the heater vessel and
it shall not project downwards inside it, as
otherwise air may be trapped inside, resulting in surging and consequent noises.
lx.,!8
13.3.2.3 At no point, after leaving the vessel,

shall the vent pipe dip below the level of its
connection with the vessel.
13.3.1.4 A vent pipe may, however, be used
for supply of hot water to any point between
the cold water tank and the hot water
heaters.
13.3.1.5 The vent pipe shall not be provided
with any valve or check valves.
NATIONAL
B U I LD I N G
CODE
0F INDiA
13.3.2
HO T W
ATER
a),
HEATERS
13.3.2.1 The common hot water delivery

pipe shall leave the hot water heater near
tts top and shall be of not less than 20mm
bore generally, not less than 25 mm bore if
hot water taps are installed on the same
floor as that on which the hot water heater
is situated.
13.3.2.2 Hot .water taps shall be of such
design as wouldcause the minimum friction,
Alternatively, oversized tap may be provided, such as a 20 mm tap on a 15 mm pipe.
13.3.2.3 The hot water distributing system
shall be so designed as to ensure that the
time lag between opening of the draw-off
taps and discharge of hot water is reduced to
the minimum to avoid wastage of an undue
amount of water which may have cooled
while standing in the pipes when the taps
are closed. With this end in view, a secondary circulation system with flow and return
pipes from the hot water tank shall be used
.where justified. Whether such a system is
used or not, the length of pipe to a hot water
draw-off tap, measured along the pipe from
the tap to the hot water tank or the secondary circulation pipe, shall not exceed the
lengths given in Table 5.
TABLE 5 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LENGTHS
OF HOT WATER DRAW-OFF PIPES
L ARGEST INTERNAL
SL
No. DIAMETER OF P I P E
(1)
(2)
(3)
m
i) Not exceeding 20 mm
ii) E;rtdtg
20 nim but not exceeding
iii) Exceeding 25 mm
LENGTH
12
7.5
3.0
NOTE-III the case of a composite pipe of different

diameters, the largest diameter is to be taken into consideration for the purpose of this table.
13.3.2.4 Wherever mixing of hot and cold

water is done by a mixing fitting, that is, hot
and cold stop-cocks deliver to a common
outlet of mixed water (that is, showers, basin
or bath supply fittings), the pressure in the
cold and hot water systems shall be equal.
This can be achieved by connecting the cold
water supply from an overhead tank at the
same st ic height as the overhead tank
supply2
g cold water to the hot water heaters.
In case this is not possible, hot and cold
water should be supplied to the fixtures by
separate supply taps.
13.4 Types of Hot Water Heaters- The
various types of water heaters used for
preparation of hot water are as follows:
PART IX PLUMBING
E LECTRIC S T O R A G E H E A T E R S:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Non-pressure or open outlet type,

Pressure type,
Cistern type, and
Dual heater type.
b) GAS W ATER H EATERS:

i) Instantaneous type, and
ii) Storage type.
13.4.1 The quality and construction of the
different tvnes of hot water heaters shall be
in accordance with accepted stabdards
[1X-1( 1 I)].
13.4.2 Typical arrangements of different
types of water heaters are shown in Fig. 5
and 6.
13.4.3 Requirements in regard to inspection
and maintenance of hot water supply
installations shall be in accordance w.ith 16.1
and 16.4.
14. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM
14.1 All water mains communications pipes,
service pipes and pipes used for distribution
of water for domestic purposes shall be
thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before
being taken into use and also after every
major repair. The method of disinfection
shall be subject to the approval of the
Authority. The pipes shall also be
periodically cleaned at intervals, depending
upon the quality of water, communication
pipes and the storage cisterns shall be
thoroughly cleaned at least once every year in
order tp remove any suspended impurities
that may have settled in the pipes or the
tanks.
14.2 Disinfection of Storage Tanks and
Downtake Distribution Pipes-Storage
tanks and downtake pipes shall be disinfected
as in 14.2.1.
14.2. J The storage tanks and pipes shall first
be filled with water and thoroughly flushed
out. The storage tank shall then be filled with
water again and a disinfecting chemical
containing chlorine added gradually while
the tanks are being filled, to ensure thorough
mixing. Sufficient quantities. of chemicals
shall be used to give the water a dose of 50
parts of chlorine to one million parts of
water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used,
the proportions will be 15Og of powder to
1000 litres of water. The powder shall be
mixed with water to a creamy consistency
before being added to the water in the storage
tank. If a proprietary brand of chemical is
used, the proportions shall be as specified by
19
SERVICLS-SECTION I WATER
SUPPLY
IX-l---
yOVERHEAD TANK
OVERHEAD
TANK -j
OROUND FLOOR
Fig. 6 Electric Water Heater Working in

Conjunction with Fuel-Fired Boiler
the makers. When the storage tank is full, the

supply shall be stopped and all the taps on
the distributing pipes opened successively
working progressively away from the storage
tank. Each tap shall be closed when the water
discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The
storage tank shall then be topped.up with
water from the supply pipe and wttk more
disinfecting chemical in the recommanded
proportions. The storage tank and pipes shall
then remain charged for at least 3 h. Finally,
the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly,
flushed out before any water is used for
domestic purposes.
15.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS IN

HlGH ALTITUDES AND/OR SUB-ZERO TEMPERATURE REGIONS
15.1 Selection and Source-In general, the

site selected for a water source shall be such
as to mipimize the length of transmission line
so as to reduce the inspection and upkeep.
Attempt shall be made, where feasible, to
locate the source_ near the discharge of waste
heat, such as of power plants provided it does
not affect the potability of water.
15.2 Pumping Installations - Pump and
pumping machinery shall be housed mside
well-insulated chambers. Where necessary,
arrangements shall be made for heating the
inside of pump houses. Pump houses, as far
as possible, should be built directly above the
water intake structures.
15.3 Prdtection of Storage Water and Treat-ment- Where ambient temperatures are so
low as io cause danger of freezing, proper
housing, insulation and protection shalJ be
provided for all processes and equipment. If
necessary, means shall be provided for
proper heating of the enclosure.
Fig. 5 Non-pressure Types Installation
,x4-20
15.4 Transmivsion and Distribution - Freezing of the buried pipe may be avoided
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE DF INlIlA
primarily by laying the pipe below the level of

the frost line; well consolidated bedding of
clean earth or sand, under, around or over
the pipe should be provided. For the efficient
operation and design of transmission and
distribution work, the available heat in the
water shall be economically utilized and
controlled. If the heat which is naturally
present in water is inadequate to satisfy heat
losses from the system, the water shall be
warmed. Where economically feasible,
certain faucets on the distribution system
may be kept in a slightly dripping condition
so as to keep the fluid in motion and thus
prevent its freezing. If found unsuitable for
drinking purposes, such water may be used
for heating purposes. Heat losses shall be
reduced by insulation, if necessary. Any
material that will cat&, _=absoi% or hold
moisture shall not be used for insulation
purposes. Adequate number of break
pressure water tanks and air release valves
shall be provided in the distribution system.
NOTE -The level of frost line is generally found to be
between 0.9 and I .2 m below ground level in the northern regions of India, wherever freezing occurs.
15.4.1 MATERIALS FOR P IPES -Distribution

pipes shall be made of any of the following
materials conforming to Part V Building
materials:
a) high density polyethylene pipes,
b) asbestos cement pipes,
c) galvanized iron pipes,
d) cast iron pipes, and
e) unplasticized PVC pipes (where it is laid
below frost line).
15.4.2 M A T E R I A L S F O R IN S U L A T I O N O F
P IPES - The normal practice in India is to
surround the pipe with straw, grass or jute
wrapped over with gunny and painted with
bitumen; alternatively, other materials, like
85 percent magnesia, glasswool, etc, may also
be used.
15.4.4 In the conventional distribution system involving the use of a network of pipelines requiring no auxiliary ,heat, it is essential that the pipelines are buried well below
the frost line. Adequate facilities for draining
the pipelines shall be provided where there is
a danger of frost.
1 5 . 4 . 5 HOUSE SERVICE CONNECTIQNSHouse service connections shall be kept
operative by the use of adequate insulation at
exposed places extending below the frost
line. Figure, 7 shows a typical arrangement
for providing insulation for house service
connections.
15.5 For detailed information on planning
and designing water supply system peculiar
to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country, reference may be
made to good practice [1X-1(12)].
16.1 Testing of Mains Before Commencing
Work - All pipes, fittings and appliances
shall be inspected, before delivery at the site
to see* whether they conform to accepted
standards. All pipes and fittings shall be
inspected and tested by the manufacturers at
their factory and shall comply with the
requirements of this section. They shall be
tested hydraulically under a pressure equal to
twice this maximum permissible working
pressure or under such greater pressure as
may be specified. The pipes and fittings shall
be inspected on site before laying and shall be
sounded to disclose cracks. Any defective
items shall be clearly marked as rejected and
forthwith removed from the site.
15.4.3 D ISTRIBUTION M ETHODS - Distribution by barrels or tank trucks shall be

employed, where the water requirements are
temporary and small. Utmost care shall be
exercised for preventing the water from being
contaminated by maintaining a residual of
disinfecting agent at all times. Hoses, pails
and the tank shall be kept free from dust and
filth during all periods of operation. Where
winter temperatures are low, making frost
penetration depths greater during the winter,
and where adequate facilities for heating the
water in the distribution system do not exist,
the use of tank trucks or barrels for delivery
of water shall be considered only for cold
weather; during the warm weather, piping
system for seasonal use may be
supplemented.
16.2 Testing of Mains after Laying- After

laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly
and carefully charged with water by
providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop-cock, so
that all air is expelled from the main. The
main is then allowed to stand full of water for
a few days if time permits, and then tested
under pressure. The test pressure shall be
0.5 N/ mm* or double the maximum working
pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure
shall be applied by means of a manually
operated test pump, or, in the case of long
mains or mains of a large diameter, by a
power-driven test pump, provided the pump
is not left unattended. In either case, due
precaution shall be taken to ensure that the
required test pressure is not exceeded.
Pressure gauges shall be accurate and shall
preferably have been recalibrated before the
test. The pump having been stopped, the test
pressure shall maintain itself without
measurable loss for at least 5 min. The mains
shall be tested in sections as the work of
31
IX-l--=
__-_-----m-v-
SERVICE
FROST LINE
_A----- -
CONNECTION
Fig. 7 Insulation Details tit Service Connection
laying proceeds; it is an advantage to have

the joints exposed for inspection during the
testing. The open end of the main may be
temporarily closed for testing under
moderate pressure by fitting a water-tight
expanding plug of which several types are
available. The end of the main and the plug
shall be secured by struts or otherwise, to
resist the end thrust of the water pressure in
the mains.
16.2.1 If the section of the main tested terminates into a sluice valve, the wedge of the
valve shall not be used to retain the water;
instead the valve shall be temporarily fitted
with a blank flange, or, in the case of a
socketed valve, with a plug, and the wedge
placed in the open position while testing. End
support shall be given as in 16.2.
16.3 Tesiing of Service Pipes and FittingsWhen the service pipe is complete, it shall be
slowly and carefully charged with water,
allowing all air to escape, care being taken to
avoid all shock or water hammer. The service
pipe shall then be inspected under working
conditions of pressure and flow. When all
draw-off taps are closed, the service. pipe
shall be absolutely water-tight. All ptpmg,
fittings and appliances shall be checked for
satisfactory support, and protection from
damage, corrosion and frost. Because of the
possibility of damage in transit, cisterns shall
be re-tested for water-tightness on arrival at
the site, before fixing.
16.4 In addition to the provisions given
in i6.l. provisions given in 16.4.1 to 16.4.3
M-L**
shall also apply to hot water supply

installations in regard to inspection and
testing.
16.4.1 T ESTING OF THE S YSTEM A F T E R
INSTALLATION -After the hot water system,

including the hot water heaters, has been
installed, it shall be carefully charged with
water, so that all air is expelled from the
system. The entire system shall then be
hydraulically tested to a pressure of
0.5 N/mm or twice the working pressure,
whichever is greater, for a period of at least
half an hour after a steady state is reached.
The entire installation shall then be inspected
visually for leakages, and sweating. All
defects found shall be rectified by removing
and remaking the particular section.
Caulking of threads, hammering and welding
of leaking joints shall not be allowed.
16.4.2 HOT W ATER T ESTING -After the
system has. been proved water-tight, the hot
water heaters shall be commisstoned by
connecting the same to the electrical supply.
The system shall then be observed for leakage
in pipes due to expansion or overheating.
The temperature of water at outlets shall be
recorded. The thermostats of the appliances
shall be checked and adjusted to
temperatures specified in 13.1.2.1.
16.4.3 E LECTRICAL C ONNECTION - F o r
relevant provisions regarding general and
safety requirements fdr household and
similar electrical appliances, reference may
be made to good practice [1X-1(13)]. The
metal work of the water heating appliances

and installation other than current carrying
parts shall be bonded and earthed in
conformity with the good practice [IXI( 13)]. It should be noted that screwing of an
immersion heater into a ,tank or cylinder
cannot be relied upon to effect a low
resistance earth connection, 8 satisfactory
separate earthing of heater should be
effected.
17. GUIDELINES TO MAINTENANCE
17.1 Storage tanks shall be regularly

inspected and shall be cleaned out
periodically, if necessary. Tanks showing
signs of corrosion shall be emptied,
thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose
material (but not scraped), cleaned and
coated with one of the proprietary
bituminous compositions not liable to impart
taste or odour or otherwise contaminate the
water. Before cleaning the cistern, the outlets
shall be plugged io prevent debris from
entering the pipes. Tanks shall be examined
for metal wastage and watertightness after
cleaning.
17.2 Record drawings showing pipe layout
and valve positions shall be kept up to date
and inspection undertaken to ensure that any

maintenance work has not introducedcrossconnections or any o$her undesirable feature.,
Any addition or alterations to the systems
shall be duly recorded from time to time.
17.3 Any temporary attachment fixed to a
tap or outlet shall never be left in such a
position that back-siphonage of polluted
water may occur into the supply system.
17.4 All valves shall periodically be operated
to maintain free Bmovement of the working
parts.
17.5 All taps and ball valves shall be watertight, glands shall be made good, washers
shall be replaced and the mechanism of
spring operated taps and ball valves shall be
repaired where required.
17.6 All overflow pipes shall be examined
and kept free from obstructions.
17.7 The electrical installation shall be
checked for earth continuity and any defects
or deficiencies corrected in the case of hot
water supply installations.
AP\PENDIX
(Clause 3.2)
APPLICATION F ORM F~RTEMPORARY/PERMANENT SUPPLY
OFWATER/FOR
ADDITIONS ND/OR ALTERATIONS FOR
SUPPLY 08 WATER
t
make application to the+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/We. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .hereby
.
for the temporary/permanent supply of water for the following additions and/or alterations
to the water supply requireinents and water fittings at the premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WardNo . . . . . . . . .
. the purpose
Street No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road/ Streetknown as. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .for
described below and agreed to pay such charges as the Authority may fromtimk to time be
entitled to make and to conform to all their bye-laws andregulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
licensed plumber, has been instructed by me/us to carry out the plumbing work.
Description of the preniises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Address,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...........~........................................
Purpose for which water is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,..............................r..............................................................................................................
The connection/connections taken by me/ us for temporary use, shall not be used byme/us
for permanent Supply unless such a permission is granted to me/us in writing by the
Authority.
I/ We hereby u n d e r t a k e t o give the* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
due notice of any additions or alterations to the above mentioned supply which I/ We may
desire to make.
5,
_-..L_*Insert here the name of Zhe Aurhority.
PART
IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTlOFt
I WATER SUPPLY
1\.,.23
My/Our requirements. of water supply are as under:

a) I/ We request that one connection be granted for the whole of the premises.
b) I/ We request that, separate connections may be granted for each floor and I/ We undertake to pay the cost of the separate connections.
c) My/Our probable requireme:rcs for trade purpose are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day and
and for domestic purposes are. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day.
d) Fr existing supply,is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day. Our additional requirement of supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . htres per day.
e) The details aa regards proposed additions and alterations in fittings are as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . .................................~.........~............
Signature of the licensed plumber . . . . . . . . .
Name and address of the licensed plumber..
...............................................
Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signature of the applicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name and address d the applicant . . . . . . . .
.*.........................a*.-............
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTE I-Please strike out whatever is not applicable.

NOTE 2-The application should be signal by the owner of the premises or his conatitutcd attorney and rLJl k
countersigned by the licensed plumber.
APPENDIX B
(Cluuse 3.3)
FORM FOR LICENCED PLUMBERS COMPLETIONCERTlFlCATE
Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work of water connection No..............
for the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected and connection given.
Ward No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road/Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locality.. .........................
Block N o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H o u s e No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Existing water connection No. (if any)...................

Owned by.......................................
Owners address.. ..............................
Applicants name............... ......... ............. son
Address ..................................................
Situation.................................................
Size of main. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Street
Where main is situated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,x.,.*4
of.............................................
I
i
0
!WO
-20
--1O
_r
d
-5
LAMINAR FLOW
-5
.r
CRW~L
/Hu(GE LM
710
ml
ZONE
rTRANSlTION
LONE
-2
-2
TV.0
-50
11 ! !
! LSO8
-8,
0.05
-04
______----
v,
w
t,,
___- ________-----
_ __;___------
7-----------
.- ___+,-----
-0.2
-0.0
i
Y
Y
-0.5
r_
-0.1
"a
x
B
L
-0.2
-0.05
_*.A,
-0.02
-0.00,
-0.01
- 00005
cf
r
i
L
so
.0,2
- oaOO2
- 0305
- OaOI
0.0,
0050-l
,W
WlkES C# VD 04 MElRE SEC,OnO NITS (FROM SCME@J \
!
O~OOOM
20
(Al NORMAL PRESSLWEJ
AIR TEMP
\\
\
~lunc vlscowY:Y:cos
WTS cEw7lsTwsl
\\
\
\.
\ L____--~-~--~,~~ER
b FMI( @ 10
@-----------------
Size of service pipe ..................................................

Size of ferrule..................................................
No. of taps.. .................................... No. of closets..................................................
No.
of other fittings
and appliances.. ................................................
R o a d c u t t i n g a n d r e p a i r i n g f e e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paid Rs...................(Receipt No.................dated.. ..............) (receipt enclosed)
Dated.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signature of licensed plumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.......................................
Name and address of the licensed plumber....

...............................................................
The Authoritys Report
Certified that the communication and distribution pipes and all water fittings have been laid,
applied and executed in accordance with the provisions of bye-laws, and satisfactory arrangements have been made for draining off waste water.
Connection will be made on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. _
The Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX C
( Clause 6.4.1)
UNIVERSAL PIPE FRICTION DIAGRAM
C-l. The universal pipe friction diagram given in Fig. 8 consists of a graph with three linked
nomograms, by means of which it is .possible not only to see at a glance the type of flow
applicable to any particular problem, but also to obtain a solution rapidly and without
calculation.
NOTE-Although every care is taken in the preparation of the nomogram to make it sufficiently accurate, it should be
noted that the nomogram is not necessarily an exact answer for the quantities required. Therefore, it is recommended
that the nomogram may be used to get the graphical solution, though these solutions may, in the nature of thin@, be to a
lesser accuracy than that obtained by actual calculations. If exact and very accurate results are required for any purpose,
these may be obtained by actual arithmetical computations.
APPEiNDIX
(Clause 6.4.2)
NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAMS EQUATION
(see Fig. 9)
D-l. Examples of the use of nomogram are given below:
Example 1
Find the total friction loss in 25 mm4 G.I. Pipe discharging 0.25 l/s in a total length of 200 m.
PAIT I x
~UJMUNC SIIVICES-SECTION
WAIER SW?LY
A.29
0 *l
- 0.26
Procedure
Q=O.25 I/s
- 0.3
Pipe
Frictional loss from nomogram

=30m/lOOOm
400
z 70
-60
-50
0
_
-40
730
El
r200 a
-20
iz
8
I
E
L
%
'50 I
L
z
-10
- -8
Total friction loss in 300 m length

= 3OmllOOOm =orn
1000
2 3C5_
Example 2
lo-
Find suitable diameter pipe to carry I5 II s

from service line to overhead tank.
20-
Total length of service main = 200 m

Kesidual pressure available at the take off
point on supply line is I5 m.
- 6
ii
a
r
.J
- 5
-4
.g
_I
IL
-2
Procedure
ii!_
h_ 50 z 2Qo:: -40 2 300K
E_ - 30
500-
- 2-o
Available head = I5 m
._
Deduct residual head = 2m
- 30
Deduct IO percent for losses in bends and

specials = 1.3 m
- 1.0
Friction head available for, loss in pipe, of

.2OOm = 15-2-1.3 = 11.7m
1000=
-1
4 = 25 mm
f
5 -20
15
Friction head available for loss in pipe of =
-0.5
-0*2
-0.3
- 0.25
Fig. 9 Nomogram of Hazen hi

Equation (L ~100)
1x-P
Williams
From the nomogram for a discharge of

15 1;s and friction loss of 58.5mi I OOOm
diameter of nearest commercial size of
pipe is 100 mm diameter.
.dATlONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as good practice and accepted
standards in the fuIfiIment of rhe requirements of the Code. The iatest aversion of a standard
shall be adopted at the time of enforcement <?f the Code. The standards listed may be used by, the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list the number appearing in the lirst column tiithin parentheses indicates the
number of the references in this part/section
(1) IS : Guidelines for registration of plumbers (under preparation)
(6) IS : 2692- I978 Specification for ferrules

for water services (firs/ revision)
(2) IS: 2041-1982 Specification tar steel

plates for pressure vessels used at
moderate and low temperature (first
revision)
(7) IS: 782-1978 Specification for caulking

lead (third revision)
(8) IS: 7634 Code of practice for plastics
pipe work for potable water supplies:
(3) IS: 28251969 Code of practice for unfired pressure vessel
IS : 7634 (Part 1 I)- 1975 Part 1 I Laying

and jointing polyethylene (PE) pipes
(4) 1s : 3076-1984 Specification for low density polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies (second revision) (under print)
IS : 4984- 1978 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies, sewage and industrial effluents
(second revision)
IS:49851968 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water
supplies
(5) IS: 783-1959 Code of practice for laying
06 concrete pipes
IS: 3114-1965 Code of practice for laying
of cast iron pipes
IS : 5822- I970 Code of practice for laying
of welded steel pipes for water supply
PART
I X PLUMSING SCRVKCS-SECTION I WATEJt
SUPPLY
lS:7634 (Part Ill)-1975 Part.111 Laying and jointing of unplasticized PVC

pipes
(9) IS: 804-1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel tanks (first revision)
(10) IS : 1703- 1977 Specification for ball
valves (horizontal plunger type)
including floats for water supply
(I I) lS:7558-1974 Code of practice for
domestic hot water installations
(12) IS:6295-1971 Code of practice for water
supply and drainage in high altitudes
and/ or sub-zero temperature regions
(13)IS : 302- 1979 General and safety
requirements for household and similar
electrical appliances wfth revision)
1X4-31

SECTION2DRAINAGEANDSANITATION
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
1. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3. PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF PLANS
...
...
5. DRAINAGE AND SANITATION REQUIREMENTS
...
6. MATERIALS, FITTINGS AND APPLIANCES
...
11
7. PRELIMINARY DATA FOR DESIGN
...
II
...
18
9. DESIGN
...
29
10. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF

SANITARY WASTES
...
31
11. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF RAIN

OR STORM WATER
...
32
12. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF SANITARY

APPLIANCES
...
32
13. REFUSE CHUTE SYS.TEM
...
32
...
33
1.5. MAINTENANCE
. . .3 4
16. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
...
35
APPENDIX A APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES
...
35
APPENDIX B FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND

SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS
. . . 36
APPENDIX C FORM FOR LICENSED PLUMBERS COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION
2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
...
38
1x-2-

S?XTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the drainage and sanitation requirements of buildings, design,
construction and maintenace of drains inside buildings and from the buildings up to the
connection to the public sewer, cesspool or other watercourse, This section also covers drainage
systems peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country.
0.2 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. The first revision is intended to update the
provisions in the light of the revision of the standards on which it was based. These have been
incorporated in this revision. This revision incorporates the following major changes:
a) Rationalization of definitions.
b) The requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than
cl
4
e)
0
g)
h)
3
k)
residences have been modified.

A table for sanitation facilities in fruit and vegetable markets has been added.
A table giving detailed guidance regarding the selectionof plumbing system, depending on the
nature of drainage load in buildings and height of buildings, has been introduced.
Provision relating to safeguards to be adopted in single stack system have been amplified.
The values of gradients, pipe sizes and the corresponding discharges have been modified.
Sizes of manholes/ inspection chambers have been rationalized.
The sizing of rain water pipe for roof drainage has been modified to take into account rainfall
intensities and recommend sizes on a more rational basis.
Provisions for drainage and sanitation system peculiar to high altitudes and/or subzero
temperature regions of the country have been added.
Requirements of the refuse chute system have been covered.
0.3 The information contained in this section is based iargely on the following Indian Standards:
IS: 1172-1983 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation third
(
revbion ).
IS: 1742-1983 Code of practice for building drainage (second revision ).
IS: 5329-1983 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above, ground for buildings(first
revkion)
IS: 6295: 197 1 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and/ or sub-zero
temperature regions.
1x-2-
NATmuL BUILDING corn no
INDIA
I. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the design, layout,
construction and maintenance of drains for
foul water, surface writer and subsoil water
and sewage, together with all ancillary
works, such as connections, manholes and
inspection chambers used within the building and from the building to the connection
to a public sewer or to treatment work,cesspool, a soakaway or a watercourse.
I.2 This section does not cover the details
of methods of disposal of sewage in the
absence of public sewer.
2. TERMINOLOGY
A UTHORITY H AVING J URISDICTION -The
the Code/ Part may authorize a committee or
B ARREL -This portion of a pipe in .which
the diameter and wall thickness remain
uniform throughout.
B EDDING -The material on which the pipe
is laid and which provides support for the
pipe. Bedding can be concrete, granular
material or the prepared trench bottom.
B RANCH W ASTE P IPE ( BWP)-A pipe

connecting one or more waste appliances to
the main waste pipe.
CYAIR -A bed of concrete or other suitable
material on the trench floor to drovide a
support for the pipes at intervals.
C HANNEL -The open waterway through
which sewage, storm water or other liquid
wastes flow at the invert of a manhole or an
inspection chamber.
C H U T E-A vertical pipe system passing
from floor to floor provided with ventilation
and inlet openings for receiving refuse from
successive floors and ending at the ground
floor on the top of the collecting chamben;
C LEANING E Y E-An access opening in a
pipe or pipe fitting arranged to facilitate the
cleaning of obstructions and fitted with
removable cover.
C OLLECTION C HAMBER -A compartment
situated at the lower end of the chute for
collecting and housing the refuse during the
period between two succqsive cleanings.
C ONNECTION
-The junction of a foul water

drain, surface water drain or sewer from
buildmg or building with public sewer treatment works, cesspool, soakaway or other
water courses.
COVER
a) A removable plate for permitting access
BENCHING -Sloping surfaces constructed

on either side of channels at the base of a
manhole or inspection chamber for the
purpose of confining the flow of sewage,
avoiding the accumulation of deposits and
providing a safe working platform.
b) The vertical distance between the top of
B R A N C H S O I L P I P E ( BSP ) - A p i p e
C ROWN OF
connecting one or moe soil appliances to the

main soil pipe.
B RANCH S OIL W ASTE P IPE ( B S W P ) - A

pipe connecting one oi more soil and/or
waste appliances to the main soil waste pipe
(one-pipe system).
B RANCH V ENTILATING P IPE ( BVP)-A
pipe, one end of which is connected to the
system adjacent to the trap of an appliance
and the other to a main ventilating pipe or a
drain-ventilating pipe. It is fitted to prevent
loss of water seal from a trap owing to partial
vacuum, back pressure, or surging caused by
air movement within the pipe system. It also
provides ventilation for the branch waste
pipe.
PART IX PLUMRING
to a pipe, fitting, vessel or appliance.
the barrel of a burried pipe or other

construction and the surface of the
ground.
T RAP -The topmost point of the

inside of a tnp outlet.
DEEP MANHOLE -A manhole of such depth

that an access shaft is required in addition to
the working chamber.
DEPTH by MANHOLE -The vertical distance
from the top of the manhole cover to the
outgoing invert of the main drain channel.
D IAMETER -The nominal internal diameter
of pipes and fittings.
D RAIN -A conduct or channel for the
carriage of storm water, sewage or other used
water.
SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
1x-2-
D RAIN V ENTILATING P IPE (DVP)-A pipe

installed to provide flow of air to or from a
drain to prevent undue concentration of foul
air in the d,rain. The main soil pipe or main
waste pipe may serve as drain ventilating pipe
wherever their upper portions, which do not
receive discharges, are extended to the roof
level and let open to air.
D RAINAGE
-The removal of,any liquid by a

system constructed for the purpose,
D R A I N A G E W O R K- T h e d e s i g n a n d
construction of a system of drainage.
D ROP
C ONNECTION -A length of conduit

installed vertically immediately before its
connection to a sewer or to another drain.
D ROP M ANHOLE -A manhole installed
in a
sewer where the elevation of the incoming
sewer considerably exceeds that of the outgoing sewer; a vertical waterway outside the
manhole is provided to divert the waste from
the upper to the lower level so that it does not
fall freely into the manhole except at peak
rate of flow.
support to the sides of a pipe or channel

above the concrete bedding.
H E E L R E S T B E N D O R D U C K- FO O T
B E N D-A bend, having a foot formed
integrally in its base, used to receive a vertical
pipe.
HIGHWAY AUTHORITY -The public body in
which is vested, or which is the owner of, a
highway reparrable by the inhabitants
collectively; otherwise the body or persons
responsible for the upkeep of the highway.
I NLET H OPPER -A receptacle fitting for
receiving refuse from each floor and dropping it into the chute.
iNSPECTION CH A M B E R -A w a t e r - t i g h t
chamber constructed in any house-drainage
system which takes wastes from gully traps
and disposes of to manhole with access for
inspection and maintenance.
I NTERCEPTOR M ANHOLE
C HAMBER -A manhole
OR
IN T E R C E P T O R
incorporating an
intercepting trap and providing means of
access thereto.
F ITTINGS -Fittings shall mean coupling,

flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions,
waste with plug, P or S trap with vent, stop
ferrule, stop tap, bib tap, pillar tap, globe
tap, ball valve, cistern, storage tank, baths,,
water-closets, urinals, boiler, geyser, pumping set with motor and accessories, meter,
hydrant, valve and any other article used in
connection with water supply, drainage and
sanitation.
JUNCTION PIPE-A
F IXTURE U N I T-A quantity in terms of

which the load producing effects on the
plumbing system of different. kinds of
plumbing fixtures is expressed on some
arbitrarily chosen scale.
M AIN Sole WASTE P IPE (MSWP)-A pipe

connecting one or more branch soil waste
pipes to the drain.
FORMATION -The finished level of the excavation at the bottom of a trench or heading
prepared to receive the permanent work.
FRENCH DR A I N O R R U B B L E DRAIN-A
shallow trench filled with coarse rubble,
clinker, or similar material with or without
field drain pipes.
G ULLY C H A M B E R-The chamber built of
masonry round a gully trap for housing the
same.
G U L L Y T R A P-A trap provided in a
drainage system with a water seal fixed in a
suitable position to collect waste water from
the scullery, kitchen sink, wash basins, baths
and rain water pipes.
HA~~NCHING -Outward .sloping concrete

IX-Z-
INVERT -The lowest point of the internal

surface, of a pipe or channel at any crosssection.
pipe incorporating one
or more branches.
M A I N S OIL P IPE ( M S P ) - A p i p e
connecting one or more branch waste1 soil
pipes to the drain.
M AIN V E N T I L A T I N G PIPE ( MVP)-A p i p e

which receives a number of branch
ventilating pipes.
M AIN W A S T E P IPE ( M W P ) - A p i p e
connecting one or more branch waste pipes
to the drain.
M ANHOLE -An opening by which a man

may enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other
closed structure for inspection, cleaning and
other maintenance operations, fitted with a
suitable cover.
M ANHOLE C HAMBER -A chamber
constructed on a drain or sewer so as to
provide access thereto for inspection, testing
or the clearance of obstruction.
N O N- SE R V I C E L A T R I N E - O t h e r t h a n
service latrine*.
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
INDIA
P IPE S YSTEMS - The system to be adopted

will depend on the type and planning of the
building in which it is to be installed and will
be one of the following:
a) TWO-PIPE SYSTEM (see Fig. 1),---A

discharge. pipe system comprising two
independent discharge pipes one of
which conveys soil directly to the drain,
the other conveying waste water to the
drain through a trapped gully. The
system may also reauire ventilating
pipes.
Fig. 2 Diagram of &e-Pipe System

S A D D L E-A purpose made fitting, 80
shaped as to fit over a hole cut in a seweror
drain used to form connections.
SERVJCE LATERINE -A laterine from which
the excreta are removed by manual agency

and not by water carriage.
S EWER -A pipe or conduit, generally
closed, but normally not flowing full for

carrying sewage or other waste liquids.
SLO.P HO P P E R (SLOP SIN.K ) - A
hoppershaped sink, with. a flushing run, and
outlet sinular to those of a WC pan, for the
recep-tion and discharge of human excreta.
Fig. I Diagram of Two-Pipe System
b)
SYSTEM (see Fig. 2)-The

plumbing system in which the waste
connections from sinks, baths and wash
basins, and soil pipe branches are all
collected into, one main pipe connected
directly to the drainage system. Gully
traps and waste pipes are completely
dispensed with but.all the traps of waterclosets, basins, etc, are completely
ventilated to preserve the water seal.
O N E- PIPE
SOAKAWAY -A pit, dug into permeable

ground lined to form a covered perforated
chamber or filled tiiih hard-core, to which
liquid is led, and from which it may soak
away into the ground.
SOPFIT ( CROWN )-The highest point of the

internal surface of a sewer or culvert at any
cross-section.
(see Fig. 3A and

3B)-One pipe system without trap
ventilation pipe work.
SINGLE STACK SYSTEM
SOIL PIPE
-The ventilation provided for waste traps in two-pipe system, in

order to preserve the water seal.
PUFF VENTILATION
IAitT IX PLUMSiNG
SERVICES-SECTION 2
DRAtiAGE
AND
aj In plumbing, a pipe that conveys the discharge of water-closets or fixtures haviqg

similar functions, with or. without the
discharges from other fixtures.
SANITATION
IX-,
STACK
STACR 1OOmm
i-ne x. LENBW 1
SOmm PARALLEL B R A N C H
T O EE INlRODUCEO O N L Y
W H E N 8AlH W A S T E WOUD
SWEPT ENTRV SO mm
Is.. F I B . 0 1
PI-l
VERTICAL OISTANCE
BETW EEN
WC=Water closet
S=Sink
WB=Wash basin
LYLAROE RAOIUS
BUILDING
?AIN
BENDS
3~
3A Single Stack System
(Western Style)
FT=Floor trap
Fl=Floor level
Singe Stack-System
(Indian Practice)
Fig. 3 Main Features of Design of Single Stack.S.wtem

b) -5 standard type of bell and spigot cast
lton pipe ,of limited strength.
S OIL W ASTE -The discharge from waterclosets, urinals, slop hopper, stable yard or
cowshed gullies and similar appliances.
S UBSOIL W ATER -Water,
occurring
naturally in the subsoil.

S UBSOIL W ATER D R A I N
a) A drain intended to collect and carry

away subsoil.
b) A drain intended to disperse into the
subsoil frbm a septic tank.
S URFACE W ATER
-Natural water from the

ground surface, paved areas and roofs.
S
U R F A C E W A T C R D R A I N- A d r a i n
conveying surface water including storm
water.
IX-Z-
S YSTEMS
OF
DRAINAGE
-A system of drains
or sewers in which foul water and surface
water are conveyed by the same pipes.
S E P A R A T E SYSTEM -A system of drains
or sewers in which the foul water and
surface water are conveyed by separate
pipes.
PARTIALLY SEPARATE SYSTEM - A
modification of the separate system in
which part of the surface water is
conveyed by the foul sewers and drains.
C O M B I N E D SYSTEM
T RADE E F F L U E N T -Any liquid either with

or without particles of matter in suspension
which is wholly or in part produced in the

course of any trade or industry, at trade
premises. It includes farm wastes but does
not include domestic sewage.
T RAP -A fitting or
device so designed and

constructed as to provide, when properly
vented, a liquid seal which will prevent the

back passage of air without materially
affecting the flow of sewage or waste water
through it.
V ENT P IPE -An open ended pipe, in a hot
water apparatus, for the escape of air and for
the safe discharge of any steam generated.
V ENTILATING P IPE -A pipe in a sanitary
pipework system which. facilitates the
circulation of air within the system and
protects trap seals from excessive pressure
fluctuation.
W ASTE P IPE --In plumbing, any pipe that
receives tne discharge of any fixtures, except

water-closets or similar fixtures and conveys
the same to the house drain or soil or waste
stack. When such pipe does not connect
directly with a house drain or soil stack, it is
called an indirect waste pipe.
W ASTE W ATER ( SULLAGE )-The discharge
from wash basins, sinks and similar
appliances, which does not contain human or
animal excreta.
WAGER SEAL -The water in a trap which
acts as a barrier to the passage of air through
the trap.
3. PREPARATION AND SUBMlSSlON
OF PLANS
3.1 No person shall instal or carry out any
water-borne sanitary installation or drainage
installation or any works in connection with
anything existing or new buildings or any
other premises without. obtaining the
previous sanction of the Authority.
The owner shall make an application in the
prescribed form (see Appendix A) to the
Authority to carry out such a work.
3.2 The application (3.1) shall be accompanied by a drainage plan drawn to a scale of
not smaller than I:100 and furnished along
with the building plan (see Part I1 Administration). The plans shall show the following:
4 Every floor of the building in which the
pipes or drains are to be used;

b) The position, forms, level and arrangement of the various parts of such building, including the roof thereof;
d All new drains as proposed with their
sizes and gradients;
4 Invert levels of the proposed drains with
corresponding ground levels;
4 The position of every manhole, gully, soil
and waste pipe, ventilating pipe,
PART
IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DIIAINACE
rainwater pipe, water-cloLet, . urinal,

latrine, bath, lavatory, sink, trap orother
appliances in the premises proposed to be
connected to any drain and the following
colours are recommended for indicating
sewers, waste water pipes, rain-water
pipes and existing work:
Description of work
Sewers
Waste water pipes and
rain-water pipes
Existing work
Colour
Red
Blue
Black
f) The position of refuse chute, inlet hopper

and collection chamber.
3.2.1 In the case of an alteration or addition
to an existing building, this clause shall, be
deemed to be satisfied if the plans as
furnished convey sufficient information for
the proposals to be readily identified with
previous sanctioned plans and provided the
locations of tanks and other fittings are
consistent with the structural safety of the
building.
3.3 In addition, a site plan of the premises on
which the building is to be situated or any
such work is to be carried out shall be prepared drawn to a scale not smaller than 1500
(see Part 11 ,Administration).
3.3.1 The site plan of the building premises
shall show:
a) the adjoining plots and streets with their
names;
b) the position of the municipal sewer and
the direction of flow in it;
c) the invert level of the municipal sewer,
the road level, and the connection level of
the proposed drain connecting the
building in relation to the sewer;
d) the angle at which the drain from the
building joins the sewer; and
e) the alignment, sizes and gradients of all
drains and also of surface drains, if any.
3.3.2 A separate site plan is not necessary if
the necessary particulars to be shown in such
a site plan are already shown in thedrainage
plan.
3.4 In respect of open drains, cross-sectional
details shall be prepared to a scale not
smaller than 150 sliowing the ground and
invert levels and any arrangement already
existing or proposed for the inclusion ofany
or exclusion of all storm water from the
sewers.
AND SANITATION
1x-2- -
3.5 The-plans for the building drainage shall

ln every case *be a c c o m p a n i e d b y
specifications for the various items of work
involved. This information shall be supplied in
the prescribed form given in Appendix B.
4.1 The requirements laid down inPart IX
Plumbing services, Section 1 Water supply
shall apply for licensing of plumbers.
5.4 Residences
5.4.1: Dwellings with. individual convet+
iences shall have at least the following fitments:
a) one bath room provided with a tap;
b) one water-closet; and
c) one nahani or sink either in the floor
or raised from the floor, with a tap.
5.4.2.1 Where only. one water-closet is provided in a dwelling, the bath and water-closet
shall be separately accommodated.
5. DRAINAGE AND SANITATION

REQUIREMENTS
5.1 General-There should be at least one
water tap and arrangement for drainage in
the vicinity of each water-closet or group of
water-closets in all buildings.
NOTE -Water-closets, unkas indicated otherwise, shall

be of Indian atyk (squatting type).
5.4.2 Dwellings without individual conveniences shall have the following fitments:
5.2 Each family dwelling unit on premises

&butting on a sewer or with a private sewagedisposal system shall have, at least, one
water-closet and one kitchen type sink. It is
desirable that a bath or shower should be
installed to meet the basic requirements of
sanitation and personal hygiene.
a) one water tap with draining arrange-
5.3 All .other structures for human occupancy or use on premises abutting on a sewer
or with a private sewage-disposal system
shall have adequate sanitary facilities, but in
no case less than one water-closet and one
other fixture for cleaning purposes.
5.5 Buildings other than Residences
ment in each tenement,

b) one water-closet and one bath for every
two tenements; and
cl water taps in common bath rooms and
common water-closets.
5.5.1 The requirements for fitments for

drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than residences shall be in accordance with Tables 1 to 12.
TABLE I OFFICE BUILDINGS

(Ckruse 5.5.1)
FITMENTS
SL
No.
(3)
(2)
(1)
F OR M ALE P E R S O N N E L
F OR F EMALE P E R S O N N E L
(4)
I for every 25 persons or part thereof I for every I5 persons or part thereof
i) Water-closets*
I in each water-closet
ii) Ablution taps
I water tap with draining arrangement shall be provided for every 50

part thereof in the vic,inity of water-closet and urinals.
persons or
iii) Urinals
Nil, up to 6 persons
I for 7-20 persons
2 for 2 l-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
From 101 to 200 persons add at the
rate of 3 .percent
For over 200 persons add at the rate of
2 . 5 perceni
iv)
_ I for every 25 persons or part thereof ---)
Wash.basins
Drinking water fountains
v)
vi) Cleaners sinks
I for every 100 persons with a minimum of one on each floor

1 per floor, Min. preferably in or adjacent to sanitary rooms
*This may include adequate number of water-closets of European style, where desired.
_____ __~_ _~.__
1x-2-
.I
TABLE 2 FACTORIES
(Clause 5.5. I)
SL
No.
FITMENTS
(1)
(2)
ii)
Water-closets+
Ablution taps
F OR M ALE PERSONNEL
(3)
I for I-15 persons
2 for 16-35 persons
3 for 36-65 persons
F OR F EMALE PERSONNEL
(4)
I for I-12 persons
2 for 13-25 persons

3 for 2640 persons
4 for 41-57 persons
5 for 58177 persons
From IO1 to 200 persons, add
at the rate of 3 percent
For over 200

sons, add
at the rate op2.5 percent
For over 200 rsons, add

at the rate op4 percent
I water tap with drainin arrangements shall be provided for every 50

persons or part thaeo f m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
I for- 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
For over 200 persons, add
at the rate of 2.5 percent
iv)
v)
vi)
_ I for every 25 persons or part thereof Washing taps with

draining arrangements
Drinkingwater fountains I for every 100 persons with a minimum of one on each floor
Baths(preferablyshowers)
As required for particular trades or occupations
NOTE I -For many trades of a dirty or dangerous character, more extensive provisions are recptired by law.
)WTE 2-Creches, wbae provided, shall be fitted with water-closets (one for IO persons or part thereof) and wash
bins (one for I5 persons or part thereof) and drinking water tap with draining arrangements (one for em 50
persons or part thereof).
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if dkred.
5.4 Drainage and Sanitation Requirements

for Traffic Terminal Stations
5.6.1 Adequate arrangements shall be made
for satisfactory drainage of all sewage and
waste water. Harmful waste waters,such as
water containing kitchen waste, shall be
satisfactorily disposed of. The drainage shall
be so designed as to cause no stagnation at
the maximum discharge rate for which the
different units are designed.
5.6.2 The minimum sanitary conveniences
provided at any traffic terminal station, like

railway station, bus station or bus terminal,
shall consist of non-service type latrine one
each for males and for females and onenonservice type. urinal for males for a daily
passenger volume up to 300 people. For large
stations and airports, sanitary arrangements
given in Table 13 shall apply.
PART IX PLlIMUNC SERVICES-SECTION 1 DRAINAGE
5.6.2.1 In airports, the following provisions

shall be made in addition to those given in
5.6.2:
a) For wash basins at the following rates:
Minimum of 2 each
Domestic
formalesandfemalcs
airports
with the scale of
provisions as for
international airports
for increase in
population
10 for 200 persons
International
15 for 400 persons
airports
20 for 600 persons
25 for 1000 persons
b) Shower stalls with wash basins in the
enclosure per stall should be provided at
the following ~oeations:
AND SANITATION
ix-b 9
TABLE 3 CINEMAS, CONCERT HALLS AND THEATRES

(Clause 5.5. I)
FITMENTS
SL
No.
(1)
i)
(2)
Water-closets
ii) Ablution taps
F OR M ALE PUBLIC
(3)
F OR F EMALE S T A F F
F OR M ALE S T A F F
F OR F EMALE P U B L I C
(3
(4)
(6)
I per 100 persons
up to 400 persons
For over 400 persons
add at the rate of
I per 250 persons
or part thereof
3 per 100 persons

up to 200 persons
For over 200 persons,
add at the rate of
2 per 100 persons
or part thereof
I for l-15 persons

2 for 16-X persons
I for l-12 persons

2 for 13-25 persons
I in each watercloset
water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iv) Wash basins
I for 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
for 25 persons
or part thereof
iii) Urinals
Drinking water
fountain
I for every 200

;oo;s or part
I for every 200

!;e;os or part
I for l-15 persons

2 for 16-35 persons
I for l-12 persons

2 for 13-25 persons
AI per 100 persons or part thereof
NO.IE I -Some of the water-closets may be of European styles, if desired.

NOTE 2-It may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are males and one-third females.
TABLE 4 ART GALLERIES, LIBRARIES AND MUSEUMS

(Clause 5.5. I)
FITMENTS
SL
No.
(2)
(1)
i)
Waterclosets
F OR M ALE P U B L I C
(3)
F OR F EMALE PUBHC FOR M A L E FTAFF
(4)
F OR F EMALE S T A F F
(5)
(6)
I per 200 persons I per 100 persons I for I-IS persons I for I-12 rsons
up to 400 persons up to 200 persons 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-24persons
For over 400 per For over 200 per
sons, add at the sons, add at the
rate of I per 250 rate of I per I59
persons or part persons or. part
thereof
thereof
ii) Ablution taps
I in each water- I in each water- I in each water- I in each watercloset

closet
closet
closet
iii) Urinals
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
thereof m the vicinity of water;losets and urinals
_
I per 50 persons
I for 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
iv) Wash basins
I for every 200 per- .I for every 200 per- I for l-15 persons I for l-12 persons
part sons
or
sons
or
part 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-25 persons
thereof. For over thereof. For over
200 persons, add 200 persons, add
at the rate of I per at the rate of I per
250 persons or part I50 persons or part
thereof
thereof
v) Cleaners sinka
(p- I per floor, Min
v i ) Drinking
water fountain
f---------------l
per 100 persons or part thereof,->
>
NOTE I -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

NOTF 2 ~-- It
do
may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are males ar#d one-third females.
TABLE 5 HOSPITAL INDOOR PATIENT WARDS

(Clause 5.5.1)
SL
FOR
FITMENTS
No.
(0
i)
MALESAND FE M A L E S
(3)
Water-closets
1 for every 8 beds or part thereof
ii)
Ablution taps
I in each water-closet plus one water tap with draining arrangements
iii)
Wash basins
2 up to 30 beds; add I for every additional 30 beds or part thereof
iv)
Baths
I bath with shower for every 8 beds or part thereof
v)
Bedpan washing sinks
I for each ward:
vi)
Cleaners sinks
1 for each ward
vii)
Kitchen sinks and dish

washers (where kitchen
is provided)
I for each ward
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals for every 50 beds or part

thereof
NOTE 1 -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

NOTE 2-Additional and special fitments for specific needs of hospitals may be provided.
TABLE 6 HOSPITALS, OUTDOOR PATlENTS WARDS

(Clause 5.5.1)
FOR
FITMENTS
SL
F OR F E M A L E S
MALES
No.
(4)
(3)
(I)
(2)
i)
Water-closets
for every 100 persons or

part thereof
2 for every 100 persons or

part thereof
ii)
Ablution taps
in each water-closet
water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every

50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
1 for every 50 persons or

pan tnereoI
iv)
Wash basins
I for every 100 persons or
I for every 100 persons 01
v)
Drinking water fountain
1 per 500 persons or part thereof
NOTE 1
NOTE
part thereof
part thereof
-Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
2 -Additional and special fitments for specific needs of hospitals may be provided.
1) 4 stalls each in the females and males

toilets in the transit/departure lounge.
2) 4 stalls each in the females and males
toilets in the main concourse.
5.6.3 Adequate scavenging arrangements
shall be provided so that each terminal is
kept clear of all refuse. Refuse containers
shall be placed at convenient points.
sanitary appliances shall conform to Part V

Building materials.
7. PRELIMINARY DATA FOR DESIGN
6. MATERIALS, FITTINGS AND

APPLIANCES
7. I General- Before the drainage system for

a building or group of buildings is designed
and constructed, accurate. information
regarding the site conditions is essential. This
information may vary with the individual
scheme but shall, in general, be covered by
the following:
6.1 Standards for materials, fittings and
a)
S ITE P LAN
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
(see 3.3)
K-2-11
TABLE 7 HOSPITALS (ADMINISTRATIVE BUILDINGS, MEDICAL STAFFAND

QUARTERS AND NURSES HOMES)
(Chwe SJ.1)
SL
No.
RTMENTS
FOR ADMINISTRATIVE
BUILDINGS FOR MEDICAL STAFF QUARTERS

( HOSTEL TYPE )
be
For Male
Personnel
Personnd
Staff
(1)
(2)
Water-closets*
ii)
Ablution taps
(3)
(4)
1 for every 25
persons or
part thereof
1 for every 15
persons or
part thereof
NURSES
HOMES
( HOSTEL TyPE j
FOR
For Female
Staff
(5)
(6)
(7)
1 for 4 persons I for 4 persons I for 4 persons
or part thereof
1 in each water- I in each water- I in each water- I. in each water- I in each watercloset
closet
closet
closet
closet
thereof m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii)
UrilMiS
Nil, up to 6
rsons
I or
p 7-20 persons
2 for 2145 persons
3 for 670 persons
4 for 71-100 pertins
From 101 to 200
persons, add
at the rate of
3 percent
For over 200
persons, add
at the rate of
2.5 percent
iv)
Wash basins
I for every 25
persons or
part thereof
v)
Bath (with shower)
vi)
Drinking water
fountains
vii)
Cleaners sinks I
I for every 25
persons or
part thereof
I for every 8
persons or
part thereof
I for every 8
persons or
part thereof
I for every 8
persons or
part thereof
I for 4 persons I for 4 persons I for 4-6 persons

or part thereof
or part thereof or part thereof
I per lb0 persons or part thereof with a minimum of 1 on each floor

e- I per floor, Min I
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
D RAINAGE P LAN (see 3.2)

USE -A description of the use for which
the building is intended and periods of
occupation in order that peak discharges
may be estimated;.
The availability of sewers or other outlets;
The nature of the sewage to be carried.
While dealing with sewage from domestic
premises or schools, ,special problems
under this head may not arise; however,
note shall be taken of any possibility of
trade effluents being .discharged into the
pipes at. a future date;
COVER --The depth below ground of the
proposed sewers and drains and the
nature and weight of the traffic on the
grountl above them;
g) Sues01~ CO N DIT IO N:
1) The approximate level of the subsoil
water, and any available records of
flood levels shall be ascertained, as
also the depth of the water table
relative to all sewer connections,
unless it is known to be considerably
below the level of the latter;
2)
of deep manholes, this

information will influence largely
the type of construction to be
adopted. The probable safe bearing
capacity of the subsoil at invert level
may be ascertained in the case of a
deep manhole;
In the case
3) Where work of any magnitude is to

be undertaken, trial pits or boreholes shall be put at intervals along
NRTIONAL lUlLDING
CODE OF I N D I A
TABLE 8 HOTELS
(Clause 5.5. I)
SL
FITMENTS
F OR RESIDENTLU
FOR. PUBLIC Room
FOR EON-RESIDENTIAL
ST
A F F
No.
For Male Staff For Female Staff
(1)
3
ii)
(2)
watcr-c1oscts
Ablution taps
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
I per, 8 persons 1 per 100
I for 1-15
2 per 100
omitting
persons up to persons upto
occupants of ,400 persons
200 persons 2 /zzs
the room
For over 400, For over 200,
rsons
with attached add at the
add atthe
3F
or 36-65
waterclosets;
rate of 1 per
fate of 1 per
I30118
minimum of2 250 persons
100 persons 4 p
or 66-100
if both sexes
or part thereof or part thereof persons
are lodged
1 in each
.
watercloset
I in each
water-closet
1 in
each
water-closet
I in each
water-closet
(7)
I for I-12
ersons
2 Por 13-25
3 PZGO
ers0ns
4 %or 41-57
rsonti
5 p
or 58-77
rsons
6 p
or 78-100
. persons
1 in each
water-closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
iii)
Urinals
I per 50 persons
or part thereof
Nil, up to 6
I PO?%
I?3Olls
2 $
or 21-45
m011s
3 p
or 4670
4 Yns or 71-100
.persons .
iv)
Wash basin
I per IO persons 1 per wateromitting the

wash basins
installed in
the room suite
closet
and
urinal
provided
I per watercloset
provided
I for I-15
2 p or 16-35
3 !ZZr65
4 pocfszsfOo
persons
VI
vi)
Baths
I pc-r lOpersons
I for I-12
rSOlls
2 &?;5
ersons
3 Por 26-40
ersons
4 Por 41-57
5 Pzs5081s77
rsons
6 I
or 98-100
persons
omitting occupants of the

room with
bath in suite
Slop sinks
1 per 30
bedrooms;
I per floor, Min

vii)
Kitchen sinks and I in each kitchen

dish washers
Non I -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

NOTE 2-B mav be assumed that twothirds of the number are males and one-third females.
the line of the proposed sewer or,

drain and the data therefrom tabulated, together with any information
available from previous works
carried out in the vicinity. In general
the information derived from trial
pits is more reliable than that
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE
derived from boreholes. For a.long

length of sewer or drain,
information derived from a few trial
pits at carefully chosen points may
be supplemented by that obtamed
from a number of intermediate
boreholes;
AND SANITATION
TABLE 9 RESTAURANTS
!Chzuse 5.5.1)
FOR MALE
FITMENTS
PUBLIC FOR FEMALE PULILI~
(4)
(3)
FOR FEMALE STAFF
F OR M ALE S T A F F
(6)
(5)
(1)
(2)
i)
WatcrlYoset
1 for 50 seats up 1 for 50 seats up

to 290 seats. For
to 200 seats. For
over 200 seats,
over 200 seats,
add at the rate
add at the rate
of 1 per IOOseatsr
of 1 per 100 seats
or part thereof
or part thereof
ii)
Ablution taps
1 in each water- 1 in each water- 1 in .each water- 1 ioLzh watercloset

cbsct
closet
1 per 50 seats
1 for 7-20 persons
Zfor 21-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
iii)
Urinals
iv)
Wash basins
v)
Kitchen sinks and (dish washers
vi)
Sl;p,;sr service
1 for f-i5 persons

2 for 16-35 pWSOIlS
3 for 3665 perx~x
4 for 66 100 persons
1 for I-12 persons

2 for 13-25 persons
3 for 26-40 persons
4 for 41-57 persons
5 foi 58-77 persons
6 for 78-i&? persons
- - 1 for every water-loset provided ,_
1 in each kitchen
4-1 in each restaurant
>
NOTE 1 -Some of the-water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

N OTE 2-11 may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are mala and one-third females.
TABLE 10 SCHOOLS AND EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTIONS
SL
No.
FITMENTS
(Clause 5.5.1)
E DUCATIONAL I NSTITUTIONS
(NON-RESIDENTIAL )
N URSERY S C H O O L S
E DUCATIONAL I NSTITUTIONS
(RESIDENTIAL )
A
For Girls
' For BoysFor/ For Boys
(2)
(1)
i)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(7)
Water-closets? 1 per 15 pupils 1 per 40 pUpi!s 1 per 25 pupils I for every 8 1 for every 6
or part thcrcpf or part thereof pupils or part pupils or prt
or part thereof
thereof
thereof
.I
ii) Ablution taps
iii) Urinals
iv) Warh basins
1 in each water- I in each water- I in each water- 1 in each water- 1 in each watercloset
closet
closet
closet
closet
J *-ater tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 pupils or part thereof
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
I per 20 pupils
for every 25
or part thereof
.p,u,p,fJ;pr part
I for I5 pupils I per 60
or part thereof
Uin
I per 40
Min
for every 8 I for every 6

f;ep;;f or part pupils or part
thereof
1 for every 8 1 for every 6
r;$@of or part pupils or part
thereof
v) Baths
I bath-sink per
40 pupils or part
thereof
vi) Drinking water

fountains
I for every 50 I for every 50 1 for every 50 I for every 50 I for every 50
pupils or part pupils or par+
r;z;;f or part pupils or part pupils or part
thereof
thereof
thereof
thereof
<-I per floor, Min--------)

vii) Cleaners sink
*For teaching staff, the schedule of fitments to beprovided shall be the same as in the case of office building
(gee Table 1).
7 Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired
IJ~
TABLE II HOSTELS
(Clause 5.5.1)
St.
No.
FIT~.KNT~
FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL
FOR RESIDENTS AND

RESIDENTIAL STAFF
STAFF
A
,
Tzz?xxx For Males
(1)
i)
ii)
(3)
(2)
(4)
For
(5)
ROOMS WHEREIN OUTSIDERS

ARE RECEIVED
/\
Females _ For Males
For Females
(6)
Water-closets* I for every 8 I for every 6 I for I-15

persons or
persons or
persons
part thereof part thereof 2 for 16-35
persons
3 for 36-65
persons
4 for 66-100
persons
1 for I-12
persons
2 for 13-25
persons
3 for 26-40
persons
4 for 41-57
persons
5 for 58-77
persons
6 for 78-100
persons
(7)
(8)
I per 100 per- 2 per 100

sons up to
persons
400 persons
up to 200
For over 400
persons
persons, add For over
at the rate
200 persons,
of I for 250 add at the
persons or
rate of 1
part thereof for 100
persons or
part thereof
Ablution taps I in each

I in each
I in each
I in each
I in each
I in each
wzter-closet
water-closet water-closet
water-closet
water-closet water-closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in
the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
I for 25
persons or
part thereof
I per 50
persons or
part thereof
Nil, up to 6
persons
1 for 7-20
persons
2 for 2145
3 pOe?ZO
persons
4 for 71-100
persons
iv)
Wash basins
I for8
persons or
part thereof
I for6
I for t-15
persons or
persons
part thereof 2 for 16-35
persons
3 for 36-65
ersons
4 Por66IO0
persons
1 for l-12
rsons
2 ?e
or 13-25
persons
3 for 26-40
rsons
4F
or 41-57
persons
5 for 58-77
rsons
6 or 78-100
persons
I per each
I per each
water-closet
and urinal
provided
water-closet
provided
v)
Baths
I for 8 persons I for6persons
vi)
Cleaners
sinks
or part
thereof
or part
thereof
I per floor. Mm
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style. iidesrrcd
4) Much useful information is .often

obtained economically and quickly
by the use of a soil auger;
5) The positions of trial pits or boreholes shall be shown on the plans,
together with sections showing the
strata found and the dates on which
water levels are recorded.
h)
L OCATION
OF
O T H E R S E R V I C E S- T h e
position, depth and size of all other pipes,

mains, cables, or other services, in the
vicinity of the proposed work, may be
ascertained from the Authority, if

necessary;
j)
EINSTATEMENT
OF
URFACES
Information about the requirements of

the highway authority is necessary where
any part of the sewer or drain is to be
taken under a highway. Those
responsible for the sewer or drain shall be
also responsible for the maintenance of
the surface until permanently reinstated.
The written consent of the highway
authority to break up the surface and
arrangement as to the charges thereof and
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES--SEC;ION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
,x_p
,
TABLE 12 FRUITANDVEGETABLEMARKETS
(Cluuse 55.1)
iz
FITMENTS
REQUIREMENTS
(2)
(3)
(I)
i)
Urinals
Not less than 2 for every 50 persons
ii)
Water-closets*
2, Min,
iii)
Ablution taps
2, Min, and an additional tap for evev 50 persons
iv)
Bathing places
Suitable numbers with bathing platforms
NOTE I -For
1X-2(1) t
and an additional
I for every 50 persons
layout for regulated market yards for fruit and vegetables, reference may be madeto accepted standards
NOTE 2-Separate and adequate provision of water-closets shall be made for females.
NOTE 3
-Adequate washing places for fruit and vegetables shall be provided.
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style,if
desired.
where reference is made to accepted standards, in relation to material specification, testing or other
information, the appropriate document listedat the end of this section may be used asa guide to the interpretation of the
term.
tin this section
--
_____-
- - - - - - -
TABLE I3 SANITARYREQUIREMENTS FOR LARGESTATIONSANDAIRPORTS

(Cluuse 5.6.2)
SL
No.
PLACE
(1)
(2)
WC
F OR M ALES
WC FOR FEMALES
(3)
U RINALS
FOR
ONLY
M ALES
(5)
(4)
i)
Junction stations, intermediate stations and

bus stations
3 for first I 000 persons

and I for every subsequent I 000 persons
for first I 000 persons

and 1 for every additional I 000 persons
4 for every I 000 persons
ii)
Terminal stations and
4 for first I OC$l persons

and I for every
subsequent I 000 person.9
or part thereof
for first I 000 persons

1 for every
and
subsesquent 2 OGO persons
persons or part thereof
6 for first I 000 persons

and I for every
additional I 000 persons
or part thereof
bus terminals
iii)
iv)
Domestic airports, Min

for 200 persons
for 400 persons
for 600 persons
for 800 persons
for I 000 persons
2*
;
I2
I6
I8
International airports
for 200 persons
for 600 persons
for I 000 persons
6
12
I8
and I for every additional I 000 persons
4*
I;
::
29
N OTE -Separate provision shall be made for staff and workers at these traffic terminal stations.
*At least one Indian style water-closet shall be provided in each toilet.
the method and type. of surface

reinstatement shall always be obtained
before any work is commenced;
k) DIVERSION AND C O N T R O L O F T R A F F I C
--In cases where sewers cross roads or
foot-paths, cooperation shall be
maintained with the police and
Authorities regarding the control and
diversion of vbhicular and/ or pedestrian
IX-2-16
Assume 60 males to 40 females in any area.
traffic as may be necessary. Access to

properties along the road shall always be
maintained and adequate notice shall be
given to the occupiers bf any shops or
business premises, particularly if
obstruction is likely;
m) During the period of diversion, necessary danger lights, red flags, diversion
boards, caution boards, watchmen,-etc,
NATIONAL BUILDING tiODE Ok INDIA
shall be provided as required by the

Authority;
n)
W AYLEAVES ( EA S E M E N T S)-The indivi-
dual or authority carrying out the work is

responsible for negotiating wayleaves
where the sewer crosses land in other
ownership. The full extend and conditions of such wayleaves shall be made
known to the contractor and his
employees, and prior notice of
commencement of excavation shall
always be given to the owners concerned,
and cooperation with them shall be
maintained at all stages. Where sewers
run across fields or open ground, the
exact location of manholes shall be
shown on wayleaves or easement plans.
The right of access to manhole covers and
the right to maintain the sewer shall be
specifically included in any wayleave. or
easement arrangements which may be
made with the owner of the lknd; and
P) D A M A G E T O B U I L D I N G S A N D STRUCTURES -When sewer trenches have to be

excavated near buildings or walls a joint
inspection with the owners of the
property shall be. made to establish
whether any damage or cracks exist
before starting the work, and a properly
authenticated survey and record of the
condition of buildings. likely to be
affected shall be made. Tell tales may be
placed across outside cracks and dated,
and kept under observation.
Unretouched photographs taken by an
independent photographer may provide
useful evidence.
7.2 Drainage into a Public Sewer-Where
public sewerage is available, the following
information is particularly necessary and
may be obtained from the Authority:
4 the position of the public sewer or sewers
in relation to the proposed buildings;
b) the invert level of the public sewer;
cl the system on which the public sewers
are designed (combined, separate or
partially separate), the lowest level at
which connection may be made to it, and
the Authority in which it is vested;
d) the material of construction and condition of the sewer if connection is not to be
made by the Authority;
the
extent to which surcharge in the
e)
sewer may influence the drainage scheme;
0 whet her the connection to the public
sewer 1s made, or any part of the drain
laid, by the Authority, or whether the
owner is responsible for this work; if the
latter, whether the Authority imposes any
special conditions;
g) whether an intercepting trap is required

by the Authority on the drain near the
boundary of the curtilage; and
h) where manholes are constructed under
roads, the approval of the highway
authority to the type of cover to be fitted
shall be obtained.
7.3 Orher Metho& of @kposal of Sewage
7.3.1 Where discharge into a public sewer is
not possible, the drainage of the building
shall be on a separate system. Foul water
shall be disposed of by adequate treatment
approved by the Authority on the site. The
effluent from the plant shall be discharged
into a natural watercourse or on the surface
of the ground or disposed of by subsoil
dispersion preferably draining to a suitable
outlet channel.
7.3.2 In the case of dilution into a natural
stream course, the quality of the effluent shall
conform to accepted standards [1X-2(2)] and
the requirements of the Authority controlling
the prevention of pollution of streams shall
also be observed.
7.3.3 In the case of subsoil dispersion, the
requirements of the Authority for water
supply shall be observed to avoid any
possible pollution of local water supplies or
wells.
7.3.4 The general subsoil water level and the
subsoil conditions shall be ascertained,
including the absorptive capacity of the soil.
7.3.5 A subsoil dispersion is not desirabk
near a building or in such positions that the
ground below the foundations is likely to be
affected.
7.3.6 Where no other method of disposal is
possible, foul water may be collected and
stored in impervious covered cess 001s and
arrangements made with the AutKority for
,satisfactory periodical removal. and conveyance to a disposal works.
7.3.7 Under the separate system, drainage
of the building shall be done through septic
tanks of different sizes or by stabilization
ponds or by any other methods approved by
the Authority.
7.3.7.1 For detailed information on the
design and construction of septic tanks and
waste stabilization ponds, reference may be
made to good practice [IX-2(j)]*.
this kction where I+&~CIKC is I&C to pod pm
tict in relation to design, testing construcuon procedures or other information, the appropriate document
listed at the end of this section may be used as a guide to
the interpretation of this term.
*In
PART IX PLUMBING SEWICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
1x-z-- e
7.4 Disposal o/Surface and Subsoil WatersAll information which may influence the
choice of methods of disposal of surface
and/or subsoil waters shall be obtained. In
the absence of surface water drainage system,
and if practicable and permissible, disposal
into a natural water-course or soakaway may
be adopted. The location and flood levels of
the water course as also the requirements
of the Authority controlling the river or the
waterway shall be ascertained._
8.2 Aim--In designing. a drainage system
for an individual building or a housing
colony, the aim shall be to provide a system
of self-cleaning conduits for the conveyance
of foul, waste, surface or subsurface waters
and for the removal of such wastes speedily
and efficiently to a sewer or other outlet
without risk of nuisance and hazard to
health.
8.1.1 To achieve this aim, a drainage system
shall satisfy the following requirements:
a) rapid and efficient removal of liquid
wastes without leakage;

b) prevention of access of foul gases to the
building and provision for their escape
from the system;
C) adequate and easy access for clearing
obstructions;
4 prevention of undue external or internal
coriosion, or erosion of joints and
protection of materials of construction;
and
of air locks, siphonage,
e) avoidance
proneness to oblruction, deposit and
damage.
8.1.2 The realization of an economical
drainage system is added by compact grouping of fitments in both horizontal and vertical directions. This implies that if care is
taken and ingenuity brought into play when
designing the original building or buildings
to be drained, it is possible to group the
sanitary fittings and other equipment
requiring drainage; both in vertical and
horizontal planes, as to simplify the drainage
system and make it most economical.
8.2 Luyoul
8.2.1 G ENERAL -Genersilly, rain-water
shall be dealt with separately from sewage
and sullage. Sewage and sullage shall be
connected to sewers. Storm water from the
courtyard may be connected to the sewer
where it is not possible to drain otherwise
after obtaining permission of the Authority.
IX-28
The layout shall be as simple and direct as

practicable. Consideration shall be given to
alternative layouts so as to ensure that the
most economical and practical solution is
adopted. The possibility of alterations shall
be avoided by exercising due care and forethought.
8.2.2 P ROTECTION A GAINST V ERMIN AND
D IRT -The installation of sanitary fittings
shall not introduce crevices which are not
possible to inspect and clean readily.
Pipes, if not embedded, shall be run well
clear of the wall. Holes through walls to take
pipes shall be made good on both sides to
prevent entry of insects. Materials used for
embedding pipes shall be rodent-proof.
Passage of rodents from room-to-room or
from floor-to-floor shall be prevented by
suitable sealing. The intermediate lengths of
ducts and chases shall be capable of easy
inspection. .Any unused drains, sewers, etc,
shall be demolished or filled in to keep them
free from rodents.
8.2.3 C H O I C E OF P L U M B I N G S Y S TE M Where the sullage from baths and kitchens
can be dealt with separately for use in
gardening or any other such purposes, the
two-pipe system is advantageous. Obviously,
the one-pipe system is more economical and
has application where all types of waste
waters are taken in a common sewer line to
the place of disposal or treatment. Both these
systems are fully ventilated by a system of
ventilating pipe. However, these days the
single-stack system ( without any vent pipe
system), where the stack itself is made to
serve the vent requirements also by
restricting the flow in the stack, is being used.
This system is recommended with 100 mm
dia stack for up to 5-storey buildings. Not
m&e than two toilet units can discharge to
the single stack at each floor level. For any
different case, the permission of the local
Authority shall be obtained. In high-rise
buildings, a partially ventilated one-pipe
system is being used where the vent stack is
connected to the drainage stack or the WCs
at each or alternate floors. The safeguards for
the single stack system are stipulated
in 8.2.3.Z. The fully ventilated system does
not demand any special safeguards. For
detailed information regarding design and
installation of soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, reference may be made to good
practice [1X-2(4)].
8.2.3.1 SAFEGUARDS
SYSTEM
FOR
SINGLE-STACK
a) as far as practicable, the fixtuies on a

floor shall be connected to stack in order
of increasing discharge rate in the downward direction;
b) the vertical distance between the waste
branch (from floor trap or from the

individual appliance) and the soil branch
connection, when soil pipe is connected
to stack above the waste pipe, shall be not
less than 20 cm;
cl depth of water seal traps for. different
fixtures shall be as follows;
Water closets
50 mm
Floor traps
50 mm
Other fixtures directly
connected to the stack
1) Where attached to branch 40 mm
waste pipes of dia 75 mm
or more
2) Where attached to branch 75 mm
waste pipes of less than
75 mm dia
NOTE-When connection is made through floor trap,
no separate seals are required for individual fuctur&
4
e)
branches and stacks which receive

discharges from WC pans should not be
less than 100 mm, except where the outlet
from the siphonic water closet is80mm,
in which case a branch pipe of 80mm
may be used; for outlet of floor traps
75 mm dia pipes may be used;
the horizontal branch distance for fixtures from stack, bend(s) at the foot of
stack to avoid back pressure as well as
vertical distance between the lowest connection and the invert of drain shall be as
shown in Fig. 3A; and
for tall buildings, ground floor appliances are recommended to be connected
directly to manhole/ inspection chamber.
8.2.4 ADDITIONAL R EQUIREMENTS -The

pipes shall be laid in straight lines as far as
possible in both vertical and horizontal
planes. Anything that is likely to cause
irregularity of flow, such as abrupt changes
of direction, shall be avoided. No bends and
junctions whatsoever shall be permitted in
sewers except at manholes and inspection
chambers.
8.3 Choice of Material
8.3.1 S ALT G LAZED S T O N E W A R E
PIPES -For all sewers and drains in all soils,

except where supports are required as in
made-up ground, glazed stoneware pipe shall
be used as far as possible in preference to
other types of pipes; they are particularly
suitable where acid effluents or acid subsoil
conditions are likely to be encountered.,Salt
glazed stoneware. pipes shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(5)].
P ART
IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SEChON
8.3.2 C E M E N T C ONCRETE PIPES -When

properly ventilated, cement concrete pipes
with spigot and socket or collar joints present
an alternative to glazed stoneware sewers of
over 15Omm diameter. These shall not be
used to carry acid effluents or sewage under
conditions favourable for the production of
hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in
those subsoils which are likely to affect
adversely the quality or strength of concrete.
Owing to the longer lengths of pipes available, the joints would be lesser in the case of
cement concrete pipes. Cement concrete
pipes may be used for surface water drains in
all diameters. These pipes shall conform to
8.3.3 C AST IRON P IPES -Cast iron pipes
shall be used:
4 in bed or unstable ground where soil

movement is expected;
b) in made-up or tipped ground;

cl to provide for increased strength where a
sewer is laid at insufficient depth, where it

is exposed or where it has to be carried on
piers or above ground;
4 under buildings and where pipes are
suspended in basements and like situations;
e) in reaches where the velocity is more than
2.4 m/s; and
f-J for crossings of watercourses.
NOTE --In difficult foundation condition such as in the
case of black cottdn soil, thecast iron pipes shall be used
only when suitable supporting arrangements are made.
8.3.3.1 It shall be noted that cast iron pipes

even when given a protective paint are liable
to severe external corrosion in certain soils.
Among such soils are:
a) soils permeated by peaty waters; and

W soils in which the subsoil contains appre-
ciable concentrations of sulphates. Local

experiences shall be ascertained before
cast iron pipes are used where corrosive
soil conditions are suspected. Where so
used, suitable measures for the protection of the pipes may be resorted to as an
adequate safeguard.
8.3.3.2 Cast iron pipes shall conform to

8.3.4 ASBESTOS C EMENT P IPES -Asbestos
cement pipes are commonly used for house
drainage systems and they shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(8)]. They are not
recommended for underground situations.
However, asbestos cement pressure pipes
conforming to accepted standards [ IX-Z(X)]
1x-2.
19
may be used in underground situations also,

provided they are not .subject to heavy
superimposed loads. These shall not be used
to carry acid effluents or sewage under
conditions favourable for the production of
hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in
those subsoils which are likely to affect
adversely the quality or strength of asbestos
cement pipes. Where so desired, the life of
asbestos cement pipes may be increased by
lining inside of the pipe with suitable coatings
like epoxy/ polyester resins, etc.
8.3.5 LEAD APES-Branch soil pipes from
fittings to main- soil pipes and branch waste
pipes from fittings to main stack and branch
anti-siphonage pipes may be of lead and shall
conform to accepted standards [ 1X-2(9)].
8.3.6 PVC PIPES - Unplasticized PVC pipes
may ,be used for drainage purposes; however,
where hot water discharge is anticipated, the
wall thickness shall be minimum 3 inm irrespective of the size and flow load.
NOTE -Where possible, high density polyethylene
pipes (HDPE) and PVC pipes may be used for drainage
and sanitation purposes, depending upon the suitability.
8.4 Drainage Pipes

8.4.2 Drainage pipes shall be kkpt clear of
all other services. Provisions shall be made
during the construction of the building for
the entry of the drainage pipes. In most cases
this may be done conveniently by building
sleeves or conduit pipes into or under the
structure in appropriate positions. This will
facilitate the installation and maintenance
of the services.
8.4.1.1 Where soil and ventilating pipes are
accommodated in ducts, access to cleaning
eyes shall be provided. Any connection to a
drain shall be through a gully with sealed
cover to guard against ingress of sewer gas,
vermin or backflow. Trenches and subways
shall be ventilated, preferably to the open
air.
8.4.1.2 All vertical soil, waste, ventilating
and anti-siphonage pipes shall be covered on
top with a copper or heavily galvanized iron
wire dome or c&t iron terminal guards. All
cast iron pipes which are to be painted
periodically shall be fixed suitably to the wall
to give a minimum clearance of 5 cm.
NOTE -Asbestos cement cowls nray be used in case
as!xstos cement pipes are used as soil pips.
8.4.1.3 Drainage pipes shall be carried to a

height above the buildings as specified for
ventilating pipe (see 8.4.4).
8.4.2 SOIL PIPES --A soil pipe conveying to
a drain any solid or liquid filth shall be
circular and shall have a minimum diameter

of 1OOmm.
8.4.2.1 Except where.it is imeracticable, the
soil pipe shall be situated outside the building or in suitably designed pipe shafts and
shall be continued upwards without
diminution of its diameter, and (except
where it is unavoidable) without any bend or
angle, to such a height and position as to
afford by means of its open end a safe outlet
for foul air. The position of the open end
with its covering shall be such as to comply
with the conditions set out in 8.4.4 relating to
ventilating pipe. Even if the pipes are laid in
external chases, the soil pipes shall not be
permitted on a wall abutting a street unless
the Authority is satisfied that it is
tinavoidable. Where pipe shafts are provided,
the cross-sectional area shall be such as to
allow free and unhampered access to the
pipes to be installed in the shaft and in no
case shall the cross-section be less than a,
square of one metre side. All pipe shafts shall
be provided with an access door at ground
level and facilities for ventilation.
8.4.2.2Soil pipes, whether inside or outside
the building, shall not be connected with any
rain-water pipe and there shall not be any
trap in such soil pipe or between it and any
drain with which it is connected.
8.4.2.3 Soil pipes shall preferably be of cast
iron. Asbestos cement building pipes may
also be used as soil pipes only above ground
level.
8.4.2.4 The soil pipe shall be provided with
heel rest bend, which shall rest on sound footing. It shall be fixed at least 5 cm clear of the
finished surface of the wall by means of a
suitable clamps of approved type.
8.4.3 W ASTE P IPES -Every pipe in a building for carrying off the waste or overflow
water from every bath, wash basin or sink to
a drain shall be of 32 to 50 mm diameter, and
shall be trapped immediately beneath such
wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon
trap with adequate means for inspection and
cleaning. Such traps shall be ventilated into
the external air whenever such ventilation is
necessary to preserve the seal of the trap.
Waste pipes, traps, etc, shall be constructed
of iron, lead, brass, stoneware, asbestos
cement or other approved material. The
overflow pipe from wash basins,. sinks, etc,
shall be connected with the waste pipe
immediately above the trap. Vertical pipes
carrying off waste water shall have a
minimum diameter of 75mm.
NOTE - Whenever wash basins and sinks have in-built
overflow arranpmnts, there is no need to provide overflow pipes in such cases.
8.4.3.1 Every pipe in a building for carrying

off Gaste water to a drain shall be taken
through an external wall of the building.by
the shortest practicable line, and shall
discharge below the grating or surface box of
the chamber but above the grating of a
properly. trapped gully. The waste pipe shall
be continued upwards without any
diminution in its diameter and (except when
unavoidable ) without any bend or angle, to
such a height and position as to afford by
means of the open end of the waste pipe, a
safe outlet for foul air, the position of the
open end and its covering beink such as to
comply with the condition.
8.4.3.2 Except where it is impiacticable, the
commdn waste pipe shall be situated outside
the building andshall be continued upwards
without diminution of its diameter (except
where it is unavoidable ) without any bend or
angle being formed to such a height and
position as to afford by means of the open
end a safe outlet for foul air, the position of
the open end and the covering thereat being
such as to comply with the conditions set out
in 8.4.4.
8.4.3.3 The waste pipe shall be firmly
attached to the wall, at least 5 cm clear of it.
If the waste pipe is of cast iron, the pipes shall
be secured to the walls with properly fixed
holder bats or equally suitable and efficient
means.
8.4.4 VENTILATING PIPES
8.4.4.1 Ventilating pipes should be so
installed that water can not be retained in
them. They should be fixed vertically. Whenever possible; horizontal runs should be
avoided. Ventilating pipe shall be carried to
such a height and in such a position as to
afford by means of the open end of such pipe
or vent shaft, a safe outlet for foul air with
the least possible nuisance.
within a horizontal distance of 3 m. The le&. f

dimension shall be taken as a minimum and1
local conditions shall be taken into account.
The upper end of every ventlating pipeshal
be protected by means of a cowl.
8.4.4j In case the adjoining building is
taller, the ventilating pipe shall be carried
higher than the roof of the adjacent building,
wherever it is possible.
8.4.4.6 SIZES
a) The building drain ventilating pipe shall
be of not less than 75 mm diameter.

When, however, it is used as MSP or
MWP, the upper portion, which does
not carry discharges, shall not be of
lesser diameter than the remaining
portion;
b) The diameter of the main ventilating
pipe shall not be less than 50mm;
4 A branch ventilating pipe on a waste
pipe in both one-and two-pipe systems
shall be of not less. than twethirds the
diameter of the branch waste ventilated
subject to a minimum of 25 mm; and
4 A branch ventilating pipe on a soil pipe
in both one-and two-pipe systems shall
be not less than 32mm in diameter.
8.5 Manholes-At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there
shall be a manhole or inspection chamber.
Bends and junctions in the drains shall be
grouped together in manholes as far as possible. The spacing of manholes in any pipe may
be as follows:
Pipe Dia
mm
up to 300
301 to 500
501 to 900
Beyond 900
Spacing
m
45
8.4.4.3 Branch ventilating pipes should be

connected to the top of the BSP and BWP
between 75 mm and 450mm from the crown
of the trap.
;
Any interval depending
upon local conditions and
as approved by the
Authority
8.5.1 Where the diameter of a drain is increased, the crown of the pipes shall be fixed
at the same level and the necessary slope
given in the invert of the manhole chamber.
In exceptional cases and where unavoidable,
the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed
at a lower level, but in such cases the peak
flow level of the two siwers shall be kept the
same.
8.4.4.4 Tha, ventilating pipe shall always be

taken to a point 150 cm above the level of the
eaves or flat roof or terrace parapet
whichever is higher or the top of any window
8.5.2 Chambers shall be of such size as will

allow necessary examination or clearance of
drains. The size of manholes shall be adjusted
to take into account any increase in ,the
8.4.4.2 The upper end of the main ventilating pipe may be continued to the open air
above roof level as a separate pipe, or it may
join the MSP and/or MWP above the floor
level of the highest appliance. Its lower end
may be carried down to join the drain, at a
point where air relief may always be
maintained.
~.uw
ix rummmc SERYICW--SEC~JON
_.
2 DRAINAGE ANO SANITATION
Aumber of entries to the manhole. The

minimum internal sizes of chambers
[t;;;en faces of masonry) shall be as
a) For depth of
1 m or less
b) For depths
between
I m and
1.5m
c) For depths.
1.5m and
above
0.8 X 0.8 m
1.2 X 0.9m
Circular chambers with a

minimum diameter of
1.4m or rectangular
chambers with minimum
internal dimensions
of 1.2X0.9m
are recommended.
NOTE I -In adopting the above sizes of chambers, it

should be ensured that these sizes accord with full or half
bricks with standard thickness of mortar joints so as to
avoid wasteful cutting of bricks.
NOTE 2-The sires of the chambers may be adjusted to
suit the availability of local building materials and
economics of construction.
'II
8.5.3 The access shaft shall be corbelled

inwards on three sides at the top to reduce its
size to that of the cover frame to be fitted or
alternatively the access shaft shall be covered
over by a reinforced concrete slab of suitable
dimensions with an opening for manhole
cover and frame.
8.5.4 The manhole shall be built on a base
of concrete of a thickness of at least15.cm
for manholes up to 1 m in depth, .at least
20 cm for manholes from 1 to 2 m: deep and
at least 30 cm for manholes of greater depth,
unless the structural design demands higher
thickness.
8.5.5 The thickness of walls shall be not less
than 20 cm ( or one brick ) up to 1.5 m depth
and 30 cm ( or one and a half brick) for
depths greater than 1.5 m. The actual
thickness in any case shall be calculated on
the basis of engineering design. Typical
sections of the manholes are illustrated in
Fig. 4, 5 and 6.
I
RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
/ +LOPE I
IN 6
DETAIL OF BENCHING
1;
I*
SECTIONAL PLAN AT ZZ
RCC SLAB
7
v SOcmDlAl
SECTION XX
SECTION Y Y
NOTE - Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to the provide forpse of modular bricks or traditional brii.
In the figure, B=one brick length, I.5 B=one and a half brick length, etc.
Fig. 4 Details of Manhole (Depths I m and Below)
1x-P
NATIONAL BUILDING CDDC. OF INDIA
RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
rSLOPE I IN 6
i._______,
T_____---J
DETAIL OF BENCHING,
LtL
f l5cm
SECTION YY
SECTION XX
NOTE _ Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to provide for use of modular bricks or traditional
the figure, B = one brick length, 1.5 B = one and a half brick length, etc.
Fig. 5
bricks. In
Details of Manhole (Depths Between 1 axed I.Sm)
8.5.6 D ROP M A N H O L E S -Where it is

uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the
connection within 60cm height above the
invert of the manholes, the connection shall

be made by constructing a vertical shaft
outside the manhole chamber, as shown in
Fig. 7. If the difference in level between the
incoming drain and the sewer does not
exceed 60 cm, and there is sufficient room in
the manhole, the connecting pipe may be
directly brought through the manhole wall
and the fall accommodated by constructing
a ramp in the benching of the manhole.
8.5.7CdNNEl.S -These shail be semi-circu-
lar in the bottom half and of diameter equal

to that of the sewer. Above the horizontal
diameter, the sides shall be extended
vertically to the same level as the crown of
the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be
suitably rounded off. The branch channels

shall also be similarly constructed with
respect to the benching, but at their junction
with the main channel an appropriate fall
suitably rounded off in the direction of flow
in the main channel shall be given. Channels
shall be rendered smooth and benchings shall
have slopes towards the channel.
8.5.8 Rungs shall be provided in all
manholes over 0.8 m in depth and shall be of
cast iron conforming to accepted standards
[1X-2( IO)]. These rungs may be set staggered
in two vertical ru,ngs which may be 38 cm
apart horizontally. The top rung shall be
45cm below the manhole cover and the
lowest not more than 30cm above the
benching.The size of manhole covers shall be
such that there shall be a clear opening of at
least 50cm in diameter for manholes
P A RT IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SAiUlTATlON
1x-z.
Y2
IYJ
-
RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
SLOPE I IN 6
DETAIL OF BENCHING
L ---em
-__-__-__-__- _I
Y
k.
SECTIONAL PLAN AT 77
.-d
SOcmc
<RING ARCH
SECTION XX
SECTION YY
NOTPWall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths tn providefor use of modular bricks or traditional bricks. In
the figure, R = one brick length, I.5 B = one and a half brick length. etc.
Fig. 6 Deraik of Manhole (Depprhs I-5 m and Above)
exceeding 0.9m in depth. Manhole covers

and frames shall conform to accepted
standards [1X-2( I I)].
8.5.8.1 All manholes shall be so constructed
:IS to be water-tight under test. No manhole
or inspection &amber shall be permitted
inside a building or in any passage therein.
Ventilating covers shall not be used for
domestic drains.
8.5.9 All brickwork in manhole chambers
and shafts shall be carefully built in English
bond, the jointing faces of each brick being
well buttered with cement mortar before
laying, so as to ensure a full joint. The
construction of walls in brickwork shall be
done in accordance with good practice [IX2( I2)]. The cement mortar used shall not be
weaker than I part of cement to 3 parts of
sand where subsoil water conditions are
encountered.
8.5.10 The wall shall be plastered ( 13 mm
Min) both inside and outside with cement
mortar 1:3; where sub-soil water water
conditions exist, a richer mix or a weaker
mix with a suitable water proofing
compound may be used for both masonry
and plaster. All angles shall be rounded to
7Scm radius and all rendered internal
surfaces shall have hard impervious finish
obtained using a steel trowel.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF LNDIA
1 cm
--l-- I
SECTION XX
NOTE-Wall
SECTlON,YY
thicknesses have been indicated in brick kngths to provide for use of modular bricks Or
the figure, B = one bride kngth. I.5 B = one and a half brik length, etc.
WaditioMt b&k. I*
Fig. 7 Drop Manhole

8.5.11 The channel or drain at the bottom of be made to good practice. [1X-2(13)].
the chamber shall be plastered with cement
mortar of 1:2 proportion or weaker cement 8.5.13 For information regarding cast iron
mortar with a suitable waterproofing manhole covers and frames, referencemay be
compound and tinished smooth, to the grade
made to accepted standards [1X-2(11)].
(where required). The benching at the sides 8.6 Storm Water Draiktge-The object Of
shall be carried up in such a manner as to storm water drainage is to collect andWry,
provide no lodgement ior any splashings in
for suitable disposal, the rain-water collected
case of accidental flooding of the chamber. within the premises of the building.
8.5. I2 For detailed information regarding
8.6.1 WATER P RECIPITATION A ND R U N
manholes in sewerage system, reference may OFF- Rainfall statistics for the areas under
PART IX MAJMUNC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 D R A I N A G E A N D SAN,TATION
lX2S.
consideration shall be studied to arrive at a

suitable figure on the basis of which the
storm water drains could be designed.
Consideration shall be given to the effects of
special local conditions and to the intensity
and duration of rainfall.
8.6.2 P E R M E A B I L I T Y O F S U R F A C E - T h e
impermeability factor, that is! the proportion
of the total rainfall dischargmg to a surface
water drain after allowing for soakage,
evaporation and other losses, varies with the
frequency and duration of rainfall. These
factors shall be taken into account in design.
8.6.2.1 The whole of the rainfall on impervious areas shall be assumed to reach the
drains, allowance for evaporation or time of
concent_ration being made in domestic
drainage work. The roof area shall be taken
as the horizontal projection of that area.
8.6.3 R A I N- WATER P IPES
OF
FOR
D RAINAGE
ROOFS
8.6.3.1 The roofs of a building shall be so

constructed or framed as to permit effectual
drainage of the rain-water therefrom by
means of a sufficient number of rain-water
pipes of adequate size so arranged, jointed
and fixed as to ensu.re that the rain-water is
carried away from the building without
causing dampness in any part of the walls or
foundations of the building or those of an
adjacent building.
8.6.3.2 The rain-water pipes shall befixed to
the outside of the exteinal walls of the
building or in recesses or chases cut or
formed in such external wall or in such other
manner. as inay be approved by the
Authority.
8.6.3.3 The rain-water pipes conveying rainwater shall discharge directly or by means of
a channel into or over an inlet to a surface
drain or shall discharge freely in a
compound, drained to surfacedrain but in no
case shall it discharge directly into any closed
drain.
8.6.3.4 Whenever it is not possible to discharge a rain-water pipe into or over an inlet
to a surface drain or in a compound, drained
to a surface drain or in a street drain within
30 m from the boundary of the premises, such
rain-water pipe shall discharge into agullytrap which shall be connected with the street
drain for storm water and such a gully-trap
shall have a screen and a silt catcher
incorporated in its design.
8.6.3.5 If such streets drain is not available
within 30 m of the boundary of the premises,
a rain-water pipe may discharge directly into
IX_ 2
-26
the kerb drain and shall be taken through-a

pipe outlet across the footpath, if any, without obstructing the path.
8.6.3.6 A rain-water pipe shall not discharge
into or connect with any soil pipe or its ventilating pipe or any waste pipe or its ventilating pipe nor shall it discharge into a sewer
unless specifically permitted to do so by the
Authority, in which case such discharge into
a sewer shall be intercepted by means of a
gully trap.
8.6.3.7 Rain-water pipes shall be constructed of cast iron, asbestos cement, galvanized
sheet or other equally suitable material and
shall be securely futed.
8.6.3.8 Rain-water pipes shall be normally
sized on the basis of roof areas according to
Table 14. A bell mouth inlet at the roof
surface is found to give better drainage effect,
provided proper slopes are given to the roof
surface. The spacing of pipes depends on the
positiop of the windows and arch openings,
but 6 m apart is a convenient distance. The
stainer area shall be If to 2 times the area of
pipe to which it connects.
8.6.3.9 The disposal of the water collecting
at various floors consequent upon fire
fighting operations may advantageously be
considered through small pump sets with
delivery of pump sets connected to drainage
arrangement of roof.
8.6.3.10 The storm water shall be led off in a
suitable open drain to a watercourse. The
open drain, if not a pucca mas0nr.y
throughout, shall be so at least where there IS
either a change in direction or gradient.
8.6.4 S IZE AND G RA DIENTS OF P IPES-- The
pipes shall be so designed as to give a velocity of flow of not less than I m, s when
running half-full. THe maximum velocity
shall not exceed 2.5 m, s.
8.6.5 DISPOSAL-SU
water may be disposed of in one or more ways specified in
8.6.5.1 to 8.6.5.5 but preferably by the
method given in 8.6.5.1.
8.6.5.1 SEPARATE SYSTEM -All courtyards
shall be provided with one or more outlets
through which rain-water may pass to the
storm water system. All rain-water shall be
diverted into the storm water drains and
away from any opening connecting with any
sewer.
Where storm water drains are necessary for
the discharge of rain-water to a public storm
water drain, such drains shall be designed for
the intensity of rain based on local conditions, but in no case shall they be designed
TABLE 14 SIZING OF RAIN-WATER PIPES FOR ROOF DRAINAGE

.
(Clause 8.6.3.8)
SL
No.
I)IA
OFPlPE
AVERAGE RATE OF
I
5Omm
t
(1)
I)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
(2)
mm
50
65
75
IO0
I25
150
75 mm
IOOmm
RAINFALL
IN
mm/h
125mm
I5omm
2oomuii
Roof Area m*
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
13.4
24. I
40.8
85.4
8.9
16.0
27.6
57.0
6.6
12.0
26.4
42.7
80.5
5.3
96
16.3
34.2
64.3
4.4
8.0
13.6
28.5
53.5
83.6
3.3 .
6.0
10.2
21.3
40.0
62.7
for intensity of rainfall of less than 13 m/h.

Usually, each separate plot shall have a separate drain connection made to a covered or
open public drain. Such connection to a
covered .drain shall be made through a pipe at
least 3.5 m in length laid at a gradient of not
less than that of the connecting drain. The
storm water from the plot shall dis-charge
intothe storm water drain directly and not
through a trap.
8.6.5.2 COMBINED OR PARTIALLY SEPARATE
S Y S T E M-- Where levels do not permit
connection to a public storm water drain,
storm water from courtyards may be
connected to the public sewer, provided it is
designed to convey combined discharge. In
such cases, the surface water shall be
admitted to the soil sewer through trapped
gullies in order to prevent the escape of sewer
air.
8.6.5.3 TO A WATERCOURSE -lt may often
be convenient to discharge surface water to a
nearby stream or a watercourse. The invert
level of the outfall shall be about the same as
the normal water level in the watercourse.
The outfall shall be protected against floating debris by a screen.
8.6.5.4 TO STORAGE TANKS -Water from
the roof of a building may be led straight
from the downpipes to one or more water tight storage tanks. Such storage tanks shall
be raised to a convenient height above
ground and shall always be provided with
ventilating covers, and have draw-off taps
suitably placed so that the rain-water may be
drawn off for domestic washing purposes or
for garden water. A large impervious storage
tank is sometimes constructed underground,
from which rain-water is pumped as required
to the house. All storage tanks shall be provided with an overflow.
8.6.5.5 An arrangement shall be provided in

the rain-water leader to divert the first washings from the roof or terrace catchment, as
they would contain much undesirable material. The mouths.of all pipes and openings
shall be covered with mosquito ( insect)
proof wire net.
8.6.5.6 French drains may be em loyed as
surface water drains and are use4ul in the
drainage of unpaved surface, such as play
field and certain types of roads. When used
for this purpose in addition to the drainage
being filled with rubble, it is often advisable
to include a field drain in the trench bottom.
8.7 Subsoil Water Drainage
8.7.1 G ENERAL -Subsoil water is that portion of the rainfall which is absorbed intotRe
ground and the drainage of subsoil water
may be necessary for the following reasons:
a) to increase the stability of the surface;

b) to avoid surface flooding;
c) to alleviate or to avoid causing dampness in the building, especially in the

cellars;
d) to reduce the humidity in the immediate

vicinity of the building; and
d to increase the workability of the soil.
8.7.2 D EPTH OF W A T E R T A B L E- T h e
stand-ing level of the subsoil water will vary
with the season, the amount of rainfall and
the proximity and level of drainage channels
Information shall be obtained regarding this
level by means of boreholes or trial pits, I
preferably the latter. It is desirable though
not always practicable to ascertain the level
of the standing water over a considerable
period so as to enable the seasonal variations
97
PAMr IX PLUMBING SERVICES-ShCTION
Ix-2-m '
to
be recorded and in particular the high

water level. The direction of flow of the
subsoil water may usually be judged by the
general inclination of the land surface and
the main lines of the subsoil drains shall
follow the natural falls, wherever possible.
8.7.3 P RECAUTIONS -Subsoil dtains shall
be so sited as not lo endanger the stability ol
the buildings or earthwork. In some portions
of the drain, it may be necessary to use nonporous jointed pipes.
8.7.3.1 No field pipe shall be laid in such a
manner or in such a position as to communicate directly with any drain constructed or
adopted to be used for conveying sewage,
except where absolutely unavoidable and in
that case a suitable efficient trap shall be provided between subsoil drain and such sewer.
8.7.4
S YSTEMS
OF
SUBSOIL. DR A I N A G E
8.7.4.1 F I EL D D R A I N P IP E S - C l a y o r
concrete porous DiDes may be used and shall
be laid d one oi ihe foliowing ways:
-The pipes are laid to follow
the natural depressions or valleys of the
site, branches discharging into the main
as tributaries into a river;
b) HERRING-BONE -A system consisting of
a number of main drains into which discharge, from both sides, smaller subsidiary branches parallel to each other but
at an angle to the mains forming a series
of herring-bone patterns;
GRID
-A main or mains near the bouncl
daries of a site into .which branches discharge from one side only;
d) FAN-SHAPED-,T~~ drains are laid converging to a single outlet at one point on
the boundary of a site, without the use of
main or collecting
drains;
\
d MOAT OR CUT-OFF SYSTfiM - SOlnetimeS
drains are laid on one or more sides of a
building to intercept the flow of subsoil
water and !hereby protect the foundations.
a)
NATURAL
main drain is best made by means of aclayware or concrete junction pipe. The outlet of
a subsoil system may discharge into asoakaway or through a catchpit into the nearest .
ditch or watercourse. Where these are not
available, the subsoil drains may be connected, with the approval of the Authority,
through an intercepting trap to the surface
water drainage system.
N OTE -Care shall be taken that there is no backflow
from sub-surface drains during heavy rains.
8.8 Waste Disposal Systems in High Altitudes and: or Sub-zero Temperature Regions
In general, all the cases to be exercised

regarding water supply systems shall also be
applicable in the case of waste disposalsysterns shall also be applicable in the case of
waste disposal systems (see Part IX
Plumbing services Section I Water supply).
The biological and chemical reduction of
organic material proceeds slowly under low
temperature conditions, consequently
affecting the waste disposal systems. The
waste disposal methods given in8.8.2. 8.8.3
and 8.8.4 shall be used only where it is not
practical to instal water carriage systems.
8.8.1
8.8.2 Box AND C AN SYS-KEMS - Where box

and can systems are employed, adequate
arrangements shall be made for the cleaning
and disinfection of the can after it is emptied
of its contents. The excrement from the can
shall be disposed of by burial in isolated
spots far from habitation or by incineration.
where feasible. The can shall be fitted with a
tight fitting lid for use when it is carried for
emptying.
8.8.3 T RENCH OR P IT L A TR INES -Trench
or pit latrines shall be used only where soil
and sub-soil conditions favour their use.
Whenever they are used, they shall not be
closer than 18 m from any source of drinking
water, such as well, lo mitigate the possibility
of bacterial pollution of water.
8.8.4 C HEMICAL TOILEI-s -For the successful functioning of chemical toilets, they shall
preferably be installed in heated rooms or
enclosures.
The choice of one or more of these systems

will naturally depend on the local conditions
of the site. For building sites. the mains shall
be not less than 75 mm in diameter and the
branches not less than 65 mm in diameter but
normal practice tends towards the use of
IOOmm and 75 mm respectively. The pipes
shall generally be laid at 60 to 9Ocm depth, or
to such a depth to which it is desirable to
lower the water-table and the gradients are
determined rather by the fall of the land than
bv considerations of self-cleansing velocity.
.l-hc connection of the subsidiary drain to the
N OTE -Chemical toilet essentially consists of small

cylindrical tanks with a water-closet seat for the use of 8
lo IO persons. A ventilation pipe is fitted to the seal. A
strong solution of caustic soda is used as a disinfectant.
It kills bacteria, liquefies the solid; and thus checks the
decomposition of brganic matter. The lank is provided
with a drain plug from which liquid runs to a soak pit at
the time of disposal.
8.8.5
W A T E R- BO R N E S A N I T A T I O N
SYSTEMS - Water-boine sanitation systems
shall be used, where practicable. Sanitation

systems for the collection of sewage should
be constructed in such a manner that

maximum heat is retained by insulation, if
necessary.
8.8.5.1 SEWERAGE -Under normal circumstances, sewers shall be laid below the frost
line. Manholes shall be made of air-tight
construction so as to prevent the cold air
from gaining access inside and freezing the
contents. The trenches for sewers shall be
loosely filled with earth after laying sewers,
since loose soil is a better insulator than
compacted soil. Consequently, sewers laid
under traffic ways and other places where soil
compaction
.--- may be expected are required to
be given adequate insulation:Where feasible,
sewers shall be so located that the trench line
is not in shadow, when the sun is shining.
Concrete, cast iron and stoneware pipes
conduct heat relatively rapidly and as such
should be adequately insulated.
maximum number of simultaneously

discharging appliances. ,For the calculation
of this peak flow certain loading factors have
been assigned to appliances in terms of
fixture units, considering their probability
and frequency of use. These fixture unit
values are given in Table 15.
9.1.1.1 For any fixtures not covered under
Table 15, Table 16 may be referred to for
deciding their fixture unit rating depending
on their drain or trap size.
9.1.1.2 From Table 15 and 16, the total load
on any pipe in terms of fixtures units may be
calculated knowing the number and type of
appliances connected to this pipe.
9.1.1.3 For converting the total load in fixture units to the peak flow in litres per
minute, Fig. 8 is to be used.
8.8.5.2 SEPTIC TANKS -Septic tanks can

function only when it can be ensured that the
contents inside these do not freeze at low
temperature. For this purpose, the septic
tanks shall be located well below the frost
line. The location of manhole openings shall
be marked by staves. Fencing around the
septic tanks shall be provided for discouraging traffic over them. As the rate of biological activity is reduced by 50 percent for every
10C fall in temperature. the capacity of
septic tanks shall hc incrcascd by 100 percent
for operation at IIYc: o\cr that for operation
at 20C.
8 A Estimate Curves
8.8.5.3 SEEPAGE PI Is -Seepage pits can

function only when the soil and sub-soil
conditions are favourable. Frozen soil
extending to a great depth would preclude
the use of such disposal devices in view of the
lower water absorption capacity. The
discharge of effluent should be made below
the frost line.
8.8.5.4 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS Suitable design modifications for
sedimentation, chemical and biological
processess shall be applied to sewage
treatment plants for satisfactory
functioning.
0 10 40. (0 80
100 110 10 10
1.0 100 110 Ia 260
FfXlURB "WITS
8
Fig. 8
B Enlarge Scale Curves
Peach Flow Load CUrvf?S
8.8.5.5 Lavatories and bath-rooms shall be

kept heated to avoid freezing of water inside
traps and flushing cisterns.
9.1.1.4 The maximum load in fixture units

permissible on various recommended pipe
sizes in the ,drainage system are given in
Tables 17 and 18.
9. DESIGN
9.1.1.5 Results should be checked to see that

the soil, waste and building sewer pipes are
not reduced in diameter in the direction of
flow. Where appliances are to be added in
fixture, these should be taken into account in
assessing the pipe sizes by using the fixture
units given in T-ables I5 and 16.
9.1 Estimation of Maximum Flow of Waste

Water
9.1.1 The maximum flow in a building drain
or a stack depends on the probable
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES--SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANlTATlOh
I\-?--z
T A B L E I5 F I X T U R E UNIT3 F O R D I F F E R E N T
SANITARY APPLIANCES OR GROUPS
(Clauses 9.1.1 to 9.1.1.2 and 9.1.1.5)
TABLE Ii MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FIXTURE

UNlrS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
BRANCHES AND STOCKS
(Clause 9.1.1.4)
T YPE
SL
No.
OF
FIXTURE
UNIT
V ALUE AS
L OAD
FACTORS
F IXTURE /
(2)
(1)
(3)
i) One bathroom group consisting

of water-closet, wash basin and
bath tub or shower stall:
a) Tank-water-closet
b) Flush-valve water-closet
DIA- MAXIMUM N UMBER OF F IXTURE U N I T S*

SL
T HAT C AN B E C ONNECTED
No. METER
A
OF PIPE
MORE THAN 3
f ANY
ONE
HORI- STACK OF STOREYS IN H E I G H T
A
ZONTAL 3 STOREYS
F I X T U R E I N TO T A L T O T A L A-?
B RANCH t HE I G H T
FOR
ONE
STAC-K STOREY OR
OR 3
INTERVAIZ
B RANCH
INTERVAL
(1)
ii) Bath tub*

Bidet
iv) Combination
(drain board
ii)
iii)
iv)
sink-and-tray
v) Drinking fountain
vi) Floor traps7
l/2
I
vii) Kitchen sink, domestic
viii) Wash basin, ordinaryj

ix) Wash basin, surgeons
I
2
2
x) Shower stall, domestic

xi) Showers (group) per head
j
4
Urinal, wall lip
xiii) Urinal, stall
xiv) Water-closet. tank-operated
xv) Water-closet, valve-operated
*A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the

fixture unit value.
t Size of floor trap shall be determined by the area of
surface water to be drained.
$ Wash basins with 32mm and 40mm trap have the
same load value.
(4)
(3)
iii)
xii)
(2)
mm
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
75
100
I25
I50
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
200
250
300
375
(5)
(6)
2
4
:
I2
;:
20
30
:z
620
::
960
I 100
I 900
200
350
2200
3800
6ooo
-
:%
600
:%
8400
_
G
-
:z
24
42
*Depending upon the probability of simultaneous use of

appliances considering the frequency of use and peak
discharge rate
tDoes not Include branches of the building sewer.
T A B L E I8 M A X I M U M N U M B E R O F F I X T U R E
UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
BUILDING DRAINS A N D S E W E R S
(Clause 9.1.1.4)
D I A. MA X I M U M N~JMBER OF FIXluRE UN I T S
Sl.
No. METER
T HAT C AN B E C ONNECTED TO ANY
P O R T I O N- OF THE BUILDING DR A I N
OF PIPE
OR THE BUII.DING SEWER
F OR GRADIEM
h
T A B L E 16 F I X T U R E UNII V A L U E S F O R
FIXTURES BASED ON FIXTLIRE DRAIN
OR TRAP SIZE
(1)
NO.
FIYI~~RE DRAIN OPI TR A P S
IFIXWRE
llhll
V ALCE
(1)
0
IZE
(2)
(3)
30 m m and smaller
ii)
40 m m
iii)
50 m m
IV)
65 m m
v)
75 mm
vi)
IO0 mm
9.1.2 The maximum rate of flow shall be

taken as thrice the average rate, allowance
being made in addition for any exceptional
peak discharges. A good average rule is to
allow for a flow of liquid wastes frombuildir:gs at the rate of 0.03 m per minute per 100
pcr\on\
i\ : 30
l/50
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
l/25
(6)
mm
(Clauws 9.1.1.1. 9.1.1.2 and. Y.1.1.5)

SI
I:100
l/200
i)
ii)
iii)
loo
I50
200
l$loo
180
700
I600
216
250
1:;
:g
iv)
v)
vi)
250
300
375
2500.
3900
7000
2900
4600
8300
3300
5600
IO 000
4200
6700
I2 000
*Includes branches of the building sewer.
9.2. Gradients and Pipe Sizes

9.2.1 G R A D I E N T S
9.2.1.1 The discharge of water through a
domestic drain is intermittent and limited in
quantity and, therefore, small accumulations
of solid matter are liable to form in the drains
between the building and the public sewer.
There is usually a gradual shifting of these
deposits as discharges take place. Gradients
shall be sufficient to prevent these temporary
accumulations building up and blocking the
drains.
NATIONAL BUILD.NC CODE OF INDIA
9.2.1.2 Normally, the sewer shall be designed

for discharging the peak simultaneous flow
.as given in 9.1.1. and 9.1.2 flowing half-full
with a minimum self-cleansing velocity of
0.75 m/s. The approximate gradients which
give this velocity for the sizes of pipes likely
to be used in building drainage and the
corresponding discharges when flowinghalffull are given in Table 19.
9.2.13 In cases where it is practically not
possible to conform to the ruling gradients, a
flatter gradient may be used, but the minimum -velocity in such cases shall on no
account be less than 0.61 rn/ s and adequate
flushing should be done.
NOTE -Where
gradients are restricted, the practice of

using a pipe of larger diameter than is requued by the
normal flow in order to justify laying at a Batter gradient does not result in increasing the velocity of flow,
but reduces the depth of flow and for this reason is to be
discouraged.
-TABLE 19 DIFFERENT DIA PIPES GIVING A

VELOCITY OF 0.75 m/s AND
CORRESPONDING DISCHARGE
(Clause 9.2.1.2)
SL
No.
(1)
D IAMETER
GRADIENT
(2)
(3)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
:E
250
I in 100
I in I45
I in 175
I in 195
vi)
300
I in 250
V)
I50
(4)
m/min
mm
100
DISCHARGE
I in 57
0.18
0.42
0.73
0.93
I.10
1.70
9.2.1.4 On the other hand, it is undesirable

to employ gradients giving a velocity of flow
greater than 2.4 m/s. Where it is
unavoidable, cast iron pipes shall be used.
The approximate gradients which give a
velocity of 2.4m/s for pipes of various sizes
and the correspondina discharge when
flowing half-full are given in Table 20.
TABLE 20 DIFFERENT DIA PIPES GIVING A
VELOCITY OF 2.4 m/s AND
CORRESPONDlNG
Sl.
No.
(1)
DISCHARGE
DIAMETER
GRADIENT
(2)
(3)
!Z
::
250
300
(4)
m/ min
mh
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
DISCHARGE
I in 5.6
I in 9.7
lin I4
Iin I7
lin I9
I in 24.5
::;
2140
2.98
3.60
5.30
9.2. A .5 The discharge values corresponding

to nominal diameter and gradient given in
PART IX
PI.UMBINC SERVICES-SECTION 2
Tables 19 and 20 are based on Mannings

formula ( n=O.O 15 ).
9.2.2 P IPE SIZES -Subject to the minimum
size of 100 m, the sizes of pipes shall be decided in relation to the estimated quantity of
flow and the available gradient.
10. CONSTRUCTZON RELATING TO
CONVEYANCE OF SANITARY
WASTES
10.1 Excavation -The safety precautions as
given in Part VII Constructional practices
and safety, shall be ensured.
10.1.1 Excavation shall proceed to within
about 7.5 cm of the finished formation level.
This final 7Scm is to be trimmed and removed as a separate operation immediately
prior to the laying of the pipes or their foundations.
10.1.2 Unless specified otherwise by the
Authority, the width at bottom of trenches
for pipes of different diameters laid at different depths shall be as given below:
4 For all diameters, up to an average
depth of 120 cm, width of trench in cm =
diameter of pipe + 30 cm;
b) For all diameters for depths above
120 cm; width of trench in cm=diameter
of pipe+4Ocm; and
cl Notwithstanding (a) and (b), the total
width of trench at the top should notbe
less than 75 cm for depths exceeding
!I0 cm.
10.1.3 All pipes, ducts, cables, mains or
other services exposed in the trench shall be
effectively supported by timber and/ or chain
or rope-slings.
10.1.4 All drainage sumps shall be sunk clear
of the work outside the trench or at the sides
of manholes. After the completion of the
work, any pipes or drains leading to such
sumps or temporary subsoil drains under
permanent work shall be filled in properly
with sand and consolidated.
10.2 Laying of Pipes -Laying of pipes shall
[1X-2( 14)].
10.3 Jointing-All soil pipes, waste pipes,
ventilating pipes and other such pipes above
ground shall be gas-tight. All sewers and
drains laid below the ground shall be watertight. Jointing shall be done in accordance
with good practice [1X-2( 14)].
10.4 Connection to Exbting Sewers-The
connection to an existing sewer shall, as far
DRAINAGE AND SANITATIOH
,_Y
as possible, be done at the manholes. Where

it is unavoidable to make connection in
between two manholes, the work of breaking
into the existing sewer and forming the
connection shall be carried out by the
Authority or under its supervision.
10.4.1 Breaking into the sewer shall be
effected by the cautious enlargement of a
small hole and .every precaution shall be taken
to prevent any material from entering the
sewer. No connection shall be formed in
such a way as to constitute a projection into
the sewer or to cause any diminution in its
effective size.
10.5 Back-Filling
105.1 Filling of the trench shall not be
commenced until the length of pipes therein
has been tested and passed (see 14.2).
105.2 All timber which may be withdrawn
with safety shall be removed as filling
proceeds.
10.5.3 Where the pipes are unprotected by
concrete haunching, the first operation in
filling shall be carefully done to hand-pack
and tamp selected fine material around the
lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them
to the sides of the trench:
20.5.4 The filling shall then be continued to
15 cm over the top of the pipe using selected
tine hand-packed material, watered and
rammed on both sides of the pipe with a
wooden rammer. On no account shall
material be tipped into the trench until the
first 15 cm of filling has been completed. The
process of filling and tamping shall proceed
evenly so as to maintain an equal pressure on
both sides of the pipeline.
Il.2 Rain- Water Pipes - Rain-water pipes

shall conform to the accepted standards
[1X-2( 15)].
11.3 Subsoil Drain Pipes
11.3.1 FIELD D RAIN P IPES -Suitable pipes
for this purpose are plain cylindrical glazedware pipes, or concrete porous pipes though
the latter may prove unsuitable where subsoil water carries sulphates or is acidic owing
to the presence of peat. Trenches for these
pipes need be just wide enough at the bottom
to permit laying the pipes, which shall be laid
with open joints to proper lines and
gradients.
It is advisable to cover the pipes with clinker
free from fine ash, brick ballast or other suitable rubble, or a layer of inverted turf, brushwood or straw before refilling the trench, in
order to prevent the infiltration of silt
through the open joints. Where the subsoil
drain is also to serve the purpose of collecting surface water, the rubble shall be carried
up to a suitable level and when required for a
lawn or playing field, the remainder of the
trench shall be filled with pervious top soil.
When refilling the trenches, care shall be
taken to prevent displacement of pipes in line
of levels. When they pass near trees or
through hedges, socket pipes with cement or
bitumen- joints shall be used to prevent
penetration by roots.
Zl.3.2 FRENCH DRAINS -A shallow trench is
excavated, the bottom neatly trimmed to the
gradient and the trench filled with broken
stone, gravel or clinker, coarse at the bottom
and finer towards the top.
22. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION
OF SANITARY APPLIANCES
10.5.5 Filling shall be continued in layers not

exceeding 15cm in thickness, each layer
being watered and well rammed.
12.1 Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances shall be done in

acc6rdance with good practice [1X-2( 16)].
10.5.6 In roads, surface materials previously

excavated shall be replaced as the top layer of
the filling, consolidated and maintained
satisfactorily till the permanent reinstatement of the surface is made by the Authority.
13. REFUSE CHUTE SYSTEM
1i. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO

CONVEYANCE OF RAIN OR
STORM WATER
13.1 Refuse chute system is provided in

multi-storeyed buildings for transporting and
collecting in a sanitary way the refuse from
floors at different heights. The refuse is
received from the ~successive floor through
the inlets located on the vertical system of
pipes that convey refuse through it and
discharge it into the collecting chamber from
where the refuse is cleared at suitable
intervals.
I I. I Roof Gutters-Roof gutters shall be of

any material of suitable thickness. All junctions and joints shall be water-tight.
13.2 This system has got three functionally

important components, namely, the chutes,
the inlet hopper and the collection chamber.
10.5.7 In gardens, the top soil and turf, if

any, shall be-carefully replaced.
W-32
13.2.2 The chute may be carried through

service shafts meant for carrying drainage
pipes. However, the location shall be mostly
determined by the position of the inlet
hopper and the collecting chamber that is
most convenient for the user. It should also
be considered to locate the chute away from
living rooms in order to avoid noise and
small nuisance.
14.1.4.1 Careful note shall be kept of the

condition of any sewer, manhole or other
existing work which may be uncovered and
any defects evident shall be pointed out immediately to the Authority.
13.2.2 In individual chute system, the inlet

hopper shall be located in the passage near
the kitchen and in the common chute system
towards the end of the common passage.
Nafural ventilation should be adequate to
prevent any possible odour nuisance. There
should bc adequate lighting at this location.
For ground floor ( Floor I), the inlet hoppers
may be placed at a higher level and a flight of
steps may be provided for using the same.
13.2 Testing
13.2.3 The collection chamber shall be situated at ground level.

13.3 Kequirements in regard to the design
and construction of refuse chute sytem
shall be in accordance with good practict
[1X-2(17)2].
14.1 Inspection
14.1.1 All sanitary appliances and fitments
shall be carefully examined for defects before
they are installed and also on the completion
of the work.
141.2 Pipes are liable to get damaged in
transit and, notwithstanding tests that may
have been made before despatch, each pipe
shall be carefully examined on arrival on the
site. Preferably, each pipe shall be ru with
a hammer or mallet and those that ?g
do not
ring true and clear shall be rejected. LSound
pipes shall be carefully stored to prevent
damage. Any defective pipes shall be
segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner
and their use in the works prevented.
14.1.3 Cast iron pipes shall be carefully
examined for damage to the protective coating. Minor damage shall be made good by
painting over with hot tar or preferably bitumen. But if major defects in coating exist, the
pipes shall not be used unless recoated. Each
pipe shall be carefully reexamined for
soundness before laying.
14.1.4 Close inspection shall be maintained
at every stage in the work, particularly as to
the adequacy of timber supports used in excavation and the care and thcroughness
exercised in filling.
FART
IX
PLUMBING
SERVICES-SECTION
14.1.4.2 No work shall be covered over or

surrounded with concrete until it has been
inspected and ilpproved by the Authority.
IJ.2. I Conlpl cllcnhi\e tests of all appliances

shall be n~dc by simulating conditions
of UW. Overllow shall be examined for
obstructions.
14.2.2 S MOKE T E S T-All soil pipes, waste
pipes, and vent pipes and all other pipes
when above ground shall be approved gastight by a smoke test conducted under a
pressure of 25mm of water and maintained
for 15 min after all trap seals have been
filled with water. The smoke is produced by
burning only waste or tar paper or similar
material in the combustion chamber of a
smoke machine. Chemical smokes are not
satisfactory.
14.2.3 W ATER TES.I
142.3.1 FOR PIPES OTHER THAN CAST IRON
-Glazedware and concrete pipes shall be
subjected to a test pressure of at least I.Sm
head of water at the highest point of the
section under test. The tolerance figure of
Zlitrcs cm of diameter km may be allowed
during a period of ten minutes. The test shall
be carried out by suitably plugging the low
end of the drain and the ends of connections,
if any, and filling the system with water. A
knuckle bend shall be tempc;rerily.jointed in
at the top end and a sufficient le lgth of the
vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the
required test head, or the top end may be
plugged with a connection to a hose ending
in a funnel which could be raised or lowered
till the required head is obtained and fixed
suitably for observation.
Subsidence of the test water may be due to
one or more of the following causes:
a) absorption by pipes and joints;
b) sweating of pipes or joints;
c) leakage at joints or from defective pipes;
and
d) trapped air.
Allowance shall be made for (a) by adding
water until absorption has ceased after which
the test proper should commence. Any
leakage will he visible and the defectivep&rt
2 D R A I N A G E ANI) SANITATlOh!
,X-,33
of the work should be cut out and made

good. A slight amount of sweating which is
uniform may be overlooked, but excessive
sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall
be watched for and taken as indicating a
defect to be made good.
N OTE-This test will not be applicable to sanitary
pipework above ground level.
14.2.3.2 FOR CAST IRON PIPES-C~~~ iron

sewers and drains shall be tested as I for
glazedware and concrete pipes. The drain
plug shall be suitably strutted to prevent their
being forced out.of the pipe during the test.
14.2.4 T ESTS FOR S TRAIGHTNESS A N D
-The following tests shall be
carried out:
O BSTRUCTION
a) by inserting at the high end of.the sewer

or drain a smooth ball of a diameter
13mm less than the pipe bore. In the

absence of obstruction, such as yarn or
mortar projecting through the joints, the
ball should roll down the invert of the
pipe, and emerge at the lower end; and
b) by means of a mirror at one end of the
line and lamp at the other. If the pipeline
is straight, the full circle of light may be
observed. If the pipeline is not straight,
this will be apparent. The mirror will also
indicate obstruction in the barrel.
14.2.5 T EST R ECORDS -Complete records
shall be kept of all tests carried out on sewers
and drains both during construction and
after being put into service.
151 MAINTENANCE
15.1 Domestic drainage system shall be,inspedted at regular intervals. The system shall
be thoroughly cleaned out at the same time
and any defects discovered shall be made
good.
15.2 Cleaning qf Drainage System
15.2.1 Sewer maintenance crews, when
entering a deep manhole or sewer where
dangerous gas or oxygen deficiencies may be
present, shall follow the following
procedures:
a) allow no smoking or open flames and

guard against sparks
b) erect warning signs
c) use only safety gas-proof, electric lighting equipment
d) test the atmosphere for noxious gases
and oxygen deficiencies (presence of
hydrogen sulphide is detected using lead
1x-2-34
acetate paper and that of oxygen bysafety lamps).

If the atmosphere is normal, workmen
may enter with a safety belt attached and
with two men available at the top. For
extended jobs, the gas tests shall be
repeated at frequent intervals, depending
on circumstances.
If oxygtin deficiency or noxious gas is
found, the structure shall be ventilated
with pure air by keeping open at least
one manhole cover each on upstream
and downstream side for quick exit of
toxic gases or by artificial means. The
gas tests shall be repeated and the
atmosphere cleared before entering.
Adequate ventilation shall be maintained
during this work and the tests repeated
frequently.
8) If the gas or oxygen deficiency is present
and it is not practicable to ventilate

adequately before workers enter, a hose
mask shall be worn and extreme care
taken to avoid all sources of ignition.
Workers shall be taught how to use the
hose equipment. In these cases, they shall
always use permissible safety lights (not
ordinary flash lights), rubber boots or
non-sparking shoes and non-sparking
tools;
h) Workmen descending a manhole shaft to
inspect or clean sewers shall try each
ladder step or rung carefully before putting the full weight on it to guard against
insecure fastening due to corrosion of the
rung at the manhole wall. When work is
going on in deep sewers, at least two men
shall be available for lifting workers
from the manhole in the event of serious
injury; and
3 Portable air blowers, for ventilating
manhole, are recommended for all tank,
pit or manhole work where there is a
question as to the presence of noxious
gas, vapours or oxygen deficiency. The
motors for these shall be of weatherproof and flame-proof types;
compression ignition-diesel type
(without sparking plug) may be used.
When used, these shall be placed not less
than 2 m away from the opening and on
the leeward side protected from wind, so
that they will not serve as a source of
ignition for any inflammable gas which
might be present. Provision should be
made for ventilation and it should be of
the forced type which can be provided by
a blower located at ground level with
suitable flexible ducting to displace out
air from the manhole.
15 . L.2 The following operations shall be
carried out during periodical cleaning of a

drainage system:
The covers of inspection chambers and
manholes shall be removed and the side
benchings and channels scrubbed;
b) The interceptive trap, if fitted, shall be
adequately cleaned and flushed with
clean water. Care shall be taken to see
that the stopper in the rodding arm is
securely replaced;
4 All lengths of main and branch drains
shall be rodded by means of drain rods
and a suitable rubber or leather plunger.
After rodding, the drains shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water. Any
obstruction found shall be removed with
suitable drain cleaning tools and the
system thereafter shall be flushed with
clean water;
4 The covers of access plates to all gullies
shall be removed and the traps plunged
and flushed out thoroughly with clean
water. Care shall be taken not to flush
the gully deposit into the system;
d Any defects revealed as a result of ins-
pection or test shall be made good;

f) The covers or inspection chambers and
gullies shall be replaced, bedding them in
suitable grease or other materials; and
g) Painting of ladders/rings in deep manholes and external painting of manhole
covers shall be done with approved
paints.
l-5.3 All surface water drains shall be periodically rodded by means of drain rods and a
suitable rubber or leather plunger. After
rodding, they shall be thoroughly flushed
with clean water. Any obstruction found
shall be removed with suitable drain cleaning
tools.
15.4 All subsoil drains shall be periodically
examined for obstruction at the open joints
due to the roots of plants or other growths.
16. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
16.1 At the completion of the plumbing installation work, the licensed plumber shall
give a completion certificate in the prescribed Ibrm, which is given in Appendix C.
APPENDIX A
(Clause 3.1)
APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES
I/ We hereby make application to the* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..T
for permission to drain the
.......................................................
premises...................Ward No....................... Street No . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road/ Street known as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The sanitary arrangement and drains of the said premises are shown in the accompanying plans
and a description of the specification of the work/material usedis also.appended (Appendix B).
I/ We undertake to carryout the work in accordance with Part IX Plumbing services, Section 2
Drainage and sanitation of the Code.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.........*.....
....................................
S&nature of the licensed plumber
Name and address of the
Name and address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..,.................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a*..................
............................ ........
..,...................*.............
Date................................
Date................................
NOTE-The application should be signed by the owner of the premises and shall be countersigned by the licensed
plumber.
*Insert the name of the Authority.
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION
DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
,X25
APPENDIX B
( Clause 3.5)
FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND SPECIFICATION
OF MATERIALS
1)
Separation of rain-water and foul water.........................................
2)
Rain-water drains, curbs and points of discharge.................................
3)
Rain-water gutters, pipes or spouts where discharging....................................................
4)
Open-full-water drains, materials, sizes, curbs and other means places,\peran&rrhs, latrines
5)
6)
Silt-catcher and grating, size and position.......................................................................

Drains ................................................................................................................................
Main sewage drains: Fall ...........................................................................................
Size .................................................... ..- ...................................
Fall ...........................................................................................
Branch drains:
Size ...........................................................................................
Materials ... ..................................................................................................................
Method of jointing .....................................................................................................
7 )
Bedding of pipes:
a) Method of bedding....................................................................................................
b) Thickness and width of beds of concrete..................................................................
c) Thickness of concrete roun@.pipes.. ...........................................................................
8)
Protection of drain laid under wall............................................................... . ..................
9)
Traps, description and intercepter:

a) Lavatory waste pipes..................................................................................................
b) Bath waste pipes .........................................................................................................
c) Sink .............................................................................................................................
d) Gully-traps.. .................................................................................................................
e) Water-closet traps .......................................................................................................
f) Grease traps ................................................................................................................
g) Slope sink ...................................................................................................................
h) Urinal. .........................................................................................................................
j ) O t h e r s ..........................................................................................................................
10)
Manholes and inspection chambers:

a) Thickness of walls.. .....................................................................................................
b) Description of bricks ..................................................................................................
c) Description of rendering.. ...........................................................................................
d) Description of invert channels....................................................................................
e) Depth of chambers .....................................................................................................
f) Size and description of cover and manner 01 fixing.. ...............................................
11)
Ventilation of drain:
a) Position-~ Height above nearest ground level............................................................
b) Outlet shaft position of terminal at top....................................................................
I?)
Soil pipe, waste pipe and ventilating pipe connections:

a) I.ead and iron pipes ...................................................................................................
h) l.cad pipe of trap with cast iron pipe .......................................................................
c) Stonew:trc pipts or trap with lead pipe.. ....................................................................
d) l.edd soil pipe or trap with stoneware pipe or trap .................................................
e) <:t>t iron pipe with stoneware drain.........................................................................
I) \tonurir: Imp \vlih cast iron so11 pipe ...................................................................
11)
\~I~III :11(1:1 (I! w~ter-~~lo\e! trap sink, lavatory and other traps material and supports.
14) Water-closets (apartments):

i) At or above ground level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
ii) Approached from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A..
iii) Floor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv) Floor fall towards door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v) Size of window opening in wall made to open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi) Position of same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii) Means of constant ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii) Position of same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) Water-closet apparatus:
9 Description of pan, basin, etc. ............................................................................
Kind .....................................................
ii) Flushing cistern .......................................
Capacity ...............................................
iii) Material of flushing pipe.....................................................................................
iv) Internal diameter.................................................................................................
v) Union with basin..................................................................................................
15) Sanitary fittings, waten storage tank, etc:
a) Number and description of sanitary fittings in room and rooms in which they are to be
installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) Capacity and position of water storage tanks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c) Size and number of draw off taps and whether taken off storage tanks or direct from
main supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
d) Details of draw off taps, that is, whether they are of plain screw down pattern or
waste not and description of any other sanitaryw.ork to be carried out not included
under above headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16)
Depth of sewer below surface of street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........
17)
Level of invert of house drain at point of junction:

a) with sewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) level of invert of sewer at point of junction with house drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c) distance of nearest manhole on sewer from the point at which the drain leaves the
premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.........................................................
..
18) Schedule of pipes:

Description of
pipe/ drain
a) Subsoil drains
b) Main sewage drains
c) Branch sewage
drams
d) Soil pipes
e) Ventilating pipes
other than soil
pipes
f) Waste pipes
g) Rain-water pipes
h) Anti-syphon pipes
Diameter
Materials
Weight
Method of
Jointing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*...................
...........
Signature of the licensed plumber ...............................................

Name and address of the licensed plumber ....i ............................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
Date ............................................................................................
I\W I IS 11.1 MBING SERVICES-SECTIDN 2
DRAINAGE
AND
%\\I I \ I Ien\
37
APPENDIX C
(Clause 16. I)
FORM FOR LICENSED PLUMBERS COMPLETIONCERTIFLCATE
Certified that I/ We have completed the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for
the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected, approved and connection given:
Ward No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . .
Street ......................................
Locality...................................
Block No.. ............................
House No...............................
Details of work............................................................................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_...._. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I... . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . y . . . . .
..I....* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . -...* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tke work was sanctioned by the Authority*

.
.......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.;.......,.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . ., . .
.h . . . . . . . . . . . . . -...
:,. .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signature of the licensed plumber
Name and address.._ . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name and address . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
..
.._........*m.........................
u. .
...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a
Date. _.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . .
The Authoritys report:
Certified that the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for the premises, have been
laid, applied, executed in accordance with Part IX Plumbing services, Section 2 Drainage and
sanitation of the Code.
Drainage connection to the main sewer will be made on.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,............,...... . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Authority
*Insert the name of the Authority.
,x.2*
NATIONAL tlUIL@tNC
CODE OF INDIA
LIST OF STANDARDS
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be
used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred &uses
in the Code.
number of the reference in this part/section.
1) I S : 1_787-1961 Layout for regulated

market yards for fruits and vegetables
2) IS:4733-1972 Methods of sampling and

test for sewage effluents yirst revision)
lS:4764- I973 Tolerance limits for

sewage effluents discharged into inland
surface waters yi:rst revision)
3) IS:2470 Code of practice for design and
construction of septic tanks:
IS:2470 (Part I)-1968 Part I S m a l l
installations Cfirst revision)
IS:2470 (Part II)-1971 Part II Large
installations l-first revision)
IS:561 I-1970 Code of practice for waste
stabilization ponds (fa,:ultative type)
4) IS:5329-1983 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings Cfirst revision)
5) IS:65 I- 1980 Specification for salt glazed
stoneware pipes and fittings (Fourth
revision )
lS:3006-1979 Specification for chemically resistant saltglazed stoneware
pipes and fittings (first revision)
6) lS:458- I97 I Specification for concrete
pipes (with and without reinforcement)
(second revision)
lS:784-1978 Specification for prestres-.
sed concrete pipes (including fittings)
(first revision)
IS: 19 I6- 1963 Specification for steel
cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
lS:4350-1967 Specification for concrete
IS:7319-1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes
7) IS: 1536- 1976 Specification for crntrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes
for water. gas and sewage ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: !537- 1976 Specification for vertically
cast iion pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage (first revision )
IS:1538 (Parts I to XXIII)-1976 Specificxt~on for cast iron fittings for pressure
i.\R I
I X
P1.l
MBIYG
pipes for water, gas and sewage (second

revision )
IS:1538 (Part XXIV)-1982 Specification
for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes
for water, gas and sewage: Part XXIV
radial tees
1s: 3989-1970 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket
soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings
and accessories first revision)
IS:7 181- 1974 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for
water, gas and sewage
8) IS: 1592-1980 Specification for asbestos

IS: 1626 Specification for asbestos

cement building pipes and pipe fittings,
gutters and gutter fittings, and roofing
fittings:
IS: 1626 (Part I)-1980 Part I Pipes and
pipe fittings (jjrst revision)
IS:1626 (Part II)-1980 Part II Gutters
and gutter fittings (first revision)
IS:1626 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 P a r t 111
Roofing accessories (first revision)
lS:6908-3975 Specification for asbestos
cement pipes and fittings for sewerage
and drainage
9) IS:404 Specification for lead pipes;
IS:404 (Part I)-1977 Part I For other
thanchemicalpurpose~(.sec,c,nclrr\.isic,n)
10) IS:5455-1969 Specification for cast iron
steps for manholes
11) IS: I726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames
requirements (second ra\~ision)
IS: 1726 (Part II)-1974 Part II Specific
requirements of HD circular type
(second re\lisiqn)
IS: 1726 (Part Ill)-1974 Part III Specific
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r HI) douhlc
triangular t!pe (.Wcoll~/ I.(*\.i\loll)
SEHVICES-SE(~TlOh 2 DRAltiAGE AND SAHITATIO\
IX-L-- _
IS:1726 (Part IV)-1974 Part IV Specific

requirements for MD circular type
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part V)-1974 Part V Specific
requirements for MD rectangular type
(second re.vision)
IS:1726 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section I single seal (second
revision)
IS:3726 (Part Vl/Sec 2)-1974 Specific
requirements for LD rectangular type,
Section 2 double seal ( s e c o n d
revision )
IS:1726 ( P a r t VlI/Sec I)-1974
Part VI1 Specific requirements for LD
square type, Section I single seal (second
revision)
IS:1726 (Part VlI/Sec 2 ) - 1 9 7 4
Part Vl Specific requirements for LD
square type, Section 2 double seal
(second revision)
12) IS:2212-1962 Code of practice for brickwork
I,
4o
13) IS:41 I1 Code of practice for ancillary

structures in sewerage system
IS:41 11 (Part I)-1967 Part 1 Manholes
14) lS:783-1959 Code of practice for laying
of concrete pipes
IS: 1742-1983 Code of practice for building drainage (second revision)
IS:3 114-1965 Code of practice for laying
of cast iron pipes
lS:4i27-1983 Code of practice for laying
of glazed stoneware pipes (j?rsr revision)
IS:6530-1972 Code of practice for laying
of asbestos cement pressure pipes
15) lS:l230-1968 Specification for cast iron
rain-water pipes and fittings (jirsr
revision)
16) 13:2064-1973 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sanitary appliances (jirsf revision)
17) 13:6924-1973 Code of practice for the
construction of refuse chutes in multistoreyed buildings
NATIONAL
BLILDING CODE OF INDIA
NATIONAL BUILDINGCODE

SECTION3GASSUPPLY
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
...
I. SCOPE
...
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
_?. PRESSURE REGULATIONS
...
4. SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES
...
5. EXISTING WORK
...
6. RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON
...
7. RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE GAS
...
8. INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES
...
9. INSPECTION OF SERVICES
...
10. LEAKAGE CHECK
...
II. USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS
..,
PART IX PLUMING SERVICES-SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY
IX-I-

SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY
0. FOREWORD
0.1: This section covers the safe use of gas for fuel or lighting purposes in buildings.
0.2 The use of gas for fuel and lighting purposes in buildings has begun in some parts of the
country and with the advent of new petroleum complexes, community gas supply is bound to
become one of the important services likeelectiicity and water supply in buildings.
0.3 The use of liquefied petroleum gas supplied in containers and cylinders is also becoming
increasingly popular. On release of pressure, by opening the valve, they readily convert into the
gaseous phase. In this state they present a hazard comparable to any inflammable natural or
manufactured gas, except that being heavier than air, low level, ventilation is necessary to avoid
inflammable concentration of gas.
0.4 A minimum set of safety regulations are, therefore, laid down to safeguard the gas piping
installation and the mode of operation in the interest of public safety.
0.5 The firsttrersion ofthis part was prepared in 1970. As a result of Indian Standards brought out
on the subject.some provisions have been updated,added.This revision contains the following
major changes:
4 The value of safe distance between gas piping and electrical wiring system has been modified.
In addition, safe distance between gas piping and steam piping has been given.
b) A reference to a new Indian Standard has been added for information regarding the handling.
use, storageand transportation of LPG in cylinders exceeding500 ml water capacity.
cl New provisions relating to LPG cylinders installations regarding some aspects, such as
jointing compound used at joints, painting of gas piping, details of fire extinguishers (number,
type and size), total quantity of LPG at stationary and portableinst$lations in proportion to
the floor area, have been added.
4 Some provisions of LPG bulk storage installations with regard to aspects, such as location
and spacing of storage tanks, safety requirements and fire protection requiements, have been
introduced.
0.6 The information regarding the use of liquefied pertroleum gas has been, largely based on the
following Indian Standards:
IS : 6044 (Part I)-1971 Code of practice for liquefied petroleum gas storage installations:
Part I Commercial and industrial cylinder installations.
IS:60JJ(Part II)-1972 Code of practice for liquified petroleum gas storage installations:
Part II Industrial. commerical and domestic bulk storage installations.
1X-3-
will shut off the gas supply to controlled

source of burner (s).
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the requirements
regarding the safety of persons and property
for all piping uses and for all types of gases
used for fuel or lighting purposes in buildings.
1.2 This section does not cover safety rules
for gas burning appliances.
2 TERMINOLOGY
V ENT P IPE -A
safety device to which certain

regulators are connected to evacuate outside
gas that may escape from the normal circuit
when some part of system gets damaged or
malfunctions or a safety valve is open.
3. PRESSURE REGULATIONS
Piping tapped on riser to supply each

individual customer; consumer.
3.1 Where the pressure of gas supplied to

domestic systems or other low pressure gas
piping systems in buildings is in excess of
7kN/ m2 a gas pressure regulator of sufficient
size shall be installed in the service pipe of
each such system to prevent pressure in excess
of 7kN/ m2 from being introduced into such a
building piping unless the building piping is of
welded construction in which case the gas
pressure regulator may be located upstream of
gas meter in each consumers premises. In
these cases, the gas pressure in piping
downstream of gas pressure regulator shall
not exceed 7kN/m2.
G AS F I T T E R -An employee of the gas

supplying organization.
3.2 If located inside a building, the required

regulator shall comply with the foIlowing:
P ILOT -A small flame which is utilized to

ignite the gas at the main burner (s).
a) If any of the diaphragms of the regulator

ruptures, the gas shall be sent to an outlet
vent pipe made of brass or plastic in order
to ventilate or drain the gas out of the
building. The vent pipe will, however, lead
to outer air about 1 m above the topmost
storey of the building. Means shall be
employed to prevent water from entering
this pipe and also to prevent stoppage of it
by insects or other foreign bodies.
b) If the gas pressure at the outlet of the
regulator falls below, 50 percent of the
operating gas pressure or rises above twice
the operating gas pressure, the gas input to
the pressure reducer shall be cut off.

A U T H O R I T Y H A V I N G JuRlsDlcTloN-The
and which, for the purposeof administering
the Code/ Part, may authorize acommittee or
C USTOMERS , CONSUMERS C ONNECTION -
P RESSURE REGULATOR -A device designed

to lower the pressure of gas coming from the
distribution main and to maintain it
practically constants downstream. This
normal operation pressure shall be practically
in all cases that of the gas appliances used.
PURGE -To free a gas conduit of air or gas or
a mixture of gas and air.
Q U A L I F I E D IN S T A L L I N G A G E N C Y - A n
individual, firm or agency which either in
person or through a representative is engaged
in and is responsible for the installation or
replacement of gas piping on theoutlet side of
the gas meter, or the connection, installation
or repair of gas supply piping and appliances
within a bullding, and who is experienced in
such work, familiar with all precautions
required, and who has complied with all the
requirements as to qualification, registration,
licensing, etc, of the Authority.
RISER - Piping usually vertical on most of its
length that supplies gas from the service tothe
variocs storeys of the building.
S ERVICE P IPE-Pipe that runs between the
distribution main in the street and the riser in
the case of multistoreyed building or the meter
in the case of an individual house.
,SERVICE SH U T- OFF
V A L V E-- A
device that
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY
c) In the event of malfunctioning of this

safety device, a supplementary device shall
connect the low pressure circuit to the
outlet circuit (vent pipe) as soon as the exit
pressure reaches 7kN/ m2.
3.3 It shall also be ensured by the supply
authority that the calorific value and sup ly
pressure of gas shall not exceed the valuesPor
the type of gas used.
4. SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES
4.1 Service shut-off valves shall be installed
on all new services including replacementsin a
readily accessible location.
4.2 Service shut-off valves shall be located
upstream of the meter if there is no regulator
or upstream of the regulator if there is one.
ix-L3
4.3 All gas services, operating at pressure

greater than 7kN m- shall be equipped with
an approved service shut-off valve located on
the service pipe outside the building.
appliance, pipe or piping system and shall

leave the gas turned off, until the causes for
interrupting the supply has been removed in
any one of the following cases:
4.4 Underground shut-off valves shall be

located in a covered durable curb box, manhole, vault or stand pipe which is designed to
permit ready operation of the valve and the
covers of which shall be clearly marked Gas.
a) If ordered to do so by the Authority.

b) If leakage of gas is noted, which appears to
5 EXISTING WORK
5.1 Nothing herein shall prohibit the
continued use of existing system of the gas
piping without further inspection or test,
unless the Authority has reason to believe that
defects which make the system dangerous to
life or property exist.
6. RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON
6.1 No person, unless is the employ ofthegas
company or having permission from the gas
company, shall turn on the gas at a service
shut-off valve or at any valve that controlsthe
supply of gas to more than one consumer.
6.2 Gas shall not be turned on at any meter
valve without specific permission from thegas
company or other authority if any of the
following conditions exists:
4 If the gas piping appliances or meter
supply through the meter valve are known

to leak or otherwise to be defective
(see IO).
b) If required inspection of the piping or

appliance has not been made.
c) If the gas company or other authority has

requested that the gas be left turned off.
d) If the meter valve is ICJLIIIJ shut off for
some reason not known to the gas fitter.
6.3 Gas shall not be turned on at any branch

line valve if any of the conditions specified
in 6.2 prevails. Where a branch line valve is
found closed, a gas fitter shall again turn the
gas on at such valve only if proper
precautions to prevent leakage are taken and
no other unsafe conditions are created
thereby.
6.4 Gas shall not be turned on at either the
meter valve or service line unless all gas keys
or valves provided on all outiets in the piping
system are closed or all out!ets in the piping
system are capped or plugged.
7. RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE
GAS
7. / The gas fitter shall put the gas off to any
IY-3- 4
be sufficient to cause fire, explosion or

asphyxiation.
c) If an installation of some gas appliance is

found to be such as to cause a serious
hazard to persons or property.
d) If any condition exists which threatens
interruption of gas supply which may

cause burner outage or otherwise prove
dangerous.
7.2 It shall be the duty of the installing agency

when the gas supply is to be turned off to
notify all affected consumers.
7.3 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for
the purpose of installation, repair,
replacement or maintenance of piping or
appliances, all burner and pilot valves on the
premises supplied with gas through the meter
shall be turned off and the meter test hand
observed for a sufficient length of time to
ascertain that there is no gas passing through
the meter. Where there is more than one meter
on the premises, precaution shall be exercised
to assume that the proper meter is turned off.
8. INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES
8.1 Installation, repair and replacement of
gas piping or appliances shall be performed
only by a qualified installing agency.
8.2 Piping
82.1 Piping shall be of wrought iron, steel,
copper or cast iTon when the gas pressure is

less than 7kN, m-; with higher gas pressure use
of cast iron shall be prohibited.
8.2.1.1 Flexible metal pipes or heavy rubber
pressure tubing shall be permitted only as
direct connections to, burners.
8.2.2 SIZE OF G AS P IPING -Gas piping shall
be of such size and so installed as to provide
supply of gas sufficient to meet the maximum
demand without undue loss of pressure
between the meter or. service regulator when
a meter is not provided, and the appliance (s).
8.2.2.1 The size of gas piping depends upon
the following factors:
a) allowable loss in pressure from meter or

service regulator, when a meter is not
provided, to appliance;
b) maximum consumption to be provided;

c) length of piping and number of fittings;
and
d) specific gravity of gas.
8.2.2.2 No gas pipe smaller than 12 mm shall
be used.
8.2.3 As far as ,possible, straight lengths of
piping should be+ used. Where there are bends
in the pipe line, these should have a radius of
at least five times the diameter of the pipe.
8.3 The gas piping shall be painted red so as
to distinguish it from other piping and where
piping is likely to be exposed to sun rays, it
shall be painted silver grey.
8.4 Piping Underground
8.4.-i PROTECTION OF PIPING - Piping shall
be burried to a sufficient depth or covered in a
manner so as to protect the piping from
physical damage.
8.4.2 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION Gas piping in contact with earth or other
materials which may corrode the piping shall
be protected against corrosion either by
adopting cathodic protection system where
soil corrosion is heavy or by applying
corrosion resisting paint like epoxy paint.
Piping shall not be laid in contact with
cinders.
8.4.3 Underground gas piping shall be
avoided as far as possible below grade
through the foundation or basement walls of
building. underground gas piping when
installed below grade thrdugh foundation or
basement wall of a building shall be either
encased in a sleeve or otherwise protected
against cdrrosion (see 8.4.2).
8.5 The building shall not be weakened by the
installation of anygas piping.
8.6 Gas piping in building shall be supported
with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps, bonds or
hangers suitable for the size of piping and of
adequate strength and quality and located at
proper intervals so that the piping may not be
moved accidentally from the installed
position.
8.7 Pipe Entrance IO Bui/d&g.v- Where gas
pipe enters a building through a wall or floor
of masonry or concrete, any gas piping or
other piping entering the walls or floors shall
be suitably sealed against the entrance of
water/ moisture or gas.
8.7.1 PIPING IN FLObRS-Piping in soild
floors, such as concrete, shall be laid in
P A R T
I X
PLUMRING SERVICES-SECIW)N .3 CA9 SURLY
channels in the floor suitably covered to

permit access to the piping with a minimum
damage to the building.
8.8 Gas pipe shall not be bent. Fittings shall
be used when making turns in gas pipe.
8.9 Gas piping shall not be supported by
other piping. Gas piping inside any buildink
shall not be run in or through an air duct,
chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct or
elevator shaft. Gas piping shall not be taken
through inaccessible or concealed areas where
their condition cannot be inspected and
accumulation of gas due to undetected
leakage may create a dangerous condition.
8.10 A drip shall be provided in the gas
distribution system, if the moisture contents
in the gas is likely to reach saturation point at
any stretch of pipe line in the system; a drip
shall, however, be provided at any suitable
point in the line of the pipe where condensate
may collect and from where it can be easily
removed. This drip should be so installed as
to constitute a trap wherein an accumulation
of condensate will shut off the flow of gas
before it will run back into the meter.
8.11 Prohibited Devices-N; device shall be
placed inside the gas piping or fittings that will
reduce the cross-sectional arka or otherwise
obstruct the free flow of gas.
8.12 Piping shall be electrically continuous
throughout its length and properly earthed
except in stretches where cathodic protection
system is used for protection against
corrosion. It shall not, however, be used to
earth any electrical equipment.
8.12.1 The distance between gas piping and
electrical wiring system shall be at least 60mm
and, where necessary, they shall be securely
fixed to prevent contact due to movement.
The gas piping should run below the electrical
wiring.
8.13 The distance between the gas piping and
steam piping, if running parallel, shall be at
least 150 mm. The gas piping should,
preferably run below the steam piping.
8.14 Piping installation shall be thoroughly
gastight.
8.15 Smoking shall not be permitted when
working on piping which contains or has
contaminated gas.
9. INSPECTION OF SERVICES
9.1 No person shall use or permit the use of a
new system or an extension of an old system of
gas piping in a building or structure beforethe
I\_,_ 5
same has been inspected and tested to ensure

,he tightness of the system, and a certificate
has been issued by the Authority.
9.1.1 TEST
OF
P IPING
FOR
TIGHTNESS-
Before any system of gas piping is finally put

in service, it shall be carefully tested to ensure
that it is gastight. Where any part of the
system is to be enclosed or concealed, this
test should preoede the work of closingm. To
test for tightness the piping may be filled with
city gas, air or inert gas but not with any
other gas or liquid. In no case shall oxygen be
used. The piping shall stand a pressure of at
least ZOkN/ m2 measured with a manometer
or slope gauge, for a period of not less than
10 minutes without showing any drop in
pressure.
9. I .2. When the gas pressure exceeds7kN/ m2,
the piping shall withstand a pressure of
O%MN/ m for 4 hours. (This test is for piping
designed for working pressure less than
0_4MN/ m):
9.2. The Authority shall, within a reasonable
time after being requested to do so, inspect
and test a systemof gas piping that is ready for
such inspection and test, and if the work is
found satisfactory and test requirements are
complied with, it shall issue the certificate.
9.3 It shall be unlawful to supply gas in a
building before the required certificate has
been issued, except that the Authority may
give temporary permission for a reasonable
time to supply and use gas before such an
installation has been fully completed and the
certificate issued.
IO. LEAKAGE CHECK
10.1 Before turning gas under pressure into
any piping, all openings from which gas may
escape shall be close&
10.2 Checking for Gas Leakage-No
matches, flame or other sources of ignition
shall be employed to check for gas leakge from
meters, piping or appliances. Checking for gas
leakage with soap and water solution is
recommended.
10.3 Use of Lights- Artificial illumiuat ion
used in connection with a search of gas
,leakage shall be restricted to electric hand
flash lights (preferably of the safety type) or
approved safety lamps. In searching for leaks,
electric switches should not be operated. If
electric lights are already turned on, they
should not be turned off.
1 0 . 4 checki.ng for ~Leakage w i t h
Meter- Immediately after turning gas into
the piping, the system shall be checked to
1X-S 6
ascertain that no gas is escaping. This may be

done by carefully watching the test dial of the
meter to determine whether gas is passing
through the meter. In no case should a leakage.
test be made using a gas meter unless
immediately prior to the test it has been
determined that the meter is in operating
condition.
IO.3 Checking of Leakage Without Using a
Meter-This may be done by attaching to an
appliance, orifice or a manometer or
equivalent device and momentarily turning on
the gas supply and deserving the gauging
device for pressure drop with the gas supply
shut-off. No discernible drop in pressureshall
occur during a period of 3 minutes.
IO.6 After piping has been checked, all gas
piping shall be fully purged. Piping shall not
be purged into the combustion chamber of an
appliance. A suggested method for purging the gas piping to an appliance is to disconnect.
the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot valve.
10.7 After the gas piping has been effectiveiy
purged, all appliances shall be purged and the
pilots lighted.
II USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM
GAS
.
Zf.1 The cylinders used for the storage and
transportation of liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) shall conform to accepted standards
[1x-3(1)]* approved by the statutory
authority.
II.2 The handling, use, storage and
transportation of liquefied petroluem gas in
cylinders exceeding 500 ml water capacity
shall be done in accordance with good
practice [1X-3(2)].
Il.3 L PG Cylinder Installation
I I .3.0 The following recommendations apply
to. installation in commeric+, industrial,
education1 and institutional premises.
I I .3.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
11.3.1.1 Those responsible for the
installation of cylinders, equipment and
piping should understand the characteristics
of .LPG and be trained in good practice of
handling, installing and maintaining
installations.
*In this section where rafcrcna is made to accepted
standards or goods praaicc in relation to material
specificaticm, testing and other information, the
appropriate document listed at the end of this section
may be used as a guide to the interpretationsfthis term.
NATtDNAL
8lJlLDlNC
CODE
O F
INDIA
11.3.1.2 The jointing compound used at

different joints in the system shall conform to
accepted standards [ix-3(3)]. Hemp and
similar materials shall not be used at the joint.
In any joint in which the thread provides a
gastight seal, jointing compound shall be used
only cn the male thread.
3 m, the proportion of such installations to

floor area is one installation per 12m and
the aggregate quantity of gas of all such
installations does not exceed 200 kg.
4 Stationary installation not exceeding

320 kg of LPG may be installed indoors in
an enclosed section of a building or a room
reserved exclusively for this purpose and
ventilated at low level directly to the
outside air.
11.3.1.3 Fire extinguishers of dry powder

type or carbon dioxide type conforming to
accented stand? r d s [1X-3(4)] s h a l l b e
provlcied in r 1.,, ct~s where LPG cylinder
installations are situated and shall be located
near such installations. Two buckets filled
with sand and two with water shall also be
installed nearby. The number, type and size of
the fire extinguishers shall be as follows:
NumTjpe Capa-
city
ber
a)
For
installations
with LPG 40
to 200kg
b)
irwtallations 1
For
with LPG more
than 200 and
up to 320 kg
c)
For installations
with LPG more
than 320 and
up to 1000 kg
Stationary installation above 320 kg

[200 kg in case provision as 5n ,(e) is not
possible] but not exceeding I 000 kg shall
be installed outdoors on ground level
only. A minimum distance of 3 m shall be
maintained between an installation and
any building, public place, roadways. and
other surroundings. The installation shall
be protected from excessive weathering by
sun. rain, etc, and from tampering by
unauthorized persons. A lean-to-roof with
expanded metal on angle-iron framework
on the sides is considered suitable for this
purpose. In any case, adequateventilation
at ground level to the outside air shall be
provided. The distance between any two
such installations shall be 3 m unless
separated by a leakproof wall of fireresistant material up to at least I m above
the height of the manifold valve.
I.
Dry 3.5 kg
powder
Dry
7.5kg
powder
o r CO2 4.5kg
Dry
7.5kg
powder
o r CO? 4.5kg
lf.3.1.4 Liquefied petr6leum gas shall not be

transferred from the cylinders in which it is
received to any other container.
8) Cylinders shall be installed upright with

the valves uppermost.
h) Cylinder shall not be placed below ground
level and shall be at least Im away from

drains, culverts or entrances and openings
leading to cellars and other depressiqns in
which gas might accumulate.
11.3.2 C YLINDER L OCATION

11.3.2.1 STATIONARY INSTALLATIONS
a) Stationary installation not exceeding
40 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on
any floor. It is recommend$d to have a
minimum floor area of 5 m* for such an
installation.
Cylinders containing more than 20 kg of

gas shall not be located on floors above
ground level.
k) Cylinders shall be located on a concrete or
b) S t a t i o n a r y i n s t a l l a t i o n s e a c h n o t
b;ick floor, preferably raised in case of

outdoor installations.
cl Stationary installation not exceeding
n-0 Cylinders shall not be placed close to

steam pipes or any other source of heat
and shall be protected from the weather
and direct suns heat. Cylinders shall be
placed at a distance of 3 m away from any
other source of heat which is likely to raise
the temperature of cylinders above the
room temperature unless separated by
metal sheet or masonry partition.
exceeding 40 kg of LPG may be installed

indoors on any, floor within the same
workspace provided the minimum
distance between two such installations is
3 m, the proportion ofsuch installations to
floor area is one installation per 5m and
the aggregate quantity of gas of all such
installations does not exceed 200 kg.
80 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on
any floor provided the floor area for such
an installation is not less than 12 ml.
4 Stationary installations each not
exceeding 80 kg of LPG may be installed

indoors on any floor and within the same
workspace provided the minimum
distance between two such installations is
PART IX PI.IrMIJINC;
SERVICES--SECTION 3 GAS hlPPI.1
n) When cylinders are being connected or
disconnected, there shall be no open flame

or similar source of ignition in the vicinity;
and smoking shall be prohibited.
11.3.2.2 PORTABLE INSTALLATIONS- When

portability of cylinders is necessary. the
7
I.X.3.
following requirements shall be fulfilled:
a) The, sum total capacity of the cylinders
connected to each mainfold shall not

exceed 80 kg of LPG. The total quantity of
gas thus installed in a workspace shall not
exceed 200 kg.
b) The regulator shall be connect& directly
to the cylinder valve or to a manifold
which shall be connected to the cylinder
valves by means of rigid connections to
give adequate support to the regulator.
cl At any time the total quantity of gas at
portable installations shall be in
proportion to the floor area as specified
in 11.3.2.1 (a) to 11.3.2.1(t).
1 1 . 3 . 3 MA N I F O L D S
REGULATORS
AND
PRESSURE
11.3:3.1 If pressure regulators, manifold

headers, automatic change-over devices, etc,
are connected to cylinders by flexible orsemiflexible connectors, they shall be rigidly
supported. Copper tube pigtails and
reinforced high pressure hoses are considered
to be flexible or semi-flexible connectors for
this purpose.
11.3.3.2 Pressure reguiator fitted with a
safety valve shall be either:
a) installed in the open air, or
b) vented to the open by means of a metal
vent pipe connected to the safety valve
:
outlet.
11.3.3.3 Care shall be taken that safety valve
outlets do not become choked with dust or
other foreign matter.
11.3.3.4 Suitable line shut-off valves shall be
fitted for each appliance or burner when more
than one appliance is connected to the gas
supply. Both ends of the connection to
portable appliances shall be securely attached
by means of clips. Hose shall be of a type
resistant to liquefied petroleum gas.
Il.3.3.5 The manifold headers which do not

have to be taken in normal use should be
braced or welded using a material conforming
to accepted standards [1X13(3)] and which
shall have a melting point of at least 540C.
11.3.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO C ONSUMERS- A
handbook containing all instructions with
regard to the following aspects shall be
supplied by the supplier to the consumers:
a) operation of the whole system;
b) how to recognize gas leaks;
c) action to be take2 in case of leakage;
1x-3-
d) action to be taken in case of fire; and

e) action to be taken in case of damage to, or
failure of any part of the installation.
installation of LPG cylinders in commercial,
industrial, educational and institutional
premises, reference may be made to good
practice [1X-3(5)].
11.4 LPG Bulk Storage Installations
11.4.0 The following recommendations
apply to LPG bulk storage installations where
stroage tanks over 450 litres water capacity
are used at industrial, commercial and
domestic consumers premises.
The maximum capacity of an individua!t*i:!;.

and group of tanks at industrial,co: ..;rcial
and domestic premises shall be as follows:
Premises
Industrial
commercial
Domestic
Maximum
Maximum
Water Capa& Water Capacity of
city of an
hdividual
Grwk,of
Tank,
Iitres
litres
260 000
130 000
80 000
40 000
80 000
20 000
1 1 . 4 . 1 L OCATION
S TORAGE T A N K S
AND
S PACING
O F
11.4.1.1 Storage tanks shall be located

outside the buildings and shall not be
installed one above the other.
11.4.1.2 Each individual tank shall be located
with respect to the nearest important building
or group of buildings or line of adjoining
property which may be built in accordance
with Table 1. The distances given refer to the
horizontal distance in plan between the
nearest point of the storage tank and
building/ property line.
11.4.1.3 In heavily populated or congested
areas the authority having jurisdiction may
determine the need for other reasonable
protective methods to be taken, such as
provision of fire walls, etc. If fire walls are to
be provided, the authority may determine the
extent to which the safety distances foraboveground tanks may be reduced.
11.4.1.4 No LPG tank(s) shall be located
within the bunded enclosures of any
petroleum installation. The minimum
distance of separation between LPG storage
tanks and any petroleum installation shall be
as prescribed under the Petroleum Rules 1937
or as specified in Table 1 whichever is more.
NATaNAL
11.4.1.5 The number of storage tanks in one

storage installation shall not exceed six. In
case there are more than one storage
installations, the safety distance between two
installations shall be the same as the distance
between the tanks and the property line in
TABLE. 1 MlNlMUM SAFETY DISTANCES
(Clause 11.4.1.2 and 11.4.1.5)
SL
No.
LPG
STORAGE
W ATER
CAPACITY 0~
INDIVIDUAL
TA N K
(1)
(2)
litres
i ) Upto
ii) Above 2 000
and up to
10 000
iii) Above 10 000
and up to
20 c@O
iv) Above 20 030
DISTANCE
FROM
B UILDING ,!
PROPERTY
LINE
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
TANKS
Above Under Above Under

Ground Ground Ground Ground
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
m
m
m
1;
I.5
15
10
I.5
I.5
and up to
,400oo
20
1300000
30
v) Above 40 000
and up to
NOTE 1 --If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-tank

installation is 40 000 litres or greater, theabove minimum
safety distances shall apply to the aggregate storage
capacity rather than the capacity per individual storage
tank.
NOTE 2 -In view of lack of experience of underground
tank installations in lndta, underground tanks larger than
20 000 litres water capacity shall not be permissible at
present.
11.4.2 BUNDING - Since LPG is heavier than

air, storage tank shall not be enclosed within
bund walls. The accumulation of flammable
liquid under LPG tanks shall be prevented by
suitably slopping the ground.
I I .4.3 P R O T E C T I O N
1 I .4.3. I To prevent trespassing or tampering,
the area which includes tanks, direct fired
vapourisers. pumping equipment and loading
and unloading facilities shall be enclosed by
an industrial type fence at least 2 m high along
the perimeter of the safety zone. Any fence
shall have atleast two means of exit. Gates
shall open outwards and shall not be selflocking.

11.4.3.2 When damage to LPG systems from
the LPG tank lorry is a possibility,
precautions against such damage shall be
taken.
11.4.3.3 Underground tanks shall be
protected from above ground loading by
providing a suitable curb to prevent a possible
accidental damage to the tank and its fittings
by LPG tank lorry.
1 I .4.4 G RASS AND W EED R E M O V A L - Road
ignitable material, such as weeds, long grass
or any combustible material shall be removed
from an area within 3m from the shell of any
LPG tank of up to 2 000 litres water capacity,
and within 6m from the shell of larger tanks. If
weed killers are used, chemicals which are a
potential source of fire hazard shall not be
selected for this purpose.
11.4.5 W A R N I N G S I G N S- NO smoking or
naked flames shall be permitted within the
safety zone of the installation. -Prominent
notices to this effect shall be posted at access
point.
11.4.6
FI R E P
R O T E C T I O N-
The
possibility
of a major fire outbreak, leading to direct

flame impingement of the storage tank, shall
be minimized by sound engineering in plant
design and layout, good operating practice,
and proper education and training of
personnel on both routine operations and on
action to be taken in an emergency.
11.4.6.1 WATER S U P P L Y - - P r o v i s i o n shall be
made for an adequate supply of water and fire
pr,otection in the storage area according to the
local hoses and mobile equipment, fixed
monitors or by fixed spray systems which may
be automatic. Control of water flow should be
possible from outside any danger area.
11.4.6.2 F I R E E X T I N G U I S H E R S- A t l e a s t t w o
dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers of
lOkg capacity each shall be installed at points
of access to the storage installations.
II .4.7 For detailed information regarding
LPG bulk storage installations reference may
be made to good practice [1X-3(6)].
.
i
LIST OF STANDARDS
standardshall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. ,The standards listedmay be used
podt? Authority as,a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses @I the
number 6f the reference in this part7 section.
(1) IS:3 196-I 982 Specification for welded
low carbon steel gas cylinder exceeding
..-- 5 litre water capacity for low pressure
liquefiable gases (third revision)
lS:7142-1974 Specification for welded
low carbon steel gas cylinder for low
pressure liquefiable gases ,not exceeding,
5 -1itre water capacity
(2) IS:8 198(Part V)-1976 Code of practice
for steel cylinders for compressed gases:
Part V Liquefied petrolurn gases (LPG)
(3) 13:3465-1966 Specification for jointing
compounds for use in liquefied
p e t r o l e u m g a s a p p l i a n c e s at+d
installations
(4) IS:2 171-1976 Specification for portable

fire extinguishers, dry powder type
(second revision)
lS:2878-1976 Specification for portable
fire extingushers, carbon-dioxide type
(first revision)
(5) 13:6044 (Part I)- 197 1 Code of practice for
liquefied petroleum gas storage
installations : Part 1 Commercial and
industrial cylinder installations
(6) IS:6044(Part IQ-1972 Code of practice
for liquefied petroluem gas storage
installations : Part. II Industrial,
commercial and domestic bulk storage
installations
h.,,l0\,4l.
BLILDINC
C O D E
Ok 1\131,\
-NATIONALBUILDING CODE OFINDIA
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR

DISPLAY STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
1. SCOPE
2. TERMINOLOGY
...
3. PERMITS
...
4. M.AINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
...
10
5. TYPES OF SIGNS
...
10
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL SIGNS
...
II
7. ELECTRIC SIGNS AND ILLUMINATED SIGNS
12
8. GROUND SIGNS
12
9. ROOF SIGNS
...
12
10. VERANDAH SIGNS
...
13
11. WALL SIGNS
...
13
12. PROJECTING SIGNS

13. MARQUEE SIGNS
13
...
14. SKY SIGNS
14
14
IS. TEMPORARY ADVERTISING SIGNS, TRAVELLING CIRCUS

SIGNS, FAIR SIGNS AND DECOR ATIONS DURING PUBLIC
REJOICING
14
APPENDIX A SPECIMEN FORM FOR APPLICATION FOR

PERMJT TO ERECT RE-ERECTOR ALTER IN
ADVERTISING SIGN
?ART k S I G N S
AND
0l:TDOOR DISPLAI STRl (T, ,\
...
15
X-
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY

STRUCTURES
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part covers the requirements of signs and outdoor display structures
with regard to public safety, structural safety and tire safety.

0.2 This part was first published in 1970. This revision follows the general
revision of the Code; commentsand suggestions received during its use have been
taken into account.
03 With the growing industrialization followed by urbanization of large
number of cities and towns, the advertising signs and its appurtenantstructures
have increased. In the absence of any definite rules, the display of advertising
signs has proceeded unrestrained resulting in a city or town littered
indiscriminately with hoardings and advertising signs of all types.
0.4 Consideration of the aspects of urban aesthetics and public safety points to
the necessity for building regulations for the control of advertising signs and
structures. For signs coming on Highways, relevant IRC rules shall apply. In this
connection reference is made to IRC 46: 1972 A policy on road advertisements*.
X-
I. SCOPE
S KY S IGN -An
advertising sign displayed in
space like:
1.1. This part covers the requirements with
regard to public safety, structural safety and
fire safety of all signs and outdoor display
structures.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 Signs
A D V E R T I S I N G S IGN - A n y surface or
structure with characters, letters or
illustrations applied thereto and displayed in
any manner whatsoever out of doors for
purposes of advertising or to give information
regarding or to attract the public to any place,
person, public performance, article or
merchandise whatsoever, and which surface
or structure is attached to, forms part of or is
connected with any building, or is fixed to a
tree or to the ground or to any pole, screen,
fence or hoarding or displayed in space.
C LOSED S IGN-
An advertising sign in which

at least more than fifty percent of the area is
solid or tightly enclosed or covered.
E LECTRIC S IGN -An advertising sign in
which electric fittings, which are an integral
part of the signs, are used.
G R O U N D S IGN -An advertising sign
detached from a building, and erected or
painted on the ground or on any pole, screen,
fence or hoarding and visible to the public.
a) a gas filled balloon anchored to a point on

the ground and afloat in the air with or
without a streamer of cloth, etc; or
b) sky-writing, that is, a sign or word traced
in the atmosphere by smoke discharged
from an aeroplane.
T E M P O R A R Y S IGN -An advertising sign,
banner or other advertising device
constructed of cloth, canvas, fabric or any
other light material, with or without a
structural frame, intended for a limited period
of display; including decorative displays.for
holidays or public demonstrations.
V E R A N D A H S IGN -An advertising sign
attached to, posted on or hung from a
verandah.
WALL SIGN - An advertising sign, other than
a projecting sign, which is directly attached to
or painted or pasted on the exterior surface of
or structural element of any building.
2.2 General
A PPROVED -Approved by the Authority
A REA OF S P E C I A L C O N T R O L -Any area
declared an area of special control by the
Authority in respect of the display of
advertising signs, where the requirements for
such display are more restrictive than
elsewhere in the area controlled by the
Authority.
A UTHORITY H AVING J URISDICTION --
I LLUMINATED S IGN -An advertising sign,

permanent or otherwise, the functioning of
which depends upon its being illuminated by
direct or indirect light, and other than an
electric sign.
The
the Code/ Part, may authorize a committee or
M ARQUEE S IGN - An advertising sign

attached to or hung from a marquee canopy
or other covered structure projecting from
and supported by the building and extending
beyond the building wall, building line.

lawfully extend. It includes the lines
prescribed, if any, in any scheme.
O PEN S IGN -An advertising sign in which at

least fifty percent of the enclosed area is
uncovered or open to the transnission of
wind.
C O M B U S T I B L E M A T E R I A L -A material is
combustible, if it burns or adds heat to a fire
when tested for combustibility in accordance
with good practice [X(l)]*.
P R O J E C T I N G S IGN -An advertising sign

affixed to any building element and projecting
O WNER -
The person who receives the rent

for the use of the land or building or would be
more than 30 cm therefrom.

R OOF S IGN -An advertising sign erected or
placed on or above the parapet or any portion
of a roof of a building including signs painted
on the roof of a building.
* In this Dart where reference is made toeood oracticein

relation IO design or testing and construction
procedures. the appropriate document listed at the end
of this part may be used as a guide to the interpretation
of this term.
Y
X-
entitled to do so if they were let. It also

includes:
a) an agent or trustee who receives such rent
e) In the public interest the Authority shall
b) a receiver, executor or administiar:>r or a

competent jurisdiction to have the charge
The licencee shall be responsible for the

observance of all the rules and regulations
laid down by the Authority;
c) an agent or trustee who receives the rent

of or is entrusted with or is concerned
with any building devoted to religious or
have the right to suspend the licence even

before the expiry period, upon which the
licencee shall remove the signs;
iz) The signs should not mar the aesthetic

beauty of the locality;
h) Tlie signs other than pertaining to
building shall not be permitted to come in

front of buildings such as hospitals,
educational institutions, public offices,
museums, buildings devoted to religious
worship and buildings of national
importance;
d) a mortgagee in possession.
S TREET L INE -The line defining
the side
limits of a street.
3. PERMITS
3.1 Application
3 . 1 . 1 CoNDl-rioNs FOR GR A N T O F
PERMIT - No sign shall be erected, altered or
maintained without first obtaining a permit
for the same from the Authority and shall be
subject to the following conditions:
a) The written permission shall not be
granted or renewed at any one time, for a
period exceeding three years from the
date of grant of such permission or
renewal.
b) The written permission or the renewal

granted by the Authority shall become
void:
1) if any sign or the part thereof falls

either through an accident or any other
causes;
2) if any addition is made except for the
purpose of making it secure under the
direction of the Authority;
3) ik:eYocfhange is made in the sign or part
4) if any addition or alteration is made to
the building or structure upon or over
which the sign is erected and if such
addition or alteration involves
disturbance of the sign or any part
thereof; and
j)
k) No hoarding sign on the highways shall

be put without the permission of the
Authority maintaining/ incharge of
highways/ roads; and
ml In addition all signs shall conform to the

general requirements given under 6.
Light and ventilation of buildings,if any

situated near the signs and hoardings
shall not be obstructed in any way;
Advertisements displayed shall not be of

any objectionable or obscene nature
gILen under 3.3;
F O R LICENCE O R
R EQUIRED D RAWINGS - Every
3.1.2 A PPLICATION
PERMIT
AND
person- intending to erect, alter or display an

advertising sign for which a permit or licence
is required, shall make application to the
Authority on the prescribed form containing
such particulars as the Authority may require.
Such a form (see Appendix A) shall be signed
by the applicant and by the owner of the site
upon which such sign is or is to be situated and
shall include the following infoimation:
a) Full specifications showing the length,
height and weight of the sign, the location

where it is to be erected, the
manufacturers name and address and
where applicable, the number of lights
and electrical details of the same.
b) Such form shall be accompanied by a
location plan indicating the position of

the sign on the site drawn to,a.scale of
I:500 and by full detail drawing drawn to
a scale of 1:20 or an exact multiple thereof
in ink or on prints including, if required
by the Authority, an elevation showing
the sign in relation to the facade.
5) if the building or structure upon or

over which the sign is erected fixed or
restrained becomes demolished or
destroyed.
c)
Maintenance and inspection of

advertising signs and their suppqrts shall
be ris given under 4.
cl
In the case of roof signs, projecting signs

or ground signs in addition to the
foregoing, the size of all members of
supporting frameworks and anchorages,
and, if required by the Authority, the
necessary design calculations shall ,be
furnished with the application.
d) Any other particulars as may be desired

by the Authority coxered in 6 and its subclauses.
e) In the case of sky signs, necessary
information as desired by the Authority
may be supplied.
3.1.3 The Authority may, on the receiptofan
ap lication for permit, either sanction or
rePuse such a permit or sanction with
modifications as deemed necessary andshall
communicate decision to the applicant. If
within 30 days of receiving an application for
a permit the Authority fails to intimate in
writing to the applicant, the permit along with
the plans shall be deemed as sanctioned.
3.1.4 When a sign has to be altered,
information only on such plans and
statements, as may be necessary, shall be
included in the form. However, the changing
of movable harts of an approved sign that is
designed for such changes, shall not be
deemed an alteration provided the conditions
of the original approval and the requirements
of this Dart are not violated.
3.1.5 E XISTING A DVERTISING S IGNS Advertising signs in existence at the date of
promulgation of the Code and covered by a
vaild licenct or permit issued by the Authority
shallnot require to be licensed under the Code
until such -1icence or permit has expired,
provided it is maintained in a good and safe
condition.
3.1.6 For advertising signs application shall
be submitted through a structural engineer
along with necessary drawings and structural
calculations. The wind load taken in the
design calculations shall be in accordance
with Part IV Structural design, Section I
Loads.
3.2 Exemptions
permit shall be required for signs
and outdoor display structures of the
following types:
3.2.1 No
a) If the signs are exhibited within the

window of any building provided it does
not affect light and ventilation of the
building.
b) If it relates to the trade or business carried
on within the land or building upon which
such advertisement is exhibited or to any
sale, entertainment or meeting or
Iettering of such land or building or any
effects therein; or to the trade or business
carried on by the owner of any tramcar,
omnibus or other vehicle upon which
such advertisements is exhibited.
p&#kT
X SIGNS
A N D
OtTDOOR
DISPLAI STRt (It Rt4
c)
In addition no permission shall be

required for the signs covered by the
provisions3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4 and 3.2.5.
Such exemptions, however shall not
construed to relieve the owner of the sign
from the responsibility of erection and
maintenance in compliance with the
Code.
3.2.2 WALL SIGNS-The wall signs listed

in 3.2.2. I to 3.2.2.4 shall not require a permit.
3.2.2. I STORE SIGNS -Non~illuminated
signs erected over a show window or over the
door of a store or business establishment
which announce the name of the proprietor
and the nature of the business conducted
therein; the sign shall not be more thanI m in
height.
3.2.2.2 GOVERNMENT BUILDINGSIGNS Signs erected on a municipal, state or central
government building which announce the
name, nature of the occupancy and
information.
3.2.2.3 NAME PLATES-Any wall sign
erected on a building or structure indicating
the name of the occupant of building, which is
not more than 0.5 m m area.
3.2.2.4 FENCE SIGNS-Signs painted on the
surface of enclosure or division fences, or on
picket or other- ornamental fences.
32.3 GROUND SiGNs
3.2.3.1 TRANSIT DIRECTIONS-The erection
or maintenance of a sign designating the
location ofa transit line, a rail track, station or
other public carrier when not more than
0.5m in area.
3.2.3.2 HIGHWAY SIGNS - In general,
advertisements of the following classes are
permissible without permission though these
should reasonably conform to the principles
set out in 3.5.f:
Class (I) Functional Advertisements:
a) Official warning signs, traffic directions,
sign posting and notices or
advertisements posted or displayed by or
under the directions of any public or
court officer in the performance of his
official or directed duties:
Example:
DIVEKSION AHEAD
b) Direction signs to places of public
amenity, such as petrol filling stations,

hospitals, first-aid posts, police stations
and fire stations:
b) Advertisements relating to any person,
partnership or company separately

carrying on a profession, business trade at
the premises where any such
advertisement is displayed; limited to one
advertisement not exceeding 0.3m2 in
area in respect of each such person,
partnership or company.
Example:
Examples:
C) Signs relating sole1 to any city, town,
RAM LAL & COMPANY
village or historic p7 ace, shrine, place of

tourist interest:
Example:
c) Advertisements relating to any institution
of a religious, educational, cultural,

recreational, medical or similar character
or any hotel, public house, dak bungalow,
block of flats, club, boarding house or
hostel situated on the land on which any
such advertisement is displayed; limited
to one advertisement not exceeding
1.2 m2 in area in respect of each such
premises.
d) Signs, notices, etc, erected by the Defence

Department for information of members
of the armed forces or the public.
Exampless:
Example:
1 ARTlLLERY RANGE AHEAD 1
HOLIDAY
COLLEGE OF
HOME I
ENGINEERING I
I
1-1
Examples:
f)
Class . (2)
, Advertisements Relating to the
Premises on Which ihese are
Displayed:
4 Advertisements for the purpose of
identification, direction or warning with

respect to the land or building on which
they are displayed, provided not
exceeding 0.2 m in area in the caseof any
such advertisement.
X-
ROTARY
CLUB I
Class (3) Advertisements of Temporary

Nature
4 Advertisements relating to the sale. or
letting of the land on which they are
displayed; limited in respect of each such
sale or letting) to one advertisement not
exceeding 2m in area.
Signs or notices, 0.2 m2 in area or less,

placed so as to show direction to a
residence and planted sufficiently away
from the carriageway.
Examples:
e). Signs restricting tresspass Of property,

limited to 0.2m in area or less.
Examples:
I
1 TO LET 1
1
1 HOUSE FOR SALE 1

I
b) Advertisements announcing sale of goods
or livestock, and displayed on the land

where such goods or livestock are situated
or where such sale is held, limited to one
advertisement not exceeding 1.2m2 in
area.
Examples:
pizEzq
,,,,,,I
NATIONtL
c) Advertisements relaiing to the carrying

out of building or similar work on the
land on which they are displayed not
exceeding 2 m* in area.
Examples:
I-ZZKI
1 IN PROGRESS]
Advertisements announcing any local
event of a religious, educational, cultural,
political, social or recreational character,
not being an activity promoted or carried
on for commercial purposes; limited to a
display of advertisements ocfupying an
area not exceeding 0.6m on any
premises.
Examples:
DIWALI MELA
FLOWER SHOW
3.2.4 T EMPORARY S I G N S
3.2.4.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGNS -Construction signs, engineersand architectssigns
and other similar signs which may be
authorized by the Authority in connection
with construction operations (see TableI).
3.2.4.2 S P E C I A L D I S P L A Y S slcNs-Special
decorative displays used for holidays, public
demonstrations or promotion of civic welfare
or charitable purposes, on which there is no
commercial advertising, provided that the
Authority is not held responsible for any
resulting damage (see 15.2.2).
3.2.5 The qualitative requirements of signs
given in Table 1 shall not require any permit.
3.3 Unsafe and Unlawful Signs
3.3.1 N OTICE
OF
U NSAFE
AND
U NLAWFUL
SIGNS- When any sign becomes insecure, or
in danger of falling, or otherwise unsafe, or if

any sign shall be unlawfully installed, erected
or maintained in violation of any of the
provisions of the Code, the-owner thereof, or
the person or firm maintaining the same, shall
upon written notice of the Authority,
forthwith in the case of immediatedanger and
in any case within not more than three days,
make such sign conform to the provisions of
this part or shall remove it. If within three
days the order is not complied with, the
Authority may remove such sign at the
expense of the owner.
3.3.1.1 Notwithstanding the above, it shall be
the responsibility of the owner to ensure the
safety of the advertising signs, even without a
rekrence from the Authority.
3.3.2 The followmg s i g n s m a y n o t b e
permitted under any circumstances:
Any sign which in the opinion of the

Authority is an obscene, repulsive, revolting,
or objectionable character or prejudicial to
the municipality or savouring political
propaganda or of a nature calculated to
produce pernicious or injurious effect on
public or any particular class of persons, or is
displayed in such a place, in such a manner or
by any such means as, in the opinion of the
Authority, could be likely to affect injuriously
ihe amenities of, or to disfigure shy
neighbourhood.
3.4 Area of Special Control
Whenever in the opinion of the
Authority it is likely that any advertising
device otherwise permitted in terms of the
Code may affect injuriously or disfigure any
particular area within the jurisdiction of the
Authority it may proclaim such area as an
area of special control. Parks and land for
public use may also be included as areas of
special control.
3.4.1
3.4.2 Subject to the provisions of3.4. J within

such area, the erection and display of any
advertising sign shall be prohibited or
restricted in any manner deemed necessary by
the Authority. The Authority shall publish its
intention of proclaiming such an area in one
or more newspapers circulating in the area of
jurisdiction of the Authority. Any owner of
property within such area who may feel
aggrieved bp such proclamation may appeal
within one month from such publication
against proclamation of such an area to the
Authority whose decision shall be final.
3.4.3 The wording on ,any verandah sign,
permitted by the Authority, in any area of
special control, shall be restricted to the name
of the proprietor or firm occupying the
premises, the name of the building or
institution, the genera1 business or trade
carried on, such as IEWELLER, CAFE,
DANCING, or information regarding the
location of the building entrance, box office
or regarding the theatre programme or similar
inform&ion. No verandah sign in any area of
special control shall advertise any particular
article of merchandise nor shall any such sign
refer to price or reduction in price.
Normally no other advertising sign
shall, except as for 3.4.3, be within a distance
of 30m from the area of special control.
3.4.3.1
3.5 Prohibition of Advertising Signs on

Certain Sites- Where the Authority is of the
opinion that liny site is unsuitable for display
of advertising signs by virtue of the general
characteristics of the locality in regard to
historic, architectural, cultural or similar
interest, or by virtue of its position, the display
b) Signs relating to the

carrying out of building or similar operations on the land where
sign is displayed
THIS FACTORY I!
BEING ERECTED
Not more than

4 m
X Y Z C&TRW
TION CO
Building and
Engineering
Contractor
c) Signs announcing
any local event in
connection wieh an
activitv uromoted for
non-commercial pm- I
poses by various local
organizations
d) Signs and business
on business premi&s
with reference to the
business. the goods
sold.or the services
provided. etc, In
these premtres and
IRANK
the name and qualifications of the person
carrying on such activity
Not more than

I.5 m (in aggrc
gate area 4 m)
Not to exceed onetwelfth of area of

each face up to a
height of 4 m
Not more than

5 m (in area of
special control
4 m)
None
Not more than

5 m (in area of
5pecial control
4 m)
None
Not more than

4m
(Ine for each road

irontage for each
iot more than

50 mm (in area
If special control
100 mm)
May be displayed
only while such
works are in progress
2ny number but

aggregate area not
o exceed that
given in co1 2
m any premises
dot more than

50 mm (in area
)f special control
00 mm)
Shall not be displayed

earlier than 28 days
before the event is
due to start and shall
be removed within I4
days of its conclusion
9ny number but

aggregate are not
o exceed that
given in co1 2
riot more than

lOtI mm
Area to-be computed

as if the advertisement were laid flat
agamst the face of
the building
c,ontractor or subCrontractor
Only to indicate
that medical or
similar services or
supplies are available where advertisment is dtsplayed*
of such signs is likely to affect in any way the

safety of any form of transport, erection of
advertising signs on such a site shall be
prohibited.
h) Within right-of-way of the road; and

j) When these will affect local amenity.
3.5.1 HIGHWAYS AND ROADS-In general

the following advertisements should not be
permitted:
3.5.2 Illuminated advertisements of the

following description are objectionable from
the angle of traffic safety and should not be
allowed:
a) At or within 100 m of any road junction,
4 Advertisements which contain, include or
bridge or railway crossing or another

crossing. In urban areas, this distance
may be reduced to 50 m, provided there is
no conflict with the requirements stated
further on;
N~IE-l-he safe stoooine distance for a vehicle

travelling at a speed oi 50 km, h is 60 m. This should
be the uninfluenced distance for a driver
approaching a junction. Assuming that 3 seconds is
the time during which the influence of an
advertisement board persists, the distance travelled
in this time will be about 40m. Thesign should.
therefore, be more than IOOm away from the
junction Hence 100 m is suggested.
b) In such manner and at such places as to
c)
obstruct or interfere with the visibility of

approaching, merging or intersecting
traffic;
Within 10 m of the edge of a carriageway;
Nor E-A distance of IOtn may be taken as the normal
minimum setback from the edge of the carriageway,
the maximum area ofthe advertisement being0.3 rnfor every metre of setback.
4 Within 50 m along the road, of any sign
e)
f-l
board erected for the regulation of traffic

under the orders of a Public Authority,
such as a Traffic Authority, a Public
Transport Authority, or a Local
Authority;
In such a form as will obscure or hinder
interpretation of any sign, signal or o:her
device erected for traffic control by the
Public Authorities. For instance, the
advertisements should not imitate or
resemble, in colour or shape, the standard
legal traffic signs, or employ such words
as STOP in the same manner as used on
traffic signs;
On boards, placards, cloth banners or
sheets (except traffic signs) hung across a
road as they distract the attention of the
driver and are, therefore, hazardous;
NOTF -Any advertisement allowed on the sides ofa
foot over bridge or flyover across the carriage-ways
shall be restricted in size and shape such that no part
of the advertisement board projects beyond the top,
bottom and sides of the parapet of foot over bridge
or flyover.
g)
In such form as will obstruct the path of

pedestrians and hinder their visibility at
crossmgs;
are illuminated by any flashing,

intermittent or moving light or lights
except those giving public service
information, such as time, temperature,
weather or date;
b) Illuminated advertisements of such
intensity or brilliance as to cause glare or
impair vision of the driver or pedestrians,
or which otherwise interfere with any
operations of driving; and
Cl Advertisements illuminated in such a way
as to obscure or diminish effectiveness of
any official sign, device or signal.
4. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
4.1 Maintenance-All signs for which a
permit is required, together with all their
supports, braces, guys and anchors shall be
kept in good repair, both structurally and
aesthetically, and when not galvanized or
constructed of approved corrosion-resistive
non-combustible materials, shall be painted
when necessary to prevent corrosion.
4.2 Housekeeping-It shall be the duty and
responsibility of the owner of every sign to
maintain the immediate premises occupied by
the sign, in a clean, sanitary and healthy
condition.
4.3 Inspecrion- Every sign for which a
permit has been issued and every existing sign
for which a permit is required shall be
inspected by the Authority at least once in
every calendar year.
5. TYPES OF SIGNS
5.1 Types of Signs-In this part, the
following types of signs are covered:
a)
b)
cl
4
e)
0
.!a
Electrc and illuminated signs (see 7);.

Ground signs (see 8);
Roof signs (see 9);
Verandah signs (see 10);
Wall signs (see II);
Projecting signs (see 12);
Marquee signs (see f3);
NATIONAL
BIXLDINC. C(?DE OF IND4
h) Sky signs (see 14); and

3 Miscellaneous and temporary signs
(see 15).
6.
GENERAL REQIJIREMF.NTS FOR

ALL SIGNS
6.1 Loads --- Every advertising sign shall be

designed so as to withstand safely the wind,
dead, seismic and other loads as set out in
Part VI Structural design, Section I Lo:ids.
6.2 I l l u m i n a t i o n - N o sign shall be
illuminated by other than electrical means and
electrical devices and wiring shall be installed
in accordance with the requirements of Part
VIII Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations. In no case shall any open spark
or flame be used for display purposes unless
specifically approved by the Authority.
6.3 Location of Advertising Signs
a)
No advertising signs shall be erected.

constructed and maintained so as to
obstruct any pedestrain movement or fire
escape or any window or door, or opening
used as a means for egress or for fire
fighting purposes or so as to prevent free
passage from one part of a roof to any
other part thereof.
b) No sign shall be erected in any form or

shape or manner which will interfere with
any opening required for lighting and
ventilation.
6.4 C/se qf Combustibles

6.4.1 O R N A M E N T A L F E A T U R E S - W o o d o r
plastic or other materials of combustible
characteristics similar to wood may be used
for mouldings, cappings, nailing blocks,
letters and latticing where permitted and for
other purely ornamental features of signs.
6.4.2 SIGN FACINGS -Sign facings may be
made of approved combustible materials
provided the area of each face is not more than
10m and the wiring for electric lighting is
entirely enclosed in metal conduit and
installed with a clearance of not less than 5 cm
from the facing material.
6.5 Damage or Defacement by Removal of
Advertising Signs- Whenever_ any
advertising sign is removed, whether in
consequence of a notice or order under the
Code or otherwise, any damage or defacement
to the building or site on or from which such
sign was displayed, shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Authority.
6.6 Alteration to Ground Level-- Whenever
any alteration is made to the ground level
P A R T X SIGNS
AND
OUTDOOR
D I S P L A Y STRIICTIRES
adjacent to any advertising sign, the owner of

the site on which sign is erected. shall be
responsihle for the alteration of the height of
such sign so as to conform to the requirements
of this part.
6.7 Trqffic Control Inte[f:ference
6.7.1 No advertising sign shall be erected or
maintained which interferes with or is likely to
interfere with any sign or signal for the control
of traffic.
6.7.2 No advertising sign shall be placed
particularly in bends and curves so as to
obstruct the view of traffic at intersecting
streets.
6.8 Draining of Signs- Adequate provision
for drainage shall be made in every advertising
sign, where the possibility of collection of
moisture exists.
6.9 Glass in Signs- All glass used in
advertising signs, other than glass tubing used
in gas discharge or similar signs. shall be of
safety glass conforming to accepted standards
[X(2)]* at least 3mm thick. Glass panels in
advertising signs shall not exceed 6 m in area,
each panel being securely fixed in the body of
the sign independently of all other panels.
Glass signs shall be properly protected from
the possibility of damage by falling objects by
the provisions of suitable protecting metal
canopies, or by other approved means. Use of
glass may be discouraged or avoided wherever
possible for signs placed overhead.
6. IO Intecference to Fire Hydrants - Advertising signs shall be so placed as not to
obstruct the use of the hydrants or other fire
fighting appliances.
6. I1 Serving Devices- Ladders, platforms.
hooks, rings and ail other devices for the use
of servicing personal shall have safety devices
and suitable design loadings. (In this
connection reference may also be made to part
VII Constructional practices and safety).
6.12 Animated Devices- S i g n s w h i c h
contain moving section or ornaments shall
have fail-safe provisions to prevent the section
or ornaments from releasing and falling or
shifting its centre of gravity more than 45 cm.
The fail-safe device shall be in addition to the
mechanism and its housing which operate the
movable section or ornament. The fail-safe
device shall be capable of supporting the full
dead weight of the section or ornament when
moving mechanism releases.
__._----* In this part where reference is made to accepted
standards m relation to material specification, the
appropriate document listed at the end of this part may
he used as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
7. ELECTRIC SIGNS AND

ILLUMINATED,SIGNS
ground. Lighting reflectors may extend

fieyond the &p or face of the sign.-
7. I Material.Y fbr Ekclric Signs - E v e r y

electric sign shall be constrllcteti of noncombustible material except where the sign is
purely a flood-lit sign.
8.3 Supporrs a n d A n c h o r a g e - - E v e r y
ground sign shall be firmly supported and
anchored to the ground. Supports and
anchors shall be of treated timber in
accordance with good practice [X(3)], or
metal treated for corrosion resistance or
masonry or concrete.
8.4 Site Cleaning--The owner of any site on
which a ground sign is erected shall be
responsible for keeping such part of the site as
is visible from the street, clean, sanitary,
unoffensive and free of all obnoxious
substances and unsight,ly conditions to the
approval of the Authority.
7.2 Installation of Electric Signs and

Illuminated Signs-- Every electric sign and
illumi.nated s i g n s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n
accordance with Part VllI Bui!ding services,
Section 2 Electrical installations.
7.3 No. illuminated sign in red, amber or
green colours shall be erected or maintained
within a horizontal dist.ance of 10m of any
illuminated traffic sign.
7.4 All advertising signs illuminated by light
other than a white light at a height of less than
two storeys or 6m above the fooipath,
whichever be the greater height, shall be
suitably screened so as to satisfactorily
prevent any interference with any sign or
signal for the control of traffic.
7.5 Intense Illumination-No person shall

erect any sign which is of such intense
illumination as to disturb the residents in
adjacent or nearby residential buildings.
Notwithstanding any permission given for
such erection, any such sign which after
erection is, in the opinion of the Authority, of
such intense illumination as to disturb the
occupants of adjacent or nearby buildings
shall, on the order of the Authority, be
suitably altered or removed by the owner of
the sitk concerned within such reasonable
period as the Authority may specify.
7.6 Hours qf Opration--No electric sign,
other than those necessary in the opinion of.
the Authority in the interest of public
amenity. health and safety. shall be operated
between midnight and sunrise.
8.5 Ohsrruction ta TtwJic - No ground sign

shall be erected so as to obstruct free access to
or egress from anv builrling..
8.6 Set Back---No ground sign shall be set
nearer to the street line than the established
building line.
8.7 Bottom Clenmnce---The bottom line of
all ground signs shall be at least 0.6m above
the ground, but t.he intervening space may be
filled with open lattice work or platform
decorative trim.
8.8 Ground painted signs sh:*ll conform to
the requirements of fi and 7v here applicable.
9. ROOF SIGNS
9.1 Material-- Every roof sien together with
its frames, supports and braces, sha!l be
constructed of non-combustible material,
except as in 6.4. Provision shall be made for
electric grounding of all metallic parts; and
where combustible materials are permitted in
letters or other ornamental features, all wiring
and tubinn shall be kent free and insulated
therefrom.
9.2 Dirnencion.~+- No roof sign shall exceed
the following heights on buildings of heights:
7.7 FlashinK, O c c u l t i n g a n d Animared

Sip--No flashing, occulting or animated
advertising signs. the periodicity of which
exceeds 30 flashes to the- minute. shall be
erected so that the lowest point of such signs is
less than 9m above the ground level.
7.8 For illuminated signs in the vicinity of
airports. the Directorate General of Civil
Aviation should be consulted.
8. GROUND SIGNS
8.1 Material- Every ground sign exceeding
6 m in height together with frames, supports
and braces shall he constructed of noncombustible material except as in 6.4.
8.2 Dimensions---No ground sign shall be
erected to a height exceeding 9m above the
x_12
He&h f of
Sip. Max
Not exceeding four storeys

or 18 m
2m
b) Five to eight storeys or ex-
3m
cl
5m
a)
ceeding 18 m but not exceeding 36 m
Exceeding eight storeys or

36 m. provided that in calculating the height of such
signs, signs placed one above
the other. or on planes at
different levels of the same
building shall be deemed to
be one sign. whether or not
such signs belong to
different owners
NATlON.AL RI:II.I)INC CODE
OF
INDIA
Y.3 Locurivn
3) No roof sign shall be so placed on the roof

of any building as to prevent free passage
from one part of the roof to another.
b) No roof sign shaii be piaceu on or over the
rootofany building, unless the entrre roof

construction is of non-combustible
material.
9.4 Projrcfion -~ No root sign shall project

b e v o n d t h e cxistrng ouilding line ot the
busilding on which it is erected or shall extend
beyond the root in any direction.
9.5 Supports and Anchoruge~-- Every roof
sign shall be thoroughly secured and anchored
to the building on or over which it is erected.
All loads shall be safely distributed to the
structural members of the building.
10.5 Height of Hunging Verandah SignsEvery verandah sign hanging from a verandah
shall be fixed in such a manner that the lowest
point of such sign is not Less than 2.5 m above
the pavement.
10.6 Pmjecriqn -- Except as provided for
in 10.4, no verandah sign shall extend outside
the line of the verandah to which rt is attached.
Il. WALL SIGNS
Il. I Material--- Every wail sign exceeding
4m in area shall be constructed of noncombustible material except as in 6.4.
1 I .? Dinlensions
a) T he total area .ot any wall sign shall not
exceed 20 m fog, every IS m of building

frontage to the street to which such sign
faces; except that in the caseof a wall sign,
consisting only ofthe name of a theatre or
cinema, the total area of such sign shall
not exceed 200m.
9.6 For roof signs near the airports the

Directorate General of Civil Aviation should
be consulted.
9.7 Painted roof signs shall conform to the
requirements of 6 and 7, where applicable.
b) No wall sign which exceeds 30 m* in area
shall be located on any wail not directly

facing the road; provided that any such
sign or signs shall not exceed 25 percent of
the side wall area visible from the street.
10. VEKANDAH SIGNS

10.1 Material --- Every verandah srgn shall be
constructed entirely of non-comoustible
material except as in 6.4.
10.2 Dimensions --- No verandah sign shall
exceed 1 m in height. No verandah sign
hanging from a verandah shall exceed 2.5 m in
length and 5crn in thickness, except that
verandah box signs measuring not rnore than
20cm in thickness, measured between the
principal faces of the sign and constructed
entirely of metal wired glass may be erected.
10.3 Alignmtwt --- Every verandah srgn shall
be set parallel to the building line, except that
any such sign hanging from a verandah shall
be set at right angles to the building line.
iI,3 Projecrion-NNo wail sign shall extend

above the top ofthe wall or beyond the ends 01.
the wail to which it is attached. At any place
where pedestrians may pas5 along a wall, any
wail sign attached thereto shaU not project
more than 7.5 cm therefrom within a height 01
2.5 m measured fron1 the level of such place.
11.4 Supports and Attac~hnrent- Ever-y.wall
sign attached to walls shalt be securely
attached. Wooden blocks or anchorage with
wood used in connection wrth screws. staples
or nails shall not be considered proper
anchorage, except in the case of wall signs
attached to walls of wood.
12. PROJECTING SIGNS
10.4 Location-Verandah signs, other than

hanging signs only, shall be placed in the
following locations:
12. I Material- Every projectmg sign and its

support and framework shall be constructed
entirely of non-combustible material.
Immediately above the eaves of the

verandah roof in such a manner as not to
project beyond the rear of the roof gutter;
12.2 Projection und Height--No projecting

sign or any part of its supports or framework
shall project more than 2m beyond the
building; however it shall not project beyond
the plot line tacing the street; when it projects
into the street it shall be at clear height of
2.5 m from the road (see Part III):
b) Against but not above or below the
verandah parapet or balustrade provided

such parapet or balustrade is solid and the
sign does not project more than 20cm
from the outside face of such parapet or
balustrade; or
Un the veranMn&ams OX pa~apets\n\\ne
c&of painted signs.
a)
The axes of ail projecting signs shall be at

right angles to the main face of the
b\i&<& W he~e a V -c~ns\Kucti~\n i s
employed for the faces, the base of the
sign against the building shall not exceed

the amount of the overall projection.
b) No projecting signs shall extend above
the eaves of a roof or above that part of
the building face to which it is attached.
c) The maximum height of .a projecting sign
shall be related to the height of the
building to which it is attached in the
following manners:
Height of
Sign, Max
9
1) Not exceeding *four
s t o r e y s o r 18m
12 m
2) Five to eight storeys
or not exceeding 36m
15 m
3) E x c e e d i n g e i g h t
storeys or 36 m
Height of Building
12.3 Supports and Attachment - Every

projecting sign shall be securely attached to a
building so that movement in any direction is
prevented by corrosion-resistant metal
brackets, rods, anchors, supports, chains or
wire ropes so designed and arranged that half
the number of such fixing devices may safely
support the sign under all circumstances.
regulations laid down by the Authority

concerned shall apply.
1.5. T E M P O R A R Y A D V E R T I S I N G
SIGNS, TRAVELLING C I R C U S
SIGNS, FAIR SIGNS AND DECORATIONS DURING PUBLIC
REJOICING
15.1 Types-None of the following
advertising signs shall be erected or
maintained, other than as temporary signs
erected in accordance with 15.2:
a) Any advertising sign which is painted on

b)
c)
4
e)
12.3.1 Staples or nails shall not be used to

secure any projecting sign to any building.
12.4 Additional Loads- Projecting sign
structures which could be used to support an
individual on a ladder or other servicing
device whether or not specifically designed for
the servicing device shall be capable of
supporting the anticipated additional load but
in no case less than 500 kg concentrated
horizontal load and 1500 kg vertical
concentrated load appiied at the point of
assumed loading or point of most eccentric
loading. The buildingcomponent to which the
projecting sign is attached shall also be
designed to support the additional loads.
13. MARQUEE SIGNS
13.1 Materials- Marquee signs shall be
constructed entirely of metal or other
approved non-combustible materials.
13.2 Height- Such signs shall not exceed 2 m
in height nor shall they project below the
fascia of the marquee nor lower than 2.5m
above the footpath.
13.3 Length - Marquee signs may extend the
full length but in no case shall they project
beyond the ends of the marquee.
14. SKY SIGNS
14.1 In the case of the sky signs, the
x-l4
ia
h)
or fixed on to or between the columns of a

verandah;
Any advertising sign which projects
above or below any fascia, bearer, beam
or balustrade of a verandah or balcony;
Any advertising sign which is luminous or
illuminated and .which is fixed to any
fascia bearer, beam or balustrade of any
splayed or rounded corner of a verandah
or balcony;
Any streamer sign erected across a road;
Any sign not securely fixed so as to
prevent the sign swinging from side to
side;
Any advertising sign made of cloth,
papier mache, or similar or like material
.but excluding licensed paper signs on
hoardings or fences;
Any advertising sign on a plot used or
intended to be used exclusively for
residential purposes, other than a brass
plate or board preferably not exceeding
60 X 45 cm in size, affixed to the fence or
entrance door or gate of a dwelling, and in
the case of a block of flats, affixed to the
wall of the entrance hall or entrance door
of any flat; and
Any sign on trees, rocks, hillsides and
similar natural features.
15.2 Requirements for Temporary Signs

1.5.2.1 All temporary advertising, travelling
circus and fair signs and decorations during
public rejoicing shall be subject to -the
approval of the Authority and shall be erected
so as not to obstruct any opening and -to
minimize fire risk.
f5.2.2 The advertisement contained on any
such sign shall pertain only to the business,
industry or other pursuit conducted on or
within the premises on which such sign is
erected or maintained. Temporary advertising
signs shall be removed as soon as torn or
damaged and in any case within 60 days after
erection unless extended.
N A T I O N A L B U I L D I N G C O D E O F IkDIA
15.2.3 The Authority shall be empowered to

order the immediate removal of any
temporary advertising sign or decoration.
where, in its opinion such action is necessary
in the interests of public amenity and safety.
15.2.4 POLE SIGNS ---Pole signs shall be
constructed entirely of non-combustible
materials and shall conform to the
requirements for ground or roof signs as the
case may be (sre 8 and Y). Such signs may
extend beyond the street line if they comply
with the provisions for projecting srgns (sue
12)
15.25 BANNER A N D CLOI H SIC;%S Temorary signs and banners attached to or
suspended from a building. constructed of
cloth or other combustible material shall be
strongly constructed and shall be securely
attached to their supports. They shall be
removed as soon as torn or damaged. and in
no case later than 60 days after erection;
except. that permits for temporary signs
suspended from or attached to a canopy or
marquee shall be limited to a period of IO
days.
1 5 . 2 . 6 MA X I M U M S IZE -7.emporary signs
shall not exceed torn in area.
1 5 . 2 . 7 PROJEC~~ION ---1emporary stgns of

cloth and similar combustible construction
shall not extend more than,JOcm over or into
a street or other public space except that such
signs when constructed without a frame may
be supported flat against the face of a canopy
or marquee or may be suspended from the
lower fascia thereof but shall not extend closer
to the footpath than 2.5m.
15.2.8 SP E C I A L P E R M I T S --All temporary
banners suspended from building or hung on
poles, which extend across streets or other
public spaces shall be subject to special
approval of the Authority.
15.2.9 Bill boards set up by the Authority
shall be used for temporary signs, symbols,
billsfor entertainment, etc. so that other walls
of the city are not defaced.
15.2.9.1 Bills for entertainment and other
functions shall not be affixed on to building
walls other than the bill boards (see 15.2.9).
The organization responsible for such bills
and posters shall be held responsible for any
such defacement and non-removal of signs.
APPENDIX A
( CIuuse 3. I .2)
SPEClMEN FORM FOR APPLlCATlON FOR PERMIT

TO ERECT, RE-ERECT OR ALTER IN ADVERTISING SIGN
1.
2.
3.
4.
ii:
Type of sign..................~..i..................................................................................................
*Location...........................................................................................................................
a) Building/ premises..........................................................................................................
b) Location.of building/premises with respect to neighbouring streets.................................
*Dimensions and details of the sign.....................................................................................
Materials used for different parts.......................................................................................
*Electrical and lighting details.. .......................................................................................
*Structural details showing also supporting framework and anchorages..............................
7. Mode of operation.............................................................................................................
*Plans as desired in 3.1.2(b) are enclosed
Name and address of the applicant

.........................................
.........................................
Name and address of the owner

of the building/ premises
.........................................
Signature.. ........................
Date .................................
Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF STANDARDS
standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the Code. The standards listed ma)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements qf the referred clauses
in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the jirst column brithin parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this Part 11.
(I) IS : 380X-l 966 Method ot test for noncombustibility ofbuil&n~ materials (first
revision)
(2) IS:
2553-1971
S p e c i f i c a t i o n lor safktj
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRLCTURES
g l a s s (src~~nd
revi.\ion)
(3) iS:401-1967 Code of p r a c t i c e

preservation
lIJ\Y\iOIl)
o f
timber
for
(.WWd
(Continued from flap I)

ail governmental and private agencies
controlling building activities. in preparing
the Code expertise has been drawn upon
from ail over the country-the Wnion
Government, States, local bodres and
learned societies like the Institution of
Engineers and the institution of
Architects.
Since the first versibn of the Code was in
use for more than a decade, large number
of comments and useful suggestions for
modifications to the Code had been
received. ISI organised implementation
conferences on the National Building Code
in most of the States and Union Territories.
Direct aesistance was also provided in
re-writing the building byelaws ofmunicipal
corporations, municipalities and other
local bodies to bring them in line with the
provisions of the Code. As a result of these
efforts, considerable feidback data was
received. In addition many Indian Standards
in the field of building activities have been
revised and new standards formulated.
Ail these have led to the revision of the
National Building Code.
in spite of the best efforts by ail concerned
to implement the Code, the revised
building byelaws, finalized in many states
have not been adopted by the concerned
Governments due to procedural bottlenecks.
Efforts are necessary at Government level
to overcome the difficulties in ,revising
building byeiaws and PWD specifications
and adoptin,g them in practice.
This publication forms part of the National
Building Code of India 1983 and contains
Part IX Plumbing Services with ail its
sections dealing with water supply.
drainage and sanitation, and gas supply.
The information contained in this
publication will essentially serve the public
health/plumbing engineer.
AMENDMENT
SP 7:1983
NO. 3 JANUARY 1997

TO
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA, 1983
the followin q? a g es IV-l to IV-W

(Part IV Fire Protection) Substitute
for the existing pages IV-l to IV:
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
1. SCOPE
2! REFERENCES
3. TERMINOLOGY
4. CLASSIFICATION
OF BUILDINGS B+ED
ON OCCUPANCY
6. FIRE ZONES
Z GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL INDIVIDUAL OCCUPANCIES
9. REQUIREMENTS
OF RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP A) .
10. REQUIREMENTS
OF EDUCATIONAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP B)
11. REQUIREMENTS
OF INSTITUTIONAL
12. REQUIREMENTS
OF ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS (GROU~-D)
13. REQUIREMENTS
OF BUSINESS BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
14. REQUIREMENTS
OF MERCANTILE
15. REQUIREMENTS
OF INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS (GROUP G)
16. REQUIREMENTS
OF STORAGE BUILDINGS (GROUP H)
1 Z REQUIREMENTS
OF BUILDINGS FOR HAZARDOUS
BUILDINGS (GROUP C)
BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
USES (GROUP J)
APPENDIX A
LIST OF REFERRED
APPENDIX
CALORIFIC VALUES OF COMMON

VALUES OF FIRE LOAD DENSITY
APPENDIX
LIST OF OCCUPANCIES
APPENDIX
D FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

15 m IN HEIGHT OR ABOVE
APPENDIX
FIRE PROTECTION
CONSIDERATION
DUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
APPENDIX
GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION PROCEDURES

FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS (ABOVE 15 m IN HEIGHT)
APPENDIX
G COMMITTEE
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION
INDIAN STANDARDS
MATERIALS
AND TYPICAL
FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS

FOR
VENTING
IN IN-
COMPOSITION
Iv.i
PART
IV FIRE
PROTECTION
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part of the Code deals with safety from fire and explosion. It specifies the demarcation
of fire zones, restrictions on construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings
based on occupancy, types of building construction according to fire resistance of the structural
and non-structural components and other restrictions and requirements necessary to minimize
danger to life from fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can be evacuated. The code
recognizes that safety of life is more than a matter of means of exits and accordingly deals with
various matters which are considered essential to the safety of life.
0.2 Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different
materials and structural elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of buildings
must also be taken into consideration for assessing the extent of hazards, and methods should then
be devised by which the hazards could be minimized. An indefinite combination of variables is
involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which cannot be quantified. The requirements of this
Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engineering design approach should be adopted
for ensuring afire safe design for buildings. It would also be necessary for this purpose to associate
qualified and trained fire protection engineers with the planning of buildings, so that adequate fire
protection measures could be incorporated in the building design right from the beginning.
0.3 Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this part is to specify
measures which will provide that degree of safety from fire which can be reasonably achieved. The
Code endeavors to avoid requirements which might involve unreasonable hardships or unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal use and occupancy of buildings, but insists upon
compliance with minimum standards for fire safety necessa~ in public interest.
0.4 This part does not cover general fire prevention. Nor does it cover the prevention of accidental
personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
0.5 This part while recognizing that panic in a building on fire maybe uncontrollable, deals with
the potential panic hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic.
Experience indicates that panic seldom develops even in the presence of potential danger, so ~ong
as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits which they can see within a reasonable distance
and with no obstruction or undue congestion in the path of travel. However, any uncertainty as to
the location or adequancy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or fumes and the stoppage
of travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles artd falls on stairs, maybe
conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.
0.6 Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building such as space between ceiling
and false ceiling, horizontal and vertical ducts, etc, tend to act as flues/tunnels during a fire.
Provision should, therefore, be made to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
0.7 Nothing in this part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building
construction, more exits or otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified
in this part.
0.8 Compliance with this part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for
other provisions for safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy
conditions. Nor shall any provision of this Code be construed as requiring or permitting any
addition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy conditions.
0.9 One of the major points brought out in this part is the limitation of heights and areas of
buildings based on fire safety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter
Table 19 based on local conditions, but the ratios of areas as maintained in the table for different
occupancies and types of construction shall be adhered to.
~.2
NATtONALBUILDtNGCODEOF INDtA
0.10 Advantage has been taken of the developments, particularly in fire resistance rating of
materials, designating types of construction in a rational manner and relating the area limitations
of different occupancies to different types of construction.
0.21 HaIons (Halogenated hydrocarbons) which exhibit exceptional fire fighting and explosion
prevention/suppression characteristics have been found to possess high ozone depleting potential.
They come under Group II of Appendix A of the Montreal Protocol, the international environmental agreement for phasing out ozone depleting substances which came into force on 1 January
1989. Due to increasing evidence that the ozone layer is getting depleted at a faster rate than
thought earlier, the developed countries accelerated their phase-out schedule with a view to
achieving 100 percent phase-out of halons by 1 January 1994, instead of the earlier target date of
1 January 2000 after which only essential use of halon will be allowed. For developing countries
like India, the total phase-out of halons is to be achieved by 1 January 2010, as per Montreal
Protocol, unless a decision is taken in between to hasten up the phase-out of ozone depleting
substances. India, having become a signatory to the Protocol in June 1992, is committed to abide
by the Montreal Protocol decisions. Meanwhile, the practical implications of the phasing out of
the halons will cover, by and large, the following aspects:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Availability of halons will be restricted;

Non-standard halon extinguishers, like aerosol type, shall not be permitted;
Discharge of halons for training/testing, etc, shall not be permitteq
All efforts shall be made for avoiding/minimising halon emissions at various levels such as
production, fire equipment manufacture, user, service and maintenan=,
e) Since drop-in substitutes for halons are not likely to be available on a commercial scale
in the near future, wherever possible, instead of halon, use of suitable alternative extinguishing media/methods will be resorted to, even accepting some trade-offs, if necessay,
f) Halons shall be restricted for essential uses only, for protection of critical fire explosion
risk areas which would otherwise result in serious impairment of an essential service to
society, or pose an unacceptable threat to life, the environment, or national security, and
all other appropriate fire protection measures have been taken.
Nom Detailedinstructionswhichwillbe issuedbythe Governmentof Indiafromtimeto timefor implementation
ofthe CountryProgrammeforthephasingoutofozonedepletingsubstance(ODS)shal[haveto be compliedwith.
0.12 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983. As a
result of implementation of this part, some useful suggestions have emerged. These have been
intirporated in this revision to the extent possible. The major changes in this revision are:
a) Few tables for the fire resistance ratings of various building components such as walls,
columns, beams and floors have been included. These fire ratings are helpful for ensuring
adherence during construction of the building to assess fire damage, for post fire structural
safety assessment of various structural elements, and adequacy of structural repairs.
b) The requirements for wet riser, downcomer, automatic sprinkler installation, high velocity
(10-15 m/see) water spray or foam generating system, etc, for buildings have been modified.
c) Appendix giving guidelines for selection of fire detectors has been deleted and relevant
Indian Standards on fire alarm system and smoke detectors have been referred.
d) Appendix for determination of fire loads and fire load density for arriving at the classification of occupancy hazard and calorificvalues of some common materials has been included.
e) Appendix for broad classification of industrial and non industrial occupancies into low,
moderate and high hazard has also been included.
0.13 The requirements given for industrial buildings (Group G) given in the code are for small
scale units in the urban areas. For other industries the requirement will have to be worked out on
the basis of relevant Indian Standards and also in consultation with local fire authority.
0.24 The composition of the Technical Committee responsible for the formulation of this part is
given at Appendix G.
IV-3
1. SCOPE
1.1 This part covers the requirements of fire
protection of buildings through classification
of buildings based on occupancy, type of construction, and their requirements.
1.2 This part also covers the exit requirements for all occupancies.
2. REFERENCES
Indian Standards listed at Appendix A are
necessary adjuncts to this part.
3. TERMINOLOGY
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTIONAND ALARM
SYSTEMFire alarm system comprising components for automatically detecting a fire, initiating an alarm of fire and initiating other
actions as appropriate.
NOTE The system mayalso includemanualfire
alarmcall.
AtJTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM Automatic system of water pipes fitted with
sprinkler heads at suitable intervals and
heights, and designed to detect, control or
extinguish a fire by the discharge of water.
BtJILDING Any structure for whatsoever
purpose and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part thereof whether used
as human habitation or not and includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, chimneys,
plumbing and building services, fixed platforms, varandah, balcony, cornice or projection, part of a building or anything affixed
thereto or any wall enclosing or intended to
enclose any land or space and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents, shamianahs,
tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for temporary
and ceremonial occasions with the permission
of the Authority shall not be considered as
building.
BLJILDING,HEIGHT OF The vertical distance measured in the case of flat roofs, from
the average level of the ground around and
contiguous to the building or as decided by the
Authority to the terrace of the last livable floor
of the building adjacent to the external wall;
and in the case of pitched roofs, up to the point
where the external surface of the outer wall
intersects the finished surface of the sloping
roofi and in the case of gables facing the road,
lV.4
the mid-point between the eaves level and the

ridge. Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration, shall be
heights.
COMBUSTIBLEMATERIAL A material is
combustible if it burns or adds heat to a fire
when tested for non-combustibility in accordance with Indian Standard given at (1) of
Appendix A.
COVEREDAREA Ground area covered by
level. The area covered by the following in the
open spaces is excluded from covered area
(see Table 19) :
a) garden, rockery, well and well structures, plant nursery, waterpool, swimming pool (if uncovered), platform
round a tree, tank, fountain, bench,
chabutara with open top and unenclosed on sides by walls and the like;
b) drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit,
gully pit, chamber, gutter and the lik~
wall, gate, unstoreyed
c) compound
porch and portico, slide, swing, uncovered staircases, ramp areas covered
by chhajja and the lik~ and
d) watchmans booth, pumphouse, garbage shaft, electric &bin or sub-stations, and such other utility structures
meant for the services of the building
under consideration.
NOTE For the purposeof this part, covered area
equals the plot area minus the area due foropenspaces
in the plot.
DOWNCOMERAn arrangement of fire fighting within the building by means of

downcomer pipe connected to terrace tank
through terrace pump, gate valve and nonreturn valve and having mains not less than
100 mm internal diameter with, landing valves
on each floor/landing. It is also fitted with inlet
connections at ground level for charging with
water by pumping from fire service appliances
and air release valve at roof level to release
trapped air inside.
DRY RISER An arrangement of fire fighting
within the building by means of vertical rising
mains not less than 100 mm internal diameter
with landing valves on each floor/landing
which is normally dry but is capable of being
charged with water usually by pumping from
fire service appliances.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF iNDIA
EMERGENCYLIGHTING Lighting provided

for use when the supply to the normal lighting
fails.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM A complete but discrete emergency lighting installation from the standby power source to the
emergency lighting lamp(s), for example, selfcontained emergency luminaire or a circuit
from central battery generator connected
through wiring to several escape lurninaires.
ESCAPELIGHTING That part of emergency
lighting which is provided to ensure that the
escape route is illuminated at all material
times, for example, at all times when persons
arc on the premises, or al times the main
lighting is not available, either for the whole
building or for the escape routes.
FIRE EXIT Away out leading to an escape
route.
FIRE LOAD Calorific energy, of the whole
contents contained in a space, including the
facings of the walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.
FIRE LOAD DENSITY Fire load divided by
floor area.
FIRE RESISTANCE(CRITERIA OF) Fire
resistance is a property of an element of building construction and is the measure of its
ability to satisfy for a stated period some or all
of the following criteria:
a)
b)
c)
resistance to collapse,
resistance to flame penetration, and
resistance to excessive temperature
rise on the unexposed face.
FIRI; SEPARATION The (.listancc in metrcs

or from other site, or from the opposite side
of street or other public space to the building
for the purpose of preventing the spread of
fire.
FIRE TOWER An enclosed staircase which
can only be approached from the various
floors through landings or lobbies separated
from both the floor areas and the staircase by
fire-resisting doors, and open to the outer air.
FIRE RESISTIN(; WALL A fire resistance
rated wall, having protcctccl openings, which
restricts the spread of fire and extends continuously from the foundation to at least 1 m
above the roof.
PART IV I: II<Ii PROTECTION
FLOOR AREA RAr!o (FAR) The quotient

(plinth area) on all floors by the area of the
plot
FAR =
Plot area
HIGH RISE BUILDING For the purpose of
this part, all buildings 15 m or above in height
shall be considered as high rise buildings.
HORIZONTALExrr An arrangement which
allows alternative egress from a floor area to
another floor at or near the same level in an
adjoining building or an adjoining part of the
same building with adequate fire separation.
OCCUPANCYOR USE GROUP The principal
purpose of classification of a building according to the occupancy, an occupanq shall be
deemed to include subsidiary occupancies
which are contingent upon it.
PLINrH AREA The built-up covered area
measured at the floor level of the basement or
of any storey.
PRESSURISATION The establishment of a
pressure difference across a barrier to protect
a staixway, lobby, escape route or room of a
building from smoke penetration.
PRESSURISATIONLEVEL The pressure difference bctwccn the pressurised space and the
area sckvcd by the pressurised escape route
[expressed in pascals (Pa)].
ROOF Extrs A means of escape on to the
roof of a building, but acceptable only where
the roof has access to it from the ground. The
exit shall have adequate cut-off within the
building from staircase below.
SEPARATINGWALLThe wall provides complete separation of one building from another
or part of a building from imothcr part of the
same building to prevent any communication
of fire or any access or heat transmission to
wall itself which may cause or assist in the
combustion of materials of the side opposite
to that portion which maybe on fire.
Srr~ P1.or A parcel (piece
cncloscd by definite boundaries.
) of land
sTACK
pRIWStJRE f%XUre
difference
caused by a tcmpcraturc diffcrcncc creating an
Iv.s
TRAVEL DISTANCE The distance to be

travelled from any point in a building to a
protected escape route, external escape route
or final exit.
4.~.~.~ GROUPA RESIDENTIALBUILDINGS

These shall include any building in which
sleeping accommodation is provided for normal residential purposes with or without
cooking or dining or both facilities, except any
building classified under Group C.
VENTILATION Supply of outside air into, or

the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
Buildings and structures under Group A shall

air movement
enclosure.
within a duct, chimney or
VENTING FIRE The process of inducing

heat and smoke to leave a building as quickly
as possible by such paths that lateral spread of
fire and heat is checked, fire fighting operaticms+re=facilitated and minimum fire damage
is caused.
VOLUME TO PLOT AREA RATIO (VPR)
ratio of volume of building measured in
cubic metres to the area of the plot measured
in square metres and expressed in metres.
The
Subdivision
houses
Subdivision A-3 Dormitories

Subdivision A-4 Apartment houses (flats)
Subdivision A-5 Hotels
a)
4. CLASSIFICATION
OF BUILDINGS
BASED ON OCCUPANCY
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
A
B
c
D
E
F
G
H
J
b)
Residential
Educational
Institutional
Assembly
Business
Mercantile
Industrial
Storage
Hazardous
Examples of buildings in each group are given

in 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.9.
IV-6
SUBDIVISIONA-1 LODGINGOR ROOMING HOUSES These shall include any

building or group of buildings under
the same management,
in which
separate sleeping accommodation for a
total of not more than 40 persons
(beds), on transient or permanent
basis, with or without dining facilities
but without cooking facilities for individuals is provided. This includes
inns, clubs, motels.
A lodging or rooming house shall bc
classified as a dwelling in Subdivision
A-2 if no room in any of its private
dwelling units is rented to more than
three persons.
SUBDIVISION
A-2ONE-OR TWO-FAMILY
PRIVATE DWELLING These shall include any private dwelling which is occupied by members of one or two
families and has a total sleeping accommodation for not more than 20 pcrscms.
If rooms in a private dwelling arc
rented to outsiders, these shall be for
accommodating not more than three
persons per room.
NOTE The occupanciessuch as underground constructions like raifwaystations and powerhouses havenot been
included in this code and shall be dealt separately.
4.2.1 Minor occupancy incidental to operations in another type of occupancy shall be

considered as part of the main occupancy and
shall be classified under the relevant group for
the main occupancy.
or rooming
Subdivision A-2 One- or two-family private

dwellings
WET RISER An arrangement for fire fighting within the building by means of vertical
rising mains of not less than 100 mm internal
diameter
with landing valves on each
floorflanding for fire fighting purposes and
permanently charged with water from a pressurized supply.
NOTE For definitions of other terms,referenceshall
bemadeto IndianStandardagivenat(2)ofAppendix
A.
4.1 General Classification All buildings,

whether existing or hereafter erected shall be
classified according to the use or the character
of occupancy in one of the following groups:
A-1 Lodging
If sleeping accommodation for more

than 20 persons is provided in any one
residential building, it shall bc classified as a building in Subdivision A- 1,
A-3 or A-4 as the case may be.
c)
SUBDIVISION
A-3 DORMITORIES
These shall include any building jn

which group sleeping accommodation
is provided, with or without dining
f,
-.
d)
e)
facilities for persons who are not members of the same family, in one room or
a series of closely associated rooms
under joint occupancy and single
management, for example, school and
college dormitories,
students, and
other hostels and militaV barracks,
SUBDIVISIONA-4 APARTMENT HOUSES
(FLATS) ~ese shall include any
building or structure in which living
quarters are provided for three or
more families, living independently of
each other and with independent
cooking
facilities,
for example,
apartment
houses, mansions and
chawls.
SUBDIVISION A-5 HOTELS These shall
include any building or group of buildings under single management, in
which sleeping accommodation, with
or without dining facilities, is provided
for hire to more than 40 persons who
are primarily transient.
-
If residential accommodation is provided in

the schools/institutions, if shall be classified as
a building in Subdivision A-3.
4.~.~.3 GROUP C INSTITUTIONALBUILDINGS
These shall include any building or part
thereof, which is used for purposes, such as
medical or other treatment or care of persons
suffering from physical or mental illness, disease or infirmity care of infants, convalescents
or aged persons and for penal or correctional
detention in which the liberty of the inmates
is restricted. Institutional buildings ordinarily
provide sleeping accommodation for the occupants.
Subdivision C-1 Hospitals and sanatoria

Subdivision C-2 Custodial institutions
Subdivision C-3 Penal and mental institutions
a)
b)
Subdivision B-1 School upto higher secondary level

Subdivision B-2 All others/training institutions
a)
b)
SUBDIVISION B-1 SCHOOLS UP TO

HIGHER SECONDARYLEVEL This
subdivision shall include any building
or a group of buildings under single
management which is used for students
not less than 20 in number.
SUBDIVISIONB-2 ALL OTHER/ll?AINING INSTITUTIONS This subdivisions
shall include any building or a group of
buildings under single management
which is used for students not less than
100 in number.
In the case of temporaty buildings/structures

which are utilized for educational purposes,
the requirements shall be as per the provisions
contained in Indian Standard given at (20) of
Appendix A as well as the local regulations.
,!:
Buildings and structures under Group C shall

4.1.1.2 GROUP B EDUCATIONALBUILDINGS

These shall include any building used for
school college or day-care purposes involving
assembly for instruction, education or recreation for not less than 20 students.
Buildings and structures under Group B shall
y
4
-...
..A
c)
SUBDIVISION
C-1 HOSPITALS
SANATORIA This subdivision
AND
shall
which is used for housing persons suffering from physical limitations because of health or age, for example,
hospitals, infirmaries, sanatoria and
nursing homes.
SUBDIV1S1ON
C-2 CUSTODIALINSTITUTIONS This subdivision shall include
any building or a group of buildings
under single management, which is
used for the custody and care of persons, such as children, convalescents
and the aged, for example, homes for
the aged and infirm, convalescent
homes and orphanages.
SUBDIVISIONC-3 PENAL AND MENTAL
INSTITUTIONS This subdivision shall
which is used for housing persons
under restraint, or who are detained
for penal or corrective purposes, in
which the liberty of the inmates is
restricted, for example, jails, prisons,
mental hospitals, mental sanatoria and
reformatories.
4.1.1.4 GROUP D ASSEMBLYBUILDINGS

These shall include any building ,or part of a
building, where number of persons not less
than 50 congregate or gather for amusement,
lV.7
recreation, social, religious, patriotic, civil,

travel and similar purposes, for example,
theaters, motion picture houses, assembly
halls, auditoria, exhibition halls, museums,
skating rinks, gymnasiums, restaurants, places
of worship, dance halls, clubrooms, passenger
stations and terminals of air, surface and
marine public transportation services, recreation piers and stadia, etc.
Buildings under Group D shall be firther subdivided as follows:
Subdivision D-1 Buildings having a theatrical or motion picture or any other stage and
fixed seats for over 1000 persons
d)
Subdivision D-2 Buildings having a theatrical or motion picture or any other stage and
fixed seats upto 1000 persons
Subdivision D-3 Buildings without a permanent stage having accommodation for
300 or more persons but no permanent
seating arrangement.
e)
Subdivision D-4 Buildings without a permanent stage having accommodation for

less than 300 persons with no permanent
seating arrangement.
Subdivision D-5 All other structures including temporaxy structures designed for
assembly of people not covered by subdivisions D-1 to D-4.
a) SUBDIVISION D-I This subdivision
shall include any building primarily
meant for theatrical or operatic performances and exhibitions and which has
a raised stage, proscenium curtain,
fixed or portable scenery or scenery
loft, lights, motion picture houses,
mechanical
appliances
or other
theatrical accessories and equipment
and which is provided with fixed seats
for over 1000 persons.
b) SUBDIVISION D-2 This subdivision
shall include any building primarily
meant for use as described for Subdivision D-1, but with fixed seats up to
1000 persons.
c) SUBDIVISION D-3 This subdivision
shall include any building, its lobbies,
rmms and other spaces connected
thereto, primarily intended for assembly of people, but which has no
theatrical stage or permanent theatriIv-s
cd and/or cinematographic accessories

and has accommodation for 300 persons or more, for example, dance halls,
night clubs, halls for incidental picture
shows, dramatic, theatrical or educational presentation, lectures or other
similar purposes having no theatrical
stage except a raised platform and used
without permanent seating arrangement; art galleries exhibition halls,
community
halls, marriage halls,
places of worship, museums, lecture
halls and passenger terminals.
SUBDIVISIOND-4 This subdivision
shall include any building primarily intended for use as described in Subdivision D-3, but with accommodation
for less than 300 persons with no permanent seating arrangements.
SUBDIVISIOND-5 This subdivision
shall include any building or structure
permanent or temporary meant for assembly of people not covered by Subdivisions D-1 to D-4, for example,
grandstands, stadia, amusement park
structures, reviewing stands and circus
tents.
4.~.~.5 GROUP E BUSINESS BUILDINGS

shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for transaction of business (other than that covered by Group F and
part of buildings covered by4.1.l); for keeping
of accounts and records and similar purposes,
professional establishments, service facilities,
etc. City halls, town halls, court houses and
libraries shall be classified in this group so far
as the principal function of these is transaction
of public business and keeping of books and
records.
These
Business buildings shall be further sub-classified as follows:

Subdivision E-1 Offices, banks, professional establishments, like offices of architects, engineers, doctors, lawyers and
police siations.
Subdivision E-2 Laboratories, research establishments, libraries and test houses.
Subdivision E-3 Computer installations.
Subdivision E-4 Telephone exchanges.
Subdivision E-5 Broadcasting stations.
4.2.2.6 GROUP F Mercantile

BUILDINGS
building, which is used as shops, stores,
market, for display and sale of merchandise,
either wholesale or retail.
Mercantile buildings shall be further subclassified as follows:
Subdivision F-1 Shops, stores, departmental stores markets with area up to 500 m2.
Subdivision F-2 Shops, stores, departmental stores, markets with area more than
500 m2.
Subdivision
centers.
F-3 Underground
shopping
Storage and service facilities incidental to

the sale of merchandise and located in the
same building shall be included under this
group.
4.2.1.7 GROUPG INDUSTRIALBUILDINGS
building or structure, in which products or
materials of all kinds and properties are fabricated, assembled, manufactured or processed,
for example, assembly plants, industrial
laboratories,
dry cleaning plants, power
plants, generating units, pumping stations,
fumigation chambers, laundries, buildings or
structures in gas plants, refineries, dairies and
saw-mills, etc.
Buildings under Group G shall be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision G-1 Buildings used for low
hazard industries.
Subdivision
G-2 Buildings
moderate hazard industries.
used
for
Subdivision G-3 Buildings used for high

hazard industries.
Tle hazard of occupancy, for the purpose of
the Code, shall be the relative danger of the
start and spread of fire, the danger of smoke
or gases generated, the danger of explosion or
other occurrences potentially endangering the
lives and safety of the occupants of the buildings.
Hazard of occupancy shall be determined by
the Authority on the basis of the fire loads of
the contents, and the processes or operations
conducted in the building, provided, however,
PART tv FIRE PROllWttON
that where the combustibility of the building,

the flame spread rating of the interior finish
or other features of the building or structure
are such as to involve a hazard greater than the
occupancy hazard, the greater degree of
hazard shall govern the classification.
For determination of fire loads and fire load
density for arriving at the classification of occupancy hazard, guidance material including
the c.alorificvalues of some common materials
are given at Appendix B.
A broad classification of industrial and nonindustrial occupancies into low, moderate and
high hazard classes is given at Appendix C, for
guidance, Any occupancy not covered in Appendix C, shall be classified in the most appropriate class depending on the degree of
hazard.
Where different degrees of hazard of occupancy exist in different parts of a building, the
most hazardous of those shall govern the classification for the purpose of this Code, except
in cases where hazardous areas are segregated
or protected as specified in the Code.
SUBDIVISION G-1 This subdivision
shall include any building in which the
contents are of such comparative low
combustibility
and the industrial
processes or operations conducted
therein are of such a nature that there
are hardly any possibilities for any self
propagating fire to occur and the only
~ consequent danger to life and property
may arise from panic, fumes or smoke,
or fire from some external source.
b) SUBDIVISIONG-2 This subdivision
contents or industrial processes of
operations conducted therein are liable to give rise to a fire which will burn
with moderate rapidity or result in
other hazardous situation and may give
off a considerable volume of smoke,
but from which neither toxic fumes nor
explosions are to be feared in the event
of fire.
c) SUBDIVISIONG-3 - This subdivision
contents or industrial processes or
operations conducted therein are liable to give rise to a fire which will burn
with extreme rapidity or result in other
hazardous situation or from which
a)
Iv-
poisonous fumes or explosions arc 10

bc fearer.f in the event of a fire.
b)
4.1.1.8 GROIJP 11 STORAG1{ IIIJ1l.DINGS

building, used primarily for [hc storage or
sheltering (including scrvici,ng, proccssirtg or
repairs incidental to storage) of goods, wares
or merchandise (cxccpt those that involve
combustible
or explosive
products
or
materials) vchiclcs or animals, for example,
warehouses, cold storage, freight depots, transit sheds, storehouses, truck and marine terminals, garages, hangers, grain elevators,
barns and stables.
c)
Smragc properties arc characterized by the

prcscncc of relatively small number of persons
in proportion to the area. Any new use which
increases the number of occupants to a figure
comparable with other classes of occupancy
shall change the classification of the building
to that of the ncw USC,for example, hangars
used for assembly purposes, warehouses used
for office purposes, garage buildings issued for
manufacturing.
4.1.1.9 GROUP J IIAZARDOUSMJILDINGS
building which is used for the storage, handling, manufacture or processing of highly
or
combustible
or explosive materials
products which arc liable to burn with extreme
rapidity and or which may produce poisonous
fumes or explosions for storage, handling,
manufacturing or processing which involve
highly corrosive, toxic or noxious alkalis, acids
or other liquids or chemicals producing flame,
fumes and explosive, poisonous, irritant or
corrosive gases; and for the storage, handling
or processing of any material producing explosive mixtures of dust which result in the
division of matter into fine particles subject to
spontaneous ignition. Examples of buildings
in this class arc those buildings which are used
foc
a)
]V.lo
Storage, under pressure

of more
than 0.1 N/mm2 and in quantities exceeding
70 m3,
of acetylene,
hydrogen, illuminating and natural
gases, ammonia, chlorine, phosgene,
sulphur dioxide, carbon dioxide,
methyloxide and all gases subject to
explosion, fume or toxic hazard,
cryogenic gases, etc.
d)
Storage and hanttling of hazmlous and

highly ffammablc liquids, Iiquifiablc
gases Iikc LPG, rocket propellants, etc.
Storage and handling of hazardous and
explosive
flammable
or
highly
materials, other than liquids; and
Manufacture of artificial flowers, synthetic leather, ammunition, explosives
and fireworks.
NcrTE A list of hazardous substances giving quantities, for whichor exceedingwhichownershandling

such substances are required to be covered under the
Public Liability Insurance Act, has been notified under
Govt of India, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Notification No. S.0. 227 (E) dated 24th March 1992.
4.2 Any building not covered by Appendix C

or 4.1.1. 7shall be classified in the group which
most nearly resembles its existing or proposed
use.
4.3 Where change in the occupancy of any
building places it in a different group orin a
different subdivision of the same group, such
building shall be made to comply with the
requirements of the Code for the new group
or its subdivision.
4.4 Where the new occupancy of a building is
less haixtrdous, based on life and fire risk, than
its existing occupancy, it shall not bc nccessa~
to conform to the requirements of the Code
for the ncw group or its subdivision.
4.5 A certificate of occupanq shall bc ncccssary, as required under Part II Administration,
before any change is effected in the character
or occupanq of any building.
5 TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
5.0 General The design of any building and
the type of materials used in its construction
are important factors in making the building
resistant to a complete burn-out and in
preventing the rapid spread of fire, smoke or
fumes, which may otherwise contribute to the
loss of lives and property.
The fire resistance of a building or its structural and non-structural elements is expressed
in hours against a specified test load which is
expressed in k cal/m2, and against a certain
intensity of fire. The fire-resistance test for
structure shall be done in accordance with
Indian Standard given at (3) of Appendix A.
For the purpose of the Code, the types of
construction according to fire resistance shall
be classified into four categories, namely,
~pc 1 construction, Type 2 Construction,

Type 3 Construction and Type 4 Construction.
The fire resistance ratings for various types of
construction for structural and non-structural
members shall be as given in Table 1.
For buildings 15 m in height or above noncombustible materials should bc used for construction and the internal walls of staircases
should be of brick work or reinforced concrctc
or any other material of construction with
minimum of 2 hours rating. The walls for the
chimney shall bc of Type 1 and Type 2 Construction (Jcpcnding on whether the gtis
tcmpcraturc is above 2000Cor kxs.
5.1 The fire resistance ratings of various
building components such as walls, columns,
beams and floors arc given in Table 2 to Table
18, Fire damage assessment, post fire structural safety assessment of various structural
clcmtmts of the building and adequacy of the
structural repairs can bc done by the fire resistance ratings mentioned in the tables.
TABLE 1 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS 01: STR[JCWJRAL
AND NON-STRLJCILJRAI.
l; I.EMENfS (IN 110LJRS)

(Claus; 5.0)
STNJCTURALtlmkttm
SL No.
TYPE OF ~OMTRIJCHON
f
(1)
1)
(2)
Iypc 1
Tyw 2
.r~p~ 3
Iypc 4
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1
1
EWrior walls:
a) Fire separation less than 3.7 m
O Bearing
ii) Non-bearing
4
2
2
1;
2
1
b) Flrc separation of 3.7 m or

more but Icss than 9 m
i) Bearing
ii) Non-bearing
4
1;
2
1
2
1
c) Fbe separation of 9 m or more
i) Bearing
ii) Non-bearing
4
1
2
1
2
1
t
1
2)
Fire resisting walls
3)
Fire separation assemblies (Iikc

fire check doors)
4)
Fke enclosures of exitways, exitway, hallways and s:airways
5)
Shaft other than exitways, elevator

and hoistways
6)
Exitway access corridors
7)
Vertical separation of Icnant

spaces
8)
Dwelling unit separation

Non-load bearing partitions
1
+
At least
1;
1+
1+
1;
2
i) 5m or less in height
to lowest member
ii) More than 5m but
1
less than 6.7 m in
height to lowest
member
iii) 6.7 m or more in
o
height to lowest member
1+
9)
Interior bearing walls, bearing

partitions, columns, girders, trusses
(other than rooftrusses)and
framing
10)
Structural membcra support walls
11)
12)
Floor construction including walls

Roof construction
i) Supporting more
than one floor
ii) Supporting one
floor only
iii) Supporting a roof
only
1
half
1
an
hour+
]V.11
,,
TABLE2 MASONRYWALLS:SOLID(REQUIREDTO RESISTFfRE FROM ONESIDEATA TIME)

(c&luc5.1)
MINIMUMTNICKM?SSfMIUhEXCLUDINGANY FINISH,
FORA FtRE RSSI.WANCE
(HOURS) OF
NAKJREOF COWtIUJtXION AND MATSRWA
d
1
1 Reinforced cement catcrete
2 Unreinforced cement concrete

3 No-fines concrete with:
Load ~ring
8
1
lZ
2
3
4
1201401602tN12to
(25)t (25)t (25)t (25)t (25)t
150
175
150
150
a) 13 mm cementhand or ~umknd
b) 13 mm light w@ght aggregate gypsum
plaater
4 Bricks of C~ :
90
100
100
a) Whhout finish
W90
90
b) Wtth 13 mm lightweight aggregate
gypsum plaster
5 Bricks of aand lime:
90
100
100
a) Wkhout finish
aggregate
9090
90
b) With 13 mmlightweight
gypsum plaater
6 Bfocka of concrete:
90
100
100
a) Without finish
9090
90
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate
~um
plaster
c) With 13 mm cementhand or gypaturd
aand
7 Blocks of lightweight concrete:
90
100 100
a) W:thout finish
9090
90
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate
gypsum pfaater
c) Whh 13 mm ament/sand or gypmrd
aand
8 Blocks of aerated concrete:
90
100
100
a) Whhout finish
90
90
100
b) With 13 mm fightweight aggregate
gypsum plaater
Walfa containing at leaat1 Pementof vertica] reinforcement.
t Wlmum thi*
of actual cover to reinforcement.
Non-@ad Bearin~
1+
&
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
.
170
100
170
100
75
75
90
100
9090
170
90
170
100
190
100
190
100
75
75
90
100
9090
170
90
170
100
100
100
75
75
90
75
100
75
140
90
150
100
75
90
90
100
140
75
50
75
63
75
75
125
75
140
75
75
75
75
90
100
50
63
63
75
lm)
140
100
150
100
140
100
180
150
TABLE 3 MASONRY WALLS: HOLLOWS (REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(Cfaw 5.1)
MINIMUMIMICKNSS (mm),EXCLUDINGANY FINISH,
FORAFIRE RSSSTANCE(HOURS)OF
NATUREOQCONSTRUCTIONAND MAmUALS
#
5
1 Briekaofcfay
a) Without fmiah
170
b) With 13 mm fightwwightaggregate 100
gypsum plaater
2 Blocksof concrete:
a) Without finish
b) With 13 mm cementktuf or gypmud
sand
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 190
gypsum ptaater
3 Bktcks of lightweight concrete:
a) Without finish
100
b) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/
sand
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate
~um
pfaater
jv.ti
Load Bearing
Non-Load Bearing
1
12
2
3
l;2341/2~1
170
100
170
.170
200
170
200
170
.
%
4
75
75
100
75
100
90
170
100
170
100
200
170
90
90
125
125
125
125
140
140
140
140
150
140
200
200
75
90
90
100
125
125
100
ltm
75
75
90
75
90
75
100
100
140
140
150
140
63
63
75
75
90
100
f ...,
..
.. d
TABLE 4 FRAMED CONSTRUCTION, LOAD BEARfNG (REQUIRED
FROMONESIDE AT A TfMf3
(clause 5.1)
-
10 RESfST
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
O@ OF PROTBCTtON
FORA FtRB R@StSGW4CE
OF1h
NATUREOFCONSITUX370NAND MATERL4@
TIMBERSTUOSATGWrRES NUTEXCEEDING
6U0 mm,FACEDONEACH SIDEUJmi
Plasterboardlayerswith jointsstaggered,jointain outer fayer

taped and filled Totalthicknessforeachface
2 Onelayerof 12.7mmplasterboard with .afinish of lightweight
aggregate gypsum plaster
25
FfRE
i3
Metallathandplaster,thicknessof plaster:
22
13
a) Sanded gypsum pfaatcr (metaf fathing grade)

b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
TABLE 5 FRAMED CONSTRUCTiON, NON-LOAD BEARING (REQUIRED
FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(Cklu.re5.1)
NATUREOFCONSTRUCTION
ANDMATERIAWSTBBL
ORTIMBERFRAMEAT CmrIERSNUTExc~DINO
600 mm,FACINGSONBOTN SIDESOF
TO RESIST FIRE
MINIMUMTHICKNESS(MM)OF
PROTECTION
FORA FIRE
RES~ANCE OF
f
STUD
CONSIKJCfTON
$h
A) ~ lining withmaterialr@ed
(without plaster finish):
1
l+h
2h
direct to stua%
One layer of plasterboard with taped and

filled joints
Timber or steel
12.7
2 llvo layers of plasterboard with joints

staggered, joints in outer layer taped and
filled-Total thickness for each face
Timber or steel
19
One fayer of aabeatos insulating board

with transveme joints backed by fillers of
asbestos insulating board not leas than
9 mm thick, or by timber
Timber
steel
9
12
One fayer of wood wool slabs
Timber
25
One layer of chipboard or of pfywood
Timber or steel
18
B) Lining with matmalr+d
lh
dkct
to SW
25
with
plaster jinish:
1 Plasterboard of thickness:
a) With not leas than 5 mm ~um
plaster
finish
b) With not less than 13 mm gypsum plaster
finish
c) Iv-ctjhish
:
1 Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster
9.5
Timber or steel
12.7
13
Timber or steel
Timber
13
13
steel
19
25
TABLE 6 FRAMED EXTERNAL WALLS LOAD BEARING (REQUIRED TO RESIST FfRE

FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(clause 5.1)
NATUREOFCON.SIRUCTION
AND MATERIALS
Timber studs at ccntres not acceahg
with internal linings ofi
600 nun
1 Plasterboard Iayem with jointa in outer fayer

taped and filled, total thickness of plasterboard
PART fV FIRE PROTECTION
MtNIMUMllmxNt?ss (MM)OFPROIWYON
FORA~RB-ANCBOFth
,,
31
~-u
rAf3LE 7 FRAMED
EXTERNAL
WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY

FROM INSIDE THE BUILDING (A)
(Clause 5.1)
NATUREOFCONWWXTION AND MATERIAM
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
(mm) OFPROTECTION
FORA MODIFIEDFIRERSSISCANCE
OF
R
3
;h
1; h
lh
2h
3h
4h
A) Sleel@tne
with an external cladding of non-combustible sheets (excluding sheet steel), with a steel
supporting fiamewark and intend Iirthrg of:

a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade)
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum Plaster2 ~o layer of plasterboard with joints staggered
joints in outer layer taped and filled Total
thickness
3 Plasterboard of thickness:
a) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish
b) Whh not leas than 13 mm gypsum plaster finish
c) With not less than 10 mm lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
4 One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints backed by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
13
10
13
13
21
32
8 Bricks of clay:
a) Whhout finish
b) With not leas than 13 mm lightweight
aggregate gypsum plaster
TABLE 8 FRAMED
15
15
19
12.7
9.5
9.5
9
5 One layer of wood/wool slabs without finish

6 One layer of compressed straw building slabs:
a) Without finish
b) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish
7 Aerated concrete blocks
15
12
12
12
12
50
50
50
50
50
63
63
75
100
75
75
90
90
100
100
75
75
90
90
EXTERNAL WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY

FROM INSIDETHEBUILDING(B)
. .
(Clause 5.1)
NATUREOFCONSTRUCXtON
AND MATERIAIS
MINIMUMTHICRNSL%S
(mm) OFPROTSCIION
TO PROVIDESUFFICIENT
InSUlatiOn TO ACHIEVE
A MODIFIEDFIRERSSI~ANCE OFUPTO 4h
B) Steeljhrrse with an external cladding of sheet

steel ji.dly lappe~ steel bolted artdji.red to steel
sheeting rails, with timber or steel mpporting
framework and internal liningofi

2 One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled
3 Plasterboard of thickness, with not leas than 5 mm gypsum plaster
finish
4 One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints backed
by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or
by timber
5 One layer of woodAvoolslabs
6 One layer of compressed straw building slabs
7 One layer of cbiplmard or of plywood
9 Bricks of clay
10 Any internal decorative lining with a cavity fill independently
Suppofiedand Rtain@ in position of mineral fib$e insulating
material (excluding glass) at a density of 48 kg/m
IV-14
,
13
10
12,7
9,5
9
25
50
18
50
75
50
TABLE 9 FRAMED WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REOUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY FROM INSIDE
THEBUILDING(C)
(Clause5.1)
AND MATERIAB
c)
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
(mm)OF PROpTION
FORA FIRERESISTANCE
OF 12 h
Timber fkwne with cnemal cladding of weather

boarding or cxternalpiywoo~
9.5 mm with an
buemal lining of:
1 Plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finished with:

a) Gypsum plaster
2 Plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster
13
10
10
10
3 One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints

backed by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than
9 mm thick, or by timber
9
12
TABLE10 REINFORCEDCONCRETECOLUMNS
(Clau.re5.1)
ANDMATERIALS
MINIMUMDIMENSIONS
(mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH,FORAFIRE RESISTANCEOF
t
;h
lh
l+h
2h
3h
4h
Cover
150 200
20
25
250
30
300
35
400
35
450
35
2 50 percent exposed
Width
Cover
125
20
160
25
200
25
200
25
300
30
350
35
3 One face exposed
Thickness
Cover
100
20
120
25
140
25
160
25
200
25
240
25
1 Fully exposed
Width
TABLE 11 CONCRETE
(Clause 5.1)
NATUREOF CONSTRUCTION
AND MATERIALS
BEAMS
MINIMUMDIMENSIONS
(mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH.FORAFIRE RESISANCE OF
A
;h
lh
l;h
2h
3h
4h
1 Reinforced eotrcrete (simply supported)
Width
Cover
80
20
120
30
150
40
200
60
240
70
280
80
2 Reinforced concrete (continuous)
Width
Cover
80
20
80
20
120
35
150
50
200
60
240
70
3 Prestressed concrete (simply supported)
W]dth
Cover
100
25
120
40
150
55
200
70
240
80
280
90
4 Prestressed concrete (continuous)
Width
Cover
80
20
100
30
120
40
150
55
200
70
240
80
TABLE 12 CONCRETE FLOORS

(Clame 5.1)
NATUREOF CONSTRUCITON
AND MATSRIALS
MINIMUMDIMENSION(mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH,FORAFIRE RESISTANCEOF
r
\
+h
lh
l;h
,2h
3h
4h
1 Reinforced concrete (simply supported)
Thickness
Cover
75
15
95
20
110
25
125
35
150
45
170
55
2 Reinforced concrete (continuous)
Thickness
Cover
75
15
95
20
110
20
125
25
150
35
170
45
~-ls
TABLE 13 CONCRETE FLOORS: RIBBED OPEN SOFFIT

(Clou.re 5.1)
NATUREOFCONSTRUCIIONANDMATIUUALS
MINIMUMDIMENSIONS
(MID).EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH.FORA FIRS RSSI.STANCE
OF
3
t
;h
1 Reinforced concrete (simply supported)
l;h
2h
3h
4h
90
90
25
90
so
20
105
110
35
105
90
115
125
45
115
110
35
135
150
55
135
125
45
150
175
65
150
150
55
70
75
15
70
75
15
TMcfmeds
Width
cover
2 Reinforcedconcrete(continuous)
lh
TMckneas
Width
Cover
TABLE14 ENCASEDSTEELCOLUMNS,203mmx 203mm(PROTECTIONAPPLIEDONFOURSIDES)

(clause 5.1)
NATUREOFCGNSIRUCIIONAND MATIWAIS
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
(MM)OFPROTECTION
FORAFIRE RESISTANCE
OF
A) Hollowprotection
(without on air cavi~ over thejlangtx)
-.
1; h
2h
5n
13
15
32
10
10
15
lh
. .\
4n
1 *Metal lathhg with txcnvelledlightweight aggregate gypsum plaster

2 Plasterlmard with 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch, finished with
lightweight aggregate gypsum plaate; not less t&
the thlcknesa
specified:
a) 9.5 mm plaster board
b) 19 mm plaster hoard
13
20
19
25
3 Aabeatos insulating boards, thicfmeaa of board:

a) Single tbicfmess of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at transveme
joints
3s
50
4 Solid bricks of clay, composition or aand lime, reinforced in every

horizontal joint, unplastered
50
50
50
75
100
60
50
60
50
,60
50
60
75
12
19
25
50
25
25
25
50
25
50
75
40
75
75
60
b) IWOlayers, of total thickness
6 Solid blocks of lightweight concrete

Hollow protection (with an air cavity over the flanges)
B) Asbestos insulating board scrswcd to 25 mm asbestos battens
c)
Solidprotections
1 Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4
mix (unplastered):
a) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced

b) Concrete assumed to be load bearing
2 Lightweight concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered)
concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced t
50
25
*So fried or designed, as to allow full penetration for mechanical bond.

t Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not leas than 2.3 mm in thickness, or a steel mesh weighing not leas
than 0.5 @/mz. In concrcle protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
~-u
NATIONAL BUfLDfNG CODE OF INDfA
TABLE 15 ENCASED STEEL
BEAMS,406mm x 176 mm (PROTECTION APPLIED ON THREE SIDES)

(Clause 5.1)
AND MATERIAtS
MINIMUMTHICRNESS
(mm) OFPROTtt~ON
FORA FIRERESIWANCEOF
r
+h
lh
l+h
2h
3h
25
%
4h
A) Hollow protection (without an air cavity beneath the lower

j?ange) :
*Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate

gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade)
2 Plasterboard with 1.6 mm wire binding? at 100 mm pitch,
finished with lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
not less than the thickness specified :
a) 9.5 mm plasterboard
b) 19 mm plasterboard
3 Asbestos insulating board, thickness of board :
a) Single thickness of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at
transverse joints
b) Tko layers, of total thickness
13
13
15
20
10
10
10
10
15
13
20
19
25
38
50
B) Hollow protection (with an air cavity below the lower

jlange) :
1 Asbestos insulating board screwed to 25 mm asbestos

battens
C) Solidprotection :
1 Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) :
a) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforeed$
b) Concrete assumed to be load bearing
2 Lightweight concretes not leaner than 1:2:4 (mix)
unplastered
12
25
25
25
25
50
75
50
50
50
50
75
75
25
25
25
25
40
60
*So freed, or designed, as to allow full penetration for rnechanieal bond.

TWhere wire binding cannot be used, expert advice should be sought regarding alternative methods of support to enable
the lower edges of the plasterboard to be fixed together and to the lower flange, and for the top edge of the plasterboard
to be held in position.
$Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in thickness or a steel mesh weighing not less
than 0.5 kg/m2. In concrete protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exeeed 200 mm in any direction.
SConcrete not assumed to he load bearing, reinforced.
TABLE 16 TIMBER FLOORS TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDING, OR SHEETS OF TONGUED
AND GROOVED PLYWOOD OR WOOD CHIPBOARD, OF NOT LESS THAN 21 mm FINISHED THICKNESS
(Clause 5.1)
NATUREOF CONStW.JCtION AND MATEatAts
kflNtMUM THICKNFSS (mm)OF PROTIXHON
FORA F7RERESISTANCE
OF
/
37 mm (minimum)
timber joirti with a ceiling of;
1 Timber lathing and plaster, p[aster of thickness

2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster:
3 One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints
4 Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped
and filled total thickness
5 One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster
b) Sanded gypsum plaster
c) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
6 One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick,finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster
7 One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by
fillets of asbestos insulating hoard not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
;h
15
15
13
12.7
19
lh
2h
13
25
31
5
13
13
5
10
9
12
IV.17
rAf31.I; 17 flM131iR FLOORS TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDING, OR SHEETS OF TONGUED

ANO GROOVIID PLYWOOD OR WOOD CHIPBOARD, OF NOT LESS THAN 15 mm FINISHED THICKNESS
(Clau.re 5.1)
(mm) OF
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
PROTECTIONFORAFIRE RESIWANCEOF
NATUREOF CONStItUCIIONAND MATERIALS
37 mm (minimum) timber joisrs with a ceiling of:

1 Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness
15
2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster for:

15
13
13
25
12.7
3 One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints

4 TVo layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped
22
5 One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with:
a) Gypsum plaster
b) Sanded gypsum plaster
c) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
5
15
13
a) Gypsum plaster
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsumplaster
5
10
7 One layer of asbestos insulating board, with any transverse joints backed by
fillets of asbestns insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
31
12*
*Finished on top with 25 mm minimum thick glass fibre or mineral wool laid between joints
TABLE18 TIMBERFLOORSANYSTRUCTURALLY
SUITABLEFLOORINGOFTIMBEROR
BOARDS
LIGNOCELLULOSIC
(Clause 5.1)
AND MATERIAE
37 mm (minimum)
tirnberjoists
MINIMUMTHICKNESS
(mm) OF
PROTIHION FORA FIRERESISMNCEOF
f
\
;h
with a ceiling of:
lh
1 Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness
15
2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickne$s of plaster for:

15
13
3 One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled and backed by timber
12.7
4 Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped
25
5 IWOlayers of plasterboard, each not less than 9.5 mm thick, joints between
boards staggered and outer layer finished with gypsum plaster
19
13
15
7 One layer of plasterboard not leas than 12,7 mm thick, finished with:
15
13
8 One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
12
6 FIRE ZONES
6.4 Overlapping Fire Zones
6.1 Denzarcaticm The city or area under the

jurisdiction of the Authority shall for the purpose of the Code, be demarcated into distinct
zones, based on fire hazard inherent in the
buildings and structures according to occupancy (see 4), which shall be called as Fire
Zones.

extends to more than one fire zone, it shall be
deemed to be in the fire zone in which the major
portion of the building or structure is situated.
6.2 Number and Designation of Fire Zones

extends equally to more than one fire zone, it
shall be deemed to be in the fire zone having
more hazardous occupancy buildings.
6.5 Tempora~ Buildings or Structures
6.2.1 The number of fire zones in a ci~ or area

under the jurisdiction
of the Authority
depends upon the existing layout, types of
building construction (see 5), classification of
existing buildings based on occupancy (see 4)
and expected future development of the city or
area. In large cities or areas, three fire zones
may be necessaty, while in smaller ones, one
or two maybe adequate.
6.2.2 The fire zones shall be made use of in
land use development plan and shall be designated as follows:
a)
b)
c)
Fire Zone No. 1,

Fire Zone No. 2, and
Fire Zone No. 3
6.2.2.1 FIRE-ZONE No. 1 This shall comprise areas having residential (Group A),
educational (Group B), institutional (Group
C), and assembly (Group D), small business
(Subdivisions
E-1) and retail mercantile
(Group F) buildings, or areas which are under
development for such occupancies.
6.2.2.2 FIRE ZONE No. 2 This shall comprise business (Subdivisions E-2 to E-5) and
industrial buildings (Subdivision G-1 and G2), except high hazard industrial buildings
(Subdivision G-3) or areas which are under
development for such occupancies.
6.2.2.3 FIRE ZONE No. 3 This shall comprise areas having high hazard industrial
buildings (Subdivision G-3), storage buildings
(Group H) and buildings for hazardous uses
(Group J) or areas which are under development for such occupancies.
6.3 Change in the Fire Zone Boundaries
When the boundaries of any fire zone are
changed, or when it is intended to include
other areas or types of occupancies in any fire
zone, it shall be done by following the same
procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
6.5.1 Temporary buildings and structures

shall be permitted only in Fire Zones No. 1
and 2 as the case may be, according to the
purpose for which these are to be used, by
special permit from the Authority for a limited
period and subject to such conditions as may
be imposed in the permit.
6.5.2 Such buildings and temporary structures shall be completely removed on the expiry of the period specified in the permit.
6.6 Resmctionson the Type of Construction for
New Buildings
shall conform to construction of Type 1, 2, 3
or 4.
shall conform to construction of me 1,2 or 3.
shall conform to construction of Type 1 or 2.
6.7 Restrictions on Eristing Buildings The
existing buildings in any fire zone shall not be
required to comply with the requirement of
the Code unless these are altered, or in the
opinion of the Authority, such building constitutes a hazard to the safety of the adjacent
property or theoeeupants of the building itself
or is an unsafe building. In the event of alteration, it shall be necessary to obtain permission
of the Authority for such alteration consistent
with fire hazard (see Part II Administration).
Alterations, modifications renovations shall
be accomplished so as to ensure conformity
with all the safety requirements of the new
buildings. Such alterations shall not in anyway
bring down level of fire and life safety below
that which existed earlier. Any addition or
alterations or construction of cubicles partitioning for floor area exceeding 500 m~ shall
be with approval of local fire authority for all
high rise buildings with an exception of
residential buildings.
IV.19
7 GENERAL
INDIVIDUAL
REQUIREMENTS
OCCUPANCIES
OF ALL
7.1 General All buildings shall satis~ certain requirements

which contribute,
individually and collectively, to the safety of life
from fire, smoke, fumes and panic arising from
these or similar causes. There are, however,
certain general principles and common requirements which are applicable to all or most
of the occupancies. They are given in 7.2
to 7.18.
7.1.1 EXCEPTIONSAND DEVIATIONS Exceptions
and deviations
to the general
provisions of requirements of individual occupancies are given as applicable to each type of
occupancy in 9 tol Z In case of practical difficulty or to avoid unnecessary hardship, without
sacrificing reasonable safety, the Authority may
grant exemptions from the Code.
7.1.2 OCCUPATION OF BUILDINGS UNDER
CONSTRUCTION
71.2.1 A building or portion of the building

may be occupied during construction, repairs,
alterations or additions only if all means of exit
and fire protection measures are in place and
continuously maintained for the occupied part
of the building.
7.1.2.2 A high rise building during construction
shall be provided with the following fire protection measures, which shall be maintained in
good working condition at all the times:
a)
Dry riser of minimum

100 mm
diameter pipe with hydrant outlets on
the floors constructed with a fire service inlet to boost the water in the dry
riser and maintenance should be as per
the requirements laid down in Indian
Standard given in (24) of Appendix A.
Drums filled with waterof2000
litres
capacity with two fire buckets on each
flooc
A water storage tank of minimum 20000
litrcs capacity, which may be used for
other construction purposes also.
b)
c)
TABLE19 COMPARATIVEFLOORAREARATIOSFOR OCCUPANCIESFAcING ONE PUBLIC STREET

AT LEAST 9 m WIDE
(Clause 7.3)
OCCUPANCYCLASSIFICATION
(1)
Residential
Educational
Institutional
A+sembly
Business
Mercantile
Industrial
Storage(seeNote4)
Hasardous(seeNote4)
UL Unlimited.
TYPEOFCONStWCtION
Fwpe 1
(2)
UL
UL
UL
UL
UL
8.0
;;
2.8
Type 2
(3)
V(T 3
Type 4
(5)
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.5
1.6
1.0
1.3
1.0
NP
;!
1.8
1.9
1.5
1.1
k!
2.3
1.4
1.6
&
NP Not permitted,
N-1
The FAR values given in this table are subject to overall restrictions on the heights of buildings in the case
of educational, institutional, assembly, storage and hzmrdous occupancies as specified in cd 2 of Table 20.
NOTE2 This table has been prepared, taking into account the combustible content in the different occupancies as
well as the fire resistance offered by the type of construction.
N~ 3 This table should be modified by the Authority, taking into account the other aspects as given below:
a) Density in terms of dwelling units per hectarty
b) Traffic consideration~
c) Parking spad) Local tire fighting facilities+and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitation requirements.
NOTE4 The FAR values specified in this table maybe increased by 20 percent for the following services:
a) Abasement or cellar space under a building constructed on stilts and used as a parking space and air-conditioning.
plant room used as acceaso~ to the principal UW,
b) Watchmans booth, pumphousc, garbage shaft, electric cabin or substation and other utility structures meant for
the services of the building under consideration;
c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically exempted under the Co@ and
d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost stoq architectural featu~ and chimneys and elevated tanks
of dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area of the lift shaft shall be taken only on one floor.
NUIE 5 In so far as single storey storage and hazardous occupancies are concerned, they would be further governed
by volume to plot area ratio (VPR) to he decided by the Authority.
[V.m
,<
- .-Q.-
.,.
7.2 Maximum Height Every building shall

be restricted in its height above the ground
level and the number of storeys, depending
upon its occupancy and the type of construction. The height shall be measured as specified
in Part IIT Development control rules and
general building requirements. The maximum
permissible height for any combination of occupancy and types of construction should
necessarily be related to the width of street
fronting the building, or floor area ratios and
the local fire fighting facilities available.
%3 FloorArea Ratio The comparative floor
area ratios for different occupancies and types
of construction are given in Table 19 (see also
Part III Development Control Rules and
General Building Requirements).
73.1 Each portion of a building, which is
separated by one or more continuous fire
resisting walls, having a fire resistance of not
less than 2 h, extending from the foundation
to 1 m above the roof at all points, may be
considered to be a separate building for the
calculation of maximum permissible height
and floor area, provided openings, if any, in
the separating wall are also protected by fire
assemblies of 4 h.
%4 Open Spaces The open spaces around
or inside a building shall conform to the requirements of Part III Development Control
Rules and General Building Requirements.
7.4.1 For high rise buildings, the following
additional provisions of means of access to the
building shall be ensured (see Part III
Development Control Rules and General
Building Requirements):
a) The width of the main street on which the
and one end of this $treet
shall join
..
another street not less than 12m inwidti,
b) The road shall not terminate in a dead
end; except in the case of residential
building, up to a height of 30 m.
c) The compulsory open spaces around the
building shall not be used for parking and
d) Adequate passageway and clearances
required for fire fighting. vehicles to
enter the premises shall be provided at
the main entrance; the width of such
entrance shall be not less than 4.5 m. If
an arch or covered gate is constructed,
it shall have a clear head-room of not
less than 5 m.
-4
%5 Mixed Occupancy When any building is

used for more than one type of occupancy, it
shall conform to the requirements for the occupancies of higher hazard. Unless the high
hazard area is separated by separating walls of
4 h rating, the occupancies shall not be treated
individually.
76 Openings in Separating Walls and Floors
At the time of designing openings in separating walls and floors, particular attention shall
be paid to all such factors as will limit fire
spread through these openings.
Z6.I For ~es
1 to 3 construction, a doorway or opening in a separating wall on any
floor shall be limited to 5.6 m2 in area with a
maximum height of 2.75 m and a maximum
width of 2.1 m. Every wall opening shall be
protected with fire-resisting doors or steel
rolling shutters having the fire rating of not
less than 2 h, conforming to Indian Standards
at [IV(5)] of Appendix A All openings in the
floors shall be protected by vertical enclosures
extending above and below such openings, the
walls of such enclosures having a fire resistance of not less than 2 h and all openings
therein being protected with a fire-resisting
assembly having a fire-resistance rating as
specified in 7.8.
Z6.2 For me 4 Construction, openings in
the separating walls or floors shall be fitted
with 2 h fire-resisting assemblies.
%6.3 Openings in walls or floors which are
necessa~ to be provided to allow passages of
all building services like cables, electrical
wirings, telephone cables, plumbing and fixtures, etc, shall be protected by enclosure in
the form of ducts/shafts having a fire resistance
not less than 2 h. The inspection door of all
service shafts shall have fire resistance not less
than 1 h. Medium and low voltage wiring running in shafts/ducts, shall either be armoured
type or run through metal conduits. Further,
the space between the conduits and the walls
shall be filled in by a filler material, compressed asbestos, fibre glass wool, rockwool,
ceramic wool, etc, mixed with cement or any
other material having fire resistance rating of
not less than one hour.
Nom Inthe easeof buildingswhereit is nwessary
to loweror lift heavymachine~or goodsfromone
floortotheother,itmaybenecessarytoprovidelarger
openings in the floor. Such openings shall be provided
with removable covers which shall have the same
strength and fire resistance as the floor.
7.7 ElecmcalInstallations For requirements

regarding electrical installations from the
point of view of fire safety, referenee may be
made to Indian Standards at IV(6) of Appendix A (see also Part VIII Building Service$,
Section 2 Electrical Installations).
7.10.2 These fixed installations shall eonfrom

to accepted standards. The typical requirements of wet riser/downcomer installation and
capacity of water storage tanks and fire pumps
shall be as specified in Table 20. The typical
arrangements of downcomer and wet riser installations are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2. The
wet riser shall be designed for zonal distribution ensuring that unduly high pressures are
not developed in risers and hose pipes.
7.8 Fire Stop or Enclosure of all Openings

Where openings are permitted, they shall not
exceed three-fourths the area of the wall in the
case of an external wall and they shall be
protected with fire resisting assemblies or
enclosures having a fire resistance equal to
that of the wall or floor in which these are
situated.
Such assemblies and enclosures
shall also be capable of preventing the spread
of smoke or fumes through the openings so as
to facilitate the safe evacuation of building in
ease of a fire [see also Indian Standard given at
(25) of Appendix A].
7.10.3 In situations where one oeeupaney is

provided with all the required fire protection
arrangements but due to proximity of unprotected buildings around, causing exposure
hazard
to the protected
building, the
protected building walls facing the unprotected building shall be provided with
water curtain/drencher system which can be
actuated, when necessaqf.
79 Fire Detection/Extinguishing ~stem ln

buildings of such size, arrangement or occupancy that a fire may not itself provide adequate warning to oeeupants, automatic fire
detection
and alarm facilities shall be
provided, where neeessary, to warn occupants
early of the existance of fire, so that they may
escape, or to facilitate the orderly conduct of
! fire exit drills
ZIO.4 First-aid fire fighting appliances shall

be provided and installed in accordance with
Indian Standards given at (9) of Appendix A.
The fire fighting equipment and accessories to
be installed in buildings for use in fire fighting
shall conform to appropriate Indian Standards given at (10) of Appendix A and shall be
maintained periodically so as to ensure their
perfect serviceability at all times.
%9.1 The fire detection and extinguishing

system shall conform to aeeepted standards as
given in Appendix A. Guidelines for selection
of various types of fire detectors for different
occupancies shall conform to Indian Standards given at (8) of Appendix A.
ZIO.5 In addition to wet riser or downeomer,

first-aid hose reels shall be installed on all the
floors of buildings of 15 m in height or more
and shall conform to standards given at (11) of
Appendix A. The first-aid hose reel shall be
connected directly to the riser/downeomer
main and diameter of the hose reel shall not
be less than 19 mm.
Nom Fire detectom for use in an automatic fire

alarm system shall conform to Indian Standards given
at (7) and (19) and the automatic fire alarm system
using such detectors shall be installed in accordance
with Indian Standards at (8) of Appendix A.
7.9.2 The requirements of fire detection and

alarm systems are covered for each oeeupaney
under 9 to 17, attention is also drawn to such
requirements in ease of high rise buildings
(15 m or more in height) as given in Appendix D.
7.10 Fired Fire FightingInstallations
Z10.1 All buildings depending upon the occupancy use and height shall be protected by
wet riser, downcomer, automatic sprinkler
installation,
high/medium velocity water
spray, foam, gaseous or dry powder system in
accordance with the provisions of 7J0.2
to ZIO.9.
IV.22
7J0.6 STATICWATER STORAGETANKS

A satisfactory supply of water for the purpose
of fire fighting shall always be available in the
form of underground/terraee
level static
storage tank with capacity speeified for each
building with arrangements of replenishment
by mains or alternative source of supply at the
rate of 1000 litres per minute. When this is
not practicable, the capacity of static storage
tank(s) shall be increased proportionately in
consultation with the local fire brigade.
The static storage water supply required for
the above-mentioned purpose shall entirely
be accessible to the fire engines of the local fire
serviee. Provision of suitable number of manholes shall be made available for inspection
AR
RELEASE
f
,5LUCE AND
hlR VALVE
, ~wd
. . ... ...
3-WAY FIRE
SERVICE INLH
Fig. 1 TypicalAtrangement of Down-comer for Building above 15 m but not

Exceeding 30 m in Height
repairs, insertion of suction hose, etc. The
covering slab shall be able to withstand the
vehicular load of 22.5 tonnes at any given
point when the slab forms a part of pathway/
driveway.
The domestic suction tank connected to the
static water storage tank shall have an overflow capable of ct%charging 2250 litres per
minute to a visible drain point from which by
a separate conduit, the overflow shall be eonveyed to a storm water drain.
a) To prevent stagnation of water in the
static water storage tank, the suction
tank of the domestic water supply shall
be fed only through an overllowarrangement to maintain the level therein at the
minimum specified capacity (see Fig. 3).
b) The static water storage tank shall be
provided with a fire brigade collecting
head with 4 number 63 mm diameter (2
number 63 mm diamettx for pump with
capacity 1 400 l/rein) instantaneous
male inlets arranged in a valve box at
a suitable point at street level and connected to the static tank by a suitable
fixed pipe nbt less than 150 mm in

diameter to discharge water into the
tank when required at the rateof2250
Iitrca per minute, iftankis inthebasement
or not approachable for the fire engines.
710.7 AUTOMATICSPRINKLERS
Automatic sprinklers shall be installed in:
a) basements used as ear parks or stora~e
occupancy, if the area exeeeds 200 m ;
b) multi-level basements, covered upper
floors used as car parks, and for housing essential services ancillary to a particular occupancy
or for storage
occupan~, excluding any area to be
used for sub-station, A.C. plant and
DG set;
c) any room or other compartment of a
building exceeding 1125 m2 in area except as in (g) (see Note), if so advised by
local authority
d) departmental stores or shops, if the
aggregate covered area exeeeds 750 m2;
e) all non-domestic floors of mixed occupancy which constitute a hazard and
are not provided with staircases indeIv.n
Fig. 2 QpicalAnangement
0
!3)
of Wet Riser and total Sprinkler $trtem of Building Other than

Apartment Exceeding 30 m in Height
pendent of the remainder of the buildings;

godowns and warehouses, as considered necessary
on all floors of the buildings other than
residential buildings, if the height of
the building exceeds 30 m (45 m in case
of group housing and apartments) (see
Note);
h)
j)
k)
lV.24
dressing room, scenery docks, stages

and stage basements of ~heatres;
in hotels, hospitals, industries low and
moderate hazard mercantile buildings
of height 15 m or abov~
in hotels below 15 m, if covered area at
each floor is more than 1000 m2;
m)
false ceiling voids which are used for

storage or as return air plenums exceding
800 mm in height
in
sprinklered buildings; and
n) canteen provided in upper floors of
D-1 and D-2 occupancies shall be
sprinklered.
Nom lt is desirable that all high rise buildings
should be fully sprinklered irrespective of their height
and occupan~. If selectivespnnfdenng is adopted,

there is a real dangerof a firestartingon one of the
lower unsprinkleredfloors gathering momentum,
spreadingupwardsfrom floor to floor through the
unsprinkleredfloorand reachingthe firstspnnfdered
ffooras a fullydeveloped fire. In such an event, the
sprinklemcanbe rendereduselessor ineffective.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA
.
/
.
!$!.~,
j,
ER
E~)
~FOOT
3A W1TH NEGATIVE
OVERFLOW
AND VENTh
VALVES
SUCTION
~MANHOLE
kirl
DOMESTIC WATER
SUPPLY TANK
(oTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER)
FIRE
FIGHTING
TANK
SEPARATION
WALL
TO
DOMESTIC
FIRE PUMP
SUCTION
/-SLUICE
VALVE
PRIME
MOVER
VALVE
3B WITH
POSITIVE
SUCTION
Fig. 3 Typical Arrangement for Providing Combined Fire Fighting and Domestic
Water Storage Tank
Iv.s
TABLE 20 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

(Cluuse 7.10. 2)
SL No.
TYPEOF BUILOING
OCCUPANCY
a)
Hous&
Reel
Wet Riser
Down
comer
Yard
Hydrant
Automatic
Sprinkler
System
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
NP
NP
NP
NP
p*
NP
(2)
(1)
I
TYPE OF INSTALLATION
WATER SUPPLY.LITRES
&
\
f
A
\
Underground Static
Water
Stomge Tank
Termce
Tank
Near the LUG Static

Tank (Fk pump)
witb Minimum Pressure of 0.3 N/mm
(3 kglcm) at Terrace
Level
At the Terrace Level

with Mhimum Pressure of 0.3 Nhrrr
(3 kg/cm)
(9)
(lo)
(11)
(12)
(13)
NP
NP
Nil
NP
90tMnin*
NP
900hnin
(1 62tMnin*)
Mrmually
Automatic
Operated
Electric Detection
and
Fire
Alarm
Alarm
Systems
System
RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS (A)
Lodging or Rooming
Houses (A-1)
1)
Less than 15 m in height
. (i)
For 10 rooms and up to
20 beds
ii)
PUMPCAPACtTV,LtTRES
(lo 000*)
P
For moms more than 10

and beds more
20 and UP to 40
NP
NP
p*
NP
NP
NP
2500
(10000*)
NOTE Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted.

b)
One or two family

Private Dwellings (A-2)
Dormitories (A-3)
Apmtment Houses (A-4)
Same as I(a)i(ii)
NOTE Buildings of A-2 occupancy above 15 m in height not to be permitted.

* indicates basement area 200 m and more.
P indicates provided.
NP indicates Not to be provided.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(lo)
ii)
15 m and above but not

exceeding 30 m
NP
p*
P (for
above
24 m)
NP
50000
Above 30 m in height but
NP
p*
100000
Np
200000
NP
NP
NP
iii)
Above 45 m in IAght
(12)
(13)
10000
One electric pump

and one diesel pump
of capacity 1 620hnin
arrd one electric pump
of capacity 180/min
450hnin
(900hnin*)
One electric pump

and one diesel pump
of capacity 2 85CU
min and one electric
pump of capacity
18Wmin
NP
40000
One ekcticd
and
one diesel pump of
capacity 2 85Wmin
and one electrical
pump of capacity
18Wmin
NP
5000
NP
45Wmin (9M)/min*)
One electric and one
NP
(20 000 in
case of)
notexceeding45 m
iv)
(11)
20000
(30 000*)
NOTE Buildings of A-3 & A-4 mcupaocy above 60 m in height not to be permitted.
c)
Hotels (A-5)
i)
Leasthan 15minheightwith
mwredareanot
NP
NP
p*
(lo 000*)
exceeding
3(Dm20neach floor
ii)
iii)

with covered area exceexhng 300 m2 but not
more 1 000 m2 covered
area on each floor

with covered area exceding 1000 mz on each
floor
* indicates basement area 200 m and more.

?
S
P indicates Provided.
P (above
two
floors)
NP
P(if more
than
ground
floor)
NP
NP
p*
P (in
entire
building)
P (if
building
is not
sprinkled
for
10OCKl
every 100 mz
covered area
subject to
minimum of
50000
10000
100000
10000
diesel pump of
capacity 2 280/min
and one electric pump
of capacity 180/min
do.
NP

(Clause 7. 10.2)
T=
OF BUWCXNG
OCCUPANCY
House
Reel
Wet Riser
Down
coma
Yard
Hydrant
Automatic
Sprinkler
System
AutoManually
Operated
rnatic
Elecltic Detection
Fuv
and
Alarm SYS- Alarm SYStems
tern
3
At the Terrace Level
with Minimum Pressure of 0.3 N/mm
(3 @/cm)
Underground
Static Water
Storage Tank
Terrace
Tank
Near the U/G Static

Tank (Pire pump)
with Minimum Pressum of 0.3 N/ mm
(3 kglcmJ;:lTerrace
(lo)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
iv)

exceeding 30 m
NP
P (in entire building)
150000
20000
One electrical and

one diesel pump of
capacity 2 850/min
and one electrical
pure; ;J:yity
NP
v)
Above 30 m
NP
200000
20000
One electrical and

one dkeal pump of
capacity 2 850/min
and one electrical
pure; ~;o~ity
NP
EDUCATIONAL
(B)
AND INSTITUTIONAL (C) BUILDINGS
Buildings Other Than
Hospitals and Nursing
HOIO12S
(B-1, B-2, C-2 &
c-3)
P (for
more
than two
Storycd
bldgs and
covered
area excedn
1000m)$
NP
NP
P* (for
educa tional
only)
NP
NP
Same as in I (b) (ii)
45Wnin in case of
hose reel (900hnin in
case of hose met and*)
10000 in
50000 if
total covered case of hose
area exceeds
(20%)
1500 m2
5? * indicates basement area 200 m and more.

u
s
PUMPCAPACITY,
LSTRES
WATER SUPPLY. LSTRES
A
&
Corrtri.
NP indicates Not to he provided.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(lo)
ii)

exceedng 30 m
P (in case
of institutionrd
buildings
P (for
education al only)
P (except
education al)
10000 for
every 100 mz
with a minimum of
50000 up to
maxm. of
100000
NP
P(iftbe
bldg is
b)
i)
ii)
III
i)
NOTE Buildings above 30 m in It@tt not to be permitted.

Hospitals, Sanatoria and
Nursing Homes (C-1)
Lcssthan 15minheigbt
P
P (for tWO P (if bldg
is G.F.,
Storeys
F.F. md
aad
above)
the
covered
am.aexceeds
300 m2
per flmr)
15m and above but not
exceeding 30 m
NP
NOTE Buildings above 30 m in Klght not to be permitted.

ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS (D) (DI to D5)
Less thaa15minhe@ht
P
P
P
(for two (if seating
Storeys
capxity
and
exceeds
above)
1000 persons)
NP
NP
P (in case
NP
capacity
isl COO
min.or
* indicates basement area 200 mz and more.

P indicates provided.
NP indii
Not to be provided.
CO:):f
(12)
(13)
20Oal
Same as in I (c) (iv)
900/nrin (1 62tYmin*)

above
900/min

above
NP
(30 000)
10a)o Jlp to :fm30
clXJ
750 m2 +
1000ofor
~%.F.
F.F. &
total
covered
area exceeds
1540 m2)
P
above
1500m2
or in case
OP)
Sameas
in 11(b)
(11)
2oo(N)in
every wldi- case of down

tional 250 m2
comer
200 Ooa
20000
P
(wherever
sprinklers
are not inStalfed)
50000
500 for
hosereel
10000 in
C&lCOF and
downcorner
Sameas
in If (a) (i)
45tYminin case of
H.R. (hosereel)
90Wnin in case of
downcomer knd
162Wninincaseof
spirdder

(Clause 7. 10.2)
SL No.
TYPSOF BU[LDiNG
OCCUPANCY
A
>
Wet Riser
Down
Comer
Yard
Hydrant
Automatic
Sprinkler
System
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
ii)

.exceedlng 30 m
NP
PUMP CAPACtTY. LITRES
WATER SUPPLY. LITRES
f
House
Reel
Corrtd.
AutrsManually
matic
Operated
Electric Detection
Fire
and
Akmtr Sys- Alarm Systems
tern
P (in case
seating
capacity
exceeds
1000 persons
or area above
1 5(U m2 or in
case OF)
Underground
Static Water
Storage Tank
Tank
(11)
(8)
(9)
(lo)
100000
NP
P (for E4
& E5)
10000 for
every
1000 m2 (in
case total
coveted area
exceeds
1500 m2)
10 w
Near the U/G Static

Tank (Fire. Pump)
with Minimum Pressure of 0.3 N/ mm
(3 kg/cmJ::lTerrace
At the Terrhce Level

(3 kg/cm)
(12)
(13)
NP
Same as in (b) (ii)
900/min* 450/min in
case of H./R.
Iv)
O
BUSINESS
BUILDINGS (E)
w
c
NP
P in case
0~
and
for E4 &
E5
2500 in case
of hosereel
(10 000/min
in case of9
o
i
50000 in
case of
sprinkler system & for E4
& E5
c)
* indicates basement area 200 m2 and more.

P indicates Protided.
(1)
(2)
(3)
ii)

exceedkrg 30 m
iii)
Above 30 m in Wlght and

up to 45 m
iv)
Above 45m in he@t
v)
MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS(F) F1 &F2
i)
Leas than 15 m in height

total covered area not exuding 500 m2
ii)
iii)
(lo)
(12)
(13)

above
900/min in case of
downcomer

above
450hnin
50000
-do-
-do-
100000
5000incase
of hosereel,
10(XXIin
case of
spinlder
system

above (if bldg is more
than one floor or
forll)
45Wnin in case of
H.R. 900/min in case
of H.R. & spirdder system
250 C@)
Uptolooo
mz covered
area. For
each addltional 500 mz
or part there
of low
20000
450Wnin if covered
area exceeds 1500 mz
I (c) (iv) if covered
area is less than
1500m2
NP
do-
-do-
NP
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
P (for E4
&E5 and
hazard Ous areas
&.in case
Or)
P (for E4
& E5 not
reqd if
bldg. is
f@
sprinklered)
P (for El
and E5)
200000
mm
P (for E4
and E5 )
250000
P
(if bldg.
of mote
than one
floor or
for11
NP
P fodl
P for#
and basements
P for#
P for#
Leas than 15 m in tilgh~

covered area exceeding
S20 m2
P (above
one
NP

exceeding 30m
NP
(4)
(5)
P (if
P (if
covered
covered
area on
area on
each floor each floor
exceeds does not.
exceed
300 m2)
300 m2)
(11)
10000 in case
100000
(50 000 if
OF (20Ooo
covered am.a in case downcomer is
on G.F. is
less t@r 300 provided)
m)
.,.
30 m
* indicr@esbasement area 2C4)mz and more.
# indi-
P indties
*P~g
-.
Provided.
NP indbtca Not to lie provided.
. ..
\-

(Clause 7. 10.2)
SL No.
TYPEcw BUSSDING
WATER SUPPLY.LtTRES
TYPE OF lNSTALLATSON
OCCUPANCY
Cord,
PUMPCAPACtTY.LtTRES
A
House
Reel
(1)
(2)
2)
Underground shopping
complex (F3)
Wet Riser
(4)
(3)
Down
Comer
(5)
Automatic
Sprinkler
System
Yard
Hydrant
(6)
(7)
Manually
Auto-
(lpe~)pe ~~i:~
Underground
Static Water
Storage Tank
Termcc >
Tank
l%
and
Alarm $%- Alarm $IStern
tems
(8)
(9)
(10)
same as V(a) (iii)
Near the U/G Static

Tank (Fii PumD)
with M~nimum P&ssure of 0.3 N/mm
At the Terrace Level=

(3 kg/cm)
(11)
(12)
(13)
NP
do-
do-
NP
&inte as I (C) (h/)
above
NP
450/min (for more
thass one Storey)
9Wkhninin case o~
Sa!ne as in I (b) (ii)
-do.
do-
do-
NOTE 1 Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted.

NOTE 2 All undergrmsnd shopping areas should be fully airconditioned.
VI) INDUSTRIAL
BUILD-
INGS (G)
.0 LOW H=ud (G-1)

0 Lesathan15mintil
(1)
(2)
Pfc4aseaupto250m P
Plot area 251 m2 to XXl
m
NP
P
NP
NP
NP
P (for
NP
NP
NP
P (in case
OF)
NP
P
NP
NP
P (in case
Ofq
NP
P(incaae
otW
P
(depend ing upon
the risk)
tim:ne
Storey)
3)
Plot area 501 m to

1000m2
P (for
more
than one
Storey)
P (for
niole
than one
Storey)
4)
Plot area 1001 m2 and

ahove
-do-
-do-
* indicates basement
area
<
NP
5tXM
(10000in
case of
sprinkler
system)
10(K3O
5ofn)
(15 O(H)in
case of
sprinkler
system)
20000 in
25 (KKl
Case of
(50 000 if
plot area ex- spinkler syscea?ds2000
tems
mz)
NP
NP
200 m2 and more.
P Jndicates Provided.
NP indicates Not to be provirkd.
ii)
P (in cme
of*)
100000
20000
.Rmem in (c) (iv)
-do-
NP
NP
NP
NP
5 CN30
for
hose reel
NP
450/min for hose reel
exceeding 18 m
NOTE Building above 18 m in height not to be permitted.

3)
MODERATE
HAZARD (G-2)
i)
Less than 15 m
1)
Plot area up to 250 m2
NP
P (for
than one
Storey)
2)
Plot area 251 m2 to 500

m
NP
40-
NP
P (in case
Or)
NP
25000
5000 for
hose reel
(15 000*)
Same as in 1 (b) (ii)
450/min (900/min*)
3)
Plot area 501 mz to I 000

m
P (for
more
than one
Storey)
-do-
NP
P (in case
OF)
NP
25000
-do-
-do-
-do-
4)
Plot area 1001 m2 and

above
-do-
-do-
P (in case
or)
P
(depend ing upon
the risk)
35000
(50 000 if
G.F. covered
area exceeds
I 000 m)
10 WJOfor
hose reel
-do-
-do-
1000oou to
500 m1
covered area
per floor
(150000if
covered area
exceeds 500
m2)

above
-do-
ii)

exceeding 18 m

* indicates basement area 200 m2 and more
P indicates %ovided.
(30000*)
2000o
I
IV-M
&
&
NATIONAL
BUILDING
i!
CODE OF INDIA
,.
!a
-1
(1)
VII)
(2)
STORAGE
INGS (H)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(lo)
(11)
(12)
(13)
NP
NP
P (if aggregate
covered
area exceeds
200 mz)
10000 for
every 100 m2
covered area
or part thereof or up to
maximum of
NP
Minimum 1 620/min
for U/G tanks of
50000 capacity &
pump capacity to be
proportionately increased as per tank
capacity
NP
15000 for
every 100 m2
of part thercOf
20m
-do-
900hnin
BUILD-
i)
Less than 15 m
1)
Single Storey Building
2)
More than one floor

building
150000
P
NOTE Buildings above 15m in height not to be permitted

VIII)
HAZARDOUS
BUILDINGS (J)
il
Single Storey Building
NP
NP
Minimum 4 h
fire fighting
requirements
NP
As per Standard
specification
NP
ii)
More than one floor

building but not exceeding 15 m
-do-
50000
-do-
900hnin
NOTE Building above 15 m in height not to be permitted.
2
g
* indicates basement area 200 mz and more.

~.:
..
1..-.
.
&
TABLE21 SIZEOF MAINS

(Table 20)
(2)
(1)
150 mm as single outlet landing
valves
HEtGHTOFBUILOING
(3)
lYPE OF BUILOING
SIZEOFIWEMAINS
I) Residential buildings (A)

O *Lodging or rooming houaea
ii) Dormitories
15 m or above and not exeeedksg 45 m
iii) One or two famify private

dwellings
iv) Apartment housea (flats)
v) With shopping area not
exeeeding 500 m2
-do-
do-
-do-
H)
Educational buildings (B)
15 m or above but not exeedng
-dr)-
w)
-do-
30 m
15 m or above but not cxeeding 30 m

15 m or above but not exeeecfing 30 m
15 m or above but not exeeeding 30 m
and to~al floor area not exeeeding ,
500 m /floor (above 30 m, not to b
permitted)
IV) Assembfy buildings (D)
-do-
15 m or above in height but not

exceedbtg 30 m and area not
exceeding 600 m2 per floor
III) Institutional buildings (C)

a) For hospitals and sanatorium
b) For custodial institutions and mental institutions
-do-
150 mm with twin outlet

Lsndingvalves
Lesstftan15m
vi) Hotels
Businessbuildings (E)
15 m or above but not exeeeding 30 m
Mercantile buildings (F)

(above 35 m, not to be permitted)
15 m or above but not exceeding 30 m

(above 30 m, not to be permitted)
VII)
[ndustrial buildings (G)
15 m or above but not exceeding 18 m2
VIII)
All buildings classified

under (i) to (iv)
Above 45 m
1X) All buildings classified
Above 15 m
under (v) above with sho ping area exceeding 500 m?

-do-
X) All buildings classified

under I (v) above
150 mm with twin outlet

landing valves
-do-
Above 30 m and area exceeding

500 m2
XI) Hotels
Above 30 m
XII) All buildings classified
Above 30 m
under H and 111above

-dc)-
XIII) Afl buildings classified
Above 30 m
under V above
-do-do
XIV) Afl storage buildings (H)

xv) Afl Hazardous buildings (J)
Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m

Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m
Buildings above 15 m in height not permitted in ease of high hazard industrial buildings.
7V0.8 AUTOMATICHIGH VELOCITYWATER

SPRAY OR EMULSIFYINGSYSTEM Automatic high velocity water spray or emulsifying
system shall be provided for protection of indoor transformers as applicable in accordance
with D-1. 16 and of accepted standards given at
(12) of Appendix A.
Z10.9 FIXED FOAM INSTALLATION Fixed
foam generating system shall be provided for
protection of oil storage area for boilers with
its ancilla~ storage of furnace oils in basement. Fixed foam installations can be low,
medium or high expansion types, which can
cover fire risks in oil storage areas generally.
High expansion foams are used for cable tunnels and other confined areas.
7.10.10 CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE EXTINSYSTEM Fixed carbon dioxide
fire extinguishing
installation
shall be
provided in accordance with Indian Standard
given at (13) of Appendix A on premises
where water or foam can not be used for fire
extinguishing because of the special nature of
the contents of the buildings/areas to be
protected. For some special fire risk, carbon
dioxide may not be suitable and it may be
necessary to provide BCF (Bromochlorodifluoromethane)
Halon 1211 or BTM
(Bromochloro-trifluoromethane)
Halon
1301.
GUISHING
However, the use of halons shall be discouraged, as halons are ozone depleting substances (ODS) and their use is being phased
out throughout the world.
7.10.11 Fire fighting equipment shall be
suitably located and clearly marked by
luminous signs.
NOTE
fltisprovisionshallnotapplyto occupancies
A-2 and A-4 less than 15 m in height.
7.11 Air-conditioning and Ventilation tirconditioning and ventilation requirements of

different rooms or areas in any occupancy
shall be as given in Part VIII Building services:
Section 1 Lighting and ventilation and Section
3 Air-conditioning and heating.
7.11.1 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems shall be so installed and maintained as to
minimize the danger of spread of fire, smoke
or fumes thereby from one floor or fire area to
another, or from outside into any occupied
building or structure (see D-1.17).
PARTIVFIREPROTECTION
ZII.2 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems circulating air to more than one floor or
fire area shall be provided with dampers
designed to close automatically in case of fire
and thereby preventing spread of fire or
smoke. Such a system shall also be provided
with automatic controls to stop fans in case of
fire, unless arranged to remove smoke from a
fire, in which case these shall be designed to
remain in operation.
711.3 Air-conditioning system serving large
places of assembly (over 1000 persons), large
departmental stores or hotels with over 100
rooms in a single block shall be provided with
effective means for preventing circulation of
smoke through the system in the case of a fire
in air filters or from other sources drawn into
the system and shall have of approved smoke
sensitive devices for actuation.
7.11.4 From fire safety point of view, it will be
preferable to provide separate air handling
units for the various floors so as to avoid the
hazards arising from spread of fire and smoke
through the AC. ducts. The requirements of
A.C. ducts should conform to Indian Standard
given at (21) of Appendix A
7.11.5 For normal operation,
schedule should be as follows:
Space to be Ventilated
*Assembly Hall Auditoria
*Bed Rooms /Living ooms
Bath Roomsfloile@ 7
*Cafes/Restaurants a{
Cinemas/Iheatr#
(Non-Smoking)j
Class Rooms :
*Factories
(Medium metal Work)
*Garages
,,
*Hospital R#ards
*Kitchens (common)
*Kitchens/Domestic
Laboratories
* offices
air changes
Air Changes per
Hour
3-6
3-6
6-12
12 - 15
6-9
3 -6
3 -6
12 - 15
,3-6
6-9
3-6
3-6
3-6
*Contaminants for normal operation of ventilating system

such as heat, smoke and fumes shall be collected separately by local exhaust ventilation.
IV.37
tion of the building in case of fire. Some such

aspects are
%12 Smoke Venting

7,12.1 Smoke venting facilities, where required forsafeuseofexits inwindowlessbuildings, underground
structures, large area
factories shall be automatic in action with
manual controls in addition.
a)
b)
c)
7.12.2 Natural draft smoke venting shall utilize roof vents or vents in walls at or near the
ceiling leveb such vents shall be normally
open, or, if closed, shall be designed for automatic opening in case of fire, by release of
smoke sensitive devices.
d)
Interior finish and decoratiory

seating, aisles, railings and turnstiles in
places of assembly
service equipment
and storage
facilities in buildings other than
storage buildings; and
hazards on stage, in waiting spaces,
projection booths, etc, in theatres and
cinemas.
%15 Suflace Interior Finishes

8
Z12.3 Where smoke venting facilities are installed for purposes of exit safety, these shall
be adequate to prevent dangerous accumulation of smoke during the period of time necessary to evacuate the area served, using
available exit facilities with a margin of safety
to allow for unforeseen contingencies. It is
recommended that smoke exhaust equipment
should have a minimum capacity of approximately
a 5-rein air change. Where
mechanical venting is employed, it shall be
firesafe.
7.12.4 The discharge apertures of all natural
draft smoke vents shall be so arranged as to be
readily susceptible to opening by fire service
personnel.
Z12.5 Power operated smoke exhausting systems may be substituted for natural draft vents
only by specific permission of theAuthority.
Z15.I The use of flammable surface finishes

on walls (including external facade of the
building) and ceilings affects the safety of the
occupants of a building. Such finishes tend to
spread the fire and even though the structural
elements may be adequately fire resistant,
serious danger to life may result. It is, therefore, essential to have adequate precautions to
minimize spread of flame on wall, facade of
building and,ceiling surfaces.
The finishing materials used for various surfaces and decor shall be such that it shall not
generate toxic smoke/fumes.
Z 15.2 The susceptibility to fire of various
types of wall surfaces is determined in terms of
the rate of spread of fire. Based on the rate of
spread of fire surfacing material shall be considered as divided into four classes as follows
[see Indian Standard givenat (22) ofAppendix
A]:
Class 1 Surfaces of very low flame spread
713 Heating Installation of chimney and

heating apparatus shall conform to Indian
Standards given at (14) of Appendix A.
7.14 Additional Precautions In addition to
the factors coverd by Z2 to Z13 there are
certain aspects, applicable to particular occupancies only, which may affect the spread of
fire, smoke or fumes and thus the safe evacua-
Class 2 Surfaces of low flame spread

Class 3 Surfaces of medium flame spread
Clas 4 Surfaces of rapid flame spread
7.15.3 The uses for which surface materials
falling into vario~ classes shall be adopted in
building construction are giveit below
Class 1
Class 2
class 3
May be used in any situation
May be used in any situation,

except on walls, facade of the
building and ceiling of staircase and corridors.
Should be used only in living

rooms and bed rooms (but
not in rooms on the roof)
and only as a lining to solid
walk and partitions; not on
staircases or corridors or
facade of the building.
NOTE Panelling (lining) shall be permitted in a limited area. It shall not be permitted in a vestibule.
Iv-m
OF INDIA
7.15.4 Materials of Class 4 which include untreated wood fibreboards maybe used as ceiling lining, provided the ceiling is at least 2.4 m
from the top surface of the floor below, and
the wall surfaces conform to requirements of
class [see Note under Z15.3]. Class 4 materials
shall not be used in kitchens, corridotx and
staircases. Some types contain bitumen and, in
addition to risk from spread of fire, emit dense
smoke on burning such materials shall be
excluded from use under these conditions and
shall also not be used for construction of ceiling where the plenum is used for return air in
air-conditioned buildings.
715.5 When frames, walls, partitions or
floors are lined with combustible materials,
the surfaces on both sides of the materials
shall conform to the appropriate class, because theme is considerable danger from fire
starting and rapidly spreading within the concealed cavity unknown to the occupants whose
escape may be hampered there by. For
detailed information on materials and details
of construction
with their fire-resistance
rating, reference may be made to Indian
Standards given at (4) of Appendix A.
7.16 Glazing
7.16.1 Building of ~pes 1 to 4 construction
shall employ one of the two types of glazing
described in Z16.2 and 7V6.3 except that we
4 c~nstruction may have the alternative of
hardwood sashes or frames or both.
7.16.2 Wired glass shall comply with the following requirements:
a) THICKNESSOF GLASS The thickness
of glass shall be not less than 6.0 mm.
b) EMBEDDED WIRE NETHNG Embedded wire netting shall be not larger
than 10 mm mesh.
c) SIZEOFSQUARESOFGLASS fhearea
shall not exceed 0.25 m2.
d) SASHESANDFRAMES The sashes or
frames or both shall be entirly of iron
or other suitable metal securely bolted
or keyed into the wall, except in the
case of panels in internal doors.
e) SETTING OF GLASS me Piitleh Of
glass shall be set in rebates or grooves
not less than 6.0 mm in width or depth,
with due allowance for expansion, and
shall be secured by hard metal fastenings to the sashes or frames independently of any lead, cement or putty
used for weather-proofing purposes.
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTtON
Zl(i3 Electro-copper glazing shall comply

with the following requirements:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Thickness of glass shall be not less than

6.5 mm.
Size of squares of glass shall not exceed
100 Cmz
SECTtONALLIGHTS The square glas~
sea to be formed by electro-copper
glazing into sectional lights shall not
exceed 0.37 m2 in area.
SASHESANDFRAMES The sashes or
frames or both shall be entirly of iron
or other hard metal, securely bolted or
keyed into the wall, except when in
panels in inteqtal doors.
FDCING OF SECTIONAL LIGHTS ~t?.
sectional lights shall beset in rebate or
grooves not less than 6.5 mm in width

&depth, with due allowance for expansion and shall be secured by hard metal
fastenings to the sashea or frames independently of any lead, cement or putty
used for weather-proofing purposes.
Z16,4 Maximum permissible area shall be
5 m2 for protection by wired glass or electrocopper glazing.
Z16.5 CXEMENT Hard metal casements,
not exceeding 0.8 m2 fitted with wired glass or
accordance
electro-copper
glazing
in
with 7V6.2 and H6.3, secured to the framea
by hard metal hinges not more than 60 cm
apart and by fastening at top, centre and bettom shall be permissible.
7.17 Skylights
72 ZI Wired glass for skylights or monitor
lights shall comply witlt the following requirements:
a)
b)
,
C)
Thickness of glass shall be not less than

6.0 mm,
Embedded wire netting shall M not
larger than 10 mm mesh;
FRAMESAND GLAZING fhe frMIle
shall be continuous and divided by bars
spaced at not more than 70 cm centres.
The frame and bars shall be of iron or
other hard metal, and supported on a
curb either of metal or of wood covered
with sheet metal. The glass shall be
frame and bars independently of any
tv-=
..
:+
7.17.2 Maximum permissible area shall be

5 m2 for protection by wired glass.
7.18 Fire L@s Where applicable, fire lifts
shall be provided with a minimum capacity for
8 passengers and fully automated with emergency switch on ground level. In general,
buildings 15 m in height or above shall be
provided with fire lifts [see D-1.5 (q)].
7.18.1 1:1 case of fire, only fireman shall
operate fire lifts. In normal course, it may be
used by other persons.:
7.18.2 Each fire lift shall be equipped with
suitable inter-communication equipment for
communicating with the control room on the
ground floor of the building.
7.18.3 The number and location of fire lifts in
a building shall be decided after taking into
consideration various factors like building
population, floor area, section of building
(compartmentation), etc.
8 EXIT REQUIREMENTS
8.1 An exit maybe a doorway corridor; passageway(s) to an internal staircase, or external
staircase, or to a verandah or terrace(s), which
have access to the street, or to the roof of a
building or a refuge area. An exit may also
include a horizontal exit leading to an adjoining building at the same level.
8.1.1 Lifts and escalators shall not be considered as exits.
8.2 General
8.2.1 Every building meant for human occupancy shall be proviled with exits sufficient
to permit safe escape of occupants, in case of
fire or other emergency.
8.2.2 In every building exists shall comply
with the minimum requirements of this part,
except those not accessible for general public
use.
8.2.3 All exits shall be free of obstructions.
8.2.4 No building shall be so altered as to
reduce the number width or protection of exits
to less than that required.
8.2.5 Exits shall be clearly visible and the
routes to reach the exit shall be clearly marked
and sign ,posted to.guide the population of the
floor con~rned. Signs shall be illuminated
and wired to an independent electrical circuit

on an alternative source of supply. The sizes
and colours of the exit signs shall be in accordance with Indian Standards given at (23) of
Appendix A.
NOTE
Thisprovisionshallnotapplyto A-2andA-4
occupanciesleasthan15m in height.
8.2.6 The floors of at%as covered for the
means of exit shall be illuminated to values not
less than 1 ft candle (10 lUX)at floorlevel. In
auditoriums, theatres, concert halls and such
other places of assembly, the illumination of
floor exit/access may be reduced during
periods of performances to values not less
than 1/5 ft candle (2 lux).
8.2.7 Fire-check doors for fire resistance of
1 h shall be provided at appropriate places
along the escape routes to prevent spread of
fire and smoke, and particularly
at the
entrance to lifts and stairs where a funnel or
flue effect may be created, inducing an upward spread of fire.
8.2.8 All exits shall provide continuous
means of egress to the exterior of a building or
to an exterior open space leading to a street.
8.2.9 Exits shall be so arranged that they may
be reached without passing through another
occupied unit.
8.3 Occupant Load For determining the
exits required, the number of persons within
any floor area or the occupant load shall be
based on the actual number of occupants, but
in no case less than that specified in Table 22.
8.3.1 MEZZANINE The occupant load of a
mezzanine floor discharging to a floor below
shall be added to that floor occupancy and the
capacity of the exits shall be designed for the
total occupancy load thus established.
8.4 Capaci~ of Erits
8.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure
the capacity of any exit, shall be 50 cm. A clear
width of 25 cm shall be counted as an additional half unit. Clear widths less than 25 cm shall
not be counted for exit width.
NOTE Thetotal occupantsfroma particularfloor
mustevacuatewithin~ minutcaforUPCI construction,l; minutesfor-II
constructionand1minute
for~pe 111construction.Sizeoftheexhdoorkxhway
shall be calculatedaccordinglykeepingin viewthe
traveldistanceasperTable24.
TABLE 22 OCCUPANT
(Clause 8.3)
SL No.
LOAD
OccuPA~
GROUPOF OCCUPANCY
(1)
LOAD,
FLOORArc+%IN
mz /PERSON
(3)
(2)
i)
Residential (A)
12.5
ii)
Educational (B)
iii)
Institutional (C)
15*
iv)
Assembly (D)
a) With f~ed or loose seats and dance floors
b) Without seating facilities including dining rooms
0.6
l.st
Mercantile (F)
a) Street floor and sales basement
3
6
v)
vi)
Business and industrial (E&G)
10
vii)
Storage (H)
30
viii)
Hazardous (J)
10
*Occupant load in dormitory portions of homes for the aged, o hanages, insane asylums, etc, where sleeping
accommodation is provided, shall be calculated at not less than 7.5 mYgross floor area/person.
tThe gross floor area shall include, in addition to the main assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room or
space in the same storey or in the storeys above or below, where entrance is common to such rooms and spaces and they
are available for use by the occupants of the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the gross area for corridors,
closets or other subdivisions; the area shall include all space serving the particular assembly occupancy.
8.4.2 Occupants per unit exit width shall be in

EXIT ALLOWANCE
8.4.3 HORIZONTAL
When horizontal exit is provided in buildings
of mercantile, storage, industrial, business and
assembly occupancies, the capacity per storey

per unit width of exit of stairways in Table 23
may be increased by 50 percent; and in buildings of institutional occupancy it may be increased by 100 percent.
.
TABLE 23 OCCUPANTS PER UNIT

(Clause 8.4.2)
SL No.
GROUPOF
OCCUPANCY
(1)
(2)
9
ii)
Stairways
EXITWIDTH
NUMBEROF.OCCUPANTS
Ramps
Doors >
(3)
(4)
(5)
Residential (A)
25
Educational (B)
25
50
50
75
75
iii)
Institutional(C)
iv)
Assembly (D)
Business (E)
vi)
Mercantile (F)
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
75
75
75
75
30
40
vii)
Industrial (G)
viii)
Storage (H)
25
40
50
50
50
50
Hazardous (J)
25
75
IV-41
8.5 Arrangement of Exits

8.5.1 Exits shall be so located that the travel
distance on the floor shall not exceed the distance given ~ Table 24.
TABLE24 TRAVELDISTANCEFOR
OCCUPANCYAND TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION
SLNo.
GROUPOF
MAXIMUMTRAVEL
OCCUPANCY
DISIANCECONSITtUCTtON
f Types
l&2
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
(2)
Residential
Educational
Institutional
Assembly
Business
Mercantile
Industrial
Storage
Hanrdous
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(J)
y..
(3)
m
22.5
22.5
22.5
(4)
m
22.5
22.5
22.5
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
45.0
30.0
22.5
NOTE1 For the sprinkler system, the travel distance

may be increased by 50 percent of the values specified.
NOTE2 In so far as basements are concerned, the
travel distance will reckon half the value as prescribed
in Table 24. Ramps shall also be counted as one of the
means of escape.
* Construction of type 3 or 4 is not permitted.
8.5.2 The travel distance to an exit from the

dead end of a corridor shall not exceed half the
distance specified in Table 24, except in assembly and institutional occupancies in which
case it shall not exceed 6 m.
8.5.3 Whenever more than one exit is required for any room space or floor of a building, exits shall be placed as remote from each
other as possible and shall be arranged to
provide direct access in separate directions
from any point in the area served.
8.6 Number of Exits
8.6.1 GENERAL The general requirements
of number of exits shall supplement the requirement of different occupanciesin910 17.
8.6.2 All buildings which are 15 m in height
or above and all buildings used as educational,
assembly, institutional, industrial, storage and
hazardous occupancies, and mixed occupancies with any of the aforesaid occupancies,
having area more than 500 m2 on each floor
shall have a minimum of two staircases. They
shall be of enclosed type; at least one of them
shall be on external walls of buildings and shall
open directly to the exterior, interior open
IV-42
space or to an open place of safety. Further,

the provision or otherwise of alternative staircase shall be subject to the requirements of
travel distance being complied with.
8.7
DOOrWayS
8.7.1 Every exit doorway shall open into an

enclosed stairway or a horizontal exit of a
corridor or passageway providing continuous
and protected means of egress.
8.7.2 No exit doorway shall be less than 100
cm in width except assembly buildings where
door width shall be not less than 200 cm.
Doorways shall be not less than 200 cm in
bight.
8.7.3 Exit doorways shall open ouhvards, that
is, away from the room, but shall not obstruct
the travel along any exit. No door, when
opened, shall reduce the required width of
stairway or landing to less than 90 cm; overhead or sliding doors shall not be installed.
NOTE In the case of buildings where there is a
central corridor, the doors of rooms shall open inwards
to permit smooth flow of traffic in the corridor.
8.7.4 Exit door shall not open immediately

upon a flight of stairs; a landing equal to at
least the width of the door shall be provided in
the stairway at each doorway the level of landing shall be the same as that of the floor which
it serves.
8. 7!5 Exit doorways shall be openable from
the side which they serve without the use of a
key.
8.7.6 Mirrors shall not be placed in exit ways
or exit doors to avoid confusion regarding the
direction of exit.
8.8 Corridors and Passageways
8.8.1 Exit corridors and passageways shall be
of width not less than the aggregate required
width of exit doorways leading from them in
the direction of travel to the exterior.
8.8.2 Where stairways discharge through corridors and passageways, the height of corridors and passageways shall be not less than
2.4 m.
8.8.3 All means of exit including staircases,
lift lobbies and corridors shall be adequately
ventilated.
8.9 Internal Staircases

8.9.1 Interior stairs shall be constructed
non-combustible materials throughtout.
of
8.9.2 Interior stairs shall be constructed as a

self-contained unit with an external wall constituting at least one of its sides and shall be
completely enclosed.
population on each floor for the purpose of

design of staircase.
a)
b)
8.9.3 A stairease shall not be arranged round

a lift shaft.
8.9.4 Hollow combustible construction
not be permitted.
shall
c)
8.9.5 No gas piping shall be laid in the stairway.

8.9.6 Notwithstanding the detailed provision
for exits in accordance with 8.3,8.4 and 8.5, the
following minimum width shall be provided
for staircases:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Residential buildings (dwellings)

Residential hotel buildings
Assembly
buildings
like
auditorium,
theatres
and
cinemas
Educational buildings up to
30 m in height
Institutional
buildings like
hospitals
i) Up to 10 beds
ii) More than 10 beds
All other buildings
d)
e)
1.0 m
1.5 m
2.Om
f)
g)
1.5 m
h)
1.5 m
2.0 m
1.5 m
8.9.7 The minimum width of tread without

nosing shall be 250 mm for internal staircase
of residential buildings. This shall be 30 cm for
assembly, hotels, educational, institutional,
business and other buildings. The treads shall
be constructed and maintained in a manner to
prevent slipping.
8.9.8 The maximum height of riser shall be 19
cm for residential buildings and 15 cm for
other buildings and the number shall be
limited to 15 per flight.
8.9.9 Hand rails shall be provided at a height
of 100 cm to be measured from the base of the
middle of the treads to the top of the hand
rails. Further, the gap between the two verticles shall not exceed 30 cm. This gap shall be
reduced to 15 cm, where children are likely to
use the staircase.
8.9.10 The number of people in,between floor
landings in staircase shall not be less than the
PART N FIRE PROTECTION
k)
m)
The minimum headroom in a passage

under the landing of a staircase and
under the staircase shall be 2.2 m.
For building 15 m in height or more,
access to main staircase shall be
through a fire/smoke check door of 1
hour fire resistance rating. Fire resistance rating may be reduced to half an
hour forresidential buildings.
No living space, store or other fire risk
shall open directly into the staircase or
staircases.
External
exit door of staircase
enclosure at ground level shall open
directly to the open spaces or through
a draught lobby, if neeessary.
The main staircase and external staircase shall be continuous from ground
floor to the terrace level.
No electrical shafts/AC ducts or gas
pipe, etc, shall pass through the staircases. Lift shall not open in staircase.
No combustible material shall be used
for decorationhvall panelling in the
staircase.
Beams/columns and other building
feature shall not reduce the head
room/width of the staircase.
The exit sign with arrow indicating the
way to the escape route shall be
provided at a suitable height from the
floor level on the wall and shall be
illuminated by electric light connected
to corridor circuits. All exit way marking signs should be flush with the wall
and so designed that no mechanical
darnage shall occur to them due to
moving of furniture or other heavy
equipments. Further, all landings of
floor shall have floor indicating boards
prominently indicating the number of
floor as per bye-laws.
The floor indication board shall be
placed on the wall immediately facing
the flight of stairs and nearest to the
landing. It shall be of siz,e not less than
0.5x0.5 m.
Individual floors shall be prominently
indicated on the wall facing the staircases.
In case of single staircase it shall terminate at the ground floor level and the
~.43
=4
access to the basement shall be by a

separate
staircase.
However, the
second staircase may lead to basement
levels provided the same is separated at
ground level by ventilated lobby with
discharge points to two different ends
through enclosures.
8.10 Pressurisation of Staircases (Protected
Escape Routes)
8.10.1 Though in normal building design,
compartmentation plays a vital part in limiting the spread of fire, smoke will readily
spread to adjacent spaces through the various
leakage openings
in the compartment
enclosure, such as cracks, openings around
pipes ducts, airflow grills and doors, as perfect
sealing of all these openings is not possible. It
is smoke and toxic gases, rather than flame,
that will initially obstruct the free movement
of occupants of the building through the
means of escape (escape routes). Hence the
exclusion of smoke and toxic gases from the
protected routes is of great importance.
8.10.2 Pressurisation is a method adopted for
protecting escape routes against ingress of
smoke, especially in high-rise buildings. In
pressurisation,
air is injected into the
protected escape routes, i.e. into the staircases, lobbies or corridors, to raise their pressure slightly above the pressure in adjacent
parts of the building. As a result, ingress of
smoke or toxic gases into the escape routes
will be prevented.
8.10.3 The pressurisation levels for staircases
should be as under:
Building Height
Pressurisation Level
Emergency
Operation
Reduced operation
for stage 1 of a
2-stage system
(Pa)
(Pa)
Less than 15 m
50
.8
15 m or above
50
15
i)
ii)
Single-stage, designed for operation

only in the event of an emergency, and
Two-stage, where normally a level of
pressurisation
is maintained in the
protected escape routes, and an increased level of pressurisation can be
into operation
in an
brought
emergency.
8.10.5 The normal air-conditioning system

and the pressurisation system shall be treated
as an integral one, especially for a two-stage
system. When the emergency pressurisation is
brought into action, the following changes in
the normal air-conditioning system shall be
effected:
a)
b)
c)
Any recirculation
of air shall be
stopped and all exhaust air vented to
atmosphere;
Any air supply to the spaces/areas
other than escape routes shall be
stopped;
The exhaust system maybe continued
provided:
i) the positions of the extraction
grills permit a general air flow
away from the protected escape
route entry
ii) the construction of the ductwork
and fans is such that, it will not be
rendered inoperable by hot gases
and smoke;
iii) there is no danger of spread of
smoke to other floors by the path
of the extraction system which
can be ensured by keeping the
extraction fans running.
8.10.6 The pressurisation system can be interconnected with the automatic/manual

fire
alarm system for actuation.
8.10.7 It will be desirable to have all the staircases in a building pressurised, if pressurisation system is to be resorted to. Otherwise, the
use of pressurised and naturally ventilated
staircases in the same building may introduce
difficulties and hence shall be avoided. Under
no circumstances shall a pressurised staircase
be connected by a corridor or lobby to an
unpressurised staircase.
If possible, the same levels shall be used for

lobbies and corridors, but levels slightly lower
may be used for these spaces if desired. The
difference in pressurisation levels between
staircase and lobbies (or corridors) shall not
be greater than 5 Pa.
8.11 Erternal Stairs External stairs, when

provided shall comply the following.
8.10.4 Pressurisation
types:
8.11.1 External stairs shall always be kept in

sound operable conditions.
W-4
system can be of two
..
All external stairs shall lx! directly conncctcd m the ground.
8.11.2
8.11..? Entrance 10 the external stairs shall be

separate and rcrnotc from the internal staircase.
8.11.4 Care shall be taken to ensure that no
wall opening or window opens on to or close
to a external stairs.
8.11.5 The route to the external stairs shall be
free of obstructions at all times.
8.11.6 The external stairs shall be constructed
of noncombustible materials, and any doorway leading to it shall have the required fire
resistance.
8.11.7 No external staircase, used as a fire
escape, shall be inclined at an angle greater
than 45 from the horizontal.
8.11.8 External stairs shall have straight flight
not less than 100 cm wide with 20 cm treads
and risers not more than 19 cm. The number
of risers shall be limited to 15 per flight.
8.11.9 Hand rails shall be of a height not less
than 100 cm and not exceeding 120 cm,
8.11.10 SPIRAL FIRE ESCAPE The use of
spiral staircase shall be limited to low occupant load and to a building not exceeding 9
m in height.
A spiral fire escape shall be not less than 150
cm in diameter and shall be designed to give
adequate headroom.
8.12 Horizontal Erits
8.12.1 The width of horizontal exit shall be
same as for the exit doorways (see 8. 7).
8.12.2 A horizontal exit shall be equipped
with at least one fire door of self-closing type.
8.12.3 Unless fully sprinkled, in case of buildings more than 24 m in height, refuge area of
15 m2 or an area equivalent to 0.3 m2 per
person to accommodate the occupants of two
consecutive floors, whichever is higher, shall
be provided as under:
The refuge area shall be provided on the
periphery of the floor and open to air atleast
on one side protected with suitable railings.
a)
FOR FLOORS ABOVE 24 m AND UPTO

39 m One refuge area on the floor
immediately
above 24 m.
b)
ABOVE 39 m One
refuge area on the floor immediately
FOR
FLOORS
above 39 m and soon after every 15 m.

Refuge area provided in excess of the
rcquircmcnts shall be counted towards
FAR.
Nom I%sphals shall followthe above norms,
whethersprinkledor not.
8.12.4 Where there is a difference in level
between connected areas for horizontal exits,
ramps, not more than 1 in 10 m slope shall be
provided; steps shall not be used.
8.22.5 Doors in horizontal exits shall be
openable at all times from both sides.
8.13 Fire Tower Fire towers are the
preferred type of escape route for storeyed
buildings and their application shall be considered as the safest route for escape. Their
number, location and size shall depend on the
building concerned, and its associated escape
routes.
8.13.1 In every mercantile, business or assembly building, theatres, and institutional
buildings except residential buildings, over 8
storeys or 24 m in height, at least one required
means of egress shall preferably be a fire
tower.
8.13.2 The enclosure of fire towers shall be
constructed of walls with a 2 h fire-resistance
rating without openings other thari the exit
doorways, with platforms, landings and balconies having the same fire-resistance rating.
8.14 Ramps
8.14.1 Ramps shall comply with all the applicable requirements for stairways regarding
enclosure, capacity and limiting dimensions
except where specified in 9 to 17 for special
uses and occupancies.
8.14.2 The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1
in 10. In certain cases steeper slopes may be
permitted but in no case greater than 1 in 8.
8.14.3 For all slopes exceeding 1 in 10 and
wherever the use is such as to involve danger
of slipping, the ramp shall be surfaced with
approved non-slipping material.
8.15 Emergency and Escape Lighting
8.15.1 Emergency lighting shall be powered
from a source independent of that supplying
the normal lighting.
12xape lighting shall be capable ofi
a)
indicating clearly and unambiguously

the escape routes,
IV-*
!*
-
b)
c)
Providing adequate illumination along

such routes to alIow safe movement of
persons towards and through the exits,
ensuring that fire alarm call points and
fire-fighting
equipments
provided
along the cscapc routes can be readily
Iocatcd.
8.15.2 The horizontal illuminartce at floor

level on the ccntre line of an escape route shall
be not less than 0.2 lUX.ht addition, for escape
routes up to 2 m wide, 50% of the route width
shall be lit to a minimum of 0.1 lUX.The recommended illuminance shall be achieved with a
unfiormity of not less than 0.025.
8.15.3 The emergency
lighting shall bc
provided to be put on within 5 seconds
(preferably within 1 seconds of the failure of
the normal lighting supply.
8,15.4 Escape lighting luminaires should be
sited to cover the following locations:
a) near each intersection of corridors,
b) at each exit door,
Cj near each change of direction in the
escape route,
d) near each staircase so that each flight
of stairs receives direct light,
e) near any other change of floor level,
f) outside each final exit and close to it,
g) near each fire alarm call point,
h) near fire-fighting equipment,
j) to illuminate exit and safety signs as
required by the enforcing authority.
NOTE For the purposes of this clause near is
normally considered to be within 2 m measured
horizontally.
8.15.5 Emergency lighting systems shall be

designed to ensure that a fault or failure in any
one luminaire does not further reduce the
effectiveness of the system.
8.15.6 The luminaires shall be mounted as
low as possible, but at least 2 m above the floor
level measured to the underside of the
luminaires.
8.15.7 Signs are required at all exits, emergency exits and escape routes, which should comply with the graphic requirements of the
relevant Indian Standards.
8.25.8 Emergency lighting luminaires
their fittings shall be non-flammable.
and
8.15.9 It is essential that the wiring and installation of the emergency lighting systems are of
Iv.*
high quality so as to ensure their perfect serviceability at all times.

8.15.10 The cmcrgcrtcy lighting systcm shall
bc capable of continuous operation for a minimum duration of 1 hour and 30 minutes even
for the smallest premises.
8.25.11 Itshall bc ensured that the emergency
lighting system is well maintained by periodical inspections and tests so as to ensure
their perfect serviceability at.zdl times.
9 REQUIREMENTS
OF RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP A)
specified in 7 for the type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requircmcmts
given in 8, the requirements
given in 9.2
to 9.4.10 shall be complied with. The capacity
of any open mcuanine or balcony shall be
added to the capacity of the floor below for the
purpose of determining exit capacity.
9.2 Fire Detectwn/Extinguishing Sjmtern
The requirements for occupaneysub-divisions
A-1 to A-5 as specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
Information regarding alarm system shall conform to Indian Standards at (19) of Appendix A.
9.3 &kit Facilities
9.3.2 In addition to requirements
for occupancy Subdivision A-2 (see 9.3.2) the following shall be provided for occupancy
Sub-division A-1:
a)
Every sleeping room above the street

floor shall have access to two separate
means of exits, at least one of which
shall consist of an enclosed interior
stairway or an exterior stairway, or a
fire escape or horizontal exit all so arranged as to provide a safe path of
travel to the outside of the building
without traversing any corridor or
space exposed to an unprotected vertical opening.
9.3.2 For occupancy Subdivision A-2 of more

than two rooms, every occupied room, excluding areas used solely for storage shali have at
least two means of exit, at least one of which
shall be a door or a stairway providing a means
of unobstructed travel to the outside of the
building or street or grade level and not more
than one of which maybe a window. No room
or space shall be occupied which is accessible
only by a ladder, folding chairs or through a
trap door.
=
The following
made:
a)
further
provisions
shall be
All locking devices which would impedeor prohibit exit, such as chain type
bolts, limited opening sliding type
locks and burglar locks which are not
disengaged easily by quick-releasing
catches, shall be prohibited. All closet
door latches shall be such that even
children may open the doors from inside. All bathroom door locks or fasteners shall be designed to permit the
opening of the locked or closed door
from the outside in an emergency
without the use of a special key.
d)
9.3.5 For occupancy Subdivision A-5, the following provisions shall apply:
a)
9.3.3 For occupancy Subdivision A-3, the following provisions shall apply
a)
All dormitories, except those mentioned at 9.3.5, shall have exits so arranged that from any sleeping room or
open dormitory sleeping area, there
shall be access to two separate and distinct exits in different directions with
no common path of travel unless the
room or space is subject to occupancy
by not more than 10 persons and has a
door opening directly to the outside of
the building at street or grade level, or
to an outside stairway in which case one
means of exit maybe accepted.
9.3.4 For occupancy Subdivision A-4, the following provisions shall apply.
a)
b)
c)
Every individual living unit covered by

occupancy Subdivision A-4 shall comply with the requirements for occupancy Subdivision A-2 in respect of exit.
Every living unit shall have access to at
least two separate exits which are
remote from each other and are
reached by travel in different directions, except that a common path of
travel may be permitted for the first
6 m (that is, a dead-end corridor up to
6 m long maybe permitted) provided
that single exit may be permitted under
any of the conditions given under(c).
Any building not more than two
storeys in height with no basement, or
in case there is a basement and with
street floor level not more than 2.5 m
above grade at any point next to the
building, excluding driveways, not
more than 10 percent of the perimeter,
shall be subject to the condition that

the access to the basement is only from
the exterior of the building if the basement contains a heating plant, group
storage, incinerator room or paint
shop or other hazardous occupancy.
At least half of required exits shall discharge direct to the outside of the
buildings; any other exits shall be the
same as required for hotels.
b)
Not less than two exits, as remote from

each other as practicable, shall be accessible from every floor, including
basements occupied for hotel purposes, except as a single exit as permitted in (b) below. Exits and ways of
access there to shall be so arranged that
they are accessible in at least two different directions from every point in
any open area, or from any room door.
Any room or section with an outside
door at street or grade level may have
such outside door as a single exit,
provided no part of the room or area is
more than 15 m from the door
measured along :!x natural path of
travel.
9.3.5.1 Where stairways or other exits serve

two or more upper floors, the same stairway or
other exit required to serve any one upper
floor may also serve other upper floors, except
that no inside open stairway or ramp may save
as a required egress facility from more than
one floor (see a/so Indian Standard at (26) of
Appendix A)
N~ Underthisprovision, if the second and third
floors were each required to have three stairways, the
second floor may use the staitways serving Ihc third
floor, so that the total number of staitways required is
three, not six.
9.3.6 BASEMENTEXITS
9.3.6.1 Basements occupied for hotel purposes shall have exits arranged in accordance
with 9.3.5.
9.3.6.2 Basement exits shall be sufficient to
provide for the capacity of the basement as
determined in accordance with 9.1; in no case
shall there be less than two independent basement exits.
9.3.6.3 Basement or sub-basements not open
to the public and used only for heating
Iv.m
.!_&
equipment, storage and service operations

(other than kitchens which are considered
part of the hotel occupancy) shall have exits
appropriate to the actual occupancy, in accordance with other applicable provisions of
the Code, or in case of mixed occupancy where
there may be doubt as to which other section
is applicable, such basements shall have exits
determined on the basis of lesser exit capacity.
9.4 Additional Precautions
9.4.1 Flammable ljquids for household purposes shall be kept in tightly stoppered or
sealed containers, For the limits of quantities
of flammable liquids to be allowed in various
occupancies, reference may be made to appropriate regulations.
9.4.2 No stove or combustion heater shall be
located directly under or immediately at the
foot of stairs or otherwise so located as to
block escape in case of malfunctioning of the
stove or heater.
9.4.3 All kitchen
exhaust fans, where
provided, shall be fixed to an outside wall or
to a duct of non-combustible material which
leads directly to the outside. The ducts must
not pass through combustible materials.
9.4.4 All wiring shall be done in awrdance
with Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations, Indian Standard at (6)
of Appendix A, and National Electric Code.
9.4.5 Where television is installed, all outdoor antennae shall be properly grounded and
protected from lighting
(see Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrical installations).
9.4.6 Doors leading into rooms in which
flammable liquids are stored or used shall be
as in 8.7. Such assembly shall be self-closing
and shall be posted with a sign on each side of
the door in 25 mm high block letters stating
FIRE DOOR lQ3EP CLOSED.
9.4.7 Where a boiler room is provided or a
central heating plant is installed, which uses
solid or liquid fuel, it shall be seprated from
the rest of the building by a separation wall
with all openings protected as in Z 6.
9.4.8
Rooms containing high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery, transformers
or adjacent to exits. All such rooms shall be
effectively cut off from other parts of the

building and shall be provided with adequate
vents to the outside air,
9.4.9 All rooms or areas of high hazard in

additions to those here in before mentioned,
shall be segregated or shall be protected as
may be directed by the enforcing Authority
where, in the opifiion of the enforcing
Authority, fire, explosion or smoke therefrom
is likely to interfere with safe egress from the
building.
p.-

fire safety requirements
for hazardous
petroleum products, reference maybe made to
the Petroleum Act 1934 and the Rules thereof.
10 REQUIREMENTS OF EDUCATIONAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP B)
occupancy group and exit requirements given
in 8, the requirements in 10.2 to 10.4.5 shall be
complied with.
1(?.2 Buildings intended for educational
occupancy shall not be used for any hazardous
occupancy.
10.3 Fire DetectionlErtinguishing System
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions
B-1 and B-2 as specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
10.4 Exit Facilities In addition to the
provisions in 8, the following shall be
provided.
10.4.1 Exits, in accordance with 8, shall be so
arranged that at least two separate exits are
available in every floor area. Exits shall be as
arranged that there are no pockets or dead
ends of appreciable size in which occupants
may be trapped.
10.4.2 Eve~ room with a capacity of over 45
persons in area shall have at least two doorways.
10.4.3 Exterior doors shall be operated by
bars or some other panic hardware device,
except that doors leading from classrooms
directly to the outside maybe equipped with
the same type, of lock as is used on classroom
doors leading to corridor, with no provision
whatsoever for locking against egress from the
classroom.
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODEOF INDIA
.-.#,
10.5
Additional Precautions
10.5.1 Storage of volatile flammable liquids

shall be prohibited and the handling of such
liquids shall be restricted
to science
laboratories only.
10.5.2 Each building shall be provided with an
approved outside gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked, where applicable. The
detailed requirements regarding safe use of
gas shall be as specified in Part IX Plumbing
10.5.3 All exterior openings in a boiler room
or rooms containing central heating equipment, if located below opening in another
storey or if less than 3 m from other doors or
windows of the same building, shall be
protected by a fire assembly as in 7.8. Such
assemblies shall be fixed, automatic or selfclosing. Provisions of 9.4.7 shall also apply to
this group of occupancy.
10.6.1 Gymnasiums, indoor stadiums and
similar occupancies may have floors/running
tracks of wood, cinder, synthetic or unprotected steel or iron.
10.6.2 In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose
school rooms having an area not greater than
300 m2, 25-mm nominal tight tongue-andgrooved or 20-mm plywood wall covering may
be used in the inner side in lieu of fire-resistance plaster.
10.6.3 A building which will have only the
first floor accessible to not more than 20
pupils at any time, may be used for school
purposes with the following exceptions:
a)
b)
Exterior walls or parts of walls which

are less than 90 cm from adjacent
property lines shall have no openings
therein,
Classrooms may have only one exit not
less than 90 cm wide.
11 REQUIREMENTS OFINSTITUTIONAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP C)
oeeupaney group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the following requirements shall be
complied with.
11.2 Fire Detection/Ektinguzkhing System
The requirements for oeeupaney sub-divisions
as speeified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for

high rise buildings) shall apply.
i

11.3.1 In buildings or sections occupied by
bed-ridden
atients where the floor area is
!
over 280 m , facilities shall be provided to
move patients in hospital beds to the other
side of a smoke barrier from any part of such
building or section. not directly served by approved horizontal exits or exits from the first
floor (floor 2) of a building to the outside.
11.3.2 Not less than two exits of one or more
of the following types shall be provided for
every floor, including basement, of every
building or section:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Doors leading directly

building
Stairways;
Ramps; and
Horizontal exits.
outside
the
11.3.3 All required exits which serve as egress

from hospital or infirmaV sections shall be
not less than 150 cm in clear wi~;h including
patient bedroom doors to permit transportation of patients on beds, litters, or mattresses.
The minimum width of corridors serving
patients bedrooms in buildings shall be 240
cm. For detailed information on recommendations for buildings and facilities for the
physically handicapped, referenee may be
made to Indian Standards given at (15) of
Appendix A.
11.3.4 Elevators constitute a desirable supplementary facility, but are not counted as
required exits.
11.3.5 Any area exceeding 500 m2 shall be
divided into compartments by fire resistance
walls and the Authority may require storeys
housing a lesser number of patients to be
divided into compartments when, in its judgment, such division is essential to the protection of the patients.
11.3.6 Doors in fire resistance walls shall be
so installed that these may normally be kept in
open position, but will close automatically or
may be released manually to self-closing action. Corridor door openings in smoke barriers shall be not less than 150 em in width.
Provision shall also be made, for double swing
single/double leaf type door.
w-e
-{
11.3.7 Exits and other features for penal and

mental Institutions, and custodial institutions
shall be the same as specified for hospitals, in
so far as applicable. Reliable means shall be
provided to permit the prompt release of inmates from any locked section in case of fire
or other emergency.
11.3.8 Wherever any inmates are confined in
any locked rooms or spaces, adequate guards
or other personnel shall be continuously on
duty or immediately available to provide for
release of inmates or for such other action as
may be indicated in case of fire or other emergency.
11.3.9 No building constructed in whole or in
part of combustible materials shall be used to
combine inmates in cells or sleeping quarters,
unless automatic sprinkler protection is
provided.
11.3.10 All buildings or sections of buildings
in penal and mental institutions used for
manufacturing, storage or office purposes
shall have exits in accordance with the
provisions of the ~de for those occupancies,
locks, or by keying all loch to keys commonly

used by attendants.
12 REQUIREMENTS
OF ASSEMBLY
BUILDINGS (GROUP D)
12.2 Mired occupanq Places of assembly in
buildings
of other occupancy,
such as
ballrooms in hotels, restaurants in stores and
assembly rooms in schools, shall be so located
separated or protected as to avoid any undue
danger to the occupants of the place of assembly from a fire originating in the other
occupancy or smoke therefrom.
12.3 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System
The requirements for occ{pancy ~ub-divisions
D-1 to D-5 as specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTE
Thecanteensshallnot be providedin basements, if provided in the upper floors, it shall be.
sprintdered.
11.4 Aaliitional Precautions
12.4 Erit Facilities
11.4.1 No combustible material of any kind

shall be stored or used in any building or section thereof used for institutional occupancy,
except as necessary to normal occupancy and
use of the building.
12,4.1 Every place of assembly, every tier or

balcony, and every individual room used as a
place of assembly shall have exits sufficient to
provide for the total capacity thereof as determined in accordance with 8. Door width for
assembly buildings shall not be less than 200
cm.
11.4.2 Bare minimum flammable quantities

may be allowed to be stored and handled such
as chloroform, ethyl alcohol, spirit, etc. The
handling of such liquids shall not be permitted
by unauthorized
persons. Bulk storage of
these items, will be governed by other rules
and safe practices.
11.5 Exception and Deviation, It is recognized that in institutions or part of buildings
housing various types of psychiatric patients,
or used as penal and mental institutions, it is
necessaty to maintain locked doors and barred
windows_; and to such extent the necessary
provision in other sections of the tide requiring the keeping of exits unlocked may be
waived. It is also recognized that cert,ain types
of psychiatric patients are not capable of seeking safety without adequate guidance. In
buildings where this situation prevails, reliable means for the rapid release of occupants
shall be provided, such as remote control of
Iv-so
12.4.1.1 Every place of assembly of subdkision D-1 shall have at least four separate
exits as remote from each other as practicable.
12.4.1.2 Every place of assembly of Subdivision D-2 shall have at least two separate
exits as remote from each other as practicable
and if of capacity over 600 at least three exits
shall be provided with each exit not less than
of 200 cm width.
12.4.2 Clear aisles not less than 1.2 m in width
shall be formed at right angles to the line of
seating in such number and manner that no
seat shall be more than seven seats away from
an, aisle. Rows of seats opening on to an aisle
atone end only shall have not more than seven
seats. Under the conditions, where all these
aisles do not directly meet the exit doors,
cross-aisles shall be provided parallel to the
NATIONALBUILDING CODE OF INDIA
line of seating so as to provide direct access to

the exit, provided that not more than one cross
aisle for every 10 rows shall be required. The
width of cross-aisles shall be minimum of 1 m.
Steps shall not be placed in aisles to overcome
differences in levels, unless the gradient exceeds 1 in 10.
12.4.3 The fascia of boxes, balconies and galleries shall have substantial railings not less
than 65 cm high above the floor. The railings
at the end of aisles extending to the fascia shall
be not less than 75 cm high for the width of the
aisle or 90 cm high at the foot of steps.
12.4.4 Cross-aisles except where the backs of
seats on the front of the aisle project 60 cm or
more above the floor of the aisle, shall be
provided with railings not less than 90cmhigh.
12.4.5 No turnstiles
or other devices to
restrict the movement of persons shall be installed in anyplace of assembly in such a manner as to interfere in anyway with the required
exit facilities.
22.4.6 In theatres and similar places of public
assembly where persons are admitted to the
building at a time when seats are not available
for them and are allowed to wait in a lobby or
similar space until seats are available, such use
of lobby or similar space shall not encroach
upon the required clear width of exits. Such
waiting shall be restricted to areas separated
from the required exitways by substantial permanent partitions or fixed rigid railing not less
than 105 cm high. Exits shall be provided for
- such waiting spaces on the basis of one person
for each 0.3 m2 of waiting space area. Such
exits shall be in addition to the exits specified
for the main auditorium area and shall conform in construction and arrangement to the
general rules of exits given above.
12.4.7 No display or exhibit ,s~all be so installed or operated as to interfere in any way
with access to any required exit, or with any
required exit sign.
All displays or exhibits of combustible
material or construction and all booths and
temporary construction in connection therewith shall be so limited in combustibility or
protected as to avoid any undue hazard of fire
which might endanger occupants before they
have opportunity to use the available exits, as
determined by the authority.
12.4.8 Places of assembly in buildings of other
occupanq may use exits uommon to the place
of assembly and the other occupancy, provided

the assembly area and the other occupancy are
considered separately, and each has exits sufficient to meet the requirements of the Code.
12.4.9 Exits shall be sufficient for simultaneous occupancy of both the places of assembly and other parts of the building, unless
the Authority determines that the conditions
are such that simultaneous occupancy will not
occur.
12.4.10, For any place of assembly under Subdivision D-1, at least half the required means
of exits shall lead directly outdoors or through
exhvays completely separated from exits serving other parts of the building.
cinema buildings, reference may be made to
Indian Standards given at (16) of Appendix A.
12.5 Lighting No open flame lighting
devices shall be used in any place of assembly,
except in the following cases:
a)
b)
c)
Where necessary for ceremonial purposes, the enforcilig .Authority may

permit open flame lighting under such
restrictions as are necewary to avoid
danger of ignition of combustible
materials or injury to occupants.
Candles may be used on restaurant
tables if securely supported on noncombustible bases and so located as to
avoid danger of ignition bf combustible
materials.
Open flame devices may bq used on
stages where they are a necessa~part
of theatrical performance, provided
adequate precautions, satisfactory to
the Authority are taken to prevent
ignition of combustible materials.
12.6 Additional Precautwns

12.6.1 The decorations of places of assembly
shall be of nonflammable materials. Fabrics
and papers used for such purpose shall be
treated with an effective flame-retardant
material. Stage settings made of combustible
materials shall likewise be treated with fire
retardant materials of Class 1 flame spread.
12.6.2 Seats in places of public assembly, accommodating more than 300 persons, shall be
securely fastened to the floor, except as permitted in 12.6.3. All seats in balconies and
galleries shall be securely fastened to the floor,
except that in nailed-in enclosures, boxes with
Iv.sl
lCVC1
floors and having not more than 14 seats,
the seats need not be fastened.
12.6.3 Chairs not secured to the floor maybe
permitted in restaurants, nightclubs and other
occupancies where the fastening of seats to the
floor may be impracticable, provided that in
the area used for seating, excluding dance
floor, stage, etc, there shall be not more than
one seat for each 1.4 m2 of floor area and
adequate aisles to reach exits shall be maintained at all times.
12.6.3.1 Rows of seats between aisles shall
have not more than 14 seats.
12.6.3.2 Rows of seats opening on to an aisle
at one end only shall have not more than 7
seats.
12.6.3.3 Seats without dividing arms shall
have their capacity determined by allowing 45
cm per person.
22.6.4 The spacing of rows of seats from back
to back shall be neither less than 85 cm nor less
than 70 cm plus the sum of the thickness of the
back and inclination of the back. There shall
be a space of not less than 35 cm between the
hack of one seat and the front of the seat
immediately behind it as measured between
plumb lines.
12.6.5 Rooms containing
high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery of other than
domestic refrigerator type, large transformers
or adjacent to the required exits. All such
rooms shall be effectively cut off from other
parts of the building and provided with adequate vents to the outer air.
12.6.6 All rooms or areas used for storage of
any combustible materials or equipment, or
for painting, refinishing, repair or similar purposes shall be effectively cutoff from assembly,
areas or protected with a standard system of
automatic sprinklers. They shall be located
away from staircases.
12.6.7 Every stage equipped with fly galleries,
grid irons and rigging for movable theatretype scenery, shall have a system of automatic
sprinklers over and under such stage areas or
spaces and auxilia~ spaces, such as dressing
rooms, store rooms and workshops, and the
proscenium opening shall be provided with a
fire-resisting curtain, capable of withstanding
a lateral pressure of 4 kn/m2over the entire
area. The curtain shall have an emergency

closing device capable of causing the curtain
to close without the use of power and wlrkxtso
closed, it shall be reasonably tiglp against the
passage of smoke.
12.6.8 The stage roof of every theatre using
movable scenery or having a motion picture
screen of highly combustible construction
shall have a ventilator or ventilators in or
above it, openable from the stage floor by
hand and also opening by fusible links or some
other approved automatic heat/smoke actuated device, to give a free opening equal to
at least one-eighth the area of the floor of the
stage.
12.6.9 The proscenium wall of every theatre
using movable scenery of decorations shall
have, exclusive of the proscenium opening,
not more than two openin ~ entering the
stage, each not to exceed 2 m and fitted with
self-closing fire resistant doors.
12.6.10 Every place of assembly in which
projection of motion pictures by light is made
shall have the projection apparatus enclosed
in a fire-resisting fixed booth according to Indian Standard given at [IV (16)], except that
such booth shall not be required where no
nitrocellulose motion picture film is used.
12.6.11 Automatic smoke vents actuated bysmoke detectors shall be installed above the
auditorium or theatres, including motion picture houses, with vent area equal to not less
than ~ percent of the floor area of the
auditorium, including the sum of the floor
areas of all balconies, galleries, boxes and
tiers. It may be desirable to provide a large
number of small vents rather than a small
number of large vents.
12.7.1 Where boilers or central heating
plants using liquid or solid fuel are located at
grade level, these may be separated from the
remainder of the building by a separating wall
with openings protected.
12.72 Gymnasiums, indoor stadiums and
similar occupancies may have floors/mnning
tracks of wood, cinder, synthetic or unprotected steel or iron.
12.7.3 The underside of continuous steel deck
grand stands when erected outdoors need not
be fire-protected when occupied for public
toilets.
12.7.4 A fire-resistive ceiling is not rcquitxxl

in a onc-storcy building having an open-frame
roof.
occupanq group and the exit requirements

13 REQUIREMENTS
OF BUSINESS
BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
13.2 Fire DetectionlErtinguishing System

spccificd in 7 for type of construction and
The requirements specified in 13.2.1 to 13.2.3,

Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise bUildings) shall apply.
-{
1.?.2.1 OCCXJPM-CYSUBDIVISIONE-1 (EXCEPT Ormc~ BUILDINGS)

Fire Detection/EWinguishing System
Details of Occupancy
Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19)

of Appendix A and Table 20]
E-1 (Except Office Buildings)

1.?.2.2 OCXXJPANCY
SUBDIVISIONE-2
Fire Detection/ fitinguishing $wtem
a)
Laboratory
ments
with delicate instru-
b)
Solvent storage and/or flammable

liquid
Fixed automatic C02 fire extinguishing

system or automatic fire alarm system
[refer (19) of Appendix A and Table 20]
Automatic foam installation or automatic
C02 fire extinguishing system
13.2.3 OCCUPANCYSUBDIVISIONE-3
Fire Detection/Extinguishing System
a)
Area of computer installations
Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19) of

Appendix A and Table 20] Halon or any
other suitable fire extinguishing installation
b)
Space under false ceiling (floor)

Appendix A and Table 20]
c) Space above false ceiling

below false floor
d)
and
Electrical switch board

Appendix A and Table 20]
Appendix A and Table 20] C02 fire extinguishing installation
a)
Telephone exchanges
Fire DetectionlExtinguishing @stem

Halon system and/or automatic sprinkler
system as per requirement
(see also
Table 20)
a)
Broadcasting stations
Fire DetectionliWinguishing System

Automatic fire alarm system based on
smoke detectors and sprinkler system
(see also Table 20)
IV-53
23.3 Exit Facilities --In addition to the

provisions of 8, the requirements given
under 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 shall be complied with.
vertical openings between floors, the population of the mezzanine or other subsidiary floor
for level shall be added to that of the main
floor the purpose of determining the required
exits, provided, however, that in no case shall
the total number of exit units be less than that
required if all vertical openings were enclosed.
.
provided for every floor, including basements
occupied for office purposes or uses incidental
thereto.
13.4 Additional Requirements
1.?.4.1 The handling and use of gasoline, fuel
oil and other flammable liquids shall not be
permitted, unless such use and handling complies with the appropriate regulations.
13.4.2 Every boiler room or room containing
a central heating plant using solid or liquid
fuel shall be separated from the rest of the
building by a s~parating wall. Every boiler
room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns gas as a fuel shall be
building.
13.5 Elception and Deviation
13.5.1 Basements used only for storage, heating, any other service equipment, and not for
office occupancy, shall conform to exit requirements for Group H occupancies in all
respects.
14 REQUIREMENTS
OF MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
specified in 7 for types of construction and
given in 8, the additional requirements in 14.2
to 14.5 shall be complied with.
14.1.1 MIXED OCCUPANCY No dwelling
unit shall have its sole means of exit through
any mercantile occupancy in the same building
except in the case of a single family unit where
the family operates the store.
14.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions
IT/.54
F-1 to F:3 as spccificd in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
14.3 Erit Facilities In addition tb the
vertical openings between floors, the population or area of the mezzanine or other subsidiary floor level shall be added to that of the
main floor for the purpose of determining the
required exits, provided, however, that in no
case shall the total number of exit units be less
than that required if all vertical openings were
enclosed.
14.3.2 At least two separate exits shall be accessible from every part of eve~ floor, inclttding basements; such exits shall be as remote
from each other as practicable and so arranged
as to be reached by different paths of travel in
different directions, except that a common
path of travel may be permitted for the first
15 m from any point.
14.4 Additional Precautions
. 14.4.1 Requirements sDecified in 13.4.1 shall
be applicable to all Gro~p F occupancies also,
14.4.2 Hazardous areas of mercantile occupancies shall be segregated or protected.
14.4.3 In self-service stores, no check-out
stand or associated railings or barriers shall
obstruct exits or required aisles or approaches
thereto.
14.4.4 Open-air mercantile operations, such
as open-air markets, gasoline filling stations,
roadside stands for the sale of a farm produce
and other outdoor mercantile operations shall
be so arranged and conducted as to maintain
free and unobstructed ways of travel at all
times to permit prompt escape from any point
of danger in case of fire or other emergency,
but no dead-ends in which persons might be
trapped due to display stands, adjoining buildings, fences, vehicles or other obstructions.
14.4.5 If mercantile operations are conducted
in roofed-over areas, these shall be treated as
mercantile buildings, provided canopies over
individual small stands to protect merchandisc from the weather shall not be constructed
to constitute buildings for the purpose of the
Code.
f,
. -.
.*
14.5 Exception and Deviation Any mercantile oeeupaney, where goods of a highly hazardous nature are predominant,
shall be
emsidered under Group J occupancy for the
purpose of the Code.
25 REQUIREMENTS
OF INDUSTRIAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP G)
specified in 7 for type of construction arid
oeeupaney group and the exit requirements
shall be compli$xl with.
15.2 Fire Detection/&tinguishing System
The requirements for oeeupaney sub-divisions
G-1 to G-3 as specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high buildings) shall apply.
provision of 8, the following requirements
provided for every floor or section, including
basements used for industrial purposes or uses
incidental thereto.
,,
25.3.2 In buildings used for aircraft assembly
or other oecupaney requiring undivided floor
areas so large that the distances from points
within the area to the nearest outside walls
where exit doors could be provided are in exeess of 45 m, requirements for distance to exits
may be satisfied by providing stairs leading to
exit tunnels or to overhead passageways.. In
eases where such arrangements are not .practieable, the Authority may, by special ruling,
permit other exit arrangements for one storey
buildings with distances in exeess of the maximum distances specified in 8, if completely
automatic sprinkler protection is provided
and if the heights of ceiling curtain boards and
roof ventilation are such as to minimize the
possibility that ernployeeswillbe overtaken by
the spread of ~re or smoke within 180 cm of
the floor level before they have time to reach
exits, provided, however, that in no ease may
the distance of travel to reach the nearest exit
exeeed 45 m where smoke venting is required
as a condition for permitting distances of
travel to exits in excess of the maximum otherwise allowed.
15.3.3 ADDITIONALPRECAUTIONS
15.3.3.1 In any room in which volatile flammable substances are used or stored,no deviee
PmT IVFIREPROTECTION
generating aglow or flame capable of ighitirqflammable vapour shall be installed or used.

Such a room shall be provided with a suitably
ventilation system (see
designed exhaust
Appendix E). To ensure safety from fire due
to short circuit, faulty electrical connection
or some similar cause, proper care shall be
taken in designing electrical installations in
such room (see Part VIII Building serviees,
Section 2 Electrical installations).
15.3.3.2 The storage, use and handling of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable liquids
shall not be permitted in any Group G occupancy unless it complies with regulations
pertaining to Petroleum Act 1934 and Rules
thereunder.
15.3.3.3 Every boiler room or room below the
first floor containing
heating plant shall be
buildings.
15.3.3.4 For requirements regarding electrical generating and distribution stations, refer,enee maybe made to Indian Standard given at
(12) of Appendix A.
25.3.4 EXCEPTIONANDDEVIATION
15.3.4.1 Basements used only for storage,
heating and other servick equipment, and not
subject to industrial oeeupaney, shall have
exits in aeeordanee with the requirements of
Group H occupancies.
to special purpose industrial occupancies:
a)
b)
Exits need be provided only for the

persons actually employed; spaces not
subject to human oeeupaneybeeause of
the prewmee bf machine~ or equipment may be exeluded from eonsidera~ion+
Where unprotected vertieal openings
are neeessary to manufacturing operations, these may be permitted beyond
the limits specified for industrial occupancy, provided eve~ floor level has
direet access to one or more enclosed
stairways or other exits protected
against obstruction by any fire in the
open areas connected
by the unprotected vertical openings or smoke
therefrom.
Iv.ss
,
,
c)
Industrial
buildings
of low and
moderate hazard are permitted only up
to 18 m height.

to high hazard industrial occupancies:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Exits shall be so located that it will not

be necessary to travel more than 22.5 m
from any p~int to reach the nearest
exit.
From every point in every floor area,
there shall be at least two exits accessible in different directions; where
floor areas are divided into rooms,
there shall be at least two ways of escape from every room, however small,
except toilet rooms, so located that the
points of access thereto are out of or
suitably shielded from areas of high
hazard.
In addition to types of exits for upper
floors specified for Group G occupancies, slide escapes may be used as required exits for both new and existing
buildings.
All high hazard industrial occupancies
shall have automatic sprinkler protection or such other protection as maybe
appropriate to the particular hazard,
including explosion, venting for any
area subject to explosion hazard,
designed to minimize danger to occupants in case of fire or other emergency before they have time to utilize
exits to escape.
Industrial buildings of high hazard are
permitted only up to 15 m height.
15.4 For detailed information on fire safety of

certain individual (specific) industrial occupancies reference may be made to Indian
Standard given at <.17)of Appendix A.
16.2 Fire DetectionlExtinguishing System

The requirements for occupancy, Group H, as
specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high
rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTE Automatic sprinklers are prohibited where
water reactive materials are kept. Instead, automatic
tire alarm system coupled with suitable fire extinguishing system shall be provided.
Exit Facilities In addition to the

16.3
16.3.1 Every building or structure used for

storage and every section thereof considered
separately, shall have access to at least one exit
so arranged and located as to provide a
suitable means of escape for any person
employed therein and in any room or space
exceeding 1400 m2 gross area, or where more
than 10 persons maybe normally present, at
least two separate means of exit shall be available, as remote from each other as practicable.
16.3.2 Every storage area shall have access to
at least two means of exit, which can be readily
opened. This shall not be subject to locking so
long as any persons are inside and shall not
depend on power operation.
apply to parking garages of closed or open
type, above or below ground, but not to
where
facilities
mechanical parking
automobiles are moved into and out of storage
mechanically which are not normally occupied
by persons and thus require no exit facilities.
Where repair operations are conducted, the
exits shall comply with the requirements of
Group G occupancies in addition to compliance with the following
a)
15.5 Fire protection considerations for venting industrial occupancies shall be as in Appendix E.
b)
16 llEQUIREMENTS
OF STORAGE
BUILDINGS (GROUP H)
IV-56
,A,-
Where both parking and repair operations are conducted in the same building, the entire building shall comply
with the requirements for Group G
occupancies, unless the parking and
repair
sections
are effectively
separated by separation walls.
Every floor of every closed parking
garage shall have access to at least two
separate means of exit, so arranged
that from any point in the garage the
paths of travel to the hvo means of exit
shall be in different directions, except
that a common path of travel may be
permitted for the first 15 m from any
point.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
On the street floor, at least two

separate exit doors shall be provided,
except that any opening for the passage
of automobiles may serve as a means of
exit, provided no door or shutter is
installed thereon. Street floor exits in
closed garages shall be so arranged that
no point in the area is more than 30 m
from the nearest exit, or 45 m in the
case of garages protected by automatic
sprinklers, distance being measured
along the natural path of travel.
On floors above the street, at least two
means of exit shall be provided, one of
which shall be an enclosed stairway.
The other means of egress may be a
second exit of any of the types, or in a
ramp type garage with open ramps not
subject to closure, the ramp may serve
as the second means of exit.
Upper floor exits in closed garages
shall be so arranged that no point in the
area shall be more than 30 m from the
nearest exit other than a ramp on the
same floor level or 45 m in the case of
garages protected
by automatic
sprinklers.
On floors below the street (either basement or outside underground garages)
at least two exits shall be provided, not
counting any automobile ramps, except that for garages extending only
one floor level below the street, a ramp
leading direct to the outside may constitute one required means of exit. In
garages below street level, exits shall be
so arranged that no part of the area
shall be more than 30 m from the
nearest stair exit.
If any gasoline pumps are located
within any closed parking garage, exits
shall be so located that travel away
from the gasoline pump in any direction shall lead to an exit, dth no deadend in which occupants might be
trapped by fire or explosion at any
gasoline pump. Such exit shall lead to
the outside on the building on the same
level, or downstairs; no upward travel
shall be permitted unless direct outside
exits are available from that floor and
any floor below (as in the case of a
basement garage where the grade is
one storey or more lower at the rear
than at the street).
16.3.4 Exits from aircraft hangars (storage or

servicing areas) shall be provided at intervals
of not more than 45 m on aIl exterior walls of
aircraft hangars. There shall be a minimum of
two exits serving each aircraft storage or servicing area. Horizontal exits through interior
fire walls shall be provided at intervals of not
more than 30 m. Dwarf or smash doors accommodating aircraft may be used to comply
with these requirements. All doors designated
as exits shall be kept unlocked in the direction
of exit travel while the area is occupied.
26.3.5 Exits from mezzanine floors in aircraft
storage or servicing areas shall be so arranged
that the maximum travel to reach the nearest
exits from any point on the mezzanine shall
not exceed 22.5 m. Such exits shall lead directly
to a properly enclosed stairwell discharging
directly to the exterior or to a suitably cut-off
area or to outside fire escape stairs.
apply to grain elevators:
a)
b)
c)
d)
There shall beat least one stair tower

from basement to fhi floor and from
the first floor to the top floor of
workhouse enclosed in a dust-tight
non-combustible shaft.
Non-combustible doors of sqlf-closing
type shall be provided at each floor
landing.
An exterior fire escape of the stair-or
basket ladder type shall be provided
from the roof of the workhouse to
ground level or to the roof of an adjoining annexe with access from all floors
above the first.
An exterior fire escape of either the
stair or basket ladder type shall be
provided from the roof of each storage
annexe to ground level.
16.4 Additiona!lkcautions Requirements

specified in 15.3.3 to 15.3.3.4 shall apply to
Group H occupancies also.
16.5 Exception and Deviation Every area
used for the storage of hazardous commodities shall have an exit within 22.5 m of any
point in the area where persons may be
present or 35 m where automatic sprinkler
17 REQUIREMENTS
OF BUILDINGS
FOR HAZARDOUS USES (GROUP J)
~-57

2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System
The requirements for occupancy group J as
specified in Tabie 20 and Appendix B (for high
rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTEHazardousbuildingsshallhavecombustible,
vapourdetectots/explosion
suppressionsystems/automatic sprinklers,tildes hydrantsystem,wet risers
andautomaticfirealarmsystemdependingon the type
d)
1Z
e)
of fire hazard involved.
Exit Facilities Requirements specified

in 8 and 15.3.4.3 shall apply to Group J
occupancies also.
173
17.4 Additional Precautions The following

requirements
shall apply to all Group J
occupancies, as applicable:
a)
b)
c)
Each building where gas is employed

for any purpose shall be provided with
an approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked. The detailed
requirements regarding safe use of gas
shall be as specified in Part IX Plumbing services, Section 3 Gas supply.
Each boiler room or room containing
a heating plant shall be separated from
the rest of the building by a separating
wall.
In any room in which volatile flammable substances are used or stored, no
device generating a spark, or glow
flame capable of igniting gasoline
vapour shall be installed or permitted
unless it is enclosed in a flameproof
enclosure.
f)
g)
The use, handling, storage and sale of

gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable
liquids shall not be permitted in Group
J occupancies unless such use, handling, storage and sale is in accordance
with appropriate legislation in force.
All openings in exterior walls except
wall vents shall be protected by a fire
stop assembly as in %6and they shall be
fixed, automatic or self-closing. Wall
vents having an area of not less than
100 cmz each shall be placed in the
exterior walls near the floor line, not
more than 180 cm apart horizontally.
Each building shall be provided with a
power driven fan exhaust system of
ventilation which shall be arranged and
operated so as to produce a complete
change of air in each room every 3 min.
Each machine in dry-cleaning establishments which uses flammable liquid
shall have an adequate steam line or
any other suitable extinguishing agent
directly connected to it, so arranged as
to have the agent automatically
released to the inside of each machine
should an explosion occur in the
machine.
Equipment
or machinery
which
generates or emits combustible or explosive dust or fibres shall be providii%l
with an adequate dust collecting and
exhaust system, unless the building or
such
housing
portion
thereof
machinefy is provided with an automatic fire extinguishing system.
APPENDIX
(Clause 2)
LIST OF REFERRED
INDIAN STANDARDS
IS 884:1985 Specification for first-aid
hose reel for fire fighting (@t revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995, Amendment No. 1)
In the following list the number appearing in

the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this part:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
IS 3808:1979 Method of test for noncombustibility of building materials

(first revision) (Reaffirmed February
1996)
IS 8757: 1978 Glossa~ of terms associated with fire safety (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
IS 901 : 1988 Specification for couplings, double male and double female
instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
(third revision) (Reaffirmed
April
1993)
IS 902:1992 Specification for suction
hose couplings for fire fighting purposes (third revziion)
IS 7673:1975 Glossary of terms for fire

fighting equipment
(Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 3809:1979 Fire resistance test of
structure (&st revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 903:1993 Specification for fire hose

delivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles and nozzle spanner (@urfh
revision)
IS 1641:1988 Code of practice for fire

safety of buildings (general): General
principles of fire grading and classification
(first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
safety of buildings (general): Details of
construction
(first revision) (Reaffirmed August 1994)
IS 904:1983 Specification for two-way

and three-way suction twlkcting heads
for fire fighting purposes (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 1)
IS 905:1980 Specification for aelivery
breechings, dividing and collecting, instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
purposes (second revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992)

safety of buildings (general): Exposure
hazard (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
(5)
(6)
(7)

safety of buildings (general) : Exit requirements and personal hazard (first
revision) (Reaffirmed Februa~ 1993)
IS 3614 (Part 1): 1966 Specification for
fire check doors : Part 1 plate, metal
covered and rolling type (Reaffirmed
December 1990)
installations
(/lrst revision) (Reaffirmed December 1990)
IS 2309 : 1989 Code of practice for
protection of building and allied structures against lighting (second revision)
IS 2175: 1988 Specification for heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic fire alarm system (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
PARTtv FIREPROTECIION
(8)
(9)
(10)
IS 906:1988 Specification for revolving branch pipe for fire fighting (third
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 2189: 1988 Code of practice for
selection,
installation
and maintenance of automatic fire detection and
alarm
system
(second revision)
(Amendment No. 1)
selection,
installation
and. maintenance of portable first-aid fire extinguishers (third revision)
IS 636:1988 Non-percolating flexible
fire fighting delivexyhose (third revirion)
IS 933:1989 Specification for portable
fire extinguisher chemical foam (third
Amendment No. 1)
fire extinguisher, water type (soda
acid) fourth revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IV-S9
IS 937:1981 Specification for washers

for water fittings for fire fighting purposes (second revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 943:1979 Functional requirement

for 680-1/min trailer pump for fire
brigade use (secondrevirion) (Reaffirmed
February 1992,Amendment No. 2)
IS 939:1977 Specification for snatch

block for use with fibre rope for fire
brigade use (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)

for 1800-1/min trailer pump for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992, Amendment
No. 1)

fire extinguisher,
water type (gas
cartridge) (third revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 941:1985 Specification for blowers
and exhauster for fire fighting (second
rewkion) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Anendment No. 2)
1S942:1982 Functional requirements
for 275-l/rein portable pump set for fire
fighting (secon$ revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 907:1984 Specification for suction
strainers, cylindrical type for fire fighting purpose (second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 908 : 1975 Specification for fire
hydrant,
stand post type (second
Amendment No. 1)
IS 909:1992 Specification for underground fire hydrant : Sluice valve type
(third revision)

for. motor fire engine @st revision)
(Reaffirmed February 1992)
for towing tender for trailer fire pump
for fire brigade use (first revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995)
for water tender, Type A, for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995, Amendment
No.1)
for emergency (rescue) tender for fire
bridge use (second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 950:1980 Functional requirements
forwater tender, me B for fire brigade
use (second revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1992, Amendment No. 2)
IS 930:1977 Specification for wooden

extension ladders for fire brigade use
(@t revision) (Reaffirmed February
1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 952:1986 Specification for foghnozzle for fire brigade use (fiixt revision)
for carbon-dioxide
tender for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
for dry power tender for fire-brigade
use (150 kg capacity) @st revtiion)
(Reaffirmed February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 957: 1%7 Specification for control
van for fire brigade (Reaffirmed
IS 1941 (Part 1) :1976 Functional requirements for electric motor sirens :
Part 1AC3 phase 50 Hz. 415 Volts type
(second
revision)
(Reaffirmed
Februaxy 1992)
IS 931:1973 Specification for wheeled

fire escape (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 2097:1983 Specification for foam

making branch pipe (first revision)
IS 910: 1980 Specification for combined key for hydrant, hydrant cover
and lower vaive (second revision)
IS 926 : 1985 Specification
for
firemans axe (second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
hooks (second revision) (Reaffirmed
Februaty 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 928:1984 Specification for fire bells
(second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
INDIA
IS 2171 :1985 Spccifieation for porlablc fire extinguishers, dry powder

(carwi(lge type) (third revision) (Rcaffirmcxt November 1995, Amendment
No. 2)
1S4643:1984 Spccifieation for suction

wrcnchcs for fire brigade usc @sI
revi.$ron)(Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 4861 : 1984 Specification for dry
powder for fighting fires in burning
metals (first revision) (Reaffirmed
IS 2175: 1988 Specification for heat

sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic detectors for usc in automatic
fire alarm systcm (second revision)
IS 4927:1992 Specification for unlined

flax canvas hose for fire fighting (@st
revision)
IS 2298:1977 Spccifieation for singlebarrcl stirrup pump for fire fighting

purposes
(second revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992)

for
delivery valve for centrifugal pump
outlets (first revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
1S 2546: 1974 specification for galvanized mild steel fire bucket (@t
revision) (Reaffirmed
November
IS 4947 : 1985 Specification for gas

cartridges for use in fire extinguishers
(second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995, Amendment No.4)
IS 2696 : 1974 Functional requirements for 1125 l/rein light fire engine
(@f revision) (Reaffirmed Fcbruaxy
IS 4989 Specification for foam concentrate (compound) for producing

mechanical foam for fire fighting
(Parts 1 to 3):
IS 2745: 1983 Specification for nonmetal helmet for firemen and civil deffcncc personnel
(second revision)
Part 1 : 1985 Protein foam (second

Arncndment No. 1)
IS 2871:1983 Specification for branch

pipe, universal for fire fighting purposes (first revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
1S 2878 : 1986 Specification for fire
cxtinghishcr,
carbon-dioxide
type
(portable
and trolley mounted)
(second revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995), Amendment No. 1)
IS 2930 : 1980 Functional requirements for hose laying tender for fire
brigddc use (jlrst revision) (Reaffirmed
IS 3582:1984 Specification for basket
strainers for fire fighting purposes
(c!!lindrieal type) (@ revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 4308 : 1982 Specification for dry
powder for fire fighting @st revision)
(Reaffirmed January 1989) (Amendment No.. 3)
Is 4571: 1977 Specification
for
aluminium extension ladders for fire
brigade usc (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
Part 2: 1984 Aqueous film forming

foam (AFFF) (Reaffirmed November
1995, Amendment No.2)
Part 3 : 1987 Fluoro protein
foam
IS 5131:1986 Specification for dividing breeching with control, for fire

brigade use @st revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 5290:1993 Specification for landing
valve (third revision)
1S 5486:1985 Specification for quick
release knife (@r revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 5490 Specification for refills for
portable fire extinguishers and chemical fire engines:
Part 1:1977 For soda acid portable fire
extinguishers (/irst revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992, Amendment
No. 2)
Part 2:1977 For foam type portable fire
extinguishers (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
Februaty 1992, Amendment No. 2)
Part 3:1979 For soda acid chemical
fire engines, 50 litre capacity (@t
IV.61
, ..@_
(Reaffirmed
Amendment No. 1)
revision)
Fcbrua~
IS 8442:1977 Specification for stand

post type water monitor for fire fighting (Rcaffirmccl
November
1995,
Amendment No. 3)
1992,
Part 4: 1979 For foam chemical fire

engines, 50 litrc capacity (@l revision)
IS 9972:1981 Specification for automatic sprinkler heads (Reaffirmed

IS 5505:1985 Specification for multiedged rescue axe (non-wedging) (@

revirion) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 10204:1982 Specification for portable fire cxtingulshcr mechanical foam

type (Reaffirmed
November 1995,
Amendment No. 3)
IS 5506:1979
Specification for 50-1
capacity chemical fire engine, soda acid
type
(first revision) (Reaffirmed
IS 5507: 1979 Specification for 50-1
capacity chemical fire engine, foam
type
(firs[ revision) (Reaffirmed
IS 5612 Specification for hose-clamps
and hose-bandages for fire brigade use
Part 1 : 1977 Hose clamps ~rst
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992,
Amendment No. 1)
Part 2 : 1977 Hose bandages (@t
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 5714:1981 Specification for hydrant,
stand-pipe for fire fighting (@t revision)
IS 6026:1985 Specification for hand
operated sirens fjirst revtiion) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 6067 : 1983 Functional requirements for water tender, Type X for
fire brigade use (@t revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
fire extinguishers, water ~pe (stored
pressure) (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
1S 8090: 1992 Specification for couplings, branch pipe, nozzle, used in
hose reel tubing for fire fighting
~rst revision) (Reaffirmed November
1995)
beaters (first revtiibn)
IS 8149 : 1994 Functional requirements for twin C02 fire extinguishers
(trolley mounted) (/hxt revision)
IS 8423: 1994 Specification for controlled percolating hose for fire fighting (@t revision)
IV.62
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
IS 10460 : 1983 Functional requirements for small foam tender for fire
brigade use (Reaffirmed November
IS 10474:1983 Specification for 150
litre capacity chemical fire engine,
foam type (Reaffirmed
November
1995)
IS 10658:1983 Specification for higher
capacity dry powder fire extinguisher
(trolley
mounted)
(Reaffirmed
IS 11101 : 1984 Specification for extended branch pipe for fire brigade use
IS 11108:1984 Specification for portable fire extinguisher halon-1211 type
IS 10993 : 1984 Functional requirements for 2000 kg dry powder tender
for fire brigade use (Reaffirmed
for
bromochloro
difluoromethane
(Halon-1211) for fire fighting (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 884:1985 Specification for first aid
hose reel for fire fighting (@t revision)
safety of industrial buildings: Electrical
generating and distributing stations
(@t revision)
IS 6382:1984
Code of practice for
design and installation of fixed carbon
dioxide fire extinguishing system (/irst
Amendment No. 1)
IS 1649:1962 Code of practice for
p.:,
!
,,
~,

safety of industrial buildings : Tca factories (first revision) (Reaffirmed
Februa~ 1996)
chimneys for domestic heating appliances (@t revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
(15)
(16)
(17)

safety of buildings (general): Details of
construction
(@f revision) (Reaffirmed August 1994)
IS 4963:1987 Recommendations for
buildings and facilities for the physically handicapped (@ revision) (Reaffirmed October 1992)
IS 4878:1986 Byelaws for construction
of cinema buildings (first revision)
(Reaffirmed 1991)
1S 1646:1982 Code of practice for fire
installations
(first revision) (Reaffirmed December 1990)
safety of industrial buildings : Cotton
ginning and pressing (including cotton
seed delintering)
factories
(/irst
safety of industrial buildings : Electrical generating and distributing stations
(second revision)
safety of industrial buildings : Viscose
rayon yam and/or staple fibre plants (first
revirion) (Reaffirmed Februaty 1996)
safety of industrial buildings : Cotton
textile mills (jirst revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
safety of industrial buildings: General
storage and warehousing including
cold storage (@f revision) (Reaffirmed February 1996)
safety of industrial buildings: Coal pulverizers and associated equipment (first
safety of industrial buildings : Jute
mi 11s (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 4209:1987 Code of safety in chemical laboratories @rst revision) (Reaffirmed February 1993)
safety of industrial
buildings
:
Aluminium/Magnesium powder tktories
(fintrwirim)
(ReaftirmedFebruary 1993)
1S6329:1971 Codeofpmticeforfi resafety

of industrial buildings: Saw milk and wood
works (Rcaflirmcd February 1996)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
1S9109:1979 Code of practice for fire

safety of industrial buildings : Paint
and Varnish factories (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
1S655:1963 Specification for metal air
ducts (revised) (Reaffirmed December
1991 Amendment No. 3)
selection,
installation
and maintenance of automatic fire detection and
alarm system (second revision )
IS 11360:1985 Specification for smoke
detectors for use in automatic electrical fire alarm systcm (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
1S 8758:1993 Rccomrncndations for
fire precautionary measures in the construction of temporary structures and
pandals (/7rstrevision)
1S 659:1964 Safety code for air conditioning (Reaffirmed 1991, Amendment No. 1)
IS 12777 : 1989 Fire safety-flamespread of productsMethod for classification (Reaffirmed August 1994)
IS 9457:1980 Safety colours and safety
signs (Reaffirmed 1992)
IS 12349 : 1988 Fire protection
Safety sign (Reaffirmed February 1993)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
IS 12407: 1988 Graphic symbols for

fire protection
plan (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
provision and maintenance of water
supplies and fire fighting (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 12458:1988 Method of test for fire
resistance test for fire stops (Reaffirmed February 1993)
safety in hotels
IS 3844: 1989 Code of practice for
installation and maintenance of internal fire hydrants and hose reel on
premises (/list revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
APPENDIX
(Clause 4.1.1.7)
CALORIFIC VALUES OF COMMON MATERIALS AND TYPICAL
VALUES OF FIRE LOAD DENSITY
B-1 The calorific values of some common
materials are given in Table 25 for guidance.
TABLE25C&ORIFIC VALUESOF COMMON
MATERIALS
MATERIAL
CALORtFIC
VALUE
WOOD
EQUIVALENT
(103kJ/kg-j*
- (kg/kg)
28.6
30.8
28.4
27.5
20.9
22.0
17.6
1.75
1.61
1.56
1.19
1.25
1.00
39.6
47.1
49.1
47.7
41.6
42.9
44.9
52.8
45.3
39.6-44.0
46.0
47.3
46.2
2.25
2.68
2.79
2.71
2.36
2.44
2.55
3.00
2.58
2.3-2.5
2.61
2.69
2.63
28.4
21.1
31.9
1.61
1.20
1.81
1.31
0.94
Polyester
23.1
16.5
17.8
48.4
48.4
41.8
20.9
24.6
35.2
22.0
22.0
2.75
2.75
2.38
1.19
1.40
2.00
1.25
1.25
Common Soliak
Asphalt
Bitumen
carbon
Cotton (dry)
Flax
Furs & skins
Hair (animal)
Leather
Ozokerite (wax)
Paper (average)
Paraffin wax
38.3
33.4
32.1
15.8
14.3
18.7
20.9
17.6
43.3
15.4
40.9
2.13
1.90
1.83
0.90
0.81
1.06
1.19
1.00
2.46
0.88
2.33
Solid Fuels
Anthracite
Bituminous Coal
Charmal
Coke (average)
Peata
Sub-bituminous Ceal
Woods (hard or softwood)
1.66
Hydrocarbons
Benzene
Butane
Ethane
Ethylene
Fuel Oil
Gas Oil
Hexane
Methane (natural gas)
Octane
Paraffin
Pentane
Propane
PropyIene
MArERtAL
CALORIFIC
WOOD
VALUE
EouNAU2NT
(103 kJ/kg-l)*
(kg/kg)
33.0
37.4
13.2
37.6
20.9
35.2
21.6
19.6
1.88
2.13
0.75
2.14
1.19
2.00
1.23
1.11
14.1
11.0
9.9
29.5
18.1
14.1
14.1
29.5
15.8
13.9
16.1
15.4
14.3
0.80
0.63
0.56
1.68
1.03
0.80
0.80
1.68
0.90
0.79
0.91
0.88
0.81
29.7
25.1
17.6
134.2
1.69
1.43
1.00
7.63
1.36
Pitch
Rubbez
Straw
Tallows
Tan bark
Tar (bituminous)
WOOI(raw)
wool (scoured)
Foodrtufi
Barely
Bran
Bread
Butter
Cheese (Cheddar)
Corn meal
Ffour
Margarine
Oatmeal
Rice
Soya been flour
Sugar
WholeWheat
Miscellaneous
Acetone
Acetafdehyde
Formaldehyde
Hydrogen
Magnesium
24.0
AkohoI!~
Ethyl Afeohol
Methyl Afcohol
Propyl Afcohol
Po~mers
Casein
Cellulose
Cellulose Acetate
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polystyrene
Pofyvinylchloride
Pofymethylmethacrylate
Polyurethane
Polyamide (nylon)
1.01
*1 kJ is approximately equal to 1 Btu so the figures in

the tables are alao equivalent to Btulkg.
B-2 The typical values fire load density for

arriving at the classification of occupancy
hazard is given in Table 26 for guidance.
TABLE26 TYPICALVALUESOF FfRE LOAD
DENSITY
BUILDING
TYPE
FIRELCMODENStTY(EXPRESSED
AS
WOODEqUiValent
I&xtAMs
PER
SQUARE
Mmtts
1. Residential (A-1 & A-2)
25
2. Residential (A-3 to A-5)
25
3. Institutional and Educational

(B& C)
4. Assembfy (D)
25-50
25
5. Business (E)
6. Mercantile (F)
7. Industrial (G)
up to
250
up to
150
8. Storage and Hazardous (H& J)
up to 500
25-50
NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
..
i.,
.
APPENDIX
(Clause 4.1.1.7)
LIST OF OCCUPANCIES
LOW H4.ZARD OCCUPANCIES
Assembly buildings small (D-4 & D-5)
Abrasive manufacturing premises
Aerated water factories
Agarbatti manufacturing premises
Analytical and /or Q.C. Laboratories
Arecanut slicing and/or Betelnut factories
Asbestos steam packing and lagging manufacturers
Battery charging And service stations
Battery manufacturing
Breweries
BrickWorks
Canning factories
Cardamom factories
Cement factories and /or asbestos or concrete
products manufacturing premises
Ceramic factories, crockery, stoneware pipe
manufacturing
Clay works
Clock and watch manufacturing
Clubs
Coffee curing, roasting and grinding factories
Condensed milk factories, milk pasturising
plants and dairies
Confectionery manufacturing
Dwellings, lodges, dormitories, etc
Educational and research institutions
Electric lamps (incandescent and fluorescent)
and T.V. tube manufacturing
Electroplating works
Engineering workshops
Fruits and vegetables dehydrating and drying
factories
Fruits products and condiment factories
Glass and glass fibre manufacturing
Godowns and warehouses (non-combustible
goods)
Gold thread/gilding factories
Gum and/or glue and gelatine manufacturing
Ice candy and ice-cream and ice factories
Ink (excluding printing ink) factories
Mica products manufacturing

Office premises
Pottery works
Places of worship
Poultry farms
Residential buildings (A-1 to A-4) (except
hotels A-5)
Salt crushing factories/refineries stables
Sugar candy manufacturing
Sugar factories and refineries
Tanneries
Umbrella assembling factories
Vermicelli factories
Water treatment/filtration
plants and water
pump houses
Zinc/copper factories
MODERATE HAZARD OCCUP~CIES
Airport and other transportation
terminal
buildings
Aluminium factories
Assembly buildings (D-1, D-2, and D-3)
Atta and cereal grinding
Bakeries and biscuit factories
Beedi factories
Bobbin factories
Book-binders,
envelopes and paper bag
manufacturing
Camphor boiling
Candle works
Carbon paper/typewriter ribbon makers
Card board box manufacturing
Carpenters, wood wool and firniture makers
Carpet and durries factories
Cashewnut factories
Chemical manufactures (using raw materials
having F.P > 23C)
Cigar and cigarette factories
Coir factories
Cold storage premises
computer installations
Cork products manufacturing
Iv-d
:...d
,
(coir, carpets, rugs and tobacco) (hides and

skin presses)
Dry cleaning, dyeing and laundries, cable
manufacturing
Electric substations/distribution stations
Electrical generating stations except u/g
powerhouses
Enamelware factories
Filler and wax paper manufacturing
Flour mills
Garment makers
Ghee factories (other than vegetable)
Godowns and warehouses (other than noncombustible goods)
Grains and seed disintegrating or crushing
Grease manufacturing
Hosiery, lace, embroidery and thread
Hospitals
including
X ray and other
diagonastic clinics (institutional buildings)
Incandescent Gas Mantle manufacturers
Industrial
gas manufacturing
(only
halogenated hydroearbons/inert gases)
Man made yarn/fibre
(except acrylic
fibre~arn)
Manure and fertilizer works (blending, mixing
and granulating only)
Mercantile occupancies (departmental stores,
shopping complex, etc)
Mineral oil blending and processing
Museums, archieves, record rooms
Oil and leather cloth factories
Open storage of flammable liquids (in drums,
cans, etc)
Oxygen plants
Plastic goods manufacturing
Paper and cardboard
mills (except raw
material yard)
Piers, wharves, dockyards
Plywood/wood veneering factories
Printing press premises
Pulverizing and crushing mills
Residential apartments, hotels, cafes, restaurants
Rice mills
Rope works
Rubber goods manufacturing
Rubber tyres and tubes manufacturing
Shellac factories
Silk filiatures
Iv.ti
Soaps and glycerine factories

Spray painting
Starch factories
Tea factories (including blending packing of
tea)
Telephone exchanges, garages
Textile mills
Tobaeeo chewing and pan masala making
Tobaeeo rediying factories
Woollen mills
HIGH IL4ZARD OCCUPtiCIES
A) Aircraft hangars
Aluminium/magnesium powder plants
Bitumanised paper/hessian cloth/tar felt
manufacturing
Bulk storage of flammable liquids (tank
farm, etc)
Celluloid goods making
Chemical manufacturers
(where raw
materials have a F.P. <23 C)
Cigarette filter manufacturing
Cinema
films and T.V. production
studios
Coal, coke and charcoal ball and briquettes making
Collieries, steel plants
Cotton seeds cleaning and delinting factories
Cotton waste factories
Distilleries
Duplicating/stencil paper making
Fire works manufacture
Foamed plastic and/or converting plants
Godowns of warehouses
(combustible/hazardous goods) (H)
Grass, hay, fodder and bhoosa (chaff)
Hazardous oeeupancy buildings (J)
Industrial gas manufacturing
(except
halogenated hydrocarbon gases/inert
gases)
Industrial units (G3 occupancies)
Jute mills and Jute presses
Linoleum factories
Man made fibres (only acrylic fibre/yam
making)
Match factories
Mattress and pillow makings (foam plastics)
Metal or tin printers (if more than 50%
is engineering,
shift to ordina~
hazard)
?.
..
_ -,..,,
,~:
.1*
r,
,!
\
1
i
,{
\
~
-:
.
Oil mills
Oil extraction plants
Oil terminals/depots
Paints /varnish factories
Paper and cardboard mills (only raw
material yard)
Pressing factories
Printing ink making
Resin,lamp
black and turpentine
manufacture
Saw mills
Surgical cotton manufacturing
Tarpaulin and canvas proofing factories
Turpentine and resin distilleries

~pe retreading and resoling factories
Underground shopping complexes (F-3)
B) Ammonia and urea synthesis plants
Explosive factories
LPG bottling plants
Petrochemical plants
Petroleum refineries
NOTE
Incaseof complexes having segregated plants
with varying degrees- of hazards, the competent
authoritv havine jurisdictions shall he consulted to
decidetie level~~protectionsto be provided.
APPENDIX
(Clauses 7.9.2,7.11.1,7.18,9.2,
FIRE PROTECTION
10.3,11.2,13.2,14.2,
REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS

15 m IN HEIGHT OR ABOVE
D-O GENERAL
a)
D-O.l In addition to the provisions of Part IV

Fire protection, the Authority may insist on
suitable protection measures in a building
15 m in height or above.
b)
D-1 CONSTRUCTION
D-1.l All materials of constructions in load
bearing elements, stainvays and corridors and
facades shall be non-combustible.
c)
d)
D-1.2 The interior finish materials shall not

have a flame spreadability rating exceeding
Class 1 (see 7.15.2).
D-1.3 The internal walls or staircase shall be
of brick or reinforced concrete with a minimum of 2 h fire rating.
D-1. 4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the
top; the vent openings shall be of 0.5 mz in the
external wall and the top. If the staircase cannot be ventilated, because of location or other
reasons, a positive pressure 50 Pa shall be
maintained inside. The mechanism for pressurizing the staircase shall operate automatically with the fire alarm. The roof of the shaft
Shall be 1 m above the surrounding roof. Glazing or glass bricks shall not be used in the
staircase.
D-1.5 Lijlts
lows :
of lifts shall be as fol-
15.2,16.2 and 17.2)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire

rating of 2 h, lifts shafts shall have a vent
at the top of area not less than 0.2 m2.
Lift motor room shall be located
preferably on top of the shaft and
separated from the shaP hy the floor of
the room,
Landing doors in lift enclosures shall
have a fire resistance of not less than
half an hour.
The number of lifts in one lift bank
shall not exceed 4. Individual shafts in
a bank shall be separated by a wall
of 2 h fire rating.
Lift car door shall have afire resistance
rating of half an hour.
For buildings 15 m in height or above
collapsible gates shall not be permitted
for lifts and shall have solid doors with
fire resistance of at least 1 h.
If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core
of the building, a positive pressure between 25 and 30 Pa shall be maintained
in the lobby and a positive pressure of
50 Pa shall be maintained in the lift
shaft. The mechanism for pressurisation shall act automatically with the
fire alarm; it shall be possible to
operate this mechanically also.
Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
cdre of the building, shall be through a
self-closing smoke stop door of half an
hour fire resistance.
IV-67
.,
])
k)
m)
n)
P)
q)
Iv.@
Lifts shall not normally communicate

with the basement: if, however, lifts are
in communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurised as in
(g), with self-closing door as in (h).
Grounding switch,
at ground floor
level, shall be provided on all the lifts
to enable the fire serviee to ground the
lifts.
Telephone or other communication
facilities shall be provided in lift ears
for building of 30 m in height and
above. Communication system for lifts
shall be connected to fire control room
for the building.
Suitable arrangements such as providing slope in the floor of lift lobby, shall
be made to prevent water used during
fire fighting, etc, at any landing from
entering the lift shafts.
A sign shall be posted and maintained
on every floor at or near the lift indicating that in ease of fire, occupants shall
use the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign shall also contain a plan
for each floor showing the locations of
the stairways.
Alternate source of power supply shall
be provided for all the lifts through a
manually operated changeover switch.
FIRE LIms Following details shall
apply for a fire lift:
i) To enable fire sefiees personnel
to reach the upper floors with the
minimum delay, one fire lift per
1200 m2 of floor area shall be
permitted and shall be available
for the exclusive use of the
firemen in an emergeney.
ii) The lift shall have a floor area of
not less than 1.4 m2, It shall have
loading capacity of not less than
545 kg (8 persons lift) with automatic closing doors of minimum
0.8 m width.
iii) The electric supply shall be on a
separate service from electric
supply mains in a building and the
cables run in a route safe from fire,
that is, within the lift shaft. Lights
and fans in the elevators having
wooden panelling or sheet steel
construction shall be operated
on 24 volt supply.
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ift should be
Fire fighting
provided with a ~eiling hatch for
use in ease of emergeney, so that
when the ear gets stuck up, it shall
be easily openable.
In case of failure of normal
electric supply, it shall automatically trip over to alternate supply. For apartment houses, this
changeover of supply could be
done through manually operated
changeover switch. Alternatively, the lift shall be so wired that in
ease of power failure, it comes
down at the ground level and
comes to stand-still with door
open.
The operation of a fire lift is by a
simple toggle or two-button
switch situated in a glass fronted
box adjacent to the lift at the
entrance level. When the switch
is on, landing call-points will become inoperative and the lift will
be on ear control only or on a
priority control deviee. When the
switch is off, the lift will return to
normal working. This lift can be
used by the occupants in normal
times.
The words FIRE LIFT shall be
conspicuously
displayed
in
fluorescent paint on the lift landing doors at each floor level.
The speed of the fire lift shall be
such that it ean reach the top
floor from ground levsl within 1
min.
D-1. 6 Basements
D-1.6.1 Each basement shall be separately
ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area
(aggregate) not less than 2.5 pereent of the
floor area spread evenly round the perimeter
of the basement shall be provided in the form
of grills, or breakable stallboard lights or pavement lights or by way of shafts. Alternatively,
a system of air inlets shall be provided at basement floor level and smoke outlets at basement ceiling level. Inlets and extracts may be
terminated at ground level with stallboard or
pavement lights as before, but ducts to convey
fresh air to the basement floor level have to be
laid. Stallboard and pavement lights should be
in positions easily accessible to the fire brigade
U_
and dearly marked SMOKE OUTLET or

AIR INLET with an indication of area served
at or near the opening.
storage of flammable oils and gases, banquet

hall, auditorium, discotheque, restaurants,
ctc, shall not be permitted
D-1.6.2 The staircase of basements shall be of

cncloscd type having fire resistance of not less
than 2 h and shall bc situated at the periphery
of the basement to be entered at ground level
only from the open air and in such positions
that smoke from any fire in the basement shall
not obstruct any exit serving the ground and
upper stores of the building and shall communicate with basement through a lobby
provided with fire resisting self closing doors
of the 1 h resistance. For travel distance
refer 8.5.1. If the travel distance exceeds as
given in Table 23, additional staircases shall be
provided at proper places.
The basement shall not be premitted below

the ward block of a hospital/nursing home
unless it is fully sprinkled.
D-1.6.3 ln multi-storcy basements, intake

ducts may serve all basement levels, but each
basement and basement compartment shall
have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts.
D-1.6.4 Mechanical extractors for smoke
venting systcm from .lowcr basement levels
shall also bc provided. The systcm shall be of
such design as to operate on actuation of
heat/smoke sensitive detectors or sprinklers,
if installed, and shall have a considerably superior pcrforrnancc compared to the standard
units. It shall also have an arrangement to start
it manually.
D-1. 6.4.1 Mechanical extractors shall have an
internal locking arrangement, so that extractors shall continue to operate and supply fans
shall stop automatically with the actuation of
fire detectors.
D-1.6.4.2 Mechanical extractors shall be
designed to permit 30 air changes per hour in
case of fire or distress call. However, for normal operation, air changes schcdulc shall be as
given in 7.11.5.
Building services such as electrical substations, boiler rooms shall not be used below
first basement if more than one basement is
provided.
D-1. 6.6 If cut outs are provided from basements to the upper floors or to the atmosphere, all sides cut out openings in the
basements shall be protected by sprinkler
head at close spacing so as to form a water
curtain in the event of a fire.
D-1. 7 Openable windows on external walls
shall be fitted with such locks which can be
opened by a firemans axe.
D-1.8 All floors shall be compartmented with
area not exceeding 750 m2 by a separation wall
with 2 h fire rating, for floors with sprinklers
the area may be increased by 50 percent. In
long building, the fire separation walls shall be
at distances
not exceeding 40 m. For
departmental stores, shnpping centres and
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2
for compartmentation. Where this is not possible, the spacings of the sprinklers shall be
suitably reduced.
D-1.8.1 h is essential to make provisions for
drainage of any such water on all floors to
prevent or minimise water damage of the contents. The drain pipes should be provided on
the external wall for drainage of water from all
floors. On large area floors several such pipes
may be necessa~ which should be spaced 30 m
apart,
D-1. 9 Service DuctslShajix
a)
D-1. 6.4.3 Mechanical extractors shall have an

alternative source of supply.
D-1.6.4.4 Ventilating
ducts shall be integrated with the structure and made out of
brick masonry or RCC as far as possible and
when this duct crosses the transformer area or
electrical switch board, fire dampers shall be
provided.
D-1. 6.5 Use of basements for kitchens working on gas fuel for departmental stores, shops,
b)
Service ducts and shafts shall be

enclosed by walls of 2 h and doors of
1 h, fire rating. All such ducts/shafts
shall be properely sealed and fire
stopped at all floor levels.
A vent opening at the top of the service
shaft shall be provided having between
one-fourth and one-half of the area of
the shaft.
D-I.10 Refuse chutes shall have opening at

least 1 m above roof level or renting purpose
and they shall have an enclosure wall of non-
..&,
ground Icvcl or first basement with

direct access from outside or from the
corridor for the purpose of termination of electric supply from the
licensees service and alternative supply cables. The doors provided for the
service room shall have fire resistance
of not less than 2 h; and
NOTE If scrviccroom is located at the first
combustible material with fire resistance of

not ICSSthan 2 h. They shall not bc Iocatcd
within the staircase cnclosurc or service shafts,
or air-conditioning shafts inspection panel
and doors shall bc tight fitting with 1 h fire
resistance; the chutes should bc as far away as
possible from exits.
D-1. 11 Refuge Area
Provisions contained in 8.12.3 shall apply for
all buildings except multi-family dwellings,
refuge area of not lCSSthan 15 m2 shall bc
provided on the external walls.
D-1.12 Electrical
the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
IV.70
basement, it should have automatic fire cxtingushing system.

g)
services shall conform to
The electric distribution cableshviring

shall bc laid in a separate duct. The
duct shall be sealed at every floor with
non-combustible materials having the
same fire resistance as that of the duct.
Low and medium voltage wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling shall
run in separate conduits;
Water mains, telephone lines, intercom lines, gaspipes or any other service
line shall not be laid in the duct for
electrical cables: Use of bus ducts/solid
rising mains instead of cables is
prefered.
Separate circuits for fire fighting
pumps, lifts, staircases and corridor
lighting and blowers for pressurizing
system shall be provided directly from
the main switch gear panel and these
circuits shall be laid in separate conduit
pipes, so that fire in one circuit will not
affect the others. Master switches controlling essential service circuits shall
be clearly Iabelled;
The inspection panel doors and any
other opening in the shaft shall be
provided with air-tight fire doors having
fire resistance of not less than 2 m
Medium and low voltage wiring running in shafts, and within false ceiling
shall run in metal conduit. Arty 230 V
wiring for lighting or other services,
above false ceiling, shall have 660 V
grade insulation. The false ceiling, including all fbttures used for its suspension, shall be of non-combustible
material;
An independent and well ventilated
service room shall be provided on the
h)
If the licensees agree to provide meters

on upper floors, the licensees cables
shall be scgrcgatcd from consurncrs
cables by providing a partition in the
duct. Meter rooms on upper floors
shall not open into stair case
enclosures and shall bc ventilated
dircclly to open air outside; and
Suitable circuit breakers shall bc
provided at the appropriate points.
D-1.13 Gas supply shall conform to the following:

a)
TOWN GAS/L.P. GAS SUPPLY PIPIiS

Where gas pipes are run in buildings,
the same shall bc run in separate shafts
exclusively for this purpose and these
shall be on external walls, away from
the staircases. There shall no interconnection of this shaft with the rest of the
floors. LPG distribution pipes shall always be below the false ceiling. The
length of these pipes shall bc as short
as possible. In the case of kitchen cooking range area, apart from providing
hood, covering the entire cooking
range, the exhaust system should be
designed to take care of 30 m3 per
minute per m2 of hood projected area.
It should have grease filters using
metallic grill to trap oil vapours escaping into the fume hood.
NOTE For detailed information on gas pipe
installations, reference may be made to Part IX
Plumbing Semites, Section 3 Gas supply.
b)
All wiring
fibre glass
in fume hoods shall be of

insulation.
Thermal
detec-
tors shall be installed htto fume hoods

of large kitchens for hotels, hospitals,
and similar areas located ht high rise
buildings. Arrangements
shall be made
for automatic
tripping
of the exhaust
fan in case of fire. If LPG is used, the
same shall be shut off. The voltage
shall be 24 V or 100 V dc operated
with
.--J
c)
cxtkrnal rectifier. The valve shall be of

the hand re-set type and shall be located in an area segregated from cooking ranges. Valves shall be easily
accessible. The hood shall have manual
facility for steam or carbon dioxide gas
injection, depending on duty condition;
Gas meters shall be housed in a suitably constructed metal cupboard located
in a well ventilated space, keeping in
view the fact that LPG is heavier than
air and town-gas is lighter than air.
need not be conncctcd to the stand-by pump.

Where parallel HV/LV supply from a separate
sub-station
is provided with appropriate
transformer for emergency, the provision of
generator may be waived in consultation with
the Authority.
D-1.16 Transformers
following .
a)
D-1.14 Illumination of Means of Exit

Staircase and corridor lights shall conform to
the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
The staircase and ,corridor lighting

shall be on separate circuits and shall
be independently connected so as it
could be operated by one switch installation on the ground floor easily accessible to fire fighting staff at any time
irrespective of the position of the individual control of the light points, if
any. It should be of miniature circuit
breaker type of switch so as to avoid
replacement of fuse in case of crisis;
Staircase and corridor lighting shall
also be connected to alternative supply. Ile alternative source of supply may
be provided by battery continuously
trickle charged from the electric mains;
Suitable arrangements shall be made
by installing double throw switches to
ensure that the lighting installed in the
staircase and the corridor does not get
connected to two sources of supply
simultaneously. Double throw switch
shall be installed in the service room
for terminating the stand-by supply
and
Emergency lights shall be provided in
the staircase and corridor.
D-1.15 A stand-by electric generator shall be

installed to supply power to staircase and corridor lighting circuits, fire lifts, the stand-by
fire pump, pressurisation fans and blowers,
smoke extraction and damper systems in case
of failure of normal electric supply. The generator shall be capable of taking starting curreip of all the machines and circuits stated
above simultaneously. If the stand-by pump is
driven by diesel engine, the generator supply
b)
c)
d)
e)
shall conform
to the
A sub-station or a switch-station with

apparatus having more than 2 000
litrcs of oil shall not ordinarily be located in the basement. If transformers
are housed in the building below the
ground lCVC1
they shall necessarily bc in
the first basement in a separate fire
resisting room of 4 h rating. The room
shall necessarily beat the periphe~ of
the basement. The entrance to the
room shall be provided with a fire
resisting door of 2 h fire rating. A curb
(sill) of a suitable height shall bc
provided at the entrance in order to
prevent the flow of oil from a ruptured
transformer into other parts of the
basement, Direct access to the transformer room shall be provided,
preferably from outside. The switch
gears shall be housed in a room
separated from the transformer bays by
a fire resisting wall with fire resistance
of not less than 4 h.
The oil filled transformers, if housed in
basement shall be protected by an
automatic high velocity water spray
system.
In case the transformer are housed in
the basement, totally segregated from
other areas of the basements by 4 h fire
resisting walls with an access directly
from outside, they may be protected by
carbon dioxide or any other suitable
system,
When housed at ground floor level, if
they shall be cut off from the other
portion of premises by fire resisting
walls of 4 h fire resistance.
Oil filled transformers shall not be
housed on any floor above the ground
floor.
Soak pit of approved design shall be
provided where the aggregate oil
capacity of the apparatus does not exceed 2000 litres. Where the oil capacity
exceeds 2000 liters, a tank of RCC
2)
When the automatic fire alarm

operates, the respective airhandling units of the air-conditioning system shall automatically be
switched off.
NOTE
Fusible link operatea on heat detection
construction of capacity capable of accommodating the entire oil of the

transformers shall be provided at a
lower level to collect the oil from the
catch-pit to the tank shall be of noncombustible construction and shall be
provided with a flame-arrester.
system.
m)
D-1.1 7 Air-conditioning
following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
j)
k)
IV-*
shall conform to the
Escape routes like staircases, common

corridors, lift lobbies, etc, shall not be
used as return air passage.
The ducting shall be constructed of
substantial gauge metal in accordance
with good practice IV (18).
wherever the ducts pass through fire
walls or floors, the opening around the
ducts shall be sealed with fire resisting
materials, such as asbestos rope, vermiculite concrete, or other suitable
sealing materials.
As far as possible, metallic ducts shall
be used even for the return air instead
of space above the false ceiling.
Where plenum is used for return air
passage, ceiling and its fixtures shall be
of non-combustible material.
The materials used for insulating the
duct system (inside or outside) shall be
of non-combustible materials. Glass
wool shall not be wrapped or secured
by any material of combustible nature.
Area more than 750 m2 on individual
floor shall be segregated by a fire wall
and automatic fire dampers for isolation shall be provided [see (h)].
Air ducts serving main floor areas, corridors, etc, shall not pass through the
staircase enclosure.
The air-handing units shall be separate
for each floor and air ducts for every
floor shall be separated in no way interconnected with the ducting of any
other floor.
If the air-handling unit serves more
than one floor, the recommendations
given above shall be complied with in
addition to the conditions given below
1) Proper arrangements by way of
automatic fire dampers working
on fusible linldor smoke detector
for isolating all ducting at every
floor from the main riser shall be
made.
The vertical shaft for treated fresh

shall be of masonry construction.
air
n)
The air filters of the air-handling

units
shall be of non-combustible
materials.
P)
The air-handling
unit room shall not
be used for storage of any combustible
materials.
q)
Inspection
panels shall be provided
in
the main trunking
to facilitate
the
cleaning of ducts of accumulated
dust
and to obtain
fire dampers.
r)
access for mahttenance
of
No combustible
material shall be fixed
nearer than 15 cm to any duct unless
such duct is properly
enclosed
and
protected
with
non-combustible
material
(glass wool or spunglass
with
neoprene
facing enclosed and wrapped
with aluminium
sheeting)
at least 3.2
mm thick and which would not readily
conduct heat.
s)
Fire Dampers
1)
These shall be located in conditioned air ducts and return

ah
ducts/passages
at the following
points:
i)
ii)
2)
At the fire separation
wall.
Where
ductslpassages
enter
the central
vertical
shaft.
iii)
Where
through
the
ducts
floors, and
pass
iv)
At the inlet of supply air

duct and the return air duct
of each compartment
on
every floor.
The dampers shall operate automatically and shall simultaneously

switch off the air-handling
fans.
Manual operation
facilities shall
also be provided.
NOTE For blowers, where extraction
system and dust accumulators are used,
3)
dampemshallbeprovided.
Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke
extraction shafts) for buildings
more than 24 m in height.
NATIONAL BUILDING
CODEOF INDIA
In non-ventilated
lobbies/corridors
operated by fusible
link/smoke detecand
with
tors
manual control.
For other
On operation
of
buildings
smoke- detection
system and with
manual control.
Automatic fire dampers shall be
so arranged as to close by gravity
in the direction of air movement
and to remain tightly closed on
operation of a fusible linidsmoke
detector.
For
apartment
houses
4)
D-1.18 Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms

shall conform to Indian Boiler Act. Further,
the following additional aspects may be taken
into accnunt in the location of boiler room:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The boilers shall not be allowed in subbasement, but may be allowed in the
basements
away from the escape
routei.
The boilers shall be installed in a fire
resisting room of 4 h fire resistance
rating, and this room shall be situated
on the periphery of the basement.
Catch-pits shall be provided at the low
level.
Entry to this room shall be provided
with a composite door of 2 h fire resistance.
The boiler room shall be provided with
fresh air inlets and smoke exhausts
directly to the atmosphere.
The furnace oil tank for the boiler, if
located in the adjoining room shall be
separated by fire resisting wall of 4 h
rating. The entrance to this room shall
be provided with double composite
doors. A curb of suitable height shall
be provided at the entrance in order to
prevent the flow of oil into the boiler
room in case of tank rupture.
Foam inlets shall be provided on the
external walls of the building near the
ground level to enable the fire services
to use foam in case of fire.
,
D-2. PROVIS1ON OF FIRST-AID

FIGHTING APPLIANCES
FIRE
D-2.1 The first-aid fire fighting equipment

shall be provided on all floors, including basePARTtV FIREPROTECTION
ments, lift rooms, etq in accordance with good

practice IV (9) Appendix A in consultation
with the Authority.
D-3. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
D-3.1 ~1 buildings with heights of 15 m or
above shall be equipped with manually
operated electrical fire alarm (MOEFA) system and automatic fire atarm system [refer IV
(19) of Appendix A]. However, apartment
buildings between 15 m and 30 m in height may
be exempted from the installation of automatic fire alarm system provided the local fire
brigade is suitably equipped for dealing with
fire 15 m in height or above and in the opinion
of the Authority, such building does not ccmstitute a hazard to the safety of the adjacent
property or occupants of the building itself.
D-3.1.1 Manually operated electrical fire
alarm system shall be installed in a building
with one or more call boxes located at each
floor. The call boxes shall conform to IV (19)
of Appendix A
D-3.1.2 The installation of call boxes in hostels and such other places where these are
likely to be misused shall as far as possible be
avoided. Location of call boxes in dwelling
units shall preferably be inside the building.
D-4. LIGHTNING
BUILDINGS
PROTECTION
OF
D-4.1 The lightning protection for buildings

shall be provided as given in Part VIII Building
services, Section 2 Electrical installations.
D-5. FIRE CONTROL ROOM
D-5.1 For all buildings 15 m in height or
above and apartment buildings with a height
of 30 m and above, there shall be a control
room on the entrance floor of the building
with communication system (suitable public
address system) to aid floors and facilities for
receiving the message from different floors.
Details of all floor plans along with the details
of fire fighting equipment and installations
shall be maintained in the fire control room.
The fire control room shall also have facilities
to detect the fire on any floor through indicator boards connectio~ fire detection and
alarm systems on all floors. The fire staff incharge of the fire control room shall be
responsible for the maintenance of the various
services and fire fighting equipment and
N-73
installations in co-ordination with security,

electrical and civil staff of the building.
shall be strictly maintained by the occupants

and/or the owner of the building.
D-6. FIRE OFFICER/SUPERVISOR

FOR
HOTELS, BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS
WITH HEIGHT
MORE
THAN 30 m
D-8. FIRE DRILLS AND FIRE ORDERS

D-8.1 Fire notices/orders shall be prepared to
fulfil the requirements of fire fighting and
evacuation from the buildings in the event of
fire and other emergenq. The occupants shall
be made thoroughly conversant with their action in the event of emergency, by displaying
fire notices at vantage points and also through
regular training. Such notices should be displayed prominently in broad lettering.
D-6.1 A qualified Fire Officer with experience of not less than 3 years shall be
appointed
who will be available on the
premises.
D-6.2 The Fire Officer shall:
a)
maintain the fire fighting equipment in

good working condition at all times,
b) prepare fire orders and fire operational
plans and get them promulgated,
c) impart regular training to the occupants of the buildings in the use of
fire fighting equipments provided on
the premises and keep them informed
about the fire emergency evacuation
plan,
d) keep proper liaison with city Fire
Brigade, and
e) ensure that all fire precautionary
measures are observed at the times.
Nom Competentauthorityhavingjurisdictionmay
insist on complianceof the aboverules in ease of
buildingshavingverylargeareas,evenif the heightis
lessthan30m.
For guidelines for fire drills and evacuation

procedures for high rise buildings, see Appendix F.
D-9. COMPARTMENTATION
D-9.1 The building shall be suitably compartmentalised so that fire/smoke remain confined to the area where fire incident has
occured and does not spread to the remaining
part of the building.
D-10. HELIPAD
D-10. I For high rise buildings above 60 m in
height, provisi& for helipad~hould be made.
D-11. MATERIALS
FOR
DECORATION/FURNISHING
INTERIOR
~-11,1 The use of materials which are combustible in nature and may spread toxic
fume/gases should not be used for interior
decoration/furnishing, etc.
D-7. HOUSE ~EPING

D-71 To eliminate fire hazards, good house
keeping, both inside and outside the building,
APPENDIX
(Clauses 15.3.3.1 and 15.5)

FIRE PROTECTION
CONSIDERATIONS
E-1.
AND SCOPE
APPLICATION
E-1.l The provisions given below are applicable only to single-storey industrial buildings (factories and storage buildings) covering
large floor areas without subdividingheparating walls which are usually designed to meet
medern production methods.
E-1.2 The requirements of fire and explosion
venting of industrial buildings, as dealt within
this section, fall under two categories:
a)
b)
IV.74
Smoke and fire venting, and

Explosion relief vents.
FOR VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL
BUILDINGS
E-2. SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING

E-2.1 The basic considerations to be kept in
mind while formulating the design and other
requirements for smoke and fire vents are as
given in E-2.1.1 to E-2.1.20.
E-2.1.1 The smoke and hot combustion
products from a fire, being lighter than the
surrounding air, tend to rise and on reaching
the roof or ceiling spread out (mushroom) on
all sides and form a layer which floats on top
of the cold air beneath. In the absence of vents,
this layer becomes progressively deeper until
the whole building is filled with hot smoky
NATION& BUILDINGCODE
OF INDIA
gases. The time consumed for this to happen

may be only a few minutes, depending on variables like, type of materials on fire, process/
storage conditions involved, etc.
E-2.1.2 The hot gases at the roof level moved
by convection currents contribute to rapid
lateral spread of fire.
E-2.1.3 The provision of properly designed
and suitably located vents inadequate number
helps the speedy removal of smoke and hot
gases, therby preventing spread of fire, besides
reducing risks of explosion of unburnt gases
and reducing damage to the contents and structure of the building by heat and smoke. In addition, they facilitate fire fighting operations, and
minimise personal hazards to the firemen.
E-2.1.4 The time taken for accumulation of
smoke and hot gases within a building on fire
being very short, the venting devices installed
shall be designed to operate in the early stage
of the fire and must be automatic so as to
ensure speed and efficiency in their operation.
E-2.1.5 The smoke and fire venting system
shall be designed in such a manner as to keep
the temperature of the combustion products
from the fire as low as possible, preferably
below approximately 150C.
E-2.1.6 Automatic venting systems are complementary to the fire extinguishing systems,
and automatic sprinklers, where provided,
should operate before the operation of the
vents; otherwise, venting may delay sprinkler
operation.
E-2.1. 7 It is easier to vent a building of smoke
than clear it of smoke once it has been filled.
E-2.1.8 Venting is particularly desirable in
large area industrial buildings or warehouses,
windowless buildings, underground structures
or in areas housing hazardous operations.
Automatic fire vents shall be provided for all
industrial occupancies (including storage
buildings) classified as medium hazard or
above having floor areas exceeding 750 m2,
irrespective of whether they are compartmentalized or not,
E-2,1.9 These provisions do not cover other
aspects, of ventilation (or lighting) designed for
regulation of temperature within a building for
personal comfort or meeting process needs.
E-2.1.1 0 Similarly, fire and smoke venting requirements as given here under are also not
PARTIV FIRE PROTECTION
applicable to multi-storey buildings, as their

requirements are different and more complex.
E-2. 1.11 It is difficult to determine precise
venting requirements on account of the many
variables involved. For instance, the rate of
combustion varies appreciably according to
the nature, shape, size and packaging of the
combustible materials as well as the size,
height and disposition
of the stacks of
materials.
E-2.1.12 In industrial buildings of floor area
less than 750 m2 and used as low fire hazard
occupancies, conventional ventilators fitted
high up near the eaves of the external walls
may serve as vents for smoke and hot gases,
provided care is taken to ensure that they are
kept open at all times or are designed to open
automatically in case of fire.
E-2.1.13 Extinction of fires by closing the
doors and windows is not likely in the case of
industrial buildings because of their large size,
where sufficient air to sustain the fire at least
in the initial stages can be expected to be
present.
E-2.1.14 Of the two types of tdlding ventilation, namely, vertical and horizcmtal, vertical
ventilation is the one commonly adopted in
the case of single-storey industrial buildings.
E-2.1.15 Since 70 to 80 percent of heat
produced in a fire is convective heat, the ventilation system has to be suitably designed to
ensure early outflow of the heat and thereby
minimize fire spread.
E-2.1.16 Combustible roof linings shall be
avoided, as they themselves will contribute to
the spread of fire, thereby multiplying the
venting problems.
E-2.1.1 7 A wind blowing across a flat roof or
a roof with a pitch under 4(P produces a negative pressure,.~hat is, it tends to draw gases out
of the building and so aids venting of hot gases.
Wind blowing across a roof of pitch greater
than 40 will draw gases out on the leeward
side, but oppose outward flow on the
windward side of the roof.
E-2.1.18 For vents to work at full efficiency,
the area of the inlets for cold air entering the
compartment must equal at least the total area
of the vents. Ideally, the inlets shall be as close
to the ground as possible.
IV-75
.,
-?
E-2.1.19 Where roof vents are installed in a

single-storey building any neighboring buildings, particularly those of more than one
storey, will be subject to some degree of exposure hazard either from flying birds or
radiation, or both, as a result.
E-21.20 If vents are to be installed, the size,
deiiign, number and disposition-of the vents
and the associated roof screens/curtain boards
have to be assessed after careful analysis of the
various factors stated under E-2. 1.11 above, as
well as other related factors like type of building construction, nature and height of roof,
process hazards, exposure hazard, etc.
E-2.2 VentingArea
E-221 The estimated requirements for ventilation are largely based on the assumed
build-up of the fire from the time of initial
outbreak to the time of effective fire fighting
action by fire brigade.
E-22.2 The vent area required to be provided
shall be approximately proportional to the
perimeter of the fire ara because the entrained
air forms the bulk of the vent~ gases.
E-22.3 The effective area shall be the minimum cross-sectional area throu h which the
4
hot gases must flow out to the atmosphere.
E-22.4 No consideration shall be given to the
increased air movement obtained by poweroperated fans, since it must be assumed that in
the event of fire, power will be interrupted, or
fans damaged by heat.
E-2.2.5 The total vent areas to be provided
shall be as per the following ratios of effective
area of vent openings t,o floor area for various
occupancy classifications indicated:
a) Low heat release content
1:150
(Subdivision G-1)
b) Moderate heat release cm1:100
tent (Subdivision G-2)
c) High heat release content 1:30 to 1:50
(Subdivision G-3)
E-2.3 Types of Vents
E-2.3.1 Venting shall be accomplished by any
of the types such as monitors continuous
gravity vents, unit type vents or sawtooth roof
skylights.
E-2.3.2 Where monitor type vents are installed, wire glass or metal panels shall be used
only if the sash is arranged to open automatically.
~-m
E-2.3.3 The use of plain thin glass for venting

shall be avoided on account of its unpredictable behaviour during fire. However if
glass or other suitable plastic sheet materials
with early disintegration characteristic
are
used, they should be designed for automatic
operation.
E-2.3.4 Where monitors or unit typevents are
used, the panels shall be hinged at the bottom
and designed to open automatically. Both
sides of the vents shall be designed to vent
simultaneously to ensure that their effectiveness at the time of fire is not in any way impeded by wind direction.
E-2.3.5 Where movable shutters are provided
for continuous gravity vents, these shall open
automatically in the event of fire.
E-2.3.6 Unit type vents shall be of relatively
small area, ranging between 1 and 9 m2, having
light weight metal frames and housing with
hinged dampers which shall be designed for
both manual and automatic operation.
E-2.3. 7 Sawtooth roof skylight shall be considered as satisfactory for venting purpoaea
only when designed for automatic operation.
E-2.3.8 Lik@e, exterior wall windows shall
not be reckoned as satisfactory means for venting of fire gases and smoke in industrial buildings. However, they may be reckotted as
additional means of venting when, they are
located close to the caves and are provided
with ordinary glass or movable sash arranged
E-2.3.9 Baffles shall not be installed inside
vents, as they greatly reduce the effective area
for venting.
E-2.4 Vent Operation
E-2.4.1 The vents shall beautomaticin operation, unless where specified
in these
provisions that they shall be designed for both
manual and automatic operation.
E-24.2 The release mechanism shall be
simple for operation and independent of
electrical power, since electrical services may
be interrupted by fire.
E-2.4.3 The automatic operation of vents
shall be achieved by actuation of fusible linksor other types of heat and smoke detectors, or
by interlocking with operation of sprinkler
system or any other automatic fire extinguishNATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
f,
ing systcm covering the area. Following their

release, the vents shall be designed to open by
a system of counterweights and associated
equipment utilizing the force of gravity or
spring loaded levers.
E-2.4.4 Automatic fire alarm system, where
instaIled, shall be coupled to the automatic
vents to ensure simultaneous operation.
E-2.4.5 Automatic
sprinklers,
where installed, shall operate before the vents open
order to avoid any likely delay in sprinkler
operation. However, heat actuated devices
used for vent release shall be suitably shielded
from sprinkler discharge so that water does
not delay their action.
E-2.4.6 Premises where height of roof apex is
10 m or more or where the materials handled
or stored have high smoke producing characteristics, in addition to fusible links, the vent
release mechanism shall be interlinked to
smoke actuated automatic fire detectors to
ensure early operation of vents.
E-2.4. 7 Non-corrosive materials shall be used
for hinges, hatches and other related parts to
ensure long fail-safe operation of the vents.
E-2.4.8 In case of any doubts regarding the
types of vents required to be installed for any
particular occupancy, authorities having jurisdiction shall be consulted.
E-2, 5 Size, Spacing and Disposition of Vents
E-2.5. 1 Vents shall be correctly sited to ensure their functional efficiency. Ideally, they
shall be sited at the highest point in each area
to be covered.
a)
b)
c)
Low heal release content 45 m between centres

Moderate heat release content 36 to
37 m between centres
High heat release content 22.5 to
30 m between centres, depending on
the severity of fire potential.
E-2.5,6 Vents shall be placed in a sheltered

situation where advantage can be taken of the
prevailing wind. The design of the vent shall
be such as to produce a,suction effect. A wind
blowing across a flat roof or one with a pitch
below 40 produces a negative pressure, that
is, it tends to draw gases out of the building
and so aids venting of hot gases. Wind blowing
across a roof of pitch greater than 40 will draw
gases out on the leeward side, but oppose outward flow on the windward side of the roof.
E-2.5. 7 Low level inlets, with total area not
1+s than the total area of vents, shall be
provided to premit outside air to be drawn in
to aid automatic venting. These inlets, which
may be in the form of doors, windows or such
other openings, shall be designed for manual
operation when desired.
E-2.6 Roof Screens or Curtain Boards
E-2.6.1 Industrial buildiz~s with large areas
and having no subdivision/separating
W@
limiting the area of individual compartments
to 750 m2 or less, shall be provided with roof
screens or curtain boards.
These screens which extend from the roof
downwards at specific intervals not only
prevent lateral spread of heat and smoke in the
event of tire below, but substantially assist in early
operation of automatic spri.nldem and vents.
E-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be located immediately

above the risk to be
protected so as to allow free and speedy
removal of smoke and other combustion
products in the event of fire.
E-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or may

other substantial non-combustible material
strong enough to withstand damage by heat or
impact.
E-2.5.3 The minimum dimension for an effective vent opening shall be not less than 1.25 m
in any direction.
E-2.6.3 They shall be resonably gas-tight, although small openings for passage of pipea,
conduits, etc, shall be permitted.
E-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vent

shall be based on the principle that more number of well distributed smaller vents are more
effective than less number of badly located
larger vents.
E-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the

roof/ceiling for a minimum depth of 2.2 m.
Around specific hazards, the depth shall be
4 m. Where roofkeiling height exceeds 15 m
they shall extend down to within 3 m of the
floor. For pitched sawtoothed roofs, they shall
extend down to truss level dividing the roof
into compartments.
E-2.5.5 The maximum spacing between vents

for the three occupancy classifications shall be
as follows:
Iv.n
E-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the

distance between the screens/curtain boards
shall not exceed 75 m and the curtained areas
shall be limited to a maximum of 4500 m2.
E-2.6.6 ln high hazard occupancies, the distance between screens shall not exceed
30 m and the curtained area shall be limited to
750 m2.
E-2.6. 7 The curtained roof area shall be so
arranged that they effectively aid in the venting of smoke and hot gases through the automatic vents provided in each area.
E-2.6.8 In sprinklered buildings, the screens
shall preferably be so located as to coincide
with the individual sprinkler system areas.
E-3. EXPLOS1ON RELIEF VENTS
E-3.1 Industrial premises where combustible
dusts ca~ accumulate or where flammable
gases, vapours or mists in explosive concentrations may be present are constantly exposed to
explosion hazards. Pressures developed by such
explosions may be of the order of 7x 105 Pa
and ordinary buildings will not be able to
withstand the shock of such pressures. Hence,
such buildings require explosion relief vents
for preventing structural damage.
E-3.2 Basic PrinciplelCons&ierations
E-3.2.1 Most ordinary building walls will not
withstand a sustained internal pressure as
great as 6.9x 103 Pa. Hence, explosion relief
vents for buildings must be designed to
operate at pressures well below those at which
the building walls will fail.
E-3.2.2 There is a rise in pressure during an
explosion within an enclosure even with open,
unobstructed vents, and any delay in opening
the venting devices increases that pressure.
E-3.2.3 Structural damage can be minimized
by locating hazardous operations or equipment outside buildings and cut off from other
operations by a pressure resisting wall. Such
isolated processes or equipment shall be
housed in single-storey buildings properly
vented and a device provided at the inlet of the
collector which will prevent an explosion from
blowing back through the duct work and into
the building.
E-3.2.4 Where highly hazardous operations
cannot be located outside of main buildings,
they shall be segregated by pressure resisting
walls and each such unit shall be ventilated
outdoors. External walls may be of heavy con-
struction if equipped with suitable vents or

high-weight panels which blow out easily.
E-3.2.5 Operations or equipment involving
explosion hazards shall not be permitted in
basements or areas partially below grade.
E-3.2.6 Fire can be expected to follow an explosion in most occupancies, so that any fixed
fire extinguishing equipment, like sprinklers,
if installed, shall be such that only the minimum damage is caused to it.
E-3.2. 7 For a given material, the finer the
particle size of the dust, the more violent is the
explosion. Some materials, such as aluminium
powder, hydrogen, and acetylene, are difficult
to vent effectively due to the rapid rate of
pressure rise. Some S1OWburning materials,
such as coal dust in a confined space, may do
much damage because of the longer duration
of their presence. Some dusts, such as magnesium, titanium and zirconium and several
metal hydrides may react with and ignite in
some common inert gases, such as nitrogen
and carbon dioxide.
E-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in
a vented structure decreases as the size of the
vent increases, but is independent of the rupturing pressure of a diaphragm.
E-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release
of explosion pressures is an unobstructed vent
opening.
E-3.2.10 Pressure
required
to rupture
diaphragms of the same area and material
directly varies with the thickness of the
material.
E-3.2.11 The slower the rate of pressure rise,
the more easily can the explosion be vented.
E-3.2.12 The degree of venting required is
directly proportional to the degree of explosion hazard.
E-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most explosions of dusts, vapours and gases do not
involve a large part of the total volume of the
enclosure, and frequently occur near the
upper or lower limits of the explosive range.
Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum.
E-3.2.14 Rectangular unrestricted vents are
as effective as square vents of equal area.
E-3.3 Types of Erplosion Relief Vents
E.3.3.1 The explosion relief vents shall be any
one or more of the following types, depending
---I
~ ,
.
on individual requirements as assessed by the

Authority. Open or unobstructed vents, louvres, open roof vents, hanger-type doors, building doors, windows, roof or wall panels or
movable fixed sash.
E-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a

manner as to prevent injury to personnel and
damage to exposures. In congested locations,
substantial ducts or diverters shall be provided
to direct the blast.
E-3.3.2 The effect or external wind pressure

or suction on these devices shall be taken into
consideration while designing and selecting
the type of vents, since wind pressures may
reach over 2x 105Pa in severe windstorms.
E-3.4.3 When ductwork is used, the ducts

shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the
maximum expected explosion pressure.
E-3.3.3 The type of vent for explosion relief

for any occupancy shall be selected with life
safety as the primary aim followed by minimum damage to property.
E-3.3.4 Where large hanger type doors or
metal curtain doors in side walls are used as
vents care shall be taken to ensure that they
are kept wide open during operations.
E-3.3.5 Where weather hoods are used to
cover roof vents, they shall be as light as possible and lightly attached so as to enable them
to be blown off quickly when an explosion
occurs.
E-3.3.6 Doors and windows when used as explosion vents shall be installed to swing outwards. Doors shall have friction, spring or
magnatic latches that will function automatically to permit the door to open under slight
internal pressure.
E-3.3. 7 Movable
bottom hinged or
be equipped with
prevent accidental
or intrusion. Such
maintained.
sash shall be of the top or

projected type. These shall
a latch or friction device to
opening due to wind action
latches or locks shall be well
E-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with

very light wall anchorages, or, if tight, shall be
securely fitted and glazed with plastic panes in
plastic putty.
E-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the
whole of a building or a room maybe involved,
it may be desirable to arrange for a lightly
constructed wall or roof to collapse and thus
avert the worst effects of an explosion.
E-3.4 Design, Sue and Disposition of Vents
E-3.4.1 The required area of explosion vents
shall ordinarily depend on the expected maximum intensity of an explosion in the occupancy, the strength of the structure, the type of
vent closure and otherfactors.
E-3.4.4 Where explosions are likely within

duct and piping systems, they shall be vented
by the use of suitable diaphragms designed to
blow out at a predetermined pressure. There
shall be no physical connection between
ductwork system for more than one collector.
E-3.4.5 In large structures, the position of
vents shall be relative to the point of origin of
explosion, when it can be determined.
E-3.4.6 Where relatively slow explosions involving coal dust, chlorinated solvents, etc, are
involved, light, hinged swinging panels may be
preferred to diaphragm type of vents.
E-3.4. 7 Obstructions of any kind blocking the
vents from the risk covered shall be avoided,
particularly where risks of rapid violent explosions are present.
E-3.4.8 Counter-weights add to the inertia of
the vents and so shall be avoided.
E-3.4.9 Various relieving devices, including
devices actuated by detonators, shall start to
open at as low a pressure as possible. They
shall be of light construction, so that full
opening can be quickly attained.
E-3.4.1O Vents shall be of such size and
design as to prevent rupture of the protected
device or apparatus.
E-3.4.11 Skylights or monitors with movable
sash that will open outwards, or fixed sash
containing panes of glass or plastic that will
blow out readily under pressure from within,
can be used to supplement wall vents or windows, provided resistance to their displacement or opening is kept as low as consistent
with the requirements for structural strength.
E-3.4.12 Flexible plastic sheets when used for
vent closures shall be installed in slotted
frames in such a way that pressure from within
bulges the sheeti and releases them from the
holding frame.
E-3.4.13 Fragile sheets made of plastic, when
used for vent closures, shall be thin sheets that
Iv-m
..
.- ,..
i
_.&.
will crack or rupture under less pressure than

single strength glass. For this reason usq of
transparent or translucent plastic sheets is
more advantageous instead of glass in window
sash.
comprising
volume:
a)
E-3.4.15 Small enclosures, such as machines,

shall be vented more generously than buildings, because if an explosion occurs in a
machine, its entire volume may be involved.
E-3.4.16 Vents for the protection of buildings
and equipment shall be installed on the following basis.
E-3.4,16.1 Small enclosures of less than 30
m3, machines and ovens of light construction
1000 cm2 for each 0.3 to 0.9 m3
E-3.4.162 For small enclosures of more substantial construction having reasonably hi h
bursting strength 1000 cm2 for each 0.9 m%.
E-3.4.16.3 Fairly large enclosurq of 30 to 700
m3, such as bins, silos, rooms, storage tanks,
etc 1000 cm2 for each 0.9 to 1.5 m3. In these
cases, attempt shall be made to the extent
possible to predict the likely point of origin of
the explosion in relation to the vent.
E-3.4.16.4 Large rooms and build,tigs over
700 m3 containing hazardous equipment
of the entire
For heavy reinforced concrete;

100 cmz for each 2.25 m3.
For light reinforced concrete,
wood construction 1 000
each 1.65 to 2.25 m3.
For lightweight construction
prefabricated panels 1000
each 1.5 to 1.65 m3.
b)
E-3.4.14 If closed vents are used they shall be

larger in area than unenclosed vents to provide equivalent explosion pressure relief.
a small fraction
c)
walls
brick or
cm2 for
such as
cm2 for
E-3.4.16.5 Large rooms or building over %30

m3 containing hazardous equipment comprising a large part of the entire volume of a room
or building shall be vented ai generoush+ as
possible 1000 cm2 for each 0.3 to 1.05 m .
E-3.4.16.6 horder to obtain these ratios, the
size of the building or room must be limited.
For some hazardous materials,
such as
hydrogen, acetylene, carbon disulphide, etc,
these limits are extremely low.
E-3.4.1 7 Emphasis shall always be placed on
segregating hazardous areas by means of
firewalls or separating walls to prevent spread
of fire.
E-3.4.18 Interior walls of light construction,
such as tile, shall be avoided in hazardous
locations, since they can cause injuries to personnel in the event of an explosion.
APPENDIX
(Clause D-8.1)
GUIDELINES
FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION PROCEDU*

BUILDINGS (ABOVE 15 m IN HEIGHT)
F-2. INTRODUCTION
F-1.l In case of fire ina high rise building, safe
evacuation of its occupants may present
serious problems unless a plan for orderly and
systematic evacuation is prepared in advance
and all occupants are well drilled in the operation of such plan. These guidelines are intended to assist them in this task.
F-2. ALARMS
F-2.1 Any person discovering fire, heat or
smoke shall immediately report such condition to the fire brigade, unless he has personal
knowledge that such a report has been made.
No person shall make, issye, poit or maintain
FOR HIGH RISE
any regulation or order, written or verbal, that

would_&quire any person to take any unnecessary delaying action prior to reporting such
condition to the fire brigade.
F-3. DRILLS
F-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in accordance with theFire Sat%ty Plan, at least once
every three month: fo~ qxisting buildings
during the first two years after the effective
date of these rules, or for new buildings during
the first two years after the issuance of the
certificate of occupancy. Thereafter, fire drills
shall be conducted at least once every six
months.
F-3.2 Alloccupants of the building shall participate in the fire drill. However, occupants of
the building, other than building service
employees, are not required to leave the floor
or use the exits during the drill.
F-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be
kept on the premises for a three years period
and shall be readily available for Fire Brigade
inspection.
F-4. SIGNS AND PLANS
F-4.1 Signs at L~t Landings A sign shall be
posted and maintained in a conspicuous place
on every floor at or near the lift landing in
accordance with the requirements, indicating
that in case of fire, occupants shall use the
stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign
shall contain a diagram showing the location
of the stairways except that such diagram may
be omitted, provided signs containing such
diagram are posted in conspicuous places on
the respective floor.
A sign shall read IN CASE OF FIRE, USE
STAIRS
UNLESS
INSTRUCTED
OTHERWISE.
The lettering shall be at
least 1.25 cm block letters in red and white
background. Such lettering shall be properly
spaced to provide good legibility. The sign
shall beat least 25x 30 cm, where the diagram
is also incorporated in it and 6.25 x 25 cm
where the diagram, is omitted. In the latter
case, the diagram sign shall beat least 20 x 30
cm. The sign shall be located directly above a
call-button and squarely attached to the wall
or partition. The top of the sign shall not be
above 2 m from the floor level.
F-4.2 FloorNumberingSigns Asignshallbe
posted and maintained within each stair
enclosure on every floor, indicating the number of the floor, in accordance with the requirements given below.
The numerals shall be of bold type and at least
7.5 cm high. The numerals and background
shall be in contrasting colours. The sign shall
be securely attached to the stair side of the
door.
F-4.3 Stair and Elevator Identi~cation Signs
Each stairway and each elevator back shall be
identified by an alphabetical letter. A sign indicating the letter of identification shall be
posted and maintained at each elevator landing and on the side of the stairway door from
which egress is to be made, in accordance with

the requirements given below.
The lettering on the sign shall be at least
7.5 cm high, of bold type and of contrasting
colour from the background. Such signs shall
be securely attached.
F-4.4 Stair Re-entry Signs A sign shall be
posted and maintained on each floor within
each stairway and on the occupancy side of the
stairway where required, indicating whether
re-entry is provided into the building and the
floor where such re-entry is provided, in accordance with the requirements given below.
The lettering and numerals of the signs shall
be at least 1.25 cm high of bold type. The
lettering and background shall be of contrasting colours and the signs shall be securely
attached approximately 1.5 m above the floor
level.
F-4.5 Fire command station shall be provided
with floor plan of the building and other pertinent information relative io the service
equipment of the building.
F-5. FIRE SAFETY PLAN
F-5.1 A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall
be as given in D-8.
F-5.2 The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to all
management when the Fire Safety Plan has
been approved by the Chief Fire Officer.
F-5.3 The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then be distributed by
the tenants to all their employees and by the
building management to all their building
employees.
F-5..4 Where the owner of the building is also
an occupant of the building, he shall be
responsible for the observance of these rules
and the Fire Safety Plan in the same manner
as a tenant.
F-5.5 In the event there are changes from
conditions existing at the time the Fire Safety
Plan for the building was approved, and the
changes are such so as to require amending the
Fire Safety Plan, within 30 days after such
changes, an amended Fire Safety Plan shall be
submitted to the fire brigade for approval.
IV-81
h-
F-6. FIRE COMMAND STATION
b)
F-6.1 A Fire Command Station shall be established in the lobby of the building on the
entrance floor. Such command station shall be
adequately illuminated.
c)
d)
F-7. COMMUNICATIONS
ALARM
AND FIRE
F-7.1 A means of communication and fire

alarm for use during fire emergencies shall be
provided and maintained by the owner or person in charge of the building.
F-8. FIRE SAFETY PLAN FORMAT
F-8.1 BuildingAddress
Street and Pin Code Number ....
Telephone Number ....
e)
f)
g)
F-8,2.2 OBJECIJVE To provide proper

education as a part of continuing employee
indoctrination and through a continuing written programme for all occupants, to ensure
prompt reporting of fire, the response of fire
alarms as designated, and the immediate initiation of fire safe~ procedures to safeguard
life and contain fire-until the arrival of the Fire
Brigade.
a)
b)
c)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Name
Regularly assigned employment
Title
location?
location?
Duties of Fire Safety Director see
F-9.1.
F-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Director

a)
Iv.sz
Name
,,,q
,*
r
Are their names on Organisation

Charts for each floor and/or tenancy?
Submit typical completed Organisation Chart for Fire Drill and Evacuation Assignment.
Duties of Fire Wprdens and Deputy
Fire Wardens see D-9.3.
F-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
0
Name
Title
Regularly assigned loc&tion
location?
location?
Duties of Building Evacuation Supervisor see D-9.4.
-.
F-8. 7 Fire Party

a)
b)
F-8.3 Fire Safep Director

a)
b)
. . ...
F-8.5 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens
F-8.2 Puqoose and Objective

F-8.2.1 PURPOSE To establish method of
systematic, safe and orderly evacuation of an
area or building by and of its occupants in case
of fire or other emergency, in the least possible
time, to a safe area by the nearest safe means
of egress; also the use of such available fire
appliances (including sounding of alarms) as
may have been provided for controlling or
extinguishing fire and safeguarding of human
life.

Title
location?
location?
Duties of Deputy Fire Safety Director
see F-9.2.
c)
d)
e)
f)
Submit a completed Organization

Chart for Fire Parties naming person
in charge, and his title in the building.
Indicate standards of selection froin
building employees based on backgound and availability.
How are they notified?
How are they notified when they are
not at their regular locations?
Means of responding
Duties of each member of Fire Party
see D-9.5.
F-8.8 Occupants Instructions Distribution

of instructions
to all tenents, tenents
employees
and
building
employees
see D-9. 6.
F-8.9 Evacuation Drills
a) Frequen~ of drills
b) How conducted?
NATIONALBUILDJNGCODEOF IF:DJA
,.
..
c)
d)
e)
Participation.
Who participated?
How?
Controls and supervision
Recording of details of drills
F-9.1.5 Be responsible for the designation

and training of a Fire Warden for each floor,
and sufficient Deputy Fire Wardens for each
tenancy in accordance with orders on the subject.
F-8.10 Fire Command Statwn

a)
b)
Location
Requirements
1) - Adequate illumination
2) Adequate communication
to
mechanical equipment room and
elevator control room on each
floor
3) Copy of Fire Safety Plan
4) Copy of Buiiding Information
Form
5) Representative floor plans showing location
of signs, floor
remote station, communications,
etc.
F-8.11 Signs
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Signs at elevator landings.

diqgrams
Floor numbering
Stairway identification
Elevator identification
Stair re-entry
Floor
F-8.12 Fire Presentation and Fire Protection

Programme See 9.7
F-8.13 Building
See D-9.8
Information
Form
F-9.1.6 Be responsible for a daily check for

the availability of the Fire Warden and Deputy
Wardens, and see that up-to-date organization charts are posted.
NorE Ifthe numberof FireWardensandDeputy
FireWardensin the building is such that it is impractical to individurdfycontact each one daily, a suggested
method to satis~ the requirements is to make
provisions for the Fire Warden, or a Deputy Fire
Warden in the absence of the Fire Warden, to noti~
the Fire Safety Director when the Fire Warden or
required number of Deputy Fire Wardens are not
available. In order to determine the compliance by the
Fire Warden and Deputy Fire Wardens, when this
method is used, the Fhe Safety Director shall make a
spot check of several different floors each day.
F-9.1. 7 Noti& the owner or some other person having charge of the building when any
designated individual is neglecting his responsibilities contained in Fire Safety Plan. The
owner or the other persu~l in-charge of the
building shall bring the matter to the attention
of the firm employing the ir~ividual. If the
firm fails to correct the conditixt, the Fire
Department
shall be notified
by the
owner/person in charge of the building.
F-9.1.8 In the event of fire, shall report to the
Fire Command Station to supervise, provide
for and coordinate
a)
F-8.14 Representative Floor Plan See D-9.9

F-8.15 Fire
See F-9.1O
a)
b)
Safety
Plan
Prepared by
Date when prepared

Date when revised
b)
c)
d)
F-9. DUTIES
F-9.1 Fire Safety Director)s Duties
F-9.1.1 Be familiar with the written Fire
Safety Plan providing for fire drill and evacuation procedure in accordance with orders on
the subject.
F-9.1.2 Select qualified building service
employees for a Fire Party and organize, train
and supervise such Fire Brigade.
F-9.1.3 Be responsible for the availability and
state of readiness of the Fire Party.
F-9. 1.4 Conduct fire and evacuation drills.
PARTIV FIRE PROTECfION
e)
Ensure that the Fire Department has

been notified of any fire or fire alarm.
Manning of the Fire Command Station.
Direction of evacuatixig procedures as
provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
Reports on conditions on fire floor for
information of Fire Department on
their arrival.
Advise the Fire Department Officer in
charge in the operation of the Fire
Command Station.
F-9.1.9 Be responsible for the training and

activities of the Building Evacuation Supervisor.
F-9.2 Deputy Fire Safety Director> Duties
F-9.2.1 Subordinate
Director
to the
Fire
Safety
F-9.2.2 Perform duties of Fire Safety Director

in his absence.
~.83
F-9.3 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens

Duties The tenant or tenants of each floor
shall, upon request of the owner or person in
charge of buildings, make responsible and dependable employees available for designation
by the Fire Safety Director as Fire Warden and
Deputy Fire Wardens.
F-9.3.1 Each floor of a building shall be under
the direction of a designated Fire Warden for
the evacuation of occupants in the event of
fire. He shall be assisted in his duties by the
Deputy Fire Wardens. A Deputy Fire warden
shall be provided for each tenancy. When the
floor area of a tenancy exceeds 700 mz of
oceupiable space, a Deputy Fire Warden shall
be assigned for each 700 m2 or part thereof.
e)
f)
F-9.3. 2 Each Fire Warden and Deputy Fire

Warden shall be familiar with the Fire Safety
Plan, the location of exits and the location and
operation of any available fire alarm system.
F-9.3.3 In the event of fire, or fire alarm the
Fire Warden shall ascertain the location of the
fire, and direct evacuation of the floor in accordance with directions received and the following guidelines:
a)
b)
c)
d)
The most critical areas for immediate

evacuation are the fire floor and floors
immediately above.
Evacuation from the other floors shall
be instituted when instructions from
the Fire Command Station or conditions indicate such action. Evacuation
shall be via uncontaminated stairs.
The Fire Warden shall try to avoid
stairs being used by the Fire Department. If this is not possible, he shall try
to attract the attention of the Fire
Department
Personnel before such
personnel open the door to the fire
floor.
Evacuation
to two or more levels
below the fire floor is generally adequate. He shall keep the Fire Command Station informed regarding his
location.
Fire Wardens and their Deputies shall
see that all occupants are notified of
the fire, and that they proceed immediately to execute the Fire Safety
Plan.
The Fire Warden on the fire floor
shall, as soon as practicable, noti& the
Fire Command Station of the particulars.

Fire Wardens on floors above the fire
shall, after executing the Fire Safety
Plan, noti~ the Fire Command Station
of the means being used for evacuation
and any other particulars.
In the event that stairways serving fire
floor and/or floors above are unusable
due to contamination or cut off by fire
and/or smoke or that several floors
above fire involve large numbers of occupants who must be evacuated, consideration
may be given to using
elevators in accordance with the following:
1) If the elevators servicing his floor
also service the fire floor, they
shall not be used. However,
elevators may be used if there is
more than one bank of elevators,
and he is informed from the Fire
Command Station that one bank
is unaffected by the fire.
2) If elevators do not service the fire
floor and their shafts have no
openings on the fire floor, they
may be used, unless directed
otherwise.
3) Elevators manned by trained
building personnel or firemen
may also be used.
4) In the absence of a serviceable
elevator, the Fire Warden shall
select the safest stairway to use
for evacuation on the basis of the
location of the fire and any information received from the Fire
Comrhand Station. The Fire
Warden shall check the environment in the stairs prior to entry
for evacuation. If it is affected by
smoke, alternative stair shall be
selected, and the Fire Command
Station notified.
5) The Fire Warden shall keep the
Fire command Station informed
of the m&ms being employed for
evacuation by the occupants of
his floor.
Ensure that an alarm has been transmitted.
F-9.3.4 ORGANISATION
DRILL AND EVACUATION
Iv.U
CHART FOR
ASSIGNMENT
FIRE
A
..
chart designating employees and their assignments shall be prepared and posted in a conspicuous place in each tenancy and on each
floor of a tenancy that occupies more than one
floor and a copy shall be in the possession of
the Fire Safety Director.
F-9.3.5 Have available an updated listing of
all personnel with physical disabilities who
cannot use stairs unaided. Make arrangements to have these occupants assisted in
moving down the stairs to two or more levels
below fire floor. If it is necessary to move such
occupants to a still lower level during the fire,
move them down the stairs to the uppermost
floor served by an uninvolved elevator bank
and then remove the street floor by elevator.
Where resistance is required for such evacuation, noti~ Fire Safety Director.
F-9.3.6 Provide for Fire Warden identification during fire drills and fires, such as using
armband, etc.
F-9.3. 7 Ensure that all persons on the floor
are notified of fire and all are evacuated to safe
areas. A search must be conducted in the
lavatories to ensure all are out. Personnel assigned as searchers can promptly and efficiently perform this duty.
F-9.3.8 Check availability of applicable personnel on Organisation Chart and provide for
a substitute when the position on a chart is not
covered.
F-9.3.9 After evacuation, perform a head
count to ensure that all regular occupants
known to have occupied the floor have been
evacuated.
F-9.3.1O When alarm is received, the Fire
Warden shall remain at a selected positon in
the civinity of the communication station on
the floor, in order to maintain communication
with the Fire Command Station and to receive
and give instructions.
F-9. 4 Building Evacuation Supervisors Duties
A building Evacuation Supervisor is required at all times other than normal working
or business hours when there are occupants in
the building and there is no Fire Safety Director on duty in the building.
F-9.4.1 He should be capable of directing the
evacuation of the occupants as provided by the
Fire Safety Plan.
PARrIVFIRE PROTECTION
F-9.4.2 During fire emergencies, the primary

responsibility of the Building Evatmation Supervisor shall be to man the Fire Command
Station, and the$iirection and execution of the
evacuation as provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
The Building Evacuation Supervisors training and related activities shall be under the
direction of the Fire Safety Director in accordance with these rules, and the Fire Safety Plan.
Such activities shall be subject to Fire Department control.
F-9.5 Fire Party Duties On receipt of an
alarm for fire the Fire Party shall:
a) report to the floor below the fire to
assist in evacuation and provide information to the Fire Command Station.
b) after evacuations of fire floor, endeavour to control spread of fire by
closing doors, etc.
c) attempt to control the fire until arrival
of the Fire Department, if the fire is
small and conditions do not pose a personal threat.
d) leave one member on the floor below
the fire to direct_the Fire Department
to the fire location and to inform them
of conditions.
e) on arrival of the Fire Department, the
Fire Party shall fqmrt to the Fire Command Station for additional instructions.
9 have a member designated as runner,
who shall know the location of the
nearest telephone, and be instructed in
its use. Such member shall immediately
upon receipt of information that there
is a fire or evidence of fire, go to the
telephone, transmit an alarm and await
the arrival of the Fire Department and
direct such department to the fire.
NOTE A chart designating employees and their assignmentsshall be prepared.
F-9. 6
a)
b)
Occupant 5 Instructions
The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to
all tenants of the building by the building management when the Fire Safety
Plan has been approved by the Fire
Commisssioner.
The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then be distributed by the tenents to all their
..
c)
employees
and by the building
management
to all their building
employees.
All occupants of the building shall participate and cooperate in carrying out
the provisions of the Fire Safety Plan.
F-9. 7 Fire Prevention and Fire Protection

Programme
a)
-,
b)
r)
s)
t)
A plan for periodic formal inspections

of each floor area, including exit
facilities, fire extinguishers and house
keeping shall be developed. A copy of
such plan be submitted.
Provision shall be made for the monthly testing of communication and alarm
systems.
F-9. 8 Building Information Form It shall

include the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
@
h)
j)
k)
m)
n)
P)
q)
Iv-=
Building address ......Pin Code .....

Owner or person in-charge of building
Name, Address and Telephone
Number.
Fire Safety Director and Deputy Fire
Safety
Directors
Name,
and
Telephone Number.
Certificate of occupancy. Location
where posted, or duplicate attached.
Height, area, class of construction.
Number type and location of fire stairs
and/or fire towers.
Number, type and location of horizontal exits or other areas of refuge.
Number, type, location and operation
of elevators and escalators.
Interior fire alarms, or alarms to
central stations.
Communications
systems and/or
walkie talkie, telephones, etc.
Standpipe system, size and location of
risers, gravity or pressure tank, fire
pump, location of siamese connections, name of employee with certificate of qualification and number of
certificate.
Sprinkler system, name of employee
with Certificate of Fitness and certificate number. Primary and secondary
water supply, fire pump and areas
protected.
Special extinguishing system if any,
components and operation.
Average number of persons normally
u)
v)
w)
employed in building. Daytime and

night time.
Average number of handicapped
people in building. Location. Daytime
and night time.
Number of persons normally visiting
the building. Daytime and night time.
Service equipment such as:
1) Ele~t~ic
power,
primary,
auxiliary
2) Lighting, normal, emergency,
type and locatiou
3) Heating, type, fuel, location of
heating uniq
4) Ventilation with fixed windows, emergency means of exhausting heat and smoke;
Systems
5) Air Conditioning
Brief description of the system,
including ducts and floors serviced;
6) Refuse storage and disposal;
7) Fire fighting equipment and appliances, other than standpipe
and sprinkler system;
8) Other pertinent building equipment.
Alterations and repair operations, if
any, and the protective and preventive
measures necessary to safeguard-such
operations with attention to torch
operations.
Storage and use of flammable solids,
liquids and/or gases.
Special occupancies in the building
and the proper protection and maintenance thereof. Places of public assembly, studios,
and theatrical
occupancies.
D-9.9 Representative Floor Plan A floor

plan, re~resentative of the majority or the
floor designs of the entire building, shall be at
the Command Post, in the main lobby, under
the authority of the Fire Safety Director. One
copy of a- representative floor plan shall be
submitted to the Fire Department with the
Fire Safety plan.
D-9.1O Fire Safety Plan In planning,
evaluate the individual floor layouts, the
population of floors, the number and kinds of
exits, the zoning of the floor by area and occupants. Determine the movement of traffic
by the most expeditious route to an apNATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
propriate exit and alternative route for each

zone, since under fire conditions one or more
exits may not be usable. This format is to be
used in the preparation of the Fire Safety Plan.
Nothing contained in this Fire Safely Plan
fortmit is to be construed as all inclusive. All
rules and other requirements are to be fully
complied with.
-
F-9.11 Personal Fire Insbucirlm Card All

the occupants of the building shall be given a
Personal Fire Instruction Card giving the
details of the floor plan and exit routes along
with the instruction to be followed in the event
of fire. A typical Personal Fire Instruction
Card shall be-as follows:
PERSONAL FIRE
INSTRUCTION CARD
El
SEAL
NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION
ADDRESS OF THE ORGANIZATION
NAME:
DESIGNATION:
FIRE WARDEN
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY YOU SHOULD
KNow
1. .lko push button fire alarm boxes are
provided. per floor. You should read
the operating instructions.
2. You should read the operating instructions on the body OF the fi~e extinguishers provided on your floor.
PART IV FIRE PROTECIION
3.
4.
5.
The nearest exit from your table.

Your assembly point on ground floor
(checkwith your Fire/Dy. Fire Warden).
FOR YOUR OWN PROTECTION
YOU SHOULD
REPORT
TO
YOUR FIRE/DEPUTY FIRE WARDEN
a) If any exit door/route
is
obstructed by loose materials,
goods, boxes, etc.
b)
c)
If any staircase door, lift lobby

door does not close automatically, or does not close completely.
If any push button fire alarm
point, or fire extinguisher
is
obstructed,
damaged or apparently out of order.
IF YOU HEAR EVACUATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
IF YOU DISCOVER A FIRE

1.
2.
3.
Leave the floor immediately by the

south/north staircase.
Report to your Warden, at your
predetermined assembly point outside
the building.
Do not try to use lifts.
Do not go to cloakroom.
Do not run or shout.
Do not stop to collect personal belongings.
Keep the lift lobby and staircase doors
shut.
1.
Break the glass of the nearest push

button fire alarm and push the button.
Attack the fire with extinguishers
provided on your floor. Take guidance
from your Wardens.
Evacuate if your Warden asks you to do
7.
YOUR ASSEMBLY POINT IS................
so.
NORTH
19
16
17
18
BLOCKNO. 2
BLOCK NO. 1
00
r-
SOUTH
(*To
indicate
appropriate
plan of building
concerned)
f,
.. .. __
. .4
APPENDIX G
(Foreword )
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Fire Safety Sectional Committee, CED 36
Chairman
SHRIJ. N. VAKtL
Representing
Tariff Advisory Committee, Mumbai
Members
SHRIK RAVI (Alternate to
SHRIJ.N. VAKIL)
DR A. K. BHALLA
Ministry of Defence, New Delhi
DR K. S. UPPAL (Alternate)
DR R. K. BHANDARI
SHRIR. P. BHATLA
SHRI M.M. KAPOOR(Alternate)
SHRIS.
CHAKRABORTY

Engineem India Limited, New Delhi
Tariff Advisoty Committee, Madras
SHRIP.K. MAIUMDAR (Alternate)

SHRIP. K. CHATIERJEE
Ministry of Defence (DR & DO), New Delhi
ASSIWANT FIREADVISER (Alternate)

CHIEFFIRE OFFICER
SHRIS. M. DESAI
Municipal Corporation of Mumbai (Mumbai Fke Brigade),

Mumbai
~Ur@al
]n personal Capacity (h CFO, State Bank oftrrdi~B-415
Of/icers Qrts, Abdul Gaflar Khan Road
SHRIRAMESH R. DHOBLEY
SHRIS. K. DHERI
Worli, Mumbai 400018)
Bhabha Atomic Research Ccntre, Mumbai

Municipal Corporation of Delhi
SHRIR. C. SHARMA (Alternate)

SHRIK. P. SHARMA
Northern Railway, New Delhi
Assm SECURtTYCOMMISSIONER(Alternate)
FIREADVISOR
SHRIJ. S. GAHLAUT
SHRIP. N. GHOSH
SHRIC. P. GOSAIN
SHRIS. C. GUnA
Ministty of Home Affairs, New Delhi

State Bank of India, Mumbai
In personal capacity (J-1916, Chiuranjan Park New Delhi 110019)
Lloyd Insulations (India) Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
SHRi SANIEEVANGRA (Alternate)

SHRf M. M. MEHTA
SHRIT.K. MITTAL (Alternate)
Engineer-in Chiefs Branch, New Delhi
GENERALMANAGER
Mather and Platt Limited, Mumbai
SHRf K. R. EASWARAN (Alternate)

SHRID. N. KULKARNI
SHRI V.
M.
MADGE
Bombay Fire Brigade, Mumbai

The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Mumbai
SHRIA. B, PHADKE(Alternate)
SHRIG. B. MENON
In personal capacity (House No. 33/238, A-5 Puzha!&ra,
Padam
Venrrala, Cochin 28)

MEMBER(HYDRO-CONSIUJCHON MONITORING)
Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi
CHIEFENGINEER(HTO-11) (Akrnate)
SHRIV. B. NIKAM
In Personal Capacity@
SHRID. PAtiMANABHA
Tata Consulting Engineers Mumbai
CFO, Bombq, Flal No. 34, B[dg No. 4,

Municipal Officers Co-op Housing Society, Keshavrao Khadye
Marg HaziAli, Mumbai 400034
SHRIG.P. MONNAIH(Alternate)
SHRIP. N. PANCHAL
Assrr INSPECTOW
GENERALFIRE(Ahemure)
PRESIDENT
SHRI V.
M. RANALRAR
SHRIR. N. CHACHRA
SHRIHARISH R. SALOT
Ministry of 1-IomcAffairs, New Delhi

Institution of Fire Engineers (India), New Dethi
Ministry of Petroteum and Natural Gas
Metallurgical and Engineering Consultants (India) Ltd, Bihar
Vijay Fire Protection Systems Pvt Ltd, Mumbai
SHRi R.WESH K. SALOT (Alternate)

SHRIN. L. N. SHARMA
Bharat Heavy Electrical Ltd, Bhopal
SHRIM. L. KHURANA (Alternate)

DR T. P. SHARMA
Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee
DR GOPAL KRISHAN(Alternate)
SHRIR. SUNDARAIAN
National fhermat Power Corporation Ltd, New Delhi
SHRIS. K. CHATrOPADHAYAY(Ahemare)
IV-89
Representing
Members
SHRI M.
S. TYAGI
SHRIP. K. SAKSENA(Alremate)
MANAGINGDIRE~OR
SHRIT. V. MADHUMANI(Alternate)
SHRIJ. VENKATARAMAN,
Minist~ of Labour (Regional Labour Institute, Kanpur),

Ncw Delhi
Loss Prevention Association of India Ltd, Mumbai
Director General BIS (l%oficio-Wrnber)
Director (Civ Engg)

Member Secretaries
SHRIHEMANTKUMAR
Joint Director (CN Engg), BIS

SMTN~ETA SHARMA
Deputy Director (Civ Engg), BIS

SHRI S. CHATURVEDI
Deputy Direetor
(Civ Eng), BIS
Adhoc Panel for Revision of Part 4 of National Building Code, CED 36/AP
Convener
SHRIG. B. MENON
Representing
In Personal Capacity (House No. 33/238, A-5 Puzhakkara,

Padam Vennalg Cochin 28)
Members
SHRIR. P. BWATIA
SHRIP. K. CHATIWLRX
SHRI S,
K. DHERI
SHRIP.
SHRIT.
SHRI P.
SHRIT.
N. GHOSH
R. A. KRISHNAN
N. PANCHAL
P. SHARMA
Engineers India Limited, New Delhi

Ministry of Defence, New Delhi
Delhi Fire Semites, Ncw Delhi
In Personal Capacity (J-191t$ ChiIfronjan Par% New Delhi)
Tariff Advisory Committee, NW Delhi
Ministry of [-fome Affaits, New Delhi
Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee
NAfloNA1. IIIJII.DING {:0111; 01 INDIA
..
!i
,\

SP7 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP7 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

0 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

development control rules, requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including

Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC64

MAJ-GEN HARKIRAT SINGH

Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi

Housing and IJrban Development Corporation

SUPERJN?ENDING ENGINEER (Aftrmore)

SHR~ 2. C. MANGAL (Alternate)

Schooi <:I Planning and .4rchi:ecture, NW Delhi

in p e r s o n a l c a p a c i t y (Cf, 141 Sa:yo Mtarg,

New Delhi I!0 02f)

Tata Consulting Engineejs. Bombay

Central Public Works Department, New Delhi

Public Works & Housing Deparanent, Goxrnment

D. AJITHA SIMHA, Deputy Director

Director General, ISI (Ex-officio Member)

SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA

Panel for Administration, Development Control Rules

Housing & Urban Dxloprnent Corpomtion Limited,

S HRI V. SURESH (Alternate to

Housing & Urban Development Corporation

Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,

Panel for Fire Protection. BDC 64:P2

Central Building Research Institute (CSJR).

Tarrif Advisory Commitee (Delhi Regional

C&&al Public Works Department (Central Designs

B RIG HARISH CHANDRA

SHRI K. DAMWXRAIV (,4Itmzare)

Forest Research Institute & Colleges, Dehra bun

LT-COL (RET~) G. B. SINGH (Alternate)

SHRI KRJSHAN L~L (Afrernate)

The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay

Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay

SHRI RAJENDRA JAIN

Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES

SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE

ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND

SECTlON 2 ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT

DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING INSPECTION

POWER AND DUTIES OF BUILDING OFFICIAL

11. DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT

f2. APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/BUILDlNG PERMIT

1.5. UNSAFE BUILDING

GUIDE FOR THE QUALlFlCATlONS A N D

FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP,

VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES

10. POWER TO MAKE RULES

RESPONSlBlLlTlES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER

APPENDIX C FORM FOR SUPERVISION

FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF

APPENDIX E FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT

FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT

0.1 A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

from the average level of the ground around

A L T E R A T I O N -A change from one